^ * ■* \ -** Kt4 K f r vtTi 4^ . ».•>■«, ^*i -^ liS)!^' € ♦ ft.' SWjl a :*' r „« <^ o\ ■*("• •^ *i— jr. ^ M, ■^^f, hr- *> t'* -> .>! -^f' -V "■.-■■-■- THE GIFT OF 'as^Ssv. -2%S^_» A^.5-s:a;&% 3Ql.ia.l33. Cornell pj 4833.F95 , university Ubrary 1885 Hebrew "^ 1924 DATE DUE Hr^^^^^^g^m U ■ it UP^ ^ V*-JE ^ U GAYLORD PRINTED IN U.S Cornell University Library The original of this book is in the Cornell University Library. There are no known copyright restrictions in the United States on the use of the text. http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924026851208 HEBREW & CHALDEE LEXICON TO THE OLD TESTAMENT. A HEBREW & CHALDEE LEXICON TO THE OLD TESTAMENT WITH AN INTRODUCTION GIVING A SHORT HISTORY OF HEBREW LEXICOGRAPHY BY Dr. JULIUS .FUERST PROFESSOR AT THE UNIVERSITY OF LEIPZIG IMPROVED AND ENLARGED CONTAINING A GRAMMATICAL AND ANALYTICAL APPENDIX TRANSLATED FROM THE GERMAN BY SAMUEL DAVIDSON, D.D. OF THE UNIVERSITY OF HALLE, AND LL.D. FIFTH STEREOTYPE EDITION. LEIPZIG: BERNHARD TAUCHNITZ. WILLIAMS & NORGATE, 14, HENRIETTA STREET, COVENT GARDEN, LONDON. 20, SOUTH FREDERICK STREET, EDINBURGH. 1885. Kg> CONTENTS Page List of Abbreviations VI Preface to the second German Edition VII Preface to the first German Edition Xm A Contribution to the History of Hebrew Lexicogi-aphy XV Coptic, Syriac and Arabic Alphabet XXX TTT Text 1—1496 Grammatical and analytical appendix 1497 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS. a loe. = a local. abs. = absolute, abstr. = abstract. ace. = accusatiTe. act. = active. adj. = adjective. adv. = adverb. adv. ace. = Adverbial Accu- sative. Af. = Afel or Aphel. ap, = apocopated. an. ley. ^ a jta| Xeyo/ievov, Appos. = Apposition. Aq. =: Aquila. Ar. = Arabic, the Arabic version. Aram.=Aramaean{Chaldee, Syriac). Art. = Article. c, constr. = construct. cans. = causative. ch. = chapter. cod. == codex. cogn. = cognate. coll. = collective. com., comm. = common. comp. = compare. concr. = concrete. conj. = conjunction. conseq. == consequently. constr. = construct state. Dag. = Dagesh. dat. comm. = dativtts corn- modi. defect. = defective. def. = definitive. den. or denom.= denomina- tive. deriv. = derivative. D. f. =: Dagesh forte. D. 1. = Dagesh lene. du. = dual, epic. = epicene. e. g. = exempli gratia, for example. f. = feminine. fig., figur. = figuratively. fut. = future. gen. = genitive. Gent. = Gentile. Gr. Ven. = graec.-veneta, the Venetian Greek ver- sion. Hif. = Hi/il or Hiphil. Hof. = Hofal or Hophal. i. e. «=idest ib. = ibidem. ident. = identical. imp. = imperative. impf. = imperfect. inf. = infinitive. interj. = interjection. intr. = intransitive. Lat. = Latin. LB. d. Or. = Literaturblatt des Orients. LXX = the Septuagint ver- sion. m. = masculine. Makk. = Makkeph. Malt. = Maltese. metaph., metaphor. = me- taphorically. mod. = modern. Nif. = Nifal or Niphai. nom. = noun. nom. verb. = verbal noun. n.p. = proper name. NT. = New Testament. num. card.^cardinalnumber. num. ord. = ordinal number, obj. = object. Onk. = Onkelos. opp., oppoB. = opposed. org. = organic. p. = page. p., pers. = person. Pa. = Pael part, ^participle, pass. = passive. pair, ^patronymic, Pers. = Persian. Pesh. = Peshito. pf. = perfect. Phenic. = Phenician, Pih. = Pihel. pi. = plural. pr. dem. = pronoun demon- strative. prob. = probably. prop. = properly. Puh. = Puhal. refl. or reflex. = reflexive. Sam. = Samaritan. Sanskr. = Sanskrit. Bc. = scilicet. sing. = singular. spec. = specially. St. c. = status constructus. subst. ^ substantive. 8., suff. = suffix, suffixes. syr. = Syriac, the Syriao version. Talm. = Talmudic. Targ.=Targum, Targums, Targumic. tr. = transitive. transp. = transposed. v., vs. = verse. V = Psalm. PREFACE TO THE SECOND GERMAN EDITION. The demand for a second edition of this dictionary has come sooner than I could have anticipated, viz, after the lapse of a year. This new edition is increased by a copious Grammatical and Analy- tical Appendix, and by repeated revision, correction and enlarge- ment of the dictionary itself in the spirit of advancing science, and in the interest of youthful students. But however flattering it may be to the author that his lexical treatment of the materials of the Hebrew tongue, notwithstanding the authority of half a century (Gesenius), corresponds to the present state of Hebrew philology, he must not neglect to repay the indulgence of the students of Holy Writ by repeated siftings of the lexical materials. This edition has not been issued simply like the former one, even apart from the Index and the Appendix; although the productions of 0. T. philology since the conclusion of the first edition last year, and the exegetical advances connected with it, could only be in- considerable. The materials of the language have been reviewed, the latest exegetical and philological improvements have been made use of for the dictionary; and thus many articles, with all their brevity, bear the traces of continued labour. This .perhaps might be the fitting place to mention briefly the linguistic view which I have consistently maintained sinfce 1834, and according to which the materials of the Hebrew language are here treated lexically. It is the more necessary to do so, since many scholars in general go on in the antiquated track, and shrink from the examination of advanced philology. It is well known that since the founding of Hebrew (grammar and of Hebrew lexicography the idea has prevailed, that primitive roots lie at the basis of the verb-stems which form the points of development for all gram- matical changes; and this view presses upon the impartial enquirer so clearly and convincingly, thatnothingbutdefective mental activity can overlook it. These primitive roots I have called here, after Tm FREFAOB TO THE SECOND GEEMAN EDITION. Grimm's example, organic. I have discovered them by com- parison of the verbal stems one with another in the language itself and with those of the dialects, and have afterwards added the result to each stem. If we take by way of example the first stem of a verb in the dictionary which has three consonants, viz. IDS with the primitive signification to be separated, isolated, it is immediately forced upon us in enquiring after the organic root, that it can only lie in 13 bad, and that X must have been added to the peculiar formation of the stem in the second period of the development of the language, when the Semitic separated from the Iranian. A proof of this manner of investigation is the stem of the verb 12 (belonging to the noun la and to 113) which has a similar fundamental idea, and consequently covers itself with the form 13"IS; as also that the organic root in fl— 'IB and 3?-7-nB gives back the form as well as the idea in a modified state. To this may be added, that the Arab. 3lj corresponds to the Hebrew 13^) that ^^ signifies to part, to separate, so thiat not a shadow of doubt can exist concerning the organic root*. The organic roots of the stems of all the Hebrew verbs can be ascertained so clearly and distinctly, that the determination of the idea is by their means accurately defined, and the literal sense of many passages amounts to certainty. It is a sort of philological prejudice to avoid these discoveries. Comparisons of organic roots with those of the Indogermanic tongues only stand in the second line, and do not form a necessary part of Hebrew lexi- cography but belong to the science of comparative philology generally, from which Semitism cannot be excluded. In my dictionary, however, the former as well as the latter is treated subordinately, since it serves solely for the understanding of Scripture, and has only to ofier what is necessary to the elucidation of the Sacred Text. The establishment of the fundamental idea of a verb-stem, its successive changes, the copious proofs for all significations, the interpretation of difficult passages, or at least the endeavour not to ignore or to shun them as other earlier * It was indeed more difficult to perceive the organic roots in jjiS, UMl!, Tins, MIN &c. from the stems, but after a systematic analysis, and a comparison with cognate Semitic and similar Indo-Germanic roots, they may be shown so clearly, that scarcely iany well-founded objection can be raised against them. PKEPACB TO THE SECOND GERMAN EDITION. IX dictionaries have done — this forms the true, proper kernel and essence of the present dictionary, to which the discovery of primi- tive roots in groups, and the comparisons within Semitism, are merely small additions. In a lexicon devoted to the service of exegesis, I have almost wholly omitted comparison with the Indo- Germanic, adding only here and there a little according to the approved " etymologische Forschungen auf dem Gebiete der indo- germanischen Sprachen " by Pott. Attention has also been bestowed on the establishment of rare stems of verbs and of organic roots, with the accurate grounding of their signification, although repre- sented in the Old Testament by a derivative noun, or by a proper name only. This peculiarity of Hebrew Lexicography was rightly asserted a century ago; since neither the Hapaxlegomena nor the greater number of proper names could be interpreted by the side of the small remains of old Hebrew writings. I have therefore sought to carry out such a mode of enriching lexicography, with the greatest possible logical consistency. The proper names of the Old Testament have received a great number of Hebrew verb-stems, an abundance of rare noun-forms considerably enriches the Hebrew language; and the increase comes first to benefit Hebrew and then Semitic philology. The interchange of the consonants of one organ of speech, which has its foundation in the language itself, as well as -the allied idioms the Aramaean and Arabic, were necessary guides in the linguistic investigation of proper names. In con- sidering the signification of such names I also arrived at the important conviction respecting the Old -Semitic theology, that in it ideas of God or gods may be perceived from whom attributes were assigned in the giving of names. The giving of names was generally an act of religious consecration, concentrating itself in an eulogy, in an appeal to God or to any divinity, as a confession. The Semites, as well as the ancient Hebrews, were not monotheists from the beginning, as modern scholars assert in order to rob re- velation of its merit; but polytheists, whom nothing but revelation made monotheistic. The polytheistic mind long continued in the nation; and although the divinities appeared no longer as inde- pendent beings, they still bore distinguishing epithets. Under the words 3N, bsa, "nba, ''nN, laai, ^a, 1^2, lay, na, an, ^nxa, ■jill^ &c., which express some aspect or attribute of divinity PEEPACB TO THE SECOND GERMAN EDITION. and therefore stand for the deity, proofs are given for what has been said. Almost all groups of words, with the exception of the few which have continued to stand on the lowest step of mere feehng (Interjections), or those indicating position and relation to the speaker or listener (pronominal roots), proceed, as is known, from roots indicating ideas*. If the action, quality or existence of a thing be communicated through the medium of language, the existence which was before perceived and con- sidered, and the appearance of things that reveals itself by sounds, are expressed by the word. The expression of the idea which attaches to the word, whether it describes action, motion, operation and being (a verb), or gives expression to a simple declaration, an apprehended object or phenomenon (a noun), is the so-called stem which etymology must seek out and explain. Where the noun represents the idea limited or at rest, we must consider it a derived form, and reduce it to a root of the primitive idea. Whether the noun occurs repeatedly or but once, whether the derivation from the active or passive conception of the verb be easily ascertained or not (Primitives), cannot be a guiding principle to etymological research. If we take for example the first verse of the Bible, we meet with four so-called primitive nouns (a5>in=tl3N'i, O'^iiVn, yiir ^^^ ^'TQ^)}. "svbich can only be perceived in their essential meaning by going back to presupposed stems of verbs. As in rare nouns so also in proper names there lies a rich material of language, which the lexicographer and the linguist must make use of; for in Hebrew as in all other languages, proper names conceal a rich treasure of old linguistic monuments; and for Hebrew the radical ideas deduced from proper names and archaeological forms of words are the more necessary and pro- ductive amid the few remains of old writing, as they present glances into old Semitism. I have therefore bestowed greater at- tention than, I beheve, has hitherto been done, upon the develop- ment of the roots of verbs from proper names, by comparison with the Semitic dialects, as well as on the meaning of their old forms; and upon an investigation of the primitive view * Compare my "Lehrgebaude d. aramaischen Idiome" etc. (Leipzig 1835. 8.) pag. 80—83. PREPAOB TO THE SECOND aEBMAN EDITION. XT of giving names, according to certain principles evolved by in- quiry. For names which are not Semitic, such as Persian, Egyptian, Indian, Armenian &c., I have made use., besides the old helps {Jablonsky, v. Bohlen and others), of the new (Haug, Philox. iMZzatto, Bunsen, Benfey and Stern*, Rosellini, Gildemeister**, Grotefend, Rawlinson, Ign. Rossi, Op-pert and others). Besides a scientific investigation of the stems of verbs from nouns preserved, besides the discovery of very ancient materials of the Hebrew language that have come through the medium of proper names, for certain groups of speech as well as things, a number of monographs has been made use of and accurately examined, that have more or less successfully advanced the ancient familiar sources. Of such monographic works I will men- tion only: Hupf eld's Essay on Hebrew Particles (after the example of my system of the Aramaic idioms); Larsow, de dialectorum ling. syr. reliquiis (Berlin 1841); Roediger, Attempt to decipher the monuments of Himyaritic writings; Tuch, On the Sinaitic in- scriptions; Ewald, On the Phenician views of the creation of the world (Gottingen 1851, 4); Enobel, "Die Vslkertafel der Genesis" (Giessen 1850, 8); Schimk, de numis biblicis (Wien 1835, 4); Cavedoni, BibHcal Numismatics, translated from the Italian by Werlhof (Raanover 1855-56, 8); Hengstenberg , BeitrSge zur Ein- leitung in's A. T.; Bertheau, Zur Geschichte der Israeliten, zwei Abhandlungen; de Luynes, Essai sur la numismatique etc. (Paris 1846, 4); H. v. Niebuhr, Geschichte Assur's und Babel's; Lepsius, Chronology of the Egyptians; v. Gumpach, Alttestamentliche Stu- dien; de Saulcy, Recherches sur la numismatique judaique (Paris 1854, 4); Wood and Bawkins, Ruins of Palmyra and Baalbek. These and similar single works whose mention here would be too tedious, abundantly complete the excellent exegetical works of the last decennia, and ofifer to the lexical inquirer such rich materials, that he is reduced to a sharply defined system and to judicious limitation. With respect to the topography and geography of Palestine, as well as the geographical names in the Old Test., excellent recent works of travel have contributed to an accurate, know- * Of the former also "Uber das Verhaltnias der agypt. Sprache zum semib. Sprachstamm" (Leipzig 1844). «* De rebus Indicia (Bonn 1838). Xn PEBPACE TO THE SECOND GERMAN EDITION. ledge, and have more firmly established the etymologies too. Besides the older but always useful travels of Arvieux, Bachiene, Berggren, Bruce, Buckingham, Burckhardf, Chardin, Clarke, Hasselquist, Jauhert, JolUffe, Ker Porter, Eorte, Laborde, Lorent, Maundrell, Olivier and others, it -was especially Robinson's "Palastina und die siidlich angrenzenden Lander" (3 vols.), and his later "Bibhcai Researches in Palestine", that rendered the best service to the geographical portion of this dictionary. But J. Wilson's "Lands of the Bible", Schultz's "Jerusalem", Williams' "Holy City", Tobler's "Bethlehem und Palastina", Van der Velde's "Reise durch Syrien und Palastina", Porter's "Five years in Damascus", Lynch' s "Narrative of the United States' expedition to the river Jordan and the Dead Sea", and many other recent works have been likewise consulted. As careful an examination as possible has been bestowed on the meaning of geographical names outside Palestine; and I have repeatedly arrived at con- clusions which deviate in part from those most recently ad- duced. I need only refer to tastpN, D''3/p and tB''«^nFi. With regard to comparison of the Semitic dialects, of the Aramaean and Arabic, or consultation of the Coptic and other dialects not Semitic, I have a few more words to say, for this department appears to offer welcome materials for judges. A scientific lexicography of. the languages in question does not yet indeed exist, but the lexicons extant are not so imperfect as to make it impossible for one to find the true development of ideas and meanings with the assistance of the Semitic dialects. From the study of Arabic litera- ture, for example, many things may be supplied to and coiTCCted in Arabic lexicography; but for the comparison of one dialect we can but seldom draw out of it, since the fundamental signification, which is the only guiding principle, can rarely be met with in reading. 0"\ving to the explanation of Arabic verb-stems by means of incidental, remote meanings found in one writer, distinguished Arabic scholars have too frequently been led into errors and false lexical conceptions, which might have been avoided by comparison with Hebrew or Aramaean. In going to the Arabic for an explana- tion of rare Hebrew words, I have proceeded most conscientiously as far as the etymological and lexical study of Arabic makes it possible; and if a few of the numerous comparisons of Arabic PREFACE TO THE FIEST GERMAN EDITION. XIH be not certainly proved, this cannot be prejudicial to the whole work. May this second edition meet with a reception as favourable as that which was indulgently accorded to the first. Teachers and scholars will certainly recognise in it the hand of improve- ment, and a confirmation of the old proverb "Dies diem docet". Leipzig, April 1863. ^^^ j^.^^ j,„^^^_ PREFACE TO THE FIRST GERMAN EDITION. This first and larger volume of my dictionary on the writings of the Old Testament treated according to the latest and most ap- proved advances of lexicology, I give with sincere confidence to an impartial pubhc; the edition in parts having already awakened among interpreters and inquirers into the Semitic tongues a feehng favourable to the new work. For the third time since 1834 I have investigated etymologically and compared linguistically the trea- sures of the ancient Hebrew; I have reviewed with a true estimate of the Semitic spirit the peculiar material of the language of the Old Testament; and the knowledge I have gained has kept me aUve to the conviction that the cessation in Hebrew lexicography, which has lasted for nearly forty years and has not been per- ceptibly interrupted by late attempts begun too often in a per- verted manner, is about to give way to great advances in acquaint- ance with the Hebrew tongue. In a new dictionary of the Old Testament, which orientalists and theologians generally desire, and which the highly-esteemed publisher has professed himself ready to issue at a great sacrifice, the public demand not merely a strict account of current meanings and the reduction of them to their originals, not merely a high esteem for the received text, completeness of articles explaining the forms of K'ri and K'tib, the union of brevity with the proof-passages equally necessary, an observance of the Masoretic orthography and accents, the accurate combination of derivative words with their stems, but also a profound comprehension of the stems of verbs and pro- 3CIV PREFACE TO THE PIEST QERUAN EDITION. nouns as the foundation-stones of the whole language, by which the establishment of the fundamental signification ceases to appear fictitious. With this view I have aimed at a more certain grasp, and as far as possible a complete knowledge of this very ancient language. I have endeavoured to understand its peculiarities, to penetrate the laws of its formation; and it is for the public to decide, whether I have shewn the capacity to set forth the know- ledge I have acquired, clearly and intelligibly. But we have to do not merely with fundamental linguistic knowledge, but also with all remote Hebrew antiquity, with the application of the certainty which has been gained to exegesis and theology, and this aim, which must animate the Hebrew lexico- grapher, stirs up the conscientious inquirer to combine an impar- tial exegesis of the Old Testament with lexicography. Besides the analysis of Hebrew stems, and the separation of the organic kernel from the inorganic husk; besides the secure establishment of the fundamental meaning, and the comparison of organic roots with those similar or allied in other stems; besides the logical development of manifold meanings from the primitive signifi- cation, with the Hebrew or Semitic views lying at the foundation, which is a leading principle in restoring a sensuous idea: I have had regard to interpretation and archaeology, for every word occurring in a difficult passage has been treated exegetically and archseologically with special attention. Of everything else, as well as of the whole field of Hebrew lexicography which has been elaborated anew, an intelligent public will be able to form their own judgment after some use of the book. Even lexicography should be a work of art in its kind, whose worth and object may be perceived by a cursory glance, without its being necessary to say a word to explain what the author wishes and aims to accomplish. Leipzig, July 1857. Dr. Julius Furst. A CONTRIBUTION TO THE HISTOKY OF HEBEEW LEXICOGEAPHY. Wlen I published the first part of this Dictionary I promised to give as an appendix a short histoiy of Hebrew Lexicography. That promise I now endeavour to fuMl; though the work has proved more extensive and exhausting than I couid foresee; and its aims and objects urgently warn me to limit my space. It is self-evident that by a history of lexicography cannot be intended here the proper preliminary studies of lexicographers — that is to say, a representation of the resources and languages necessary to explain Hebrew words, such as Oesenius understood its main purpose to be. Nor can it include arguments to shew how useful a consultation and comparison of the Ara- maean idioms, of the Arabic, Himyaritic, Ethiopic, Amharic, Phenician and even of the Coptic languages at times must be in the decipherment of many Scrip- ture words. No one also will expect a bibliographical enumeration of all th~e Hebrew dictionaries published since the introduction of printing, such as J. Ch. Wolf ga,ve, up to his own time, in his great Hebrew Bibliotheca; since my purpose does not call for such enumeration. I contemplate rather, a concise sketch shewing how the explanation of the words belonging to the Hebrew language was historically developed by degrees; how an alphabetical arrange- ment was first attempted in a peculiar and strange mann-er consisting of an abstract of old Hebrew dictionaries which had almost disappeared, and of similar works belonging to that department in the first thousand years of the common era. Scripture itself already interprets numerous names of persons and places in order to deduce from them, or to confirm and expand, certain historical events^; which interpretations often contain a lexical view confirmed by later inquiry 2. In a still more extended way attempts were made in the post-biblical andTalmudic time (tiU 500 after Christ) to interpret the proper names; and views of the connection of stems and their true meanings as confirmed by later inquiries may be easily perceived from a small essay which I undertook in 1845 *. Many Talmudic teachers (Me'ir, Jeshuah ben Qorcha and others) are famous as interpreters and expositors of personal proper names *. Biblical names 1 Aug. Knohel, G-enesis p. XIX. — * e. g. iTlrt from Imn = tiitl; rttSN formed out of Hi'^S; VP from m = lr»p: bsiMliS from bs 5»'^in bSIM^B are lexical and grammatical possibilities; but yet they could not have been intended in"the act of name-giving; rather does another signification seem to have been thought of in )y_, bNIMl!}. — ^ Printed in the New Zijjon by Pro- fessor GoWent^Z, Leipzig 1845. 8. — '* Y'oma'SSb (p^i.'n); Midr. rab. 27a (llSp.il). ^VI A CONTRIBUTION TO THE HISTORT of places and nations are explained by such as were better known in sub- sequent times, hy the traditional migrations of peoples and their supposed ramifications already adduced in the Talmud and Targums^; and even the names of animals are frequently elucidated according to derivatives from Hebrew sterns^. A treatment of the Hebrew language according to its popular idiom and poetical style, according to its dialects and archaeological inflections (in the Song of Deborah, the Song of Solomon, in Hosea &c.) in northern Palestine, according to the dialect of Ashdod (Neh. 13, 23) and Galilee (Matth. 26, 7) — all this belongs rather to a history of the Hebrew language^. It has also been proved long ago in monographs, that the Mishna, that code of traditional laws which was collected towards the end of the second century in Aramaean, contains many elements of the old vulgar Hebrew, and is fitted to enrich the stock of words in the ancient language*. In addition to the explanations of personal and local names , together with those of words that occur but once or seldom, almost all the treasures of Hebrew scattered throughout the great works of the Talmud and Midrashim, are interpreted for ethical, homiletic and legendary- historical purposes, so that a collection of them would give a sort of Hebrew dictionary of the Talmudic time^ There existed also in the course of these centuries an incipient linguistic consciousness, that Aramaean in general, and the Babylonian, Syrian, Oalilean and Nabathaean in particular, sometimes too the Phenician, Arabic, and even the old Persian, with all their diversities, are useful in clearing up ancient Hebrew words ^; without our being able to speak of a scientific con- sciousness of comparative philology on that account. In the Christian church, in which but a few fathers of this time (till 420 after C.) shew a slight knowledge of Hebrew, those only can be regarded who learnt the language and the Biblical traditions by intercourse with Jews and Jewish teachers; translating and interpreting the Old Testament in the spirit of what they learnt. To these helong Justin the Martyr (150 after C), Clement of Alexandria (200), Origen (230), Ephrem the Syrian (360), and especially Jerome (till 420); but they are all inferior to the Talmudic doctors in the interpretation of words. The last alone has shewn a better understanding of Hebrew, from his acquaintance with the geography and topography of Palestine which he got from a learned Jew of Tiberias (386)', in his book on Hebrew proper names with the names and situations of Hebrew localities (389); but particularly in his ^^ Quaestiones et traditiones" upon the Old Testament books*. 1 Jerus. Meg. p. 5i>; Midr. Eab. p. 32 a; comp. Jerua. Targ.I. and II. See the inter- preters of the so-called ethnographical table. Jos. Schwarz, das heil. Land (Frankfurt on the Main 1852. 8vo). _ 2 e. g. riT'Dn, tlB5N, and nxp, Chull. 63 a. — s On the Galilean dialect all has been collected from the Talmud by LigUfoot, 0pp. vol. II. p. 232 and following. — * Comp. .<4. Th. Harimann, Supplementa ad W. Gesenii Lexicon e Mishna petita. Kostock 1813. 4'o. Gesemus, Thesaurus linguae Hebraioae , partes I. II. III. 1829 — 1853. 4to. .4. (?ej]7er'« Lehr- undLesebuch zur Sprache der Mishna, 2 parts. Breslau 1845. 8vo. (Leopold Dukes, die Sprache der Mishna. Lexicographisch und grammatisch betrachtet. Esslingen 1846. 8vo. — 5 A copious gleaning respecting the grammatical and lexical views of the Talmudists is found in Mos. Konit^s book pi^Ji (Ha-Oyen). Wien 1796. 4*0. — « Comp. e. g. Jerus. Sehekal. St; 12a; Nedarim52a; Pcsachim 41a; 87a; Soth. 40i>; Abod. Sara 24b; Berach. 601), and other places. — "> Preface to the Paralipom. — 8 See Rahmer, Die Hebr. Traditionen in den Werken or HEBREW LEXICOGEAPHy. ZVU About 400 after Christ the great Amorite Asclie (+ 426) who had begun the concluding part of the Eastern or Babylonian Talmud, is said, according to the account of Haja (about 1000 after C), to have -nrritten a book concerning the doctrine of the vowel-signs {Sepher Ha-nikk'&d), in which the non-pronunciation of certain letters in the words of Scripture ^ &c. was treated of, especially in the spii'it of that vowel-mysticism which was afterwards such a favourite theme, on the basis of the doctrine respecting the four gutturals (5>nnN) , of the peculiarity of Eesh in pronunciation, of the exceptional dageshing or hardening of the Aleph-sound in Scripture, and of the Alphabet-rule Atbash (ilSanS*)''. This book, which witnesses by its very name to the existence of a vowel- doctrine in its first origin, was called "The great NikkAd-book", when another appeared afterwards (about 900 after C.) from Ibn Sargddo; and it was esteemed a work of the old Babylonian Academy^. All the Talmudic writ- ings, namely the Babylonian and Palestinian Talmud, the works of the Midrash, in short all Jewish productions till 400 after Christ, exclusive of the inserted pieces of prayers, national songs, riddles, elegies, sayings, are written down in the familiar language of their time, without any endeavour to make use of the old Hebrew; and without desire to put the thoughts in an unmixed pure language, whether Hebrew or Aramaean. But since the Talmudic teachers were very often obliged to return to the Bible as the source, and had to enter into the explanation of Biblical words for dogmatical or homiletic purposes, they must necessarily have been in the possession of grammatical and lexical rules. This was actually the case. The Talmudic writings contain a large number of grammatical remarks, of syntactical subtleties, and lexical observations, but always incidentally; without independent treatment, and linguistic consciousness. In the Talmudic time the pronuncia- tion of Hebrew was observed with the greatest scrupulousness, and was named N'nlJ'n; although punctuation- signs did not then exist. Reference was made to this received pronunciation or Nl]?a, if a mispronunciation had to be removed, e. g. when d''5>a'iB Lev. 12, 5 was not to be pronounced D'^^STlS but D^ysifl; when abnia Exod. 23, 19 was not to be pronounced abna but a'^na. fiut the pronunciation of a word in favour of a received doctrine or its application to ethics and homiletics &c. was named JTiba, and thus arose the Talmudic formula iS^JS'Kib DN IIJ.'; there is a roof (a foundation) for the received pronunciation, nib^b bi< IB"'^ there is a foundation for the pronunciation of the teaching handed down or of the current tradition. Besides the received, established pronunciation (N'lJ???), and the pronunciation in favour of traditional doctrine (JTifa^a), and besides an exact consideration of the full or defective orthography (^DM, sba), the Talmud has also preserved traditions concerning the form of the text, as well as open and closed Parshioth (ni^pint), ninins); concerning words provided with points (nilpWa), floating or suspended letters (niilbri ni'niN), hooks &c., which the Masora received at a later time. Active endeavours to attain to a scientific knowledge of the Hebrew language appeared more decidedly in the first half of the sixth cen- tury. When the study of the Talmud was no longer attractive amid the des Hieronymus. Breslaul861. 8to. — i e. g. the second 3ia -iffliNb ibid.T. 41. In Eschk. 70a"tire bsii'^sin niKiDM are distmguished from T ; • "„: - : v t •• : t ° those of IN "ipa. Pinsker has treated at length of this Assyrian Nikkud - system in a particular work under the title "Einleitung in das babylonisch-hebraische Vocal- und Accent -System" (Vienna 1863. 8to); with which compare my essay upon "das baby- lonisch-hebraische Vocal- und Accent- System und die babylonische Masora" in the journal of the German Oriental Society Vol. XVIII. part I. and II. p. 314. — 3 The Lexicographer David (about 960) calls them ■'axisatl 11)j)S \3)5nM in his Dictionary (see Pinsker 1. 1. S. 62). S. D. Luzzatto first tried an explanation 'of "the Assyrian system in G. J.Polak's Halichot Kedem (Amsterdam 1846. 8™) p. 23— 80; H. Ewald apprehended it still more acutely and profoundly in his Jahrhiicher for 1848. p. 160 — 170. * The naming of the vowels iinriND, nitMNp, and of the accents Mpin'ia bBb?D?3 for nbiabffl, boblD?? for Ni'll, T'IITM for nsia and generally the same mode^of expres- sion as that 'of ien-Asher points of itself to Tiberias. — 6 Comp. my Geschichte des Jfaraerthums p. 19—20. Upon Piriclias and Chaiib see the same work pp. 18. 19. OP HEBKEW LEXICOGRAPHY. XIX These founders of various systems of vowels and accents, of the Masora, and with them also of the first elements of grammar, usually appended their works to Bible-manuscripts; though they also frequently wi-ote them down in special NikkM-books, as we learn from that of Mocha and his son Noses': As early as 600 there originated with the advocates of these two systems, and with those of the Tiberian one in particular, which was most widely spread, model- manuscripts of the 0. T., supplied with vowels and accents, having the great general and the lesser Masora, in the Aramaean idiom. About 600 we first meet with the intelligence of a Heldli-manuscript , which was made at Hilla or Hel&la, a town built in the vicinity of the ruins of the old Babel, and which was famished not merely with vowels and accents, but also with Masora copiously. About 1500, when a part of it was sold into Africa, it was already 900 years old^; about 1136, when a great persecution of the Jews took place in the kingdom of Leon, it had been brought from thence to Toledo, where the grammarian Jacob ben Elasar made use of it, after 1136, in his work Sepher ha- Schalem; whence Kimchi quotes it, who had not seen it himself^. The Machasora Rubba which appeared soon after in Syria, attaches itself to the Helala- manuscript; having likewise the vowels, accents and Masora written upon it, and being quoted as credible and authentic in the oldest Biblical manuscripts*. Even in the T"" century, Sinaitic manuscripts, and those of Damascus, Jerusalem, Jericho and Sanbuk^, obtained credit and author- ity; and arguments were sometimes adduced out of them relative to vowels and accents, or sometimes the Masora. In like manner the following teachers in this department, mentioned in Bible -manuscripts, may belong to the same time: the head of a school, Pinchas (probably in Tiberias), who is quoted beside the Tiberians (Baale Tebarja), the great Machasora and Ben-Asher^. The Masoretes Jonathan and Chabib, who are adduced immedi- ately after Mose ben Mocha, likewise belong here; and may have made similar classical manuscripts of the Bible. In the following or 8*^ century, the study of the original Hebrew text, combined with a conscientious acceptation of single words according to their traditional vowel-sounds, and of clauses with their accents, as well as with the 1 Ben Jerodhim in Pinsker, Likk. S. 62., mentions their lips "^^SD. — ^ Juchasin ed. Constantinop. — ' Michlol 93*; 156*; Dictionary, word ffl'n'l; Comment, on Ps. 109, 10. From the quotations in Masora-Grlosses, and sometimes in grammatical works it was cited by Norzi and others. I was the first to give an explanation of ''bsbrt "iDd in Literaturbl. d. Orients ; comp. also my "Gesch. des Karaerth." p. 22. — ^Jiail N'iiTri.M is the usual name of a large cyclical ritual -work for all the year, in which besides prayers, poems and precepts, the whole Bible is found with the necessary additions. The word is formed after the Syriac jjjcui , which means a ritual of the ecclesiastical year. The orthography ^^a1'^ refers us to Palestine or Syria. It was quoted afterwards under the name of Nn^iTMM or isa'n N^iTtlJ^. A Bible-manuscript alone was also called 'niTriMi a^s e. g. the manuscript made in the year 1010 after Ben-Asher (Pinner, Prosp., Appendix). — 5 1310 i-iso, ''pton 1S&, iMb'OI'1^ ^50, iflt!^ 'nst?, "'IjiiaSD ISD, all named after localities like ■'SlibSl, besides being' often quoted in manuscripts, and by grammarians (Kimchi and others), are also very frequently mentioned by Norzi. Among the towns and localities jsbsbrt , Q'jbllill^ , in'n'; , ''31D , only p^iasD is unknown to us. — 6 In the oldest manuBcript'of tiie Pentateuch /on'Geii. 22, 2, Ex. i, "8), in that of the year 1010 (on Prov. 20, 11, Job 32, 3), comp. Pinsker, Likk. T.29 and 31; in Ben-Asher's Kuntras ha- Masoret, vide Heidenheim's Mishpete ha-Teamim, p. Si*. XX A CONTRIBUIION TO THE HISTORY Masora embracing both the lesser and the whole, was considerably promoted by the more decided and frequent appearance of Karaitism. The invention or the system of signs for facility of reading, which had taken place nearly 200 years before, after the example of the Syriac, by means of an increased acquain- tance with the old language had not only made the origin of new Hebrew religious poetry possible S but had also procured acceptance ^ for Uraare's Karaite principle (about 760 after Christ) "search diligently into Scripture", by awakening a grammatical or natural interpretation; and had caused a greater diffusion of Bible-manuscripts furnished with vowels, accents, and Masora. Testimonies for the grammatical, lexical and Masoretic study of the language, for explanations of grammatical laws and interpretations of Hebrew words became more numerous in the 8* and 9* centui-ies. Anan, the founder of the Karaite sect, wrote in 760 after Christ a commentary on the Pentateuch, and a ni2£M ISO. His disciple Malich ben Harmala in Jerusalem wrote about 780 a commentary on the Pentateuch with explanations of the words. The Karaite Nissi of Bazra (790) wrote a commentary on the Pentateuch in the form of a book of precepts. Benjamin Nahavendi, and many other Karaites until 800, wrote Sci'ipture- commentaries. Daniel-el-Kumasi wrote about 850 a "book of precepts", developed from the Pentateuch, in which numerous interpretations of words necessarily appeared. Mose hen Adonim of Da/ah (F&s) about 870, whom Sdhl adduces as a grammarian (pIplM), also wrote intei-pretations of words, which the Lexicographer David hen Abraham quotes. In like manner Meborach in Jerusalem, is celebrated as a grammarian; although nothing but poems of his are preserved. Zemach, the head of the school at Pumbadita, wrote about 875 a Talmudic dictionary, in alphabetical order; which, besides explanations of matters contains also those of words ^. About 880 Eldad, an unreliable narrator of the history of the ten tribes, belonged to the list of interpreters of Hebrew words ; and was recognised as an expositor by his contemporaries Ibn Koreish, as well as by others afterwards. Zemach, the head of the school at Sora (about 890), com- municates to the Keiraw^nites in his views respecting Eldad, that a great difference prevailed between the scholars of Palestine and those of Babylonia with reference to the vowel- signs and accents, the Masora, and other subjects connected with the criticism of the Scripture-text *- With regard to the differences (T'SlVn) between the Easterns or Babylonians ('^Nn's'ia, rTiT?3 iilisis), and the Westerns or Palestinians (iN:a1»M), it is to 1 Jose b. Jose, Januai, Elaser b. Kalir, Jochanan ha-Kohen in Palestine, Simon b. Keifa and David b. Hi^na in Babylonia, none later than the 8'k century, probably even in the 1 St half of the 7 ti>. Pinchas also of Tiberias (600) wrote a collection of commandments in the form of a didactic poem, see my Geschichte des Earaerthums p. 18. Asaph ben Berechia of Jericho wrote (about 630) his work upon medicine in pure Hebrew. Also Jochanan henSabda (about 650) of the same place. — ^ 'Anan\note, after 761, a com- mentary upon the Pentateuch, and a,Sepher ha-Mizvot to put together the laws of the 5 books , and to explain them according to the sense of the words , both in the Talmudic - Aramaean language. Benjamin Nahavendi also wrote, about 780, a commentary upon the Pentateuch, upon Isaiah, Daniel, and the 5 Megillot, in the new Hebrew. Nissi ben Noach (about 790) mentions in his work upon the Decalogue, many com- mentaries (D'^ai^ns) and commentators (QTinis) before him, and commends strongly the Babylonian vowel- and accent-system, as'well as the Masora. — s This dictionary is known to us by quotations in the Juchasin of Abr. Sakkuio at the beginning of the 16"» century. Comp. also Zeitschrift der deutsch-morgenlandischen Gesellschaft XU. p. 144. XIV. p. 320. note 2, — * The Gutachten is printed with the narrations of Eldad'. OF HEBREW LBXICOGKAPHT. XXI he remarked, that these reach farther up than the origin of the two vowel- and accent- systems in the 6''' century. We know from passages of the Babylonian and Palestinian Talmuds, that as early as the 3'''' century after Christ, there was a difference in respect to the pronunciation of certain words of the Scripture, as well as their exegetical interpretation ', between the Easterns and Westerns, which is partly expressed by the formula "''iiPri bN i. e. do not read thus, but thus. And we know also, that many deviations of the Septuagint and of Jonathan on the Prophets originated by using the Eastern system of reading. The difference conse- quently reached back almost to the living period of the language. The Eastern system presented the traditional pronunciation, which the Septuagint, Jonathan and the Babylonian Talmud followed. The prepos. ']U, e. g. with the suffix in ri were normal, or found their expression in both. The two Masorete-schools, that of Ben-Asher and that of Ben-Naphtali in the 9*' century, represented the difference; and the national grammarians Ibn Balam, Ibn Saruk, Ibn Labrath, Ibn G'andch, Ibn Esra and others, revert to the old diversity. Pinsker has devoted a particular treatise to these T'Dljiri; com- paring Eastern manuscripts, and beginning with the year 816 after Christ. From 880 — 900 after Christ independent works belonging to this department appear; but before I adduce their excellent authors here, it is necessary to present the fundamental principles upon which gram- mars and lexicons were composed up to the time of Ibn ChayyAg . The 3 following parts of grammar were the most important, till the year 1000 after Christ: 1. The doctrine of letters with their transitions into one another when they belong to the same organ of speech; and in a few cases other changes also, but particularly the pronunciation of the guttural sounds and Eesch; 2. the doctrine of the vowel-signs, their application according to the Masora, and the farther development of the vowel-system ; the doctrine of Dagesh and Raphe, of Meteg and Odya, and of other signs; 3. the doctrine of accents, both in the 21 books of Scripture, and in the three named na's«. To these impor- tant parts then, according to our view, grammar proper was limited in developing the laws of the formation and variation of words, according to the current logical or hermeneutical rules (miw) of the Mischnaio and Talmudio time, whether the eight of Hillel or the thirteen of Ismael, or thirty -two of the Galilean Jose, or their reduction to a smaller number. By compaii- Bon of an unknown word -form of Scripture with another that was known, by 1 Kerem Chemed IX. p. 69. XXn A CONTEIB0TION TO THE HISTORY inference from one change to another, from parts to the whole, the la language were derived, and connected into a whole i, so that rules ^ inflexion of nouns and verbs &c. followed naturally, and a foundation was laid tor syntax also. With reference to the arrangement and plan of dictionaries it is to be remarked, that the oldest lexicographers in their alphabetical disposition of roots had taken as their guide either the two firm, unchangeable stem-sounds, as HO (niB) to riDi, mto, nnto, or quite arbitrarily put the first two consonants of a stem at its head, whether they were the firm radical ones or not, e. g. 5>i to 1?a, ba to pba, and therefore also IN to rm, ^i> to ]:», without being more sparing in the Sevelopment of interpretations on that account. At the beginning of a stich-word (gate, ljLj), all the words to be explained in it stand enumerated in their connection; then follows their explanation; before each letter that stem is first explained which has only that one letter for a root, e. g. 3, as the only radical in M35. Sometimes there is before each letter a grammatical treatment of it , its changes , its applications to word-building , or of the relations of words to one another. But with all external defectiveness , which is shown more or less in arrangement and plan, the natural native view of the formation of Hebrew stems, which ben 'Alan, Ben-Asher, Ibn Sar^k, Ibn Labrdth, Saadia, Mi ben SuUeimdn, David ben Abraham, even Nathan in his Arflch, and Bashi adhere to, should be carefully noticed. A comparison of stems within the language, and with those in the Semitic dialects, already proves convincingly, that they are often compounded of firm and loose constituents. I shall now try to continue an enumeration of the authors of works in Hebrew philology. Jehudah ben 'Aldn of Tiberias (about 880), but living and working in Jerusalem (died 932), wrote a Hebrew grammar with the title "Light of the eyes" (D^i"'^ Ti!*'?), a dictionary (rTnana), in which the pro- nunciation of Besh was treated as a peculiarity of the Tiberians; and a com- mentary (li'iriB) on the Pentateuch, with a Masora^. About the same time as Eldad (880), of whom nothing is known except what others communicate, Jehudah Ibn Koreish, skilled in languages, of Tahurt in Marocco, flourished in P^s, who understood the Berber language, besides the three original Semitic languages and another popular language of that region, who studied the Mischnah and Talmud, the Koran and Arabic poets, and was weU-fitted to write works upon the Hebrew language and its comparison with others. He composed: 1. A Hebrew dictionary (li'i|N) in alphabetical order, according to the peculiar arrangement abeady mentioned, viz. that before each group of words (oL), belonging to a letter, there was a chapter concerning those words which have only the letter in question for a radical thema, as well as a chapter concerning the changes of that letter. Not only does the author himself mention this dictionary in his Eisaiet^; but Ibn SarAk, Ibn Labrdth, Ibn G'andch and Kimchi, Ibn Esra and Hadassi also quote explanations from it*. 2. Bisdlet (jUL*^) or a letter to the congregation of the Jews at Fks, 1 Comp Eschk Alphab. 163 seq. and the grammar Kdil JopU, of Akron ben Joseph I. (composed at Constantmople 1294, and printed there 1581. 8vo). _ 2 Aecording to the usual Kunje hewB.sB.\B0<,3lleiJachjaAbuSakarijja, and by ffimcM with a transposition of the name. Ah ben JehudaJi (Michlol 108b) = Jehudah b. 'Ali (= ^Alin), with the surname "T'TSi? (ascetic). As a grammarian he is called in Dod Mard. lib nV^^^^ ^ HmkerlA. - 3 Chapter 2. p. 47. ed. Barges, article nbTabs , to which P^nk'^l i t 108. has abready called attention. - i ibn Sarilk, Articles nnSN, in'^m, jj^Vj, 1^^ .' OP HEBREW LEXICOGRAPHY. XXm among whom lie stood in high estimation. This Eisalet^, now printed from a defective manuscript, which the author himself wished to be regarded as the second i part of the dictionary, exhorts the congregation first of all, not to banish ;the Aramaeic Targflm from schools and synagogues, and to consider the great value which the Aramaean has for a knowledge of Hebrew. After the intro- duction follow 3 sections: a) an explanation of difficult Hebrew words, from the .Targfim, in alphabetical order; b) an explanation of Hebrew words from the Mischnah and Talmud; c) a comparison of Hebrew with Arabic &c. ^; 3. a Hebrew grammar (pl'l)?'! '^5,5)) quoted' by Levi ben Jephet (1030), and anonymously by lin Esra^; 4. a homonymic (D^srinid72!i niJSiB 'niNla), men- tioned by Jehudah Hadassi^. Almost about the same time (about 900) there lived at Tiberias the great master of the Tiberian system of vowels and accents, and of the partial as well as entire Masora, Ahren ben Mose ben Asher, usually called £en- Asher, who became at last the centre and new founder as it were of these scientific subjects; after the scattered and boundless works befofe him by Mocha, Mose, Pinchas, ben '^Aldn and others. His most important writings were: 1. 'nttJN p 'ISD, the restoration of a standard text of Scripture ,' furnished with accents and vowels as well as the Masora, by which a stop might be put to the disorder in this department. This Scripture- copy of Ben- Asher gradu- ally procured for itself general acceptation for all times ^, though not without opposition on the part of the contemporary Babylonian Ben-Naphtali. 2. A Masora -book called Masoreth Ben- Asher'' , in which the Masora is noted both at the particular word of Scripture*, and presented as a whole at the conclusion of the original text, in a summary manner^. 3. The book of accents^", a representation of the accent-system for 21 books of Scripture, as well as the doctrine of accents concerning the 3 books of Scripture, Psalms, after that Easchi upon Jer. 12, 20; Ibn Labr^th article !r|lVl!<; Ibn G'anS.ch and Kimchi article InSBJ; Ibn Esra on tj'lDM Am. 6, 10; Eschk. 31b, 92 b. Ibn Esra names it on account of the beginning DN1 it« , and with a symbolical name fert^rt 1BD (Mosnajim, preface). — i Fragments of it were first communicated by Schnurrer (Eichhorn, Biblio- thek III. p. 952). Wetzstein, who copied in Oxford the whole Risalet, gave the introduction with a translation and notes in the Litteraturblatt des Orients 1842. no. 2. J. J. L. Barges andS. Goldberg have now published the entire manuscript, as far as it exists. Paris 1857. 8vo. From the Eis^let Ibn G'andch (see Kimchi, art. iJiSTN and W^S), Ibn Esra (e. g. Job 9, 26) and Hadassi quote. — ^ in this EiaS,let are" employed? ' a) the com- munications of Sdad upon the explanation of Hebrew words; b) the Sepher Rephuoth oi Asaph, which old authorities also quote; c) the book of the Halachot of Simon Kahira {about 890), in the explanation (p. 40) of Biblical words; d) the Pesach-Agada (p. 27) in use among the Jews. — 3 Pinsher, Likk. S. 65. — * Sephat Jeter no. 104. — 5 According to the account in Ez. Chaj. (ed. of Del.) p. 46. — 6 MaimUni (Hil. Sepher Tora 8, 4) found this original writing of Ben-Asher's inEgypt, whither it had been carried from Jerusalem ; and reckoned it of sufficient importance to correct the Bible manuscripts according to it. — "> liBN-'ja rrnOM. — ^ Called Qi5S)rt rrnfaa, n-'irlsa tHoi^. — 9, in a ms. of the year 1010 (5>ir)n), which is now in Petersburg, are found both'theMasoras of Ben- Asher, in a peculiar, diJFficult, Hebrew dialect. The general Masora at the close is composed in difficult Hebrew rhymes. Pinsker, Likk. T. 130. The Masoras written in Aramaean since the times of Mocha and Pinchas, were corrected and enlarged according to the Masora ■of Ben-Asher, and have therefore been preserved in Aramaean down to our time. A short chapter from the Masora-book, headed N'lpatl IID, and closing with D"'b''3H5?3m liii'', is found m Dukes' Kuntras ha-Masoret, p. 36. — lO Named di?35>t:M ■'pTlpl(a) ISO, more correctly perhaps after the beginning QiMSaii 'no IID. ■ XXIV A OONTEIBUTION TO THE HISTORY JProverbs, and Job, all like Ms Masora-book, in hard, abstruse, Hebrew- verses ^ 4. A treatise upon consonants and vowels, of which only a few fragments have come down to us, inserted in his small work upon accents ■ To this treatise which is rather grammatical, Saadia, in the first quarter of the 10* century, wrote objections and refutations (nilpiiari) , also in awkward verses like Ben Asher's book ^. 5. A collection of 80 Hebrew words written like others, but with a different signification *. As an antagonist of Ben- Asher, Mose ben David hen Naphtali appeared in Bagdad (biS), who wrote a small work upon the doctrine of vowels and accents, as well as upon Masoretic variations belonging to Scripture, in strong opposition to Ben- Asher ^. His opinions are still preserved in the tables of variations between the two (ChiUu- phin) in our larger Bible- editions; although the usual decision was in favour of Ben- Asher. — After these numerous preparatory works in Babylon and Palestine, whence the study of the Hebrew language spread to Egypt, North Africa, and Spain, We meet with such important works in this department in the 10"" • century, that the fruitful beginning of Hebrew philology may be rightly designated by them. In the first quarter of the 10"" century Saadia hen. Joseph (bom 892, died 942) of Fayyflm in Upper Egypt wrote a number of works relating to Hebrew philology, which served to stimulate and direct later times ^ after he had translated all the Scripture into Arabic, with the addition of shorter or longer exegetical scholia. His grammatical works ' commence the series, viz. 1. a Hebrew grammar (Sepher Leschon Ibrit) con- sisting of ten treatises (ailSlB, Qi'lMNM) ^. 2. Eefatations of and criticisms upon the work of Ben- Asher ^. Then follow his lexical treatises (li'^-JN, Q''iiln3 "ISD), viz. 1. a dictionary of the Hebrew language in alphabetical 1 First printed in the Rabbinical Bible of Venice 1518. folio, but only consisting of a few fragments. The subsequent copy of Dukes after a manuscript of Luzzatto's, under the unsuitable name of rTlfaMln Oicpjlp (Tiibingen 1846. 16.), has not only a very divergent text, but also a piece of his grammar and particularly that upon the poetical accents, which latter W. Heidenheim has correctly printed in his edition of the Psalms (4 edition, Eodelheim 1842. 16). A commentary upon the first chapter of Ben -Asher concerning the poetic accents was supplied by S. Baer, in his Torath Emeth, Eodelheim 1852. 8vo. _ 2 ri^^^pjf^T j^,^flj^^j,j^ '')?.'n)?1 '?• The small divisions ni'jiniNrt nilbin nVs in Dukes 1. 1. p. 57, ni'iN ''ii2'a) 55 are preserved. — 3 Dunash Ibri Lahrdth has defended Ben- Asher against Saadia , in a work which still exists partially in manuscript. Jeliudah Ibn Balaam made use of Ben- Asher's as well as Ben-Naphtali's works in his N'lp^iil "'TZS'a , as also in his commentary upon the Pentateuch (see Chaluz n. p. 61). — * niSIT D"'5iMlI5 only mentioned by Hadassi (Eschk. no. 163. and 173.), and in so obscure a manner, fhat one does not know whether it is to be looked upon as lexical, or as belonging to his Masora-work. — 5- In his D'^M^aill nilnpart hs rTljaria he spoke about 3>'nbB1 b''5>bM ■'S'm laai, bllJ yap, NTU, D'^snan and about accents, as one can still perceive from the differences (SiSlbfl) in our large Bibles at the close. — 6 Jin Esra counts him among the Vi'l^Tt 'jiuib "'i)?!, and characterizes him especially as "bss Qi'lSTJStl ;l3i<'-i DipW. Por the first time in 1849 I enumerated in theLitteraturbl. des6rients ch.'688 seq'. the philological works of Saadia, with the writings for and against him. — ' Insbbs SflS Hebrew TillSbSl "'pBD. — ^ The 10 treatises discuss the consonants, the gutturals (sn'ilN), the inflections (diSlblntl), the vowels (lIpS), Dagesh and Raphe, the accents, rules for reading, the joining together of words (Qisi'iit), nouns, particles. The treatises are fiometimes quoted singly. — 9 These niSl^nareoomposediuHebrew verses in rhymes. OP HEBREW LEXICOGRAPHY. XXV order ^ and in Hebrew , in -which each letter is named iTnana ; 2. an interpretation of the Hapaxlegomena ^ and a comparison of theni with ana- logons words from the Mischnah, Talmud, and Targfim; written against the Karaites. In our editions these have increased to 91. He wrote besides, a work on Hebrew rhetoric ^, in which he treats at length of word-building, style, grammatical anomalies, and the use of Hebraism in rhetorical style. Dunash Ibn Ldbrath wrote criticisms upon the works of Saadia (niailZJri); and Ibn Esra defended him, in his Sephat Jeter, against these attacks. Before Saadia (900) the Masora-book tibSNT MbSN '0 was already known. It was a kind of lexical Masora, put together in alphabetical order, and began with iiVSN (1 Sam. 1, 9) and i^b^N^ (Gen. 27, 15), which appear only once (hence the name), and con- tained grammatical remarks* in addition to Masora. The grammarian Isaac ben Jehudah (in the 13"" century) in his bttJiSlri 'D (ms.) does not identify it with the great Masora ^ Jehudah Ibn BaHam, Kimchi, Joseph Ibn '^AJenin mention this work, which is preserved in Paris in manuscript^. The treatise which is the oldest of the lexical Masora, containing 360 paragraphs of traditional remarks on the sacred text with particular relation to the number of excep- tions &c. has been published under the title: "The book Ochlah WOchlah (Masora), edited, translated, and furnished with explanatory remarks, after a manuscript in the imperial library of Paris, by Dr. S. Frensdorf (Hannover .1864. 4)"; but since 1038, when Elias Levita mentions it, it had been lost to critics of the text. Professor Hupfeld has also found a copy in the Uni- versity library at Halle. A contemporary of Saadia, Ahron ben Joseph ha- Cohen Ibn Sargddo of Bagdad, Gaon at Anbar, belongs here, as a commentator on the Pentateuch and author of a 11)?3!l 'ISO; whilst it is the province of a history of Jewish literature to speak of his other works '. Ibn Bdlam in his commentary upon the Pentateuch cites his linguistic explanations of the Pen- tateuch- commentacy*; and Ibn Esra next mentions him under the name V'Jlj.'^ Ina-iTanji ■on'i ilisri ». The Gaon Hdja speaks of his 1ll53fl 'jD in rtai5:;i?ri IBD; and of his Halachite opinions a few are cited in Rashi's Sepher ha- Partes (fol. 26 seq.). Contemporary with Saadia in Payytim one Jachja Ibn Sakarijja (Jehudah) el-Kdtib in Tiberias translated the Bible into Arabic^". Somewhat later than Saadia's linguistic works in Egypt, those of Abu-Sahl Dunash (Adonim) Ibn Tamim in KeirawS,n (bom about 900, and died about 960) meet us". Like his teacher Israeli (died 940) he applied himself besides other sciences (such as medicine, philosophy, astronomy, mathematics &c.) to the Hebrew language, and wrote a special Hebrew grammar, containing a com- parison of the linguistic phenomena characteristic of the Hebrew and Arabic / lin^ij iBp, nin^D "1 ■'Si'ins 1SB. — 2 rn'nBbN iiasbbis V5*sobN 'T^Dsn. For a_ bibliographical notice of t&s work' see my Bibliotheca Jud. Vol. I. p. 269. — ^ '0 '"^'3ii?5 TilBb n^nia. — * in the citation in the Arabic work upon nuitlia nisbfl in ten chapters (ma.) it is called fol. 40 iibSNI nbSiS SNnS iS pTlplbiSil n'lDMbN. Geiger , Jiid. Zeitschr. I. 316. — 6 It is said there : !^b:^i« '01 ini'n Nn^nonla TlNitja rtbiNt Gratz, Gesch. V. p. 555. — « Geiger 1. 1. p. 291 and 317. — 7 He wrote besides, a commentary upon the Sepher Jezirah, a philos. dissertation against the Aristotelian views concerning the eternity of the world &c. See my Bibliotheca Judaica vol. III. p. 246. — 8 On Deut. 21, 12 &c. ; comp. Chalflz II. p. 60. — » Pentateuch-commentary upon Gen. 49, 6—7; Deut. 33, 6; Exod. 36, 15 (short recension); Lev. 18, 6 &c. — 'io De Sacy, Chrest. Ar. I. p. 350. — " He came from Ir6k and lived in KeurawSn, where he was educated under Isaak Israeli ben Suleiman. XXVI A CONTRIBUTION TO THE HISTOET languages 1. The study of Hebrew as well as of other scientific subjects generally, was transplanted from Africa into Spain, where it was fully developed. Menachem ben Jakob Ibn Saruk (bom 910 and died about 970) called from Tortosa to Cordova by the high Jewish Minister Abu-Jusuf Chasdai ben Isaah Ibn Shafruth (bom about 915, died about 970), wrote a copious Hebrew dictionary^ of Holy Scripture, including the Aramaean of Daniel and Ezra; by the help of the scientific works of Ibn Koreish and Saadia, of the earlier interpreters (&''ln3) and poets (d'^T^'ilna). A grammatical introduction precedes each letter (nSana) ; and introductions relating to the preliminary grammatical studies divided into ten chapters, supply in it the place of a grammar ^. Against this lexical work of Menachem, Dunash (Adonim) Ibn Labrdth ha-Levi^ (bom about 920, died about 980) wrote a kind of Anti- dictionary (Teshuboth or Sepher ha-Shoroshim), following the alphabetical order of Menachem, consisting of 160 criticisms (but properly 200, as is expressly noted in the refutations); besides a large introductory poem against Menachem consisting of 108 strophes, as well as a panegyrical poem comprising :41 strophes dedicated to Chasdai^. Upon these lexical anti-criticisms, Ibn Sar&h, or rather his disciples Jehudah ben Baud (Ibn Chayyiig), Isaak Ibn Chiquitilla and (Ephrayim) ben Kafron wrote refutations of the attacks and defences^, which are still preserved, though defectively, in two mss. at Florence and Parma''. In such Teshubot of the disciples in defence of their teacher Menachem, only 50 of the 200 attacks of Dunash are refuted; against which 50 again, an attack of the scholars of Dunash was directed, which is also preserved in the above-named uianuscripts. The contest begun between Menachem and Dunash and continued between their followers {Jehudah ben Shesht and others) already mentioned, is of great interest in relation to a knowledge of Hebrew philology, of the new Hebrew poetry, and of the state of Jewish culture in Spain, in the tenth century ^ A turning-point in the view taken 1 Ibn Esra in the Mosnajim, preface; Ibn Tamim's Jezira- commentary, preface (ms. in several libraries) , see Litteraturblatt des Orients 1845. ch. 563. His teacher Israeli (about 900) employed himself likewise with Hebrew grammar, though only incidentally (see a fragment of the Jezira-commentary in Dukes' Kuntras ha-Mas. p. 9. note, and p. 73). — 2 Called 'ji-i.Jij! ^s^ or li'inslrt ISD, also dpsa rrnarito. See at lengtii concern- ing Ibn SarM my Bibl. Judaic'a" vol. III. p. 248—2^0, where writings and essays upon him are pointed out. — 3 This dictionary appeared for the first time after 5 manuscripts, edited by H. PhilipowsU. London 1859. 8vo (228 pages). A fragment of the gram- matical introduction was formerly given by Wolf m hisB. Hebr. vol. HI. p. 692—695; more fully by Dukes in his Lit. Mittheilungen p. 125—148. (Stuttg. 1849. 8to). ,T.he articles nnSN, as«, 'nna, is, USa, iNn, msana, are printed in Litteraturbl. d. Or. 1843. ch. 186 and 661. — ^ He came from Bagdad, but lived in Flis, and was called thence to Cordova by Ibn ShafrHih. — 5 These maiian were printed after 3 manuscripts by H. Philopowski; with exegetical and critical notices by Dukes and Kirchheim. London 1855. 8vo. _ 6 Hebrew 1B3T1 nQiBn bs m^nUJn. These Teshubot were ascribed to Menachem himself, by the grammarian Profiat Duran in his work lbs MiBS'.'a (ms.). Fragments of these refutations, so far as they are quoted in Duran's Ma'^ase Epho'd, were communicated hj Dukes in the Litteraturbl. d. Or. 1849. ch. 33—35. — ' In the manu- script at Parma, these refutations are expressly ascribed to the disciples of Menachem {Dpitt ■'^J'^Mbn). — 8 Hnsker has the best on this subject with reference to Menachem inLilik. T.il6.128. 144.170-175.198; S. 45. 157— 163; concerning i)una«A ibid. T. 4. 9. 57. 66. S. 157. 162. 164. With the aid of Pinsker's criticism , Oratz has applied this in his History of the Jews, vol. 5. OP HEBREW LEXICOGRAPHY. XXVII of the stems of Hebre-w verbs ■was caused by Jehudah hen David Ihn Ghayyiig , who was born in F^s, and, as Mose Ibn Esra reports lived in Cordova, where he became the teacher of Samuel Ibn Naghdila (ha-Nagid). He was the first, who after the Arabic model, established the triliteralness of Hebrew stems, even of those provided -with quiescents, lengthening and double root- letters; who sought accordingly to elucidate in his works not only lexical arrangement and interpretation but grammatical rules also; and his views have been accepted by all later Hebrew philologers who proceeded from the Spanish school, Ibn Esra, Ibn Ba'lam, both the KimcMs, Parchon and others, even down to our time^. On account of this system with its consequences, the teachers of the Hebrew language in the 11* and 12*'^ centuries, the chronographer Abraham ben David ^, the grammarian Ibn Esra ', and the lexicographers Par- chon^ and Kimchi^ consider him the first actual founder of Hebrew philology. He wrote: 1. a book concerning verbs with quiescent letters^, in 3 divisions, namely a collection and explanation a) of all ND and "iB; b) of all n»; c) of all Wb. 2. a book of verbs whose second and third radicals are the same^. These two single works which stiU exist in Oxford in Arabic* and in two Hebrew translations by Mose Ibn Chiquitilla and Ibn Esra, are stiU found in many libraries, discuss along with the lexical enumeration of verbs , their gram- matical formations and changes in particular, and do not enter into an exposi- tion of passages of Scripture as a part of the explanation of words. To this belongs 3. his work on the signs or the Sepher ha-Nikkud ^, in which the vowels, the Sh'ba (n51B), the system of accents, and the Ga'ja {voV'x) are treated at length 1". Ibn Chayyug was a very great authority to the great grammarian and lexicographer of the ll"' century Ibn O'anach, who pays most regard to him in the grammar and dictionary. But notwithstanding this esteem, Ibn O'andeh wrote his Kitab-el-MustalcMk that is "the supplementer", in the form 1 He bears in Arabic the naiaeJachjaAbn-SakarijjaJeMdahFdsi. — ^ In his book of tradition he says: " Jehuda ben David FSsi, named Chayyug, haa restored the holy language to its purity, after it had been already forgotten in all the dispersion". — ^Inthe list of philologists (preface to Mosnaj.) it is said of him : "he is the most learned of the masters of the Hebrew language, the chief of all who gave forth deep thoughts before him". In SepJiat Jeter no. 74: "the grammar of the Hebrew language was not known, untilJehudahbenDavid, the chief of grammarians, arose". In Sapha Berurdh, ed.Lippm. p. 256. he aays : "know , that all older teachers of the language assumed as the roots of *TTi, affii only Tl, ail}; for Tmy merely lUi*; for yj5 only 5>J; andfornus, SlTi only a and T ; this was the view of Ibn Koreish, Ibn Saruk ; only Ibn Labrath awoke a little from the sleep of ignorance &c., and Grod opened the eyes of Jehudah to perceive the quiescent letters, how they are added, are wanting, or change". — * In the preface to his dictionary he says of him, that there had been revealed to him what even a Saadia had not known. — ^ in the preface to his Michlol: "and the chief of the teachers of the Hebrew language was Jehudah FS,si, called Chayyug ; he found Hebrew grammar perverted in his time" &c. — 6 in the Hebrew translation of Ibn Esra msfl nrmN 'nSO; in that of Ibn Chiquitilla ']\aam "inDM T\Vr\MH ISO; Arab. (jJ^t ^Jr'*' v'^ ~ ' Hebrew 'bssfl 'nSD. — * Catalogue of NicoU and Pusey p. 7 following: Ure, no. 458 and 459. — » Arab. JajuLudt i_jLx^ — i" These works were used by IbnParchon, Kimchi, Balmes, down to Heidenheim. AUthree were printed in a Hebrew translation by Leopold Dukes, after a Munich manuscript: no. 1. according to Ibn Esra' s, and the Tmrpn according to Ihn Chiquitilla's translations; no. 2 and 3. according to the latter's translation, but no. 3 , with the additions of the other translator ; Frankfort on the Main 1844. 8vo. 'XXVin A CONTRIBUTION TO THE HISTOET of additions and corrections to Ibn Chayyug . Samuel ha-Nagid, a disciple of Ibn Chayyflg, wrote against this book; and Ibn Ganach wrote on the other side his Kitab el-Taschvir, as he wrote against another adversary his Bisalet el-Tanbih. He wrote besides a Kitab el-Takrib, and a Kit&b el-Tasmijah with relation to Ibn Chajjug. Before we touch upon the next results of Hebrew philology in Spain immediately after Ibn Chayyug, it will not be uninterestiag to turn back to the East whence the first impulse came. Contemporary with Saadia who lived at PayyUm in Egypt, Jeshuah Ibn Sadal Ibn Baud el-Hiti (about 920), wrote a commentary" upon the Pentateuch and Job; his son MuH-Fardg Ahron hen Jeshuah (about 940) also wrote an Arabic commentary on the Pentateuch, and a special grammatical work. The head of the school at Pumbadita, Ahron Ibn Sargddo, wrote (about 940) a NikkHd-book in the sense of mysticism; and a commentary upon the Pentateuch which Jehudah Ibn Balaam mentions in his exposition of the 5 books ^. Similar commentaries were written by Chassan ben Mashiaeh, whom Ibn Esra mentions under Ben-Mashiach; by Jeshuah hen Ahron (about 960) , and by Sahl hen Mazliach el-Fdsi. Many other Karaite teachers of the lO*** century also composed grammatical books, which promoted the study of the Hebrew language. Conformably to our purpose however, we shall only cite a few of the lexicographers of the tenth century who lived in the East, and who deserve more attention and respect than even Saadia and Ibn Sariik, in a history of Hebrew lexicography. David ben Abraham of F^s^, a younger contemporary of Saadia and Ben-Jerochim and living perhaps before Ibn Saruk, wrote a large and copious Hebrew dictionary in the Arabic language, arranged in the old national manner mentioned above, called in Arabic r|"'bs«n, and in Hebrew JTiana or liUN, which, notwithstanding a few unimportant defects, has still maintained its position well^- He says himself (preface and article ob), that his predecessors had abeady composed well- arranged Hebrew dictionaries, that he himself had only followed in their paths, and had merely deviated from them in establishing interpretations ('ji'ins); thdt there had been alphabetically arranged dictionaries (niSi^Jis), as there had been long before him exegetes and grammarians. Appealing to the old grammarians (T^pTlplbs) and exegetes (Ti^DSnbN), he enters largely into the grammar, Masora, the Tiberian vowel- and accent- doctrine. Every irregularity in vowels and accents, which had become almost canonical in his time, the syntactical subtilties, the constructions of verbs with prepositions, and the unusual forms of 1 See Bibl. jud. vol. III. p. 246. — 2 Arabic Abu Suleiman DavM ben Ibrahim el- Fdsi, as the name is in the title of his dictionary (tiibisn) written in Arabic. 3 Xhe only existing manuscript was found by A. Firkowitsh of Eupatoria in the year 1830 in the cellar of a Karaite synagogue at Jerusalem, along with other old papers. The manu- script is divided iato 2 parts: the first contains the Hebrew roots from N to 1, the second from 5 to n. The existing 313 quarto-leaves are written upon cotton paper now much corrupted by age, the Arabic in Hebrew square characters, each line consisting of about 50 letters, and a page from 26 — 30 lines. At the beginning of part 1, the first and perhaps also the second leaf of the preface is wanting; and at the end of the second part a leaf is wanting, containing the stich- words ^n and I23n. The manuscript has besides a number of superscriptions and subscriptions, but from which the age of the manu- script cannot be ascertained. See IHnsker, Likk. T. 117—167, whom we must speci- ally thank for his communications about this manuscript, the numerous fragments of it, and his carefully collected observations respectmg the author. OP HEBREW LBXICOGEAPHY. XXIX verbs, are considered more cautiously and acutely, than they are by his suc- cessors; so that his dictionary is the best which has remained to us from those times , to judge from the numerous specimens of it which Pinsher has printed ^ Besides the dictionary, he wrote a book upon the vowels and accents (Sepher ha- Nikkud), as well as commentaries upon parts of Scripture, e. g. upon the Psalms, the Song of Solomon, &c. About 1050 after Christ, one Alt ben Suleimdn wrote a large Hebrew diction- ary in the Arabic language, for which he took that of David ben Abraham as the model. He himself says in the preface, that he had before him an extract from David's work composed by Abu SaHd Levi ben Jephet, which he had laid at the foundation of his work and enriched with independent additions. According to his own account, he made use of the works of Ibn Chayyug (Jachja Ibn Davud), Ihn Koreish and el-Sheich el Fdzl AbvUl-Farag Harun alone, in his lexical treatise, besides that of David. Like his predecessors he did homage to the old lexical system in the establishment of roots from two or one conso- nant-letter only; and found in Ibn Chajj'&g''s assumption of their triliteralness an innovation to be rejected. He supplied the missing words and stems in the dictionary of David; but sometimes inserted sections of his own upon gram- matical subjects, which bore particular titles. If too great an admixture of (Karaite) exegesis is seen in the dictionary of David; the work of '^Ali, on the contrary, is distinguished by rich grammatical additions. Of the peculiarities of this Iggaron ^ it is especially to be noted , that it often corrects difficult words of Scripture by adopting changes of letters, and even substitutes others for them occasionally; that uncommon words are sometimes explained according to the sense and connection, at other times from the language of the Mischuah and Talmud, from the dialect of the TargUm which is here called Syriac, and often from the Arabic very successfully. He is also the first that occasionally explained proper names. Although his copy of Scripture was accurately supplied with vowels, accents and Masora, and he had before him the works connected with these, he still moved very freely, attend- ing, where it seemed necessary, neither to them nor to the K'ri and K'tib'. The works of Hdja ben Sherira, the famous teacher of the academy at Pumbadita (born 969, died 1038), which are not unimportant for Hebrew philology, should be particularly noted. Besides commentaries on most of the books of Scripture, which are quoted occasionally by Ibn Esra, David Kimchi and others*, he wrote a Hebrew grammar (pl'n)?'^ ISO) mentioned by Ibn BaVam in his grammatical dissertations upon the particles (part. 1^1) and upon the verba denominativa (verb BtSn)^. Also, a Hebrew dictionary called <^^^\ (el-Ch^vi), that is the gathering, translated into He- brew by Ibn Esra as ClSN^ln ISO, which is arranged alphabetically after 1 Likk.T.122— 167. — 2 Enumerated in ISpoints by «nsA;er, Likk.T.177— 182. Each letter is called Bab (gate), and consequently the whole consists of 22 gates. — 3 The manu- script of this dictionary is -withFirkowitsch, and is not rightly described in Geiger's scientific Journal III. 442. no. 1 ; but is completely so by IHnsker 1, 1. T. 175 seq. It forms a folio volume of thick parchment-like paper, containing 429 leaves. IHnsker gives there the large preface in the Arabic original, with his Hebrew translation, and then frequent examples from the dictionary itself, in his Hebrew translation. — * See Rapaport's biography of Hdja (printed in Bikkure ha-Ittim of 1830) note 28. — * In ms. at Paris. Bibl. Imper. AF. U. 497. XXX A CONTRIBUTION TO THE HISTORY the manner of many Arabic dictionaries where the order is regulated by the last radical letter (e. g. IS^i under Daleth). In this dictionary written in Arabic, which extended to the Biblical Chaldee also, the language of the Mishna, as well as a comparison of the Arabic, and sometimes even of the old Persian, was applied to the explanation of Hebrew words, as may be seen from the quotations of Ibn BaVam in his commentary upon the Pentateuch , of Ihn Esra^, of David Kimehi in his book of roots », his grammar and his interpretations of Scripture *, of Bashi ^ and others. We now return to Spain, where Hebrew grammar and lexicography had received in the 11* and 12"' centuries that highest development wHch gives the tone even to our own time. The grammarian Isaah ben Saul in Lucena, a disciple of Ibn Saruh and teacher of Ibn G'andch, wrote^ a dictionary (II^-IN), which Levi ben Jephet expressly quotes^; and from which Ibn G'andch^,' ^Mose Ibn Esra^, and Abraham Ibn Esra^" took explanations. Isaak Ibn Chiquitilla^^ in Cordova, a disciple of Ibn Saruk and teacher of Ibn G'andch, also wrote explanations of Hebrew words, possibly in the form of a dictionary ^^. This history may now close with that distinguished inquirer in the department of the study of the Hebrew language, who became a model to his later contemporaries (Jehuda Ibn BaVam, Mose Ibn Ohiquitilla, Salomon Ibn Gebirol), and to his immediate successors {Ibn Esra and both the KimcMs). This inquirer was Abu!l-Walid Merwdn Ibn G'andch ^^ of Cordova, called in Hebrew Jona (born 985). Here belongs first his great linguistic work Kitdb el- TaraMcA, i.e. "book of inquiry" (^SiyLuJI oLaT), in Hebrew pTipl 'isO, which is divided into two great parts, of which the first, Kitdb el-Lumc^, that is "book of variegated fields", in Hebrew JiMpIrt 'nSD, treats at length of Hebrew grammar; the second, Kitdb el-Azul, that is "book of roots", is a Hebrew dictionary. The dictionary is the only one which Ibn Esra mentions by name of the seven works of Ibn G'andch, and designates as valuable; Ibn Parchon, who himself made a Hebrew translation of it, thinks it worth while to treat of it^*; 1 On Numbers and Deuteronomy preserved in Oxford (see Chaluz 11. p. 60). The dictionary of Hdja is there expressly called el -Cham, as in Tanchiim upon Judges 8,16. — 2 Frequently in his grammatical and exegetical writings, as at Deut. 32, 39 ; Is. 46, 8; Am. 1, 27; Ps. 58, 10; Job 41, 15; 6, 10; 13, 27; 21, 32. In the preface to Mos- najim he says of it: "it is full of learning, and perfect beauty", and to judge from the conclusion there, it was written Diiiafirt ^liabs. — ^ Articles btlN, ttJNa, S'Vi, bia, nNi, aan, Tan, 1V2, sba, bns, nps, 'lay, ij>-i5>, i^d, iti, ipia, fiian. — 4 e. g. on Is. 5, 5; 35, 14; Jer. 12, 6; Ezek. 19, 10. — 6 On Judges 4, 19; Hos. 3, 4. — 6 Hdja has also given explanations of difficult Talmudic words from the Arabic or Persian, e. g. of niJUO (see Kimchis dictionary, article Saiu); and one perceives this from his remarks upon the Mishna -order Tohorot, which have just been printed. — ' Pinsker, Likk. S. 65. He names the author pIp'iMM. — » Kimehi, dictionary, article Ti'n. — 9 See Wolfs Bibl. Hebr. vol. III. p. 4. — " On Deut. 32, 17 ; Is. 27, 5 ; Sephat Jeter no. 68. — 11 Arabic jj^iajiis. in Ilm Ganddh. — 12 Quoted by Ibn G'andch in his "SuppIementer"(eZ-Jl!fMS. a, a, frequently pronounced e. B b. Bi-^a. /5. b T V TiMMi. y^ s ^ ■^ Aa.A-^a. 6, d e c ei 6, e, Bometimes pronounced a. 5 ^ 5"e. ^?, Z H H Ht«. v, ^ e « GiTe. &, th I I Ia.TTa. t, i K K K&.nni^ X, k X A X»>irA«. A, 1 n M IL jtt, m H It Hi r, n 5 ^ 2* ?, ^ O a 0, 8 n n Hi TT, p p P Po Q, r c c CiMa. ^6 Byllablea like v, at the end like «. ^ ^ *i 9>, ph X X Xi X, ch T * Ti V> PS in (0 in to, 5 nj i3 igei sh H q Hci f, ph, Greek (f. ' £) :« S)« _ , corresponding to the Arabic tP^i '"^1 to the Greek x and ^. ^ 8 2. Sopi ll or the Bpiritoa asper (— ) of the Greeks. X •X. 2f».n':Li«k dsh, Arab. ^ ff ^ ^ma. , , , , among the Greeks expressed ^) S"> ^"- by X and j( in proper names. 'f ^ Ti ti In the Coptic language, which arose out of the Egyptian in the second centoiy after Christ, three dialects Are distingaished, the Sahidic (Thebaic), Memphitlc, and Bashmuric, the first of which has an inclination for the harder, the last for the softer letters. Each of these has also its peculiarities, both with relation to the changes of consonants and its vowels and diphthongs. XXXIV Syriac Alphabet. The 22 letters, in form, uame aud pronunciation, are as follows: Form. XTn*« Pronunciation. At the end. In the middle. At the beginning. JName. 1- i Olaf ^f of the Greelis, JS of the Hebrews. \.a <.A A S BSth 2^ b or bh (v) ^ ^ •^ ^ Gomal "^ g <»■ gb r J Dolat ^. d or dh SL 01 H6 \^ h a o waw ojo w > 1 Zain V ^1 f of the Greeks, the French a. ^-M WJfr - M. ChStL t^j^ gjj the German eh in JiocAe, tha Scotch eh in tocA. -* ^ *• •I TMth &4 th or t \A \rf * - JM 90^ 7 ^ * a a Kof, Chef cb, palatal k V ^ i^ ^ Lomad ^ 1 >a >o la U) Mim >a*il m '^ V 1 3 Nlin n L ,Pfl ^Jp xa a Semkat £bA^JU s '^ -%> ^ :& Eg l^ the Hebrew y 1^ y^ a, s PS M> p, also ph or f S ^ ZodS % „ of the roof of the month, s Hebrew Ji •' \^ k^ a, £) K6f k guttural; or k r 5 Etsch v.^a9 r <->. ^^ - ^ Schtn ''T^ Sh or s 2^ z Tau 7 t or tb, also t, Engl. «A. The five vowels In Syriac are sometimes expressed by points, sometimes by sign, borrowed from tha Greeh. The voweh, consisting of points are: a "., P,„.,„, _«,,„^, , _ l^ I^r' ^^^ « o_oro_ torn The vowels derived from the Greek, and similarly na^edi^e-a"/ ' "' Of other orthographical sign, or such as are nece,s«y for reading it is oT "' "' "' " -""- 1. iiuoftooAo. the fine point beneath the letters ^ T^T^:'' \ """'"^ '" '"'"' '"' '''"'"^"«-- same letters, when they are pronounced ^Tl^r^-^TTl "" '' ^ '^ """""""' """^ *» aboveavowelless let.er'which^s followed by a l'kevTwXs?nft°d \T''""""' '" "'^ """« "^ ''«•"' following consonant, i. Mehagyono is a line below tZ™ T' ? "' '»P**P™°u'">iation with the denoting it, pronunciation With a short.orr5l^Lf*:°r"r """ """^ ^ '""""'«* "^ " ""« ""e. 6. mb^- are the two horizontal points abo'e a Z^triT f i'" ""'"» '*«^' "»' '° >>« P™""-^^^^ are not distinguishable by consonants. ' ^™°e^«'' »•>« Pl>«'al from the singular when they XXXV Arabic Alphabet. The series of 28 Arabic letters, three of which stand for vowels also, is as follows: Form. Name. Coupled with the preceding and following lettera. Ooupled with the preceding letter. Coupled with the following letter. Not united with another letter. Pronunciation. ^ L ^ 1 :feiif ' of the KreekB, Hebr. N. A V i 1^ B6 b ;: ys*. 2 UD T6 t i V>. i- (A, Ts, the torth, Greek I?'. A t ^ c Glm, Dshim g,glnPreneh before sorj'. A. t t s> c Ha h, a sharp h, Hebr. fl iSL A. t Ha, Cha 1^ like eh in Bacfie in ' German. - 4X — i> Dai d - tX — 6 Dai, Dsal d, a lisping d — /; — ; ES r — > ^ ) ze Z in English and French. JM> u* JM U" Stn S, Hebr. D or ttj A ui. Jt, Shin sh, S .lO. ua. M u" sad, Zad g, a sharp s, Hebr. Jf ^ yd jO l> Dad d, a flat & h. h. is i» Ta, Tha t, th k So. h ib za, Tsa Z, a lisped t X d £ e jAin S> of the Hebrews. i. t £ £ Gain g, a rough, guttural r A v_a i o F6 f A L> i> o Kaf k, a guttural jj, Hebr. p X d r.^ d K6f k, a palatal i XXXVI Form. Name. Coupled witli the preceding and following letters. Coupled with the preceding letter. Coupled with the following letter. Not united with another letter. Pronunciation. JL A J JO i J r 8 Lam Mim waw Yl 1 m h pronounced sharp. V, W and A Besides the three consonants Slif, WW and YS , which were formerly used to denote the rowels d, i and il, the following signs for short vowels were introduced at a later period: 1. *" j Fatah y a or e; 2. ^ y KasTf i or iff sometimes e; 3. ' j Damnij o and u. The other signs for reading are: l._^ Gazm or Suliiin (rest), corresponding to the Sheva of the Hebrews. 2..^, Tashiid, a sign of the doubling or strengthen- ing of a consonant, corresponding to the Dagesh forte of the Hebrews. 3..^, Hamz (stitch), a sign arising out of ^ over Eliff to express It as a consonant, i. e. the spiritus lenis; also over Wdw and YSj when they come in place of such Elif. i-J^i Wazl (union), is the sign over Elif hamzaei, whose vowel Is absorbed by the preceding; which appears with Elif of the article, the Imperative of the first form of firm verbs, &c. fi- ^*'t MaM (extension), put over an extended Elif, when a mere Hamz is written for the hamzaed Elif which Immediately follows. i< Ji^, called r|bN (=£1^!?), "'^eU pro- perly signifies as a name Om, Plutarch quaest symp. IX 2 § 3 ; the letter had actually among the Phenicians the out- lines of an ox's head i^ , A , but ori- ginally it only expresses the initial sound of this word, which was a. The "Akcfa of the Greeks is the same name, but its form is derived from the Phe- nician Alef-figure and it stands at the head of the original 22 letters in the western alphabets which are formed in imitation of the Greek, as it does also after the Phenician, in the other Semi- tic alphabets. As a numeral, though not in the old Biblical Hebrew, ^Mef signifies 1; with two points or a little stroke above (n, S) 1000; as an ab- breviation it is said to express in Phe- nician monuments 'JSN monumental stone., more rarely UJNi man. The pronunciation of ^Mef as a con- sonant consists in the gentlest guttural sound inaudible without a vowel, which may be compared with the Greek spiri- tus lenis (-) forming along with the breathing n, which is partially audible, a proper sound which can then be pro- nounced with all the vowels, like every other consonant, as iN 'ab, &1SN 'eblis, las '3mar &c. As a vowel-letter Alef, though seldom, expresses d, as in DNp kamHos. 10, 14, aisb \kt Judges 4, 2l!^ niniS'i r4m6t PkovJ 24, 7, ^iiS'i dag Neh/i3, 16, ttis'n rash Prov. 10, 4, btNTS 'asts^l Lev.'i6, 8, inssa Ez. 47, I" T ! ' ' IT T • ' 11 K'tib, kt, viz. as a plural-ending, •^N 4kh as a suff., where indeed, since the introduction of written vowels, the vowel letter seems superfluous. But ^Alef is also used for i, so far as the A- Bound generally passes into the E-soimd, used in the middle of the word, as iiJNp. Pkov. 6, 11, yss; EcoLES. 12, 5 and others. As a syllable-divider 'Alef is also a consonant, e. g. bNiIJi pro- nounced Yish-al. By the twofold use of 'JJef as a con- sonant and a vowel the following cases are to be explained. 1. The occasional sounding of the 'Alef after final syl- lables with t, 6, H long, denoted by 1 and 1, when an A-tone follows those syl- lables ; a peculiarity that may have been afterwards obliterated in pronunciation. Thus e. g. in ^-^l^i Jo. 4, 19 ; Nisbii Jos. 10,24; NliN Is.28,12; Ni^y Zech.1,7; Nis;; EzR. 3, 7; Nia'i ISTeh.'?, 66, where this rare orthography has been preserv- ed from the remains of a pronunciation which was afterwards lost. See these words, a or e in terminations, usually with n-, are sometimes to be found com- bined with N-, in the Aram, or Phenic. manner, as NSiS, NIDI'S, yet also archai- cally in proper nam'es, NTS, NS-'S, N'!.'!, iS'in'j &c. In many, however, a is con- tracted from ai, as NiD?3y from-iiBMS. — 3 IT T -: I- T -: 2. The prefixing of Alef in words begin- ning with a vowel, the vowel attaching itself to the 'Alef as if to a consonant, e. g. is 0, "niN 'or, ffl''N 'hh &c. ; and in the later Aramaean pronunciation yi or ye are sometimes absorbed in i and then augment the original Alef- sound, e. g. iti^ff (I't^^) p. n. 1 Chr. 2, 13; ffiN (la^;) it is Mic. 6, 10; !l3Tij! (!i3!:) '&, 11 (as some would read). — 3. The same is the case where a syllable beginning with y 01 w has weakened the y or w into vowels, e. g. D'^NS'!?, D"'Nn.5, ntoii, t]''Nb3£, niii<5, d-^Nns out of d-i'i'sVy, Diii!i,' ni'^aa! d-^iai:, 'niis and r ■ : - ' r T : ' it:' r : ' it di'^ns, where the original forms still appear. — 4. But on the contrary where the initial syllable vowelled in k, ^ or 6 appears hardened into a semi- vowel on account of the preceding vowelled final sound, there is a sign of the later pronunciation approaching^ 1 ^^ to the Aramaean, e. g. bs^Ji'i out of h^^i'i; a,?.'il (SNili) 1 Sam. '22, 18; ''tp''h i^j^''^\}) Zech. 11, 13; inN'ii for la'NT 2 Sam. 1, 8; Zech. 4, 2; Neh. 5,"9; 7, 3; tiajSiJ 1 Chr. 6, 8 out of nDN'^laN Ex. 6, 24.' — 5. In 4 pre- IjTT I--: ' -^ ceding, J.Ze/' loses its snort a and then appears only as orthographical, as in I]pBi3Nlr! Nu. 11, 4 ("?Nn), or is en- tirely lost, e. g. Q'^M'nln (a^'^tlN.ii) 2 Chb. 22, 5; S^'nion (-ONri) EccLES. 4, 14; rriba (rrnfa'sMjEz. 20, 37; ^"laNi ("nni 28,' 16; niBTBin (nisilJNn) Nbh. 3, 13; ' ' 1 } IT \ I : - it' ' ' more rarely is this the case in the short a preceding, as TilJyNI (out of TlUl^Nl) Zech. 11, 5. — 6. After the spintus lenis of the 'Alef is lost and the vowel it hears is. the only thing remaining, the vowel so left attaches itself to the pre- ceding vowelless consonant so that the l^lef either remains otiose, e. g. li^NB (-sjb) Is. 10, 33 ; astji (UNi^) Ez. 2b, 6 ; CNias (t3''Nffl3) Nbh. 5, 7 ; DsYa (QNl'a) 6, 8; isitp'i '(Wtoi) Ps. 139, 20, or en- tirely disappears, e. g. nto (riNilJ) Job 41,17; nblJl (-N';^) ISam.'i, 17;"d''Min ("?3itn) Gen. 25, 24. Sometimes, however, the vowel of the ^Jlef attaches itself to the preceding syllable-closing consonant, by which the syllable is altered, e. g. njDsb?:, nspijb, 'j'iiS'nHi Jos. 12, 20, anx Jee.^29, 22,' nizn 'Job 29, 6 out 'of IT T : - ' r :'• : ' ' 1 : - ' it : - ' it s •■■ ' and many others. Nl or >< appears 1. as a prefixed sound in many words, whose beginning ap- pears too hard to be uttered by two consonants the first of which is vowelless, in order to modify the double sound by the prefixed vowel a or e which again is sustained by 'Alef. Thus Mli'KN bracelet besides >Ti^3i, 5?'"1TN arm besides SnX ; also where the strong form no longer appears, e. g. ti'"iBN hrood, SaSN finger, 2. as a prepositive in the adjective for- mation, in order to express an intensive, emphatic or abiding quality, e. g. ITiN horrible, wild, iVDtX lying, n'l'fN naiive, abt^N firm, hard', nSTN decaying, and many others. « S or N sometimes serves as a pre- positive where the word begins with a consonant which has its firm vowel, e. g. tTiias* (rt'li.!; = !Tia) com, a small coin; TiSN a nut; fliSyaN. a pustule; d"')!)'!?* besides D'']?'; chains; Vu'naN basin, cup. ' Comp. Phenician D'lN '(pronoun, edom) blood, Augustin on Psalm 136; Aram. Q'lN; TjiaN eq^uivalent to Ti-J; NT^ns. riddle; ']SN. garden; Mod. Greek hv for av ; Gr. ^^i? and ii&tg, Lat. sta- tus, Er. ^tat. But the short vowel pre- positive became already a firm vowel forming a separate syllable by the doubling of the following sound, in many words of northern Palestine, e. g. 'jij'iSN a sedan out of Tips (Syr. Uo*;^ cradle), 'j'lSN palace out of ']'!&, Ar. ^jt\i; more frec[uently in Aram. e. g. DIN blood, 'j-iN garden, and ipany others. Yet the prosthetic N, N, N in "'TN, ■'iist, IttJN, ISN, and others, are not to be explained on this principle. In the more complete root- or stem- formation, which has three sounds, Mef is regularly unorganic in relation to the mother-form or primitive root, i. e. it does not belong to the original forma- tion of the root, whether the mother forms in such roots niade with Alef be organic and the last forms, or whether they hold good as such only relatively to the derivative ones. This farther development is made by 'Alef: 1. as an initial sound to simple monosyllabic pri- mitive roots, in order to form firm stems with two sounds, e. g. liN (root ia), nSN (root na), 'TjjaN (root ^i), bjas (root ba), 5?j3N (root pa)', 'las (root na), isn (root ^s). The inorganic and perhaps at first simply inseparable prefix 'Mef is easily recognised in this formation, in as much as its relative mother forms are found in the language itself partly without the prepositive, partly with other prefixes, as e. g. the above pri- mitive roots in ia, "^a-s, ^j3, ba-s, pa, 'ia"5, "75, and many others. It is only where such 'Mef is evidently dialectic and softened from S>, e. s. dSN out of dW, that there is no real Alef-initial 3^^ . Eound. — 2. As a medial sound, where l4lef, developing itself out of the middle vowel a in monosyllabic stems, became so firm as to give rise to stems with three sounds, e. g. DN'n, t3Nb, 1t?a, ma, SNI, SN'n, asb, tlsJiIJ «S;'c7, wliose i-T' rx' i-T' ri' M-T ' relative mother forms sound as D'l, db, IT IT 13 &c., and still appear partly in the language itself, partly in the circle of Semitism. Even here the 'Alef appears as a stem-sound and consequently or- ganic, when it is dialectically inter- changed with '^yin or is softened from it in certain cases, e. g. Sisn, bituS, )HV5, VN-J besides :35>n, bsi^,' \:pO 'and bSii , which comparisons of roots within Semitism easily confirm. — 3. As a final sound, where by adding an Mef mono- syllabic roots are farther developed into dissyllabic ones, e. g. Nlla (root li), Nta (root T3), Ntaa (root ria), Nia (root li) and many others. SJi^ (fl. ■'SN, as in the cognate words IT *'■ nm, on, c. "^nn, lan: once c. ax, in IT ' IT ' r -: ' r -: ' r ' order to denote an ancient proper name, in proper names however more fre- quently -as* besides ""'aN, "las and "i^; with suff. "laiS, where the i,' as a remnant of the root -form with three sounds, unites with the i of the suff.; farther T^as*, ^■'SN, where the fore-tone . I- T ' I r T ' a remams because the accent rests upon I, but on the contrary elsewhere DS'^aN, nnias; thejpZ. nilais, c. niSN, with suf. TilaN, QSinbi*, proceeds from a primi- tive form las, which is more frequent in Aramaean, as '^"liiN, ""iTl'lIfiS) t*^l) and in Arab. »jI in the construct state, and then the feminine plural ending, which originally expresses nothing more than the collective idea of parents , is blended with this form) father, axii prin- cipally begetter, cognate in sense T'bia; the commonness of this usage makes it unnecessary to quote examples. Setting out with this fundamental conception the Hebrew frequently uses it in a tro- pical sense viz. 1. the spiritual begetter, i. e. creator, God Jer. 2, 27 ; Deut. 32, 6 ; Is. 63, 16; 64, 7. In the honorary Messianic title lyi:??* Is. 9, 5 it should therefore be translated. Father, i. e. God of eternity, the Eternal, as xqovov narijQ in the Orphics means Saturn- Hercules: comp. as in proper names. — 2. Preserving the leading qualities of a father the word is next used to denote benefactor, care-taker, supporter. Job 29, 16; a beneficent ruler Is. 22, 21; or a spiritual benefactor and care-taker, i. e. teacher, instructer, counseller, particu- larly in salutations and addresses to priests and prophets Judges 17, 10; 18, 19; 2 Kings 6, 21; 13, 14, whereas on the contrary teachers and prophets employ son and daughter. Comp. Aram. SON master, teacher; in the church abbas, papa,pope, and many others. — 3. From the latter spiritual sense the Hebrew sometimes expresses by ^Ab counsellor, chief adviser of a higher personage, hence Visier, ^\y, for example, Joseph is so called Gen. 45, 8 ; dsvtsQog natriQ Haman is called Gr. Est. 13, 6, and Lasthenes is termed natriQ IMac. 11, 32; as also a king calls himself son in relation to a prophetic counsellor 2 Kings 8, 9. — 4. From the father's prerogatives the Hebrew expresses by the word still farther, lord, possessor, holder; hence the figurative expression, I salute the grave. Thou art my lord, Job 17, 14, i. e. the grave possesses me. But this signification commonly appears only in proper names compounded with ""'as, -laN, -SN, comp. liabs-'^aN., b':raN, b^p'^'atjt, Tiin'^aN, ^':n"'?N,' s^'^aN, -^i ba''as«, in order to express the posses- sion and mastery of a power or vir- tue &c., i. e. to possess strength (^iabs), power (b'lp), fame (Till), splendor (b^p), protection (bu), goodness (aw), light (C = Qi"') &c. as the proprietor and lord (at?), so to speak. Elsewhere as is used in surnames in more artifi- cial language, as in the Arabic, e. g. ^LsiJI yA 'Abul-maali, father of dig- nities, i. e. estimable, ^JMk£iJi\ yiS Abul chusni, father of beauty, i. e. peacock. — 5. In so far as the father is the founder of a domestic society, a race or a fa- mily, aJ denotes among the Hebrews 1* DN head of a family or progeny (cognates in sense tji^N, iBN'i, niaN-n^a, "ife, N-^tos, naMn mi), hence SNTiia family-circle, the domestic society of an ancestor; from which follows the signification grand- father, ancestor, forefather Gen. 28, 13; head or ancestor of a people Gen. 10, 21 ; tljiil ITOn/iN Gen. 17,4 5 progenitor of a number of nations, where the construct "iN is chosen for "'^iN, in or- der to explain Ori'nSN. When 'ancestor is not clear enough in relation to an older forefather, the word lillSs'l is ad- ded to designate the primitive progeni- tor Is. 43, 27. — 6. According to the latter view the Hebrew uses it figura- tively to express the progenitor of a company, the founder of a corpora- tion or art (Phenician i'l, e. g. ffl'nri y^ Kit. 4, 3 head -architect, as also in later Hebraism) the creator and inventor, the first doer Gen. 4, 20; 4, 21 the be- ginner of all that play on the harp and pipe; next the first framer axidi fashioner, Job 38, 28. — For the signification of as in proper names see under iai« and ijst. On iaj< 2 Kings 5, 13, Job 34, 36 I- r T ' ' ' see "lais. r T The organic form of SN was origin- ally perhaps aJ, in the grammatical formation of the language liN and "'SX, which is still preserved in c; out of this is appears to have been smoothed away in the development of the language, and the construct forms "laN and ISN, the !■-: 1-:' f plural niais, Arab. «i>UJl, are so to be explained. Similarly as in Hebrew is the Phenician SN c. "laN Kit. 13, 2, with suff. liN Mel. 4, 5, pi. nSN Kit. 1, 3 entirely of the same formation. An- other old form was MSN, and^e explains the Aramaean plurals ^ilSN, ,3i-s>) and ^•/Ti-al , Arab. uijLgjIaswellastheappear- anceof^e in the construct state in some Semitic languages. But as the forms look like derivates from ti"b they have been taken as if they came from IniN in the sense of to beget (cognate Sis), which may be right as to form with re- lation to their appearance in the circle of the development of language; but 3N the primitive root aS must be regarded in itself as identical with ila.&pa in patri in Sanscrit, pa in pater, va in vater. 2N m. God, as laSf above, conceived of as the creator,' benefactor, care-taker, ruler «fec. but once c. from aS for -''3N. in Gen. 17, 4 5 iDp.'i.l 'ji^pii-aN head-an- cestor of a number of nations, in or- der to express the name Q^'l?^ (which see) better, therefore referred to a person. But it is usually taken as the first member of compound proper names, denoting God. As the form of the Stat, constr. it must co-operate with others, though mostly expressing a co-ordination. So e. g. in the proper names 1?,:?^ {God is light), tJrt'nii* {God over a raging multitude), D'llaN {God is ele- vated), ■'T^SSN {God is existing), QiblB^N {God is prosperity), for SN must have been originally an honorary title or epithet of God, to which 15, dibffl are appended or which is conceived of with a quality (Si), so that therefore laN is not properly speaking subordinated to the following noun or adjective. In such proper names SN is interchanged with ■'SN; for IS'^Sn', til'^lai;, ■'^'':?i?., Qi^l^ias' also occur. ' Comp. the Phenic. T^'^N-SN {God is mighty) n. p. of ^El. In proper names one may however re- tain ab like El and Jah, if we under- stand by it that aspect of the Deity only which SN can have. The cod. "' IT Samar. presents SN for r|N Deut. 33, 3, which can only be a mistake in tran- scribing. DN, Aram. ahs. m. father, ancestor, Dan!^, 23 ; 5, 22 ; Ezr. 4, 15 ; 5, 2, with suf. •'SN (with Patach because the ''-; is sounded but weakly after the Syrian manner), "rjISN, "'tllSN, proceeding from the form , nsiUN, '^St't'' ^}- (courage), ni);n and others with )'a of the place whence it disap- pears. Hence to dispense with, with the object accompanying which is given up, properly to cease, e. g. niiS5» 1j?N Deut. 32, 28 dispensing with counsel, i. e. counselZess, where ISN is the construct of laiK; to be vain, useless, with b or ya of the person to whom something is fruitless, Ps. 142, 5 ; Am. 2, 14 ; Jer. 49, 7. — 3. To cease, perish, of men, animals &c. Nu. 17, 27, hence I^IN un- fortunate Job 29, 13; 31, 19; to perish Jer. 48, 46; to be cut off Joel 1, 11. — 4. To lose something, with the accusative of the thing lost, 1 Sam. 9, 20, derived from the second signification and as- suming a transitive sense, while all three are intransitive. Derivatives !Ti|?i?., '15N, perhaps ']Xi» and p:;N!. Pi. Ijasj (a for e as in p]^r Mal. 3, 3 ; /««. las^, -iaN:;i) caus. of Kal, there- fore 1. to drive into banishment Jer. 15,7; to scatter round about, to disperse 23, 1, and cognate in sense with y^sll of a herd. — 2. to cause to disappear, to de- stroy Is. 26, 14; to squander, ']i!i Prov. 29, 3; to let go, to destroy something, to take away Eccles. 9, 18; ib 7, 7 to destroy the mind. — 3. to annihilate, root out, applied either to men Ps. 9, 6; Ez. 22, 27, or destroy applied to things, 2 Kings 21, 3; to lessen Job 12, 23. — 4. to give up for lost (opposed to 115)53 to seek after) Eccles. 3, 6. Derivatives Hif. T^at*!! (as also T^HNH with a for ^ ' iv:iv \ r -:i- e; fut. T'^HN, in the voluntative iiT'SN from liiNN Jee. 46, 8, because a + a gives either t, e. g. y\i^, or &, e. g. b'^SiN, from T^Wil, b'^SNiS, Hos. 11, 4; Job 32, 11) caus. of Kal, but stronger than Pi. 1. to cause to disappear, with the accusative of the object, Job 14, 19; with ']a of the place or circle Nu. 24, 19; Jer. 25, 10; hence to cut off, destroy, annihilitate, Tvith ^U out of Obad. 8, or also 'aS'n :i'n)?a out of the midst of the people Lev. 23, 30; to lay waste Zeph. 2,5; to extinguish (the name), with QiMUJii nnna out of the world (the region of the world is termed ti;?giBl-i nnn) Dbut. 7, 24. The stem in this inorganic form is wi'itten in the same manner in Svr. r^l, ?oi, Sam. abad, Targ. n^N; Ar. tyjf, 1. to separate from something, to flee, 2. to lose oneself in speaking, to speak obscurely, 3. to be waste, spoken of a country ; and from the signification "to sink" is derived SJof misfortune. But the organic root is 15"N, which is also preserved in 13 (see this), and the usual Arabic form ^Lj in this sense may also be nothing but ^'2 organic. 13N (fut. 1^»2i Targ. IS'i,';) Aram. intrans. to disappear, with ■)» of the ob- ject Jer. 10, 11. — Af lain (for l^ii* Targ., from ^'^m, IjJN!! as in Hebrew, /M^.iaini, Targ.'liai^V-N'iaill, !Tl-, Targ. also I^^In) as Hif. in Hebrew with the accusative of the object Dak. 2, 18, or with h_ 2, 12 24. —Hof. lain (formed after the Hebrew manner) 'pass, of Af. ^D>{ m. annihilation, destruction Nu. 24, 20 24. The form is the same as that of 'nrii remnant, ^bh worm. niDlSl. (after the form nbT5 spoil) f. 1. the lost, perditumEx. 22, 8, which one finds again Lev. 5, 22 23. The form is that of the neuter. 2. in K'tib Prov. 27, 20 destruction. If Mn^N should be read here, it is an abstract form like iiabf ; see however m^SN. n'lJH (K'tib Prov. 27,' 20) m. equi- valent to )'\'iM (with the softening of the ending "ji- into M", comp. fi"b^, riM'bttJ) destruction, if ni^N is not to be read." "'"' piDN. (a rare formation) m. destruc- tion, hence the place of annihilation, the kingdom of death Job 28, 22, with nap Ps. 88, 12, bsto and m?a Prov. 15, 11; 27, 20 K'ri cognate in sense. In the New Testament appears 'A^aSScov ('ji'na^.) personified as prince of Orcus, which is translated by 'AnoXkvcov Apoc. 9, 11. pnS and l^iN (c. l^SN, according to the form ']a'l|? Ez. 40, 43) m. destruc- tion EsTH. 8, 6 ; 9, 5. The form is late and Aramaeising. ni3t? I- (3. pi. once NISN, see N; fut. !^a^«1 from riass^';!., 2. fut. sg. once NSn Peov. 1, 10, "merely retaining the 6 vowel and with e in the second syllable as in tijji 2 Sam. 6, 1; Ttlbi 20, 9, and as in Np'i from rtnN Dbut.'33, 21, here too Alef has come from He) intr. 1. to lend, to incline, of a reed (see m^n), hence to he bowed, miserable, poor, used properly like MSS to be oppressed, hum- bled, troubled, only in the derivatives li^aN and njjN. — 2. to incline oneself, t to strive, ZA a proposal; but the fundamental idea "to bend oneself", as niN and iras and the Arabic ^^t, properly to shrink, to withdraw, to turn away from some- thmg i. e. to reject, to loathe it, still points to a connection of the root with •^TJ^I' '^T^'^ ^^ C'- ^- *" * connection of the initial a-sound with h and 3) in which the radical idea of bending, bowing and inclining lies. riDS n. an assumed verbal stem for as (which see), i. e. ^N follows the ana- logy of nouns which spring from n"b, though they are primitive words. n3N in. only in Job. 9, 26 as a more exact designation of swift-sailing ships (niiis). It should probably be accented ^tSN and derived from InSN after the form ^112 , Inltp , so that it signifies a reed, a hul- rush, properly the flexible, hence tlSi* 'N. as Nna-'bS) Is. 18, 2 ships which are made from reeds and sail rapidly (Schul- tens, Iken). Comp. Arab. oLI reedpole, »i>Utreedstalk(Samachsch.n.l6). Others read inS'^N from :i<)N (enmity, robbery), or take inSN in this sense and translate pirate or robber-ships. Targ. and Jerome derive it from Si") ^^d understand /»■«'* (as), Ibn Koreish and Saadja understand flood, fluctus ingens, like the Arabic <_)Gt. All these are less probable. Since Abai in Abyssinia is a name of the Nile (comp. Isenberg's Dictionary of the Amharic language p. 124), JiSN 'N might be Nile-sailing vessels. nS^ (only pi. n'^SN, comp. TOffl, rail, illf^a, and this plural only with the article and contracted Q"'aii out of Q'^SNti, and this again closely connected only with ya, a tooth, in ta^sris^) m. elephant, hence Q'^ansiB 1 Kings iO, 22 ; in 2 Chkon. 9, 21 the LXX translate odovtsg iXsqiavTivoi, Vulg. ebur, i. e. ele- phant's tooth, ivory; elsewhere abbre- viated simply into ']'6 1 Kings 10, 18 ; 22, 39; Ps. 45, 9; Am. 3, 15; brought home as wares from the Tyrian colony HJiUJ'nn Tartessus, the southern coast of Spain, with the Phenician-Jewish fleet, together with Q^BJ? and Q""l3n. Since these articles, procured in commerce with Tarshish, came properly from Libya or the north coast of Africa and may have been purchased thence on return voyages from Tarshish, the name is perhaps taken in the first place from the Coptic tfioTp elephant (see Lassen, Ztschr. f. d. Kunde d. Morg. IV, 1 p. 13), though rosS that may be connected with the Sanscrit ibha-s (elephant); which explains why the Hebrews had not the name Fil brought to the Semites by the instru- mentality of the Sabseans. The ground- form of the name may also exist still in iX-icpag, el-ephas, eb-ur; the first syllable iX however appears to be a remnant of fil. See lansuS. *|DN a rare st. c. from SN and in -: IT Hebrew only in the proper name b^aiiN K'tib 1 Sam. 25, 18, but usual in Ara- bic. This st, c. is Phenician in the names of plants described as Phenician in Dioscorides and Apuleius, e. g. nSSISN. Bovivsaa-d- i. e. ayiovaa (Diosc. 4, 23); T^^'2,^Bovqlov|lcl,& i. e. xQvaoxSfirj (ib.) and fa"'2liil£i:3N Butzutzim i. e. brassica silvatica (Apiil. 127), where bu is ab- breviated from abu. b';513N n. p. K'tib, see liN. ^IDi^ interj., an exclamation of pain (Kimchi) Prov. 23, 29 who has pain, who has woe? It appears to have been developed only as a collateral form of "liN, coming as it were from "'ilN; comp. cti'^oi, Syr. i.«^o] (ubija) woe ! To this group of sounds belongs also "laN and "la, though in a modified significa- tion. ' The translators (LXX &6Qv§og, Targ. NTi'n, Syr. Uoo?) took it for a noun like liba, formed from ilSNi (to be bent). DiniSt (with g for e as in ^TN, STN, ~(t>^; pi- Q"'p1!3l!«) m. crib, rack, manger Is. 1, 3; where no oxen are the crib is empty Prov. 14, 4; will the wild buffalo abide by thy crib Job 39, 9. The root is D5N to fodder; comp. gjarv)? crib and nat-sofiai to fodder. See In'Tii?., ini'ii?, JT : ■-. nDi< (unused) tr. is usually con- sidered a collateral form of '^5? Is. 9, 17, to which is given the significa- tion to turn, to draw (fif the sword) and consequently cognate with TjSilGEN. 3, 24. Ibn ffandch, Kimchi and Tanchum have adduced this explanation. Others have thought of the Arab. ^J^» ^-?' n.? 1- n.p. f. 2 Kings 18, 2 abridged from !i»ai«. 2 Chr. 29, 1 ; comp. thePhe- nician ■'ax Kit. 23, 3 n. p. m. perhaps from byaias.. — 2. c. of atf in com- pound personal proper names forming the first member of the compound. As ai< generally in proper names can only be taken for a surname of God, being 8 ON an epithet of the divine being and pro- ceeding from the primitive times of the Semitic people like bN, n!J, so the ordi- nary signification of the st. constr. in names formed with as (or bN , fl"' , 1'', i!i^ , ■ijba, b?a, and forms from iMld height, heaven, as "laitJ, "''M^Zi in compound proper names) cannot be maintained in the usual sense. "^aN, "as* (as "''biS, -bij, -i!i^ "11, -1M^', -lai^, -'5'is, -b?a, -bi?a, -b?a, -isba, -I'liJt and many others) is amalgamated with the following member into a single concep- tion, without its being subordinated, si- milar examples existing elsewhere in the language. So e. g. aifbN, bNiag, Irr'jbya, trjaN andaNi"! cannot possibly be trans- lated, God of the Father, Father of God, Father of Jah and Jehovah's Father, be- cause it would manifestly be without sense; and ii^bN, bN^bs, bNi\ translated by God of Jah, God of God, Jo of God would give an absolute blasphemy. Proper names compounded with """aN or other epithets of God, being united and complete conceptions in themselves, must be regarded as reflections and remnants of a very ancient, powerfully- growing religious life in which the im- pulsive religious idea strove to embody itself by giving names to the most be- loved object, as new creations also mir- ror themselves in the formation of pro- per names in the course of a new life, e. g. IDp aiBIJ will be graciously requited 1 Chr. 3, 20; ■'3?i;iblS to Jo are mine eyes 4, 36. Proper names compounded with -■'aN. are therefore as little taken from family life as those compounded with "■^bN and -i^ &c. ; nor do they denote a dignity or position in the family circle, but embody old complete conceptions, very ancient religious invocations and eulogies, somewhat like the way in which, in later times, the liturgical ex- pression rt;j iliri praise Jah was deve- loped into the proper name tT^lliii — in- vocations and eulogies which imparted a dignity in the giving of names. It seems therefore most suitable in interpreting the compounds lexically, either to retaiu W^2^ ; the epithets of the divine Being with- out translating them, as a^, 'i'rf], 'ii, ■^N, ''bN, ''aiN, or merely to connect them with the verb to be and the names of God. — 3. Very seldom does the St. c. las appear as the first member of a compound name in order to de- signate the head of a race or father of a nation (comp. bNU'^aN). — 4. More frequently ''aN appears in connexion with names of places, to express the lord of a country, city, village &c., e. g. ■jyaa las, Sijjn "i^i* and many others. ^>*''3S< C^b is 'El, that is, the creat- ing, protecting and nourishing Grod is to be invoked as the mighty, as bN , which see) n.p. m. 1 Che. 11, 32 ; but in 2 Sam. 23, 31 'jirb? {strength, an epithet of 'El) appears as the second member, and as the complete name 15 {light, also an epithet of 'El) in 1 Cnk. 8, 33. To un- derstand this proper name we must com- pare :3S''1?.5«,, fi,*;???., ^!?i% '^iS''Vs> '^^^^. and many others, whence it may be recognised as an invocation in an old religious petition-song. See'jiljib?* and "15. 5\DN''n>4 (^Ab is gatherer i. e. pro- tector) n. p. m. Ex. 6 , 24 ; contracted tjClsN, 1 Chb. 6, 8, immediately "from J)ON''iS<. For the signification comp. the proper names ^oa, ip-'bit. 3'^DN (from iiN) m. properly sprout, more definitely 1. ear Lev. 2, 14; 'N ITlbiBrt Ex. 9, 31 the barley (stood in) the ear; comp. b5>ia tiniBBrt ib., d''5B.^r: IIMD Song OP Sol. 2, 13, where a state is expressed by the accus. — 2. time of the ear, specially connected with lO'lh Ex. 13, 4, month of the ear-time, accord- ing to tradition the month ')D"'5 in the later Hebrew, corresponding to April. Inasmuch as lilliN^ii «3l'n!l Ex. 40, 2 17; Lev. 23, 5 is the usual expression for this, S'^aNM fflnh appears in the Pentateuch only as an unusual peri- phrasis, perhaps in order to convey an allusion to the Egyptian name of the month eiiHn, imifi (Plut. de Isid. p. 372) which was of consequence to their wor- ship there, though otherwise they do not coincide. — 3. n. p. of a place on the Chaboras, with the signification meadow- ground, grass- and pasture-land, comp> Cs\ pasouum, pasture, connected with bn (earthbank) iiSN bn (bank of grass- land), where a colony (Jibis) dwelt, and Ezekiel remained a week, Ez. 3, 15. A Tel Abib might very well be the name of a place on the Chaboras (comp. Amm. Marc. 14, 3 AborcB amnis herbidce ripce), but the locality is not yet ascer- tained. — For explanation of the root comp. as and the Phenician 'ph i"'iN 'A^i^Xa^ov Biosc. 3, 106 white flower, king's lily, Syr. I-moi flower. ?']1S''!I1N CAb is revolving time) n.p.f. 1 Sam. 25' 3 ; 1 Chr. 2, 16. For it there are also bS'^iN and K'tib b^Siaj*. The words b'1.1 and b-l are forms from bi.l T IT . 1 the revolution of time, period, comp. ia';S and TUi* ; las is an old form in addition to '^3N. b-1 is once shortened into b-l 2 Sam! 17,"25. See ■'35?^. by''^^ s. b;5''aN.. ?y^2^ s. b^riN.. T^iH s. n^N. r IT ITDi* {'Ab is judge) n. p. m. of a phylarch of the Benjaminites Num. 1, 11. From the parallels tiBia^bN, "in^, "i;", !T1l2S1I5, bs«i51, Phenic. '^5>atisi: one IT ; "■ . I" • IT ' — : ~ : sees that Z>ara is' not the name of a place. S'T^HN CAb is knowing) 1. n. p. m. Gbs" 25,' i, compounded of Jt'i^-'^iS, 5»TiaN. For a more exact explanation cimp! srhis, s'7,;^!7^ s^i;, s>n;b3fa, i>1^Kiia and !T'?1^ where the one mem- ber is always yi; (which see) and the other gives the appellations of God in great variety. Comp. the Phenic. n. p. DP?t!t ^o^xdfiag {App. 8, 41). — 2. n. p. of a Midianite tribe on the way between South Palestine and Sinai, where is a city 'SX^.^ (Abda), in Ptolem, 'E§68a. Or it is the tribe Abida in the vicinity of Asyr {Burckh., Ar. 672). n*a5< CAb is Jah) 1. n. p. m. 1 Sam. 8, 2';^ but the form interchanges with lln^SN 2 Chr. 13, 1 and d^'jax (which see)' 1 Kings 15, 1. — 2. n. p. f. 2 Che. 29, 1, for which also abridged ia» inn« 10 D1D^? (■which see). Comp. the Phenio. re. ■p. ^tT'^% ('Ab is Baal). W'DN (^M is Jahu) n.p. m. see fT'lJN. N'=1?T''3N (avTO&sog) n.p. m. Ex. 6, 23 ; comp. Nisi^b^., m'rt\ N1f;i Ae, he him- self, self, like hu among the Persians, aviog, exeivog among the Greeks (Simon. Onom. 549), denotes God in the religious usus loquendi, and therefore NliT^SN is like the proper names bN''SN, rfiN. TlfT^Di* C-^i is renown, see'^aN.) n.p. m. 1 Che. 8, 3 ; 'A^wiS Mat. 1, 13. Comp. the proper names Tiii, !T''li!l and in classical proper names Cleopas, Fatro- clus, Cleopatrus, -ra and others. In He- brew proper names Tiil, lifl (splen- dour, fame) is an epithet of the divine names n^, bs; hence lirT'tlN and n^m, IW'Hi* andbNi'ay, 1iln'(0''N and bssiBS* in the properest sense may be compared. The cognate in sense TSS fame stands similarly in the n. p. liSi''. bVp'^pN; C^i is light) n. p. f. 1 Che. 2, 29. V^p is to be derived from brt Qs^'n) = brt with the signification to glit- ter, to shine, comp. 'iS'^laN, ; it is possible, however, thatb^lri"'aN is only a variation ofb'^niaN. "' ?'^n''PN (l4J is strength) n. p. m. Num. '3, 35. li'jPN (with suff. ;;|?;5N, pi. tj''f/-'aNi) m. lowed, oppressed (see tlSN), as 'i5» (from ™5'): needy, poor, beside bl and ■^W Deut. 24, 14; Ps. 72,13; and in op- position to T^ipy rich, happy 49, 3. Like Di|ii5> frequently, and Tj'in din"' Ps. 10, 18, D^"'?^ denotes Ps. 12, 6; Is. 41, 17 and poetically DIN iJ^riN 29, 19 the people who are unfortunate, or in want of help ; and like "'Sy together with its cognates it denotes the pious umighte- ously oppressed and suffering, conse- quently it is equivalent to pilS Am. 2, 6. •ji^aN •'Sa Ps. 72, 4 is poetically for D'ia3'':ai< the needy, the oppressed. The name" of the sectnij!^55j,i75wm«es, in the early christian church, rests upon Mat. 5, 3, and is equivalent to, oppressed, pious exiles, Is. 25, 4; Syr. }JaI=f pau- per, miser, by doubling the final radical sounds. The Coptic efuHit is perhaps taken merely in the signification of 'ji^li^?' nJT'D^ (formed from naN, comp. ']i'i5N) f. only in Eccles. 12, 5. Accord- ing to theLXX, Vulg. Arab.: the caper, namely the berry of the caper tree, which with its pepperlike seeds pro- vokes to appetite and lust; or incitement itself (hence the Targum NSSllfn coha- bitation; Ibn G-'anS,ch SijK^f desire; Ibn Parchon mNn; Greek Ven. oge^is); or lastly the privy member (Kimchi "laN bii1l553ll): all derived from the significa- tion to desire, to covet, and conseq. caper- berry. This meaning is also confirmed by the Phenician nii'^N. (JDiosc. 2, 204) iQ^iavrov& (sQ^i- with allusion to herba, &ow stands by mistake for vov&) caper, as well as by the iiSi'^aN (caper-) berry, berry generally in the language of the Mishna; the parallels in the members of the preceding verse Eccles. 1. c. (^jj^ti and lafi, see these) also refer to fruits. Insraisil ISm IT ■ -:iT I" T : means therefore: the caper-berry (i.e. ex- citement) is destroyed ('^sn fut. Kal from 'tis), probably with antithetic allusion to an expression 'Nln il'lSFi, the caper is green. See Tis. The explanation difficulty, necessity, from 'ji'^iN (fi inino- vog soil, ^torf) in Symm., or insight from SiSiia = hi'^a in Ibn Esra and Jerome IT • IT • can no longer be adopted. !3^i!3'^3N ( Ah is goodness) n.p. tk.IChe. 8, 11; comp. the proper names iTilto, Vjs^Ei, li^^au, in^a'jN-aiia andaiS-iriN. bp'^PN C-Ab is protection) n. p. f. 2 Sam. 3,4; comp. b|3TOn. Vu is formed as a noun frombbca 11. (to protect, cover), comp. Thlt. D*!|1N (Ab is clearness, splendour) n. p. m. standing as a collateral form of iTiSN in Kings, and Qi can only have the signification of Di"' (daylight, splendour) for n^, as 15 '^In! or abridg- ed ia = bNi^N. Q-' I. (wiiich see) is I" r * -: IT ^ ' the original Hebrew form for Di'' ac- cording to the Phenician pronunciation- !3ND^3« 11 Dni2&< Comp. as parallels the proper names SN-'IIN, n^TiN, 'ns-'Si^, btiV2\ n^lp. PISia'^DN (Father-Ma' el) n. p. of the founder of one of the four leading tribes of southern Arabia, adduced as the 9. descendant of Joktan (Kachtan) Gen. 10, 28; 1 Chr. 1, 22. One of these four South-Arabian nations is called among the Hebrews biSM , in Theophrastus (hist, plant. 9, 4) Mdh, transposed from Mail, in Dionysius Perieg. (957 ss.) and in Strabo (XVI, 1112) MincEi, and dwelt according to Ptolemy (6, 1, 23) and Pliny (h. n. 6, 32) in the middle of South Arabia where J;hey carried on a large trade in incense, and were deno- minated /nsja s&voe. 'r\h'n-'2H CAb is Jang) 1. n. p. of several kings of Philistia (of Gerar, Gath &c.) Gen. 20, 2 ; 26, 1. Since Abi- melek, king of Gath in David's time (Ps. 34, 1) has also the additional name of llSiSN 1 Sam. 21, 11, it appears rather to have been a name which the Hebrews gave to the kings of Philistia, a title of honour as it were. In this relation the Turkish dLUI Ataheg, Bokhar. (^aJUsI Malik, Pers. »L.ii>Lj Padishah, .fflthiop. ahba nagasi &c. have been com- pared, which express in words the same thing. But the commonness of this name elsewhere, its interchange with '^^S'''!'?*. ('which see) and its connexion withTibM-ibN, 'bN'^abn, n^sbw, TjlsniriN, IT . . ' — \ . ; — ' ' V IV ■ : - ' I V r.. V n "^5^5?.) '^3^'IIN, Phenic. proper names id^^Vm, b?5^^'3, in:sl?7?, Tibanay and others shew ttat '^bn is taken as a nu- men or deity, and thus the comparison must be renounced. 2. re. ^. to. of other persons. Judges 8, 31; 1 Chk. 18, 16, where 'ijbainN; stands in the parallel passage 2 Sam.'8, 17. See ':|bn and ifiN. D'73''DN (^Ab is noble) n.p.m. 1 Sam. 7, iri6,"'8; 17, 13; 31, 2; comp. :213, ^nnjiriis, ai3i53S», rr^iis. See lais. '" ITT r-:' ITT r-' jt:-: i--: DM'^DN ( Ab is grace) n.p. m. Judges 4, 6; 5, 1; comp. D^rnN, dSS. IS'^riN (^Ab is light) n.p. m. 1 Sam. 14, 50; but the shorter form liaN (which see) chiefly stands for it. Comp. 13, ''^^h !i,!;'i1N, b^5'^'^1!!<. See di I. '" IT 1 IT • I 1" • . JT 5|D^5^ '"■• P- "»• contracted from riDN;''aN (which see). nTy"'2N C-^b is help, comp. Attaholf, Adolf i. e. father's or God's help) n. p. m. 1. in the Gileadite family Josh. 17, 2 ; Judges 6, 34; patron. iltSM las "Abi the Ezrite 6, 11 24. A contracted 'form is W'^N Num. 26, 30, whence the patron. '''iTJ'^Ni in the same place. 2. also else- where, though seldomer 2 Sam. 23, 27 ; 1 Chr. 7, 18. Comp. biSITi*, b!S"''iT», iTS^^bis, 'Tri»i\ '' ' '' '' "' ']ini)?-''3N see bs'^aN. and liab?. "I'^ni* (c. ii^N from ISN) adj. m., durable, strong, a rare collateral form of lias* (comp. IllSN, TlUJsit step), as a substantive protector, warrior, hero, only used in Gen. 49, 24; Is. 1, 24, to designate the God of Israel. T'SN {pi. Q''1") adj. m. properly very valiant (an intensive form) manly, power- ful, courageous, forcible, but usually a subst. a valiant, courageous man, with the addition of ab Ps. 76, 6; in the signification hard-hearted, obdurate only in Is. 46, 12, comp. ab pTn. Figura- tively, hero, or a principal, dignified, great man. Lament. 1, 15 ; Jbr. 46, 15 ; pi. (like Di'n''a5< Judges 5, 25) distin- guished, e. g. Q'^T'SN dnb food of the distinguished, i. e. excellent food, manna, Ps. 78, 25 (LXX aQTog ayyihov, comp. Wisd. 18, 20); the first, most excellent of a class, e. g. Q'^S'in TiaN ISam. 21, 8. TiaNS Is. 10, 13 K'tib is contracted from TiSiNS and signifies, lihe a hero, a migh'ty one; theK'ri reads T'SS, much, copious. Poetically I3"''n''a6; is applied 1. to powerful oxen Is. 34, 7, fully ■''n''a!S y^ll oxen of Basan Ps. 22, 13, because they are known to be strong on account of the good pasture. Metaphorically kings Ps. 68, 31, where the peoples are called calves (ti'ibiS*). 2. to the spirited horse Jer. 8, 167^7,3; 50, 11; rrnrn T^TiaN gallop of his horses Judges 5, 22 (see dbrt). □"TiIlN (^Ab as high, elevated) n.p.m. NuM? 16/1 ; 1 Kings 16, 34. A shorter ^^^•2^ 12 !?nx form is D'niiN. In order to explain these compounds with Ol we must compaxe the proper names d"!, DTiSba, D'laS, IT • I-:' IT -:' IT i' IT IT : - bl was a very ancient epithet of the highest deity, as among the Pheni- cians oi Baal (Saturn), comp. 'D'l bS'z spoken of the Libyan Baal {Qesen. Mon. p. 453), 'Pafiag (D'l) o vipiarog &s6g in Hesych. !ja5''3>4 {'Ab as wandering) n. p. f. 1 Kjngs i, 3. iil^, a participial noun from aaia, signifies wandering about, going astray, and was an epithet of the Semitic gods since the rovings of the races were looked upon as wandering journeys of their deities (s. Movers, Pho- nizier 11, 2 : wanderings of El, Astarte, Cadmus &c. pag. 59 and following). ^^SIC^N (Ab as prosperity) n. p. m. 1 Chk. 5, '30; 6, 35; Eze. 7, 5; comp. ?1tt5 and the proper names ^iB'^bN, - I • : - ' IT 1iaJ''DN C-^b is ability, rectitude) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 2, 28 ; contracted from "ilaN llia^ ; the latter is also found in Ti"1UJ\' The" form ^1125^ ('Tiizj) is as in bl?pV, ilS'l, ffliab, and similar compounds are found in "I'lainN (= Iffi-'-ins*), nbN1'ia\ '.'I" ''UJ''!3^{ ( .45 zs msimjr, contracted from -'ili:-^^^) n. p. m. 1 Sam. 26, 6; comp. iia^, ■'Uj-'js;, T\^\ For it there is also the shorter form iiBSN 2 Sam. 10, 10. □ipaJi^X (^Ab is prosperity) n.p.m. 1 KiKGS 15, 2, or also Di^tiaN abridged 2 Chr. 11, 20, for which U, 2 bX'^'niN; elsewhere identical with the son of David 2 Sam. 3, 3. iri^Di?* C-^^ ** distinguished, noble) n. p"m. i Sam. 22, 20, contracted from nnj-'aN. Mark 2, 26 'A§ii&aQ, comp. the proper names ^n\ N^n\ iln\ l^ni andos^nr -'■■■ "' ' = •"'-=• r : : ' TjDiJ «'«. Isy. Is. 9, 17 ZTMp. ':|j3Nniri to j-oZZ efeeZ/ together, ']lljy niNS ISSiNnil and iAey (the l^l^rt ■'Sas) roll them- selves to the mounting' up of smoke, i. e. they wind themselves upward in columns of smoke ; Ibn Parchon correctly liBliri^l. 'I'USy nwa is an accusative to denote becoming something. As the di- rection up, upward comes by Fi1N5, the stem can only mean to turn, to whirl, to roll like TjSii, whose organic root is ']i, ']S; Arab, viijf to be pressed, liJU to be complicated. Another and cognate class is formed by words in "rja, '^'y"i, Tja-D &c., to which the Arabic ii)L belongs and from which the Syriac and Arabic translations have taken the ex- planation. 72^ I- (/M«.biNi) intr. to fall to ruin, I- T 1 VJIV to sink down, hence 1. to fade, to wither, to perish, of the field, of plants, of green grass, of the vine (iBiT'n for "JB-I in poetical diction) Is. 24, 4 7 ; 33, 9 ; Jer. 23, 10; Jo. 1, 10; figuratively to mourn, wither, of pastures Am. 1, 2. Comp. bjai^, bajs, ba)?, Arab. Jit, Jis, Syr. Viaj, but also Vsi, Sam. "abal, Arab, (seldom) Jijt in the signification to mourn, lament. 2. poet, (for which in prose Hithp.) to hang the head, to mourn, of men, perhaps too of pining, wasting away, as the effect of mourning, with bs of the person or thing over which one mourns Hos. 10, 5; Jer. 12, 11; Job 14, 22 ; put along with niN to com- plain, for the purpose of strengthening the idea Is. 3, 26; 19, 8. Derivatives bj3N adj., b^N. Sif b'^SNii (fut. -bSN''') caus. to cause to mourn, to bring about mourning, Ez. 31, 15 in the day of his descent to the grave I caused a mourning; Lament. 2, 8 he made the rampart and wall to lament. Hithp. ba^nrt {pros.) to afflict oneself, to mourn, either absolutely or with b?, more rarely biS of the person or thing, 1 Sam. 15, 35 ;"l.6, 1 ; 2 Sam. 14, 2 ; e. g. na-by over a dead person, bSM-b? over transgression, Ezr. 10, 6. To this stem belongs the primitive root ba-N, which also exists in ba-i, and by interchange of the labial sound in ba-N, ba-)?; the harder form how- ever seems the organic one. ^D« 13 ^3« !?D4^ n. (not used) tr. to lead, to drive, a cow, and its organic root 5S~!S identical withba""! II. Hence the proper name b'^aiN. ^DN in. belonging tob^N, seebjaij. p3t^ (unused) intr. to shoot forth, to grow, to spring forth fresh, from the organic root b2 with the idea of fresh springing and sprouting, Arab. tN^I and Jut, of the moisture and freshness of the young green grass, Syr. Va*. grass, green. Comp. the Hebrew root in the stems ba-;, bji (b^a) L, ba (bba) H., bi'tt),- all which coincide with the or- ganic root in bl3N. Derivatives b^N subst,, bas. ' IT- P3N f- a fresh, grassy place, mmrfoMi, usually of places overgrown with luxu- riant grass in the Jordan-valley or any other, specially 1. of a grassy place in the neighbourhood of IBniB-n'^a (which see) in the territory of Judah 1 Sam. 6, 18, but for which the LXX and Tar- gum read 'jaN , with relation to v. 14 15 ; but in the text stands tibillirt bas the great meadow, which was upon the mili- tary field of Joshua's campaigns (STliB ?idin:); and the ^iBiii^ Unto was aboiii Bet-Shemesh. — 2. n. p. of a city 2 Sam. 20, 18: with He local InbSi* towards T 1" T Abel 20, 14, which !i however also re- lates to the question where? in 20, 15: flbSNa in the direction toward Abel (comp! ina'iha forestwards, in the dis- trict of the forest 1 Sam. 23, 15). It is described as bNliuia DNI ^^S* and in the neighbourhood of !i35>M-n''a, but not identical with the latter 2 Sam. 20, 14 15. It is the place lying north of Mer6m, Jjf ^Alel, 'A§el.a in Euseb. (Onom.) between Damascus and Paneas, 1 EoNGS 15, 20. More frequently, how- ever, baiS appears with more exact de- signations appended,as l.!nS5»M-nia bas* or iiasiart 'a 'n 2 Sam. 20^15.; 1 Kings 15, 20;' 2 Kings 15, 29 n. p. of a city Mel, which is adduced as belonging to the northern boundary of Palestine and to the tribe of Naftali, beside ']'i^S», now Merg jljun, beside the territory n'n33 i. e. about the sea of Galilee, near to ■jn. The city is also called merely bas 2 Sam. 20, 14 18. Josephus (Ant. 7, 10) calls Id^eXfiaxea, as Scripture does Abel, a metropolis in Israel. See ^laSM-nia. 2. D-iafflii bais Num. 33, 49 n. p. of "a city in the neighbourhood of CtiTD, a district in the Moabite territory, on the other side of Jordan, opposite to Jericho, which is also put for it Num. 25, 1; Josh. 2, 1; Mic. 6, 5, without the two being identical on that account. Jo- sephus (1. c. 4, 7; 5, 1) mentions i^^tl?/ as 60 stadia distant from Jordan, and as situated near 'lovhdg (■jlirnia) and 5)?trtfv',' pi. m. Qib'sN, c. ibig, /.'n'ibaN) ffl^/- mourning, troubled, bowed down GrES. 37, 35; Is. 61, 2; of inanimate things: desert, waste, destroyed, Lament. 1, 4. Qg'bSi? perhaps: mourning for the mother, Ps. 35, 14; '\T'^ ''\^^. mourn- ing for Zion, Is. 61, 3. Ar. J«ul, Sam. ahU, the pious one (comp. ''iS*, ']^'^i^Nl, "ili"), among the Syrians: a monk, and so also among the Karaites bljN or "jija ■'b^i* the genuine pious Israelites (Karaites). b^N (with suff. dbSN , '^bSJj) m. mourn- ing, e.' g. 133, biXJ^GsN. 50, 11; Esth. 4, 3 ; howling Mic. 1, 8 ; linj 'N perhaps: the only i. e. exceptional mourning Jek. 6, 26; Am. 8, 10; b 'N rtia5> to cause mourning for any one Gen. 50, 10; Jer. 6, 26; Ez. 24, 17; 'N-bN '& N^p «o zwzfe io mourning Am. 6, 16; 'N iM':, "inaSi, ni3. mourning days, -clothes, -house Gen. 27, 41&0. rtmaa, iitoia,bina, :in, aia di\ IV : ■ ' ' I T ' IT' |- ' I I ' 'nSS are used as the antithesis. PDN (c. bills) m. nue?", stream, of the ■^blN EuloBus, one source of which springs forth in Susiana Dan. 8, 2 3 6 (Jefet, Raschi, Ibn 'Esra). The stem is bSN to flow, and the noun is developed after the form asw. From the cognate bs^ the synonymous bai'' has originated ac- cording to the form ^51D. It is possible that bj3Ni is an Aramaised form of b^l'' (Jefet), comp. ''113^ and ''lljijs. ?Di< (properly firmness, definiteness, certainty) only used as an adverb 1. cer- tainly, really, yea surely, in truth, for sure, vero. Gen. 17, 19; 42, 21; 2 Sam. 14, 5; 1 Kings 1, 43; 2 Kings 4, 14, commonly employed to introduce a dis- course as the Latin immo vero. Hence the Targnm renders it by NUttJipa, and the LXX by val, always expressing the firm assurance of a thing which was either absolutely unknown or doubted of. From the latter case arose its use as an ex- pression of opposition (comp. tibis*, IjsN): however, certainly; but the antithesis lies in the connexion of the sentences only, while the adverb itself merely expresses certainty. — 2. In later writings: but, yet, however, Dan. 10, 7 21 ; Eze. 10, 13 ; 2 Chr. 1, 4; 19, 3; 33, 17, where the antithesis always lies in the sentences. bl3N never expresses of itself a denial. The stem is b5"N III. to bind fast, to twist together, whose root lies also in ^,5"-?, ^|3"t7, Tj;?'!; Ar. Ji, Jwj is pro- bably from the same root and abridged. The Aramaean d'la comes from d "la -equi- valent to Hebr. d'lla (which see). J3}>5 I- (unused) 1. to be firm, hard, comp. ^UN L, lirt (root ^a, )li), Ar. ^j-;^ to be hard, thick, ^^\ and others. From it comes ^iiN. — 2. to flow constant, en- during, comp. ']?3N. Thence comes niSN K'tib. Both ideas are here connected as in 'jais, proceeding from the fun- damental signification to be firm. P^ II. (unused) to turn, wind, re- volve, only a collateral form of 'pjn. From it comes 'jsk. pS! (with suff. isax , pi. D'^J^N , c. ipiN) f. firm, hard, hence 1. a rock, a stone Gen. 31, 45 46 ; Ex. 7, 19 in every state, polished or rough, and therefore con- nected with inwbiij, tr^w, isna; ijjbn diJiiN 1 Sam. 17, 40 the smooth'of stones i. e. smooth stones. Often as material: of stone, which is also designated else- where by nouns; joined with 'JM Peot. 17, 8, ysp Is. 54, 12, n'n)?: Ez.'27, 22, lli Zech. 9, 16, and perhaps laip La- ment. 4, 1: a precious stone, but also without an adjunct Exod. 39, 10, like the Ar. -^, Syr. l-sV, ..^thiop. ebn, or in connexion with the names of precious stones, as T'BD, "Ojiiij'nn, d!iia, niJJN Ez. 1, 26 ; lo! 9 ; Is. Wi, 12 ; Ex. 25" l". Then generally every stone, e. g. metallic ore, ore Job 28, 2, comp. Arab, dual (jUj^ the two metallic ores, i. e. gold and silver, ni^toa 'N, a stone with the image of an idol Let. 26, 1; li)? 'N a p« 15 wctil stone 2 Sam. 5, 11 ; MSS 'N a corner- stone Job 38, 6; MDMS'ja 'N a lurden- Stone Zech. 12, 3 (for practice in lifting; stone-heaving was a youtt's play in Pa- lestine, as Jerome relates); 5>bp. 'N a sling-stone 9, 15 ; 'IS 'N limestone Is. 27, 9 ; "^"^ya 'N waT-JZe 1 Che. 29, 2. Meta- phorically 113 'N hail- stone i. e. hail falling down like little stones Josh. 10, 11, which is also called yz^ alone, comp. Pers. xjS^XLwu (senkge) little stone i. e. hail, Syr. ]?r^ Ui-a; lU-'a.jbN ''S^N crys- tal-stones, hail Ez. 13, 11; 'I25!!5"'N fiery stones Ez. 28, 14 16 spoken of masses of fire lying about on the D"'f7'b!S! ffllj? Tn according to Asiatic belief, the Alborg (comp. Is. 14, 13). A poetical combina- tion appears in DM 11 'N properly stone of dumbness, i. e. the dumb stone Hab. 2, 19 ; TsNIiO^ 'N roch of Israel i. e. Jehovah Gen. 49V24,''like bNliu^ 1154 2 Sam. 23, 3. — 2. Weight, from the heaviness and weight of the weighing stone (comp. Prov. 27, 3 and the German Gewicht) proceeding from the internal conception of I5g Lev. 19, 36; lasi -Qf^ two sorts of lodghts Deut. 25, IsV'Prov. 20, 10 23; ^[^5311 'ga in the king's weight 2 Sam. 14, 26 i. e. royal shekels which were heavier than the usual ones; D'^S-ipSN weights of the purse i. e. the smallest weights that lay in the purse Pkov. 16, 11; niB5»n '» lead- weight Zech. 5, 8 and b'^iari 'N tin-weight 4, 10 for plum- met; hence figuratively inb— 'p3N ^fe?ra- mets of desolation Is. 34, 11, parallel to Syr. il » V oi, Samar. emian, and as Jo- sephus represents (Antiqq. 3, 7, 2: Majvaijg fisv ovv a^avrj-d' airtfiv ixaXs- GSV rinHg Ss, naqa Ba^vXcovioav (isfia- &ij)i6tse, iiiiav avttjv xaXovjisv), is pro- bably borrowed from the old Egyptian. See the stem £:S3 and the ^amsean 'nan^ll n. p. m. 1 Sam. 14, 51, bably abridged from 'ni'^^N 14, LXX Id^EvvriQ. DDi^ (o^ly P'^'Tt- pass, own) tr. to feed, nourish, fodder, as DiN frequently signifies in the Mishna- dialect, hence DiaN ^Wafed ox Prov. 15, 17; Qi'na'ia diCKi^N. fatted fowl (see la'ia) 1 Kings 5, 3 [4,23], Targ. NI^TaiUS.' The deri- vatives Diaij manger, crib, &i:3N»3 gra- nary, barn, point to a fundamental pro- 60. meaning to collect, to bring together. Ax. (jiof equivalent to >«*^) ^^° U**^i then metaphorically to fodder, feed, i. e, to stuff or cram in, to take in nourish- ment in abundance, comp. iSSb equiva- lent to tjDN to collect, then to feed, whence comes NlsDM fodder; then from I : • ' this fundamental idea is developed DlSNa like niiaa granary from 1111 to collect. Comp. tsyb properly to gather together, to bring together in abund- ance (equivalent to U)5b), and then to nourish richly, Talm. to feed. nraynS (pi. rb>-) /. swelUng up, blain, 'pustule Ex. 9, 9 10; comp. the Talm. Wia pustule, yiai>a watery pustule, Syr. i^ i SnnSn swelling, here formed from the reduplicated form ta- ken from Sia (which see) with a pros- thetic. Comp. the Coptic root Aete, and teAo-B- to boil up. VDi^ (unused) intr. to shine, glitter, hence to be high. Organic root yi ; comp. n (r^?). ^^- u»i^. r?■^ t?"?> rr^ 5 Aram. y'SN, whence NSaN tin. In the same manner derivatives from i>Si to r.T shine are used to designate high places. From this come the proper names yaiS, yDN {height; comp. ?''&;, n^S-'M) n. p. of a city in the tribe of Issachar, Josh. 19, 20. ISDN {splendid, beautiful) n. p. of a judge of the northern Israelite races, bom in Bet-Lechem of Zebulon (Josh. 19, 15) Judges 12, 8 10. p3t? I. (unused) tr. to grind, to tri- turate, to rub or scrape into small pieces, whence piN, Jipas. The organic root is pj3"N ; comp. Ar. (^au to cut in little pieces, and many others. pD^^ n.(Kal unused) tr. a weakened I r T form of pan to fold round, embrace, to wrap round. Only in Nif. paN?. {fut. pas;; , inf. with suff. ipaNfi) to embrace one another, hence to struggle, to wrestle. Gen. 32, 25 26, alluding to p|i\ In like manner briSS to struggle, wrestle P2^ 17 irom bns to embrace (-which see). The root p?"N is also in j?a"1, p5"fi) and even Baschi thought of this comparison ; Ar. (3jI to wind, comp. "Jjas. Ibn Sai^h and Ibn 'Hsra have rendered it by "issni and have therefore taken it as a deno- minative from pSN, comp. xovig and xovi^sa&ai, naXri (-wrestler's dust) and naXaisiv, arena and pulvis in Latin; but this interpretation is less probable. p2N (c. pj?Nl., with suff. D/JSN) m. bruised, pounded earth, dust, especially the fine particles ("nSS* being the larger ones), which fly up easily and spread themselves Is. 5, 24; 29, 5; Ez. 26, 10; Dbut. 28, 24; comp. jjn;lj and p'n dust, derived from a like fundamental signi- fication; Arab. s\ji£. pounded, destruc- °* tion and dust; iiJu puMs. n)53iii (only c. n]^SN) /. powder of spices, aromatic powder. Song of Sol. 3, 6. ^D^ I. (unused) intr. according to the derivatives (T'SS and T'SN) to he strong, firm, powerful, vigorous. The organic root is ^3"Ni, which is also found in la-.l and' 'ni-3 in the same signification; Ax.jXSH to be fleshy, fat, strong. This fundamental signification of strength in the root IS manifestly comes from to be pressed or drawn to- gether, the same transference of idea being also found in ^as, Ar. li&. I. VII. Vni. to bind together and then to make firm, "O.'z to connect. Similarly 'nisp , pTtl and the transposed ujj I (apN) he hound together, strengthened, TV . prevailed, ob- •viously point to this combination of idea, and the root in la-n is therefore iden- tical with it too. ' Talm. 'nais to fasten, ')"''iV, DT^hiS, ^ , IT ' IT : - ' IT • -: ' D^llN and others, lead to the right ex- planation. See i^N. ''aJDN (contracted from ■''i^"'5i;) n. p. m. 2 Sam. 10, 10, for which ■'l»''?N. usually appears. dibtl32^ (abridged from 'ffl'^aN.) n.p. of a son "of David 2 Sam. 3, 3 by hs5>a. But in the later genealogy he is called '©•^aN 1 Kings 15, 2 comp. 2 Chr. 11, 20. His daughter Tamar (2 Sam. 14, 27) was married to Uriel of Gibah, from which marriage sprang ilSSJ? or «i!T'3''a, the spouse of Eehoboam," 2 Chron. 13, 2; 1 Kings 15, 2. Maacha was also a grand- daughter of Absalom. riDN {hollow passes) n. p. of an Is- raelite station in the desert Num. 21,10. See aiN. I 5 ''T|bH) 1 Sam. c. 15. This name of the Amalekite kings may have existed even before the time of Samuel, Numb. 24, 7. Hence aaN stands poeti- cally for pbas* generally Numb. 24, 7, for which the Samar. text reads ai^N. The gentile name "'iSN of Raman Esth. 3, 1 is therefore explained by Josephus (Ant. XI, 6, 5) TO yivog'Ajj,aXBxlrtig, and so too by Jewish tradition. The Se- mitic name SSN or aiii* among the Ama- lekites dwelling with kindred Edomites and Canaanites is certainly identical with the Phenician SiiN Ogyg-es, the Titan-king, to whom the oak at Hebron was dedicated (Jos. Ant. 1, 10, 4 ; Jewish wars TV, 9, 7), who is designated as a Phenician in the tradition of the Titans ; especially as the Greek Ogyges-tradition is also derived from Phenicia. ''Sai* Bee asN. IJi^ (unused) tr. to bind, tie together^ r T to fit in, unite compactly, whence STnSN, comp. Targ. ISN and Talm. 15N with their manifold derivatives in this signi- fication, Ar. 4\s.f: but the rootisia-N, * r T ' which is also found in '75 (ll-l), from which "VA comes. Only in the harder i-sound do the words ItTN, If!""', Ar. cX.£>.-^, 13-N (in n. p. 13n), Ar. t\i_t, t^'j "^li?."?! Syr. i-o-^i Ar. jLJs_.t and others exist in the same fundamental signification. n^DiN (formed from IJN, m.; pi. nil") f. 1. properly bound together, hence bundle, bunch, e. g. aiTN Ex. 12, 22 Hyssop-bunch, Hyssop-bundle, used for sprinkling; metaphorically 2. a band, troop, company 2 Sam. 2, 25 ; comp. ban ; 3. a knot, a loop, a fetter, e. g. n'i'isN iitaia bands of injustice. Is. 58, 6, to which is parallel siaii nias'iri (naia is equivalent to nt3?a Ez. 9,' 9); 4. chain- ing together, putting together, hence :nj« 19 DJ« (heaven's) vault, arch, Am. 9, 6, comp. TttJlJ Nbh. 3, 38 ; Ar. JtlsUs , firm build- ing, properly ligatio. jiSN and aiais, see SSN. IT I -: r-: TfJ^ m. a nut, a nut-tree, 'iSt nSS nut- garden. Song op Sol. 6, 11. Witt rela- tion to the Ar. -^ysa., Pers. \^, Syr. ija— , js appears only as prosthetic. The word therefore cannot have a stem t>N-, and the less so as it has been probably taken from the Mediterranean (Indo- Germanic). In the dialect of Grhilan aghiz. The Talm. Ntl-IMN, Armenian engus, the cognate Tib equivalent to T13 (comp. M3\^3 and ln3iab) point to a connexion with the dld-High-German hnus, Lat. nvj; &c., and the original form may have also been among the Semites engus tiMN, Ti^N. n^3iN (received, among the D'^asn) n. p. m. of a wise man otherwise un- known, the son of Jakeh (tlj5.J"']5i) , to whom the collection of Prov. 30, 1 — 33 is ascribed. Since this form of name is frequent (comp. '^1'IS, biaa, 'TIS!, binn, biNiB) and the idea of collecting, receiving actually appears in proper names (comp. tjDN , riVnp), perhaps 'Agur is not symbolical. The Targ., Ibn 'Esra and others have not understood it so. In the primitive times, however, IWN may have been an epithet of God, like the others here mentioned. miSiN (o. rri") f. properly herry, corn, hence the smallest coin-weight, a little coin, £]D3 'N a little silver-coin 1 Sam. 2, 36. TheN is prosthetic, and TCnii (from It^i) equivalent to !Tn3 (from 'rC^i) has the like signification, as gran from granum. The stem therefore is not 'ISN (which see), but Tia , as belonging to fTiX Syr. l^'o^f the same,.iSlthiop. agdr. The Vulg. (ut offerat [rTniSN b] nummum [tlDS]) has incorrectlyunderst'oodfi^'iSN to mean assembly, and so derived it from 'laN. ^^yi, see TiSN. 7J{< '(iio* ^sed) intr. to flow, to flaw down, to drop, whence bjN. The or- ganic root bj-N is also in bs (bbij) to spring, flow; on the contrary, tie'Ar. J.^t (to collect) is connected with bba. bsS: (only c. pi. -ibSij) m. 1. drop's, ba-iV^N dew-drops Job 38, 28, LXX ^w- lovg Sqogov (more correctly §6lovg Sq.), Targ. nVu ■'D'lD'l; from bas. 2. spring, only in the proper names dibSN, iibaiS. " , * ■*■ T :v ' IT — : ff] jlN {double spring) n. p. of a place on the border of Moab Is. 15, 8, LXX 'AyaXsifJi,, according to Euseb. 8 miles south of li* i. e. Areopolis. It is the "AyaXka (flbss) of Josephus (Antiqq. XIV, 1, 4)" if this be not the nbas of Is. 15, 5. It must not however be con- founded with Cbay EzEK. 47, 10. DJ^ (unused) tr. to collect, draw together. The organic root is therefore d4"i«, which also appears in D.| (D??JI, whence fTiaSW), Ar. «*a. to collect, ivs* the same, whence |»ja- a collection of water. The cognate roots in d3 (dl3), Q» (DM5»), !l-?2ri and many others con- firm the fundamental signification of this word. Derivatives dSN and Ti'pSN. DJi^ (not used) intr. a weak form from day io Sent? or 5ow oneself, hence I" T literally of the bending of the reed or cane, comp. Is. 58, 5 ; figuratively to he lent, bowed, sorrowful. Derivatives dSISi , daS; linax, Though daS is used for it as a verb, yet if we may conclude from the derivatives, das appears to be more original, especially as analogies in the dialects only suit the latter. From it are derived das 2. and ^i^pas 2. The organic root is da"N. DJN {pi. c. ■'Mas) adj. m. sad, humbled, 1BSi"''Max bowed in spirit Is. 19, 10, comp. Ar. *&-5- Stem das. DSiN (pans, das , c. dat?., pi. d-iMas., but c. ■'?iaN, with suff. dp'"'gaN) m. l. (from das) "a collection of water, confluence, and so like lni)?a from W]?, but nest a pool, place 'where water is collected, connected with d^M Is. 14, 23; 41, 18; Ps. 107, 35; 114,' 8, or also without it Ex. 7, 19; 8, 1; Is. 42, 15, but always 2* pDJi< 20 ^CD"lJt5 a pool or a collection of water wMoh refreslies Is. 35, 7; Ps. 107, 35. The stem is 6SN , comp. Syr. i^^f a pool, Ar. *£► a collection of water. 2. (from OaN) re«1N. ■jaiSl (c. ISN, pi. nb-JN) m. bowl, basin, to receive the sacrificial blood, from its hollowed, bellied form Ex. 24, 6; ib3 rriS^Stln Is. 22, 24 vessels of cups, op- posed \o D'^b^art •^'^'S vessels of flagons; '1515 'N goblet of rounding i. e. round goblet, Song of Sol. 7, 3. Syr. \i^ pitcher, Ar. &jL&.t washbasin, Targ, NiaiN fan, NiiSN pit. ITT 1 ' IT : : - * nJtJ (not used) tr. is only a colla- teral form of das to collect, heap to- gether , applied to men and armies ; Ar, !_«,> the same; from it comes t]^N (after the form das, only in pi. d''BaN,' with sm/. liBas) m.heap, crowd, troop, therefore like 5T1 an army Ez. 12, 14; 17, 21; 38, 6''9 22; 39, 4-^ comp. Ar. i_iisfc a crowd of men, k_A^ troop; hence the Targ. rightly n^'i'^a armies. Symm., Ibn O'andeh saA.Kimchi connect it with the Aram. t\% wing. "iJli^ (fut.^il^'^') tr.l.to collect, bring to- r T '■•■=i" gether, e. g. nourishment in harvest-time, Prov. 6,8; 10, 5 ; to gather in the grapes Deut. 28, 39. Figuratively (not used) to introduce, to receive, like rjDN ; whence is derived the proper name "niaN. The organic root li'H is also in AJramaean '^4"?? ^Vh Syr. i^ to bring together, to heap, Hebrew ^i (113), whence iTilS?3. — 2. (not used) to gain, make gain, de- serve, from the idea of gathering, bring- ing together; existing only in the dia- lects. — 3. a third signification to bar- gain for, as Targ. lis, Syr. t-v^l, Ar. ^1, is cognate with the root in 'IS"©, but is not found in Hebrew las*. See however rTn^N. J^liaifi {def. HTpl!^) Aram. f. letter, official document, Ezra 4, 8 11; 5, 6; l-^r\i, in the Nasireean dialect Ut-^1, NnT'SSS, NriTias and dimin. NiTniass*. See n'nsN. IsD"!?!* (only c.pl. "'bU'naN) m. a word used only by Ezra for cup, ' bowl, Eze. 1, 9, properly hollowed out, deepened, comp. 'JSN; LXX ipvxrijQee, Esr. Ap. GTiovdsTtt, Yxdg. phialae. The Syriae li^f is said to express the same in sense. According to the Talmud (see Ibn TEsra on the passage) from i^stl (d]l) las re- ceiving the lamb's blood, i". e. tantamount to p'nTa bowl; according to Simonis from ba-ias. (ba after the Ar. Jio) blood -receiving; by others {Pfeiffer, Hottinger, WaJd) the origin has been sought for in Persian, but without suc- cess. The N is manifestly nothing mora r]iJi< 21 ^«3-!« than prosthetic, and therefore bu'is is best derived from D'n.1 (which see) with the derivative ending b-, which is also found in ^733(1 (see the letter b). nhDiN TO. fist, closed hand, with which one strikes Exod. 21, 18; figuratively SiB"! 'N fist of power Is. 58, 4. The N is prosthetic and the stem tj'iS to put or pack together. Talm. 'N b^a violent, 'N isbn handful. t : ni ili^ {pi. ni'nSi* , with suff. dln-'n'-i.^N) viv • ' ' ' I." " I : • f. only in writings of the Persian pe- riod: official document., writing, edict, ac- count, letter Neh. 2, 7-9; 6, 5 17 19; 2 Che. 30, 1 6, brought by the messenger on horseback (ayyagog, from the Per- sian; Hebr. yi 2 Che. 30, .6). With respect to the Persian s.Uol engare, writing, from [jcXjjUoi engariden, to write, as also ayyocQog cowner derived properly speaking from S^lJol and signifying tdbellarius — whence ayya- gsisiv to compel to serve as a messenger, Talm. N'^'nMN court-serjeant — , the pre- sent word' niay perhaps have been taken from the Hebrew ^im in the sense of ^i to roll, and therefore 'N is like per- haps to llbaa, or it may have come from the Semitic root ^ii (which see), ^thiop. naggara, equivalent to 1DD, and so 'N would be tantamount to "nDD. In any case the word bears a genuine Hebrew stamp, as well as the Aramaean form N'lJiN. 1>< /after the form Dto, It, "13; with suff. tin) to. properly veiling, then concr. veil of vapour, fine cloud, vapoury mist, which rises from the earth Gen. 2, 6; i^Nb lau ipn Job 36, 27 they (the water-drops) trickle through his vapour- cloud as rain. The accusative 'IBM caused the other, accusative to be written withb. The stem is Tit? I. to veil, surround, Ar. ii\ (med. Je), hence t>Lsl veil, va- poury covering, atmosphere, comp. )iS cloud, from ')5i> to cover, veil. The or- thography Tijs in many mss. makes no difference in the sense. TN or !T1N (only pi. ni'lN , with suff. •'piTN, '^'^ni1J«; rarely niiN, which might perhaps in 2 Sam. 13, 16 be read n^is) f. properly turnings, windings, from llij? n. to turn; then causes, cir- cumstances, occasions, as tiaD turn, then cause, Ar. ,_jt\*u causa, JLs>. motive, manner, from jLL to turn, bb.? (c. bba) turn, and thence circumstance. The word only occurs in the difficult phrase ninsM T\ik^'r\ nbiisn M5»ih niiN-bN •^V - r* I - IT : - IT T IT I 2 Sam. 13, 16, let it not be the occasion, i. e. let it not cause this evil which is greater than the other. The LXX could not explain the passage and translated according to the context iir^ adsXcps', on iieydi,]] rj xaxia, without i3 "'HN'bN H5*'nM InbilS having stood in their text. IT T IT IT : ° In practice it is however mostly con- nected with b? only and is thus a causal particle: on account of Gen. 21, 11 25; 26, 32; Ex. 18, 8; Num. 12, 1; 13, 24; properly propter causas with a following genitive; "'ni'iN-b? for my sake Josh. 14, 6 ; seldom by way of strengthening ni'iN-bs-b? Jee. 3, 8 for the sake of all the causes, on account of all this. ^"1^ a stem falsely assumed for Aram. 'j'jTiN; see 'j^m SIJi^ I. (Kal not used) intr. to pine r T- away, languish, consume, tab-escere, to be destroyed, applied to the mind (^25), as iibs to the eyes. Only inJffif 5ini\0 (med. Waw). " ' " ^ Sn^t II. (not used) tr. to arrange, to prepare, Ar. CjiJI and conj. 11. to form, bring up. Only preserved in the proper name bij^'iN. n'TN see bss'iNi. bsS'TiS! {discipline is with 'El , frofli 11^ 22 |ni< or i'jN, Ar. LJiJI information, education, and bi/f) n. p. of a son of Ishmael, and, like 'nip, n'-iis, rroii, Ntoa, also of it'" 'It:' it ' IT - ' an Isnmaelite race Gen. 25,13; 1 Chk. 1, 29. In the LXX Na§dsnl is cor- rupted from l4d§Bi]l on account of the preceding Na^aimd. "11^ (not used) intr. to be powerful, strong, then trans, to overpower, over- come, and therefore like ITIJ, whence , r T ' "'I'O. Many stems with the initial sound « are often closely related to those whose initial sound is a, comp. "^jaiu and ';jl?N, b,:ill5 and bSN. Here therefore telonsr ins I • T . '" ^ , , ^ r r and TllB. Derivatives are the proper names' lis, 11N, ilij, ^iiN and 'JIN. The stem llrt is cognate in the proper names llrt and ilrt, Ar. 01 equivalent to d^ and like the Hebr. 1il5 (IITIJ). T'TN equivalent to TIN and = lin and 115, o^ly in the proper name d'lIN (which see) equivalent to DT11N. TTS* {powerful, mighty; comp. illlj, bt}) w. p. m. of an Edomite royal de- scendant, who escaped (1 Kings 11, 17) during the slaughter in David's time 2 Sam. 8, 13; 1 Chr. 18, 12; but 11!l is the reading in verse 14. Illi or 1lS was a national and guardian deity of the Syrian races and also of the Edo- mites. See I15. rrrji belonging to nilN see IN. ilN {powerful; equivalent to lilN, from 11n) n. p. m. of a chief (UJN'l)' at Casiphia in Ezra's time Ezk. 8,17;'-^^ T'm iljjt ibid, stands for Vnm iltj-biji' P7N (c. lilN., with suff. ■'515, 15?.'iN; pi. d'ljJIN., withsM/. Ti5lN_, dil^SINJ m. properly settler, determiner, commander, ruler, from JIN to fix, determine (which see), hence in the comprehensive appli- cation of it in Scripture 1. commander, ruler, king 1 Sam. 24, 11; Ps. 12, 5; Jbe. 22, 18. — 2. lord in the most ge- neral sense, consequently a) in opposi- tion to 155; slave, servant, Peov. 30 10; Mal." i, 6; Is. 24, 2, or also in antithesis to nriBl^ and ln?3N, and where the subjection is expressed by bjSa Is. 26, 13. Frequently also as an addition or honourable address to 'T[b?3 in '^JIIN Tjb'an 1 Sam. 24, 9; 26, 19, "or also in other addresses with names Num. 11, 28, like the German Jlerr, English sir; b) husband, consort. Gen. 18, 12 ; c) stew- ard, as substitute of the lord. Gen. 45, 8 9 ; Ps. 105, 21 ; d) proprietor, pos- sessor. Gen. 42, 30; 1 Kings 16, 24; all derived from the general idea of lord. — 3. The highest ruler and lord, God Ps. 114, 7, more frequently f 'lN!l-b| lilN Lordofthe whole earth Josh. 3, 11 13; M10.4, 13; Zech.4, 14; 6,5; Ps. 97, 5, or xaz i^oxrjv lllNll Mal. 3, 1 as Tiisb^a T'l'iail, or with the adjunct niNaJt '1"'' Is.'i, 24, or merely " Ex. 23, iV." — Apart from the different significations of the word the following peculiarities in certain forms are note-worthy 1. ''31N {my lord) is a courteous address from children to parents Gen. 31, 35, to teachers and seers 2 Kings 6, 5, espe- cially to kings, fully 'T|b'at1 "'31N, or generally to persons, to whom one shews respect Gen. 44, 7; 1 Kings 1, 17. This form is also used a) in short addresses or replies ■'51N ■'3 Gen. 43, 20 ; 44, 18 ; Num. 12,11; 'Judg'es 6, 13; '^SIN-Nb Gen. 23, 11 ; 42,10 ; 1 Sam. 1,15; ^3i'n ■'iaii 1 Sam. 22, 12; b) in addresses which have the name, as an apposition to the name e.g.nuSa ■'iiN NuM.11,28; <\'n'^h» ^i'i» 1 Kings 18, 7, but more rarely of per- sons absent 2 Sam. 11, 11; Gen. 24, 12. He or she that speaks usually represents self as 155; or !iUN. c) This singular suffix as such was soon left unnoticed in the language so that it even remained where one would have expected 1551N Not. 32,25; 36, 2; Gen. 47, 18, hence ''^i?.''5 only appears by way of exception in 1 Sam. 16, 16. The my in such forms of speech is almost without significance, comp. Syr. >»r^, French Monsieur. — 2. C^jilN in the plural form also with suffixes,' did not become concrete till later, agreeably to its abstract signifi- cation dominion, power, and therefore it was used as a singular in construction and in personal addresses, e. g. ''5'tn, |nx 23 |n« yiNM the lord of the land Gen. 42, 30 33 " r]Bii ■'SiN tAe ford of Joseph 39, 20 ; iriBp d'^a'iN. a strict lord Is. 19, 4. In this 'manner occur ^-^N., 1=V.''?*:i '^''p%^ 's-'S'lN, 0?"'?.']N!., T'S'lN '&c. in all signi- fications of the singular. Sometimes also it is applied to God, Ps. 135, 5. But for God a more favourite expres- sion is Q-'S'lS.p ■'ns Deut. 10, 17; ■>5'lN Ex.4,10;'\a"-;i''lN' ■'"•I'Ps. 8, 2; ■'"^ 'Ti^S'iN Is. 51, 22. The plural tl"'p5«,, which appears but seldom as an actual plural and is also so construed, Gen. 19, 2; Is. 14, 13; Deut. 10, 17; Ps. 136, 3, is therefore in this case the abstract form, as it exists in Hebrew also in 'Q-'lib^, omnipotence, D"'b»a dominion, a-'UJi'ip, Hos. 12, 1, D'^a'irp' 1 Sam. 19, 13 le' (co'mp. Diin life, Q'^nV'!? dimissal, tii^yiS.oppression, D''aDPs.l(5l,3, n|;iis) and was taken personally afterwards. — 3. 'ij'lS in address or also in narrative is applied to God, like ■'S'lN in the sin- gular-use. The Masora counts up 134 places where ■'i'18. is so (ffllj?) used Gen. 18, 3; 19, 18." The suffix is written - for - in order to distinguish it from ■'lis Gen. 19, 2, which is actually taken for plurality. But that - is really a suffix may be recognised from Ps. 16, 2; 35, 23 and from the circumstance that it never appears with the article as t3"'SiS.; and when God calls himself "'liN Is. 8, 7, this only shews that the suffix was already left wholly unnoticed as in "'i'lN. In the Phenician '\1» adon, like b?a and Ij^M, is first used as an honorary epi- thet of Deity, e. g. of Tan b?a and ri'n^bM, and also with the suffix IplN (our lord) seldom 'jiis merely; even the Pentateuch knows the Phenician deities (Deut. 10, 17) under the appellation t]"'5iN. ''3'lN (my lord) appears as a de- finite local deity belonging to Byblus and Cyprus, viz.'i^5coj'iff,whichHesychiu3 rightly explains by dsanoTijg vno 0oivi- xcav, while, as in the Hebrew "'J'tN the proper significance of the suffix entirely disappeared; more rarely pN alone oc- curs. The exclamation "'ini ']i']N ''i^l flih oh Adon (lord)! oh his glory! Jer. 22, 18 was the death-wail at the sym- bolical funeral obsequies of the God Adonis in Phenicia (Amm. 19, 1), and the prophet may have chosen this dirge on purpose. Phenician and Hebrew pro- per names compounded with linx (see pn""'31N.) are to be explained agreeably to the primitive view that ^ilN is an epithet of Deity, which, like fli, btx, ■^jbM, bsa, p'ltt and others, is also put for the name of God itself. lilN (strong) n. p. m. Neh. 7, 61, for which Ezk. 2, 59 has IIN , in signi- fication equivalent to i"N. See ^IN. lilN (originally a form belonging to the proper name D'^'lilN, which is still preserved in 1 Macc. 13, 20) m. /ire, splendour (see 'lis), then like TjiN. (which see) the name of an old Semitic fire-god. An Edomite town or one be- longing to southern Judah was also named from the Edomite deity li'iN;. The form TIN and TIN also appears. Perhaps too the proper name Q'l'lN. com- pounded of D'n I7N, and "liN as the name of a god should be identified with ^i'lN. D'^Tili* {Double "ador) n. p. of a town in the territory of southern Juda, be- side 12513b and M)rr?., which Rehoboam caused 'to be fortified, 2 Chr. 11, 9; LXX 'ASaiQai. It is the '!A8aQa be- longing to Idumea in the post-exile period (Jos. Ant. 13, 6, 4; 13, 9, 1) and 'nilN 1 Macc. 13, 20. It is said to re- present the present Bura, westward of Hebron. The dual has arisen from the former name ^i"N as a designation of the double city, 'upper and lower, and this formation is usual in the names of cities, comp. a:bl»1i:, Q^p'^^ °T^l''^' Qiaia'i?, n:p5';iJ, Dwia-i, i:n^, Q^'iRi Diiriw, QiS'lVi and many others. See T^n',' TilN and IIN. IT- ' I-: 1 . 71*7^ aram. adv. properly a word de- noting place, iU, correlative to I^N aJ«? and as the latter is formed from 18 (^n) by appending an re, so is l^nN from '''IN. However it is used more definitely to express the relation of time: then, at ^n« 24 □lii that time, tunc, as a consequent with respect to ■what goes before: thereupon, hereupon. Dak. 2, 15 17 19 25 48; Eze. ■ 4, 9; with the Aramaean accumulation of, particles: 'J^'isaoi that time, then Dah. 2, 14; hence ')';'i!iit"')a from that time, since Ezk. 5, 16, with the supplying of 'J»3"13> till now. The original form ''IN is only dialectically different from the Hebr. ilN Ps. 124, 3, from which the Hebr. TN, as the Ar. if from liil, is IT ' ' developed; but the Syr. ^t^'^ follows another analogy. See 'rj'i. T^nTN (with suf. i'li'lN, pi. d-i'n-; adj. fern. n'n'iiN, comp. riDbia from wbvi) adj. and subst. : bright, splendid, glorious (from Tin equivalent to llti to shine, glitter) applied to the name of God Ps. 8, 2, to God himself 93, 4; hence prin- cipal, distinguished, a chief, lord, 2 Che. 23, 20; Neh. 3, 5; with repetition of the suffix D!l"''ni'iT5< D!i"'t1N their lords brothers 10, 30; a noble ,' hence bsD fi'i'ni'iN eup of the nobles i. e. precious, splendid Judges 5, 25, a poetical cir- cumlocution, as Di^iaN tinb Ps. 78, 25 ; I" ■ - V IV ' ' noble, Ps. 16, 3 the noble in whom is all my pleasure. The Di-iitsn-bs is subor- dmated as a supplement to the construct ipi'iN, comp. Is. 29, 1; 43, 21. Thence metaphorically, powerful, mighty, of the waves Ex. 15, 10; great, majestic, of the cedar Ez. 17, 23, of the vine 17, 8, of a fleet Is. 33, 21 ; mighty, powerful, applied to gods, kings and peoples, 1 Sam. 4, 8; Ps. 136, 18; Ez. 32, 18; hence T-^N alone is already applied to God Is. I'o, 34 (comp. V. 13 T'SN), to a hing or leader Judges 5, 25, to shepherds (parall. d'':?'l) Jbr. 25, 34, and even to the cedar Ze'ch. 11, 2. Comp'. fi'i'l'i'iN, the Lybio-Phe- nician name of 'Atlas, brother of 'El (Maxim. Tyr. VHI, 7 ; Mart. Capella IV p. 250), ^I'lN-SN among the Cartha- ginians an epithet of deity and of Be- tyle (Augustin, ep. 17; Priscian II c. 1; VI §. 45; VII §. 32), ^^^N-ffii<^ Eusad- dir, 'PvaaadiQwv , name of the Tangier cape, which is now (jifl-u^ ^juK , Capo Bianco. — The adjective feminine r'l^N is used substantively (with suf. isp'^'i!^): 1. for mantle, properly the wide, large over coat in which persons wrapped themselves, which was also reckoned the most costly and splendid, Josh. 7, 24; 1S>S1U 'tA Shinar-mantle, i. e. artificially wrought, from Shinar or Ba- bylonia (see Pliny VIII c. 48) 7, 21 ; but especially the hairy prophet's mantle made from the skins or hair of camels, in its full form ^'S'q 'N Zech. 13, 4 (comp. 1 Kings 19, 13"; 2 Kings 2, 8 13 14; Jon. 3, 6, jxrilmr^ Hebe. 11, 37), to which belonged 'liS' ^iTN ^dvij SsQuariiirj Mat. 3, 4. — 2. The pride of the mea- dow, the dress of the meadow, green, parall. 'jji'i^rt 'jiw Zech. 11, 3. ^x'^^ (Pers.; atar belonging to Ized) n. p. of a son of Haman Esth. 9, 8. (b^N is equivalent to TIN, Pers. ^tar, and N"" a noun-suffix.) IT -' mj^ (not used) tr. to fit firmly to one another, to bind, to stamp firmly, to .* dam; cognate d^rt (which see), Ar. -.ol to fit, bring or keep together. The root dTN, dTrt is also in rt-M'i 11. . '- T ' 1- T IT T Derivatives InaiN, InaiN n. p., laiN IT T-;' IT : - -*^ ' 1* T-; n. p., dnis n. p., dnN n. p. D"li^ (without flexion) m. man, or collect, men, in the widest sense Ps. 68, 19 ; 76, 11 ; or d'lN-ba Job 21, 33 to ex- press the same. In the very fr-equent use of the word the following peculia- rities are observable. 1. dIN is a spe- cial proper name of the first man in the history of creation, 'ASdft, Adamus. Hence it is retained as a proper name in the versions, and in this special sense it occurs several times with the article ^^»'n (comp. bi>a!i, la^ii) in the first chapters of Genesis. Elsewhere the article stands in a collective sense even with d^N. — 2. From this special name arose the poetical circumlocution dlN'^a, in plur. d'lN 1551 or UliXrt •'iSi for "man, men, viz. in order to denote an antithesis to God or in addresses by God. But this periphrasis, after appearing but seldom as Num. 23, 19 ; Deut. 32, 8 ; 1 Sam. 26, 19 &c. did not become usual till the later- Dl« 25 m^^ period of the language, when — )a seems almost as though it had grown along with it. In Syr. J-»Jp= has become a single word and even stands for Adam, Targ.iB3N-13 or lUi'ia; the Biblical ex- pression is a poetical one in the Pers. 'iOi\\ [•'^y (merdiim zade) son of man, Ar. |.;>l |j.jf, 'pl. ^C>\ ^, Syr. >^?f, Maltese Inydem, Phenic. dTi* &c. — 3. As an original designation of kind or spe- cies dTN in the sing, or D1i<"'^i5i in the plural IS apphed to man or men of the multitude, in opposition to Israel Jek. 32, 20, or to nobler men Job 31, 33; Hos. 6,7; usually referring to the enemy (as a contemptible man) Ps. 124, 2. Ac- cordingly D^N with ttJ-iN Is. 2, 9; 5, 15, uS-'N-iia^Ps. 49, 3 or ti^'nto 82, 7 designates the lower class, the Syr. I-»J| and lr=\ being used for such antithe- tic ideas. But DIN Eccles. 7, 28 is seldom used as UJ''N , without implying such a distinction. — 4. Like Tl5"'!!< in the signification some one, any one, aliquis, Lev. 1, 2; Job 32, 21. See izS'^i?. — 5. Collect, men; and therefore there are certain phrases in which DliS stands as a kind of apposition, e. g. D"iN N'ns wild of men, wild among men, i. e. a wild man. Gen. 16,12; DIN h'^'q'^ foolish among mm i. e. a foolish man, Pkov. 15, 20; or where- it follows in the genitive, e. g. DIN ''5''ili< the poor among men i. e. poor men, Is.'29, 19; a^^N ipiT Hos. 13, 2 sacrificing people; dnx "'Si'ds Mio. 5, 4 anointed men; D'liSl lilUNI the first among men i. e. the first ^man Job 15,7; or with Si e. g. anaia d^iaa Pkov. 23, 28. — : ° IT T : r : I ' 6. In opposition to the animal, hence the human in dIN i^laM Hos. 11, 4, ITT 1" : - ' ' comp. 2 Sam. 7, 14. — 7. (firmness) n. p. of a city at the Jordan Josh. 3, 16, twelve Eoman miles distant from iri'iS in the Manasseh territory (now Sotha), but without its situation or any traces of it being more exactly determined. The proper names iiaiN, Ha IN, laiN * ■*■ IT T — I IT I "" ' r T — ; present a point of contact for the ety- mological explanation. In the derivation of this primitive word Scripture appears to allude to nanN Gen. 2, 7; 3, 19, comp. amoid-a'p :, and the idea- that the first man was made from dust or earth is really ge- neral and old, without the necessity of supposing a red-brown colour of tho earth in Palestine being required, since InaiSt. does not at aU come from the stem dns (to be red) and the limitation to a particular colour of the earth does not lie in the Mosaic document. In any case dlN has been originally formed into a proper name, and has therefore remained without flexion, even where the appellative conception man or men must be understood and one expects a construct, e. g. Prov. 6, 12 bsiiba d^N equivalent to 'jIN Uj^N ibid. D"1X (3 pl- laiN) intr. to be red, e. g. applied to the colour of corals, blood, coccus, Ar. -ol, -of, Targ. d'lN, thence on account of the beauty of this colour, in the dialects, to he beautiful, lovely. di5''5-3a diSS* laiis redder than " f • : • V IV I : IT corals were they in body Lament. 4, 7, i. e. fresh, blooming (of colour). Youth- ful freshness is expressed by the bloom- ing, white colour of the body, disy body, is in the accus. as 1 Kings 15, 23 he was diseased in his feet (T'bS'n'nN). Pu. d^N (from d^N, comp. 1&3 Ps. 80, 11 from 1&3, nw from Tili Nah. ' I 1 ' r T r •- 3, 7), only as a participle d'^NH, pl- d'la'iNM, to be red-coloured, e. g. the shield of the warrior with blood, the hide with colour, Nah. 2, 4; Ex. 25, 5. Hif. d'l'iNll to be red, properly to shew red, then to grow red Is. 1, 18. The Hifil is used in this signification as it is elsewhere in verbs denoting colour. Hithp.'Q'^^T\'r\ (for d'7.-, comp. p-mniri, ^l'EO'7) *" *^*^ itself red, to play red, of wine, Prov. 23, 31. This stem was probably formed ori- ginally from d'l or rather the primitive dlN, and therefore it signifies primarily to be of a blood-red colour. Derivative^ Vhm, dlN, d'iMIN, 15731N, and the pro- I T ' •-' I ' r : — ; ' r : - ' ■*■ per name diM'iN. D'tN (from d^N) adj.m., Wa'jN f, pl. Qn« 26 mDi« TO. D'^'a'lN, 1. red, red-shining , in pro- phetic vision applied to a red horse witli allusion to the shedding of blood, Zbch. 1, 8 ; 6, 2 ; to the red appearance of water caused by the red earth 2 Kings 3, 22; to the youthful freshness of cheeks, in connexion with n5S Son& or Sol. 5, 10 (comp. Lament. 4, 7). — 2. the red- brown pottage of lentils is termed diN as a substantive. Gen. 25, 30, cpoivi- xiSiov in Diog. Laert. 7, 1, 3, because lentils were usually cooked with the red-brown pods. See d^N. DIN f- a red precious stone, Ex. 28, 17, LXX accQStov, Vulg. sardius, Targ. ']p?2&, Qrv.Yea.&vdQo^ carbuncle, Saad. -♦^f 1:1) •■jLj &e., always derived from the red colour. a'"TN (rarely di^is ; fortress, from dlN) l.n.p.f. the mountainous territory 'jE^(io?«, in Greek writers {Jos. NT. &c.) 'JSov/Mia (after the vulgar or Phenician pronun- ciation of diN), which lies high and secure on the south-eastern boundary of Palestine, intersected by rocky clefts, extending from the southern extremity of the Dead sea to the .^lanitic gulf of the Eed sea. Originally perhaps it may have stretched only to the mountain district el-Sharah SLau, generally only to the mountain-land (hence it was sub- sequently called JL.a. O'ebdl, rs^alTjvri, Gebalene). But it may have altered in extent at different times Gen. 36, 32 43 ; Ex. 15, 15; Num. 24, 18; 34, 3; Josh. 15, 1; 2 Sam. 8, 14; 1 Kings 11, 14ff.; 22, 48 and elsewhere. Sometimes 'N yiN stands for it Gen. 36, 16 21 31, '■'more rarely 'N npito Gen. 32, 4; Judges 5, 4.; 1 Maccab. 4, 15; partly in exchange with T^j^to, 'to yiN or 'ia-^rt. Besides O'jN signifying the land, it is taken for the people or inhabitants, Edomites, in which case it is masc. e. g. Numb. 20, 20. In the same sense is also em- ployed dint* ■'ia Ps. 137, 7, or 'N.-na Lament. 4, 21 22, as in the names of other countries. D'li* la^i?: the Edomite wilderness 2 Kings 3, 8 "is the uncul- tivated steppe from the Edomite capital ybb to y-ian. To Edom at different times belonged 5>bD, V15>, nb-'N, tTiS:?, laa. lijl^y, ITi, la'^n and many others (see these wor&s), i. e. the wider tracts of Arabia. See 'T'5'to. — 2. n. p. m. of the progenitor of the Edomites, 'Eddm, who is properly called liU5f (which see). This is transferred, as Edom the name of the country also was, to the inhabi- tants Gen. 36, 1. The constant enmity between the Edomites after they had subdued the former inhabitants (d'^'ih), and their Israelite half-brethren led the old narrator to represent the history of Esau in such a manner that the name d'rist is derived from red-brown pottage or the red colour of the skin, Gen. 25, 25, as well as Wi) and Tiyto ib., which, however, are only in substance different names of the rough mountain-land. Since history recognises only the original in- habitants d'l'i'n (equivalent to d'l'ih mountaineers), who had possession of mount liyia, and the wy "'33 Dbut. 2, 4 8 12 22, who afterwards subdued them, d'jjS could not have been a people of that name who immigrated into the country, but must have been adopted by the Esauites as a name for the land. — 3. It is very remarkable that some- times dliSt stands for d'lN, i. e. that agreeably to the context and parallels nothing but Aramaea can be understood by d^N, as 1 Chr. 18, 11 comp. 2 Sam. 8, 12; on the contrary dIN 8, 13 stands for diN 1 Che. 18, 12 ; PsT6'o, 2 ; 1 Kings 11, 16; we may compare 2 Kings 14, 7, as also 2 Chk. 20, 2; di?2i'ns!. 2 Kjngs 16, 6 is for d-'ains , which the K'ri al- ready coiTects. The original cause of this interchange lies in the resemblance of Dalet and Eesh in Semitic writing (comp. I'nST 1 Che. 9, 15 and ■''lil Neh. 11, 17; ■'■p^T Josh. 7, 1 and ''nm'i Chk. 2, 6; lajniri'; 2 Chr. 24, 26 'and 13|i; 2 KiNGs'i2,"22; ns'^'n Gen. 10, 3 and HD'i'i 1 Chr. 1, 6; d'^Sl'i'i 1, 7 and d"i51'i Gen. 10, 4). — 4. in the proper name masc. d'lN l^is* (which see). Qi7^'libi2y, '^s?='5i p^l^^tl. ^^^?^?. 1i??5N,' '^i'^^n)' are but organic root-sounds doubled. niniN} f. prop, the firm, hard body of the earth, from d^N; hence 1. the firm earth in opposition to D';n Gen. 2, 9 19 ; 3, 17, and as an element, humus 2, 7, out of which this or that is made Ex. 20, 24; generally: the terrestrial globe, sphere Gen. 4, 11; 6, 1; 7, 4; 'Nfl ''5B the surface of the earth Gen. 2, 6 ; Ps. 104, 30. — 2. specially: thick earth suitable for banks or building, arable land, field Gen. 4, 2; Jo. 1, 10; 2, 21; 'N.n I^V to till the ground Gen. 3, 23; 'N IS'S, 'N 113''!!? a husbandman, cultiva- tor, 'N, a^js one addicted to tilling the ground' 2 Chr. 26, 10; sometimes the field with its produce Is. 1, 7. — 3. me- taphorically: land, country, province, e. g. •i'l nalN Is. 14, 2, iBli?ti 'N Zech. 2, 16, bNliU';' 'N (in Ez. frequently) Ez. 11, 17 for Palestine or Canaan; niaiS: lands Ps. 49, 12. — 4. (fortress) n. p. of a town in the tribe of Naftali Josh. 19, 36. naiNI (fortress) n. p. of one of five towns in the vale of D'^'iiU which was afterwards destroyed with dio and MIMy Gen. 10, 19 ; 14, 2 8 ; Deut. 29, 22 ; Hos! 11, 8. ^"ly^^, (formed from BIS* 7; fortress) n. p. of a town in the tribe of Naftali, Josh. 19, 33 (comp. tTi'lN 4.); ■'73'IN ap.sri ib., as the Tabnud (Jer. Meg. 1, 1) has' assumed, 'Adami (and) }ia,-Nekeb, LXX 14qi/,s (ASiJii) xai Nu^ox {Nand§). It was afterwards called 'yim (Talm. 1. c). "''nn^ (pi. d''ai"iN.K'ri'2KiNGS 16,6; 2 Chb. 2'5, 14 ; 28, 17, or ti-";n% 1 Kings ll,n)gent.m.Edomite,ri'^12''\»(plm^'l») f. anUdomitish woman D^vt. 23,8; ISam. 21, 8; 1 Kings 11, 1, formed from dns. See d'lN and dlN. ^■'5»iS V^i ^1^ "',5^ IT-: I v: r •• I" : ' I v: r : are usually employed for the plural. Q''53'7>? (tA« red-brown) n. p. of a ridge of hills on the border between Judah and Benjamin Josh. 15, 7; 18, 17, so called probably in the first in- stance from the colour of the earth in the hills (see d'jN). From this came the appellation of a distinct place which lay on the ascent of this hill-range, d"iW1N hbsa (terrace of the red-brown hUls), opposite to Gilgal, a place which Jerome still found in Maledomim and translated by avd^acig nv^qarv,' ascensus ruforum, but which he referred to the shedding of blood. ''3'/2'T>< (also ■'3173") adj. m. reddish, applied to the hair. Gen. 25, 25; fresh, applied to the colour of the face 1 Sam. 16, 12; 17,42; comp.dnN. 'L'KKnv^qd- xrjg, Vulg. rufus, literally, without its being necessarily referred to the hair only. NHDIi^ (Pers., from N'3'1 thma, Zend, the' highest Being, and ta from data, i. e. given by the highest Being; with a prosthetic) n. p. m. of a Persian, ESTH. 1, 14, ?"1^ (not used) tr. to make fast or firm, to set, hence TiiJ ; metaphorically to determine, command, rule, dispose, whence comes 'ji'ilS, TIN and perhaps also THN and I'i'llS. There is a similar transference in "jisn, whence ')iDri. The Arab. ijcXfc to make firm, ^jS^ a firm dwelling, is cognate; farther l^.S, ISaj (which see). •j^TN (strong) n. p. Eze. 2, 59 ; inter- changes with plN. The frequent va- riation in orthography between - and i or - has a foundation in the Syriac- Phenician pronunciation, which utters - as 0. ^^^^ Aram, a form equivalent to Hebr. \n» , but only in the proper names TJ^'^^ (Bel-Adonis), I^Nn^l^S and bB-insi.l! Sardanapalus. But see these words. ^^N (paus. y^»; pi. D'^S'IN, c. ^2"]N, with'swf. ri-iS, Silks']'?) m. properly the solid, hence fundament, basis, pe- destal of a pillar. Song of Sol. 5, 15; the lower hoard-plate in board-walls Ex. 26, 19 ff., then threshold generally; figu- ^jnt< 28 "n« ratively foundation of the earth, Job 38, 6. Stem l^jji. ''37N see Tili*! IT, -i 'IT ''DTX first part of compound proper names; properly speaking nothing but constr. pN with the connecting sound i in proper liames (comp. dpi'lT? and many others). It appears to have been more common in Phenician. See j5T5"''5'lN, TPi'is, )?ia-''i'7N, dp'^i'iN, "£'n"'5'iN; jT • I -; ' ' V IV • 1 -: ' 'it • I -: ' it • i -: ' comp. Ti7N:. pT5"'^3h>< CAdon of Beseh) n. p. of a Phenician king of pJSi (see also pja) Judges 1, 5 — 7. Perhaps the Phenicians had a sanctuary of Adonis here. As Byblos is called 'ASaviSog tegd and Byhlius Aden (Martian. Ca- pella de nupt. phil. p. 54) or ^Aaaiqmg "ASaivig (Nonnus, dion. XT J. 157) was spoken of, Adoni-Besek may have been used in the same way, and was sub- sequently converted into the proper name of a person. jT'DTN CAdonisJah) n. p.m. 1 Kings 1, 5; Neh. 10, 17. It is used inter- changeably with 1!T'3'|N 1 Kings 1, 8 or DlJ-iaiN EzK. 2, 13, 'but is always treated like the other epithets of God, comp. MibN, lii"-, Dpi'nty. On the proper name il'^i'iN 5it2 see under iitp. 'in'DlN CAdon is Jahu) n. p. m. 1 Kings 'l, 8; 2, 25; for which JT^iiN stands in 1, 5; 2 Sam. 3, 4. D'^JIN see 'ji'iN. p'l2"''Dl>t i^Adon is righteousness) n. p. of a Canaanitish king at Jerusalem Josh. 10, 1 3. pna (right, salvation) is a very old epithet of the highest deity among the Phenicians, hence in their proper names p'n.lji-isb)? , p'lli-'Sii)!.. The father of the CalDiri "(Di'n''a3) is called ^dSvx, JSvdt'x, J:v8vx, i:ideH i. e. plit and p^^:^ (= hebr. pi'iia) as the just- dealing deity; whence Philo's expla- nation (in Eusebius) by dixaiog. In He- brew this epithet appears sometimes as an abstract noun plJi in Mifelii:, some- '•■'•'. it'- :. • ' times as an adj. noun in plStandpllii'', p'jiSlin^ orpi'ia according 'to the Phe- nician pronunciation. Dp'^DlS CAdon is assisting) n. p. m. BzE.'2,13; 8,13. InNEH-lCnrt^in^ stands instead, the epithet of Jah Ci|3 or D-ip:; (helper) interchanging with W itself. DT'ahi* CAdon is elevated) n. p. m. 1 Kings 4, 6; but for this there is in 2 Sam. 20, 24 and 1 Kings 12, 18 Q'liN , and 2 Chk. 10, 18 Dh'lii for "1% and DTl'in, niN and 'I'j^i. being the Pheni- cian pronunciation for the Syrian deity Till. Hence Sanchoniathon (p. 34) writes "AdcoSoe. Here I'jN; or ihT}, as the first member of the compound clianges with -'i.)». See 'ni'iN. "nji^ (Kal not used) intr. to shine, lighten, metaphorically to he splendid, excellent, distinguished, renowned, far- famed, or also, to he powerful, great, extensive, all proceeding from the fun- damental idea of shining. Hence come ^IN, doubtfully ^^N, I^N, ^i^N., the n."p. 'iTS'inN, '^bw'n'iN, dSiN, D^'ninN. Only the 'Nif. Tisji to shew oneself glo- rious, splendid, renowned, powerful, with a in any thing, Ex. 15, 11. '''I'liJS 15, 6 is part, in the constr. with the remnant of the j as a connecting vowel, comp. I'lDN Gen. 49,11, ''na35 31, 39, ■'S^ih, •^ppn Is. 22, 16. For T^n Gen. 27, 40 the 'r': I ' i't ' Sam. Pentateuch reads Tisn (when thou shalt be powerful) ; but it has probably done nothing more than paraphrased the difficult word T^'pn. — Pi. 'IJIN (not used), whence I'lJA, T^'pN, rTi^N. — Eif. T^'jlN!-; (/Mi. ^■''iNl) to glorify Is. 46, 21. — On the organic root see 'I'rii. I^Sl {height, top) 1. n.p. of a place in the south of Judah near 'Edom; with a local tiT^N Josh. 15, 3, described as situated between ']i'n!^n and 5>i?'i|2. But in the briefer description of the south- border Numb. 34, 4 it is called "l^t}_ T^N (Addar-court) ; and since 'ji'l^n is' omitted there, ^'iN may perhaps be dif- ferent from'N"15t5, which is equivalent to li'i^irj. Tin o'ccurs besides in the proper 'name 'N ni'iC)5> Josh. 16, 5; 18, 13. See rTi'n^5>. In composition 'TIN is rendered in ' the Targ. by N^'i'iN ^"1« 29 {jJiresMng-floors), and tte Aram. Tnsj is in fact from the same origin. — 2. (mighty one, lord) n. p. in. 1 Chr. 8, 3, which name however is 'I'lN in Numb. 26, 40. (See this word). "TTSI m,' 1. dress, ornament, as also nTlsiZECH. 11, 13 Ip'^rt 'i* a costly or- viv- ' , ' 'it: - IV ^ nament (ironically). — 2. as ITnlN mantle Mio. 2, 8. "nN (c. pi. "■''Ili!?) -^ram. f. a large open place which being trodden down was used as a threshing-floor in the East, Dan. 2, 35. Tai-g."!]!!!)! [def. N'l'lN, with suff. Tj'n'iN ; pi. V'pl'?'. «• ■'p^SJ . def. IXp'^Jf) usually for ']'lii; SyrJi?] , Ar. >JOt taken from the Syriac and resolving the hard middle sound into n. The stem is 'nlN in the signification to be wide, from the Hebrew IIN. rx, "llN m. name of the 12. month in the Hebrew lunar year beginning with ICi , corresponding to our March Esth. 3, 7 13; 8, 12; 9, 1 15 &c.; Aram. Ezb. 6, 15 ; 'ASuQ 1 Macc. 7, 43 and Joseph. (Ant. IX, 4, 7), Syr. j?i. The Syrians and Arabians received it as they did the other names of the different months from the Aramaeans. Since the name of this month, as also WSIB, lb.03, lO"'?, bibN, naa and irs, appears" only in the post-exile, later Hebrew writings; and since tradition (Eosh ha-Shana c. 1) looks upon them all as derived from Babylonia; besides, inasmuch as they are found among the Palmyrenes, Sy- rians, Kurds, Baalbekians, with greater or less variation , one must look for the names of the months as far as the Hebrew is concerned, only among the Aramaeans, who are the medium of their adoption. These names among the Aramseans, as well as among the Phenicians and Persians, have reference to worship (comp. TltePi and others). Hence TIN must be put beside the homonymous Syrian deity TIN (see Ti'JN)) and is farther allied to the Zend ^tar, Pers. \i\, tolzed (fire-god), son of Ormuzd, to whom March may have been sacred. Comp. TjiN, ITS'!!!!?., '^I'^'^IN) ■l'^^5 (not used) Aram. intr. equivalent to Hebr. Tiis, whence 11N. mi^ and 'n'lN (Assyr.) m. l.fire, comp. Zend, diar, Pers. vit the same, and there- fore connected with the Aram. Tin as the name of a month, though in its origin it may have been different. — 2. Ized, representing fire, hence fire-god generally. But only in the proper name '4^'BIIN and in '^l-JTl^.- In relation to the stem 'nii* may be referred to 11N, since this Hebrew stem also points to that. njan'lN {pi. T'ltiS-, def. ^5«'^-) m. astrologer of the fire-god 'Adar, hence a name of high dignitaries associated with satraps and others, Dan. 3, 2 3. Since the second part of the compound word Ija (pi. 'j'^'pT-^, def. m^'yi^) besides tjlBN, a'b'nri and '■'"'jiiBS Dan. C27; 4, 4; ^,V 11 signifies in the first place soothsayer (comp. Dan. 4, 14) and astrologer, then a kind of priestly class generally, and is not confined merely to the placing of the horoscope, the first member TIN can denote nothing else than the highest deity of those mixed peoples to whom the priests were dedicated (see ^1^)- Perhaps the priests of the fire-god may have occupied a place in courtly rank next to the satraps and stadtholders who are mentioned before them. 4^'^m^ ^ram. adv. Ezr. 7, 23, ac- cording to" the connexion either quickly, nimbly, zealously (hence the Eabbins re- present it by nio'ita, ni'i-'lri)?5i) or: rightly, exactly. As "it appears in the Aramaean official letter of the Persian king, in which other old Persian words are also found (comp. 1 JlU'ia , IWIB? and others), it has been derived from the Persian o>-wn4> rightly, diligently, or oi-w/l» \i> in the right, rightly. "nllN; n.p. of a Syrian deity who re- presents the revolutions of the year (from 'TIS* = 115, which see), consequently a sun-god'(see'Tj'nnri,'Ti'nTJ5), existing only in Tjb'a'i'iN as a" part of the compound. liS'SlV? (pi- '3''5.3") "«• a gold Persian coin of the value of an Attic xcwoiis n-n« 30 2r\^ (13 «. 6 d. English) a Barik, 1 Che. 29, 7 ; EzK. 8, 27, Grsecised Jagsixog. Eeckon- ing by Darics was usual among the Jews under the Persian dominion. This coin- name is old among the Persians, and appears already in the Cyropaedia (V, 3, 3), and the Grsecised form alone could mislead Jahn (Einl. II. p. 345), so as to derive it incorrectly from /laqsiog. For Q'ljiB'n'iN or D^Sb" (without dagesh lene, as sometimes after "i, comp. a-'ri^UJ, la'nj*) the form D-'5'i?23^'i or Q'^iM- also appears EzR. 2, 69; Neh. 7, 70 71 72, and one sees even from this that N is prosthetic, ys" appears to be abridged from lias. The Persian word has been derived from Bar a (king) and Kaman (bow), or from Bara and ij^J (image), or from xiX 4> dergah, aula, and ijLoOTara prince, that is hingly court, because on one side was the stamp of the king's image, and on the other a bow. Others identify it with Sqccx^u;, as a weight, whose etymology is not in Greek. Perhaps we should look here for the origin into 'n^N, as in Nlt'^^N Adar-Mars. aih>* see QT'SiN. jT -: IT • I -: tjb^n'IN C-^dar is Mng) 1. n. p. of an Assyrian deity, 2 Kings 17, 31, to whom the inhabitants of Q^Jl'lBi? (which see) burnt their children, consequently a sort of Adar-Mars i. e. sun- god, who was thought of as a destroying being. Hence d^i'iDtp in Berosus is also called the sun-town.' More probably it has been moulded together out of "^bw 'rj'i'iN and 'N is equivalent to Tjinn' "(which see), Syr. >^jp». — 2. n. p. of an Assy- rian king 2 Kings 19, 37; Is. 37, 38, transferred from the name of the god. Vy^^, (Targ. def. NS'^'in) Aram. f. arm, metaphorically power, Ezk. 4, 23, like ^nr. N is prosthetic, as also STi (which see).' The stem is S'Ti. "' ''^ll'T^ {"o^n-districtfplantation) n.p.f. 1. capital of )ia^ (Batanaea), which be- longed afterwards to the territory of Manasseh, Num. 21, 33; Deut. 1, 4; 3, 1 .10;JosH.12,4;13,12 31. LXX'EdQatv, 'ESQam'v, Eus. (Onom. under Astaroth) 'JSgad. The last-mentioned gives its distance from !Tt!?a as 25 Eoman miles and from Abila'as'9. In Arabian geo- graphers it is called isjl-C-5t>l, nowBraa, whose distance from Damascus is about 24 Arabian miles. — 2. A town in the territory of Naftali Josh. 19, 37. — The original form is 3>'nl« from 3»11 = 5>1T, with N prosthetic; and after an i with- out the accent was annexed ''5*'l'7i« arose out of this. n"inNl (with suf. in'^IN, DF)'^5N) /. see n'''''iN. r- t^l J^ a stem adopted for the infinitive r r ahsol. iSilN Is. 28, 28 for 1231'^ , and chosen IT ' I ' solely on account of its coincidence with the future. Comp. inf. absol. £]bi< for t]iO Jek. 8, 13; Zbph. 1, 2. Dm^ (but with the e sound atlN in r T 1" T pause or where the second root-sound going into a simple syllable must have a long vowel, likewise before suffixes as :ipN, iS^Ni., '^latlN and others; fut. apN; and apN^i., but 'first person ailS Mati. 1, 2 as often in verbs N"B, once apN Pkov. 8, 17, comp. "npN Gen. 32, 5, N having arisen out of ee NN, and therefore this last form must have come from aMNN ; inf. constr. :ihi< Ecclbs. 3, 8 and the feminine formation iilartN; but m the imperat. i!lN, pi. l^rtN and with the suff. or in pause again from arti*, hence rtSrtN) 1. trans, to love, ayanav; sensuously, of love between the sexes 1 Kings 11, 1; Eccles. 9, 9; or men- tally of the love of parents, friends, virtuous or vicious love Gen. 37, 4; Ps. 99, 4; Hos. 12, 8. This conception seems to be used in the most varied relations, sometimes inmost desire and wishing for a thing, sometimes reaching or pressing after something, finally sometimes doing with a strong incli- nation, to be fond of doing, to like. The modifications of the conception, though coinciding in a central point, are shown according to the construction: with the accus. of the person or thing to love in the widest sense Gen. 24, 67 ; Peov. 4, 6 ; Dn« 31 ir\^ Hos. 3, 1 ; with b of the person to bestow love upon one, to be devoted to. Lev. 19, 18 34; with 3 to be attached to, to have pleasure in something, ']iM!ia SrtN'i'ni EcCLES. 5, 9, and he who is attached to money, has no produce, similarly to a j?51, ysirt; with b and the infin. to he fond of doing, to like Hos. 12, 8; Is. 56, 10; with "i3 in the apodosis, to rejoice that. Part. m. ati'S; f. nstlN, sometimes poetically ''niJii*: a friend, male or female, beloved, "male or female Ps. 38, 12; Hos. 10, 11, but always more than i>1. Derivatives sriN (d'^SMN), - I ' IT -:r Nif. art!S3 to be beloved, properly to love one another; only in the participle D'^atiNJ the beloved 2 Sam. 1, 23 i. e. in this place, who have loved one another. Fi. ailN to love violently, to woo, only in the partic. artNM , pi. d'^atiN'? , lover Hos. 2, 7 9 12 U' 15; Lament. 1, 19, with aw and n IT ~: r - '~ J" T -:r' ' properly a fem. form of the infinitive of Kal, hence loving, with the accusative of the person or thing, e. g. Gen. 29, 20 ■,. Deut. 7, 8 ; 1 Sam. 18, 3 ; 20, 17 ; 1 Kings. 10, 9 ; Hos. 3, 1, where, however, it may also be taken as an infinitive, since it is connected like an infinitive with S,. b and ')M. Oftener it is a noun, after the form of rtiN.1, rtaS'n, and has for iT-a-' . n.\,~ . the most part the signification love, an antithesis to rtsaiu, Eccles. 9, 1 6; love between the sexes Song op Sol. 2,. 5; 5, 8; 8, 4; applied to love, inclina- tion and attachment in general, Prov.. 10, 12; 17, 9 (comp. 1 Pet. 4, 8; 1 Cor. 13, 4); sometimes concr. beloved, Song op Sol. 2, 7; 3, 5; 8, 4. The figure in Song op Sol. 3, 10 is bold: its in- terior is inlaid with love for one of the- daughters of Jerusalem. nnnnN see artx. D'^nVlti'see artis. D'^inN see artis. r T -: "I" ir\^ (not used) intr. to be strong^ powerful, properly speaking a farther development of IN (lUS), whence as is. well known li«M, Ar. olt (med. Je) and 3lt (med. "Waw);1jy (hl5») is also cognate. On the farther development of stems. with two sounds into those with three by hardening the inner vowel- sound into. He, see rt. According to others "irtN is tantamount to iriN , trtN (to seize), which,, r T ' r T ^ m^ 32 i?nK however, is less probable. Derivatives the proper names llnsjt , lllriN. Tilk {power, for poTverful) n. p. m. Gen' 46, 10. ^if^^^ see iint?. IT ' " TiilN {powerful, strong) 1. n. p. of a judge, Judges 3, 15; 4, 1; the LXX and Vulg. have liJiN (strong), the Syr. and Ar. have read lifiisi (with Eesh), from ItiN = 'lis. Since Ehud was a son flf Gera (!Ti5j, "Ti^TN must be read in- stead of Tins in 1 Chr. 8, 6. — 2. name of another Benjamite 1 Che. 7, 10. )^n5^ interj. an exclamation of com- plaint, woe! ah! For the most part with i""! ■'i'lN following. Josh. 7, 7; Judges 6, 22 ; Jer. 1, 6 ; also with the addition of other words, e. g. TJS 'N alas, my daws'tor, Judges 11, 35; ''ihN 'N 2 Kings 6, 5, somewhat seldomer with b, e. g. tii^ib 'N woe to the day Jo. 1, 15." The N is prosthetic, and the shorter form nil also appears Ez. 30, 2, which is blunted off into h in HNJl 25, 3. To IT V ' this relationship belong lilri, in, "irtst, and in the Semitic dialects verbs ex- pressing pain are also formed from them. ^TnS? {river, stream) n. p. of a river where Ezra rested with his countrymen returning home from Babylonia, into which another stream ('iMSli) flowed. It is not far from the district NiBOS ; hence Nins* 1!iS EzR. 8, 15 21 3L ■ '^ince the locality and name of this river have not yet been investigated, many have thought of the Adiava river in Adiabene (Amm. Marc. 23, 20), which might suit perhaps, if we were to read J''2ij5 xaaaia, '^'^5_ vagdog, a'b Xijdov, !Ti)5 xirtw and others, to the ar- ticles brought by the Phenicians to the Semites and Greeks, the former having been the first that carried on a trade ^n« 33 n^hm in foreign perfumes and spices; but tie proper origin of the name must be looked for in India, as d'3"i5, "i"!!!, and others must be derived from Indian tongues. For this purpose the name aghil is compared, heard by Europeans for Aloe in farther India. briN (^th suff. ^brjN, n^rtN, ^briN, and frequently rfbriN besides 'ibriN , with a local tibfiN , retaining 5, as Inbsh for '3>n, ibSBiiliSh for ibss, i'lNn before gutturals, spec, with a local as fi'iSSl, ns'ni; pi. O'lbriN besides 'rt'N and in a T : I ' * r t; IT ^ _ r: i reduplicated form likewise before the suffix) f. tent of nomads GtEN. 9, 27, so called from its ring-shaped, round form. SeebtiNlI. HenceD'^briNa 1313U5 Judges |- T 1* T t: it 1" ; 8, 11, as in the sing. Gen. 4, 20, nomads. It is especially applied to the old Is- raelite sanctuary, which, like a nomad tent, was moveable and could be carried about; in its full form 1^152 bnsjt tent of meeting, most frequently in the Penta- teuch; also "'"'' 'N the tent of Jehovah 1 Kings 2, 28, rrii^rt 'N tent of the law ti" IT Numb. 17, 23, or merely brtN 1 Chr. 15, 1 ; 17, 5 ; Ps. 78, 60 or bni^ii Ex. 39, 33, always the exterior of the tent, the round roof, distinguished from 13l^H. Metaphorically 1. habitation, dwelling- place Job 8, 22; 21, 28; Psov. 14, 11, therefore tantamount to n^a, and so citadel 1 Kings 8, 66 or by circum- locution n^j3 'N Ps. 132, 3; poetically of the citadel of the sun where he abides, Ts. 19, 5, which is called nbit Hab. T I's t 3, 11. In this general sense it stands therefore for Db-^iJ (hall) Ez.41, 1, where -the LXX have atkajji. — 2. Like the At. Jjof, originally people who inhabit a tent, then: people, race, famUy, so e.g.qDii biiis Ps.78,67 the people of Jo- seph i. e. the ten tribes, because Ephraim was the chief of them. In like manner 11^ '8 Is. 16, 5; li^Si-na 'n Lament. 2, 4; Q'^bpN peoples JPs. 83, 7; families, persons Zbch. 12, 7. Hence b!lJ&5 to wander, and so construed with 15* 13,12. — Hif. b-'iiNfl {fut. bini*.;!, contracted bp;, comp. 'iniS! for in.NN) Is. 13, 20 to pitch one's tent. inbnS* (tent, temple) n. p. f. a symbolic name for Samaria Ez. 23, 4 5 36 44. Here the form arose out of rtbilN (its own sanctuary) i. e. which itt:it ^ . "" possesses its own sanctuary. DN'^bilit (family founded by "Ab i. e, Goi)n.p"m. Ex. 31, 6; 35, 34. Since bilN and the feminine form iibpN were certainly used as proper names, b!^ij: might be compounded with an epithet of God in the farther development of the name, as D? people, ttJiN and riM man, rrjS abbreviated na dwelling, and others. 'Comp. biS'^M?, bsiairna, bsai^N, bsina and see too ''SN. ^n'lDnN (fro™ ^!? '''??!? • *^* sanctuary in it) n. p. f. a symbolical name for Je- rusalem formed by Ezek. (23, 4 11 22 36) and contrasted with the namenbilN for Samaria. This sort of formation in feminine nouns did exist, as na"''12Sn the mother of Manasseh shews, 2 Kings 21, 1; and though the prophet thought of symbolising yet he followed given forms, as in nbilN. The i- is not a ' n t: IT ^ ' suffix, but a connecting i. SnQD'^bilN (people of the sanctuary) IT T > TMT . , , „ n.p.f. of aHiwite and mother ot many Edomite races Gen. 36, 2 14 18 25; 1 Chr. 1, 52. naa is the name of a sanctuary on a height and seems to have been used in very ancient times in proper names among extra-israelite races , since traces of it are still found in names of places. d'^bnN see bn'N. I- r: jT ^ ' d''bn>t see brjN. 3 ^m 34 b«1« "int^ (not used) intr. equivalent to •IN ("nix) '0 ie enlightened, illuminated; comp.,11ilS. Derivatives ii. p. litis, V^^lr' yiflN {enlightened) n. p. of the first high priest, brother of Moses Ex. 4, 14 26; 6, 13 20; 7, 7 12 19, Aaron, 'Jaqav Ltjk. 1, 5, and Ar. (jjjjLs^ Hdrun. As he was the progenitor of the priestly family, the priesthood were spoken of as Ipsri Vnn.H ■'aa Josh. 21, 4, or n^a f-irtN Ps. 115, id 12. In the Talmud QiSnilN also appears for the same thing. There "'inlN, Ti-^i' are also formed. The mountain lh, where Aaron died Num. 20, 28; 33', 38, is now called (O.sUo J— p J.«.=>- (mount of the pro- phet H3.rfln). For the etymology comp. li^ (according to the form IS, ip_, from rtiN) m. request, desire, Pkov. 31, 4 K'tib desire for 13U5. See, however, IN 2. I'J^ 1. conj. (pronominal stem) the in- clusive and exclusive or, hence either vel or aut, probably allied to <1N in JlMINM, and to 1 and, as the Latin vel {or) is formed from ve {and). Where two objects are merely separated and free choice between them indicated without making anything prominent, the connexion with 1 is still visible, as for example in the double position is ... is* Ex. 21, 31 ; Lev. 5, 1 either . . '. or, sive ... sive, or threefold is ... is ... iN 5, 21 23, or where an iN is omitted in the first member Num. 5,' 14, where ^ . . . n might stand just as well Prov. 29, 9; or there is instead ^^1 . !n;t7;; "iCN. Numb. 9, 20; or finally it 'is interchanged with 1 Numb. 5, 14. In this sense is stands before the perfect like •] consecutive. — "Where iijt departs from this simple method, the following gradations in its signification may be seen: a) or rather, correcting as it were what was spoken before, whether in the way of limitation, e. g. liia'S* iN or rather a tenth (third of a month) ^Gen. 24, 55; or in the way of enlargement, e. g. ii< 5[ni;i^l or rather that thou seest. Judges 18, 19 comp. 1 Sam. 29, 3; and so it is distinguished from QN in inteiTOgative clauses in the second question where something is put which is entirely dif- I or ferent. Ar. rather, also Comp. .a.r. . explained by Jj. — b) if perhaps, or perhaps, Lat. sin, where iN announces a case which revokes the preceding Lev. 4, 23 28 ; ^i^^-Teq iN or if perhaps he answers thee 1 Sam. 20, 10 (Vulg. si forte); pT51 iN or if perhaps he takes hold of Is. 27, 5; tiS'iN if then perhaps Lev. 26, 41, comp.'^2 Sam. 18, 13; Ez. 21, 15; Mal. 2, 17. In this sense it may be sometimes translated he it so that, he it then so, but the connecting of of element is entirely lost; Ar. jj! .f, — c) or if, putting quite another case, for which however "'^ iN also stands Lev. I- I 13, 16. Most of the gradations are ca- pable of being recognised only by means of the connecting clauses. — 2. iN K'tib Peov. 31, 4 as an interrogative, for which the K'ri reads "iN (comp. Gen. 4, 9) where? "15123 iN (so to say:) where is strong drink'? But it is also possible that iN or "'N as an interrogative like TSia contains within itself a negation and so one might translate, not strong drink! The group iN, "iN, iN. It is distinguished from iN , in which the disjunctive element prevails, and from DN, which expresses pure condition, without respect to the circumstance whether the transaction be conceived of as taking place or not; and from lb, which is commonly used only in cases of hope. See iblN. — 2. suhst. n. in the signification of ^N, but probably in TS1N alone. ' rK*>* C-45 is "El, contracted from m« 35 niN ixiaN; comp. IJil'^i} from ItS'^^N) n. p. m. EzEA 10, 34." ^'I^ I. (not used) intr. to he hoUow, hollowed, bowed. With the stem SN is IT cognate Aram. :iN (laSN), whence comes SWN flute (comp.b"'bn from bti), with a harder initial sound in Arab. oLa- to be hollow, bellied, v_5^ skin, belly, and also the Hebr. Ini-J belonging to the proper name iia. Derivatives iis and the proper name nbi*. 31^^ n. (not used) intr. to return, turn about, to amend, Ar. i-}|t (med. Waw). This stem aN (a ■' ' ' I IT T to appoint necromancers 2 Kings 21, 6; 2 Che. 33, 6; 'Nrt T'Drt, 'Nrt iTi'iSM ' ' IT r ■• ' IT r : • 1 Sam. 28, Z % to cut off, to put away the necromancers; 'N rib5*.S skilled in necromancy 28, 7. niail!* see nhs. b''3iX (prop. part.=bj3!S from b|?N H.) n. p. of an overseer of David's camels (aibtt.m-b?), who is himself designated an IsHmaelite (■'b5>53ti'') 1 Chk. 27, 30. V,.. ,../ ^ The Ar. title for camel-overseer J^l may perhaps be considered as a pro- per name. ^21>t see bai«. "^IT IT \ TIJ^ I. (unused) 1. to turn, wind, sur- round, i. e. like aSD either intr. to move and turn about circularly, or trans, to surround, embrace, close about, and metaphorically like aab , Ar. JL&. , to turn, occasion, cause something. Hence are derived T^iS , IliS (which see)^ ninj«. IIS* has the same sensuous fundamental idea, and differs from the present only in sound. — 2. to be powerful, firm, strong, a metaphor which is also found in Tiy and bltl , properly to be encircled, firmly surrounded, comp. the German "strong" and "Strang" (Hebr. iTIJp, !^]l?) Tll^)i -^i^- '>lt (med. Je), whence come Jul and ot strength. Derivative TNM. — 3. to veil, to cover, also from the' fundamental signification of sur- rounding, spec, applied to a cloud veiling the horizon, comp. ISS. — Derivative IN. The Ar. signification in oil to bend proceeds from to writhe (with pain or anguish) and is also found in blti; the meaning to be troublesome, burdensome is properly speaking, to be firmly sur- rounded or pressed; derivative JtO.I, hardship. "TlK n. (not used) see the noun TiN. IIS {,pl. CI") m. fire-turner, poker, ru- tabulum, consequently from KW 1. 1 ; but since TIN is described as smoking Is. 7, 4 or taken from the fire Zech. 3, 2 or from the burning Amos 4, 11, it cannot mean poker, but only fire-brand, as the Targum 11N for T^Bb (Job 12, 5) and the versions have taken it. Pro- bably the root "TiS (iw) is here tanta- mount to the Aramaean iStN, Ar. \l to bum. nilii* see ni^i*. mi< I. (Kal unused) intr. 1. equivalent to iiSN to be inclined to an object, hence IT T , . to will, desire. Derivatives IN, ■'1i<.»> n. p. ■'IN. — 2. (not used) to dwell, in- '■■■■■ 3* r\)^ 36 -j^^D bm habit, properly to incline, establish one- self, as InSti passed from a like funda- mental signification to that of dwelling, encamping. Hence "'N. Pih. rt|ij (fut. !n?N^) to desire strongly or eagerly, in a good as well as a bad sense, and also in the signification to strive after Ps. 132, 13 14, always with the accusative of the object. The sub- ject of the afiection is usually denoted by laai Deut. 12, 20; Job 23, 13 ; Prov. 21, l6'.' Derivative ii^iN. Mithp. ilflsnll (fut. ap. lijn^) to shew oneself wishing or desiring, then gene- rally: to long for, with the accusative of the object Jer. 17, 16; Am. 5, 18; or also absolutely to have a desire 2 Sam. 23, 15; with b: to long for something Prov. 23, 3 6.' niN.n n^t?n^ to long a longing i. e. to have a vehement desire 21,26; Ps.106,14.— Derivative niNFi I. ' ' ' iT-:i- The root M-1N as ii-is* has no con- nexion with the Ar. 15** to long for, desire in its original signification, since this means properly adspirare, to breathe upon; on the contrary it coheres with (^^1 to bend, incline, i. e. to settle down, encamp, dwell (similarly the Hebrew '^}.!Q)i Syr. ^oi to make inclined, 'j>o]z^ to be inclined. T\)'^ n. to measure off, mark, pro- perly equivalent to nin. Only iuHithp. WNriin (in the form tah dni^Nnn Num. 34, 10) to murk for oneself, to sign, if it does not rather stand for tarji^nl-i (from niFi). Derivative iniNp 11. "Gbn. 49, 26 boundary; on the contrary niN (from ".!!i?) « ^ign, riN and niN as tie sign of the accusative are not to be derived from JTiN n. ITT njij ni. belonging to •'N {jpl. Qiin), ■'^'i') '^,'J^) see these words. n^N ("• ^}J^) /• desire, lust, longing, usually connected with It5s3 Deut. 12, 15; Hos. 10, 10. On Prov'''"31, 4 some read the K'tib IN equivalent to }i?N; but see iN. ' " " I *1J< (not used) perhaps tantamount to tlt^ (in t^t;ia) to look forth, hence to wait, hope. Derivative ''T1X {hoped for) n. p. m. Neh. 3, 25. bV\'^ n. p- of the sixth son of Jok- tan and thence patriarch of the district Zanaa in South Arabia Gen. 10, 27, where the kings of Temen resided. Arabian tradition names JKI 'AsM or Zanaa ben 'As^l the founder of Zanaa, and 'Usal is still retained as the old name of this district. In the passage Ez. 27, 19, where in our present text b-TINHi is pointed, the versions have taken it as a proper name, only the LXXreadbTJsa i^ 'Aaril, Vulg.bTlNM en V T I" ' ' ° IV I" Mozel, Aqu. and Syr. ?T1N53 from Uzal. See bTWM. IT : l"]'}^ interj. An exclamation of sor- I row: woe! alas! It appears absolutely but seldom Num. 24, 23, or with the aceus. Ez. 24, 6. Most frequently it occurs with b Num. 21, 29. It stands parallel with' liiN Prov. 23, 29, which is also connected with it radically, lili, iT^iN, ■'iiiS and the nouns ij*, ii^iN are IT ' r-.-: I- ' iT- cognate. '''ItJ {inclination) n. p. m. Numb. 31, 8. niiS interj. equivalent to "'is Ps. 120, 5, of which it is a farther deve- lopment. b'^'Ji* {pi. S"']?'''!!?) m. properly equi- valent to bS5 , with which it is cognate by root: slack, loose, from blN, and by a common transference to folly, badness: a /bo? Prov. 1,7; 7, 22; b^pBto 'N 10, 7 a fool of lips L e. a prattler; d'ibiN 10, Ar. Jf. — 2. of a person, powerful, mighty, chief, 2 Kings 24, 15 K'tib, cor- responding to 'bi'nii 'nia.5 and 'nia vs. 14; but yet modified again, possessors, the rich. For "iblN the K'ri has chosen the usual ■'b^N Ex. 15, 15 ; Ez. 17, 13. ''b'liS; (formed from b'^'iN) adj. m. foolish!,' % W'"| Zbch. 11, 15 a foolish shepherd. V^i^ ''• P- of tte river Eulaeus, Dan. 8, 2, by which Susa is surrounded (Plin. h. n. 6, 31; Arr. exp. Al. 7, 7), and where is also the Choaspes (Her. 1, 188; Str. 15, 728); in Pehlevi Aw Halesh i. e. the pure water, now Kara-Su. 'N ']''2i Dan. 8, 16 between {he two hanhs of the Eulaeus. vli^ and ibN adv. and conj. from r '' '• IN in its conditional signification or if, hut if, and "'b not, hence 1. if not, ei fn^ Num. 22, 33, hence Ibn "^Esra renders it by ■'bib, since the latter, taken from lb and "lb equivalent to ib , signifies for the most part if not. In this sense it is connected with the perfect. From the original if not arose 2. perhaps, applied in cases of fear, doubt, hope, mockery Gen. 16, 2; 18, 24; 24, 5; Is. 47, 12. Hence 3. if perhaps Hos. 8, 7. Signi- fications 2 and 3 require to be joined with the imperfect, and the language departs from this usage only in a few cases. — 4. whether perhaps ? if perhaps f n^isiN 38 |1« consequently in some passages equiva- lent to Ar. iJliJ. In Nxjmb. 22, 33 it stands for sblb. — In the same way is compounded i^ijnoTs, Aram. S^mI?"'';!, jiaiiif abridged >»?, NM^, Maltese evvella i. e. ^.t, perhaps; on the contrary the a^ « - . , Ar. Jlc, (Jol! signifies only whether it he that, and is not connected with "'bN. a'^blN see bw. dbl!l< (ia cowsf;-. with Kametz im- pure; pi. c. I'abN, comp. iai3, SNiB!a, nS'na, ^J^ "'ll'?? ,' Q'^aNi^??) m. properly fitted or joined into one another, hence vault, arch, formed as a noun from DbSJ?? (from QbN which see), and therefore he- sides t3^'lN the original DbN frequently occurs also. As a technical expression in building it denotes: l.hall, vestibule, ■nSlBln DbiN Ez. 40, 7 porch; NBSn 'N 1 Kings 7,7 a throne-porch, i. e. the pecuHar arching oyer the throne which enlarges into a hall ; and because judg- ment was also administered in this hall, it was termed UbtumM DbN ; D'''Ti'ai»n 'N IT : • - IT 1 ' r - IT porch of pillars 7, 6. Such porches or halls stand in connexion with rT'S Ez. 40, 48; ba-^rt 1 Kings 7, 21; 'iSn Ez. 41, 15; and DbiN 2 Che. 15, 8 and 29, 7 17 might stand very well for the temple, as the LXX, Ibn Gandch and Kimchi have understood it. The Coptic eA4>jM. has been adopted from the LXX. — The stem is dbN to bind, from the inter- lacing of the beams (comp. tHN), like rrnSN arch from lim, hisabsi citadels, IT--: TT ' it:- ' likewise from ObN; but the rendering by vestihulum, porticus is inexact, and the LXX often retain the Hebrew word. See dbi?. 2. {solitary, from tjbN) n.p. m. IChr.7, 16; 8, 39 Hl^li^ adversat.^); 3, 7; Is. 59, 4; on the contrary Jee. 4, 14 TjaiN is from DjiJ I. iSiS'ia son of my hurt i. e. son of pain Gen. 35, 18 ; "'SNa in my sorrow Deut. 26,14; Wi^m 13r\b' bread of sorrows i. e. sorrowful repast ,''Hos. 9, 4. One might, however, take a"'5iN here and in Pkot. 11, 7 for a participial noun from ^IN (comp. aia, Situ) afflicted, sorrowing. — 2. the' goods, property, possession which have been obtained by toil and weariness; Job 20, 10 iiis his substance i. e. what belongs to him; &g. punishment i. e. what is deserved from the work of sin, Ps. 94, 23 (Wis); Job 21,19 (isiis). •jiiSt (with suff. isi!!*, D5iN; pi. Q-'SiN) m. 1. equivalent to tlNn. substanceB-OS. 12, 9; — 2. effort li" ^; then metapho- rically, power, strength in general, also in the plural D'^S'iN Is. 40, 26 ; Job 18, 7 ; spec, applied to the power of Behemoth ])i^ 40 1D^« 40, 16; to the power of begetting Psalm 105, 36, hence )'\!f n^W"! first-born Gen. 49, 3; Deut. 21, l'7;"Ps. 78, 51 and ^IN poetically son generally. Job 18,12. The idea of power proceeds here from exertion and labour. — 3. (power) n. p. m. Numb. 16, 1. V]^ and "JN (Egyptian: sun) 1. n. p. of a city in lower Egypt on the east bank of the Nile, the chief place of a nome called after it Gen. 41, 45 50; 46, 20; written 11N Ez. 30, 17. The prophet Jeremiah (43, 13) paraphrases the old Egyptian name by 125a 125 n''a (temple of the sun), the Arabic by tjiM-ii i>^ (fountain of the sun) ; the LXX have 'HhovnoXig, Heliopolis ; Plin. (5, 11) oppidum solis; and there was really a famous temple of the sun with a great priesthood (Her. 2, 3 59). In Coptic this city is also written Uln, and oein, outoiiu light has been com- pared. — 2. n. p. of another town of the sun in Syria, for which, however, ■JIN is written. See TiN-ni»pa. 131^ (also iSN, Talm. isii*; the ter- mination 1- is eq^uivalent to ^n-; rich, gain-bringing) n. p. of a city 'in the neighbourhood of Lydda (I'b), built by the Benjamites , which was populous in the post-exile age Eze. 2, 33 ; 1 Chk. 8, 12. In the neighbourhood was found a plain which is called 'N n^jja Nbh. 6, 2, where many hamlets (d''1E)3) were. — Comp. thePhenician N5iN lind, proper name of a Tingitan river" and NiiN'SlLi the name of a Numidian town. " ni»3ii< K'tib see ni^iN belonging to n-r. . D31U* {ability, power; formed from^ii^ with a-) proper name of a Horite and of a Horite tribe Gen. 36, 23; then also of a Jew 1 Chr. 2, 26. The noun-ter- mination a- was a favourite one in Edomite proper names, comp. an5>Jl ^^i>^ tDU'^ll, Clt^n, h'VS; so too ^-'""' 131}* (the same) n. p. m. Gen. 38, 9. ^^ (not used) tr, a stem presup- posed for neiN in the signification to measure; and one might compare the ritis or Maphartis.' See\&'i)3. Coptic ton to count, to measure. As all the measures and weights of the Phe- nicians passed from them to the Greeks and Semites (comp. fivd nw; iTjJii as- QuTiov; ^p_xci^og; "ib noQog; riNO adtov) and came'from them assuredly to Egypt also, the stem iqW belonging to iiBiN seems perhaps to be old Semitic, espe- cially as iMh, ^S, riND, S)?, na and others are of Semitic origin. Probably tlN (f|1N) is equivalent to r|N (tlSN which see) to surround, to encompass, hence ^isijj something round. Comp. the Talm. tjIN, turn, way, manner, as 'JBN in its metaphorical acceptation. IDIi^ ra.^. of a gold country, whence Sri3 and ilriT were brought, interchanged with 1251125'in and ^'D^m Jee. 10, 9; Dan. 10, 5, coriip. Ps. 45, 10; 1 Che. 29, 4. (In the first passage ^Ofir is put for 'Ufas by the Targ., Syr., Theod.) The ge- nuine Hebrew TS might lead to the taking the proper name TBIN as Semi- tic, compounded of IN coast (sfee IN and ■^n) and TS gold, i. e. gold coast. But though the Hebrew may have thought of such a derivation in the word, the country is still represented as a distant one, which only sea-faring people could reach; and it is not improbable that it is originally like 1j?iN, d^l'is and others, of foreign origin. Since it is also inter- changed with NSffl Ps. 72, 15, and this is regarded as belonging to south Ara- bia like "IBIN, 'Ufas must be unhesitat- ingly looked upon as the name of a gold coast in southern Arabia, which originated in an Indian colony there, the Indians having other emporiums besides in that territory. TS*iN might then have arisen from the Sanskrit vi- pdgd, a name of the district of Hypha- sis, whence the colony proceeded. See a:,l':i and l-iBiN. — tBia ant l Kings 10, 18 was read by the Syr. TBINU 'T and interpreted by 'Ofir; but it may have been a peculiar gold place in the vicinity of TB>iN, as there was besides IBiN a iBiu there, in Arrian (Peripl. ' p. 13. 18) and Plin. (h. n. 6, 26) Mapha-^ n^Dii^ 41 "lyiN IIDTN (written also IBIN, I^Sij) 1. n. p. of the llth son of Joktan Gen. 10, 29 ; 1 Che. 1, 23, hence too of an Arabian tribe, as all the Joktanite names are at the same time the names of Ara- bian tribes. — 2. (with a local Mlicii*) proper name of a province, district or city in Arabia, where was the seat of that tribe, which as the name of a place (like btiN, maisin, Niia, nb-iin and IT ' vjT i--:' n : ' IT •-: others) was the cause of the personal name being introduced into the ethnographical table. The Scripture says that Solomon's ships with Phenician seamen fetched thence gold, sandalwood (iiabs), dns, precious stones, silver, ivory (Q'^aiiiis) and other things. 'N a^iT, 'N Qnjs then became usual designations 1 Kings 9, 28 ; 10, 11; Ps. 45, 10; Job 28, 16; Is. 13, 12; 1 Chr. 29, 4; 2 Che. 8, 18; 9, 10. Poetically T'S'IN stands for gold gene- rally. Job 22, 24, the product bearing the name of the country, comp. ffli'iU'lFi. From the Biblical accounts we gather the following results, 1. that "Ofir was a coast land, to which people came in ships, 2. that the main articles of com- merce were gold, precious stones and other costly things, 3. like bTIN , NiilJ J T. . IT ' IT : and others it must be looked for in southern Arabia, in the vicinity of NilZJ, TSW, TSia, d^m The fact that Jo- sephns (Ant. 8, 6, 4) looks for it in In- dia, that many Indian articles of com- merce are found among the productions which the Hebrews traded in there, and that the Arabic sometimes renders it by 1>-Lgj|, must be explained on this ground that Ofir like ^Ufas was founded by an Indian colony and was the emporium to which Indian things were brought for exchange. Accordingly the LXX trans- late it hj JlaxpaQcc, 2cocpiQ, HovqisiQ &c., thinking of the Egyptian name for In- dia (Copt. Coqip), but which is nothing else than the Hovnaqa of Ptolemy and the Oxmnaga of Arrian, that cannot be identical with ^0/ir. — "With relation to the origin of the word, it has been de- rived from In {coast) and Tis equivalent to S.vi riches, hence understood riches- coast; or compared with Maphartis in south-western Arabia; but it is probably of Indian origin. ^BiN (rarely l&N; c. ^siiS!; ^Z. dijBiN, c. iS&iJS, with suf. dipiasiN) m. properly circle, hence a wheel, a usual chariot wheel Ex. 14, 25 ; Is. 28, 27 (belonging to iibw. and inj33'itt). Hence it is ap- plied to the wheel's under the ten bases of the ten vases in Solomon's temple, where we learn from the description (1 KiNUS ch. 7) that they had naves (tji'nijjti) and therefore turned about axles (d'^SIO), to which they were fas- tened by tenons (riiT'); in other re- spects they had felloes (d^'SJi) and spokes (d'lp.^atl) like common wheels. It is also applied to the wheels of the threshing machine, which, rolling over the lying, loosened sheaves, separated the grain from the chaff; and hence it is used of wheels of an instrument for putting to death, which was made like a threshing machine to execute the punishment of threshing bodies to pieces Peov. 20, 26 (comp. 2 Sam. 12, 31 ; 2 Kings 13, 7 ; Am. 1, 3). In prophetic vision it is also ap- plied to the wheels of the divine throne, which are called in Dan. 7, 9 ']''b5b5 and whose wonderful form is described in Ez. chs. 1 and 10. See IQN. 'r T V)^ (part. Y^ , pi. d^StN) 1. intr. pro- perly pressed together, hence to be narrow, applied to space Josh. 17, 15. — 2. trans, to press, to drive, Ex. 5, 13 ; hence to hasten. — 3. refl. to urge oneself, , to hasten, to he in haste, e. g. T'DBSllb to acquire riches Peov. 28, 20; isiab Josh. 10, 13; d^ba'na 'n Peov. 19, 2 \o be of swift foot; d'l'iina 'N to be hasty in words i. e. thoughtless 29, 19; with ya to hasten from, withdraw Jee. 17, 16. Hif. y^Nln (fut. Y''^'^) *" ''^^9^ <"* ^'"■y one, with 13 of the person Gen. 19, 15, or with the infin. following, Is. 22, 4. — The stem Ym in its fundamental signification sounds in Syr. I ji., Talm.yj)? ; with audible initial sound in yp-b , 'pp-S ; in a wider sense to hasten, flee also in ti* ('IS")- nSiS (c. l5SiN; pi. rri'iaiN, -i^k, ^)i)^ 42 m« «. nilJjiiN, "i's) m. properly tlie laid up, inclosed, preserved, from'iSN (which see) ^fter the form Dnin, SbiJ*, hence 1. a ■store, stock Pkov. 15, 16; 21, 6 20; of provisions (bSNH, )izil5, )1l) 2 Chk. 11, 11, or of precious things Hos. 13, 15- Most frequently it is applied to the trea- sures of the temple, called i'^ 'N , r^ja 'N ■''i or d'^n'^N '3 '^, or to those of the royal house. Figuratively and poetically abtrf , ni'i , "rjiifri , Tna, SiBp. 'n Jqb. 38, 22 ; Pkov. 10, 2- Is. ib, 3; Jer. 10, 13. — 2. store-house, treasury, conservatory Ps. 33,. 7; Jo. 1, 17; 2 Chr. 32, 27; hut n^a ^laiNM Neh. 10, 39 ; Mal. 3, 10 or 'N n-^i n IT ' ' ' i" Dan. 1, 2 stands as the complete ex- pression for it. — For 'nltiNJi we also find written in Zech. 11, 13 l^i^rt (Syr., iTmcAj), which means the temple treasury and is used as an apposition to '^^ nia. Hence the Targum nVs^MN T^ hand of the master of the treasury, Syr. IT-^ ius. Derivative "ISN (denom. from "dH^n) to heap into a treasure, to collect, or to lay up in store 2 EJmas 20, 17 ; Is. 39, 6 ; figuratively to heap up, riz. violence androhhery Am.8,10. Nif. 'nSiiji (fut. 'ISJN:.) to he laid up in store, along with IDtii denom. from IDH Is. 23, 18. '"■■"■•■ Hif. T'ltNil (but only the fut. T^l^iN, comp.'b''5iN'Hos.ll,4; T^as Jer. 46,8; in the voluntative ii'iitiN'i") to set over the IT : I T^ treasury, with 3^ Neh. 13, 13. The noun 'iKii* and also its denomi- native 'nSSN are formed from the stem •nJiN (which see). y\'^ (or IN, after the form 'lit, iBia, aiU; 3. pi. I'nijt; fut. 1n;i; m/'- "r\^) pro- perly equivalent to n'lN to burn, blaze, but in a limited fundamental significa- tion 1. to be clear, to lighten; applied to the morning or the rising sun: to become bright, Tin ^'pjn'n the morning lightened i. e. it became clear Gen. 44, 3 ; impers. hiNl bdb and it be light for you 1 Sam. 29, 10; inf. "nisi 'rjb'iti going and lightening i. e. becoming clearer Peov. 4, 18, comp. "^bifi bi-iS^ EsTH. 9, 4. Figuratively to lighten at a distance, to be bright with prosperity Is. 60, 1. — 2. to become clear, applied to the eyes, as the sign of enlightenment 1 Sam. 14, 27 (K'ri) 29 ; comp. Ps. 38, 31 ; 69,24; Lament. 5, 17, as vice versa hurt and hunger obscure the eyes. — 3. to grow green, to sprout, to blossom, also in ys, ITIS, nni &c. coming from the idea of shining. Derivative liiS II. Nif Tins (fut. 'niijt.']; inf. with^, liNb from 'N!lb) 1. to be light, shining, glorious, applied to God, hence ^'a''*- TiNi cognate in sense with T^IN Ps. 76, 5.' — 2. as Kal, to become clear, to become day, 2 Sam. 2, 32 ; figuratively, to enlighten, to dawn, applied to the soul Job 33, 30. The Mfal sometimes coincides with Kal intrans., as one may see from d'l and d'l5, 'Tfns and 'Tjns, bp_ and bp_5 and others. De- rivatives TiN I., Tin, QiTiN, !rTTiN,'niNn I ' I ' r ' IT ' IT and perhaps InTiN??, with the proper names ■'IIN, b^'^'TlN, rt'iTlN, 1!T''T1N, r ' I" • ' IT • ' IT • 1 ' TlNi'lia and many others. ffif. T^sri (fut. T^n;, ap. iN'n) caus. 1. to lighten, to spread light, with b? over something Gen. 1,15 17 ; Ex. 25, 37 ; with b of the person, to mahe it clear to some one, to enlighten Ex. 13, 21; Is. 60, 19; Neh. 9,19; with the accusative of the ob- ject and sometimes too with b of the per- son, to enlighten, to make clear Ex. 14, 20 ; Neh. 9, 12; Ps. 77, 19; 97,4; but also intrans. like Kal and therefore without a preposition, to be light, to be lightened, to glimmer. Job 41, 24; Ez. 43, 2; Ps. 139,12, properly to spread clearness. — 2. to kindle, to bum, e. g. dry boughs Is. 27, 11, the sacrificial and altar-fire, Mal.1,10, lamps N'um.8,2. — More fre- quently it is employed in metaphorical senses which appear in Hifil as numerous as in the noun 'niN, and of which the principal are these: a) D^J'^I* X! ^ en- lighten one's eyes, i. e. to animate, enliven, to preserve in life Prov. 29, 13; Ps. 13, 4; in particular of spiritual enliven- ing and brightening, i. e. to give insight Ps. 19, 9; EzE. 9, 8. b) QiSB 'Tl to en- lighten the face, i. e. to brighten one up EccLEs. 8, 1, opposite to d^as tW'd to disfigure the countenance; figuratively -n« 43 ^IvS spoken of God, to look gracious, to be favmrable, with a Ps. 119, 135; b 118, 27 i V? 31, 17 ibW Num. 6, 25; Dan! 9, 17; ntj Ps. 67, 2 of the person or thing who is favourable, seldom absolutely Ps.80,4, or with the omission of WiB 118, 27. c) to enlighten in the sense of to teach 119, 130; comp. the cognate in root InTi. — Derivative the proper name T'N''. To the stem TiN belongs the organic root IN, which is also found in 'IN-"' (if 18^ he Semitic), Ti-IS I, 'iN'Fi. This root appears besides with a harder in- itial sound in il-T' 11., in-'in 11. In IT T ' IT T Arabic there are only preserved from this stemjji to kindle, .i.i glow, »l and ^1 to set fire to, \\ fire; and the Ara- maean has also derivatives of the same. niS I. (with suff. ■''niN; pi. d'^'ilN only Ps. 136, 7) m. (also Job 36, 32, since bet- ter mss. read rby for iT^bs*), 1. light, e. g. the early one, that of the early dawn Judges 16, 2, of the sun Is. 30, 26, of the moon 13, 10, of the stars Jee. 31, 35, of the dark weather-cloud i. e. lightning Job 37, 15, of the lamp Jeb. 25, 10; ri'^)?^ 'list light of the splendid stars Zech. 14, 6 (the ']1N&p"' which accompanies should be read according to the K'tib ']1NSJ5^ they draw themselves together and referred to ni'ip^); generally put with i)ja, ^nto, mV, laaiB, n^n, np;, njab, tl'^asiS), ISS, is, and the opposite of^i'iBn and 'bsS^Is.'59, 9; Job 30, 26, and therefore different from liNM , which it' IS the name of the body itself that gives light. More rarely the genitive that be- longs to lis and explains it is omitted, so that Tin stands alone for the early light Neh. 8, 3; Job 24, 13, daylight Ex. 10, 23, sunlight Job 3, 9 ; 31, 26 or sun Is. 5, 30; Hab. 3, 4 (comp. ffl;;; 'N blSliU'' Is. 10,17. is Jehovah so far as he constitutes the salvation of Israel. He is also called tibi5» 'liN 60,19 20, as Israel IT I ' ' in a similar aspect is termed di.ia "liN Is. 42, 6 ; 49, 6 the salvation of the peoples. c) enlightenment, instruction Ps. 43, 3; di'BS *liNb for the enlightenment of the nations Is. 51, 4. d) d''3B "liN light of the face i. e. grace, favour Ps. 4, 7; 44, 4; 89, 16 ; then cheerfulness, joy Job 29, 24. — The pi. di'liN stands for ni'iNM in this sense, but its single occurrence can determine nothing for the signification. — INS Am. 8, 8 see 'nN3. IT ' |- T niN n. (2>i.nnilS, rH!A)f.a. green, bloom- ing plant, a sprout, verdure, ns d'ns 1ii<"''bi>. Is. 18,4 as a clear (lovely) heat on the fresh verdure; nhx Dp.b to gather herbs 2 Kings 4, 39 ; nhitK '^'p the (life- giving) dew of herbs Is. 26, 19. This noun is derived from 'liN in the signi- fication to shine, glitter, so far as verbs of shining are also applied metaphori- cally to blossoming, sprouting, ripening; comp. ys iy^i), ririT, ipj, nps &c., likewise Samar. Sbsb to shine and to sprout, Syr. h°^ fire and jziaii flower. n^N {pi. Q'^'niS, Qi'IIN) m. 1. light- country, light-district, i. e. land of the sun-rising, somewhat like the Homeric TiQog ^M T TjeXior r« (H. ft, 239), allied in sense to HTra east country. Only in the pi.: i''i 1133 dilNa Is. 24, 15 praise I : - I- • IT ' ^ God in the east countries; the prophet names in the same place as the opposite n1« 44 m« lands D^Jl ''"N coast-lands of the Mediter- ranean i. e. of the 'west. Comp. as a parallel case 59, 19, -where in praising Grod :3^i»?a and llJM'ttj-n'nta are used; in iT-;r V r.' r: • ' like manner 45, 6 and others. In Arabic, however, «.f, _}f, _}I means the north, the north country i. e. the region of dark- ness, of night, comp. Talm. liN, Nn'niN evening, Zab. 5oi spirit of darkness (see bs'i'lIN), and accordingly one must trans- late d'^'IN northern countries, looking upon &:iai 'JIBST? in Ps.107,3 and Is. 49, 13 as parallels to D^n "i^N . . . d"'lN. In any case the connexion and parallelism re- quire us to understand here certain lands and districts, eastern or northern. — 2. fire, flame, glow Is. 44, 16; 47, 14; IBN IIN 50,11 glow of fire; 'm '1^^_^'n Ez.5,2 to destroy by fire; figuratively altar ofhurnt- offering Is. 31, 9, the parallel being 'nisn in the same figurative sense. — 3. Only in the pi. Qi'niN (with suf. ^'^'IIN) pro- perly instruction, enlightenment, revelation, used exclusively in the plural to denote the high priests' oracular image which ■was in the shining breastplate of judg- ment (ub;?)??! 1ll5n-bN) along with di^an (which see). Both consisted, according toPA27o(vit.Mos.), of two small oracular images that symbolically represented revelation and truth and were consulted in difficult cases Ex. 28, 30; Lev. 8, 8. '«;? ^Nl^ to ask the "Urim 1 Sam. 28,' 6; 'Nrt lasttiaa bjSld to ask after the sen- tence of the "Urim Numb. 27, 21. As the 'TJrim and Thummim were entirely unknown in the post-exile period, the formula di^nbi D^'iiNb ^pb i535> ^y Ezr. 2, 63 or 'T\)'%) ifeii nbs. n? Neh. 7, 65 till a 'priest appear with 'Urim and Thummim arose for undecided cases of justice. Instead ofthe usual combination O'^^fil 'Cy^ix there is found in Deut. 33, 8 T'^^^'it} ^''•SFi thy Thummim and 'Urim. But where 'a-y,^ stands by itself Num. 27, 21, or occurs parallel with nia'^n andd^N--55 ISAM. 28, 6, it mustbetakeS n^^f>^^^ Thummim. The versions (.li-SJi. SrtKtamia^o\ x«J leXsiotri'iEg) have translated according to the etymology, and have therefore ren- dered them well in part. — 4. n. p. of a city of the Casdim, hence called "Tiijt d^l.toS , where the home of Abraham and his family was Gen. 11, 28 31; 15, 7; Nbh. 9, 7. In wandering to Canaan from this town he arrived first in Charran, which was also looked upon as the city of his birth or home on account of its vicinity Gen. 12, 1 ; 24, 4 10, comp. Acts 7,2 4. We should therefore look for 11N, agreeably to the Scriptures , whether it was a town, or as the LXX (jtaQa twv Xaldaiwv) take it the name of a coun- try, in northern Mesopotamia in the vicinity of Charran where a Chaldean nomad-horde may have dwelt. For the more exact determination of the place, the views of Nicolaus Damasc. (Jos. Ant. 1, 7, 2) and Eupolemus (Eus. praep. ev. 9, 17) which assumed as identical with Ur a town Ovqiij in Babylonia, subse- quently called KaitaQivrj, have been com- pared, others combining with them the fort mentioned by Ammian (25, 8) Ur in north-eastern Mesopotamia, a six days' journey west of Hatra. But inasmuch as the former explanation is impossible in itself, since Scripture can mean no- thing but Mesopotamia, a fortress is also an unsuitable place for a nomad-horde, which could hardly have dwelt in such a place. Hence it is best to attempt to determine nothing more exactly. The etymology of the proper name "l^iN is either Semitic, signifying east country, or equivalent to Ih mountain, or it is to be looked for in the Arian languages as though it had come from the d'''niB3. Accordingly one might compare the Zend vara i. e. fort (Vend. p. 130), Sanskrit Ur a town, Pers. awra = Kalah a fort. The Syrian lexicographei-s explain Ur by j^-^. Jewish and Arabian tradition, followed by Jewish and Christian inter- preters, have taken 1\ applied to the sacred books. — 4. Military standard of single tribes, flaff, different from ba'vt , the banner of three tribes together, Numb. 2, 2. — 5. time-sign for the purpose of marking certain portions of time Gen. 1, 14. — 6. om£n a,Jid prodigy, along with nsi?a and like the latter signifying, an omen or sign of something future, a premonitory sign Is. 8, 18; 20, 3; Ez. 4, 3, and in all the significations of nsin whether as a sign of a future occurrence, a sign and proof oi a thing i&c., or a wonder gener- ally. — 7. memorial, properly a monu- ment by way of remembrance Is. 55, 13. — These significations all proceed from sign as in the Mediterranean (Indo- Germanic), comp. aiiiia, prodigium &c., Phenic. ni«, Arab, xjf, Aram. ni<, fzf In the frequent use of this word the feminine construction can only pass for an exception. Gen. 9, 12 17; Josh. 4, 6; 24, 17; 1 Sam. 10, 7; Ezek. 4, 3; Jee. 44, 29, which might take place for many reasons. As to the derivation, the word is usually taken as having its origin in mi* or Tm from !i1N to mark, for which the Arabic is appealed to, where XJl has the same meaning. But even if the stem IniN actually exists in He- brew in the signification to ps the limits of, whence niNn Gen. 49, 36 boundary is derived, that circumstance does not compel us to assume the same stem for niN also, especially as in Arabic the noun xjf in its manifold senses cannot always be referred back to ^^X Hence it appears preferable in my opi- nion to look for its stem in niN I. nix n. (only with suf. 'JlpniN, Sli- Ez. 23, 45 47, bsniN Josh." 23, 15, usually written defectively iris, sni«, irii«, fins, Dnjj, ^nN, yet these too kre occasionally written fully; from niN III.) m. like the other form TN (which see), that is used with the grave suffixes (DSHN, drt"), properly the being, exist- ence, essence, body, hence person; "')''N'j "h^ 'O'Dt)^ Hag. 2, 17 and your person did not turn to me, so that it properly serves as a kind of pronoun for greater emphasis, like Dit?, 1BS5 and D'1.5.. From the fundamental signification of niN and riN body, being, person, which then passes over as in the case of QltS; into the signification self, essential, pe- culiar, so far as it occupies the place of a person, and the essence of a per- son or thing, the following peculiarities are to be explained: 1. A noun is made prominent as subject at the beginning of a sentence or part of a sentence by riN (niN) prefixed, which may be ex- plained by as to, quoad, or in some similar way, usually when there is a transition to something new Ez. 17, 21 ; 44, 3; Is. 57, 15; Neh. 9, 19, or when the subject is prominently adduced by a special expression in an inserted clause 2 Kings 10, 6; Jek. 45, 4; Ez. 35, 10. — 2. With the subject before bb, when something is summed up by that means Ex. 1, 14; Judges 20, 44 46; Dan. 9, 13, or before numeral words in general 2 Sam. 2 1, 22. — 3. For the purpose of emphasising or making prominent the subject in a passive or intransitive connexion of the discourse Gen. 4, 18; 17, 5; 27, 42; Ex. 10, 8; 21, 28; 25, 28; 27, 7; Lev. 10, 18; Num. 26, 60 ; 32, 5 ; Deut. 12, 22 ; 20, 8 ; lEiNGs 2, 21 ; 2 Kings 18, 30 ; Jee. 35, 14; 38, 4; 50, 20; Josh. 7, 15; 2 Sam. 21, 11; Am. 4, 2; Peov. 16, 33, where the verb cannot always be taken as impersonal or the neuter of the passive as it were, since all cases could not be properly explained by that means, and the intransitive connexion could not be resolved, e. g. 1 Sam. 20, 13 ; 2 Sam.1 1, 25 j Josh. 22,17; Neh. 9, 32 and elsewhere. In this sense also riN before the subject should be taken, where it stands after a 1 and, since that and can give no accusative force to riN, and the accom- mi< 47 nm panying verb as intransitive or passive obviously refers to the circumstance that rs stands in this case before the subject, and that the clauses are more circum- stantial, e. g. Num. 3, 26 ; Jer. 27, 8 ; 36, 22; 2KiNGs6,5; Ez.20,16; 2 Che. 31, 17; Neh. 9, 34. This original and toler- ably frequent application of rijg (nis), after its signification as a noun had been dropped, in order to bring forward the subject in certain cases in a more emphatic way than it could be done by the article or by nr and Nl^rt, is often misapprehended by versions and inter- preters because they have been led astray by its preponderating use with the object. Thus e. g. the Targ. and Vulg. in 1 Sam. 17, 34 read SiNI, and interpreters have taken HN in the sense of with; in 2 Kings 6, 5 bpSin'riN lias been taken for '55 nN the axe, edge of the iron, i. e. the iron hoe, and so in many cases, which is unnecessary after the explanation that has been givefl. — But the most frequent use of riN (niN) is 3. as a sign of the accusative, depend- ing either on an active verb following Hag. 2, 5, or preceding Gen. 24, 30; 25, 20; Ex. 9, 16; 1 Sam. 25, 2; 2 Sam. 6, 21; 1 Kings 20, 12; even in cases where the active verb has become a noun in the infinitive, having the ar- ticle Jee. 32, 16; or between the verb active and subject Is. 20, 1; Gen. 4, 15; Josh. 14, 11, or where in consequence of the verb a double accusative is re- quired and one of them is prefixed with a suf. (ihiN) Deut. 31, 7; Jee. 25, 15; EcCLBS. 12, 9. Where the object, which must have the sign of the accusative in consequence of the verb active, is a personal pronoun, niN appears in its place with a suffix, as '^nis, iriN &e., if that pronoun cannot be attached to the verb itself as an accusative suffix: i. e. ^^^{ becomes the bearer of the personal pronoun in the accusative, which is al- ways the case when emphasis requires the accusative of the personal pronoun Numb. 22, 33 ; Jee. 7, 19, or when the verb has two objects in the personal pronoun and the Hebrew verb active can only have one suffix 2 Sam. 15, 25, or where another mood of the verb does not admit of the apposition of the ac- cusative as a suffix Gen. 4, 15; but in in general without being confined to certain cases. — 4. It is used as an accusative sign i. e. nN, or the more closely attached and shorter TIN, be- fore substantives, whether they go be- fore or come after the verb by which they are conditioned, whether they are more or less definite, relate to persons^ or things, whether they have the article,, or reject it in poetical discourse or briefer expressions. In this application -riN also stands with different pronouns in order to put them into the accusative e. g. ■'??"riN whom? Hf riN this; TlBN.-niJ the person whom or the thing which; or also with other words, when they are supposed to be nouns, e. g. ^S'HN Gen.. 1, 21; with numerals Numb. 7, 7, when they seem to belong to substantives. — 5. The accusative -sign also stands in rare cases before substantives and other words, where they cannot be regarded as expressive of the object. This is done a) in designations of time Ex. 13^ 7; Deui. 9, 25; b) in announcing the going to a place Judges 19, 18. But in cases 4 and 5 there is not only great license in putting or omitting the "nsj, but it is also interchanged with other prepositions. — 6. Another use of the- present accusative -particle is the re- flexive, when the vocable appears as a separate word with a suffix, e. g. fink Jee. 7, 19 themselves; Ez. 34, 2 8 10. The acceptation of it as a reflexive might be extended all the more readily as this self, just as in the case of fflSS ,, fiSy, fi'1.5., comes from the original signi- fication of it, and the reflexive syllable -nn, Aram. -riN &c. in verbs, originated in our present HN (nis). — 7. Very seldom does another preposition follow the accusative-sign before the noun, for the purpose of combining two relations- by two prepositions, as 2 Sam. 19, 32 he went over Jordan with (tin) the hing I'l'nna-nN itlV'O^' to conduct him upon, (and) over Jordan. The K'ri endeavoured ni« 48 1^5 to avoid such an accumulation, by read- ing ')'7.'li!ln, as the versions also did. Its frequent interchange with another preposition is something merely exter- nal. In this case it appears accident- ally as nis also, is smoothed down to TN and signifies with. Though this preposition reads with the suffix "'riN, Tjnsj, its resemblance without the suffix causes a confusion of the two, so that even "'iniN appears for ■^rust and vice versa, especially in 1 and 2 Kings, Jee., EzEK. and elsewhere, e. g. iniN for iriN 2 Kraas 1, 15; 3, 11; 8, 8; dniN for iDFiSt 6, 16 and other places, rarely in the earlier Scriptures, as Josh. 14, 12; 2 Sam. 24, 24. The derivation of this vocable, which reads independently before a suffix rriiS , and as an accusative-particle close- ly before a noun nt} (before Mak- kef "Pin), must be looked for, as abeady mentioned, in the verb riN (niN) 111. to be, exist, and niN like PiN is a noun- form, like those which are often deve- loped out of concave stems (ii>). As original nouns riN and niN properly denote being, eaiistence, essence, and are also identical by root with ;15;, -l2Ji (nij is equivalent to llji, as, esse); and this fact becomes still clearer from the Aram, accusative-sign, Targ. n^, Syr. i^, rightly explained by £ar 'Mi as person, body, being (x*u^. ,_awJ( i:yfi3 X v) ■^ ■My). Hence the successive deve- lopment of its usage proceeds from this original noun-signification and is not difficult of determination when we con- sider aay, D'TS., aiss and the Ar. pa- rallels L^, jyt. But it is easily seen also that the reflexive syllable "nfi or the Aramaean -m (Ps. 76, 5; 2'Che. 20, 35), used in stems passively in Ara- maean and ^thiopic, must have come from the same vocable; and since the reflexive element actually lies in riN and niJS as in their parallels, and no 'trace appears of the Tau being unradical and unessential, it cannot possibly be identi- fied with the Ar. L t , .iEthiopic Mjd, &c., because they belong to a quite diflferent group. It^ (pronominal stem) adv. demon, ori- ginally ibi, there, as a correlate to ''N (■'JS) where? transferred to time': then, about that time, at that time, 1. definitive in relation to the past, and therefore where the perfect is suitable. It should be rendered accordingly at that time, then. Gen. 4, 26; 49, 4; Ex. 4, 27; 15, 15; Josh. 22,31; Judges 13, 21; 2 Sam. 21, 17. — 2. in relation to a transaction unfinished by the narrator or that is proceeding. Here it should be rendered by then, hereupon and is connected with the imperfect Gen. 24, 41; Ex. 12, 44; 15, 1; Lev. 26, 34; Num. 21, 17; Deut. 4, 41; Josh. 8, 30; 10, 12. It is in- correct to suppose that the imperfect de- pends in this case upon TN and stands for the perfect, since that is solely conditioned by the nature of the He- brew imperfect, and stands even after CitJ, after vau consecutive, elsewhere moreover in the course of a sentence (Job 3, 3; 15, 7), not caused by external combinations. — 3, It also stands in connexion with the imperfect, when it really expresses the future, Ps. 96,12; or — 4. in order to introduce the apodosis with then. Job 9,31; Peov. 2, 5, to which belong too Jee. 22, 15; Ps. 40, 8; for it does not signify therefore, as a causal word, but stands before the apodosis, announcing the succession of time; nor is it pleonastic 2 Sam. 2, 27, since it introduces the apodosis here also with yea then, and the member of the verse must be translated: surely then they would have gone up not before the morning &c. — Connected with prepo- sitions we find simply TNM, once sepa- rated into TN")?? Jee. 44^ 18, either in the signification from that time onward i. e. since then, or time finished as TN is applied to the past, and there- fore a) adverbially: foi-merly, heretofore, in former time, before, from of old, from ancient times, Prov. 8, 22; 2 Sam. 15, 34; Ps. 93, 2; Is. 16, 13; 44, 8; 45, 21; 48, 3 5 7; Jer. 44, 18, parallel with ti^iS'p, OniM, dii ■'SBb, and antithetic tLu. foun- dation &c. N^TN (from ITN) Aram. adv. deter- (T : ." ^ t ■ ^ , mined, firm, unalterable, undeniable, tinsM 'N 12)3 Dan. 2, 5 8 the word from me' is unalterable, i. e. the thing is firmly de- termined, where N'lTN as an adverb does not agree with the "gender of the noun. The Talmudic njaSDb 'S 'N means: a certain one is consistent, true, with relation to his opinion. — But as the verb ITN does not occur elsewhere, the adverb N1TN appears nowhere except in the two passages of Biblical Aramaeism, and inasmuch as N'^JT'I'IN Ezra 7, 23 appears to be N'nTN"'TlN and the adverbs N51S&N, N'lTTlN are also formed ex- T ;[- : T ' it: - :- temally in the same way, it is not im- probable that NITN as well as the latter words is old Persian, with which may be compared azdd, assiduous (Inscription of Nekschi Eustum v. 43 45). niJ^ see TN. it t it niTN m. vaaanog, hyssop, a well known aromatic plant, which grows on walls 1 Kings 5, 13, and when bound in bunches (iliaN) serves as a brush or fan in sacred sprinklings Ex. 12, 22; Lev. 14, 4 6 49 51. Among the dif- ferent kinds of hyssop, comprehended under the name SiTN, according to Saadja, Maimuni, Ibn G'andch, Eimchi, Tanch{im,Bertinoro it was organy, called among the Greeks bqiyavov, among the Arabians ^5*-io , Ja*-)- I* '^^^ ^^ Vhs- nicians who brought SiTN to the Greeks '■'4 ^11« 50 ^1« and other Semites along with the name, as is the case with other names of eastern plants and shrubs, e. g. t3"'?3)5iI5 avxa-iMVOS, Ni^)? aimos, '\'b'2 wimvov, lois xvTtQog &c. In the Greek we can still recognise the Phenician pronunciation, and therefore the derivation must like- wise be referred to the Phenician. The stem would be STN, had the word not been adopted &om distant Asia. liTNl m. a belt, girdle for the loins (d^iria'; d:2£br!) Is. 11, 5; Ez. 23, 15; Qirit^B 'N yirdle of linen Jee. 13, 1 ; on the contrary 1ii> '{} girdle of leather 2 Kings 1, 8 was the prophets' girdle. Seldom: /'eMer Job 12, 18, connected with ION. It is formed from the stem 'itn like 5iTN , and the same noun ^^t is found in Arabic Mark. 14, 51 for aivdam, where it denotes a covering, a cloth, generally. ^^^ (pronominal stem) adv. demonstr. then, at that time, only in Ps. 124, 3-5. Compounded of ^T = !iT and N, then shortened into the more common TN (which see). Comp. I^^N, riT. " ■jViJ for )'>im see )m denom. t"T13t^ (with suff. rrnv) f. an ex- pression in the language of sacrifice, which means according to the rendering of the versions (LXX fiv^fioavvov, Vulg. memoriale) properly meat-offering of re- membrance (tins?;) i. e. either what brings the persons sacrificing to the remem- brance of God, or what brings God gratefully to the remembrance of the sacrificers. Hence it is formed accord- ing to 3i/il from 1ST, denoting that holiest pai-t of the meat-offering which was consumed upon the altar Lev. 2 2 9 16; 5,12; 6, 8; Num. 5, 26. But the portion was named 'n not merely as it w-as applied to all kinds of nnsa de- dicated to God and burnt upon the altar; the pure frankincense set out with the shew-bread (in vases) Lev. 24, 7 and which was burnt upon the altar was also so termed (Jos. Ant. 3, 10, 7). In this sense also the verb T'Stti means to sacrifice Is. 66, 3, or to consecrate ge- nerally 49, 1. One sees from Numb. 5, 15, where nnSM is called •y\'^'si ntiia and from which, as being ']ii» n'n3T?3, oil and frankincense were omitted, that this connexion of ideas has prevailed in the application of 'N. The signi- fication "name of God" as the highest and holiest has arisen out of "sacrifice" in the Mishna, and so the names of God in Scripture are there termed nilSTN. Yet this signification may be also con- nected with that in 'nST (which see). <31N I. (3 f. nbTN an Aramaean form for nbTN Deut. 32, 36; once the future ibTFi Jer. 2,36 contracted from ''bTN^, coinp. SpN from StiNN , IHN from "inNis) a rare poetical verb (yet common in Aramaean) intr. to go, having the nu- merous secondary significations of "Tlbil: hence la 'N to fail, applied to food 1 Sam. 9, 7; or to dry up, applied to water Job 14, 11 ; without a preposition, to vanish, spoken of power (li) Deut. 32, 36, and ib 'N in the signification of i) "^brt (Song OF Sol. 2, 11), to go away Prov. 20, 14. The passage Jer. 2, 36 INa ibW'tl?? why goest thou very much i. e. why rnnnest thou, is difficult, and ad- mits of various interpretations. In this sense bt'; is formed from btN which it may be (comp. Np';). Tet'it might as well be taken from bbT (intrans. to be low, vile, common), and then the imperf. bT'' would have the same form as dilj'; , b)?.' , and the passage would mean: why art thou so very bad, a sense adopted by the older interpreters. Derivative n. p. b.TN. The stem is frequent in Aramaean, as the Targ. btN., Syr.'^ff, Samar.asaZ; the Arabic for it is JK (med. Waw), and also Jyc. One easily perceives that the root isbt-N and the fundamental idea not "to go away, roll off," but, as Aramaean usage proves, "to go" generally; and this conception comes originally from the idea "to stir, to move, to move about hither and thither", the opposite of rest, as is the case in '^bti, Aram. 'rjn. Hence the root lies also in br (bbt), *?>& &c. J , I- ^ l-T-", IT ?T^ n. an assumed stem to b-TlNB Ez, 27, 19, but see briN and briNa. IT IT ; bT« 51 PTN (separation, division) n. p. of a memorial stone between Eama and Nob, which with IJN 1 Sam. 20, 19 became the name of a place (see ISis). The Ar., Syr. and LXX read instead of it tVsi and the LXX also read ISTi^ for 'j^N ; but the textual reading gives a satisfactory sense. bl^ (3^Z. >ibTN, IpZ. NibTN; imperat. "bTN with the vowel drawn back for bTJjt) Aram, to go Dak.2,24; Eze.5,15; with b to go, away Dan. 6, 19 20; Ezk. 4, 23 ; h, 8. ,See bTN l-T see niaTN. jTt? {dual d^2TN which stands for the plural also ; on the contrary the plural rii|N. belongs to proper names, from ITN) f. ear, as the organ of hearing Deut. 15,17; Ez.12,2. So in the phrases Saia, te ijan, dto, n;i5?, rtj3|, iSNnfi, ^bn'&c. which are easily understood. nWJailon iD^iTN Ez.24:,26 making the ears hear, caus- ing them to hear. Q^St?? 5>)51B «o hear with one's own ears Ps. 44, 22 • Job 28, 22. The primitive XTN, Ar. ,j(j>| and,j(il, Targ.lliiN {def. W^'w, contracted N51N), Syr. M?f, ii'f , Zab". p'o], should not be ■ derived from a verb-stem ']TS« which became a denominative, but appears to be formed from TN o5?, auris, after the form ^laa , whence the /emimwertil^a Hos. 10,6. If one were to try to get to the de- ■ rivation by a verb-stem, TN would be equi- ■ valent to oi to cut, comp. b^b\ point, so that 'JTN would be named from its pointed • shape. From l.ts* once formed have arisen 'U'*> TfN and niSTN , with the denomi- T' ■- 'V IV IT—;' ^ native •jTN (not used) intr. to hear, hearken; to percdve; from Kal comes only the de- rivative ITN belonging to the proper name •^|J?I?.i comp. the Arabic ^lil, which is likewise a denominative. Hhel WJJ , only assumed forEccLES.12,9 according to the versions (Aquila,Gr.Ven., SyT.,Targ.) and the ancient interpreters (see Ibn 'Esra) : to cause to understand, propose, comp. Ar. JT«_ ^i>t; but it may be more conveniently referred to the following verb ^TN I. But the conjugation used is '"' ^'fi'^ ^7N1^ (2 sg. nstis.p, fut. -ptisi , imper. i^N^, ilS/TN^p) properly to iniliAe the ear, to direct the ear, i. e. to hear attentively, to observe, perceive Is. 1 2- 8, 9; with bs or b Ex. 15, 26; Deut. 1, 45; Ps. 77, 2; Job 34, 2 16 to listen to something, to ohey some one; with the ac- cusative to perceive, hear Job 33, 1 ; 37, 14; Ps. 17, 1; 86,6; seldom poetically with n? for bg Num. 23, 18. Mostly in the signification to grant, spoken of God who hears prayer; or to obey, spoken of men. Contracted forms are "jiTIS from VTMN Job 32, 11 ; y^m from •jitn^Pkov. 17, 4, as often occurs in verbs NS. De- rivatives are the proper names STiiTN"' , jTiJ I. (not used) trans, to weigh, to ponder; determine, settle; henCe J^'AeZ ']JN Ecci/BS. 12, 9 to weigh, prove, parallel 'nsn. Derivatives are d^irNM and IJ'' (c. '\ . T: I ')TT '■ ")|1 J = IfN in the proper name iT'SP with Tod distinguishing it from tT'STi*,. The stem has come from ^r , Ar. ^\ j , changing Tod into !Alef; and to If in the signification „weighty, heavy," hence „to be fat" belongs ai:|1?3 Jbe.5,8; the At. ,o\«i to be strong, powerful, points to the correct view. 71^11. (not used) tr. to make, prepare, hence ')TN an implement; but the stem of this noun is probably ]T ('jit), and it is formed likepJN. frompT with N prosthetic. ITN (with suff. ';[3_TN., according to many mss., Ibn Koreish and other lexi- cographers pi. '^■'rJN.) m. implement, furni- ture Deut. 23, 14. if it is to be derived from Its, it can only be in the significa- tion of the Arabic fjT* to adorn, set in order, whence 1JN. will be equivalent to ^»j\ dress, metaphorically arms, then implement, as a similar transference of idea is found in Mediterranean (Indo- Germanic), and as Ibn Koreish compares 4* p« 52 ^m the Arabic (jK ; interpreters comparing also the Aramaean ']^T, )'<1, Syriac ^1 &c. But since no trace of a verb 'jtN is found in this sense either in Hebrew or the dialects, as Ibn Koreish renders '^"li.TN by the corresponding ^^Lux, the LXX and Vulg. abeady presupposing another derivation in ^mvij, balteus (sword-belt), it is right to assume with Parchon and other lexicographers that N. is merely prosthetic to ^T (from ^IT 11.), and then 11 is of the same origin as the Aramaean 111, I^T, Ar. j^v &c., just as other nouns beginning with T take N prosthetic, oomp. P,!?.i ^^X^- See IIT n. ]^^ (from 'jtliS after the form dSlilS, 'nSID; point, top) n. p. of a village in the vicinity of the two Blth-h6r8n, built by ti'iNia an'Ephraimitess, to which the name Sherah was given by way of distinction from another |tN 1 Che. 7, 24. See niatN. IT -: niDTN (p'- of IJi!?; c.rii5TN;,''ii2J-n, lUJ-p, Ara- IT' IT' i- T ' r 't' maeantpr. The Arabic s\( to gird, to be Strong, firm, »j^ to make fast, surround, proceeds like the Hebrew ptn from a similar fundamental idea, as the noun ^M a covering and the denom. .vt to cover, still shew. j?nt« 53 n&^ yilTN (-with suff. •^y-lTN) f. equivalent to Aram. ^i'HT with N prosthetic, Jbe. 32, 21. niTN (c. ti'l"; without ^jZwr.) m. 1. na- tive, born in a country, spoken of men, opposed to '^A Ex. 12, 49; Lev. 16, 29; 17, 15; 18, 26; fully yiNrt 'N Ex.12, 19; Num. 9, 14. Then applied to things: inborn, native, a thing which has origi- nated and come forth in the place where it is; hence spoken of a tree which grows in its own soil and has not been trans- planted Ps. 37, 35 ; a native tree is also a strong tree, because one that has grown where it is from the beginning is stronger than a transplanted one, in which sense the LXX and Vulg. generally have KsdQos, cedrus. — In these connected significations 'N is formed directly from the stem n^T (which see) after the form aTSS, mTN.' — 2. equivalent to the proper name n'lT (see 1 Che. 2, 6) of the tribe of Judah (n'nt receives here the S prosthetic) ; whence arises the patron. ■'ITlTIS an Ezrahite, a descendant of tl'T.t or fTiTij, spoken of "irr^N 1 Kings 5, 11; Ps. 89, 1, and of )-q"ii 88, 1; compare on both 1 Chr, 2, 6. But though Heman and Ethan are adduced as belonging to the tribe of Judah an'd descended from tTiT , yet in 1 Kings and the Psalm those of Levitical descent are meant 1 Che. 6, 29; 15,17 19; 16,4142; 25,1 4, since a n'lT was in the genealogical tree there also (1 Che. 6, 6). TllTN see rTTTN. !• T : V IT : V n^ I. (c. "'tis*., also in proper names IrtN. and m ; with suff. ^riN , T^riN and "^''b?.) 6-1' ; piuP- B'^flN, with suff. "inN, Vn^ from T'pN, as often happens in the case of an impossible reduplica- tion, e. g. tisriii; '^''m and tja-irii?., &p-) m. properly a very old word of relation- ship, forming with las , Qrt one kindred, and almost so metamorphosed m constr. and before annexes. It denotes brother in general, in the very frequent use of it, but whether a uterine brother (Gen. 49, 5) or half-brother by the father or mother's side can only be discovered from the connexion Gen. 24, 29 ; Mal. 1, 2. Yet one finds a more exact determina- tion where the degree of relationship is a point of importance, or where a person wishes to speak more plainly, e. g. with the appended as'ia, QN'ia, n^^'l^i '^'!3t3^- fIN brother is used in a still greater variety of ways than SN , being transferred and borrowed most diversely, and though an exhaustive enumeration is unnecessary on account of the easy recognition of the particular meaning in a given place, yet the following grada- tions of signification deserve mention: 1. friend, companion, with relation to men- tal brotherhood 2 Sam. 1, 26; 1 Kings 9, 13 ; Job 6, 15 ; 19, 13.— 2. By enlarge- ment of brotherhood transferred to per- sons belonging to one family, race, country and people, and therefore much the same as relation, fellow-countryman, i. e. of a nearer or more distant circle as one belonging to the same in- ternal brotherhood Gen. 13, 8; 14, 16; 29, 12; Num. 8, 26; 16, 10; Judges 14, 3; 2 Sam. 19, 13; Is. 66, 20; Neh. 3, 1. Those of the same family, tribe, people &c. may be looked upon as blood- related brethren in a figurative sense. Still widening out the circle farther, so as to extend it to other peoples and men, to whom one stands in near relationship or with whom he is allied by origin, it denotes — 3. an ally, confederate, Am. 1,9; Gen. 9, 25; Num.20, 14; Neh. 11, 12 14; 2 Chr. 5, 12. — 4. Extended to the widest human circle and arising out of a moral view is the signification: neighbour, fellow man Lev. 19,17; 25,35; Deut. 21,1; 23,21, the same as Sp. in this respect. — 5. From the last and widest sense has come the use of it for any one, with 125 iN preceding, alter ... alter, the one . . . the other, just like the usage of S"! . . . UJ^N , e. g. rtiN-'bN tti''N one to another Gen. 42, 28; Ex. 16, 15; TTlNTiiS IIJ^N one another Ex. 10, 23; r T V r TTlN'tSa 125"'N one from the other Gen. r T r •• r ' . 13, 11 ; shorter VtlN lU'^N one against an- other Zech. 7, 10; T^hNT U5''N one as the other Ez. 4, 17; Deut. 25, 11, and so in n« 54 n« all possible varieties. For greater va- riety the word is applied besides S'l... UJ-'ij Is. 19, 2, even to animals Jo. 2, 8 and inanimate things Ex. 25, 20; 37, 9. — 6. fiN fellow appears in poetical and figurative discourse in order to compare a person with something, or to put one by the side of another to shew likeness of disposition, habits &c. Job 30, 29; Peov. 18, 9, as elsewhere "larj 28, 24 and ^'i Job 39, 29 are used. — 7. The use of UN in compound proper names seems peculiar, whether it be the first member as MTIN , 'iiriN, or the se- cond as Ti^V. The frequent application of it in such compounds as in the case of SN (comp.Tibairii!*. and-i^N, llrt^HNand -■'^N., SID'^nN^ and-^riN, n^-jnN.and M^as., Dyb^riX. and -laN &c.)', and the ascrip- tion of divine epithets as e. g. SN , ':jb?3 , lin, :i1ip, W, Dp, ^13, DSb and others, ', , ' •• I- 'it ' ITT ' - I ' which in other cases are connected with ^i^J, V, im^'j, shews that nsj is also to be taken as expressive of the divine Being (seCSN,). In general nsj may have- been oun-ent as an epithet of deity as a friend, maker of covenants, and promoter of brotherly association. As a more exact determination of HN in this signification cannot be given any more than that of as, because it belongs rather to the very ancient Hebrew doctrine of God, I have left it untranslated in the interpretation of proper names compounded with it, as in the case of as. — 8. riN Ez. 18, 10 , , IT IT ' m the member of the verse inN tliUSti i^^^? "^P^^JiS) li^'S been looked upon as an orthographical mistake arising from iriN , because the LXX, Vulg. and Syr. have omitted it; but ns may be Ezekiel's orthography for TjNj^and it might be translated, and he does only some one of these things, but it is better to take riN in the signification of I2j''i< vs. 7. De- rivatives niriN , Mini? , and m , ins , inx , "'tl in proper names. The organic form is nij here also as in the case of as without^ doubling the guttural sound, Phenician UN (e. g. iriiST Mel. 1, 2; ■'riN la Plant. 1, 3), Ar. ^t, Targ. HN (def. NtlN.), Syr. \A , and the stiU-existing st. c. HN in the proper names aNrti*, 'jartN confirms this; but in the grammatical formation the forms init. and ■-=uIf father's-brother, 'N has been translated in the sense of li'n. But SNriN is not very different from iTitiN, asi'' (see ■'5N and HN I.). " ' "' " 2n!>5 see aNHN. IT V IT ; - ISriN ( Ach i. e. God is knowing) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 2, 29. 13 (from -jia) intel- ligent, knowing, is in proper names like Sr^ a quality of God, comp. ii^Sa ; and riN is a very old epithet of God lijse 3N. iriN see IMN. 1 IT V nn^ (a shorter form ItiN Ez. 33, 30 IT V ^ 1- - ' for IIIN, out of which came next the Aram, form Ifj the same, hence IHiS' even in the absolute state Gen. 48, 22; Is. 27, 12; 66, 17 K'tib; Zech. 11, 7; but regu- larly the constr. only is ini«; pi. Cl.tlN.) num. card. m. 1. one, unus, with the fe- minine formed from it nnis (which see), made into a formal adjective Gen. 1, 9; 2, 24; 11, 6; 27, 45 &c. Besides the frequent adjective use of ins* it appears 2Aa enumerating the days of the month, first, primus, W'yrh 'N Di^a on the first day of the mo?i«A Ezr. 3, 6 ; 7, 9; 10, 16 17; Neh. 8, 2, and with the omission of UV Gen. 8, 5; Ez. 26, 1; 2 Chr. 29, 17; also in the enumeration of years, e. g. of a reign Dan. 9, 1 2 Ezr. 1, 9; seldom, however, in counting the days of the week Gen. 1, 5 (comp. Ar. f*^ t\.=»j'J, Syr. 1^ * ^ 1^, Ilia, laiv aa^^a- Trai; AcTs20, 7; 1 Cor. 16, 2). Because this mode of speaking is rare in Hebrew, even Josephus (Ant. I, 1, 1) and Philo (de op. mundi) looked for something else in it. — 3. The meaning the first is also expressed by IHNll in enumera- tions, namely where "'i'Sli, '^lablSll &c. follow, which may indeed be also trans- lated the one, like the Latin unus, alter, tertius, Greek jila, SsvteQa, tqkri Gen. 2, 11; Ex. 25, 32; 28, 17; Num. 11, 26. But when a second only follows, there stands in the other member of the verse also rriN Gen. 10, 25 or even 1pi!?fi Ex. 18, 3;'^ Sam. 14, 6, or ■'ittj and'^ilin EcoLES. 4, 10. When put after the nouni in« 56 -in^^ *lHN alone is often put for IflNti, be- cause the numeral is already definite in itself Gen. 42, 19; Numb. 28, 4; 1 Sam. 13, 17. — 4. In repetitions, e. g. ItliJ . . . Tna, or bo!E with the article: the one IT ••■ ... the other, unus , . . alter Ex. 18, 3 ; Judges 16, 29, or also iriNi ... "tUN ' ' jT •-• : IT V ... "itlJ^I, the one ... the other ... the IT V : ' third 1 Sam. 10, 3; or distributirely each one Numb. 13, 2 ; 34, 18. The fol- lowing formulas should be understood in this sense: nriN insb (IMN st. abs.) IT ••• 1- - : *• r - ' Is. 27, 12 orae a/iSer- t^e other, singly; omitting the first "ipN in ItlN 'ins? (ipis) Is. 66, 17 one after the other, man for man, Targ. iS5>''a ^na N5fD, and so Theod., Symm. , Syr. and others, be- cause 'nHN was already read instead of IfliS; ItlNTiN in one with the other I — ' r - •■• r Ez. 33, 30, where "ir! has arisen out of IrtN; IflNS IfiN owe to the other. Job 41, 8, comp. Vn^% VO^N vs. 9 ; "itlS? . . . insb owe to iAe other, 1 Kxngs 3, 25. IT V ; ' > The plural d'''lrtN. in this sense: indivi- duals, some. Gen. 27, 44; 29, 20. — 5. ItllS is sometimes made strongly pro- minent in the signification of, the known and definite individual, or one, applied to Abraham Is. 51, 2; to God Job 31, 15, in which sense it may be translated the only one, the one alone, a single one Mat.. 2, 10; IpN'Isb none 2, 15; ItiNrt a single one Gen. 19, 9. Here belongs also linNa a single one, spoken of God Job 23, 13. The % is put to announce, in what respect something appears, comp. Ex. 6, 3 ; Ps. 39, 7 ; 68, 5. In Phenician Trtsa (Mass. 3 and 4) means : for each one, every one. — To this is attached the usage of the word for: sole, chief, put after the noun Ez. 7, 5; Judges 16, 28, or even the numeral alone Song op Sol. 6, 9. — 6, This method of making 'N prominentwhile it is firmly attached to the noun, appears in the signification one and the same, e. s. IHiS di"' on one O IT V I and the same day Gen. 27, 45; 41, 11. In a similar sense d'^llriN, when it is 1* T -; ' attached to the noun in the plural Gen. 11, 1. — 7. Vice versa 'tj is used where no single person is definite or promi- nent, but a mere indefinite oneness is intended, hence like the indefinite ar- ticle e. g. 'N N^as 1 Kings 20, 13 noo- (f^rrjg tig; the 'N prefixed as in Ara- maean in lailp ins? a holy one (angel) Dan. 8, 13; 1 Kings 19, 4; Ez. 8, 8 (in a similar way does Izi'^N stand, or the plural d'^M'' Is. 65, 20); in the same method: some one, aliquis, nonnemo, e. g. % dii som£ dayZsCB..14c,i, hence 'N'^N, or 'N"i«b no one Numb. 16, 15; 1 Kings 8, 56. — 8. This signification appears in those instances especially where 'N in the construct state is connected with a noun following, e. g. d5>!l ItiN Gen. 26, 10 some one of the people; 22, 2; Lev. 13, 2; 2 Sam. 6, 20, which mode of expression again is weakened into the mere designation of the indefinite article an or a, e. g. ni'ibli IliN a pit Gen. 37, 20; so too 2 Sam. 6,' 20; Job 2, 10. — iriNSi, Aram. Nin3, Gr. }ia&' ' IT '■■ : ' IT-: I- ' eva (1 Cor. 14, 31) is used adverbially as one i. e. together Is. 65, 25; Eze. 2, 64; EccLES. 11,6 (Judges 20, 8 CS'^NS IVlN stands instead of it); still farther diltisb into one, into unity Ez. 37, 17. The same original numeral {card, numb.) is pronounced in the feminine nrrN from Fi'iliN, in pause riHN, and so in connexion with ten M^iss> 'iS, as the masculine TttJJ* ItlN. The feminine IT J I _ ^ admits of as various significations and acceptations as ItiN. The following are the most noteworthy: 1. the signification only, especial, eaitraordinary , e. g. 'nS~\ M5>1 nns* Ez. 7, 5 a misfortune, an only misfortune, but one may read with the Targum, Syr. and others tl5>1 'TTlN tl5»1 ., ., .IT T r - IT T evil upon evil; ntlN dp_i a singular revenge Judges 16, 28, standing alone, having just the same meaning as 'nTii25, nsa are used m the same way. The organic form IliN, belonging to "in« 57 ^)m nns, nns? (comp. Ar. iX^\, Targ. 1p, Syr. fji, Sam. acAarf) has not only no verbal root in Semitic, but agrees with numeral roots in Mediterranean (Indo- Germanic), as numbers generally do from one to ten, e. g. Sanskrit ika, with d dropped, and ekatera one of two, pre- served in Greek in SKatsqog, sxaarog. — Derivatives liriN a proper name, and THN {denom. from iriN), only in Hithp. Itisnrt to do a thing cleverly (in strength) Ez. 21, 21. np;, Ar. iX=-j, might be considered a secondary form. But though the ancients and also Ibn Gandeh, Kimchi and others have thought of a similar explanation, yet the LXX and Vulg., because the denom. word -stem among the Hebrews was only current in ini, took '^1^tS^ as = in (Tin) , Ibn Koreish as = TfiN, and some mss. read even I'nnNnfi r T ' I — :i- : ' turn thyself backwards, and therefore it ex- presses with ■'3"'a''!i, "'b-'niarj and ■'a^'bin a turniag to all sides ('rf'^is is to be supplied, comp. 6, 2: turn thyself for- ward). See "in"' (Phenic. 'MV, hence 1h], din;;) and its derivatives. nni? (not used) tr. 1. Ma. Q-iiS *linN. Ez.2,10 before and behind, 1 Che' 19, lb; 2 Che. 13, 14 on all sides, for which also liriNni D''3B?j 2 Sam. 10, 9 stands. This adverb is most frequently used in connexion with verbs in order to modify their signification by back- wards, backward, e. g. 'N bs5 Gen. 49, 17; 'N niffl Ps. 9, 4; 56, 10; Lament. 1, 8 or in Hifil '» aiiBln Ps.44, 11; Is. 44, 25; Lament' 1, 13; 2, 3; '^ iiD3 2 Sam. 1, 22; Ps. 35, 4; Is. 42, 17^; 'N n3rt to strike back Ps. 78, 66 ; 'N 'nir: Is.l,'4;'Nb\d| Is.28,13. b) with preposi- tions, as: 'TilnNM from behind, opposite to Q-'iS?? 2 Sam. 10, 9 ; from the west Is. 9, 11 ; litiNb after :jDS to turn backwardFs. 114, 3 ; 'N 5 rt^li to be backwards, i. e. fallen away, turning the back. — 3. as an ad- verb of time, later, in the future, comp. ti'tg time before, past, only with b, as 'nV Is. 41, 23 in the time following, 'N3 5>a'iB to hear into the following time 42, 23. The later interpretation nates is also in Arabic. Derivatives iT'S'inN and ' ' "■ injj denom. from "litjlN, only Hithp. IpNnrt to turn oneself backwards i. e. westward Ez. 21, 21, as many wish to read for ntiNnn. See ins. I" - : • IT ••• . fliriSS (constr. PiiriN, with sujf. "^nm, ISnnN, inns, once Numb. 6, 7 inn«; ^Z. T\vm, only with sa/. ■'n''hN K'ri Josh. 27'13, T^pvm Ez. 16, 52,'T'n'-'nN Job 42, 11, t3t!j''Di''i'*? 1 Che. 2, 16';'but there is also another plur. with suff ■'ninij Josh. 2, 13 K'tib, 'Ti:ninN Ez. 16, 51 55 61 for 'T|:ninN, DD'^nins* Hos. 2, 3 for 'm) f sister of full blood, Gen. 4, 22, sister by a stepmother 20, 12 or by a stepfather Lev. 18, 11, in short it is used as variously as fiN, and, as is pointed out there more fuUy (SN-ra, DN-na, atj ri^N-na), where the degree of relationship is meant to be specialised, 18, 9. The idea of the relationship in- volved in sister is transferred to a re- lative, kinswoman Job 42, 11, one of the same tribe or country Numb. 25, 18, niece Ez. 16, 55 according to the LXX, and is as in the case of fin, hence niriN IT ' IT like HN is an endearing address. Song op Solom. 4, 9, as the Ar.^Xi.f , Lat. soror. Figuratively nidi* is spoken of sister cities or kingdoms Jer. 3, 7 ; Ez. 16, 46 ; 23, 31, so far as they stand in near relationship to one another; and so it is employed like HN in order to express a close mental relation Peov. 7, 4, or generally to denote a firm connection Job 17, 14. In the expression rtffisj sniriN-bN Ex. 26, 3; Ez. 1, 9 'HN 3e- notes simply the other like niS'n, and is to be taken on the whole like ffiiN TiriN-bN. !• T V The feminine singular form nitiN has arisen from llnN, connected with the feminine termination at. The u of the ground-form with the a in at is fused into 6, where the a preceding is length- ened in the absolute state, and is seldom uttered sharply as in d^^riN (inhN); in Aramaean the 6 passes into k, hence we have there ririN, Syr. ]i^ for l2>-»] , comp. nian. The pi. niins goes out from the ground-form "'flN for the sake of distinction from the sing., while the fem. pliir. attaches itself immediately to the ground-form; or it also proceeds from MpiS in nitiN after the form nisa from ilia, where however the accent must also remain before the suffix m^ 59 mn^^ (comp. T'niSM). We should therefore read TiiriN .fosH. 2, 13 K'tib &c. In Aram, the plur. mtiN, Syr. I^a»l pro- ceeds from a f ormltiN like the Ar. i:y Li». I. iriK (fut. ThNV comp. a'lN"', but usually THIS'' — d from aa, as elsewhere in sb, and S in the last syllable like the pause-forms in lat^i , IMS?'', bii*"" — , once tni 2 Sam. 20, 9; imp. pi. imN like ia?7N besides ■'TttN from ThN) imJis! I v:iv i't: iv I ;•■/ 1. to lay hold of, seize, take, hence like a pVprt, At. i-j t\i&.|, with a of the member or object, to lay hold of some- thing Gen. 25, 26; Ex. 4, 4; Judges 20, 6; IKmaa 1, 51; Job 16, 12; Ps. 73, 23; Song op Solom. 7, 9; also ge- nerally to grasp, to lay fast hold of something, to hold, in a spiritual or figu- rative relation e. g. Job 38, 13; Eccles. 2, 3; 7, 18, opposite to m^n. i'lllSsa •'ba'n nms Job 23, 11 my foot holds fast by his steps i. e. I do not lose his tracks; always, however, agreeably to the nature of 3, denoting the laying hold of an object by one part of it, not the whole. With the accusative of a person or thing: to take, to seize, to lay hold upon. Judges 12, 6; 16, 21; Song op Solom. 2, 15; 3, 4; Pa. 56, 1; 139, 10; most freq^uently of shuddering, ter- ror, pain, hunger, misery and such like, which seize some one, Ex. 15, 14; 2 Sam. 1, 9 ; Jee. 49, 24; Ps. 48, 7 ; Job 30, 16 ; figuratively to hold, applied to the eye- lids that they do not close, Ps. 77, 5: thou holdest the lids (ni'lMffl, Aram. pn''Fi) of my eyes; seldom a's'with a to hold fast by something Job 17, 9. THN rtSltl nan 2 Che. 25, 5 to handle lance IT • ! ~ J ' and shield, then to equip generally, "'JtlN yin equipped with the sword Song op Solom. 3, 8. — 2. to hold together, to join, to fit, to pin into one another, in architecture, proceeding from the idea of taking, laying hold of; 1^)5la tHN to fit into the wall, to fasten into the temple- wall 1 Kings 6, 6; oninN Ez. 41, 6 fastened. In this sense with the acousat. to lay hold of something, to hold fast, 1 Kings 6, 10: and it (the side-building) joined, to the house, i. e. held by the house, by means of cedar beams. Spoken of doors: to holt Neh. 7, 3, properly to fit in or insert the bolts; hence in Aram. "ipS) Syr. r."i to shut up. — 3. to take out, take away from a number, with ya , therefore TtiN Numb. 31, 30 47; 1 Che. 24,6 taken' out, comp. isbs. The Targ. uses inns, and inNns' for TSbs. De- rivatives WtiN and denom. I'niki, pro- per names triN, ittiN, irimN', liT-mN, '^ ITT' r:-' it:--:' it:--:' Mnis, n-TMN, msinx IT t-:' r •;-:' it t i : Nif. TmS to he held fast, with 3 Gten. 22, 13; to he caught, with a by some- thing, EcoLES. 9, 12. ^ The other Nifal- form TniS3 , fut. THN"' , is a denomin. from IT 1-: Pih. TtitJ {part, ttlisa) to enclose, en- compass, iiBS'ipS Job 26, 9 the outside, i. e. round about the throne. 3of. THNrt (only part. Q^.p^a) to he fastened, with b to a thing 2 Che. 9, 18. The stem TpN, Targ. IpN, Syr. r*] , Ar. j^t, has for its organic root tfl"N, and its collateral forms are in the stems 15-N, 1p."^, "1-^, 1?'5) which express cognate ideas. THN {constr. TrtN in compound proper names; grasper, holder, sc. Jah is) n.p. m. 2 Kings 18, 1; 1 Chr. 8, 35; see MirnN, triNirtX As an attribute of God IT : — : ' it T I : triN holder, is synonymous with "ITS helper and with a derivative from ^Xn (rt'im^ surrounding, protectiug), from which the interchanges of names are to be explained. n-in;* {p. nr, with suff. in-r ; formed from the adject. f'riN) f. properly that which is seized, laid hold of, hence pos- session, connected with TUT' and ini Gen. ' i-t 'i-t 47, 11; Lev. 25, 46; most freq^uently spoken of the possession of land, con- nected with y-nij or hbw Lev. 27,24; Num. 27, 7. Accordingly Palestine is called 'bN'ntol-''?.? 'S Josh. 21, 41 or " 'N 22, 19. Elsewhere appear the following expressions: T'Sfl nmN. Ez. 45, 7 pos- session of the city, t!bi3>''S Gen. 48, 4; ia)5. 'N 23, 9 possession of a sepulchre. ^T\^ 60 and many others. From this comes the denom. trisii Nif. (Jut. YTilU'j) to put oneself in possession, with 3 of the thing Gen. 34, 10; 47, 27; Nim. 32, 30; Josh. 22, 9 19. The form has been made after the analogy of verbs ''S by way of distinc- tion from TtlNS. rv:r.- ""in^ (AoZrfer, protector) n.p. m. Neh. 11, 13; for which there is in 1 Chr. 9, 12 JTnTlT' (encompasser, defender) from itn. '""'" rT iT'TnN (Jah is holder) n. p. m. 1. 1 'kings 22, 40; 2 Chb. 20, 35; the LXX and Vulg. read rtiTriN , which they - ° _. n:-iT' J pronounced according to the Phenician- Syrian method 'Oxa^iag, Ochazias. — 2. 2 Kings 8, 24, for which 2 Chr. 22, 6 have 1lni'lT5> {Jah is helper) and 2 Chk. 21, 17 THNirt^ In proper names those of cognate senses were often inter- changed. liT'TnN n. p. m. 1 Kings 22, 40. O-Trmt (preservation: from ihN with a formative termination D-) n. p. m. 1 Che. 4, 6. r-TnN (Philistine) n. p. m. Gen. 26, 26. The termination n- for masc. proper names is still found in the Philistine t\ib^ , and the explanation of the above by the Hebrew THN is uncertain, because we have not yet obtained a clear know- ledge of the idiom of the Philistines. nni? (not used) intr. to hum, he on fire, hence fem. tiN; Arab. _l to burn, ..of, "f C whence xa.| heat, _l to be hot, to glow. The proper name niriN (which see) does not belong here. ''riS* (abridged from lvr\^) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 5, 15 ; 7, 34; comp. lak.. ••riN; (connection, from nnN, comp. Zeuasis) n. p. m. Gen. 46, 21, for which 1 Che. 8, 6 has liriN. Q{<\'1X {God founds fellowship) n. p. m. 2 Sam. 23, 33; 1 Chr. 11, 35. ^T^^: (P^- 1?t"''?^-) ^'•«™- f- equi- valent to the Hebr. InVn, properly the pnx united, closed, from Tin, hence riddle Dan. 6, 12 ; Syr. iij-^ol and from it the denom. r^] to give riddles. The N is prosthetic, comp. if if = T1. iT'ni!* {God is Jah) n. p. m. 1 Sam. 14, 3;" ikxNGS 11, 29. In 2 Che. 10, 15 there is instead in"- ; another time 1 Che. IT ' 8, 4 mUN. which see. liTnX n.p. m. 1 Kings 14, 6. IT ■ -: •* IWnN {God is renown) n. p. m. Num. 34, 27; comp. 'T:!7''aN. ITIJ* {God is Jo; 'O = Si'') n. p. m. 2 Sam. 6, 3. TIT'nN {Ood is mysterious; from 'iin) i\ • -: I n. p. m. 1 Chr. 8, 7. niD''nN (^Ach i. e. God, is good) n. p. m. 1 Sam. 14, 3; see aia-ias*. "TlbTllN CAch i.e.god, of origination) n. p. m. 2 Sam. 8, 16; lib; is an abstract noun fromlb"' (which see), comp.ni?3''ni<. ni!l!3''nS: {'Ach i.e.god, of death) n.p. m. 1 Che. 6, 10 ; but instead of it in 6, 20 is nn73 , Luke 3,26 Mad&, from tin = tiM (comp. nns from ns, nun from nnj to * "I" IT " I" IT' melt, dissolve, hence nHM equivalent tc nta dissolution, death. Tjbip'^ni* CAch i. e. God, is King) n.p m. 1 Sam. 21, 2; see TibaiSN. I^PTIN CAch is Man i. e. M^y, the male divinity of MjJj'i?, "'SM Is. 65, 11) 1. n.p. of a heathen lAnakite Num. 13, 22 ; Josh. 15,14; Judges 1,10. The goddess ■'iB M'^vj), among the Phenicians Onka, was also worshipped as a male deity "(a Mijp {Movers, Phon. I. 649-50). Hence the name is formed according to analogy, from InitlN. — 2. n. p. m. in the later period 1 Che. 9, 17. See ■'5.a, ")». l^y^a'^nX C^cA i. e. God is power, dominion) n. p. m. 1 Sam. 14, 50; comp. n. p. yj>a , from nSJ' which see. ■* 1 - r^ IT T \*T\)fi {Ach is clearness; ']''{ai'Q'i)n.p. m. 1 Che.7,19. In proper names a- at the end is frequently interchanged with ■]-, and l^^ftN has an analogy in D^'SN.. mj^n« 61 ^^n^n^ Sli^riS CAch is noble) n.p. m. 1 Kings 4,14Vcomp. S'ji''2N.. D^i'^nN CAch is grace) n.p.f. 1 Sam. 14, 50'; 25,' 43; see Q^j'^^N.. TtMO'^nN CAch i. e. God, is supporting) n. p. m. ExOD. 31, 6; comp. '!|ttD in the proper name liTiDaD. ih'' therefore cor- responds to "iriN.. ■lT?''nj< i^Ach is help) n. p. m. Num. 1, 12 ';' 1 Chk. 12,3; comp. 1T,|^"':3N. , -^bst. DpTlN {'Ach Le.God, is assistant) n.p. m. SKiNGS 25,22 ; comp. dp/SlN. , Op^'^'l'T? , D^)?.;, 1=^)?.;^?. "i!??. and ?^«1^. DT^riN ( Ach i. 6. God, is e/salted) n.p. m. Num. 26, 38, for which there is in 1 Chb. 8, 5 D'lin = O'lins. and perhaps also fflN'^1 iriN Gen. 46, 21 = •ttSs^liriN. eq^uivalent to QTi|rii«.; patron. "'M'n- ; comp. aTSN. Perhaps the proper names DT^n and D'lin are abridged from "n&. ^Tni* C-^ch i. e. God, is a friend; 5>'l is formed from TiVI after the form lia, )'p n. p. m. Num. 1, 15 ; comp. bN Wi. iritD"'riiS. CAch i. e. God, is early light; "'^'n^ ='tJ,; in'ci,;?^J n. p. m. 1 Chr. 7, 10 ; comp. M^'inid. naSTlii (from TO'i-inN , 'Ach is ahili- ty) n. p. m. 1 KcjGS 4, 6 ; perhaps not *ll25\butia'' (c. TOJi) should be assumed it:' ITT '■ r:' as the groundform; comp. the cognate im in nbNIlZJN. IT T T 1" ; - -; PBrT'tlN (God [HN] is a spinner of plans, i. e. counsellor) re. p. m. 2 Sam. 15, 12. See bsn. !?ni^ (not used) tr. to separate, keep of, hinder, Arab. J.=>f. Derivative n.p. ■'bm. r : - DbriN (fruitful place; fromSbn) n.p. of a town ia the tribe of Asher, Judges 1, 31. Josh. 19, 29, where this very name is wanting in MailSN bSHM, 'N SbllK from Cheleb to Aahlab should be read, so that abrj corresponds to ibriN. In the cod. Vat. Idnoli^ stands, i. e. ano XsXe^. See ibh and nabn. — The form is the same as m laTSiS, -nriiN, nstN, nilSi, Qbns. "• "' "' '"" IT : - cO^ a particle of wishing: oh that! would that it were! with the imperf. fol- lowing Ps. 119, 5. The vocable of wish- ing iMln-lM 'N 2 Sam. 20, 5 as names •' IT ■■ ' I : IT •• nnx 63 ^m of cities must be connected with r'lliN . ins is seldom put for the plural others Job 8, 19. — 3. later, as elsewhere 'ji'^lHN Ps. 109, 13; Joel 1, 3. In the same way other significations may be ap- plied, as they result from the conception of the verb. — 4. {lateling) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 7,12. lipN {abs. Gen. 18, 5 ; 22, 13 ; 24, 55 ; EUTH 2, 2; Prov. 24, 26; Ez. 40, 1; Hos. 3, 5 &c. ; more frequently in the constr. iriN ; pZ. c. I'inN ; with suf. iSiiriN , ^■"ins, Qfi"''n5t?) m. properly hinder, later, after (see "'pQN); for as one sees from the accentuation and inflection, the word is formed from ins somewhat like Til (from 13'i), by changing the ground vowel into -, together with a forward accent on account of the guttural. But commonly it is 1. an adverb, as so many other nouns, supposed to be in the ac- cusative, become adverbs, a) of time: after, then, Gen. 10, 18; 24, 55; Prov. 24, 26; Hos. 3,5, always joined to the imperfect; later Gen. 30, 21; Ex. 5, 1; hereupon, then Gen. 38, 30, joined to the perfect; behind, likewise of time Gen. 18, 5 ; b) of place: following Ruth 2, 2 ; behinfl Gen. 22, IB, hence the Vulg. has post tergum, but the LXX, Syr. and Sam. Pent, read "lUN. — 2. a preposition: after, a) of time, before the noun in the con- struct state Gen. 9, 28; 11,10; hence with a following infinitive noun where it means after that Ex. 18, 2; Lev. 14, 43; Num. 6, 19. So too in the following compounds: 13 'N properly, after it was so, hereupon Lev. 14, 36; fiT 't« 2 Che. 32,9; llBiS. IpN after that Ezek.40, 1; but in tius connection sometimes admit- ting an intercalated clause, as e. g. ION ... ns^T (comp. Job 42, 16) after this; so Job 19, 26: and after this i. e. and then — th^ have stripped off my shin — and out of my body, i. e. sensibly, will I see Qod{asb^i). The expression D'l'ni'nrt IpN Sl^Nrt after these things i. e. hereupon, is frequent. Gen. 15, 1; 22, 1. — b) of place: behind. Judges 3, 22; 2 Kings 11, 6; 25, 5; Ps. 68,26; Song of Sol. 2, 9 ; hence imM from after 2 Sam. 7, 8 ; Ps. 78, 71. In this sense are construed the verbs -^ibrt, tia, laiia', nbi^ withlpN, some too with IrtNa. — c) behind in' the sense back of, west of, Ex. 3, 1 ; but this signification is rare. More frequent is the use of the con- struct state plur. I'lUN, 1. as an adverb of time: afterward, thenDEVT.25, 18; Josh. 2, 7 ; 7, 8. As an adverb of time the in- finitive or ^125n frequently follows it Gen. 5, 4; 14, 17, so that a sort of con- junction after that arises out of it; but the conjunction lies only in laJN. "''^nN as a particle of time is also con- nected with conjunctions and particles,. e. g. 15"'''int5 Ex. 11, 1; ^ttJN. 'N Deut. 24,4; 'nilJN.|3'''pn.N Josh. 2,7 ;'«' "'S 1 Sam. 12, 21; rji't-i'im EsE. 9, 10; nj^T-bs '» 2 Chr. 35, 20. — 2. as an adverb of place and a preposition: after, behind, Gen. 32^ 21; Judges 5, 14. In this sense many verbs of going, following, hunting after &c. are joined to "''inN , e. g. tiN'i Gen. 16, 13; Tjb!! 24, 6iV''aW 24, 67; ti^^ 35, 5; rr-n Ex. 23, 2; train 33, 8; WT 7 ' ITT ' ' r . ' ' ITT 34, 15; n)?3 Num. 32, 11 12; Deut. 1, -36; sat; Jos. 8,17; di)5 Judges 10, 1-^ aTO EuTH 1, 15; iirti 1 Sam. 7, 2; Nia. 11,' 5; 1p; 14, 36; 'pb'l 17, 53; tTna 22, 20; rt^' 25, 13; nbS^2 Sam. 3, 26; "nry IKiNGS^l, 7; yi'7 '19,20; ns'i 2 Kings 9, 25 and others; either put after or be- fore, or depending on, the verbs. — 3. as a preposition, before nouns, in the signification after, behind, Judges 18, 12 •,, Neh. 3, 16, without being caused by a verb. In all these senses appears in like manner its plur. with a suffix, i. e. "''nnN , 131'nm, 'ni'inN, 'riiinN, d3i^ni«,T''nriN\ |.,_: - ) 1 |..._:|- I 1 . 1 — :,- i ,... — ;,- i it-:i- ^ TfintA , 'D'Tj'^'lfjtX , as an adverb oi preposi- tion. — 4. In addition to the applications of ItiN just mentioned in the constr. plur. and with a suff. plur. the following rare cases should also be noted: a) constr. pL sometimes appears in the original sub- stantive meaning: hinder part; of the spear: the lower part, which is stuck into the ground, therefore nipn.p ""ptlNa with the lower part of the spear 2 Sam. 2, 23 ; !T''ntlN-b5> on its (the tTlTJi) back side'Ex^ t t.—.r - '- it: •' ])^m 64 nnnt^ 41, 15. — b) i^HN Prov. 28, 23 in the signification later, after, at last, whicn is a more extended form of the adverb "^ITiti ; I'— :r ' elsewhere it is only a prepos. with the suffix in the 24 passages where it ap- pears. — c) We have still to notice its numerous combinations with other par- ticles (conjunctions, prepositions &c.), as : 'raJN "I'lriis, Targ. I'n ^na, Ar. Lo jo»j, ) Is. 8, 23; op- posite to ')ii:[5N'n. As a substantive: later, after i. e. he who appears last; along with lifflN'n describing the eternity of God Is. 44, 6; figuratively the revenger who arises last, cognate in sense to bi«ii Job 19, 25. — 2. latter, second, another. ExOD. 4, 8; Deut. 24, 3. — 3. of place: westward (comp. Tins), hence 'NH D^rt the western sea i. e. the Mediterranean Deut. 11, 24; 34, 2; Jo. 2, 20; the eastern is the Dead sea. — 4. The plural I3''V'^DN is also used substantively for posterity, later races Job 18, 20; Is. 41, 4; EccLBS. 4, 16. — 5. The feminine iHS'lhN is applied as an adverb, particu- larly with the prepositions 3, 3, b: lastly, finally Deut. 13, 10; Num. 2, 3i; Dan. 11, 29. niHN (from UN IrtN ; following 'Ach i. 6. God) n. p. m. 1 Che. 8, 1. pn'IrtSi (fromb^p IpN; following the possessor of power, i. e. God) n.p.m.l Che. 4, 8 ; comp. b^ni^N.. "iinx Aram. adj. f. another, a second, rr; IT ' ' ' consequently with feminine nouns liba Dan. 2, 39 ; rtl^n 7, 5 ; 1'n)?. 7, 8 ; written in the Targ. "''IrtiN, connected with NT'S Gen. 26, 21; m'j Num. 14, 24 and i>pN Deut. 29, 27. The masculine form was ■npIN, Hebr. 'IpS?, comp. d31N, pBIO; and the feminine of this form is developed partly by N- (c^e/^. NH"), partly by ■■-: (cowsJ?-. r\\, def. Nrr^-). ■'itlN (c. ni'inis , rfe/. Nn-'^ns) .4m?«. f. the late, the future Dan. 2, 28; else- where tjiD, CjO are its substitutes. iins* Hebr. see inN. I" —.,- r - i^nS (with sM/i'jhi'nnN) .4mm. ^j-ep.: after, like the Hebrew "''nnN. ns"! ■''nriN a/f«j- tfe's i. e. in the future Dan." 2, 29 *5 ; Ih'i'nm D1)3^ Dan. 7, 24 ames after them. IHN must be assumed as the ground- form of it. In Targumic Aramaeism ins (from ^pN.) stands for it. '" ^ I'^nni* (for IppN; the Yod is put in theK'tib for pronunciation's sake to dis- tinguish it from IppN) Aram. adj. last, Dan.4, 5 [8] rppN ^^{and until as the last, different from the adj". I'lpN another. The terminations )- and ■)- are adjective ones, Syr. ii-. JT'intt (formed from IrtN; comp. fi'^^'^'n) A properly the late, hence nnn« 65 jy^nj^'nt? 1. the end of a period, the future, parti- cularly in the phrase D''M''ti 'N, there- fore '"!! 'isa Gen. 49, 1 in the future; principally the happy future Jbk. 29, 11 ; 31, 17: Ps. 37, 37; Peov. 24, 14. iirT'rt ' ' ' ' ' IT : IT \ 'N there is a future to one Prov. 24, 20; and therefore it is put with Ml)5Fi. — 2. end, issue, e. g. of the year Dbut. 11.12, of certain relations Peov. 23, 18; opposite rT'HJN'n Eccles. 7, 8; Is. 46, 10. 1!TiS 'N the end of his discourse Eccles. 10.13. But in prophecy it is distinguished from yjj, in this respect that it does not designate the issue itself but the re- motest occurrence before the end {ypj Dan. 10, 14. Also the end of life, death, Num.23, 10. — 3. what is left or remains, a sense which is only determined more exactly by the connexion, Ez. 23, 25; generally remainder, last, Peov. 23, 32. — 4. the uttermost, most distant Ps. 139, 9. — 5. posteriority, aftergrowth, or con- crete those who come after Ps. 109, 13; Jbb.41,17; Am. 4, 2. D''"!!!!!* Aram, see iinis. r -:r r-:r I'lriN Aram. m. adj. another, alius, e.g. a? people, nation, Dan. 2, 44; nbN 3,29; subst. another 2, 11 ; 5, 17 ; 7, 24. This ad- jective form has been farther developed out of iniN and in the Targ. it is also written pHiS and pniN. But there are also Aramaean forms with Alef rejected, e. g. adj. Tnin , Sam. pis* ; I'lin and many ^ IT ^ T r 7 others; in like manner the Syr. 1-^H*- !T^3"inN adv. backwards Gen. 9, 23 ; 1 Sam. 4, 18. The termination ni-; gives the adverbial character to the word which is here formed from an adjective I^HN , as from the adj. pi); comes rT'S'n'ii?. 'jB'llfflnN (read^Ackhashdarpan; on- ly in the pi. 13''5.S", c. ''3S") m. name of the persons in the Persian empire who were highest after the king (Dan. 3, 2) whose number was the same as that of the provinces, namely 120, Dan. 6, 2 comp. EsTH. 1,1, and whose dignity sur- passed that of the tins, and therefore of all the other seven dignitaries, as &''5JD, V'lT.niN and others 3, 3. Above i*T : ' ' r:)T : --; ' the 120 Ackhashdarpenim only the three T'S'lD (sing, '^pb) were placed 6,2. — As the word is evidently of the same origin as Jlargdniig, it has been correctly rendered by Satrap, especially as we know from history that the Persian kings sent satraps into the provinces (Cyrop. 8, 6, 1 7) and that the country was divided into satrapies (Herod. 3, 89 &c.), of which according to Josephus there are said to have been as many as 360 (Antiq. 10, 11, 4). Without regarding the period when the satraps were instituted or their number we have simply to examine the etymology of the word, which is said to mean according to von Bohlen : Khshadra- pan. Satrap of the military bound- ary^ according to De Sacy: Kshatra- bdn, satrap of the province. On the coins of SurSshtra one has in fact de- ciphered the Sanskrit -form Kshatrapa, which is, according to Lassen (Zeitschrift fiir die Kunde desMorgenlandesIII. 260) guardian of the warriors of the host, but more correctly it is like the Zend Shditra paiti protector of the province {froia Kshetra, province). But granting this explanation, it is only the old Persian that can be normative for the word, and accordingly it has been found written Khshatrapdwd in an old Persian inscription of Behistun (III, 3). This may be either traced back to the same theme with the termination van, or it may use the synonymous -pana, Sanskr. -pa, Zend -paiti. Agreeably to this explanation and admitting the N prosthetic, the form should have been expressed in Hebrew and Aramaean ■je^lffiniS. Since the part IBIIN is found elsewhere, it is better to look upon the word as compounded of iBtiN. i. e. Ksha (old Pers. Kshaja, new Pers. Sha, from a primitive toTia Kshatra) king, Ti court, and )B (from pa to protect) guardian, i. e. court-guardian of the king, etadt- holder. IBn^lOni* (only pi. V?.?") Arain. m, the same as in Hebrew Dan. 3, 2 3. J2?"l"ltJ?n^ (onceK'tibia^iffinxEsTH. 10, 1 ; Persian) n. p. or title of a Per- sian king EzE. 4, 6; Esth. 1, 1 and 5 Ji^-is^'n^ 66 ^^ fi:eq[uently in this book; Dan. 9, 1. Ac- cording to the places where he is men- tioned, 'N was that Persian and Median ruler, who had for his wife a Jewess Esther, and for minister one Mordecai, under whom the historical circumstances narrated in the book of Esther hap- pened, and at the beginning of whose reign the Samaritans sent a calumnious libel to hinder the rebuilding of the temple; whose son too was Darius that became a vassal-king over the Chaldeo- Babylonian empire, Dan. 9, 1. According to ToB. 14, 15 he was also conq[ueror of Nineveh. Trom all this it follows that we must understand Xerxes who became ruler of the great Persian em- pire 485 B. C. After his assassination about 467 B. C. Artachshasta {Artaxeriees Longimanus) took upon him the gov- ernment of the Persian empire, while his son Darius Nothus was placed over Babylonia as a vassal-king (because being sprung from the Jewess and not from the noble family of the Achseme- nides, he was called the bastard). — The first member of the name llSliN = Khsha equivalent to Kslija (new 'Pe.xs'Shdh) i. e. Mng, also exists in I^^Ta-|jft? (great king), a name of the Armenian princes; the second member laiiiB or ^IJ'nil) coincides with the name of Xerxes, KhsKhershe &ii& Khshwershe deciphered in the cuneiform writing, where also a fluctuation in the reception of w appears, as it does here. aJnainN see la^ifflnN. "inJiTl^? (Persian) from wnN Mng, whicla is also found in iBirariN , '^B'llllJnN , and 'inia, Z(indL.Khshaftar\ld.shathr^-a.&w 'PerAa.n Ashidar (comp. Sanskr. Kshattri a kind of mongi-el , who may have been taken for the service of the public) messenger, courier, hence in composition, T6yal messenger, and as an apposition to ti^i?iB^ y^,, i»5;?.i7 risn Esm 8, 10 14. But for the second member of the com- pound the form ll^nttS also appears, a circumstance that makes no change either in the derivation or meaning. See l^ni^™. '''nriaJnN {messenger, courier) n.p.m. formed from the Persian 'nnilint* and IT : — : adopted from the Persian 1 Chr. 4, 6. ■jnntUnS (only in plur. Q^ji'ltl-) m. eq[uivalent to "inaHN whilst the formative syllable )~ is appended: royal messenger, ambassador, Esth. 8, 10 14. 'AaKavSijg, a messenger, mentioned among the Greeks as a Persian word and interpreted by ayysXog arose out of the new Persian Askaddr. The messen- gers or royal servants were taken, if we may judge by the name, from a peculiar cast of the Kshattra, who were not of pure descent on the mother's side, to which fact not only does the Sanskrit Kshattra point, signifying ori- ginally such a mongrel, but also the explanation of 'N by d''3):'n!^""'.3a (Esth. 1. c.) i. e. sons of slaves, see Ij'H'i. Other explanations of this 'N are less probable, according to the context: as that ot Ibn "^Esra from fflfiN king and 'nnia, Pers. I t r-: ^ IT : ' \\JUu' estitr or -ZujI estar, mule (spring- ing from the union of an entire horse with a she-ass), estar properly speaking, being abridged from the Sanskr. agva- tara, swift goer, mule. Thus the word is eq^uivalent to muli regii, and the Per- sian version has Nii'iniUN for taiM'; in Gen. 36, 24. The same remark applies to the derivation proposed by Eashi, who takes the second member as Jum\ ushtur, camel, Sanskr. ushtra. In any case the signification was early forgotten, since the LXX, Vulg. and Syr. have omit- ted the word entirely in their versions. ntlN (from nins or miiN) see inis. I — '^ : :r~: vw-v it v Vltm Aram, see rrtS. 1" - r : UN (also in pause; from t:£3N) m." properly concealment, secrecy, then un- observedness , but usually an adv. con- cealed, secret, still, noiseless, slow, hence DjS 'TjVifl to step along noiselessly, quietly, of a mourner 1 Kings 21, 27, where the Targ., Syr. and Joseph. (Ant. 8, 13, 8), who render it sometimes whispering,. sometimes bare-footed, have merely con- jectured. b-'lsiN TibN UNI Hos. 11, 4 and gently I bear ""(b-^SiN = b-iiN from , bl3) for him. More frequently t3N appears < ^^ 67 £JCD« in connexion with b, e. g. Xiab '^bti Is. 8, 6 to flow slowly, noiselessly, spoken of n'buS; 1?|b ■'b-BNb 2 Sam. 18, 5 g'ere% (deal) for my sake with the young man (LXX cpsiaaa&e and Vulg. senate merely give the sense). For aNb also stands DNb as an adverb in the signification covered, obscure, comp. fitssb, Dab, e. e. 'nsii "^^aS Ut?b Job 15, 11 and the purpose, is it so concealed by thee, i. e. so obscure and covered? The stem of BN is UUN which see.: r I- T *' but the inappropriateness of it has led many interpreters and versions to derive the adverb DNb and tsb from DNb. r : r r r t OS; (from uaN; with suff. ias and IS* is the same root, which is found in 'n-'aV , M-13>, but IT T ' IT I ' _ ^ si % which is not connected with the Ar. is|. Derivatives tilS, UN. r ' I" □CDi< tr. to close, e. g.'the lips Prov. 17, 28 in order not to speak, the ears 14, 13 and Is. 33, 15 not to hear. Part, pass. D^aaiS closed: DiM£3N d'^SplB iSibn 1 BJNGS 6, 4 windows of closed (Targ. ■jMini?) bars, i. e. immovable, whose cross bars or lattices could not be shut and opened at pleasure, like other win- dows (2 Kings 13, 17; Dan. 6, 11); ni?:tJN tiii'ibriEz.41,16 26 or'N. nisibn closed i. e. latticed windows. The ex- pression in the Targum: open without and closed within (on 1 KiNGS 1. c.) is said only to mean that the lattice-work of the opening was fixed within. On these passages also the Ar. ajI has been compared, and Sp^ to slit Jer. 22, 14 has been collated; but since i>^'p was 5* jDK 68 ^i< used for to slit or split, and the break- ing ttrough of a window was denoted by it, nothing but closing with lattices can by meant by 'if?. Hif. Q'^JDNli (fut. d'^Uij::) Ps. 58, 5 to close, the ears. " ^ The stem DtaiS, Ar.I^f, Targ. CitiN, Syr. >Q.ii, has for its organic root Dt3"N, which is also found in n-W£3, d£3-n, IT T ' |- T ' With another (-sound in Dn-n, arrD, Ar. *ia3, AJa, ttXsA, and arising out of the sibilant i-sound DD'ln, Ar. t,ja , Hebr. Dit, DT &c.; but in all the nu- merous stem-groups of the root no trace of the signification to split is found. |COi^ (not used) tr. to weave, hind, spin, properly to tie, hence IWN (which see). The root is ytl'^, which returns in N-i^, ■]¥ (belonging%o niSiat, InSIt) &c., Ar. (T^f) iJ->*5) comp. Ar. ^jh bundle. "lCDi< (/m«. 1C:N'') tr. 1. Jo ewcZose, surround; with b? Ps. 69, 16 «o close upon one. Jerome renders it by coro- nare,, certainly thinking upon 'nui', which is cognate therewith by root. The stem 'lESN, Ar. Its I to surround, is connected by signification with the cognate ia5», but in the organic root also with 1U-2, '-in-3, ia-3, Tia and others. — 2. (not used) to bind, where the organic root is connected with that in 'iri'J, 1{3")5. Hence comes the pro- per name "icjN. Pih. 'najj (not used) to bind, figura- tively to lame. Hence lasjt. "1t3i< {lamed one) n. p. m. Eze. 2, 16 42 ; Neh. 7, 21. In relation to the signi- fication comp. the Latin proper names Scaeva, Scaevola, Laevus, Laevinus. *1!i>5< adj. m. bound, i. e. lamed, im- peded, e. g. ^inj 12 '» i^e right hand Judges 3 15 and 20, 16 i. e. left-handed. Comp. Ar. tXJiftI dumb, properly bound, tongue-tied. ''5|? (with suf ijN, nS)».Nl, Cl\^) adv. interr.: where? ubi? correlative to "'T (in itn) there, but used in this short form only before a suffix, as i^N where (is) hef Job 14, 10; 20, 7; Ex." 2, 20; rt^iN where (art) «Aom.? Gest. 3, 9: d^N T I'.- - a ' ' IT - where (are) *A«y? Nah. 3, 17. But iiiN 2 Kings 19, 13 (comp. Is. 37, 13 Ti^'t^ Mic. 7, 10 is to be taken as n;iN. Tor d^N once occurs loosely connected with the pronoun, !i;n: Wn M^N Zech. 1, 5; NiSN d^'^N Is. 19, 12 is put for the sake o¥ greater emphasis, where are they then ? gf as isipj* with !i;i«. In Arab. (^1 is the; interrogative pronoun quis? which be- comes a sort of noun in the formation of a feminine and plural form. — From; this pronominal stem are derived Irt^N, VSt, ■'i*, which see. ''N (probably consir. of "lis) interrog. adv., where'? correlative to (Aram.) "tlrt there. It signifies 1. qualis, i. e. a man of what condition? nolog, who? It oc- curs only in the construct state (from ■'N), and since it stands only before de- monstrative pronouns or adverbs, and never by itself like !i^N, nothing but its interrogative power remains, which it imparts to the pronouns. Thus e. g. a) MT "IN which? what? 1 Kjngs 13, 12; 2 Kmss 3, 8 ; 2 Che. 18,23; Esth. 7, 5 ; more frequently however with respect to place than person, i. e. MT in the sense of here, hence TTt "iN where ? 1 Sam. 9, 18 ; 1 Kings 22, 24;' Is. 50, 1. Some- times this is written as one word rtPN (which see), b) M-TM ''N from what? whence? Gen. 16, 8; Judges 13, 6; 1 Sam. 25, 11; opposite to !i3N whither? — 2. just the same as "IN where? or also how? but without a suffix and so supplying in a measure its place, Gen. 4, 9; Dbut. 32,37; n'^sn-'N 1 Sam. 26, 16 where is the spear? nibON ni^Tb ">{« Jee. 5, 7 how shall I pardon in con- sideration of this? (see ni53 iS for Phenicia. ''^ V. (only in plural D''';n) m. prop. screecher, howler, a concrete from the abstract signification "howling"; hence jackal Is. 13, 22; 34, 14; Jer. 50, 39, from its nightly howl, as also in Arab, it is called (^.1 ^i\. The form need not be considered as developed either out of ■'IN and so identical with the Arabic word, or as from M;i.lSt, but may be de- rived immediately from "'N , the sound of this animal. See "^N H. and !i"N. ni« 70 r]^^ 3"'N (not used) trans, properly to hurt, asperse, despise, hence to attack. It has been assumed that the stem is such merely on account of :3|;N, where the Yod is consonantal, but miN is properly the ground-form in the same sense as aiy (hence comes a"'5>!l Lament. 2, 1), of which the former is only a weaker form. The Targ. (on Lament. 2, 1) rend- ers SIS' by yip to reject, despise very correctly, and with this sharper initial sound the root is in Aramaean ^^^ to contemn, despise, hate, Arab. i_>Lft (med. Je) to blame. Derivatives i;t« and the denomin. H^jf , n'2^ii , lna''N , and perhaps the proper name ii'^N. n;;N (oftener ^^S, with sujf. i^^i*, ];|a^'N ; pi. Q'^^^N , eonstr. ija^Sj) m. enemy, hater, opposer in the widest sense, ap- plied to attacking enemies Ex. 15, 6 9 ; Ps. 7, 6, to the blasphemer and despiser of God Ps. 74, 10, to a single enemy 1 Sam. 19,17, or collectively to a hostile people Jer. 31, 16. The predicates of a;;N ai-e manifold, e. g. t[ri, Tpn, 5>p!i, 'las, and many expressions are formed with i;;N which we shall have to adduce with the verbs in question and on other occasions. The noun is a participial one, formed either from fiS''N, as 'nsb, ' IT ■■ ' 1" ' 'ly'xa from 'ISO and 'nym , or directly from the stem (which was not in use as a verb) without retaining the idea of the verb ; hence although it is often used, it has as a verbal participle the accusative after it but once 1 Sam. 18, 29. Hence ni"'j« and the denom. VIV n^N (only ■'rii;;Nn) to be an enemy, to hate, with the accusative Ex. 23, 22. As the mode of speaking in other cases was b ^''N !T'!n, this secondary formation con- tinued to be rare. nn'^N (after the form riT'S: eonstr. IT •• ^ IT ■• ' r^") fern, enmity, hatred, ya 't< nilBfl • . . T'ai to raise enmity between . . . and . . . Gen. 3, 15 ; 'N'tiba without hate Numb. 35,22; 'sa in enmity 35,21; Dbii» 'N Ez. 25,15 and 35, 5 eternal i. e. irreconcilable enmity. — For naj? Job 9, 26 many mss. read Ma'^N and many interpreters take it in this sense (see InaN); but the pos- sible explanation is given above accord- ing to the textual reading. It may be mentioned moreover, that Rashi and Ihn 'Esra take it as the name of a place, for Euhoea, the original seat of the .ffiolians. This rests on the Talmudic tradition (J. Megilla ch. 1), that Euboea was colonised from d''Fi3 and that it stands for the latter. Ships of Chittim are known in Scripture as early as Num. 24, 24. nD;;; 54 {eonstr. ina:;N , with suf. ■'na^N ; from a"*}*) fern, a female enemy; MiC. 7, 8 10. '" Ti;); (with suff. ■^TN, D^TiS, 1=7,-, ^^7; contracted from n^N) masc. prop, turning, divine arrangement, equivalent to rtaO , hence misfortune, fate, destruction; or properly strait enclosure, embracing round about, hence strait, necessity, op- pression, misfortune Job 31, 3 23; Pkov. 1, 26 27; 17, 5; T'N Qi;i Job 21, 30; Jek.18,17; 46,21; dB.13;PROV.27,10 an unfortunate day, day of destruction, fatal day; bs T'N Job 31,23 the destruc- tion of God i. e. caused by God. Mss. also write ^''N in the sense of mist, vapour, otherwise IN ; but our text is decided in favour of "IN. The stem is IIN (which see) and the noun is after the form]?''p, pi-i, shorter forms forTjN, p^p, p^p; the original signification may be cognate in sense with inao. The Arab. 01 with its IT • derivatives is allied to IN in this sense. See niiN. IT (T'tj^ 1. fern, name of a bird of prey unclean in the eyes of the Israelites Lev. 11,14; Dt. 14, 14, which has a keen sight Job 28, 7. Sdadja and Ibn G'andch translate it (_^(X« appears instead of it, Gen. 18, 9; 19,' 5; 38, 21. But if it be associated with a suffix, the con- nexion is a very loose one, e. g. 'nyt nil Zech. 1, 5 for d^N where are they? Just as in the case of ''N the question is usually conceived in such a manner that it is almost equivalent to a nega- tive 2 Kings 18, 34; Jeb.13,20. TiJ^jA^ii or where ? NIDN ir'N where ever ? — 2.ad- 1 - I"- verb. indef. wherever, every where over, wheresoever Job 15, 23, where it con- cludes the sentence. For !i^N once l^N appears inK'tib Jee. 37,19, which stanks for ^I^N with the old plural ending, traces of which are still preserved in verbs and particles (comp. >13N , I'lN.). (T'J^ see ■'iS V. IV • r •?^ K'tib S. fT^N. I - r- Di'Jt n. p. of the well known hero of the book that bears his name, ^lyyoh Job 1, 1; 2, 7 10 11; 3, 1; 6, 1 &c. whom the prophet Ezekiel (14, 14 20) accounts a model of piety along with nb and IJNi'jT, three types of goodness, just as Jeremiah (15, 1) reckons Moses and Sa- muel, Ben-Sira (49, 4) David, Hezekiah and Joshua, and the Koran the three prophets Nuh, Hud and SS,lech. — Ac- cording to the Hebrew orthogi-aphy of the name it appears to be derived from the denomin. ^-iN, after the form 1i3T0, .. |-T ' I • ' lip''., as the same form appears in other 7« proper names, comp. DSlTi, 'lisJ!:, ^y;^ ^■7)?.) and it signified accordingly: ill- treated one, which suited the fate of the hero. But tradition (Apokryphon of the Alex. Vers.) speaks of his earlier name S|3'i% 'Iw^d^, who was an Edomite (Gen. 36, 33), and the LXX and Vulg. name him as the hero of the book: ^v, 'Im§, Job, which is elsewhere a proper name Gen.46,13, standing also for awi Numb. 26, 24 or V^xi-^ 1 Chr. 7, 1 K'ri.' Hence I r T ' Si^ must either be taken as a form with a firm N prosthetic; and 51'' (from il"" equivalent to the Ar. i— >t to turn, return to God) like aiiN will signify converted one; or it is a Pihel- formation from SIN = Ilia with the same meaning, Ar. i-j|jl he that turns himself. biari* (from bsr-inN.) n. p. of a Ty- rian princess who became wife of Ahab king of Israel, and was notorious for the introduction of the Phenician Baal- worship, 1 Kings 16, 31; 18,4. bST is equivalent to bliT (which see) heavenly dwelling, citadel, consequently allied in sense to ')iS73 (which see) in the proper name li»a bi!>a = biST bS»a, and SN in I I : -I- I : -I- ' IT the first member nearly corresponds as an epithet of the supreme deity to b?l3. See bar and lat*.. The highest divine being, Baal among the Phenicians, is conceived of as enthroned in the seventh heaven in the fire -citadel (baT, bat, ni^i^ (pronominal stem) interrogative adverb: where? for the elsewhere se- parate form MT ■'N 1 Kings 13, 12; Job 38, 19 24 ; yet mss. vary in wi-iting them together. D''*'N see ■'N V. (perhaps from n^^.N). "n^^ (pronominal stem, abridged from 513"''^) interrogative and qualitative ad- verb: how ? how so ? Gen. 44, 34; 1 Sam. 16, 2; but the comparative element often disappears as in quomodo, or is ab- sorbed by the inten-ogation-power (sel- dom the reverse) and so only the quali- tative how (like '^j-'N, 'rj'^N in the Targum) TDD-ifc^ 72 b^^ remains, 2 Kings 17, 28 ; Euth3, 18, like nmg. Besides, like Tl'D'^H , it is used as an exclamation of pain or astonishment Is. 14,4; Ps. 73, 19 or with the accessory idea of negation, and therefore it is resolvable into a simple negative, Ex. 6,12. 'Ti33"''J< (fameless) n. p. m. 1 Sam. 4, 21, which is explained there by iibs li^3. But this signification perhaps is only used by the narrator accommo- datively; and the proper name has pro- bably been abridged from 11^3 ""'as.. Comp. 195V. n^''^? (pronominal stem) interrog. and qualitat. adverb: how? with all the shades of the abridged form 'Tj'^iS, yet prin- cipally with the intermingling of an ex- clamation of pain or astonishment, Dbut. 1, 12; 18, 21; 2 Kings 6, 15; Lament. 1,1; Is. 1, 21 ; with the exclusion of the interrogative sense Deut.12, 30 ; Judges 20, 3; as a mere interrogative where? like the simple ■'N, Song op Sol. I, 7. This compound adverb exists in Ara- maean in different forms, e. g. Targ. Ni?^N, ^T^, V^, TvJ' Syr. I^f, -e-f, ri-3^^^ (pronominal stem) the same, compounded of TVD and iN, but only in the sense oi where, ubi, without a question 2 Kings 6, 13. The K'ri has ilD-'N. Some mss. have ilB'^N, with which it coincides in a sense that suits here. *!D^i^ (pronominal stem) see tTb''N. (133 ''^^ (pronominal stem) adv. how f connected with the imperfect. Song or Sol. 5, 3 ; Esth. 8, 6, compounded of ''N and Ji53 ita, but appearing only in later Hebraism. See !iD3. P''^^ (not used) an assumed stem to explain l3''N, b^N, b''S« &c., in which a r .,-7 IT-' iTv: ' Yod as the alleged second radical sound is either audible, or visible in the ortho- graphy. On this assumption V'^tl and b'^S have been compared, as also the Greek ullw, e'dm ; while to turn, revolve has been taken for the fundamental signification. But Hebrew dispenses with stems having the middle i-sound; and the alleged traces of an interior ?-sound in derivative noun- stems are referrible to 13* or more cor- rectly to stems of one syllable with a (dp, bs, bn, ba) and should be ex- plained according to the known rules that apply to stems having two letters. See blist I. and H. 5*N (plur. Cb'^i?) originally comm., afterward only m. a stag, hart, belonging to one family with las and 'i1Mfi2 Deut. 12, 15 ; 14, 5 ; 15, 22, described as spring- ing or running swiftly Is. 35, 6 ; Lament. 1, 6, as panting and crying for the water brooks. Ps. 42, 2 also used of the hind and construed with the feminine. In favour of this correct sense is the Phe- nician bjN (Mass. 5. 9) and b^N i'nJT (ib. 9) the young of the stag, comp. "ng'? d^ibiisri Song ofSol.2,9; theTarg.sb"}!, I- T - IT ' ' . *^ IT T - ' Nb^N,Syr.|:^f,Ar.j4|, J^l, ^thiop. chajdl, and also the translation of the LXX and Vulg. sXacfiog^ cervus. But the derivation is much more difficult. Erom biN, I. b'jN would be (after the form 'TIS, a^l, y<'r) prop, the strong, power- ful, solid, for which the .^thiopic chajdl (b^h) appears to speak, and to which the simple b^^ points. But inasmuch as the sex of the stag is not prominent, and Scripture distinguishes it rather by nimbleness, the word may be derived from b'lN = bin in the signification " to turn", then "to run" (turning and swift- running are identical in many verbs), so that b"*? would properly mean nimble, a swift-runner. b'^N {constr. b'^N, bN only Ez.31,11; jpZ. d'^biN anddb", once dibs Job 42, 8, constr. ''Y^, Ez.32,21 ''bsi)m. l.powei; strength, concr. hero, warrior,powerful one, chief, Ex. 15, 15; 2 Kings 24, 15 K'ri (identical with b':p '1135 24, 14) Ez. 17, 13; d'l.iS bs 31, 11 hero, compeller of the nations, LXX aqimv i&vav; d'^'nbs ""bs 32, 21 the mightiest of heroes i. e, the greatest heroes, Vulg. potentissimi ro- bustorum. "nia.^ bN as an epithet of the - b^^ 73 nb^i^ Messiah Is. 9, 5 according to Aquila, Symm., Theod. and Saadja mighty hero (therefore bs is not God). In the pas- sages in EzEK. many mss. (see Norzi) haveb"'!*, "'^''i}; in the passage in Isaiah the interpretation usually adheres to bs , and even in Job 41, 17 t3''b''!S heroes is abeady the reading. Comp. biN I. — 2. a strong tree, hence the name of an oak, terebinth, perhaps also palm, so especially the ^Z. Q'^biN Is. 1,29; dibs* 57,5; defective with'suff. tilvhs Ez. 31, 14; but in the latter it is pointed Dil'^bs. plSli ■'b'^N Is. 61,3 oaks of righteousness, i. e. consecrated to God, parallel with "'•' S>i313 , consequently the opposite of the D''b''N of idolatry, perhaps images made out of the oak 1, 29 ; 57, 5, so that p'liS. (which see) seems here to be an epithet of God, equivalent to i'\ Hence come a) n-. p. I'nNS biN {Terebinth of Paran) Gen. 14, 6, a place in the neighbourhood of mount Se'^ir, where the Horites dwelt, and which lay near the wilderness of Paran, LXX rsqi^iv&og t^s (DaQuv. — b) n.p. Q'^b-'N (in mss. also dibiS or Db"'N , with a local !iab''N; palms) name of the seventh station of the Israelites on their march from EgyptEx.15,27 ; 16,1, where stood seventy palmtrees. In these proper names the Targ., Sam., Jerome, Arab, as well as Kimchi, Rashi, Parchon and others understand by b^N or the pi. d"'b ^N a plain overgrown with trees, without respect to the kind of the trees , which is quite possible in consideration of the noun ']biN being from the same stem, and perhaps D''b"ii? even outside proper names is nothing more than grove, bush, wood, a plantation generally, and so cognate in sense to 5>B73 Is. 61, 3. In any case 'N denotes a strong, stedfast, firm tree, contrasted with the more perish- able plants. — 3. ram, so called from its strength like aries Gen. 15, 9, 22, 13, an animal used for sacrifice, fre- quently mentioned in the Old Testa- ment, KenceQian, ttibipa 'n 15, 9; Lev. 5,15; d^Nba, DUJN , ' d^l'si b^^N Ex.29, 22; Lev. 19, 21; Ntjmb. 5, 8; and since 'N was also applied to animals not belong- ing to li^a, they sometimes said IfilS-biiJ EzK. 10, 19 comp. Gen. 31, 38. The pro- phets describe lijus-ipa QibiN Deut. 32, 14 or ni^ai ■'b-^N Is.'eO, 7 as rams se- lected for sacrifice i. e. the fattest. Scrip- ture supposes the ram furnished with horns, with which it pushes Dan. 8, 3 4 and by that means develops great strength, hence a symbol of the Medo- Persian empire 8, 20. — 4. a term of architecture {constr. b"'N, pi. D'^biN or ^.''^ ) ■'^itli ^'"'ff- l^'^S?) pilaster (prop, ram, comp. the German Bock in Eisbock), i. e. the projection which always springing, pillar-like, out of adjacent recesses on both sides, fronts towards the space where is the entrance and through passage. It appears at halls and doors (abis and 13>1B) Ez.40,9 21 24 29 33 36 38 4:9, at side chambers (Q-'NFi) 40,10 16 21 29 33 36, at the parts of the temple where doors andposts are 41,1 3; 1Kings6,31, inthe gate and temple on two sides Ez. 40, 10 26 34 48 49 ; 41, 1, which were gener- ally of the same measure as chambers and. walls, and were as broad as was the wall of that space to which the D"'biij belonged, and in which the chambers themselves were. The LXX frequently abide by ail and interchange fib'^N with dbiN or dblN; the Targ. has the same word isb"'N, Nbx (in 1 Kings 6, 31 the IT .. ' IT •• ^ ' punctation should be ^!^b^!); but the other versions have indulged in conjec- ture more or less; and accordingly one is driven to the connexion of the text and the derivation. It may very well be brought into association with b^N, comp. AquilaEz.40,14 xQiafta and nQiog, so far as it resembles in a measure a buttress to the ram. ^''\/t.,pl. a"'b''N and Q-'bi}, see b^N. ^■^X (from biN I.) m. power Ps. 88, 5, Targ. Nb'^tl. The Syriac has retained the word in U*] . nb^iN {constr. nbfN ; pi- nibjN, constr. ni^^N) ?. 1. hind Job 39, l;'Ps. 29, 9, noted for its agility 18, 34; Hab. 3, 19; iTiten 'N Song of Sol. 2, 7, !Tites '^j r\b^^ 74 n^^N Jer. 14, 5 hind of the field; as a pleas- ing image of the wife Peov. 5, 19. — 2. equivalent to M^N (in nib-^N) or fibi* oak, hence 'Si finbiB 'N Gen. 49, 21 a : IT '- : - Stretched (slender) oa^, iAa< presents beau- tiful houghs, liXX. arslsxog avsiiisvov. — 3. ir»an rh^» Ps. 22, 1 name of a lost poem in which the hind of the dawn was spoken of, called so after the same manner as was the elegy of David and Jonathan niT)?, (2 Sam. 1, 18), because Jonathan's bow was celebrated in it (1, 22). in^iTl 'N was an expression familiar to the Hebrews to designate the first light of the morning (Jer. Berach.), like the Ar. xJlyi. r)b"'IS see nib-'N. IT .. I " lib^i* (deerfield; comp. the German Hirschau,Hir6chfeld,Hirschberg) 1. n.p. of a Levitical city in the tribe of Dan Josh. 10, 12 beside Q'^abyilJ and Ti? 1157211) or Din-, which the LXX in Judges V IV V|V ' 1,35 take as an appellative (]D"'b''N) and translate bears. — 2. n. p. of a city in the territory of Zebulun Judges 12, 12, so written for 'jibi? Josh. 19, 33 or pbs?. lib''!Sl (oak-grove, oak-bush; from bw I.) 1. n. p. of a town in the tribe of Dan Josh. 19, 43, different from ■jib^N 19, 42, but it must have been in its neighbourhood, since it is put with Qiabyia and 115)3123 rfa 1 Kings 4, 9: in its vicinity lay pn rT^a. Entirely distinct is 'jibij (also written 'jibi? or ']ib''Ni) Josh. 19, 33, which lay on the Ijorder between Naftali and Zebulun. — 2. 1^8*, li^"'i« (strong, hero) n. p. of a Hittite, Gen. 26, 34; 36, 2. — 3. n. p. of a judge belonging to Zebulun, Judges 12, 11. nip'^N (oak- or palm-grove; from blN I.) n. p. of the well-known Edomite sea -port on the eastern gulf of the Eed Sea 1 Kings ,9, 26; 2 Kings 16, 6; 2 Che. 8, 17; 26, 2, but commonly .written rib''N (which see). ri*lD''N f- strength, power, protection Ps. 22,' 20, Targ. t\]>J\T\; formed from ITv: ob'^N (nine times Dbs; pi. D'^'abiN, d'^^sbN, also ni^bs) m. a rare archi- tectural expression which appears only in EzEK. chapter 40 and resembles the analogous form QbiN making its plural in the same manner (comp. fiT^ri and blin), but is yet different from it. It means , a sort of hall-like space that re- cedes and projects, where the hall -shape is made by the D"'b''i5 i. e. the projecting pillar-like walls at entrance and exit, and its base is the £|^&. A 15?1I3 could therefore have several db''S< i. e. ni'abN IT ■- \^ r 40, 16, but always as a principal part of the gate 40, 21, still worthy of spe- cification along with the gate 40, 25 29 33, furnished with windows 40, 16 25 29 33 and like the QiNn and D-'b-'N r T r ■• needing to be measured 40, 21 24 29 33 36; whilst &blN is a hall built on the outside. In subsequent times Db''N may have been interchanged with labw ; therefore the LXX, Vulg., Targ., Ar., Syr. translate it partly like dbiN (the LXX have even alldii, iXdft for the Hebrew DbiN 8, 16; 40, 7 9 40 48; 41,15 26;"46, 2 8; 1 Kings 6, 3; 7,6; 2 Che. 3, 4), partly like Q'^b'^N. Instead of the plural T'Mb''N the K'tib has con- stantly iiab'^iS or ilabs in the singular. Since the signification is only an off- shoot from that of dblN, the word ap- pears to be of the same origin, and one might therefore derive it from fiblS. Qli^a (palms) n. p. see b';N 2. niab'^N see db-'N. I - 1" IT •• D'^ab'^S see dbiN. ,.- ,.. IT •• ib'^X (def. NSbiN or Tii-) Aram. m. ' IT ■ ^ ' ITT 1- T ■' . p. O .„ a tree Dan. 4, 7 11 17 23, Syr. 1^:^-1 , in the Targ. for yy. It is properly like the Hebrew form "pb'^N , "jibN , only that it denotes here a tree generally, comp. d SQvg. Others combine b';8< with it in the signification of bush and d"'b''N bushes, so far as it is parallel with 1-1 Is. 1, 29 or 5»iaa 61, 3, and take tree from bushy; but this meaning is only secondary. n b^N (a grove, apalmgrove; or nib'^s) n. p. of the Edomite harbour-town on n!?^^ 75 y^ tie east gulf of the Eed Sea Deut. 2, 8; 2 Kings 14, 22; 16, 6; according to Eusebius (under 'Hld-d) ten miles east of S>bD, according to Pliny (5, 12) 150 Eomaii miles from !i-T^; the gulf is called from this town (among the Greeks 'Eldra, Alkdva, LXX Aikmv [lib in], Aikd,&, 3 OS. AiXavrj; Procop. A'lXdg) the Elanitio. At present there is a fortress (iujif) there, named iUot 2uJi£, sur- rounded with palmgroves, and the ruins of the former city Elat still exist under the name Gelena. See nib''N. The femi- nine termination n- is usual in Pheni- cian (and in the Edomite dialect), e. g. nay people, na'n mistress; and in Phe- nician pronunciation the form nib"'i< also stands for nb''N. nb'N see nb^N, b^N. •.;•.•- JTT-' IT- D^i^ (an unused stem assumed for r T ^ tr^, na"'N and Qinij*) intr. to he vio- lently moved, to he terrified, affrighted; but the stem is properly DN (DIN), and DijS might as well be formed from the latter, as D")? from dp (dip). Cognate El meaning to diS is^ dfi (dlJl) to be violently moved, to reel, and WS (dW) belonging to d''5'.. U^^^adj. m., JiMI'S* f. formidable, terrihle, fear-inspiring, cognate in sense to N'nii, Hab. 1, 7 ; figuratively, majestic, applied to the majestic appearance of warlike troops with banners (nibiili) and of the beautiful, Song of Solom. 6, 4 10. D'^N (onlypZ. d^'M'^N; after the form b^jS) m. 1. terror, dread Ps. 88, 16. — 2. idol, properly bug-bear, an object of terror to the worshippers, Jek. 50, 38, as nstbca, Aram. Nbni, comp. ins ap- plied to God. — 3. d'^m, d'i72''N {giants, properly terrors), a name of the original inhabitants of the banks of the 'Amon, and of Moab generally. They were d"'ND'n giants, for which the Moabites said d""?^ Deut. 2, 11 and the 'Ammo- nites diMjni 2, 20. They were spread over the Moabite dTii'np miZJ Gen. 14, 5, • i-T :'• 1" T and according to the Targ. and Samar. are said to be identical with the d)?.'; (=d''aN) 36, 24, whom the Horite ray met in the desert. 51)3''^ (with a reduplication of the termination poetically Inna'^N; constr. nu^i*, with suff, ■^nn-'N; ''pl'mn-'^) f. after the form MliS, nsiN, InS'^N, ter- . IT •• ' IT •• ' IT •• ' ror, fear, which a person or thing in- stils. Job 9, 34; 13, 21; 33, 7; 'N nbuj iDsb to send fear before Ex. 23, 27^; ^y ''N ^hsi Josh. 2, 9 and Ps. 55, 5 fear falls upon one; "^bn riM'^N the fear which a king inspires Prov. 20, 2. ?^_i^ I. (pronominal stem compounded of the interrogative ''N and the demon- strative vocable -re) 1. adv. interrog. where? correlative to the words ')';l"!Sl, T?!"?* (ill ■'I?*.) t^*t O'lce existed in the language, comp. Ar. /j-?' where? Syr. P-*| who ? of wh^ kind? {qualis f) where the peculiar nature of "'N (which see) manifestly appears. But this T^N in Hebrew is still preserved only in con- nection with 1U: 1';NU from where? whence? usually with the imperfect Josh. 9, 8 ; Judges 17, 9 ; 19, 17 ; 2 Kings 6, 27; 20, 14; Job 1, 7; 28, 12 20; Jon. 1, 8; Nah. 3, 7; Is. 39, 3, very seldom with the perfect Gen. 42, 7, or entirely without a distinct verb in the sentence, and merely including the verb to he Gen. 29, 4; Num. 11, 13. Once the K'tib reads for it the abbrevi- ated form "jsri whence ? 2 Kings 5, 25. As in the case of ""N the interrogative sometimes recedes in this word Josh, 2, 4, but it should not be taken rela- tively on that account. In Ps. 121, 1 it should be taken as an interrogation expressing longing desire. To ']';i{ i. e. the state absol. and con- struct are to be distinguished: 1. TJN as a negative in the absolute state, when it closes the part of the sentence after the subject and so forms along with it a full sentence, also in slight pause, or including within itself the verb to be, or generally, when it is free like Vi^ and not subordinate, e. s. VN DINT Gen. ' o I.J- lyT : 2, 5 and a man was not there; IpJH ']';!!< Job 35, 15 there is not anything, which he has puriished; ']^!S"d!S!T Gen. 30, 1; Ex. 32, 32; Judges 9, 15 'and if not ... then, where it closes the first conditional clause. As a vocabl^subsisting by it- self, independent and not subordinate lp_^ (in pause yin) stands at the close of a sentence either in interrogative positions to denote an antithesis Ex. 17, 7; Num. 13, 20; 2 Sam. 17, 6 in the signification no, not, or as a subst. nothing Eccles. 3, 19, or as a complete idea, there is or was nothing, especially so -j-Ni, in pause yjA-\ ISam. 9, 4; Job 3, 9;'Prov. 14, 6. "'Sence l^Nb Is. 40, 23 to nothing, comp. bsb sig fAr/Se'v Job 24, 25, ■)';i«3 as nothing, as a nothing Is. 40, 17; 41, 11 12;Ps.39,6;Hag. 2, 3; there wanted nothing i. e. almost Ps. 73, 2 ; infasi y_^72 Jek. 30, 7 none, properly nothing, is as it; 'J^Na of nothing Is. 41, 24. Allied in sense are DSN, 5>SN. — 2. 'jijS as a negative in the construct state: a) appearing before the noun and subordinate to it (see ■'t?, Tiba, 1^|)i corresponding to the German o/ine, un-, or the English in-, e. g. ^B012 ']''N Gen. 41, 49 without number; 003 liN Ex. 21, 11 without money. By such as- sociation there is formed poetically a kind of new adjective, e. g. b"'N ^lij Ps. 88, 5 strengthless , Ipn ']''N Pkov. 25, 3 unsearchable, riMin' T^n' 25, 28 wattless, 'nicna I^n 28, 27 rich (comp. ixh, bN, Nb2i,'ib|).' In other cases ]>>ja without stands for the same, e. g. I^Na Inain without a wall Ez. 38, 11. b) be- fore the infinitive, which is taken as a noun, e. g. ')''l3!i )'^lft without under- standing Ps.32,9. c) expressing the nega- tion of existence generally, tiSifi, DBN, llS"; being similar words, and so subordi- nating itself to the subject: thus before nouns, e. g. 'Tjba !■]■'>« Judges 17, 6 there is not a king; before participles, e. g. yfit rtb"3> Ps. 14, 1 thei'e is not a doer i. e. none does. With participles it also ex- presses a negative present, e. g. 135''N 5731^ he is not hearing i. e. he hears not Jer. 7, 16, or an immediate future 37, 14; seldom does it appear in union with the imperfect 38, 5. But the ')"'*5 that subordinates itself in this manner may also take a more independent place in the sentence, e. g. p^ia VN tiTN Eccles. 7, 20 for 'It 'N 'N; bai'^ lyb^rt^N Jee. 38, 5 for "i 'n''!i. d) T'N joins itself to the infinitive with b, e. g. '^13S ']■'{}_ as^nilb it is not to stand before thee i. e. one cannot withstand thee 2 Chk. 20, 6; EzE. 9, 15; Esth. 8, 8; also in narrating the past 2 Chk. 5, 11 ; 35, 15; very seldom with the omission of b, e. g. 'T^?. V^ ** '* '*"* *" compare Ps."40, 6 for ^'"lyb". e) as a negative subordiaate to the words bip every, all, 'ni'n thing, somewhat, iiaiNM something, it reverses the idea like ^«b ', e. g. la '5 iiN Ex. 5, 11; Jek. 38, 5, rjniN73 ^N 1 Kings 18, 43 not anything, i. e. nothing, bb T'N none, Num. 11, 6; 2 Sam. 12, 3; Peov. 13, 7; Eccles. 1, 9. See Nb. f) in connexion with another negative ''bsa preceding, in order to strengthen the signification, which must be represented by because there is not Ex. 14, 11 ; 2 Ejngs 1, 3. g) To this head belongs especially the construct T'N in connexion with a. verbal suffix, where the subject and predicate are combined with the verb to be superadded in idea, and thus some- thing complete in itself is expressed, as also ffl;;, nsri, ■'n, liy, nN, ns, ias, Vj?, fiS>, bs &c. are employed, e. g. ''33"'is / am not Ex. 5, 10; iSi'^N he is not i.'«, is no more. Gen. 5, 24. For the suffix Q- the form ia- or ia^- also appears Ps. 59, 14; 73, 6. . " I^« 77 Syi^ We have still to notice particularly "[■^^^ and ']''N in connexion •with 3, 3, b, l??: V^-? equivalent to 6''5N) n. p. m. Numb. 26,30; hence the patronym.-'^'lS''^ there also. P]"'{<1 see rl"1^^. ilS''N (seldom nsN, constr. na''N: IT •■ ^ IT" ' r ■■ ' alter the form Ti'S^», rTO''N) /. 1. a mea- sure of gram Numb. 5, 15; Is. 5, 10, according to Josephus (Ant. 15, 9, 2) an Attic fiiSijikyoe , 48 yoivMsg (about V-j^ bushel English) or as much as a na for liquids, 3 USD, 10 1M3>, or VJo lah or 'is. The LXX have either re- tained the term in oiqisi, oiqii, oIq)i, vifd, vcpi, because the name was widely known, or rendered it by tQia fjistqa (a idtQov they put for a MNt?). It is possible that the word should be re- garded as originally Egyptian, since it is also found in Coptic; but the Hebrew certainly thought of a Semitic deriva- tion, comp. riis. — 2. Figuratively mea- ture generally, Ez. 45, 10; Mich. 6, 10. nC'N (a pronominal stem com- pounded of '^N and !is) adv. interrog. 1. of place, where here ? where there ? or merely a strengthened where? ubinamf Gen. 37, 16; Euth 2, 19; 1 Sam. 19, 22. — 2. how? of what kind? Judges 8, 18; Vulg. quales fuerunt viri? and so the Syr. and Arabic. It appears that flb'^N in this sense was put for Jib^N (2 Kings 6, 13 K'tib), as vice versa lni"'N Song op Sol. 1, 7 stands for rtb-'Nr — 3. of what form? Is. 49, 21. — 4.' when? at what time ? Job 4, 7. — In all signi- fications this In's'^N is interrogative, and the meaning how? still exists in i— iAS' heifa. See Us. i^lD^^ (a pronominal stem com- pounded of the demonstrative ^N or N, and Nis = is , Ms) adv. demonstr. so then Judges 9, 38 ; Peov. 6, 3, used in ques- tions or lively discourse to give them emphasis. aJ'^N I. (lengthened from fflN by omit- ting the reduplication of 125, hence the feminine is IWif; with suffixes ■'laiij, '■:\Vi''», iiB'^N, rtffl''ij; and from the ex- tended groundform three times the plural d''l25"'N, as also the diminutive '\W^ti. The usual plural, however, runs as D'^lBSN , constr. ""diN, with suff. ''laSN , li-ifflSN, 'T'llJSN &c., probably at 'first D''iai2N, as also the Samaritan reads in the text Gen.18,16 ; 19,10 16, and there- fore from the singular-theme I23i3!jt) m. prop, strong, from ii5n (^atUNi), like isa from "155, then generally 1. a man, a) with relation to strength, courage and valour as qualities belonging to a man 1 Sam. 4, 9 ; 26, 15 ; 1 Kings 2, 2, comp. vir, avijg ; b) with reference to age and so antithetic to )'pj ISam. 2, 33; c) as a husband, opposed to a wife Gen. 2, 24: 3, 6 ; Lev. 20, 10; Numb. 5, 12 ; Euth 1, 11; d) with reference to sex, therefore male, masculine, applied to men Lev. 15, 18; 18, 6; Ez. 22, 11, or to beasts Gen. 7, 2, for which ^3T also stands 6, 19 : J J ITT ' ' also used of children of the male sex 4, 1; 1 Sam. 1, 11. In this sense it is combined with tliSN to denote both sexes IT • ^>5^ 78 ty^N Ex. 21, 29; 35, 29; 36, 6; Numb. 5,6; 6, 2; Deut. 17, 2; Judges 9, 49; 21, 21; EsTH.4,11. Children are frec[uently named in addition by themselves. In all these ramifications the sex of the man is the fundamental idea, to which was added that of strength as the special characteristic of the male. — 2. man, without regard to the sex- relation, so far as the human being is presented in the man according to oriental ideas: a) in contrast with God man is set forth nearly eq^uivalent to mortal Job 9, 32; 12, 10, consequently oppos. to "''' Lev. 27,16; Num. 30, 3; Josh. 10, 14; 1 Sam. 13, 14, Vn Numb. 23, 19 ; in particular d"HlJ5N is 'opposed to Q'^ti'^'N Gen. 32, 29 ; 1Sam.'2,26; Is. 7, 13, a!nd therefore "N? US'^N 31, 8 means not huma,n i. e. god- like, cognate in sense to &1K"Nb. In other places the usual term to express this idea is iBiSjSt Job 5, 17; 9, 2; 25, 4; Ps. 9, 20. b) in opposition to the beast Gen. 49, 6; Ex. 11, 7. c) collect, men. VU''N"^b y"7!N a land without men Job 38,26, so too tnN-i«b. CuiiN taiili 2 Sam. 7, 14 human rod i. e. with which one chastises men, comp. Hos. 11, 4. d) In the sense oi person generally, with- out respect to sex , strength, age, and without regard to any antithesis, ll5"'N or Qi'ttSSN stands before other nouns or be- fore adjectives, forming as it were the indefinite article, e. g. before p''1.5i, nib:ia, ^I'l:^, latop??, ^inu, ■'■is;, Tika, IMiD,' D'l'nD, or in the plural d''NI2n lDil253N Num. 32, 14, where la^N and 'iN entirely disappear in translation; particularly does this occur with gentile names, e. g. ■''i;?i> 'N Gen. 39, 14; '''ilrti 'N Esth.2,5; S-'J;'!?? 'N Gen. 37, 28; D^'lSKi 'N Jer. 26722; D-'nin^ 'N. 43,9, but always to make the nouns prominent, and give them a certain emphasis. Before proper names vi''iX'n must stand for prominence-sake Numb. 12, 13; Judges 17, 5; 1 Kings 11, 28; Esth. 9, 4; Dan. 9, 21, because it cannot be subordinated in this case; on the contrary llJiN before names of peoples, lands and cities is subordinate, e. g. bN'ito^ Ilj-'N Nu. 25, 8 an Israelite, prop, a man of Israel, plur. bij'ito^ "'tBJN 1 Sam. 7, 11; IS'bs ■'ttJSN Judge's 12, '5. ' ' IT : • I" : - In this relation the singular is inter- changed with the plural or the sing, is used as a plural collectively and so con- strued, Judges 8, 22 ; 20, 33. From this signification arises another: inhabitant, citizen, warrior, subject, when T23''N or ■■laSN stands before proper names of per- sons or places, applied to masters, gen- erals, princes &c., as may be seen from the examples already given and from 1 Sam. 23, 3 ; 24, 5 ; 1 Kings 10, 8 ; Ppov. 25, 1. Earely does lU'^N appear in sub- ordination to another noun in order to denote relationship, succession &c., prin- cipally before d'^fl^N as a periphrasis for minister or servant of God, prophet 1 Sam. 2,27; Deut.33,1; 2 Chr.8,14, sometimes even for angel Judges 13, 6. — 3. From the second signification comes the sense own, possessor &c., as b?a or 'ja, when it subordinates itself in the construct state to that neuter or abstract noun which it possesses or with whose at- tribute it is invested, e. g. '].nN"^25"'N Prov. 6, 12 man of vanity i. e. one who possesses I.IN. In this manner the language applies it very frequently to supply by means of such a circumlocu- tion the want of definite adjective forms that prevails in Hebrew, e. g. Q"''p5'^ ^"'N ; lah, n?3N, nyi, arib, ti''M'n, m-'to ib'^n; -I I ........1 _|-j „.. I |. ,j „ .. |. J bTt, llisb ffl'^N &o., and this sort of periphrasis is even more common than with by S or 'ja. But the'N cannot always be thought of as the possessor; accord- ing to the nature of the following nouns it must also be taken as expressive of origin or derivation, or as having to do with the object of the following noun, e. g. T^S*!! ''1155N Gen. 24, 13 the inhabi- tants of the city i. e. those belonging to the city; diiSKin "'tiJN 26, 7 the inhabi- tants of the place; h'V^ IB'^N 25, 27 a man abiding in the field; ni^iN ''^?Si 1 Kings 9, 27 shippers i. e. men having to do with ships; b^n TB''Ni 1 Sam. 31, 12 a warrior i. e. one belonging to the army, which is also used occasionally in a collective sense for b'^h ■'l^5i^?. In- ^^^ 79 !^i« like manner ttJiN stands alone, where it is put after asp| Is. 21, 9, for ^U ffl-'N warrior, and instead of it also dIN 22, 6. So too b5>a and la ai-e used. — 4. The ■word gradually came to lay aside its nature as a noun, just as DIN, UN, SI T J IT T ' iT ' - 1" and others are applied. In this sense 1U''N signifies a) any one Gen. 13, 16; Ex.16, 19; Song OP Sol. 8, 7 ; especially repeated ^iN ffliN Lev. 15, 2 ; Num. 5,12, comp.lolN ; •ii'^N TiN Gen. 39,11 no one. b) distributively, each, particularly 'C''N 1Z3"'N Numb. 1, 4, for which also ttJ-'N ^n!!< UJiN "ins* 13, 2, Josh. 4, 4 stands. T15''N after ,"■•'. I' . . 53 specialises particularly that which is the subjeet of discourse, e. g. izi'^Nb Gen. 45, 22 to each one, where cVpb pre- cedes, tti'^isb Zech. 10, 1 where DriS goes before; but b is omitted when it already stands in the preceding connexion Gen. 41, 12; Numb. 26, 54; 1 Sam. 30, 22. c) every man, every one, e. g. IS'HM IBiN Gen. 23, 6 every one of us; iii'in 1B''N euery one Ms sword 34, 25; 40, 5; 41, 11; 42,25&c.; iiZJ^'N ©^N 1 Kings 20, 20 emery one the other. In place of it we have also lB'>N-b3 Ex. 35, 21 ; ffl'^N ffl'^N 36, 4; Wl lBiisPs.87,5; TBiJSl ffliN Es'th.1,8, as we say each and every one. d) an antithetic or additional member to 5>1, hN, niH5> or also to ffliN, in order to IT ' !• T _ r ' express a comparison: the one . . . the other, alter.. . alter Gen. 9, 5; 11, 3 7; 13, 11; 26, 31; 31, 49; 37, 19; Lev. 19, 11; 25, 17; Is. 3, 5. On the very various ways of putting ffliN as an an- tithetic or additional member to HN or IT yp see under these two words them- selves. In this sense we should under- stand Gen. 15, 10 and he laid his every ■piece (iina-llJiN) opposite to its other; the suffix in iina is antithetic to that in IWI, and uiifS with "z forms one idea, e) It is seldom the impersonal one 1 Sam. 9, 9; perhaps also Gen. 13, 16. — The following expression should be specially noticed: QilSSN Qnb Ez.24, 17 22, where the Targ. and'Vuig. take d-iuSJN in the sense of Q'^baN, but interpreters partly punctuate d'^iaSN, comp. DisiN Dnb Hos. 9, 4, supposing it to follow the analogy of D-'Taisy. )-^^^ Am. 2, 8, and partly punc- tuate it d"ii25ii« in the sense of d"'ai£5> Pa. 127, 2. More con-ectly Bashi and others understand d'^TlSSN. in the sense of (other) people, therefore bread of other people, because the mourning meal was always prepared by other persons. Hence the Targ. and Vulg. have translated correctly as far as the sense is concerned. The form of the noun ffliN , as already mentioned, is extended from lUN , which original form is confirmed by the femi- nine iTiSN, rnUN, and the denominative lUTUiSrifl (which see); accordingly the stem can be nothing but U3N (idiiSn). See TBTBN. Prom the original 1BN has come in compound proper names a) the ab- breviated "U5n (comp. -riN from ns), as it is found in the name ISIUN and in the noun IIIISN; b) "TZiN (in'^VaiCS?, ^jatiN, TinaN); such abbreviations often oc- curring in proper names. So the Phe- nician ISN (Ath. 2, 2 ; Plant. 1, 6 10 12 16; 2, 46 56), which was pronounced ys (tis), is, es, comp. in the same language bN which was pronounced el, il, yl {ul), and ns (the accusative-sign), pronoun- ced ys, yth; —6 riN a man who, there- fore also n^N (Kit. 4, 1) woman. From the extended fornt ID'^iS, which appears likewise in compound proper names (nm-uJ-'N!, liniB-'N, b^n-iaiN), 'jiiB''«, is formed. See'inia'^N, ITON, ffiiN ("m, "I23i<) in proper names, and fflUJN. See also 105IS and lIJiDN. Hence the denom- inative Hitp. miBNn^l (from fflN= IZJiN) to con- duct oneself as a man, wisely. Is. 46, 8, as the Targ. has also a denominative HJidNHN or HJTSNnN, but here it renders ^'^^ n. (not used; from BIN =niN HI. belonging to Aram. rT^N) m. 1. equival. to fflll being, existence, essence; hence the proper name ''a''N synonymous with "^"^1 (which see), comp. rr^N and the proper name ''n"'N (see r"'N) that comes from it. — 2. iut the orthography TUN is only nti'D-syi^^ 80 n^« used, perhaps to distinguisli it from llJiN a man, 2 Sam. 14, 19 ; Mic. 6, 10, where, however, many mss. read lB"'i>< against the Masora. jnaJS-ai'iJi Qiero-Bdal) n.p. of a son of Saul 2 Sam. ch. 2-4, for which in 1 Chk. 8, 33 and 9, 39 the nameb?aT2Ji« stands. The original name b?la was afterwards paraphrased by rilija Jer. 11, 13; Hos. 9,10 (comp. also n^:3''S)3, nm'^:'); IBiN or "12)4? , lUN was an epithet of God, like 'TiflU5''N (hero, i. e. God, possesses renown) n. p. m. 1 Chk. 7, 18. See the proper names Tin-iiN, lin'^riN, llJl"'???, 1 ' IT : r litD^'N (denomin. and diminut. from UJ"'N with the termination -on, comp. ^i'15^)M. 1. little man, manikin, little image of the eye, pupil, that which man guards and protects as the noblest thing, usu- ally only with y)^ following, Dbut. 32, 10, Peov.7,2 or \-';S-r& Ps.l7, 8, comp. the same figure in Arab. ,j^.Jt ^jL«jt, Koptic ikAAoTS" iioTS-ift.A (pupil, but not little daughter, which a.'Kov means), Gr. noQij, xogdaiov, xoQcusidiov, Lat. pupa, pupula, pupilla &c. &c., as the ancients long ago remarked. — 2. figuratively: middle, so far as the pupil is thought of as the middle of the eye, hence rtb';b 'S« Prot. 7, 9 midst of the night i. e. the deepest night; Tjl^n 'SJ 20, 20 midst of the darkness, i. e. deepest darkness, where the K'ri, however, reads TiiBjS (which see). In addition to this explanation of the word already given by Jos. Eimchi, Bashi brought forward another, accord- ing to which it signifies the black, dark ('-lirnsil): thus )1S, 'N would be the black of the eye i. e. the pupil, Mb'jb 'N the dark- ness of the night (parallel" nbsN.), and '^1^'rl 'N the darkest i. e. thickest dark- ness; comp. Coptic K«.Ke, k*.kj dark- ness, and KiLKe ck &a.Ae the dark of the eye, pupil. The stem would then be IijSn (which see) out of which the noun ']iT25''N sprung, after the formlbi)?, 'ni'T'3, and lluSjt after the form blMX ' ^hj-j-ajijjj (Aero, i. e. God, is power) proper name of a grandfather of the general (1 Kings 1, 35) and Davidic hero Benaiah, who belonged to biSJiap. (Josh. 15, 21; Neh. 11,25) 1 Che. 11,"22, for which name perhaps '■'rt ffl"'i< stood abridged in the source of the history of 2 Sam. 23, 20, leading to the ortho- graphy "'rt 'il5''i«, already corrected by the K'ri into b'^p-ffl'^'N. Comp. the proper names b^p-iSN., b^p-]! (2 Chr. 17, 7). ''^''S (assumed to be Aramaean pro- nunciation for ■'IB^) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 2, 13. See ffliN n., iib'i and n-N. n"'i^ (jiot used) m. 1. Hebr. being, existence, essence, from niN III. ; hence the proper names ''n'^iS! and (niN in) bN'^n^N. The stem riN (din) is equival. to m^ (w) belonging to 123;; , and to 125k belonging to UJ"'I!< n., comp. Sanskrit as, Pers. ^^yXujJi, Latin esse; but since U37_ is in Arab. jj*»j|, Syr. i^l , a concave stem (W) must be assumed as its original. The proper name ■'IB'^iJ (which see) is probably from 1B"'N = rT'N and therefore it is to be ex- r r plained as the proper name ''0'''?) con- seq^uently as synonymous with ■'iij';, especially as the Chronist is fond of inter- changing names have a like significa- tion. In that case one would be obliged to assume for the sake of "'id'^N a stem d>lN = W (niN ni.). — 2.' {absol. not used, def. Talm. xniN, but usually in Biblical Aramaeism ■'ri''N, an adjective form developed out of iT'tji) Aram. m. being, existence, consequently synonym- ous with Hebrew llji and like it weak- I" emng into a particle, but in con- nexion with a suffix shewing traces of a plural like so many other particles in Hebrew (comp. "npN, nnp, 1»a, V5) and Aramaean (comp. 'nna). Including the verb to be, as is the case with other particles of the same kind, it expresses it as V3^, there is, properly there is a being, in which way n"iN is used in the Targ. ; with the negative, rr^b , tTib , Syr. ^-^, from rT'N sb there is not, Arab. Tl^^ 81 ijLfJ, This vocable sounds in Samar. IT'S, riN, n2, whence one sees the con- nexion with TIN and riN as an accu- sative-sign (see nis) which in fact is of the same origin. tri'^N !• {b^ng, living, comp. ''1l3''Sjl) Heir. n. p. m. 1 Chb. 11, 31, for which in 2 Sam. 23, 29 stands ■'nN, which is synonymous with "'n'^N. See bs^'n'^N. — 2. (an adjective form developed out of r"'N, which therefore stands absolutely like niN in the Targ.; with suffixes NirfN, ';|''niN, 'jiS'^riiN, ■'lriin''iji) Aram, m. there is, properly, as n^N, «;;, ffliN, iU)''N, "125^, there is a being, an existing one, but in use entirely like U3p. as a particle, e. g. Bbs ipisj Dan. 2, 28 there is a God i. e. a God is existing; 3, 17 29: "na.l "TiiN 5, 11 there is a man: with a negation iniN'Nb there is not 2,10 11; 3, 25 29 ; without a noun, there is none, 4,32. In all these cases the Targum has rT^N. But the adjective element of the termination in ■'n"'N is entirely forgotten, and the same stands both before the plural and the feminine noun 2, 30; 3, 12. b ■'rr'N some one has Ezr.4, 16. Con- neeted with participles, e. g. ')"'nbs 3, 18, bn3 2,26, •p^-'TSS 3,15, it is 'a'circum- locution for the narrative present. The Hebrew ilji must be compared generally. 'jirr'N (from niN II; the rare forma- tion was perhaps occasioned by 'jiHt'H) m. entrance Ez. 40, 15 K'ri, but here adjectively, antithesis ■'n''3B; the Targ. has merely by conjecture ln'jS5>iltn , and the LXX by putting s^a&ev only thought upon the opposite of "'M*'??. The K'tib has linN^ after the form i'lM'^ia^ (from diB = dia), which is also a deriva- tive of niN n. bN''r!''N {existence of El, from r-iN and bN with the connecting vowel) n. p. of a Benjamite Neh. 11, 7, and since this proper name existed, bi}"'n''S«b Pbov.30,1 is to be translated for Ithi'el, i. e. as a name in the way given. But the LXX and Syr. Hexapl. already symbolised 'n, understanding by it the in-iN faithful (bjS riN possession of God) ; Jefet (Comment, on Prov. in ms.) found a whole doctrine relating to God in the verse, and since the time of Cocceius (in his dictionary) interpreters have turned it into bN '^n'^isb , which, however, is in- admissible. Crr'N n. p. see dns. IT •• ■" IT" nn'^S; Ps. 19, 14 see dMn. IBST'N (abridged from 'n-i^N.) n. p. m. Ex.'6,'23; 28, 1. See inn. ' ' ' IT T 'irr^N (from ^ni^ after the 'formStSN, ai being contracted into i; Job 33, 19 nriN; with sujT. iirTiN; plur. ■a^ir\>m and t]T •• ' " I T 1" * I' T I" tin) m. properly an adjective, 1. con- tinuing, constant, perennial, abiding, with reference to time, hence Job 33, 19 and the restlessness (S'^'n) of his members is constant, where 'jnN is adj. belonging to ai'i ; old, e. g. irr^N ^i-J Jer. 5, 15 an old people i. e. who have continued for a long time, parallel dbiSa lij. In the Phenician mythology "jniN (pronounce Itan, Iton) was called the highest deity, and the Baal of primitive times was named ^rT^N b?a, Bel -Itan, Bshrdv (Strabo 16,1), which is interpreted "the old Beel" (Ctes. var. hist. 13, 3 ; Movers, Phoen.I.254&c.). From that very ancient period, in which ')n''N the old still existed as an epithet of the highest being, pro- ceeds the name of the month d'lpnNij nv 1 Kings 8, 2 for ''1'ian, inasmuch as the months were called' after the names of gods among all the Semites and ancient peoples, as also IT and bia (which see) refer thereto; and probably the propen name ']nit« should also be explained in accordance with that fact. Then the plur. would stand as in the case of d^ln 5N &c. — 2. Applied torivers and streams: perennial, inexhaustible, hence 'N bni Detjt.21,4, Am. 5, 24 unexhausted brook, opposite to STSN; subst. )n-^^ ni-i™ Ps. 74, 15 streamsof inexhaustibleness, i. e. ever/lowing streams (which do not dry up in summer); iSn'^Nb Ex. 14, 27 to its flowing. — 3. Applied to power and strength: firmness, solidity, spoken of tha 1« 82 I3i^ rocky abode of the ^Amalekites Numb. 21, 21, parallel S>bD; 'N ni3 Jbr.49, 19 habitation of strength, -whicli is called 3>bD iisn 49, 16: adv. irr-isa Gen. 49, 24 in Strength i. e. firm; pi. Q'^ins Mio. 6, 2 rock mountains, described more particu- larly by yiN '^lOiM and parallel with S'''n!i; metaphorically: mighty, chief 3 o^ 12, 19, comp. T^aN. — 4. Figuratively: harsh, rough, hard, properly violentPROV. 13, 15, opposite to )'n. —^ 5. {Ood as very ancient) proper name of a wise man and poet, but also of other persons 1 Ejngs 5,11; Ps.89,1. See ■'HITN. i- T : V The word 'N is developed out of the stem ']nj (which see). The same is in Arab. ^jjI^ from i^y, Phenic. ^m. 11 N (pronominal stem) adv. and conj. 1. properly like ^S {"r^^ was originally abbreviated from ''Sn) conj. relat. on, quod, that, therefore 'before dependent clauses, e. g. Gen. 44, 28 and I suppose that (Tjn) he is torn in pieces; Judges 3, 24; 20, 39; Zbph. 3, 7 7 thought that ('tjn) thou wouldst not fear. Hence like ■'S it is left untranslated before direct language, or is also like ''3 taken as an assurance, certainly, yea, assuredly, certe. Gen. 26, 9; 29, 14; Ex. 31, 13; 1 Kings 22, 32; ISAM. 16, 6; 25, 21. — 2. Equi- valent to "iSi as a sign of the apodosis : so, then, particularly in admonitions, e. g. Ex. 12, 15 so ('tjn) shall ye put away the leaven on the first day; 1 Chr. 22, 12. — 3. Most freijuently it is an expres- sion of opposition: but, however, yet, as '^'S again has the same sense. So e. g. Is. 63, 8 and he said: they are yet ('ttn) my people, isb TjN but not Gen. 20, 12. nj-rN 'TjjS but this Lev. 11, 4 and so Num. '26, 55; Deut. 18, 20; ISam. 29, 9. The idea of limitation is attached to this sense: only, tantum, nonnisi, tantum- modo, and that too with the utmost en- largement of the idea, e. g. before the perfect, in order to give it the sense of the pliisquamperfectGBN.27,30; Judges 7, 19; before nouns where it may be translated only, only just, scarcely, quite, according to the context, Dbut.28, 29- Is. 16, 7; 19, ll;Ps. 39, 12; 62, 10; 73, 1; 139, 11; before adverbs 1 Sam. 25, 1; Ps. 73, 13; before the perfect and imperfect: however, Jon. 2, 5; Ps. 49, 16. The signification only, rare in ■'3, appears most conspicuously in the present word. In this sense of only, nothing else than, 'riN also stands at the beginning of a sentence without limiting a,ny thing in relation to what precedes, e. g. Is. 34, 14 15, for which p'l is the usual word 28, 19; Ps. 32, 6. — '4. More rarely as an explanation of what goes before and consequently a supplement to it, just like i3, in the sense oi for, e. g. 2 Kings 24,' 3; Ps. 39, 12; 68,22. — 5. By virtue of the meaning cer-' tainly, yea, "^JN is used in admonitions and therefore before the imperative: yea certainly, ISam. 18,17; Jer. 28, 7. — 6. "rjJS is sometimes variously in its signi- fication modified by particles following, whether they belong to it or not. So e. g. bt? "rflS only that not, tantum ne, 1 Sam.' 12,' 20; "bN 1\p however to, in. Numb. 18, 3; Lev. 21, 23; but in Is. 14, 15; ON ■iji* but if now Josh. 22, 19; lljON 'rJN only that which Ex. 12, 16; niiTla ':]N only on this condition Gen. 34, 15;'nsrT Tin yea really! Gen. 26, 9; IHT Ti^ that this Jer. 10, 19; 1123N3 TIN IV 1 1- ' ' IV -:i- I r however as Deut. 12, 22; nn? TjN yet now Job 16, 17; diB TjN yea there! Is. 34, 14 15; iiblS TjN surely of such sort are Job 18, 21; 13 TjN only that 1 Sam. 8, 9; Targ. ipN. d'na.' More rarely do particles go before, e. g. TjN 13 for surely. 2 Kings 5, 7; TjN pp solely, a strong only (Kimchi) Numb.' 12, 2; NI^-TlN ^b not he surely Job 23, 6. — Some have considered nN Ez. 18, 10 and 21, 20 as a different orthography of TjN; but the opinion is not well founded.' ^DiJ (not used) tr. to bind, fold up together, hence to strengthen, Ar. dS\ to fortify, to twist; cognate to np."i», 15-N. Hence the proper name 'iSN. T3SI (fortress, castle) proper name of a city in the land of 'I5>5'tt5, beside blaa, T|'nN and ffib3 mentioned as the ori- ' ginal residence of Nimrod Gen. 10, lOy ■ nnDN 83 b^^ and therefore one of the oldest cities in hither Asia. The LXX read 13 'IN 'AqxkS, and Bochart compares the river 'AQyaSijg at Sittakene, conjecturing that the whole country was called 13'ni« at an earlier period ; but from the context Sittakene lies too far eastward. Le Clerc has compared ^axnda, a city below Ninus, where the Lycus flows into the Tigris (Ptol. 6, 1). The Talmud under- stands by it (Joma 10 a) a city 'ISIBS. But the Targ. and Ber.Eab. (37 '§.'5) have interpreted it more probably by 'j''i"iS3 Nisib in Mesopotamia, which was also the sense understood by the Syriac, reading, as it does, 'ISN. a''^?Nl see insi?. '" DT13N (after the form nbriN from STSi) adj. m. properly deceiving, lying, hence: drying up Jbr. 15, 18, oppos. to ')niN, with the omission of htO a failing irook, with an allusion at the same time to the city ^iTSJS (which see). — The form is usual in"adjective-formations, comp. Ar. v_> ji"! deceitful. D'^TSlSl {winter -Irooh; with a local rt^iTSN) 1. n.p. of a seaport in the terri- tory of Asher, prop, in Galilee on the border of the territory of Asher Josh. 19, 29; Judges 1, 31, according to Joseph, and Jerome nine miles from 13?. Jo- sephus (Bell. Jud. 1, 13, 4) caUs it '£x- SiTinmv, Ptol. (5, 15) "ExdiTtna, Pliny ■Ecdippa (5, 15, 17) from Aram. ^'''nSiS; Talm. a-iTS, Ar. wO), Jerome Dippa, now Bsib, el-Zib, near Eds el-Nakiirah. — 2. n. p. of a city of the tribe Judah Josh. 15, 44; Mic. 1, 14; but it is not ascertained whether it be identical with a''T3 Gen. 38, 5 or NaT3 1 Che. 4, 22. ITSi* (after the form it3N) adj. m. properly nearly equivalent to y"''nB , from 1,I| = ^}.\ ) Ar. lli', to break in pieces, to damage, hence 1. hold., daring., Job 41, 2 'N ^b none hold. — 2. in a bad sense: cruel Job 30, 21; Lament. 4, 3. — 3. destructive, applied to poison Dbdt. 32, 33, where the Samar. however reads •''IT Tjt?. '''Tr3>» . (formed from 'hTSN) adj. m. p T : - ^ IT ; hard, terrible, cruel, Peov. 5, 9; 11,17; Jee. 6, 23; 'N 'TJNbM a messenger who brings terrible tidings Peov. 17, 11; ap- plied to punishment Jee. 30, 14; to the day of judgment Is. 13, 9. Collect. tyrants Peov. 12, 10; Jee. 50, 42. ninTS!>|! (formed from '''iTbN) f. fierceness, cruelty, Peov. 27, 4. The abstract termination uth is usually made from adjectives, comp. nin'is, niUiby from n'13, y^.^. ilb'^SN (an infinitive noun frombSN) IT • -: ^ r T ^ /. eating, concrete: a meal 1 Kings 19,8. aJ'^S'* (Philistian) n.p. of a Philistine king in Gath in the time of David and Solomon, 1 Sam. 21, 11. If the Philistine dialect was Semitic, fflipN should be derived from 1B3iS = ttJSS (which see) to roll together (spoken of the serpent), Ar. u**X[s:, and Dd5> (which see). In that case as an extended form for liJSN it has, like the proper names liJnJ, ■^illJriS, some such sense as serpent- charmer, serpent-master, comp. HaQTfq- Smv. LXX: 'A'Ayovg, lA^xk, which has led Hitzig (Urgesch. p. 80 £) to think of the Mediterranean 'Ayiiatis. 7Di^ {inf. constr. VSN., "bSN, with prefixes V3N3, "N.b, with suffixes i^SN, SbiN, SiVsN; aisonbSN, usually with 1 1 : T -: ' IV : T -: ' it : t ' . J, , . b: Inbiisb, but once as an infinitive noun "l Sam. 1, 9 as nb''3i«. 1 Kings 19,8; jOTp.bbsit,-b3N., i^'^SN; fut.h'D^\ bSN andnbss*',' in pause b3IS\ yet ib3r Ez. 42, 5 see b'3\ "With respect tp IMbSi^n Job 20, 26, -3Nn arose out of -5Nn"= -SJ«n, and consequently belongs to Kal, whither the sense already points. Derivatives bSN (Phen. Nbbis), fib'Dm, Tib'^'DS , bssa , ■' I ^ r -/' IT : T ' IT •-:' iT-:r' rbSN.a, nbsia, ni3?5 (2 Che. 2, 9). Nif. bpN5 (fut. b'3K^)pass. of Kal Gen. 6, 21; Exri3, 3;' Lev. 17, 13 or to be allowed to be eaten; figuratively as in Kal, (applied to fire) to be consumed, Ex. 22, 5; Zbph. 1, 18. Pi. bSN belonging to IrtbSNri see Kal at the end. Pu. b3N to be consumed, e. g. by fire Ex. 3, 2;''Nah. 1, 10; by the sword Is. 1, 20. Hence perhaps the proper name bDN and bSN. IT \ IT ■- Hif.h'^'ziHli (Iperf. TibSNln, Tibssn; ' rv:iv *■ ^ I -irviiv' •:r-;r' /m<. 5''l3Nl) causative: to make eat up, to give to eat, in the manifold figurative expressions of Kal, always with a double accusative Peov. 25, 21; Deut. 8, 16; Ez. 16, 19 ; to cause to enjoy Is. 58, 14; only once with ']52 of the food, Ps. 81, 17. Inasmuch as the trace of a con- struction with bx is not found, and -bN b3i« rian cannot be said, b^ilN V I IT • ' r Hos. 11, 4; can neither be an imperfect for b"'l3NN, nor a noun equivalent to bSN; rather does it seem to be a North -Palestinian and Aramaean form for b'lSiS from bl3 (which see). See also BN. The infinitive b-^art Ez. 21, 33 should likewise be referred to bl3. Derivative rib^NM. The stem b^-N, Ar. j^sT, Sam. bSN, 7«. IT : Syr. Xs| is connected in its organic root with the root in bl?"UJ I. to which many significations refer. b^N (3^er/. /'.iibSN for nbSN; Zpl. ibas; fut. blpN';) Aramaean, the same, Dan'. 4, 30; 7, 7 19 23. For an aUeged different meaning of the verb bsij in V"l)? '^. 3, 8 ; 6, 25, namely to call, pro- claim, spread, see fip,. ^Di* (with suf ibss) m. 1. food, especially fruits, grain &bn. 41, 35 ; Ps. 78, 30; properly nourishment, support, Ar. J5l; comp. Phenician NbbN (place !?3J< of grain) n. y. of a Byzakian city. Fi- guratively: food of fire, of animals, therefore also hooty Job 9, 26. — 2. as an infinitive noun: eating^ so ibSN "'bV Ex. 12, 4; 'N ■'S3 16, 21 every one ac- cording to Ms eating. bSN, also ^IBN, n. p. of a sage to IT \ 'T 1 wiom the gnomic poet Ag4r dedicated his NiBn Pbov. 30, 1. As a proper name (and as such the Masora, Targum and old interpreters have taken it) bSN might he taken as equivalent to 'nm in the sense of one that has pined aiv'ay, sor- rowful; but the LXX and Syr. con- sidered it the 1^' imperfect from Mb 3 or bs , and the modems have followed the assumption. See bN"'n''N. nbSN (after the form !i»5r5>, and so IT : T ^ IT : T ' the feminine of bSN) f. the eating 1 Sam. 1, 9, or also as biN: food Gen. 1, 29, fodder Jer. 12, 9: With b, however, it is generally to he connte'd a verb. ]5^ (from )'S with a, demonstr. out of a, as in TN out of "^T-n) adv. 1. like ' IT r -:' a strengthened ys: therefore, in a re- sumptive apodosis Ex. 2, 14; Is. 40, 7, V P comp. ^51; or as, comparing =just as, like ■'3.11 in the Targ. Jer. 3, 20; con- sequently almost equivalent to iU3. — 2. assuring, like yii: surely, GtBN. 28, 16 ; ISam.15,32; IKiNGS 11, 2; Jer. 3, 23; 4, 10; Is. 53, 4. — 3. limiting what precedes: hut, only, however, tantum, Zbph. 3, 7; Ps. 31, 23; 82, 7; Is. 49, 4, for which 'Tjij stands more frequently, abridged from ''3N.. — The Targ. ren- ders it by NtsiBiipii, NMb-i, dpa, and the LXX appear to have taken it at various times as '13 dN. See too 13. . '1" I* M" It IS not to be traced back to a verbal stem. Hjt^ (rare) tr. to push, to strike, hence to drive on, spur on, with b? on account of its original signification Prov. 16, 26: for his mouth (which de- sires to eat) pushes upon him ("iibs>) i. e. urges him on (to labour); so the LXX ix^i'a^srai, Vulg. compulit. In Syr. "■saf also appears with Vl to drive on 85 y]sy3^^ to work, Ethpeal to urge on oneself, to be industrious. — Eimchi has compared tlj?-^ with t]3 to lend, i. e. to bend to- gether, to curve; but this sense does not well suit. Others understand it to be a new formation fi-om t]3 hand in the sense of to handle, as the derivative E13N Job 33, 7 is taken by the LXX; but our assumption best corresponds to the usage of the dialects. The Ar. lJjI is a denomin. from o!^t saddle, s &55|S (with suf. ""SIDN) m. stroke, only in Job 33, 7: and my stroke will not fall heavy upon him. The Syr. translates it: and my saddle (Talm. ti31i«) i. e. bur- den, Targ. Nilt: burden; but these sen- ses also proceed from the fundamental idea already given. The LXX render ri ^siQ i^ov, reading ''BS'l. *l!D^ (not used) tr. to plough, properly to dig, Ar. -> I to dig, J^\ a pit; but the organic root is ^^~H , which is found also in 'iB, fi-13, "ip^II., ^p-3. IT ' IT T ' 'it ' 'r T 13N (this is the reading of the Sy- riac, Targ., Jerome and others for 13N) the proper name of a place Gen. 10, 10, viz. Nisihis, ^^''''' gJ. According to the stem 'i3is it should signify field. 13!s! see ^3N. V n IT ■ "13N (formed from 13N equivalent to ^13^ r as nba from nb)3 ; pi. Di13N , with suff. D3'''l3ij) m. he who is occupied with the field, a husbandman J'er. 14, 4; 31, 24; ^'W^^ 'N 51, 23 the husbandman and his team. The same word is in the Targ. 13N, Syr. Ifsl and hence a derivative " ' cs verb (Wiseman hor. p. 86, 2), Ar. -^S; but in ager, aygos, German acker, ag is the root (comp. anti, occa, Germ. egge). ti/^^ (not used) intr. equivalent to IIJSS (which see) to roll up in the form of a serpent, comp. D3S>. Hence the proper name 1)B''3N. 5]a3DN (from t]Vy3) n. p. of a Pheni- cian city Josh. 11, 1; 12, 20, which belonged subsequently to the tribe of Asher 19, 25. According to the Syriac, bi< 86 b^ and perhaps the Phenioian language also it means a dedicated place, i. e. one ■where a sacred station was. 7^5 I. (pronominal stem) pron. dem. a gentle reference to a thing and em- phasizing of it, weaker than ttp Hence arises its modification into the article in Arabic, and exceptionally in Hebrew in some remains still, as Q'^jiMbN 1 Kings 10, 11 12, also written Q-'^i^bN 2 Chk. 2, 7, and TliabN Gen. 10,26, which was evidently adopted through the medium of the Arabic. Yet it also exists in the shorter form bn in llJ-'aabN Ez. 13, 11 ; perhaps also in the proper names 1B)?PN , ibinbij, N)5.FibN; but always attaching itself firmly to the noun or proper name like the common bil , and therefore ad- duced with it in the alphabetical series. Arabic words are adopted with the ar- ticle in the Syriac and in modern lan- guages. Yet this application must not be extended too far in Hebrew. Thus e. g. bN in dljfbN Peov. 30, 31 as in riTO-bi? 12, 28 is the negative particle, and "bx in proper names is merely the shorter 'form of bN God. See InbN, bs, lbs (Aram.) and Sbsj. 7^ n. (pronom. stem) a negative word which is connected by root with D«b , Nb , ■lb, "lb and must not be derived from a verb-stem. It is applied in Hebrew in the following ways: 1. as a conjunction in the sense of /«)/, ne, to express in the feeling of the speaker an unwillingness or not-wishing; hence it is always con- nected with the voluntative of the im- perfect to denote dissuasion &c. Thus e. g. dissuasively Gen. 22, 12; Ex. 16, 29; 1 Sam. 26, 20; Jee. 17, 21; wishing Gen. 43, 23; 1 Sam. 17, 32; 2 Kings 18, 31 ; Jee. 7, 4; asking 1 Sam. 26, 20; Ps. 51, 13; Dan. 9, 19; assuring and pre- dicting as certain i. e. manifesting the subjective feeling of the speaker origi- nally in a wish Gen. 49, 4. It always stands with the imperfect and with it too if possible ia its shortest form ; on the contrary Nb which is exactly equivalent to non, ovK, chiefly precedes the perfect, and if the imperfect, it denotes a distinct command: e. g. tll^'iri bN kill not! is a wish, but n^'nn ti^ Ex. 20, 13 thou shalt not Mil! is a categorical command, though bN often borders upon the latter Zech. •8, 17; Peov. 3, 1 3. It is specially to be noticed that in later writings b? stands for bs Ez. 9, 6, just as bs stands for b? 10, i; 12, 12 19. — 2. More rarely does it stand thus in mere de- clarative positions Psalm 34, 6 ; 41, 3 ; 2 Che. 14, 10, where it expresses a subjective interest like ov jwif. In both cases it immediately precedes the im- perfect, and rarely do any words inter- vene, Jee. 15, 15 ; Ps. 6, 2 ; still seldomer does it interchange with ba (from "iba) Ps. 141, 4. — 3. bi* often stands adver- bially without a verb, when it forms a clause with the exclamation belonging to it, e. g. Tibs biS yet not my daughters! EuTH 1, 13;' ■'riN-bN 2 Sam. 13, 12. In particular it is joined to Ni to express a deprecating sentence briefly, Gen. 19, 18 yet not! though stiU the imperfect fre- quently follows Gen. 13, 8; 18,3 30 32; NuM.10,3 1. Farther it stands before nouns in exclamations expressing imprecation, e. g. ba-bs, 1£3'2-bt« 2 Sam. 1,21. To this head belongs ni'iN-bN 2 Sam. 13, 16 no occasions! i. e. cause not! which the LXX have paraphrased by "'inS'bN HS^'n Jib'iia ■'3 in order to evade this IT TIT IT : r use of bN. It also forms a sentence by itself as a request 2 Kings 3, 13 not so! oh not so! — 4. like ii^ interrogative and negative with the perfect, e. g. bs dFiUiIJB do ye make no incursion? 1 Sam. 27, 10 (the Targ., Syr., Ar. have under- stood whither? the LXX and Vulg. seem to have read "'M'bN ; but the textual reading may be retained). More rarely in the sense of ^3, v^. ^s*) 15» are |.. ,-7 i"-:i- ' it:-' r. 'l"/ r' i- seen partly in the traces of a plur . be- fore the suf., partly in the constr. state) prop, setting out with a demonstrative conception and therefore pointing to something, but exclusively in the forms now adduced a prep, to, towards, ad &c. expressing direction or mere tendency in a local view. The very frequent use of the word may be classified under the fbllowing leading significations: 1. de- noting nothing but local motion or direc- tion whether spoken of the body or the mind, answering the question whither? to what? It should therefore be trans- lated to, towards, ad, versus, nqog. In this sense are construed with it a) verbs of local motion, e. g. fil/SS GrBN. 1, 9; sa Ex. 3, 13; N'^aii Josh."?, 23; Tjbri Dbut. 14,25 ; nbid'EsTH. 1, 22 ; C)&N Gen. 6,21; aaTri 1 Kings 12, 15 ; li-'-i'pyi Neh. 9, 34; Sun Exod. 19, 9: la'i Lev. 12, 2; 'i\^rt Exod. 19, 9 ; n't)? Josh. 10,' 24; pSl^'Ex. 14, 10; — In'jJ? Num. 36, 13; y'y; Jbr. 49, 20; VVWn Gen. 45, 1; — ys nb3, Instt Lasibnt. 4, 17; Dp-J Ps. 119, 20; T^Vp, Hos. 12, 7 ; nua Prov. 3, 5 ; ^yuJi there also ; 1Mb Jbk. 10, 2 &c. c) Here belongs also the signification towards, expressing a remoter direction to another agency, in which case it is especially interchanged with by , e. g. Ez. 44, 7 in the direction of your abominations; WIMISSI"^^ 1 Bjngs 10,7 towards the fame; "bij 15b!?\' Dan. 11, 23 to mahe a league with in addition; rtninis."bs< Lev. 18, 18 in addition to her sister, i. e. besides her; d"'B3*bN Lament. 3, 41 to the hands i. e. besides them. So too the signification upon in dividing and measuring Ezek. 45, 2, which may be properly rendered towards, in addition to. With this is connected d) the dative- use of bt? with many verbs, so far as they properly express direction, e. g. after ipS Ex. 25, 16; ^1352 Jo. 4, 8; bbfi Gen. 12,'i5 ; bffla? Is. 14, 10 ; nbw 1 Sam. 2,27 &c., for which b usually stands. In this sense we should" also take "h^ ins is a terror to me Job 31, 23 i. e. I am afraid, e) After many verbs bij has the signification towards, erga, as a ramifica- tion of the dative-conception, e. g. MtoS 2 Sam. 3, 8 ; 'n^'n 2 Chk. 16, 9 ; ppia Job 29, 24; "bN-yi? it is not towards Gen. 31,5; -bN d-i^irii I'nass 43,30. f) Still farther it has the signification against, contra, adversus, si'g, tQoe, expressing a hostile direction, as after .the verbs DIJS Gen. 4, 8 ; Tjb™ Exod. 14, 5 ; yap^ Josh. 10, 6 ; inb^ j'uiGES 12, 3 ; i; iTiis 1 Sam. 5, 6; t\m Zbch. 14, 2; NfflS Is. 2, 4 &c. In most cases this signification is to be elicited merely out of the context, since bi^ 88 b^ the verbs are also constxaed with bs in other senses; they have also more frequently an accusative of the object after them, g) Expressive of move- ment and therefore prop, denoting to- wards bi} is also used where it can be ren- dered before, coram, e. g. after inOrt (Hif.) Num. 13, 30 'ns-m Mirs JudgesII, 36 ; N'np^ 1 Sam. 26, 14; DriB NtoS 2 Sam. 2, 22;S?3J> 2 Kings 5, 25;' ISi^Jo-b 42, 7, though this motion be purely mental and is hardly perceivable at times, h) Denoting direction or motion into some- thing, hence entering or pressing into, to be translated bym, Lat. in, among, Lat. inter, for example in Gen. 8, 9; Exod. 25, 21; Deut. 11, 29; 1 Kings 9, 24; Jon. 1, 5; among 1 Sam. 10, 22; Jek. 4, 3 ; EzEK. 2, 6. Eiguratively -bs assnin i^ to be grieved info the heart i. e. from the heart Gen. 6, 6 ; p'^rj-'isN into the bosom Lament. 2, 12. This in often seems equi- valent to within, e. s. iJi'iS'ttJ-bN Detjt. ° I ivT : 17, 5 within thy gates, properly between &c., or through, per, for example ~bN ttnij?. Numb. 25, 8 properly into her •pudenda, right through; but where the direction must be rendered by upon, bN stands for b», so Ezek. 18, 6; 32, 6, as vice versa \lS for bij Is. 65, 7; 1 Sam. 20, 24 &c., which is sometimes corrected by the K'ri. Lastly i) expressing the limit of motion or direction, hence syn- onymous with ly in the sense even to, unto, usque ad, thus D'jMlJJrt-bi? Jer. 51, 9 even to the heavens; ';lTi&-bN Job 40, 23 even to his mouth; 3, 22; G-en. 6, 16; also where it is tantamount to towards, versus Dan. 8, 9. — 2. From the various senses of motion which in their modifi- cations are sometimes softened down al- most to prepositions of place at, with, arose a) the meaning at, by, near, apud, juxta, prope, sig, e. g. Ipbisri-bN 1 Kings 13, 20 at the table; D^M-Sn Jer. 41, 12 at the water; I'l-bx Ps.i09,'l4 wifA God; Tiiis* -bN Pkov. 30, 10 to his lord; -bN Sjpv Gen. 41, 57 to Joseph; di3B-b3-bN to all faces Ezek. 7, 18; comp. too Gen. 40, 14; 49,^29; Lev. 4, 7; 5, 9; Josh. 5, 3; 1 Sam. 17, 3; 1 Kings 8, 30 — always denoting rest in a place, mere rest. Hence came b) the meaning of bs« as expressing the idea of regard to the noun, an abiding with or at something which is moved into the neighbourhood of the actor so that reference may be made to it. This bij may be rendered as to, with respect to 2 Sam. 18, 27 ; on account of 21, 1; over Hos. 12, 5; about 1 Sam. 1, 27; of Jer. 40, 16; for, pM-bs for certain 1 Sam. 26, 4; according to, "ifbi* according to command Josh. 15, 13; and so other modifications that have ori- ginally proceeded from the idea of reference to; hence many verbs which cannot be well thought of without a close reference are construed with bN , e. g. rtsa 2 Sam. 1, 24; ppto Job 29, 24; dpsn Judges 21, 6 ; bbsrirt'l Sam. 1, 27 ; im Gen. 20, 2; la'i' Jer. 40, 16; ISb Ps. 69, 27; Mi J Num. 25, 1; lap'j Is.'sj 19 &c. , where bij may be rendered by over, with, about, of and the like; but frequently too it interchanges with other prepositions. — 3. Besides the two prin- cipal meanings just mentioned bi* is still to be noticed a) before a noun fol- lowing a noun with "pz preceding, i. e. bij ...■)?? , from ... to, from . . . even to; it serves a) to give emphasis, e. g. b^t!'? b';rT"bN Ps. 84, 8 from strength to strength i. e. with increasing strength; "bs Jl3>'ia iiy^ Jer. 9, 2 with increasing wickedness; §) for comprehension, e. g. ^fbi* )m Ps. 144, 13 from kind to land i. e. of every kind; y) to circumsoriba locally, e. g. !ia)?!i-bN ^I3i|?li-p? Exod. 26, 28 from one end to another; HS'bN.^ H&tt Ezr. 9,11; S) to circumscribe time, e. g. nsa ns-bN IChr. 9, 25; di^-bN di^a Num.' 30, 15 ; e) to circumscribe persons, e. g. ■lij-bN -lif? Ps. 105, 13; but ya is some- times omitted in the first half-member, e. g. d'^SS-bN d-'iB Gen. 32, 31; "bij ns ns Num. 12, 8. — b) bij between' two nouns of the same kind "to express the one to the other (like S'n . . . IZJiN , unus . . . alter), e. g. rtJ-bN JiT Exod. 14, 20; 36, 10; Is. 2, 4; Ps.42,8; Ezek. 21,22.— c) bs in its signification to, towards, upon &c. as a particle of motion is some^- b^ 89 ^« times omitted and the accusative put in- stead Hos. 7, 11; Nah. 2, 6; Pbov. 5, 5; JuDaES 9, 44; 11, 29 ; Is. 34, 15, as also Nia?? stands for iSiaa-bN. — d) bs is often connected with other particles, viz. with prepositions, adverbs, conjunctions &c. as QSn-bN Ez.6,10; 'ni»N,-bN Exod. 32, 34; "pHN-bN 2 Kings 9, 18 j" ^a-bis EzEK.31,ld; niiia-bN 10,2 &c., where- by their significations are modified, a thing that is noticed under the particles themselves. — 4. Very seldom does bN appear in its original demonstrative sense as a demonstr. adverb, pointing to an object, repeated in the sentence "bjt . . . "bNl here . . . there Jer. 51, 3, before the imperf. — The absolute state bs of this bi} , which does not appear, coincides entirely with bs IT.; or bi? is here shortened from the pronominal stem bi? , which is also the case with the article bN. As to the form of this preposition, bs which is always closely connected with the noun, is manifestly derived from an absolute form bs, which latter may yet be recognised in certain forms with suf- fixes (lbs, rbN &c.). The plural use before the suffix in Hebrew is a well known peculiarity which holds good in the case of other prepositions, and the constr.plur. •^hvi^JoB3,22; 5,26; 15,22; 29, 19, like the Arab. J I , shews that bN also is nothing but a constr. in the sin- gular. In the Targ. bN is paraphrased just according to the context by D5>, la, V, ■ay^.,^ ^SNb, by &c. With regard to the derivation the pronom. stem 'el (bis) may be supposed an abridgment of the compound e-Za, comp. Copt. eAs> (Bashm.), hence ert 19, 25 ; Deut. 4, 42; 19, 11; 'bNrt ni'^Nrt Gen. 26, 3 4; bsn D.'ivrt Deut. 7, 22; bNrt nhyinrr Lev. 18 , 27 ; but it occurs only in the Pentateuch and thence in Chro- nicles. The use of this pronominal stem as a plural of !nt cannot be explained by the form, but by the fact that the personal idea in it had disappeared. See nbN. ?Nl (pronominal stem) Aram, equi- valent to the Hebrew biS H. Only in EzR. 5, 15 K'ri, for which the K'tib has nbN synonymous with the Targumic ibN or with the Hebrew tlbN, since Jerem. 10, 11 adopts iibs as Aramaean. 7^ ni. (with the article bsn, with a sujf. only ibN in the Psalms; pi. dibN or abN Exod. 15, 11; from blS or nbil to be strong, though it is a primitive word) m. 1. a very old Semitic name of the highest deity, which already appears in the pre-historic period: God. bs on ac- count of its universality stands both for the God of the Hebrews, Jehovah Num. 12, 13; 23, 22, as well as for the gods of another nation, or idols Is. 44, 10 15; 45, 20; 46, 6; but for Jehovah usually stands bN!i Gen. 31, 13; Deut. 7, 9, or d'^n'biSi. b'^'GBN. 33, 20; 46, 3; Num. 16, 22J also D^ri'biSt bs ^'^ Josh. 22, 22; Ps. 50. 1, or aibis'bs' Dan. 11, 36, or bi? is connected with certain adjectives as with ■^ItB , dbiS*, ']i"'by &c. or is otherjvise para- phrased Deut.'"32, 4; Ps. 89, 8. The b^ 90 ^« universality of the original meaning of ^N , and the circumstance that it does not primitively express the true God xat t^ox^v as its cognates in sense Clji'lsN, mirti, irf do, inasmuch as it might IT : ' IT ' also denote the gods of thp Semites, caused the .almost constant addition of an attribute in the genitive, to de- scribe the true God, hence with li^bs* Ps.78,35; ■'^IB Gen. 48, 3; ^t?;! 16,13; dVi5> 21,35;'!S3)5 Ex.20,5; tD'inS Detjt. 4^ 31; 'lisn ExOD. 34, 6; nilMN Deut. 32, 4; ■'p Josh. 3, 10; ni5>^, 1 Sam. 2, 3; l^as Job 36, 5; N\^.ia 36, 26; 11133 Ps. 29,3; nJDN 31,6; nibMii Jer.51,56 &c. By putting these together and uniting with them other expressions of El one might almost elicit a complete doctrine of God. The following should be espe- cially remarked: a) the nationalising of the name, in addition to the above- mentioned emphasising or appending of the national names of God, by adding the word'bN'iio;! Gen. 33,20, or the name of the people 'jl'i'ia': Deut. 33, 26, or some national particular Gen. 31, 13. b) As biJj once denotes even the god of the other Semites Is. 44, 10, there is added, for the sake of distinguishing him from 'El of Israel, ^pN ExOD. 34, 14; or "IT Ps. 81, 10 ; or Is!) Deut. 32, 12. In this usage bx is sometimes interchanged with b?a, e'. g. ni'na bis Judges 9,46, identical with ni^a \y% 8,33; 9,4; as |. . -r ' III also in the Syrian name bi?5£3 Is. 7, 6 i. e. bsiiia we may conjecture that bi* should be taken for ba. A rare peri- phrasis for the nonrHebrew 'El is bN"Sib Deut. 32, 21 Ungod. c) bs is used as an a,djective to nouns to denote the highest, most excellent, most distinguished, e. g. bN-i^'lM Ps. 36, 7 mountains of God i. e. r "-:r ' ' the highest mountains; bN""'jr'lN 80,11 cedars of God i. e. the tallest cedars. Comp. the like use of i'^ Gen. 13, 10; Ps. 104, 16, n;; (which see) and n''!i'biiit. d.) The plural signifies only Gods Exoi). 15, 11; Dan. 11, 36, and in this sense ta-ibs ■'351 Ps. 89,7 sons of Gods i. e. angels, comp. d''i7'b_l!j( "lia. e) As a designation of the highest divine Being, as the name of Deity, bs is very often applied in the formation of proper names, partly as the last member (bS'iMl^, bNW'n, bNiajJ, bNISS, bNIN, bNWb," b{«1l:),' partly as the first, where it either remains wholly unchanged (iT'bi!}) or is shortened into bN ('T^b^J, TO'nbN,'TaTbN, pnbN, si-htx', ^ , IT : ••' ' IT T : V ' IT T : V ' 'it t : ••• ' itt : v ' absbN, IsstbN, d^pibN, SwbN, insbsi, viv:v' i|T.T : V ' 'ct:-.-' -i-: v ' 'itt:-.-' lJ>bN, iT»bN, rra^bN, bJ>sbN, nspbi*), IT : V ' ITT : V ' IT T : ••• ' -r : v ' it't : •.'■'' and in this abridged form is also ap- pended as an epithet to the names of the deities, e. g. of ^j^n, NiSn, lb in. Usu- ally, however, the bij shortened into bN is connected with the following member by means of the union-vowel i- which is very common in proper names (iT'b!!* , IN'^bN &c.). But the abbreviations in IT • v: -' "bsj, -■ lbs prove nothing towards the de- rivation of the word, since the con- struct-forms in proper names have the freq[uent abridgments, e. g. "lyi, "IBH., -mi, -ina, -ws, -totij, -imj? from »■!, I3ri,'a'' = d'i\ dm, nisfdiij, dp, and do it' IT I ' r' 1VT 1 I" ' 'it' not follow the usual grammatical ana- logy. In this usage it is to be noticed, moreover, that it is sometimes inter- changed with bsa (5>'i:;bN 2 Sam. 5, 16 and J'T'bsa 1 Chr. 14 'Vl as , NiM, "ifiv ITT : V : ' -" it ' I ' : ' tT'", HN &c. whence its signification as a name of deity is manifest. — 2. strength, mzg'Ai, hence the phrases T* bsb ItT'JiPeov. 3,27, 1^^ bsb-^J;; Gen. 31,29; Mio.2,1, Ti bNb VN Deux. 18, 32 ; Neh. 5, 5 the IT I" : ' I" ' ' ' hand is, is not to might (= mighty) i. e. to possess or not to possess power. See T^. Concrete: hero, mighty one, but in this sense only the constr. b"!*? , pi. d''b''N, eonstr. "'b'^N, and therefore to be referred to b'JN as it is always written with Yod; only 'in Ezek. 31, 11 dp.1 bx; in 32, 21 ">bN likewise stands for ■'b"'N, which many mss. still read. Hence the signification hero does not belong to bx , but only to biN, constr. b'^N , plur. d-'biis, constr. ^^N ; and in Is. 9, 5 even by virtue of the or- thography biS is to be translated God. — 3. For Ezek. 31, 14 where dfT'bN their oaks is the reading, we should either put Q!iib"'N, since d''b''N always stands in this sense ; or we should punctuate dfl'^bs. b^ after the Arabic. As a name of the Btation d''bN many mss. write iastead jDi^N; but according to the sense, only ai^^! 13^''^ is right. — 4. ram Job 42, 8; but QibN stands here for d-'b''N from b';N and therefore does not belong to the present ■?rord. — 5. As an ex- pression in architecture pilaster, b';N, constr. b'^N, is always used, and where the mss. have the constr. bN , it is there written for b■'^5 , as the Aramaean bN for biN, also sb-iN. See b^n. I" ' IT ■• T Though the use of the divine name bs is frequent only in Hebrew with ni^S, fi"'!l'bijt, yet numerous traces of it are also found in the dialects. The Syriac translator has the form U*] in Is.14,13 i Ps. 22, 2 ; Matth. 27,46 i Mark 15,33 for God; the Samar. often wa- vers between bs* and Sibij!; among the Zabians V*i is a name of the sun, i. e. of the highest planetary God, as traces of a Moabite El-cultus under the name of sbybij highest 'El are also found in the city called from this cultus or wor- ship sbsbM (which see, and comp. Hebr. and Phenic. '\v'bi) bis, Aram, ibs* nbN). The Arabic dictionaries likewise enu- merate as names of God Jo I, Jl, J I. The Phenicians being nearest to the Hebrews, have bs} both in their doctrine of God and their sanctuaries, e. g. 'HX btt as Kronos xat i^o^^v, '11 in "IXog in Sanchoniathon, bNT^a house of Ood as name of Betyls or piUars and stones dedicated to^El; so also in their personal proper names, e. g. ''^mi'^S "Evv- Xog, bssn Hanelus, bsDB rasUus, bsa-S Gagilus, bs«n"'Xa Msaot'vlog, Mezetulu's, Mustulus, biSTia Medadulus, bNTS> Uzu- Ins, bNFilB)? Caatulus &c., and D'^bN'^i? l4§8rik.snog formed out of the plural Q''bs«'; and in their names of places e. g. bNn5)5 Kavrtil'tj, -h'a, bWiNS Gunela, ^"5'^)?. Cartilis &c. They also use it appellatively to denote other deities. — As to the derivation, it has been con- sidered from the time of Sdadja , who traoislates itby .i>LiiJI mighty, as coming from biN I. to be strong, and so derived 91 nv^h^ from a verb-conception; as indeed a con- siderable number of derivatives from biN , with the fundamental signification of strength, are found in the language. But even in this case bN, which may always have come from a verb - con- ception, should be accounted primitive ; and from it ai-e derived secondarily nbN, 5i^i«, tibN, libN, b-'bN, bibs and the numerous proper names where bN appears entire or abbreviated; then bsi (bbs I.) and rtbs, "jibN and again the proper names from this stem. 7^ I. (pronom. stem) as a collateral form of pronoun demonstr. bs see bi* I. J -^ r 1- 755? II- (pronom. stem) as constr. of bN I. see bis I. prepos. The attempt to derive this bN from a root ThtA = (ij •' ^ IT T ^^J to incline to one, j_)j to be helpful, is opposed to the peculiarity of pronomi- nal stems. PNl ni. as an abbreviation of bi? God in proper names, e. g. "iSTbN, Nb5»b*t and others. See bs III. and the proper names in question. K'\ stone has also been compared with the first mem- ber bN, but it is more natural to take it as the article. See 113^5.!; and ttjiaaa. r T r : - lD"'5a^a?>« see a-^SKibN. ^ T - r 1 ! - Tvi^ C^i is « friend) re. p. m. Num. 11, 26 27. Comp. re. p. 'Ti''b8< of si- milar signification. On 11 coinp. the proper names iTil, ^lil, Itllli^ &o. i"i3?n^>t 1. re. p. of a Midianitish- Araliy tribe Gen. 25, 4; 1 Che. 1, 33. Here bg appears to be the article. — nbi^ 92 n^« 2. n. p. of an Ephraimite 1 Chr. 7, 20 according to some mss., for whicli the textual readinff is IT:S»bN. nb^} see rtfti*. r T - I v: il?i^ I. (from bx ni.; or perhaps farther developed out of bis) 1. (not used) intr. to be strong, powerful, stout, spoken of men, trees &c. ; ^ipN Hos. 4, 2 stands perhaps by exception for infin. Hifil. Comp-bN (biN I.). Derivatives rtbt?, li^tft (after the form li'nli) and the proper name Nbs. — 2. tr. to strengthen, to swear, confirm hy an oath Judges 7, 2 ; Hos. 4, 2. Derivatives nbs, lnbiiaiB, so 'Na NS ^_ I" I IT, ; ' T : IT Neh. 10, 30 to enter into a covenant, comp. ni'naa isa Ez. 16, 8; causative 'Na N'^ari tiz. 17, 13, with the accusa- tive of the person, the phrase being there distinguished fi-om riN ni'na nl3. o • . '■■ '■=■■ ':■', — 6. curse, imprecation, connected with exclamations of swearing, as was wont in covenants to guard against perjury Job 31, 30; Peov. 29,24; Zech. 5, 3; applied to the curse which devours the land because of the breaking of the covenant Is. 24, 6, or by means of which it mourns Jer. 23, 10. 'NH n?ai^ Numb. 5, 21 oath of the curse i. e. the solemn formula of cursing; spoken of the im- precatory section Deut. 29, 13 18 19; 30, 7 ; of the punishment following the curse Dan. 9, 11; figuratively the sub- nb^ 93 n!?« ject of the curse Jbe. 29, 18, as Mj?:?ia is also applied, Ndmb. 5, 21. n^N (from bha HI.) f. oak, terebinth, Josh 24, 26, Targ. Nn^N, comp. ^fts. This flVs appears to exist in the pro- per name 'TjbMVN. nbS (not used) f. goddess, only in the proper names MbN"!^, nbs'nn, lnbN»i\ fha (from biS i. e. biN , hence in the mss. nb"'N also) /. 1. oak, called so from its strength, GtEN. 35, 4; Judges 6, 11 19; 2 Sam. 18, 14; 1 Chr. 10, 12; but distinguished from 'jibN Hos. 4, 13; Is. 6, 13, though belonging to the same genus. The old translators and inter- preters hesitate between terebinth and oak, as they do also in the case of h'%, mVn, TiVn; sometimes they render it with reference to the Aram. ')b''i< by tree, bush, very seldom by valley, plain, meadow, whence we see that nothing accurate was known about it at a very early period. — 2. 'Nil pay (terebinth- slope) the name of a place not far from npty and nbiia 1 Sam. 17, 2 19; 21, 10. — 3. (strength) n. p. m. 1 Kings 16, 6; 2 KiKGS 15, 30, and also the name of an Edomite tribe Gen. 36, 41, by whom perhaps the Edomite seaport nibs (see nib'^N) or nb''N was built. !^b^ (rare) m. synonymous with bs III. Qod, enlarged at the end with an ac- centless a, as iib^b; only in the proper names tibs'iiaN ] -'niB"'. n?^ (pronominal stem) demonstr. 'pronoun, these, used as a plural to the singular TiX, iT, IT, nsf if, jja;i.f if not. lyibV^ (also tn'bN Dan. 11, 38; with prefio). V:" 5'bSjl.b and i^'bisb, as is fre- quent in the case of nouns whose ini- tial sound is a vowelless N; only in poetry in the sing., in Job, Is., Hab., PsAiiMS, or also in the later writings through the influence of Aramaean, as in Dan., Neh. and Chr. ; but regularly in the plur. U'<'nb^_,- constr. ''n'bsj., with suff. 12'^p"bN &c.) m. God, synonymous with bjS, of which it is obviously a farther development. In the applica- tion of the word, we must first separate the form of the singular from the plu- ral. The former, construed with an ad- jective sing, or plur. is applied: a) to heathen gods, Dan. 11, 37 and he has not regard for any god, spoken of Antiochus Epiphanes, who robbed the temples (Po- lyb. 31,4) and wished to destroy the usual worship (1 Macc. 1, 43; Diod. 34, 1); ''"'■J-^l? '^'f'SI ^1' 38 god of the fortresses, spoken ot'Melhart at Tyre; nibN "ij?.^. 11) 39 strange i. e. heathen god- i^''^NJ? '^p It Hab. 1, 11 this his power (attributing) to his god. b) Applied to the most high and true God Deut. 32, 15; Ps. 50, 22; Hab. 3, 3 &c., for which also yi>9\ 'N stands Ps. 1 14, 7 ; and when the Psalmist says 18, 32 : who is ttibN be- sides ""I, the true God only can be meant. 17^5 ni^N N-'irt 1^i».b Job 12, 6 to whom God brings it with his own lumd. — But the very ancient use of the pi. diJi'bN for God is most frequent, because the ancients conceived of the Deity as an ag^egate of many infinite forces (comp. d-'Jj'iN, Q''iai)? Hos. 12, 1). In this view % signifies 1. the true and most high God, Jehovah, and is used in the widest extent, even where a mere contrast to human nature is intended Zech. 12, 8; Ps. 8, 6 ; Ez. 28, 2. Like rtibs it is some- times construed with the singular Gen. 1, 3 ; 2 Kings 19, 4 16 ; Ps. 7, 10 ; 57, 3, sometimes with the plural Gen. 20, 13 ; 31, 53 ; Josh. 24, 19. At a later period, however, the construction with the plu- ral was avoided as polytheistic: hence it is said 1 Chk. 17, 21 'Nrt 'rjbn for % isbrt 2 Sam. 7, 23; ^■'Ip^S m Feh. 9; 18 for 'N nbN Ex. 32; 4,' and the Samaritan Pentateuch on this account Gen. 20, 13; 31, 53; 35, 7; Ex. 22, 8 changes the plural into the singular. • — 2. the national god, the guardian deity of any people. Gen. 17, 7; Jon. 1, 5; Judges 1, 16, and therefore applied to the national God of Israel i. e. Jehovah, usually bN'lto': ''p'bN Ex. 6, 1 ; ■S^'i\ 'N Ps. 20, 2; dhSsN '» 47, 10; or along with 1' 18, 29VLEV.'i8 and 19. As an epithet of Jehovah Deut. 4, 36, 1 Kings 18, 21 'N oftener stands with the article, d-'rfbNn Gen. 5, 22 ; 6, 9 11 ; 17, 18 &c., but also without the article Gen. 1, 1; and '8« both in prose and poetry is in- terchanged with niir; without any dis- tinction. Thus e. g. 'ijt 155> Dan. 9, 11 ; 'N ni'i Gen. 1, 2; 41, 38; 'n rr^a in Chron. and Ezra; 'n n'i'i Job 1, 'i 8; '» tjNbj: Gen. 32, 2"'' besides its con- nexion with \ Yet though there is no historical distinction in the signification of both, one appears at least in their application, inasmuch as the one or the other was used at certain periods of the n)b^ 95 r\)b^ living language and therefore by cer- tain writers. The historical books (Josh., Judges, Samuel, Kings) have i"! in pre- dominant usage; in Job ''i prevails in the prose parts, in the poetical bs? and nilsN; the Proverbs have I'S butEccles., Daniel and Jonah almost exclusively 'iS ; in the Psalms sometimes i'^, sometimes 'N prevails, just according to age; and m Genesis a twofold recension has been assumed according to this double use. — 3. Like bs, accompanied by adjec- tives or attributes in the genitive, which belong to the highest and universal God, it denotes the most high and the uni- versal God of humanity, 6. g. with D^Mffllrt l^'iNrtl Gen. 24, 3; d'i'^a Mic. '6,'6; ti'i'qxi'n Neh. 1, 4; niNSsA Am. 3, 13; lioa-bil? nini'iri Num.\(9, 22; )m Is. d,l& ;^ tl7.)5. Deut. 33, 27 ; pns Ps. 4, 2 ; SVi-^ 18,47 ;''lon 59, 18; T5»a 4"3',2; n'sMn 109, 1, where 'N stands in the con- struct state, and' the latter seldom ap- pear as a mere apposition 80, 5. It must be considered as a mere doctri- nal thing, when the'Targ., Sam., Sa'^adia and sometimes also the LXX and Vulg. translate the name D'^M'^N, where a clo- ser contact with humanity is expressed, as is done with ii also, by angel &c. — 4. Like bs, Q''ti'bN. is applied to the gods of the Semites and other peoples either with the addition 'iSSli Gen. 35, 2 ; S1D3 Ex. -20, 23; nsB)? 34, 17; Ci;i'i!ir!, Dbtjt. 29, 17; Y'yfi'n 2 Kings 17, '27; Qi^asri Ps. 96, 5,' or with the name of the people whose god is meant, e. g. ■''I'iaNn Josh. 24, 15 ; D'hn Judges 10, 6; SNia ibid.; QiiiK 1^ Kings 11, 5; ')i'7)5/2 Kings 1, '2;' nan. 18, 34; or also' 'a'^'rfbiif.^ alone 17, 29,' applied to Ba'al 1 Kings 18, 21, to a female deity 11, 5, to a made image Ex. 32, 1. From the Israelite point of view such a deity is called t3"'n'bN-i*b 2 Kings 19, 18. — f v: I 5. Like bs it is added to nouns to ex- press what is highest &c. e. g. 'Nfl 1p Ps. 68,16 spoken of mount Bashan; % sbs of rain 65, 10; 'N nnti Gen. 35, 5; 'N ''blRS5 30, 8 &c." Here belongs also the adverbial B'^rt'bisb Jon. 3, 3 extra- ordinary, comp. xjt^, though no other example of it is found; and perhaps also the addition of 'N to NB3, inter- rupted by the suff., Ps.'45, 7 thy elevated throne; so too may 'N in ^'^ii'bijt 'N 45, 8 be taken thy exalted God;' hut these cases stand isolated. — We may now give those modifications of the- fundamental idea, according to which d'^ilbN is really applied to a plurality, conseq[uently where the signification God is laid aside. Here belong: 1. where it is applied to heathen gods Ex. 12, 12; 2 Chk. 28, 23,. a use that is very ex- tensive, which is naturally adopt- ed wherever polytheism is implied. ■ — 2. A farther application of 'N is its use to denote jicdges Ex. 21, 6; 22, 7 8, properly God's judgment, where th©^ judgment is before God (comp. Deut. 19,17), hence LXX correctly: to hqi- rriqiov tov &sov, and the Targ. accord- ing to the sense tify^'n. — 3. angels^ as also DibN is used^Ps. 97, 7; 138, 1, where LXX, Vulg., Targ., Pesh. and others translate angels, as also in Ps. 8, 6 ; 82, 1 6 ; Gen. 3, 5 the translators and ancient interpreters render 'N by angels; but this explanation of 'N in the places cited is not at all certain, because the old translators and inter- preters manifestly wished to avoid an- thropomorphisms , and in the passages in question 'fft can be taken otherwise. Only the periphrasis D''!7'bijt ''iln for angels Job 1, 6; 2, 1; 38, 7 is certain, after the analogy of d'^bs ''Sa Ps. 29, 1 and dilBilj? 89,6. But d"'rt"%, if one will not take it as an abbreviation of 'jj-lBiN , by itself denotes ghost , spirit i Sam. 28,13, that is to say, in the singular sense; LXX, Vulg., Syr., Ar. have gods, Targ. angels, Josephus a godlike image, but more or less by conjecture. — 4. kings i. e. much the same as earthly gods, like our Majesty, Ps. 82, 1 6 ; otherwise they are called sons of God 2, 7; 89, 27. The noun iiiblS. (elsewhere used by the Semites: Phenic. in Sanchoniathon p. 28 'EloEifi i. e. d"'lri'b!iit ; Targ. tnbijt , Sam. tnb.N , Syr. fo^; Arab, s!^! , jtil , with the art' ^i!?« 96 bl^« 2JLt|) is a very old ulterior develop- ment of bs which is by all means to be '" ^ --* taken as primitive, and the verbs sJf to ■worship God, x)f to be afraid, astonished, seem to have been formed from the noun; on the latter verb comp. Aram. Nbt!.,!) as also ins, d''a''N, nitbsJM. pS|bN I. (from bbs. which see) 1. (not used) name of a Phenician and Syrian deity as Tl^pn (Ezek. 8, 14), perhaps of Adonis, as a symbol of the fruit of the vine, -whose death might therefore re- present the cutting off of the grapes, the vintage, which happened in September, when in Syria the festival of Adonis was kept, and which month by the orientals is towards the end of the year (Jerome on Ezek. 1. c; Julian, orat. 4). From this name of a deity is to be explained the Phenician n. p. 'ElovlaTog ('^bl^N; Jos. Ant. 9, 14, 2). — 2. name of the closing month of the eastern year, cor- responding about to our September, Neh. 6, 15, the civil year had already begun with ■''niBn , because of the late adoption of the names of the months by the Jews, which they took from the names of gods (Eosh ha-Shana ch. 1). The name of this month runs in Syriac '^aii*l , Sam. HAl, Kurd. ^j^. t (EiMn for EiMl), Ar. J^ t , Baalbek. iXov}., with little variation, as in Hebrew, whence we see the wide- spread use of the Aramaean appellation. The stem is probably bbs synonymous with hbi) to glean (the vine), to cut the latest grapes off, generally to have the last gathering, as the death of Ado- nis is conceived of in adulto /lore secta- rum frugum (Amm. Marc. 19, 1 ; 22, 9). ^!lbs II. only in K'tib for h-b^_ Jbe. 14, 14,' see b-'btj. ^ibX (from bliSJ I.; ^fer. Q'^S", constr. •^i") m. oak, terebinth, properly a strong tree, spoken of the ever-green terebinth or the strong-leaved oak (see b'jN , !ib''N , !nbN), as also the LXX, Venet, Syr., Vulg., Symm. and others usually render the word; the versions translate it (but rarely) plain, valley, meadow, because these trees were planted by springs or in meadows. This 'N appears 1, in its ap- plication to old Israelite sacred oaks and terebinths which had themselves a cer- tain reverence paid to them , or beside which there was a sacred station. Thus a) aan libt? {oah of the pillar; SSiM is a noun iike M5SM) at Sichem Judges 9, 6, perhaps the same at which in Joshua's time the sanctuary was Josh. 24, 26, where Jacob buried the strange gods GrBN. 35, 4, and where there was pro- bably at one time a heathen cultus. b) 'N fii3ii5>a {oah of the magicians) the name of a place also in the neighbourhood of Sichem Judges 9, 37, where oracles were probably communicated in the earlier heathen time; comp. the oaks of the oracle at Dodona (Odyss. |, 327). e) "nian 'N {oak of Tahdr) name of a noted oak in the vicinity of Bethel 1 Sam. 10, 3. Mount Tab6r was a holy place, like its homonymous Idra^vQiov ('liinN.) in the island of Bhodes formerly in- habited by the Phenicians, where a temple of Zsvg 'Ata^vgiog (App. 12, 27) existed; and perhaps the oak was de- dicated to Tabor, d) N'nM'a "^ibii {oaks of Mamre) a name of consecrated oaks belonging to the Emorite Mamre, in the neighbourhood of Hebron, where Abra- ham built and dedicated an altar to Je- hovah, and where God appeared to him Gen. 13, 18; 14, 13; 18, 1. In the time of Josephus (Bell. Jud. 4, 9, 7; Ant. 1, 10, 4) an Ogyges-oak was there; and even in Constantine's time an altar stood under Abraham's oak which he con- verted into a church (Socrat. Hist. Eccl. 1, 14). e) npTO 'jibs or npb ■'libs (teacher's oak) name of a consecrated oak in the neighbourhood of Sichem Gen. 12, 6; Dbut. 11, 30. fTiia seems an an- cient epithet of a deity (see iTiia). f ) d'^SSyJiSi ^ibij {oak ofZaanannim) Josh. 19, 33 or'diiyjta 'N K'tib Judges 4, 11 n.p. of a place in the vicinity of 11)175, in the territory of Naphtali, as far as which the nomadic tribe of the Kenites pitched their tents; so called perhaps from an oak consecrated at Q''3?5'K (which see), ])b^ 97 ^b« or D^ssa (which see), where there maj have been before a Phenician sanctuary. It shotild be remarked, however, that mss. and translators sometimes inter- change p^N and liVlS. — 2. {strong, powerful) n. p. m. Gen. 46, 14; Numb. 26,26; hence the patronym. ili'^N in the latter place. Elsewhere the orthography is also pb''i?. li^N (from bN = Vn; plur. D-'S'iVn, cons(r.^iiVi<)m. l.oak, stands distinguish- ed from !ibN Is.6, 13,andiscoupledwith tisa'b (white poplar or storax plant) Hos. i,' 13 and nnn (holm-oak) Is. 44, 14. We must assume a peculiar species of oaks when it is viewed along with ^ibit, nbi?, !iVn &c. The oaks of Bashan (I'lOaJ? D'^i'ibN or -iiBart ■'iibi?) were cele- brated: they were used in ship-building T5zEK. 27, 6 and are applied poetically as a figure of greatness and distinction Is.2,13; Zech.11,2. — 2. (strong) n. p. m. 1 Che. 4, 37. C|^i>N (and V^», with su/. ■'BlbS; pZ. n"'SbN, cons«r. ■'B')Vn and "'sbi?) ai?'. m. .prop, hanging to, attaching to, hence 1. tame, spoken of a lamb Jbk.11, 19, as Jerome abeady understood it; but Ibn Labrdt and Ibn Koreish have taken it in no. 4 signification as a noun; others derive it from CibN family, in the sense of fami- Uaris; which explanations are less to the point. — Then as a noun 2. friend, from hanging to, attaching to (comp. "I an, Ar. v_«s.Lo) Prov. 16, 28; 17, 9, hav- ing the same sense as V'^ (19, 4) and sometimes parallel to it Mic. 7, 5, or as y'ryq Ps.65,14. Here probably belongs the passage Jer. 13, 20: since thou thy- self hast accustomed them to thee, as friends (Q'^sbN) at thy head i. e. thou hast before chosen the Chaldean's as friends. — 3. husband, properly friend, Jer. 3, 4; Prot. 2, 17, therefore also yp (Jer. 3, 20; Hos. 3, 1) is put instead of it. — 4. A collateral form of t|bi!» bullock, as epicene also applied to the female Ps. 144, 14, consequently it is not de- lived from the original idea of the ad- jective. — 5. Denominative from t\)>{X (family, tribe): head of a family or tribe, applied to the heads of the Edomites in particular Gen. ch. 36 ; 1 Che. 1,51- ch. 4. At a later period it was also spoken of Jewish chiefs Zech.12,5 6, and accord- ingly some Jewish teachers have the title of r]a (Ba'al) 2 Sam. 5, 16, 1 Chron. 14, 7' and with "in^ 2 Kings 23, 34, whether the change toot place from free choice or for eupho- ny. This construct -form is also some times exchanged for the abbreviation of bN into bs (1 Chr. 3, 6 ; 14, 5 — Ex. '" ■■■ 7 n«^b« 98 ^^^« 6, 22 ; Num. 3, 30), or disappears entirely, bN passing into the second member, e. g. b'ur'ay 1 Chr. 3, 5 arises out of Q^Vn I" ■ - ' IT * v: 2 Sam. 11, 3. As happens in the case of "''iN,, "■'rtN &c., the member stand- ing in the construct state is fused with the following, without subordination, into a single conception, so that it should not be interpreted as a genitive, but as an apposition (see "''iiN.)- Consequently they ought to be taken together as very an- cient invocations of God and eulogies borrowed from an old popular liturgy used in the dedication of what was dear- est, as also other antique nations, the Egyptians, Phenicians &c. invested what was dearest to them with the names and religious formulas of their deities and saints, DK''p!^ CEI is father) n. p. m. Num. 1, 9 r le'i ; 1 Sam. 16, 6 ; 1 Chb. 16, 4; comp. b^''!?N, bjS''SN , and SN in proper names. ^^jiibN {"El is God) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 11, 46. See IsN-'SN. nnS-'bi* C^l is) n.p. m. 1 Chr.25,4. iins is a participial noun from niN HI. (see too ■'O'^ij) with an elongation by means of accentless a. In place of it stands 25,27 hnibN with the absorption of^Alef. "^•■■•= IT'bN (synonymous with llbs) n. p. OT. Numb. 34, 21. 5?^''P^4 ('S is knowing) n.p. m. 2 Sam. 5, 16, for which 1 Chr. 14, 7 has 5>'T'b5>a. See 5>']i''iN. The name appears to have teen in use among the Syrians also, 1 Kings 11, 23. fl^ba (from nbN I.) fern, the fat tail IT!" ITT"'' ■ of oriental sheep, which was commonly consumed with the fat (ibrj) as a sacri- fice ExoD. 29, 22; Lev.7,'"3; 8,25 and is described as ti|»rt n^5>b 3, 9. In the dialects (Arab. xaJI, Targ. i«ibN, Syr. |i^*^l ) the same word exists ; and when the LXX once translate it by oacpvs, they follow later usage. nON {'El is Jah) 1. proper name of the prophet Elijah of Tishbeh (!ij3l25ri) 2 Kings 1,3, who is also called lln^ibij 1 Kings 17, 1, 'Hli'ag Matth. 11, 14, and who became at a later period the centre of a rich circle of traditions. — 2. proper name of other persons 1 Chr. 8, 27 ; Ezr. 10,21 26. irT'b;* {Self-'El, avTo&Eog) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 26, 7; 27, 18. See NiriiiN.. 5« {Self -'El) n. p. m. i. Job ch. 32-35, but sometimes written lil'^bN. — 2. 1 Sam. 1, 1 ; 1 Chr. 6, 12 19 alter- nating with bN "lbs and SN ^bx . — 3.1 Chb. 12, 20. ''^''il'iST'bK (i. e. li'^y iiT^-bN to God are mine eyes directed, as if it had arisen out of Ps. 123, 1 &c.) n. p. m. in the later period of the language Ezr. 8, 4; 1 Chr. 26, 3, for which, however, 3, 23; 4, 36; 7,8 &c. '"'y^'Syh^ stands. In 1 Chr. 8,20 i5iJ»'ibN occurs instead of it, which is merely abridged out of '^'i''bN. Hence the LXX have 'Elimvai. ''D'i3?i''b« see ■'J'^SiiT^bN. r ■• I ; V r " i : : ••* Nliin''Pl!4 (^El is protector) n. p. m. 2 Sam." 23, 32. See Niti. t|"in''?>4 CEI as sender of harvest - rain; comp. the proper names t\'in , rt'lii) n. p. m. 1 Kings 4, 3. b''b!^ (also bbs; jjZm?-. S''b"'bN , Sb") m. 1. a small image of a god, which among the Egyptians and Phenicians gave oracles, erecting itself {Servius on Aen. 6, 68 ; Plin. h. n. 37, 58). Hence it is put along with 'n)j'B5 )'\]n and 00)5. Jeb. 14, 14 K'ri. It is usually applied to little images of heathen deities or idols gener- ally Lev. 19, 4; 26, 1; Is. 2,8 18 20; 19, 3; 31, 7; to the images of the gods at Memphis, the central seat of Egyptian worship EzEK. 30, 13; with the addi- tional idea of the greatest contempt, in opposition to Ci''!i'bN Ps. 96, 5; 97, 7; 1 Chr. 16, 26; Hab.'2,18. TheK'tib has once for it bibs Jee. 14, 14. — 2. Figura- tively in the later time of the language: lie, falsehood, parallel to 'np'UJ Job IS, 4; folly Zech. 11, 17, proceeding from tha. -|i?D^^« 99 \i;^b^ original signification idol. The Syr.U^f low, It'. N r\ i idolatry, heresy, are con- nected with it. The forms blbs and b''bN are develop- ed from bs with the termination il and Al to express the idea of lessening and contempt. Other traces of a similar for- mation are found in Hebrew. A verb bbi« "to be nothing" is neither found in Hebrew nor in the dialects. The Arab. ill to be weak, low, is connected with the Hebrew biN. n "nbH^bs C^l is king) n. p. m. Euth 1,2. 'See 'itbaiaN. T^y^ (pronominal stem; an old plural formation made from bN these by means of yi- as in ')3'n, X'}^, comp. nbtj, lbs) Aram. pron. demonstr. plur. : these, Dan. 2, 44; 6, 3; 7, 17. ibij also stands in place of it 6, 7. BD'^bN CEI is gatherer i. e. protector; from ClDN''b!iit.) n. p. m. Numb. 1, 14; 3, 24. See qDN''^ls.. 1T?''bN {'El is help) n. p. m. Gen. 15, 2; ExoD. 18, 4; Ezr. 8, 16; 1 Che. 7,8; 15,24; 27,16; 2 Chb. 20, 37. See iwi^is , 'vv'in, 'TrJ>i^ 'iTS'iriN , 'ntsinn.. ''S'^y'ibN see •'S'^Sin^bij. Q2>''b!!< i^El is gatherer or founder of families and communities) n. p. m. 2 Sam. 11, 3; 23, 34; instead of which 1 Che. 3, 5 has bsj"'^?. 13? in personal proper names is often an epithet of God as the founder of kinsmen or of the state; and is therefore like the names of Deity b{S, ■'JiBJ &c. applied to God (-%»), S15, I'iT, D'l, lap &c. Comp. for ex- ITT ' IT T ' IT ' ^ 'it ^ ample "'l'ttJ'''B?, bN^tey, Ci^''35<., S15'''H?, ITT r-' \ v' t •-' IT :';t ' it ; ';,t ' l:5'Kip\ D5»5pi, aiJiTi ayan'i, QUaia^, it:'-:' it:':t' it : tjt' it:-:' it: tit' "^''in';, IS^M?, d'nay, more rarely DN m tJN-irii* , aVaiB, dsibn, be'nMN, and with it • -:' IT : ■ ' IT--' I-.- T : - ' the absorption of S> or N m Dbn?. out ot DS b'T5>; di>ba, dsba\ dSpT^ and per- IT I-:' IT : • ' IT : : • ' it': :t ^ naps also d-Tnis. See dS* 2. ^ . IT-, -: it TB''PN (^El is dispenser of riches) n. p. m. Idumaean Gen. 36, 4; 1 Che. 1, 35; Job 2, 11. See ts. PB''P>t C^l is judge) n. p. m. 1 Che. 11, 35. In sense this proper name coin- cides with l-iibbs, tSDTB'ibN, iriUEiilS and IT :- : IT T i;v:' it : - : other compounds of asia and yi. Comp. moreover bbs, bbSN. n T ' it : V ^ilbB''bN C^l is distinction) n. p. m. 1 Chk. 15, 18. The original proper name llnbs is fused together from irti'ibs, as it stands in the above place beside proper names ending in 1!Ti~ ; but '^'tv was lost by contraction, and therefore another initiatory word was prefixed. libB'^bjJt (^El is deliverance) n. p. m. 2 S^'! 23,"34; 1 Che. 3, 6, for which JabsbN stands in 14,5. Comp. bis''ubs, V r.- : V ' r ,...;- 1 tr^abs. IT :- : "TlS'^bN CEI is a roch) n. p. m. Num. 1,5; 2,10; comp. the proper names Ti2i, bsilis, "'iia'i'TiJt, "TUttins. 1" • I ' r- I- ' I t: ISS'^bs^ CEI is protector) n. p. m. Num. 3, 30, instead of which IgabN also occurs ExOD. 6, 22 ; comp. also the proper names lisK, !T;i|i2£. )^^, like "jiB:^ and 'j'iSSl:, might signify the dark, wintry region, darkness, night (see 'TIN , bjJ'^'ilN); and it is possible that in the case of these compounds it may be taken in this sense. Np ''bx C^l' is rejecter i. e. of a people) n. p. of a Davidic hero of iHll. (T'J') Judges 7,1, hence "'^'if-v' 2 Sam. 23, 25, which is wanting in the parallel passage 1 Che. 11, 27, because the gentile noun was like that of the preceding proper name. Np^ from Nip. Cp"'!?^ C-Ei! is setter up or assister) n. p. m. 2 Kings 18,18; transformed into Qipjiri'; 2 Kings 23, 34; 1 Che. 3, 15. In the New Testament (Matth.1,13; Luk. 3, 30) 'Ehaxiifi. Comp. the proper names d'^p'i , dSap'; and those compounded with dp ,'^ viz. dp^riN., dp-'S'jN, dP"''nTy, 'it' 'it • -:' It •_! -:' W . bNlttp, where d)5 or d''|?J is spoken ot God. ' tO'^bi* see Mfflibx- '■■••= " ■■•" y* ^^Dli'^bx 100 ^bb^ yyiO'^^ii i^El is founder of the cove- nant) n.p. f. ExoD. 6,23; the Greek form 'Ehad^sT Luke 1, 7 arose out of nyairfibN (comp. nyaiaini 2 Che. 22, 11, alternat- ing witli iy^litSifi: 2 Kings 11, 2) a col- lateral form of" J'aia-'bN. Comp. the . - IV ; v: _ JT proper names 5>a 125, riSSlB, S'lia INa and the Greek n.p. Baqaa'^ag (Acts 15,22), which is perhaps 5>5l25"'na (son of the covenant) formed after the analogy of yailJTia (daughter of the covenant). i'i!^''b&i (Samar.l2JibN)n.».of aGreek tribe beside pi, which the Mosaic eth- nographical table adduces as the son of Javan, Gen. 10, 4; 1 Chr. 1, 7. Since Javan is the Ionic tribe, we have to ex- ~ plain 'N as the -ieoZz'c, the lonians and Aeolians being the two leading tribes of the Hellenists. In this manner Josephus (Ant. 1, 6, 1), Jerome (quaest. in Gen. 10,2) and Zonaras (ann. 1,5) have un- derstood the word. This Greek race formerly dwelt in Thessaly, Euboea, Boeotia, Anatolia, Peloponnesus &c. (see Knohel^ die Volkertafel p. 81-86), and at the time of Ezekiel(Ez.27,7) they also inhabited Aeolis in Asia Minor, stretching from the Cyzicus beyond Mysia and Troas as far as the river Hermus, as well as over the west coast of Asia Minor, and the opposite islands (Di^.n) generally. In their great commercial trade the Phe- nicians brought from them red and blue purple (IU-5'IN arid nbsn). The Hebrew form is developed from the fundamental form AlksTg. See IT". b3 'ITT _^_{El is good fortune) n. p. m. 2 Sam'. 5,'i5, for which in 1 Chr. 3, 6 yniaib.N stands, written by mistake and proceeding from the 8. verse. See SiffliaN, 5"m5. - I ■-: 3''ld''5N {^El is requiter) n.p.m. 1 Chr. 3, 24;'' 24,' 12; Nbh. 3, 1; Eze. 10, 24 27, See the proper name aiUJ''. 3'ipa3''bN CEI is hearer) n. p. m. Nu. 1, 10^; 2 Sam. 5, 16; 1 Chr. 2, 41; 3, 8; 2 Kings 25, 25; 2 Chr. 17, 8. But in 1 Chr. 3, 6 it stands for Sfl^ibs , which the Chronicle-writer perhaps interpreted yiMiaibN. See i>ail5. 3'U3''biS C-^l is salvation-dispenser) proper name of the famous prophet and disciple of Elijah, 1 Ejngs 19, 16 &e. ; in Luke 4, 27 'Ehaaawg. See i>125. t3SaJ''^i!< {'El is judge) n.p.m. 2 Chr. 23, 1. ' See piaN , tiBirJ. ' , ' IT • -: ' IT T ^in»b^^ see nnxibN. T IT • ■••: T IT • V: T]?^ (pronominal stem) Aram. pron. demonstr.pl., these, hi, placed after mascu- line nouns only, and so far distinguished from the term 'jiVsj; which is cognate in sense Dak. 3, 12 &c.; 6, 6 &c.; Ezr. 4,21; 5,9; 6,8. The addition Tj- to bs ("Vn, see Ti^lX) which is also found in "rj'i, Ij'i, Tjiln, is an old pronominal stem that occurs in Arabic appended to demonstratives, and its use as a suffix of the second person has been developed therefrom. See 'rj'i. ??^ I. (not used) a stem assiuned for bN I. and b^bi*. But even if the r ^ r v: stem were in use, it would be a secon- dary one from the pronominal stem bN. SeebjSL b^bg and blbsjt 11. should t'e referred to b^ m. 7P^ H. (not used) intr. synonymous with bbi (which see) i. e. the stem bs is , |-T ^ 1 '~ = bi, of which libn is a farther develop- ment, to complain, sigh for. Ax. J I, comp. Gr. dlttXdCsiv, oXoXv^sir. See however P?^ m. (not used) intr. equivalent to bs? (biN) to be strong, powerful, stead- fast. Derivatives nbs*, libs. ' : , IT- > ' 1 - !??i^ rV. (not used) belonging to bibs I. See Aramaean bbs. bONS (not used) Aram, trans, to gather in, to collect into a barn, spoken of the harvest, usually of the vintage, to dress, consequently equivalent to bbj (which see); whence blbs I. ''bbS! interj. woe! Job. 10, 15; Mic. 7, 1; with b of the person, as in other exclamations of grief. The termination 1- appears to be like that which is in many pronominal stems. It is usually nb^ 101 "niD^N assumed that it is to be derived from the verb bbN 11. ; but it is more likely that the interjection has formed the basis of the verb, as the Greek aSond^eiv, sidCsiv, oloXv^siv were developed out of the exclamations '^s'tN, !^.in = !i;n, llsbll in Phenician worship. D?K (Kal unused) tr. 1. to bind to- gether, to tie (kindred in sense with rass, 'i?23> I), hence rtabs. — 2. like las, TiBp, TrtX to bind, to fit into one an- other, intertwine, interweave, arch; hence D^N, DbiN (pi. ClabiN), db'iN (pi. D'^'ab", riH"); then to make firm generally. De- rivative lliabs n. — 3. to draw together the mouth, or more correctly: to be bound i. e. tongue-tied, hence to be dumb (see 'ntJN), to be silent, comp. Ssajj,og lijg yXtoaaijg Mask 7, 35; Ar. Jjii, Syr. Jc^^f. Derivatives Dbs, DbN, lifabN. — 4. i\, red-coloured wood; but it is more cor- rect to take it as sandal-wood, which is called in Sanskrit mocha, mochdta. It was imported by the Arabians fr-om In- dia and Persia. nabx (from a'biSi;^Z. 'a'^)f?» and nia", with "sii/f. vn^hs) f. prop.' the bound, hence bundle (of grain), sheaf, Gen. 37, 7; Ps. 126, 6; allied in sense to naS, lay. The stem is abs. aiabs see a\|ia'?N. "iTD^i^ (some mss. Tifabs) n. p. nj. • — ^ IT • -|bD^« 102 ivbi^ of tte first Arabian Joktanite race Gen. 10, 26; 1 Che. 1, 20. According to the Arabic tradition, the race Gh'hom, ■who dwell at first in Yemen, then in Hegas and Tehama, is derived from Kachtan; the name of its kings Modhadh (ijoLajo) is compared with our Ilia (bs is the article). El-Modad would thus be equivalent to the progenitor of the of the G'orhomites. Others compare the Kachtanite tribe t>fwo (Mur^d) in Yemen, and therefore read l^iabN; others again compare El-Mdtdt, brother of Chimjar and son of Saba (Ptolem. 6, 7, 23). T^babx (contracted from .Tiba rhjA, hing's oak, and referring to the Pheni- cian oak- worship, remains of which were preserved among the Hebrews also Josh. 24, 26; Judges 9, 6 37; Tiba [which see] is then the name of the deity) n. p. of a Phenician city in the tribe of Asher Josh. 19, 26. The assimilation of n is rare, and possible only in a proper name. 'jH^N (from Dbs) adj. m. forsaken, widowed, with ya of the person by whom one is forsaken Jbe. 51,5. The feminine rtaabN, however, is concrete. Comp. the Phenician labN widower. 'T : - ■j^ppi* (formed from ^aV^i « changes into 6 in abstract formations, as 'nS3 has arisen from ^'S'i) m. widowhood, figu- ratively of a forsaken state Is. 47, 9, like nsabx vs. 8. ™^^N (prop- adj. fern, of labt?) f. 1. widow, prop, isolated, forsaken (see dbS! 4), hence she is frequently adduced along with din; Ex. 22, 21; Deut. 10, 18; Jbe. 7, 6; Ez. 22, 7, 'li Detjt. 27, 19; Ps. 94, 6 or '^jj^ Zech. 7, 10 as pro- tectionless and wanting help. Elsewhere it is spoken of widows as a peculiar class of women Gen. 38, 11, together with nvoil.? and nbbn Lev. 21, 14; 22, 13; Num. 30, 10; 'Ez. 44, 22; or with reference to their forlorn state Deut. 24, 17; Job. 24, 3; 29,13 ;Ps. 146, 9; as an addition to nis'sj! 2 Sam. 14, 5; 1 Kings 7i 14. — 2. Figuratively of a widowed state Is. 47, 8, where the image is con- tinued (see l^bi?). — 3. Only in the pi. nii73bN (perhaps from ')i?pbN = 'jia'iN) Is. 13, 22 (parallel SS3> ■'bd'^p) Ez. 19,' 7: towers, palaces (comp. Dbk 2 and dblN). In the former place the Targ. Vulg. Syr. and many iaterpreters take it as if it were a collateral form of nisa'lN (comp. nsabN, Targ. Nba'iN, Syr. jiicjf, Arab. jLLo.I) or had originated from niia'iN by mistake, as some mss. still read it; but it is more correctly derived from dblS 2, and so the Targ. (and LXX) has taken it in the latter passage, translating 5>'r;_ (as Judges 8, 16 by Ijan) lay waste, vnth- out reading on that account S'T'I (from S?'n). See lia'iN. '"" n^iaabs (with suf. rriniJabN, plural Qinwa-)"/. 1. widowhood] Gen. 38, 14 19; 2" Sam. 20, 3; — 2. pi. fig. time of exile, a condition of widowhood to the people Is. 54, 4. *'35ap5< adj. m. properly one concealed, not named, hence as a pronoun: a certain one, quidam, 6 dsTvu, connected with ''3'bs (which see) Euth 4, 1; 1 Sam. 2i| 3; * t 2 Kings 6, 8; comp. Ar. -^t, aJjI unus, ullus, aliquis, the interchange of b with 1 in words belonging to the stem fibx often appearing. See d'iN. I ?ib''at«, d5»s. ■jnibjt C-^l is giver) n. p. m. 2 Kings 24, S] EsE. 8, 16. See ini. "iDsN n.p. of an east- Asiatic or Ba- IT ^T V bylonian- Assyrian country which can no longer be discovered. Gen. 14, 1 9. The Jerusalem Targum renders it by TiBNbti (comp. Is. 37, 12), and so understands by it an Assyrian province. If this be so, the words bt? oak and bfi hill would only be additions to IDN, llSN. " . IT-:' IT - ^SbVi C^l is protector) n.p. m. 1 Che. 7, 21. But 15» may also be =tTiJ*, and - n •' , ITT ' 15»bN tantamount to bi«''15>. ni^W 103 my bit C-^l is ornament) n.p. m. 1 Chr. 7, loV " Comp. Tf^y. ■'TIS pi< ( Bl is victorious) n.p. m. 1 Chr. 12, '5. W = "'«, see IS. ITy^pS C^l is helper) n. p. m. Ex. 6, 23; YSam. 7, 1; 2 Sam. 23, 9; Ezr. 8, 33; 10, 25; 1 Chr. 23, 21. Comp.lTS-'bN, ^T|"'aN., 1Jj?''rii5 &c. The abbreviated iorm JdCagog Luke 16, 20 (Talm. ^ISV) bas arisen out of 'EXsd^aQog. Sbybjt (andnb-; the exalted 'El) n.p. of a town on the other side of Jordan (so called from the Moabite worship of 'El, Phenician )v'bv bs) which belonged to Eeuben, and where subseq[uently the Moabites dwelt Num. 32, 3 37; Is. 15, 4; 16, 9; Jer. 48, 34. According to Eusebius (s. v.) it was a mile from 'liaiiSri. Ruins of it stiU. exist, called JL«JI el-Al {Burckhardt' s travels in Syria, p. 365). niUJ'bs {^El is creator) n. p. m. Jer. 29, 3; 1 Chr. 2, 39 ; 8, 37. Comp.bN^ltoS:, rfiBS^M. The 'forms iiizj's and in the'Ara- IT"-:|- ITT maean manner !liU5>, "liBy are participial nouns also, though originally like 3 perf sing. See nfe^. n?ij {fut. ElbN.';) intr. prop, to bind, to unite with one, comp. At. oSLs I cove- nant, hence 1. (not used) to associate with one, to unite with, one, to hang upon one, comp. Ar. i— dJf, hence Cjlbi? 1 (which see), Ar. >— ftjJ I, and perhaps too >)l!pN 3 (prop, associate, friend) meta- phorically head of a tribe. Sheikh, like the Arabic i.^(U».La (companion, and pre- fect, prince) and Jf • have proceeded from a similar point of view; if t|bN in this sense be not a denomin. from J]bN 3. — 2. to learn, i. e. to make oneself familiar with something, to bind intimately, Prot. 22, 25, as also IJjb (which see) in ad- dition to learn has also the meaning to accustom oneself to something, comp. Targ. tjbN and qb^, Syr. '-aii^f, ui^, in Zabian ^■ais' only in this sense. — 3. (not ^sed) tr. to yohe in e. g. animals, in ^^ order to cultivate the field, particularly oxen and heifers, which signification also comes from the original idea of binding, as jugum from jungo. Hence tlbN 1 (which see) and tjlbs 4. — 4. (not used) tr. to unite, bind together, for example, many single things into one mass, hence tlbN 2 and denom. IT^bNrt; or to be united, to form a union, hence JjbN 3 (which see). The idea of binding together in the stem tlbN is also in the Arab. <^\ and Syr. ^a^l, hence Mi^ ship, i. e. the joining together of planks, but the organic root ist|b-N, since Ar.i^j, Syr. wa^, Aram. t]3b mean to bind together. Pih. t|bi< (fut. t^,!^1, part. E]ba con- tracted in the Aramaean way from tlbsM) to teach, with a double accusative of the person and thing. Job 15, 5 ; 33, 13; proceeding from the second signi- fication of Kal, as TJjb from llih , comp. Targ. Cibs, Syr. ■.i^. i5sbM Job 35, 11 he who teaches us, from f|ba. Hif. q-'biStrt denom. from f]bN 2, which see. t]bs: (pause t]bN, with suff. isbN; pi. D"iBbN, constr. ^sbis, with suff. rebs, r T -: ' I" f " I IT T -! ' artisbs? ; dual D^Bbi?) m. 1. only m the plural, oxen, heifers, Ps. 8, 8, denoting together with !i5is [li^S] sheep and goats tame house- animals, properly animals tamed to the yoke, cattle for the yohe, comp. jii-mentum (beasts of burden , of draught) from jungo. See t]bi< 3. Also like §ovg and bos as epicene it is ap- plied to cows Deut. 7, 13; 28, 4 18 51, since the derivation does not req[uu-e the meaning of ox exclusively. In the Psalter the form t|1^S« seems to have been selected for the feminine gender Ps. 144, 14, and as epicene is construed with the masculine form of the verb ; but in the passage cited f|l^N may also be taken in the third signification. Also in the Phenician t|b!!« is steer (Mass. 3) and therefore £)bN is the name of the first letter of the" alphabet in that language, as Plutarch says (q[uaest. symp. 9, 2, 3) Sia TO 0omxct.s ovtco xalsTv rov §ovv; and t|bN Tiiabrt according to Bioscor, r\bii 104 r\b^ (TV, 126), ^ovylfoaaov , the name of a plant among the Carthaginians. — 2. As a numeral, a thousand, properly the union of many individuals, a mass (see V^» 1 and 4), then fixed to a definite number, as also InNM properly denotes a number, then a hundred; hence IjbN could signify a myriad in Aethiopic. Along with nouns 'N usually stands he- fore them, and the nouns I|D3 Gen. 20, 16 or !^D3-^33 2 Kings 15J'l9, "'bai Ex. 12 ,'"37, a's'p. 1 Sam. 13, 5, Tilria 1 Kings 12, 21,'%'r\ Tiaa 2Chk. 25, 6^, riMi? Num. 35, 4, ffliNi Judges 15, 15, "13 1 Kings 5, 25, ')D|' Is. 7,23 and the like, follow in the singular as express- ing collective ideas. This usage how- ever is not constant, for it also follows the noun plural Deut. 1, 11; 1 Kjngs 3, 4; 5, 6; 2Kings 3, 4; 1 Che. 29, 7, though more in the later period of the language. But when 'N does not stand in close connexion with the noun, but should only be expressed in the sen- tence, the noun comes before it Num. 31, 33 45; 1 Kings 8, 63; 2 Kings 24,16; and this mode of speech, which is a favourite one in Aramaean, is also ex- tended at a later period of the language so far as to be used where the numeral is closely connected with the noun 2 Che. 30, 24; Ezea 1, 9. Elsewhere it is usual to place the distinction in the position of the numeral before or after the noun on the emphasis which the narrator intends by what is enu- merated, or by the number itself (See co- pious remarks on this point in Shoroshe Lebanon, pag. 191 — 195.) As a large round number JjbN stands either alone. Is. 30,17; 60,22"Eccles. 7, 28; Job 1, 3; 33, 23; Ps. 84, 11, or put before the noun 90, 4; Is. 7, 23; Ecclbs. 6, 6; Song op Sol. 4, 4 ; Ps. 105, 8 ; seldom put after it 50, 10, where r]bN is to be referred to ''p'^rt. In the same way the plural Q'^Bbs is used, either alone Ex. 20, 6; 1 Sam. 18, 8; or put before the noun in the construct state Numb. 10, 36; Ps. 68, 18; Mic. 6, 7. The num- ber which defines the thousands more closely stands before nbN or Q'^sbN , and the one is regulated by the sex of 'N , e. g. d"isbN nswuj Num. 2, 24; iiSS'^N tibN 1 Che! 5' 1^; fi'^sbN nyiailS I's' i; Eibs nsB 2Che.25,6; nbis nsa Num.2, 9, where the defining number, therefore, stands sometimes in the abs. state, some- times in the construct, and plurality is also expressed often by !;|bN. The dual is D'^ebN 2000, and is sometimes put before, sometimes after the noun, the latter being either in the singular or plural Judges 20, 45 ; Is. 36, 8 ; 1 Che. 5, 21. Hence the denom. Hiphil Il"'bNfi to bring forth thousands, to cast forth in thousands, spoken of sheep Ps.l44, 13. — This signification of the noun ap- pears also in the dialects, e. g. Ar. uiJf, Syr. i.a^, Maltese elf &c., and it is clear from the meaning of myriads in the Aethiopic that 'N properly denotes, likeia'i, rtNM, a number bound together to majie a united whole: from t^jn 4. The use of 'N for a large round number Gen. 24, 60," Mic. 6, 7 appears to con- firm this derivation. — 3. properly a union of"-family members, therefore as- sociation of the members of a family or tribe, larger communities into which every race was divided, which com- munities again had their presidents or rulers (d"''tt5N'n, Q-iBlbs? Zbch.9,7; 12,5). (Synonymous terms are titiB'Can, titJM, asta.) Hence the word always denoted a smaller division of a tribe or race Is. 60,22 (Slbs), parallel ''13; Judges 6, 15 (■'sbN), parall. SN rT'l; Numb. 1, 16; 10," 4 36; Deut. 33, 17; Josh. 22, 21 30; 1 Sam. 10, 19; 23, 23. Metapho- rically: the seat of such a community or family group, civitas, Mic. 5, 1. — 4. n. p. in the enumeration of the cities in Benjamin's territory: Josh. 18, 28 •'Dia^riT ^ibKn Sblil. Since 5>b5: appears as a Benjaminite city 2 Sam. 21, 14, and ''Dl^i^fl-T':? Judges 19, 11 or simply ■lOW^ti Josh. 15, 8, poetically ipba and Wz"^, and it suits the connection very well if t|bN Zech. 9, 7 r\b^ 105 nbin^i^ should be read as i\hs and understood of the present city which belonged to Judah and Benjamin together, like Dia\ /«/■«« read Josh. 18, 28 ■'DW:lrt £]bNrt S^ik taking it for the name of a single city; he also states that in his time a quai'ter of Jerusalem with Zechariah's grave was stiU so named. C|b8< Aram, like the Hebrew tjbN 2 : tJumscmd Dan. 5, 1, also written t|bN 7, 10; pi. according to the K'ri ^sbi* 7,10, for which, however, the K'tib has lD"'Bbs«. S]ii|S: see Ti'hix. ObS^Sl n. p. m. 1 Chr. 14, 5, see ubs-'bN." V IV - v: pySbN CJEI effects noble achievement) n. p. »re.' i Chr. 8, 11, see bSB, inbys. V?i^ (Kal unused) intr. to cleave fast to something, Ax. jJI and ^jaJt to hang together, only in Fih. Y\i} to press firmly upon something, figuratively to press, urge strongly Jvoass 16,16, where the b stands with a compound sheva after losing dagesh forte. Comp. Syr. jX and ^ to constrain, and the Sam. yiN , of the same meaning, with b changed into ^. — The organic root is y'b'N and is also found in yh-n, TZJb, Ar. ijaJ to cohere firmly. ■jBSbN n.p. m. Ex. 6, 22, see IS^^'^bs. QlpDN m. no-withstanding, Prov. 30, 31 a Mng, whom there is no with- standing.; who marches along victorious, formed like ma-bN 12, 28 with bs not. •••IT - ' ^ r Others compare the Ar. |*j-fiJI people, and translate: with whom is the people (so LXX). nDpjNl CJEI is possessing) n. p. m. Ex. 6,' 24, the father of Samuel 1 Sam. 1, 1, who because he dwelt in Eamah in the district of d''S'iJi: or t]i5r ynN is also called --aii: SiSpbN 1 Chk. 6, 11; 12, 6; r it't : ••• 1 I I I 6, 8; 2 Chr. 28, 7. As to derivation, compare the proper names liT^Sjja Phe- nicianb?5''i|JN and b^n?)? (from ^N ni)?), the name of the Punic town Kav&rii.'q &c. aijPbsj n. p. of the birth place of the prophet Nahum; according to Jerome (on Nahum) the little village Elkesi (■'i|5)5b6«) in Galilee which he saw him- self, and of which ruins still existed in his day; according to Epiphanius (de vita prophet. 17) nsqav rov 'logdcivov tig Briya^aQ ix qjvl^g 2v(is(av; accord- ing to Cyril. Aleai. (on Nah. 1, 1) Elkese, xajit] 8s axnri ndvzcag nov tijg 'lovSaicov XmQKs; and according to Assemani (B. Or. 1, 525) that (jijUt two miles north of Mosul on the east bank of the Tigris, where the tomb of the prophet is still shewn. But we must decide in favour of a place in Palestine. Hence the gen- tile ■'iBpbiJ Nah. 1, 1. — With respect to the derivation, bij, as in the names of the towns ibinbij, N;?nbN, Ti|?nbN, Nb^biJ, may be only a shorter form of bij (which see) Qod, and iBjj, Ar. u«}i", may be taken in the sense of how, fig. power, might, like the Phen. proper name bNFiiB)?, yh- (Castulus, -la, -linus: Mor- celli, A&. Christ. 11. 357), therefore both together El's power. Besides lljp a form IB"')?, iS^i^ may have existed, and so in Jerome, Epiphanius and others Elkesi (■iTBpbij). A form riffl;?bN may have appeared also. The 1ilIJ''J? rising at the foot of Tab6r and flowing through the plain of Esdraelon may have been named from this word, as it is called in Ax. LftA=» /-§^i because its mouth is at Khaifa; and perhaps Elkosh might be looked for at this river. naJpbN see lIJpbN. ■'USppN see BjPbN. ^b^ (not used) see llJlbN. (- T ^ IT TbinbN n. p. of a town in the tribe of Simeon Josh. 19, 4, improperly 15, 30 counted to Judah, along with others; in 1 Chr. 4, 29 this name is simply lb in. — According to Berosus (p. 50) Mvlkia or Mvlijra (Phenician nbia = mbi?3, Aram. Nnnbi?:), the well- - ...... 7 IT :- I ' known deity of the male and female physical principle of generation among the Babylonians, was also called 0aldt&, {a (Hb5i), !Tlbi)2 in ■' ' lT-:r ^ ITT''' ITT I its vicinity. See ibin, mbia. . "' IT ' ITT I NjPJflbN (or T\'p~) n. p. of a Levitical city in the tribe of Dan Josh. 19, 44; 21, 23. iXpT\ (prop. N)5.n) is a name of the primitive deity Ja^ri in the Baby- lonian and Phenician cosmogony (jDa- mascius ed. Kopp. Frankfurt a. M. 1826. p. 258), sprung from the union of Tauthe (Nnirin = >iMn) and Moymis ('ji.ia = d^a), denoting the placing and making firm of the wild chaos (from ilpD, N]?Fi, rtin, Ar. AS3 Vin.). bN from bi«' is IT T ' ' V (■• appended as an epithet, as in the case of ibin and others. npnb>5 see NpnbN. IprijN ?J. p. of a town in the tribe of Judah Josh. 15, 59. "ppi is the cosmo- gony-deity Jdxog or -ov' mentioned in Damasaius (see N)?nbi<) along with Jdit] (N(?n), signifying firmness, establishment (froi 'jip.n, lifi). D^ (from dN i. e. tm eq[uivalent to dN i. e. das) only in proper names, as dk'^m, dN??l», dN'13 and perhaps in ti,';5!K. = dij-iaN,, d-mi« = dN-Tni!<, dNbn IT"-:, IT •-:' IT-.-: it i -:' it •• = diS~5''tl) m. people, community, comp. ."l^i?, Ar. jwl, especially d?. Hence perhaps the proper names ■'?:i«, 'jiUN. See dHN. ' ' r T D^( see dUM. r 1- T □ i< I. (with sm/. lasj, |;i53ij, i52N, dS'HiS; ^Z. n52is;) /■. mother, a) first of all, the corporeal one Ex. 2, 8 ; 2 Kings 4, 30, hence the expression^^aiSi-ia, -ns, spoken of uterine sisters on the mother's side Gen. 20, 12; Judges 8, 19, which stands poetically for corporeal generally Ps. 69, 9;_ Song of Sol. 1, 6. In the annals of reigns the queen-mother because of her influence on the reign as H.^V^Si is called OiJ, like the Sultana "Walida in the Tur- kish empire, IKings 2, 19 ; 14, 21 ; 15, 2 13; 22, 42; in this respect the grand- mother too is so called 15, 10. b) a stepmother Gen. 37, 10. c) grandmother 1 Kings 15, 10. d) the ancestress of a race and people generally, Ez. 16, 3 45; Is. 50, 1, or of all mankind Gen. 3, 20. In its manifold figurative applications d!J denotes 1. princess, i. e. a mother caring for the people Judges 5, 7. — 2. female possessor Job 17, 14; comp, iN 4. — 3. people, a collective people, a collective community. Is. 50, 1; Jee. 50, 12; Ez. 19, 2; Hos. 4, 5, hence the Targ. Nia''i3. — 4. mother-earth, the common mother of mankind. Job 1, 21, comp. Ben-Sira 40, 1. — 5. mother-city, metropolis, but only in the expression dN-i T'S* 2 Sam. 20, 19; elsewhere riMN stands for it in that sense, 8, 1. The Hebrew appears to have understood by it a city to which the surrounding ham- lets (niia) belonged; comp. Phenician dN, Ar. |»f, Malt, am, the same; also I^TjTTjQ, mater are used in the same sense. — 6. with 'rj'i^rt Ez. 21, 16 point, head, commencement, whence two or more ways go out, and therefore tantamount to IIJN^ 'rj'l^. (v. 25). It is translated by cross- way, comp. Ar. *(; however it may also be taken like the Arabic ^^jJoll ^i main street. Since Vm (perhaps originally: holder together) is a primitive word like aN, the verb -idea to bind together, with which it is manifestly connected, can only be derived from the noun in the first instance. With the noun the words for mother, nurse, in most languages may be compared. See tiUN. DN n. belonging to di)3N, see d^N. DJ^ (pronominal stem, almost always with Makkef following) prop, conjunct, condit., in conditional clauses, at first exactly like the Ar. ^ ( , Syr. ^f in form and signification. But ?rom the frequent and very various use of this particle in conditional, demonstrative, interrogative and optative sentences, a separation and classifying of its meaning into the following summary is necessary: 1. dS is a conditional conjunction in all sorts of conditional clauses, where a first po- D« 107 a« sition refers to a following one, and is our simple if, si, quodsi, Dbut. 8, 19; Judges 4, 8; 1 Kings 9, 6; iib DN if not Gen. 4, 7. With respect to time QN is sometimes joined to the perfect Gen. 18, 3; 47, 29; Lev. 25, 28; Num. 5,28; EsTH. 5, 8, sometimes to the im- •perfect Gen. 4, 7; Ex. 4, 8; Am. 6, 9; hut the perfect is also to be taken in the sense of the imperfect Gen. 43, 9 ; Ps. 7, 4; Job 11, 13; Is. 4, 4. It is hut seldom a sign of the actual past 1 Sam. 21, 5; Job 8, 4; 9, 16. In any case the imperf. or perf. with Van consec. .stands in the second member, in the continuation of the sentence, except where an actual past is to be expressed in the apodosis, Ps. 127, 1. From this signification the following branch off: a) the use of DN in putting forth pro- minently certain cases, e. g. as an apo- dosis Ps. 63, 7 . . , when I think of thee; in the protasis Job 7, 4 when I lay me down, then ... Ex. 1, 16; Jbr. 14, 18, where the perfect always stands and ON might he rendered as often as. Hence this DN appears especially in describing permanent states and re- peated acts. Gen. 38, 9; Num. 21, 9, and might even be translated always when. More rarely does i3 stand in place of it. Judges 2, 18, or lujs Dbut. 11, 27, or DN is in the clause describing the case in such a way that no apodosis follows Job 17, 13, where it remains whoUy untranslated, b) its use in pre- supposing almost impossible cases, where tiN with the imperfect following might be rendered if .. . should, so should, or would... also, Am. 9, 2-4; Ob. 4; Is. 10, 22; Ps. 50, 12; 139, 8; Job 34, 14. c) the connexion of DN in this signi- fication with the participle Judges 9, 15; 11, 9; and therefore it stands be- side 125;' or I'^iS with a suffix, Gen. 24, 49; Ex. 8, 17';' Judges 6, 36; ISam. 19, 11, where the participle is to he taken as a futurum instans; more rarely with the infinitive and a suffix Job 9, 27, which may be resolved into the parti- ciple, d) In formulas of asseveration and swearing, where the second clause in which one binds himself is wanting as being ohvious of itself, DN appears not only to include the sense of cer- tainly, certe, omnino, hut also the idea of denial, e. g. Gen. 26, 29 certainly thou wilt do us no hurt, but properly: if thou wilt do us hurt, then . . .; 1 Sam. 3, 14; 2 Sam. 11, 11; 1 Kings 1, 51; always joined to the imperfect, seldom to the perfect Jee. 15, 11. is^ DN may be translated in this case certainly, Numb. 14, 35 : certainly I will do this, prop, if I don't do this, then ...; Josh. 14, 9; 1 Kings 20, 23 ; Job 1, 11. It is to be taken in the same way, when expres- sions of confirmation by oath, dissua- sion &c. precede. Song op Sol. 2,7; Neh. 13, 25; also where the connexion with an oath is less apparent Judges 5, 8; 2 Kings 3, 14; Is. 22, 14; Peov. 27, 24. In this sense dNln is equivalent to ia (LXX BaXaiim) proper name of a city. Song op Sol. 8, 11, perhaps in Samaria, comp. Judith 8, 3 Bsla/Mjv. In the word ^iaJl (constr. ■jiaii.), occurring in the phrases liart d^'iiia and iis lian , EzeMel (Ez. 30, 10 15) may have all the more readily alluded to the Egyptian ']iBS« , because the name in fuU is liaiS! )S5. See ^iart. — 3. {work- master, maker) n. p. m. 1 Kjngs 22, 26 ; 2 Kings 21,18-26; Nbh. 7, 59, for which occurs in Eze. 2, 57 "tais (which see). The personal proper name was probably used after the epithet of Baal, if "jiaN and las were not formed from DN. — ^ I" " IT 4. n. p. of an Egyptian (as also of an Aethiopic and Libyan) supreme deity, who was chiefly worshipped at Thebes, Jbe. 46, 25 , hence ']'iaN i<5 Nah. 3, 8 stands for a name of Thebes (see t«i). The Greeks and Eomans compare this 'Jmon QAfifiovv) with Zeus (Herod. 2, 42; Diod. 1, 13). As of Egyptian origin 'ij is said by Jablonsky to be contracted from the Coptic a.-jwo-ir-oeiit light-giving into aLMO-s-n, which again in hieroglyphic inscriptions was written a^jun, and that connected with pn means Am^n-sun i. e. sun-god. That 'Jmon reaUy represented this aspect of nature-power is apparent from the fact that the hieroglyphie de- signation is. a sun -pillar, that he is figured with a ram's head and coincides with the Baal of the Phenicians. Others derive 'N from the Coptic a^Moiti, Moni to nourish, or from mots-k, mkh to persevere, remain firm &c. But all these and similar derivations, so far as the Semitic root can be referred thereto, shew that the name of the Egyptian deity may have been adopted from Semitism, especially ])t2^ 111 bm as the same -word appears in Phenioian also as an epithet of Baal. The form "liJpN is only a North-Pa- lestinian and Phenioian orthography for ■jHN, and as many mss. and interpret- ers read yatu for the latter, the former seems likewise to have been pronounced ^Jmmon, especially if one compares the Phenician. The Phenician ']'i)3N appears as an epithet of ']n''t?"'b?3 (hence the name of a Phenician cape ^Ammon-Baal- Iton, Strah. 17, 3) just as the word is here applied to the hypostatised and per- sonified aoqsia. Even the Egyptian ')iaN was considered to be without beginning (Pint, de Is. 31); according to Manetho (Plut." 1. c. 9) he was the concealed one; according to Jamblichus (de myst. 8, 3; comp. Euseb. Pr. Ev. 11, 7) he was called the world-creating SrjjiiovQyo? and arti- ficer, and therefore there is said of him what in Peov. 8, 12 is spoken of HUiiri, with which the explanation of "jiUNin theMidrash (1. c.) by ysSM, M&3M agrees. The meaning of pillar was also thought of, as is given under no. 4. lijQN n. only Jek. 52, 15 written for lian.' ' D'^iiaN see 'JUN. flDTOX (with suff. ■'nsiBsj., ■insag, pi. niSIHN; formed from ■])?«) f. firmness, Ex. 17, 12 and his hands were firmness i. e. firm; security, Is. 33, 6 and there shall be security of thy times i. e. thy times will be secure; fidelity, opposed to ■l^lB Peov. 12, 17 22; calmness, tran- guillity, opposed to haste in order to get gain 28, 20 comp. 20, 6; honesty, up- rightness Jee. 5, 1; Ps. 37, 3; 119, 30; goodness 119, 75 as an adverbial accu- sative i. e. graciously; veracity 89, 25; Dbut. 32,4; favour Ps. 36, 6; fulfilment of a given promise 89,2; confidence 89,3; conscientiousness 2 Kings 12, 16; 2 Chr. 34, 12; )T2IA 'N Is. 25, 1 highly faithful, prop, an adverbial accusat. All these significations proceed from the funda- mental one in ']?3it to he firm, confident. 'N in Scripture spoken of God Dbut. 34, 4, of men Hab. 2, 4 never occurs in the sense oi faith, Ttiang, which it did not take till the latest period of the language. 1^153 Si (valiant, strong) n. p. m. father of the prophet Isaiah, Is. 1, 1 ; 2 Kings 19, 2 20; 20, 1. For the explanation of the name comp. niauN, ''itMN. ^'aa n.p. m. EzE. 2, 57, for which )'\'a» stands in Neh. 7, 59; probably it is a shorter form for ']iMN! (= )V2!f), which also lies at the basis of i'iS'^MNi.; yet liJnN and "iJii* may also be derived here from dK (which see). D'^MN! see b^N. ']iD''5pN n. p. m. for lilMiS 2 Sam. 13, 20, which attested by the Targ. Kimdhi declares to be a diminutive form, as it is also in the Arabic; but as this form is without example in Hebrew, and the Septuagint wants it, we may regard it as developed accidentally out of ')''HN yaifi (alsofMN; after the form p'l'lia) adj. m. firm, spoken of a covenant 2 Sam. 15, 12; strong Job 9, 19; powerful Is. 28, 2; with nb Nah. 2, 2; Job 9, 4; or sb Am. 2, 16 strong in power or courage i. e. powerful or bold. T^5Qi< m. prop, the extended, the pro- jecting, hence 1. summit, top of a tree Is. 17, 6 ; — 2. summit of a mountain, and generally a mountain-castle, tower, 17, 9 : the desolation of the forest and of the moun- tain-top i. e. of the forests and mountain- castles, which they (the mountaineers, "''^53^t) Aaue left because of Israel; a genuine historical allusion. See ilttN and lat*. r v: r T !?DX intr. to fade, become loose, to l" T languish, especially spoken of plants; then like nbs and t]bS5 to long for a thing, to hope. Ax. Juol. In Kal only the part. pass. fern. Ez. 16, 30 in TXa 'rjnSi'b tibaN: how has thine heaH languished (with lust) ! But already the LXX read Ijnsb T^v &vyazs'ga aov, and it might also be translated: what hope is there of thy daughter! i. e. what is there to expect from the immoral mother in relation to the daughter and young family? !^b53». would thus be a noun, after the form niiM, rtsiba. IT : ' IT : n^D« 112 P^ Pul. bb53N, part. bb?:N, tut in Ps. 6, 3 VbMN, for 'NM, only poetically 1. to fade, languish, wither, applied to plants and fields Is. 16, 8; 24, 7; Nah. 1, 4; Jo. 1,12; to pine, to ie withered, with sorrow, applied to menPs. 6, 3 ('52N outof'?3¥()?). — 2. to mourn, to be sorrowful, dejected, spoken of persons ISam. 2, 5; Jee. 15, 9; Hos. 4, 3; figuratively to go to ruin, applied to the earth &c. Is. 33, 9 ; Jek. 14, 2; Lament. 2, 8. On the root comp. baij, bj?5 &c.; the organic root is here bW"N, which is also found in ba"p. nbaii f. in Ez. 16, 30 see bMN. IT \ -: ' ^ bbpi* (only pi. Q''!?") adj. m. weak, decaying, poor Neh. 3, 34. The form is one that has arisen from bMN redupli- cated, and S has continued firm from the original intransitiye conception. DDi^ (not used) tr. to unite, bind to- gether. This idea of unitedness is im- plied in DJJ (stem- or family-uniting one, i. e. mother) which is probably primitive. Another formation from the stem DN is !i-MN, expressing the idea of belonging together, being united, whence liWiS , she belonging to the family and connected with it, as SntiB'ttS from nsffl. Then DN ' IT : " r T r like D5> denotes to be united in one, from the' fact of all the individual mem- bers of a people belonging together. Comp. moreover tJiS, Qlsb and d^. The j: I" ' I- 1 I- Arab. •I has exactly the same meaning. See too !173N, fiN, rtMN, nas and the IT - ' I ' IT \ ' IT T proper name dttN. D138 (gathering-place) n. p. of a city in the tribe of Judah Josh. 15, 26 , in the vicinity of Mlbia. •' ITT 1 V2^ I. trans. 1. (not used) to fasten, to make fast or strong (see Nif.), spoken of a house: to build; then: to act the ar- chitect, to bring something together, to mnke; hence pN (which see) and 'jiUN. From the signification to make firm follows that of to support, prop; hence ripMN 1. — 2. Figuratively to maintain, foster, bring up, properly to support, strengthen, whence the participle ']1^JA Esth. 2, 7 ; substantively Num. H, 12; 2 Kings 10, 1 5; Is. 49, 23 hringer up, fosterer, guar- dian, naidaywyog, and fern. riSMN 2 Sam. 4, 4 ; Etjth 4, 1 6 ; paH.pass. Tim Lament. 4,5 brought up, 5>bi-n ''b^m scarlet robes. In this signification that of nourishing may have been implied also, as is seen from the Ax. riXjo which is identical with the root in IM-Ni ; but the meaning "to carry" is not perceptible; comp.'^ittO, bsbS), 1?D. — 3. Figuratively: to malee something fast, firm, to hang faithfully upon something, Ar. ^yi\; hence part, pass. ■pi. D''JJ1»N Ps. 12, 2; 31, 24 the faithful, firm, matoi, prop, the supported^ comp. 'TjTOD Is. 26, 3. Derivatives ']»« (pi. d^aiMN), tiiwN, 1MN, las, WMN,, diMN, dials, nast, fij^N 1, and the proper names "jlSBN, i'l^a?., '"'FiMN.. — 4. (not used) to flow continuous, constant, applied to a river, also in ']!T'N connected with fast, firm. Hence the proper name iisaN 2. "Nif. lat?.?. (/"«• TCI?:.) 1- to *« fastened, supported, or to be firm; applied to a house, lasj?. n:^ 1 Sam. 2, 35; 25, 28; 1 Kings 11, 38 a firm house, figuratively an unbroken line of posterity; "lagS di)?a Is. 22, 23 25 firm place. — 2. to be sup- ported, fostered Is. 60, 4, where the dagesh is omitted in !l5aNri as in t^sa^Pi (EuTH 1, 13). — 3. to he ti-ue, reliable, faithful, e. g. spoken of God Is. 49, 7, of men Gen. 42, 20; 1 Kings 8, 26 ; 2 Che. 1, 9, of a messenger Peov. 25, 13, of a witness Jee. 42, 5, of a prophet or priest ISam. 2, 35; 3,20, particularly of fidelity and loyalty to God and his covenant, with ns ("nij) Psalm 78, 8 37 ; Is. 1, 21. tlT^ )'q»i one honest or faiih- ful in spmrPEOV.'il, 13; 27, 6: faithful (i. e. well-meant) are the wounds of a friend; thence generally: true PSaMiM 111, 7. ,With a play upon the word and idea Is. 7, 9: to prove oneself. — 4. to he durable, lasting, e. g. spoken of the uninterrupted flowing of water Is. 33, 16; Jer. 15, 18, opposed to dJ^N; of lasting diseases Deut. 28, 59 , ' of p^ 113 njD« durable promises Is. 55, 3, of abiding covenants Ps. 89, 29, just as many forms of this stem in Syriac have the same signification. Pih. 'J/3N only in the Sam. cod. of the Pentat 'for Hi/U Ex. 4, 1 5 8 9; 14, 31; 19, 9; Num. 14, 11; Deut. 1, 32; 28, 66 without altering the signification of the Hifil. Sif. VMNfi (fut. VMNl, ap. ipNl) 1. to hold fast by a thing, with a, e. g. by God liS. 7, 9: if ye do not 'hold fast; 28, 16: whoever holds fast (by Grod), shall not flee; to support oneself upon something, hence to trust, with a in any thing, like the Ar. (Tv^t with i«j Gen. 15, 6; Job 4, 18; Deut. 28, 66: and thou wilt have no trust in thy life i. e. thou wilt be tired of thy life; to give faith (trust) to a person or thing, with b Gen. 45, 26; Peov. 14, 15; more rarely with i3 following Ex. 4, 5, or with the infinitive andb Ps. 27, 13, or with- out b Job 15, 22, where one might trans- late "it hope. Only once does 'Nil stand with the accusat. in the sense to count safe Judges 11, 20: he did not count it safe for Israel to pass through. — 2. Only in Job 39, 24 in the sense to make a pause, to stand still, spoken of the horse (comp. Virg. Georg. 3, 83), going back to )'i2St in the signification to stand firm, as also the Targ. and Peshito em- ploy 'N. The^ stem 'JMN, whose first significa- tion corresponds to the Ar. |jU), is also -* »f in the Ar. /Twof and /j^i and in some senses in the Syr. ^1, Targ. 'JMN; but the organic root is IM'N, such as is stiU found in the Mediterranean. Ijj n. only in Hif. V^^^ for ^M'^rt Is. 30, 21, denom. from pa; which see. 15QN {part. pass, oi Af. \'a''ira) Aram. tantamount to the Hebr. IMJS I.; but in use only in Af. yq'^'n (Targ. V'j?"'??) ^J^- -.^n, Ar. (Tw^), like the Hebr. V'PSvJ construed with a Dan. 2, 45 ; 6, 5 24. — The n, in this very word in the dialects, also appears to have been partly re- garded as belonging to the stem. See my system of the Aramaean idioms (Lehrgeb. der aram. Idiome I. 146 &c.). ■J^QN (after the form DSn) m. 1. worh- man, artificer, opifex, artifex Song op Sol. 7, 2; it may be derived from ')73N 1. very well. But this word is in Aramaean ■jMIIS and stands for -^^ and aian, Syr. I^l^o), so that Kimchi and Ibn Koreish read 1138 (out of IMNM = T^NM). It seems to be formed from Pu. denoting properly practised, fit. — 2. Adj. masc. as a basis for the following iiSaN. — 3. Equivalent to liMN in the proper name liSMN de- rived from it. Vl2^ adj. m. 1. sure, true, firm, like the At. jjjyot, Syr. jXiio]. Substan- tively: fidelity, '\-q'& iJilsN Is. 65, 16 the God of faithfulness i. e. who keeps fideli- ty. Hence adverbially: truly, certainly, either at the beginning of a discourse Jek. 28, 6, or especially as a confirma- tipn at the end of sayings and poems, single or double Num. 5, 22; Deut. 27, 15 &c.; Neh. 5, 13; Ps. 41, 14; 72, 19; 89, 53. Erom this )12» the Hebrew riMN from FiSMN = njMN is to be derived, Phe- nician 'ri3MN, e. g. ''^I^ ^?.5S '^'^ " ^S"' of truth shall be (Poen.'l, 9). — 2. As a ground-form to the proper name ']iai?3N., in the sense of "lUN 3. yDiH m. confidence, faithfulness Is. 25, 1; comp. Phenician ^MN fiirmness (Kit. 1, 2). Derivatives nWN, tjMN, Dia^. naiDN (see IBN 2) /. i. the established, determined, therefore covenant Neh. 10, 1, Ar. JuLJol; decree or statute 11, 23, parallel '^btert ri^tB. — 2. proper name of a ridge' of Antilibanus (Talm. lisas) Song of Sol. 4, 8, from which comes the proper name of a river that flows with IB'iS (now Awag) through Damascus 2 Sings 5, 12 K'ri, but for which the K'tib has nSSN (which see); the Targ. un- derstands also in Song op Sol. by T"}^^. the'N IrtS; and it has been conjecturally identified with the modem (^i^j^- The name is to be taken from ^aN! in signi- 8 njDi^ 114 P« flcatiou 4, if Antilibanus received .its name from the river. nD^N 1./. bringing up, tutelage'E&TB. 2, 20, 'from laN 2. — 2. fern, from lai} <»T«, n;i??8j, li:N, imnm; see also the proper names, Mf. 'iMNa (fut. IMNp., pause I;:-, be- 1 fore a monosyllabic word 'lMi«_';) 1. to be said, told. Josh. 2, 2; Jer. 7, 32; to be revealed, communicated Dan. 8, 26 ; with b or bi} of the person Numb. 23, 23; Ez. 13, 12. Often IMn;; stands imper- sonally: it is said, dicitur, diciint, par- ticularly in quoting popular sayings Gen. 10, 9; 22, 14; Num. 21, 14. — 2. to be named, with b of the person Is. 4, 3; 19,18; 61, 6; '62, 4; Hos. 2,1. Hif. T'MNJi to make say, to promise, with the accusative of the person to whom one promises, Deut. 26, 17: thou hast promised God this day &c., and v. 18 : and God has promised thee this day &c., as Ibn Esra and Jehuda ha-Lewi have rightly explained. The interpretation of the Hifll by to raise (after meaning 1 of Kal) given by Ibn G'andch, Kimchi and Parchon, or to choose used by the LXX and Vnlg., is less suitable and not so weU founded. Hithp. 'n^snri only in Ps. 94, 4: to lift up oneself,' to boast, brag {so Kimchi, Ibn "Esra and others); but it may be taken in the signification to conduct one- self in a commanding way or imperious- ly, from 1MN 9. Comp. Ar. P»lj'. Respecting the original meaning of the stem 1MN and its organic root the most necessary information has been already given in adducing the numerous senses; and therefore I shall only men- tion in addition, that this verb occurs in all Semitic dialects. Comp. the Phe- nician a t3?S IMS (Poen. 2, 56) to speak friendliness (in a friendly way) of one. Comp. especially IM-J IT. witii its nu- merous derivatives, and fi'iM IV. On ITT another direction of the original con- ception see under Aram. THN. laS. (pause ^53N ; 3 fem. iTia^ from np^aN ; ipers. npMN ■,part.^'as. , ply'^yns ; inf.''ni!»n andlaa EzR. 5, il; fut. imn;.) Jram. 1. to say, with b of the person Dan. 2, 25 and accusative of the thing 7, 1, to communicate a thing orally or in writing 7, 1, used as in Hebrew by way of introducing what is said, 2, 8 26; 6, 13. Part. pi. T'lm 3, 4 is used impersonally like the Hebr. Nif., Syr. 1D« 117 n^D^^ ^r^j . Hence IMNM. — 2. to command, Dan. 2, 46 ; 3, 13. See other meanings of the stem under IWN and Hebr. las. r • r T "lUN (constr. lasO see IViniH. 15QN (with suff. 'i'lJjN; pZ. tJ"''lMS«, c. ■"■laN) OT. 1. iop, of a tree, only in Gen. 49,' 21 1B«5-'''nat« tops of beauty i. e. beautiful fops, as the LXX translates. — 2. word, discourse, utterance (allied in sense to li'i), but only poetically. Numb. 24, 4, usually connected with bN ; 1i^;i Job 6, 25; iis 8, 2; ns^a Pkov. 1,^2 ; n?;i 23,12; 'n)?i25 Is. 32, 7; hmn PBOT.22J21; D^b 16','24&c.; only once in prose Josh. 24, 27. In this sense 'N may be applied as variously as the verb, just according to the context, and even the meaning poetry may be adopted occasionally. — 3. command. Job 20, 29. — In signification the word is equivalent to IMS, as i>Mt;5 equivalent to3»ai^, and the forms taken from it in the first in- stance are iTiMN , tTiMN and the proper name ''"fnti. "' IHN '(def. tn'yisif in the Targ.; pi. I'^'nMN) Aram. m. lamb, young sheep, pro- perly: wool-bearer, wooUy, Ezr. 6, 9 17; 7,17, comp. Targ. iaiJ!j=113ij! andK'n^N for Hebrew ntoas, to^js, Syr.l^iof, Ar. j^l lamb, Phenician Tai* (Mass. 9). It might be derived from IMN in the sense of to jut out, erigere, eminere, as aU words denoting hairs, bristles, proceed from verbs signifying "to stick out". The Aram. la-S, whence IMS wool, has a similar meaning, and the Hebrew 'natt might also be cognate in root. See la5> and laS. Considering, however, that lajj denotes the young of sheep, a lamb, it seems more appropriate to derive it from laN in the sense of to spring forth, sprout,' then to bear, spoken of sheep, as the Ar. ^f means to bring forth numerous young ; from which again the meaning to speak may be taken, since "sprechen" in the Germanic tongues pro- perly means spriessen, sprossen, i. e. to sprout. I^K (jprqjecting forth, prominent i. e. high, viz. Jah is) 1. n. p. m. Jbe. 20, 1. — 2. (hill-place) proper name of a place, mentioned beside nba bn &c. Ezb. 2, 59. Tak m. 1. equivalent to las (poet.) word, discourse, Ps. 19, 4, and then like 'na'5 thing, res, aliquid. Job 22,28 ; promise Ps. 77, 9, comp. Ijan 56, 5 ; eulogy 19, 3, comp. D'l'pa'l V. 4.^; "^aU proceeding from the original signification wor^y?i< (from'naN; constr. JTiaiJ; pi. ninaN, constr. nilMN) /. like "iaN in significations 2 and 3, and also used only poetically Gbn.4,23 ; Deut. 32, 2 &c. The use of 'nas, however, is more frequent, niaS (from laN, like !T1T5> from IT : V ^ ■•■ 1" ' IT : V its) /. same as MiaN Lament. 2, 17. '^^^a (projecting, from 'naN 1) n. p. m. Nbh. 3, 2 ; 1 Chr. 9, 4; comp. TaN. ''"IHX (from 'ifas) noun gent. m. Amo- rite, i. e. mountaineer, name of one of the greatest and most important of the races of the Canaanite or Phenician people, who dwelt almost wholly in the interior of Palestine at the time of the conquest of "Canaan by the Israelites, and there- fore standing for Canaan generally. Gen. 48, 22; Deut. 1,20. The Phenician Amorite race first settled on the other side of Jordan, which is hence called ■''ibiitn yi!^ Judges 10, 8, where they founded two kingdoms, a southern one with the metropolis liafflrt 11, 22, Num. 21, 13 34, and a northern one with the metropolis '^5>'n.'lN 21, 33. They after- wards became powerful on this side of Jordan also. The great importance of the tribe and its spreading over aU Palestine led to the designation of the collective pre -Israelite inhabitants as Amorites Gen. 15, 16 ; 2 Sam. 21, 2 ; Am. 2, 9. See laiN. »T'*l5aX (Jah is promiser) n. p. m. innD^ 118 I« IChr.5,33 37; Neh.10,4; 11,4; Ezk. 10, 42; Zef. 1, 1. Sometimes IrtilMN stands for it. The form 'n?3N. is construct from IMN (promiser). IT T ^-^ ' W'l'Qtt (the same) n. p. m. 2 Chr. 19,llVhut in 31,15 and IChk.24,23 it stands for tT^'naN. IT : - -: pSiaS; n. p. of a king of 'iSiia at the time of Abraham, GrBN. 14,1 9. Since Semites dwelt in Shin'ar according to the ethnographical table, the etymology of the name must be sought in Semitism. We may regard it as compounded of DN (like Qn) which is often met with in proper names (see dN), and of boi the name of the Aramaean Saturn, Syr. <^ J , and so it is similar to the Hebrew illli'^^y, r- r-j' bN"'53^; h- is only a termination like ^. tJ/Di^ (not used) intr. eq^uivalent to 115m (fflIM) to give way, to disappear, to cease, to recede; hence IISmn. — Like many other stems in NS , IIJMN is also a farther ' r T development of the organic root in hSM'N which is found in laa (fflTO); the same stem seems to be in the Ar. u«jo| yester- day. Neither the root nor the stem ap- pears in use in the other dialects as the idea of a verb. aJHN m. prop, the disappeared, the past, from ffl)3Ni , hence 1. yesterday, Job 30,3: iiNillJ 'N the yesterday of desolation i. e. the long desolate places ; but inter- preters and versions take it here in the sense of night, comparing it with the Aramaean NUaN darkness. As an adverb yesterday, already, long past, 2 Kings 9, 26, as bw^lN , comp. Is. 30, 33. — 2. spe- cially: the closed, vanished, conseq. the last, preceding night, Gen. 19, 24; 31, 29 a of 42. The Arab. ^jujo\ yesterday, and the verb Lamjo to make at even, as a deri- vative from ijujo\, presuppose the Hebr. signification. rpN (contracted from nDMN = npais.; with sujf. iriMN., |!jn»N.) f. prop, firmness, stability, from '])5N I., hence 1. spoken of time: continuance, duration, 'Nl Bib 113 ' ' VIIV I T Is. 39, 8 like riMN dibiB Jee. 14, 13 en- during, steadfast peace. — 2. confidence, security, certainty, rightness, Detjt. 13, 15; Josh. 2, 12; 2 Sam. 7, 28; Neh. 9, 33; Jee. 42, 5. — 3. fidelity i. e. that quality which keeps the word or pro- mise given Ps. 30, 10; 45, 5; 54, 7; 57,11, and even fulfils words of threaten- ing, represented as a peculiar virtue in God, kings, men, and usually joined with IDp Gen. 24, 49; Ps.25,10; Peov. 20, 28." 'kence God is caUed % bN Ps. 31, 6, or 'N •'Si'bN 2 Che. 15, 3. —'I in- tegrity, llamelessness , honesty, opposite to 5>«3p. Judges 9, 16; Neh. 7, 2; Ezek. 18, 9, hence friendship Esth. 9,30; un- selfishness ExoD. 18, 21. — 5. truth, as opposed to lying Gen. 42, 16; veracity Peov. 22, 21, particularly in relation to religious truth and the true announce- ment of the future Ps. 25, 5; Dan. 8, 12; 9, 13. Hence it is frequently con- nected with the word of God Ps. 119, 142, with prophecies Jee. 26, 15 &c. See nnriBS (with suff. inrirint?, pi. e. rrirrri") f. corn-sack, LXX fidQamog Gen. 42, 27; 43, 12. See nna, comp. nriBUa. from tISU. r T '^S13N (from rias; veracious) n. p. m. 2'Kings 14,25; JoN.1,1. The Arab, has the abridged form i-a^; and the proper name MaT&aiog, Syr. v»iio (Matth. 10,3), is perhaps ''na = ipa, if it be not abbreviated from tTn73 = STTina. IT ■ - IT : • - ■^an^N (from )ni^ =Hebr. inb, with N prosthetic) Aram. adj. f. strong, power- ful, prop, well-hipped (comp. delumbis, delumbatus) Dan. 7,7, of which the masc. is inas, comp. '^'itiN from the masc. 'itilN 2, 39, where the feminine is also formed merely by i- = n^-;. See ina and Aramaean "jna. 1 4^ (pronominal stem contracted from ')';») adv. interrog. prop, where? hence in the Targ. for '^N , but in Hebr. whither ? 1 Sam. 10, 14, in which signification it stands for f15N (•]}« with Tl- of motion). ■JS'IS until when I how long? quousque? 1« 119 nj^5 Job 8, 2; IN a (K'tib) whence'^ 2 Kings 5, 25, for I^NU. The contraction of the vowels ai between two consonants into A is frec[uent in Hebrew, e. g. 'jn'i from Vm, il55> from i»"'3>. See nsN, MN. I'jT ' IT T tit' viT 1^5 (pronominal stem) see ''-36?., rms &c. IT - ijt ahility see lis. ?K Heliopolis see ']iij{. t^Jli^ (pronominal stem contracted from N5"nN, written also ?15N) interjec- tion: oh now! I pray, obsecro, quaeso, standing at the beginning of the sen- tence where Ni cannot usually be put. It either follows the imperative Gen. 50, 17 ; Ps. 118, 25 ; llSiJ 2 Kings 20, 3 ; Is. 38, 3; Ps. 116, 4, oTthe future apo- copate Nbh. 1, 5 11, or it stands en- tirely as an exclamation without refer- ence ExoD. 32, 31 ; Dan. 9, 4; nSN Jon. 1, 14; 4, 2; Psalm 116, 16. Insurgent entreaties it can even follow N3. — The IT little word of entreaty N3, which also appears by itself, and the exclamation flit as a collateral form of Mrt, make IT ^ . '^ the composition and meaning clear; but the Ni is already somewhat obliterated by the orthography fi3N;andwheni«5or !12 was uttered less enclitically n5, NSN and rrSN were accented; or two ac- ITT (TT ' cents were given, NSiS. (^Ji^ (or !l5N ; pronominal stem) Aram. person, pronoun, equivalent to Hebrew ■liN. /,Dan. 2, 8 23; 3, 25; 4, 6; 7, 15. This pronominal stem is in Syr. Ml , Zab. N5N , Samar. !iiN and N5N , Arab, ut, Aethiopic ana, Amhar. enl. Malt, yn, yna, ynae &c. For its linguistic derivation see ■'5N.. NDi< (not used) Aram, equivalent to rtSNiI. in Hebrew. Hence isa which see. IT T 'it D4^_ (Aram.) belonging to na5^5 see as." I" flJ^ (pronominal stem, once fiSN; from ']N with T\- of motion) oAv. interrog. 1. whither'? in pure double questions ^^5^^ . . . rtjt'n-'ij whence ? ... and whither Gen. 16, 8,'or I^Na*! . . . Mii* whither ?... and whence ? Judges 19, 17, or ■'Mb . . . MiNJ to whom ?... and whither ? Gen' 32, 18. But also in the simple question whither ? 2 Sam. 2, 1 ; 2 Kings 6,6; Zech. 2,6; 5, 10; Ezek.21,21; or InSN alone, repeated, Song op Sol. 6, 1, written in the second member tisis Psalm 139, 7. Agreeably to the nature of interrogative particles whither? sometimes including a negative may be resolved into nowhere, Gen. 37, 30 ; Deut. 1, 28 ; 2 Sam. 13, 13. — 2. With suppression of the interroga- tive-power, thither, hither, after ST^ lib Josh. 2, 5; Neh. 2, 16, but without re- nouncing it entirely. Here belongs also the artificial compound which originated in the second period of the language rt5i«1 rt3N 1 Kings 2, 36 42; 2 Kings 5, ITT : ^ VIT ' ' ' 25 hither and hither i. e. any whither; in itiix the e at the end of the word has been resolved out of a in consequence of the coincidence of too many a's, comp. ^72 for fro. — 3. With suppres- sion of the idea of motion, where ? Euth 2, 19; Is. 10, 3. — 4. Of time: when? hence imiS'TS till when? how long? Ex. 16, 25 ; Ps. 13, 2 ; Job 18, 2 ; but )S also stands for it. naN see iSSN and WN. 'it TIT TIT n^a see WN 2. ••■IT TIT nJN I. (only in 3 plur. ISNI, which, IT T \ "f -t it:' ' however, already TJra Koreish reads ISiSi) intr. synonymous with ■)« (I^n) to com- plain, lament, mourn. Is. 3, 26; 19, 8. Hence tT'3N , JTiiNn, and see the proper name By^Si)!. IT • -: The organic root, if our textual read- ing be right, is ii-SJS as a farther de- velopment of "jN, with the fundamental signification "respirare". Hence it is con- nected with 'JN I. (see ')lis) and yi (which see) where the comparison also is given. But the Ar. wf to groan, sigh, can only be compared with tiiNi, Arab. ^f. nJi^ n. (not used) intr. properly equi- valent to n53> n., rtsn and 5>S3, Aram. ITT ' ITT |-T ' nji^ 120 m2i< N5N.: to be bent, hence to be bellied, spoken of vessels whicli are able to hold some- thing on account of their bent or bellied shape (see ''bs). That the designation of ship proceedes from this idea may be seen from the choice of ib3 Is. 18, 2, from rti'^SD, and the Greek •^avXoe and vavlog &c.' Hence ■'iN, fl^SIS and rt'iiiS K'tib. "- ""' nJt^ m. (Kal unused) intr. to be a IT T ^ convenient, suitable, proper time, like the Ar. ^t, then: opportunum esse, to come " •' up exactly to, to suit exactly (comp. (^we accidit, obvenit); hence !i3Nh. Figura- tively to lie with, prop, coire, to fit to something; hence Wsn, if this meaning is not rather to be referred to !iiS« I. in ITT the original signification "respirare", so that the idea of the verb may be taken as prop, to pant, snort, to be hot. Pih. ti5N (by accident or adaptation) to cause to meet, to join something, hence to bring on, to cause Ex. 21, 13, joined with T^b. it: Puh. fl5N to be brought on, which may also be paraphrased by to happen, fall out, to befal &c. with b of the person Peov. 12, 21 or bij Ps.'91, 10 and the accusative of the thing that is brought on. Eithp. tiSNnrt prop, to allow to happen to oneself, hence to seek occasion (comp. the noun rtJNin occasion) 2 Kjngs 5, 7 with b of a person, in order to injure. Prom this signification of nSN some have derived riN ("riN) as if it were contracted from npN; but see riN (with suffix iriN) and niii. I •-' l-T WN see N5N. IT—. IT-: IJt^t (pronominal stem) person, pro- noun: we, only in Jbr.42, 6 K'tib (usual in the Mishna) for which the K'ri reads the usual linJN. The organic root may be W"N , the radically cognate Sanskrit nau, Greek ym, Lat. no-s corresponding to it, being found. Besides, this pro- nominal stem appears so in the suffias as also radical. But a more probable origin is 5i«, Coptic a.it or n (see ■'iNJ, to which is added the plural termina- tion f| (comp. !:bN,, rtbN). See wriiN.. V\^^ (pronominal stem) Aram. pers. pron. m. they, ii, isti Dan. 2, 44, else- where i'art and in the Targ. I^SiSl, Syr. ^Bi, ^1, Sam. ']15N. It originated from ■Jlil (out oihu-un) plur. of llrr, by prefix- ing the pronom. stem "ii* (as occurs in ■i-iN , ""S-JN &c.) and the He is absorbed I* -;' !• IT ^ by the dagesh (see my Lebrgeb. der Aram. Idiome I. p. 238). The feminine form is ']''3N they, eae, istae Dan. 7, 17, which arose out of 'jilTfJiS!. On the origi- nal forms y\'r\, lin m., I^'rt, l^rt /. (comp, •Jin, T'ri and vn'; ^i? a!nd ^i, is, vp) see Nlti. The Punic ynnoaho (Poen. 1, 3 7) is Mb iSrt here, and is not connected with 'JMN. ffliDN (from tlJSi*, as the Aramaean still is; plur.'a'''^i^_, constr. ''1B3N, from ^l55»t) m. 1. a poetical expression for mrni, collectively spoken of the human race Dbut. 32, 26; Job 7, 17; 9, 2; Ps. 8, 5; Is. 56, 2. It is very seldom taken like TiS'^N for a single definite individual, Ps. 55, 14; Job 5, 17. Some- times there is poetically iBiStifja Ps. 144, 3, as is done in the case of DIN ' ' IT T collective; the parallel is filN")^ Ps. 8, 5, and like ti"')!?, 'N is likewise con- trasted with God Job 4, 17; 25, 4; 33, 12. Hence the word before us denotes mortal, decaying man 25,6; Ps. 8, 5, particularly low-minded, corrupt man Ps. 9, 20 21; 56, 2; 66, 12, as ffl'^N also is so used, without this signification being necessarily involved in the funda- mental conception, and without its being actually there, comp. Ps. 8, 6. Else- where 'N also appears in the sense of common men, the people, e. g. IBiSN E3'i]'!35 Is. 8,1 with the people's stylus i. e. in a character that all may read, comp. Hab. 2, 2 for the thing itself; and for the manner of expression, Kara av&qanov Galat. 3, 15. — The plural Q'^llSSN which arose out of S'^llSiDN (see Tljiis) ' which the Samaritan actually has sometimes, belongs entirely to IZJiN as far as usage is concerned; and therefore its mean- r\m:ii^ 121 ijnj« ings should be looked for there. The con- nection between ttSiSN and viiH, d''i25iN and D''il5'i5i«. is explicable by the well- known north -Palestinian (and Pheni- cian) peculiarity of pronouncing - like - i. e. a like o. See lIJiN. — 2. (man) n. p. of a grandson of Adam, a son of nil5 Gen. 4, 26 ; 5,6 9. 'n in the ante- diluvian tradition was an original con- ception of the primitive man and parallel with DIN , but afterwards it became the ITT ' name of a person, like Manu (man) among the Indians. In Phenician ffliiN, (i. e. 1IJ3N.) "Avvaog (Herod. 7, 98) appears as the proper name of a Sidonian. See «55!s n. ' n!fl^3« f. only in Ps. 69, 21, taken as a substantive by the LXX and Vul- gate; but according to our fext it reads nffl13iS and can therefore be nothing but the imperfect of iBii (which see). nJi^ (not used) intr. to groan, prop. to he grieved (a harder form is piiS, cog- nate pan); only in Nif. nSNi properly to feel oneself vexed, hence to sigh, lament, with bs Ez. 9, 4; 21, 12 or with 'ja of the thing on account of which one laments Ex. 2, 23, but also abso- lutely to sigh, to mourn Lament. 1, 4 8 11; spoken of animals Jo. 1,18, parallel with bjais Is. 24, 7. By way of climax is added: with breaking of the loins Ez. 21, 11 i. e. so violently that the loins might almost burst, and ni'^i'iaa i. e. = 125s3 laa with sorrow or mourning. The stein WN (Targ. nSN, Syr. and Zab. >-j»J] , Samarit. anach, Ar. sSl) is of the same signification as piU with the harder A-sound; and since pSN is ob- viously connected with psn, Greek ay^- eiv, ang-ere &c., the original idea to he grieved plainly appears, and therefore rtJNl. is another and farther carrying out of the idea. The organic root lies in Hi'N, as well as that of Jns Nah. 2, 8, j?p3, ^' t^' i^' '^'^''™' ^^' ^'^ *°'' whilst of rt-iN the root is SN. To this belongs nODN (with suf. "innSN.; pi. with su^. ''p'^?^) /• prop- straitness, state of an- xiety, and then the complaint which one utters Ps. 102, 6, parallel with ^iJi Is. 35, 10; sigh Ps. 31, 11. nnWN Is. 21, 2 must be understood as put for inn- (comp. Innbb'; 15,8 =rtn-; sriDiln Ex. p. . -, '^^v*; 'T ' it:it" 9, 18 =131") 1. e. lament for it (Babylon). NJrljN (pronominal stem) .^raJw.^roK. pers. pi. like the Hebrew litiSN , we, Dan. 3, 16 17 ; EzK. 5, 11 ; and also WnSiti. 4, 16. After separating the pronominal stem -5N, which is also found elsewhere (see ■'Sn), there only remains NStt, which is equivalent to lin, ISN, and finds its explanation under "iiriSN.' nSriDN see N5WN."' T : 1- -; r : i — : 'Unjijl (pronominal stem ;^aMS.15reN; abbreviated 15n5, paus. MXXi) pron. pers. we, in use exclusively as the plural of liN and i3bN Gen. 42, 13; 43, 8 &c., whilst >i5ij; appears only in Jer. 42, 6 K'tib , and the abbreviated 1Sh5 is only in Gen. 42, 11; Ex. 16, 7 Sj'Num. 32, 32; 2 Sam. 17, 12; Lament. 3, 42. It stands 1. often connected with a parti- ciple in order to denote a present trans- action, either before it Gen. 37, 7, Deut. 1, 28, or after it Gen. 19,13; 42, 21; 1 Chb. 29, 13, but with a fine distinction in the accentuation of the discourse. — 2. In the same manner with adjectives, which are seldom placed after it Neh. 5, 3, commonly before it Josh. 2, 17; 9, 22; 2 Kings 7, 12. — 3. As with all personal pronouns, 'N is put before or after the verb with a personal suffix for the sake of greater emphasis on the personal Gen. 44, 9 ; 47, 19 ; Detjt. 1, 41; Josh. 9, 19; this is particularly fre- q[uent in the later writings Lament. 5, 7; Ez. 33, 10; Ezk. 4, 3; 9, 7; 10, 2; Nbh. 5, 8 &c. To this belongs also the repetition of 'N with particles which are already connected with the suffix 15- 2 Sam. 5, 1. As to the derivation, it has been re- garded (Gesenius) as arising from ''SbN, like <|5N out of "15N!., either by repetition of it (fewald), 'or simply by adding the suffix li (Gesen.) after changing the mm« 122 sj« 3 into rt. Neither opinion is correct. The most appropriate explanation is to look upon 5N (as it is found in "'S-iN, ■'-iN, 1-iN &c.) as a very old pronomi- nal stem, also occurring as an element in the Coptic pronominal formations (e. g. Theb. jk.K-oK, Bashm. e.n-a.K &c.), and isn the proper -word for we. In this 15tl the 1-, Avhether abridged from 11- or bl-, is the plural designation, as is also the case in the synonymous 1-58 (see lbs, I'^jS, mVn) and just as in i-3N the "i- is nothing but the inseparable pronoun of the first person singular; the remaining pronominal stem sn is then merely the harder form of J}*. In Aramaean the plural 1- has passed into N- (comp. NSN he for iJlj|, Syr. \^\ , Armen. anak, Sanskrit ndga (tin) &c. and thence plummet, perpendicular line, by which they judged of the uprightness of walls: thus 'N naih a wall of the plumb-line. But the latter explanation has not a good foundation in the conception of the verb. ^535^ (pronominal stem; in pause ■'Sbs) person, pronoun I, a fuller form for ''5N, appears especially in the older period of the language, and therefore it is not found in Ezek. (but in 36, 28), EccLBS., Dan. (but in 10,11), Ezr., Neh. (but in 1, 6) and Chr. (yet in 1 Chr.17,1). It is applied like ■'3N (which see) in the cases there adduced, and therefore it is unnecessary to quote examples. — The Midrash has already compared with ''SbN the Coptic *i.KOK (Thebaic with omission of the vowel js^Sr, with c for r on account of the preceding k: a.ilc; Memphitie a^noR; Bashmuric e.it«.R) and no doubt has ever been entertained of their mu- tual relationship. Erom their compari- son it appears that "■- in "'Sbs* is the same pronominal stem of the first person, which is also met with in ''-3N and in the suffix, and that this personal sign of the first person i is omitted in Egyp- tian, according to the peculiarity of the Coptic. The anoch (tjbi<), Phenician 'TjpN (Ath. 4, 1; Kit. 2, 1; 3, 1; Poen. 1, 15 16; 2, 35), which remains after this, exactly corresponding to the Egyptian &noK, ei.n«LR, is easily recognised as a compound of «..n and or, Hebrew 5N and S-, especially since the SN appears in p^ 124 PJ« the latter in ■'-5N, *iiH-iN &c., and the a.n is employed in the former in various •ways to make pronominal stems. Thus there remains only och, Phenic. eoh, Coptic OK, a.R, which makes in essence the pronoun of the first person, and may be observed in the comparison of languages (Sanskrit ah-a,m, Greek sym, Latin ego &c.). ?Ji^ (not used) i. e. ')N intr. eq[uiva- lent to !i3nI. andWii, to lament, mourn, ITT '|-T ' ' ' Ar. (jt and(^^, Targ. ']5N, distinguished in the Mishna from b5^5. Only in Hiihp. prop, to shew oneself sad, then to com- plain, to murmur Numb. 11,1; Lament. 3,39; JJKK.yoyyiZeiv. Ibn'^Esra derives it incorrectly from IIN. DJK (only participle &5i«) to urge, press, compel, Esth. 1, 8: not compelling; Targ. D5N, Syr. ^jf, whence it has been adopted in Esther. The root is Di"N with the fundamental signification to prick, goad, still existing in 05"«5 and yS3; whether it be also connected with iBS-y (which see), Ar. \juJ>£-, is problematical. D3N (only part. DSn) Aram, equiva- lent to the Hebrew D3N, hence figura- tively Dan. 4, 6 to cause distress, trouble, i. e. to be troublesome, grievous. Hj?^ (unused) intrans. to he raised, arched, hilly, then metaphorically from the projecting, elevated and raised side of the face (see t)N from t]SN and Aram. pSSiS) and specially from the standing out nose; just as the meaning of d''iS has been derived from a similar point of view. The root is S]!"** which is still found in qi (C]13) HI.' to be raised, arched, projecting (whence J]i3), rt-B5, whence the noun !iBS, with some mo- dification of the labial sound in as, from which is the proper name ib (hill), and in In-ai, Ar. Lj eminere, elatum esse, whence the proper name isi (height, hill or heaven). The signification of this root is also in the Mediterranean (comp. Sanskrit nabhi, Pers. ndf, Lett, nahha. German nab-el, old high German nap- alo &c.). Comp. also Ar. oLi eminere, longum et elatum esse, and o«j the projecting of the camel's hump. Hence t|K, and the denominative !r|3N (probably no more than a de- nomin. from tjN, comp. Bat! from dtsh ; fut. ^i^}D intr. to be unwilling, provoked, angry, Kal only in poetical discourse, with a of the person with whom one is angry 1 Kings 8, 46; 2 Chk. 6, 36; Ps. 85, 6; Is. 12, 1 ; EzR. 9, 14; seldom with \ Ps. 60, 3, or absolutely Ps. 2, 12; 79,5; comp. Ar. i_iil to turn away from a thing, to be reluctant to, to be angry, of also denomin. from i_ajf. In prose there usually occurs instead Hithp. t\ijxr!n (Jut. tjaNn^) to be angry, with a of the " person Dbut. 1, 37; 4,21; 9, 8 20; 1 Kings 11, 9; 2 Kings 17, 18. Hence ns5N. 1TT-: t]3i< (not used) Aram, eq^uivalent to Hebrew !:]3N L ; hence the noun E|3N. t|3N; (only plural ')''B5^, with mf. ■'rti^'sN; from tl5N =Hebr."s|3N)4m?re.»re. synonymous with the Hebr. Q'JSN face, properly the projecting, visible and prominent aspect of man Dan. 2, 46; 3, 19, as the Hebrew QiiB abo derives its meamng from a similar view (which see). Comp. I]is. •1B3N; f. parrot. Lev. 11, 19; Deut. 14, 18, from denom. t^5N , so called from its irascibility. So according to the Ara- bic version (comp. ^^S a sort of eagle from i^\ to be angry) and the Talm. '^''?.{?'!] ^^"^1 after the same etymology. The LXX have yjaQn^qiog sandpiper, from t)iN = J|i I. cursitare, which is also possible. p^^ (/«*. pbN;} 1. (not used) intr. to he narrow, strait, pressed, the stem being connected with p3"rt , Aram. p5."^l5 (comp. ayiEiv, angere, eng &c.), Arab. ii)t; par- ticularly spoken of the narrow, long, npjK 125 nji? stretched neck, as lN|a neck from IIS to be strait. Hence i)?N. — 2. Figura- tively, to groan, shriek, of the wounded and dying Jer. 51, 52; Ez. 26, 15, i. e. to cry out with pain, comp. tiJN. Hence 'iTT-: Nif. piSta to groan, sigh, as nSNi Ez. 9, 4; t]^ pJNp 24,17 otomto, be silent! i. e. mourn in silence. !lp3N (constr. np5N) /. 1. an infinitive •ITT—: TS'^ noun: sighing, complaining, joined to ilsa Mal.2, 13 ; the mourning, e. g. of captives Ps. 79, 11 or of the poor 12, 6, Syr. 1^^^ with apocopation of 'Olaf. — 2. (only abs.) name of a species of lizard, ge- nerally of an unclean reptile Lev. 11, 30, which Onkelos has rendered "ibi hedgehog, the Jerus. Targ. N'^lti n^bs, N''in nftJiM, and about which versions it: ■ ^ 'vtv ■• ' and interpreters in general have in- dulged in conjecture. It is the femi- nine form of pSN in the signification of p5N 1., consequently a reptile with a narrow, long neck. tyJi^ I. (only in part. pass. fflliN m., JlllSlJN f.) intr. to he sick, ill, then figur. to be painful, dangerous, spoken of an arrow-wound Job 34, 6, of suffering Is. 17,11; Jer. 30, 12 15; to be melancholy, mournful, of a day 17, 16; to be sick i. e. morally bad, spoken of the heart 17, 9, always proceeding from the fun- damental signification "to be sickly", as one sees from Mfal, hence joined to nbn. IT T Nif. laiNS to be sick (incurable) 2 Sam. 12,15. '"'■■ The stem '4« has for its organic root 1B5"N, as may be seen from the syn- onymous ttJ5 (TlSli) Ps. 69, 21 and D5 (Dpi) Is. 10, 18, Syr. >-«i and Jui, Ar. ^jS (Abdallatif p. 118) and from the Medi- terranean (Sanskrit nag, Gr. voa-siv &c.). As in Mediterranean so also in Semitism the sibilant afterwards passed into a A-sonnd. A connexion with ffl3N H. for VJiiSjt is hardly imaginable. ti'Jt? n. (not used) an assumed stem for UJiiK man, as ISM (UJuSit) is assumed iv: ' r > r t' for I25''i!ji (which see). Some have made the fundamental signification to be sociable, to enter into connexion with, referring to the Arab. jj»*j| associate, friend &o.; but since this sense is not certain even in Arabic, it is better to compare the organic root in it IB'5-JS with the Arabic Uw to grow, sprout, so that DSiSN pro- perly means sprout, shoot, plant; as also the proper names rroj (from mo =^0©), i:)?- (from 1j? = !-i-3)5 to create), ^y'j>_, n^lB (comp. Soua of Sol. 4, 13), hv\'^, bairi in primitive history only express this original conception differently. Deriva- tives ffliSN, diiBSN, Aram. 'ttJiN. I v: ' !• T-: ' iTv: aJDN see laiSN. a33N (Dan. 2, 10 -iivs.; def. NtOSiSt and also N^iiN K'ri 4, 13 14, where theK'tib IT T-; ' ' has NffliiN, comp. Phenician UJiiN; pi. Q11B3N the Hebrew form 4, 14, in the I- T-; ' ' Targ. however y^iai from ']''^\^, on Ps. 62, 10) Aram. m. like the Hebrew uSiSN man or collectively men Dan. 2, 10; 3, 10 &c. 1233N "IS son of man, i. e. in the likeness of man 7, 13, is according to most interpreters the Messiah, the vlog tov av&Qcauov of the New Testament and in the usus loquendi of the book of Enoch. But inasmuch as the old Testament knows nothing of a divine nature belonging to the Messiah, and moreover that ascribed to the 'N 13 is attributed to the saints of the most high in verses 18 22 27, it can only be as- sumed that by the expression is intended the ']''ii"'bJ> ''%^'tii, the Jewish people. nJ^? (not used) intr. to incline to, to lean to something, to turn to one side (cognate in sense 5»bl!:), hence the pre- position riN ("fiij, with a suffias TIN), contracted from njN , properly side, then beside, with. — With the stem nSN , which also exists in Aethiopic {enta there means side and as a preposition with), the Ar. tXlfc to incline, bend, from which comes JU£, JuLa side, dS& beside, and the Hebrew IMS HI. in "'"i^y are cognate (see m, -ntj); also the Ar.^^ft to bend, nnjN 126 P]^D« ojf to be flexible, belongs to the same. nnJi^ (pronominal iX&in) Aram. 'pron. pers. niasc. thou Dan. 2, 29 31 37 38; 3, 10; 5, 13 18 22 23; 6, 17 21, for which the K'ri punctuates InFiSN i. e. ri5N (in the Targ. also HN), which is gen. comm. in Aramaean. ■^— The initial sound iN in this compound pronominal stem is abeady known from "i-SN and ■'S-SN and is preserved in the Ar. oof, Maltese ynt, Aethiop. an-sta, Amhar. ■an-ste, but it may have begun early to assimilate itself to the following stem, since n in the Syriac iJ) is only pre- served orthographically and has like- wise disappeared in the Hebrew nnN and Zab. NnN. On the other pronominal stem nn (lin) see rtriN. IT ^ : '' IT - IWiDISl (pronominal stem), Aram.pron. pers. ni. ye, Dan. 2, 8, the plural of rtnsis or :p3N, also in the Targum ^inN with the assimilation of n. The organic form for it is awN, Arab. ^\. Hence the final n is merely a weakening of m in Aramaean (the closing v in Greek arose out of m in Sanskrit). From this has originated the Hebrew dni? (which see). See the explanation of the plural sign •j!)", Hebrew d- from d1-, below under driN. OX see nSDN. IT I- : IT ^5D{^ (not used) trans, to heal, like the Targ. NON, Syr. ^o"] , Arab. LlT &c. in the same signification. Comp. "'^?DN , Es- sene. Hence S*DN (healing one, physician) n.p. of a king of Judah IKings 15,8, 'AadMATiH. 1,7, and of another 1 Chb.9, 16. Of the same meaning is the proper name rt&l = N&'n 8,37, and since this is abridged from n;s'n = n;^!SD'^ 9,43 (comp. bisB^), so NdN is also to be regarded as ala^old abridgment of !i:jNON whence at first Slj^JdN. {Jak is heating).' MDilJ (not used) trans, to violate, in- jure, hence 'j'ibN. Comp. Arab. U^ and ^(>(to injure, Lte to cause damage, \juSi, 63 ^ ijaJt to break, which seem to be con- nected with the Hebrew stem. "nlDN m. oil-vessel, oil-flash, 2 Kings 4, 2, according to Kimchi an ointment- vessel from Tj^D (which see), in which case N would occupy the same place ex- actly as a in E]W?3. But as N does not appear elsewhere as prosthetic in the formation of nouns, Bashi has assumed ■rjDN (equivalent to Tjd) as the stem, and the noun is to be taken as like y^l^, p'DS* (from ii&N) m. hurt, damage, mischance, coupled with the verbs N'lp, n^tt Gen. 42,4 38; 44,29 or In'fl Ex. 21,22 23. "TlOX (after the form ^^ViSi , hence for I^IDN; plur. d"''nWi«.) m. band, fetter, so 'Nrt rr^a Jee. 37, 15 house of the pri- soners, prison, allied in sense to r\'''3. isbsn; plur. di'llDNtn n^a Judges 16, 21 '25. d'^'iW alone Eccles. 7,26; Judges 15, 14 fetters, spoken of the arms of the coquetting wife. To this is reckoned also the expression d''TiD!l n'^a _, A H I • 1 • I" IT 1" JliCCLES. 4, 14, VIZ. as being contracted from d'''7?0i{ (an intensive form from Ti&N, but almost with the same meaning, like IDS and 'nBN, liSN and T^aj*) masc. l" 'captive Is. 10, 4^24, 22; '42, 7. — 2. (a secondary form of IDN, Osir, an epithet of Adonis , common in Phe- nician in proper names ; see under ^On) ». p. m. Ex. 6, 24 ; 1 Chr. 6,8 22. Coimp. Phenician IDN'ia?, 10X3^ as proper names. QD^ (not used) trans, to heap to- gether, to gather, to bring together to a place, comp. Ar. |*y^, |»- 2 Kings 22, 20. — 2. to gather in the sense of drawing together, snatching up together, Jbe. 10, 17 ; figura- tively Pkov. 30, 4; to draw in, with- draw, ttsb 'i« to withdraw their shining Joel 2, 10; 4, 15; dibffl-riN 'N to with- draw peace i. e. to take it away Jee. 16, 5; Ti 'N to draw in the hand i. e. to ' ' IT T desist from something 1 Sam. 14, 19; &"'bs'l '8 with bs of the place to draw •r : - T V -r hach the feet, a figure of one dying GrEN. 49, 33; to draw together i. e. to take, catch Hab. 1, 15; to draw in, in the sense of to take to oneself, to take under the protection, with bN of the place Dbtjt. 22, 2 or with the accusative Josh. 20,4; spoken of the glory of Grod which receives one, i. e. to enter into the glory of God Is. 58, 8; sliiffKili or n5>'nsa 'n ' ' IT : - - f- T • T to receive from leprosy or him who is thrust out by leprosy, i. e. to heal 2 KjuGS 5, 6 11; il'^SS 'N to withdraw anger i. e. to pour forth anger no more Ps. 85, 4, like £]!!* S^lljln 78, 38. — 3. to gather in, in the sense of to take away from some- where, reproach Gen. 30, 23; Is. 4, 1; ni'n, 12535, Diin, n»123i 'N to gather in - I ' VK' I* - ' IT T : T "^ the soul (applied to God or men) i. e. to cause to die Judges 18, 25 ; Ps. 26, 9 ; 104, 22, fully rbN f\Q» to take to him- self Job 34, 14; freq[uently with the omission of Visi &c. in the simple sense of allowing to die = to destroy, to snatch away 1 Sam. 15, 6; ajS'n ib&n dying of hunger Ez. 84, 29 ; hence the expression niSN (orbs) "bs'N to gather to the fathers i. e. to cause to die, to cause to come to the fathers, 2 Kings 22, 20; 2 Chr. 34, 28. — 4. to hold together, to close, a march Is. 58, 8. See Pihel. At 2 Sam. 6, 1 the LXX, Vulg., Syr. and Ar. read tjal'l in the sense of CJOiip and he gather- ed; but it suits the context better to translate and he enlarged, from ElO"'. De- rivatives ElDN (diSDN.), t)Di*, 'AsbN., i^sBlS., JT'&N, and the proper name Sp'm and rjONiaN , JiDibt*. Nif. t|DN5 (once -N5 Ps. 47, 10 for 'N?) refl. of Kal 1. to assemble Judges 16, 23, with bs or b whither persons assemble or repair Lev. 26, 25 ; 2 Chk. 30, 3 ; with b? to gather together against one Gen. 34, §0; Ps. 35, 15; Mic. 4, 11; Zech. 12, 3, or also whither, if the place be a height Am. 3, 9. Then also passive of Kal: to be heaped up Pkov. 27, 25; spoken of a herd to be driven in Gen. 29, 7. — 2. pass, of Kal in the 2* signi- fication: to be brought together Jbe. 8, 2, to be received Ex. 9, 19, to be withdrawn, spoken of shining Is. 60, 20 ; particularly in the expression to be healed, of a leper Numb. 12, 14; figuratively to put up a sword into the sheath Jbe. 47, 6. — 3. pass, of Kal 3 : to be gathered i. e. to die, in the phrase to be gathered to (bs) his forefathers i. e. to be gathered to them into the region of shadows, with d?-bN, niijiN-bN, oralso ni'na);-bN Gen. 2*5, 8'; Judges 2, 10; 2 Kings 22, 20, seldom t)DlS3 alone Numb. 20, 26; Job 27, 19. To this signification is annexed that of dying, perishing Hos. 4, 3 ; ceas- ing, disappearing Is.16,10; 60,20; Jbe. 48, 33. £]&» Fih. to gather with zeal, to collect vigorously. Is. 62, 9 ; to receive to oneself Judges 19,15; to bring together, close, a procession Num. 10, 25 ; generally explic- able by Kal. C]SN Fuh. to be gathered, taken together ' Is. 33', 4; EzBK. 38, 12, with b? against Hos. 10, 10; nsDN i]BS)! to be collected like heaps Is. 24, 22, where 'N as a ver- bal noun strengthens the thirig. In ad- dition to this form there was also in the language an intensive one tlOBDN to be collected here and there, whence ftbsDN.. Hif. EjDi^rt (Jut. C|&i«) adopted by some at ISAM. 15, 6; Ps.i04,29, ^s\xy^^ 2 Sam. 6, 1 &c.; but these forms are always better considered as belonging to Kal. Forms of !:|DJ , as TiS''&iiDiS; inf. c. lONb, "i?^) tr. 1. io Jfed together, fetter, make fast, with cords, chains &c. 2 Sam. 3, 34; Ez. 3, 25; Judges 16, 5; Job 36, 8; TiGN Ps. 146, 7 fettered. Then, l!pN, ^iDN, IIDN, IDN, iTlfaa, l&iM. I •■' I' t' it' itv:' VI t' I" Nif. 'HDNS pass, of Kal: to be fettered Judges 16, 6, to be held in captivity Gen. 42, 16. Pih. IBN see "T^BN. Puh. IDS to be taken captive Is. 22, 3, e. g. inip)?.Ki by the bow, where "jj stands for ')? ttJ'iN, as in 21, 17. The stem IDN (Targ. 'nON, Syr. raf, Ar. .m\ &c.) is intimately related to 11N (which see), 15tN (which see), W and 1^5> &c.; but the organic root is 'iD'N, as is seen from comparison. ID!!* (not used) Aram, eijuivalent to Hebrew 1DN. Hence 'TiDN, 1DN. r T t ■■•:' itvs nPij? an Assyrian word, used in com- pound Assyrian proper names: at the end of them e. g. in 'iDNb? (which see), IpNSMbllJ (which see) and others, and in tie "form -^bt* as the first member of - the compound in ']^ri"'nDN. It corre- sponds to 9ira in Sanskrit in the sense of commander, leader, head, the short ending a in Assyrian not being heard; the Greek xaQa also originated from the same word. "iSN (constr. 1BN Num. 30, 13, but he- ir ■ r ' . fore a suffix only the form'nDNappears)?™. a vow of renunciation, abstinence, a vow not to do a thing. Num. ch. 30; ^m n^iTB 30, 14 oath of abstinence. Comp. \t^\, i?aJof the same; in the Mishna TiSN, TlDN in this sense. 1DN (only with suff.; pi. d-ilBN with IT v: * ^ H * [• T -^j a singular meaning) m. equivalent to 'IBN Num. 30, 5 6 8 15. As in 1TO8 IT • ^ ' I - and 'TifflN, niSnS and n3n3, the intensive it' V I \ VI:' form here does not appear to alter the meaning. "1D54 {constr. 'niDN, rfe/.N'iDjSt) Aram. m. royal prohibition, interdict Dan. 6, 8 9 13 14 16 (LXX oQtafiog, Soyiid), from 1DN to forbid, Ithpe. IDriN in Targ. |'in"*lp^^ (Assyr.) n. p. of the son of Sennacherib, king of Assyria after his father, about 696 B. C. 2 Kings 19, 37; Is. 37, 38; Ezr. 4, 2. "IBN is no- thing but 1BN (which see) in IBNbs, 'iBNlwbllS &c., and is here somewhat altered merely by the laws of euphony, because it is not at the end; ')^tt is, nno^^ 131 ^^ according to Ph. Luzzatto (see 'iBSOiji), the Assyrian hadhuna victorious, from an Assyrian root in, Zend, hadh (Sans- krit Badi) to conquer, witli the adjective snffix ana. ^Esar-Haddon signifies ac- cordingly the victorious commander. The different forms in the LXX and Euseh. liaogSttv, in Tobix 1,21 Hax^gSovog, cod. Alex. 2!axsQd(av, in Josephus 'Aaaaqa- jpddae, NayaqSas, arise in a great de- gree out of the Biblical form. *)r)P&? (Persian) n.p. of the Jewish wife of 1l5'nil2JnN., female hero of the hook of Esther, who was previously called ilB15 (which see) Esth. 2, 7. According to the Talmud, Targ. IT. (on Esth. 2, 7) and Jalkut, 'N signifies star. Verms-star (SlSb, NlTlMS), with comparison of the Persian niNnb i. e. Sjlx* sitareh, NinDN i. e. iJiJu) in Zabian, NT^nDN, i. e. Greek aafqQ. And in reality the Zend, qtara, Sanskrit stri is of like signification, so that N would only be prosthetic. yi^ {def. N5>n) Aram. m. wood Dan. 5,4; EzB. 5,8, usually looked upon as coming from ^t- CjN (fromt)as, l^iN, from t)iN ; with suf. iSN, iSN, Ssii; du. D'^SN, constr. ''SN, with 1- -' r -' IT-' •! — ' I"-' . suff. WSN, r&N) m. prop, the projecting, the prominent (see £13N), hence the vi- sible, projecting side of the face (comp. !l3s) and so 1. the nose as the prominent thing of the face, whether of men Num. 11,20; Is. 3,21; Ez. 23,25; Peov. 30, 33; Ps. 115, 6; or of animals Peov. 11, 22; Job 40, 24. As a projecting thing it is poetically compared to a far-look- ing tower, SoNCt of Sol. 7, 5 ; comp. Ar. ijji cape and mountain-summit. The dual according to this meaning is used of the two nostrils, nares. Gen. 2, 7; 7, 22, and since the breath is drawn in and given out through them, it is called d^BN m'l Ex. 15, 8, Lament. 4, 20, I)!* n'l'n SoNd op Sol. 7, 9 scent of the nose i. e. the smell of the breath. With this meaning is connected: 2. anger, ira, the nose as snorting, just as in the Me- diterranean languages anger is conceived of as a snorting, glowing or smoking of the nose. Hence they said for to he angry, % £]« JTin Gen. 30, 2; Ex. 4, 14; 3 riN 'jias DeuT29, 19; Ps. 74, 1; lnb» a riN Ps.Vs, 21 ; V^ tiN 'Tjna Jee. 42, 18^ a rij? nb3 and Thi Ez. 5) 13; 7, 8; nVlB a t)!!? 7^3; IjN ^ii Is. 30, 27; Ps. 2, 12*; i)^ l?''td*!! ^ic. 7, 18 &c.; for to cease he angry, ''ya t\^ 31115 Gen. 27, 45 ; Nxjm. 25, 4; t|i«M tlS'llri Ps. 37, 8 ; for to keep anger, tlN S'^ton Job 36, 13. As a noun it is said of anger: ElN"'''1p Ex. 11, 8; 1 Sam. 20, 34; rjN li'^n 'Ntjm!'32, 14; rjN ni'nay Job 40, 11; i\k T5> Ps. 90, 11;' tji? fiyT Lament. 2, 6; sometimes J]N alone and unconnected Peov. 21, 14. Besides we have the following: i:|!S di;" Zeph. 2, 3; tljS W Jee. 18, 23; £1N uS'^tJ Peov. 29, 22; sji? b?ja 22, 24; '<'■' T\!A Deut. 7, 4. £]N Tj'niS is putting off of wrath i. e. long- suffering Jee. 15, 15, and in this sense occurs the verb tlN tl'^'lNi^ Is. 48, 9. But in r)N MSi^ Ps. lOJ 4 SiNhas the meaning nose. In the meaning of wrath d^SN is used in the phrases 'N I^'IS Ex. 34, 6, 'N i:£)5 Peov. 14, 17; elsewhere merely in the" formula 'Dim'2 ti^i'i Dan. 11, 20 not hy the wrath of a man (and not in battle, but by snares), spoken of the death of Seleucus. — 3. face, fades, as that which projects in the appear- ance of men, only in dual diss, espe- cially in the phrases: 'N tinnniairt Gen. 19, 1; 'N nip. 1 Sam. 24, 9 ; 'S i'pS) 2 Che. 7, 3 , where d';SN in the accusative de- scribes the idea of the verb more close- ly; d-'SN-Vy Vsa 2 Sam. 14, 4; wnpffll^ or d^BsV ^? 'Gen.48,12; 1 Sam. 20, 41. "BnV occurs in the sense of '^SBb oiJy in 1 Sam. 25, 23, since it cannot be taken there in the sense of d^BSb TsM on ac- count of the following 'il'^JB-b?. n?T d'jBi* sweat of the face Gen. 3, 19. V^^^i and ■)''BN has a similar meaning in the Targ., and also the sing. NBIS Ez. 1, 6, and iSSSN Jerus. Num. 12, 14, and therefore they have there all the senses of d'^fB, also: way, fore-side &o., Syr. ,^1 and 9* p]« 132 P]« ys] . Hence it may also be explained why the AetHopic I]^ signifies mouth, the mouth being here looked upon as a visible part of the face; in which sense t|$ is to be taken perhaps in Ez. 8, 17, since the Barsom (JTni?3T) was held before the mouth by the Persian sun- worshippers (Syde, hist. rel. v. p. ed. n. p. 350). The dual in Uim should then be explained like the plural in d'^SS (which see). — 4. Like d^SS (which see) and nQoamnov in the sense person, and therefore d'^SN means persons ISam. 1, 5 (the dual d'jSN has here nothing but the force of a plural, and therefore does not denote exactly two; the LXX incorrectly read D&is). — 5. d^BN (face i. e. presence, viz. of God, comp. bsiis) n. p. m. 1 Chb. 2, 30 81. — The 'stem EjiN appears to be only a denom. from t|t« in the sense of anger; but t|N itself is derived from IjiN, which exists also in the Ar, nj^ (pronominal stem, properly a preposition with, at, generally the ex- pression as a preposition of rest and also of motion near: at, to, before, to- ward, both ideas flowing together in other languages also. Trom this has been developed the idea of a conjunc- tion, so far as it denotes something in the neighbourhood or moved thither; it is then) conj. and signifies in general: also, e. g. I'l'nQ'i Jlj!? 2 Sam. 20, 14 also after him i. e. near after him, and conse- quently different from d.|i, which merely increases; likewise Lev. 26, 16; Detjt. 15, 17. In this sense tiN stands 1. to make pronouns emphatic, Detjt. 2, 11 even they; Prov. 22, 19 even thee; so too Prov. 23,28; Judges 5, 29. In the two- fold sentence 2 Kings 2, 14 this em- phasis of the pronoun (Nlln t\^ is a gra- dation of the personal idea in the verb n3;;i and it must be translated: and actually he sm^te the water i. e. hardly did he smite it, till &c. , in the same sense as "1^ t3?Ki3 Song of Sol. 3, 4. — 2. to make particles emphatic, e. g. ■Dim t\^ Job 19, 4; 34, 12 yea truly; V? £liS 6, 27; )1i t\^ Ps. 18, 49; b|3 tfX Is. 40, 24; nti| da C]Nn and yet, but, and even Lev.26,44;'''3 )!]{!« Ez.14,21; iilp tfX EsTH. 5, 12; 'j-'ij t\k Is. 41, 26 &c. In aU these cases 'S is taken for even, yea even, imo, imo certe, prop, nothing but a strong and, to which is added the idea of the . following particle or pronoun. In '^^ i:]M the emphatic !:]M and, actually, yea, causes it a) to be equivalent to an exclamation, prop, and is it really so iAa«HAB.2,5; ISam.21,6; 14,30, or to an interrogation really ? Gen. 3, 1 ; b) an ascending gradation in certainty with respect to a preceding position, adding the chief particular which is still want- ing, and to be translated if an affij> mative clause precedes, hmo much more 2 Bam. 16, 11 ; Pkov. 15, 11 , if a nega- tive, how much less 1 Kings 8, 27; Job 9, 14; (with the omission of ""S) 4,, 19. Sometimes dN rjiS is similar, 36, 29, — 3. More rarely in other cases for the sake of making clauses emphatic, to be translated by even, notwithstanding, just so, as an antithesis or gradation, EocLES. 2,9; SoNGOP Sol. 1,16; ISam. 2, 7; Is. 26, 9; Ps. 65, 14; 74, 16. — 4. The reduplication irjN . . . tlN Is. 46, 11, to denote different things as meeting in one respect, is only an emphatic ex- pression, like n ... I 38, 15, Ps. 76, 7, or da... da Ex. 10, 25 26, and may be translated as well . . .as also , not only . . . but also , prop, nothing but even . . . even, and . . . and. da appears too in all these cases, so that the two are inter- changed. — Besides, the following cases should be noticed: a) when the inter- rogative particle appears in the member of a sentence where is also C)N, it prefers to join the latter, e. g. tlNii Gen. 18, 13 24; l-'N tlN5 Amos 2, ll'^ 'comp. Ar. |vlil, ^1; sometimes the interrogative particle is left out, ti^ is therefore equi- valent to £]Nli Gen. 3, 1. b) titj! is some- times transposed, according as the em- phasis is intended, e. g. t]^ bv Ps. 138, 7 for bS r)i!»; dS tlN Job 36, 29 for qs dN. ' ' . . ' ' ' Etymologically, as 'r|i« is abridged n^ 133 )Q^ from ''SN, so is t]N from iBN, the ori- ginal form appearing in the Jerusalem Targum on Gen. 27, 33 and perhaps in lb''BN; the abbreviated form r|N, Targ. SJi}, Syr. ^1 is connected in the root fi ■with o and the copulative 1 and. Also NS, 'is in J^S-'N, NiBN, i&N," is cognate with it. 5|>J (pronominal stem) Aram, the same, Dan!" 6, 23. HDi^ (/m(. IBN^.) fr. to bind, bind about, gird, with b of the person and a of the object, a girdle (lai^n) Ex. 29, h; Lev. 8, 7; from which fundamental signifi- cation the meanings to veil, clothe, cover, draw on have been developed, as is seen from the derivatives. Hence IBN, liBN, fTiBN and perhaps I^BN. The stem IBN is not found, it is true, in Aramaean and Arabic in this signification, but yet traces of it are preserved. The organic root is 1B"N, also found in IB-JS, Ar. tXio (to bind, fetter), with change of the p- or <2-sound in ns-1, na-a, uia-it &c. IBS adj. m., iTiBN /. see JniBN. IT ' IT t-; ' IT 1-: 1SN see liBN. I " I - WBN ((;o««D5 to pitch. According to the Ar. |jtXs (Ham. p. 712) high tower, tower -like tent, /TjtXi to build aloft, the N in this word aad in NSIBN Targ. on Jbe. 43, 10 for I'l'lB'ttS tent, Syr. iJJ^T 1 Chk. 15, 1, (ai Ben-Sira 21, 5 palaces, palace-tents, Talm. N3']BN, plur. 'jijJ'iBN the same &c.) with dagesh following is only prosthetic as in 'JV'IBN, and the noun I^B should then be derived from )'is (which see). But the stem may also be 1BN, Aram. IBN, whence )'^B!^ in the sense'of ST^as, o'bw, after the model of "ilfeiS from 'nsji. jT ' 'vt . r T From this then a secondary verb yxs may have arisen. The Syr. Ur^l 'n 19, 6 know then; IBN ']n'; ''Ki «1D« 134 D^B^ 19, 23 oh that then! It is compounded of N = "'N (demonstr. pronom. stem) and is equivalent to Tib (which see), TVs (which see). It may, however, be also taken as interrogative, from the twofold character of N , comp. Phenician is MM what then? (Poen. 2, 63) = iSN nM. i^lD^$ (pronominal stem) adv. de- monstr. equivalent to iSN, then: so then in lively discourse, in demanding or in- ferring, and in questions for the sake of emphasis: tandem, note, therefore. Gen. 27, 33 37; Ex. 33, 16; Is. 19, 12; Hos. 13,10; 2KiNGslO,10. From HS"iN inter- rogative it is also different in orthogra- phy; but on the other handNiS'^N stands for it in Judges 9, 38 ; Pkov. 6, 3, without distinction in meaning. See "'N and NIB. liSX (seldom ISN, after the form TiTN,' iiijN, ^lEpN, therefore for liSg) m. prop, veiling, clothing, but especially 1. of the upper priestly or kingly garment or shoulder-covering, ephod (LXX inafjiig, Aq. im^Qafifia, inevdviia, Vulg. super- humerale, Targ. N']iS''N; the Syr. has retained the Hebrew word in \'^t^, the Coptic in et^oTx), made of purple, blue, red and golden threads, and consisting of two halves like the mass-gowns of priests (Jos. Ant. 3, 7, 5), of which the girdle (s^n) that kept them together formed an essential part Ex. ch. 28 ; 29 ; 39; the lower mantle was called b''yB Tissn Ex. 28, 31. Such an ephod was worn by the high priest Ex. 28, 4, by David in priestly functions 2 Sam. 6, 14, 1 Chr. 15, 27 (hence ia TiBi?), by the boy Samuel consigned to the priests 1 Sam. 2, 18 28, as also by other lower officiating priests 22, 18. — 2. as per- taining especially to the priests 14, 3, it was used for a sign of oracle-giving 23, 6 9; 30, 7, without a particular oracle-image being necessarily thought of. This priest's robe was put on or produced at the giving of oracles Judges 8, 27; 17, 5; 18, 14 17 18 20; Hos. 3, 4. As the Urim and Thummim were connected with it and the ephod was abused by those who had no right to it, it is named along with the d'^S'in. See rtlSN. — 3. {oracle-giving i. e. oracle- giver) n. p. m. Numb. 34, 23. TDJ^ (not used) a stem assumed for TB1N (which see) and TBia (which see) in the sense to shine, to glitter; see, how- ever, these words. nSi< (not used) intr. tantamount to ns"' to snatch at something, to hunt, strive. Verbs t& and ''B are often inter- changed with one another. Hence the proper name rt'^Bi*. n''BI^ (equivalent to nsNi; striving) n. p. of a Benjamite 1 Sam. 9, 1. ^''BN (for bSN, from bSN 2.) adj. m., ilb'^BN (jpl. rri") f. weak or tender in the s^aXk,' unripe, Ex. 9, 32 spoken of the ears of wheat and rye, which being yet young were not smitten by the hail; hence not ripening late, late-growing, as some incorrectly translate, since this is merely secondary. Comp. Targ. bSN tender, young, of sheep; then late-born. In the Mishna b'^BN is the opposite of T'Sa (Sh'W^it 6, 4).' The LXX (6>«fta) and Vulg. (serotina) have rather given the meaning than a literal version. D''B>4 n. p. m. see ti^ 5. p'^BM (constr. piBN ; pi. t3''5p.''BN , constr. i)?.iBn'', ^with SMjf. Vp^'^BN.) m. l.'=pBN, properly adject.: strong, powerful, firm, therefore a-iBSU ip-^BN Job 41, 7 the Strong of shields i. e. firm shields ; then substantively : a strong, powerful one, a hero, 12, 21, parallel ^'''li; figuratively firm, condensed, hence Jar, ri1!Jin5 ipiBN 40, 18 bars of bi'ass. Comp. on this signification the proper names jjBN , pBiS , piBN and Mp^BN, all from the verb pSN. — 2. prop, sunk, deep, hence ground (of a valley), depth, bed, cleft, D^ 'S 2 Sam. 22, 16; Q^M 'N Ps. 18, 16 ; 42, f- Song op Sol. 5, 12 ; Jo. 1, 20 founda- tions of the sea, of the rivers; valleg (cognate in sense ia) Ez. 6, 3; 36, 4 6, particularly like brti a valley watered by a torrent 35, 8 ; Ar. i^i^tj. See pBN I. — 3. torrent, a flowing wood- or valley- brook, which is dried up by the summer heat Ps. 42, 2; 126,4. ThestemispBNlL piD« 135 tD« The different senses of this word cannot be referred to one stem, as some have attempted to reduce them artifi- cially, just as little as the manifold nouns in Arabic can be derived from one stem. p''SN (fortress) n. p. of a city in the tribe of Asher, where Phenicians dwelt Judges 1, 31; elsewhere it is called pS5< Josh. 19, 30, which see. T^Bii see ^■'SiN, isiN. TlSi^ (not used) a stem assumed only for the noun fISBN appearing in the Samaritan codex, which is actually writ- ten in Arabic \iAi(, in Aram. 'TiSN. nDSN in the Samaritan codex for rtSBrt Gen. 19, 29, from '^JSN; on the other' hand it has nissn Deut. 32, 20 for riMnn. !?£5t^ (not used) intr. 1. to he dark, dusky, gloomy, of the night, cognate in sense to "^uifi. That it is to be taken with the medial e may be perceived from the derivatives bSN, rtSN. Ar. (^t to conceal oneself, to sink, of the sun. The organic root is identical with that in bs-uS, as also in Arabic the meaning "to be small, low, little, weak" is explicable from this fundamental signification. Another sensuous idea for it is to be veiled, Ar. jAft, then to be dark; but it is not necessary to assume it here. — 2. to be low, tender, weak, of stalks; Aram, to be weak, young, of sheep bom late, prop, to sink, to bow down, applied to the tender stalks. Derivatives rx' 1" T ' IT"-:' V I ' iT"-:4- PSN adj. m. dark, obscure, sunless, spoken of days Am. 5, 20. PBJi m. darkness, gloominess, parti- cularly thick Job 3, 6; 10, 22, allied in sense to Tiiun Is. 29, 18, opposed to Tin Job 30, 26; Vbn 'jais 28, 3 the stone concealed in darkness (in a deep pit) ; figur. misfortune 23, 17, concealment Ps. 91, 6. nbSN (after the form 'n^S'n,; with «m/. '?[nbbN; pi. nibsN) /. eq[uivalent to bsN darkness, deep obscurity Dexjt. 28, 29; put with iib^b Pkov. 7, 9, 'rji^n Jo. 2, 2, Zeph.I, 15, sometimes withoutl co- pulative Ex. 10, 22 ; opposed to tJ'^SlriS!: Is. 58, 10. n^3?2 nbBN 8, 22 thrust'mta deep darkness, where 'N is the accusa- tive, while in Jeb. 23, 22 it is 'NS mi. InbBNS Peov. 4, 19 is in many mss. 'sk ; but iit stands for 'Ni3. 'BSBt<, 'j'^n) Is. 34, 12; 40, 17; 41, 12'49, to which also 52, 4 belongs, a meaning that pro- ceeds from that of ceasing, coming to an end; most frequently d) like "'nbla, ''pbiT in the sense except, or with' a limitation, only, which usually proceeds from a negation in the language. It stands at the beginning of limiting pro- positions Numb. 13, 28; Deut. 15, 4; Judges 4, 9 ; 2 Sam. 12, 14 or in the middle of the proposition Is. 45, 14; 54, 15, in which sense the connected phrase ■i^ DBN is to be taken: except that, only that i. e. but however Am. 9, 8. — 3. only in dual d^DBN Ez. 47, 3 steps i. e. as far as a step is' reckoned, viz. ankles, equi- valent to DB , as many versions and inter- preters have understood it, not soles of the feet, the extremities of the feet, as Ibn O'andch supposes. See DB. — 4. in the proper nama of a city D'^K'n DBN (extension of the broohs) in the tribe of Judah 1 Sam. 17, 1, for which '5 DB stands in 1 Che. 11, 13, so that 'N must be explained here by the meaning' no. 3. See d''53'5-DB. ■"OBNl adv. except, not, nothing farther, in the formula 1i» ■'DBN'l Is. 47, 8 10, Zeph. 2, 15 and nothing farther. It is the DBN with the i of union, as in inblj and "'Fibla, which very old con- structive form is then applied to an adverbial use. The LXX, "Vulg., Targ., Syr. &c. have erroneously taken it for DBN with the suffix i- in the sense of e^r- cept me, which is contradicted by li3> DBN 2 Sam. 9, 3. ' "" i?Di^ (not used) intrans. to breathe, blow, from the organic root 5>B"i<, which also exists in Ji-Ss and with the guttural sound softened in n-NB. Hence S'BN. — 2. to breathe, to snort, to hiss, spoken of the serpent, as !15>B is applied to the panting cries of a woman in labour; Syr. ]^ to bleat, Arab. cLi to snort; tlNS to C ' IT T blow, of the wind ; rtB to send forth, of sounds &c. Deriv. M?BN. 3>B>)I m. breath, figuratively nothing, nothingness Is. 41, 24, hence parallel to rs, DBS. TOBN (for WBN; comp. nsb?, h1.1T for SIBV?) iTnit'^'from Sptf) "fern. prop, the breathing, hissing, therefore adder, viper Is. 30, 6 ; Job 20, 16. Comp. Targ. N'^SBN, Talm. NBN, Ara,b. ^^Jiif; so too the Coptic, in a similar sense. F]D« 137 1D« nDi^ (not contracted in reduplicat- ing the ^ -sound as other words in SS) tntJ". prop, to turn, revolve, but used definitely trans, to surround, to encircle, in a figurative sense spoken of the "■'blari, na""''!^^'?, ni5>'n, with the accus. of the person k 'Sam. 22^ 5 or b? Ps. 40, 13. The organic root !r|i!? is identical with SD (aiaD) according to the laws of root- building, and the Ar. ol , whence oli I time, is the same. In Phenician is derived from £]£« i. e. JjN the name of the place NBN (pronounce Ippo) place protected round about (comp. 'in.l &c.) i. e. Hippo. 'Innoiv in Africa is called upon a Sido- nian coin (12£ n3 NSN nS3 DN D5i2?V) NS8J; comp. also i-s] cover; and see t^^. pDiJ I. (not used, only a collateral form of pBi*) intrans. to he sunk, bent, deep, spoken of an inlet, ravine or valley ; hence p''SN. The organic root is pS-N (pa-?)- '" pDi^ n. (not used) intrans. to flow, to pour out; hence p'^SS* 3. The organic root ispS^iS, which is found in pB'D IE. and in a modified state in ln-3S, tlS'DlI., I J n IT T ' 1- T ' n&-i:5, 'rts-d &c. r T ' Ir T pB^^ (Kal not used) intrans. to be stout, firm, strong, prop, held fast to- gether; only Hithp. pSSfirt to subdue oneself, to apply force to oneself, to com- pose or restrain oneself. Gen. 43, 31; 45, 1; EsTH. 5, 10; 'itntn ii5i^nii Is. 42, 14 to be still and refrain oneself; 'Nnln I3^'?t!l 63, 15 to restrain compassion. Comp. Ar. (SJf. The fundamental signi- fication may proceed from "to embrace firmly, to embrace, encompass" (comp. tnp and piri), and perhaps the stem is to be put along with pSN II. (which see). Derivatives p"'SN, the proper names higSN , pSN., p'fsN and pBJ* (fortress; with & of motion npBNi} 1. n. p. of a city in Asher Josh. 13, 4. It is the 'Ldcpaxtt (Phenician iTiJSN.) on the Adonis river {Euseb. Const. 3, 55; Sozom. 2, 5), the present village 'Afka at the foot of Lebanon between Balbek and Byblus {Burckh. I. 70), which is called JuDaBS 1, 31 piS?N and Josh. 12, 18 pBN.. — 2. proper name of a strong place on the east side of the sea of Gali- lee, near Hippo (NStj), where Eusebius (Onom.) points out a fort "AifOLKo. which still exists under the name (3^ ^ (Burckh. I. 539) 1 Kings 20, 26 30. But others more correctly understand by it — 3. proper name of a city in the plain of 'b!S5>'iTi 1 Sam. 29, 1 in the tribe of Is- sachar, situated, according to the Ono- masticon, near 'En-Dor (li'i ')'^S or y^). — 4. (written pBiS.) proper name of a place over against StSln 'JS^ 1 Sam. 4, 1 and probably identical with lip &N. in the mountains of Judah Josh. 15, 53. — Ac- cording to the natural derivation it is from the stempSN; however the myth of Adonis has abeady combined the stem with P5N (pi?n) to embrace (Etym. Magn. s. v.; Bochart Can. p. 748). pSN (fortress) n. p. of a place, see npSN (the same) n. p. of a city in the tribe of Judah Josh. 15, 53. See *lD^ I. (not used) intrans. probably equivalent to IS (Tns) to be pounded, ground to powder, cognate with IB"^ (which see). The organic root is 'IB'N- Hence 'hbn. 1D^^ n. (not used) trans, to wind round, hind about, cover, by modification from "IB? (which see), Syr. r^. Hence ^BN. "iDi? HI. (not used) 1. intrans. to bear fruit, to increase, to be fruitful &c., a stem assumed for ID^'IBN, ?!']!}?§, inn- which should be referred to In'lS I. — 2. to bear, a stem assumed for p^'ISN, but see rrnss H. ITT 1SX (from 'IBN I.) masc. prop, scatter- ed, bruised, hence 1. fine dust (as the noun pi from pp.'i), a figure of tranaitori- ness. Gen. 18, 2?; Job 30, 19, put along with IBS; metaphor, nothingness, Job "IBN 138 fOnDi^ 13,12 dust-poems i. e. worthless; 'N nS'i Is. 44, 20 io g'msp at nothingness. — 2. asAea, i. e. the dust that remains from things burnt. Numb. 19, 9 10 (there = 'Wi)i comp. cinis with Kovig (dust); as the orientals mourned in ashes 2 Sam. 13, 19, Is. 58, 5, figuratively mourning Ps. 102, 10, and as an antithesis including a play upon the words to INS Is. 61, 3. To strew ashes is a figure of multitude, Ps. 147, 16. 'Nb ins Ez. 28, 18 to hum to ashes. "ISN (from 'nBN n.) covering, head- covering , Asaii - ornament , Aead - d^^ss, 1 Kings 20, 38, comp. Syr. ]°r^, Targ. NlBSM , Talm. n^B5»?3 , Ar. 8.-Aix) , turhan IT : : - ' V 1 : - ' J - &c. The Syriac, Vulg. and others have incorrectly thought of "i&N. niSN {jplur. d"'n") masc. young hrood (of birds), chicken, Deut. 22, 6 ; Ps. 84, 4 ; Job 39, 30; formed from nps (which see) with N prosthetic. 'li'^"1lBl!< masc. sedan, litter, ferculum. Song of Sol. 3, 9. LXX (foQEiov, Kimchi nibs na D'^NiBiiilS naTi. On the firm N I - IT (• : I V IT • , prosthetic see above p. 2 ; ']'1]''1B (after the form ')V?'n) is to be derived from tTiB 11. to hear (which see). The Aram. N"''nis, Talm. N'l'llEN, Syr. J^ios &c. is more general, and in the Song of Sol. the word is merely adopted out of the north- Palestine dialect. D'^IBN (formed as a plural from a singular noun '''nBi!<='^'nE: fruit, posterity) 1. n. p. of the second son of Joseph. Gen. 41, 52, Hos. 13, 15 already point to the correct derivation from rt^s (so ITT ^ too Hos. 14, 9 and other places; 4, 16; and 10, 11 there appears to be even an allusion to the noun fTiB) ; conseq[uently the N is prosthetic and the plural is chosen on account of the collective idea, as in the proper names di'ttilfi, nilai, niN'^'frtMand others. Adopted as a son of Jacob Gen. 48, 13 seq. he became the head of a warlike, powerful and numer- ous Israelitic tribe Num. 1,33; Josh. 17., 14 ; Judges 8, 1 ; 12, 1-6, which received the most fruitful territory at the division of Palestine Josh. 16, 5; 17, 8; Hos. 9, 13. After the separation of the kingdom Ephraim formed the centre of Israel, which was then poetically termed by the pro- phets Ci^'iBN Is. 7, 2; Hos. 4, 17 &c. 'N -np Jos. 17, 15; 19, 50; 24, 30 was called the northerly mountain of Pales- tine ('Ebal, Gerizim &c.), as the southern wasiiTitr; llrt 11,21; and after Ephraim in its rivalry with Judah laid claim to the national name Israel, this phrase is interchanged with bs'lto'; 1p (which see). 'N 'n?l 2 Sam. 18, '6 is the name of a forest district on the east bank of the Jordan in the vicinity of Gilead 17, 26, and is probably a continuation of the course of the woody mountains of Ephraim. Inasmuch as 'ij in the pro- phets was a periphrasis for the kingdom of the ten tribes Is. 9, 8; 17, 3; 28, 3 (a ■; 'IBS "by 7, 2 in Ephraim i. e. in the kingdom of the ten tribes) Hos. 4, 17, so 'N 'n^lB 2 Kings 14, 13 was the name of the gate on the north side of Jeru- salem, elsewhere also called Ta!J?S l^ttj Jbk. 37,13 ; Zech.14,10, about wtere the Damascus gate (Bohinson II. 177) now is. — 2. n. p. of a city 2 Sam. 13, 23, identical with ']';'1B5» (which see) 2 Chr. 13, 19 K'ri, 'EqiQatii or 'EcpQsn John 11, 54 in the neighbourhood of the wilder- ness of Judah, and with ^EqsQwv in Euseb. (under the word), 8 miles from Jeru- salem, in the neighbourhood of Bethel {Jos. Jewish wars 4,9,9): originally it is not at all connected with our D';'nSN. The designation of a proper name by a derivative of n^s is very suitable, since ■''IB Gen. 30, 2, Deut. 7, 13 is so used; comp. the proper name Kaqnog (D"''nSN) 2 Tim. 4, 13. ''""' lD"lDi^ (pi. iS"'D-) .4mm. gent. masc. r ; IT -; i"T ' name of the inhabitants of a state CnSN in Assyria, whence colonists were brought to Samaria Ezr. 4, 9. Accord- ing to £ashi: Persians, consequently it is equivalent to "'D'lB, pi. N^J&'iB Dan. 6, 29 K'ri, with k "prostheti'cJ " Others have sometimes thought of the Parrhasii in eastern Media, sometimes of the in- habitants of Prusias (Cellarius on Pliny >DD"lDi< 139 b^)i^ ep. 10, 85) or JF^ma-bora (Amm. 1, 23) &c.; but tie question cannot be decided according to the evidence that exists. 00155:? (and ■'SnD-) Aram. gent, m. name of an Assyrian tribe, probably the Pa/ratahenians between Media and Persia (Herod. 1, 101) Eze. 4, 9; 5, 6. i^nOISK see ■'SDIBN. 1- : - : - -: i : : -. n*lS>i (fruit, posterity) 1. n. p. m. eq[uivaient to a^^SN, with which it coittcides in signification (from in'is). Hence comes the Gentile m. "^niSN 1 Sam. 1, 1 belonging to the tribe of Ephraim (in Josephus z^s 'EtpQat/iov nXijgovxiag) Judges 12,5; 1 Kings 11,26. — 2. with d of motion iirTiSN {to ^Ephrath) n. p. of the Ephraimite district Ps. 132, 6; we should here understand especially nSilS, asbylS"! mto is meantQ-'^yi nilp. — 3. {fruitfulness) n. p. of a wife of Caleb 1 Chkon. 2, 19, pronounced also iin'iSN 2, 50; 4, 4; from her along with her husband Caleb a place was called nn'iBN :ib3 2, 24, which is probably identical with n'iBN 4. — 4. n. v. of a IT : V •* city in Judah which is elsewhere called Btib riia Gen. 48, 7, with a, of motion nn^^?N'"35, 16-19; 48, 7; Euth 4, 11; LXX in an appendix to Josh. 15, 59. Poetically the close union of QnbTT'a fWlSN Mio. 5, 1 has become one name. I it: ■' ' Hence is derived the Oentile "'ri'lBN 1 Sam. 17, 12; plur. D"'n'i&sj Etjth i,'2 i. e. belonging to 'Ephrath = Bethlehem. See nis 2. it: riDi^ (not used) a stem assumed for rsia (which see); but it comes from ns'' (which see). DnSJ? (old Persian) Aram. m. only in EzR. 4, 13, according to the context: income, revenue, as Bashi, Ibn '^Esra and others take it; but without a certain derivation, since Pehlevi afdom i. e. end gives no suitable sense. DiJi^ (not used) intr. 1. transposed from ysN to shine, glitter. Hence the proper name liaiaN. — 2. eq[uivalent to SIB I? to hear, to attend to something. Hence the proper name fSSNi. •jiiaSN! (splendour viz. of God, from aits 1.) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 7, 7, for which, however, in 8, 3 'Tlf;i''ai« occurs in a sense almost the same. IHISN (hearing viz. of God, from a^N 2.) n. p. m. Gen. 46, 16, for which the nearly synonymous '^i'tiS Numb. 26, 16 occurs. JJaSN (with suf.-^^^-, pi. nisa-, from J>5^ with N prosthetic) f. finger, Lev. 4, 6; Song op Sol. 5, 5, particularly the forefinger, which one dips into any- thing Lev. 9, 9; Numb. 19, 4; 'N nbffl Is. 58, 9 to stretch out the finger, by way of mocking (comp. Persius 2, 33 ; Martial 2, 28, 2; Plant. Pseudol. 4, 7, 45, and Ar. »l«a); 'Ni fTnin Prov. 6, 13 to point at with the fingers, i. e. to seek to injure by mysterious hints. 'N , how- ever, is transferred a) to the hand ge- nerally Is. 2, 8; Peov. 7, 3; Ps. 8, 4; D'^ri'bN 'N Ex. 8, 15; 31, 18 the hand of God i. e. God's power, God Himself, comp.DEUT.9,10;LuKEll,20; h)finger- breadth, as a measure, the fourth part of a nab Jbe. 52, 21; c) with Q'jba'n 2 Sam. 21, 20 toe, comp. Saxtvlo?. The stem is S>a3t I. (which see) to catch, take, as finger in German is from fangen; ■' of - " » the noun in Arabic is )t-^\, (**^].i ySSN Aram. f. the same, Dan. 5, 5, and 'toe 2, 41 ; in the Mishna, the Hifil ^lasri to stretch out the finger, comes from it. 1^5^ (not used), part. D^^IJIN, only a Samaritan orthography for D"'SN Ex. 5, 13; perhaps for aiJtiN = d-iltN.^ b'^SX (constr. pi. ib-iaS; from bSTN) m. 1. prop, corner, end, where a thing is broken off, hence the extremity, y"!]N!i 'N Is. 41, 9, parallel 'Nrt niS)?, Symm.' aynmv, as also y")|>. (tfom ys]?) actually appears in a similar metaphorical way. — 2. only in pi. Ex. 24, 11 (comp. v. 9) separated, selected, LXX imlsxroi, noble. b^)i^ 140 nb'ni^ fiomp. B^^"''!? in this signification from ITS , and at "a later period in a religious sense D''«311S) Pharisees; comp.Ar. J^^l. Perhaps also connected with significa- tion 1, much like M3S &c. Pheni- oian (Mass. 4 6 7 &c.)"n'b^1 = n1bii£1 definite pieces of the sacrificial animal, from 'bl!:i = bliN. 1" T 1" T p-'Sfri ipl- constr. 'h'^lli^) m. 1. joint, of the arm Ez.13,18 i. e. the knuckles, elbows, and perhaps the shoulder-joints, hence it is there used according to the versions and interpreters like HBt? as a designation of measure, comp. Syr. U^j*. — 2. in architecture: a wall of union 41, 8, where we should probably read !:ib''SN instead of iib". — The deriva- tion is from bSjtN, because signif. 1 originally denotes the joint or knot, which binds together the upper and lower part of the arm; as also !li2t< has proceeded from the same point of view; comp. Targ. pa'iN=Hebr. 'b''5iN. nb'^SN (jpZ- ni^'^liN) f. 1. equivalent to b'^SN 1 : arm- or shoulder-joint, either where the upper and lower arm or where the arm and shoulder join, Jee. 38, 12, Targ. "')?a'iN. — 2. as a measure like n73N Ez. '41, 8, or like ^STN 2 an ex- pression in architecture, if rtbiSN should not be the reading there. y'^^ to separate, divide, take away, take out, la TibstNl Num. 11, 17 / will take out of i. e. take away from, which the Sam. codex reads "'Fibstil (LXX aifslslv); to refuse, withdraw, take away, EccLES. 2, 10; with b of the person GrBN. 27, 36 to select for one, i. e. to reserve, which again the Samar. codex gives b"'SJl , cognate in sense to b'^'iart. In Ez. 42, 5 some read as the 3 future of Kal iblti'' = ibiti*'' for ibsi^ theu take I : I I ; I 1:1 ^ away, which is not necessary. Deriva- tives b"'itN!, bl£N in the proper name Irt^j^SN, and the proper name bia? 1- Nif. bKNi to he separated, spoken of space Ez. 42, 6. Hif. b-'itsfl (only in fut. bltsv; = "bSiip) to "take away, Ntjmb. 11, 25, with la , but for which the Samar. co- dex reads bsy. The stem bSN "to tear away, tear loose, to take away" is connected in its organic root with the roots in bS"5, bit's, bl25-5 &c. and has its analogies in the dialects. bSK (constr. bltN) m. distinguished, IT T, * 1 :' see *ilnj;b¥N.. xiJi^ (not used) to lean upon, attach oneself to, to incline to, proceeding from the fundamental signification of binding, attaching, Ar. JJoj to bind together, Jl»oT root, jL«of to make firm. The org root is bit"N, which is also found in 1" T ' , , bit-5> (which see), bu5-N &c.; Ar. JJac to incline to, JkJj, Jof to hold fast to- gether &c. Hence biti} and the proper name b^N 2. Fih. bsiS* only in the derivat. b''5tN, nb^iuN. IT • - PSN (noble, choice, frombSis) l.n.p. m. i'Chb. 8, 37; in pause bit» 8, 38. — 2. {slope, declivity, from bSS) proper name of a place Zech. 14, 5, not far from t3'''^l:i-i5 or ilH-Niii, both in the neigh- r T I" r T 1" ' ° bourhood of Jerusalem; iDut it is uncer- tain, whether b^N is here identical with bttNrt n'^a Mic'!' \, 11. VI.. T 1" ' P2N (with su/f. ibSij) m. 1. properly slope, ^eclivity, then side, comp. Ar. _njs (mod. Hebrew 'iBp) -side, district, from is to bind (itiS)?); particularly bSSja at the side of 1 Sam. 20, 41 ; 1 Kings 3, 20; Ez.40, 7; but like iJEiba it can be taken here as a preposition at the side of, near (comp. the French de chez). — 2. a prepos. beside, at, by, Gen. 41, 3; Lev. 1, 16; 1 Sam. 5, 2 &c., as other prepositions of the same meaning have proceeded from the fundamental signi- fication side in the noun. — 3. {declivity, slope) n. p. of a place in 'NH rT'S Mic. 1, 11, perhaps identical with bstN Zech, 14,5. '"' FT' ?Sii {distinguished is Jah) n. p. m, 2 Chr! 34; 8. D^^ 141 ^«"ls^^ Dlfi^ (not used) equivalent to b^V to be strong, firm, powerful, hence DSSi (strength, power viz. of God) n. p^m. 1 Chr. 2, 15 25. ."ni?SN f- eq[uivalent to !T15»J£ step- chain, aiMe-chain or -ornament, comp. Lat. pedica; then metaphorically arm- land, arm-ornament, bracelet. Numb. 31, 50, 2 Sam. 1,10, on account of similarity in shape. It is possible, however, that 'N should be derived from 1^^ = 15J5> (arm) in the signification of arm-band, like the Ar, Juaft, and the stem would be l^it (which see) = Ax. tX^i^. "l5f 5? (not used) tr. to bring together and shut up, comp. Ar. -«al to bind firmly together and to bring into a heap; by transference to bind together. Hence ISiN and denom. ^ISN , Nif. lltNi , Hif.TiaNH, and the proper name 'nitN. "llf K "*• ^^^^1 pnnce, either = Sans- krit tschara or the Zend, qara; only in the proper name lltN'niB. "iSS m. equivalent to -^istN , only in the proper names ISSNid, "iSNlIJba, r v:- I : ISN {union) n. p. m. Gen. 36, 21 ; Ar. ^\ covenant. TPtWi (rare) properly adj. m. very glowing, sparkling, bright-coloured; then as a substant. carbuncle Is. 54, 12. From fTl)j (which see). ij?}< (rare) epicene: roe, roe-buch or doe Detjt. 14, 5, according to the Targ., Ar., Syr. wild goat or wild roe; formed from lil^N = lijjSN from p5N! 1 = pSS Ar. {^^^Xs. (the Sam. codex reads 1)?^), so called from its slender, narrow neck; comp.Ar.^jLlfi, Talm. Np, NjSN stag, roe. Perhaps pN (pp.N) equivalent to •iJf, of similar signification, should be assumed as the stem. pp^ (not used) see ij^N. IK (c. ^N , as T from 1^ ; from N^N 1 ; not used) m. strong man, hero, giant. particularly of the supreme Ba'al in the mythology of the Phenicians, Babylo- nians &c. , hence in compound proper names of deities, persons, localities &c. e. g. 5>|5'1N = by^'lN (which see), the Phenician Hercules, i. e. Ba'^al as a wrestler and hero; Arbel-us (Vja'lN), pre- decessor of Ninus among the Assyrians (Beros. p. 61), who is otherwise called Arbyl-as (Glycas p. 244), i. e. V^a'iN; 'AqiaXsvg (Excerpt in Etym. magnum under Gades), i. e. Archal (b^'ii?) or ArcholQyyytSt), as a Phenician name of Hercules, the vanquishing giant (comp. the Hebr. proper names bsv, bsiii^ with nibS''). See ■'IN and Vn'^N, \kl»', N'iN.. nk see liN. i^'ni? I. (not used, a stem assumed IT T ^ for the proper name N'HN , for 'IN , bs'lN , bfi'lN, the proper name "'bN'lN) intr. to be strong, powerful, courageous. The or- ganic root N-1N is also found in "iN'i (which see), n-'lN &c., comp. aQ-siv to make strong, hence '^Aqrig, the powerful one, Mars; aqsiog valiant. ^"li^ n. (not used) intr. to bum, IT T ^ glow; the organic root is N-1N, which is found in "IN (IIS*), 'iN-n and with " i '" T • a stronger guttural sound m !l-^n, with which also rt-IJ IT. is cognate. Hence b-'NIN, bi!«''lNVbf?'lN. r :- ' I" ■-:■ i" •-: K"lN (^iT^NIi*. Jah is power) n.p.m. 1 Chr7 7, 38. ''■ b''N1K m. hearth, Ez. 43, 15 K'tib, out of silN (from N'nN H.) with the ter- vnr ^ ITT '_ minationb''-, comp. Ar. ii\ t hearth. The LXX read aqiil (bN'^'nSi), which the K'ri also prefers, and in fact Isaiah 29, 1 has also the same for b''N'iN , perhaps to allude to hero of God. See bN'nii. bN"lNl (not used) a collateral form of bs'lN , which is only in the proper name ''bs'lN. ^N-nS: m. only in pi. C)''bN'llS! Is. 33, 7 according to some mss., in the sense of hero. This form is used in Tahnudio in the meaning angel. But our text has Vn'in. !?«nx 142 D1« ^H*1iJ (with suff.' laVs'lij) m. strong, powerful, hero, collect.: heroism, distin- guishedls. 33, 7, formed fromN'nN (n'^n) and the noun-ending h- (after the form hwz), which is attested besides by the doubling of the I; hence also Sa'^adia l» g*'^XJ (their nobles). On account of the rareness of the word with such a suffix some mss. abeady read dibit'iN or fiibiJ'lN ; the Targ. Symm.Theod'.Aq." re- solve it intoQrtb InN'iN, and others have taken it for 5N ilSt. But if the former acceptation hardly merits consideration, the latter is liable to the objection that a shortening of I'lN into IN , or a doubling of Z in bN for PN, is without analogy. See ?iS'''n4«. It is an old explanation of this word to derive it from bi*^, like the Ar. JU to go quickly, so that bs'lN = "^Jisba in the same verse, whence also bN'ii? angel in the Talmud may be explained; but the assumption of such a Hebrew stem has no secure basis. ^SilN see bNi'iN. ,'- •-•• '" —■ ''l5^^'^Sl {heroic, valiant) n. p. m. Gen. 46, 16; Numb. 26, 17; patronym. ^bN'nN for ■'I'.bN'lN' in the latter place. D*li< I. (fut. ihlSi) tr. 1. to hind, at- tach, weave, only in the figure: to weave plots, xaxa qantsiv, to lurh, with b Dbtjt. 19, 11; Ps. 59, 4: or with b? of tlbe per- son Judges 9, 34; Job 31,''9; also with the accusative of that for which one lies in wait Pkov. 12, 6; or absolutely lurk- ing to reconnoitre Judges 9, 32; Pbov. 7, 12; Job 31, 9. Participle :i'ni« a lier in wait. Josh. 8, 2 12 14 &c.,' but also collect, the Hers in wait, of an army. Judges 20, 33', if ap> be not here a collective form like 15N. Derivatives y^^, i'ni*, na'lN, i^Na and perhaps apN. — 2. (not used) to join together in a row (huts), hence the proper names =1:)!? . '^y.. , ^sa'lN , nia'iN^. — 3. (unused) to lattice, shut up; hence rtSl'nN. IT \—: Pih. Spiji , only mpart. tr^'^yxn- lurhers. Hers in wait, with bs Judges^ 9, 25. Hif. (only a'l.il, according to Kimchi for aiN"! or i-iN^T in Pihel after an usual manner of contraction) to lay wait 1 Sam. 15, 5. As the Hifil does not appear elsewhere, the LXX and Vulg. have read iHN/iJ, Targ. ':j'"lS*y and some mss.(Kenn. Ill; Eossi 715'j Tnp. But we may abide by the textual reading. The stem SIN is in Arab, o^t (to ^ i-' ^ bind), for the figurat. sense Vjf) Syr. ^s'f (to bind), whence lisjf a bulrush, juncus; and as in bflS, bt &c., in Ar. ^,MoandiJLa>, Grv.SoXov Qdmsiv&c.^Q above ideas are connected; in addition to which Ojt, whence &s^\ (twist), may be compared. The organic root is i'n"N , which is also found in C]'n &c. In ad- dition to this original signification the verb also meant, according to the deri- vatives: to grate up, to enclose, hence JiSi'lS*; it was used moreover of the clos- ing 'o'f the hand- or finger-joints, hence Ina'iN, and of the binding or putting to- gether of huts, hence S'lN, S'njs; 3 and 4 (court) and bsa'IN &c. But stems have been assumed for some of these deri- vatives (which see) that belong perhaps to other groups. D'HilJ n. (not used) to browse, see iia'iN. IV :- a^^S! m. 1. a lying -in- wait, lurking or amhusJi Job 38, 40. — 2. place of lying-in-wait where animals lurk in ambush, covert 37, 8, parallel nsisa; yet the latter may also be derived"from signification 3. — 3. (not used) court- yard, village, prop, an union of huts or houses (comp. ISSi) from a'ist I.; hence the proper name bsa'nN. — 4. {couri) proper name of a city where one of David's heroes was born, whence the Gentile ■'S'^t? 2 Sam. 23, 35; perhaps equivalent "to lis. n'ljl as a collect, see a'lN I. r. TT nnN (with suff. ia'^N, d|a'lN) m. 1. cun- ning plots, laying wait for Jee. 9, 7; Hos. 7, 6. — 2. ground-form of haiN^ IT t: I Dn^^ 143 yD1« D15< (court) n. p. of a city in the tribe of Judah Josh. 15, 62; comp. aiN 4. viv ^^^^'^Nl (EI's court) l. proper name of a hamlet in upper Galilee in the tribe of Naphtali, between Sepphoris (i^is^) and Tiberias (isi'iaia), nine Eo- man miles from Legio (Euseb. sub voce; IMaco. 9,2; Jos. Antiq. 12, 11, 1; 14, 15,4; Bell. Jud. 1, 16 ; Vit. 37 66), which is called in the Mishna ba'lN (hence the Gentile iba']N Aboth 1, 10; n|S)?a Tsa^N Jer. Ta'^anit 69 b ; comp. besides rriVsi^ JiND &c.). This is said to be the 'N ni| Hos. 10, 14 -which IMbffl or "iDNSJibilS is said to have laid waste when he first invaded Israel. — 2. n.p. of a city in Assyria in the neighbour- hood of Qaugamela (bM-l'^a camel-hump), to. "AQ^rfka in Strabo (16, 1, 3), Jj,"]^ in Abulfeda, known from Alexander's vic- tory there, to which Arbela some refer Hos. 1. c. — biS was employed in forming the names of places by all Semites (see above p. 91); on a'lN see the word. nS'lN (after the form rt^BSt) m. a locust, especially that species which ap- pears in swarms (gryllus gregarius) Ex. 10, 4 14 19; Judges 6, 5 ; Jo. 1,4, men- tioned with ai>bD, asn, Va'nn, b'^sn, , IT : T ' IT T ' I : - ' I* T ' SM, p))'}_ as a peculiar kind, yet some- times employed generally. According to Ibn 'Esra and Kimchi 'N is developed out of iiai, because they appear in numerous flights; biit agreeably to the analogy of '01S\ , yon, pb"! &c. the stem may be i'ls n. to browse upon, to tear off (comp. Ax. >-Jjift to eat off), whose organic root STN is also found in tlTti, t\1 &c. niDIN (from ^liH ; only in plur. constr. IT t: T ^ ... , 7 J Jr niaMNi) /. prop, noose, hence figuratively plot. Is. 25, 11: and he causes Ms pride to sink together with the plots of his hands (i. e. which his hands have formed). But Kimchi also adduces the signification wrist, Ar. v-9«l joint, from i'lN I. to join to. Jos. Kimchi adopts for the pre- sent form the singular S'lN, and the constr. pi. niaiN like rriSI.*! from "Hs, ; but ^ * I : T I I T ' V ( 1 the singular is more probably rta'lN. na'nx ipi. nia-, with suff. ort'Tibiis) f. prop, the latticed, enclosed, hence generally window e. g. of heaven, flood- gate, from which the rain is said to flow down Gen. 7, 11; 8, 2; dove-cote Is. 60, 8; chimney or hole for the smoke Hos. 13, 3; all these senses from a^N I. ' ' l-T ni3"1N. (from ahs ; court) n. p. of a place in the tribe of Judah 1 KraGS 4, 10, in the neighbourhood of iibfe in the plain of Judah on the Philistine bor- der. Comp. the proper names a'lN, a'lN. J^S'n^ (abridged from b^a"!?*; giant- Bdal or Bdal-Heroules) 1. proper name of the progenitor of the giants in Phenician and Babylonian mythology, also the founder of the oldest cities; hence — 2. proper name of the ancient city ']i';iari (comp. Num. 13, 23), the old Phenician 3>a'iN n;;'ij? i. e. city of Arldal Gen. 23, 2; 'Josn.'is, 54; 20, 7, on which account i'a'iNJn n^'l^ might be used also (comp. ^'^a n:i'nl?)"NEH. 11, 25. — The stripping off of the b- or b- from b5>a or bsa exists in Phenician -I- 1" : , (comp. the proper name 5>aiN'] = p?aiN^ 'lo^ag, Juba, i. e. Ba'^al is loveliness, viz. «ii«i = W3) and in Hebrew (comp. proper nam'e yailJN =b5>a«5N); and 'IN as the first member of the compound is in any case to be regarded as the con- struct of IN (= '''i^X siiioe it appears as the name of a deity with biS'^^N (which see). See IN. ' IT JJSI.i^ (i. e. D^'l with N prosthetic; fern. Wa'iN, c. n^a'iN, with suff. tinf^'lN; ^Z.talien as ten ti'''5?"a'nN ; dual expressing manifoldness D':Fi?a-iN fourfold; other derivatives from 3>a'7 are ■'^''a'n, S^h, Sa*!) the cardinal number four, put be- fore a noun in the plural Gen. 23, 16, Jer. 49, 36, or put after it Josh. 19, 7. Since the numbers from 3 to 10 are properly nouns of multitude, the fem. sing, was considered a collective, and stood accordingly even before masculine i?nn« 144 ]):ii^ nouns, both in the status constructus and as an adverb -without the construct state. At a subsequent period the masculine ■was used as an adjective with a fem. noun, and the fem. with a masculine noun, Gen. 14, 9 ; Judges 9, 34. Seldom does the number stand alone, where the noun is to be supplied, Prov. 30, 24: four things. In the genitive placed after the noun it denotes in the enume- ration of numbers: fourth Zech. 7, 1. Joined to ito masc, inlfeS fem., fiVii^m stands with the former Gen. 46, 22, i>aiN with the latter 2 Chbon. 13, 21. The plural means forty, which is fol- lowed by the noun in the singular Gen. 5, 13; 7, 4, and which is often applied in Scripture as a round, symbolical number Num. 14,33 34; 32,13; Deut. 2, 7 and elsewhere, comp. Matth. 4, 2. The Aegyptians, Arabians and Persians also take 40 for a round number (e. g. tsehil mindr = 40 towers , spoken of the ruins of Persepolis). But in IKinqs 5, 6 S'-yaiN stands for nya'iN 2 Che. 9, 25. I- T ; - - 1- : - ' The stem 5>a'l appears to be a pri- mitive word for the number four; but neither has the connexion of it with a Mediterranean root nor its derivation from the Semitic been yet discovered. Various derivatives from Sa^N may be seen under i>5'i. Hence the 'denumeral (verb derived from a numeral) i'S'n to make or be four-sided, four- cornered, from which the 'part. pass. »ia'n m., wi'n f., d^y^'n pi. four-sided or cornere/iik. 27, l;' 28, 16; 30, 2. Comp. the Ar. »j» to be foured, «j . to form four. — J^h. 5>a'n to be fourfold; part. S>|n'i?3 (fem. nv^'ya i' plur. iTiSSi'^??) foursquare' 1 Kings T, 31, almost like -R T yan^jt (f., Wa'iN m.) Aram, four Dan. 3, 25;' 7, 2 3 V i7. Jli^ (fut. ans-i, in the ulterior for- mation "^.'iNin) tr. to plait, the hair in locks JxnsGES 16, 13; to weave, of the spider Is. 59, 5, then to weave generally, hence apN a weaver Ex. 28, 32; 35, 35, /W. Tii'-jii 2 Kings 23, 7; plur. masc. ti''{!''nJ«IsVl9,9, b'^a'^iN 'niJa (see liia) ISam.17,7; 2 Sam. 21, 19; 1 Che. 20, 5 a weaver's beam, with which the shaft of a spear was usually compared. De- rivatives a'nN, tS'iN and also, according to some, a^i'a from iltxis. ^ The stem apN is in Ar. _^l, only that it appears there in the signification "to weave cunning, to excite discord", Coptic ep'x, wpx to shut up close to- gether. The organic root is a^-N, which is also found in aTto, modified TtTM; r t' ir t ^ with relation to the Mediterranean, arc- ere, uQUX-fti, Lat. aranea = aracnea (comp. lumen from lucmen) have been compared. S'lN m. 1. prop.^jZaiY, texture, 'Nln ^n^ weaver's pin, reed. Judges 16, 14; — 2. shuttle, prop, the weaving hither and thither, to this side and that side, Job 7,6. na'n!!^ see aa'iN. it : - I ! 23'!^* 1. (^S'l with N prosthetic; the very stony, from iai = Qa'i) proper name of a territory in Bashan on the other side of Jordan with 60 cities (T^NJ n'rin), over which aV reigned Deut. 3, 4 13 14; 1 Kings 4, 13. According to the Tar- gum it is identical with the later pro- vince Trachonitis (Sjii^Cp, rQuxa}vTug = the stony) — the name being merely a Greek translation of the Hebrew — , now called ie^a (^Mz-cH. 1. 195), which suits the state of the ground well. But it may have also embraced at times Gau- lanitis (G'olan), Auranitis &c. The city and fortress 'Puya§a, beyond Jordan (sa*!) in Jos. (Anti(j. 13, 15, 5), the xoj/t^ 'AQy6§, 15 Roman miles west of Gerasa (Euseb. Onomast. under lAqyof) and in Eusebius' time named 'Egyd^a, (aa'^s), the aa"! of the Mishna and Talmud, are ITT , > probably identical merely in derivation. — 2. (heap, number') n. p. of a man of distinction under Pekah 2£jngs 15, 25. 'JIS'lNl nebr. «adi Aram. m. equivalent to IMS'lN (which see), from which it originated, Dan. 5, 7 16 29; 2Chb,2,6. Tjnx 145 n5^ I'SnH (s'lN with an old termination T-) m. chest, boa;, only in ISam. 6, 8 11 15, from a'lN to shut up. On the final ad- ditions of sibilants see '0"'-::3?, i»-a'iri, lB''-a^t! &o. ; for arg- eomp, area, oq x-avij (hedge), arx &c. ']'i'iN is formed agree- ably to a similar view. 'IXJS'IN Jn. 1. purple-muscle, indigenous to the Phenician and Laconian coasts, itoQ(fVQa, purpura, from which the red purple is prepared, distinguished from the muscle of the blue purple (nban). Elegant locks are compared to the form of the purple-muscle Song OP Sol. 7, 6. — 2. Usually it appears only with relation to the colour of a material, as we have to understand in Ez. 27, 7 16 the purple-muscles brought from the Grecian coasts, beside nbsn; hence: stuff s coloured with red purple,, which, fabricated by the Tyrians, were exported to all quarters Ex. 26, 1; 27, 16; 28, 6, fully with njjn Num. 4, 13 or '''jast Judges 8, 26; generally it stands with nbsFi, yis, 'Tjsb, iBtiS, h'^'n^'z &c. a3 a precious cloth. In Aramaean arose out of this old Hebrew and Phenician form,')lS'i8, Syr. P%ji (with change of the a into 1, eomp. rtHFi, Aram. WiFi), which form passed over to the Arabs (.\j\f?-\ I), Persians ((jU^;0 and others. Hence every derivation leading up to '\V,^^ (from .H-iN and "JV, from dpN and 115, from 113 'and 'IN or a"!!!* and \^i) 'JJ .. 'it: I : :- 'it:-' should be rejected a priori, as also every derivation from a foreign language (Sanskrit rdgavat, coloured, furnished with colour). As "]- is a usual noun- ending and N prosthetic appears else- where, the stem can only be DS"! IT. (which see) of the same meaning as fi)?"!; eomp. Ti'a'ii^ and Arabic A^j variegated marble. See DS'n H. Tli< (not used) intr, to proceed from, le descended from, a secondary form of Til J as I's and NS frequently run into one another. Hence the proper names lilN and JT'IN (i. e. Tin, equivalent to Tn^';; descent, concrete sprout) n. p. m. Gen 46, 21; Num. 26, 40; patronymic ipN Num. 26, 40. The change into IIN 1 Chk. 8, 3 appears to have arisen from con- founding the last two similar letters. liTlN (descendant, from Tin) n.p. m. 1 Chb! 2, 18. nii^ I. (not used) intr. equivalent to N'HNI. to he powerful, strong, courageous; hence '''IN, In^^i'iN, bs'^'iN I. and perhaps also the noun 'IN. The organic root tl-IN is also in Mediterranean. IT T m{^ n. (not used) intr. equivalent to N'lN n. to burn, glow, eomp. IN (IIN), N^n"(in bN'ifi) and !Tn; (Num. 21, 30), with a harder guttural 'n'l'n, Ar. (^.1 to glow, compared with ^^\{ to make hot, »! to kindle &c., and in Mediter- ranean areo, ardeo, uro &c. Hence bNl'HN 2. I" •-: mt^ in. (poet.) tr. to pluck, to pull, in order to gather in, with the accusative Song op Sol. 5,1; to pluck off, of the vinestock Ps. 80, 13 ; eomp. Aethiop. ^IN to pluck, TIN to reap, in Mediterranean aiQ-siv. The nouns np.N and !l,';'i.N, JTlIN cannot, however, Ise' derived from IT"—! this word, since a connexion of the verb with stall, hurdle, crib, is not natural. rn^ rV. (not used) tr. to knot, to T IT ^ ' ^-^ plait, to fit together &c. eomp. Ar. ;5>t; hence nipN, rt^'iN, ti^pN. (rt^^lN) and ^'^^ (pronominal stem) Aram, inter j. see! Dan. 7, 2 7 13. i- is the old abridged plural form for d1-, as in iVn. (which see), iVn (see !iVn), and as in the Targ. Q'l'nN, which appears for I'iN. as a conjunction. Aramaean "IN is like the Hebrew bN a pronominal stem of mul- tifarious senses, of which also traces axe found in 'n-llJN and other words; and these stems ''are different only dia- 10 ■n« 146 n« lectically; as tlie Coptic ptonominal stem ?iew is connected witli po, ep, and is also in use there as a pronominal stem. li^Nl (posterity, from 'I'lN) n. p. m. Num. 26, 17; Gentile I'li^N Gen. 46, 16. 11 "IN (ll'l with N prosthetic; refuge or place of refugees) 1. n. p. of the ninth son of Canaan, hut only as a Gentile ■''II'INI GrBN. 10, 18, i. e. the Phenician race of the Aradians on the mainland, and the state Aradus or Antaradus, now Buad ('iljj), sloping over against the island-state. The Jerusalem Targum, therefore, renders "^ITlN hy ''N5''liia3N, to which Maratus, Mariamne, the road- stead Carnos&c. belonged; see ^S'^N. — 2) proper name of the Phenician island- state Aradus (Jer. Meg. ch. 1 D'ni'n ="nN), founded by Sidon through the instru- mentality of refugees (Strabo 16, 2, 13), whose inhabitants were skilful seamen and yaliant warriors Ez. 27, 8 11; IChr. 1, 16. Aradus to the south of Carmel (Scylax peripl. 104), the island Aradus near Crete (Pliny h. n. 4, 20) and those in the Persian gulf (Strabo 16. p. 766. 784) were colonies of this tribe. InArabic appear the forms i>fy , lt>Ujt, S^.^y, to- day the island is called Suad. The stem is 'ii'n (which see, and where the Phenician forms are also to be found). imiN (= rtTiN according to the Ara- IT t: I-.. ^ IT tt; O maean obscuration of the o- sound; plur. ni'lN ^ni^N, Only in constr. n'TiN, for which there is also ni;''lN) fern', prop, hedging, hurdlework, from !ilN IV.; hence manger, crib; more definitely 1 Kjngs 5, 6 ; 2 Chr. 9, 25 ; 32, 28 ^tall, or more correctly horse-stand, each horse having his own crib and place; as also praesepe denotes stall. Aram. N'^'TN for DliS? in the Targ. and for Btall;"plur. )VyA, constr. n^'ii^; Syr. ^io), Ar. ^^X ni'lii. (only in the transposed form 5TJ1N.) fern, crib, trough, 2 Che. 32, 28: and coves (i. e. indentations or recesses) to ihe cribs; consequently = nTnN.. TilX see iia. IT -T nS^li!* see ^•Dim. IT -: IT : -: h50*n&i| (from ai*!; height) n. p. of a city in the territory of Sichem Judges 9, 41, and perhaps equivalent to MUl'i (which see) or tia'in (which see also). d'^ailN K'tib, see Qist and-'M'lN and laiN.' r T-: 'ji'lN (also I'lN, constr. )'i'i^) fern. (m. only in 2 Sam. 6, 6 seq. 2 'Che. 8, 11) chest, box, for keeping things in, hence 1. mummy-case, sarcophagus, GtEN. 50, 26. The word is found in Coptic also; in the Jer. Targ. NMipDiba yXwaaoxoiisiov. — 2. money-chest or trunk for money gathered into it 2 Kings 12,10 11; comp. Talm. N^'il!« money- chest. — 3. Most frequently: the sacred ark where the two tables of the law were kept Ex. 25, 14 15 &c., for which also sometimes occur rTiyri 'N. Ex. 25, 22; i'^ ni'na 'n. Deut. id, '§; n'^'iaii 'N Josh. 3,'6;'i'^ 'ji'iN. 1 Sam. 5, 3 ; Q-'ii'^N 'n 2 Sam. 6,2. The Ar. jjl \ I and lO I ) 1 1 explained by ic3«.jL2, Targ. li'lN, Syr. i-Jo?) , are the same word, and that n is not radical is seen from the Talmudic N'^IIN money- iT : I "^ chest, NrT'lN fish-holder; we must there- fore assume ti'iiS IV. as the stem, in the ITT ' _ same sense as for ?1T1N &c., hence 'ji'lN is prop, fitted into each other, like area from arcere to enclose, to encompass. nailN n. p. m. 2 Sam. 24, 20 seq., for which JiSTiis stands in 20, 16. See T ;i — : ' T:r-: Tl^i (only part. pass. IIn) intrans. to be hard, firm, strong, Ar. \\\ to draw together, to be firm, \-jS-\ it is therefore identical with y"nt« , Ar. jjS j f in its funda- mental signification. The organic root is TVN- which is also found in yViS', TVJlr^p'Pj &c. Hence dil'nN Ez! 27, 24 firmly turned, firmly bound', spoken of the cords of thread (D'^ahs "'tS-O, which the Tyrians bought up as raw material in order to use them in weaving; if la''I'li?. should not be taken there in the n5< 147 n« sense of the cognate d'^tTd. (comp. y53N and Y^n)- Yet QinNmay te taken with greater probability' for a species of yam, and so be explained as a noun, like D^ban, d^idian and d-iahi •'HSi. Deri- vatives, the proper name Ti'iM and TIN (plur. dniN , constr. niN, with suffiai T'tlN.) m. cedar, so called from the firmness of its roots, whose tall (Is. 2, 13) and beautiful wood was used in temples 1 Kings 6, 9 &c., palaces 2 Sam. 7, 2, ships Ez. 27, 5, pillars Is. 44, 14, parti- cularly in tables 1 Kings 6, 18; and was also employed as a figure on account of its tallness and beauty, Num. 24, 6 ; Ez. 17, 23; 31, 8; Ps. 80, 11. Derived from T'lN this noun is found in all Semitic n dialects, and in some is even applied to every slender and high tree. This is to be explained as in the case of "jb ''N , which word also denoted originally a special tree. f\f^^ (from tijs) fern, cedar-wainscot- IT : - * V IV •' ' ing, cedar-work; Zeph. 2, 14: he has loosened the wainscoting (see 'n'-tS L); comp. ns». Q'^T'lS see TIN. mt? 1. intrans. prop, to direct or turn towards a certain quarter, hence to wander, to go, with W Job 34, 8 to walk with one; part. tl'lN a wayfarer, a guest (prop, equivalent to aaiO one that turns himself, goes about) Judges 19, 17; 2 Sam. 12, 4; Jer.14,8; dWN 1i>a 9, 1 a lodge of wayfarers. Derivatives fTl^) i^JJ'lN and the proper name fi'lN. — ' 2. (not used) trans, to direct, to deter- mine, to decree, appoint; derivative ^tltlN.. The fundamental signification of the stem 'N to turn oneself, direct, is con- nected with that of 'Tj'lN tendere, and the signification no. 2 is developed out of it. In Arabic ^J is principally applied to the turning and direction of time, therefore x^^t, a section of time, a turn of time, ^OjLs chronicle; the organic root, however, is tl'n'N and is closely related to that innTS, TtT!*, riTD &c. n^X {wanderer = n'lN) n. p. m. Eze. 2,5;'iChe.7,39. iT]i* (with suf/lai ip-^^; plur. nirTlN, constr. niliTlN , with suffix "'nh'iN , but also retaining Cholem in the sing. dniti'lN &c.) fern. prop, turning, direction, then 1. poet, path, way, literally Gen. 49, 17 ; Ps. 8, 9 ; 19, 6, or figuratively for walk, manner of life in all the senses of 'Tyi, e. g. »p 'N Ps. 119, 101; ^)?ll5 'N 119, 104; d-iTi 'k Prov.5,6; r:sii5M"'i! Is. 26, ' f - I ' ' IT : ■ I ' 8 &c. — 2. way, manner, Gen. 18, 11 the manner as of women i. e. their fluxus menstruus; yet it may also be taken here in the signification no. 2 of n'lN = prt i. e. monthly. — 3. comprehending the idea of time in inlN as a noun: l-T course, and then in the sense of lot, fate, condition Job 8,13. — 4. poet. : wayfarer^ as if for ni'N ^"'N &c. ; hence Ibn Koreish : JjUbAuJI L*jt (as nttj)?. and other words are so used) Job 31, 32, and so likewise in the plur. nifi'iN 6, 19, so that it al- most coincides with nin'ni* caravan. nii* (Ta.Tg.U'ViiH; plur.)n'-\^, constr. ntl", with suf/ia; ftinfTni?) Aram. fern. the same Dan. 4, 34; 5,23. Elsewhere this word in Aramaean frequently oc- curs for the Hebrew '^'Vl_. Sin^N {plur. niri", prop. part. fern. as a noun) fem. prop, the wandering, more definitely: company of travellers, caravan, troop Gen. 37, 25; Is. 21, 13. iinil!* (out of the masc. n"~ii<; from IT •-.-: '^ -IT' ri'lN 2 ; with suf. innns ) fem. appointed, measured out, dimensum (of food), hence like ph that which is allotted and set apart for nourishment, supply of food, support generally, Jbk. 40,5; lian 'N. 2 Kings 25, 30, Jer. 52, 34 a constant support; specially a dish or mess Prov. 15, 17 i. e. a definite portion once for all. ''IN (after the form -lib, ''bi:?, from ITlN I.; plur. niilN., only for lions made from metal melted and gilded over by art diji.'nN 1 Kings 10, 20, comp. d^^bit 6, 34 doors of gates, distinguished from triSb'S, ribs; yet niilN also occurs in it: ' ^ ■ T -: , this meaning and for image -work va. 10* b^^^^ 148 nnx ■ the shape of lions, 1 Kings 7, 29 36; 10, 19; 2 Chr. 9, 18 19) epicene, masc. a lion, prop, the powerful, courageous, aoEL-og, Num. 24, 9, as a figure of the rulers of the people Ez. 22, 25; along with S^ represented as a rending beast, sometimes fluctuating in form with In-'^N 2 Sam. 28, 20: Lament. 3, 10. The young lion is called ni'^IN. TiS Jer. 51, 38; 'N ^i&s Judges 14,^5. — ' ■'INS Ps. ' -: r : ' ■ r-:iT 22, 17 may stand for "'INriS as in Is. 38, 13 and be brought into connexion with "'?1Si)?!7 or ''515^0, hence: (they surround me) like a lion, in hands and feet; but neither the versions nor the Masora have so understood it. See 'INS. — Only the Aramaean (Targ.n;;'lN,1|i'iiS, Syr. l-«-5| , comp. Hesych. 'AgiotO- [iW^^] Tj Xsaiva. vftb J^VQcov; Zab. masc. N'^'IN, fern. NJiI'^'in) and Hebrew -Phenician dialects have preserved this word, from which, however, according to Ibn Koreish it has passed into the Berber (arier) and perhaps too into the Armenian {arriudz ) dialects. See In. IT '^^''1^. (•'^ defectively bN'iN.) masc. 1. hero (from ti'nN! I.) eq^uivalent to Vn'in , b-iN'HN, bN'lN, only in 2 Sam. 23, 20^ and 1 Chr. 11, 22, Targ. Nja'ia'n, in which sense it may either be but a secondary form of those nouns, so that one has not to take bN" for God; or it may be regarded as a compound of "''in and bfj and so translated hero of God i. e. great hero. More probably still biS'''nN. in the above places may be explained as a Moabite proper name {hero El); as the Phenician bSS'^'iN {Aryhas) also appears as a proper name of a Sidonian prince; and so the passage should be rendered: the two (sons) of 'Ariel in Moah, as Josephus seems to have understood it. b^i'iN (like by^'^'iN. in Sidon) being the name of the Moabite Hercules or Mai-s might very well become a proper name, especially since the land and metropolis of.Moab (LXX on Is. 29, 1; Theodoret on Is. 15, 1; 29, 1) were called "Ariel after this Moabite god, and the country about Areopolis (lA.riel) 'Aqirjlmg. — 2. {Sero "El) n.p. m. Ezr.8, 16, perhaps identical with bs'lN in the proper name ■'bs'iN Gen. 46, 16, as elsewhere many names (comp. bS'lN) have arisen out of a very old name of deity. — 3. An epithet of Jerusalem Is. 29, 1 2 7, i. e. the hero-city, the unconquerable, Aq. and Symm. }.sa>v d-Eov; but the Targ., Saadia and almost all Jewish interpreters take it in signification 4 (which see), and considering the passage Is. 31, 9, where Jerusalem is celebrated as a sacred hearth of the everlasting fire, it is more advisable to choose this signification. — 4. hearth, altar (Targ. NHS'im) Ez. 43, 15 16 K'ri, LXX aqii^}., where, how- ever, theK'tib has more correctly b'^N'IN (which see) ; according to the old inter- preters also Is. 29, 12 7. But though the Talmud (see Kimchi's Lexicon under the word) and all the ancient expositors look upon it as a compound, it is still very doubtful whether it should be taken as compounded of I'iN. and bN, and not rather as standing for b'^Ni'iN, Arab. if>f focus. See bN'ltl. The sacred hearth at Jerusalem with the everlasting fire might well be termed b''N1N or bsi'iN, and r : - J.. . - I that again be used for Jerusalem gener- ally. 1'11'lN (Persian) re. p. m. Esth. 9, 9, IdqiSalog, arising perhaps from the Zend. airja ("''IN.) and ddo ("''i) giving what is worthy. The abridgment of ddo into dai also exists in the proper name /lav- qjs'gvijs. See NH'T'IJ* (Persian) n. p. m. Esth. 9, FT T P -! ^ / X- J 8; formed from the Zend, airja-data. According to others from "''IN = ahura animating = Ormuzd, and data, or from Hari- (Vischnu-)dato. iliU'lNl (tl- is equivalent to the ter- mination rt-, comp. tTniB^) 1. epicene, masc. identical with i'^n' lion, 1 Kings 13, 24 &c., applied like the latter in manifold ways, without any distinction between them. — 2. (J,ion = hero) n. p. m. 2 Kings 15, 25 ; comp. 'jn'S , iij^b , yni^ , ni^a^ as proper names, the Phenician proper names I'lN {Aris, Arin Liv. 26, nn« 149 49; Cic. pro Scauro 14, 18), 'nn'ttJi'iN = n'nhia^i'iN (Aristo Liv. 34, 61; 'lAgi- (stasv Diod. 3, 41), as well as the use of the Arabic iXwl (lion), Pers. vUi, Turk. (jiLufjf, and the names of the lion in ■western languages. ni"1{< {plur. def. i.T\ Josh. 24, 31 &c. to live long, prop, to make the days long, gen- erally to last long, applied to a reign Prov. 28, 2; with the omission of QiM'' EcoLES. 7, 15; to continue long in the doing of evil 8, 12; to extend, leng- then Is. 54, 2 ; to cause to stretch out, i. e. to make long 1 Kings 8, 8; 2Chron.5,9. Figuratively: to abide, tarry Num. 9, 19 22, Ar. CJ^ t; to put off, to delay, e. g. 'Q^ anger Prov. 19, 11; Is. 48, 9; ffiBS feel- ing Job 6, 11. The organic root in 'rj1"N is connected with that in riTN, TITS' &c. With the 1- T ' ' r ^T Stem comp. the Ar. dCf and the Aram. ■^flS*, Syr. fi] &c. "1"1« t]'1>< Aram, equivalent to Hebr. 'Tj'iN ; whence' iiSIN. (not used) intr. 1. to be suited, adapted, prepared for, Targ. 'ri'iN , Ar. - t ,~, '" ■ iKI in d J. — 2. tr. to make suitable, to restore, rectify, calm, heal, Arab. C/^f, hence ilS'lN, in which sense the root is also found in Mediterranean. The fundamental signification would thus proceed from "to set to rights, to pre- pare", and would be connected with nitn. But since riNSI and lira pro- i-T \r \ : ' T , ceed from the fundamental sense to bind, and iiSf^. is spoken of the repairing of the breaches in walls (pia, yis) = NB'i, or of the restoration of the state, it seems more correct to find the original idea in binding, and so "^TN is = S^iN, Ar. (^^if &c. See, however, ^iStiN- "TTIN Aram, same as Hebr. 'rt^tn 1 to be suited, adapted, '^'''1^. (an extended form for '^'in) Ezr. 4, 14 with b. Tj'-lN adj. m., iiS^lN f. long Job 11, 9; enduring 2 Sam. 3, 1. 'n"it< (for which occurs in the ahsol. state 'Tj'nN, comp. )b'p^ and "jD]?; only in constr. '^f'liijt, like ^lUj^ Ex. 19, 18 from 1123S>, 13to PR0v.ll,i8 from'isto) adj. m. ' IT T ' V tV , IT T ' lo7ig : hence the combinations ^^^'r "1 v? Ez. 17, 3 long of wings i. e. long-winged; O'iBN 'Ti'HN Ex. 34, 6, Num. 14, 18, or r^yf^ t]i5 Jer. 15, 15 long in anger i. e. patient (see TJ'IIS); m^ '^['nN Ecclbs. 7, 8 endur- ing, patient. But 'T|^N may also he taken as a noun, which suits in part even better, or as the construct of '^pN. V^ see ^p^N. 'n'lN m. 1. length, see 1^'iiX. — 2. n. p. of a city in the land of Shin'ar or the kingdom of Nimrod Gen. 10, 10 (LXX 'Oqs'x ['^t!'']) Syr. wajf Oroch) mentioned with biii, 13IS and nsbs, not belong- IV T ' I — I" : ~ ing to Assyria, or Syria and Mesopota- mia. According to the Jerusalem Targ. I. and II. (also Jerome and Ephrem) D^fi Edessa, whence the later Edesseneg T^ 150 cn^ are called i-jisjf; according to the Mid- rash (Bar. rab. ch. 37) it would be = pn (which see). But both explanations leave the proper territory of Nimrod, and must therefore be decidedly rejected. Accord- ing to the Talmud (Joma 10 a) it is niDi'iiN or niS'l'iN i. e. Vqxoij, south of Babylon in the neighbourhood of the Euphrates (Ptol. geogr. 5, 20, 7), from which city the race 'Oqitjvoi in south- western Babylonia (Ptol. 1. 1. 5, 19, 2; Strab. 16; Plin. h. n. 6, 30, 31) received their name (see IS'HN); on the contrary the city 'Agaxxa, Aracha, Arecca on the Tigris (Ptol. 1. 1. 6, 3, 4; Amm. Marc. 23, 6, 26) on the border of Susiana and Babylonia is constantly called NS'^'lN in the Talmud, and cannot be meant here, since it lies near Susiana. 131B3 put by the Talmud (1. c.) for 13N is to be looked for in the vicinity of nw'n'iN , Orchoe. On the ruins of Tj'iN see 'tlie Journal of the German Oriental Society IX, 332; X, 726. — 3. n.p. of a city on the border of Ephraim, between Tib and tri'ias'; tut it appears not to have be- longed to the Israelites. Hence the gen- tile ■^■s^ii Josh. 16, 2, 2 Sam. 15, 32, in the second of which passages the LXX translate "'S'lNil by 6 aQ^iEzaiqog Javtd — 6 !AqxI ezaiQog J., and therefore they read 111 Ti'SI ''S'lNrt. I- T ].. .. I- : - IT "qnij! (with sujf. fe'iN) m. length Gen. 6, 15; Ex. 26, 2; but for the most part metaphorically e. g. Q-'ttj '« Ps. 21, 5, Job 12, 12 length of life, great age; D^EN 'N PROV.25,15pa<«erece. See'^j'nN 2. On another '^j'ni* see Tj'iN 2. '" N3"1N (or Tfs-) Aram. f. Dan. 4, 24 continuance, duration (Pseudo-Sa'^ad.), tarrying (Eashi); a longer season 7, 12. From 'ijpN = Hebr. '^'IN. NZlS'lii (with sujf. nn^S'iN) Aram.f. prop, commissura genu, then knee Dah. 5, 6, from a^T (comp. asi in the Mishna) to bind. As. Ju^s, elbow, as also has and j-'Stt* originate in a similar view. nS'nN (twice n^llN) f. healing (cog- nate in sense with nNB'i). 'js rttiaS Is «8, 8 or 'N nnV» 'Jer. 8,'b"-'"" arises, hence 'N nbJ>rt 30, 17; 33, 6 to heal, which is applied like NS.I to the restoration of a state, the repairing of walls Neh. 4, 1, or generally to resto- ration 2 Che. 24, 13. Comp. the Ar. - * xXJjt and the stem 'Tj'nN above. Since the healing of a wound consists in the laying on of a plaster, in the scar that rises above the wound (comp. ilbSFi, fllria), it has been translated plaster, scar, but without the necessity of as- suming another fundamental significa- tion for the verb. !13'1N Aram, see SOIiS. IT : - IT ! - 13'lNl Aram. n. p. of the city 'Ogx^l, the old Hebrew 'rj'lN (which see), in Sy- riac liasjf, Talm.jilS'iiN i. e. niSiN ' i- : I I : T Hence the gentile "'IS'IN, pi. "iNIS^N Ezb. 4, 9 the inhabitants of Orchoe, i. e. the Chaldean race of the 'OQxrjvoi (see Tt'lN), who are named as colonists along with Persians, Susianians, Elymaeans &c. ''13"1>» see IS'IN. r : : - I : ~ ''3'IK see '^I'nN. D*liJ (not used) intr. equivalent to d;i (which see). Dp (OM'i I.), rt-M-l n., DN'n I. 1. to be Ugh, Arab. |ijj to be high, to rise up ; hence the proper name Q'lN. (which see), gent. iM'iN and in'i». From the cognate stem D'lS of the same meaning comes ')ia'l» (see^Q'ny IH.). — 2. to be strong, firm, spoken of a build- ing, prop, to be large and high, whence ')i»'lN and the proper name ijfa'^N.- O'nN (constr. apN; high region, height, mountain-land) 1. n.jp. of the land lying between Phenicia and the Euphrates, Aramaea, and then — 2. of the Semite race dwelling there about the Lebanon mountains IKiNas 8, 5; 15,18; 22, 3 31 &c., whose chief city is Damascus, for which reason their district is some- times called ptote'i 'N 2 Sam. 8, 5; 1 Chr. 18, 5 ; these inhabitants are called espe- cially Aramaeans 2 Kings 8, 28. But this race spread even to fisyw (which see) 1 Chr. 19, 6, IlllJa 2 Sam. 15, 8, which bordered on the 'land east of Jor- J1D"1^? 151 dan Deut. 3, 14; Josh. 12, 5; 13, 11 i3. Westward of tlie Damascene Aram they spread to iin'i n"ia {whicli see) 2 Sam. 10, 6 or aitl'i (wMcli see) ; north- west to lis (fs) Baalbek, )'^V nija ria- Q(i8siaos in Laodicea) Am. 1, 5; north- east from Damascus to tliia (which see) Ps. 60, 2; 1 Chr. 18, 5;"l Sam. 14, 47, and also on the other side of the Eu- phrates, between it and the Tigris, to Mesopotamia, called DIN "jlis Gen. 25, 20; 28, 2, )'Vb Gen. 48,' 7, fi'iN JTito Hos. 12, 13, S^p^s dps. Gen. 24/10 &c. Like the name )Sy2 (which see) this too gradually acquired an extended meaning, since at first it merely de- noted the inhabitants of the high re- gion. At the time of the Peshito Me- sopotamia was regarded as the proper Aramaean-land, and therefore it retains for it 'N, while it calls the remainder of the region, which was inhabited more by Romanised Aramaeans, lailN (2 Sam. 8, 5 &c.). In the present Hebrew text n'lN already occurs for QinN 2 Sam. 8, 13 -'Ps. 60, 2; 2 Chk. 20,' 2; and vice versa we must read D'lN for d^^llit in 1 Che. 18, 11, comp. 2 Sam. 8, 12. TMs name 'N, which is applied sometimes to the race (Syrians, Aramaeans), some- times to the land, sometimes in the singular (2 Sam. 10, 14 15), sometimes in the plural (10, 17 18), is given by the Scripture to the founder of a race, who is the son of d^ Gen. 10, 22: but like all the names there it must be taken as ethnological rather than per- sonal. — 3. n.p. of a grandson of Nahor Gen. 22, 21. — 4. n. p. of an Asherite 1 Chk. 7, 34. ]ia"1ISI {constr.pl. ni5?3'ni«, where o disappears; with suff. I'Ti'JM'IN) m. pa- lace, fortress, citadel. Is. 25, 2; Jbr. 17, 27; Am. 1, 4 &c., usually comprehending many buildings, and therefore used with n^a 1 Kings 16, 18; 2 Kings 15, 25, where 'N is the general word. The Targnm has translated incorrectly li'niN hiU. Figuratively applied to the temple of God Jeb. 30, 18. — It is formed from aiNi with ']i-, and the Arab, j.^^ *° ^® p« high, is identical with the Hebrew d'^N. ,^* rr Since |» > I to hind firmly together is con- nected with the Hebrew dbs, so 'jbbN (c. pi. nisabN) is only a secondary form, a frequent interchange of 'n and b taking place in these very stems. See also '|i?2'irT and d'lrt. ■'^I^. {.P^- '="'^1??.) once with the ar- ticle d'''Hh!l="nN!l 2 Che. 22, 5) gent. (from dSs) m., tT''a'nN. f. Aramaean, male and female, either a western i. e. a Sy- rian 2 Kings 5, 20 or eastern i. e. a Me- sopotamian Gen. 25, 20. The district may have been extended, zs Arim,Erem,, Irem, Orem in the classics are the names of different tribes all of whom belonged to the Aramaeans. '''Q1N (secondary form for ''53'ii*) gent, m., n^aSN f. Aramaean, but in the fern. as an adverb, in Aramaean, in the Ara- maean language Dan. 2, 4; Ezr. 4, 7. Owing to the Syro-Phenician pronun- ciation, "'Mi'lN, pZ. d"'ailN., stands for it in 2 Kings 16, 6 K'tib. ' n^anS 1 Che. 7, 14 see ■'MIN. IT • - -: !■ — : D''53'1S< 2 Kings 8, 29 see -^H^tA. ''353"1iSl {palace-born, Palatinus, from lia'nN) n. p. m. 2 Sam. 21, 8. Comp. Tiberius bom at the Tiber &c. T^'^ (not used) 1. to be slender, spoken of the chamois, Ar. jjjl) Syr. \^]--, — 2. to be thin, of a tall-growing tree. The fundamental signification of thi^ stem may be to stretch, extend, Arab. ^J^ to stretch the ears, and the organic root Tn"ISi, which may also be found in')'i-n. More suitable, however, is the root Ttn with the siffnification of Tn ('Jl'l which see) to be firm, hard, comp. Ar. r7^% to be lasting, firm, ^tj to make fast, ^J.^ hardness. Hepce Xy^i the proper names I'lN, H''5'1N, IS'iN, reilN, nsij*. The same root may also t:c — :' IT ; 1 •' be assumed in TiFi, W'lri. I'-JN (or ■ji'iN) see ,n5pN., !^;5pN.. pi* see '\'i-f&. jnN_ 152 ?]n« I'iji m. 1. prop, beam, pole (comp. ■ilti) i. e. a firm and hard tree, cognate ■wdtli T'lN Is. 44, 14. Thus it is ex- plained according to the Mishna, some- times cedar, sometimes pine (Tanchiim Jerushalmi); it is also used there for the mast of a ship (ini-'B!? '^125 Tni«), as 'j'iFi (Aram, ''i'nw) means pine and mast. The stem is p!* (which see) = Ipn (which see), comp. TIN and T'nn. — 2. {strength, power) n. p. m. 1 Chb. 2, 25. See I^'IN . I"!!^ {power, strength) n. p. of a Ho- rite Gen. 36, 28 ; of the same significa- tion as the proper name I'nJt (which see). riDSIK epicene f. a hare, an unclean animal, Lev. 11, 6; Dbut. 14, 7, Ar. (.jijvf, Syr. M^'l, prop. rMrewe?-, rambler, from 13h (which Ibn Gfandch has assumed as the stem). But it may be derived also from aSN (n^a.'is? from n^ss) to go along quickly, to run along, to hasten, (perhaps =f|5i!< assumed for the root of lnS3N, but comp. the Ar. v_Ajf to acce- lerate, uftA^ to hasten &c.), which makes no change in the fundamental significa- tion. n3lj< (■■!»«) n. p. m. 2 Sam. 24, 16 K'tib, LXX Oqva, which might be a feminine form of ')'ns«; but the usual reading is InS'niN. liSIX (from ']S'i: rushing stream) 1. M. p. of a river and then of a valley (bt!5)) the boundary between the terri- tory of Belka (i. e. the territory from Anion to Jahhoh JtrDGES 11, 13) and Karrak, formerly the southern limit of Trans-jordanic Palestine towards Moab (Numb. 21, 13 26). Rising in the Ara- bian mountains {Jos. Ant. 4, 5, 1) it runs into the Dead Sea. It is now called ■^^y Mu'gab. 'N niM| Numb. 21, 28 are the rocky series ■ of hills along its banks as far as ^'S, on which a town IT ' was built, also called bSSi ni^aSi Josh. 13, 17; perhaps in the above passage of Ndmb. iriaa ibya is to be taken IT, r—.r . as ec[uivalent to Wa niMa. — 2. n. p. of the Amon- district, Arnona in the Onomasticon; parallel to SNia Notib. 21, 28; if rriai 'b'S% be taken as the name of a towii, parallel '15*. jT^SIN {Jah is strong) n. p. of a Je- busite''2 Sam. 24, 18 K'tib, for which also injii'iN. (from 'ji'iN, fnN = '];]«) was written according to the Phenician pro- nunciation; which was then changed into nS'i'iN. (= tlJ^i'iN.) 2 Sam. 24, 20 &c., and then again by wiping out the fl'J into W'nnN. 24, 16 K'tib. rr^ahi* see H^i'iN. IT : I-: IT. pnit (formed from 'j'nN: strong) n. p. m. i Chr. 3, 21. .'13'IX (from I'li* with the termination ']-: strong one, hero) n. p. of a Jebusite i'Chr. 21, 15. Elsewhere !i5ps« stands for it. i^'ni^ (not used) intr. to flee hastily, equivalent to S'ln (which see) and cognate with p'lS (which see also); Ar. ^yS6 the same. Hence the proper name SpNn = y'lnri (which see). J^l^ -iram. eq[uivalent to Hebrew f^^ (which see). JJnt* {def. iHTy&) Aram. f. equivalent to the Hebrew y"nN earth. Dak. 2, 35; 3, 31 &c., by changing y into 5> which is frequent in Aramaean. See the verb SIN. t — : 3>1N Aram. adj. m., NSIN f. low, deep, I — r IT : — with 'jn Dan. 2, 39 lower than. The K'ri reads there S'lN for the K'tib N5>^N, r-: IT : - ' because isba is compared with a per- son. In the Targ. it signifies below, at the last, e. g. S'lb = St^sb , 5>lba = i^lNba, ' " i-T I — :i-' r: • i — " literally from below i. e. accented on the final syllable, o^vrovov, a grammatical term in Hebrew. ''^IN {constr. r-'Jf'iN) Aram. f. the bottom (of a pit) Dan. 6, 25. n"!^ (not used) intr. to stretch, ex- tend, or to be stretched, extended, Ar. jivj, hence tj'nN tract, extent of land, in TaJ^I'lN. More probably, however, the stem 'N is identical with ilN I.; T I-T ' P]^i< 153 P^ comp. At. o%I to knot (cerate I^t), Oji (whence xiji plaited hair, cord), ^;' in «jxl Knots pS, Syr. l-i^f (y changed into S*, or into p, as is sometimes the case in Aramaean, hence) also Aram. Np^N (which see). The stem is y"i!!« (which see), though in usage 'N may be looked upon as primitive. The Armenian ard field, Gothic airtha, Anglo-Saxon eord, German erde, Greek iQa^e (humum) &c. may proceed in part from a like stem. JtS'llSl (firmness, prop, firm, strong, viz. jah is, softened from "'NS'ii*, as N- is often made out of "^m-) n.p.m. 1 Kings 16, 9. p'lN (from y'HN, S passing into p; def. NjJlN) Aram. f. earth, Jee. 10, 11. An explanation of this word is already attempted in the Midrash rab. ch. 13. Tl}^ (1*' person '^ninN; part. TIN; imper. Ik, before Makkeph "rtlN, plur. 11J«; fut. 'lijj^) tr. to curse, to devote to destruction, Gen. 27, 29; Num. 24, 9. Tl'IN in particular is very frequent as a formula of cursing (the opposite is '^jl'iS) Gen. 3, 14 &c. ni;'-'''n'l!S Job 3, 8 cursers of the day, magicians; "ni^Nl Mai,. 2, 2 and I will turn into a curse'; ■i'lN and iTiN Jud&es 5, 23 used as 'ni^N , ' ' ' IT in a formula of cursing and strengthened by the infin. absolute. See however Nif. 'INS (out of ^N5 , as nS5 , bni Ez. 25, 3; "ipS, npS Mal. 2, 5;' pari pi. D'l'lNi) to be cursed Mai. 3, 9, with a of the thing wherewith. Pih. IpN (3 perf. with suf SI'T^n) to curse much. Gen. 5, 29; to bring a curse, spoken of the curse-bringing water Num. chap. 5, where d^'i'iNM is in alliteration with Qiin. "'^ ■ I' T ITof. INIrt to be cursed. Num. 22, 6. The stem is ns, Ar. jo with the fundamental signification "to reject, to push aside, to abhor"; the organic root may therefore be also in "iN'i (which see). At. nLj from » Li, and consequently identical with -Xj. The N in IN, which is in Arabic Si and in farther develop- ments li), has also in Hebrew arisen from the harder guttural sound, and so the root in N-^fi to separate, to sever, whence H'ln and )V^'n (which see), Aram. H-^n to wipe away, for which the Ar. JO stands, is identical with ours. C0"^'^^^ (pause O'lns.; by way of ex- planation the Armenian ararats crea- tion and the Zend, ^rjavarta holy land have been compared) 1. n.p. of the high- est mountain-cone in the high district of Armenia, twelve miles south west of Erivan Gen. 8, 4; hence all the high mountains on the plateau of the Araxes valley are called U'l'iN "''irt (Gen. 8, 4). It is especially the present Aghri Dagh or the great Ararat (Pers. Kuhi Nuch i. e. Noah's mountain, in the classics 6 'yd§os, Armen. massis) and KutsJiuh Dagh or little Ararat. — 2. n. p. of the Armenian high land where the Ararat mountains were situated, consequently of that part of Armenia which is si- tuate between the Araxes and lakes Van and Urmia; fuUy B'l'iN yni* 2 Ejngs 19, 37; Is. 37, 38. — k' n. p! oi all Ar- menia, divided into many kingdoms. Hence U'n'iN nisV?? Jee. 51, 27, ad- duced together with iJU (which see) and T531I5n (which see), if indeed the plural itself be not used in relation to these. The Targ., Syr. and Ar. have ITlp, I'l'i'ip, ji^jj' i- e. the Gordish or Kurdish mountains, which rests, however, upon another tradition. i-|"lN 2 Sam. 23, 33 stands for ■'Tirt (which see) 1 Cheon. 11, 35. The latter is the more correct. tyiiSl (not used) tr. to seek after some- thing, to long after, to desire; hence nffl'iN. The stem 'N is connected with the Ar. Jw^^ to desire, \jo>a to be seized with K'-lt^ 155 ^^ a longing for; but the organic root fflp"i« is also in «5t^ , where the fundamental signification to press into something is easily recognised. ty*li? (Kal not used) prop, to take, seize, then: to take something for oneself, to take possession of; to buy. Pih. iaiN with tniSN to take a wife to one- self (cognate in sense with NiBi) Deux. 20, 7; 28, 30; or with the omission of TCm 2 Sam. 3, 14; Hos. 2, 21 22, prop, to take possession of, to espouse. Puh. iB'IN (part. MiBlk for 'N?3) to be betrothed, of a maiden Ex. 22, 15 ; Deut. chap. 22. The stem 'it, Ar. j-y* (hence ^jA spouse, \j"yy^ bride, bridegroom), Aram. DpN (comp. j* v I to farm, (j**J i f farmer, of a garden, of land, Talm. D'^'IN, Sam. D^'^S5 farm), is closely connected with 123'ij (which see), Ar. vii.j; the organic root, therefore, is iU'l'N. nffl'IN f. wish, desire, longing, Ps. 21, 3, parallel with ab mstn ; from laiN. O /T7-. 1 -N '" '""•!" 1"^ bentence (Kimchi) or detailed statement (Targ. and Parch6n) are conjectural. NHJ^J^nrTli^ (also Nn- EzE. 4, 8 11 23; Nrid- 7, 7; Persian) n. p. of the Persian king Artaxermes, a name borne by Pseudo - Smerdis and Artaxerxes Longimanus, Ezr. 4, 7 8 11 23 ; 7, 1 7 11 12 21 ; 8, 1 ; Ezr. apocr. 8, 1 ; Neh. 2, 1 ; 5,14; 13,6. The orthography appears to be similar to that found on an inscription of 'Nakshi-Eustum and on several Pehlvi- medals, Artha-Shetr i. e. Arta-chshatar (ini^riFi'iN) mighty king (the first part of the word is found in Arta-banus, -phemus, -bazus, comp. Hesych. 'Agtaioi, ol iJQcoss, siaQo, IIsQaaig ; the last is the Zend, khshe- tro or shetrao king: hence the Hebrew form arose out of Nn'ilsnFi'iN), from which latter orthography the modem Persian »juiw<2>j| Ardeshir is formed. But another derivation, viz. from Arta-K'^ha- -sadeh i. e. son of the great king, may be adopted for the sake of the Hebrew mode .of writing the word. Several other ety- mologies have been attempted, which are not so satisfactory. ^^ I. the stem of la^N (out of m), iHSij, niUN and of the denom. tt5l2JNnrt see i25ilJN I. I- T t^t? n. the stem of hSn (which see), fiuSs, irnsN, see tBirSs II. IT V ' IV • ' r T tt}^ III. stem of nnJilUN , uSiUJN, see l- IT ■ -! ' r t ' viw in. r T tliS* (only constr. in the compound proper names bjalUN, ?aTa5«, "iinil???) m. a man. See these proper names and 113"'i<. aJS« 1. (from fflldiS II., with suff. iiaN, DStBN dropping the dagesh) f. (like ■niN, S52, lB?ail3 with a few exceptions; masc. only in Jer. 48, 45; Ps. 104, 4; Job. 20, 26) fire as an element, in the largest use Gen. 19, 24; 22, 6&c.; con- nected with T^sb 15, 17, njab Ex. 3, 2, 11'ra? 13,21,'bm Lev. 16,12, Misw 13, 24, 'TiSn Ps. 2l| 10 &c. ; ma tips "or a ffliS ins, nbiB, niJtln &c. means to : 1" 'i-t' i- • ' I- • hum with fire. Among the manifold ap- plications of the word the following are to be observed: a) ■'^ U5N Num. 11, 1 3, 1 Kings 18, 38, Q^MlBn-'p? fflis 2 Kings 1, 10, Q-'tibN '4* 1, 12, Job1,16','-''^ dnu 'n ' ' r v: |.' ' ' ' ' _ I" ■• 1" Gen. 19, 24, more rarely IBN alone, lightning, because God was supposed to dwell in fire and to send lightning out of it Ex. 3, 2; 19, 19; 24, 17; Deut. 4, 15; 5,4, just as the fire to consume sacrifices Num. 16, 35 and to destroy sinners Lev. 10, 2 proceeds from Him, for which reason one durst not approach Him with unholy fire (fTiT Uis) Lev. 10, 1; Num. 3, 4; 17, 2; 26^61.' 12JN ''Sai!* Ez. 28, 14 16 are fiery stones thrown about as if from the (fire-vomiting) ^Iri D'^ln'bN. b) fflN as an element of de- I- v: '' I" struction Job 15, 34; 20, 26; hence the expression to come into fire and water Ps. 66, 12, i. e. into extreme danger; or also as an element of purification Mal. 3, 2. c) flame of wrath, in connexion with t]N Deut. 32,22; Jek. 15, 14, and applied generally to violent feeling Jer. 20, 9 ; Ps. 39, 4. d) war-fire, war-flam^ ^^ 156 -insy« Is. 10, 16; 26, 11. e) heat of the sun Joel 1, 19 20. f) shining, glitter 'Nam. 2, 4 and perhaps also 2 Kings 2, 11; 6, 17. Derivatives iilEN, iTttSN. — rri ilia ' IT V ' IV • IT I" see rrnUJN. — 2. The ground-form of llJ'^N ("wliich see) man, only in Ez. 8, 2 LXX o/i. ttj/Spoff =d^^N 1, 26, from I25t;5l^l. (which see). This form is still preserved in Phenician, e. g. "'ns m (Athen. 2) Kmsvg, nniDia 125n (Mel. 3 and 4) a man of Sicca in Numidia. tiJK (^«/. NIS'n) Aram. fern, fire, Dan. 7, 11 = Hebrew IBN. A feminine form I" N115N (def. sntliN, fi^f) is also Ara- n ••• ^ IT : •■• ' ^ maean. UJN I. (an abridged construct form of ffl''N in the propel: names IS^JN , b5>5ffi!S and as a basis for )fiist) masc. man. Ji^S^jl II. an original form for the com- pound 1-1BN., only in Numb. 21, 30 in an old poem, according to the Masoretic orthography; but the LXX read TUN; Phenician 125N = 'niaN (Mass. 5, 13 &c.), Ili fflN (Melit. 1). See also 2 Sam. 21, 19 compared with 1 Che. 11, 23. UJ8«! (in many mss. UJij*; from IIJN to be = ffii) masc. tantamount to IB;; being, existence, essence, and then use'd as U5'' 2 Sam. 14, 19; Micah 6, 10; Aramaean - "f ■'ri''N, Ar.fjuj], Prom it has arisen the proper name ■'ia''ij = iTl5^ See ffliN II. a3^t {plur. '\-'tti^ , def. N-^mN , with suffim "'Jlil^^) Aram. masc. foundation, Eze. 4, 12; 6, 16; 6, 3; Ar. jlf. See iBtus*. I. bsiriN (equivalent to b^jai^N, IIJN as tiN and Va being merely abridged forms of lI5''i« and bsjS; not from baiB there- fore) n. p. m. (Jen. 46, 21; i'Che. 8, 1. (bN in proper names also becomes Vn iand bi?.) Patron. ■'baiBN Num. 26, 38'j where the Samar. cod. has "ibNIii^N = ■''byaiBN. '" " ' ' ' ■jHlpi* (from tiN = "i-i^, and 'ija from ■Jia , intelligent hero; not from ']ilB there- fore) ra. p. m. G-EN. 36, 26. ?2a55< (abridged from bljaias* and therefore equivalent, to bl3l23M; conse- quently not from 5>5ld) n.p.m. 1 Chk.4,21. b?at^N (JSero-Bdal) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 8, 33; 9, 39; elsewhere = mda-lzJiN (which see). IW)^ (not used) 1. trans, to pour, to T T J,* moisten, to wet, Syr. r^\ cognate with ff-^. The organic root is 'TIlS'N, which is also found in ii-1125, IllJ-b, !n-nil5 ITt' I-t' ITT (which see). — 2. intrans. to pour out largely over a thing, Arab. I Jlj to water, to pour. Derivatives ITIJN , 1125N , JTilBN , n|jiaj« and perhaps li'ltiN. itiiH see InTilJN. I" T IT •• -: IttiiS! Jreasc. outpouring (of brooks), hence metaphorically the place where brooks flow down, a ravine. Num. 21,15, Targ. NHMlia "rjSlB??, ZzmcAj inn 'J'i'n'i)?. l^fflM see I'iViUN. mtlJi< (formed from masc. TIBN ; plur. ni'iiBN, coKsin n^N or rTi'7-) /. equival. to llBii, a sloping "place where torrents flow together: the bed of a valley, a ravine, then foot of a mountain (Ax. ^Aau radix montis, from pouring out, i^,*juio Si -^ ' * ravine, from ^_a.«o to pour out) Deut. 3, 17 ; 4, 49 and taken thence into Josh. 10, 40; 12,3 8; 13,20; usually applied to the ravines of n^Ds (which see) whose top was Nebo, and that too even where ni"]©}* alone stands ( — the plural is used of many sloping plains), which ravines are described as pin or the southern limit of Palestine 12, 3. liiaJN (fortress, castle) n. p. of a Philistine royal city, one of the most important among the five principal cities of the Philistines Josh. 11,22; 15,46; 1 Sam. 5, 1; Is. 20, 1, and a border for- tress of Palestine towards Egypt; Greek "AJ^arog, now a village, Asdud. Gentile ■'lillBN, and fern. n'''i- applied to a dialect of Ashdod Neh. 13, 23. Since the Greek orthography presupposes an liilJN , and TiilS which is assumed as the stem, commonly occurs in a bad sense, and therefore ill suits an established city, it seems better to refer the word ni^i^ 157 ntyj? to IfflN, ■with 1 reduplicated, and so it would have an analogy in niliJJN. muJN (one word according to the Masora) fern, only in Deht. 33, 2. K we abide by the Masoretic orthography and the received pointing, nilBSJ may be = nTttJt; in the signification of tTllBN. and identical with ni-ifflN Josh. 12, '8 or n5DSrt n^iBN 12, 3. As the theophany of Dedt. 1. c. is described as proceeding from four sides and i5''?a"'a is similar to 'IM'^FiM Hab. 3, 3, the verse should be translated: God came from Sinai and ap- peared to them (iab) from Se'ir, he ap- peared (to them, iMb) in brightness from Paran, and he came forth to them (ittb) out of tBlp rha'n (which see), having riTON in the south, where 1^S>to, ''i''D, pNS 1fl , UJ'ip raa'n are names of places whence God revealed himself to Israel; and in the case of the last he had HTiBN on the south (comp. Siphre on the place). See ri. IT ntJ/i^ (not used) intrans. to be firm, IT T ^ ' close, to he firmly fitted together, Arab. Wl to support, i. e. to make firm, con- sequently it is equivalent to lUN (ilJfflN), of wf '' of' Arab. (j«f (whence i^\ base) and (jol to be firm, hard, and «5n (tIJIN) III., from which come TlSsi'', iBNin\ Derivatives . n IT, ' IT : n^ljlBN and iniiiUN, besides the proper names n^llBiJJ, 1!l'-, tTffli"'; on the con- trary for llilji? see '^m." Comp. rtu5;, to which belongs tTifflin, firmness. nfij iSl (with suffux dniBs) fern,, fire, only in Jer.6,29 K'tib, which the K'ri reads QFi IZJM; Aram. KISM fern, the same. nt^N (fil^S is taken for the construct, which is with the suffix "iniBN , Ps. 128, 3 Tinids ; plur. Qili:3 , constr. "'lij? , oncepZur. ri'l^N Ez. 23, 44) fern, a woman, used in manifold ways like 12J''N, thus a) a married woman Gen. 24, 3; 25, 1; Ex. 21,4; hence mssj b?a a husband 21, 3, as rTUiN Lev. 18, 11 stepmother. The expressions filBsb yra , Ttp^ , TX^^ Gen. 4, 19; 20, 12; 'i Sam. IS," 17 are ex- plicable only according to this sense, b) concubine Gen. 30, 4, comp. '^vvaiuss 11.24,497. c)inrfeGEN.29,21. S) wo- man, without reference to condition 31, 35; 2 Sam. 1, 26; maiden Gen. 24, 5; Song of Sol. 1, 8; Is. 4, 1; with a genitive following to denote quali- ties, as 'itn n^N a lovely woman Prov. 11, 16, V''rt rrds a brave woman Ruth 3, 11. e) with reference to the female sex, and therefore applied to animals also Gen. 7, 2 ; comp. yvvq, femina, after the same manner, f ) with reference to the female character in its weakness, ti- midity, helplessness &c. Is. 3,12; 19, 16 ; Jer. 51, 30; Nah.3, 13, to which transi- tion there are analogies in the classics; with relation to moral weakness Eccles. 7, 26 28. The phrase iiiSN Ti^ Job 14, 1 as an appellation of sinful, feeble man has arisen out of this view, g) with nifiN or n'n following it denotes comparison: the one . . . the other (see Vi^an)'. h) every (see 12;in) Ex. 3, 22 ; Am. 4,3. ' , The word 'ij is derived, according to Gen. 2,23, from llS'^N i. e. in the first place from the original form of it (tON); but no construct state was formed from lilBN , . n " because a secondary form niBN existed; and where such state was expected, they put iriiSN as an apposition, e. g. !i3iT !ii3N, wabi? 'N, Tajb''S 'n Josh.'2,1; Judges 19,1; IKjngs'7,14; but elsewhere niBN is used instead, Pro v. 11, 16; Hos. 1,2. See riBN. The usual plural i3"<1253 , constr. ildi , is formed from CTIJSN , constr. ''tiiN , I" : ' IT-;' r : - ' to distinguish it from the masculine, con- sequently from ttJSiS n. (which see) ; yet the stem for it may be also rttBS = IIJSN 11., •' ITT l-T ' especially as ifiii* itself is connected with Arab. LSo to grow, sprout. In the dialects also all the stems here ("ilJN , fflSN and rtffli) are represented. MtBS ( constr. i-il^Hi; plur. constr. ■'ffi'S: from Tdsj fire) m. prop, sacrificial fire, altar-flame, a burning, spec, sacrifice Lev. 22, 22 ; Num. 28, 3 ; in the most general sense Lev. 24, 7. Most frequently in the formula ■^^h 'N Ex. 29, 18 or with the addition of rjWi TL'^'H^'i in tie plural r]w^ 158 ^)^^ ■11 ilBN Lev. 2, 3: 7, 35; Phenician TDN j» . 7 7 7 J J.. (Num. 6, 5) the same. iT^iaJN (with suMiv tTTiiiltJN) fern, support, pUlar, Jer.50, 15 Kt'ib, parallel •1)3 in; from STIISn, comp. ^N (-which see), Arab. !i**ul. Perhaps we should read ri^lttSiJ, from the singular n^TON. niiaii* see !T"1125N and JTiiat?. r : - IT -: IT : T ^laiN (only consfr. 'j'l'llJN K'ri) masc. same as ^iiU^'N (which see) K'tib dark- ness Peov. 20, 20, conseq^uently from IBN or lUN with the diminutive ending ■jl- That tt5''i« may be considerably shortened has been already seen in lUN I. ; but l^liN II. (which see) may be ' as- sumed as the stem with greater pro- bability. "liaiN (not 'TiuSn) see 112JN. "lltBN in the sense of IllliN see 11J5n. I - IT n - l^tlSSl (from ItON I; hero, mighty) 1. proper name of the second son of OlU , who followed dV"'3> Gen. 10, 22; 2. of IT •• ' ' the ancestor of the Assyrians, and there- fore a name of the Semitic people the Assyrians themselves (in old writers 'idaavQsg, lAaavQioi, Assyrii) who dwelt on the east side of the Tigris north west of 'Elam, and spread thence west- wards. — 3. (level, plain) n. p. of the land Assyria on the' east side of the Tigris Gen. 2, 14, so that when one crossed the Tigris from Mesopotamia, he came hither (Arrian Alex. 3, 7). Since it is specifically distinguished from Me- sopotamia (Barhebr. chr. syr. p. 386), Babylonia (Is. 11, 11), and by the an- cients from Susiana, Media and Armenia, it is the land between Mesopotamia and Media, along with the territories Adia- bene, Arbelitis, Sittacene &e. according to Ptolemy (6, 1). In full form IlllSi? 'j^'ii* Is. 7, 18. Of the cities or countries com- prehended in Assyria there appear in Seripture(GEN.10,ll 12 &c.) only ni^h'i T'y (which see), Tft^^'s, (which see), t\\i (which see), Ig'n (which see), 'nDVi} (which see), I^'n^Fi (which see) and" bsa^N (which see) ; in the classics besides Gharcha (nS'^S =i<3'i3), Gaugamela ("il baa), Mespela (rtbsidn) &c. When As- Syria afterwards became a great king- dom, IIIISN also comprehended Meso- potamia, the Euphrates-district Is. 7, 20; 8,7; 2 Kings 17, 6; 18,11; 1 Chr. 5, 26, Babylonia (Arr. 1. c. 7, 19, 21; Herod. 1,178.122) 2 Kings 23, 29; Jee.2,18; Lament. 5, 6 ; Ez. 16, 28 (comp. Judith 1,1 7; 2, 1 4; 5, 1), Elymais, Syria and other territories (Strab. 16 p. 736), and even the kingdom of Persia Ps. 83, 9, EzE. 6, 22, when the latter took the place of the Assyrian one. In parti- cular it signifies also — 4. Syria Ps. 83, 9, especially the Syrian kingdom of the Seleucidae; and 'N in Is. 19, 23 24 25 may also be understood of Syria. In this sense iTiUSN an3 in the Mishna is I* - IT : to be taken for our square character, which was developed out of the Syrian ; and the fact that the Assyrians are called Ss\ir, Ssura in the Median cunei- form inscriptions, and that the Syrian inhabitants of Kurdistan call themselves Surdn, as well as the origin of the name Syria, refer to some connexion with Sy- ria. — 5. n. p. of a city and district in the south of Palestine and to the east of Egypt Gen. 25, 18 ; hence the gentile plur. d'nilIJN proper name of an Arabian race Gen. 25, 3 (mentioned with Q'Bi'mb and Q'^M^b , as descended from 'jTi) whicli inhabited this province. — 6. n. p. of a city of Assyria Gen. 2, 14, where at a later period Seleucia on the Tigris (Nj^ibD) was built, according to the Tal- mud (k'tubot 10 b). "IIUJN n. p. of a territory which be- longed to that of Israel; hence an ad- jective with the article ■''iiiiSnM as the designation of a tribe 2 Sam. 2^^9. This TlTliN. was sometimes taken for a district' of the city IfflN (which see) Josh. 17, 7, sometimes, according to the Targum, for a circuit of Asher, and as such it was distributed to Manasseh Josh. 17, 11; but since the Vulg., Syr. and Ar. read i'pil25.55 i. e. that which is spoken of in Deut.3,14; Josh.12,5; 13,13; 1 Che. 2, 23, we may either write so, or take it in the same sense. "llla'K 159 '{^^^^ 1 - I -: ft - ' n -s _ lini^i* ('^e hero i. e. God w /ree) «. 2>. i».' 1 Chb. 2, 24. See ti^s?. -liaji* (only ■pZwj'. with auff. h-iniillSN K'ri) /em. support, pillar, Jer. 50, 15; from miJN. IT T t^D^t^i$ (see IhMUSn) n. p. of a god of the Hamathaeaus 2 Kings 17, 30, ■woishipped under the figure of a bare buck, like Mendes of the Egyptians. Comp.Zend. eshem a Dew, agmano heaven, Pers. eshmani devil, asuman heaven, which, however, does not explain 'N. more exactly. It seems preferable to" assume the identity of the Hamathaean divinity NKffflN with the Phenician god of meicine IMiBX , Chamat having pos- sessed a Phenician settlement and being in general looked upon as a son of Canaan (Gen. 10, 18), see IMlUN. nT'tBN see tTmiJiS. IT " -: IT ■• -: aJ'^tpN (only constr. plur. ''125"'ti5N) m. 1. ruins Is. 16, 7, properly piece of a foundation (as IDia 58, 12 is also a rum, cognate m sense iiS'nn, comp. Ar. (jwl hase and a remaining trace), because the foundations remain as ruins after the destruction of buildings. But according to the parallel passage Jee.48,31 'iia''">^i« appears to be taken for "'toi^, as if it were the reduplicated form of ^ili'^i} (■'^n); See idllJN I. — 2. cake, pancake, properly something spread out, flat, Hos.S, 1 raisin-cakes, as an idol-offering, comp. nin''sa (from ns5£ to make flat, broad), nXaKovg, placenta, from nXuK- flat, old high German pmifreijr, cake, from preit = broad. See 115«3n I, 2. najiaji* (oZ.rTiii5'''aJN-, from lamll.) fern, same as laifflN 2 : pancake, cake lor a journey, 2 Sam. 6, 19 and 1 Chb. 16, 3 put with nnb— 133, mb nVn, ibiiJn; or with nisri as a means of animating and refreshing Song op Sol. 2, 5, in which sense the Jer. Targ. 1. took it for n-ipisa Ex. 16, 31 ; as also the LXX, Vulg. and Targ. understand it. The Talmjidio explanation leather hag for holding wine rests on a comparison of ■UJT^IS! with the Aram. y:£5> , whence yiti* j Arabic ijol, whence (jajyet pitcher. TlJi'^^ (not used) tr. to hind, to hind together, to interlace, like the Talmudic 'T|'ON(Bechorot44b); hence Tjl^g, b3il5N. The stem 'N is cognate with the Ar. iKjA/j to interweave, entwine, ^-.wt and ^-S.^ whence ^L*il band, and also with liLJlc, ;3*lft; while the organic root lies, more or less modified, in plU'n, pro, p,l I, m whence t]p2, Tjto <^c. ^ T|a3N {pi- Cii3';dN according to the Misima: the Latertwisted testicles) m. bond, cord, particularly the testicle-cord Lev. 21, 20, from'^i'ilJN (which see), hence the chorda spermatica; accordingly iKm- cM has for it W'S,^, and the Talmud also bsnUN, Ar. hJSJmjs^. ^SaJN {jpl- nibbidx, constr. ribsiiiJi*, '125n) m. 1. a hunch or cluster of grapes. Numb. 13, 24 but also with the addi- tion D'^asy 13, 23, Gen. 40, 10, or \^% Song op Sol. 7, 9, hence grapes, spoken of the date-clusters Song op Sol. 7, 8, Ar. \tkdl; of the cypress-blossom 1, 14. — It may have been formed from TiffiN with the termination 61 (comp. Vya-5, bs'lH) bb*!)?), and the Aramaean NbiiD P^.^ may proceed in like manner from SD = TjlB-N. This explanation is confirmed by the Talmudic D''JS3 big bbiaij ovary, nbism disciples (Sota 47 a) 'i. e. an union" of followers (comp. 'njp) '^°- — 2. n. p. of a Canaanite Gen. 14, 13 24. — 3. n. p. of a valley in the neigh- bourhood of p'^an distinguished for grapes, Numb. 13^3 ; 32, 9 ; Deux. 1, 24, so called from the Canaanite Eshcol, and retained as a name on account of the vine-branch which was cut off there Numb. 13, 24. T33U3N 1. proper name of a Japhe- tite| "son of 'nMJi (Cimmerian) Gen, 10, 3. As his two brothers are ns'i'l and fiuhsh, the ethnographical signifi-^ cation o"f the name can only be ex* l^^ii 160 n^i< plained by constant reference to them. — 2. n. p. of a tribe that derived their descent &om T^ISI^K and that still dwelt at a later period together with the Ar- menians Jek. 5 1,27; according to Greek and Bomau accounts on the other side of Taurus. Agreeably to the latest eth- nographical researches, as well as Jewish tradition, we understand by the word the race that forced their way at a very early peridd from Asia to Europe, partly across the Tanais, partly across the Hellespont, taking up their abode in Scandinavian and Germanic lauds. See Enobel, die Volkertafel p. 33-43. "iStaN (withsM/.'Tj'l31SN) m. 1. only in Ez. 27, 15 and Ps. 72, 10, gift, present, established price, -from ISttS II. (which see). The assumption that it originated in "IBIISn (in the sense of piece of money, Armen. aspar, a coin) must be rejected. — 2. (only in 2 Sam. 6, 19 read by the LXX for 1SB5N in our pre- sent text) a sweet drink, as the Targ., Vulg., Syr. and others understand it, from 15U5 I. (which see). ?tyjj (not used) intr. to be firm, pressed close, pressed firmly together, hence to be strong, hard, comp. Ar. Jo I to make firm, Jof to hold firmly to- gether, J^t firm, and the cognate J-toI &c. The organic root is bi25"N, found with modification in bSfN ("which see). Hence PJIJK (according to Kimchi bfflN) m. like (^t a tamarisk Gen. 21, 33; but neither versions nor interpreters give this special meaning, translating some- times a) grove, wood, plantation (Gr. Venet., Vulg., Samar., Jerus. Targ. I. and n.; Beresh. rab. ch. 51), hence the Samar. tibriN, ibriN for tTniJJN; some- times b) tree, oak (Onk., Symin., Syr., Arab.) or terebinth 1 Sam. 31, 13 = iibsft 1 Chr. 10, 12. But the meaning pro- bably passed from the special to the general, as in Slbsj, tibs; the significa- tion "tree" in the Mishna should there- fore be explained as in the case of ']b"'ij, both being named from the idea of strength. Like libN {oak, terebinth) blliit was also looked upon as a sacred, con- secrated tree; and so the bl^N in ysiti INa Gen. 21, 33, in rta'n 1 Sam. 22, Q, a!nd in DBS'' 31, 13 shouik be taken. QXaa (with suf 'i?pT^N; pi. with suff. IimiiSn) m. 1. fault, guilt, transgression Jbr.51,5; Pbov.14,9: guilt is an inter- preter or index {y^b") of fools, oppos. to lilf'i; by 'N N^art Gen. 26, 10 to -bring guilt upon one i. e. to lead one into sin; S'^ailSsa "^yblirilri to go on in transgres- sions, Ps.68,22. — 2. the thing through which guilt is contracted, trespass Num. 5, 7 8. Most fi:eq[uently — 3. a tres- pass-offering, distinct from nNUn sin- ofiiering Lev. ch. 5; 14. The cases in which 012)N was presented are given in 5,1517 21; 14,12; 19, 21; Num. 6,12. The LXX translate it ro vneQ dyvoias (Ez. 40, 39 aeq.), or ro rsy? nilTHifisXsi'ag (Lev. 7, 7), or ^ nkrififisXsia (Numb. 6, 12). Dti^i^ (not used) intrans. 1. same as dUJ'tl, to glisten, gleam, to shine, of the sun. — 2. figuratively to be bright, serene, friendly, gracious; a similar metaphor to that found in naia, btllt and irti. Deri- r T ' I- T j-T . vatives: the proper names Na "'IBS , IMiSn (Phenician), nairis 4. — The etymo- logical correctness of this meaning has been fully established under Bffln , a form whose initial sound is merely softened down into dl25N. Compare a monograph by Alois Mailer: Esmun, ein Beitrag zuxMythologie des orientalischen Alter- thums (Wien 1864. 8) p. 14 et seq. DK^N (only Lev. 5, 19 and Num. 5, 7 dUJNi; fut. D'aJij;;) intr. 1. to be desert, waste, isolated, devastated, e. g. ']'i'l?a\S Hos. 14, 1 ; nat?? Ez. 6, 6. The organic root is tJttJ-N, identical with that in dlU (dai^), dTiJ-J &c.; comp. Syr. ,ai^] wasteness; Syr. ic^f to be dark, hence (.lio.^o) darkness. Prom this figuratively — 2. to be condemned, to atone, to suffer Ps. 34, 22 23; Jer. 2, 3; Hos. 5, 15; Dt^N 161 mo^x 10, 2; Zech. 11, 5; Prov. 30, 10, prop, to be exterminated, spoken of men or beasts, of the destruction of the land Is. 24, 6, as a punishment for sin; — 3. to commit a fault, to transgress, with b of the person whom one offends Lev. 6, 19, Numb. 5, 7, and with a Hos. 13, 1 or b Lev. 5, 5 of the thing in which one' commits a fault; also absol. to be guilty. — The going wrong is either a missing of the aim, a taking away and lessening (NUn), or a rebellion against some one, a violent invasion of some- thing (?^s), or a separation and depar- ture from good (DllJN). Comp. the Ar. *j| to commit a fault, prop, to hold back from a thing, hence in -the deri- vatives: to remain behind, to tarry, to be lazy. Derivatives DiiiN adj., DTUN, Nif. DT2JN3 to suffer for, be punished Joel 1, 18, spoken of the destruction of flocks. Hif. D''fflNn to punish, to condemn, Ps. 5, ll.'"'"' afflS (j)l. tJiKUJN) adj. m. guilty i. e. either burdened with guilt Gen. 42, 21, 2 Sam. 14, 13, or bound to atone for guilt EzE. 10, 19. — 2. subst. a guilty one, EzE. 10, 19: and the guilty (gave their hands, QIJ 13!?^T, to bring) a ram for their trespass. rrOSBN {constr. na") f. prop, inf Kal: the bang in fault, and as such connected with b (as MafiN, nNIi) Lev. 5, 26; but nmiajilj a substantive: l./iaiMZf 1Chr..21,3, asii npiosb Lev. 4, 3 to the fault of the people i.' e." so that the people incur guilt; b niaiBN Dssiy nais 2 Che. 28, ' : I T -: r.' T ■ IV - ' 10 you have faults with you against . . .; Ps. 69, 6. — 2. guilt, 2 Chb. 28, 13; EzE. 9, 6 7 15; 10, 10; Ham Main ' ' ' ' IT : - jT : • to trespass much 2 Chr. 33, 23; me- taphor, trespass-offering, 'N "fiS Lev. 22, 16 the sin of a trespass, i. e. which con- sidered as guilt must be expiated by Bias*; 'N Dii 5, 24 day of the trespass- offering, i. e. when it wa's presented. — 3. condemnation, punishment of sin, 2 Chr. 28, 13 li-^bi* '^^ naiBN the con- demnation of Jehovah upon us.' — 4. idol, properly the object of trespassing, comp. fW and riNEin Hos. 4, 8, only in Am. 8, 14 l^"!?:'^ 'N to which they said D'^ti'biSt ■'li; but here perhaps iraiiSs should be understood as identical with Nni«JN, nn-, which was brought to Sa- maria as a god of the Hamathaeans 2 Kings 17, 30. m^i/aaJN see irnuaJN. IT : - IT -. : - XQ^^ (pi- 'oy$V<^, after the form paisn, IS'in, b'siBn) m. solitude, wilder- ness, then as a place of the dead (oTiTi) equivalent to niabs (n^iabit) kingdom of sliadows, Qiniiis 'o-'SniiJNa Is. 59, 10 ' ' r •• - I-- : -IT _ ' _ in desolate places like the dead i. e. in the realm of shadows; the DbiS Tn: sit ' IT I" " QisnBr!??^ Lament. 3, 6. In this sense the versions and old interpreters have translated it. The stem is dilJN to be de- solate, and in the termination an the nasal sound is sometimes doubled; or dTISN is 7 I" T here the same as f,M*A, *— .ft gloomi- ness (see IUJn). The Phenician I^IDN (Esmfln) belongs to ■]Mia in iiiMTB, rti-, d'lp.-. laUiS (not used; from Q'SBn) m. pro- perly anything gleaming, shining, warm- ing, hence sun; and accordingly from the healing power and warmth of the sun, the Phenician god of medicine, Esmun, the healing power of the sun personified. It is the Phenician Aescu- lapius who like the sun also represents the generative and preserving power; and the surnames of Aesculapius iiyi.aon?ig (Hesych.) &c. are in accordance with this derivation. NWIUN and MnfflN 4 are only collateral forms of VpfflN; and in the Inscription of Eschmanazar in Sidon another reading QiBN (D'^iIJn) is supposed to be the same. maaJN (plur. nil53123S) /. a watch (from IMffi), connected with Mb'jba (the genitive expressed by a , comp. Ps. 137, 7 ; Is. 9, 3) night-watch', vigilia, qivlax'^, as a portion of the night, but commonly without this addition Ps. 63, 7; Lament. 2, 19 ; yet in Ps. 119, 148 some explain it like ni-nuia 77, 5 eye-lids, see InlM'JJ. 11 niDti?« 162 DQ^^ rriiaaJi^ (fromia;^) /. same astrnat^N night-watch, the night being divided into three of them. The first was called ni'^)?tUN liitA"! Lament. 2, 19; the inter- mediate one nsis-'nlri 'n Judges 7, 19 ; the last Ipaii'^'N Ex. 14, 24; 1 Sam. 11,11. |tyij I. (not used) intr. to be hard, firm, strong, Arab. ^jm\ (hence atLiAyf hardness), i^] (hence,j.jo| hard, strong), ^jio.s>. to be firm, protected, ^2v«>^ to be hard, Targ. ']«JS>, )i^^_ the same, therefore lilZJN, 'jiins'firm, Lard. It is cognate with ']Dri in the organic root. Derivative, the proper name !i5i^N. |£2^iJ n. (unused) infr. to be dark, obscure, Targ. )m (hence )mit._ darkness), Zabian ^.^-f (|Jq-».| darkness), and it is perhaps connected with ^fflJ*. Hence comes ']11BN and perhaps also )'\Vi^ii Pkov. 7, 9 and 20, 20 after the form ■ninis = 'ni'nsi, itiTOi)?. See ']a«5N. 33^3 is: (with suff. ''aSIBN) m. a lattice, a lattice-window Judges 5, 28, Peov. 7, 6, properly a pinning into each other, and therefore equivalent to sbl^N (see t3''abl23) from as-iS = ab'^j. The' nouns ■^Ijri, TjjaiB, tijatiN in their stems express similar ideas. >l3tl5l!< (fortification) n. p. of two dif- ferent cities in Judah, Josh. 15, 33 43; the one name, however, may stand for JT T : lyj^Jj! {declivity, slope, from ']5>ia, see bitN , SI^n) w. ^. of a city in Judah Josh. 15, 52, along with a^i« and nail. P|J2^iJ (not used; a collateral form of t]^3) intr. to speak softly, to murmur, to do a thing in a lurking, mysterious way, therefore to practise enchantment, as far as enchantment consists in mut- tering magical forms, comp. Syr. ^a^f to practise magic, which stands for the Hebrew 'ijan Deut. 18,11. The organic root is SiB-N, which is found also in t)T25-3; Syr. '-aAjs, in Ithpe. to pray, prop, to whisper, like 125nb to whisper and to swear to, whence lljnb whispering, sorcery and (softly whispered) prayer; Ar. i_fl.w.S' the same, therefore i^.Am\Xjb signifies a theosophist, icjLt*uLC« theo- sophy; perhaps in a modified form in affl'p to listen, to hearkin attentively, whence iiB)?^ oracle, sentence. Comp. the middle Jiigh German losen, prop. = lau- schen, Gothic Mausjan, originally to hear, to listen, derivative loos = oracle, reveal- ed (prop, heard). The verbs UJns and llirtb , cognate in sense, proceed from a similar view, and according to Bar Bahlul ^.s^] is actually used in the sense of uSrji. Prom another fundamental meaning DOp (which see) proceeds, and again from an- other Uisb, tab; but the three verbs, r T ' JT ' ^ ' cognate in sense, have certainly had dif- ferent shades of meaning imparted to them here. 5HJ3X (prop, part.; plur. ']"'SttJt«, def. N^SliSiS) Aram. m. an enchanter, Dan. 2, 27; 4" 4; 5, 7 11 15 along with D^Sn, I'n'ilSS and others. See !r|fflN. tjtSS (pi. D''S") m. an enchanter, ma- gician, Dan. 1, 20; 2, 2; distinct from &J15N Aram. m. the same Dan. 2, 10. nei^Sl (with suff. ins-, from iiBl^ I.) f. 1. quiver (prop, what takes, receives) which one fills with aiTows Ps. 127, 5, and in which something may be col- lected and concealed Is. 49, 2 ; Jek. 5, 16; 'N ■'Sa aj-j-ows Lament. 3, 13 ; 'N Ni253 to bear the quiver Is. 22, 6 ; 'N for 'N ^ia Job 39, 23. — 2. (only in pi. nisilSiiJ rarely rTiSliSi?, once with the article niST^ll = niSlSNlrt) dunghill, dirt-heap, rubbish, a) as an image of humiliation Ps. 113, 7; 1 Sam. 2, 8; b) as the name of a gate in Jerusalem, dung-gate Neh. 2, 13 ; 3, 13 14 ; 12, 31. — The singular form MBIUN is preserved in the Mishna; but in Hebrew the plural is used, be- cause 'N expresses a collective idea. The stem is ii&T^ 11. (which see), comp. \juu dust; on the other hand, the plurals TJDJ^^N 163 l^i^ ririBi^N has come from another form nsidN; IT : - TJSI^J? (Persian) n. p. m. Dan. 1, 3. Etymologically it is compared with the proper name WSudN , as 'IS^N with'nsfflN , and if this be correct, 1BN must be the name of the- Ases-race head (the LXX singularly enough translate it 'A^tsadQi, ■''HTS'iaN), the original ancestor of the Germanic and Scandinavian peoples. T513 or tie would be the second part of the word. But the derivation of it is still obscure. ISfflN masc. only in 2 Sam. 6, 19 and IT : 1 Chk. 16, 3, according to the Targ. (51f>B) portion, from 'l&llS = "l&D to measure, determine. According to the LXX we should read ISIBN (which see); and pro- bably it has exactly the meaning of 'IBIBN (which see). The Phenician pro- per" name Aspar (Sail. Jug. 108 seq.), ^d-tpaQ (App. fragm. Numid. 4) should be written "isBN, comp. Hebr. n. p. JTisb. rSSUJS (from n&io IT. ; plur. ninST^N) fem. same as ilsiIJN; 2. rubbish Lament. 4, 5, Targ. snb)?''^, Ibn Ctandch Jolyo, Tanchum 'iX>ye. 'jib]?jdj< {holm-oak) n. p. of a Philistine city between W5> and Insi^ J IT- IV : - on the Mediterranean sea JtroGBS 1, 18 ; 14, 19; 1 Sam. 6, 17, where a village of the same name still exists, Ashalan. Be- cause the Ascalon district was rich in onions, they are called Ascaloniae, Esca- lots (Plin. 19, 32; Diosc. 1, 124). Gmtile *<5i!5)5i2JS«. See bpttj. I ': : - 'r t 'nti'J^ L {imp. plur. I'nizSij) intrans. equivalent to 1«5 11., in (see 111^, Tin) to go about, run about; then generally: to go, to walk, to step along, Tjlia 'N Peov. 9, 6 to go along upon the way. Comp. Ar. J| to go , whence ^f foot- traee, Aram. "inN the same, from which comes ins, trace. The organic root is 1lS-N, which is modified in in, 1^ &c. r T ' IT ' IT Hence IlIJN, IISN. Fih. ll^N (/iwi.'liBN^) to cause to go for- wards, with a in a thing Peov. 4, 14, where Jfjsb should be supplied; 23, 19 to cause to go in the sense of to guide, lead. Is. 3, 12; 9, 15, opposed to inynrr to lead away from the path. Puh. ItB^ to be led, guided Is. 9, 15. 15i?J^ n. (not used) intrans. 1. to be united, by love, marriage &c. Hence rrlTlJN , d-^lllSN , lUJN I. Comp. liDiS. — 2. to be firm, strong, pressed together, steadfast, cognate with 1123 "p , 1i^"M &c. The organic root is nO"l!«, which is also found in 1i;j (lilts) IV. &e.; and from this fundamental signification IISN means in the Mishna to confirm. Derivatives lUJN (name of a tree), missn, Aram. N31TSN, and the n. p. of a city lUJiS. 15i^^ (not used) intrans. equivalent to 1D^ (which see) and also to IttJN II. (in illViN ,nSN, dinas) to be conneeted,unit- n " -: ' rr '^ r •• -/ ' ed, Ar. -m.^ , spoken especially of con- fidential or intimate union. Hence liSN IT T in the proper names 5N1toN. and 5N"'1iBN. "liati, constr. ItON, see bsiiUIS. IT T ' I- -: ' I" : — : *l5!fi^ (not used) intrans. equivalent to lias (which see): 1. to be straight, even (of a way) ; whence the proper name (of the land) IllBN. — 2. in a moral sense: to be right, honest, upright, righte- ous, so far as this is represented in a plain, straightforward line of conduct. Derivative IIUN in iibNITIJN , which is IT T T I" : — : ' interchanged with !ibN1\l5\ — 3. to be prosperous, happy, metaphorically re- presented by the evenness of a situa- tion, the same metaphor being found in 11153 and lia;; (Hab. 2, 4). Perhaps how- ever from IIBN n. Hence the proper name ITUN, im, 112:n. PjA.nBlSi denom.fromllBN (which see). P«A.1iBNdenom.from1iaN (which see). imN I. (happy, from IllJN, as the name is interpreted in Gen. 30, 13 ; comp. the proper names Felix, Paustus, For- tunatus, Eudaemon, Callitychus, Enty- chus, Macarius; see however D'^lias.) 1. n. p. of a son of Jacob and then founder of the tribe of the same name Gen. 30, 13; 35, 26, thence the territory 11* n5y« 164 nty^^ of Asher Josh. 17, 7; 19, 24 &c. Qentile ■''niliN Judges 1, 32. — 2. only in ^Zm/-. ai-liBN (which see); comp. (TniaN. In the Phenician, a proper name D"!!??!!*. 'Aaiqv- jiog {Jos. contra Ap. 1, 18), abridged from D'lllJJ*'!:??, interchanges with D'lnia? 'AaruQVftoe, I4&a-, whence we may infer the Phenician identity of tTn^N. with VI:- "IfflNII. (out of litis; fortress, from 'itiN n.) n. p. of a city east of djD«5 Josh. 17, 7, on the border of Manasseh, and on the road to Soythopolis (iNiZJTT'a) according to Eusebius (s. v.). But Kimchi thinks that 'n is the name of the race, and that nnas^rt lirJNW means, from the IT : ; • - I" T I" ' border of Asher to Miohmethath, as 17, 11 refers thereto. 1113 i< inasc. 1. (onlyjpfoj'. Qi'nidN , from ItiN il.) equivalent to lllBNn, the name of a tree, commonly sherbm-cedar, larch, as 'iilSitri (which see) has been taken, or according to Kimchi, box-tree (SilBi^N). d'l'itiN-na Ez.27,6 is referred to yq ivory : out of sherUn-cedar i. e. inlaid with sher- bin-cedar; Kimchi reiexs 'tiNTiS to IZi'l^,, which is here fern, as a collective meaning plank-work, and we must construe 'itin)? )Vi lias* D'''niai<-na thy deck, daughter 'of the sherbin-cedar (i. e. made of sherbin- cedar), they have overlaid with ivory. Yet Bochart already reads d'^'niONna, after the analogy of !ia)?ia in that place. The tree is n^med from firmness, as TIN once V IV bears the appellation IllBNn, and there- fore it is looked upon in Is. 60, 13 as TIN, along with 'liTin from ^ir^. — 2. (with suf. i'llBN , plur. with suff. ■'ipis,) fern. a) step, walk Job 23,11, hence i 'N Tjan to hold fast the step on something Ps. 17, 5 ; 'N 'jSiB to make sure the step; 'm IniS'M the step totters 37, 31; la 'N flDDi'^Ae ,. ' ' 'r T IT :iT Step glides away from something 44, 19; 'N :ij3Ell5 the step has slipped 73, 2. The use of the plural as a singular in con- struction occurs here more frec[uently Ps. 37, 31; 73, 2 K'tib. b) by a usual metaphor: conduct Prov. 14, 15. The stem is hilSs I. r T "iBSJt masc. step, waZA Ps. 17,11; Job 31, i] same as itis 2; comp. 1&N = ■n&N. ITv: "lUD^ (only constr. plur. '''itiN; with suf. ^'iltiN, r'ltiN besides iVrptiN = irr''-, TjiitiN = 'Tji'i-, dS'^ntiN, where the form of the construct state is pre- served even before the suff.) masc. for- tune, happiness, hence as an interjection in the construct state: hail! happy! be- fore the nouns IIJ-'S? or TlJiJStl Ps. 1, 1; 112, 1.; d;iN 32, 2 J 84, 6 13; Prov. 3, 13; 15a. Ps'34,9; 40,5; tiiSN Is. 56, 2; Job 5; 17; ''ia Ps. 33, 12; d^ 89, 16; before the plural nouns d''ll5ii<, 1 Kinqs 10, 8; ti-'-i'^S 2 Chr. 9, 7;' d-^iSi Prov. ' ' r T -: ' ' r T 20, 7; or before compounds and parti- ciples which have become nouns and express their ideas, e. g. before "bs ii ■'Din Psalm 2, 12; i>tt5s-"iiiai 32, 1^ ■bistoM 41, 2; n^i lailJi'' 84, 5. Tet the noun following is sometimes omitted and must be supplied, so that the relative -ti follows Ps. 137,8 9; 144, 15; 146, 5, or this too is often omitted after a construct state (see Ex. 4, 13; Ps. 81, 6) and ■''1113N attaches itself closely to the following word Ps. 65, 5. — The plural of this word is based upon the collective idea of an abstract, and the application of it as an interjection exists likewise in the Aram. '7 laia , Arab. lilUJa &c. The reading TiN 2 Sam. 23, 21 Kt'ib see in 'itiN. Hence the denom. Pih. TlSN to pronounce happy, Gbn. 30, 13; MalTs, 12 15; Job 29, 11. Puh. 113N to be made happy, Ps. 41, 3 ; Peov. 3, 18'. "ItdX (withswyf. "'I.tis) masc. prosperi- ty Gek. 30, 13. '^y.^. (* compound pronominal stem) pron. relat. (without distinction of num- ber or gender) wlio, which, forming the relative in prose (like !iT or IT in the poets), and explaining, at the head of a clause, a noun preceding. As a most important word in dependent sentences it stands: 1. where it is supplemented by the personal pronoun and stands at the head of the relative clause (since it is iti;i< 165 "iJi'N a sort of particle), both together express- ing what the relative in other languages does, e. g. i|l Nlln 'N what lives Gen. 9, 3, where Nltl completes the mere rela- tive TiBN. 'N stands therefore, a) when it concerns the subject, in which case the pronoun should be taken as a no- minative Detjt. 20, 15; Ps.l6, 3; 2Chr. 8, 7; b) when it relates to the object, e. g. INblS 'N Jbr. 32, 3 whom he shut up, where i- merely imparts to 'i^N the idea of the object; c) when SiON is neither subject (nom.) nor object (accus.), but a subordinate idea is the thing it chiefly relates to, e. g. iT^it)? 'N whose harvest Job 5, 5, where i- goes along with "lias. This supplementing of the unpersonal ^l^N by the personal pro- noun may be dispensed with: a) where 'N already expresses the idea of the sub- ject Detjt. 23, 5, or in smaller clauses, or before each finite verb because the personal is already contained in it; f) where it may already stand as ex- pressing the idea of the object alone, which is especially the case in smaller clauses, or where things are spoken of: but where y) it relates to a sub- ordinate idea, it must not be wanting either after the noun or preposition; and 'N can stand without being supple- mented only when it refers to nouns expressing time, place, way, manner, e. g. isa-I^N dijrt-l? 2 Sam. 19, 25 till the day he came; la'^-IUJN Qipwa Gen. 35, 13 in the place where he spoke; ll^N 'nS'lrt llT this is the reason why . . . 1 Kings 11, 27. — The occasional want of the pronominal supplement converts '8 also into a usual relative, and as such it stands 2. still farther descrip- tive of a- noun abeady mentioned, e. g. iFiN im D''1253NH the men that were with 1 ■ IV-: _rT-:r him. But inasmuch as a descriptive clause of this sort may be supplied by a suitable adjective appended, 'N. is frequently dispensed with here, and that too in all cases mentioned in 1 under "' ^> 7» e. g. Gen. 15, 13: in a land (which) is not to them &c. By this means the sentence is more contracted. — 3. It introduces a new noun not yet present in the preceding sentence. Thus used, 'N. may be partly the subject of the sentence e. g. rr'airbs' 'N 1 Kings 16,9 who is (set) over the house, partly the object connected with nx e. g. ns N*!)?^ '-[■6» Gen. 49, 1 that which will hap- pen; partly is dependent on a stat. constr. or a preposition e. g. 'nffiN.b Am. 6, 10; 'IICN bi> Jee. 15, 4.- It is true that 'N IV -: I- ' -: does not at all cease in this case to express relation to the preceding noun, but it is also itself a noun by its re- ference to what follows, and upon it as such a clause of its own depends. — 4. 'N. in the accusative i. e. conceived of as subordinate, may express place, time and manner like any other noun, whether it refers , without prepositions, to a preceding noun that expresses such an accusative Gen. 35, 13; 40, 13; Deut. 9, 7; 2 Sam. 19, 25; 1 Kings 11, 27, or as in the last two places is the supporter of what follows , and has reference to what precedes only as an accusative of this nature. If in the former case '1U5n can denote with respect to time then, when, with respect to place where, with respect to manner that, wherefore, as, in the latter case 1125N. bv 1 Kings 18, 12 may denote whither, ■nijBN. bba 2 Sam. 7, 7 wherever, 111:n. ''3 for as Ex. 14, 13, llfiN as Deut.'7,'19', 1 Kings 14, 19 , Job '9,5 , lifiN. bb just as Zeph. 3, 7, where 1 Chr. 13, 6 (comp. 2 Sam. 6, 2); and in this usage even riN may stand before it when it also de- pends on an active verb Deut. 9, 7; 29, 15; 1 Sam. 2, 22; 1 Kings 8, 31; 19,1; 2 Kings 8,5, where it means where, as, when. Hence "llflN. standing at the head of a sentence in the sense of when Lev. 4, 22, Num. 5, 29, 1 Kings 8, 33 38 can only be explained by this usage; yet one has always to think of a re- ference, which IIUN follows as an accu- sative involving a general relation, just as elsewhere the construct state before 'N. in that accusative is frequently ad- opted in order to express the relations of place, time and manner Gen. 39, 20; ^^^ 166 n^ty« Lev. 4, 24 33; Deut. 4, 10; Jee. 22, 12. In this sense we have ^idsa wAew, wherever Judges 1, 17, in full form d«5-iii5NaGEN.21,17orD'aJ-'nttJN Dip73a IT IV -;r ' IT IV -: 'i : • 2 Sam. 15, 21; "nTlJiiia /row wAere Ex. 5, 11; ■nTjONj? as, >si as, ut 32, 19; 1 Sam. 8, 6 &e. — 5. Sometimes 'N passes into a relative conjunction, for whicli "'S stands elsewhere, so that 'N also means occasionally: a) that, e.g.1Xa^_ lis Zech. 8, 20 it shall be yet that; 'll^N aiu EccLES. 5, 4 it is good that. It is then interchanged with ■'3, e. g. ItJN i|55» for this reason that Gen. 26, 5, 2 Sam. 12, 6, besides ■'3 ipS> 12, 10; 'iiSn 15>?3b m order that Josh. 3, 4, besides i3 l^a^ 11, 20 with a small alteration of the sense; IIUN 1^2 so that Ez. 12, 12, besides i3 iy;i fs. 7, 5. b) As a relative conjunction with a and 3 (which can never be without the support of ll^N.) in ^ifiNa while; of place, where; 1fflN3 i-,-.i ■*■ ' IV -li- as, sicut, where 'N corresponds to i3 in signification, c) In order to introduce a consequence in sentences interrogative or implying admiration, 'N is used in the sense of so that, that, Eciclbs.7,21; Deut. 28, 27; Mal. 3, 19 &c., for which "13 stands elsewhere, d) In order to ex- press object and design in a sentence: that, in order that, with the imperfect Gen. 11, 7; Josh. 3, 7; Detjt. 4, 40. Here belong also itlsh liIJN Dan. 1, 10 that not (see Manila Son» of' Sol. 1, 7), b ^ilSsa on account of Jon. 1, 8. e) In clauses relating to time 'nilJN means when, quum, for which '''3 stands else- where, particularly in the sense when- ever = as often as, with the imperfect 1 Kings 8, 33; IllSstS while, in sofar as, because (passing to the cause) Gen. 39, 9 23 ; rarely does the simple "11BN stand for this idea Deut.11, 27, for which, how- ever, as coinciding with QN 11, 28, the meaning when has been claimed here also ; "niSN.a from that, i. e. on this account, because Is. 43, 4. f) Like 'ntiN3 the simple 'N, also means as Is. 54, 9"; Jer. 33, 22; 48, 8, as 13 is used elsewhere Is. 62, 5. — 6. Some traces of 1125N as a mere I sig^ of the genitive are preserved, inas- i much as it expresses the idea of belong- I ing to, which is characteristic of the genitive, e. g. bisia^d 'iidN 1?>'i'ab 1 Sam. 13, 8 till the set time of /Samuel; "fiNI iTrt im iiS'^'n 1 Kings 11, 25 and b'e- r -: IV -:^ IT TIT ' side the mischief of Hadad (yet the ver- sions have abeady supplied "IMN in the former, and TV^'S in the latter place); SiN'na tiiSn i-ilia 1251N 2 Sam. 23, 21 iv : - IV -: I- : • r ' K'tib, an Egyptian of distinction (i. e. of consideration, size), instead of whicli therefore 1 Cmi. 11, 23 has tTn73 ttJiN IT " r (but the K'ri already reads in the former IV : - r' As to the orig^ of this pronoun, 'lUJN must be looked upon as a dialectic col- lateral form of blriit, especially since the Aramaean is? in' IIN is only dia- lectically difierent from bs? (in lbs); Hebr. bSN perhaps =1SN; and in tie Coptic too the same interchange is found. 'niBN or bilJN is naturally therefore com- pounded of three difierent vocables which have a good foundation in the pronomi- nal stems. This relative appears short- ened in the Phenician into ffi'N (which see) ; in later Hebrew (for example in the Mishna) it is abridged as bid (which see), Aram, b'^'ji, elsewhere in earlier as well as later Hebrew as •izS or -la, where the Eesh is resolved into the following consonant, or is merely abridged into Il5 (see -TU, -id, to). '' bl!il"1pK CEI is allied) n.p.m. 1 Chr 4, 16. ItoN. constr. of lias which is equi- valent to the Phenician 1DN (Osiris), an epithet of Ba'al, husband of tTniUN. nbjSl'IfflN (from "nilSN, and rtbs? =bN, see MbN) n. p. m. 1 Che. 25, 2 ; for which nbs'^ilji ("^toj after another reading) stands in 2*5, 14. nnaJN (!Tniil5N Deut. 7, 5, Micah 5, 13; pi. ri'i'ii^N; see ^'''ittJN.) f. name of a Phenician goddess, who is sometimes identified with the Sidonian Astarte Judges 2, 3 (compared with 3, 7) and stands beside b?a, though again se- parated from him. In usage 'ij denotes n*i5y« 167 njy« 1. the idol of this female deity of the Phenicians consisting of a pillar Deut. 16, 21; Judges 6, 25 30. !Tm2)!K!i 2 Kings 18,4 is to be taken collectively, and is therefore identical with D'^'liaN 2Chr. 31,1, image-pillars of Ashera. So too n'lTlSN 2 Kings 21, 3 is identical with ni'il^N. 2 Chk. 33, 3 in this signi- fication. — 2. the female deity of the Tyrians whom Jezebel introduced into Israel, different from the usual Pheni- cian 'N, 1 Kings 18, 19; 2 Kings 21,7; 23, 4 7; 2Chr. 15, 16, and to whom oc- casionally a riitbDM (which see) was erect- ed 1 Bongs 15, 13. She was then iden- tified with n'nniBS, as the LXX, Symm., the Syr. and others translate. — 3. the image or image-pillar of this goddess, so far as it was only dedicated to the goddess without being the image of the idol in itself 1 Kings 16, 33; 2 Kings 13, 6; 17, 16; 21, 3; 23, 6 15. — The plural rri'll^iN denotes: a) like d"'b5>a no- thing more than the plurality of forces united in the goddess, and may there- fore be always applied to a single image 2Chr.33,3, and be identical with tTnTUN 11 IT — : 2 Kings 21,3; b) Ashera-worship, image- worship, idolatry generally 2 Chk. 19,3. The images of 'N were upright wooden pillars or stems of trees, whose tops and boughs were cut ofii and which were wor- shipped partly as-* symbols of the Phe- nician nature-god, partly as the numen itself. Hence the following are used with it: Tits 1 Kings 14, 15; aiitfi 2 Kings 17, loY insa 1 Kings 14, 23 ; "iny 2 Kings 14, 6 or T'hs'n 2 Che. 33, 19 ; '/pJ Deut. 16, 21; laS''2 Chr. 34, 4; yni 34, 7; S>15 14, 2 ;' n"i3 Ex. 24, 13. This is the reason why the LXX, Syr., Ar., Sam., Graeco Venet., Aquila and many inter- preters have translated sometimes tree, sometimes grove. The word is usually derived from 1n^nN (ityida) / am perceived (ib. 1, 8), dbsriN {&isla,m)Iamgrown M^(ib.3,23). bS«nii56«, ■jintiN, fifanffliji and^brn^N should'there- forebe referred to bilffl," iiT25, Jibld and 1^^H?BSl Aram. m. rebellion Ezk. 4, 15 19, from l^ld (which see). lintlJiSt (rest) n.p. m. IChr. 4, 11 12. See ^lilj i. Comp. bsriBij. •IXlFiaJN n. p. of a Levitical city in the mountains of Judah, for which ?MFil25}« also stands Josh. 21, 14; ISam. 30,28; IChk.4,17; 6,42. SeeMMl^n. and5>?5i^. Comp. bJtnizSs*. Perhaps" how- ever, in the signification to spread. ^ipri^N n.p. same as InbrillSN (which £ee). nij (from niN; pi. y^m, def. N^ng, -with suff. ■'rtinN) Aram. m. equivalent to Hebrew r'iN wonder, sign, Dan. 3, 32 33 ; 6,28, cognate in sense with rrijgn ; comp. Phenician MN (et, yth) sign, token cf recognition (Poen. 1, 8), spoken of the tally used at a league of hospitality (tessera hospitalis), and njt. ni$ (pronominal stem) pron. person. (2* person sing.) m. thou, written thus five times without rt 1 Sam. 24, 19 ; Ps. 6, 4; EccLEs. 7, 22; Job 1, 10; Neh. 9, 6, which the K'ri corrects into rtnN. See nriN. IT - Pl^ (pronominal stem) pron. pers. (2* person sing.) 1. m. thou, an abridged form of nN Num. 11, 15; Dbut. 5, 24; Ez. 28, 14. The reason for this abbre- viation has not always been discovered, and therefore the LXX and Syriac read in Ez. 1. c. riN with. — 2. /. thou. Gen. 24,23; Judges 9,10; five times in pause m Gen. 12, 13; Euth 3, 9 11; 1 Sam. 25, 33; Pkov. 7, 4. — For rijs the ori- ginal form "^riN also appears seven times in K'tib ; but the K'ri reads °riN, effacing the old form Judges 17, 2 ; i Kings 14, 2; 2 Kings 4, 16 23; 8, 1; Ez. 36, 13; Jer. 4, 30. See iiriN. IT - riS: I. (before Makkeph -nSfi ; before a grave suf. QSnsj, but also tDSniw Josh. 23, 15; dMnti besides QiiniN; innt* Ez. ' IV : ••• IV ; I ' ' IV ; V 23, 46 besides ^Siniis) properly subst. m. same as DIN II. (which see) existence, being, essence, body, and therefore like fiSS self, essential. It is used as the sign of an accusative, or to give pro- minence to a noun as subject &c. Comp. the Phenician riN (yth, et) nota accusa- tivi (Poen. 1, 1 3 6 10 &c. Tripol. 2, 3), with suff. atirns (ib. 3, 23). The suc- cessive development of its significations is given under nis n., and like that word it is to be derived from nils HI. in5< II. (before Makkeph tin ; with suff. ■'riN, ^FiN, QjsriN, contracted from Fi2f« = njN and to be derived fromniN to incline, lean upon, turn) prop. m. side, support, but only used as a preposition : at (comp. - the Ar. du&, Aethiopie ent), with, ex- pressing fellowship or accompaniment. In this sense many verbs axe connected with njS to modify their signification after this preposition, e. g. -riNhSlB'i n« 169 nnt< to lie with Gen. 19, 33 ; TIN IMS to stand with, to help Num. 1, 5 ; TIN lib to spend the night with one Lev. 19, 13; TIN aiBi to sit beside Judges 17, 11; nianbu Tj'nS') "DN ^'''1 to carry on war, to strive with; TIN D'^btirt, ni'na n^Si to enter into a covenant, to make peace with; TIN ^ritiO^ to make a matrimonial alliance with &c. Where it is capable of being taken in the meaning against depends entirely on the verb Gen. 14, 9; Num. 20, 13; 1 Chr. 20, 5; Peov. 23, 11; Jer. 38, 5, which arises, however, only from the sense toith. The same is the case with the mean- ing at, close by 1 Sam. 7,16; upon 1 Kjngs 9, 25 ; besides Ex. 1, 14. Other modifi- cations of the signification are: a) at, as an expression of particular care Gen. 30, 29 ; 39, 6 or close attachment to something 5, 24; diSSTiN especially is so used in a subjective acceptation Ps. 16, 11; 140, 14. b) mth, cum, as an expression of accompaniment, union. Gen. 15, 18; Judges 1, 16; 2 Kings 6, 16. c) ammg Gen. 43, 16; 2 Kings 9, 25. d) at, locally considered 1 Kings 9, 26. It is very often interchanged with las (which see) and may also be taken in other collateral senses, which are easily perceived from the context. — In connexion with other prepositions we have chiefly to notice the very frequent use of riNM meaning on the part of, a parte alicujus, then generally from, with which verbs and nouns of going forth, sending, requiring, receiving &c. are coupled Gen. 8, 8; 26, 31; 38, 1; Ex. 11,2; 25,2; Job 2, 10 &c.; often too it is = ID5»M. TiNM Is. 44, 24 K'ri stands in the sense of ■'S'jja Hos. 8, 4. Some- times riN is put for riNM Gen. 49, 25, when ']» has preceded. In Phenician m (tin) is the same, hence "^nN (Kit. 2, 2; 29, 2), '^nN'ttJ (sitti) which I have with me (Poen. 1, 8). — On account of the similarity between riN I. and 11. with or without Makkeph, great uncertainty exists in different books, interpreters and versions wavering between the two — a fluctuation that extends even to the form with a suffix, though they are ex- ternally distinct (see niN II.) e. g. Jer. 5,18, where LXX and Vulg. read QSriN, the Targ. DSFIN TNI in. (with suf. iriN ; pi. d"'riN) m. mattock, coulter of a plough, hoe, prop, anything cutting into, from niN I (which see) 1 Sam. 13, 20 21. ns IV. {pi. D''riN, with suff. Da-iriN) m. equivalent to riN HI., of which it is merely a collateral form Is. 2, 4 ; Micah 4, 3 ; Joel 4, 10. The stem of it nx is = riN (niN I.) belonging to riN III. rN (before Makkeph) from HN I. see riN I.', niN n. riN (before Makkeph) from nisj 11. see riN II. I" rx (only before suf. inis, fjriN &c.) see riiN 11. I S^n^ in Deut. 33, 2 only, according to many mss.; Is. 21, 12; 1 plur. 15nN Jer. 3, 22 = WNriN. — nriN commonly ' IT T \ " Stands for it (which see). Snf* (only in Ezr. 5, 16; elsewhere in Biblical Aramaean MnN; 3 pi. iriN; part. npN; inf. NpM = NnNM; imp. pi. iriN) Aram, to come, Dan. 7, 22; Ezr. A, 12 ; 5, 3, with b or bs whither. See Hebrew innN. Af. ■'n'^.tl'^DAN. 5, 13 ; dpi. T'np 5, 3 ; inf. MTi^h 5, 2) to bring, with the ac- cusative or b of the object Dan. 5, 3 23. Of. "'n'jrt (which passed over into "'n'^fi : thence 'the fern. sing, n^nifl Dan. 6, 18 ; 3 pi. ITT^rt 3, 13) to be brought. bi'Sr^ (with-Ba'al) proper name of a Sidonian king 1 Kings 16, 31. In Jo- seph. (Ant. 8, 13, 1; c. Ap. 1, 18) two kings are similarly called 'lOo^alog or Ei&a§. i. e. bsairiN, comp. the Pheni- cian proper name b?|nN (Gerb. 1, 2). In this sense the proper name bNTp""!)? = bN'iriN has been taken; but see bNin''N. nni^I. (seldom NHN, whence the 1»' IT T ^ IT T ' ^^ers. ofpZ. iinN = i5NnN; fut. !inN;;.JoB 37, 22 ; — contracted into - innNn = innNn Micah 4, 8, and shortened Nnp Deut. 33, 21 = »r\if^2; making the first guttural prominent riN^i] Is. 41, 25 nn^? 170 ])r\^ from HpNvi; 3 pi. Vr)»^_ Ps. 68, 32, or •with T ii^rijjt.;:.; pl- tmp. 'vm Is. 21,12 ■witti relation to the future that is formed so) intr. 1. to come, with b or "iS of the person, to whom one comes Mic. 4, 8; Jer. 3, 22. — 2. like Dta : to happen, with ace. Job 3, 25. — 3. to go, to pass away, spoken of years, i. e. to flee 16, 22. Fart, fern. pi. ni^ni* coming things, the future, futura, ra fuglXovia Is. 41, 23; 44, 7; 45, 11. Hence according to some, the noun lirT'ii for Ti^riN; see, however, niN II. ' Hif. linil (from InpiN!!) to bring; imp. pi. I'^nlTf 'is. 21, 14;"Jbr. 12, 9. The stem MriN (isriN, Targ. NDN, ITT IT J IT -: ' nns, Syr. ]ii, Ar. LSI) is in all the Semitic dialects; but the organic root is n-riN, as the existing root ns (niNlI.) proves. nnj? n. (not used) should be as- IT T ^ ' sumed for the noun 'jinjs (which see); but according to others ^nN is the stem. See 'jiriN. nnj^ (a pronominal stem compound- ed of !in-5N ; with a slight pause rtriN Ps. 2, 7; 5, 5; 25,7, in a stronger one, ilFiN Ps. 56, 9; elsewhere instead of tins ap- pear also n IS and riN which see) pron. pers. (2* person) ni. thou, to which "'JN. and Nifl (which see) are put in contrast Gen. 31, 44, whose plural was originally DWN (from DWSN, comp. Aram. "Iinais, Ar. |vXJt) still perceptible from the verb- affix in- , but usually smoothed away into QnN you. Like ''3N it is connected 1. with the part, expressing the present of an action Ex. 7, 27. — 2. with the verb of the second person, particularly with the future or imper. in order to make the personal prominent with emphasis Gen. 21, 26; 41,40; Judges 8, 21, where also Mni< sometimes appears as an ac- cusative. Gen. 49, 8. The same is the case with nouns and the suffix T^- ISam. 21, 2 ; Ps. 44, 3, though seldomler. Most frequently, however, the emphasis is given by joining it to ):]K or Da Numb. 27, 13 ; EccLES. 7, 22; Prov. 22, 19 ; or the idea of personality is strengthened by it. — 3. Like all pers. pronouns it implies in itself the verb to he, so that it forms a complete sentence with what is expressed Gen. 3,19; 29,15; 32,18. In other respects the wide use of lini* , riN , DHN, )F\^ may be easily seen fromiVbZ- dius (Concord, partt. p. 106-118). As to derivation, rtriN has arisen from rtnSN, as a comparison with the same forias in the dialects clearly shews -'f (Targ. rtnSN, nSN, Ar. oof. Malt, ynt, Aethiopic aneta, Amharic anets). The assimilation of n is begun already in the Syriac (Syr. ^jf). ~?N is a pronominal stem, which is also met with in ■'-JN ' J- -: (which see), Isn-iN (which see), ip-iN (which see), Coptic «.it or 'n &c.: ac- cordingly, only rtn or n remains as a characteristic designation of the second person, together with the fern, "'n or abridged Fi te, with which the charac- teristic T 'in the Coptic forms ht-k, Kto-k, «-&o-k, nTik-K coincides, when one strips ofi' the concluding -k (a sign of the 2 pers. masc. e. g. pw-R thy face, Hebrew ^-). Ta is usually written in He- brew inn, sometimes also n, and in dif- JT ' IT ' ferent Semitic dialects the vowel too is thrown away, consequently n , of which there are traces in Hebrew also. In applying it as a verb-affix to the pre- terite it usually appears without the accent, n-, once accented ni23 Ps. 90, 8 ; T ' IT — ' ' rarely does the fuller form !in occur; in the future, however, -n only appears. iiriN see Nnis. _ IT -- IT-; ■jirN (the Samaritan text has in^N; pi. rbhN) f. she-ass Gen. 32, 16; ^45, 23 &c., while iTsn denotes an ass m.; ' I -: ' poetically an ass is termed 'N"']5 Gen. 49,11. The word appears to be formed from a stem rtnN with the formative syllable "ji-; yet it has also been de- rived from ■jriN to be slender, flexible, cognate in sense with ']15>, which also suits the Eastern ass. Better perhaps from inN (which see) to be strong. ■JiriNl (def. N5-) Aram. m. an oven, furnace, Dan. ch. 3. It is formed from pin« 171 riN (nriN) = iiJN to bum (like lisn from TiS) widi the noun -ending ')1-; Syr. Uo^i, Ar. ^jji or^jjji, Eabbin. N3in t&na with N rejected, Pers. tun, there- fore not from "WFi. pWN {,pl- ti'^ip.lFiN , withsMf. Nn'')3.inN , for which the LXX read >TlT5!i) m. a break, in galleries and buildings, then the gallery itself Ez. 41, 15 K'tib. See ppN. ^riN (a compound pronominal stem) pron. pers. (2* person) /. thou, only in seven places according to the K'tib Judges 17, 2; 1 Bongs 14, 2; 2 Kings 4, 16 23; 8, 1; Jer. 4, 30; Ez. 36, 13, for which, however, the K'ri already reads the usual riN. This pronoun which has arisen out "of ''n"3i< is to be ex- plained as tins, so that the charac- teristic is ■'Fi, and i specially denotes the feminine. The "'Fi- is still pre- served as a verb -affix to the perfect for the 2* person fern, at somewhat later period of Hebraism, viz. in Song op So- LOM., Jerbm., Ezbk. and Euth, as also in the future, where, however, )'^e\~ likewise appears; but the n should be regarded as a mere after -sound. The form FIN abridged from it, which has become common, appears in use like tlFiN, and sometimes stands, according to the Ara- maean view, for the masculine also. See ns. : r ''FlN (same as ''p'^ix) n. p. m. 2 Sam. 16, 19 22; 18, 2; 23,29; for which there is in 1 Chr. 11, 31 TiiN. ^n^ see BN 2. I- - : 1- I'^PlSI. The Samaritan text reads so in Gen. 31, 6. p'^nS (Q"')?-, with suf Nn"'|?."'FiN K'ri) m. terrace, gallery, stair, from pns* , Ez. 41,15 16; 42, 3 5; Targ. fr (elsewhere for 3>i2:i 1 Kings 6, 5), LXX arod, us- QUSTViiOV. DHN (a compound pronominal stem from DH"SX) pron. pers. (2** p. pi.) m. ye, applied like rinx and ''5N., proofs of which see in Noldius (Concord, partt. p. 120 — 124). Once, however, Ez. 13, 20, it stands for 'jns*, occasioned by the pn« m following. — The characteristic form I^P ('??* is prefix) arose from Qin, which after laying aside the m is still preserved in the affix to the verb (iFi), and which the dialects also confirm (Ar. iXit, Aram. TlFiiN, IIFiN, ^f^^f). D1- is an original ending of the pi. masc, afterwards smoothed off into A; comp. ibN, 11N, V as a plural in the verb &c. Probably the Phenician too pro- nounced this pronoun DON; therefore it occurs as a suffix, Poen. 1, 1 isthim malchy macom syth dipM "'SV'^ ^^^'^. nji?5'^a" from 'ria; d^iiSa from 'd-ia; comp. in the ilishna la'ia from ■'_^'D-'l5- — 2. for b?a, e. g. iVa from 1"? b^i = I'SM 'a ; comp. Phenician dtja from 'at'a b^a (Numid. 3, 3). — 3. lo- cal for n'^a in names of places, e. g. !Ti:|»^ya from fTintiS* n''a; in Phenician proper names n"'a is shortened in a pe- culiar way even into n. The pronunciation of Beth as a con- sonant is b, clearer and softer than the dull, labial p D; and as in the three classes of consonants a transition ap- pears from the sharp into the softer sound of the same organ, or vice versa, so there is a frequent interchange of a and B , more rarely of it and a , either, for the purpose of modifying the ori- ginal idea of a word, or from yielding to Aramaean influence, e. g. t\i and a.?; TS and Ta; bsa and bSS;' 5»aa and S^as; bT'iB and bna; ■TjafaJ (2 Sam. 10, 16) and "Tisiffl (1 Che. 19, 16); laN and IBN; Ijsa and -nNS; la n. and the or- ganic root in 1B-N ; tiSDa and fflan. More rarely does a or S interchange with M, e. g. 'rrnStT: and "ri^iSia ; m-^-m and N'^ia ; dnaia and" ansa; na'n (in^ si^'ja'i) and i^s'n; nB)5 and ba]?; '^'as and -laV ; pjan 173 and p^n; )1^\ Syr.^sT; ^)21 Ar.^^&c. Sometimes this interchange took place in order to have an alliteration by means of the organic permutation, e. g. ']iai'i (for liai'n) Is. 15, 9, to have an alliteration with Dl. Hence the LXX often have (i for |3, e. g. iisab Asfiva Josh. 21, 13; !15S^ 'id/ivBia &c. Comp. also Mekha for Behka, Greek ^lirim for usUrta. Sometimes the per- mutation extends to all three letters, e. g. tjiBi , a^i and Dilfa , or also to 1 , e. g. saa, N?:5, mJi and NSp, or definitely ITt' ITt' ITT JTJt' "C a passes over into the still weaker sound w, e. g. Nil into JiTn , N3J1 into rtnp &c., ' ° 'T T ^ it T ' IT T IT'T but seldom into the vowel w, e. g. 'T& ^1i» from 5>5il5-ra. The double or da- geshed BIth in passing into the western languages is converted into mS, e. g. Aram. Sias* ambuba, bS'ST' in Sanchon. IsQoii^aaX, pipart Afi^axoviJ, (the m in the dialects passes even into n, e. g. lap At. tXftAi', nbaiB Ar. xXaa*«) and in Semitic itself, e.'g. n''5>3721D = !S''5bD. ' " nil: IT ! I •• Comp. the Phenician proper name aab Kon^a.§os {Movers, Phon. I. 687), sbw: imbole (Poen. 1, 2). Seldom is m put before a b not doubled, e. g. a'n^ (= ahs) xagcifi^iog (or the original m converted into (3, e. g. l';ia5 LXX Ns§qoo8, Jos. Ns^QmSijg); NSaO aafi^vxr); Xdfi^da&om. N'7?3b. " ' ' IT :- In the completer root- or stem- formation Beth frequently appears with relation to the mother -form as un- organic, i. e. not belonging to the original state of the root; and it is used in such farther development: 1. as an initial sound to simple organic roots to make out of them enlarged stems of two syllables, e. g. ns-a (na-s), vr^ (p?-), pT-i (p.^)' Ti '(^?-i). ^p"^ (^p. fi-^rt)j na-al. (nt?), ip-a (^.ntb), Oia-a (uo) &c., without our knowing anything more exact of the signification of such Bith. — 2. as a final adjunct in the forming or derivation of new words (pluriliterals): in this manner ai- in away from 1153^ (which see); a- in ^^f^ (which see); perhaps also as'^N (wiience naanN) from Tin ; a- in abia (which see) from 'Tj'nS; comp. the Arab. Oi>jj to strangle, from i>y. noose; Aram. ana locust, from na = y'lp &c. "5 (pronominal stem; with suff. ia, ^■z knd naa Ps. 141, 8, 1-a, ia, sa, ' ' : IT : ' ' 'IT ' I ' IT ' lia, oaa, pa, aina and aa, trana, it' |-.*t' 'i'.'T' IV T it' T 1" T ' Itia and 'Jrta) a« inseparable preposi- tion : in, in the widest use of that word, nearly corresponding to the Latin in (with the accusative and ablative) or to the Sanskrit locative, and which is always dependent, on account of its single and abridged sound. It is the most general preposition for motion near, and the varieties which proceed from this primi- tive meaning are developed in the fol- lowing order: 1. pure vicinity of rest, expressing, as it were, the immediate con- tact of rest, like Lat. in with the abla- tive, viz. a) in a local sense: in, at, to (answering to the question where?) e. g. i;;ya at the fountain 1 Sam. 29, 1; D'JM'Ba in the heavens Ex. 20, 4; 1^1^ a at the gate 2 Kings 7, 17 ; uS^paa in the sanc- tuary Lament. 2, 20; ']';jJa ')'^V eye to eye Num. 14, 14. b) in the sense of time, e. g. !i5tt5a msuj year to year Deut. 15, 20; iB'iha ffll'n month to month 1 Chr. 27, 1. c) in an adverbial sense, e. g. "jaa, 13*3, d^iaa, fiyea &c. (which see). With this is connected the use of a d) before the in- finitive, e. g. p'nica 'in laughing Prov. 14, 13 &c., but which may be resolved by conjunctions in connexion with preposi- tions, according as one thinks of time, place or circumstance along with the action, so that a may be translated by while, after that, when, then, although, be- cause, e) Standing before certain nouns or particles it converts them into pre- positions or particles, e. g. lisa (see Tis), 'I'^sa (see ']':!!«), DSga (see'DSN), ^llJN.a or "lUa in that, i. e. while (see 'y&4), "iia^a (see iia?.), •''i.a (see i;i), ■-iBa (see n^ss), "'Stsjia '(see •\\)a), lana (see la'n), I'if^jia (see nii«5f , Ntan, -1S.5, fflp3, ipa &c.;''d) verbs of asking oracles, or more correctly of inq[uiring, e. g. bjSl^, TlSn'n, N'np^ &c.; e) verbs of being pleased with soniething, e.g. ina, iiS'n, ibjs, nam, or also those of the contrary, as ONa, b?a, mp &c.; f) verbs of abiding in or dwelling' upon a thing, relating to the senses, as ns'i, Wn, J>affl, n-^nrt &c.; g) verbs of abid- ing in or dwelling upon what relates to the mind, as NSp, ppJi, bnrt, bbp, ia^, r??7. i*?;, n'^ia, n^j*?:, wj>, Mnirt, ^^^ &c.; and generally it is used thus in reference to an object whether the action be for or against it, so that a may be translated over, for, against. — 'With this fundamental idea of the vicinity of rest, in which an occasional idea of motion is only apparent, is connected 3. a as an expression of accompani- ment, with, prop, at something, whether such vicinity of accompaniment be con- ceived of as helping or adjunct, serv- ing as an instrument, or ruling and working, in which case it may be trans- lated through or by. In such sense a is used a) of accompaniment in the signification with, as "153 fi?3 with much people NtTM. 20,20; ■'TOba with my disciples Is.8,16-, iariba Jer. 11, 19 with its fruit. Here belong also the compound particles iiba , T'sa, ■'baa, n^pbsa &c., as well as tie construction of the verbs dip, TT^, Sta, 1p_B &c., which express the idea of ap- proaching with something, b) as an ex- pression of the instrumentality or means which accompany the action, as a subordinate matter, in, which case it may be translated by, sometimes with, as STiaa i;;a by Moses &c. In this sense a a) joined to nouns forms numerous adverbs, as inipa with or by strength i. e. strongly; and 'so "inpa, '^'isa, ''bffl'a, rm^, wia^a, on'a", taba ''ic. ^) it stands with verbs which take, in order to supplement themselves, the cause, the author, the instrumentality and the means, e. g. a t)£5^ to faint by or from Lament. 2, 19'; a nia Ez. 7, 15 to die by; a NjaSrirt to prophesy by Jer. 23, 13 ; a 5>ailj3 to swear by, as the Latin per; i A'nri Josh. 10, 11; 21 ias-i Ez. 34, 18; a Nnp^ Is. 58, 1; a ias^'io do work by Ex. 1, 14 i. e. to use one for work; IntUS or a ird/n to take interest by one i. e. to lend to one Dbut. 15, 2; Neh. 5, 11. y) ^ denotes the material which is supposed" to be the means, e. g. niN'naa out of looking-glasses Ex. 38, 8; niBHSa out of brass 1 Kings 7, 14; lasa out of wool Lev. 13, 52 &c. Accordmg to this view :? is to be taken before numbers, when something is summed up by that means, in which case it may be trans- lated consisting in, e. g. ^''^^UJa con- sisting of seventy, Deut. 10,22." 6')" a an- nouncing that for which a thing {akes place, particularly in verbs of ex- change, selling, taMiig, in denoting re- ward or price &c., e. g. dtiba for bread 175 i^^)^:i Neh. 5, 15; llJSSa Deut. 19, 21 for the life; ribisa Is. 7, 23 for a thousand; bhia for Rachel Gen. 29, 18; iiliaDB Peov. V, 23 for Ms life; in the same sense also it means on account of Gen. 18, 28. — 4. With relation to objects a denotes the being in a place wherein , where it may be translated within, among, inter, in &c. e. g. Dtna among them Ps. 139, 16; O'l'iiia among the peoples Lament. 1, 1; fiiTUSa among women SoNG OP Sol. 1,8; a'''niu")ja among the conspirators 2 Sam. 15, 31. Hence it is used with verbs which direct their action upon objects in such a way as not to take in the whole but to affect a part only, e. g. 3 NtoS to hear in something Job 7, 13 i. e. a part of the burden; a 'rO'n to smite in or among i. e. to smite a part of them 2 Sam. 23, 10; in like manner a bSN to eat of some- thing, a nniB to drink of something, a liljl &c. — 5. at, toward, always denoting decided vicinity, thereat, as it were; different from bN , which expresses motion toward without nearness. Ac- cording to this signification it is con- strued with verbs implying such motion as is connected with the attainment of its object and remains within the limits of motion, not passing into rest or divergence from a straightforward course, e. g. T^^ ')ni to give into the hand, Ba nbtt) he sends into them i. e. , IT r T into their midst, a 'TjlTio tread into something; besides, verbs of ruling or of hostile invasion, e. g. ^ii!^, STl'l, ? hti2, iaii, a-'-n, snbi &e. men the motion is directed to something up- ward, a should be translated upon, e. g. '7\'^,!X^^upon thy head 1 Kings 2, 24. — 6. in the signification unto, into, in with the accusative, e. s. d'lMffla unto the heaven (as far as heaven) Gen. 11, 4, for which bs is used in Jek. 51,9; hence certain verbs with a occur in this sense, e. g. I ■jirndrt 1 Kings 16, 11.— 7.This a forms an ulterior development of the no- tion of in with the ablative, which exists in other languages also, in, in regard of, after a whole has been briefly put together, to classify it according to the contents, e. g. t|i5»a in fowl Gen. 7, 21 i. e. in respect to fowl. — 8. It shews the existence of a subject in a quality, so that the latter includes the subject of which only it consists. Here the preposition may be translated by as, e. g. Ex. 6, 3 7 appeared I'lttj bisa as the mighty god i. e. consisting in btj i^u5, comp. EzR. 3, 3; 1 Chk. 7,23; 9'',' 33; or it stands vice versa to give pro- minence to the predicate, e. g. "llnNa iX^Ti he is a single one Job 23, 13 i. e. exist- ing as one; Ex. 32, 22 they are S'la in evil (see however i>1 III.); inil5 n^a in Jah consists his name i. e. Jah is his name Ps. 68,5; Is. 26, 4; Nia;; pma he comes as strong 40, 10. Poetically, a statement generally is introduced by it, but in Hebrew more rarely, in the dialects more frequently, particularly in Phenician and Arabic. As to the derivation a has been looked upon 1. as an abridgment of JT'a {within, in), especially as the meaning agrees pretty well , as r^a in Aramaean is ab- breviated into ia ^^, the Arabic ii>-o being also smoothed away into i>~> in geographical names, and as a appears there also in Hebrew; comp. the Coptic gi house and in, the German in from inn a dwelling. — 2. It has been derived from N'^a (from Nia , like i<\^ from N15), out of which the Aramaean a and after- wards 3, i_) arose. According to this view it signifies entrance. It appears more suitable, however, to regard a in its short form as a vocable belonging to language generally, and as cognate with 1. ^ (pronominal stem) Aram, prepos.: in, with, by Dan. 2, 19 34; 5, 2, like the Hebrew a. ^^3 see Nia. IT I nHO (for ns'^a, which is in 18 mss. IT • ^ IT • ' . of Kennicott; from Nia, comp, fl»''R) f. entrance, Ez. 8, 5. NffllNB {def NFitti-, formed from llSiSa) Aram. adj. fern, wicked, evil-minded Ezb. 4, 12. n^^D 176 t^M "li^B (Kal unused) tr. same as la, ItjB for-axe, to bore, to dig, to dig through. For the organic root comp. N-'ia and tLe Arab. .Lj to dig, jIj to in- vestigate. But 'np_a (to split) is not a har- der form, because it belongs to another group. Deriratives 'iNSi, ni'iNSi, 1ia Josh. 19, 8 which is said to be identical with 'isa Judges 9, 21 see tibsa. — 4. Only in the plural ni'nNa (wells, fountains) n. p. of a Gibeonite, then a Benjamite city Josh. 9, 17; 18,25, inhabited even after the exile Ezr. 2, 25, which, according to Eusebius (s. v. B?iqc6&), is said to have been seven miles from Jerusa- lem on the way to Nicopolis. Gentile Ti'lisa 2 Sam. 4, 2 &c., also Tiha 1 Chr. 11,39, comp. 1'ia from "inNS; now el- Bireh (S».i"i5a alone stands; see there- fore 'ipy'i-isa. Comp. the Phenician 'iNa "iT-:i- " : -t -. ; ns (wonder-weU) n. p. of the fountain of Arethusa at Syracuse; n'lNa Berytus inPhenicia (Steph.Byz. sub voce: sxiif^ Sia TO svvSqov BriQ juq to (pgsaQ nag awor?) which is called riniia Ez.47,16. . ' IT I" ' 16* 3 (contracted out of 1i«a; ;jZ. ni'nisa) f. reservoir of water, cistern Jer. 2, 13 and K'tib 2 Sam. 23, 15 16 20. ^^^^(eispZajwer; perhaps fi:omNlN"']a protege of heroism, see ^m) n.p.m.l Che. 7, 37. ^'^^^^ (the same) n.p. m. 1 Chr. 5, 6. ''nSl? (the same) n.p. m. Gbn. 26, 34; Hos, i; 1. ti?i^3 (fut. '^^•sS) intr. 1. to stink, to be loathsome Ex. 7,18 21; 8, 10; 16,20; t^ii2 177 bD — figur. 2. (not used) to be hated, no- torious, bad, disagreeable; comp. Syr. ^^fo, Sam. I25jjia or llSya. The stem is closely comiected with «5a (tt5ia) in the original idea to change colour, to become opposed to, contrary to, bad, except that in the one case what is said of the co- lour, is in the other spoken of the sub- stance of a thing. The Ar. (jawu to be unhappy, ij^y-? to be bold, wanton, in like manner tj»*^) «i*-S-? *** shudder at, and Aram, nrta to change colour &c. are only farther metaphorical applications. Comp. besides ll5a-5>. Hence llJiO, naSsa, . * r T ' : ' IT : T ' Nif. Il5i«3i (reflexive) to shew oneself bad, repugnant, to make oneself hated, with TN ("Fin) or a of a person, to one, 1 Sam.'"i3, 4; 2 Sam. 10, 6; 16, 21. Elf. uS-iNari (fut. uS-'Na;;) i. to cause to stink 8. g. ointment, Eccles. 10, 1 ; to spread a stink Ex. 16, 24; in full form CVrs "r\ to make the odour bad, but only figuratively to make loathsome, hated 5,21, then omitting H'^'lTiN and with a of the person, to bring into bad repute 4en. 34, 30; 1 Sam. 27, 12. — 2. in the sense of Ui'^Sft (uSls) to shame, to make ashamed, e. g. l»i|S52 Pkov. 13, 5 = lii'^ai'', beside "fBrin, comp. ffliaa 19,26. ll5''Nart Is. 30, 5 is pointed UJiNah. Hiihp. ttSsarilri to make oneself odious, to (D») one', I'Chron. 19, 6. 25^3 -4ram. the same, impersonal (Kke 5»|r; to be sorry) with b? Dan. 6, 15 (op- posed to Dpa "to be of good odour" and "to be good"; comp. aia to be good, and uLis to have a good smell). SJ3N3 (with suf. ■ilBNa, Dl^-; an older form for Uiiil!5 y^H, D'^'^to 'N Is. 14,4; — 2." as the name of the Assyrian empire, where Babylon was the capital of the province 2 Chk. 32, 31; 33, 11. Subsequently, at the time of the Persian dominion, it was also — 3. a name of Persia Ezr. 5, 13 ; Nbh. 13, 6. — baa as a celebrated capi- tal Jee.50,12, surrounded by enormous walls 51, 12 58, with its iron gates Is. 45, 2, hanging gardens (in the form of terraces Jos. Ant. 10, 11, 1), with its boundless luxury and its love of plea- sure Is. 14, 1 1 ; 47, 1 ; Jbe. 51,39; Dan. 5, 1, and with its remarkable fortunes &c., is described at length by Greek 12 bnn 178 •"ija ■HTiters, and especially by Berosus. In Jek. 25, 26 and 51, 41 it is also termed 'TiiB^ (whicli see). Subsequently, a city founded in Egypt, almost opposite to Memphis (see Literaturblatt d. Orient 1849 p. 358), by Babylonians who left their homes under Cambyses (Jos. Ant. 11, 5; Strabo, Geogr. 1, 17; Ptol. 4, 5), was called Babylon. With regard to the derivation of ^sa, that from baba is, indeed, gram- matically correct (see Lehrg. der aram. Idiome p. 167); yet it is not impossible that the name was originally formed from ba aa court (gate) of £el, or from ba"'ia (= Tia) Belus-town, or the like. p!3 3 Aram. f. the same, used of the city or province Dan. 2, 12 48; 3, 1; 4, 26; sometimes with Nna"! great as an adjective, like nart Am. 6, 2 and Jiog- noXis Tj fieydlTj in inscriptions. "^b:?? (in the Targ. def. fiNbaa; only in pi. def. N^baa) Aram. gent. m. Ba- bylonian, i. e. belonging to the city of Babel Ezr. 4, 9 ; Hebrew baa lia Ez. 23, 23. 3i3 m. food (oomp. Ar. _U; Pers. sU food, Sanskr. bhag = cpdy-Eiv\ Ibn G'andch and Z^OTcfc' bSNJ?), only in K'tib Ez. 25, 7: D|:i5b i:3b"^in'3 to give for food (i. e. to destruction). But as the K'ri and LXX read ta, as d".i)ib Tab appears in 26,5, and as in 47, 13 !1J1 arose out of !Tr, it is advisable perhaps to retain Ta. If, however, the K'tib reading be fol- lowed, it need not be regarded as for- eign; but it may be derived from aia (which see). 1J3 (fut. iha^, Mal. 2,10 isas) tr. 1. (not used) to cover, veil, clothe, whence Tja. — Pigurat. 2. to cover, to conceal, then to act covertly, to deceive, deal falsely, absol. 1 Sam. 14, 33, Job 6, 15, or with a of the person whom one de- ceives Jee. 3, 20; Is. 33, 1; Hos. 5, 7, rarely with yz Jbr. 3, 20. Out of this signification has been developed that of to forsake faithlessly e. g. God, Jer. 5, 11; a wife Ex. 21, 8; a husband Jeh. 3, 20; a friend Lament. 1, 2 &c.', to be- tray, with the accusative Ps. 73, 15; like yyp to spoil, rob Is. 21, 2, hence the proverbial climax laia ^5^at^ 21, 2, iisa d-'naa 24, 16, isa laa Jer. 12, 1; ISia )1l^ tlN Hab. 2, 6 well! (see ^S 2) the drunken man (equivalent to ia"'IS ^ii!l) robs; then generally to sin, to commit injustice, once even ^i!* isa Ps. 59, 6; most frequently in this sense oc- curs the part. plur. D''15'|i , opposed to Qi'nia^, t:'')>'''^51 &c. (in "Hab. 1, 5 the LXX" and' Syr. read di'l^a for d;;iia); Prov. 13, 15: and the conduct of sinners is bold (see IIT'n). Derivatives Ija, niiaa, Tiaa. The stem, it is true, is not in use in the dialects, but its fundamental signi- fication is easily perceiyed from the or- ganic root "I5"a (comp. 15 "is , IS, "fp'S); and a like transference in bs>a, Ar. Qtjju, {}Ji=>, jjJOiJ m. confirms it. 'l^S (with suff. iiaa without dagesh in i; pi. d'^'iaa, constr. '^'isa; once Ps. 45, 9 pi. ni'iaa) m. (fem. only in Lev. 6,20, but the Samaritan copy has masc.) 1. covering, clothing in the proper and usual sense, cloth Gen. 28, 20; 1 Sam. 19, 13; 1 Kjngs 1, 1; a tegument over the sacred vessels Numb. 4, 6-13, comp. Ar. i>Ls3o clothing, cover; in particular a kind of upper-garment Gen. 39, 12, beside b'lya Ezr. 9, 3 5. Figuratively, Is. 52, 1; 59, 17; 61, 10. — 2. covering, deceit, faithlessness, treachery, robbery, sin Jer. 12, 1; Is. 24, 16; comp. laa 2. rrilJS (originating from ni'ilia, comp. nibb i!i from riibb ifi ; here the form passes over as in niasn Prov. 1, 20 into the fem. pi.) f. treachery, deceit Zeph. 3, 4. Tiia (only fem. filiaa with the a im- I T ^ •* ' IT IT pure remaining in the first syllable) adj. m. faithless Jbr. 3, 7 10 interchanged with niaa. IT" I ''^y^ (perhaps from ''l.ri?: 7-5 = "''if comp. MIS I., fT'lS; belonging to the people^ n. p. m. Ezr. 2, 2; Neh. 7, 7 (perhaps from the Persian bhagavan happy)- ^i'JD 179 ID ^'bsa see bba (constr. bb.?). NTO3 (Persian) n. p. m. Esth. 1, 10. "J5i appears to be the Bay- of Persian proper names, as Bayoqa^og^ BayaXog, Bayandrijg, and may be the "53 in the proper name ']tii'3. and perhaps also the -:i5§ in Nna^N. 'With this -i%, Six have been compared sometimes the Zend, baga (the sacred word, then a name of Ized), sometimes the Sanskrit bhaga (felicitas). sn- or in", Niri" (also in the Persian IT MT ' TIT ^ proper names O-tavrig, Ca-tanes, Pe- tanes) has been compared sometimes with the Sanskrit tanu, Pers. ten (body), while it has sometimes been regarded as a termination (fa, tana = dana, given). ■jnija (Pers.) n. p. m. Esth. 2, 21. Instead of it NDnaa (Pers.) n. p. m. Esth. 6, 2. See T IT : ■ ^ MDASM and Kn^la. it:--: IT : • ^2 1, (from Tia I. ; plur. d'^'na, constr. '''na, with mff. V^^) m. 1. dismembered, singled out, separated, hence Ex. 30, 34 las 13 separated upon separated i. e. each apart, part by part. The con- nexion of two nouns with a expresses their closest likeness. From this signi- fication arose 13b (the state constr. of 13 with b, asrTHXb together with, f^^jV before, nN'])?b to meet, opposite, ■y?? before &c.) prop, to the being alone of, subordinate to the following word, or even standing alone. It is in con- nexion with ■)» (la 13b) si) a preposition: besides, except Num.' 29, 39; Deut. 3, 5; also 13^5? Gen. 26, 1 ; 46, 26, liBN 1j?ba except what Ntjm. 6, 21 ; 1 King's 10,' 13 ; 2 Che. 9, 12, with suf. i13ba eiecept Him Deut. 4, 35; b? 13b' Ezr. 1, 6. b) an adv.: only, especially, seorsum, solum EzB. 1, 6; EccLES. 7, 29; Is. 16, 13, in which sense it is in pause 13^- It is often connected with a suffix, also as an adjective, solus, a, um, as ■-pb I alone Num. 11, 14; Deut. 1, 9; ,^pb Ps. 51, 6, in pause 'rjisb Ex. 18, 14; b3l3b Deut. 29, 13; il3b Gen. 2, 18 ; ft'i3b "Ex. 22, 26 ; Q13b Gen. 43, 32 ; ' IT- : ' ' IT- : ' ' here the suffix fem. pi. is sometimes W^^lb Gen. 21, 29, sometimes ^liisb 21, 28. — 2. solitude, emptiness, only constr. pi. 113, Job 17, 16: into the soli- tude of the grave it (i. e. hope) descends (l^?1pFi = 1p.Fi, like tianbtin Judges 5, 26 =nb'tt5ri, nson'in is.28,3 =Dain): , . . • ,• T:i T" ' J.. J../ J 5Nffl "i j73 IS only equivalent in meaning to nia ipsti Job 38, 17 and to biNi^ •'psttj Is. 38, 10, and cannot be translated bars, which it never means. 13 II. (in pause 13, pi. D'^IS; from 113 H.) m. 1. yam, thread, yarn-web, prop, twisted into one another, meta- phorically linen, particularly white linen belonging to the 153, in, d^D53B, nphS), Cii3N, nssaa, liss of priests" and dis- tinguished' persons Ex. 28, 42 ; 39, 28 ; Lev. 6, 3; 16, 4 23 32; 1 Sam. 2, 18; 2 Sam. 6, 14. d'llS collectively white- linen garments Ez. 9, 2 3 11; 10, 2 6 7; Dan. 10, 5 ; 12, 6 7. — 2. branches, of a tree, so called from interweaving; only in pi. a''13: '3 rtiB» Ez. 17, 6 to get branches; d'^IS Jiaa 19, 14 staff of branches, holding together the branches or twigs. Of this signification a farther development is: a) a pole, bar, staff, prop, wound together of branches, Ex.25, 14; 27, 6 &c. Comp. German Baum, and the Greek Kmka. It is possible that the idea of firmness and stifiness arose from that of being wound together, inter- woven, hence pole, beam. See, howevei-, 113 n. b) only in the pi. members. Ax. tjia», prop, branches of the body, in full form 1i5» -ilS Job 18, 13 branches (members) of the body (TiS* for body also in 19, 26); riS bSNi ibid.: it eats his members, c) only in pi. Hos. 11,6: hnots of human beings, compact masses, conse- quently n3 = T'ibri, which suits there. 12 III. (only ^Z. d^lS , with suff. i?[''13 ; from 113 in.) m. prop, speech, talk, chat- ter, hence lies, brag Job 11, 3; l^'f^b 1113 Is. 16, 6, Jee. 48, 30 his groundless lies i. e. lying oracles; once concr. liars Jee. 50, 36 i. e. the astrologers (Is. 47, 13), who appear fools (44, 25) because of their predictions which do not take place. 12* 13 180 Hs 13 see ia. "72 abridged from I^S, and still more ■T3, in proper names compounded witli it, e. g. Iip.ia (which see); so likewise *7ai> is abbreviated into 13, e. g. fT'ia (which see). Comp. the Phenician pro- per names l^fflNia (Kit. 3, 3), ri^)?ba'i3 (Earth. 5, 5)," hSimiS^'ia (ib. 2y&c.'" " ^?13 (paj-i. with ««/. dNia fortJNia) IT T ^-^ " IT IT : I '' prop, to speak, to prattle, to brag, ^arro- loyeiv, hence to lie, with aba to invent of oneself, i. e. to fabricate IKimas 12, 33 (where the K'tib has Tabw 'a lj, and somewhat modified in M-Ts, i>-is &c. as well as m the corresponding Ar. Jo to divide, separate. "T12 n. (not used) intr. to be inter- woven, intertwined, spoken of twigs, of ropes of yarn &c.; hence ia U. The fundamental signification proceeds from the idea of binding, twisting into one another, the same organic root being found also in 1B-N , le-ia , la-'i , na-K &c. The meaning beam, in Aram. 4a, ^Ar. <>j, has perhaps come from that of crossing, twisting into one another, as in the Hebrew rTiip, 11)?, Ar. X&c. Tl3 ni. (not used) same as Nia (which see). Derivative ia III. "713 m. solitariness, separation, waste- ness, only as adverb (noun in aocusat.) solitarily, desolately, alone, coupled with the verbs a'dj, ^5^, Mnsti Lev. 13,46; Detjt. 32, 12 ; for which nab is used in Numb. 23, 9; Ps. 4, 9. '" ' T72 (from I^N.-ia dedicated to Adai, see Tiii!) n. p. of an Edomite royal fa- mily, 'cfBN. 36, 35. iia see ■'I. I" : r !T''I2 (abridged from iT'iai' wor- IT ! I" ^ ° IT :i" shipping Jah) n.p. m. Eze.10, 35. See 13. ^■'7? {pi. d'lb-; frombnal.)^. 1. pro- perly divided, separated, hence lead- alloy (plumbum nigrum, i. e. stannam, Plin. h. n. 24, 16; 33, 9), which is se- parated by smelting. d''b'''ia, several kinds of lead-alloys Is. 1, 25.' — 2. the name of a metal mentioned with gold, silver, iron, lead, brass, by which is understood a sort of tin {xaaaksgog, Aram. S'l'^ClDa) Numb. 31, 22; Ez. 22, 18 20; '|!i iaN Zech. 4, 10 prop, tin- weight, then plummet, perhaps = las* rrisbrt 5, 8. viv t ' ?1!3 I. (Kal unused) tr. to divide, separate; derivatives b^ia, bia, Inbiaa. r I (TT ' IT T ; • The organic root bl"a is also found in M-bl &c. ; but the Ar. Jjo (to change, to exchange) should not be brought into connexion with it. Nif. bl53 {fut. b^iai) to separate one- self, to be separated, with ■)» Numb. 16, 21; EzK. 9, 1; 10, 11; to 'be excluded 10, 8; with the omission of yq and with biS to separate oneself from a thing and pass over to another 1 Chb. 12, 8; to be chosen as a committee, with or without V23,13;EzE.10,16. Jlif. b'^'jiart 1. to separate, divide (prop. causat. to cause a separation), with ')''a . . . VaJo, Syr. J|-», Sam. 'nia. nri3 (not used) intr. 1. IT T ^ like ^.^ to be empty, to be empty, uninhabited, waste, Aram. Nina, Syr. lata, in the reduplicated form olsulciZ] to be ter- rified (comp. Hebr. aai^); derivative lina. — Hence 2. to he desolate, to be waste. Sips also appearing in the same metaphorical use; spoken especially of the primitive chaos. irj'2 (= llria after the form "^y^ m. emptiness, wasteness, spoken of primi- Dnn 182 r\br\:i tive chaos out of which the world arose Gen. 1, 2. In this primitive significa- tion was Ilia taken in the Biblical cos- mogony, and used in establishing the dogma (l^N?3 u5;) respecting creation. Hence Aquila translates oiidsv, Vulg. vacua , Onkelos and Samarit. ^^p"^^,. The Phenician cosmogony has converted l!ib §aav into a personified expression de- noting the primitive substance, and as a deity, the mother of the races of the gods; the Aramaean name nitia, niiia, i!113 m. a kind of white marble (Ibn Qandch), alabaster Esth. 1, 6; the LXX incorrectly a/iagayditijs. Kimchi has compared the Arab. iaJuLs (marble-like stone). lb''illll {Aram. ivoTo.h'rtz') f. eagerness, haste, 'aa adv. hastily, quichly, Ezk. 4, 23. ' ■ T'jrilll adj. m. shining, enlightening, spo- ken of the sun, Job 37, 21. See 'nSia. xHS (Kal unused) intr. to he terrified, surprised, to shudder, Ar. Jk^; meta- phorically (like tSrt) to move restlessly," very quickly or hastily, to he restless, hasty, as a sign of insecurity and terror. Nif. bnas (/Mi. brta';) 1. to he terrified, af righted 1 Sam. 28^ 21; 2 Sam. 4, 1; Ps. 6, 3 4; 90, 7; Jm^, Targ. N'nf.l- J< Q (perf. Na ; 2 fern, once ma 2 Sam. 14, 3; 3 pi. wa, once INb Jek. 50, 5; on the other hand «iN'a 27, 18 is either for the inf. Nia by transposing the N, or for isai after the Yod was absorbed I T by the preceding i-, as vice versa in n; T)'i'a\-\ Ex. 15, 2; 1 pers. pi. liNa, 1 Sam. "25, 8 16,5 orb ISam. 9,12, with the accus. of the person or place to whom or which one comes. Is. 19, 23; Lament. 1, 4 J the place whence, is coupled with )'a Gen. 16, 8. In this sense metaphorically: a) (o be bom, to appear Eccles. 1, 4; Nia"'"b!ab Ps. 71, 18 to every one who is bom i. e. to posterity, b) with "7? or bit to reach to one, i. e. to be equal to him, 2Sam. 23,19 23; IChe.11,21; applied to inanimate things with the accusative^ to reach to something, of ramparts Jer. 32, 24. c) to reach, with 1? or bN whither Ex. 22,8,NuM. 32,19,particularly spoken of a report or an account Gen. 18, 21; 1 Kings 2, 28 ; in this sense too with ■■SSb EsTH. 9, 11; elsewhere ''SBb Na Gen. 6, 13 is come before me i. e. has presented itself clearly to me. d) to come upon, to fall upon (suddenly), ori- ginally to hit, with b?, bs, b, or with the accus., e. g. of an enemy, the sword, a destroyer, poverty &c. Gen. 34, 27; Job 15, 21; 20, 22; Ez. 32, 11; Pkov. 28, 22; seldom in a good sense, with b? Josh. 23, 15. e) to come to pass, evenire, to be fulfilled, in a subjective sense, spoken of wishes, promises &c. Deitt. 13, 3; ISam. 9, 6; Is. 42, 9; Jek, 17, 15 ; opposites bsi , ai113. In this sense it is also used: f) of inanimate things, to come near, as of the iiBld Job 37, 9; rv\'-\ 41,8; &■; 38, 11; MITDN 3, 24; liffl 5, ^1 ; T^N Prov. 6, 15. g) it is applied to time, e. g. d-'MJ Jer. 7, 32; n^ Ez. 7, 12; isia Ps'.'l02, 14 &c., to de- note partly what happens, partly that which is to be in future, hence Q''NaH r T " Is. 27, 6 the future times, comp. ni^niN 41, 23. h) It appears in a variety of modifications just according to the preposition with wjiich it is connected, e. g. with a : to come with somewhat i. e. to bring, '■'n la'^a jxa 1 Kings 13, 1 Ae brought a word of God (without Na 13, 2 5 9 17 18 32; 20, 35; in 1 Sam. 3, 21 it means in the word of God, over- powered by it); nibi^a Na Ps. 66, 13 to bring whole bumt-oferings = to sacri- fice; Eccles. 5, 2 fop a dream bringi vys ah &c.; 'I'l li'iN niiaaa sa Ps. 71,* IT. • ' IT -; I • ; ■ It ' ND 185 ^^n 16 to bring songs of victory (?1'1^5 equi- valent to is) of the Lord God'; hence the parallel is T'^tN, comp. »-* ^\ to bring. On the contrary diija N3 1 Chr. 4, 38 to be adduced by name, prop, to reach with the name, different from "ISDMl Kja Job 3, 6 to enter into the IT : ■ : ^ IT ' number i. e. to be received among the number. From this signification may be understood still farther i) the use of sab {to come, infinitive with b), as a preposition, towards, versus, unto, with relation to place. Num. 13, 21; 34, 8; Ez. 47,15 ; for which also isaVlS Judges ' ' I : I- 3, 3, 1 Chb. 5, 9 stands, and giving more prominence to the idea of the verb S[N.i3-1» {till thy coming) Gen. 19, 22, Judges 6,4, or iiSN.b, ^N2 Gen. 10,19; 13, 10; 1 Sam. iS, 7. ' i^a^a frmn de- veloped itself out of Stab and is fol- lowed by IS 1 Kings 8, 65'; 2 Kings 14, 25; Am. 6, 14. — 3. to enter, intrare, ingredi, to press into, an intensifying of signif. 2 (for which the Targ. has bby, Syr."^, Ar. Jija.i>); opposite Niar The place into which one goes is con- strued with a 1 Sam. 9, 12; Ez. 2, 2, hence !:|j?a sa 2 Kings 18, 21 to pene- trate into the hand; with bN Gen. 19, 3; EsTH. 6, 4; with the accus'. Ps. 100, 4. Njni N2tJ to go out and in Deut. 28, 6 ; Ps. 121, 8, rarely with iffi; added ISAM. 29, 6, 2 Kings 19,27, 'which de- notes metaphorically the whole actions and conduct of a man, aa 5»2'1.1 rTlS* poetically Ps. 139, 2. With "'isip'or the accusative Num. 27, 17 to stand before one, to conduct his cause. Earely in the sense to go about freely Jer. 37, 4 as an antithesis to sit captive; to bear an office 1 Chk. 27, 1 ; to enter and retire, with accusative of time nais'rt on the sabbath 2 Kings 11, 9, spoken of the Levites officiating. In this sense many phrases and expressions are formed by Na, in which it may be variously trans- lated, as: to enter (into the house of the husband) Josh. 15, 18, with bij Dan. 11, 6; 13sil5?3a Na to go into judgment Is. 3, 14, Job '22, 4 i. e. to accuse; with a to associate with one Josh. 23, 7; Is. 19,23; to treat in common, to enter into a covenant Ez. 16, 8; Neh. 10, 30; to press into a circle of friends (Tioa) Gen. 49, 6; to come into, btl)?a into the con- gregation, i. e. to be received into it Deut. 23, 2; to participate in (a) a thing i. e. to attain to Ps. 69, 28; with a to fall into a thing, e. g. into strife Prov. 18, 6, blood- guiltiness 1 Sam. 25, ^6 ; with a to ad- vance, to progress in, e.g. fi'iaia Gen. 24, 1 or d-^jj^^a 1 Sam. 17, 12 (as theLXX, Vulg., Syr., Ar. read for D-imiNa) i. e. to become older; Qiiiy i1S>a sa Ez. 16. r T-: I—: r it 7 to advance in the highest ornaments; to turn in, spoken of the sun, i. e. to go down Gen. 15, 17, opposite Nlf; to be brought in, corn, Lev. 25, 22 (comp. ilNiaPi); to come in as revenue 1 Kings 10, 14; fflsa Na to stand the fire Num. 31,23. Derivatives ^iNa, Niaa, iiNiah. ' IT ■ ' I T ' IT : Hif. N'lan (with suff. ■iiN"'art &c.; 3 f. MN'^an ; 2 pers. nsaii, n^iart aiid nsian , T r " ' ^ T r •• ' T I" •• T I • -; ' nsart; 1 pers. '^riNjali and inN^ari., and thus the flexion is still fluctuating in many forms) causat. of Kal in all the three principal meanings: 1. to cause something to go, i. e. to guide, e. g. the axe, Ps. 74, 5; with bs, to lead to one Deut. 33, 7. — 2. to cause to come, to bring to, to offer, with accus. of the ob- ject, also of inanimate things, and with bi? or b of the person, Gen. 2, 19 ; 43, 9 ; Lev. 4 5 ; 2 Che. 9, 10 ; Is. 16, 3 ; 1 Sam. 9, 7 ; sometimes the object must be sup- plied. Metaph. to call io^eiAer Est. 5, 10; with b5> to bring something upon one Gen. 6, 17, ''with b or bs Jer. 15, 8; 32, 42, also of good things Gen. 18,19; to fulfil (prophecy, a word given &c.) Is. 37,26; 46,11; Jer. 39, 16. — 3. to draw in, to cause to enter, to lead in, to bring in, e. g. into the house Gen. 43, 17, into the for- tress Ps. 66, 11; to pull in Gen. 19, 10; to bring home (a wife) Judges 12, 9 ; to bring (into judgment) Job 14, 3 i. e. to accuse before a tribunal; N'^aii'i N'Stirt Num. 27, 17, 1 Chr. 11, 2 to lead to war and out of it; to cause to go down (spoken of the sun) Am. 8,9; to store i. e, to lay up grain 2 Sam. 9, 10; to inter 2 Che. 28, 27; to put into Ex. 4, 6; 25, 14;' 2n 186 b)2 Lament. 3, 13. — The final !S some- times disappears, as ■'Sii Etjth 3, 15 = N'^ain; iSN 1 Kings 21, 29 = N''iN; comp. is; IKJN&3I2, 12 =i4a\ Sof. Naiii (3 fern, nxairt ' after the IT *■ ' IT Aramaean manner, 3 pi. INMil; part. Nai?a; Niia on the contrary is a noun) ^Jas. of Hifil, Gen. 33, 11; 43, 18; Ex. 27, 7; Lev. 10, 18; 13, 2 in the most diverse significations. Derivatives NSiM, iSaiM. borne remains of the stem Nia are found in the dialects (Arab. *Ij to turn back, to turn in, sU and sG to sleep with &e.) ; but other verbs are commonly in use for it there ; while NiSi is very often applied in Hebrew, and as it would seem, in Phenician also, e. g. Nb'' (Sard. 6), tulip's (Tug. 5). The organic root «a, compared with the Greek /3a -co iPai-vto), Sanskrit 5'd, German g'e-hen&c. has the series of senses here given ; but the reduplicated aaj^vj to press in has also been compared. 313 (a reduplicated stem, unused) intr. to he hollow, open, whence iS, ilia; A -L o IT ' IT T ' Aram, ia the same, from which comes aias* flute, ambuba, where an m was inserted before b; Ax. ljLj, from which 1-jLj door, and others. Gomp. the Coptic fiHfi hollow, hole. J 13 (unused) tr. either to put into a right state, to prepare (food), then to cook, to bake, whence the noun iia, with which compare the Sanskrit pa6, Pers. bale -ten &c.; or the fundamental signi- fication is to eat, to take food, comp. Sanskrit bhag, whence bhakshja food. Greek qidy-siv, Pers. and Ar. L food, the latter from sb, sU. According to the former explanation' the organic root would be :tja , identical with that in iiB-N , Ar.^^_^, nj3-!an. &c. "113 (belonging to iT^ISi?) see ir-na. IT :)■■ ' IT :i" 1]3 belonging to the proper name ■'ja, which see. T13 (perhaps Ta Zech. 4, 10 is = T3, if it does not belong to TT3; fut. Ttt*") tr. prop, to tread down (ts = Da), hence to despise (by words), to esteem little, with accusat. of the object Peov. 1, 7, the object somewhat remote 23, 22, usu- ally with b 11, 12; 30, 17; to overlook, 6, 30; 13,13; 14,21; 23,9; elsewhere only in Song op Sol. Comp. tra and iita. The organic root Ta which also exists in Da &c. is enlarged in i-gj (to push away, to reject, to despise). Hence Tim m,. 1. contempt, mockery (along . with ns'nn, niNa) Ps. 31, 19; 119,22; 123, 4, vhieh one shews to something , or endures; bi» Tia TiBiB Job 12, 21, Ps. 107, 40 to pour out contempt (reproach) upon; 'a J>ato 123, 3 to receive contempt abundantly; ninBia73 '^ Job 31, 34 the contempt of families; 'ab JTirt Gen. 38,23 to be despised. — 2. proper name of a Nahorite, and then of an Arabian tribe, which, like yiJ>, niffi' (which see) and others, inhabited a part of ^Edom Gen. 22, 21; Jer. 25, 23. Hence the Gentile iTia Job 32, 2. — 3. n. p. m. 1 Che. 5, 14. ntlHl /. an object of contempt Neh. 3,36. ^na (from rt^tia) n. p. m. Ez. 1, 3. tlDia see np'a. ''|13 (from '',5N-']a: striver, wisher) n. p. m. Nbh. 3, 18. "^13 (Kal unused) intr. to be entangled, perplexed, Arab. cJb, properly to turn round about, identical with the organic root in '^a-N, -^a-i, Tia-D, and modified in '^p"!^ &c- The fundamental signifi- cation is connected with that of to in- tertwine, to get entangled. Derivative hsiaa. IT : Nif. '^•iaD (3 p. pi. lias) 1. to wander about, with ? of the place where Ex. 14, 3. — 2. to be perplexed Esth. 3, 15 ; Jo. 1, 18. ?13 (not used) 1. intr. to bubble, to flow, to stream forth copiously, to spring forth; hence ba, in this sense. D13 (not used) intr. properly to be bellied, thick, then to be high (e. g. by heaping up), firm, whence Mtta and the proper name riiaa. — The organic root Da is cognate with the stems DN3, Ar. *.ai, iv^Vj to be thick, to be large in circumference, d^ia (^\^\ Ar. ^^^ to be firm, thick, swollen; and the idea of height in rtaa is a farther development of this fundamental signification ; comp. Greek ^afjiog height, altar, probably from the Phenic. NM3 (bomo), ^ijfia from the Phenician NU'^a; Syr. jVi . n height (Peshito 1 Sam. 10,23); Pers. pL? (bam) top &c. |Q (only 2d person iinia Ps. 139, 2 ; part. pi. fl'^Sa Jer. 49, 7, as the LXX and Syr. already understand it ; part.sing. only in the proper names latliN, latiN, abridg- ed in ITiia) prop. ti\ to split, divide, Ar. /TjLj, and therefore like nqivm, cerno (see ']'%), but only metaphorically, (by judgment and sagacity) to perceive, to understand, to mark, to know, with b of the object Ps. 139, 2; absol. Jer. 49', 7: counsel has departed from the wise (D'^iaa). Hence the proper names ln3ia , ''33, "^sa =■'513 , 13 in Miia and irT'", la, the nouns r ' 'it ITT : .„. IT ' 'r;' . nsian, iian, iim K'tib, 1:3 (rs), n;r5, nii''3, n''a I. (from nsia). Nif. liai (1 person ''ni535; part. ifO.'i, pi. D''5ai) to shew oneself discreet, to be knowing, intelligent. Is. 10, 13; coupled with Qsn Gen. 41, 33 39, rtMSn being conceived as dwelling in the heart of the lias ; 'nai ■jia? 1 Sam. 16, 18 know- ing of speech, eloquent, Jer. 4, 22 ; oppo- site bsD. Pih. ^iia to give heed, to attend, with the accus. to somewhat Dbut. 32, 10. I'laa; inf.\'k'n, with sm^J ):[5''aii.; imp. 5a!l; fut. T'a'') 1. caus. to cause to under- '" ^ ' r t' • 1. V r ii. Stand, to teach, inform, with ? or trie person and the accusative of the thing, i» 188 Y)2 Dan. 8, 16, 2 Che. 35, 3 K'ri, Job 6, 24, or Vn of the thing Ps. 33, 15, or with the aocusat. of the person Nbh. 8, 9, then with a double accusat. Ps. 119, 27; to make wise, intelligent Job 32, 8; to give insight, merely with b of the person Dan. 11, 33. TiiM teacher 1 Che. 25, 8; 27, 32; Q-'J-'ia Nbh. 8, 3 interpreters of Scripture. — 2. Almost the same signification as Kal, because the latter was little used: to distinguish something with intelligence, to know, to understand, to mark, with a in a thing, Dan. 1, 17; 9, 23; Nbh. 8," 12; some- times with 5l to have skill in a thing, 2 Cheon. 34, 12; with accusat. Micah 4, 12; Job 28, 23; also absolutely Is. 40, 21 ; or with infinit. following Nbh. 8,2. Sif. n. Tia (from )''^'n, rejecting the formative h, which was done at a later period of the language; 3 pers. I^a Dan. 9, 23 ; 1 pers. in'ra Dan. 9, 2 ; in/in. dbsol. ^la Peov. 23, 1; imp. 'jia, Wis, IS^a) in the second meaning of Hif. I. to mark, with a of the place where, Dan. 9, 2; with the accusat. Dan. 10, 1 he marked the word (Vulg.), where the LXX read liai; on the other hand in Irtaiai rtN'l^a 13 ibid, (and he gave heed to the vision) the rtS'^a is a noun with the accent drawn back, as Ez. 19, 14. The imper. is nra Ps. 5, 2 ; iJia 50, 22, with accusat. generally in the senses of Hif. II, 2. Derivatives MS''a, ns^a (va) and the proper name ']ia''. Hithp. )iJi^riT} (pause ')3-; rop.'jsiam; fut. laiari^, pause )i-) prop, to consider with oneself, hence to mark, attend to something, with hS Ps.37,10; Job31,1; bg 1 Kings 3, 21^ Is. 14, 16 ; a Jbe. 23, 20; 30, 24; 1^ Job 32, 12; 38, 18; accusat. Is. 43, 18; 52, 15; Job 37, 14; Ps. 107, 43, according to which con- structions the sense is modified; also absolut. to shew oneself attentive Is. 1,3; to look about, with b of the thing Jbe. 9, 16; to mark, 2, 10". ■j^fl Aram, the same. Derivatives iii^a n313 (from Bi'rtS^a understanding ia IT ^ 'T IT with Jah) n. p. m. 1 Che. 2, 25. ''3*13 (together with lasi; Jah is under- standing, &om lia) n. p. m, Nbh. 11, 15. See ■'Sa. I* i D13 {part. pi. ti'iOia, north-Palesti- nian orthography = d^Da; comp. S'^Mip 2 Kjngs 16, 7) trans, to tread down, to stamp upon, with a into something, Zeoh. 10, 5 into the mire (heroes treading into the mire i. e. their conq^uered enemies); with accusat. to crush with the feet = con- quer, subdue, Ps. 44, 6; 60, 14 (di)?]?, d'l'ia) ; Is. 63, 6 ; with bj? of place 14, 25 ; metaphor, to despise Peov. 27, 7. De- rivatives rtdiaa, inD^an, the proper names Dia'', ''Oa. PUi. Dpia {inf. with suff. dSDfflia Am. 5, 11, ffl dialectically for D, 'lite 'ji^'niB for 'ji^'lC)) to destroy, to lay waste, with accusat. Is. 63, 18; Jbe. 12, 10; spoken of the sanctuary: to desecrate, comp. xatauats'opiai ra ayia IMacc. 3,45 51, DM'HM Dan. 8, 13; rarely with b? Am. 5, 11 to plunder, as the Targ., Vulg., LXX &c. have understood it without reading DjDtpiaa. See iZJia II. Hof. Dain to be trodden. Is. 14, 19. Hithp. DDianfT to stamp with the feet round about, to tread about, with a in something, Ez. 16, 6 22. ^ ' The organic root Da, Arab. ^^Lj, is closely connected with that in DB"'i, ttSs-T, Oa-'n (which see), where M or a stand for a. J7Q (not used) intr. to spring forth, boil up, bubble up, metaphor, to swell up, Targ. Pa. 5>a?a; hence rt^ayaN; (which see). — The organic rootsa "also exists in H-S'a and »a-5 (which see)} while the Arabic verbs ij (to rush up), uLs (to bubble forth), cL V. belong to the same. VQ (not used) 1. intr. to shine, to be bright (Aram. liSSia light), metaphor. to he high; Ar. fja^ the same. — 2. ta p: 189 jyn be white. Derivatives sia and n^S'^a; T^-^'ri andT'idirt, 'rj-'b'iM and Tfbin'&c.) and It IS unnecessary to assume a stem B3J for Hifil n. Hence the proper name uii'' Hithp.^iaiQ'zTin to be ashamed (mu- tually) Gen. 2," 25. £^■13 n. (Kal unused) intr. same as 1l5Na in a subjective sense, to be bad, hated; the organic root l!5a is radically connected with I25i«a. " Pih. Dfflia (=1Z5''tt5ta) to act viciously; with b? of the person, to bring evil upon one. Am. 5, 11. _ Sif. I. ■a^'irt to act badly, almost like an intrans. to be bad. The part. ©"laa occurs frequently Prov. 10, 5; 14, 35, opposite b^^Sitoa; fem. nujiia 12, 4. Hif. II. il5i|i'iri'(once l25''Nan Is. 30, 5, where the K'ri reads 'aJ''N::h"=llJ'':3h) to become bad, corrupt, Jo. 1,10 12 17 &c.; metaphor, to be ashamed of. Is. 30, 5. t^-12 ni. (inf. iljia) intr. to extend, spoken of time; hence iZJia 1? until the extension i. e. very long. Judges 3, 25 ; 2 Kings 2, 17; 8, 11. Accordingly the Targ. has N\!iD I'S. Pih. 125lBil3 to extend, to delay, to tarry, Ex. 32, i; Judges 5, 28. The organic root IBS is here simply modified from IBS (see 'OIb), ys ; and the fundamental signification is to Spread, extend; transferred to time, to lengthen unduly. The Aram. N^.^D proceeds from a similar point of view. nt;dia /. shame, Mic. 7, 10; Ez. 7, 18. DQ (not used) intr. to put up (at an inn), to pass the night, to remain, abide; comp. Ar. cjLj, Targ. for ^ib, Syr. A.C , Malt, bejjet to dwell, to nestle &c. This verb may, however, be derived from n^jn, rria (D''n|), and the proper organic root na to n^a may signify: to be deepened, opened, comp. niB , ti-ns and na (nna). Derivatives IT^a and the words connected with it. niZl (denom. from nia) Aram, to pass the night, Dan. 6, 19. T2 (with suff. Wa ; from na) m. 1. rob- bery, prey, cognate in sense with bbffl. Is. 8, 1 ; usually accompanying the verbs na Num. 31, 32, n^li and b h;!i, b )T\i Dbut. 1, 39; Jer. 15, 13. 'Spoken' also of captives. Cognates in sense laia, njjiba. — Metaphor. 2. riches, Ez. 29,19 ; in which meaning it is cognate with liah. See n-ra. 'IT IT • NTS (only 3 pers. plur. «ii!t-nia: place IT : I : • ^ IT : t : .. m- of excellent olives : iriit, tvi a collateral ' I :' I : form of riT after the type Qi3> , b'^iS , - IT : , •' ^ IT-: ' IT-.-; ' such exchange of - and - often occur- ring; or ri''t is here after the form I25ilp , constr. T)V\) proper name of a place in Judah, Josh. 15, 28. p)^ (not used) intr. to be hard, firm, thick. Hence (by resolving the dagesh into r) bt'ia, n. p. "'bt'na; figur. comp. JumJ to be strict, hard; Phenician tibta basalt, whence the Greek ^aadXtJjg iron- marble, of whichPliny says : quern vocant basalten, ferrei coloris atque duritiei, unde et nomen ei dedit. Cognate is "ittja (which see), whence IllJa, so called from the hardness of the iDasalt-soil. pXH I. (not used) intr. 1. to break forth (spoken of the sun), to shine forth, to flash; comp. Ar. cjJ to rise (of the sun), in like manner iJjjJ. — 2. to lighten round about, to scatter rays, comp. Syr. >-a'p, Targ. pta , Ar. to throw out, to sow. Derivative pta. ' ITT pis n. (not used) tr. same as ]?na (which see), to divide, to tear, comp» pn 192 Syr. •-'>y=>, Aram, pta to break. Hence the proper name pTa. pT2 m. lightning, the zigzag of the lightning's flash, only in Ez. 1, 14; in- terchanged with pia 1, 13. It is pos- sible that pTa is merely a different or- thographical form of p"!!, like lim 7, 13 of li'in 7, 12 14. But '-\ and T^are seldom exchanged for one another. pT!3 (preach, fissure) n. p. of a city in the north of Issachar, not far from DBai on the west bank of the Jordan; according to Eusebius between Neapo- lis (IDS^) and Scythopolis (isti-nia) Judges 1, 4 seq.; 1 Sam. 11, 8.' The king of it was called )?_T3"''5iN (which see). n]3 (fut. 'nita^) tr. only a collateral form of ITS to strew about, to scatter, metaphor, to divide (abundantly) Dan. 11, 24. This form was adopted through Aramaean influence, where 'iTa, Jl-s (hence N'n'ra, j-i-jo-p seed-corn), Tia ap- pear; comp. Ar.jjj, jjo the same. The organic root is 'nr^i as in ^-y;. Pih. 'iTa to scatter, to put to flight, Ps. 68, 31 (elsewhere ITB 53,6; 89,11); many read there the imp. 'nja. NriT3 (Pers.) n. p. m. Esth. 1, 10. jsnt- is identical with mm- (in srtvi) IT ; IT T ^ IT T : "•' and formed from zkt a, born {Bopp, Corn- par. Grammar p. 37); the first syllable agrees either with -jl in that proper name (which see) or -ra is adopted for it. ■jinS (from ■jna) adj. m. a trier of metals; Jer. 6, 27: I have set thee for a trier of metal (IStaa same as llta, llta) am/)ng my people) yet 'nSa?? may be here equivalent to 12£a-']?3 '{without me- tal), since '])i just before a is often smoothed away in this manner, comp. lisaa Jtooes 8, 2. ■ I'lri? {pi. with suf. T^Sina) m. watch- tower, tower, of besiegers Is. 23, 13 K'ri; hence the Targ. has Nim. 1iri2 (for '-mt, after the form t\^^ ; pi. &'''llfia, with suf. T'^ina) m. 1. prop. pa the ripened, from Irta U. (which see); hence a young man in the prime of manhood, along with iibina Dettt. 32, 25; Is. 62, 5; 2 Che. 36,^17*; metaphor. a young warrior Jer. 15, 8 ; '^'IN "''llfia Ez. 30, 17 warriors of Seliopolis, i. e. the garrison, spoken of the warlike caste of the Calasirians (Herod. 2, 166); Tid S'''l1rta circle of the youths, Jer. 6, 11; a champion, Jwr. 49, 19; hence always the nucleus of the population Is. 23, 4; Jer. 9, 20; opposite Q-'Jp.t 31, 13. — 2. part. pass, of Itia I. chosen, 1 Sam. 9, 2. See ina I. '"' 1^13 m. same as 'jina, Is.23,13 K'tib. ITIS {constr. TTia) £K^'. »i. chosen, select, choice; subst. a chosen one, a tried one, 2 Sam. 21, 6; Is. 42, 1 &c. ^nS 1. intr. to feel loathing, abhor- rence, with a at something Zech. 11, 8; Targ. -a Yi>^, Syr. Vj»s; opposed to ■a ina; comp. Hebrew bss. — 2. tr. to curse, abhor, Ar. Jl^. Puh. bna to be cursed. Part, nbnha K'tib Prov. 20, 21. Translators'reai with the K'ri rbna?a. jnS (/w<. Ipa';, inf. constr. '{n%) l.tr. to prove (metals in the fire), hence along with Ijlia Jer. 9, 6; Zech. 13, 9; prop, to cause to glow, the organic root of •jn-a being identical with that in 'JH'llS. — Metaphor. 2. to purify (from dross). Job 23, 10: he purifies me (from dross), / come forth as gold. Figur. to try (the heart) Jeb. 12, 3; Ps. 17, 3; 1 Chr. 29, 17; Ps. 7, 10, the walk '^'I'n Jer. 6, 27, the reins ri^ibs 11, 20, the thoughts SqS'niO Ps. 139, 23; 'ina 2, the proper name ina-'. IT : • Nif. 'inas to be chosen, selected Prov. 10, 20, 'with IB to be better than 8, 10 19; Jer. 8, 3; with b to be pleasing to one Prov. 21, 3. Puh. 'nna to be selected, i. e. to be ex- i~ 1 cepted, only in Eccles. 9, 4 K'tib: for who is excepted'^ The K'ri and trans- lators read 'latT', which however is IT •. : ' against the accent. To the stem ina corresponds the Ar. _sS, like Ipa to the Ar. ,jjtf ; but the organic root is 'Itt'a, which exists also in in, li-in. No other significa- tion of the stem appears to have any connexion with it, since the root here in Arabic is ji, whence -^ fissure, \ division. i *in3 n. (not used) intr. 1. to mature, ripen, whence Tina 1 out of Tina (which see), la'^'ina, ni'nna; cognate 'isa, Aram. isa &c. applied to human age. — 2. to hasten forwards, to advance, like the Ar. '^—^ Hence perhaps Puh. ina Eccles. 9, 4 K'tib: for who among all the living marches on i. e. among them continues to live, has hope. Derivative inaa 2. in3 in. (not used) intr. to be deep, low, prop, divided through, deepened; hence the proper names C'ln^ ^^d 'o~\tV3. ; comp. Ar. «^ division, rent, a great river, prop, like Sl»l?a, »t=?) ^^"^ laxkA, low country. ins m. same as 1ina = 'n-w, nCOS n. (fut. ntaa^) intr. prop, to hang upon something, therefore figur. to trust, frequently with a 2 Kings 18, 5; Jee. 39, 18 ; seldomer -mth b? to rely upon something Ez. 33, 13; Hab. 2, 18; with the insertion of the dativus corn- modi (of advantage) 2Kings 18, 21; Jee. 7, 8; with bN Judges 20, 36; 2 Kings 18,22; Is. 36, 7; Ps. 31, 7; 86, 2; Peov. 3, 5 ; or connected with the accusative 'jiniaa to complete the idea, 2 Kings 18, 19; Is. 36, 4. At a later period there was used for it liniaa ■^^^ with bN i. e. to hang upon something, Eccles. 9, 4: for eeery one who becomes ripe (comes into the world and falls off like ripe fruit), trusts to life. ^^f- tP'^'^'^ to cause to trust, with accus. of the person and b3> of the thing Jee.28, 15; 29,31. The organic root is tlU-a, which also exists in nu, n-ril3, and does not ap- pear to be connected with naa I. De- rivative Tina a. '"' n^3 (from fi£?a I.) m. 1. security,, fearlessness, confidence, usually in the accusative as an adverb: without danger, securely, unconcernedly, with the verbs, nntDD 195 n Nia Gen. 34, 25, aru'' 1 Sam. 12, 11, t^^rt Judges 8, 11, 'Tjbrt Peov. 10, 9, laid 1, 33, -iiinrt Ez.'sb, 9, ins Mio. 2, 8, and yery rarely alone Is. 32, 17, ■with Upidrt. More frequent is H^jab, also withasi^ Job11,,18, )^^i_ 24,23, nnJrt Ps. 78,'53, yai Is. 14, 30 &c. — ■ IT : • ' ' I I- T ' _ 2. proper name of a Syrian town situated in iOia DIN 2 Sam. 8, 8, which David took and occupied with a garrison, along with ■'n'la (which see). The versions read n'aa, 1 Chr. 18, 8 nnsa, which reading appears to be the safer one, in- asmuch as the head of a Syrian tribe was called tiaa (Gen. 22, 24). See DSt:. nnipIS (from nua I.) f. repose, se- curity is. 30, 15, with taip^i^rt. 'linEl3 (from tiEaa n.) m. trust, con- fidence Is. 36, 4; EccLES. 9, 4. SliriElS (from ntaa I.) pi. f. security, tranquil life Job 12, 6; the Jewish inter- preters render niilsiau. The plural im- plies a collective idea. On Ps. 51, 8 and Job 38, 36 see niria. ?CQ3 (prop. Aram.) intr. to cease, to desist, to be at leisure, to rest from labour Ecclbs. 12, 3, Ar. JJiJ trans- ferred to nothingness or vanity, Maltese batal. The organic root is bB"a with the fundamental signification to rest, to leave of, which is modified in bl"n, Ar. Jjjo (to be lazy, stretched out). b?2 (3 /. nbtaa ; part. f. Nbaa) Aram, intr. to cease, to rest from labour, Eze. 4,24; Syr. ''M-s, in Targ. for nati. Pah. baa (Bp. pi. 3 196 nj^D elsewhere ^Ua; probably also ln"''a Betar. It was only used, bo waver, in the later period of the language. ''3 interj. an exclamation of pressing entreaty, of wishing or of asking, Oh that, I pray, in addressing superiors with ■'S'lN Gen. 43, 20, 1 Kings 3, 17, or lanNi. Josh. 7, 8, Judges 6, 15, ISam. 1, 26, to ask for a favourable hearing; the translators (LXX Ssofnai, (Ssofis&a, Vulg. obsecro, Targ. 15>aa &c.) render it more according to the sense than literally. On the other hand, in i5N. ''a upon me 1 Sam. 25, 24 (comp. 2 Sam. 14, 9) ia belongs to a with suff. (see a). As ■'SN and "'iSN (which see) appear as exclamations, ia obviously belongs to the same group, without ttSa or iiSN having to be assumed as the stem. p3 see Tia Hif. II. yi3 (only constr. 'jia; with sm/. ''Sia, i'?!?''^ pause ^s-^a, iiia; 1. pi. S'lSia, only with smJ. ir^ia, 1513a, dJTi3''a', Clb''S''a; 2. pi. niSia usual in Ezek., with sujf. IJTiiJia, dnjia; dual aisia) m. prop, r; , r it r* '_ t "-^ ■'■-'■ division, separation, and therefore con- crete interval (space between two things), s O.- Arab. ^^WrL- ^^^ '^'^ tl'is sense only the dual D^i'^a 1 Sam. 17, 4 23, space between two armies, fisraixfiia {Eurip. Phenic. V. 1285). Hence 'a!i i»ii« one standing as a go-between for two armies, a champion who decides between the two {Joseph., Kimchi); the LXX sometimes i^ftsffo-aro? i. e. 6 ixsaaToe, sometimes with a free rendering avyg dvvarog. But as a rule it occurs only in the construct y^ (with suff. and the double plural) prepos. be- tween, among: difiN T^a Prov. 6, 19 between brethren; S''t7''iB~']ia Job 30, 7 between the bushes; D^3''» l^a Ex. 13, 9 between the eyes, i. e. on the forehead. It usually separates two npuns, denot- ing as it were the interval, duality being either expressly asserted Numb. 7, 89; Zech.6,1, or naturally implied Ex.12, 6; 13,16; Hos.2,4; Zech.9,7, or lastly being obvious from the context Gen. 1, 6 18; 16, 14; with the plural Pbov. 26, 13; Job 24, 11 ; Is. 2, 4. When the nouns, between which a separation is in- tended to be made by ^la, are not placed together, there occur ')iai . • . VS CtEN. 1, 18; 13, 3; 16, 14; b .'!'. V^J Gen. 1,6; 2 Sam. 19, 36; Ez. 41, 18; Mal. 3, 18; bl . . . T^a Joel 2, 17; ^"2^ . . . T^a Is. 59, 2. Many verbs expressing the ideas of dividing, separating, judging, valuing, seeing into, sitting, stepping through &c. are thus connected with yz in the ways just given, e. g. b''iart Gen. 1, 6 ; iibort Ex. 11, 7; d"'3'iM n^lIJ, a-''! Ti^lT} Dbut. 25,1; Peov. 6^19 ''&c. It has rarely the signification as well as also, sive ... sive, 2 Sam. 19, 36, 2 Chb. 14, 10, which is frequent in the Mishna. — The plural form is applied as that of other prepositions (itiN, rirtn), for the most part where the suffix also has a plural sense, e. g. I35"'5''5 Josh. 3, 4 (seldom with the singular sense) ; and on account of this plural sense the K'ri changes isia Josh. 3,4 &c. into T'i''a. The construct plur. nira (= Targ. ns-'a , Syr. iJ-LS = Targ. "'51a , Syr. v*JUs ^ constr. pi. of the masc. form, comp. the abbreviation in rr^a) is the feminine form, and is met with only in Ezek. without suffix, e. g. chap. 10. Compounds with other prepositions are: ')''a"SN between, among, with accusat. Ez. 31, 10; Va-b? high between 19,11; ni3''a-bN 10,2; 'j'^aa forth from between Ps. 104, 12, hence Ci'jb:}'! paa Gen. 49, 10 i. e. ex utero (d^b"p = d^ya); b T'lS'^aa Ez. ch. 10 = b 'J^aa away from between; ']iaa = "Tjifia or like the simple T^a among. Is. 44, i, where mss. read ']ia3 and the LXX supply d^B. See ni^'ll. ']''3 (pi. with sm/. 1p\3''a, •\^'rf) Aram, prepos., the same, Dan. 7, 5 8. In the sing. (']i|3) as in the pi. (liia) it is the construct form; in the Targ. we have also the constr. fem. ns'^a and constr. pi. ri-ia. y3 as a noun Dan. 10, 1, see n5''a. n3''21 (constr. nS", with suff. ddni^'a; pi. riS'^a) f. understanding, insight, pru- nj^D 197 n^D dence, chiefly by teaching, instruction, Prov. 1, 2; the intimate understanding of rtMDn 4, 5 ; usually joined with the verbs b-i'stoVi, 115,^.51, isiam, »n;, rep^ Is. 29, 24; 'p'rov. 16, 16 ; i)AN. d, 15 ; '9 ,'22 &c. ; also a stronger expression of M?3Sn Dan. 1, 20; understanding (of a predic- tion) 8, 15; 9, 22; generally with bsffl, rmsn, 'lona. " dTisb ni-ia s^T" i Chr. IT : T ' IT !• ■ IT IT • (-T 12, 32 to have insight of the times, i. e. to understand the times , spoken of the children of Issachar, comp. the "'S'lii DTi5>rt at the Persian court Esth. 1, 3i. I- • IT ' In connexion with Dbtjt. 4, 6 it is applied in the Talmud to a knowledge of astronomy. The plural Is. 27, 11 is put as an abstract for the sing. In WI3 Dan. 10, 1 the accent is drawn back on account of the following ft (comp. Ez. 19, 14), and it should neither be taken as an imper. nor as a noun "]"%. TW''^, (=Wa) Aram, fern., the same, DANr2,"21. nS'^a (only ■pi. a-'iS-'a; from y>ISl) f. an egg, of birdsDEDT.22,6, of the viper Is. 59, 5, of the ostrich Job 39, 14; % _ riiajS eggsforsaken\^.Vd^k\ At. iuoAj, Aram'. NS'^a. IT " T^S (from ia) m. same as 'ilja a wM, only in Jeb. 6, 7 K'ri, for which K'tib has lia. NT'S {def. »F\'y'£) Aram.f. a fortress, at Ecbatana (snariN) in Media Ezr. 6, 2, i. e. the acropolis there; elsewhere in Aramaean, fortress generally; Syr. fzj-kS. See n'T'a, ' IT • STT^a (only Dan. Chr. Neh. Esth.) IT • ^ " f. fortress, castle, palace, hence 1. the fortress Susa, Neh. 1, 1; Esth. 1,2; 2, 3; diflterent from the city Susa which was built adjoining the fortress (called in Herod. 5, 53 r« ^acdijia to. Mej^vovia). As the seat of the Persian government whence commands issued, the fortress Susa is mentioned in Esth. 3, 15; 8,14; Dan. 8, 2 ; then transferred to the city Susa belonging to the fort, and so inter- changed with lidita Ti;? Esth. 8, 15 ; 9, 6. --^ 2. temple-fortress, temple, 1 Chb. 29, 1 19, specially of the fortress belong- ing to the temple (afterwards Antonia) Neh. 2, 8, whose head was called 'an Ito 7 7 . _ ,- prince of the palace or fortress 7, 2. The word is regularly formed in the Hebrew way from la (^ia), Sanskrit vri, Zend, vere (to defend, to foster, to surround, to protect), and this organic root is also found in 'na'is , 1'2,~!i , "la'Si I- T ' 1- T ' r V &c.: tlTia is derived from ia, as the ' IT • " \ -r, Zend, vara (fortress, prop, fence), Pers. bdru m\Li (castle) are from a similar root. The freq[uency of this word (bora, bara, bar) in the compound names of Persian cities (Persa-bora, Pyrisa-bora, 'Eato- §aqa., Koyno-^aQ &o.) led the LXX and Josephua to write the Hebrew n^'^a in Greek ^dqis, since the latter was ex- tensively current in the Greek world. Derivative n''3Tia. I-T 1- ri'^a'T'B {pi- ni^i-) f. fortress, castle, fort, 2 Chb. 17, 12; 27, 4, frec^uent in the Targ. for the Hebrew niW'iN. The word is formed from nT'a; comp. by way of analogy the Persian name of a place Baqtivri (Ctes. Pers. 4), Sanskrit varana (fencing in) from the same root. rr'B (from n?a which see; pause rr^a, with d of motion Inrrja., pause "'ja; constr. nia, with d of motion Innia; with suf. 1" ' T I" ' " inia, ^jn'^a; plur. Qina bottim, abridged from DTiia botim, and therefore doubling the following consonant as a compensa- tion, constr. "^ria) m. (f. only in Peov. 2, 18) like VrtN, t3i)5M, house in the widest sense, consequently also tent, hut, tower, palace, temple. Gen. 33, 17 (where niab is the opposite), 2 Kings 23, 7 &c. which is clear from the context. In frequent use, the applications of 'a are to be classified as follows: 1. an actual habitation of men or gods with all dif- ferent gradations: a) tent. Gen. 27, 15; tabernacle, Ps. 5, 8; in full form iTia d'^n'bN!! Judges 18, 31, 'f'l rr^a 1 Sam. r viiT ' ' I" 1, 7; in like manner the little tent -like temple of Ashera (Astarte, Mylitta) woven by women, 2 Kings 23, 7 (comp. EzEK. 16, 16): tent of the paramours (d'^ffi'ijsfl i. e. of the consorts of Astarte), n^D 198 n^3 wLich was set up in the court of the temple; little temples on high places, ''na niMart 1 Kings 13, 32; 2 Kings 23, lb' erected at the altars in such localities. b) habitation of men, Gen. 19, 2; Ex. 20, 17; Judges 18, 2; biXJ rr^a a great, i. e. palace -like, house 2 Ejngs 25, 9. c) palace, castle, Gen. 12, 15, also with the addition Tjb^Sl 2 Sam. 11, 9, there- fore n^afi-lsS or'an-b? "liat*. head of the palace, minister of the court, 1 Kings 4, 6; 16, 9; 2 Kings 18, 18, cognate in sense "Jib Is. 22, 15. d) temple, sanctuary, 2 Sam. 7, 5 27; 1 Kings 2, 36; the temple at Jerusalem, usually n^ail 8, 19; Ez. 43, 4 12, in full form I'^^'nia 1 Kings 3, 1, bat JT^a 8, 13 temple to dwell in, for a habitation (see bat), d^^'bisn rr^a 1 Chr. 9, 11, called by way of contrast to the movable tabernacle d'^abii* rail) 1 Kings 8, 13, once n^art «j'i)??3 temple- sanctuary, same as ti'^pj!2 or trjaii alone, Ez. 48, 21 ; 'arr 1p IMicah 3, 12 temple- mouritain; so also it is applied to temples of the gods, of )'\n 1 Sam. 5, 2, of b?a 1 Kings 16, 32,' 'ii)2'i 2 Kings 5, 18, 'tjHds 19, 37 &c. — In this most general signification we have to notice besides: Irtbri rT'aGEN.39,20, NbSrt 'a 1 Kings 22, 2'7, nssri^^ 'a 2 Che. 16, 10, 'a N-'bafi Jee.'37, 4, 'niiDNli 'a 37, 15, 'a liati 37, 16, iMiiSa 'a g[bn.'42, 19 prl- son, jail; aiBi?a-n''a dwelling-house Lev. 25, 29 ; Niba n^a castle, fortress Judges 9,6; liiabri ^s;; 'a 1 Kings 7, 2, also IS^n n-'a' simply is. 22, 8 forest-house of Lebanon, a part of Solomon's palace; ']^i^ 'a garden-house 2 Kings 9, 27; 'a niSS 20, 13 treasury, treasure-chattier; B'^bs 'a armoury or arsenal ibid. &c. Here belong also the designations of certain parts of a house, as D'lSDlSil 'a store-house, store-chamber, 1 Chr. 26, 15, a part of the temple; d'llBS!! 'a Harem EsTH. 2, 3; X^ !ini^?3 'a drinMng-hall, 7, 8 &c. — 2. Metaphorically applied to a place where, or an object in which something is or dweUs,, e. g. to bi«ti Job 17, 13; the grave is therefore called i?ia ir-a 30,23, Cibis* rr^a Eccles.12,5 (comp. Diod. Sic. 1, 57) or also rr;? alone Is. 14, 18; the body, a dwelling-place of the soul, is called 'nan r^a Job 4, 19 (clay-hut); r\l^ means the dwelling- place of animals in the wilderness 39, 6, the web of the spider 8, 14, the nest of the moth 27, 18, of the bird Ps. 84, 4 &c. In the case of inanimate things: conservatory, case Ex. 26, 29; poet. l23BS"nia Is. 3, 20 scent-case, smell- ing-bottle; Ez. 1, 27 which has a case round about i. e. setting off the enclosed all the more brightly by its splendour; place, space, e. g. Neh. 2, 3 the city, the place of the graves of my fathers; iTia D^pNO 1 Kings 18, 32 space of two nsD; V.^^ f'S Song of Sol. 2, 4 wine-keep, in the vineyard, where the vine-keepers indulge in wine. In this sense for the most part 'a is to be taken in compound names of places. — 3. the interior, inner part (enclosed in a circle), opposed to yirt; only as adverb like yin, e. g. n^a?a from within Gen. 6, 14; b n^aa 1 Kings 6, 16, b rr^a^ab Num. 18,6 within the; b riaa-bij 2 Ejngs 11, 15 into; nn-'a'Ex. 28, 26 inward, rtniaa from within 1 Kings 6, 15. rria in the accusal, before nouns hence at, prop, within Gen. 24, 23. — 4. Metaphorically family (prop, inhabitants of a house, comp. Jjof tent and family), race Gen. 7, 1; generally, what belongs to a family, people, servants &c. 50, 4, hence rrja'ia Gen. 50, 2 or r^a T^b^ Jer. 2, 14 a slave, a maid; or that in which the family is continued, posterity, children Ex. 2, 1 ; 1 Sam. 20, 16; 1 Kings 12, 16 ; TC^ ilia to found a posterity Deut. 25, 9, EuTH 4, 11, and so nia tifey 2 Sam. _ . - "t" IT T 7, 11; farther goods, possession, Gen. 15, 2; Ex. 1, 21; Esth. 8, 1. as-rT'a means either paternal house, family of the father. Gen. 24, 23 ; 46, 31, or family house, as the smallest division of the races; pi. niais tT^a Ex. 6, 14, Num. 1, 2, elliptically nias alone 31, 26; Josh. 14, 1. By a farther metaphor: people Ez.27,14; interchanged with ''53 2 Chr. 35, 21 ; Ez. 2, 5 ; Is. 31, 2 ; Israel n>3 199 ^^^"iD n^3 is therefore c^led .■f'l n''a. Hos. 8, 1, comp. oJxos \)-sov B.ehti\&.,-^ 5: proper name of a Moabitecity,' only with the article n^aii Is. 15, 2, perhaps = n''a S'^nbSI Jbr. 48, 22. The noun n^a (from nia) ; sounds like an old word from the same stem in the dialects also (Targ. ria, Syr. )2us, &,.>£, At. ouo &c. with the like manifold meanings), and even the plural formation has also there occasionally the irregular stamp (comp. Syr. n§ grave (Malt. 2, 1), Nba na (Tug. 5) Hades; comp. TtoXvSsynav &c. TCG, (eonstr. rT'a, def. n-, with suf. nr';a ; 2??. V^^) -4»'a!'re. m. the same, Dan. 2, 5: hence Nsba 'a Eze. 6,4 or rr^a i^ba Dan. 4, 27 feo's Aowse; uTthm 'a I . - I 3 ' IT T v: I" EzB. 5, 2 temple, also ctrf^a alone 5, 3; N'lliS 'a 5, 17 treasury" h'pSO 'a 6, 1 Aouse of the rolls; is'^nian 'a Dan. 5, 10 banquet-house. TO'SL I. prepos. between, abridged from riJ-'a (comp. rira in Ez., nsia and n3ia in the Targum) e. g. niaini rfa Pkov. 8,2 between the ways; niybsn^a Ez.41, 9 between the sides (side-chambers); rr^a DijiaN Job 8, 17 between stones. The Syr, i-fcs in this signification may have origiaated also in the same manner. The present natural abbreviation gave rise to the opposite, viz. that n''a was sometimes resolved into V5, e. g. 'JH"'!? ^la Jbr. 48, 45 = '0 JT^a (place of Sichem) i. e. liauSn. IT'S n. a construct of n^a, occurs in very many compound names of places as a first member, to express, according to signification 2, place, locality, examples of which are found in the other Semitic dialects also; comp. also the Latin /araum joined with the names of deities in com- pound names of cities (Fannm Fortu- nae, Eanum Herculis etc.). The most important names of places compounded with nia are: ^15* ST'^ (see XiN I. 3 and 4) proper name of a city 1. in northern Benjamin; — 2. in the neighbourhood of ■ji'in-fr'a and aias?? 1 Sam. 13, 5. — 3. poet, for Bethel, Hos. 4, 15. See |ii« ri?jja. bx rT'S CEI's place) n. p. of an old royal city of the Canaanites Josh. 12, 16, originally denoting nothing but the mountain with the sanctuary, which was called by Abraham bN-rT'a "nn Gen. 12, 8, Josh. 16, 1, while the city proper was called Tib (which see); then the latter stood for the former also 16, 2; 18, 13, till at last Tib was entirely sup- planted, as soon as it was assigned to the territory of Benjamin 18, 22. A distinction was made between Abraham's bN-rr^a 1p and the city b^-nia as Jacob termed Tib 28, 19. The altar there erected by Jacob with the name biST'^a bs Gen. 35, 7 gave perhaps to this height with its sanctuary the name bN-n-ia Q-'n'bN 1 Sam. 10, 3. Bethel was situated twelve Soman miles north of Jerusalem on the way to QSIB in mount Ephraim, Jud&bs4,5; 1 Sam.' 13, 2. For a considerable time the tabernacle stood there 10, 3. When it became the chief seat of idolatry afterwards 1 Kings 12, 28 fieq[., it was also called ^iN n"ia Hos. 10, 5. Gentile "h^^n rT'a 1 Kings 16, 34. — n'^'na bs n"'a'jin)GBs9,46 orbsa n-ia I- : r I" ' -1-1" n'^'na 9, 4 is not the name of a place, but means temple of the covenant- Baal or covenant-El, worshipped by the She- chemites. bSN.I rT'a see bag, bSN. PNanN rr^a see bNais. 1" ; - I-. I" : - ?20S n''? only in 1 Chr. 4, 21. According to some it is said to be iden- tical, as the name of a place, with the proper name yattj, 'i» ^Na (Josh. 19, 2); but it is probably a mere personal pro- per name, D'^a denoting here family. ■jiyiQ b?3 rT'S see lifa b?a and ''k'12 rT'S {place of the cistern; ■'N'la from ■'INa) n. p. of a city of Si- meon 1 Chr. 4, 31 , for which the pa-^ m3 n'»3 200 niDtL'n r\^2 rallel in Josh. 19, 6 has ITiNSb t^-^ii (which see). The LXX (Baid[iaQin, in the Talm. (Ta'anit 21) paj> 'n&S.''''"See pB5>. IpSjn rr^a (place of the sheep-binding i. e. for the purpose of shearing) n. p. of a city in the neighbourhood of Sa- maria, in full form d'^snrt 'S> 'a 2 Kings 10, 12 "14, LXX Bai&axad; according to Eusebius on the great plain 25 miles from Legion (Megiddo). According to the Targum, which £ashi follows, nia N';?'! ni25i33 (place of the shepherds' union). naiyn rr^a (place of the desert) IT T -: IT I" ^* ^ ' n. p. 1. of the northern border-city of Judah Josh. 15, 61, which was also reckoned to Benjamin 18, 22. — 2. of a southern city of Judah near the Edo- mite border, 15, 6. See Sia'iy. ' ' IT T-: Dlin rr^Sl (place of the height, moun- tain-place) n. p. of a city of Gad at the Jordan, Josh. 13, 27, which is called in Numb. 32, 36 'J'nn nia, at the modern ' 'ITT I" ' Nahr el-R&mah. Subsequently it was called Nna'n nia (by the Syrians and in the Talmud), the difficult word (dim, llrt) being altered. In. Joseph. (Ant. 18, 2, 1) it is Bri&aqafiqi&S.. Herod named it in honour of the wife of Augustus Ai^iag (Livias) ; in Joseph. (Ant. 18, 2, 1)' 'lovliag. nn rr^a see din n-^a. I IT T 1" IT T r n^tlSn ST^lIl {acacia-place) proper- n^jn n^n 201 n^v nn name of a city between ^Sfii nia and nbina bas Judges?, 22, in'Manasseh, IT , : i" T ' ' ' on the ■way to rtTilt. •' IT- : »1 Jin JT^B (magpie -place) n. p. of a city in Benjamin Josh. 15, 6; 18, 19 21, three miles from Jericho and two from Jordan, now Hagla; Jos. (Ant. 13, 1, 5) has Brj-d-akayd, i. e. -a-^aXd (riia nbsn) for Bai&^aai 1 Macc. 9, 62 64, wliich, however, does not suit the con- nexion well. pn ST'S (place of grace) proper name of a place in Dan, 1 Kings 4, 9; but others take it as an addition to 'ji"in rr^B (place of hollows) n. p. of two cities in Ephraim, twelve miles north west of Jerusalem, in the neigh- bourhood of Nicopolis, of which the one was called ')i"'bs the upper (on the moun- tain) Josh. 16, 5; 21, 22 (therefore the ascent is "fHn rT'^5 !ib»M 10, 11), the other linnn the lower 16, 3 ; 18, 13 on the border of the tribes of Ephraim and Benjamin in the valley at a pass be- tween the hiUs (Jos. Jewish wax 2, 19, 8) and where there was a narrow hollow way (1 Ma.cc. 3, 16 24); therefore also it is called 'h 'a Tiia Josh. 10, 11. At the present day they are the upper and lower Beit 'Ur (Robinson Palestine HI. 273). When without any thing appended 2 Chr. 25,13 (in Judith, the two books of the Maccabees &c.) the Mishna and Talmud understood a,BetIIoron situated in Judah. See d''5'-|'n. ■r I DNi'' rr^a see ni'itas. IT I" I T-: laji ST'S see "^3 rr-a. I IT T I" r 1" 13 !n''3 (pasture -place) n. p. of a Philistine stronghold in Judah, not far from Mizpeh 1 Sam. 7, 11, which Jo- sephus (Ant. 6, 2, 2) and the LXX read 13 nia, the Syr. and Ar. 'jtDJ rr-a (which they have also for ^is'n 7, 12) i. e. old Mizpeh (August, de civ. dei 17, 7). 13 JT'S see 13 iT-a. nisab ST'S see niNSb. I, T : I" ' ^ ■ Onb n''!3 (battle-place) n. p. 1. of a V IT !■• city in Zebulon, Josh. 19, 15. — 2. of a city in Judah Josh. 15, 60 LXX, 2 Sam. 23, 14 24, in full form 'r^'pr^1 'b 'a Judges 17, 7 8 9; 19,1; 1 Sam. 17,' 12, known as David's birth-place 16, 1, six Eoman miles south of Jerusalem (Eu- seb., Jerome) situated on a rocky height, called also n^Bij (which see) Gen. 48, 7. Gentile ■'Mnbrr "n'-'a 1 Sam. 16, 1, for which also occurs "'n'lBN 17, 12, once lanb 1 Chk. 20, 5!' " "" niBSb IT'S (refuse-place; b sign of IT : - : I" ^ * : ^ the genitive) n. p. of a city otherwise unknown, in Judah or Benjamin, Mic. 1, 10; perhaps identical with tTiB5> (wliich see). NisQ ST'a (rampart-house) n.p. 1. of a castle or (according to the Targ.) of a locality at Sichem Judges 9, 20, iden- tical with D3«5 'bxm 9, 46 49; in any case distinct from Sichem. — 2. of a castle or a fort with the quarter be- longing to it, in Jerusalem on mount Zion 2 Kings 12, 21, which stretched down to nVd (which see). ySyiq n''3 see lis*??. nsytQ rr^a (see n3i»'a) «. ». of a IT -: I- 1" ^ lT-:i-' city at the foot of Hermon , in the ex- treme north of Palestine, near to "0 &c. 2 Sam. 20, 14; it serves to designate baN more exactly 20, 15, in order to distinguish it from another of the same name. The part of Syria bordering on Beth Mdacha was called 'M 'a dlN or n35>M, n33>a 2 Sam. 10, 6; Josh.'13, 13 &c. n-iaa rr^a see trnas. IT ; • V IT . ■ 1i;P n''2 (place of pleasantness) n. p. of a Syrian royal city on Lebanon, Am. 1, 5, which was called by the Greeks (Ptolem. 5, 16) TlaqaSsiaog and is still preserved there in the name of a hamlet. nVOTJ? JT'S see niMTS*. V n :- I" viT :- fliSJ? fT'S (place of echo) n. p. of a city in Judah, Josh. 15, 59. The Bri&- aviv of Euseb., four Eoman miles from Hebron, is D''5S in Josh. 15, 50, and ' I'T , the same also is Betavrj Judges 1, 9. nS?. irr^a (the same) n. p. of a city nnn-^i? n^D 202 jn^D in Naphtali Josh. 19, 38, which the Ca- naanites continued to inhabit Jxjdges 1, 33, Euseb. Bij&ava&d, but identical ■according to him with xdjA,!] Batavaia, 15 miles from Diocaesarea. riiinUJ? IT'S {place of Astarte-wor- sMp) n. p. of a priestly city in Manas- seh not far from )vi W^ 1 Sam. 31, 10, for which appears elsewhere niinilS? 1 Chr. 6, 56 or fTnnuSsta = 's> rr^a Jbsk 21,27. """ ■•■ '■■ Dps JT'S (place of escape) n. p. of a city in the south of Judah Josh. 15, 27; Neh.11, 26. Gent, ■'^bsn 2 Sam. 23, 26. See \h^. ' " li^B tr^'Z {piaceofBa'al-Pe'or)n.p. of a Moabite city in the east of Jordan, over against Jericho, in the neighbour- hood of mount 1iS>S , afterwards assigned to the Eeubenites" Deut. 4, 46; Josh. 13, 20. See 'niss. y^B JT'S {place of destruction) n. p. of a city in Issachar Josh. 19, 21. IIS ST'S {place of rock) n. p. of a city in the mountains of Judah, the boundary towards Idumea Josh. 15, 58; 2 Chb. 11, 7; Nbh. 3, 16. It is also known inMaccabean history (5a jiS-croi)^ a) ;1Macc.4,29 61;6,7 26;14,33;2Macc. 13, 19. According to Eusebius it was 20 Boman miles from Jerusalem towards Hebron. LXX: Brjd--, Bai&aovQ. At present it is called Beit-S&r. Dinn JT'a see sin^. IKlli rr^a {place of security) n. p. of a city in Manasseh Josh. 17, 11 16, which could not be conq[uered till late JiTDGES 1, 27; 1 Sam. 31, 10 seq., comp. 1 Kjngs 4, 12; (according to 2 Macc. 12,29) 600 stadia from Jerusalem. After the desolating march of the Scythians in Palestine (Jee.4,5 13; 5,15 16; 6,22 23; Herod. 1, 105), soon after 632 B. C. it was called, probably from being pos- sessed by the Scythians (Sync. p. 214), ^xvdav nolle (LXX on Jtjdges 1, 27) or ^xv&oTioXig {Jos. Ant. 5, 1, 22; 12, 8, 5; 13, 6, 1; IMacc. 5, 52; 2 Maco! 12, 29). It was the southern border- town of Galilee, and belonged to Deca- polis. For INIZS n^a (LXX Bai&aav, -adfi; Jos. Brj&aava, Bs&aa,vrj) occur in 1 Sam. 31, 10 12 'jtB 'ja, 2 Sam. 21, 12 1125 '5; changed farther in the Ar. ^^Lwju, Talm. IDia. U5X31p JT'B {sun-place, called so from the worship of the sun) w. p. of 1. a priestly city in Judah, on the soutli eastern border of Dan Josh. 15, 10; 21, 16; 1 Sam. 6, 12 15; 2 Kings 14, 11; 1 Che. 6,44; under Ahaz the Philistines took it 2 Chr. 28, 18. As a Danite town it is mentioned 1 Kings 4, 9, being iden- tical as such with uiauj liy Josh. 19, 41. At the present day there are stUl ruins of it called ^ju.^ \->^ {Bohins. Palestine in. 224 seq.). Gentile "n^a ■'laauSrt 1 Sam. 6, 14. Din in Judges 1, 35 is different. — 2. a city in Naph- tali Josh. 19, 38 ; Judges 1, 33. — 3. a city in Issachar Josh. 19, 22. — .4. the Egyptian city "]». Heliopolis Jer.43,13, explanatory of the foreign word. niSPl JT^S (fruit-tree-place) n. p. of a city in Judah Josh. 15, 53; now Taffuch {Boh. Palest. IL 700). The use of ri'^a in compound names of places in Palestine is also fre- quent in other respects, e. g. DI.5. tv^ CErubinl9«); llj niS (Jer. Ta'^anit c. ult); IMS nia '(Jer- Shebrit 9, 2); ''iiri n-ij^; Njs n-'ja Bti&cpwyij (Matth. 21,1); BTj&avia (n:j55? n^a; 5*^5? = N5^^ Targ. Jer. on Ex. 15'end)'Mattt. 21,17; B7i&a§agd (nias> rr^a) John 1,28; (ac- cording to the Vulg.) Bethheziz (n''a y-'S);) 1 Macc. 9, 62, elsewhere 'J? pa^ Josh. 18, 21; B-q&saSd{iinxin rT'a) John 5,2; Bri&aaida (N'i"'lt ITia JiTomf 1, 45 &c. Sometimes in the course of time it was changed into p»5> (see V'S);), IDS (see tri)^ ^V?^ (see m), ny(see"li572ffl), bsa (see li5»5|i), lia (see ''a), or was en- tirely omitted (see aitjTl, tiaiy, obs, paj;, rrn^iS, ba^!, nijiaV &c.)', 'or was abridged into "'a or a (which see). Its use is manifold and frequent in the Phenician and other Semitic dialects. 'jJl'^S {constr. in^a; rare) m-. palace. i
l- l3''N5a) m. prop, resin-drop- ping, hence 1. the name of a tree like the balsam-shrub now growing about Mecca, Bacha, so called from the drop- ping of a resin when its leaves are cut 2 Sam. 5, 23 24; 1 Cbk. 14, 13 14; Ar. sSo. The Targ. T'ib''N or nin (Ar. icj^' mulberry- tree) of the Jewish inter- preters is a mere conjecture. — 2) pa? NSart Ps. 84, 7 Baeha-valley; according to Josephus (Ant. 7, 4) the name of a vale in the neighbourhood of the Ee- phajim-valley near Jerusalem, through which the pilgrims travelled to Jeru- salem; but the Psalmist may have also alluded to the signification {valley of weeping, i. e. mournful, desolate valley), comp. njaba N''.|i Ps. 23, 4. See D^sa. .133 (/■M*.!l3a^ap.^an,3^Z.Ti;3:;:; part. fern. sing. ti>i3i;a after the form tT^'lS, Ti'^'-tn; inf.'\'S::L, iiba, c. nisa) intr. prop. IT • IT ' ' it' ( T ' I : ^ J^ ■'^ to flow, therefore to weep (to shed tears) Ex. 2,6; Num. 11,10; metaph. to mourn, lament, in cases of misfortune 2 Sam. 15, 23, with repentance and regret Ezr. 10, 1 ; Zech. 7, 3 ; to bemoan, with accus. of object Deut. 31, 13, with b Jer. 22, 10, Job 30, 25, hv Judges 11, 37, bis. 2 Sam. 1, 24. Yet in connexion with bi» • 1" it may mean to make up to one with weeping, to press upon one Num. 11, 13, or locally to weep lying upon one Gen. 45, 15. 1S3 'a 2 Sam. 13, 36 to weep violently; "in 'a to weep Utterly Is. 33, 7. "isa Mic. 1, 10 is rendered by the LXX (cod. Alex.) ol iv I4>telfi (^AxsIjji same as "Aktj , or we should read ol iv "AxEi (irj) i. e. ioa = iS^a in Acco (parallel n^), as the Arabic also explains, and as interpreters have maintained aince Reland (Pal. p. 535) ; the punctuation of iia does not need to be altered into tea, since, according to the Phenician, that name must have been pronounced i33>, "'Sg (y^Ktj, 'IAksC). Derivatives iisa, riwa, ■"Sa, ni^a, and the proper name Q'^a'a. Pih. !i3a to weep violently, with b? for one Jer. 31, 15; with the accus. to bemoan Ez. 8, 14. The organic root !i-3a lies also in N-3a, Tia-i &c., modified in n-SS, S>a-3, IT T ' Ir T ' IT T '_ I- t' pa, i>a &c., and the fundamental signifi- cation is to flow out &c., Ar. ^Xj (to weep), (3^ (to rain excessively) ; comp. plu-ere and plo-rare. nip 5 m. a weeping Eze. 10, 1, = '''Sz. 1133 see 13a. I - Is ~ ni33 (with ««/. rfniaa Is. 28,4; else- where only the plur. Qi'n elided) m. Bel, Belus, the supreme deity of the Babylonians Is. 46, 1; Jer. 50, 2; 51, 44 (where there is an alliterative reference to it by means of Sba), Greek Brtl. In the astrological conception of the gods, the planet Ju- piter was understood by ba (Diod. S. 2, 30); among the Zabians V4S. To Bel the Babylonian tower was dedicated. ba is shortened in baa into ba, and also in compound proper names into » (see TiNiba); Zab. V»£i, Palmyr. bia. See bsa. The signification is: mighty, strong, comp. the Phrygian royal name BalXijv. bS is the foi-m of the name ba, which is found in the local name baa, i. e. "" ^ ON tower of Bel; tradition (Amm. 23, 8) making Bel the builder of the fortress in Babel, whence the city was named, as well as the builder of the famous walls surrounding the city (Eus. praep. ev. 9, 41: BijXov Ba§vlwva %si%si nsQi^aleiv). bs 1. abbreviated from the particle ba, see ba n. — 2. abbreviated from «b 206 nb2 5a (which see). See Tiba and perhaps aSba &o. i^?3 (not used) a stem adopted for the constr. pi. ''N'ibsi Jbe. 38, 12, so that the singular form jsiba would be after the form Nib??; and the Aram, stem Nba is really equivalent to "h^, the same noun having there the plural T^Nba; but see ^iba. t^!?3 I. (Pe. unused) Aram. intr. to IT : he concerned about, to he considerate, to have a care for, Ax. %^ to examine (carefuUy). Hence ba. Pah. jsba to afflict, veto, with accus. (by b) of the person, to bring down, Dan. '7, 25; comp. Jo IV. and VIII. for S>in in the Targ. The Hebrew Mba has already a farther developed sense. NbS n. (Aram.) see ''ba. IT : ^ ' I- : Jib 2 sometimes interchanges with ba, and is therefore coupled with the imperf. Jek. 2, 11 (Is. 44, 9 with ba). Lament. 4, 14; still oftener like '^ba it is joined to nouns in order to express their negation. It appears to belong to the group of the negative words (ba, -iba, ■'n^a). See tib and ■'ba. I'TNb? 1. n.p. of a Babylonian king, father of TJ Y"I52.^ — 2. surname of Merodach himself 2 Kings 20, 12 ; Is. 39, 1 ; in Jose- phus 6 BaXddae- The latter is identical perhaps -withMaQdaitsfiTradog of Ptolemy, 721 before B. C. If the name be Semitic, it signifies Bdal-^Adonis (ba = b?a and 'inN,= 1i7i<), as fi» b^a (Numid. 5,1) ap- pears in Phenician also; but since Tjl'lH is not Semitic, it is better to explain bala- dan from the Sanskrit h&la (power) and dhana((s\<^ed)\.&.having power andriches. ISaSN^? Dan.7,1 stands for ^^Nllfba (which see). j|?3 (Kal not used) intrans. to break forth or break in rashly and suddenly, of a disaster; cognate pba to break in CLuickly with desolation, Arab. ;jjj (to tear away quickly), Jo to shine out, spo- ken of the breaking forth of the morning- red, to shine out, comp. Ip.a. Derivatives rr^aibaa and the proper names !iJiba,\lba. Sif. i""???! 1. to cause to break in, to break loose, with accusat. of the ob- ject, e. g. "f^ desolation, with b? of the person Amos 5, 9. The Targum renders according to the sense laSM, which all the ancient interpreters agreei with; comp. a similar figure 5, 6 with nbs. In this sense is the derivative noun ST'S'^baM Jbe.8,18 also to be taken; there- fore it is construed (being a participial noun), like the verb, with b?. — 2. to have splendour, i. e. to be clear, like b''!l3iS7 (comp. Ax. conj. V. to be clear) Ps'. 39, 14 ; Job 9,27; 10, 20. The old commentators have rendered it accord- ing to the sense by p-Ttjnfi, the Targ. by la-jriN, mi. The organic root 5b"a lies also in ab"B, tib'S, pb"a&c., the idea of break- ing forth, separating, dividing, being fundamental in them all; the significa- tion of shining also lies in the root of the verb sb-ilS. •lSb2 (bursting forth, i. e. firstborn; see lias) n. p. m. Nbh. 12, 18; for which 10, 9 has •'aba. ''SpB (the same) n. p. m. Neh. 10, 9. inba (from I^N-ba i. e. JBel-^Adad) n. p. of a friend of Job, Job 2,11; 8,1; 18, 1; 25, 1. niN. (which see) was a national deity of the Edomites, and ba (Zab.''^'-^) is a farther abbreviation of ba or ba (comp. I^ba and l?ba), as per- haps in the proper names DJ»ba, tilnba foriibs>a. "'■ "'■' n^S (fut. nbai; inf. with suff. Ti'ba; IT T ^ IV : . ' ' " !• : ' part. »». iiba , f. nba) l. to fall to pieces, to be rubbed in pieces, to be rotten, of clothes Deut.29,4; Josh. 9, 13; with b?tt Deut. 29, 4 to fall off from i. e. to be worn out on the body Josh. 9,45; figurat. of the growing old, falling away of the heavens and the earth, which are said to fall in pieces like worn out garments, Is. 50, 9; 51, 6; Ps. 102, 27. — 2. to consume away Ps. 32, 3, to grow old- n^n 207 'na«t:;cD!3D Gen. 18, 12, substant. !lba the withered, ' ' IT T ' decrepid, Ez. 23, 43; vanished as dust, ■fallen to pieces (by ipl) Job 13,28. De- rivatives nba, tibsi, ■'iba, r-'ban. Pih. Slba (m/'. mba) to consume, wear out, in a bad sense, prop, to make to fall in pieces, to rot, e. g. "1^3, lis Lament. 3, 4, ^i:£ (form) Ps. 49715; to destroy 1 Che. 17, 9; in a good sense: to use = to enjoy Is. 65, 22; applied to time: to spend (comp. rql^sw ^iov) Job 21, 13 K'tib, where the K'ri reads >i^5^, as vice versa 36, 11 69 mss. read 1^5^, and here tiba has incidentally the mean- ing of nb3 (Jer. 20, 18; Job 36, 11). The organic root Ji-ba is connected with that in b^-N, ba-3, Arab, ^ki (to be rotten, of clothes), Syr. U=, Targ. Nba, -iba. See also sba I. rr : ' IT : it : nbs ffl«&'. m., !iba /■. see tlbs. \?T ' ITT ' ITT nbs A 1. the withered, emaciated PT T- EzBK. 23, 43. — 2. n. p. of a city Josh. 19, 3, called elsewhere rtb^.l (which see). n?3 I. (Kal unused) intr. to he ter- n/J«(?, to he surprised. Ax. (3*lj harden- ing the third radical sound. The verb bpl (which see) belongs to this root, as b.^ip is connected with rtbjs. The funda- mental signification is to totter to and fro, to be fearful. Pih. rtba {part. plur. a^rib^a) 1. to terrify, to put into fear, EzR.'4,"4 K'tib, where the K'ri has the usual QibiiaM; comp. Syr, ^mJi»s (quadriliteral) to ter- rify. — 2. (not used) to destroy suddenly, to overthrow hastily, to prepare a speedy downfall for, as from biia. Derivative HxS n. (not used) intr. to be weak, weakly, tender, Arab. atAj. The organic root is fr-ba, identical with the root in bS"i< 2. Derivatives, the proper names it: • ' MT : ■ nn33 (pi. niiiba, constr. rrinba) /. ITT- IT-' i:-^' 1., terror, death-terror, Is. 17, 14; usu- ally the pi. Job 18, 11 ; riTObst 'a 24, 17 ■terrors of the darkness of the grave; 27, 20; 30, 15; 'a '^jba fera^r o/ (m-ors 18, 14 is death personified, d XQurog iyimv Oavdrov (Hebr. 2, 14), or king of the lower world, Abaddon (Apoc. 9, 11), as the Targum has understood it. — 2. sudden death, Ez. 26, 21, as Slblia Is. 65,23; 'a-ia Psalm 73, 19 by sudden death. Hilbs (fender; from ttba 11.) 1. ra.^. /. Gen.' 30, 3; 35,22. — 2. \civitas) n. p. of a place 1 Chr. 4, 29, prop, a farther form of tiba Josh. 19, 3, identical with IT T ' ' Inbsa (which see). ■jilbsi (tender) n. p. m. Gen. 36, 27 y 1 CffiB. 7, 10. ibs (a collateral form for iba) Aram, I : ^ IT'' f. consumption, hence metaphor, a tan on articles consumed, excise, Ezb. 4, 13 20 j 7, 24, like Tjbrt (prop, course) toll. The ancients conjectured head-money (C]D3 ''Kib? Jek. 38, 12 see ''iba. ''ibs (only constr. pi. ^;iiba or ''Niba, comp. Q'^.'iaK and QiNaS; the vowel-sign Tod was omitted after the consonant Yod, as in ni5 Zeph. 2, 6) m. prop, the act of falling in pieces , of waxing old, but only concrete: worn out clothes, rags, Jer. 38, 11 12, coupled with dipba and niariD; Syr. i-^i^. iSi^tlppba (also -i^^a Dan. 5, 1 ; 7, 1) surname of Daniel at the court of Nebuchadnezzar Dan. 1, 7; 2, 26; 4, 5 6 15 16; 10, 1. 'itt is the -tshara of the Behistun inscription (54 corresponds to tsK), signifying leader, lord (see Le Sanscritisme etc. p. 65), then perhaps the name of a god, or equivalent to ■iDN in Assyrian proper names, like the Sanskrit qira (commander, leader) ; NIBp or N^ is the Zend, genitive-sign tsha) ba (which see) is well known, or it also should be explained as the name of an Assyrian god; i. e. all together: Bet (or = Sanskrit pala , maintainer) of the- lord. But the name has not been satis- factorily explained as yet. ^b2 208 i'i;^^ ''^2 (or tub's.) Aram, same as Hebrew tiVa (which see), to fall to pieces. Deriv- ative fta. ip3 I. (from inba) masc. perdition (Arab. Jo), Is. 38,17 : nTOM ''IjiBi ri'P'ttJn ■^ba t/iOM securest my soul from the pit of perdition, i. e. thou enclosest, protectest it; if it be not a poetical substitute for nnia ■'ban so that there is no pit. See r : "O'Z 11. (pronominal stem) a negative particle: not (comp. ba, i<^a), used 1. along with nouns like ^iN to express denial of them, like the English no, un-, in-, -less, according as it is more or less closely connected with them, e. g. iba Ca without water Job 8, 11; DlB-iba 30, 8 without a name, i. e. infamous; ■Ciab ■'ba unclothed 24, 10; :i05""'ba with- out money 31, 39. Here belongs too its close combination with an adjective or participle, to express its negation, e. g. tl"'l2373 iba unanointed 2 Sam. 1, 21; 5>aTl55 "^ba unheard Ps. 19, 4; rtsisn iba IT : • !• : ' ' IT -: r : unturned Hos. 7, 8. More rarely — 2. before verbs, to deny the action, either before the perfect, as TjiBfi '^ba Is. 14, 6 he has not ceased i. e. without inter- mission; or with the imperfect, as ""ba dl)?n Job 41, 18 [26] it does not hold. In both cases ba and isba are also put; and once the K'tib has "iba for ba Hos. 9, 16. Less closely joined to particles of place it appears thus: a) "'ba-IS Mat.. 3, 10 till without, Ps. 72, 7 till none, as inba IS is also used; b) "'ba-bs because G-EN. 31, 20. More closely joined to other prepositions and almost as inde- pendent particles appear the following: ■^b^a before a noun, properly nothing but an intensive iba Deut.4,42, Job 36, 12 without, where 'iilJN. should be supplied, elsewhere iiba also; ibab without. Is. 5, 14; Job 38, 41; 41, 26; -ibaa without, before nouns, participles and' infinitives Is. 5, 13; Lament. 1, 4; Deut. 9, 28, or also before verbs 28, 55, where one may paraphrase it by so that not, because not, because none, so that nobody (as "^ba ' also can sometimes be similarly render- ed). The latter is interrogative in ''baaii. 2 Ejngs 1, 3 is it not because; the negation being made stronger by the addition of VN Ex. 14, 11. ikh TON ibaa without whom not Eocles. 3, 11 ; comp. 11»8 dS; with whomsoever Gen. 31, 32. For other compounds, e. g. b»lba, see these. ^"i^a (with suf. 'ib"'ba) m. usually farrago, mixed provender (from bba to mix) ; more correctly corn for cattle, which was tossed with the fan and winnow- ing shovel and was salt Is. 30, 24, called biba even at the mowing Job 24, 6. The word is connected with bia 2 and bia'j , originating from ba (bba)=ba (bia) to sprout, grow. In Job 24, 6 many Jewish interpreters have taken it as ib ■'ba not his = foreign, which suits the context well. — Hence denominative bba {fut. apoc. biaj] K'tib, for which the K'ri has bav;) to fodder, with b Judges 19, 21. ni3''^3 (from !ia-iba) m. (according to Kimchi) not lohat i. e. nothing, nihilum Job 26,7, comp. la'i sb. It is a word created merely by poetry. Targ. fT'b'^M T\h IjaD'i d^na, LXX im ovdsvoe. 'Ac- cording to other Jewish interpreters it is a noun from dba signifying cord, rope, band. b?*^3 (contracted fromb^l-'^ba; in pause b?i") m. not-height (b?2 subst. m. from nb/, like li>i, ly^ from'iiSS, MIS) ITT ' '-r' -r' ITT ' ITT' 1. e. depth, e. g. 'i ''bns 2 Sam. 22, 5 and Ps. 18, 5 streams of depth i. e. deep streams, a personification of the dangers of death; metaphor, worthlessness , low- ness, nequitia, with ffi^js 1 Sam. 25, 25 ; 2 Sam. 16, 7 ; 20, 1 ; 1 Kings 21, 13, ^a Judges 20, 13; 1 Sam. 2, 12; 25, 17, na 1, 16, or intensified with -ja llJiN Deut. 13, 14; Judges 19, 22, to denote some lowness or worthlessness in a per- son (e. g. rebellion, idolatry, inhospi- tality &c.); omitting ifflSi^ 2 Sam. 23, 6, or IZJ^N Job 34,18; a ' personification of Assyria Nah. 2, 1. Elsewhere connected with 15> Prov. 19, 28, d'lN 6, 12, ys'-^ I" ' ' IT T ' ' ' 1" ^^3 209 y^3 Nah. 1, 11. % la'n Ps.41,9; 101,3 a worthless thing, facinora, res improbae (comp. rb'W i'nai| Ps. 65, 4); separated I)eut.15,9. At a later period (N. Test., Sibylline books, Old Testament Pseud- epigraphal works &c.) the abstract b^ilb 3 became a name for the prince of the lower world, whence BslictQ (1 Coh. 6, 15), Syr. ii-^!^. 7/3 (1 pers. perf. "'rf'sa , 1 pers. im- perf^pl. nba5=l:a5, like >i?ar from DP, tit3P5 = fii3p3 &c.) trans. 1. io ?«!>, to IT ':iT T 'l T ' mingle with one another, to confound, e. g. iiDiB language. Gen. 11, 7 9. In this sense appear with a reduplication the Arab. JlJ/, Syr. V^:^^', Targ. baba, Malt. JaZJei &c., applied especially to lan- guage. Hence the city bna (which see) was named, according to Gen. 11, 9. Derivatiyes b'^ba (according to some) with the denom. bba. See bjan. — 2. (not used) of prohibited intercourse, to ■cohabit carnally in a prohibited manner, like baba of the Jerus. Targ. on Gen. 49, 4, l^nSiS-i (incestuous intercourse) among the Zabians (cod. Nas. 2, 60). Hence ban. The form basi Is. 64, 5 is to be regarded as a future apoc. Hif. from bas, standing for baS], for which by drawing back the accent arises basi, as liB"! 1 Che. 20, 3 for Ite"!. — bbaiu -IT- ' . I — n : - belongs to the stem 3aiS. B^ithp. bbianfi (fut. bbian';) to mix oneself, to be mixed (according to Kimchi), with 3 among, Hos.7,8 (comp. verse 11): Ephraim mimes himself with the heathen i. 6. the heathen press into his posses- sion. According to others it is from ba = ba3 to grow old, to fade, which is neither well founded in the language, nor suitable to the sense. 7^2 n. 1. intrans. to fbw, to drop r T (of the eye), then to be moistened, e. g. Tiba Ps. 92, 11 I am moistened i. e. "I — • anointed; comp., however, bapi 11. De- riv. bban. More frequently trans. 1. to moisten, to wet over (in particular the pass. part, with a of the object with which), in sacrificial language Ex. 29, 40; Lev. 7, 10; Num. 8, 8. — 2. as in ba;, ba metaphor.: to shoot forth, sprout, grow. Deriv. b'lba. r : 0^ The stem ba is in Ar. Jo and is also found as anorganic root inba'N, ba"il5, ba"i, ba &c. in modified senses. The same organic root appears in many stems of the dialects. D73 (inf. constr. d'ba) trans, to bind to, r T ^ ' I : to shut fast, by a nose-band (^D'n), a bridle (sna), generally to bridle, to bind, Ps. 32, 9. The Syriac >a^i^ has the same mean- ing; and the Targ. D''ba dumb proceeds from a like fundamental signification. The organic root is Db"a, also found in Db-N, Db-5 &c.; and the Ar. ^ (IV.) to be silent seems to be of the same fundamental meaning as the Aram. Dba. Deriv. (according to some) !T3''ba. D?3 (only part. Dbia) tr. to scrape into , to nip , the mulberry fig or sycamore (inM^Jti), to make it ripe the sooner (Plin. h. n. 13, 14; Theophr. h. pi. 4, 2), which was either an ad- ditional task of the shepherd's (1|5.ia), or belonged to the preparation of his food. Then perhaps: to cultivate mul- berry figs, to gather figs (Syr.) Am. 7, 14; liXX xviXa>v,Y\ilg.vellicans, accord- ing to the original signification, with which the stems Dps, yps, Dbs &c. are said to be cognate. According to Aquila (aQswar avx.) the fundamental meaning is to examine, seek out, same as Targ. llJba, here to seek for figs as a means of life; according to Tanchum like the Talm. Dba to mix, it means to mingle sycamore ' leaves for fodder , which is less suitable. It cannot be a denom. from Dba (according to the Ar. and Aethiop. the fig), because !nM|>ia could not accompany it in that case. !^^3 {fut. 5>ba\ inf. constr. ?'ba) tr. to swallow, to devour, of men Is. 28, 4, of beasts Jon. 2, 1, Jeb. 51, 34, of the earth Numb. 16, 30, hell Peot. 1, 12, the deep Ps. 69, 16, particularly of 14 Vb2 210 d:?!'^ greedy and total swallowing. Figur. to have in possession (acquired property) Job 20, 15 18; to destroy entirely Ps. 124, 3; to bring into his power Jbr. 51, 34; proverbially (as similarly in Arab.) •''^^ i»b3-*l? Job 7, 19 till I swallow my spittle i. e. in a moment; comp. 5>^S3 Numb. 4, 20 (omitting ph), and J»ba. De- riv. yba and tbe proper names i'bia, I35>bl3. Nif. 5'bai figurat. to be destroyed, Hos. 8,8; l^'lll-lU '3 Is. 28, 7 to he overcome by wine; comp. dbil 28, 1, 'nSS &c. as also the Ar. «A.\ Pih. 5>ba (^aas« 15*ba; inf. constr. 5>ba, ^. IsVa; fut. i'bs^) 1. io swallow up to- tally (spittle), hence proverbially sbs^ _ (inf.) Numb. 4, 20 = p'-i sbiSi Zz'Ae' «Ae swalloioing (of spittle) i. e. in a moment; LXX i^aTiiva. See Kal. Figurat. ^IN '3 Frov. 19, 28 to devour mischief (what brings mischief) greedily; comp. Job 15, 16. — 2. Like Kal, to destroy, to anni- hilate, spoken of men Hab. 1, 13, of God Lament. 2, 2 8, cognate in sense withn'^niari, liax^T &c. and in the great- est variety of figurative uses Is. 25, 7 8, of the destruction of a country, a place, Lament. 2, 5; 2 Sam. 20, 19. 5>baKi Is. 49, 19 destroyer, waster. Puh. J»b3 to be destroyed. Job 37, 20: does a man' then speak, that he should be destroyed? with b of the person: destruc- tion to be prepared for one 2 Sam. 17, 16. Ilithp. ybanrt to destroy oneself, to sweep away, hence to vanish, spoken of wisdom Ps. 107, 27. ^ The stem ^ba (Ar. lAj , Targ. 5>ba &c.) has for its fundamental meaning to swal- low, to gulp down (eat), as is perceptible from the Aethiopic and from derivatives ; the organic root is i*b-a, which is also found in i>b, S'b-D II!' (in the Targ. quadrilit. tlSb& = 5>^a) &c. ybl? (with suff. ■'ibs, 'is*-) m. prop. swallow (see 5>ba) , hence 1. (like 5>ba3 .Numb. 4, 20 and i5>ba Job 7, 19,' see S>b|) Lev. 21, 4 (according to the LXX 5»bja for b?!?) he shall not defile himself for a moment {i^dniva), to profane himself; -^accordingly it is an intensifying of 21, 2 3. — 2. concrete: thing swallowed, J^er. 51, 44 i. e. the robbed temple -vessels which were deposited in Belus's temple (comp. Is. 49, 24; Dan. 1, 2). — 3. abs- tract: destruction, Ps. 52, 6. — 4. {cleft, prop, swallow, comp. 'iAyXJ) n. p. of a small town at the southern extremity of the Dead Sea, afterwards ISS Gen. 14, 2 ; see Euseb. under Bala. — 5. (con- sumption, destruction') n. p. m. Gen. 36, 32; 46, 21; 1 Chr. 5, 8. Patronym. lyba Numb. 26, 38. T^b? (a pronominal stem compound- ed of iy and ba ; only in constr.pl. ■'TSba, with suf. ■'lyba &c.) prepos. prop, not (bs) till (l^), nothing to, without to, usually exfiept; with yi2 (as in ''ba?3, VN?) e. g. ■ttJ-'N ■''TS'.baM Numb. 5, '20 besides the man, i'^ 'aa 2 Sam. 22, 32 except God, ■'ISbs?? Is. 43, 11 beside me, and so still farther compounded ''IS'.ba??!! 2 Kings 18, 25, '';i5>ba5?ba, with suff. SiiJ>ba, ■^li^ba, p. ■'T) prepos. the same, without, eiccspi, Gen. 41, 44; Is. 45,6. InJoB34, 32 the construct plur. "iiyba also stands before an imperfect, the latter being conceived of as expressing the idea of a noun (=fiinN 'iljUN what I see). il»ba Gen. 14, 24 and 41 j 16 forms the clause of a sentence by itself according to the original meaning not to me i. e. it does not concern me. See ba. OybS 1. n. p. of a heathen Syrian prophet belonging to Tins (which see) on the Euphrates, who" was hired by the Moabites to curse Israel Num. 22, 6 seq.; Deut. 23, 5 6; Josh. 13, 22; Mic. 6, 5; LXX Baladfi. As fiy {people, race, see d^ibist) appears very often in proper names J we may look upon d5>ba as made up of W and ba t>b2 211 nD3 (= bs) one not belonging to the people i. e. a foreigner, or of d5>"Sba'; = d5'ba^, abridged DS'ba {conqueror, corrupter of the people, comp. Laonicus, Nicolaus, Nicodemus &c.), the abbreviated form DSba 1 Chr. 6, 55 also appearing in the name of a place DSbs'' Josh. 17,11. Jewish mediaeval tradition has identified Balaam with the wise man Locmdn, and therefore derived the name from 3»ba and the formative syllahle d-, like ioc- mdn from fJiS (to swallow). — 2. {con- qtiering-place) n.p. of a city of Manasseh in the neighbourhood of Megiddo 1 Chr. 6, 55, see d»b5\ p ?3 (in Kal only the part, with suff. Slpbia) tr. to waste, destroy, Is. 24, 1, LXX iqij(iovv,Rashi I2''^n^i, and compared in sense by Scripture itself(N'AH.2,ll) with pa 1 (see pia) or pa (see p]^a) Is. 1. c. Metaphor, to plunder. The same signification is borne by the Ar. \^J^ (as is seen from Jts,jj wilderness, qua- driUt. cJiJb to be waste &c.), Syr. ^alibO (hence IZojoXa the being plundered, poverty), Ai. (3^ to be destroyed, waste, depopulated. The fundamental signification of the organic root pb"a appears to be to break of, to put away, remove, to separate; and the root itself is identical with that in pb"n, pb"?3 &c. Deriv. the proper name pba. Puh. pba is incorrectly assumed for Nah. 2, 11,' since Hj^ba?; (which see) is a noun. p33 (waster, destroyer) n.p. m. Numb. 22, 2 seq.; Judges 11, 25; Mic. 6, 5. tjiba see IttJba. I- T ' IT : • ISNSBb? (and IS^sba Dan. 7, 1) n. p. of the last king of the Chaldeans Dan. 5, 1 ; 7, 1, identical with Nahonned, Ndbonnedoch, Neboden (in Berosus, Al. Polyhistor, Abydenus, Eusebius), Aa- ^vvijTog (Herodot), Na^ovddiog (canon of the kings), Nabunita (inscription at Bi- sutun). Etymologically the name agrees with ISNiapba (which see), for NiB is , only a modification of NllScl. IISJ5? (according to the Midrash "ba \^\"i e. liUJb bsa Ecclbs. 10, 11, or llB^-ia) n. p. m. EzK. 2, 2; Neh. 7, 7. Perhaps from «5ba (Aram.) searcher, with the ending )-. nbs (prop. Fiba, developed from the prepos. ba = ba into a feminine form [comp. 'I'la and nS'^a, nil'^a], only with suff. Tlba , ^Fiba) prepos. except, without, 1 Sam. 2, 2 except thee; Hos. 13, 4 ex- cept me. ''riiSS (prop- an old construct form of nba, formed with i of union [comp. ■inblT, ipBN], which form was employed adverbially in the language; see "'dBN) a negative particle (like "'ba, ba &c.): 1. except, only, without, but, before an apodosis ("^nblT more before one word) limiting the protasis. Gen. 43, 5: only if your brother be with you, where dS? is to be supplied to 'a; except Ex. 22, 19; Numb. 11, 6; Josh.'h, 19; Dan. 11, 18: but his reproach he will recompense to him; hence dIS Tiba Am. 3, 3 4 unless if i. e. unless it be that; only Gen. 47, 18 ; Judges 7, 14. — 2.Earely connected with an adjective in order to deny what it expresses (as "'ba), e. g. ii'nD "Tiba Is. 14, 6 incessant, 'lihu Tiba 1 Sam. 20, 26 unclean, or also with the verb, e. g. niBN nnn i>'id ^nba Is. 10, 4 they do not sink down under the prisoners (yia nnn is like nnn bS3 a single idea); so too "inba 1? before nouns or verbs Numb. 21, 35;' Job 14, 12. — '^nba^ is often used before the infin. constr. (where ItiTs never stands), in which case b, that would otherwise be prefixed to the in- fin., is put before "'Fiba, meaning not to, that not, in order not to. Lev. 26, 15 ; Deut. 4, 21; Josh. 23, 6; Jer. 35, 8; Dan. 9, 11; rarely before the finite verb, Ez. 13, 3: that which they have not seen, ^nba?? from not, because not, with the infin.'NuMBBRS 14, 16; Ez. 16, 28 (see ^a). naa (after the form na]? from dia, only in Ez. 20, 29 does it appear to be divided with the freedom of poetry into ira Na = !sa Ina what comes f with d of ]T IT IT IT ^^^ n»3 212 ^non motion nn«a; pi. niMa, constr. riaa T IT T ' *^ it' it Numb. 22, 41 &c.; but because of the similarity of the construct and absolute states another construct plural was also formed in i- and attached to the plural feminine termination ni-, as in nifflNI): ' I -: : - and others, ni- being regarded rather as an ending for the individualised col- lective idea, only on this occasion 6 has been shortened into o, i. e. i- into -; with suf. inina , sinina , TTiiaa and Is. " .1- it 'I re it ' IT IT 53, 9 rnaa, orriaa, ,i»">niaa) f. 1. a ' IT : ' IT it' 1" it' ' height, an elevation (see Dia), a hill, in topographical statements, e. g. 'nS] niaa Jer. 26, 18 and Mic. 3, 12 the heights of the forest, i. e. wild, unbuilt heights ; dbi3» ni?2a Ez. 36, 2 everlasting heights i. e. bs'iiB': ipn 36, 1, opposed to ^Ij -I"i:j?b ch."35;' ni?j:a poetically 2 Sam. 1, 19 25 i. e. 5>ab.ia ^n 1, 21 ; lis-iN niaa - I : •- |"t ' ' ' I :- IT Numb. 21, 28 the rocky hill-ranges of the Arnon's banks. — 2. It is applied to designations of places, as bsa niaa {Ba'aVs-heights) n. p. of a Moabite city on the Arnon Numb. 22, 41; Josh. 13, 17; niaa (heights) n. p. of a place in Mo'ab Numb. 21, 19, identical with bsa niaa. It appears to have been used in the Moabitish and perhaps too in the 'Edomitish (see ?iaa''bfli!«) dialect for the usual waa and'n?:''"!?— 3. Fi- gurat. yiN inaa 'X'ri Dbut.^32, 13, Is. 58, 14, Am. 4,' 13, Mic. 1, 3 heights of the earth i. e. mountains; a5> ''naa Is. 14, 14 heights of the clouds, i. e. exceeding height; D;j ifiaa Job 9, 8 heights of the sea, i. e. high-rolling waves; '^"''nin or niaa-b? T'asrt 2 Sam. 22,34, Hab. 3, 19 to cause to tread on the mountain heights (i. e. secure places of refuge); elsewhere in Kal also 'a-b? "^"n Dbut. 33, 29; Amos 4, 13; Mic. 1,3. Here the K'tib sometimes reads ''niaa. — 4. Like §mii6g in Greek: grave-mound, tomb, only in Ez. 43, 7, where dniaa may stand grammatically correct for Qmaaa, in their tombs, but which the Targ. reads dniaa (lirt-'nia^); and in Is. 53, 9, where we should either read with 3 mss. vnfaa (parallel ia;|), comp. I25i'i| Job 21, 32J^ or vnfaa, as if the original derivation had disappeared, as the plural -usage in fact already indicates. — Most fre- quently 5. height, hill, a place of sacri- fice and of the sanctuary, according to the practice of all ancient peoples of worshipping the deity on high places; and as long as the Israelite sanctuary was only a moveable tabernacle, the term signified also a high place used for the Israelite worship of God 1 Sam. 9, 12 ; lKiNas3,4; 2KiNGsl2,2 4; Is. 36,7; 1 Chr. 13, 29. But on the prospect of setting up a national sanctuary Deut. 12, 13 seq. the worship on high places was prohibited as a heathen custom, and its extermination was enjoined upon rulers 1 Kings 15, 14; 22, 44; 2 Kings 12, 4; 14, 4; 2 Chr. 14, 2 &c. — a thing which the pious themselves did not al- ways succeed in effecting. As worship was offered there and sacrifices perform- ed with incense 1 Kings 3, 2 3; 22,44; as altars were erected 2 Kings 18, 22; a temple there was called niaa n''a temple of the heights 1 Kings 12, 31 ; 13, 32 (oppos. to "''' n-'a), for which also niaa frequently stands alone, 1 Kings 11,7; Am. 7, 9. niaa n'^a is also understood ' I T 1" to mean the little temple-tent of Ashera, which was placed on heights 2 Kings 17, 29 32 and was often made of va- riegated cloths or pieces of cloth Ez. 16, 16. The priests serving there were termed niaa ■'3H3 13,33; 2Kings23,9. I T I"-: I ' ' ' Xlif niaa Hos. 10, 8 the heights of Beth- Aven. pnbl 'a Am. 7, 9 spoken of build- ings exciting the anger of God. To erect a 'a as a place for worship is called MSa Jer. 7, 31; 19, 5; to go up to the worship is MbyJl 48, 35. Meta- phor, iiaa is a place of idolatry, hence bsart 'a places of Bdal-worship Z'eb.. 19, 5; nsn 'a 7, 31 idolatry in Tophet (in the valley of Hinnom); it is even an abstract, apostacy Mic. 1, 5. n533, n^a, naa see Tra. IT - ' iv - ' IV : IT ?fltt3 (from 'Ja'ia circumcised; but perhaps according to the Ar. Jtlio, fol- lower of moderation) n.p. to. 1 Chr. 7,33. )D2 213 iaa see 1/3. I : • rii/Q3 n. p. see naa. IT IT T b?2 nias see naa. ni03 a false form for Tiaa, see MM 3. ?~ I"t:ii ' ITT IB ma^c. 1. (^Zmj-. Q''ia; from "jia) part, intelligent, knowing, only in ^Zwr. Jbe. 49, 7, elsewhere only in the com- pound proper names l^riN, laiUN (which see), abbreviated in niia, ^iT'JSi. — 2. ■" ITT : ' ITT : ground- form to the plur. D'^iS, for which ■ja is usual in the sing. But - is not the base here, since it does not remain in the construct, but a sing, ^a = 13 after the form of Tia, V, TttS must be presupposed. ■j3 {constr. -^a, once 15 Gbn. 49, 22, more rarely ~)'z, in compound proper names "15 , -ja , or abridged "a , "a , poet- ically i3a Numb. 23, 18; 24, 3,' or ija GEN.49,il; withsa/. isa, ii'3,f\i'^ pause ijsa, Tjja, ?55a &c.; the]??. ma«c. isQiSa, constr. ''Da, fan. nisa, constr. nisa and so 1" : ' ' _ it' 1 : with suff., which therefore presupposes a sing. 15= Aram. ia after the form ^TlS, nu, V, whence the fem. na i. e. nJa, as the Ar. viAAj is connected with la) m. prop, begotten, born, therefore 1. a child, without distinction of sex, 15 T la Jbr. IT T N" 20, 15, Is. 49, 15 a child, a male, plur. frequently D''3a children. Gen. 3, 16; 21, 7; LXX r/xya, «aj5ta; Qiia isTs 1 Chb. 2, 30 childless. — Definitely 2. son, i. e. a male child (opposite na Ex. I, 16 22, or along with na to denote both genders) 21,31; Lev. 12, 6 ; Judges II, 34; Ex. 14, 20; 44,25 &c., because the male only constitutes childrenship in the Hebrew view. In the frequent use of this word (see my Hebr. Con- cord, s. V.) we have to notice the follow- ing applications: a) son in the proper sense Gbn. 4,25; 16, ll&c; hence DN-^a Gbn. 27, 29; 43,29, a^-ia 49,8 brother ' I ' IT 'iV ' by the mother's side, and by the father's. Besides, it is used as tiaig in the mean- ing of boy, youth, parallel with lya Peov. 7, 7; SoNa of Sol. 2, 3. 'rf^'nln-]k fs son, prince, heir to the throne. P 2 Sam. 13, 4; 18,12 20. Sometimes "la expresses the true, genuine, and as it were the hereditary idea of the noun with which it is connected, e. g. "^a ■rjbn Ps. 72, 1 adding to the force o^f ■^ba, a case not uncommon among the orientals; so too "Tjba-na 45, 14, D''5b73 nva 45,10 queen, queens, b) yz is joined to the names of animals, to de- note the young, but without distinction of sex, e. g. D^'MNTia foal of the dNI (which see) Ps. 29, 6, parallel bw; "\i Ipa young heifer Lev. 9, 2, a name for biS; naii-ja Lev. 12, 6 a young dove; lim "-sa Gbn. 49, 11 = T'y; li^s ''3a young sheep, lambs Ps. 114, 4; Spy ''Oa 147, 9 young ravens; llUi-ija Peov. 30, 17; D''3a the young of the sparrow (d''551) Job 39, 16 (comp. n'isa); meta- phorically applied to d"'3a of Vi^y (which see) 38, 32 in astrology, c) It is trans- ferred to plants with the omission of the genitive ^Si, which, however, is sup- plied in idea; hence fem.: shoot, young twig, Gbn. 49, 22, where nlS3 is an adj. fem. to it; Ps. 80, 16, where in verse 18 ia is resolved into aiN'ia, as ln53, V' ITT 'V ' IT- ^ which the right (']"'??■') hand planted, is resolved into y^'n^ iii"'N. — 3. "ja is con- nected with masculine or feminine nouns to express a virtuous or vicious per- sonality, i. e. to denote more definitely and in a more intensive form mental sonship, to set forth inheritance of virtue or vice without respect to actual natural childship, as n^'nlMri nWJ-'ja 1 Sam. 20, 30 the son of a 'perverse of rebellious- ness, i. e. of a perverse and rebellious woman, where the LXX and Vulg. read n'TSS for"nT^.5; n555» ■'3a Is. 57, 3 sons of the sorceress ('35>"= '3b>B); Job 30, 8; Eccles. 10, 17 &c. — 4. a grandson Gen. 29, 5, like la Ezr. 5, 1 (comp. Zeoh. 1, 1), pi. Win Gbn. 32, 1, though in the plural when a more exact state- ment is required d''3a ''3a stands Ex, 34, 7, particularly with d^3a Deut. 6, 2; Peov. 17, 6; Jee. 27, 7. ' This usage solves a number of apparent contradic- tions in the lists of names given by the Chronist, partly in relation to his own p 214 P narratives 1 Chk. 6, 28 (oomp. 16, 5), partly in relation to those of other his- torical books in Scripture. To this head belongs the signification posterity in lists of names (comp. vlog Matth. 1, 1 20), particularly as a constr. pi. along with the names of tribes and founders of races, e. g. bs'ito'; '^Sa Israelites Ex. 1, 9 or ■ysi)-^ -iss'lPs. 77, 16, iris ■':a Hebrews Gen. 10, 21, liwy ija Ammon- ites 19, 38, nn-'3a Hittites 23, 3, ''Da bssno^ Ishmaelites, ll^^ "ija Kedarenes Is.' '21,' 17, 1TON ■'3a EzEK.'l6, 28, isa m^n^' Jews Jer. 32, 30 &c., for which n'^a sometimes stands, e. g. apS;^ ir^a Is! 2, 5, bs'iiui nia 14, 2, niiri'i n-'a Jer. 3, 18, nDiTi-'a Am. 5, 6, iTi n-'a 1 Kings 12, 19 &c. The sing, is ex- pressed by 15352 «J"'N Lev. 17, 13, the plur. by ■'3a72 Num. 8, 16 or ^saja D^'JiSN 16, 2. In like manner p55>. ■'Sa Num. 13, 33 or dip55> ■'aa Dbut.'i'28 'JmPs children i. e. the posterity of Anak. In this sense ^ja sometimes stands in poetic diction in connection with the Gentile plural, the name of the people alone being sufficient in other cases, e. g. ''2a d""!^? Am. 9, 7 the Cushites, the poster- ity of Gush; Q-'2i''n ■'2a Jo. 4,6 the Ja- vanites &c., comp. visg l^%amv in Homer; Q-'-|D2 ■'ib^' Is. 2, 6 = D^'1S2. After this r : r r i - ' r : t analogy we should translate Q"'!!?!!* "isa Job 1, 6; 2,1; 38,7, and D-'bi«'i2a Ps! 29, 1 ; 89, 7 (elsewhere also 'N ' IB^ij! Judges 13, 6) angels {ayysXoi, messeng- ers), who dwell in heaven 89, 7, i. e. who are descended from God in their higher, spiritual nature, and resemble Him; as the Targ. (Nsssbjg) and the LXX {ayysloi) understand the phrase; comp. Aram.l''!ib!St la Dan. 3,25. According to senses 3 and 4 of D"'!7'bN the phrase 'N"ia is to be understood (spoken of kings, heads of the people) to mean a glorious and exalted scion of divine power and discipline, hence morally god-like (comp. 2 Sam. 7, 14; Ps.89,27), from which Ps. 2, 7 is intelligible; such a representa- tion being in fact extensive in the old world, as among the Greeks the pre- dicates of kings were Sioysvrig, diorge- cp^S, Jiog viog. Of the latter significa- tion is also I'l-'by ■'3:3 Ps. 82, 6. See Q"'n'bN and \']'o's. — As an antithesis r v; ' I : V to ^''ri'bN "ija, principally in the later period of the language, &1N"')a appears, vl. DIN or 'StTl 13a, which is also to be IT T T IT I" : ' , taken in this meamng. See DIN and Aram. la. — 5. Sonship (comp. dN, fi!«) transferred to other relations, as to that of dependence of the vassal upon the lord, to the close relation of master and pupil, of prot^g^ and patron &c., hence a) subject, vassal 2 Kings 16, 7, with lasj. b) ward Ex. 2, 10; disciple, youth, e.g. ^■'a3-')a Am.7, 14: a disciple of the pro- phets, belonging to the prophetic order, particularly in the plur. d''N''a3 "isa 1 Kings 20, 35; 2Kings2,3;'4, i &c.; as the prophetic schools under Elijah and Elisha were called, whose relation to their masters was more intimate than that of the &''Nia5rt ban ornplnb to Sa- muel; comp. Greek vlog, ncug, Syr. r^, plur. constr. ^»ls, Arab. cNJ. &c. in a similar sense. Vice versa the master is also called in Hebrew at* (which see); the teacher-poet, therefore, addresses his reader as ']a Prov. 2, 1 ; 3, 1 &c. c) pro- tege, favourite, hence applied to Israel as the son of God Ex. 4, 22; Hos. 11, 1; Ps. 80, 16 ; in the plur. Is. 1, 2 ; 30, 1 9. d) one belonging to, a relative, companion. So (according to the Targ., Symm. and Midrash) D^'ri'bN ''33 Gen. 6, 2 seq. is to be understood as meaning companions of the distinguished ones (see D''!7'bi!jt) i. e. persons of distinction; Q1N-']a man, also plur. 'N ■'33 i. e. belonging to the human species ("see Q-tn); li^iasj "'33 Ps. 72, 4 the poor; D'i'lin"ia Eccles. 10, 17 noble (in the same sense lb'' Is.2, 6); QSH •'3a \ viv ' " IT T I" : Jer. 17, 19 belonging to the people i. e. the people themselves Ex. 33,2; 37,18. — 6. "la often appears with imper- sonal nouns as a farther developed poetical combination, to denote the closest relation to such nouns, whether spiritual or figurative descent, relation- ship, attachment, subjection, or in what- p 215 P ever way it may be conceived. To this belongs: a) its union with, names of places and countries, but only in plur. constr. : Dlj? "'^pa GtEN. 29, 1 easterns i. e. Arabians, ir2i' 'a Ps. 149, 2, and so with ^'I'i?. Is. 21, 17, qia Jbk. 2, 16, Qiyi.)i Ez. 16, 26, 1TON 23, 7, baa 23, 15, 'iTiN 27, 11 &c., to denote the Ke- darenes, Egyptians, Assyrians, Babylon- ians, Arvadites &c. Other local refer- ences belong here, as 'isp.'ia Gen. 17, 12 or. 135 ■'pa Ps. 18,45, elsewhere also tt5"'N; n'Ja-ia Gen. 15, 3, also T-b^ 17, 12 ; flJi'iMfl i;a EzK. 2,1; of animals TttJa-iia Deht. 32, 14. b) Figurat. -ja ■jlY Is. 21, 10; l£2i?'V.? Job 19, 17; isa MBTQN Lament. 3, 13, for which occurs once nsiSN alone Job 39, 23; nia|p.-ia 41, 20.'^ See 135, iT^a, ']Ba, ■)lh, Visiais', niljjj.. c) It is connected with abstract nouns to denote the possession of a quality, a virtue or a vice; or with other nouns to express dependence, de- scent, the fact of being ruled, similar- ity, comparison &c., in short to express a relation of the mind. So b';n"ia 1 Sam. 14, 52 strong; r\V2-)'^ 20,31 worthy of death i. e. having incurred the penalty of death; ni3n-ia Deut. 25, 2 worthy of being smitten; bs^ba'^a 1 Sam. 25, 17, inii5-ia Is. 5, 1, lbiu'"15 14, 12, pian-ia Gen. 15, 2, !ibi?-ia Ps'. 89, 23, niaisnii "'sa 2 Kings 14, 14, fiVist'n "'pa EzE.'4', i, qisi-'?a Job 5, 7, yn^-'ii 28,8, Mn 13, 11). His music-choir may have been called 'jab Tm {death of Ben, comp. NW yis 13^ 11) Ps. 9, 1, as a choir of singers was also. named after Tin^T) 62, 1 ; b is a sign of the genit. (see b), and the article occurs in various ways elsewhere in proper names (see b!i). — - Hence the denominative Nif. iisas to obtain children, with ' IT : • •)» by Gen. 16, 2, because Ija was inflected after the analogy of ^ib; but in Zabian the denominative is "With reference to Gbn.16,2 and Deut. 25, 9 15 is derived by Kimchi, Parchon and others from naa {to build up, to set up, establish), the builder (of the house) as it were. But the ground-form is "ja with a vowel that hardly holds the consonants together, a dialectic offshoot of ia (comp. in a and in a, where r and n also inter- change, probably through the medium of Z), Syr. r^; and -; passed sometimes into- p 216 njD — , sometimes into -, a case of trans- formation not infrequent; then - for the absolute state arose out of -. This genealogy is be seen from the plural (d"'3a), from the fem. sing, (njn) and plur. (nisa) &c. The ground-form mentioned is probably a primitive word like SN, iiN, without its being derived from a verb, and the construct forms ""'33 and •isa, as "•'SN, -''m. and "llaN, "im, point to a cognate effort in the de- velopment of language. As a primitive word bar, ban, ber, has an assonance in language generally, comp. Pers. ^^.i V jj , Shah-pur = king's son ; Latin puer, porin Marcipor &c. ^3 (only constr. pi. "'ia, with suff. ■inisa, 1i!7"'?a) Aram, the same Dan. 2, 25;' 6, 25; Ezr. 6, 9; 7, 23. IS stands for the sing. DID'^riN-ia n. p. m. 1 Kings, 4, 11. jT T • -: I V ai5''aN (which see) is to be regarded as nomen numinis. ''DiX~']2 (son of my hurt, see lis IT.) n. p. of Benjamin, given by Eachel Gen. 35, 18; and therefore only an in- cidental name. "iDa'TS (dedicated to the hero i. e. to God) re. p. m. 1 Kings 4, 13. See laa, I" • : - ■lj5^"')3 {lance-bearer) n.p. m. IBaNGS 4, 9."'" See 1)51. Trri"']? (a dedicated one of Hadad^s) n. p. of a Syrian king 1 Kings 15, 20; 20, 1; 2 Kings ch. 8. 1^5 (which see) was the supreme deity of the Syrians. The Edomites also worshipped this god under the name of nns , lis (which see), and compounded their proper names with it (see 1'iN, tJ'niN, i;!iba); comp. Wlin {'"^ITTPoi Ti^ni'in ,' iisn. ''" '' '"' > VI'.' : 1'' I I •: ;» iTTl" □3ri"'j3 {son of whimpering, the whim- perer; Ssirt = ■jisrt from )ili = "jis, Ar. (jJO to whimper) re. p. of a man Jer. 7,31 32; 19,2 6; 32,35 &e., who pos- sessed a valley (i.l) in the neighbour- iood of Jerusalem. In connexion with ■'.I stands also ti-^ia 2 Kings 23, 10. See asrt and ''5. t * r lirr'lS {free; comp. Tittl^N) re. p. m. 1 Kings 4, 8. ^■'n'^S (valiant) n. p. m. 2 Chr. 17, 7; comp. the proper names b^ti"lB''ij, b^p'^as, bpnnN (bp = b:p). prriS {very gracious, very good; prt is an epithet of deity, as is apparent from vfi, vrh», ^5^^!^^ "imv, bN-isn, 'it T ' 'it T : V ' 'it T I : ' 'it T ' I" • - ' bsssn, tT'isn, inn, i5n-b5>a &c.) n. p. I": — :' it: — :' itti"' 'itt -i- '' * m. 1 Chr. 4, 20. ipn*12 {gracious; see the proper names 1DH, !T'':DIt) re. p, m. 1 Kings 4, 10., "■'■■■ "' "■ ^■'^"'"'jS (fortunate) re. p. m. 1 Sam. 9, 1 K'tib for 'jajaa (which see) as the name of the tribe; elsewhere written in one word and defectively; separated only as a Gentile •'5-'73^-|a 1 Sam. 9, 21, with the article for definiteness i3''a''!Tia I' . ; - I 1' Judges 3, 15; 2 Sam. 16, 11; plur. ija ''5''H^ Judges 19, 16. Identical with -ja ■'i'^M: is ■'aia^-ujiij 1 Sam. 9, 1, 2 Sam'. 20, i, EsTH.'2, 5, lijr-TIJiN being pro- bably = '■'"la (comp. b^ri"ia) or ti5''n forms the gentile and "'S'^n^ alone suf- fices for 'yia 1 Sam. 9, 4. yn^ also ap- pears by itself as a proper name ; else- where it is the member of a word in T^??;;?)?, V^?'? (■which see). ''D"'ia']-'13 see V^riS" ''i!3J'"^!3 {dedicated to the confederation; see Qy) re. p. m. Gen. 19, 38, afterwards lis?.' N33 {infinitive Niaa, also with b: IT : ^ ' 1" : • ' : NSab) Aram, the same as tisa, with accus. of object EzR' 5, 2 3 13'Y7; 6, 8. Itpe. NSanij pass, to be built, rebuilt Ezr. 4, 13; 5, 8 16; 6, 3; with accus. of the material 5, 8. See MSa. ' it: n32 and "lia (3 pers. with sufF. ■'nsa; IT : r : ^ * " • IT : ' 1 pers. with suf. Sn'^iaj 3 p. pi. '[is. ; part. pi. i:3a; inf ^i^^s^a; '3 p. pi. fui. 'jiaa:) Aram, the same Dan. 4, 27; Ezk. ch.'5. Deriv. liSSi. 'it: ' nJ3 (2 pers. Unja 1 Kings 9, 3; fut. run 217 P"irij3 rea^, apoc. lanj, 3 times Wa»l; inf.ahs. Mbi, co«s(r. triaa, with *a/! Dsnisa and according to Ezekiel's peculiar manner ■^j^nisa 16, 31 = Tin-) tr. prop, to dispose, to set up, to place, like the Ar. j^, hence 1. to build, to erect, establish, to raise, with accus. of the object, as a house Deut. 20, 5 ; a palace 1 Kmas 22, 39 ; an altar 9, 25 ; a city 22, 39 ; a temple 16, 32; a tower 2 Chr. 27, 4; sanctuaries on heights 2 Chb. 33, 19; ships Ez. 27, 5; also spoken of the parts of a great building 1 Kings 9, 24; 2 Kings 15, 35 ; Ez. 4, 2 &c. ; even of the beginning of a building 1 Kings 6, 1 (comp. 2 Chr. 3, 1). The material out of which something is built is also put in the accus. Ex. 20, 22; Dedt. 27, 6; 1 Kings 15, 22; 18,32; Is. 9, 9; Ez.27, 5, more rarely with a 1 Kings 15, 22. Then: to build upon 16, 24; to overlay e. g. walls 6, 15, with a of the material, in which case, however, the object governed by tisa remains in the accusat. Also with a: to build upon along with, to participate in building Zech. 6, 15; Nbh. 4, 4; with b^ (like "nXJ, '^Vn) to build over, to obstruct by building, to en- close. That by which the building rises is also put with a Micah 3, 10; Hab. 2, 12. More rarely to build up (what is destroyed), to rebuild. Josh. 6, 26; 1 Kings 16,34; 2 Kings 14,22; Am. 9, 14; rr^isa'l d'^bldiT' Ps. 122, 3 Jeru- ' T ; - T T : ' salem rebuilt; to fortify i. e. to build up with fortifications 1 Kings 15, 17; 2Chk. 11, 6. Improperly it is applied to the creation of the woman Gen. 2, 22, where 5>bst being the nearest object (being made into a woman, illissb) stands in the ac- cusative. — 2. Eigurat. to establish family happiness i. e. posterity (n^a), with b of the person 1 Sam. 2, 35; to set up a throne i. e. dominion (n&3) Ps. 89, 5; of peoples, to bestow prosperity or well-being, with accus. of the person Jee. 24, 6; 42, 10; generally to establish 1, 10; 18, 9; 31, 4; Ps. 28, 5; Eccles. 3, 3; to give a lasting place to Zech. 5, 11 &c. — Derivatives Via, fr^sa, tisaa, niJan I|t:-' it: •' iv: •' r : - and the proper names fisa*', PNia*", •'Sa, n;;!?;, 'n^yy]. See also la, la and na. "" ^ ■ r Nif. iliai 1. to be built, to be built up, set up, in the wide sense of Kal, 1 Kings 3, 2; 6, 7; Jer. 30, 18; Neh. 7, 1; to be built again, e. g. y^y^ and airTi Dan. 9, 25 ; Ez. 36, 33. — 2. Figurat. \d be placed inprosperity &c. Jer. 12, 16; 31,4; Mal. 3,15; Job 22,23; to be established, with accus. of the thing by which Ps. 89, 3, or with a Prov. 24, 3. — !i3a3 Gen. : ' it: • 16, 2 and 30, 3 is a denom. from 'ja (which see), which follows in general the method of rtb in inflection and in derivatives. The stem rtsa is like the Targ. Nia, Syr. iJ-=>, Ar. LiLj, where also ex- amples of the wider senses occur; but the organic root is ln-3a, Ar. ^^, and the Hebrew ')3a is the same. The fun- damental signification appears to be to make firm, identical with that in ia"NL, ""133 (familyship, fromlia = !l3a) n.p. m. Neh. 3, 24; 7, 15, for which in Ezr. 2, 10 ■, aas>, m^ &c. But . ° r T ' r T ' i-T smce the noun appears only in the Pentat. (once out of it in Is. 22, 21) as belonging to the priests' dress, and was already looked upon as a foreign ex- pression by the Targ. and Jos.; since moreover the Semitic dialects present no explanation of the stem: it is better (with Kimchi, Parchon and others) to regard the word as adopted from old Egyptian, and therefore quadriliteral. jJJ (i. e. 'ja; not used) tr. same as n-3a, Ar. ij.J, to restore, setup. Hence the proper names la^'ia, "laaM, ""iSa, 15a. D J3 Aram. intr. to be unwilling, to bear ill-will against, along with r|:ij3 Dan. 2, 12, therefore the Targ. on Prov.25,23 takes 0''5a = d5>W; at Job 16, 10 it has. N^JD 219 1^2 i«D''55l wrath; and the Samar. has DSB to irritateI>XiVT.32,lQ foriSS]?. The Ar. ^j^J is not connected with it; but probably (jaii (lov^ag, 'lo^ag, '/(B^a?) = byar"; S>ai5n (Annibas, Chanebo) = bsasn; 5>aiUN5ri (Chinisbo) = V?am3n. In this very' word b»3, I at the end is stripped off; which is more rarely the ease in the first member, e. g, rp'pjpV??? Bomilcar = 'ab?3. y3 abridged from bsja in the com- pound proper name ^aiai* (which see) = bSfauiN; comp. Phenician Bijtdymv (Etym. magn. s. v.) from )W bsa. N^3 and Wa (3 pi. i2>3, Ipl. Hi^-'S^; part, fiya, N-, pi. ']^sa; inf. Nya?? ; fut. NSjaN) Aram. tr. to desire, request, with yiz 'from some one Dan. 2, 16 23 49; to seek, with accus. 2, 13; 6, 5; to beg, with 15^0?! construed with dlj?. 6, 12 or Q'l)?."!'? 2, 18 or •\a 6, 8, sometimes also with the addition of the noun 1S>a 6, 8, nni5>a 6, 14. Deriv. a. PaA. lya (3 pi. /at ')i5>a': = ')15>-) to ash urgently, withb of the person DiN. 4, 33. ni^3 (not used) an assumed stem for the particle ISa, ISa. For this purpose the Ar. t\ju and cXjij to be separated, removed, VI. to remove oneself, to with- draw, Syr. Ethpe. r^^f , Af. ^^f with a Similar meaning, and ^isio remote, ||.^aD reinoval, Aethiop. intr. to be otherwise, tr. io make otherwise, to alter &c. have been compared. Accordingly the signification to he back, to be behind has been fixed upon for ^^a. But though many particles have arisen from the stems of verbs (comp. ^liiS, nrin &e.), and a compa- rison of the Arabic (after Danz), the Sjrriac (see above), the Aethiopic {Ge- senius) &c. is so near at hand, yet the old Lexicographers (Kimchi, Parchon&c.) have regarded a as a preposition con- nected with 15? , and fixed the significa- tions accordingly. The Arab., Syr. and Aethiop. verb would in that case be looked upon merely as a variation of £2?3. Others compare 15a to cover, to veil, which, however, suits a few mean- ings only. i;?3 220 1V2 ly? (a pronominal stem compounded of a and 1? and regarded as a united whole; therefore before the suff. like a noun or an infiu. of this form , e. g. tiSja &c.; but where it is attached less closely to the following noun, b coming after, 1?a sometimes stands, both forms being also interchanged in a noun, e. g. ^153 and 'IS-?.; with noun- sufflases, as prepositions elsewhere, viz. '^'T5>a, ^-i^^ pause '^'T?a, "^pi^a, i7».a, t^'T?!^, liisa , D31S>a',' t3n5>Si': only 'in Ps. 'fsS, i—:r' !■-• :-r' iT-:r' ■' ' 11 does ■'5'7.i*.a appear with the suffix of a verb; the trace of a plural suff. is shewn only in «i3''iya Am. 9, 10 [which many mss. however efface], while it is frequent in iriN, nnn, ^is) prepos. properly like apud (from ape ad) at, near. According to the sense of the single parts of the compound (see IV and a) and without denying the nature of th'ese parts, the following significa- tions adopt a gradual succession in place: 1. so far as 1? expresses direc- tion, in answer to the question whither? but with the sense of a predominant: a) ai, beside, near (lilie the cognate apud), as 1 Sam. 4, 18 he fell at the side of the gate, since he had sat 4, 13 K'ri nssa "i^-n n^ (LXX 15>i^; elsewhere l.rbij stands)'; nainin 15>a' 2 Sam. 20, 21 beside the wall, or also through the (holes for shooting of the) wall. The expres- sion "l|»5 W'lfi ti'^'py} Am. 9, 10 to bring down misfortune upon one speedily is in- deed peculiar, but it is akin to this. b) at... toward, meaning thereat, e. g. Is. 32, 14 bB5> and ^rla are at the holes (of wild beasts), i. e. in the desert solitude holes will be formed beside the pleasure- towers. When it is governed by a verb which expresses motion between (thi-ough) something, it may also be translated through, e. g. Jo. 2, 8 and they plunge through the spears (i. e. between the spears, they run in among them) and do not break off (their march). So in the phrase Tibtip 1,?a through the lattice- work of the window ,' 'r['D'z^'r[ 1?a, 1»a asi^N &c. after riijsidri Gen.' 26, 8;" ni'l'lii Josh. 2, 15; bs3 '2 "Kings 1, 2; Nia Jo. 2, 9 ; where, however, ■)» Song op Sol. 2, 9 only expresses from something. • — 2. behind 1. e. close upon something, after verbs of shutting, enclosing. Judges 3, 22 and the fat closed up thick behind the blade, i. e. the blade which had pene- trated with the haft was enclosed by the fat; il^a 1iiD"l Judges 3, 23 lie shut the door behind him ('Egl6n), the shutting one (Eh(id) being outside, i. e. he shut him in; £)15>a a . . . "liiDiT Gen. 7, 16 he closed it behind him, where the shutter is different from the person shut in; on the contrary to close behind one who has been brought out, is ex- pressed by 'E 'iriN ^Vs Gen. 19,6, comp. 2 Sam. 13, 17. In this sense 15>a is to be taken after the verbs '^ife Job 1, 10, Tjon 3,23, 'Ti.; Lament. 3,' 7, ^•s.y Gen. 20, 18, Dnn Job 9, 7, l^ri PsI 3, 4, Zech. 12, 8 &c. In all these passages the door or thing is closed behind one or a thing, while the closer is without; the additional idea of around or about lying either in a"'a&72 and such like words, or in the verb, being usually, however, unexpressed. Hence the mean- ings of nsQi, dfiqji are not to be found here. Seldom is TSa wanting in such a case as 1 Sam. 1,5; or 'a is put and the verb of enclosing is to be supplied Jon. 2, 7. In this sense we are to under- stand b I5»a?3 Song op Sol. 4, 1 from behind . . . forth i. e. behind . . . forth. — 3. Expressing direction to and striving after an object, giving prominence to the signification of IS*, many verbs which denote praying, interceding for, atoning, seeking God, asking, taking heart &c. for one, are construed with isa in the sense of for, direction to- wards an end being denoted. So after bbsnp Gen. 20, 7, 'ns? Ex. 32, 30, ■''■'-biS p^l 1 Sam. 7, 9,''pTnnn 2 Sam. 10, i2,'!ibsn isfes 2KiNGsl9, 4, laiT ' ' IT • J ITT ' ' l-T nj;3 221 ^ys ■f'l-nN Jer. 21, 2, yipa ^lay Ez. 22, 30, 'T'nsn Ez. 8, 24, 'Nii-riN iSjsa 2 Sam. 12',16,-bi} uS'i'i Is. 8,19; then •I'^i-bN N'niJ Jer. 11, 14 to call to God (for expiation) OnSI 1?3 /(»• their transgression, but tlie LXX read here appropriately njSSi ; IB ntoy Ez.45,22: Van to take a pledge /or one, for -whom another is a surety, Peot. 20, 16; ffisj?. lj?a ^ns Job 2, 4 to give up for the life; !i^i5>'rib5>?^ 42,8; Xq Itiffl to bring presents of something for one] 6, 22 ; — for being always ex- pressed by 1»a -which is different from %9, though the latter is also used some- times, and from nnn, inasmuch as it is never applied to place. Here belongs too Tiy isa 'lis sc. ■BJ-'N wi Job 2, 4 every one gives T\y for ^1S 1. e. to re- ceive ^iy, (see 'nif); Pbov. 6, 26 for a whore (thou givest all) even to a piece of bread. In both these instances "jna , more rarely ^frt, as Ps. 139, 11 and night will be light for me, is to be sup- plied. This meaning for (in favorem) is only the figurative application of at, near &c. and is nothing but a modifica- tion of ly in a cognate sense effected by a, with which many verbs are construed. Hence it is interchanged with a Jo. 2, 9. The Ar. tX*j behind is to be explained in the same manner. The Samaritan translation supplies its place by l?Oa (at), understanding it as a similar compound. ni?3 (fut. Mj?ln^ , resolving in Aram, manner the ai [^] final sound into ay 2pl.)'^1S^F}, imp. yZ.a (»a see N5>a. !■ - IT : si3>3 (constr. ria. ■jiya see isa and 5?a. "lis? {shepherd, from 'T'5?a) n. ^. m. Numb. '22, 5; 1 Che. 1, 43.' DTliyS {constr. "'n-, from n^a; the plur. is often a form of the abstract- formation) pi. m. terrors. Job 6, 4; Ps. 88,17. lyS (not used) 1. tr. = tSM (which see) in the proper name >i,!J!?M : to split, divide, separate, Ar. yij (to split, divide), ijojLi n. (to divide), hence the noun ijoju (part), comp. vLo (to separate), whence the proper name 'fS''a=tyM {part, i. e. meted out by God), like the pro- per names pbn, ■<)5bn &e. — 2. intr. (like the Ar. Jltj to be valiant, bold, cou- rageous, whence ;j*/lJ courage, ij**^^ a strong man) to be strong, courageous, firm. See issa. T53 (a segolate form from isa, and not to be explained TS ia) 1. {a part viz. of God, or courage, valour, victory) n. p. m. EuTH 2, 1. — 2. {firmness) a symbol. proper name of one of the two pillars before the temple, the first of which was called T^a;;, 1 Kings 7, 21. 02^3 {fut. U^a';) *»•. to tread down, to beat out (with the feet), transferred from the ox Deut. 32, 15; figurat. to despise 1 Sam. 2, 29. The stem is in the Targ. uya =Hebr. 'rjllj also to tread the grapes, Syr. '-jLrls or ^^, for which ttSua is like- wise used in the Targ. andTalmudj in Arabic this idea lies in jiJ and t).a; pi. Q'^bsa, constr. ibsa, witii suff. i'ib5>a, r I : ' j"-:r' " itt : ' Tl'^l^sa, tor the sing, according to a very ancient usage expressing the ideas of lord, ruler, but Ip'^bja for the actual plural) m. 1. prop, mighty, great, strong, rich, master, therefore a) lord, in rela- tion to subordinates, d'^.is "^b^.a Is. 16, 8 lords of the heathen i. e. their con- querors, subduers, spoken of the vic- torious Assyrian army; nispN '^b^a EccLES. 12, 11 the masters (wise men) of assemblies i. e. the great synod, "ibsa diffllBrt 2 Sam. 1, 6 horsemen might be translated according to the usual signi- fication of ffl'iS either the lords of the equestrian troops, i. e. the principals of them; or it might be taken as pleonastic like the G-erman "die Herren Eeiter"; see, however, under itJ'iB. b) possessor, owner of a thing, so far as he commands or rules it, in the widest application, e. g. with liart following Ex. 21, 34, n;aii 22, 7, Tifflii 21, 28 i. e. possessor of the pit, of the house, of the ox &c. So in combination with the nouns t]^, 1033, rTi)2Ta, 053, 15»to, asaa, d'''ia'i,'ni'B''B, 1 ■ : ' I|T T ' IT •• ' II : • ' 1- T : ' i • r ' ■jiiab &c. denoting the possession of these objects, the ruling or having them. Sometimes also it is applied to him who should possess something, to whom it belongs, though he has it not, Peov. 3, 27. In this sense it is sometimes separated from the object which one possesses, which can only be perceived from the context 17, 8; 16, 22; Ecclbs. 7, 12 ; 8, 8. c) iilBN b5>a Ex. 21,3 lord ' ' ' ^ IT • -r . ' of a wife, husband, oftener b?a alone Dbiit.22,22; 24, 4; 2 Sam. 11,26; Jo. 1, 8; Hos. 2, 18; Pkov. 12, 4, Hke the Ar. (jJJ (husband). On b?a Lev. 21, 4 see yba. d) The constr.-'hs^ stands before the names of cities, denoting the dwellers, citizens, hence "'bs'.a interchanges with ■'ia and i«jiN (comp.' 2 Sam. 21, 12 with 2, 4 '5) Josh. 24, 11; Judges 9, 2 47; 20, 5; 1 Sam. 23, 11; 2 Sam. 21, 12, also before T'i'fi Judges 9, 51, which the r T ^ it LXX render incorrectly 01 ■qyovfisvoi. — 2. {owner, lord = ')i1N) n. p. of the supreme god common to all the Syro- Phenician peoples, whose worship the Israelites too frequently adopted Judges 2, 11 13; 3, 7; 8, 33; 10, 10,'as they met with these Baal-sanctuaries when they immigrated Num. 22, 41; always with the article b^ain on account of its appellative signification, which is omitted only in the constr. state. In order to give different aspects in the interpretation, of it, or other parti- b^2 223 bV2 cular references, it appears with addi- tions that fix it more precisely, thus a) ni'isby!? JtrDGEs8,33; 9,4 covenant- Baal i. e. with whom a covenant has been concluded (comp. Ex. 23, 32; 31, 12-16), to whom sacrificial gifts were vowed, by whose name men swore (Jbk. 5, 7; 12, 16) and from whom pro- tection and blessing were expected in return; alternating here withbi? Judges 9,46. — b) Baal-Gad, a name of the for- tune-bringing Baal, conceived of as the prosperity- dispensing Jupiter -star and such like, n. p. of a city Josh. 11, 17; 12, 7; 13, 5 at the foot of mount '\my^ (G'ibl el-Sheili), in the neighbourhood of which was also the town 'ji'p'iti bsa 1 Che. 5, 23. See -15, IJI. — c) iijpti % BdalSamon, a name of the Phenician Baal, representing the nature-power of the Egyptian ^Amon (Sun -god), and thence the name of a city in Samaria, where the worship of this Baal may have been established Song of Sol. 8, 11. SeeliMNl. 2 and pnii. — d) Siat 'a Baal as the keeper off of vermin (see aiSt), a name of Baal at 'Ekron in Phiiistia 2 Kings 1, 2 , similar to Zsvg anojiviog or iivmyQog (Pans. 8, 26, 4; Plin. 10, 40) or the Myiagrus of the Eo- mans (Solin. Polyh. ch. 1). In the East flies are a great plague (Oedmann, ver- mischt* Sammlungen IV. p. 80 sec[.) ; and that Baal was a tutelary deity against them, is conceivable. — e) 'liitn 'a a name of Baal as tutelary god of Haz6r (see "liatl), then n. p. of a place in the vi- cinity of the city Q'J'IBN (which see) 2 Sam. 13, 23, or T:'nsy (which see) 2 Chr. 13, 19 K'ri. Frequently also a in Phenician received surnames from the places of his worship, where he was adored as a special tutelary deity, e. g. Ik b?a (Malt. 1, 1), T^Fi 'a (num. Tars.), •iSi^fl '5 Zevg Jt^vg (Niimid. 4, 1) &c. — f) 'li?:'in 'a Baal as a tutelary deity of Sermon, a name of Baal after the place of his worship, a protecting god of -the snowy Hermon-mountain , which iname was then transferred to a place 1 Chr. 5, 23, in the neighbourhood of l| by la. The part of Hermon at which this city stood, was called 'ri '2 'nil Judges 3, 3. See li^pin. — g) liSM 'a Baal of the heavenly dwelling, referring , to the tower of Baal or Saturn in the seventh heaven, "lis^n (Dbut. 26, 15 ; Ps. 68, 6) being similarly used elsewhere; consequently identical with blST bsa and the Phenician Bsgladfjiijv ' (bsa Q^U125 , in Sanchon.p. 14 explained xvQiog ovQKvov, in Augustine on Judges do- minus coeli); hence the name of the place fsn bsa rr'a (place of Baal-Meon) Josh. 13', 17, abridged by the omission of n^a Num. 32, 38; 1 Chr. 5, 8; and still farther abridged into I'ya (which see). — h) 'ni5>B 'a Baal of the shame-un- covering (comp. Jerome on Hos. 9, 10 1 Phegor in lingua hebraea Priapus ap- pellatur) Num. 25, 3 5, Ps. 106, 28, in whose honour virgins yielded up their innocence, who was worshipped in Moab, and who gave his name to a mountain there (see "liys) Num. 23, 28. — i) 'a diit'^S Baal of the P'ratzim-mountain (see d'^itlB), a name of Baal who may have had his worship on Q'^it'^l, a moun- tain celebrated for ancient victories (see 'B-1!i Is. 28, 21); whence the name of a place which was interpreted on the occasion of a great victory 2 Sam. 5, 20; IChr. 14, 11. D'lJS'll, 1TO*10' 'I'iS'S and others belonged to the sacred mountains of antiquity, as at a later period p^ab. and others, which received their names partly from Baal representing some na- ture-power or other, partly from their lo- cal conditions. — k) ]iS5£ '•zBaal- Tsephon or - Typhon, a name of Baal as represen- tative of the opposite of mundane order and harmony &c. (see liES), or of the god ruling in winter. To this manifestation of Baal, the city pSS 'a (see pSS) in Egypt seems to have been dedicated Ex. 14, 2 ; in Palestine or the former Canaan, lisis, nsst &c. — 1) ntobf? 'jS t^» Ba'al worshipped at niabtu as a tutelar deity and then the proper name of a city 2 Kings 4, 42 in the land of 't}5 ISam. 9, 4; according to Euseb. and Jerome 15 Eoman. miles north of Dios- bs2 224 bm polis in the Thamnite district, conse- quently not far from Gilgal and Bethel. The LXX and Euseb. read '«5 rr'a, i. e. IT 1" b?a is dropped, as in ']i5>?2 rT^a. See rtttibia. — m) IMFi 'a is Baal as Phallus IT • IT ' IT T r _ of Dionysus, as Priapus in the cu- cumber field (Jbk. 10, 5 and the ex- planation in the Letter op Jeebm. v. 70), whence the proper name of a town not far from WSS Judges 20, 33, which IT : • ' ' Euseb. and Jerome read I72n rr^a. See ^ IT T 1" ^ "TOFi. — As the highest universal deity in Phenicia, Syria, Libya, Babylonia &c., as the male, the begetting principle of nature, as the sun-god and the king of heaven &c. he is always called in Scrip- ture bsan Judges 6, 25, 1 Kings 16, 31 &c. constituting with ni'iniB? Jxjdgbs 2, 13 or nifflN 2 Kings 23, 4" the entire ' IT ■• -: ' heathen worship of the Phenicians. In this sense appears 'a!^ rr^a 1 Kings 16, 32, 'jan ■^N-'a? 18, 22, 'afi'"'';iab> 2 Kings 10, 19, 'aa y'p-6z Jee. 12, 16 '&c. The plur. D'^^ssa Judges 2, 11, 1 Sam. 7,4, 1 Kings 18, 18 may either be under- stood as niniUN. 2 Che. 19, 3 or Q''"!iiJN. 14, 2, of the images of Baal, or of the manifold aspects of Baal, i. e. of the plurality of forces united in him. — 3. As a designation of the highest being among a great part of the Semites, as the nomen numinis like bN (which see) or tt;j (which see), b?a, is applied, like them, to the formation of proper names, partly as the last member (e. g. bsanj*, bsa I'pa, bsaiUN, b»a-i^, sa-iN), partly as the first, e. g. pn bya', iiibia, and in __ _ ' ° 'ITT -j- ' it: - ; ' many n. p. bsa may have been changed into bN or fl"' in order to efface the allusion to heathenism, as is seen from ^T'bis 2SAM.5,16 = i>iibya 1 Che. 14, ITT : V ' ITT : V ; ' 7. Much more frequent is the formation of proper names with it, in Pheni- cian, e. g. byariN (Gerb. 1, 2); b?ana (Karth. 8) ; bsaasn (Numid. 1,2); bS'asri (2, 3); byaiB?33ri (2, 2); byais: (Kit. 26); b»a-;TB?i (Numid. 7, 1); b^asb?? (Malt. 3, i); byan-iaa (Numid. "l," 4)^ bsa^'fei; (=5>?a i,3); S^asnu (7, 1) &c. — 4) bya (probably witli the omission of one member of the proper name) passes for a) a personal n. p. m. 1 Che. 5, 5; 8,30;. b) the proper name of a city in Simeon 1 Che. 4, 33, which may be identical with 'ijsa nbsa Josh. •' ■ I" : r—.r 19, 8. — 6. In applying the name bsa to appellations of places, it is some- times used with the modification that describes it more exactly (as 13 bs'a, ■JID^ b^a) ; sometimes n^a is prefixed (see fs*??', rtisbia, lbs); it is seldom joined to Wn)? {city), as'bya nnjj Josh. 15,60, or to nina (heights), as ^?a nixia Num. 22, 41. On the abbreviations see ba, ba. Hence denom. r b?a ifut. bf^i) to be lord, possessor, to rule, with the accusat. Is 26, 13, or b of the object 1 Chron. 4, 22 ; oftener to take to wife, to marry (prop, accord- ing to the oriental view to rule the woman, as the Ar. »iLLo) Deut. 21, 13; 24, 1; Is. 62, 3; nbsa Gen. 20, 3 the ' ,' ' ' |T\ : ' mm'nea one. Nif. b?a3 to be taken to wife, to be married Pkov. 30, 23 ; figurat. to be in- habited Is. 62, 4. Belonging to bJja and compounded with it are the following proper names here adduced alphabetically to facilitate reference. n'^'na b5»a see bs'a and n^-ia. |. . _ I- _ I- |. . ia bsa see b5>a and 13, 1A. IT - r - 1" 1- ' IT ymTi b?2 see b?a and ■jinn. aiat b5>a see b^a and aiat. I : -r -I- 1 : ^:n b?a (Ba'al is gracious) n. p. of an idumean king Gen. 36, 38, and also elsewhere 1 Che. 27, 28. "[iTi, yn, masc. ■Jti, fern. ti3rt, are very old epithets of the Deity, as appears from the proper names in, nsn, bsisn, ran, bwasn, i|"' iTTi"' I" •-' IT-' r :--:' bNisn, rr^sin, ■'s:n, pnbN, isniriv I": — :' it: — ;' i-t-:' 'itt:-.*' 'itt i:' "finv &c. In Phenician NSn was an 'IT T I T -^ epithet of Astarte or Coelestis, hence the proper name NSn there (= NSniay Karth. 5, 5); )n an epithet of "El.'iiJsii- mfin, Baal, Melcar; hence the proper names bsan (Kit. 3, 1), ibiBNNari (8,1. 2), Vi^asn (Malt. 2, 3. 4), bsnsn (='a3n, Numid. 1), IjJb?^?'! ^amilcar, Idfit),- bv^ 225 n^j?n j««s); in an epithet of Melcar &o. e. g. *1)2.V??D Himilco, iwsti Chinisdo &c. ■nian bya see bsa'and lisn. ■jijann bya see bsa and pM'in. fSu 5»a seeb?a, n^jii and fSJa; comp. also fsa. "iss b?a see b»a and 'lips. tjiins b5>a see bsa and b-'St'iS. r t: -r -r . r t : ■jiDS b?a see b?a and iiSK. niij'j'd^sa see bsa and niSbii). IT • IT - r " '" , IT • JT inn bya see bsa and 'iMn. IT I -I- -r IT T bya (whence ba, which see; it ap- pears stiH more abridged as "bsa in the proper name yribsa, like b3»a as "bsa t r ITT : V : ' - r - : in the proper name iT^bya, then as 5a «. g. in TiN.ba) Aram. m. same as Hebr. b?a in the sense lord, possessor, there- fore DSa bsa EzK.4,8 9 17 prop, lord of 1" : I" : the (royal) decree i. e. either stadtholder, and so the parallel is Inns , comp. Ezr. 5, 3 ; 6, 6 ; or according to Ezra Apocr. 2, 25, Jos. (Arch. 11, 2) and Kimchi &c. = 1i3tn , 1SD chancellor; but the former f : - ' 1" T is more probable. In Phenician DUa (Numid. 3, 3) is considered to be con- tracted from DSa b?a (see a). Slbya {constr. nbsa) fern. 1. coner. mistress, possessor, aiN 'a 1 Sam. 28, 7 an enchantress (see ais), QiDlIJS 'a Nah. 3,i a female magician i. e. who endeav- ours to work by secret intrigues; ITjaln 'a 1 EJUGS 17, 17 mistress of the house. — 2. abstr. dominion, possession, property (of Baal), or dwellership from b?a dweller, as the feminine form is often used for an abstract, hence a) {Ba'al-city) n. p. of a city on the northern border of Ju- dah Josh. 15, 2 9 and on the western border of Benjamin, which is also called sometimes bya"n;^'l)? {Bdal-town) 15, 60, sometimes D'^'iyi n-^lp 15, 9. But ' KT : I- :'• , it is very doubtful whether JTTiiT; "'b^.a 2 Sam. 6, 2, for which 1 Chr. 13, '6 has Ciyi ni"ip , should be taken as the name of a place the same as Iribs* a, since accord- * it -; r' ing to Josh. 18, 14 it seems here to be a remnant of rriin^ ^bsa T'S d'^ny': T\p^/, or imin^ ■'bsan should be referred to t3yn,"with the LXX, Targ., Vulg. and others. — 3. "With the article MbsatT (^dedicated to the worship of Baaltis) n. p. of a mountain in Judah Josh. 15, 11, probably the part of the Judah-moun- tains at irtbsa. — 4. n. p. of a place in the south of Judah on the Edomite border Josh. 15, 29, which then be- longed to Simeon; abridged or altered into nba 19, 3, or nnba 1 Chr. 4, 29. IT T ' ' IT : ■ ' — 5. The female deity corresponding to Baal, called in Phenician Tibya ' , • T-:r (my lady), BijXrig, B^X&tjg, therefore 'IN a ribsa, n. p. of a city on the south- ern border of Simeon Josh. 19, 8, for which 1 Chr. 4, 33 has merely bsa, abridged fromlNa 'a; comp. the Phenic. INa Fini^ba on a gem of Berytus. — 6. }?Z."nib'»a to designate the Baaltis- worshipin all forms, likeo'irya forbsa; whence nibsa n. p. of a place in the southern part of Judah Josh. 15, 24. In 1 Kings 4, 16 the very same city is meant, only the prep, a is omitted before Beth, as is often the case. nibya see nb^a. I T : IT-.r ri533 ''b?3 Ntjmb. 21, 28 same as b^a nta'a Josh. 13, 17 (see TiS'^s). The plur. of b?a denotes the multiplicity of forces conceived of in the one power, as is frec[uently the case in names of deities. D'^il ''bS'3 see b?a. |. I- -;i I nn^rti. 1^52 2 Sam. 6, 2 perhaps eq^uivalent to frjIfT'a b^a the city Baal in Judah, different from'b?3 in Simeon 1 Chr. 4, 33; this then would be = n^^__ b5>a Josh. 18, 14. See nb5>a. — |— ' IT . I 3''T'^3J2 (Bel is Mowing) n. p. m. 1 Cm. 14," 7, for which 2 Sam. 5, 16 has 3>TibN. On S'T' see yfaN. ITT : ••■ ITT IT • -. JT'byi!! {Jah is ruler) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 12,5. On the composition of two names of the godhead making one proper name see bsjias. Cby? (perhaps from D^bS;-la orb?a, &'''bi>.) n. p. m. Jer. 40, 14. nbsS (dedicated toBaaltis) l.n.p.oi a 15 ^i«n r\bv:i 226 ni^n tjity of Dan on the border of Judah Josh. J.9,44, comp. 15,10, which was therefore also called nb^a. This '3 must be un- iT-:r r , derstood 1 Kihgs 9, 18 to lie in the neigh- bourhood of Its and li'ih nia (which see), according to the Talmud and Jos. (Ant. 8, 6, 1) ; but 1. c. it is put in the vi- cinity of 'ib'iFi (which see). — 2. n.p. of a city beside ib'in, built or fortified by Solomon, 1 Kings 9,18, which 2 Che. 8, 6 does not contradict. Bdalheh (^LaJju) or Heliopolis, also called IS V^a, has either been considered the same, or it should be looked for at least in that neigh- bourhood. The JuyXju put by the Arabic version at Josh. 12, 7 for na b^a, seems to be nb5»a. iT-:r 1J42 nbsa see iibsa. r : (--: r it-:i- pa (perhaps from fy-b^a = liHa 'a "which see ; in Phenician names of places such an abbreviation of b?3 is frec[uent) n. p. of a place in Moab Num. 32, 3, which is called in 32, 38 ^iyM b^a, in Jer. 48, 23 ^iSU rr^a, and in Josh. 13, 17 )is>a bsa n'-'a. See liy??. X352 (= N3^."ia son of grief, i. e. patient, pious) n. p. m. 1 Kings 4, 12; Nbh. 3, 4. n3?3 (the same) n. p. m. 2 Sam. 4, 2 ; 23, 29'| Nbh. 7, 7. ^i?3 (fut.^S'2'';part.f. !Ti5>a, !Tiya, p T ^' r : •' -^ ' iT-:i ' it- i ' rTiJja, and in Hos. 7,4 iTlSa fluctuating between masc. and fem.) 1. tr. to kindle, set fire to , with h of object Is. 30, 33 ; then to burn, to consume (cognate in sense bSN), with accus. of object Ps. 83, 15 ; or to reach on fire to something and to consume it, with a Job 1,16 ; but a also expresses locally in, among, Jer. 44, 6 , Ps. 106, 18 , or upon (a whole) omitting the accus. of the part Is. 43, 2, Lament. 2, 3, or the means by which. Judges 15, 14. Metaph. spoken of anger EsTH. 1, 12, of evil Is. 9, 17. — 2. i7itr. to bum, to blaze. Is. 1, 31; 4, 4; 9, 17; sometimes with the addition of fflNa Ex. 3,2; to glow Mal. 3,19; to sparkle, with 553 whence 2 Sam. 22, 9 ; figurat. pf anger Is. 30, 27; ofburning wrath 62, 1; Tl'lV^ lnB8«a Hos. 7, 4 to be heated i. e. glowing hot by the baker, consequently much the same as an intr. like T^^M (ibid.) tr. fire- maker (perhaps 11, 9 T'^ heat). — For Jer. 10, 3, Ez. 21, 36, Ps. 94, 8 see the denom. of 'n?a. — Deriv. iTn^a, proper name tTnyan; see T'Sfa. Pih. 'iVa (inf. 15'a' 'with suff. hlVS.; 1. to kindle, to put 125N to. Ex, 22, 4; JBE. 7, 18; Ez. 39, 10 '(cognate in sense p'^iSIn), with a to; CM?* Lev. 6, 5; ni)^-'T 'is. 50, ll;'ni'7S 2 Chr. 13, 11, therefore with accus. of the object. Seldom intrans. like the Kal to burn, 13|a ''TV^ Is. 40, 16 is not sufficient to burn (the sacrifices); 44, 15. — 2. to destroy by burning, hence metaphor, to root out, to remove, to annihilate, with •jtt of the place and accus. of the object D'eut. 13,6; 17, 7; 26, 13 (cognates in sense ni'13^1, T'Hfflii) ; to take away bbs (a dung-heap) 1 Kjngs 14, 10. Without giving the name of a place Num. 24, 22 ; Is. 6, 13 and even that will be destroyed again; 4, 4 "isa Ini'nai and by the spirit of destruction. With "''inN to cut of after one 1 Kings 14, 14; 21721. — 3. From the preceding signification has arisen: to feed upon, e. g. D'na Is. 3, 10; 5, 5; with a of the whole, a part of which is consumed, Ex. 22, 4. Deriv. 1j?a. Puh. 15 a to be kindled Jer. 36, 22. Hif. 'T'»a!7 (fut. T^ija;;) causat. 1. to cause to bum, to kindle, with accus. of the object Ex. 22, 5 ; with m and 'a of the object Judges 15, 5 to bum up; l25Na 2 Chr. 28, 3, if i:sa:;i be not here =''^^J!,y; comp. 1 KiNGJs 16, 3. The means by which: ^>iNa Ez. 5, 2; on the contrary ']iBS>a Nah. 2, 14 is the accus. with a essentiae into smoke. — 2. with ■'pHN "1 Kings 16,3 to root out thoroughly, literally after, behind. — 3. to feed upon Ex. 22, 4. The stem 'a has its analogy in the fundamental and collateral meanings, in the dialects (Targ. 'nsa to burn, Ar. »j.sij wrath, Syr. r^^ to clear away &c.) 5 but the organic root is l^-a, since, a ")i;3 227 "TilfD cognate ground-sense is found in ^V (TlS see Hos. 7, 4; 11, 9), "nn-a &c. "15?3 (not used) intr. to be wild, rough, not built upon, spoken of land, a field, a district, comp. Targ. *ia (^la) to be ■waste (= Did Hebr.), Ithpa. n^^HN, Ithpe. TiariN, Af. T^aiN. The Hebrew la Job "39, 4 like the Targ. ^a and ^a (de£ N^a) should either be referred to this ITT' . root "na, or to "la with the same mean- rr' r ^ ing, after the Ar. -j , whence j a field, a desert. Many verbs with the middle -5> have been developed out of monosyl- labic stems (15>; see 5>); and the organic root 'la has a Mediterranean analogy ■Reside the Semitic, for this meaning. See ia, la. Derivat. 15>a with the de- r' IT -r nom.iya; T'S'a, and perhaps the proper names 1i5>a, sSsa. I : ' iT-:r 13>2 m. 1. (not used) same as la field, — C ' IT wood, generally what is not built upon, hence T'Sa. — 2. Metaphor, wildness, toughness, Aram, "lia, hence fig. want of cultivation, silliness, stupidity, with IJJiN Ps. 92, 7 a rough, uncultivated man, and the same without ffliN 73,22; withb"'D3 49, 11. Comp. the Talm. adject. Iia uncultivated, wild; Tia = l^a, ni'^ia, Targ. N^'lia stupidity; "T^a not built upon. — Hence the denom. ; 1?a (fut. I^^l; part. 1§a) intr. to be stupid, foolish, metaphor, to be bad Jbr. 10, 8; Ps. 94, 8. Nif. isas to be infatuated Is. 19, 11; Jee. 10,' 14 21. 153 ™' <" taking away, a removing Is. 4, 4. It is prop, infin. Pihel. N"1?.3 (perhaps a wood from "iSa) n. p. f. 1 Che. 8, 8, which is called Vi'i'n (per- haps ffl'n'n should be read) in 8, 9. Per- haps from N'lJ'-na (daughter of the fresh) from Ni5> ="rii5' ni. ITT ITT niy? (from n?a) /■. a jMni% Ex. 22, 5. " See T'Sa.' ' t!^J?3 (not used) mfr. to be valiant, laid, Ar. J^jJ, J**4^- Hence XJ^5>5 (vaZo«r, boldness) n. p. of a king of Israel 1 Kmas 15, 16. fT'bya (from rr-fflS-ia see JTitoS^) IT" -:r ^ IT"-; 'v it t-:' w. p. m. 1 Che. 6, 25. nnritljyil (from 'Jf-n^a; see a) n.;?. of a Levitical city in Manasseh Josh. 21, 27, for which ni'^nilSs (which see) stands in 1 Che. 6, 56. ini^3 (Kal unused) intr. to be terri- fied, to be afraid, Ar. o^ attonitus fuit, Syr. hi^ timuit; on the contrary the At. o**J appears to correspond more nearly to IJias. Deriv. nnsa, Dina. •' i-T ITT : ' r • Nif. n?ai (1 pers. insas) to be terri- fied, afraid, with ''jsa or '^se's'? "A 1 C!^^- 21, 30; EsTH. 7, 'e';' Dan.' 8,' 17. Pih. nsa (3 fern. sing, with suff. ''annya; innya for iMnn"; part. fem. with suff. ijns^aKi from tiiaa out of rnsa??, like n'llBT? 1 Kings 1, 15) to put into terror, to alarm, with accus. of the object Is. 21,4, Job 7, 14, e. g. MM"'??, nteVs, niJijia &c. The accessory idea of sudden- ness is not found even in 1 Sam. 16, 14. nriSS /". terror, restlessness Jer. 8, ITT : ' 15 ; 14, 19 ; opposed to tis'na (rest). y3 (from y'Sa) a swamp, a morass, mud Jee. 38, 22. n23 (from y:£a, plur. in Ez. DN^a after the Aramaean mode, which the Masora reads oth) f. swamp,tslough Job 8, 11; 40, 21; Ez. 47, 11, coupled with !Saa, where nSj? and sail grow; Targ. N5ta, pi. y^a, Ar. 5L»aj slough. See y^a. '"niSa (K'tib; from IJSa) ad;, m. %A, inaccessible, steep, 'art 'I?! Zech. 11, 2 «Ae AigiA (situated on the highest top of Lebanon) wood. The K'ri reads T'Sa. 1122 (from laa) m. ore of gold and silver, same as l^a, hence D'']?n? '^I^'? TiBiN Job 22, 24 tL Ophir (gold) sSaZi Je ore of the mining-pits. ''SS {shining or Aig-A from yia, see iDa) n. p. m. EzE. 2, 17. T'Sa (from liia; constr. I'^ita, with '- 15* ^IJ2 228 pyn suf. "^IT??) "*• 1- t™^ 0^ cutting off the grapes, vintage (prop, cutting off of berries, like T^Sp cutting of fruit) Lev. 26, 5; Is. 24, 13. As the gleaning was called nibbiJ* Micah 7, 1, the proverb arose : letter the gleaning of ... than the vintage of . . . (where in T'lsaa the Dagesh in Beth is omitted; comp. 1 Sam. 23, 28; Ez. 32, 30). It also stands for T^^'if Jee. 48, 32. — 2. adj. m. K'ri in Zech. 11, 2 = liiaa (which see) high, steep. See isa 3.' ^ 7lf3 (not used) intr. to be furnished with a husk (laminated), to have a husk, Ax. J-«aj, comp. bits to peel, Pih. to peel off. The organic root is bS'Si, bS-E, also found in blt^N to tear loose, bS'i to separate &c. ; comp. Greek irxvl' ov, cxvk-svo), German Schal-e, schal-en &e., as also bmd, ban, bilJ. Deriv. bsa. ?S2 (only^Z. ti'^baa) w, prop, husk- growth, hence onion Numb. 11, 5; comp. Syr. iljiS, At. ^oj. b>iibS5 (from '5t-']S El as protec- tion; later among the Jews b^bst; the Talm. explains it = bs bit) n. p'. m. Ex. 31, 2; EzB. 10, 30. 'bjst'for bit appears also in S'SabS, npb^ (according to some). n^l bSS (from 'it'ia asking) n, p. m. EzK. 2,' 52: in Nbh. 7, 54 n-'bita (the JT'bsa see nibita. r : - I : - i?5^2 {fut. Sa^V, inf. constr. ?ka; imp. 3>aa, with an accentless suff'. d§^Si) tr. to tear off, to tear in pieces, break 'off, se- parate, cut off, hence 1. to break in pieces, to beat or strike off, e. g. disSM (the projections of the temple-roof borne by the pillars) on the head of all of them Am. 9, 1. — 2. Metaphor, to break off, i. e. to stop, the march (tTli*), spoken of the march- ing of locusts Jo. 2, 8. — 3. Usually to get gain (comp. ';j«ji), i. e. to snatch un- righteously to self, to rob one, 5>^ai 13 Job 27, 8 though he gains (unjustly); ?ita Ps.10,3 = S'lj^'i, especially so the phrase 5»it|i»ita Jek. 6,13, Pbot. 1,19; 15, 27, Ez. 22, 27 also in the meaning to plunder; once with the addition of 5>'l Sab. 2, 9, where Joakim is meant (see Jek. 22, 17). '^^as Jbr. 51, 13 is considered to be an infin. with the suff. of thy being cut off (see M53N); but though possible as far as the form is concerned (comp. ''5>ba Job 7, 19, dyjjS Am. 1, 13), yet the passive sense is un- proved, and it is better referred to 5>ita. Fih. S>Sa (fut. 5»S5^) 1. to cut off e. g. the thread from the thrum Is. 38, 12; metaphor, of the cutting of the thread of life: to tear loose, to destroy Job 6, 9. — 2. to complete, make an end of (comp. y)3_ from ypj; metaphor, to exe- cute Is. 10, 12; Zech. 4, 9; Lament. 2, 17. LXX avvzsksiv. — 3. to get gain greedily, hence to overreach Ez. 22, 12. With the stem in question the Tar- gumic i>a:?, J>15i, Syr. -^^j Ar. »^ and kjo^ (which properly belong to- gether) are cognate; and to these also belong y^S, nss &c. The organic root lies in ita. 'J%'2i (pause'^, with suff. ^^(Sta, "^Sita, fii>2ta) m. prop, torn off, torn away, hence 1. robbed, properly snatched to oneself by violence, generally unright- eous possession or gain Prov. 1,19; Hab. 2, 9 ; corruption Ex. 18, 21 ; Judges 5, 19; extortion 1 Sam. 8, 3; cognate in sense 5?1B'5>, IjttJS, into. Eigur. gain, pro/it Gen. 37, 26; Job 22, 2. — 2. Per- haps same as ypj termination, ceasing, destruction Jbr. 51, 13. yi?3 (not used) intr. to swell up, spoken of the fermenting of mud, comp. Ar. t>dj , (jOLJ (to bubble forth), Aram. yaita to press forward &c. Deriv. ya, ntsta. ' IT ■ pi?3 intr. 1. (according to Rasht) to swell, of the feet, to get callous spots (comp. Jij v. to extend, swell out, then to get callous spots, boils) Deux. 8, 4; Neh. 9,21; — 2. (not used) to rise on high, to swell up, whence psa (which see); — - pyn 229 ^5fD 3. (not used) to overtop, of a place; whence tie proper name rip_aa (which see). — The stem is remotely connected with niaa 1 (which see); the organic root is pi"^) ^hich exists also in pD"3 &e. According to the opinion of Kimchi the fundamental signification is to flow, after the Ar. (3"«flJ (spuit) &c., which however is only a collateral form of «.tflj; according to the Sam., Vulg., Alex. = S^TS to be cracked. But all the TT above explanations suit the derivatives, and have their analogy in ^w &c. pS3 (with suff. i)55ta) m. dough, pro- perly the swelling mass, named from its extension, Ex. 12, 34 39, 2 Sam. 13, 8, Hos. 7, 4, irrespective of fermenta- tion. nj?23 (height, hill; comp. Ar. siLaj) n. p. of a city in Judah Josh. 15, 39 ; 2 Kings 22, 1. From psa. IliB (fut. ^issai) tr. 1. with acous. to cut off, grapes Lev. 25, 5; to gather grapes Judges 9, 27; Lev. 25, 11. Hence "iSia vintager, a figure of the depopu- lating enemy Jer. 6, 9; 49, 9; Ob. 5. Deriv. T^ita. — 2. to lessen, to shorten, metaphor. Ps. 76, 13: he lessens (i.' e. restrains) the defiance of the powerful, the Targ. using "nsa for Hebr. V'li and Syr. '^ &c. in this sense, and a similar meta- phorical application of verbs of cutting off taking place elsewhere. Deriv. n'naa. — 3. Metaphor, to cut off from something, to separate; hence to fortify (of walls, cities &c.), so ITilsa Is. 2, 15 and nilSa •" IT : ' I 1 ; Is. 37, 26, the separated being conceived of as inaccessible; comp. Arab. itJuo to refuse, and *Xx to enclose, Mb^&c. Of a forest: to he steepZ^CH. 11,2. Figurat. ni'lJEa Jer. 33, 3 enclosed, i. e. incom- prehensible, inaccessible to the under- standing. Deriv. "liaa, Ti^a 2, li'iKa, 'nitaa, n. p. lata. — 4. (unused) ac- cording to 3n Gandch: to break, of ore (in mining language), like the Ar. -o (laid), whence ^, gold and silver ore. Deriv. ijta, 'nMa, 'i^ijiia, laaa, comp. y-it'n, whence f'j Ps. 'g8, 31." " Nif. 'n^ljii to be restrained, to be made inaccessible, only figurat. of ntiTa (plan), with 'ja of the person. Gen. 11, 6; Job 42, 2. Fih. isa to fortify Is. 22, 10; Jer. 51, 53. The signification of the stem now giv- en is fully established in the Aram, (see meaning 1) and Ar. -iflj II. (amputavit), and even the Ar. sense, to see, is to be explained, like the Hebr. ^la, of cutting, separating. But for sign. 3 the stem 1^"a has been compared with 'iSl: to be firm, strong; and for the derivatives of 4, )ti'n, b';)!, even "l^a 1 have been compared with 'laK, considering to gather grapes, as synonymous with ingathering. The suc- cessive development, however, of all the significations rejects these explanations. 123 (pi- 6''15£a) m. 1. piece of ore, i. e. gold and silver ore, broken out of the mine, and mentioned as a costly thing along withTiS'iN (atiT) and irisyin t|D3 Job 22, 24: and laid (nilli part. pass, of miZJ) on (thy) soil is gold ore i. e. such will lie before thee; the pi. (according to Kimcht) ^J'^'nSa ''^^ Ti^'n-} 22, 25 thy gold ores will be immense ("I'nia powerful). Comp. Talm. (K'tub. 67) 'N3"''ns Na^)! or Nbba, which Ariich explains: atiT ■iN^iaa y'lsjrt-'ja Uj^bsrt. — 2. (strong place) ?2.p. of aLevitical city inEeuben Deux. 4, 43; Josh. 20, 8; LXX BoaoQ, and identical with BoooQ ('lita) in Gilead 1 Macc. 5,26; the explanation of the Je- rus. Targ. by ')i'i"irn3 (?) is obscure. An- other city in this district, north of Arnon was called fi'lSa Jer. 48, 24 (which see). — 3. (God is a fortress) n.p.m. 1 Chr. 7, 37, comp. n. p. 12iaa. "IS? (after the form ans) m. same as 'naa ore of gold, figurat. Ksa isb Job 36, 19": not riches (comp. D-'jia iib child- less 1 Chr. 2, 30; d''5B Nb Eccles. 10, 10 without a face i. e. without edge) ; the iie- gative sib here also refers to ""'SaNa bb^ nb and (not) all the forces of strength, I e. he values ('^'i^.l) neither riches nor m)i2 230 Vp^ strength; but most take ISa as 'nS and a. litan Jer. 6, 27 is said by some to be =iaa-'|n (without money), )'q being abridged as in T'iSaM Judges S, 2; but it is more suitable there to take "nisaw as a noun equivalent to 13fa, which agrees with the context. See ']ina. m23 (formed from 'nSa) f. 1. /bZrf, jjew, Ejc. 2, 12, consequently like NbSM from Nb3, parallel 'na^; therefore the Targ. has N'liain; but the LXX (h &Xi'ipsi) and the Syr. read tTl^a; and others take it for the name of a city (comp. Is. 34, 6). — 2. (fortification, see •niia 2) a) n. p. of the chief city of Edom, Gen. 36, 33; Is. 34, 6; 63, 1; Jer. 49, 13; Am. 1, 12; LXX BoaoQ, Ar. i^yt&i, Greek Boat q a. It is the present village Sjjyoj (Bozaire) in G'ebail, with large ruins, situated on a height. There is an allusion to the signification to hold a vintage (see "l^a) Ob. 5. b) n.p. of the city Bostra (Amm. Marc. 14, 8), BoatQa (Steph. Byz. s. v.) in Hauran (Abnlfeda), 24 Boman miles from ■'S'lIN (Euseb.) ; but not mentioned at all in the Bible. — 3. re. p. of a city in Moab on the Arnon Jbk. 48, 24, named in 1 Macc.5,2 GBoaaog a together withBocrd^ (laa). — A !Tnaa on the Euphrates, is adduced in theMidrash on Lament. 3,16. mS3 (pi. niisa) /. same as irTika (see Kimchi; Sehnurrer, diss. p. 173) Ps. 9, 10; 10, 1, and so built up after the form Tid^'D, n^pa; of this the pi. ni^sa ITT*-' It't- ' * I T - Jer. 14, 1 (denoting as a collect, continuance) would be explained of ■drought. Interchange of such forms as MlJta and nisa, also exists in rTnipa, ITT - VI-' V*l - ' VI 1 - ■ji^SlH m. steep height, fortress, Zech. 9, 12, opposite 'nia 9, 11; comp. !ina. m22 f. want of rain, drought, hence 'a nSttS Jer. 17, 8, which is called in 14, I'ni'naa; comp. the Targ. Nn'nisa the same; and 15sy below. ' l-T p12p3 l.aioJJZs, seepa)?a. — 2.(sen- tence, words, sc. of God, from pia III.) n. p. m. EzK. 2, 61; Neh. 7, 53. p?p3 (a reduplicated form from p*ia II., according to the analogy of 5>1253>125 from ^1125 ; yet Jerome pronounces bokbok, after the form ij?"!)?) »». prop, hollowed out, deepened, hence a bottle, 1 Kjngs 14, 3 for honey; a vessel easily broken as being of earth Jbe. 19, 1 10; in reference to which noun the verb ppa (which see) was used 19, 7. The Syi-. ^aa^, Malt, bahbyka &c. are the same; as ^Txos of the LXX also belongs to it. iT'P3j?5 (speech of Jah, from pia III.) n. p" ml k^B.. 11, 17; 12, 9 25. 1j?5j?5 (reduplicated from 'ijja, see 'n;pa) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 9, 15. '')32 (i.e. ■')?ia = 1!l^^)?a mouth of God; see Sri'jjapa) w. p.m. Numb. 34, 22; Ezr. 7,4."'"" in*j?3 (the same) n.p.m. 1 Chr. 25, 4 13." ■ ■• ?1J53 (only pi. tl''»)?a, constr. •'3!'')?a) m. cleft, fissure, breach Is. 22, 9, breach in a waM Am.6,11. a stronger word than D'^O'n. bp3 see bpa. J?p3 (inf. with suff. BjJJ??; imp. with suff. IW)??; fut. yj>j3.-i) tr. to cleave, to divide, with accus. of the object, as the sea Ex. 14, 16; Is. 63, 12; Ps. 78, 13; wood EccLBS. 10, 9 ; a rock Is. 48, 21, spoken of the miracle of Moses Numb. 20, 8, which is termed poetically Ps. 74, 15, to divide spring and brook i. e. to cleave the rock in order to bring forth spring and brook; oSriM (nam6 of a rock in "'Hb) Judges15, 19; with a to cut into the earth, i. e. to plough Ps. 141, 7 ; to rip up e. g. the pregnant Am. 1, 13; the shoulder Ez. 29, 7, i. e. to wound; figurat. with a to break through, a camp 2 Sam. 23, 16; to break into, a city, with accus. 2 Chr. 21, 17, i. e. to conquer it 32, 1 ; to bear, an act that takes place by the opening and splitting of the eggs; Nif. and Pih. occurring in this sense Is. 59, 5. According to the deri- vatives, this verb has also the meaning: Vp3 231 Pp:^ to make a breach, into a wall, to divide itito halves, to make cracks in the ground &c., referring back to the fundamental sense. Deriv. 5!'>)j)a, S>^a, tiy)??. Nif. 5>p.ii5 to open itself, to hurst asun- der, e. g.'lj^ Job 26, 8, 1p Zbch. 14, 4, na'iNi. Num! 16, 31, y'lN i Kin&s i, 40, nias' Job 32, 19; pass, of Kal, to be 'opened, of TiS>M Gen. 7, 11 , niaitin Pbov. 3, 20, D^a Is. 35, 6; to be con- quered 'Ea.^Q,!^; Jee. 52, 7; to be born Is. 59, 5 ; of the breaking forth of light, Is. 58, 8 (comp. 1)52). Pih. 5»)?.a {fut. V'^.T) intens. of Kal: to split, wood Gen. 22, 3; spoken of streams Hab. 3, 9 with the acous. yiN , so that the earth appears; a rock Ps. 78,15, cliffs (ni'lllt) Job 28, 10; to rip up 2 Kings 8, 12 ; to tear in pieces, of animals Hos. 13, 8; 2 Kings 2, 24; to divide (eggs) i. e. to hatch Is. 59, 5. Sel- dom causative: to cause to break forthlSiZ. 13, 11 13. Pu. S>(?_a pass, to be conquered (of a city) Ez. 26, 10; to be ripped up Hos. 14, 1 [13, 16]; to be burst open (of lea- thern bottles) Josh. 9, 4. Sif. ?''|iaJl to conquer (a city) Is. 7, 6 ; to break through to (bs) one, 2 Kings 3, 26. Mof. 5>)?.af1 to be conquered, Jbb. 39, 2. Eithp. 5>)?arit1 to be cleft, to burst. Josh. 9, 1^; Slic. 1, 4. The stem 5»j?.a is in Targ. S>p_a, S»p.B, Syr. '^J.a, Aethiop. to open; and in Arabic is only preserved in the noun Xjuj (W)5a) &c.; but «Jo n. (to cut in pieces) is cognate; and the properly corresponding stems are Lei (to cut Of asunder), [^ (to separate, divide). 5>p.a entirely coincides with (3*j. Hence the organic root is S-pa = pa I., which lat- ter is first changed into pS'a, and from the nature of 5> into 5>-pa. ^ Sj3|3 m. half, but only spec, half- shekell' Gas. 24, 22; LXX Sgaxfi^, the half of a SiSqaj^fiov. SOpn Aram. f. same as Hebrew Wpa it': • ' IT': • (which see) Dan. 3, 1. •^^i?? ifionstr. njypa; pi. nisjja) f. prop, cleft, broken ground, or a' cut (between mountains), hence: a sunken place, a low plain, a valley, opposites Ijrt, Di^j Deut. 8, 7; Is. 40, 4; Ps. 104, 8; a place enclosed by mountain sides, private and quiet, Ez. 3,22; 37,1; generally a plain. Gen. 11, 2. Hence 'a stands in topographical descriptions and names of places, e. g. intl^ 'a Deut. 34, 3, n^Sfa 'a Josh. 11, 8; |iN 'a Am. 1, 5 the plain lying about the Syrian Helio- polis; TiiaVin 'a Josh. 11, 17; 12, 7 the valley lying at the foot of Hermon and Antilibanus, in the neighbourhood of the Jordan -springs; iaiN 'a Neh. 6, 2 a plain about Ono, near Lydda, where hamlets were built ; Nlll 'a Dan. 3, 1 the valley near the city Dura in Babylonia (see tiCfl'n); i'la)? or ynyi2 'a 2 Chb. 35, 22, see ilM. At a later period of the language it is still more frequent, being exchanged with iT^a (see bsa'lis) or joined to it (see D'lafi nija, Ha'iy IT'a). Pp"^ I. {Ipers. ■'nijsa, Spers. pi. with suf. Dippa; part, pp.ia) tr. 1. to depopu- late, prop, to waste, to make desolate, Is. 24; 1, with pba; to plunder, Nah. 2, 3, Targ. n?. — 2. Eigurat. to make poor, empty, lnJ£5» (counsel) Jee. 19, 7, chosen for the purpose of having a ver- bal allusion to papa; comp. najy 49, 7, 5>ba Is. 19, 3 sai^ of niS». The LXX have understood it according to the sense = 5>p.a (aq)d^co) and MS3; = 'S lUJSN ; which, however, must be rejected as regards Is. 19, 3. Nif. pai {2 fern. !i;^^ai for !i;|a3, comp. iibas, liTi, rTa?5, hapi, tiaoi; inf. it:it' 1 :it' it Tit' itI:it' it:it' ' piati; /wt. pia^) to be wasted, empty, de- populated. Is. 24, 3.; parallel Ta. Figurat to become empty, poor, spoken of ni'l (i. e. intelligence, parallel tilsts) Is. 19, 3,. and therefore coupled with 5*ba. Po. ppia to depopulate, lay waste, parallel rilT (to winnow, scatter the in- habitants) Jer. 51, 2. The fundamental signification of the stem pa is to make open, empty i. e. to desolate; the similar pa I. being also- ppa 232 *1P3 intrans. ; this fundament, signification is usual in IV. Aethiop., but has nothing in common with pa, ^^ (to flow, to break forth, = rtsa), whence perhaps pb^. pp^ n. (only part. pJJ.ia) intr. to blossom, of the vine Hos. 10, 1 ; comp. At. {^^ (to bloom out), prob. cognate with 3>pa in the sense "to break out". The LXX, Symm., Aq. have (1. c.) the signification to climb, to grow luxuriant- ly; the Targ., Ibn Esra and others to be empty, from pp_a I. ; but only that given above suits the context. "np3 (Kal unused) tr. prop, to split, to cut through, to break through, like the Ar. Jb, hence 1. to plough, to cleave the soil, like IS, llSin, nbs, 2>pa are ' r' n ' i-T ' 'i-T transferred from a similar fund, mean- ing to ploughing. Deriv. ^pa, and de- nom. Ip.a. — 2. Pigurat. to break out, to break forth, of the early light, like 5>p.a and inilj from a like ground - sense. Deriv. "S^^. — 3. to divide, se- parate, like lia, hence Pih. 'n)?.a {fut. 1)?a^) to divide, with \ ... y'^ between . . . and, i. e. to search into, to examine Lev. 27, 33; with \ of the object: to judge of, consider 13,'36j with accusat.: to review, look after, to count again, to inspect, the flock Ez. 34, 11 12, in order to protect or punish; with 'inN to search after, to look after, i. e. to weigh Pkov. 20, 25, but also without "ipN in this sense, 2 Kings 16, 15: it shall be for me to weigh i. e. I shall have to weigh; with a: to fix attention on something , 'to consider with pleasure Ps. 27,4; parallel a MTU. Iplil iconstr. ^)p_a, with suf. 'iS'lp?) common (m. Ex. 21, 37; f. Job 1, 14) as a collective word prop, cattle for the plough (Am. 6, 12), armentum (accord- ing to Varro prop, aramentum), a herd, for the use of field-labour, to which the single word liilj is related as yA^ to nto, tjiS* to Tiss, therefore only in the sing. , the pi. not appearing till 2 Chr. 4, 3 (Neh. 10, 37 ir'i)?3 stands for li^Jja, and Am. 6, 12 has'been re- solved into d'^ Ip aa). In usage it denotes 1. coll. oxen, heifers, black cattle, UXX. §6bs, §ovMha, put along with ')t<^, ti-'hm, d'^'i^jn Gen. 12,16; 26,14; Lev. 27, 32, without distinction of sex 3, 1 ; also cows Dbut. 32, 14; 2 Sam. 17, 29; Job 1,14; nib^ 'np^a Gen. 33,13 sMAmj' Mne. To express a single animal, ^ipa'^a a young heifer is used besides 'nillj Gen. 18,7; Numb. 8, 8 (pl."i)?a ''iSi 28,11), as an apposition to "ns young heifer, young cow Ex. 29, 1 , Lev. 4', 3, to bss young calf Lev. 9, 2 &c., on which account it appears to denote rather the species to which these belong, 'a nbs^ Deut. 21, 3, 1 Sam. 16, 2, Is. 7, 21 young cow (belonging to the class of Ipa); ^pa !l5pM posses- sion of oxen Gen. 26, 14; 'a iTiS* Joel 1, 18 herds of oxen. Metaphor, artificial images of oxen 1 Kings 7, 29. But if fi'i'ipa 2 Che. 4, 3 has this meaning, it is written for &''i>ps 1 Kings 7, 24, since I- 't : ' ' the pi. does not appear elsewhere. — 2. Earely: a single ox, so particularly in the case of numerals Ex. 21, 37 [22, 1]; Numb. 7, 3; with inS 1 Sam. 11, 7. — 3. (not used) transferred to other flocks (comp. Targ. ']i'nin ■'ppa on Is. 7, 25; the Syr. li-a= spoken also e. g. of swine Luke 8, 32; Ar. -aaj the foal of ahorse). Deriv. the denom. 1)?a {part. "Ipia) to be a herd, with- out distinguishing the kind of animals ; spoken of one who herds sheep Am. 7, 14, as the Targ. and LXX rightly under- stand, without reading 1p.i5. "Ipiil (jplur. D'^'lpa as if from another ground-form) m. prop, breaking forth (of the morning -red), hence the dawn, the morning Gen. 44, 3; 2 Sam. 23, 4: mim- ing without clouds. The act of shining out orbreaking forth is expressed by "liN Judges 16, 2 ; 1 Sam. 14, 36 ; Mic. 2, l'; by nnN Is. 21, 12; by ti^rt Ex. 10, 13; but also by 5135 Ex. 14, 27Vas with aiy •'ITT 'V VK Deut. 23, 12); or by the noun NSia Ps. 65, 9; and 'iija stands opposed to ais Gen. 1, 5, or also to Cii'nna Ps. 55, •••IV ' ' •rr: it 18. Figuratively 'a is a symbol of pro- sperity Job 11, 17. When 1p> is ap- ^P3 233 nt:;p3 plied to a coming morning, the mean- ing is to-morrow morning, crastina lux Ex. 29, 34; Lev. 19, 13. In the former as Tvell as the latter sense 'n|)a is fre- c[uently used as an adv. in the morning Ex. 16, 7; Ps. 5, 4; more frequently nTysh 30, 6; in prose 1)?aa Gen. 19, 27; 1 Sam. 19, 2; less frequently does it bear the sense of early, soon, Ps. 49, 15. 1)?33 l)?aa Ex. 16,21, D'^'i)?aV Job 7, 18, or D"''! jjab Ps. 73, 14, 1]?ii ''i)?;aV 1 Chr.9,27 express the distributive, i.e. every morning. Derivat. (according to Kimchi) the denom. "npa to appear every morning, Ps. 27, 4; but see Ijp.a. In Arab. -Jo and other forms with KM appear in this signification; both stems in that language generally run- ning into one another; the versions fre- quently give the sense in paraphrase. iT1|33 (an infinitive-noun) f. a looking after, Ez. 34, 12. See 1)? a. rinPS f^n- examination, inquisition, gener. punishment (according to Saadia), chastisement (as in "ipji) Lev. 19, 20; perhaps from Tjja = Aethiop. bpa, Ar. Jix to strike. typ3 (Kal not used) tr. to seek, to desire, to wish; then: to seek out, to choose. The fundamental signification is as in the cognate Ip.B, Ar. JoAi, to divide, to separate from each other in order to judge of, disgregavit, to examine, fignrat. to press into something (see I'la), to look after something, to search, to which the other senses are attached, hence not to feel; comp. il5sn, «5Tn, VnizS with a cognate fundamental meaning. The stem is in the Targ. ilJna, Syr. ^-*^=, Zab. ' ^ 1^ , Ar. ^iA^. The organic root is ISp.-a (l25n-a &c.),' also found in ttjjj (which see), Ar. jjujS (to seek, seek out), viAi (to tear off). Ft. I25j?a (fut. llS^a^) 1. to seek (per- severingly), opposite to Nlta (Song of Sol. 3, 1), absol. 2 Kings 2, 17, or with accnsat. of object (cognate in sense iB'i'i) EzR. 2, 62; Ps. 40, 17; with b to seek after something, to search for, Job 10, 6 ; with inf constr. following and b to seek, to will, to strive, Deut. 13, ll'; 1 Sam. 14, 4; EsTH. 6, 2; Ps. 37, 32; with in- sertion of the dat. commodi: to seek for self Lament. 1, 19, to seek out for self Judges 18, 1; 1 Sam. 13, 14. Here should be noticed the peculiar phrases: 'D ■'5BTIN 'a to seek the face of one i. e. to visit one in order to gain his favour; of God, to seek his presence, i. e. to pray to him 1 Kings 10, 24; Hos. 5, 15; Ps. 24, 6; Peov.29,26; I'^-riN 'a to seek God i. e. to turn to him, to pray, to be penitent (a supplement is ''"'"ni* NSJa Dedt. 4, 29) Ps. 105, 3; PROvr28"5. — 2. to strive after something, to endeavour, with accusat. n2!i3 Numb. 16, 10, nijai^n EccLBS. 7"h9, reTON Jer. 5, 1 &c.'; seldom with b of the object Prov. 18, 1 ; usually in tliis sense with an infin. fol- lowing and b, Ex. 2, 15 &c., also with- out b Jer. 26, 21, which, however, may also "be taken in signification 1. Other phrases should be noticed: 'B nyi 'a to strive after the hurt of one Num. 35, 23,1 Sam. 24, 10, for which "bN HjP'i 'a is in 19, 2, opposite b naia 'a Ps.'l22, 9 ; 'B BBS 'a to seek the life of one, i. e. to plot against the life 1 Sam. 20, 1, but also in a good sense, to preserve it Prov. 29, 10; comp. llSBSb fflp'i Ps. 142, 5. — 3. To seek = to require, to demand, with accusat. of the object Jer. 45, 5, but with 1?3 Neh. 5,12, Ez. 7,26, Dan. 1,20 or 1112 of the pers. of whom something is required Gen. 31, 39 ; Is. 1, 12. To this head belongs the phrase 'B l^a 'B d'5 'a to require the blood of any one from any one, i. e. to take revenge upon one, 2 Sam. 4, 11 ; without D'n 1 Sam. 20, 16. — 4. to visit, to revenge, punish, JoSH. 22, 23; comp. Ip.a. — 5. to ask, with ■)« EzR. 8, 21 or ■'Ssba of the person EsTH. 4, 8 and b? of the object for which one asks, Esth! 7, 7. Derivat. !Ttt5p- Pu. 125)5_a (fut. ffljf.a^) to be sought, to be sought out, to be examined Ez. 26, 21, Jer. 50, 20; Esth. 2, 23. ntp|32 (with suff. "^niBlsa; only late) ^D 234 t«"l3 f. a request, desire, with JibNllS Esth. 5,8; EzE.7,6. *13 (even without pause) and 'na m. 1. corn, grain, either winnowed and cleansed Gen. 41, 35 ; 42, 25 ; or what is on the threshing floors Jo. 2, 24, or even on the stalk Ps. 65, 14 ; 13 nns Am. 8, 5 Jo (jp«re tA« coTm (-granaries), for the purpose of selling (comp. Jer. 50,26); IS bsM 8, 6 what falls from grain i. e. ckaf; 'na-nNia?5 5, 11 presents or gifts of grain; ia n&S Ps. 72, 16 superabun- dance of corn; 'na lait Gbbt. 41, 49 to ' IT r T ' heap up grain; ia 'nailS 42, 3 to sell grain; ia i»SU Peov. 11, 26 to withhold the sale IT l-T ' o/ coTO &c. "We have still to notice the proverbial saying: laii-riN ']5nb"rt?5 Jer. 23, 28 what has the chaff to do with the wheat i. e. the unessential with the essential. — 'la is usually (/JKjEJsj-a, Kim- chi) derived from lia, since the latter is used in Jer. 4, 11 of winnowing; but the fluctuating pronunciation (na and la), its application to corn on the stalk, the Ar. ,j (wheat) which Saadia puts for it, appear to shew that it is a pri- mitive word, perhaps resembling the Lat. far (D. Halicar. 1, 2 tov qsa^qog, o na- lov(iEv riiisTg ^iav). — 2. a field. Job 89, 4, like the Aram, 'la and la, Ar. S '" IT ' -J (see Ijja); but it is scarcely con- nected with signification 1. "13 I. corn, see ia 1. I- ' IT ->3 n. field, see "na 2. "13 m. (^Z. constr. I'la) ai?'. »i., ilia f. 1. in a moral sense, tried, approved, pure, clear, Ar. Ij, with aab Ps. 24,4; 73, 1 ; or without it 19, 9 ; Job 11, 4. In a physical sense, beautiful Song of Sol. 6, 10. — 2. chosen, select, consequently a favourite. In this sense many Jewish expositors (from polemical motives) take la-lplBS Ps. 2, 12 Mss i. e. do homage to the chosen (king) ; ia like "VXp. else- where. See Tia. — 3. clean, i. e. free from something, empty (Kimchi) Pro v. 14, 4 = ■')53 ; but here too "na is trans- lated corn, and there is either to be supplied ')iN (Jos. Kimchi): without ('j''^) osoen no (T'N) granary has corn; or (ii« Esrct) ia is opposite to niNiaa"ai: a granary is without omen, hut much &o. ")3 (poet.; with suf. 'I'la) ?». son, Prov. 31, 2, therefore (according to the Talm. and Midrash) la-lj^l^S Ps. 2, 12 Mss, i. e. do homage to, the son (pi God) i. e. the king (comp. verse 7). It is a primitive word (see ^a), out of which in the first instance ';a has come (see on fi'i^a, risa, na), and thence 'ja (which see). In Phenician, some proper names appear to be compounded with 'la , as in Hebrew with -ja , thus WiJJN.-'ia Ver- mina, Bsq-, OvsQ/iivag (Liv. 29,33) &c. na (def. Nia; from Tna i. e. 13. = isa) r ^ ' ITT ' r: r r :•' Aram. m. the field, open country, in oppo- sition to the city, and therefore for tlie Hebrew iTjVi ia the sense not built upon; with rirn'DAN.2,38, Ttt^ni 4,20; so also the Syr. ij-^, Arab, "j &c. See "li^a. As an adverb it is used in various ways like the Hebrew yin, e. g. Niab, Nia-ia &c. '" ' ITT ' • 12 (with suff. rtia) Aram. m. son, Dan'. 3, 25; 7,13; Ezk 5, 1. "12 (once Tia Job 9, 30, with suff. ^"I'a; from T^a) m. 1. cleanness, pureness, with a^|3 Job 22, 30, or T' 2 Sam. 22, 21,''Ps. 18, 21 25, seldomer alone 2 Sam. 22, 25, fig. of purity in actions, integrity. — 2. same as n'^'ia (cleansing) salt of lye or alkali, for washiug Job 9, 30, or for smelting metals Is. 1, 25. Comp. Phenician na (Tugg. 7) clean. i<"n!3 (fut. Nna\ inf. constr. nnn, IT T ^ IT ; • ' ' I ■ ' imp. N^Si) trans. 1. (not used) to cut, form, fashion, as !Tna I. (which see); comp. Pih. Hence — 2. to create, spoken of the divine creation of the world Gen. 1, 1; Is. 40, 28; of the wind Am. 4, 13; of man Gen. 1, 27; of light and dark-i ness Is. 45, 7 ; as the Arab, f o and tjj have this meaning, where one may al- ways suppose the forming of given materials; joined with 1Si and MiBS> as Nnn 235 1-13 cognate in sense, Is. 45, 12 18. The LXX render it by noisTv, wliicli (as Fro- copius of Gaza mentions) also signifies creating out of a shapeless primitive material. Subsequently, however, when the doctrine of creation from nothing (TJNH 1252, creatio ex nihilo) arose, xri- Csiv was chosen (Aq. Symm. Theod. and the later LXX). Metaphorically, parti- cularly in the second part of Isaiah (20 times): to found, to produce, to make, to cause to arise, Is. 40, 26; 65, 18 ; also in a moral sense to cause something to arise 45, 7: Ps. 51, 12. nitob N'na Gen. 2, 3 ' ' ' _ I -:r ITT ' he made in creating, i. e. he created anew, comp. nitosb V'lati. N'l'isi Eccles.12,1 creator. Usually construed with accus. of the object Jer. 31, 22; but also with accus. of that into which Gen. 1, 27; Is. 45, 18; Ps. 89, 48. Derivat. flN^'ia, and the proper name JT^Nia. Nif. NiaS pass, to be created. Gen. 2, 4; to arise, NlSi dS Ps. 102, 19 the 7 7 7 1^ . . ,_ 7 people that arise; to be bom, Ez. 28, 13 ore the day of thy birth; spoken of new occurrences, Is. 48, 7. Hh. N-na (inf. and imp. iS'na) to fell, to cut down (a wood) Josh. 17, 15 18; 'a a'llia Ez.23,47 to cut in, to pierce, Targ. yta;' to engrave, like ppjn Ez. 21, 24 1. e. to draw. The Targ., LXX, and other old interpreters have translated it sometimes as equivalent to Tna to select, sometimes as l)5.Fi, which is un- necessary. i^^3 (Kal not used) intrans. only a collateral form of NpM (which see) to he filled, to be full, then to be fat, to be well-fed, to be strong, lusty. In Ar. the stems i^y", ;v^, iT'^ 9300. the cognate group l^5, ;5j5' ^)^ ^^^^ * ^'^^ mean- ing, so that b, m and w are obviously interchanged here in the first radical sound. Nba (which see) is a remoter cognate. Deriv. N'^'na, and the proper name "'N'la. Hif. N^'iairi to nourish, to give nutri- ment, with accus. of the person and 'JM of the object with which 1 Sam. 2, 29, where the LXX read lasi'iaiib (from •^Jpa , hence ivsvloysia&ai) for QSiii'nailb. Tl'7N'l3 (a collateral form of ';[li«"ia Is. 39, l) 2 Kings 20, 12, surname'"of a king of Babylon. See ':jli<'ia. rr^NIB (abridged from iTiNiai Jah IT T : ^ '^ IT T : . IS creator) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 8, 21. ''Nl"]3 re. p. of a place, joined with nia (which see), either transposed from '''nNa, or •'N'na (from N'ia= N'lM meaning to be strong) is the strong, an epithet of the lion, therefore 'a rT^a 1 Chr. 4, 31 is interchanged with nisab rT'a Josh.19,6. *12'13 see la'na. I" : ■ I! !- "lana (after the form J?aj?a, in'^t!, consequently from ia or ia; pi. Q"''!") OT. a bird fattened for the table of So- lomon 1 Kings 5,3; in the pi. fowls, as the Targ. Syr. Ar. and Vulg. under- stand. But since in Hebrew Q"''lS2t stands elsewhere for fowls (Neh. 5, 18), Kimchi, Tanchum and others understand goose, as a peculiar species (comp. Syr. iioio swan), since they were highly prized by the ancients, when fattened. The stem is laia to screech, i. e. to send forth sounds , Ar. -j^j , therefore «j jJ much screeching and also goose, prop, screecher (comp. Gans = x^i', Sanskrit hansa, Lat< anser i. e. the sound-uttering). "113 (not used) intr. 1. to be separat- ed, divided, dismembered, same as TiB and D'ns; it is not connected with the Aram. I'Vs. , Syr. ?r= ; the Ar. o».j (to iaiL* is a denom. from (>jj (hail). Hence Ipa with denom. 1'na, and nTia. — 2. to 'be i-T ' •.'iv : scattered about,to be sprinkled, theietoTe to be sown, like TiS ; deriv. the proper name 1'ia. — 3. According to Kimchi: to have hail-like spots, and so a denom. from Tna; more correctly it is metaphor, to be many-coloured, variegated, spotted, sprinkled, spoken of the skins of ani^ mals, as the Lat. spargo (Virg. Eel. 2,41 ; Aen. 7, 191) and Greek ndcam, diandaaca being so used; in which sense the stem appears in Ar. transposed J-jj. Deriv.l'^lS., -113 236 ti^nn 113 771. prop, ice- corn (comp. inTiB seed-corn), then hail Ex. 9, 18 22 ; 'a d'l j Is. 28, 2 the flowing down of hail i. e. hail-storm; '3 'jSN 30, 30 hailstone; as a destroyer of the crops '3 is used figu- rat. for invading punishment Is. 28,17; 30, 30. At. ^' j, Syr. ij^s, the same. Hence the denom. I'nS to hail, with the addition nTiS _ i-T ' •.•!•.■ : in the accusat. Is. 32, 19: and he will only hail the forest, i. e. (according to Kimcht) not the crops nor the city. Tia 1. (seed-place) n. p. of a place in the desert of IlilS Gen. 16, 14, which stands in verse 7 for 11115 itself; Targ. N'lart. — 2. (spottedness) n. p. m. 1 Che. 7,"2b (see iha). 112 (j)l.'a''Vl^) adj. m. party-coloured, spotted, sprinkled (see 'I'lS 3), spoken of the skins of goats Gen. 31, 10, of horses Zech. 6, 3; cognate in sense with Nlbti, but different from 1J55. In Arabic the use is more extensive e. g. of party-coloured garments &c.; so too the Syr. 1 ?!-=>• The name ndgSog, pardus, which is also in Syr., also originated in a like significa- tion of ni3 3. fTT"l3 (a verbal noun after the form nba'i) f, hail, (according to Kimcht) an apposition to T'la Is. 32, 19. ("113 L (imp.pl. I'na) tr. 1. (not used) to cut, to cut in pieces, sacrificial animals, conseq. = the fundamental signification of N"!^ (which see), Ar. ^^j and ^syi (to cut). Deriv. rr^'na. — 2. Metaphor. to separate, choose, select, with accus. of the object 1 Sam. 17, 8; comp. 'la (Tia). — 3. (not used) to be clear, serene, pure, of the ether, comp. "la; coming from the fundamental meaning "divide". Deriv. •iia. I* : mi3 n. (fut. M'pa';) prop. tr. same as Npa, N'la (which see) to nourish; but used intrans. to nourish oneself, to eat 2 Sam. 13, 6 10, sometimes with the ad- dition of dnb 12, 17. The fundamental meaning does not come from to cut, but to fill. Pih. An alleged ot/'. of riia, seerriia, Hif. iTnart (inf. constr. rn';iart, fut. TfXii) to give to eat, with accus. of the person and thing 2 Sam. 3, 35; 13, 5; comp. Aram. "'laN also in the sense to dung. Deriv. ripa, ni'na, niia. "nlia (blessed, scil. of El, Benedict) n. p. m. Jbk. 32, 12; Neh. 3, 20; 11, 5. Dil3 (plur. d'^ai'ia; assonant with d''aib.5)?re. only inEz. 27, 24, (according to Kimchi) a costly cloth of the Tyrians, woven out of threads of various colours, which was an article of commerce among them, = noXvfiita of the Greeks, conse- quently a kind of damask. Kimchi com- pares the Ar. ^y>^ (a cloth or stuff made of colours of different threads), *j*J (woven from two-coloured threads). The LXX (s'y.XsxTof) and the Vulg. (pretiosae) read D'''11'na. Since d'la means to twist together firmly (into a cord) out of many threads, to make fast, such a spe- cific cloth may be understood by di'ia, which was applied for the purpose of covers, curtains &c. (see Q''T5S). ' tuiia 1. (dialect, for ni'ia; pZ-d'^'diia) m. a lance (from ttj'na I.) Nah. 2, 4. — 2. (pZ. d''-, with sw/.T'^i'ia ; from iBna n.) m. a tree of Lebanon Is. 14, 8 ; 37, 24 ; 60, 13, whose wood was used for various purposes, for floors and doors 1 Kjngs 5, 22 24; 6, 15 34, for ships Ez. 27, 5; put together with 'nrjin, lll^NFi, nN as a noble, precious wood Is. 41, 19; 2 Chr. 2, 7. It is therefore employed as a figure of the great 2Kliigs19,23; Is. 37, 24. In 2 Sam. 6, 5 the reading d'l'nifflai Ti>-bia has been substituted for ditt5iia ■'Sy-bsa after 1 Chk. 13, 8, r : I"-: t : ' ' as the LXX also read in their second text (iv iaxvi xai iv (^Saig). The LXX understand by it in many places the cypress, or a tree like it, to which the Lat. bratum (Plin. h. n. 13, 17), Greek ^ga&v &c. point; less often cedar, oak (Vulg.), pine &c.; the old interpreters understand a sort of cedar; in Phenic. it denoted pine , therefore QllSa "'N i. e. n^i^ia iSji7/(riiow«, pine-island, the name of one of the Balearic isles on an in- ry\^2 237 mn ITT scription; whence we may infer that se- veral trees were designated by the term. See fflia n., and ni'ia. ni'na (from nia II.) f. same as n) and as in the Targ. oth, Ath was sometimes looked upon as a feminine termination, a plural ^Tl2i was employed there, with- out assuming the th not to be radical. For ni^a appears in the Targ. and Phe- nician the form rTia (pi. 'j-'n'ns , c. "'nN'na), according to the usual change of 6 into k; from which form come the Greek §Qtt&v, Lat. bratum. nnin^l n-p- of a city mentioned with nMn,^tJ"i^'aD, piBHlEz.47,16. One sees IT-:' -r: •' ' ••• p - ' from the context that the Syrian HMri which is too far to the north cannot be meant here, which the LXX read before ins (Numb. 34, 8). It is better to un- derstand the rMn Josh. 19, 35, )'\13r\ 1 Chr. 6, 61, which is also named rMti <1 Che. 18, 3; Meg. 6 ») and was iden- tified with Tiberias (see nan). "We may therefore identify tini'ns (= nnilNa) ■'it 1" \ IT 1"-' perhaps with Berytus {BijQvrog in Steph. Byz. s. v., BsQoij in Nonnus, in Pheni- cian INS, 'na, n'la), that very oldPhe- nician city on the coast. See T'la. T13 (not used) tr. to cut into, to pierce, transfix, cognate with T'lS IT., yns n. (which see); comp. Targumic T^a the same; whence NTia incision (of ' ! , . IT : • ^ the skin) &c. Deriv. (according to some) the proper name niT'ia or ri'jT'ia ; comp. •ttSiia = Ti'na. The noun ^T'na and the proper name ''PT'ia are derived from bta (which see). rilT"13 {olive-welt) n. p. f. 1 Chk. 7, 31 K'tib, for which the K'ri has n^ns. riir and the other form HIT (see tT^n^'fa) •r _ ^ _i ^ IT : I : • -' are clear in their meaning, and that *1Na may be still farther abridged into "na (see nniia, I'na) and this possibly into ia (see Va frombja), can hardly be doubted by those who know the laws of the Hebrew language. See tia. rr^TIS K'ri see niTla. •I- : • I : • ?T13 (out of TsTa from bra) m. iron, as a metal Numb. 35, 16, which is fetched. out of the earth Job 28, 2, so called from its hardness and firmness; 'a as"! Josh. 17, 16 chariots covered with iron plates; 'a t«b»3 2 Sam. 23, 7 to he fenced with iron (comp. 2 Kings 9, 24) i. e. with iron armour; 'a U5> Job 19, ' - I" ' 24 an iron pencil, with which letters are engraved; "liBSJM 'a Jbr. 15, 12 iron from the north, which was firmer ; nillSj* 'a Ez. ' ' I T - 27,19 wrought iVon = steel. Metaphoric. a) hard, pressing, spoken of uai^, Vj* Deut. 28, 48; stiff-neckedness Is. 48, 4; b) made of iron: asse, sword, fetter &c. Deut. 27, 5; Ps. 105, 18. ''sT'lS (frombt'ia, man of iron, strong) n. p. vi. 2 Sam. 17, 27; Ezr. 2, 61. rrill (inf. constr. tt'ia; imp. Ii'ia; fut. n'la^) intr. 1. to run away, to go away (in haste), to flee, either absol. Gten. 31, 22, Ex. 14, 5, or with ^'a of the place from whence 2 Sam. 19, 10, or from before Job 20, 24; with nt{M from the neigh- bourhood of 1 Kings' il, 23; with "'asn Ps.139,7, 2 Chr. 10,2 or ■'5B>M of'tke person before whom Jon. 1, 10, or with 1|iM out of the power of one Job 27, 22, and with the accus. of the place whither Jon. 1, 3, or also with bij Numb. 24, 11, or b Neh. 13, 10; with "'pHN in the sense to flee after, to pursue, 1 Sam. 22, 20. In the imp. 'rjb is usually added as a dativus commodi Gen. 27, 43 , Am. 7, 12, to ex- press a sort of reflexive like "s'enfuir". 'a usually stands as a more exact ex- pression of the idea of D15 Judges 9,21, tabai 1 Sam. 19,18, nSj'Jer. 39,4, and principally of ^brt 2 Sam. 13, 37. CiJiR nhab Jon. 4, 2 ]>), has U'T's. for its organic root, which is also found in nVN, r T ' I r T rtlS (many mss. have fl'''ia; plur. D'^rt'^'na ; formed from the intensive form r!'''jia)"arf/'. OT. 1. (LXX and Syr.) fleet, hastening forward, of the serpent Is. 27, 1, a symbol of Egypt; but others take it (see Kimchi) = ']inV)55 ringed, a designa- tion of the crocodile, as the Vulg., Aq. and Symm. appear to have understood it, which is more suitable to Egypt. Metaphor. Job 26, 13 n'na fflni is the northern (fleet or twisted) dragon, a star near the north pole, to whose influence storms were ascribed. — 2. fiirii'ia Is. 43, 14 is difficult. According to the Targ. and ancient interpreters (see Kimchi) it is parallel to riipSNa: in ships (see ni'n as a noun). Ewald reads t3pb3 ti''n'''n:^a after Zeph. 1, 14. More correctly: and I strike of all bolts (comp. 45, 2; Lament. 2, 9), thus n'''ia is = tl'^'ia. — 3. {fleeing') n. p. m. 1 Che. 3, 22. ■ ■'an']? 2 Sam. 23, 31 from d'ri'na, see oVria. ■'"12 (= ■''nfja) n. p. m. 1 Che. 7, 36. '''I? I. m. for the fern, n'l'ia which see. I'na n. m. only Job 37, 11 according to the, Targ. purity (of the ether) from iTjja = la (which see), then the ether itself; but according to Kimchi, the noun is ■''1 (which see) = I'i'i. i<'''l3 (from Npa, hence lengthened out of Np^; pi. C3"'N'''ia, constr. '^!$-)adJ. m., Sliji'ia (pi. niNi'ia) f. fat, thick, GrEN. 41, &; 1 Kings 5, 3; Judges 3, 17; also with the addition Itoa Gen. ' IT T 41, 18; full, of ears 41, 7; nourishing Hab. 1, 16 (of food), yet it is better to take MN'na here as a noun, since bSNM is masculine elsewhere; vigorous, of the body Ps. 73, 4. rt^'na Ez. 34, 20 stands forMN'^'na, without having a masc. "'la. IT • : ' ° I" : nN''"l3 A created, become. Numb. 16, 30. — 2. hs'ia Hab. 1, 16 is the adj. fern, which has become a noun. See N'^'ia. rT''l2 (after the form ni'is) /. /bod, 2 Sam'. 13, 5 7 10, same as ni'na and • T riTna. I T n*i13 see N'l'ia. JT ■ : l"T rT'ia see tTna. - P T - C" T ty^'^'^ (plur. cri'^'ia, constr. "'rt") m. 1. Jar, prop, the bar of wood that passes across to close doors, mentioned along with nb'n and nain as a fastening Deut. 3, 5; i Sam. 23, 7; Jbe. 49, 31; some- times for the binding and fastening to- gether of boards Ex. 26, 26. To destroy the bars Am. 1, 5, Nah. 3,13, Lament. 2, 9, means figur. to destroy the strong parts of a city; the contrary being to strengthen the bars Ps. 147, 13. The bars of the earth Jon. 2, 7 i. e. which barricade an entrance into the interior. — 2. Accord- ing to the Targ., Sa'ad., Kimchi same as n'^'ia fugitive Is. 15, 5. n^'^n? (equivalent to W'''n-']a = -ia W"! unfortunate) n. p. m. Gen. 46, 17; 1 'fe-HE. 7, 23 ; 8, 13 ; 23, 10. Patronym. 711a Num. 26, 44, as from ny>'-ia. See s>'ia. -IV n'^'l'S (from Tia) f. same as I'a a ma- terial for cleansing, mentioned with iri3 (vitQ-ov), the one denoting a mineral, the present word a vegetable kali Is. 2, 22 ; salt of lye, got from soap plants (Ar. ^j^LLit or j^-b), used for fulling and cleansing garments; hence d'^DaSM 'a Mal. 3, 2. '■'-" n'''l3 (withsM/.''n'''ia) f. prop.cutfeig in pieces (of the sacrificial animal), hence metaphor, covenant, league. Gen. 21, 27, from the custom of going between the T2 239 T2 •parts of the cut animals; and therefore to make a covenant is 'a n'n3 26,28; 31, .44; Ex. 34, 10; elsewhere also 'a S'^ph, •'a ips, '^p^, Dito; 'aa Nia, p^nrt, iaV Ez. 16, 60; Dbut. 29, 11; Gen! 17, 2. To break a covenant is called h^T}, 'nSlTT, nSffl Deut. 4, 23, Mat.. 2, 10, Sn?. 'I>s. 89,' 40, 'na^ Hos. 6, 7, npi25 Mal" ■2,8, 'a ats lKniGsl9,l0; 'aa'^isiij Ps. 44, 18 &e. In the widest sense 'a de- notes a contract between nations Josh. 9,6, friends 18am. 18,3, married persons Mal.2, 14; but especially does it denote the covenant of God with the fathers, which is named niaN 'a Deut. 4, 31, or QiS'ifiNI 'a Lev. 26, 45, 'or the covenant of God with Israel generally Josh. 7, 11 ; Ps. 132, 12; in which sense the things promised in the covenant, the things that are the media of what is promised, the objects that constitute the conditions of the covenant, and the signs themselves ure called ni'ia, e.g. 'art yiN covenant- land Ex. 30, 5 i. e. Palestine (comp. Hebr. 11, 9 yij rijg iaayysUag); "Jjsb?? /art Mal. 3, 1 messenger of the covenant i'. e. Messiah. As designations of the law 'art hinib'DEUT. 9, 9, 'art 'ji'^N Josh. "3, 6, 'art ^sjD Ex. 24, 7, 2X^108 23, 21, 'art" ■'pa'V (the ten command- ments) Ex. 34, 28 'frequently occur. As •a sign of the covenant 'a is circumcision •Gen. 17, 10; and so in Dan. 11, 30 32 as peculiar to the later diction: the. religion "of the fathers, the Hebrew theocracy; Dan. 9, 27 : and he will make the covenant, dif- 'ficult to many for a week i. e. the religion of the fathers wiU be very difficult to many because of suffering; ri'i'ia T'as 11,22 prince of the covenant {OnizsTJi..) i. e. the head of the theocracy. Some- times n'l'na is people of the covenant Dan. 11, 28, and so perhaps may also n'^'ia DS> Is. 42, 6 be taken. '' ' • IT ' ?[13 I. (/w*. 'ijpa';) tr. 1. tolow, lend (the knee), hence = W kneel, with the addition of d''3"ia-b5> 2 Che. 6, 13 and ''isb (fiefore) the person before whom one kneels Ps. 95, 6, with S'lSi. In this fundamental signification (therefore not denom. from'^j'na) appears the Targumic IP?) Syr. ft^, Maltese lyrek, berrek (in a metaphor, sense), Ar. (i)o (of the camel) &c. Deriv. 'Tj'ia. — 2. to bow the knee (before God) = to do homage to, to worship, invoke, then to pray, praise, utter blessing, as the knee was bOwed along with it, a metaphor, use which is found in the dialects also. Only the pass. part. '7^'\^'2. praised, blessed Gen. 9, 26; 14, 19, constr. ':|i'ia 24, 31; pi. Ci''3>)'na ISam. 23, 21, cons'tr. ''Siia Is. 65, 23; fern. sing. rtSlia Euth 3, 10; ljX^svXoyi]fisvog, svXoyrjTog. Elsewhere onlyPih., to which belongs the inf. '^j'i'na Josh. 24, 10 out of '^J'i'^a, and also 2 Sam. 8, 10; 1 Che. 18, 10. 'it is used, in the most general signification to bless, of God and men Gen. 9, 26; 14, 19, of the fruit of the body and of food Dbut. 28, 4 5, of the prosperity of the married state Pbov. 5, 18 &c. Derivat. rtS'na, the proper names '^l'^^, 5S?11) rt^S'^a, irt-'Sia, 'i3 or bj^ t|'na 2 Kings 1, 13; 2 Chr. 6, 13. 's i5'n3"Vi? iV;" to he bom on the knees of a person i. e. to be born to a person, from the custom of placing the new- bom child on the knees of the father or grandfather for solemn recognition (comp. II. 9,455; Odyss. 19,401) Gen. 50, 23; D"'3ia laip Job 3, 12 the knees (of the mother) took up first. Metaphor. lap, to which the child was accustom^ ed and on which it was caressed, there- fore "z-'bv 5>lB5>lfl Is. 66, 12, or where • • - i-t; it ' ' one lays himself as a sign of tenderness, e. g. 'a-b? Sid;, ItS^ Judges 16, 19, 2 Kings 4, 20, consequently like the German "Busen", bosom, with a similar figure. The tottering of the knees,, ex- pressed by 'a p-'s Nah. 2, 11, nis'iip 'a Job 4, 4, nibfflS 'a Is. 35, 3, is a figure of distress, and in lD"'a ilSdbn 'a the knees melt to water "Ez. 7,17 it even stands for the aab of Josh. 7, 5, denoting despoa- dency! Q?3'na Q'JM 'Ez. 4:7,4: water reach- ing to the knees (where Q'j^i stands for ''M, comp. 1 Kings 16, 24). "ni? (part. Tj'ia; p. pass, '^'''na) Aram. same as Hebrew 'rj'na I. Dan. 3, 28 ; 6, 11. — Pah. 'ij'ia (1 pers. Tt'D^'z; part. Tl'naa) same as Hebr. Pihel Dan. 2, 19 20 J 4, 31;Syr. ^H»'. 'n*'!? (plur. with suf. '^Si'i^'na) Aram. f. equivalent to Hebr, Tj'ia Dan. 6, 11 ; comp. Syr. -t°r*- Elsewhere too NaiS"!}* (which see), from a stem ai?"!. bsS'ia (an old form for btOia on the separating boundary between the Arabic, Aramaean and Hebrew; El is- blessing) n. p. m. Job 32, 2 6 ; comp. !Ti3ia. IT : viv n3^3 (with Aa interrog. tTSiart, constr. ns'ia, with suff. Tinana; pi. nto'ia, e. n'iaiSa, with suff. Db'-'rita'na) f. blessing, benediction, salvation (opp. tlbb]?), 1. the invocation of blessing e. g. of a dying person Gen. 27, 12, of the unhappy Job 29, 13, of the pious Prov. 11, 11, or for the piaus Deut. 11, 26; aita-ns'ia 24, 25 benedic- tion of good. — 2. the consequence of bless' ing i. e. prosperity, the favour of God, ns^D 241 ^J^3 with ■'^ Gen. 39, 5, Deut. 33, 23 or alone Is. 19, 24, sometimes with the fol- lowing genitive of him who is blessed i. e. prospered Gen. 28, 4; 49, 26. God's blessing is with some one is expressed: 'a ■''' nS'ia Gen. 39, 5, or also with bs Is. 44, 3, or -bN Ps. 129,8. In the plur.': gifts of fortune, favours of God, blessings Gen. 49, 25 ; Ps. 84, 7 God^s gifts Is. 65, 8 ; "z ''?31B5 blessing-bnnging showers i. e. fructifying Ez. 34, 26; wholesomeness, peace, hence 2 Kings 18, 31 deal peace- fully with me. — 3. Metaph. concr. happy, highly blessed, particularly in the phrases M3'ian;rt Gen. 12, 2, Zech.8, 13, niiBrt niV-jV -Ps. 21, 7. — 4. (El is blessing) n. p. m. 1 Chb. 12, 3. — 5. (originally = iiS'ia, but interpreted blessing by the Ghronist) proper name of a valley in the neighbourhood of ^jjri 2 Chr. 20, 26. n!312 (constr. nS", pi. niS'ia; from "^"la II.) /: a pond, for watering gardens EccLES. 2, 6, perhaps identical here with Tjbwri '3 Neh. 2, 14, the laying out of which was referred to Solomon according to Josephus (Bell. Jud. 5, 4, 2). So of the pool at Hebron 2 Sam. 4, 12, at Gibeon 2, 13, which is named tiia"! Q^a in Jee. 41, 12. From ■|in"'a (which see), a spring on the west side of mount Zion, were formed two pools: a) iia'nafi n5rb5*!n the upper pool Is. 7, 3 ; 36, 2, identical with the upper Gihon-outflow 2 Che. 32, 30 and perhaps also with T'Srin T^S Neh. 2, 13, now called by the inhabitants Birhet el-Mamilla; b) MSiaii flSmnnin the lower pool Is. 22, 9 at the south-west point of Zion, in the valley, called in the New Testament the lower Gihon, now Birket el-Sultan (Robinson Bibl. Research. I. p. 483 &c.). Hezekiah stopped the water of the upper pool 2 Kings 20, 20, 2 Chr. 32, 20; and it was called afterwards insuji 'a Is. 22, 11 •IP IT T : : ' With reference to the reservoir between the two walls. li'iMTI) 'a pool of the city of Samaria 1 Kings 22,38 ; nblSln %pool ^f n'^^ Neh. 3, 15 at the south-east slope of Zion at the mouth of the Tyropoeon (Robinson I, pp. 493-498. 500 seq.), and therefore quite distinct from that of the lirf.^. The pools in 'jiaian Song of Sol. 7, 5 were distinguished by the clean- ness and clearness of the water. — The word has been derived from Tj'ia II. to pour out; and the Ar. &Slj, which is put for it, belongs to the same; yet it has also been taken for incurvity, breach (from -^pa I.). n^SlS (Jah is blesser; ':|'nais abridged from "Ip'na^, LXX BaQa-^lag; comp. Is. 8,2) n'.p.'m. 1 Che. 3,20; 9,16; Neh. 3, 4, and in Zeoh. 1, 1 alternating with inii'na 1, 7. it: viv ^tT'3"l!3 (the same) n. p. m. Zech. 1, 7. IT : V I-.- ^ ^ *- ' nb"l3 /• which the Samar. Pent, reads IT ! for tibia Gen. 2, 12 and the Samar. version puts for MQlUr It means beryl, adopted from the Aramaean vulgar dia- lect, in which snibiia also appeared. D'13 (not used) tr. 1. to make firm, to twist together firmly (a rope), particu- larly out of different coloured threads, cognate in sense with bns, ban, Db.=i ° I- T ' r T ' l-T &c.; then to weave together out of dif- ferent threads and yam; comp. Ar. ^o to twist together (a rope), especially so n. and rV. (•»jf to make fast, *J>.J a rope, |*)4^ (woven out of many threads) a garment, also of the twisting together of threads of different colours, hence to be many-coloured. Derivat. Di'ia. — 2. (not used) intr. to struggle against, to resist something, prop, to be hard, firm, whence the Aram. d!ia; comp. Ar. ^yi to strive against, to have a disinclina- tion, Awj aversion, conseq. = sper-nere. D13 (see Q'na) Aram. adv. prop. /JraiZy^ certainly, sameasbax, Syr. >ei-=, there- fore partly adversative: however, yet, partly assuring: certainly, yea Dan. 2» 28; 4, 12 20; 5, 17; Ezr. 5, 13. The derivation from the Sanskrit param, paramam, is baseless. j'lS (not used) belonging to ?5'ia, which see. W"t3 n. p. of a place at ffl^p,, with; ''■■'" 16 nn 242 *nD ■whicli it is mentioned for easier re- cognition Numb. 32,8; Deut. 1, 19 22. One may compare the Ar. &xJ«./o (green or blooming meadow), and look for it on the southern border of Palestine in Ein Hash (south east of Kurnub, north of '^m el-Weibeh)Bobms.Pal.ni,i3. See laip . 5>- as elsewhere 5*- is an addition at the end, as for examp. in ^'I'lBia, &c. ; consequently the stem might be J?*l3 (not used) tr. to present with a gift, to distinguish with gifts, comp. Ar. CvJ V. (to give); hence ^'1% >i5''il3, per- haps nyiia. JJnil {gift viz. of 'El) n. p. m. Gen. 14, 2. Perhaps also the proper name nsi'is belongs here, -which however the Scripture alters in sense; or we may take W'nsi as = S^n. IT t: -IV n^'13 (from5>pSi) f. gift, IChr. 7,23: for she was a gift to his house, after he had lost his children. The explanation by TO'i is less suitable. p"l3 (not used) intr. 1. to shine, glitter, lighten, then also perhaps to flash with lightning, like the Ar. j^'lj, Syr. ^^l^; comp. Sanskr. Vrdg with a similar mean- ing. Deriv. p'na with the denom. "p^i^, "B^' ")?-1?,> lil5, and the 5. p. p^J, ppa. — 2. to burn, cognate in sense with ■nn , verbs of giving or containing light being frequently transferred to burning; derivatives, perhaps Ip^la and the proper name ppa. — The organic root is PI'S, which is also found in pTia, pV"!, Aram, i^-^, n^-T &c. '" ^ '' ^ r :' r T pna (corasir. ppl; pZ. £i'']5'ia, with sm/. 1"')?'ia) OT. 1. lightning 2' Sam. 22, 15, where the LXX read the denom. p'la. To send lightning, with nV^J Job 38, 35 ; to hurl lightning, with a"! Ps. 18, 15. 1!3|b 'a iniuy Jbr. 10, 13 to make the lightning for rain, as messengers going be- fore; ystil 'a Nah. 2,5 the lightning runs (zig-zag); in Ez. 1, 14 pTa (which see) is written instead ; comp. the Coptic k^H-s. lightning. — 2. splendour, fulgor, spoken of a'nn Deut. 32, 41, rT'in Hab. 3, 11, yp Zeoh. 9, 14, d-'fs DanI 10, 6 ; '| '\^-qh Ez. 21, 33 because of the lightning i. e. that it may lighten; po6t. p'na the glit- tering missile Job. 20, 25, comp. Arab. jij U (sword). — 3. {shining or lightning) n. p. m. Judges 4, 6 ; comp. the Pheni- cian n. p. m. Barca, Barcas i. e. p'la, and the fem. NjJ'ia (Virg. Aen. 4, 632). p"l2 see ppla-^ia and '])?^'na. Dip'lS {from"i~)'s party-coloured, see Dp.'i) n.' p. m. EzE. 2, 53. IpnUl {pi- C5") ?ra. a fe'rec? of thorn or neiiZe, from burning (see p'nS 2) Judges 8, 7, as Aq. and Symm. understand it, comp. VnM from 'ntn to bum. The LXX. retain the word. Hesychius {^aQanivtf) explains it under axav&a. ripIS and npia f. emerald, as the I-.- 1-,* T 'r : IT ' LXX, Vulg. and Josephus understood it Ex. 28, 17, Ez. 28, 13, so called from its glittering (see p13); the Sanskrit marahata, Greek a-fiaQaySog are iden- tical. rP'12 see npia. Tn3 {1 person ini'nai, part. f. li'ia, part. pass. Il'ia, inf. 'la after the form '^\a, Tn, with suff. Diab; on the con- trary inf. 1- (see 53'na);comp. Ar. /*~^y> (thick), enlarged from a similar root. niS (not used) same as ffl^ia 11. Deriv. nils. I : ''rillZl (from ni^a cypress: the deity worshipped iti the cypress) n.p. of a city in Aram Zoba, mentioned with nua (=naa , ,, IV IV Syr. >-.»'^4) or ntiatp , situated on the road to the Euphrates 2 Sam. 8, 8, which is not, however, to be identified with the seaport Berytus. Bqa&i in Sanchonia- thon (p. 18) was the name of a deity of Lebanon, who was called in Phenician BrjQOvd- (p. 24) i. e. n'"ia, being the female principle of Jao-Adonis, among the Syrians of El-Adan (hence the pro- per name TiN-bS 113 Kyn-El-Adan, the name of a Babylonian king); and the Syrian town may have been so called from the worship of the god. In 1 Ohb. 18, 8 'J13 (which see) stands for it, which was another name of the town, denoting the male principle, El-Adan. "liiB3 (cool-hrook) n. p. of a brook (bni) 'not far from Ziklag 1 Sam. 30, 9 10 21; it is considered to be the small stream which rises at Bebir, and flows south of Gaza, under the modern name of el-Sheria, into the Mediterranean sea. From the constant use of the article with it we may infer that an appellative meaning was thought of. See 'liaa II. rriiiBB see nniua. IT : IT • 7ti?3 (perhaps transposed from bailj to bubble up) intr. to rise, to seethe, to boil, not spoken of water, but of what is cooked in it, consequently = to he dressed or to he done Ez. 24, 5 ; figurat. to ripen, spoken of ears Jo. 4, 13, i. e. to be cooked by the sun. Comp. Aram. pblB , Greek nima, Lat. coqui &o. in a 16* b^2 244 ]'^:i like metaphorical sense. Derivat. bllSa adject. Pih. bilSa to cook, hj water (trans.), with the accusat. of the object, e. g. flesh Ex.29,31, in.!! 23, 19, TI5 2 Kings 4, 38, and with 3 of the vessel Num. 11, 8; 2 Chr. 35, l3; also to dress or pre- pare by fire, to roast, broil, 2 Sam. 13, 8 ; nibis^'ari r^a house of the cooks Ez. 26, 24. 'Deriv. nblBS??. Fuh. blS'Si 'ntoa Ex. 28, 42, awfia being IT :-•• r : ^^2 246 nn similarly used. — 4. Figurat. like INl^: relative, supposed to be a part of the family-body, as may be seen from Gen. 2, 23. So JuDaBS 9, 2 ; 2 Sam. 5, 1 ; 19, 13; Is. 58, 7. "ItBlIl {def. Nitea) Aram. m. the same, Dan!' 2, 11; i"9- 7, 5. »ntt53 (also "itoa) /. 1. announcement, intelligence, message, 2 Sam. 18, 22 : and the tidings are not profitable to thee (nSM prop, to obtain, find, viz. a reward), as the LXX here render (supplying dxps'Xsia) ; % Ili'^N 18,20 messenger. Though usually good tidings are meant, we see from MaiU % 18,27, that this meaning is not contained in the word. — 2. a reward for tidings, 2 Sam. 4, 10: which was (rT'ii is to be supplied) that I might give him a reward for his tidings. See 'itoa I. Ji'Ji'3 assumed by some to UiitSia , see iijia. I naia (with suf. iniaa, Bni^l &c. ; from fflia I.) f. shame, as an affection of the mind Ps. 40, 16, Zeph. 3, 5, usually with tl"'iB, as it shews itself by red- ness of the face Jek. 7, 19; Dan. 9, 7 8; disgrace, ignominy, in their mani- festations, conseq. = shameful Hab. 2, 10, joined to IBSb, nt:S>, iljSSi (see iiUJia) Ps.44, 16 ; 109, 2 9" to express the idea of covering with shame; then slavery Zeph. 3, 19; shame-bringing Is. 30, 3. Figurat. a) the pudenda, in full form nia:a~lT''l5> Mic. 1, 11 or miy nm 1 Sam! 20, SO- b) an expression of contempt, for 55>a Jer.3,24; 11,13;Hos.9,10, and so m the proper names nm-iIJiN, nUJaiBB &c. nap 3 f. only a collateral form of nilSa in the proper name rilja'n'; (which see). jnS Aram, see Mia. IT I nS I. (out of n5a=n5a from the masc. ']a='lja; with suff. ina'from TiSa; pi. nisa, constr. niia, like the pi. masc. diJa, constr. "isa) f. daughter, opposite to la Ex. 21, 31, without distinction of age, as -dvyatriQ, therefore also maiden, virgin, woman. Gen. 30, 13; Judges 12, 9 ; Is. 32, 9, and so the LXX sometimes translate it by yvvri. Elsewhere : foster- daughter EsTH. 2, 7 ; maiden Judges 12, 9 ; female pupil, worshipper, disciple Mal. 2, 11. By transference not merely is the idea of age disregarded, but generally that of descent alone is prominent, and so it is not applied to a proper daughter, e. g. DlNrt niia Gen. 6, 2 the wom^n ° ITT IT I : ' descended from Adam, opp. to fi'^tl 5jSt "'iS; aii5-na Song op Sot. 7, 2 bom o/'aa'^na , i. e. nobly-born; Qisba niDa Ps. 45,10 14 queens, bom as queens (see'ja), for which once even na alone is used 45, 11. But in DiUJaSi na Dan. 11, 17 (speaking of the daughter of Antiochus , Cleopatra) the actual daughter is meant, and genea- logised in apocalyptic language accord- ing to mother and grandmother. In its proper sense of daughter it is very often employed (see my Concordance s. v.) as well as ^a (which see). Metaph. a) along with nouns to describe some quality, where the fem. stands in, relation to the nouns, of which it supplies the place, e.g.T'l^r! nisa Eoci,es.12,4 the singers, for Q"''1B5£ (which is fem.). — b) with the names of animals in order to express the feminine, e. g. n55>=ifl na Lev. 11, 16 ; ' ° iT-a- - I- ' ' pi. !i35>i nisa Is. 13, 21 (see ns5>l). — ^ iT—.r I : _ ; ^ n-:j~' c) With names of cities or countries, to which also T^S* and yiN belong, na denotes the female inhabitant belonging to them by birth or abode, e. g. niia d'jVi^'i'i^ Song op Sol. 1, 5, comp. Luke 23, 28 ^vyareQeg 'IsQovaakrifi; ')i''2t 'a Is. 3,16; liy 'a Lament. 3, 51; VtlNri 'a Gen. 34, 1. Yet na in this connection is often taken collectively: the inhabi- tants, the citizens, hence the people con- ceived of as a whole, bom in the land or city, the people generally appear- ing in the language of prophecy as a female (Is. 47, 1 seq.), interchanged with "■la, sometimes also with n^a, e. g. ■list-na Ps. 45, 13, Q^bi^i'i: na Is. 37, 22, I^St-na 16,1, tj'iiit-na Lament. 4, 22, D^iisa-na Jee. 46,' 11, ©■'©'in-na Is. 23, 'lb, rTT. e. g. ■'M^-na Jer. 8, 19, seldom the plur. "^is^ niia Ez. 13, 17, used interchangeably with 'I'a? "lia, nD 247 b^)r\:i by which phrase prop. &5> is only strength- ened, as poetically TiXrina Micah 4, 14 (5, 1] belonging to troops i. e. troops = TIIS ■'Sa 2 Chr. 25, 13. But in this sense one may regard na as abridged from rrja, it's. The image is still far- ther carried out by prefixing Sibwa Is. 23,12; 47, 1; Jbk. 46, 11; Lament. 1, 15, also with fiS Jeb. 14, 17, to denote a population or citizens never conq[uered or never to be conquered. This mode of expression is then transferred to the place or country itself, if it be conceived of with its inhabitants, e. g. li^Sj-na Is. 1, 8, Va|-na Ps. 137, 8, i. e. 'zion and Babylon, in relation to which the in- habitants are denoted by the addition of riiTB"' Jer. 46, 19, comp. 48, 18. — d) In connection with nouns of time or with numerals, it signifies age in the €ase of a female, as yz does in the case of a male Gen. 17, 17. — e) In con- nection with cities or with T^S, na de- notes what belongs to a city: environs, farm-stead, village, particularly in the pi. nisa NxMB. 21, 25; Josh. 15, 45; Judges 11, 26 &c. — f ) In parallelism, in the second member it is set over against the name in the case of females, just as it is applied to proper names fem., like ^a to masc. — Besides, the following peculiarities should be observed: a) "na •j^y Ps. 17, 8, Lament. 2, 18, usually taken for daughter of the eye, i. e. what naturally belongs to the eye; but it seems more correct to take na as an abbreviation of nsa (see !ij3|)- S) "i^l Qi'niBN Ez. 27, 6, which has been trans- lated daughter of the sherhin-cedar i. e. made from sherbin; but it is more pro- bable that we should read there D'^'lT^Nria (from 'nTOsn). c) nisa Gen. 49, 2^ has been translated with Saadia and others shoots (see ^a), or collect, branches, and so construed with the sing. !Tl?.3t (comp. nisa in theMishna); but the entire pas- sage, which the LXX already misunder- stood and the Samar. reads "''p"'?^ ''|!^ 1112} ''bs>, is perhaps better translated with Ilgenipnihe, passage), reading niaa : mountain-deer in their lurking-place (nisa !TTS»a same as Ar. iijoi.0 tyUj wild game). — Here belong both bNina 1. and biria, !T;j^na, and the following com- pounds bi proper names: D'^a'lTia n. p. of a place in the vici- nity of liaiun Song of Sol. 7, 5. D'lan perhaps = iia'n. 5>ail5"na {belonging to the sworn co- venant, see sauj) n. p. f. Gen. 26, 34; 1 Kings 1, 15; it is possible, however, that it arose out of SildTia (daughter of prosperity), whence 1 Chr. 3, 5. siiB-na (see i»au3-na) n. p. f. 1 Chr. 3, 5. ^5 n. {pi. d-'Fia) m. (f. only in Is. 5, 20) prop, the hollowed out, recepta- culum (from nna [which see] i. e. na = na from nia to hollow oui), the bath, a mea- sure of liquids, same as iiCN of dry goods Ez. 45, 11 14, 2 CHRr2, 9 &c.; according to Josephus (Ant. 8, 2, 9) = 72 sextarii, 8^/2 gallons; comp. in Mishna na /. measure generally, then an adv. time, ntiN naa at once. ri!Il {plur. ']"'ni) -^ram. m. the same, EzR.'"7, 22. TO. in. an abbreviation of n'^a see na I. rim rV. an abbreviation of naa see na L ' r2 V. = na see bisina. riS the original form of D'lna see n';a. nnS (not used) tr. to cut of, to se- parate, metaphor, to lay waste, same as nna n., comp. Ax. oaj; whence Mna. ,- T ' -r • ' IT T See ^n. l-T nns (from una = nna II.) f. a cutt- IT T ^ IT T '~ '^ ^ . \ ing off, metaphor, desert (comp. fTjlT.y Is. 5, 6, or end = nbsi; yet the former is more correct, if we compare fii^a. nr^a (from nna n.; pi. nlna) f. de- 'T - '" T ' , solation, Is. 7, 19: valleys of desolation i. e. desolate valleys; perhaps, however, cut off, cliff, reef, so that the place may be translated in the clefts of the crags. iina = nna, as D-'nN = a''nN, ia = i,-5. IT - tT T ' r " I IT t pMiriZl 1. {inhabitants or people of Ely "jinn 248 from na which see) n. p. of a city in Simeon 1 Chr. 4, 30, written in an abridged form Vina Josh. 19, 4. An- other town with a" similar name Berv- Xova, Bethulia, Jl^l^bina (from JT^IpNina), not far from Q^n^ on a height, is men- tioned in the apocryphal book of Judith only 4, 6; 6, 11 14; 7, 3. — 2. {man of El, changed out of bNin?3) n. p. m. Gen. 22, 22; 24, 15. '" ' 'T]in3 as an infin. from 'T|ria = pna is read by some for Tjina Gen. 15, 10; see "^nn. pins Josh. 19, 4 see bi|a. ins (Kal unused) tr. to divide into pieces, to divide. Gen. 15, 10; comp. Ar. -Xj, -Kia and Jaj (lt?a, as the Samar. codex has in the derivative) with the same meaning. The organic root is 'nn-a. Hence 'ina and the proper name li'^na. Pih. "ina to cut in pieces. Gen. 15, 10. "in3 Aram. prep, after, forftied from "insa = insa after the place, ^jt. ji^s ; see ins. 1212 (withsu/.i-pna ; pi. d^ina, constr. ip^a) OT. 1. what is cut off, a piece, of an'animal cut up, Gen. 15, 10, where the Samar. has lua ; Jer. 34, 18 19. — 2. a place cut through, a place cleft, hence according to the LXX 'a ^^ Song op Boi..2,n mountains cleft through; comp. however ^iina. lilSna n. p. of a place on the other side of Jordan, from which one came to D^sn.a 2 Sam. 2,29. Aq. Be&wQcov, Vulg. Bethoron: hence they regarded it as a contraction of ')i';in n'^a. But the latter place is unsuitable as lying on this side of Jordan; and it is better to compare it '^^ Tl?'7"'^'^F (afterwards Livias or Jw lias) on the Jordan. nnn 249 J^JI nn3 I. (not used) intr. same as na (nia) to be hollowed out, for the recep- tion of a thing; and as n^3, a recep- taculum, is derived from that; so here na II. (which see) comes from this. nnS n. (not used) tr. same as nna to lay waste, prop, same as ^1J , accord- * o -^ ing to a usual metaphor; comp. Ar. o*^ (to cut off), deriv. rtna. Jl J , called Vaa (equivalent to ^as i. e. ViMjI = 'bM.O, as the name of a letter pro- : :i- ITT'' 7 , bably signifies camel, not hecause it is said to have the rude form of a camel's neck in old writing, e. g. on the Mac- cabean coins ( I , -j), in the Aethiopic (T ) and Phenician ( /, ^) alphabets, but because the word begins with this sound. The r of the Greeks is the Phenician figure in a reverse form; and its name among them, rd-iifia. = rdfiXa (as the Mishna also pronounces), is identical with ours, except that here a, as a sound, is called gi from an unknown influence; and therefore bttS was converted into the un-Hebrew baa. It is pronounced gh, aspirated ghh, and only in Arabic did it become afterwards a sibilant, without ceasing on that account to be connected with the palatals. As a numeral S is three, 'i 3000; in Phenician it may have passed for an abridgment of bi.J (Gil. A). From the close relationship of the palatals i is interchanged with ti, 5, )? and y (partly as belonging to them, see 5>), partly according to dialectic diversities (see n'^'iS.;, ywia, ?-^'2i\ &c.), partly within the language itself. So with n in tiT..;, rtsn; bM, ban; ^>;, inri; bia, bin; m, y^n; aps, sipn &c.; with S in laA, 1&3; ba.!), ba3; ^a.J, 'r T ' >rr ' i-t' r t ' n ' s»a3; iia, 'ins; on, qds; lea, 'nea r T ' i-T ' r T ' i-T ' I- T ' r T ' it &c.; with p in aa.j, aa)?; ya-j, 5>ai?; 17?, 17.)?; >?, ^S)?; 5»n.5, 5>5?)5; tl>;, r|S)5; tT|, Vj?)5 &e.; with S> in in.;, las; baa, bay; daa, aas; ipa, tis&c; r T ' r T ' r T ' r t ' r t ' 'it' 'i t ^ j finally with the Ar. c, as fin.; Ar. ^5*^ (to raise a dispute). On the contrary the LXX have often expressed the He- brew » by Gimel, e. g. W? TaTa, 1?'^ 'P.aymv, ^'W jofioQ, rta^'l 'Psy/ta &c. Besides, the relationship of 5 to the fol- lowing letters takes place, though in rare cases: a) to Yod, which may be a softened palatal sound, e. g. S*!.;, i'li n.; Qaa, dai; comp. Li^ and ilSi; l-T ' I-t' i-T' ^ ITT' lizS'' and TaJS; ffliS'' and oij', Aram. I-T I-T ' I-T U^ ' ttjtdfs; W^ to-day, ^^Juvs.; — b) to Beth, since it is evident that a closer relation must have existed between the two letters, e. g. by.1 Jer. 3, 14 andb5>a, ' ° r T ' r T ' 5Jti and aS"', NS = Ar. L>, as vice versa l-T , |-t' it • ' Ar. i>Li. = Hebr. t33, nns (whence 13?, 7?). Deriv. t^N5,'N^, ?,N3, -jiiss, "INS. Ti:i?,-!. *l,T^5, ri^ (from niN.^); n. p. bNINJl. The stem 'a has been retained espe- cially in Aram. (MN.J, U,^) and Pheni- cian (see 'jiNS and N.J_); in Arab, only ^-jLft (to rise up, to set oneself on high) can be compared; but the organic root is NJi, which still lies perhaps, at the basis of several forms. T]'^^ n. (not used) intr. same as rt5 IT T ^ ' IT (which see; thence "5, M5) and N^a (whence N^a, iX^i) to be hollowed, of bog or low land, where water has collected and remains. Perhaps the idea of being deep or hollow is connected with that of, the bellied or arched. Deriv. IniNJi. ' ITTI" nN3 f- pride, haughtiness Psov. 8, 13. flNS (out of the intensive form; pi, V'Vii) adj. m. high, Ufted up, large Is. 2, 12; Job 40, 11 12, cognate in sense with 01; but also in a bad sense, high- minded, proud, haughty 3 'ER. 48,29, subst. a sinner Ps. 94, 2; Prov. 15, 25; op- posite D'^liS. PNIftSi CEZ is elevation) n. p. m. Num. 13, 15; comp. the Phenician b^SNa, a proper name. "Wa is an abstract form, from iiisa. ITT ^^1^53 (a frequent form of nouns from „ IT-:r rt b ; constr. mN.1 , with sufF. ims a ) 1. ma- jesty, elevation, of God Dbut, 33, 26; Ps. 68, 35 : his highness over Israel, i. e. who, as the lofty one, protects Israel. — 2. In a bad sense, of men, haughtiness, pride, arrogance, ostentation Prov. 14, 3, cognate in sense lab bnii, Tia &e. Ps. 31, 19; Is. 9, 8; '4 ilto to act proudly Ps. 31,24; 'a 'npiS pride compasses about 73, 6. Once for '5 ffi'^N a haughty man 36, 12. Arrogance Is. 13, M. Figurat. of the sea Ps. 46, 4: the high swelling of the waves. Of the scales of Leviathan Job 41, 7 high-arching , as an adverb: with high arches; but according to Aquila, Jerome and others =tna body, back. d'^blSa (pi. after the form D'^jPlttSg) m. pi. (abstract) redemption, deliverance. Is. 63, 4; according to others a pass> part. ■jiNBi (after the form 'Jim, lib)?; constr. ■jiN^, with suff. 'T|':5iNa Ez. 16^56 ='!jr according to Ezekiel's orthography) m. m«: 251 b^^ used in as various ways as ?ns*A and' ni!*5, 1. highness, elevation, majesty, of God Ex. 15, 7, MiCAH 5, 3, Is. 2, 10 (cognate in sense t'S); 'aa bpIS 24, 14 to shout for joy for the majesty. God is therefore termed bs'ito'; 'a Hos. 5, 5, ap?."i 'I Am. 8, 7 (comp. '^s'liB'; US; 1 Sam. 15, 29). Metaphor, of thunder Job 37, 4, of men (ironically) 40, 10 (cognate in sense S^a); or also as a designation of idols Ez. 7, 20, made of ornamented things. — 2. splendour, excellency Is. 60, 15; Nah. 2, 3; of Pa- lestine as the glory of Israel Ps. 47, 5 ; figurat. excellency of the banks e. g. of Jordan Zech. 11, 3, of Egypt i. e. of the Nile Ez. 32, 12. — 3. pride, haughti- ness Peov. 8, 13; 16, 18; Is. 16, 6; Am. 6, 8; arrogance Job 35, 12 ; pride, of the waves 38, 11; cognate in sense nsa, msa. &c. — This noun was in use in Phenician, as was generally the same kind of noun-forms from H'b (comp. ")iDa , He- sych. §av.%6v vXav&fiov, from 51^3; Tibsj Plaut. 1, 1 3 11, fromflbs*), particularly in proper names, e. g. tlbsisa Qunela (s. HV8), V?abNaN3 Gunelma ' (= Gun El Baal) proper name of a city; and in the Poenulus (2, 67) appears also ba '^SN^ (Gune hel) majesty of Baal. DINS (an intensive form) f. same as ')iNa highness Ps.93,1; great, elevated Is. 12,5; splendour, excellency 26,10; pride, haughtiness 28, 1; figurat. swelling, of the sea Ps. 89, 10; mounting up, ascent, of smoke Is. 9, 17. ST^NSi (after the form MSn: i. e. an intensive form from rtNS II.) valley Ez. 7, 16 ; 32, 5. Frequently the K'tib reads instead of it niNia (from m^p), or also niN\!i (see nN"'3)! 'ji'^Sa (from ilSi after the form ^^I^S , li^b», ''\vy'l, only in plural ti"'|!'i''N,4 K'tib) m. 'proud, haughty Ps. 123, 4, where the K'ri reads D"'5i'' ''N? (the proud of the oppressors). b^^ (fut. bsa-') tr. 1. to loose, to set free what was bound or fettered (cognate in sense T^nfl, nns), hence a) to loose from an enemy, from force, from slavery or death, i. e. to liberate, to redeem, with accus. of the object and 1^53 Jer. 31, 11, Ps. 107, 2, or '\)2 of the' person from whom Gen. 48, 16;'Ps. 103, 4; Hos. 13, 14; to deliver, from slavery e. g. of Egypt Ex. 6, 6, of Babylon Is. 43, 1; from dangers Lament. 3, 58 , which are conceived of as enchaining. Hence biSJl is often an epithet of God, as He is a deliverer from dangers Is. 59, 20, Ps. 19, 15, with llJf , I'iV &c.; Israel is prophetically termed DiblNS Is. 35, 9, in full foi-m '<'« ■').1N.5 62, 12. 'b) to set free, a slave, i. e. to redeem him Lev. 25, 48 49; to deliver something de- dicated, vowed, i. e. from the bonds that prevent its use 27, 13, or to repurchase what is sold, i. e. to deliver it from its present possessor, to ransom 25, 25 ; hence (as Symm. Theod. LXX under- stand it) Job 3, 5 : the darkness and the shade will redeem it i. e. recover it as they once had possession (Gen. 1, 2); to redeem the blood of the slain, i. e. to revenge, in full form D^fl '.5, hence fre- quently D'jtrt bjSiii Numb. 35, 19, Deut. 19,6, 2 Sam. 14,11, seldom bsia merely Num. 35, 12; and since only the nearest of kin had the duty of redemption and blood-avenging biSia also means simply: a blood-relative Ruth 4, 1 8, 1 Kings 16, 11, cogn. in sense with INffl, a'i'i)?; comp. Ar. jLj blood-avenger and blood-rela- tive, isbslna EuTH 2, 20 (one) of our kins- men. Coimected with the duties of Goel was {according to custom) also -that of marrying the childless widow of the deceased, which, according to Deut. 25, 5-10, only the Levir had to do; and Josephus (Antiq. 5, 9, 4) has incorrectly explained a Levir at Euth ch. 4. Hence bt!5 (as it were a denom. of bxii) Euth 3', 13 means to perform the marriage duty. — 2. (unused) intr. to be loose, unfettered, i. e. free, unbound, hence figurat. to be profane, rejected, desecrated, abandoned; in which sense its usage is manifold (Nif. bisa?; Pih. biS?.; Puh. bjsj; Hif. b-'NSrtj'fcthp. bwnri; Nif.-Puh. bNM; lilie the noun bsi!). "The Hebrew thinks bi^:\ 252 d:i of what is holy as inaccessible to an unconsecrated one, and for him it is locked up; this twofold signification is also found in bli (Vbn), which belongs here by root; couyp. §s§ijX6a}. Deriv. bi«a, d^blN-^, !lbN5, and the proper name 'bsS';. Nif. bNaV^Mf. bmi) pass, of Kal: l.'to be redeemed e. g. what is sanctified Lev. 27, 33, what is sold 27, 27; to he bought back, of what has been sold Is. 52, 3; rarely reflexive to redeem oneself Lev. 25, 49. — 2. to he polluted, profaned, by blood or sin Zeph. 3, 1; perhaps in the farther developed Aramaean signifi- cation to make oneself unclean, to pollute oneself. Pih. bN3 to defile (God) by offering polluted animal sacrifices Mal. 1, 17. Puh. bsil {part. DNS??, fut. bsa^) 1. to he polluted, spoken of Dnb sacrificial food Mal. 1, 7, ■'''i ^pbffi 1, 12. — 2. Ac- cording to the Aramaean meaning: to be rejected, with p; from Ezr. 2, 62; Neh. 7, 64. Nif. and Puh. bNM (after an Aramaean sense) to be soiled Is. 59, 3 ; Lament. 4, 14. It is prop, a passive form of Nif. Hif. b'lNaN (N for ti in the Aramaean manner; comp. ISN'li* = ISN^ll Micah 7, 15, inT'lN = flt'irt according to some Zeph. 2, 14 from nn 2, 11, diBUJN = dijji^rr Jer. 25, 3) to soil, to make un- clean Is. 63, 3. Hithp. bsarin to defile oneself, to make oneself unclean, by the food of idolaters Dan. 1, 8. The fundamental signification of the stem is to separate from something, to divide of, whence to untie; the Arabic stems tN?-5 ^^ separate), Jjta. (to open, to disjoin) belong thereto; in Hebrew b|?-5, bn, and more remotely also fibs belong to the same group. bxa see ThtaSi ^ I T IT 'i : ^Sa {constr. pi. ibN.^) m. desecration, profanation Neh. 13, 29. rt5N3 (from the masc. bss) /. 1. re- demption, of a sold field, repurchase Xev. 25, 24 ; metaphor, right of redemp- tion, which extends even to possessions which are to be sold for the first time Jek. 32, 8 (the LXX read iibis); price of redemption Lev. 25, 26 ; a field to be redeemed Etjth 4, 6. — 2. relationship, which has the right of redemption, hence 'a ^IJ-'N Ez. 11, 15 a relative, which the LXX read iibiii. — On Maccabean coins (l^S ribNS) also in the sense de- liverance, freedom; Phenieian InbNS (after the form Snsis) the same; therefore as a proper name Gala (Liv. 29, 29). The masculine form biN5 (pronounce gul, comp. liN-l gun) is found in the Pheni- eian proper name Gul-alsa, Gul-ussa &c. 33 (prop. part, of ai.^ I; pi. D''iji) m. husbandman, peasant, 2 Kings 25, 12 K'tib, for which the K'ri reads d'^iS'' in the same sense (from 33"'), according to Jee. 52, 16. '' 3a in pause belonging to i-l, see a|. 33 (from ai.J ; pause as , with suff. "la-l, Tjas; constr. pi. 13.5, with suff. dj5"'5i!, Op"'5^) ™- prop, hill-like, arched, gibbous (connected by root with the Latin gibb- osus), hence 1. the back, of men Ps. 129, 3, of the Cherubim Ez. 10, 12 if the text here be correct. — 2. a hill, as being arched and heightened, therefore hill of the altar i. e. the upper part, the upper surface Ez. 43, 13, for which the LXX read tiata 1:153 , comp. Greek v&- tog; hill of a shield i. e. boss, Ar. i-j*s» (shield). Job 15, 26 with the thick bosses of his bucklers, as one goes equipped to meet the enemy; of the arched lulls of, bulwarks, bulwarks 13, 12. — 3. vault, booth of harlots, fornix, LXX ohtjjia TioQvixov, to noQvBiov Ez. 16, 24, along with npa and HJ2l, where harlotry was _ IT T , " T ' J practised by the rmon;; in the ser- vice of nature-gods 16," 31 39; con- sequently cognate with rtSp in origin and signification. — 4. the rim of a wheel, felloe, 1 Kings 7, 33, also accord- ing to the LXX Ez. 10, 12, or if one thinks of the back, the feUoe is ther6 the hack for the spokes. 3a (with suf. njnS; but also pi. y^^i^ particularly the constr. 153, with suff. d:i 253 DDJl rr'^aa; from aas I.) Aram. m. eq^uivalent to Hebre'w SS in the sense of back, therefore SaS"b? K'ri Dan. 7, 6 upon its iack, the fem. suff. referring to 'nV'n; but according to the K'tib to 1?g3 (panther) which is masc, and therefore the plural means the two sides enclos- ing the back (comp. the Greek ra vara, also sides), and is to be explained like n'^SB ; hence the plural suffix tt'^aa. In the Targ. (and Talmud) '^A-'bS or "'art? appears as a, preposition, upon, super, supra = ■'is'b? in Hebrew, the hilly and arched back being regarded as the most visible part of the body; and there- fore 35 in one respect coincides with .d''5s. The LXX and Vulg. have trans- lated in this sense in the passage above ; which, however, is unnecessary. With relation to the special meaning side, Syr. |ja^ (side), and therefore the pre- pos. at, near, apud, pr ope, the stem 53 is to be taken = 353 , as may be seen from the Syr. ^al^Vi. at. Ax. (_/Ia» {side), and from the stems 333, S]5,3, tl,?.*! &c. Possibly Waa Dan. 7, 6 may be so understood. 3a (for the part. pass. 3''3 from 313 1., - often arising out of "'-; pi. Q"'33) m. 1. prop, split off, cut off, hence a board 1 Kings 6,9, of cedar-tables; comp. ffl'n)?. of similar derivation. — 2. Prop, hollow- ed out, deepened, a hole (from 313 11. = N33), hence a pit, a cistern, a spring, Jer. 14, 3; comp. Aram. 33, Ar. >_>s» and Hebr. IS3.5. Such a cistern was com- monly funnel-shaped (Diod. 19, 94), and the mouth proportionately small (Xen. Anab. 4, 5, 25); it did not always con- tain water, as is seen from the Aram. 33 for 'nia. — 3. a locust, properly what collects in swarms (comp. Sia'^js) Is. 33, 4, a participial-form of 313 III. = t^33 to collect, to flock together; elsewhere 313 stands for it (which see). Da (or 3il) n. p. of a place where David inflicted slaughter on the Phi- listines 2 Sam. 21, 18,19. In the parallel passage 1 Chr. 20, 4 6 it is sometimes given 1T3, sometimes n.l, by the LXX and Syr. sometimes ns sometimes 33; a geographical trace which was early lost. Da (def. N3.l) Aram. m. a pit, cavema, a cistern, where lions were shut up, Dan. chap. 6, Targ. for 'lia ; comp. Ar. Sy^ , Syr. i-sa-^ &c. If the stem be 333 III., 33 is = 313 (313 11.) which see; but Na3 may stand for N313 as the word is spelled in Syriac. t?3il I. (not used) trans, same as 33 IT T ^ 'T (313) n., Si""! &c. to hollow out, deepen, to dig out; Syr. -^a.^, hence V-^,,^ a grave; Ar. LI&. the same, Sv_^&. a ditch. Hence according to some N33. 5^3i! n. (not used) trans, to collect, IT T ^ water in a reservoir, cognate with rt33 (belonging to the proper name ■'a.|); to gather in (revenue); comp. Targ. N3.5 (to collect tribute), Syr. )^, Ar. l^ andLu?. in a wider signification, espe- cially the Hebrew inip^ and 31.1 HE., and besides the Targ. 33, whence 333 (to gather in). Derivat. iS33. ND5 (pi- ^th suff. TINS?) m. a col- lection {oi waiei), same as !il)3M, then concrete a cistern Is. 30, 14, a lake Ez. 47, 11, formed by the water that re- mains after the spreading sea has re- turned. See, however, 33 2 and Na3 I. D3il (not used) intr. to be arched, p T gibbous, then: to be crooked, bent. Deriv. 3.1, tia3, Ha3, the proper names 33 (313), ''|ina3." The stem 33 is cognate with S]?, 3p., 1.1 <£c., and is also found as an organic root in fl-IS' ^n' ^r^?' n-33, 5>-33 &c.; in Arab, the stem is r V r T o ^ oLs>, whence ^o^ (hump). DDa I. (not used) Aram. intr. same as Hebrew 333, which see. Derivative Aram. 3.1. DDS n. (not used) Aram, formed from 333 and connected with the Hebrew 33.1. See Aram. 3.1. DD^ HI. (not used) Aram. tr. same as riDJ 254 n3J Hebrew aiJi II. (which see), to deepen, to hollow out. inaa (only pi. niaJi) /. l. the arch of the eye, the black Lev. 14, 9; Ar. xm^ (the upper felloe, as it were, of the eye). — 2. same as ^Sj, 4. felloe Ez. 1, 18. — The fern, form had also the signification hill (same as 5'5-i'.)i hence the Aram. Nna.5 ya§^ad-d John 19, 13; comp. the proper name liria.^ (from 5135), and i^ (which see). See a.|. fl33 a ground-form to liriai, which see. vllSa the construct state of Shs , which J- : -IT see. n3il (3 ». fern. NrtSJl, in the Ara- maean orthography of Ez. 31, 5, comp. 27,31; inf. iTn^; fut. TJ^iy, yet the 3'^ fem. pi. once'ru-'Jiasri Ez. 16, 50, where the guttural h was treated as in Th for the sake of assonance) intr. 1. io n«e to a height, from the ground (see Jlinasi), to shoot up high, of trees Ez. 19, li; 31, 5 10, i. e. to he high, of an upright state, with the addition of iiJiipa 31,14 or tiaip 31, 5; to overtop, of men and trees, with '))3 over something 1 Sam. 10, 23; Ez. 31, 6; cognate in sense with fil'n, NfeS- ^^ derivatives, it is applied to hills, towers, mountains, gates, walls, horns &c. — 2. to be high (in a hori- zontal sense) over something, with 'JM Job 35, 5, or ht Ps. 103, 11, of clouds' the heaven &c. — 3. Figurat. to he elevated, renowed. Is. 52, 13; 55, 9; to be placed high Job 36, 7 ; or in a bad sense, to he high-minded, proud, haughty, arrogant Is. 3, 16; Jbe. 13, 15; Ez. 16, 50; Zeph. 3, 11; often with the addition of lab Ps. 131, 1; Ez. 28, 2; 2 Chk. 26, 16; Prov. 18, 12. Derivat. nba (and nnh^), naa, n^inaa, rrja.^ (accordmg to some). Hif. fl'^asri {fut. rt'^as^, poet. part. 'W^'^'Xa) causat. to cause to shoot up high, a tree Ez. 17, 24; to raise up, the low 21, 31, the entrance Pkov. 17, 19 i. e. a high house; to build the nest in a high situation (on the crags), spoken of the eagle, and then metaphorically of dwell- ings like these nests Jer. 49, 16, Ob. 4; of high flight Job 39, 27; with other infinitives, like b^SlZirt, as an adverb Ps. 113,5; Job 5, 7. '' ' ' Hof. na^n (not used), whence the proper name Miiasi. The stem is intimately connected with )ia.1 , 5>55 , Ar. U^. The organic root is ii-aa , out of which a great number of stems have been developed. nba (orniaa, constr. Th% 1 Sam. 16, -IT -IT' -i: 7, but more frequently nSS, according to the well known interchange of a and o; pi. dir7b.5) adj. m., nrtba {pi. niinias) fem. 1. high, of stature 1 Sam. 9, 2; of a tower Is. 2, 15; a mountain 30, 25; a tree Ez. 17, 24; a gate Jeb. 51, 58; a wall Deut. 3, 5; a horn Dan. 8, 3; a battlement Zeph. 1, 16 ; a hill 1 Kings 14, 23 ; the gallows Esth. 5, 14. As a suhst. abstract nhji Eccles. 12, 5 what is high, i. e. a hill, a mountain, of whose height old men are afraid; as a concrete: a high, high-placed one. The pi. Q'^ln'ss 5, 7 is to be explained of God, after the manner of D''lr['b!S!, Q'^fflilJ? Hos. 12, 1, d"'N'iia Eccles. 12,1; in which sense ' I" : I ' ' 5iM Ps.138,6 also occurs in the singular, according to some. — 2. haughty, proud, arrogant, with D^5''5f Ps. 101,5, sb Prov. 16, 5, or ni'-i Eccles. 7, 8; but Tlrai, is also a subst. pride, arrogance 1 Sam. 2, 3, or concrete D'^lnhs the proud Is. 5,15. '■ ' tlDil (with SM/.ina.^, DJiaa;^?. constr. ''pa.j) m. 1. height, of cedars Am. 2, 9, of stature 1 Sam. 17, 4, of a tree Ez. 41, 8 ; the upper side (rr^j) of felloes Ez. 1, 18; pi. 0^53113 "liias the heights of heaven Job 11,8, like a^am nah 22,12. — 2.Figurat. height, elevation, majesty. Job 40, 10 ; or in a bad sense haughtiness, pride, ar- rogance, with tijS Ps. 10, 4; Sb 2 Chr. 32, 26; nil Prov. 16, 18; or alone Jer. 48,29; Ez!l9,ll; 31,10 14. DDil (not used) tr. same as NSS to IT T ^ ^ IT T collect^ gather in, applied to the collect- ing of tribute, comp. Targ. NiS, Syr. mn3:i 255 niDJ )a» , Ar. Lis,. Deriv. the proper name nin?? f- haughtiness, Is. 2, 11 17. b*ina (or bia , with suf ■'biSa ; pZwr. n"'bli's," with sicff. ^■'bisa) m. prop, the extremity, the last of a thing, where it is at the end or begins, and by which it is enclosed or encompassed. Hence 1. ths border, edge, surrounding margin, e. g. of the altar &c. Ez.43, 13 17, where the Vulgate has for it margo, finis; the boundary which divides one field from another Dbtit.19,14; 27,17; Hos. 5, 10 (comp. nba.|!); hence metaphor, 'a S'^Bfl to displace the boundary Pbov. 22, 28, i. e. figurat. to destroy firmly- established institutions; 'S ^''SSiri 15, 25 to establish a definite possession; then the margin, shore (of the sea) Jee. 5, 22; Ps. 104, 9. Most frequently — 2. bor- der in the widest sense, the border of a province Gen. 47, 21; Num. 20, 23; Josh. 13, 10; Ob. 7; Josh. 13, 30; the limit on one side Ntm. 34, 6 7; Josh. 15, 2; then a district with its border round about, district generally Gen. 10, 10, Ex. 10, 14 &c., especially where the entire compass of a land or place is meant Mal. 1, 4; Am. 6, 2; '^ ^"^Vl^- Am. 1, 13 to enlarge the district! by ex- tending the borders, or 'S"b? b'^'jiSrt Zeph. 2, 8; a definite native land Jeb. 31, 17; the territory belonging to a place Judges 11, 18, and as several territories be- longed to one city, in the plural 1 Sam. 5,6; 2 Kings 15,16; 18,8. Comp. Lat. fines. In Phenician CibilS {Gubulim Poen. 1, 9) signifies specially,' quarter. Hence the denom. baa (/m«. bias':, before Makkeph "ba?;') trans, with acciisat. to draw out a bound- ary Deut.19,14; to form a boundary, to bound Josh. 18, 20, where bias is the object; without the object Num.' 34, 6: Vaa'' biisn d^rt (according to the read- I : • t T - IT - ^ ^ ing of the Samaritan cod. on account of the difficulty of biasi, where it is better to read biaab); with h: to border upon Zech. 9, 2. Sif. b^iaSfn to set bounds around, to enclose Ex. 19, 12 23. The word bias, formed like the ab- stract bins , properly means at first en- closing, surrounding, then as a concrete edge, margin, border &c. and is there- fore derived from bas. 1 '"' ?in« see b'as. nb^lDSi (and nbas, from baS; with IT : IT \ : ' I- T ' suff. inba.^ ; pi. nibia.5 , with sM/f.n-'n'bas) f. 1. enclosure, of a field Is. 28, 25; margin of the earth by which it is se- cured against the sea, shore Ps. 74, 17. — 2. boundary, limit. Num. 34, 2, hence 'S S''\an, T'Dfl Is. 10, 13, Job 24, 2 to remove the boundary 1. e. to rob; then like bia.S a bounded district Dbut. 32, 8. -lilia (rarely 1'as, with suf. Qp^ia.H; pi. D-^Tias , Q'l'n'as , constr. ■''n'as , with suf. Brt'^'nias) adj. m. strong, powerful. Gen. 10, 9; mighty, omnipotent, Is. 9,5j valiant, heroic, warlike, hence 'lias 'T|bM Dan. 11, 3 of Alexander the great; fre- quently as a substant. a strong one, a warrior, with Vri Judges 11,1, or nis Ps. 103, 20, or also without them Jek. 51,30; Ps. 120, 4; hero, heros, Gen. 6, 4 (LXX yqag); 2 Sam. 23, 8. Meta- phorically an active, a valiant, an ahUy an upright man 2 Sam. 22, 26; 1 Kings 11, 28; Euth2, 1; a leader, of warriors Is. 3, 2, or of others 1 Chr. 9, 26; also in a bad sense: a violent man Ps. 52, 3, and in other places in the greatest variety of collateral senses. The Ar. jLki. and Syr. Ir^?^ are identical with it; but they are limited to more special meanings. Nl'^na {def. NH'n-) Aram. f. power, omnipotence, Dan. 2, 20 23. trraa (with suf. ■'n'lias; pi. ni'iias , with'su/.' T^n'lias) /. 1. power (bodily), strength, Eccles. 9, 16, oppos. to flMSH; strengthening 10,17: for strengthening and not for drunkenness ("'nifl) ; pi- ni'lias col- lect, strong power of life Ps. 90, 20; va- lour, courage, military spirit Judges 8,21, with HMnb'sb Is. 36, 5, sometimes eon- cidce for Di^'as heroes, the most spirited warriors Is. 3, 25 ; Jek. 49, 35 ; or applied to the prophetic spirit Mic. 3, 8; power^ HDJ 256 bj might, of the horse Job 39, 19; of the sun Judges 5, 31; unrighteous might Jeb. 23, 10. — 2. Metaph. noble achieve- ment, mighty achievement, of God Is. 33, 13, Ps. 145, 11, or of men 1 Kings 15, 23; 2 Kings 10,34; omnipotence, of God Ps. 21, 14 (therefore in Syr., the Mishna and the New Test, for God Himself) or of men Is. 30, 15 ; glorious achievement Ps.71,16; '3 dS'n Job 26, 14 the thunder of his fame i. e. far-sounding fame; vic- tory, Ex. 32, 18; Syr. l^o^ mighty achievement. See 'nas. l-T HDil (not used) intr. to be high, of the forehead, a mark of baldness in the fore part of the head; consequently cognate with n^-i , the Ar. L!s» having this meaning, »m:>] with a high fore- head, Targ. n55 of height in stature. Deriv. rrsLi, nna'^. nsa (after the form I^S^, nip &c. from Pihel) adj. m. having a high fore- head, i. e. bald (on the fore part of the head) Lev. 13, 41 , different from np)? bald at the back of the head (according to Sifra). nn33i (with suf. innaA) /. baldness (in the fore part of the head), as a ble- mish Lev. 13, 42 ; metaphor, a bare place of a cloth, on the outer or right side 13, 55. •^31^ (ingatherer, from ni-l) n. p. m. Neh. 11, 8; Talm. ''N|.5, Syr. t^-^. D'^DS I. (springs, cisterns) n. p. of a place not far from Jerusalem, mentioned as being on the road which the Assy- rians took thither Is. 10, 31; it is un- certain whether it be identical with ail. I D'^na n. see as. n3''35i see Was from X^i. IT ■ : IT ■ : 'l-T ?''Da (from S»|3.5; constr. ?i^S, with suf. ■'» ^a^ ; pi. tM'^^i , with suff. fj-'jU-'aa) m. 1. a cup, crater, of silver Gen. 44, 2, with which one divined 44, 5, and out of which liquid was poured into the goblet (Di3) Jer. 35, 5 ; so called from its hollow, arched form (comp. S>5ip, 5>5n.3). In Ex. ch. 25 the LXX take it in the sense of oil-cup, lamp Q.a[i7tddwr), which is possible, indeed, but not necessary — 2. Metaphor, the cup of flowers, calitc, Ex. 25, 3132; cognate in sense nsap , Ar. T^DS (pj^op- "Aj- ''"■• (after the form l5"'&3,'*5''lJit, h'h», T'OP!), ST^"'?? {constr. Tni% , with suff. Ti'n^a) f., prop, dispos- ing, ruling, leading, powerful &c., but only as a suhst. master, lord. Gen. 27, 29; fern, the reigning queen 1 Kings 11, 19 (comp. Greek dianoiva); or the queen- mother 15, 13; 2 Chron. 15, 16; Jee. 13, 18. The form has arisen in the first instance from ^15.5, and this abridged from 'lii: hence the fern. rTnai in the I" T ' viv : construct state and with suff. Gen. 16, 8 9, Is. 24, 2; 47, 5 once even in the ab- solute state. riT^na see T^aJi. IT • : I" : 115 ''P3 (from 11)55) m. properly firmly drawn together, stiffened, frozen, hence ice, with 'j^N hail (see ^''^.jbN Ez.l3, 11, where the LXX strangely thought of DiSS-bsj Hab. 2, 11); figurat. from its similarity: cj^staZ Job 28,18, as xQvcTaX- Xog likewise denotes ice, and crystal was looked upon as ice (Plin. h. n. 37, 2); the Targ., therefore, has merely bllB, whence by transposition Ar. jjJj , which means not only beryl, but also crystal. !53il (not used) tr. 1. to bind firmly together, to twist together closely, to weave together, to bind about; comp. b^H, bS3, V|33 &c., Ar. J^A.^ (to interweave, to bind together), J^r* (= n'lAN, b^n) a band, JJa* a rope, Targ. basi, Syr. Vaa (to bind) &c. Deriv. inbaaja.'nibil. ^ ' IT T : • ' I : - — 2. to press firmly or thickly together, to draw closely together, transferred to other objects, i. e. to make dense, thick, firm, large, to cause to become a thick, and therefore a bent, arched mass (comp. la.j) ; Ar. JJjs. (a thick, firm mass), Ju&. (large, thick, dense), JLa=» telly, JJa^ a thick mass, jlAJa.^ hump (of the camel). It is therefore applied to a mountain, b2^ 257 nbsj a hill, as a thing heaped together and fouuud into a solid mass. Deriv. the proper names ba.? ("'ba.^), bas, bha (ac- cording to the LXX), the Hebrew and Phenician baa. — 3. Figurat. to enclose, to encompass, to border, spoken of an edge, the border of a field, enclosure, surrounding, bank, shore &c., prop, to bind about ,with a string; comp. finis and funis, English boundary, properly a thread. The surrounding, edge or border of a thing is conceived of as a sort of line which encloses it sometimes wholly, sometimes in part. Deriv. biaa (baa) and nbiaa, with the denom. baa. IT :' i-i baa see baa and baa. 7D3 (mountain-district), n. p. of the Phenician city Byblus {Bv^Xoe, see a) situated on a height (Strab. 16, 2, 18 xsvtai S icp vipovg tifog fuxQov anto-Osv trig &aXdrTijg) not far from the Mediter- ranean Sea, celebrated as the oldest in the world (Steph. under Bti|3^o?,- Eustath. onDionys. v. 913), south of the parent- land Sidon; then of the whole ancient kingdom Byblus, including that of £e- rytus, both as the name of a land, as well as in an ethnographical respect, contrasted with the southern neighbours in 1?33 (low country). Metaphorically applied to a race of the Byblians in baa ■':i3T Ez. 27, 9 the Byblian masters (in the building of ships). Comp. the name baa Tjbja bNp.'? Enylus ('Evvkog is also mentioned elsewhere, Arrian 2, 20), in Alexander's time king of Byblos, on a Byblos-coin. Hence the Gentile "ibaa Qyblite i. e. Byblian, e. g. 'iT\ yiNfl Josh. 13, 5 the land of the Gyblites, as far as which the northern boundary of Palestine is announced as reaching; pi. D'lbaa 1 Kings 5, 32, who at the time of the" construction of Solo- mon's temple were subject to the Tyrian king Biram. — Prom the orthography baa has arisen the present Arab, name sLxSk (G'ibla) with its diminut. J>aa&., the rare §l^X-iog (LXX in Ezek. at the place mentioned; Zos. 1, 58); but there existed also a form baa (comp. Euseb. Onom. p. 421: Bip-og, mhg fVoivixtjg, iv 'le^Ewril dv&' ov to 'E^gaixov sxsc rofsl) or bha (which see), and from this come Bvp-'og = rv§l-og, Mcobile (i. e. El-Gobel baa-bs) of the Peutinger ta- bles, the Arab, dimin. JlIl*^ and the Targ. i«;baia 1 Kings 5, 31; 2 Kings 12, 13 &c." The syllable "IN put be- fore it in the Targ. is the same as that in S>aiN, baiN &c. ...» ,.. ._ ^D3i (mountain-land) n. p. of a moun- tain-district inhabited by the Edomites, at the south of the Dead Sea, in Ara- bia Petraea, mentioned with 'Amalek, 'Ammon, P'leshet Ps. 83, 8. By it is meant a district of the Edomite moun- tains, which Josephus (Ant. 2, 1, 2 ; 3, 2, 1) calls Fo^ollTig, but whose inhabitants he terms ra§aXhai (9, 9, 1) ; Eus. and Steph. Byz. have Fd^aXa, -Xrivr;, Fi^dka, -Xrjvri, which territory they limit sometimes to a smaller, sometimes to a larger; now G'bdl (JLa,*-) identical -wi^ Syria Sobal of Judith 3, 1 (Vulg.) and the crusa- ders. Here too as well as in baa , there existed a form baa (hence rS^oXTrig, Sobal). The Jerus.' Targ. (on Gen. 33, 3—14 17; 36, 8—9) puts sbaa (Gen- tile ""Nbaa) for T'S'ffl generally,' as does also the Samaritan. Out of ba.^ has been formed the Phenician Nba.n"(Ga- bala) the proper name of a city iii Phe- nicia; but out of baa has been formed baa" (Mei-gabl-Mm, proper name of a city of Baetica in Spain). The "jbaa in the Mishna along with Galilee (Sota 49'') arose out of 'jbia, which was con- sidered the eastern border of Galilee (Jos. Bell. Jud. 4, 1, 1). bnS »*■ is read by the LXX for biaa Judges 2, 9, Ps. 78, 54, Ez. 11, 10 I'lj is looked upon as = baa (mountain), and is translated ogog. But biaa is more correct. bna see biaa. nSna see nbiaa. IT • : IT . n*lbaa see nba-l. I : - h . pna see baa. IlT : - ■ IT : nbna (an abstract form like ni-n??) f. sarae as !lb3a?3 prop, twisted, woven, ""■ 17 p. 258 J^3J or intertwined, then concrete (according to the LXX and 3n G'andch) twisted work, lace-work, a broad chain like net- work twisted (of gold threads) Ex. 28, 22; 39, 15, explained by raV ntoSM. The Targ. and Saadia have border, i. e. of similar length ; the Syr. and Samar. : doubling i. e. doubled (from bi-l = Vb3), which, however, is less suitable. |!3il (not used) intr. 1. to be bent, to be drawn together, to bow, to stoop (cog- nate with )Q^ which see), hence )'^A; comp. Ar. ^\J^ and ^)-^ (hence figu- rat. to be cowardly, fearful). — 2. to curdle, of milk, to coagulate, of a fluid, proceeding from signif. 1, whence InSaa ; comp. the numerous similar forms of the stem in this sense in the Targ. )^i , Syr. ,:;iL^, Ar. ^j..^ &c. — 3. Figura- tively to be heaped together, to be drawn together (into a mass), spoken of a hill, hump, bunch, top; then: to be arched, gibbous, topped, of a mountain; to be solid; hence IbM. Derivatives of this signification are also preserved in the dialects: Ar. (jU-&. table-land, hill; mo- dern Hebrew niJISas, 'Jisa.l hiU. The organic root of this stem, in the signification given, is ')-i5 ; the stem be- longs to those formed by n out of simple organic roots; and the roots in N-Dp, !l-lp are cognate with it. Another sense is preserved by the Aram, ^a.^ (to be bent, arched), which is to be derived from the organic root M; hence "Ji^a = a.5, spoken of the arch of the eye. IBS adj. m. gibbous, hump-bached. Lev. 21, 20, prop, contracted in the spine (LXX, Vulg., Ibn Gr'anich and others); according to the Jerus. Targ. (seeKimchi) very dark or brown (after the Aram. X>'^!i = Hebrew aa), which, however, is improbable. nDDS /"• milk curdled, coagulated. Job 10, 10, with which the embryo, formed of coagulated semen, is compared; hence cheese is incorrect. ■jiS? (after the formb'bfiS; pZ. fi''S?aJ!) m, mountain- summit or top, hence Ps, 68, 16: a mmmtain of summits, i. e. a moun- tain abounding in summits, referring to the tops of Antilibanus (]«5a 'nrt), as Symm., Aq[. and Jerome understood it; '5D'''lfl 68,17: hilly mountains (thesubst. appended in order to express an adject, corresponding to the idea, as iibina fl'nS'S 1 Kings 1, 2, na-'ban t)'''Ti?T'!i' n'eh. 1,2). J7Dil (not used) intr. 1. same as S.^ I. to be rounded, bent, of a cup, or any thing round or bent; deriv. ?"'^.1, bi'as, — 2. to be high, arched, gibbous, whence Waa, T\^'3.m, the proper names 5>M, n5i.1, 1i:yaV, mV'^S,, r^y^i. Both senses, as is evident from the connexion of 53 with rti.l, fiSJi, IniJi, flow into one an- I-t' I-T' ITT ' other, the humped and gibbous shape being conceived as round, bent, and high-arched; comp. Ar. «Ai*. I'D? {hill, top) 1. proper nam£ of a Levitical city in Benjamin (LXXilzjSaa) Josh. 18, 24; 21,17; IChr.8,6; 2Chk. 16,6 (along with Mizpeh); Ezr. 2, 26; Neh.7,30; 11,31; 12,29; IChr.6,45, distinct from ^^i'as, forming the nor- thern border of the kingdom of Judah 2 Kings 23, 8, Zech. 14, 10, as liMT did the southern one. It is said (by JEuseb. and Jerome) to have been 5 So- man miles from Oofna (n5S.il , now G'ifna) towards Neapolis. It is stUl preserved in the village G'ibijja at Wadi el-G'ib between Singl (Bet-El) and Gifna {Bo- bins. Pal. III. 298). — 2. another form of the proper nameWaa (which see) Judges 20,33, lSAM.13,3,"alsoin;|ia 'a Judges 20, 10, 1 Sam. 13, 16, 1 Kings 15, 22 (beside Mizpeh, now Nabi Samwil), but which, as well as 2 Chk. 16, 6, is pro- bably = MjyS-5 : conseq[uently it is the present G'eba between el-Suweinit and Wadi Farah, i. e. between Michmash (Muchmas) and Eamah (el-Eam). In the vicinity was perhaps the place ~1tysp_ 5»5a {hill-wood, see tTTyn) Judges 20, 33. — 3. n. p. of a city not far from W:3.5 , consequently like it situated near Bamah and Michmash Is. 10, 29, probably the same as nifea JiSlaa Judges 20,31. IV T - IT : • ' pijn ysj 259 nyDj ■ — 4. another orthography for "pSSa 2 Sam. 5, 25, as may be seen from the parallel place 1 Chk. 14, 16. ']53''31Z1 yZpi (hilly place of Benjamin) n. p. of a city in Benjamin, Judges 20, 10, ISAM. 13, 16, for which in 13, 3 5>aS alone stands 1 Kings 15, 22, but which in any case is identical with T\i>M , which the ancients put for it. NynSi (=''Sa.'! hill-inhabitant) n. p. m. 1 Chk. 2, 49.'" nyna (constn nsas, withsM/.inyaa, tin-; /jZ.n'iyaa, constr. niSlas, with suff. 5^ "niyas) /. i .a" hill, Is. 40,4, together with Irt; with the adjectives Itnhi 1 Kings 14,23, Jer.4, 24, ncjto Is'.'3d,25, iin'i Ez. 6, 13 (opposite Vi5 35, 8), which has i»N1 2 Sam. 2, 25', di'na Jer. 49, t ''IT ' 16, particularly a place of view Num. 23, 9, and a high watch-tower whence announcements are made far and wide Mic. 6,1; Zeph.1, 10. Metaphor. &) pri- mitive hill or primeval mountain, which sank into the earth at the creation of the world; hence fig. the first crea- tion Job 15, 7; Peov. 8, 25; Hos. 4, 13; 2 Che. 28, 4, in full form tlbi5> ni3>a5 IT I J ■ Mils of primeval time Gen. 49, 26; Dbut. 33, 15; Has. 3, 6. b) hills of worship, where the gods had their places . of wor- ship and their pillars Jer. 13, 27. In particular it is often used in descriptions of idolatry: dnrt )^^ni^ nisasa 3, 23 from the hills of worship (the LXX, Vulg. and Syr. read n:?aaa = Waa), a noise from the mxmntains (^?3 of '5a refer- ring to this noun also), which is all ?l)?isb. e) specially of Zio;a, Is. 31, 4; Ez.34,26. — 2. (MZ, like dunum in Ger- man, Gallic, and British names of cities, comp. Lugdunum, Caesaro-, Augusto-) n.p. of a city in Benjamin Judges 19, 14, more exactly described by V?^??'? '^^^. and therefore with the article 20,5-43; according to Josephus (Ant. 5, 2, 8) 20 or 30 (Bell. Jud. 6, 2, 1) furlongs (stadia) from Jerusalem towards the north. In- stead of it there is in 1 Sam. 13, 3 16; 14, 5 and elsewhere lJ>a5. (which see). In 'iyj •'Ml Hos. 9, 9; 1,0,' 9 there is an allusion to the shameful deed described in Judges ch. 20. This '% is named in 1 Sam. 11,4; 15, 34; 2 Sam. 21,6; Is. 10, 29 blNl^ nya.n (as the birth-place of Saul), or also yi^^k '5 1 Sam. 13, 2 15; 14, 16; 2 Sam. 23, 29 ; 1 Che. 11, 31, and is said to be the modern Tuleil el-Ful (J-Jj J^l) (Eohins. Bibl Ees.II. 144. 317). Gentile insaa 1 Che. 12, 3. Besides, the following designations of places are compounded with 'S : a) !1MN '.^ {hill of the waterfall) n. p. of a hill 2 Sam. 2, 24 in the neighbourhood of 115*55 at U'^S. b) nptea was {Mil of the field) n. p. of a place not far from iisa.^ Judges 20, 31, which is also called sa);. Is. 10, 29. c) a"!;! '-5 Qiill of the leper) n. p. of a hill in the north of Jerusalem, to which the lepers were probably obliged to withdraw Jee. 31, 39; in Josephus (B. J. 5, 4, 2) BeCs&d (perhaps nniT-'a). d) dinS.Nl-l'3 (hill of Ood) n. p. of a hill at the town of Gibeah, where a sanctuary may have existed 1 Sam. 10, 5 ; according to some it is identical with ^^ ^'n 2 Sam. 21, 6 (as is read for i''' T'tia). e) flb-'Dnp 'A {hill of beauty) n. p. of a hill in the south of the wilderness of Ziph 1 Sam. 23, 19; 26, 1 3. f) ifr\iti'rt nsaa {shooter' s-hill) n. p. of a hill in the neighbourhood of hihi in the plain tTiia Judges 7, 1. See rtpia. g) nib'is;^ % {Mil of the foreskins) n. p. of a hill in the neigh- bourhood of bsbs Josh. 5, 3. h) '.1 IT : • ' -^ ' DbllSn'l^ {hill of Jerusalem) n. p. of a hill of Jerusalem Is. 10, 32, mentioned with Zion. i) DtliiS '5 {hill of Fhinehas) n. p. of a hill in the mountains of Ephraim Josh. 24, 33, according to Euseb. (under Fa^adg) the hamlet Fa- ^a&d (snas), 12 miles from Eleuthero- polis, having the grave of Habakkuk. — fl3iaV!l 'A hill of frankincense Song OP Sol. 4, 6 is merely a figure, like 'l53!i "nrt in the same verse. — 3. n. p. of a city in Judah in the neighbour- hood of Kirjat-Je'arim Josh. 15, 57; comp. 1 Sam. 7, 1 ; 2 Sam. 6,3 4. — Ii^ Phenician NSas (isa.^, written Gippa, comp. 'i^nas) is the proper name of a 17* py^J 260 "IDJ city of Mauritania (Aug. ep. 65); still farther, 5>aa (Goba, itin. 18), nsaa (Cho- bat, Ptol.) occur as proper names of cer- tain places. ■jiyna {hill-place) n. p. of a hill-town four Roman miles from Bethel (Euseb.), and the leading place of the four confederate cities (G-ibeon, Kephira, Be'erot, Kirjat-Je'arim) Josh. 9, 17. It was allotted to Benjamin 18, 25, given up to the priests 21, 17, and though strictly distinct from Saa" and Was it J ^ -IV ^ IT : ■ was sometimes interchanged with them (see 5'as); now called v_^uysOf el- Gib {Robinson Bibl. Ees. 11. 135). At an early period, there was in the place a legal sanctuary with the great naa 1 EaNGS 3, 4 seq., with the tabernacle and an altar for sacrifice 1 Chr. 21, 29 ; 2 Chr. 1, 3 13. There was also a large pond 2 Sam. 2, 13, Jbr. 41, 12, as well as a desert belonging to it 2 Sam. 2, 24. Gentile "'ib'aa is applied to the inhabitants of the whole Gibeonite ter- ritory 2 Sam. 21, 1 seq., 1 Chr. 12, 4, who are elsewhere called Q'^S/ni (which see). niyna see ns>aa. it: r : • pi? 33 m. prop, a small cup, hence figuratively (according to the Jerus. Targ. I. and II., the Samar., Ibn G'andch, Tanchum in Murshid &c.) the caliai of flowers, Ex. 9, 31 and the flax had a calix i. e. it flowered. In the Mishna: flower, flower-cup or what is concealed and en- closed in it, e. g. the calix of hyssop, origanum &c. on account of its cup-like form. — The word is formed from ya.-i (=?"'a.5 cup) with the diminutive termina- tion V-, like bb'i(5 (from D'l)?.), bsifflij (from "^fflJii), for which also b"!- is found in b^i'^r^i, bia'^3, b- in bn'd'ri, bij in bl'nn &c. (see letter b), and which is also met with in the dialects. When the LXX, Vulg. and the Sam. (£]Ni) under- stand it to mean seed-bud, seed-capsule (though the appearance of it with that of the ears of barley is not possible), this may have arisen only from another view, without having a different derivation on that account, since the cognate Arab. Jkjuj) (to have buds), J*jLo(cup, goblet), if J_ &c. comprehends both. n?D3 {hill) n. p. of a city in Benja- min Josh. 18, 28. As it stands along with n^'n'i? i. e. 'o'^^^i ')?, it is probably identical with Waa in Judah Josh. 15, 57. D'^li'i nilp or U^'iy 'p was ceded, i-T : r :'• i-t '• ' like tiSaa , by Judah to Benjamin. The LXX "read ra§a(u& (nis>aa), Euseb. Fa^a&av ('jinyaa); and there may have been different ways of pronouncing the name. r$D^ in compound names of places, see ns'aa. IT ! • pnJPDa see waa and linaa. "iDil (from 'la.'i , hence 3plur. in pause I'laa ; fut. 'laa';) intr. to be strong, power- ful, capable of bearing arms, either ab- solutely 1 Sam. 2, 9 , with a of the ob- ject by which, or with b according to Jbk. 9, 2, or with a 1 Chr. 5, 2, or b? Ps.117,2, 2 Sam. 1,23 of the object over which one is strong; with '\a stronger than Ps. 65, 4; 2 Sam. 1, 23. From this signification arose that of to conquer Ex. 17, 11; to swell up, of water Gen. 7, 18; with aqpusat. b';n to get influence Job 21, 7 &c., which can be all referred to this fundamental signification. De- rivat. laa., laa, Tia-i, nT^aa, rrnaa, V i-j ' I- ! ' r : ' IT • : ' vw : ' rrniaa, and the proper names bN'^'ia.l, •naa. " Pih. "laa {fut. '-\'3lX[) to make strong, to help, with accusat. of the object Zech. 10, 6 12 ; Cb^n to put to more strength EccLEs. 10, 10; opposite MM 30 liuSart, T-> • . ^ • IT : I I" : - Derivat. Iiaa. I • Hif. T'asfi 1. to procure ascendency, to exert strength, with b of the dative Ps. 12, 5. — 2. in a bad' sense, to make difficult, Dan. 9, 27: and he will make the covenant difficult to many i. e. they will hardly be able to bear it on account of enmities and suffering. Hithp. "naanrt (/wJ.'naan^) to shew one- self strong, to defy, with "bsj against. Job 15, 25; with b:^ to get ike victory "1DJ 261 -IJ over one Is. 42, 13; absolutely to in- crease, to grow Job 36, 9. The fundamental signification of the stem is to be drawn together, to be pressed together, as the Ar. wCi. (to bind together, to make firm, whence *vI:L I Al- gebra i. e. a drawing together of the parts into a whole) still shews; comp. lan. The development of the idea is as in prn, "iiap &c. The organic root is ^'2~A, which also exists in ia"i<, 15-3 (which see), as well as in the Arab. jjJO to be fleshy, fat, strong. "15a {constr. 'isa Ps. 18, 26, where D''an stands substantively; pi. D"''n53) m. 1. a valiant soldier, a warrior, Judges 5, 30, Jer. 41, 16, or generally man, with the additional idea of strength Job 40,7. But usually, likelST, applied to the male sex in general Deut. 22, 5 ; thence metaphor, a married man Pbov. 6, 34, or a man 30, 19, Jbk. 31, 22 (opposite Q'^fflJ Jer. 43, 6, or t\a Ex. 12, 37). Poetically boy. Job 3, 3 a boy is conceived. Then universally: man, Jeb. 17, 7; Prov. 20, 24 (comp. Phenician 'nas Tug. 6), parti- cularly in opposition to God, and there- fore like ffl"'N in the sense of one Jer. 23, 9, every one Jo. 2, 8. — 2. {strong) n. p. m. 1 Kings 4, 19. 13a in the proper name laa li^'^^i which see. naa Ps. is, 26, see ISJi. 13a Aram. m. same as Hebrew 1i)i. TtiJ'.2,^h; 5,11. npa (in Targ. lai.:; ; only 'ra.pl. y^'-p^ , def. N^ias) Aram, m., the same, Dan. 3,8 12^^,6 &c "I'Sa see liaa. ni3a see filtosi. IT ■•. : IT : ni3a see liS-J. "iSa {vl. constr. tiasi) Aram. m. same as lias Dan. 3, 20. 13a {gigantic, high, comp. Syr. i^^f^) n. p. m. EzE. 2, 20, for which in Neh. 7, 25 liyi^ (high) stands as a masc. proper name. As names of cities follow in the passage, it might be the later city of Judea Nn:?.5-n-'3 (Ptol. 16,4 Baetogabra) 0^ T'';i?"""'5 (Betogabri in the Peutinger tables,' Beth-gebrim in William of Tyre) between Ascalon and Eleutheropolis, for which another list had p^aa. bN"'13a {El is a hero) n. p. of an angel, who explains symbols and makes prophecy clear, Dan. 8, 16; 9, 21. It is the Q'tl'bl!* IB^'N become a proper name, as the prophets were called in the pro- phetic period, in whom the spirit of God was manifested. C^32l (not used) intrans. to draw to- gether, to condense, to become firm; of ice: to stiffen; the Arab. nujis>. (whence o , 1 1 (j4*AS» coagulated) and jm'N., as also jAjs. (hard, thick) are connected with it; comp. Talm. rT^^l'iaaa a hill. De- rivatives iij-'aa, ©■'asbis,'n. p. lO-'aaM. naa see linas. XM3a see Tinaa. n I - ' I : ' 'lirsa {either height, formed from iilaS, or contracted from "linsa.^) n.p. of a city in Dan Josh. 19, 44721, 23; 1 Kings 15, 27. Eusebius read the name ^inss {rtt§a&m), Josephus Nnaa {Fa^a&d)); and it was subsequently called na.V aa (with d of motion TOiA , with suff. \W; ^Z. niSJi, with suff. Dti'^nJia) m. prop, that which covers or is spread out over something; hence roof, the flat roof of Orientals (as tectum from tegere, aiiytj from axiysiv, Ar. ^Ja.w roof, from ^iaM [naa] to spread out) Josh. 2, 6 8 ; 1 Sam. 9, 25 &c. ; metaphorically roof of a gate 2 Sam. 18, 24, of a tower Judges 9, 51, of an apartment Ez. 40, 13, of an altar Ex. 30, 3. — In Phenician SS is a pro- tecting roof, a protection; hence there the proper name bsaJi (protection of El), see Morcelli, Afr. christ. II. p. 322. The noun should be considered as origin- ating in the reduplicated form NaN-J. See m. Comp. besides U-'U, bib &c. Ta I. (from ni-J I.) rit. prop, decision = fortune, especially a favourable for- "IJ 262 IDIJ tune; hence 1. good fortune, zviti. Gen. 30, 11 according to the K'tib 153 adv. fortunately (LXX iv rvxy, Vulg. feliciter, Jerus. Targ. I. N3U Nbrg); but the K'ri has ia sa fortune comes i. e. has turned, IT IT ' ' a reading which Onk. Syr. &c. follow. — 2. an epithet of the fortune-bring- ing deity in Phenician and Babylonian worship , the god of fortune , connected with bya (Babylonian ba) the highest deity of fortune; hence 15 bsa (Baal as the bestower of good luck) n. p. of a city at the foot of Hermon Josh. 11, 17; 12, 7 ; 13, 5, where the sanctuary of the god was. Some understand by it vilL-Xju, whose ruins still exist. See bsa. In the astronomical explanation of mytho- logy, one understands the planet Ju- piter, the most lucky of all the stars (Ar. good fortune). Comp. the Pheni- cian nJi UJ'n Rusgada (promontory of Gad) n. p. of the sea-port Cirta in Nu- midia. — 3. an epithet of Venus or Astarte, who was worshipped by feasts (lectisternia) Is. 65, 11 together with ■'ii? (luna). In Phenician l-l or na (-^i) was an epithet of Astarte i. e. Venus; hence the proper name n'n'nil5y'i.!i (Karth. 3), or of iiays (Venus); hence the pro- per name rra3>5"''i.|! (Griddeneme, see Poen. 5, 3). — 4. ra. p. of a son of Jacob Gen. 30, 11 (prop, dedicated to the deity Gad), head of a tribe named after him, and from whom also the territory allotted to it was called Deut. 3, 12 16; Josh. 13,24-28; Ez. 48, 27 28. Hence yns 1.1 1 Sam. 13, 7, la ''aa Num. 32, 1, na73 IT ' ' IT I": ' ' I" - 13 Josh. 20, 8; and the Gentile ^13, IT ' ' ex' usually ■'I.Jll, collect, the Oadites Deut. 3, 12, for which also 1)1 alone stands, Deut. 27, 13. — The following geo- graphical names are compounded with 15 as a nomen numinis: a) 15n bH3 IT IT — "l" 2 Sam. 24, 5, commonly: the river-valley which belongs to Gad i. e. the Jahbok; but probably laii should be taken here as the name of a god, after whom the Jabbok was called, b) 15 ■jh-'i Num. 33, 45 46, commonly: the Bibon belonging to the tribe of Gad; but more probably Dibon of Gad, where his sanctuary was, and which was distinct from another 'jh'^l. c) 15"bl5?3 (tower of Gad) n. p. of a city in Judah, Josh. 15, 37. Comp. !11.|. — 5. n.p. m. 1 Sam. 22, 5 &c. — As a proper name it should be often taken for a nomen numinis only; comp. the proper names 115, ''15,bl!«''15, ni5, n5. See 15. 13 n. (only in "1315 ; Persian) Aram, m. place, city, Zend, gdta place, old Pers. gada city. See 'laiS. TS I. (with suff. in the proper name ■iia , from 115 I.) m. same as IS fortune, then the name of the fortune-bringing deity of the Babylonians, of their planet Venus (!i»i*.i, tTinffl?) or of Jupiter (piia) favourable to the fortunes of in- dividuals, to both of which the Israelites offered worship in exile Is. 65, 11. Comp. in Punic the proper name l^bSIS (Gada- lius i. e. Gadalyan, Gad is Ely on) Harduin, acta cone. 11. 878; Syr. I»-^ the same, li-\ ^-"^ temple of fortune, and pi. ]p, great and small fortune; Ar. Jt^, the same. la n. (probably out of I'JS from 11^ ; comp. Targ. NV5, Phenic. 1';5, FolS in Diosc. 3, 54) m. coriander, perhaps so named from the serrated, indented leaves, or the furrowed corns Ex. 16, 31, Num. 11, 7; with whose white seed-corns the manna was compared. The Jer. Targ., Syr., Ar., Kimchi &c. translate it by '13013, Nn'iaD'iS i.e. S^vS' (coriander); Arab. Jcii. round grain. imS (only def. pi. N'J'1315; Aram. m. a treasurer Dan. 3, 2 3, from 15 = T5 trea- sure (perhaps from the Pers. ^/Utrea- sure) and 13 (Pers. \\^ an adjective termination from the Sanskiit wri, Zend. vere to defend, to protect) holder. But the perfectly analogous form is lani from ni and 13 (see 13ni) where the - of t" n IT ^ IT T :' _ T the first word is thrown forward in the compound. But since the Aram. iaT5 IT T • (which see) stands for it in Ezk. 7, 21, it appears preferable to take it from 15 = Zend, gdtu (place), old Pers. gada in Pasar-gada (Persian's city), hence local m:^ 263 mj guardian, which suits IS'n'iilSnN, )X3, Tins &c. ITV nana and lala see Tl!| I. ^5^5 (fecisiore, cZe/t) w. p. of a sta- tion of the Israelites, coupled with "ih Numb. 33, 32, not far from las irSS; Deut. 10, 7 naiJi. The first form' is from Pihel, the second from Pual. ^i^^3l (with a of motion ^nsil) n. p. of a place Deut. 10, 7, called elsewhere IT :• maia Sam. see 113 I. Pih. ITT : • TT llil I. (i. e. 1.V, /m«. iai, »Z. ^. Consequently 5>y. mS n. same as ni3, see ''13 I. ITT IT-' I": mS (a fem. form of the masc. 13 1.) f. IT- ^ 1 an epithet of Venus (nini^? or ti»5>.3) as a fortune-bringing goddess, in the astrolo- gical conception an epithet of the planet Venus or little fortune (among the Za- bian Arabians), for which the Phenician has also 13 ("l-l). Hence lnl3 isn {court nnj 264 nj o/ Qadda) n. p. of a city in Judah Josh. 15, 27, so called perhaps originally from the Gadda-worship; Tin, noiO, QipID, n.]?3 and others taken from the old heathen worship of the Phenicians being also joined to "ilStn and made designa- tions of places. In Phenician there was 1. a feminine form n'!.'! (comp. rib = rrib), contracted ri-j, as an epithet of nin (Tanais), and so together, like the Hebrew ^A b?a, the proper name of a city nanin (on a coin) i. e. Tingis, Tiyyis, in Mauritania. The numer- ous names of places na in Palestine probably arose in like manner from *^vrv~'^'^-i- — 2- •^'^-?> whence a propei name of the Mauritanian city Qilda — Oidda in Tingitania. 11'ia I. {pi. DinilJi, c. 17,11.5) m. prop, the crowded together, therefore troop, a collection of warriors, and that a) a wandering hand, greedy for booty, and predatory Gten. 49, 19; 1 Sam. 30, 8; 2 Sam. 3,22; 2 Kings 5, 2; diin.? IIJ-'N Hos. 6, 8 a robber, plunderer; figurat. of invading or pressing suffering Job 19, 12 ; abstract the excursion of a hand 2 Sam. 3, 22. b) a troop of warriors, to attack 1 Chk. 7, 4; 2 Che. 26, 11; ">'ni23 'W'yni, leaders of warlike troops, 2 Sam! 4, 2. Here belongs also Ti^^n ''33 2 Chr. 25, 13 or poetic. in.rn3 'Micah 4, 14 [5, 1] soldiers, who surround the king Job 29, 25; fig. army of angels Job 25, 3. — In the same sense the Svr. "°'\i ^- dJ>^ (with n inserted). 'Vn^ n. (from lis I.) OT. a furrow Ps. 65, 11, prop, an incision. ni^n? (only ;?;. nil"; from nxj I.) ^. an incision, a cutting (of the skin)' Jbe. 48, 37. ^iia (oncebis Gen. 1,16; constr. bil^, )h^, before Makkeph "bia K'ri, with stiff. abin^; ^Z. d^bi.?, dibini, co«««?-. ibia, Tdth suff. vbi|) aiy. m., rtbn.5 (or nbiia; jpl- n'bia, ni", nibi-) f great (opposite fu)?) in length, extent Gen. 19, 11, of men with gigantic bodies Detjt. 9, 2; Josh. 14, 15; of the sea Numb. 34, 6 7, the Euphrates Dbut. 1, 7, the wilder- ness 2, 7 &c.; then of compass and mass, of rtniiSn, ''15, ba, nata, nb3, n^a &c. Gen. 21, 8; Dect. 4, 7; Josh. 7,"26; 22, 10; 1 Kings 10,18; 2 Kings 25, 9 &c. whether it be in number and multitude, in importance and extent, or in weight, violence, power &c. It is applied to fear Jon. 1, 10, to joy Neh. 8, 12, to sorrow Gen. 50, 10, to the penal judgment of God Jo. 2, 11, and gene- rally to the greatness and importance of a thing Gen. 39, 9 , to di; Ugh 29, 7. With reference to age 'Si means older, oldest Gen. 10, 21 ; 27, 1 ;^with reference to might, distinction, nobility, riches, strength, distinguished, very powerful Ex. 11, 3, influential 2 Kings 5, 1, of note 4, 8, mighty Eccles. 9, 14 (of a warlike prince), Jbr. 27, 7, Peov. 18, 16, in high of/ice 25, 6, rich Nah. 3, 10, loud (of the voice) Peov. 27, 14 &c. '-5^1 'rjb'Bn 2 Kings 18, 19 the great Mng, an appellation of the Assyrian kings, ruling over kings as vassals, like Tiba d-'iba Ez. 26, 7, Dan. 2, 37, or Tttjsn bi7.5!i Ez. 17, 3 of the Babylonian king" So also the old Persian and the Sassani- des call themselves on their inscriptions. bi^-JSl d''3nli the crocodile, a symbol of Egypt; '.51:7 1p Zech. 4, 7 the great mountain, i. e. the great hindrance; b'i^.jSl IpSiri the high-priest Hag. 1, 1; d''b'i.5 great men Peov. 18, 16. nibia Ps. 12, 4 great i. e. proud, used as an abstract; comp. the Greek /^sya (Od. 16, 243) and iieyiiXa. nbiTa, nbnji see nbia. IT : ' IT : IT •. : ftl^a (only^Z. d'^Slia, constr. is-ii) m. reviling, reproach, scorn Is. 43, 28, Zeph. 2, 8, particularly by actions. nSlia f. reviling, reproach Ez. 5, 15. flBl^a see nD'Hl. IT • IT 1 • liia see ^'iji. ^n\ (from n^a n.) /■. 1. Venus or Astai-te, same as 15, 1|, hence fortune; then the nature-deity of fortune, hence I'^ri"'?? {fountain of Gad) n. p. of a city in "Southern Palestine at the Dead Sea, in Judah Josh. 15, 62; 1 Sam. 24, 1 2; n: 265 Hj Ez. 47, 10; Song op Sol. 1, 14; which seems to have been earlier called IKSn I73n 2 Chron. 20, 2. The LXX write IT T ^ / \ > , 'EyyaSSt , -yaSdi! {'^'^.I'yS) or h'yyaSi (■'1-1'T'?)- -P'Ji^y and Solinus heard — |iy niJ or MTrr? {J'-yyaSa, Engadda), by which means the derivation given comes out still more clearly. See I73n listsn. — 2. (plur. d'^inii, constr. iil.?; from nt-i II.) »n(x«c. properly the pushed out, the cast out, spoken of the fruit of the body, foetus, then abiding by one kind of foetus spec, the young of goats, a kid, joined to D''-Ty Gen. 38, 17; Judges 6, 19; 13, 15 19, but also alone Ex. 23, 19; 34, 26; Dbut. 14, 21; comp. the Phenician N73 (Mass. 9), Ar. ^^Jl3» (a kid), iLsIji^ (the young of a gazelle). ■'^5 patr. from IS, which see. ri ^ it' ''la (from IS ; Jovianus) n.p. m. 2 Kings 15, 14. ■'^la (from 1| ; the same) n. p. m. Num. 13, 'i'l. 5N"'nS (Elis Gad, i. e. fortune-bring- ing) n.p.m. Num. 13, 10 ; comp. the Phe- nician niFituyiJi , nasjiisi , and the Hebr. IT -|- rT'lJ (after the form tT'Tn; pi. with IT T : ITT : ' * suf. T-n-'lJi K'tib) f. = ma 1 Che. 12, " (T it: -' ' ITT ' 15 K'tib, a bank. n»"ia (j)l. n'-i.^, with suf. ':j^n»'i.^) /. a kid Song of Sol. 1, 8. b''^a see bn.i. '^ rT I'T tO^llt m. 1. a heap, heap of sheaves Ex. 22,5, Judges 15,5, opposite nn)5; comp. Arab. (j**j<\&., ijmiX^ for the Hebrew b5 and "lah (heap), the former of which also signifies acrowdofmen accord- ing to Kamus (p. 834) ; more frequent- ly, however, the form there is with k, ^JMJ;X5', u-tXi; Targum. fflni, Syr. ).k.^^. — 2. as tomb, tumulus, prop, a heap of stones over a grave Job 21, 32 (cognate in sense Tm'a. Is. 53, 9, h''^. Job 3, 22 = ba &c.), for which the form *i>jLi. occurs in Arabic. See IBTJ. yj^ (frombna, hence with«tt/. ■'iTs'iS Job 31, 18, and pan. bxj; fut. b^a^) tr. (not used) 1. to twist, interweave', into threads, strings &c., whence hfi; comp. bnn (which see), Ar. JcX^ (to twist to- gether), J-XS'(to bind together), Targ. ^]1;) Syr. ''^.p^. — 2. intr. to be dense, firm, stout, strong, as verbs of binding elsewhere (1©p, 153, 153, ban, bin, V. I- 't ' r T ' r T ' 1- T ' I ^ nni5), whence bTJ (of phallic ability)-, comp. biXJ =-51 Num. 14, 12 with Joel 2, 2, b'l3 = DJt5>, Ar. Jj^ (strength, power). Metaphor, to grow 1. e. to be- come stronger Gen. 38, 14; to grow up,. riN (tin) with one 1 Kings 12, 8 ; to be- come or be larger, older Gen. 21, 8; Ex. 2, 11; to become or be rich Jer. 5, 27 (along with T'lZSyrr); to grow or be vio- lent Job 2, 13 (of pain), strong, ex- traordinary Gen. 19, 13, exalted, great 2 Sam. 7, 22, Psalm 104, 1, high, dis- ijng'M2sA«rfGEN.41,40; to grow or be dear 1 Sam. 26, 24; to be or become far-reach- ing Dan. 8, 10. It is used generally in the widest significations relating both to body and mind, to denote power- ful growth or advance. The trans- itive fundamental signification is still perceptible from Job 31, 18, he honoured me as a father. Deriv. biia, flblli), nbn.^, bna, biM, b^M and the proper names ST^bia, I'iT'bns,' !T'blS\ IT : - : ' IT : - : ' it : - : • Pih. bia {pause b'na , nb^n , inf. bjia, fut. b'la';) to cause to become strong or great, to make great or strong; hence 1. to bring up Dan. 1, 5, Hos. 9, 12, to cause to grow Numb. 6, 5, Is. 44, 14, to make wanton Ez. 31, 4. — 2. to raise high EsTH. 5, 11; to make distinguished or powerful 2 Chron. 1, 1; Josh. 3, 7; <» praise, to extol (God), with b Ps. 34, 4, or the accusat. 69, 31. Deriv. the proper names biS, TlbTI. Fuh. b'1.? to be trained up Ps. 144, 12. Hif. b'i'isri (fut. b'^'na:) caus. 1. to make great, with'accus. of the object, as fli'J'.ain Is. 28, 29, D-'iasu Eccles. 2, 4, niyra; 2 Sam. 22, 51 ,' bjjiii Am. 8, 5 , niina e£. 24, 9 ; fignrat. inw J IDH 'iTi Gen. 19, 19 j bnj 266 D-i:i tTiin 'an Is. 42, 21; with adv. nbsjab IT : ■ T : I : 1 Chr. 22, 5 to make exceedingly great. To this belong the expressions: 'iTi !ns Ob. 12 to rejoice aloud, from mis- chievous joy (elsewhere !13 a'^n'^rt Is. 57, 4, Psalm 35, 21); but for' which b? rtS3 'an Ez. 35, 13 also appears. With b? to boast over one i. e. to deride him, to set oneself above Mm Ps. 35, 26; 55, 13; Jer. 48, 26 42; blS-rb?? 'an Zbph.2, 8 seeb- (a rein or halter of braided thongs). In the LXX and Onk. the vulgar expression for the same, wliich came into use in the Grecian period, was lil.SD^S, xgcusneSa, -Sov, which is prop, equivalent only to tr|33; and that was afterwards supplanted by ntt-'a (Jerus. Targ. I. and II., Syr. and Mishna) when it came into general religious use. — 2. festoon, an ornament on the capitals of pillars, though a chain-work (ni'i'ttSnttS ntosw) not twisted, 1 Kings 7,17. '" " * ' '' bia (with suff. ibn-J, once ib^l) m. greatness, magnitude Ez. 31, 7, but usu.- ally in a figurat. sense fame Dbitt. 32, 3, exceedingness Num. 14, 19, might Ps. 79, 11, majesty Dbut. 5, 24 &c.; Mb '3 Is. 9, 8 insolence, pride. Slbia (from b'rS; as nbll-l also was IT ■.. : '^ it' it : used, the usage fluctuating and nbl'is being sometimes written) f. same as b'la greatness, majesty, of God and men, 1 Chr. 29, 11, fame Ps. 145, 6; in the plural mighty deeds; reputation, consequence, EsTH. 10, 2. iT'DT^ (Jah is great: bl.^l constr. of a it : - : ^ " r: form bTJ = bi^a, comp. TiCJ]? and "jup^) n. p. m. 2 Kings 25, 22, for which in"'bl.!| also stands in Jer. 39, 14; Zbph. 1,1: ^liT^pTta (the same) n. p. m. Jee. 38, 1; 1Chr.'25,3. Tlb^3 n. p. of one of the five mu- sical sons of Heman 1 Che. 25, 4 29, probably forming along with the names of his four brothers (ijy inM7g'"i1 "'nbia niNnnM T^nin inib?3 'i". e.' I have dealt out fame and victorious help; I have spo- ken oracles in fulness) an old prophetic saying with which an oracle began, whose words were applied as names to the five; the tone itself pointing to this explanation. DHil (not used) trans, same as anp (Ci^lE). Ar. |.tX=», jjais &c. to cut of, to fell, to destroy, annihilate. With the insertion of S (see a>) Pih. Wli to pj 267 IIJ overthrow, to lay waste, whence the proper name Ci5>'i.5. But see ^^i. |1j) (not used) tr. same as dl.j; see na n. p. TO., see fi'S'i.?. J^IJl (/m«. y^V]) tr. to cut of (= 5>T.5 , Arab. s.d^, cognate i>1'' I.), «o /eZZ, a tree, Is. 10, 33 ; to break asunder, a staff Zech. 11, 10 14; to destroy, a city Lament. 2, 3; to break, the arm (!y'"lT) 1 Sam. 2, 31, i. e. the posterity, being the strength of a family, for which however the LXX read S'nT; to shave of, the beard Is. 15, 2, for which in the parallel passage Jeh. 48, 37, stands TiV^St which is also critically correct. Comp. the Ar. P15 {pause y'la ; fut. 5>'ia^ , pause tl^'l) f° <'"* asunder, to overthrow, a'':ttn 2 CsR. 34, 4 7, Q'^b^DS Deut. 12,^3, d'l'lljJN. 7, 5; to break in pieces, the bars Is. 45, 2; to break of, the horns, i. e. to destroy the power, Ps. 75, 11. Puh. 5>13 to be cut down. Is. 9, 9. liyrS {feller i. e. warrior; comp. Is. 10, 33) n. p. of a shophet or judge. Judges ch. 6-8, who was also named bsa'i^ (which see). Qj'ra {desolation, from tii_0 n. p. of a place at the entrance of the wilder- ness, on the way from iiUliM Judges 20, 45. LXX Fsda-v {^'i^), consequently from "[li = Dia. But probably from yiA. ''33?'7a (= liSI-?) n. p. m. Num. 1, 11. n*!^ (Kal unused) tr. prop, to cut into, to hurt, Ar. ijtXjs*, oj^, Syr. ^r^ &c. ; then to reproach, mock, revile. Derivative iis'na. P'^- ^|I-5 (part. t\'im) to revile, to blaspheme, particularly ' God Num. 15, 30; 2 Kings 19, 22; to despise, by deeds Ez.20,27; cognate in sense q'nn. Deriv. 111?' ^g?-?- The organic root of this stem is tj^-s , which is also found in ii-s'n with a IT T similar transference ; comp. Sanskrit tap, Pers. tdf. 5]^3i {pi. D'^eil.S, constr, "^Si^) m. see na^H {pi ni-) f. see lnBl15. IT •.. • ^*^ ' ' IT • *Tlil (fut. TiS';) tr. prop, to enclose, to hedge around, to surround (comp. Tirt, Tl5*, 'nai*. iri3), hence to enclose round rr ' |- T ' r T^' about, e. g. n'nsjt Job 19, 8, 'jj'n'n Lament. 3,9, so that one cannot go out; like all verbs of enclosing it is construed with 1i»a 3, 7. ^1S 'a to build a wall r : ' 1"T T around, to surround with a wall, either to hinder the invasion of enemies, Ez. 13, 5; 22, 30; or to shut up Hos. 2, 8. Metaphorically to wall up, yis a breach in walls Is. 58, 12; Am. 9, 11. The Part. pi. d'^'i'ia 2 Kings 12, 13 masons is a de- nom. from 'ni.l. — The stem is in Ar. ^ ^ ^ l"T ^ ^ ^ \iX^ (to surround) and ^c^^ 1. 11. IV., the idea of shutting out being second- ary; the organic root is 'nl".1. Derivat. ^t; , 'n^.5 (belonging to 1x5)! nnn.? , n'i'ii ; the proper names TjS (^l-J n''a, 'I'ISN), ■ni-ii, ^ia (iin.1), rrna, n^'ria, DTiiMa. viv' 1: ^ 1;''' IT":' •*:' T I": "T75 {constr. ITj, comp. b'n5>, ISS; with sm/. i'lX^, ^Z. Tj^p-, !7''p.") COTOOT., properly what hedges about, encloses around, hence 1. a wall, to keep off enemies Ez. 13, 5, or to shut up Hos. 2, 8; about a vineyard Num. 22, 24; Prov.24,31; abouttheliin of the temple Ez. 42, 10: 'i TOa to build up a wall, to ' ' T ITT ^ protect a city Mic.7,11 (opposite 'a yp3 Is. 5, 5, Ps. 80,13), and figurat. Eccles. 10, 8; a fence Ps. 62, 4. Here in all cases 1^} is a noun, properly a part, activ. — 2. a walled place Ezr. 9, 9, where ll.l stands for Til-I; comp. Ar. i"T IT * mj 268 n:i jji>&. (a place protected axound by a wall). — 3. (fortress, from Tia = T'l-l) n. p. of a city in Judah, in full form ins-rr'a 1 Che. 2, 51, but the Qmtile i*pi 27, 28 after the original form. The expression, in the second and third sense, was usually in Phenician equivalent to the Greek tscxog, therefore 'I'l.l (Plin. 4, 36: Poeni Gad^r, ita Punica lingua septum significante; Avien. v. 268: Pu- nicorum lingua conseptum locum g a d d i r Tocabat; Hesych. rddsiga' ru nsQicpQa- yiiaia) or l^aN (with Alef prefixed, in the Berber wall, borrowed from the Phe- uiciau) is still preserved in inscriptions as the name of many places. So a) Agha- der (Tias*.) n. p. of a Phenician colonial town in the province of Susa in Africa, in full form Di13ln Tijn (Carian for- tress) KaQtxov rsixog (in the account of Eanno in Periplus), out of which arose afterwards Agurem. b) ^"li^. (Gadir, Agadir, Gades) n. p. of the city Gades on the west coast of Spain. Deriv. "T15 {on\jpart.pl. d"''l'i3) denom. from ITJ, to make a wall; part, a mason, SKiNGS 12,13. Tia (fortress) n. p. of the metropolis of a small Canaanitish kingdom Josh. 12, 13, between IS'i and Jia-in. Per- haps it has been preserved in 'i'i.5 h'^ya (Taanit. 20"), which is called'm 'the New Test, and elsewhere bia?? merely (MaySaU Matth. 15, 39). As "the con- struct of IXJ , consult the word. TTS or ^i'1.5 1. (fortress; comp. Ar. pItXa. wall) n.p. of a town in the moun- tains of Judah, in Jerome Oedrus (10 miles from Diospolis) Josh. 15, 58; 1 Chr. 4, 39 ; at the present day the ruins Gedur are north of Hebron (Ro- bins. Bibl. Ees. II. 338). But this is not clear. Another liT^, situated on a moun- tain on the other side of Jordan in Peraea is adduced in the Mishna (Sh'bi'it 9, 2) as being surrounded with a wall in ancient times; and the mountain on which it stood was called ^'[li ifi (Je- rush. there), in the neighbourhood of 'illDH 1!i (mount Machaerus). — 2. (en- closure, shutting up) n. p. m. 1 Chb. 8, 31; 9,37. SnTia (pi. ni'ina, n'lia, cowsir. nnna, with suff. TTi'll-Si) /. 1. a wall, as a " IT r r-' ' ' fortification, therefore figurat. fence Ps. 89, 41; hedge Nah. 3, 17 (which is made artificially); hurdle, caula, mandra, Jee. 49, 3, fully with ykli. Num. 32, 16, Zeph. 2, 6, or '[Ik'Sh Num.' 32, 24; Arab. ijiiy^ pen. In Hos. 2, 8 'Ttpi stands for WTi.!! and belongs therefore to *Ti.!i. IT": ° i"T — 2. with the article 'iiTi (the fortress) n. p. of a city in Judah Josh. 15, 36, 1 Che. 4, 23, different from 115, din-115, Tia, in whose neighbourhood was a city named diS>tJ5. Gentile TiTi.l 1 Che. 12:4. riiTl3 (wall-work; the plural should be taken collect.) n. p. of a city in Ju- dah Josh. 15,41; with the article 2 Che. 28, 18. 'I'na see 11.!!. I- •■ : l"T n"l'lS f. court -enclosure Ez. 42, 12, where 5 mss. read ni'm.!iM. See Ma ■'Jin. I ■■:- IT ■-: □IJlll? (double -fortress) n. p. of a city in Judah, Josh. 15, 36. 5!/nil (not used) tr. 1. to heap, heap up, to accumulate; Targ. llSlS (to measure in heaps), Syr.Ut^, >..»-. j_^ h eap, Ar. U*tX5 n., to which also lojLb- &c. be- longs. Derivat. iai'i.!| 1. — 2. to press together into a hill and make firm, comp. Ar. (j«i>L:& (firm, strong); hence tt5"'"il 2. The organic root is ffll-i| ; also found in ISn-y (which see). ' ' nil I. (not used) intr. to be deepened, hollowed out (within), to be bellied, arched, of a lowland, a marsh; hence •'!|, rta and perhaps ''5 in the proper name ^n"']-?-" "^^^ ^^™® meaning is in 1. the stem N3, whence N.j, according to some mss. for M;i; 2. the stem iiN.j n., en- larged from N3, whence n^iV; 3. the stem i«\5, whence N^a, N'>S,'^N-ij|.. From the reduplicated form of 'this monosyl- nj 269 labic stem arose the Aram. i'^A, riiS'^a butt, cask (comp. NS and aa); so in like manner there originated in a cognate stem lo, reduplicated l-ol-o, the nounl^-ooj: drinking cup. nil n. (not used) tr. is the organic root belonging to inirts , which see. na only in Ez. 47, 13, according to the LXX, Targ. Vulg. = !iT, as 47,15. Single mss. read N'^a , ■'a , ST'a (= N''5), sa, understanding jsZazn, valley, district, as the Syr. has U-J; but this does not give a suitable sense. nnil (fut. nrtS'') tr. to thrust away, to uiithdraw, to remove, e. g. IITM [a. bandage) Hos. 5,13; therefore the Sy- ■> riac and ancient interpreters translate to heal, parallel NS"!; comp. Syr. loi-^ intr. to flee, to remove. The organic root is na , At. X&. (to scare), reduplicat- ed JUSS\a-, and is also found in iij'lri 11., ns-; n.; Ar.^^^, Syr. l^-*- Hence nna (after the form IriNS) f. prop, removal (of a bandage), hence a heal- ing {Kimchi) Pbov. 17, 22 (LXX). More correctly with Targ., Syr. &c. = tnna body: a joyful heart does good to the body; parallel Q'na (the bones). But it might also be written for inrtB mitigation, or come from 'nTli after the Ar. X4a>-, to , . , ITT « • brighten up. inil (fut. ■ntiv) intr. to bow oneself down, to prostrate oneself, e. g. 5^¥1^ (to the earth), 1 Kings 18,42, in prayer; with Vi5» 2 Kings 4, 34 35 over some- thing. It is cogfnate with i^^-^i Hebr. '!?■?■ ' "la (with suf. ^ia, ':13a, ma; from iia i. e.' ia = ma) m. the back, particularly in the phrase ia iint* '^"'^l^f? to <"»*' **" Ami Di:i 270 mj appearance of the locust in swarms, gryllus gregarius. — 2. (= ih 2 Sam. 21, 18; hill-place, from as 1.) )2. p. of a place 2 Sam. 21, 19 , for which the LXX and Syr. have the synonymous ab (hill), and the parallel passage 1 Chb. 20, 4 in (sloping place). See ^S. ''5'i3 (•'r "'^-l i "'^ is a very old adject, termination, as in "'liVri, isiiun, "ilin) collect, m. prop, what collects in troops, hence a swarm of locusts, Nah. 3, 17: as swarms of locusts upon swarms of locusts; Am. 7, 1; comp. Targ. laiii and iJSSiJi (pi. def. ■•i^aiJi). JilJI (see Sii?3, SSN and saN) 1. «. p. of a. mixed race dwelling in the extreme north, comprehended by the Greeks under the name of the Scythiatis, thence trans- ferred — 2. to the centre and representa- tive of the race, to their king, Ez. ch. 38. 39. Gog comes forth from the distant north (38, 15 ; 39, 2), the prince of TJ5n^ , ■ijT^n, baw (and probably also of Oniri) with his army of cavaby (38,15) march- ing against the people of Israel, when he is miraculously encountered (38, 17-23) and annihilated (39, 1-8). In the later tradition which sprang from Ezekiel's de- scription, iiji along with iSiii represents the mixed population of tlie north, the Scythians and Caucasians &c. — 3. n.p. of the country of the people Grog, i. e. of the Scythians, but only in the Apo- calypse 20, 8, rdy together with Maywy, as it has become a geographical name in Arabic also. — 4. According to the cod. Samar. and the LXX, by saj* Num. 24, 7 is understood nothing more than aia, tradition (Sabb. 118) making the Messianic time to be distinguished by an antecedent struggle with Gog. 5. n. p. m. of a Eeubenite, 1 Chr. 5, 4. As to the signification of 5i.!i it ap- pears to mean mountain i. e. Caucasus (Pers. SyfKoh, Ossetie ghogh mountain, and even the classical name Caucasus originated in Koh-Kdf), since Caucasus was the chief seat of the Scythian peo- ples. The hardening of the last sound (A) into g (ffog homKoh) seems to have taken place early; and when the name had already become that of a people, the other names Siau, SSN (which see), Samar. aiSN, Gent. ■^aSisV^i*' i Ptenic. 1-:' i-T-:' I — :' iliN, also arose. Another explanation from the Pehlvi koka moon (see Grab- schrift des Darius p. 64), because they prayed to the moon, is improbable. A Semitic etymology is also possible. From the reduplicated form N?N5 (see N-l I, whence aJi) in the sense of to be high, overtopping, JiJi might signify a moun- tain, a summit; comp. Ar. jja-ya. (breast, of a ship, i. e. something heightened). Pig. this stem would mean gigantic, great of stature, powerful, warlike (cognate 1p."1)5 Is. 18,2); comp. Sanskr. kA to he mighty, kavi (in the VIdas, Pers. ^J^) Mng, mo- dern Persian ^j(k a v) warlike, valiant, in which sense the Amalekite name a Jit , aiSN , aSN , the Hebrew proper name Si-J, and the Phenician SiJN in the story of Ogyges may be taken, tn Gen. 14, 1 Symm. has taken lij for 5iJi , and trans- lated it by "Scythians". "Tlil I. {Jut. 1«J, ia;) tr. 1. same as- ITJ I. and TUt II. (which see) to cut into something, to scratch, to wound, &gu- rat. of a warlike troop, e. g. ypj> Gen. 49, 19 the rear, i. e. to inflict a 'complete defeat; hence 15, the Phenic. 1^5 (see la). — 2. Figurat. to press, with the ac- cusat. whereinto Gen. 49,19; to drive on in haste Hab. 3, 16; comp. Ar. J^. — 3. Metaphor, to decide, determine, mea- sure out to, of fortune, fate &c. Deriv. jt' i-T Tlil n. (not used) tr. to bind, to fetter; comp. Ar. 3li (to fetter), Si^ (to hinder), but especially the organic root in ia-N, l)?"^ &o. Deriv. "V^A. '' ' '"j^l I- (not used) intr. properly to be hilly, arched, gibbous, conseq^uently same as ms, Targ. as I., Ar. oL^, cognate with !T-aa, i>-S5 &c.; then metaphor, to- ascend and appear visible aloft, e. g. of the back or belly &c. Deriv. iJi (from flia) and n^fi, ".ia, inijia, the'proper name dill. mj 271 pj mil n. (not used) tr. to hollow out, to deepen, like as II., N-iii: deriv. IS ^ ' IT ' IT t' 1" (Aram. 1S). Comp. Ar. S^^ low country, Sya. deepening, recess. mil in. (not used) intr. same as iilp ITT ^ ^ It't to gather together in troops, to collect, Ar. ■ 55J&. (to call together, to collect); de- riy. ii^ 2. ma f- 1. hody, prop, belly, Job 20, 29, = ia 2., LXX amjj.a, Kimchi t|iJi , con- sequently from in.J I. More correctly, after Targ. (p-'p), Bashi ("nsn), Ibn 'Esra (!1s;^n) and others sheath, quiver, from T\M n. to deepen out, as ^1S (which see) is similarly derived. — 2.aliftingup, Job 22, 29 for when they are lowered, thou promisest lifting up {Bashi, Ibn ^Esra); in a bad sense: pride, haughtiness , 33, 17; figurat. sin, iniquity, Jee. 13,17. It is usually taken as an Aramaeism for fllNS, especially since ^IINS is in use; but 'rxM I. may even of itself be con- itt 'f nected with HNS. In Phenician lis (Gawan) =11^.1 (elevated) is the pro- per name of the old deity of the Byb- Uans; ia (majesty), hence the proper noun masculine I^^^IS (Givalius i. e. -iun, majesty of "Ely on). ma Aram. f. pride, Dan. 4, 34. ma (only pi. d-'jlJi, with suf. "rj^ia K'tib) m. a person, a being, consequently = ■'1)1 ; but only in pi. people, Ez. 36, 13 14 15. See -^Ss,. I nil I. (not used) same as TiM I. and aas (which see), Aram, aaa I. Deriv. na. nil n. (not used) same as fll.*! II. and nT ' ITT Aram, aas III. Derivat. Aram, (lis) 15, which see! Tia (after the formbip, tia; withsw/. ■'tis) m. refuge, perfugium, Ps. 71,6; i. e. place or person to which one flees. Tlil intr. 1. to flee, to escape, to hasten away, a collateral form of TW, lUltl; hence USiM T3 ■'3 Ps.90,10: for it (Qaril r IT r ' ' ^ IT : t their pride) quickly hastens away, refer- ring to rtSUi according to the LXX and Targ.; comp. Ar. ^U. (to flee away), ^L^ (transfugit), Syr. V^ to pass, to dis- appear. Deriv. 11.!). — 2. (unused) to fly, to soar away; cognate in sense t|iy, of birds. Deriv. Ti.J in its diminutive ^Tia. — 3. to go over, to cross, transire, water; cognate in sense 'nay. Deriv. ^Ti!|, nT.^. Nif. TiM (3 pi. i-Tiaa for lTia5,\s mss. still have it; the punctuators wavered between the stem r.l and t.s) to disap- pear, to hasten away, to flee, to be gone, and therefore according to the Targ. Nah. 1, 12 : though they be numerous and yet ever so many, yet they shall disappear and pass away (^asi). H^f- '^''}^ (only fui. apoc. ta'JI for Vj,-, because the punctuators had in their mind the stem T.|) cans, to make to fl^e, to make to hasten, to drive on. Numb. 11, 31: and it (the wind) drove forward quails from the west. Ptia {pi. with suff. I'^bTI-l) m. a young bird, formed from tiil with the diminu- tive syllable b- (comp.bli."), particularly of the young dove Gen. 15, 9, Deut. 32, 11, and also of other birds; Ar. J\y&., Syr. (transposed) V-^}, Pheni- cian bti.l (gozol), whence the name of a plant btis T'^ri (Azir-gozol, Apul. herb. 65); the Ar. uy=» (to coo like a dove) is denomi^. ITia {pass, ford, properly a place of passage, from Ti.S with the formative syllable )-) n.p. 1. of an Assyrian tract of land situated at a river of the same name (iTIJi), where there may have been a ford; 'hence fully 'a 1p3 1 Chr. 5, 26, named with nbtt, lian,' N1M (which I : ' I T ^ IT Y ^ see), to which 272 of the ten tribes in an earlier deportation, and afterwards the ten tribes 2 Kings 17, 6 and 18, 11 ('a adduced here as a territory with i^y '''ip) were carried captive. This river Gosan is the Kisel-Osen rising in the north of the Zagros and falling into the Caspian sea (iSiiier-, ErdkundeVIII. 590. 615). From it — 2. a city in Media between the mountain Chabor (viz. the Assyiiaxi KhabAr el-'hasanijja in Jakuti, to distinguish it from the Mesopotamian)- m 272 m^ and the Caspian sea received the same name, Fav^avia in Ptolem. (VI, 2) ; and the appellation may have been extended to a whole territory. It is a question whether in 2 Kings 17, 6 and 18, 11 'i ■''ly (along with ■'lU ■'15>) should not be read for I'm , and whether this terri- tory should not be understood; Jewish tradition supposes pT3a i. e. Gdzaca, the summer residence of the Median kings. — 3. n. p. of a country in Mesopota- mia, between the rivers '1^3 (Ptol. Xa- §digag, Strab. Id^oqqag, Aboras, Plin. Chabora, Syr. Kab-ilr &c.) and Saccoras, ravCavhig , now Kaushan, Is. 37, 12, 2 Kings 19, 12, mentioned along with Tin {KaQQcti, Carrae) in north-western Mesopotamia, and qit'i (Ptol. 5, 15 'P/,- adcpa) in Palmyrene &c. mil (imp. fern. TIJI for ■^na, as il»i'l = -'lai'n, ■'-!iN= ■''HIN) 1. tr. to send forth, to push forth, the fruit of the body, i. e. to bear, Mic. 4, 10, coupled with b^ll to be in labour; whence m. — 2. (unused) intr. to spring forth, to bubble up, of water; whence the proper names XT<\, lirfa. But usually in the -^'T- 5"'|!^^ (/w*. fliji;, opoc. mnv, inf. r!''.|! abridged from ti'^ain) to break forth (of an army), with yz of the place Judges 20, 33; to break' forth, of the sea Job 38, 8, evidently adopted from the image of the bursting forth of the foe- tus; to bubble up, to stream forth (wetter), with I through something, Ez. 32, 2: nnd tJiou burstest forth (with water-jets) through thy nostrils (tjinnrtia = ^''n'lnsa from rt'nri.i=M'nn5 Jbe.8',16, sing.'^e snorting, t^\. the nostrils), of the crocodile; with -Sn into something. Job 40, 23. On the stem n5 comp. the Ar. ^>^ (to spout forth water -jets), ^Ls- (to drive or push forward), Targ. ns (to break forth, of wind), Syr. .-^ (as the Hebr.) &c. The organic root is also found in ns-5. • 1" T nia Aram, the same, whence Afel nSN (part. fern. pi. ']n'^yq) to break through, of wind, Dan. 7, 2. ■'13 (a shorter form of ii5, whence f. n»l3,' as the Aram. i| from 15, 'n^'^- iTii^ out of niib from mb; with'aa/. .IT IT • J ITT ' . " ■;'i.l omitting owe Yod;- jjZ. d'l'ia, constr. ■'I'll, also Q''lii, as mss. read, with suff. 'r^lii Ez. 36, 13 14 15 from a sing. Hl> (which see), and d''\1 Gen. 25, 23 K'tib, Ps. 79, 10 with the omission of Vau quiescent) m. 1. (from !n.1 I.) the body (as the fem. iT'ii), prop, belly (cognate in sense Ipa), transferred to the whole body; figurat. being, person, even of in- dividuals, Gen. 20,4; 25, 23. See E|iJi. — 2. (from tiiji in.) prop, the connected, crowded together mass, hence people, populace, confluxus hominum, in the widest sense like QS (which see), and so a) o{ Israel Gen. 12, 2; Deut. 32, 28; Josh. 3, 17; 4, i; 10, 13; 2 Sam. 7, 23; Is. 1, 4; Zeph. 2, 9 &c., but i'^ "lia is never used for i'^ Qif; in the sense of inhabitants, citizens 2 Chr. 15, 6, Pkov. 14, 34, and so also Q-'lii Ez. 36, 13 14 15. b) most frequently a non-Israelite, but specific people Deut. 28, 36 49 50, 1 Kings 18, 10, also of a colonist race 2 Kings 17, 29; or of single tribes Is. 14, 32 (the Philistines), 18, 2 (the Aethiopians), Zeph. 2, 5 ; Jer.25, 12 &c. c) heathen people generally, hence with the accessory idea of enemies, oppressors, Ps. 2, 1 &c., in which sense it is op- posed to D? the Jewish people Deut. 32, 43; the pi. lD|;'i.!i especially is used in this manner Ps. 2, 1 ; Is. 42, 6. This view of 'a became usual in later times, the LXX, Ar., Syr. and others having taken it so even where Israel is meant d) a troop, flock, of animals, as of locusts Jo. 1, 6, of wild beasts Zeph. 2, 14, as d» too sometimes denotes, Prov. 30, 25, Greek sd-vog (Hom. II. 2, 87), Latin gena (Virg. Ge. 4, 430), Ar. x^l For dp.ia (in the pi.) as a proper name, see D^iii. JTia (from the masc. ^I.^ = tii ; c. TVM , with suf. in;n.5 ; pi. ni^i.?, with sujf. dp'iri-, ^?VJ''??") f- iody, prop, belly (like the Syr. \^^~x) and that sometimes living Gen. 47, 18, Neh. 9, 27, also supra-terrestrial Ez. 1, 11 23; Dan. 10,6; sometimes dead, a D^IJ 273 ]b)i corpse (cognate in sense "las 1 Sam. 17, 46, nb?:) Nah.3,3; 1 Sam' 31, 10 12; Ps. 110,6; also of beasts Judges 14, 8 9. D^ia (crowd of peoples, mixed people) n. p. 1. of a tribe in babs (which see), in the neighbourhood of Dor Josh. 12, 23, perhaps because a non-Phenician race had settled there. — 2. of a people in b"'b3 (which see), whence the ter- ritory' was named ti^M'n h-'hA (boundary of the mixed peoples) Is. 8, 23. In this Goyim-boundary was situated the city d""i)i>i ni;|"in Judges 4, 2 13, so called to distinguish it from another n'O'ltl.. Perhaps bab.? Josh. 12, 23 is identical with yb-J^'as nibib-! 18, 17 is with baba 15, 7. — 3. of an unknown tribe whose king bsin is mentioned in G-bn. 14, 1. Symm. understands by the word Scythian tribes (^Sxv&ai), without per- haps reading on that account diais (see m). — 4. of peoples in Asia minor and Europe whose lands are washed by seas and are therefore termed d'lj'N Gen. 10, 5; Zeph. 2, 11. i?1il (1 pers. ■'nba Is. 65, 19 ; fut. bia; K'tib'PROV.23,24; inf. bi? ibid. K'tib) intr. 1. properly to turn oneself in a circle, to go in a whii-ling motion, hence figurat. to exult i. e. to move round in a circle for joy, to rejoice Pbov. 23, 24 K'tib; with a Is. 65, 19 Jo rejoice over something; b\rbN (so all versions read for "bs, though elsewhere bs does not occur in union with the imper.) Hos. 9, 1, rejoice not, as the nations; yet one may take b'^a here rather as a noun, and the construction as in 2 Sam. 1, 21. Comp. ssn in a cognate fundamental meaning, whence Vn, As. JLs* (med. Van, to dance), z'ab. V^ in Ethpa. Deriv. b-ia 1, 'nV'i, nb\v — 2. to turn, to writhe', from"fear, like blO which is radically cognate (which see), to fear, to quake, but only in Hifil; comp. Ar. Jka-j and the double meaning of IpB. — 3. to turn or move in a circle, to move forward in a definite circle, of time (cognate in sense ll'i); Ar. the same. Deriv. b''a2, b^ri ba- (=b^a) in proper names. — 4. tr. to surround, to enclose, a district, in which sense ba stands else- where (which see); comp. 1313, whence 133; Ar. Jfc& circumference. Deriv. b^S, lib.;, 'ps, fi>^a (n^a). The common form in use is Hif. b'^atl (in the abridged form b-^a; fut. b^i'^,' apoc. bjS.;, ba|n; inf. Va K'ri out of b^ili) in the sense of Kal, as often in middle-vowelled stems (see "jia, ail, DliB, nilB, n^j, t\*a &c.) a new Ka!l, as it were, is formed by this shortening: l.to rejoice i. e. joyfully to move in a circle (hence it is stronger than nuto, tolto, 151), either absolutely Ps. 32,'"ll; Ze'ch.' 9, 9; Is. 49, 13; 65, 18; or with 3 of the object, in which one rejoices,' e. g. Wl'iO'^a Ps. 9, 15, lona 31, 8, ^^■3, Is. 41, 16, Tiba:? Ps. 149,'2 &c. ; very seldom with b? Zeph. 3 17. — 2. to serve God in a solemn, religious dance (comp. aan), an intensive of ia5> Ps. 2, 11, where, however, ac- cording to some, the 2 signification belongs. — 3. to turn oneself, with pain, to mourn, with bv over a thing Hos. 10, 5, parallel b|?N; b-'a appears to stand there as = b^p in order to have an assonance with fiba. nbiS (prop. part. fern. Kal of tlb a , to denote the collective idea or the abstract, hence without a pi.) f. 1. a company of banished, exiles, captives Ezb. 1, 11; 9, 4; Jer. 28, 6; Zech. 6, 10. — 2. cap- tivity, exile, banishment, e. g. 'at! ^bSi Jeb. 46, 19, 'an ■'53 EzR. 4, 1; Ez. 12, 4: as the going forth into captivity; 1 Chkon. 5, 22 until the exile; EzR. 2, 1 the cap- tivity of exile; Nah. 3, 10 &c. Connected with verbs 'a Nisri 2 Kings 24, 16 to lead into exile; ' 'aa N^J Jek- 29, 16, 'aa ^bn 49, 3 to go into exile; 'ana anzi EzR.' 6^, 21 to return from exile; 'Sin bp)> EzR. 10, 8 the congregation of exiles. See nba, rtbia under rtba. 'ibia (from biSI 4; circle, region) n. p. 1. of a Levitical free city in liBa (which see), belonging to the territory of Ma- ^ 18 VD1J 274 mj nasseh Dbut. 4, 43, IChe. 5, 56, Josh. 20,8K'ri, for which theK'tib has in the two latter passages lib-l (which see) ; Jo- seph. (Bell. Jud. 1, 4, 4) FavXavri ; called by Euseb. nwfii] fisyiar);, and situated, accordinig' to the Talmud (Menachot 9 ''), over against Vi'lp_,. — 2. of the territory- named after it, ravXaving, -avnig {Jos. ib. 4, 1, 1), divided into upper and lower Gaulanitis, designated as the eastern bor- der land of Galilee. The name is preserv- ed till the present day in ^ ^«^ (6'tilS,n), the appellation of a Syrian mountain. yaiS (for y^aa, part. Pu. fromyM.;, rejecting the m) m. prop, the deep- made, hence ^2i EcCLES. 10, 8; Targ. Y)ps>, fjanS.Syr. Iji^a^&c. pil (not used) tr. i. e. '].| same as ■)! to cover around^ to protect. Deriv. the proper name lilJi. ■'3 '3 {protected, screened) n.p.m. Gen. 46, 24. Patron. 1 Cheon. 5, 15. J71il {fut.i>ii1, inf. constr. S'-)^ and5>l3) intr. to breathe out (the breath of life), , j^XJa&., JLX^ &c. where the names for belly, back, body, are bor- rowed from such fundamental meaning. It may be, therefore, that 'nist I. and 11., aiji I. and n. &c. are connected. n lil n. (Kal unused) tr. same as 31i, il-Stl, ln-B3 &c. to enclose, to conceal, IT r' IT T ' ^ ' to encompass; comp. byr. Ma^ a net, i. e. what takes in, ^a-v^ to fish, to hunt. Bif :]i51-[ to shut e. g. rTinb"!; Neh. 7, 3; comp. the Talmudic MSSn.'fiSiaa. ' ^ ITT-:' IT : ilS^a/'. prop, a body, like the Ar. vj.^ but only in use for a corpse 1 Chron. 10, 12 for rt^ii.? (1 Sam, 31, 12); also in Greek in the same manner Ssjiag, omfta. &c.; Ar. SuLl^ a corpse. ll'a a ground-form to V'niJi, which see. "lia {pi. d^liia and ri'ni)i; with suff. T'n'i'na ; from 'nna V) m. a whelp (of the lion) Jee. 51, 88*; Nah. 2, 13. The noun ll-J I. usually stands for it. "Ilil I. {fut. TiS^) intr. to gather them- selves together, to crowd together, with a hostile design Ps. 56, 7; with b? against one 59,4; hence fig. (like tjON') to turn (into a house), to lodge (as a stranger), peregrinari, to dwell Gen. 35,27, Judges 17, 7, particularly of a "1.5 Ex. 12, 49, of individuals Euth 1, 1,' Is. 23, 7, of whole tribes Ps. 105, 23; also of animals Is. 11, 6. In this sense, it is construed either with % of the place where Judges 19,16, Ps. 105, 23, with D5> of the pers. with whom Gen. 32, 5, ' with the ac- cusat. of the object Judges 5, 17 or of the person Ps. 120, 5 , or with -riN of the person Lev. 19, 34 and also ';jina 16, 29. n^ja ^i Job. 19, 15 a domestic, a slave, coupled with riMN ; according to the LXX, Jerome and others a neigh' bour (cognate in sense yytS), as the fem. n:a nia Ex. 3, 22. ^''•'btiNa -iia Ps-. -:?^ays proceeded in the language from .15' 1 7o dwell in the tabernacle of God, mj 275 ^U i. e. with God ; in the same manner '\Dili (Ps. 68, 7) is connected with the accusat. of the place where, Ps. 5, 5 the evil man does not dwell with thee. Deriv. fiTisn, JT :' ■nil, T^a, ri'l'^a, perhaps ^S, TI.J (also in proper names), 'Ti:i53, ^1151373, the proper name IIS"'. IT Eithp. "Ipiann (fut. Tlian';) to sojourn, to lodge, with W with 1 ^isas 17, 20. Jer. 30, 23 and Hos. 7, 14; see ^15 11. The organic root of this stem is also found in IJ-N, Aram, 'na-', 1i-T &c.: the transition from the fundamental signification to gather together to that of going into, turning in, is also in t]DN. "llil n. (fut. 'n'l^j) mir. prop, to turn oneself, to shrink back, but mostly in the definite sense to be afraid, with ^12 Dbut. 18, 22, ■'235? Deut. 1, 17, 1 Sam! 18, 15, Job 19, 29, or the accusat. of .. . Dbut. 32, 27; to be concerned, ameious, with b about something Hos. 10, 5, parall.'b^i<. In a good sense, to have reverence, awe: i'' ^iz of Grod Ps. 22, 24; 33, 8; Job 41, 17. Deriv. liM and'ilW, STliSJ?. — A farther develop- ment of the stem is presented by 'nil"'' (which see). Sithp. TliJirifi to be anxious, to he afraid, with b?" (after the Syr.) of or on account of a thing Hos. 7, 14, parallel ''^''^2';) l"it the LXX and mss. read l^lijirirt with reference to 1 Kings 18, 28; the old interpreters have taken it in the sense to gather themselves together, with relation to Dbut. 14, 1, Jer. 16, 6 &c. But the explanation already given is preferable. "Tlil ni. (Kal unused) tr. same as la (^'la) = ba to roll, to turn round, of round, heavy things. Deriv. "lia in b'nia. D'liai Prov. 21, 7 and iri"iai Hab. 1, 15 see under Tna. Hithp. 'I'n'ianSi to whirl- itself upward, to whirl, of a whirlwind Jer. 30, 23, hence cognate with bbinnlri. This meaning of the stem may pos- sibly be combined with 1ia H. ; but the natural separation of the stems and a reduction to their sources is preferable to an union which is only too ingenious. "Tlil IV. (fut. ina;-, inf 'ri.j) intr. 1. to glow, to seethe, to boil up, to ferment (comp. 'TIS HI., Ar. _jU , of the boiling of wrath, the burning of hunger, thirst &o.); hence figurat. of the seething and boiling of unslacked lime (see "la). — 2. same as iTia and the cognate TiS: to be angry, to be zealous, to be exasperated, absolut. Is. 54, 15 behold they are very zealous (against thee), but that does not come from me; or with "nsj against, ia-ia "rjriN whoever is exasperated against thee Is. ibid, erroneously taken by the Targ. and others in the sense of to gather to- gether. — 3. tr. to stir up, to incite, to kindle, e. g. strife (according to the Targ.) Ps. 140, 3, if we should not rather read 1'ia-' (from the Pihel !T^a). it: ^ IT"' TIJ V. (not used) intr. to such, of young animals, properly to moisten, to draw in moisture; comp. 'tis* IV. (whence T;^) and the organic root in ia-5 (to flow out). Deriv. the noun 11 a 1 I- T \. J I and na. l^ia I. (from 1>ia V; pi. d'^lia, D''ia, 1 ^ I ' * r i"v' with suff. STilia) m. same as lia , a young animal, that sucks, generally a whelp, catulus, particularly of the lion Ez. 19, 2 3 5, in full form rtlJlN 1ia Gen. 49, 9, Deut. 33, 22, Nah."2, 12, distinct from T'SS, an animal which is some- what grown; seldom that of the "jn Lament. 4, 3. The same appears in dif- ferent forms in Arabic {G'urw, G'irw, G'arw) and Syriac {Gdrjo, Gurjo, Guro), and is also applied to other animals. "n^l-l II. (from lia I.) m. a dwelling, a hospice, hence 1. bsa lia (hospice of Bdat) n. p. of a city in Arabia 2 Chr. 26, 7; comp. Phenician 5»a-l.!i (forbyai?,) proper name of the island Qirba (in Li- byan, Meniax), and at the same time the name of a city there (in the Peutinger table Gerra, in Ptol. IV, 3 rsQQa). — 2. Iia-rtbya (height of Gur-ba'al) n. p. of a place 'not far from 'a'sh'^-\ (which see) 2 Kings 9,27; 1ia is here shortened ' 18* bi)^ 276 W from b?a "Ti-J; comp. Phen. 1i (Gor), proper name of a city in Africa. bnia (co«««r. bl-, with suff. ■'b'niJi; IT ("■ " r T I ^Z. nib"iiJi) J». prop, a little stone, small and round (from "115 a round pebble [^1.1 III.) with the diminutive termina- tion b-) for casting lots, like \pf/q)og (Babbinic DiS"'DS), 1. lot, in a general sense Lev. 16, 8; 1 Che. 24, 7 &c.; in dividing an inheritance Josh. ch. 15-19, booty Ps. 22, 19 or otherwise Josh. 17, 14; 19, 1. To cast lots is expressed by '.1 Ti-'bart Josh. 18, 8, iiT' 18,6, b-'sn Is. 34, 17, b"'l2fiPK0v. 16,33, H'T] Jo. 4, 3, ipS Lev. 16, 8; with b? of the thing upon which the lot is cast Ps. 22, 19. Passively, the lot is cast is expressed by bsj Jon. 1, 7; the lot is drawn by b? '■I'inbi' Lev. 6, 9, b '5 Nlf' Josh. 19, I ITT ; ITT ' 10 ; to divide by lot by 'Sa pbn 1 Chr. 24,5. — 2. the portion that falls to one (by lot) Judges 1, 3; figurat. destiny, portionFs. 16, 5; Dan. 12, 13. See bpf 'j■^ia(asiffrom'^^J) m. K'tib Jee. 2, 25 for 'j'i'ia (which see). jyiii (not used) tr. to heap together, to curdle, to draw together into a lump, of a clod; to make firm; hence 8515, 1231^, the proper name ■jizjia. — The or- ganic root in u5a is identical with that in 1253-'! (which see), comp. Ar, i^La. (to collect, to put together); a farther de- velopment of the root is in iBaa (which see), Ar. (jikA&. &c., perhaps after tt5i3 had preceded. The meaning to search out in the Syr. v-^a^ is connected with the Hebrew tt35 (u5l25.!i). But see I25i2:a. tb*ia m. prop, clod, lump, of earth (root «5l3), crust of the earth; figurat. a small ball, a little lump, i. e. a boil of the leprosy, which makes the skin ashy-gray and lumpy (comp. the ex- pression: glebam in os iniicere) Job 7. 5 K'ri. T5 (not used, in combinations TA; see f?4 = T35) m. treasure. This form of the noun , at the basis of the late Hebrew •Tjtsa (which see), appears in forms in the Targ.,Talm., Syrian, Zabian, Armenian, Persian, Pehlevi,Zend, Sanskrit &c. ; and as the word is not found in Semitism tUl late and then comes tlirough the medium of the Aramaean, it can only have been introduced out of the Aryan tongues. For that we have the Sanskrit gandsha (treasure-house), Zend, ganza, Persian gindsh, Pehl. gandsh &c., in all of which n is unorganic, and g changed into z (see a). This form of the noun then passed over into Aramaean, after a Persian transformation of the a-sound. The original form without n inserted, also penetrated in many ways into Ara- maean, most of all into the classical languages (Lat.^'a^^a, Greek j'ctfa); comp. Hesych. Fi^a naga Ilsgaaig ^aaiXsiov, i] 01 ex tmv noXXoiv qisQ6[isvoi cpoQot. Curt. 3, 13, 5. T3 I. (constr. pi. i-n) m. 1. a shearing, of I'iiS Deut. 18, 4, to53 Job 31, 20, i. e. the shorn wool, vellus. — 2. mea- dow-shearing, mowing, i. e. either the young shoots that remain after the mowing (Kimchi) Ps. 72, 6, or the mown grass itself; "TibMIri 1i the king's mowing. Am. 7, 1, i. e. the early mown grass be- longing to the king. Ta n. (constr. pi. ■'t55 with n in- serted) m. treasure, Esth. 3, 9; 4, 7; see Aram. li. T3 (in compounds; def. NTS; in Bibli- cal Aramaeism only in pi. T'tS.H, def. N^jtsa, with n inserted as a compen- sation for Dagesh) Aram. m. treasures, where the incomes of tribute and taxes were laid up, Ezr. 6, 1, which were also deposited in the archives. N''Ti5 rr^a Ezr. 5, 17 ; 7, 20 treasury, ya^oqividxtoi'. This form of the name is also found in the late Hebrew iT35 (from Ma), in the compound late Hebrew word 'lata, with the total disappearance of the sharp sound in the Aram, 'lata, in the Svriac .ttyx 7 X ITT" rf lr=>>*^, -1^. But besides this form there was also another, t.J (which see), in use, to which belong Tiya (which see), Targ. and Talm. Nja, 'Jyt. ]\{, }f}^ (Barhebr. p. 425), 15° V\ &c.; and all forms may be traced back to these two. "131J 277 □U "13TS m- a {reasarer, Ezr. 1, 8, comp. Syr. ir^i"^- It is compounded of T-J (shortened TS) and 'na (see lan^O- "13-T3 (only ^Z. Vl?!-?) -^osn. m. the same, Ezk. 7, 21, Syr. ir=>H: The first part is from NTS = NT| (see t.|;); in Pers. as in Pehl. the same word occurs with n inserted. mil (not used) trans, to cut, to hew (stones), whence rfTH; comp. Aram. "'TJ;, Sjr. i_t'f.^(to shear, cut), Ar. |ys. (to out in pieces, divide); consequently it is merely a farther development of T.^ (TT-I); ■'t^5 Ps. 71, 6 and the proper name Itia belong to M.J. n-Ta {constr. n-T.^) f. = T3 shearing. Judges ch. 6; in full form 'lUStrt n-M 6, 37. n'Ta (= TiT''5 from T &c.; but the or- ganic root is DT-.1, which occurs else- where. Deriv. Dia. P«. on (not used) figurat. «o swagger, to exaggerate; comp. Talmud. Nnt-i-J hy- perbole, aiT.? exaggeration. Deriv. the proper name DT|. nn 278 m^j DT3 m. a devourer, a kind of locust, IT r mentioned along with 3''pti and iiS'iN Jo. 1, 4; 2, 25; Am. 4, 9; according to the Targ. btiT (NbttT), i. e. the creep- ing locust, without wings ; according to the Syr. Ha_»io (the stripping off); ac- cording to the LXX xdnnti, cater- pillar. □■T3 (swaggerer) n. p. m. Eze. 2, 48; NEa'?, 51. ■^Jta from iih (which see), as ■'5'i>''«J from nb'^V}. J?7il (not used) tr. prop, same as 5>13 to cut down, to fell (trees), but also equivalent to iita to hew; also to lop of the branches, so that the trunk alone remains; comp. the Ar. £cX^) ^V^' ccXa- &c. Deriv. S»T.J. yra (with sm/. i5>T.5, Q^TJl) m. prop, a lopping off of branches, concrete a tree without its branches, a trunk, a stock. Job 14, 8; then generally a stem, Is. 11,1, even a newly-planted one 40,24; At. cJl»., but Syr. liio^for Hebrew ^)5.'2) ^- "^W a part torn off, cVa. a stock. 1^^ (/"««. 'nn^ imp. ^fX; fut. ITS'; only in signif. 2) tr. 1. to cut down, to fell, wood 2 Kings 6, 4; to cut in pieces, to divide, lb; 1 Kings 3, 25, a; Ps. 136, 13; «o consume, like bj?N, with accus. of the object Hab. 3, 17; VHJ-b? 'i to con- sume on the right hand Is. 9^ 19. Accord- ing to Nifal and the derivatives it has also the meaning to destroy, cut off, yi:i from something; to be shelving, of a territory; to be burst, rent, by heat; to sepa- rate, a hall &c. — 2. to decide. Job 22, 28. Deriv. 1T5, TT^n, rxy\%, the proper names 'in, -^jt}, (nS|:,, nSp., tip^i.^). Nif. 'iTW pass. 1. to be cut off, sepa- rated, i. e. to be excluded, "fa from a thing. Is. 53, 8; 2 Cm. 26, ^l\\p^ 'in? 1^ Ps. 88, 6 to be excluded from the hand (i. e. the guidance) of God; absolutely, and with the addition of the dativ. com- modi Ez. 37, 11: we are cut off i. e. ex- cluded (from the agency of God); to be lost, Lament. 3, 54. — 2. to he de- creed, determined, Esth. 2, 1. Hif. T^nn (not used), whence tTTraM. The stem 'a, identical with 1^)?, Targ. ^\Si, Syr. JT-^^, Ar. »y&.j and the trans- posed forms T'15, y"l)5, Ar. \ys>- &e., is clear in its fundamental signification, so that the collateral senses easily flow from it ; and for that of decree, the ana- logy of the Aram. pDS , usma , Ar. ^-^^ &c. may be compared, where the idea proceeds from that of cutting. The or- ganic root, however, which is also found in 'lia n. (to saw), 'nit 2 &c., is 'nT-5, IT ^ " I- ' I- t' 'isr-ft. r 't "iTHi {plur. Q'^'lta) m. 1. a piece, part, of sacrificial animals Gen. 15, 17; figu- rat. a division of the sea Ps. 136, 13. — 2. {precipice, a steep place) n. p. of a Phenician royal city between Beth- H6r6n, Lydda, and the Mediterranean Sea Josh. 10, 33; 12, 12; 16, 3; after- wards a western border-place ofEphraim, and assigned to the Levites 21, 21. De- stroyed by the Egyptians, it was restored by Solomon, 1 Kings 9,15-17; while in David's time it was in the hands of the Philistines 2 Sam. 5, 25 (in 21, 18 ah stands instead), 1 Che. 14, 16. Euse- bius determines its distance north of Nicopolis to be 4 miles. Afterwards it was called with a fem. termination niTA {Eus.\ rrax (1 Che. 14, 16, Jos., Straho), M^T.5 rdCiiQa 1 Maccab. 7, 45. "iTa adj. m. see !TiT5. I" T " IT" : "Ita see i^T!|. ••■I" I- : • "ITS {part, hn, pi. ■)"''nT!i, def. a^^lSt) . 1 : i"5 -^ ' i-.mt' ' iT-:iT'' Aram. tr. = Hebrew ^\% 2., to decide, determine (the fate), hence in Dan. 2, 27; 4, 4; 5, 7 11 &Jemmer'"l;of fates), astrologer, with tiiON, DUin, ■''lias and D-iSiri. This in exists also in'lnilN, which see. Deriv. NIT.5. 1 -^ : -: Ithpe. iT-^nN (3 /em.' ninriN for nlT5- comp. nius^" Dan. 5, 10)' pass, to be' se- parated, torn away, with ']73 from some- thing Dan. 2, 45, or to tear oneself away 2, 34. " •Tnta see Tr-S 2. n^in 279 niT3 f- 1- properly cut off, divided, hence a secluded place, separate place, Ez. 41, 12-15; 41, 1 10 13; LXX to unoXo 1710V, what remains (of the temple buildings). — 2. cut (of the body), out- line, figure, form, metaphor, body, breast, face, forming the cut of a man, Lament. 4, 7, as the Targ., Syr. &c. understood it; Xiomp. 5Sj5.. Ar. sya* the same. !S"1T5 {constr . ITTT^) Aram. f. a decree, sentence, fatum, Dan. 4, 14 21, parallel insa; comp. '|i'nTa the art of sooth- saying. n-lTa see 1J)i. 2. ITT : ••'• niia (26 mss. hare tTn^.a) /. prop. adj. fern,, to yiN (from sing. ITS) Lev. 16, 22: a land separated (from cultivation), i. e. a desert (see !i"it-0) LXX yrj a§a.rog, Vulg. terra solitaria,' hence 12"ia is used for it 16, 10 21 22; Ar.^^^ unfruitful land. Comp. Phenic. iTlTS (Grisira) n. p. of a city in Africa (Ptol.). Improbably bare land, even if "iT.i , Ar. \y=^, allows this meaning. 11T5 (prop. Gentile of IT-j) n. p. of a heathen race in the south of Palestine, mentioned with 11123 and Egypt 1 Sam. 27, 8. The GUzrites inhabited the land of Dba (LXX in the place) at the southern border of Palestine as far as 1TO (which see); and this district may have been called IT-J. ni (with suff. ■'HS) m. a bursting through, from the mother's body, birth, Ps. 22, 10: for thou wast since my birth (ina = Tljia ; yn is omitted on account of its repetition in '3)3) from my mo- ther's womb. nnJl (not used) intr. to bow oneself, IT T ^ to bend oneself; whence perhaps ^iri-l, which see. Ar. l.giL>, ...La- the same. ■jina (with suff. ^im^ m. prop, the bent, bowed, therefore the belly (from bending) of creeping animals. Gen. 3, 14; Lev. 11, 42. This noun may be derived from nni, Ar. L^v^ (to bow oneself); |m liit'i, and the stem-jna, Targ.-|nj, Syr. ,0^;^^ &c. might be looked upon as a de- nomin. See, however, ]ns. THi! (unused) see nna. ''TnS (diminisher, denier) n. p. m. 2 Kings 4, 31; 5, 25; 8, 4; elsewhere ■'Tn."'.|i stands for it. It is usually con- sidered to be a compound of ■^TtTiji {valley of vision) ; but it may be also an intensive form of TUs = ian3. . r T r ' ?n^ (not used) intr. to glow, to bum; cognate, the transposed !ibp. But here ch is only a hardening of h, and the Ar. J..g^ (to be heated, zealous, angry &c.) is cognate with btiS (see ins) ; this h again is only a hardening of the interior a-sound, so that the organic root prop. is gal, also found in Tl-bp, Ar. J^i'. Deriv. bn*), nbn.si. ins (for bfl.1 after the form Ons; pi. IT v ^ IT - IT ■■• ' ^ D'^bna, constr. ■'bn.1, with suff. T'bna, r T IV ' (■• ~:r ' " IT T IV ' iTibtlS.) /. a burning coal (of wood), which was employed for cooking, baking, or burning, Ez. 24, 11; Is. 44, 19; Prov. 6, 28; the relation to Dtis (black coal) is clear from Prov. 26, 21 ; but lUN ■'bna ' ' I" ■- -:r usually occurs Lev. 16, 12; Ez. 10, 2. Figurat. lightning, 2 Sam. 22, 13; Ez, 1, 13. 's ffli<1-b3> '.!; Mnn Prov. 25, 22 to : I - V IT T ' _ discharge coals on the head of one, i. e. to make him ashamed. rb ns (with suff. Tibna) /. the same, Is. 47, 14; 'S'HN fias to quench coals 2 Sam. 14, 7 is proverbial, i. e. to destroy the last shoot. Dnil (not used) intr. to glow, to burn, then metaphor, like fill &c. to be heated, burned, blackened; comp. Arab. |vSX&. Derivative ona (blackness) n. p. of a son of Nahor's Gen. 22, 24, and thence of an Aramaean dark-coloured race. ?nil (unused) intr. to bend or bow oneself, deriv. litis. The stem is written in Targ. IpS, Syr. ,oil^, and that it was consequently 'S would have the form of I also the Arab. ,j"^S\s» we see from the nnJi 280 ^^•J plnriliterals formed from it (comp. (%*^ to be contracted); but the organic root is lO"!, also found in i*-53, Aram. in-n. '^See also fina. 'r : IT T "inil (not used) intr. same as "fni to bow down oneself, or same as ^■, Wjja, though cognate. — 2. with the article ■'.lijf n. p. of a place in the plain of Moab (iSjia nnis), where Pisgah rises, and at which people arrived from niaa or b»3 niai (which see), Dect. 34, 6.^— 3. applied in designations of places , as also njy)?a, pay, bria. The following are met" with: a) OStl-i-J. (valley of whimpering, Josh. 15, 8; 18, 16, in full form San-ia \|! Josh. 15, 8; 18, 16; 2 Chr. 33, 6 or nbin-'i;:; \^_ 2 Kings 23, 10 K'tib (see dSlri'-ia) k. p. of a valley south east of Jerusalem, where children were sacrificed to Moloch,, whose proper burning place was called nsn (which see); this valley is also termed accord- ing to the LXX simply N^an (the valley, with the article) Jer. 2, 23. Afterwards the name was contracted (N. T. yssvva, Targ. Dsna, Arab. ^X^ &c.) and re- ceived a farther meaning. — b) la ?'''l|?'5Q'3 (valley of craftsmanship) n. p. of a place near Tb and iaiN in Benjamin, Nehem. 11, 35; also written &ii25^n N''.|i 1 Chron. 4, 14, whence it is evident that it belonged to Judah earlier, -whose inhabitants were actually crafts- men. To name colonies or places from crafts (in wood or stone) appears not ■unusual, as ril^';irt in the circle of Jjeathenism (ti'pi'n bijs.j). — c) -nns'; la bN (valley of'El-Phtah; see Mns, nns^) n. p. of a valley in the north of Zebu^- Ion, Josh. 19, 14 27. — d) o'^'iasin ■'5 ' €j . rr—.n i- (valley of the Abarim- mountain; see D'^'lS^.) n. p. of a valley of mount 'Aba- rim by which it is formed, running from west to east, over against the sea. This valley, which is called perhaps in Zech.14,5 l3'''irt"Vl, is described by Ez, 39, 11 as fii'nSSrt "iJi valley of nomadio troops, of the Scythians, whom he calls ai-isb 39,11 14. — e) Q^aSIrr '5 (valley of the wild) n. p. of a valley at the Benjaminite city Q"'yaa (Neh. 11, 34) 1 Sam. 13, 18 ; there was also there a place Q''|!>32?1p (Mishna Challa 2, 10). — f) nbWrt-i.H (valley of salt) n. p. of the Ghor adjoining the great salt mountain two miles and a half long Chasm Us- dum ((.cXM/f |vw.=>), at the south of the Dead Sea, dividing the territories of Judah and Edom, 2 Kings 14, 7; comp. Robinson, Palest. 11. 483. — g) D"'1tT"'Ji (valley of mountains) a symbolic and pro- phetic name of a valley, formed by the cleaving of the mount of Olives (8 stadia from Jerusalem) into two parts, from east to west, and termed nbins N''5 IT : I" Zech. 14, 4 ; the two halves of the moun- tain arising from the formation of the valley, are to give way towards the north and south, through which great valley sti-etching to bltiS! (a pause form of bits) people will flee from the earth- quake 14, 5. — h) 'jrrri iji (vallmi of the oracle) a symbolic and prophetic name for the lower city of Jerusalem, where Isaiah and others before him an- nounced oracles. Is. 22, 5. ''j (for ""Iji, and only in the pi. Q'^'^a) see '^'\i. I N''il (unused) tr. same as mJi 11. and ITT > ' JTT Ina. Derivative Nia. IT ;r N'^a (an abridged segolate form for N^a from N';! = m = M1.5; pause »■)%, constr. NVJ., after the analogy of '^i;'pl. niN"'5 K'tib 2 Kings 2, 16; Ez. 6, 3; 1 Sam! 17, 3; but N^.5 17, 52 is for n.|i, as may ^"'J 281 ^m^j be seen from the same verse) f. a valley, same as ■"]! 1 Sam. 17, 3 &c. — N>W is a) Num. 21, 20, Dbut.3,29 and 4, 46 the name of a valley at Pisgah, over against 1153 n-ia; b) 1 Chr. 4, 39 of a valley not far from 'n'lJi; c) Jer. 2, 23 of the valley of Hinnom. d) 'sri "iSia Neh. 2, 13 15; 3, 13; 2 Chr. 26, 9 is the name of a gate of Jerusalem in the west wall. — In compounds it appears in 1. xi'ST] N"'a Nbh- 11,30, or Dbti-ia N-'S Jer.7,'32 &c., see ia. — 2. diTflnn N-'Ji 1 Chr. 4, 14, see ■iji. — 3. p;i|n N13 Is. 22, 1, see \i. — 4. nbHn N''5 2 Chr. 25, 11 or "ji N'la 2 Sam.''8, 13,'"Ps. 60, 2, see r^ — 5. ^-^i rtriBS {watch-valley) n. p. of a valley in Judah not far from M;l3-1M 2 Chr. 14, 9. IT "IT ' — Figurat. B''i5312;-N\5 {valley of fatness) Is. 28, 14 a designation of Samaria; Ni-J nainn Jer. 7, 32 and 19, 6 Jerusalem is SO named as a silent field of the dead; aia yn'!2. ^'^^. {valley of the tumultuous multitude of Gog) a symbolic and pro- phetic name of the valley where Gog's armies will perish Ez. 39, 11 15; l!«\|i niabS valley of darkness i. e. fearful valley Ps. 23, 4. H^t (contracted from NV^) f. same as N';| and only in Zbch. 14, 4; more fre- quently in plur. niN''5 K'ri 2 Kings 2, 16; Ez.6,3; with suf 'r[''niiS\|i 35,8. H!^^ (abridged from N''.|i) f. same as N''a Is. 40, 4. Elsewhere the form fT'N.si appears, which see. T^S (from T15) m. a band, sinew, vein. Gen. 32, 33 of a sinew; of the veins of the body Ez. 37, 6 8; Job 10, 11; 'S ins Job 40, 17 nerve of the testicle. Eigurat. btna '| an iron band {of the neck) i. e. an inflexible neck Is. 48, 4. Comp. Targ. 1\!! , Syr. l|-«^ sinew, tendril, denom. liJi to divide the sinew by cut- ting; Ar. dJs (fetter), iijLs>. neck-rope. i3T''a seeriT.!!. IP • • rT'il see niJi. ri'^a {water-fall) n. p. of a place not far from IrriSN n:sa.5 (which see), on the way to the wilderness of Gibeon 2 Sam. 2, 24, for which the LXX, Vulg., SynMn., Theod. read N\i. 'jirr'a {stream; from ni.j) n. p. 1. of the second of the four rivers of Para- dise which flows about the entire land of laiSi and its source -land y^y Gen. 2, 13. yiV (which see) as the original seat of man (2, 15; 3, 23; 4, 16; Is. 51, 3; Ez. 28, 13; 31, 8; Jo. 2, 3) was a de- lightful locality in the east Gen. 2, 8, which may be determined more exactly by the geographical description of the four rivers. According to Josephus (Ant. 1, 1, 3), Kimchi and others, and as it ap- pears also, from the LXX, Jer. 2, 18 Ben-Sira 24, 37, it means the Nile, which flows through all the southern lands (\S13) that fall under the narrator's point of view. Hence the historian must have thought of the origin of the Nile in Asia, which is possible from the accounts in Strabo, Arrian and Pausanias. The Semitic use of Gaihun for the Oxus or Araxes {Jakut in Golius), for Pyramus in lesser Armenia and Cilicia {Abulf. Ann. II, 44), and for the Ganges (see Belaud, de parad. §. 17), has led interpreters to other explana- tions, without however enabling them to solve the paradise -riddle by to the relations of countries and peoples now well known. See Bertheau: die der Beschreibung der Lage des Para- dieses zu Grunde liegenden geograpM- schen Anschauungen, 1848. — 2. a name of the Nile, Jer. 2, 18 LXX, as the sense of the place requires; comp. Sir. 24, 37. — 3. name of a fountain on the western side of mount Zion 1 Kings 1, 33 38; 2 Chr. 32, 30; 33, 14; it formed two pools, the upper Gihon, iden- tical with the upper pool in 2 Kings 18, 17, and the lower. Is. 22, 9. The upper Gihon is still called so {Robinson I. 512). Altogether different is the fountain trbilS at the south eastern de- clivity of Zion in the mouth of th& Tyropoeon {Robinson I. 493-seq.), which the Targ. incorrectly puts for it. ■'Tn'^a see nns. 1--: 1" I--' ^^J 282 b:^ Til see 31.*. h^tt_ (after the form V';)!, '7^5?) m. a revolution , of time , a generation , hence = li'i; only in the proper name fem. ^^a-ilaN 1 Sam. 25, 3, for which the con- tracted form ba (comp. lljy, 1I5^»), shor- tened into ba, ako appears. b'^a (with 5m/. ib\|!, 05b''a) m. 1. ea- uUation, joy, an apposition to rtnailJ Jeb. 48, 33; Jo. 1, 16; figurat. 'a'Vin Ps. 65, 13 of hills, to get a joyful ap- pearance; ibi.^ nn^aia 43, 4 for '^nria'ia ■'b'^si Is. 16, io. ' ^ut b\^ Hos. 9, I'is an imper. — 2. a revolution, of time, a generation, an age, = 11'^ ; metaphor, age, Dan. 1, 10 tAe ioys, those of your age, as Theod., the Vulg., Syr., Ibn G'anS,ch &c. understand it. Comp. Ar. Joys», Sam. b'^a (for Hebrew 'li'i , Greek ysvea), b''^ in the Mishna &c. — 3. a tomb, tu- mulus, lengthened out of b.l = b-l Job 3, 22. '" ilD'^S /. same as b''5, exultation. Is. 65, 18. np'^S or Ji'b.^ {circle, region; it stands for ')ib\5 after the form liSin, liSTi) n. p. of a city in the mountains of Ju- dah, in the neighbourhood of Hebron Josh. 15, 51; 2 Sam. 15, 12. Deriv. the <}entile ij'b-'.i 2 Sam. 15, 12; 23,34. np''3 (n- an old feminine termina- ■1- r tion) f. same as Inb'^i Is. 35, 2. IT • ' rS'^S (from y^Si ; protection) n. p. m., 1 Kings 16, 21 22; comp. 131.!;. Tia (from llJi IV.) m. see 'IS. T'3i (dc/l N^'^ii) Aram. m. same as Hebrew 15 Dan. 5, 5. a5''a m. only in Job 7, 5 K'tib, and €q[uivalent to «5ia. laj'^a (from 1Z51.J ; firm, strong) n. p. m. 1 Chr."2, 47. pa in the proper name bs'^ax., see ba (pause b5; ;?Z. diba, constr. ibsi, with sm/. (jj^i^s, vba, drt'^ba; from bba) OT. 1. a heap of stones, by way' of honourable memorial Gen. 31, 46 48 (parallel ti!3S?3 31, 51) or ignominious one; in full form Q-'SiN b.1 Josh. 7, 26; 2 Sam. 18, 17; hill of stones about which roots wind themselves Job 8, 17 ; which is prominent above the furrows of the field Hos. 12, 12. — 2. a heap of ruins, ruins, a heap of ashes (parall. tibsa) Is. 25, 2; Jee. 9, 10; 51,37; Job" 15, 28; a^bl D-'Jti 2 Kings 19, 25 and Is. 37,26 waste ruins. It seems also to have the mean- ing hill of the dead; at least b'la = b5 (b.^) Job 3, 22 has this sense. Tor the proper name Q'^bs see the word it- self. — §. a spring (parall. T'Sa) SoNG OP Sol. 4, 12; wave, billow, Jon. 2, 4. To the roaring of such waves are applied liN-j Job 38, 11, ]i?p!i Jee. 51, 42, lijSuS Ps. 65, 8 ; comp. the Coptic -s-oK (fluctus). ba in the proper name ba'^lai* see b''Ji. ba (after the form ba, from bb.J, but only with suff. or in the pi. and in the resolved form ibb-H, d'^bba, constr. ''hb^; comp.ibblt, '^'p'lis', d'nVp from bs,S\|i, 'Itl, therefore without any reason for assuming a form bbs) m. 1. prop, a heap, what is heaped together (see ba), hence a dung -hill, a dung -heap, Zeph. 1, 17, parall. ia5>; with the addition DINtl riNJt ■*^ IT T ' IT T IT I- .. men's dung Ez. 4, 12 15, which, like di^iBS: (cows' dung), was used for fuel in a country without wood (Plin. H. N. 36, 59; Liv. 38, 12); comp. bb-J, Ar. xl^ , Targ. Nba , bba , Talm. b5 = ns^N. — 2. a tomb, in the lengthened form '&"'5 Job 3, 22 ; see bii. — 3. same as b-ibs 2 stubble, chaff. Job 20, 7 like his stubble he vanishes away for ever (see Ps. 83, 14; Job 41, 20 21; comp. Targ. Nb5, Syr. IL^ in the sense dust, from a like fundamental signification); but Nack- mani (followed by Wolfson) explains it turning (comp. bb.j 2) and translates: scarcely does he turn, comp. Phot. 12, 7. The explanh,tion already given suits better. ba (only with the suff. rtbji cruise for oil, oil-vessel, Zech. 4, 2, from its round form. See bb.1. xijj 283 I^J^J S^a {part. isb|, seldom nVj, part. pa««. ''hi, ■'bf , where a is treated as a guttural; inf. s\m) Aram. tr. same as Hebr. tibJi , prop, to bare, uncover, hence to discover, to communicate, to reveal, e. g.l'n Dan. 2, 19 28 29 30 47, Nnp-'725> 2,22. "' '"' Af. see "hi. D?3 (not used) tr. to cut of, to shave off, the hair; comp. Ar. ^iXa. and iJLa. , Hebr. r|bn, Syr. '-^:>^ &c., but also Ar. i_aJo>. to draw off, hence i_iJLa. ex- uviae. The organic root is ab"-'' i f|b"n. The intrans. idea to be bare, waste, is only preserved in the proper name Siaba enlarged by 5>. Deriv. 3b3 (jpl. Q''itbs) m. a hair-cutter (in constant employment) Ez.5,1 ; Syr.^.ai:»^. (the same); Targ. ab.5 shears. ySbSi re.p. of a mountainous tract inls- sachar, where there was not only a moun- tain (6 miles from ']NiJJ-n''a) , but also a place of the same name (Eus. Onom.), and where Saul fought his last battle with the Philistines and fell 1 Sam. 28, 4; 31,1 8; 2SAM.1, 6 21; 21,12; 1 Chr. 10, 1 8. At the foot of mount Gilbo'a lay the cities DJlllJ and pSN (which see), not far from one another (1 Sam. 28, 4; 29, 1). At another point of the moun- tain rose a fountain {yv), Tubania, now En-G'alud, reaching to the town of Jezreel, and it was here where the Israelites pitched their camp; this foun- tain was the Dor-fountain ("niTV?), at which, in the valley of Jezreel, stood the town En-Dor, put by the LXX for X'V. A village Gelb6n now lies at the back of the mountain {Bohins. Pal. HI. 157. 170). — As to the derivation, the word is sometimes considered as coming from ?iS3"b| (fountain of ebullition), on ac- count of the fountain Tubania springing lip at its foot (']'^y"ai£3), sometimes as = Sas QiilC) with I inserted. But it has pro- bably arisen from aba (which see) with y for the final sound (see SS'ia, SiB^a &e.) in the sense of bare mountain, bare moun- tain-land (like Cl^T'^.!l from T^5 = abJi). Comp. thePhenician yaba (Gilba, Gilva), proper name of a Numidian city, as well as Npa proper name of a city in Africa (Poiyb. 1, 74). ba^a {pi. d''b5b|, with suff. vS-) m. 1. prop, what turns itself, revolves, hence a wheel, particularly of a kind of war-chariot that rolls along rapidly, poet. = as'i Is. 5, 28; Jer. 47, .3; Ez. 23, 24; 26, 10; a water wheel Eccles. 12, 6, on which the rope of the bucket winds; the wheel-work of the heavenly chariot-throne Ez. 10, 13, yet more pro- bably here whirlwind (as in Ps. 77, 19) in which the thunder resounds ; the whirling of wheels Ez. 10, 2 6 ; the whirling of dust i. e. what is driven about by the whirl- wind(chafO Ps. 83, 14, Is. 17, 13, parallel f fa (comp. Ar. J,=, , Targ. Nb.? , Syr. U^). But it had also the signification sphere, as TQoxo? rijg ysveaswg (James 3, 6), Syr. &c. the same; in which sense interpre- ters (Luther, Coccejus, Eosenm.) have taken it in Ps. 77, 19. bapa {with .su/f. •'Jlibsbs) Aram. m. the same Dan. 7, 9. ?aba {constr. b-^ba) m. 1. a wheel, of a threshing machine Is. 28, 28. — 2. (usu- ally with the article; with a of motion inb.iibJifi) n. p. of a city between in"''T' and Jordan (50 stadia from Jordan, lO from Jerusalem, according to Josephus) Jos. 4, 19 20; 5,10; 9,6; 10,6; 14,6; 15, 7, in whose neighbourhood was QiNbr? 1 Sam. 15, 4, for which the LXX read 'S, ; once '.^Jri nia Nbh. 12', 29. Under Samuel there was there the tabernacle, the place of assembly, the legal worship and tribunal 1 Sam. 7,16; 10,8; 11,14; 15, 21 33; afterwards prophets dwelt there 2 Kings 4, 38 ; and frequently diere was also an organised heathen worship in the place Judges 3, 19, Hos. 4, 15; 9, 15, Am. 5, 5, occasioned perhaps by former heathen inhabitants. — 3. (ac- cording to Eosenm., Win., Maur. and others) n. p. of a Canaanite royal city be- , tween Dor and Thirza, where the dwell- ers consisted of a mixed heathen people b:h:i 284 rhii (ai.iJi) Josh. 12, 23; probably also the name of a district belonging to it. An- other Canaanite district in the vicinity, where the chief population also consisted of D'l.iJi (which see), was called ^''b.J Is. 8, 23, where lay liiari, IIJI)?., Qi'HKi ■>», n^'nn (which see) and other places; on which account the LXX have iden- tified it with b"'Vl J as tiey have also in 1 Maccab. 9, 2 both Gilgal and Galil. — 4. n. p: of a city, six Roman miles north of Antipatris Deut. 11, 30 (comp. Gen. 12, 6), still known to Euseh. under the name of Galgule, and accurately de- signated by him. — As an appellative it has been translated etymologically a) place of a heap of stones, a monument of stones, with reference to Josh. 4, 19-24, especially as the twelve me- morial stones might be connected with the heathen worship of the aborigines, comp. 13 b.^ Gen. 31, 47; perhaps also from the circular form in which the twelve stones were set up. b) a wheel- shaped height, consec[. =bib|, if the city, was really built on a height; comp. the great and little wheel in the Eiesenge- birge. c) With reference to the ety- mology given in Josh. 5, 9, explaining the interrupted passover-feast, Josephus translates it (Ant. 5, 1, 11) sksv&tQiov. But more probably it is circle, district, like the cognate in stem b"'b.1 (which see), nib'^b.^ Josh. 18, 17 also standing for bSi)s'n 15, 7, and b'^b.? Josh. 12, 23 according to the LXX;" subsequently b|5^a (see Euseb., Jerome, and the an- cients) was_ pronounced bibii (roXyml, Golgol). InPhenic. comp. b.'ibV''N (coasi of the circle) n. p. of the city Igilgili (lydplei Ptol. 4, 2; littus Igilgilitanum in Amm. 29, 5, 5; now Gigelli in the neighbourhood of the river Ampsaga in Algiers); bshi (Gulgol) n. p. of a Phe- uician settlement in Cyprus. bilba see bibli. paba see b-iibs. "^IT : r it: • nbabSi (with suff. in'plba, pi. with suf Dnb^^.?; from )>):_&)' f. "head , shill (of a man), cranium, (so called from its I round form) Judges 9, 53; 2 Kings 9, 35; then figurat. a single person, in- dividuum, like the Latin caput, German Kopf, English head, and Hebrew llSii'T (Judges 5, 30). 'iS adv. by the head, for each head, Ex. 16, 16; dn'blbab /or ' ' ' ' JT : : •- ; ' each person, viritim Num. 1,2. — On the noun comp. the Syr. l^'-^^f^i Arab. x«^'^) in the N. T. roXjo&S. (xgavlov Tonog, calvaria), where sometimes the first, sometimes the second I is elided; and the reduplicated form of bba forms the basis. ""l^il (not used) tr. to crust about, to cover around, to enclose, whence Hbi. Comp. dbv, £3bp in their original signi- fication, and Latin clad, whence claud, &c. ; nbn 1 especially is cognate with it. iba (with sufi'. ■''lb -5) m. skin, prop, the covering of the body Job 16, 15 ; Ar. oJU*, Targ. lb.5) T'V! &c. the same, and the verbs there are borrowed from it; hence they are denominatives in the sense of "to draw off". n?il L (inf. abs. ribi, constr. nibn;. ITT ^ ' it' I : ' fut. Tihil, ap. bai) tr. prop, to make bare, naked, bald, therefore in the fun- damental signification = nb5 (to scratch off, to shave), hence 1. to make bare, smooth, polished, abradere, polire, of a writing table, a metal plate for a look- ing-glass &c., perhaps cognate with b| in Aram, bbs; whence 'ji''b5. Comp. Ar. (.^.Sk, S^k and also ft^^. — 2. to make bare, uncover, the shame, the face, (see Nif.), hence fig. to lay open, to un- veil, liO Am. 3,7; Peov.20, 19; to com- municate, to make known Esth. 3, 14, with b of the person, or with the ac- cusative 's iji* (-nt«) 2 Sam. 7, 27; to reveal (of God) 1 Sam. 9, 15; seldom b |TN 'a to open the ear to one i, e. to make him susceptible of something Job 36, 10, or by (10 something 36, 15; to open, Q^r;? NiM. 24, 4 in a spiritual sense = to have intuition; to open, 'IBO Jee. 32, 14 (oppos. &nn); sometiniea also without 'nso 32, liV VI" ' nby 285 n^j Nif. rtbai (Jut. Mba^) pass, to be un- covered, unveiled, 10^ Ez. 13, 14, ni'lDb ban 2 Sam. 22, 16J 'o-'biilS Jbh. 13, 22', tlTlSEz. 23,29; figurat. to J« discovered, of cr5>tt53Ez.21,29, rtplJS Is.56,1: to .become known Job 38,17, nibsaii Deut. 59, 28 Job 12, 22;'to"Mrem7 20, 27. The object usually stands in the accusat., rarely with b|? Lament. 2, 14; 4, 22. Puh. tlb.1 (part, tibsa) to become mani- fest, to be 'open Prov.' 27, 5; to be dis- covered, after she has concealed herself Nah. 2, 8. Hithp. nbann (fut. ap. ban^) to un- cover oneself GtBN. 9,21; figurat. to r«i;eaZ ■oneself, to disclose oneself Prov. 18, 2. n!3il n. OV- «*«• tl'ba, constr. nibS; ITT ^ ' it' » : ' imp. n^a; fut. fibs';, op. bj";) ira '^- >^ba an emigrant from home, i. e. a stranger (parallel I'pss) 2 Sam. 15, 19, where for ■Jjaipab the'tXX, Vulg., Syr., Ar. and mss. read'a?3; D^ba ewiles Am. 6, 7 ; paH. fern. Mbia the banished Is. 49, 21. Very seldom does the land stand for its inhabitants Judges 18, 30, Am. 5, 5, Jer. 1, 3, yet often in the prophets, without one being able to give the fun- damental signification a reference to the land. Deriv. nib a, tibia. IT' IT Nif nba: (fut. ap.br) reflein. 1. to turn itself down, b? upon something, Is. 53, 1 : and the arm of Jehovah, upon whom did it turn itself down? i. e. who has felt its omnipotence ? Am. 5,24: and let judgment roll itself down (ba'JI, as the Targ., Syr., Jerome read, but referring it to inba I. ; the punctuators read ba^T and derive it from bba) like water. — 2. to depart, to be removed, with )^2 of the person Is. 38, 12. Hh. nba {imp. apoc. ba, fut. ap. ba^) to roll down upon, to hurl down upon, with b? of the object i. e. to punish Lament. 4, 22 , parallel 1)5S Lament. 2, 14; to hurl forward, to roll forward, with "ntja from one Is. 57, 8, where the preceding ■ji'iST is the object; to roll along, like the billows of the sea in fulness so DibiS n'npy Jer. 33, 6 (comp. Is. 48, 18; 66, 12'^ !Am. 5, 24); to roll away from, with b?a of the person Ps. 119, 22; to draw away, to take away, tjOJi ns Is. 22, 8; to drive away, 1115 Is. 16, 3. Puh. !iba to be driven (into exile) Nah. 2, 8 ; but according to others from !iba L Hif. nban (or also Thi'rt, in all forms IT : ••■ ^ , IT : ■ ' of the perfect; inf. mbatt and with pre- fix a with the absorption of He; fut. ap.'Sy) causat. to drive (into exile), to lead away, particularly great masses 2 Kings 25, 11; Jeb. 52, 28; with ac- cusative of the object, and accusative or -bN of the place whither 20, 4 ; Ez. 39, 28; with p: of the place from which 29, 4. Hof fhiTi (3 /em. after the Aramaean manner nbatl; part. pi. &'')?'? = '^'2"> ■M) n^j 286 'nb:i pass. Jer. 13, 19; 40, 1. Deriv. the proper name iba"'. n'lpa see nVa from Tsl-J. nsS (formed from Vij) f. 1. same as 25 oil-cruet, oil-vessel Zbch. 4, 3 (per- haps also rnVJi 4, 2 should be taken for STrnV-j, as as'iinHos. 13, 2, Ms Paov. 7,"8,''DnB Neh.'S, 14, Cim Ps.'49, 15, a'niaa 55, 16); figurat. aiHTn nba Ec- CLES. 12, 6 oil-vessel Cs.'m as Zbch. 4, 12 =^JiJ£^ oil) i. e. giving to the body the nourishing flame of life; comp. Copt. ReAwA cruet. — 2. cruet-shaped form of capitals (ni'^ins)) 1 Kings ch. 7; 2 Che. ch. 4, Targ. T^MN (basins), Syr. T-il^i. — 3. same as hi 2, only in pi. water-springs, in full d^M 'n))| Josh. 15, 19; Judges 1, 15. See ST^Ji. nba see lnbi!| from nbJi II. JT IT IT I nbS same as Aram. Nb.l (which see). Iba (coresij-. niba, Jer. 5o', 2. To serve them is called b» '& TWV Ez. 22, 3, 'jjrt-bN i^i^y NiaV'lS, 12' 'ill NMt?5 20, 7, 'a ^pnx rtDfe, 9, ma '5li-nN 23, 37, rtNMa^ '^'"rtiBS 22, 3; '5 15? 2 Kings 17," i2, 's, -l^nN rjbfi 1 Kings 21, 26 &c.; to tahe theik away IS expressed by T'Siijirt Ez. 30, 13, ^ip^i 1 Kings 15, 12, a^ri Ez. 20, 8, niii" 6, 6 &c. LXX {innrjSsviJia, diavoii'i^a, svd-vjiti(ia\ Targ. (xniSU) and Syr. have for it designations of nothingness; others have thought of bb.5, hi and taken it for a word analogous to bi;:T = baT. nibs {pi' constr. ''aib.5) "*• covering, mantle, nbdO '-5 coverings of blue purple Ex.27,24J'as Aq., Symm., LXX, Targ., Syr. and others take it, confirmed by the Targumie dbii, Q-^bJi, dbia, NMiba &c. The explanation that diba is = dbs /■aw stMjf i. e. cloth merely woven but not yet coloured with nbsn, has no foundation in the old versions and in- terpreters. Iib| (from bl.J after the form lint, fish) is twice in K'tib for ibi-l, which see. nipa (from nb.!| XL; also rhi; with T T ^ IT T ' n T ' suf. lba) /■. a carrying away, exile, = n|^i.!| Ez! 1,'2; 33,21, bat usu- ally concrete, exiles, nab IB '5 Am. 1. 6 ■^ , IT •• : T ' the captives in full number, referring to Jo. 4, 6 ; tiim^ 'ji the exiles of Judah Jer. 24, 5 ; •^^•2 '.5 Is. 20, 4 ^^"l^ Josh. 5, 9 ; Ps. 119,22; with "bsj to roll forward to 1 Sam. 14, 33; to roil upon Prov. 16, 3^ Ps. 22, 9 (where iS'i^ should be sup- plied) to roll his cause upon one, comp. Aeschyl. Agam. v. 174 ano cpQovtido^ ai&og ^alsXv; to roll down Prov. 26, 17; to drive or push out (excrements), hence bbii 1; to roll about, chaff, dust, hence br3, b5b.*i. In this signification bi is connected with Mb 5 11., comp. Ar. J.s» (to wander forth). — 2. (not used) intr. to turn, to move round, to move in a circle (cognate in sense SSD)) to whirl, to circle, hence blbii, b^b-J, riyb-^, nbaba» baba, baba; to heap together, to roll to- gether, hence ba 1 and 2 ; to roll, to float, of the waves, hence ba 3 and Inba 3, the proper name nbs; to be circular, b!5j 288 D^J round, of a cruet, kettle, hence bba 2 (see bii 2). iVj/. bs3 (/■««. V-i^) a. also. — 3. (great j important; see bbJi) n. p. m. Neh. 11, 17; IChr.9,15."' b^a see b5. b 53 .4ra»». m. (according to Ibn Esra, Kimchi) prop, the revolving, rolling (of fitones), hence heoMness, weight, '.5 ■jSN EzR. 5, 8 and 6, 4 stone of heaviness, i. e, a heavy, large stone, hewn; perhaps (as in Talm.) stone, whence bl^3 (which see) ; comp. Ar. JouLa. , J^ &c. Accord- ing to the LXX, Ezra apocryph. and others prop, finely polished, well cut or polished stone, mar-JZe, frombS=!ib|, Ar. jo» to polish, to make smooth. "^bba {weighty; see bb.1 3) n. p. m. Neh' 12, 36. D^il I. {fut. Q'ba';) 1. tr. to wrap to- gether, to fold together, ri'n'^N 2 Kings 2, 8. In its organic root, I3b".!| is closely connected with that in db'S, fib "3, .ab"n &c., and from this fanda- r T ' 1- T ' mental signification has been developed to be rolled together into a firm ball-shape mass, to be hard, firm (see InMbfiN, niabri and dbs). Deriv. aba. — 2. intr. IT- r T -^ ••• I to be rough, unformed, undeveloped (see Sbll); Talm. of an undeveloped, uncul- tivated, rough man; fibs SiBSIS a woman not yet bearing, fruitfnlness being con- sidered as her development. Derivat. iiwba. Dxil n. (not used) tr. to veil, to cover about, Targ. tlbii, whence N?3''bl, Ar. ^^Jj^ in (_>LLls>- (cover) ; the same sig^- fication lies also in labj>, which see. De- nvat. 0155. — This stem is obviously a farther development of bi (to encircle, to enclose, surround) by means of m, or perhaps of ln-b5 (in )vhi_ a cover Is. 3, 23; comp. in another sense N-b3; the Talmudic "ivbi margin may be so named on account of its enclosing what is written) ; as the Syr. |f^^ (veil, cover- ing) and the stems in ;jA,a-fti5<,\ yla-vlg, %Xai-va (upper covering), old high Ger- man clei-t, high German Klei-d&c. shew. The organic root is d-b.1 , not connected with db5 I. , .'"^ a pa (with suff. ■'Mb.?) "i. prop, the wrapped together, rolled together, lump, i. e. what is riot yet formed and unfolded {to f'vtoe Pqvov), therefore (according to LXX, Symm., Vulg. &c.) the embryo, Ps. iD^:i 289 -|J?bj 139,16; comp. Talm. 6ba the undeve- loped, unfolded. nD?il see Ti?3ba. ,.. . . . I - TiTpba a4i- W-) STll^Vl f- l- unfruit- ful, of a wife Is. 49, 29 ; figuratively of night Job 3, 7, so far as no fruit of the body comes forth in it. Db.5. lies at the foundation of the word; and the Syr. I'-f' > '»^also makes the origin of it clear; and <2d is a very old derivation- syllable (see letter Daleth, beginning); comp. d.d in the proper names YlMS, TCST (which see), dd in IIB'IS (whence lililJ'IB), IS'lS (which see), "the proper name" 1?M?,' Aram. Ij^'iB from pl^B, Syr. ryi"^ (line, series) from ^r". — 2. Metaph. : desolate, waste, of £]3n r'lS Job 15, 34, i. e. without house and child; forsaken, solitary, 30, 3 solitary from want and hunger. In Arab, there are also the metaphors hard, of rocks, stony, of the ground, severe, of man &c., without this being the signification from which one sets out in tracing the rest; or without venturing to assume 155-1, (Xt^Sk as the stem. ^^i I. (Kal unused) tr. same as bs (farther developed by 5>) to roll, to roll forward, to drive (incessantly), to roll farther (see Hithpahel) ; cognate in stem Shp (to hurl forward). Hithp. 5>V5n^ to roll oneself forward, to move oneself violently forward, Pkov. 17, 14 before it moves forward with violence (i. e. before strife becomes irre- pressible) leave off strife; 18, 1 he rolls himself along (i. e. breaking through all bounds) against all counsel; 20, 3 and ^uery fool waves forward i. e. allows him- self to go on, and so provokes strife. This signification of the stem '.5 float- ed before the minds of the translators in the Targ., LXX, Syr., Vulg. and the old interpreters generally, and is also the one etymologically established (comp.bs, 3>b)?, nekl-Eiv, cell-ere); while the Arab. «Jta. is only connected with nb.!i, Jv^. vbi A n. (not used) intr. to be firmy strong, hard, thick; comp. Ar. JiXe , Jkic. (in the derivatives), and the organic root in Vd-;;, b3 &c. Comp. besides the Ar. <\*-Ls» to be hard. Derivat. the proper names isba and isb.s. 1J?^^ see 1»b.!|. lypa (strong, powerful, from 5>b.1 U., with the deriv. syllable dd; see Tiabs) I. (designation of a person) n. p. m. found especially in the tribes of Manas- seh and Gad Num. 26, 29 30; Judges II, 1 2; 1 Chr. 5, 14. Patron, i-isba ' ' i*T : • Judges 11, 1; 12,4. — 2. (designation of a place, rochy mountain), a) lyb.^il 'irt (Gilead-mountain), the name of a lime- stone mountain on the other side of Jordan, intersected by many valleys and fissures, and forming many plateaus rich in pastures. Gen. 31, 21 23; Deut. 3, 12; Song op Sol. 4, 1; 6, 5; Jee. 50, 19; Ob. 19. This Gilead-mountain runs through the territories of Eeuben and Gad as well as the northern province of Manasseh Deut. 3, 12 13 (comp. the description in Euseb. Onomasticon) ; and the present name of the mountain-pass south of pan from east to west, t>L«-ls>. or '(>.-, is still a remnant of it, without being altogether topographically identi- cal on that account. Judges 7, 3 'iBSt^^ TSb.lfl 'n!n?3 and shall goto their home from mount Gfilead making a circuit (1. e. torm- ing an arch in order to surround the position of the enemy, since return by the direct route was cut off by the en- camping of the Midianites in the plain of Jesreel). — b) '.^fl yiN (Gilead-land) name of the land nearest mount Gi- lead (comp. Num. 32, 1, Deut. 2, 37), in which ~I1V2 Hi?' T?- ^^r ' 'V'7 ''P? '^°'' particularly ^lua, were not yet included Deut. 3, 10 13; Josh. 12, 5; 13, 11; 17, 1; Mic. 7, 14; 1 Chron. 5, 16; but then it comprehended all north of the east -Jordan land as far as Jabbok, while the south, now Belka and AglUn, still remained excluded. Afterwards the name became wider, and embraced. 19 ni^^j 290 □J ■both the district of the tribes Eeuben, Gad and half Manasseh, andalsoBashan; i. e. it reached south to the brook Ar- non, north as far as mount Her- mon (G'ibl el-Sheich) Deut. 3, 8; 4, 38; 34, 1; Judges 20, 1; 2 Kings 10, 33. Hence it happens, that Gilead as a ter- ritory stands sometimes for the province of Eeuben merely 1 Sam. 13, 7; some- times for Gad especially Judges 5, 17, or for Gad and Eeuben together Ps. 60, 9 ; 108, 9 ; sometimes for the district of the 2V2 tribes Num. 32, 26; Deut. 3, 12-16; Josh. 12, 2 5; 13,11; Am. 1,3 &c. To the cities which received the apposition l^bs^ or Ij^b.^ belong niJpN'i Deut. 4, 43'^ "m-' Judges 21, 8, ^rv 1 Chr. 26, 31. The inhabitants were called 'S "^fOiS Judges 12, 4, or simply T?ba 12, 5.' iEven after the exile Gilead is mentioned as a geographical name 1 Macc. ch. 5 and 13; Josephus (Ant. 13, 14, 2; Bell. Jud. 1, 4, 3) puts together raXaadtrig or raXaSrjvri and Moabitis; but the name Perea is more usual. 'li'bn n. p. same as IS^ba , of which it may have been originally a colla- teral form; Scripture gives it a histo- lical origin Gen. 31, 41 and puts isb?- ^7il {3pers.pl. IllJba) I'rafr. (according to my Concordance) to stretch' oneself, to lie down, with ']73 at something (see ■]») Song of Sol. 4, 1 ; 6, 5 ; Ar. (j*IIs., cognate labn (which see). But this meaning hardly suits for a comparison of locks, and the LXX, Jerome, Syr. have taken the fundamental significa- tion to be either, to appear, to become visible, or after the Aramaean (Targ. i^,''rb-S>, Ar. (jaXi to leap down, nba see nibj;. I\ T IT , riSa (springs; comp. diba) proper name of two places in southern Judah. They were distinguished by nil?5> and rT'ririri in the singular Judges 1, 15, or ni^bs> and ni^nnn in the plural Josh. 15, 19; as Beth-Horon was by li''b^ and ■jinnn Josh. 16, 3 5. C3i (from das) 1. a suhst. m. (not used) the ground-form to 'rOii in tTaJa, Phenic. (Eryc, 2) rTaa, assembly, con- gregation; hence the proper name liibi'MJi (Gamalius i. e. Gamaliun, see Morcelli; Afr. chr.) i. e. congregation of Elyon; hence heap, Ar. aj?- heap, adv. Lis. in heaps. — 2. a conjunct, (as a subst. a putting together, annexation, addition, therefore a particle of addition), whose senses may be arranged in the follow- ing manner: a) also, simply adding to something preceding. Gen. 3, 6; 7, 3; 19, 21, therefore "'Si d| yea also Euth 2, 21 (see "'3); in corresponding clauses dS . . . da also . . . also i. e. as well . . . as i- r also, not only . . . but also Gen. 24, 25 ; Ex. 10, 25; 12, 31; 1 Sam. 17,36; Jer. 51, 12. Sometimes even, even also, i. e. the conjunction intensifying the idea in that part of the sentence where it stands, and consequently bearing a relation to something going before, which must fre- quently be supplied in thought, Prov. 19,2; 20, 11. In this strengthening of the idea its favourite place is at the be- ginning of sentences in the signification even, Prov. 14, 20; 17, 26; Eccles. 10, 20 ; with a negation or after one : tiot even, not so much as, 2 Sam. 17,12 13; Ps.l4, 3; 53, 4; dS t]N even also is stronger Lev. 26, 44. b) da increasing and ad- ding stands, for the sake of emphasis, with personal pronouns repeated: like- wise, self. Gen. 20, 5 and euen she her- self said, i. e. she said likewise, espe- cially when the personal pronoun is the intensifying of the suffix Gen. 4, 26; 10, 21; 27, 34; 2 Sam. 17, 5; 1 Kings 21,19; Peov.23,15; more rarely in the case of repeated verbs, in order to give intensity to the action, in the significa- tion even, really, truly, yet. Gen. 31, 15; 46, 4; also merely for emphasis and for laying stress upon a thing, before nouns, Judges 5, 4, Jo. 1, 12, Lament. 4, 15, Job 15, 10, very seldom put after ^DJi 291 i?iDj them Gen. 20, 4. c) comprehending, not simply adding: together, e. g. D5"';i2i-D3 doth together, uterque. Gen. 27, 45;' "DS DnV.«5 Pkov. 17,15; 20,10; bS) Da even all together Judges 9, 49 ; 2 Sam. 19,31; EccLES. 7, 21 ; particularly before num- bers. To this belongs also !in»-D.5 now also, yea now, prop, yet even now, which suits in many passages Gen. 44, 10; 1 Sam. 12, 16; Jo. 2, 12; Job 16, 19; nn3>"D| !iai and what now (takes place) 1 Kings 14, 14. d) adversative : even then, even so, i. e. yet, Ez.l6, 28 ; Eccles. 8,12 ; Ps.l29, 2, which is merely a consequence in the position of the clauses, e) confir- matory: eoen, indeed, much, Gen. 29, 30 and he loved even; Hos. 9,12; Job 16,19. ^?Dil (Kal unused) tr. 1. to draw to- gether, to bind together, to collect, con- sequently from the organic root N-MJI, which is also in DJ-N, DJi (fiaii), At. *♦&. &c. Deriv. Nah. — 2. as an en- largement of the idea: to draw in (water), to suck in, to sip in; comp. Targ. i>12i_, Talm. mizi, dNH. IT T ' r T Fih. N'la.^ to sip up, to drink in, hence figurat. (according to Symm., Jerome, Kimchi and others) Job 39, 24 : he drinks up the ground with vehemence and rage, i. e. the war-horse runs over the ground quickly; the same figure being in the Arabic a^. Hif, N'^asii to cause to drink or sip up. Gen. 24, 17, parallel Mpfflrt 24, 43. N/Q3 m. Egyptian papyrus -plant, the paper -reed, papyrus -rush, Coptic kboi the same, out of which boats were made, '^ nj5Ft, 'a-ibsi Ex. 2, 3, Is. 18, 2, which glide along easily (Plin. 13, 21—26). The papyrus-reed grows in the marshes of the Nile Job 8, 11, and is placed on a par with the reed Is. 35, 7. 'a is usually derived from NMS 2, i. e. from sucking in the water, with appeal to the Ubula papyrus (Lucan.Phars. 4,136); more cor- rectly from »12i, 1, hence prop, rush, like juncus from jungere, which 'jiaSN (which see) and the Talmudic ^a^ (rush) confirm. HDil (not used) intr. 1. to he drawn together, to he stout, to be firm, strong; to be packed together, to be put together, of the fist, hand. Deriv. laji. Fih. 1M3 (not used) to set firmly, to establish, a post, a garrison. Deriv. Ites. The stem 'a is entirely identical, in its fundamental meaning, with the Ar. (Xt.^ 1 i\t^ (to be drawn together, firm, hard), which is used in many deriva- tives; consequently with 'j^ap, Arab. 1533 (only pi. d'^l.-) m. prop, firmly set, established, hence (like a''i£3 , asa) a post, a garrison, Ez. 27, 11: the sons ofArwad were with thy army round about upon thy walls, and as a garrison in thy towers; LXX (fvlaxsg (garrison), and so Syr., Aquila; but \h6Yu\^.,Rasiii,Kimchi and others interpret it dwarfs, pigmies, thinking of lall (span, fist) men as long as the fist, i. e. Tom- thumbs ; the TM'g. has taken it as the name of a Pheni- cian people, translating Cappadocians (■'NpCaiS)?), because it has probably taken a'^iaa = D''lBa from laJi (which was r T - r T IT ••• I ^ so understood by Armenian writers and Syncellus). Jerome has valiant warriors (bellatores) , daring (comp. Syr. ir^°-^ I fit " stubbornness, Arab. 4>Li»- hard, firm), without on that account reading D'^'ljn.^. TCtii m. span, fist, prop, what holds together, from nas = yaj5, hence a measure Judges 3, 16, as the LXX have am&aiiri, span, Vulg. jjaZraa manus, Aq., Symm. "^qov&og noXaiaxiaXog. The Targ., misled by the Aramaean form l^^^aiia^ which signifies arm or ell, renders it by Nl''a'l5 (stafi). (iDil see Daa. n T r T •1535 see n53Sa. IT- IT-: ?*l5a!li (prop. part. pass, from baji, but used as a subst.) m. 1. a weaned child, which wants the breast no more; grown. Is. 11, 8; 28, 9; Ps. 131, 2. — Besides: 2. {matured, strong) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 24, 17. — 3. in '.rrca (place of camels) n. p. of a city in Moab Jee. 48^ 23 (see r'^a); comp. Nsa.? in Galilee, Gau- gamela (ba.ii-a.l) according to Strabo = "' ■ 19* b)^^ 292 bt22i oJxog KKfiriXov, a town in Assyria; con- sequently blM-J = Vm5. biaa (and Ism; with suf *;^Hi.?; pi. W'^t^iliiJ m. an act, good or bad, but only with reference to others, with D'J^J Judges 9, 16, Is. 3, 11, Prot. 12, 14, or without it Ob. 15, 2 Chr. 32, 25; pi. *e«e/?*♦=>■, Talm. tlta^) n. p. of a city in Judah 2 Chr. 28, 18, which was still standing at a later, even at the Talmudic, period. Comp. the name of a city Sycom,enon, in the neighbourhood of Carmel (Onomast), now (^mzu (itaa), east of Lydda (Bobinson, Palest. III. pp. 56. 57). bD^ I. (fut. biJ5^) tr. prop, to bring to an end, to make ready, to complete, hence 1. to do completely, to deal with one, to do to, what is good, with bs> Ps. 13, 6; 103, 10; 116, 7 or the accus. of the pei-son Is. 63, 7; to benefit Prov. 11, 17, but also with the addition of aia 31, 12 or niit: 1 Sam. 24, 18, and also with the accusative of the thing. So too the reverse; to do evil, to shew evil, with the addition of 5>p Ps. 7, 7 or W'l Prov. 31, 30; very seldom with b of the person Dbut. 32, 6 ; Is. 3, 9 ; Ps.' 137, 8. Since it denotes, according to its origi- nal conception, completed, finished, free action towards one, it might also na- turally mean to requite 2 Sam. 22, 21, Ps. 18, 21, as this concludes the ac- tion. Hence Jl^.^ to do, should not be compared. Deriv. biaa (b733), '!lh'\1ii, biBSn , and the proper name Ss}"'b535. — 2. to make ready, to make ripe, a child, to make it cease to suck, to wean, 1 Sam. 1, 24, hence with the added sbna Is. 28, 9; deriv. bins 1. (which see), and the proper name biaa 2. Weaning, which took place very late^(2MACc.7,27), was connected with an entertainment among the Hebrews (Gen. 21, 8) and Egyp- tians (IKings 11,20). From this signifi- cation is perhaps derived that of bas applied to the complete, mature, grown up camel, in opposition to a young one, 13a (which see), comp. ba.5, bna5 and the proper name 'h'aA; elsewhere per- haps intr. to be ripmed, mature, strong, whence the proper name bias. Figurat. to make ripe, full, of the grape. Is. 18,5; to bring to maturity Numb. 17, 23. Nif. basi pass, of significat. 2. to be I weaned, &en. 21, 8; 1 Sam. 1, 22. "With '.5 the Ar. J^ (X.) to be full^ ripe, (jL«5'(n.) to complete, and JCt^ (to be perfected i. e. beautiful) are iden- tical; and all the significations may be traced back to the fundamental one. ?DilII.(not used) intr. same as ban H. to bear a burden, to labour, comp. b^as*, Ar. Jl*^ to carry. Deriv. perhaps ba5 and bwn 3. P53S I. in the proper name btj^'bas which see. Vitta n. (pi. diba.!;, c. iba^) m. camel, the grown one (see bail, bia5 3), con- trasted with IDS (which see), the young one. It is the well-known strong ani- mal belonging to Palestine Ezr. 2, 67, Arabia Judges 7, 12, Egypt Ex. 9, 3, Syria 2 Kings 8, 9, which serves the •'ijD:! 293 ^DJ inhabitants of the desert for travelling Gbn.24,10; 31,17,as well as for carrying burdens Is. 30, 6 and for warlike opera- tions 21, 7; in which their riches con- sisted. Job 1, 3; 42, 21. Construed with the feminine it means the female camel. Gen. 37, 25. The name of a letter of the alphabet, is written 'biqi on account of the incipient sound. — The word passed from the Semitic (Hebr. baa, Syr. U^c^^, Arab. J>»^ &c.), since the animal was indigenous especially in Arabia, to other peoples (Copt. "sseoioTA, ' &c., Hebr. tt-M3, Gr. xa^-oj, xafi-voi &c.; perhaps the stem is tiaa. Deriv. according to some, Itsyg. VDil (not used) tr. to make deep, low, a pit, comp. Ar. (ja^c (to be low), (j***ft (to sink), (ja,**. (to count as low, to de- spise), Targ. y>3a (to hollow out, a pit), Syr. Ethp. to ciig out &c. Deriv. yM1.!|. "iDil {Jut. Iba^, "'laa?) intr. to come to an end, to cease, Ps. 12, 2; to disap- pear 7, 10; to he gone 77, 9; but tr. with b? to come to a valid determina- tion respecting on^s case 57, 3; with T»a to perfect for one, 138, 8. Deriv. the proper names TflnSt , liT'-. — The ■^ ^ , IT : - : ' IT stem 'Si IS organically connected with bna ; and in the Psalms should be rather explained by the Aramaean idiom. ina (constr. 'naa) see rT'^a.1. IT T ^ r :•' IT : - : "l'Q3 {part. pass, ^"laa) Aram. tr. to complete, to despatch, Ezr. 7, 12. "1523 (completion or perhaps heat) n. p. f. Hos. 1, 3; according to Jerome a vanishing away from passion, which also suits "la.!;. - T "iDil 1. n. p. of the Japhetic founder of the people '1121 Gen. 10, 2, from whom T53125N, nsi'i and naianwere derived 10, 3; then — 2. n.p. of a people descended from Gomer Ez. 38, 6 , whose warriors serve with the Togarmites in the army of Gog. In Jerus. Targ. 1 and Midrash Gen. rabba ch. 37 'a is interpreted by Np'''nBN, ■'p.^'^BS? (and thence in Jncha- sin ed. Krak. p. 135 ") i. e. Phrygia (not Africa), probably with reference to the derivation (la a = Aram, 'nai.1 a coal, hence prop. xaTaxsxaDft«V»?»'), with which also Bochart (Phal. III. 8) agrees. But the Phrygians formed only a small branch of the Togai-mites (Jos. Ant. 1, 6, 1; Hieron. c[uaest. in Gen. 10, 3) and can- not exhaust the primitive people Gomer. The Talmud (Joma 10*) interprets 'a by N''3a'lJi Germani i. e. the Asen-race of the Ashhenaz who dwelt early in Ascania in Asia Minor along with the Phrygians, in the Trojan times, and inhabited generally, the north west of Asia Minor (n;DN). But this race is only a branch of Gomer and can as little ex- haust the primitive people as the inter- pretation of the Armenian writers (Euseb. Chron. Armen. II, 12; Syncellus pag. 91), viz. the Cappadocians. Doubtless 'a means the original race of the Cimme- rians {KniiiiQioi, Cimmerii &c. of which the ground -form is Cymr), who pre- vailed at an ancient period in Taurica (under the name (••* from ^ij hence the name Krim) and the Bosphorus, and afterwards migrated to the coun- nnoj 294 tJJl tries of Asia Minor, while the rest came under Scythian rule. In their farther expeditions they emerged under the appellation Cymbrians or Cymmerians (Kifi^QOi, Cimbri). iT'1503 (Jah is requiter) n. p. m. Jbr. 29, 3/ " ' in'^'l^S (the same) n. p. m. Jbk. 36, 10. '' ' ' ■ja (with suff. 135, isa; pi. Qijii; from *]5S) comm., prop, a place hedged or fenced about, marked oiit, hence a garden, a park, e^ g. applied to the garden of the first human beings, Gen. ch. 2 and 3, which was in yiV and an image of the most beautiful garden Ez. 28,13; 36,35; Jo. 2, 3, whence also it was named D^ii'bN )i_ Ez. 31, 8 9, or 11 ].i Gen. 13, 10, Is. 51, 3 &c.; a garden of 'herbs Dbut. 11, 10; '^h'si^ )A Is. 39, 4 and 52, 7 a royal park. Once it stands for ba Song op Sol. 4, 12. — IS (Targumic % )m, NS5, Aj. «JLs> &c.) is identical, in its fundamental significa- tion, with the Greek loqiog, Lat. hortus, Zend, vara, vare &c., and even with DJins (which see), nagoidsiaog, from the Zend, pairi-daeza, an enclosure. 3Jil ifut. 5bai; .part. pass. f. constr. inn3.5 = nj55.5) tr. to turn off, to bend aside, like the Ar. i^aJJj* and w»-i&., hence: to purloin, to steal, with aocusat. of the object Gen. 31, 32, Ex. 21, 16, Deut. 24, 7, or also absolut., where no- thing but the action is regarded Ex. 20, 15; Josh. 7, 11; Prov. 30, 9; meta- phor, to carry off, of a whirlwind. Job 21, 18; 513.; Gen. 30, 33, Pkov. 9, 17 what is stolen, unrighteously acquired; tail in^5^ what is carried off in the day Gen. 3i, 39. Eigur. to deceive, xXsTiteiv, connected especially with dh Gen. 31, 20 26. Derivat. TiM , the proper name rasa (perhaps). Nif. aSM pass. Ex. 22, 11. Hh. ^35 to steal industriously or often, particularly used in a figurative sense to purloin the revelations of others Jbr. 23, 30; with 'S ab 2 Sam. 15, 6 to steal the mind of one, i. e. to gain it for one- self. Derivat. 535. Puh. 53.|i (inf. abs. 533) pass.^ to he stolen, with' 153 of the place whence, Gbn. 40,15; Ex. 22, 6; with bN Job 4, 12 to steal secretly upon one. Hithp. 533nln to withdraw by stealth i. e. noiselessly and singly, prop, to repair to a place by stealth 2 Sam. 19, 4, The stem '3 (Targ. 535 , Syr. ^.=11^ &c.) is still perceptible in its fundamental signification in the Arabic v_AAafc (to bend to a side), as also v_^>Aa>. (side) shews; it should therefore be compared with t]33, t|3n &o. But the organic root is gab, since the inserted n sometimes disappears in the Semitic branches of the stem. n3a (j)l. t)i535) m. a thief, fur, Ex. 22, 1 6; Jer. 2, 26; Zech. 5, i; ip5n Si53a bands of thieves Is. 1, 24. I- T- ' ' •"□35 (after tte form nbT5) f. what is stolen, Ex. 22, 2 3. riDJil (Egyptian and connected with Kvovqiie) n: p. m. 1 Kings 11, 20. JlUa (pi. mil) f- a garden (= '],s) Is. 1, 30; Job 8, 16; Am. 4, 9; comp. the Phenician 'JS {JTdvoe vnb KvnQimv naqa- BsiGog Etym. M.). n33 (in late writings) f. the same, Song of Sol. 6, 11; Esth. 1, 5. Di) (not used) tr. 1. to bring together, to gather in, like the cognate words 033 > Targ. 11533, Ar. (jlilS', 'JS; hence 2. to conceal, to hide, comp. Targ. T35, Syr.. VU^, Arab, y*^, whence Talm. (I'lED) dit135, ttTioxQvcpa; 3. to wrap up to- gether, to inw'rap, to form into a ball, to envelop, the stem appearing in this sense in Ethiopia also. Derivat. T35. TD3 (only constr. pi. iJS.^ m. a cover- ing, a cloak, a mantle (from TS.I 3) Ez. 27, 24 (parallel Diba), made from 1317? iia, in which the Tyrians traded. In Targ. Ez. 27, 24 and Targ. Esth. 1, 3 )y_A, 1T35 is used in the sense of coverings; nj 295 ^W only the radical n is resolved into the doubled sibilant (Vf!-^, 7.TS); while in iTiS from TS (which see) the reverse is the case. TDa belonging to nsa Esth. 3, 9; 4, 7, see til. T3a (cowstr. nsa, pZ. l-ita.-H, def. N^^TSJi) Aram. m. see TS. D'^TDSi from 153 see ta. ,. ^ . iviv 1" "r^tDS (^jZm/". D'^Sy.i) »i. a treasure- chamher, among the old interpreters = ISiN 1 Chr. 28, 11. As Tt- is the extra- Semitic sufP. ha, tiS is the usual Ta (which see), the gaza of the classics. On the termination 'Tj^ see 'l^tV^ (in •''yp;a), tiffl'^M, 'rj'n'iia, ^X^n &c. " ?Jil (1 person "'ffiSS, inf. ahsol. "jisa) tr. prop, to hedge about, to surround, to hedge in, hence '\i_, !iS3, !l2a; there- fore to protect, to screen, with 5N or V^ of the object Is. 31, 5; 37, 35;' 38, 6; 2 Kings 19, 34. Derivat. the proper name liriM. PiA. (not used), derivat. TdVa. Hif. IJii (/««. 'jS'i) to protect, to guard, with b? Zech. 9, 15, like Kal, or with "isa of the object 12, 8, because pro- ceeding from the fundamental significa- tion to cover protectingly ; comp. the Phe- nician proper name n'nril!5y3a?3 (prot^g^. of Astarte) Corth. XI, 6 and 7; ^ai«. (tent, protection, house, hence sanctu- ary), from which comes the adject. ISSN holy (Mass. 5). Derivat. 'jan. Identical with ^a (l^-j), ^j^i (j^ are ']& (l-ftAJ* , i-ftA. -v (to turn aside), consec[uently cognate with the Hebrew tiSS and ass. So others. But such a sense of the verb may be derived perhaps from the noun r]| (which see) side, wing, yet it is more correct to take as the organic root r)5-3 to cover, as it exists in E15-3, t^."^ &c.' Derivat. Aram. t\%\ on the contrary the Hebrew t].| should be referred to tjs.l. ■^iriSS (=lins.^; from a masc. "JS arose tisa , from which linsa , great protection) n.p. m. Neh. 10, 7 ; 12, 16 ; out of which came "'in3!| 12,4. T\V\ {inf. abs. iSi; fut. nSS';) intr. to cry, to roar, of oxen, cows 1 Sam. 6,12, Job 6,5, Targ. N^a, Syr. i^ = pSSt generally; also to sing (comp. is'^y a in the Masora); and yo&v, Sanskrit (/aw, Pers. kau and gau the ox, may be com- pared with it. Deriv. fiSJi. In addition to the organic root gdnh or gda there existed another, kdw or kd, from which " \ ^ ^ (5-" the verbs N|?^ (in riN)?), i^LS, 'iyS &c. come. See lp. nSJ {place of cows) n. p. of a place at the east of Jerusalem Jer. 31, 39. The Targ. understands by it, with re- lation to the stem TO a (mugire, boare), a place isbss ns'na {cow-pool)\ but the Syr. has ]^r^ (rock-hill), taking it as = ilNa and appearing to understand the prominent rocky point on which the fortress of Antonia stood. byj {fut. hvy^) tr. prop, to separate, to exclude, same as bsa (which see) and the Arab. Joto- (to separate), hence to thrust aside, to reject, to abhor, with accusat. Lev. 26, 30 43 44 or a of the object Jer. 14, 19; to deny Ez. 16, 45. The idea of profanation comes fi"om that of rejection. Derivat. b^a and the proper name b?-!. Nif. byss to be rejected, cast away, of the shield" of one fleeing, 2 Sam. 1, 21; comp. Phenic. bWS to be buried (Malt. 2,1). Hif. bSSrt {fut. bS^r) to let be cast out (the seed),' of a bull. Job 21, 10. According to the fundamental signifi cation given of bW, bpa, the stem is identical with S^ ('<> I'eject), and bp H, (which see) belongs to the same group; the meaning to desecrate, to profane, ia bv^ 296 P]DJ transferred from the other; so Aram. to soil. ^?a (rejection) n. p. m. Judges 9, 26. 5^3 m. aversion, rejection, Ez. 16, 5. *1J?il (inf.constr.^ySi, "lyii; m«. lysi; fut. 'n5»5i) intr. prop, to cry, as the Syr. ji.,^, Ar. . L^ , and perhaps also -^s- in numerous enlargements of the idea, this stem being found also in the Indo- Gennanic tongues. Hence to call at, to address harshly, to snort at, with 3 of the person Gen. 37, 10; Is. 17, 13; Jer. 29, 27; Euth 2, 16; to chide, to threaten, to curse, with accusat. of the object Ps. 9, 6; 68, 31; Mal. 3, 11, or also with a Nah. 1,4; Ps. 106, 9 ; cognate in sense D'^'nlnri Is. 11, 15. Deriv. iilSJi, l-v: IV ' ITT ; ' T\'-\'sya. viv : • m3>3i (constr. ITtJ*.-!!) f. threatening, harsh address. Is. 51, 20; reproof Peov. 13,1; rebuke la. 50, 2. ti)^3t (fut. UJSa';) intr. to be pushed or moved, to and fro, 2 Sam. 22, 8 ; Ps. 18, 8; comp. Targ. viiS_ to push, hence T25\|i^ = Hebrew nai, Syr. ^^, Arab. (J " g-> . The organic root is also found in T2Ja-i. Deriv. the proper name 'ttS»|t. Puh. lasa to be shaken Job 34, 20. Mthp. I. llJajiinrt to totter to and fro, of the drunken Jek. 25, 16; to wave 46,8. Sithp. II. ffl^anfi the same, 2 Sam. 22,8; Jeb. 5, 22V46, 7. aJJ^S (quaking, shuddering) n. p. of a part of the Ephraim- mountains, with in Josh. 24, 30; Judges 2, 9; hence '^ ''^35,1 ('^« valleys lying about Gdash) the proper name of a locality 2 Sam. 23, 30; IChb. 11,30. Ori^a (from I3n5.-i3 a valley burnt, dried up) n. p. of an Edomite people Gen. 36, 11 16, perhaps called so from their dwelling-place. 5|a (from tjBa; with suf. is.!); constr. pi. ''B.5) m. same as ma, IS iAe iacA, i. e. the high point, the summit; hence iBS fl'^^piia tops of the heights Pkov. 9, 3; comp. Phenic. NS3 (Gippa, top) n. p. of a city in Africa (Aug. ep. 65). Pigurat. (like aa, •'5) body, person, iBaa Ex. 21, 3 4 with his person i. e. alone, (lovog. t]a (plur. I^Ba, with SM;f. ftiSV, from t|5a) Aram. m. a wing (perhaps pro- ceeding from the idea of side) Dan. 7, 4 6, but different from the Hebrew r|a which is derived from £|Ba. Yet the stem here may also be tjBa in the sense of to cover, Ar. v_ttj> &c. nDil (not used) trans, to collect, to gather together, therefore cognate with fiaa. The organic root also exists in t)a"N, At. t_as.. Mf. rtsaSi (not used) to collect; hence the part. ""'BaM = insaTa in the proper name l!33'"'Baa. IT • :- |Bil (not used) intr. same as 'Jjaa , ^SB to be crooked, to be bent, or to bend. The organic root is "i-SS, l-sa, enlarged by n. Arab. ij-Aa- the same; hence ^j-to- eyelid, vine, from the bent form. Deriv. "jEa (with suff. ipsa, issa, nis-v, />?. fiiSSa) co?ra?7i. (m. only in Hos. 10, 1, 2 Kings 4, 39) a vine, grape-vine. Is. 7, 23; 24,7, in full form y]^J^ -jBa Num.6, 4 ; the stock of the vine Gen. 40, 9 ; 'a iTito a wild vine-stock 2 Kings 4, 39, of wild cucumbers. Targ. ']Bia, Syr. i^>^s^ the same. To sit under the vine Mic.4,4, to invite under the vine Zech. 3, 10, to eat of his vine 2 Kings 18, 31 i. e. to live in the profoundest peace. Else- where 'a is a figure of the Israelite people Ps. 80, 9, as also Q'nS Is. ch. 5 ; called the luxuriant vine p)5,ia 'a Hos. 10, 1 (see p)p.a), or nnpb 'a Ez. 17, 6. PlDil (not used) intr. same as saa to be arched, hilly, hunch-backed, Arab. i_is\.fta» hilly land; or perhaps only equivalent to !:]ia (t]a). Deriv. q a. S]Ba (unused) Jram. tr. to cover, to shut, whence Af. tiaN to shut up, t|lBa = Hebrew n'naDtt, Talmudic NB.!) a wall ^DJ 297 "IJ^J shutting in, £)3.^ to surround, Ar, a covering of fruit or leaves, oLftSVj steel -covering (of a rider) &c. Deriv. Aram. t\A. "iDil (not used) intr. to be strong, hard, especially of a tree, hence cognate with ha.l, ^53; the same meaning is borne by the stem ^133 to 'iDb, and by the Aramaean stems 'les, 'iss, 'nas in de- rivatives; in which signification the stem is also preserved in the Indo-Ger- manic tongues ; whence nvnag, cupressus, pine. The Targ., Greek- Venet. and old interpreters thought of this sense, when rendering isa by cedar. Deriv. "IBJI and nils.!). "isa m. a hard, strong tree, whose wood was used for ships Gen. 6, 14, and from which also a kind of resin (see nilS-O flows; 'h lity should there- fore be taken as I'lN V'S, i. e. 'isii deter- mines the general ys. About the kind of tree meant by 'a the greatest diversity of opinions prevails among the old trans- lators and interpreters: the Targ. and Greek-Venet. have cedar; Bochart and Celsius cypress; an anonymous Greek version boas; Syriac juniper or willow; the moderns fir-tree; in no case should it be translated bitumen. fl'^'IDS (formed from 'n&ll with the termination rr^-) f. resin of the Gopher- tree, then as a combustible, brimstone Gen. 19, 24; Is. 30, 33; 34,9; mentioned with DTIB, tON, nba as a material of destruction. "la {constr. pi. ■''la) adj. m., rTna (nps) f. 1. dwelling, abiding, of a "i.|i Ex. 12, 49 ; Lev. 16, 29 ; joined with n^a, slave, servant Job 19, 15; or neighbour Ex. 3, 22. Poetically inhabitant of the earth, a man, hence 15 DSn (Jar from men) Job 28,4, parall. ttJiiSiM; according to Rashi, Gershuni and others "13 is here a subst. IT dwelling-place, a bed. — 2. subst. a strange shepherd Is. 5, 17, without read- ing "IjI on this account. ia (once T'ii 2 Chr. 2, 16; with suf. ^^,> 'i'^ji; P^- '^''15) "*• !■ '^ stranger, a foreigner, hospes, prop, abiding as a stranger in a foreign land Gen. 15, 13, Ex. 2, 22, along with aidin a settler Gen. 23, 4, Num. 35, 15 "(i. e. he who though not a native is yet naturalised as an inhabitant), opposite to H'lm Num. 9, 14; 15, 30, or m Deut. 1, 16"- adduced in the charitable laws along with Din;, M553>N, ip» Jer. 22, 3; Zech. 7, 10; also applied to whole tribes Ex. 22, 20. The LXX have naQoixog, nqog- rjXvTog, ^svog, and twice the very word itself ysimgag (N'H'i^a); but the signifi- cation proselyte is only a later one. In Is. 5, 17 the LXX understand by Qi'ns the wandering herds, i. e. sheep or goats, without reading D'^ia on that account. — 2. Eigurat. a pilgrim Ps. 39, 13, 1 Chr. 29, 15, comp. D'l'nia}?; a protege, one de- serving protection Ps. 146, 9 ; comp. in the compound Phenician proper names ri'inidy'i.^ (prot^gd of Astarte) FsQa- atqajog', bsa'lJinS* (= -nsjt) &c. na (from Ti-J rV.) m. lime Is. 27, 9, as the Targ., Syr. and Ar. render; comp. Ar. -A2», )La^ the same; Phenic. NI.5 (Gira, Guira, lime-place) n. p. of a town in Numidia. "la {pi. ni'iji) m. same as "il-J Jer. 51, 38; Nah. 2, 13. N"la {enmity; see ITM) n. p. m. Gen. 46, 21; Judges 3, 15. 31^ (not used) tr. 1. to tear off, to scratch, to scrape of, cognate C|'nS; but the Targ. ap.5, Syr. ^'r\, Ar. v_}j.a., may be derived from the noun. The organic root is ai'-J, f|T-5. also found in •2.-\ (ai'n), ti'i (rjl'i). — 2. to despise, to revile, according to a usual metaphor (see Ell'n). Deriv. Din m. scab, scabies, scurf, scurvy Lbv."21, 20; 22, 22. 1313 {despiser, reoiler) 1. n.p. m. 2 Sam. 23, 38 ; 1 Chr. 11, 40. — 2. only in n»a5 i'n.J {hill of the leper) n. p. of a hill at Jerusalem Jer. 31, 39. "lil")-! see lis. n;nj 298 n"iJ *l'n!i'n.") m. a berry, of the olive Is. 17, 6; m the Targ. and Mishna along with n\!!'].| also in the sense granum, a ■gram, e. g. of wheat, of the grape, salt &a., whence the denom. ^A^l , Ar. r^yf- hean. One sees from this that the fun- damental signification is properly what is insulated, separated (comp. tTj}'^?) i- e. a com, kernel; but that it is totally un- ■connected with to be round. rriana (only pi. nna'^s, c. n'-ir and to be explained like the plurals in Q'^jJE, ni'lN^SS; from Tl-in.) f. prop, a fissure, a hole, the wind-pipe, the oesophagus, the throat; Arab. !!&. (hole, a hollow); and also INia (from 'nilt) prop, means fissure, opening. Then generally the neck Peov. 1, 9; 3, 3 22; 6, 21. The Ar. ^s>^s» (to gurgle) is denom., as from the Latin gurges (depth, abyss) gurgulio (wind- pipe), the German Gurgel (whence the verb gurgeln), the English gurgle; comp. also the Phenician n'nsa (= n'nii'ia i. e. Oigart, depth, ravine) n. p. of a city in Phenicia, Grreek yiyaqrov; 'nii'l^ (Gir- giris, a gap, a fissure) n. p. of a moun- ■tain in Libya. ti^il'15 (not used) intr. to be slimy, clayey, from llS'iJi {to swell, of slime, to drive, to push forth) formed by partial reduplication. Deriv. ttiS'ns, "'1B3'15. aJSia see ilBa'1!!. IT : • r T : ■ ''tDi^na (from '^i'-ii) n. p. of a Pheni- cian people who had come over from the territory of Manasseh on the other side of Jordan {Euseb. Onom.) Gen. 10, 16; 15,21, but who were omitted in the enumeration of the single tribes as too unimportant to be mentioned Ex. 3, 8 17; 13, 5; 23, 23; 33, 2; 34, 11; Ntjm. 13, 29; Detjt. 20, 17 &c. and who dis- appeared from the political theatre after Moses's time. Later tradition and po- pular history found them among the Phenician tribes in northern Africa, where also a city Girgis (ti-1'1.^) existed at the Syrtis Minor. Whether the Fsq- ysativoi Matth. 8, 28 were a remnant of the race in (question, is still very un- certain. "nil (Kal not used) tr. prop, same as FT rrnn, a'nn to scratch into, thenio scratch, to shave generally, as the Targ. 1p^, Syr. ?^-^, Ar. i>y&.. The organic root is Ti-| (np-n, t3p"n)) comp. Italian gratt- a,re, French graU-ev, English to grate, scratch, German kratz-en, Lat. rad-ere &c. Eithp. Tn.wfi to scratch oneself, with 3 of the instrument Job 2, 8. mil I. (Kal unused) intr. prop, same as nin to glow, to burn, hence to kindle, ITT ^ ' ^ ^ to be zealous, Ar. i^y^ the same, ana ]y^ (L V. Vm.), Aram. n;i^, 1h^, Pa. (reduplicated) ■-^^Jnj^ to provoke; the same signification also lies in the stem "[%_. Pih.'T(-\% {fut. iTlJ':) prop, to inflame, to cause to kindle, hence to make jealous, to provoke, to stir up, strife (p"]^) Pkov. 15, 18; 28, 25; 29, 22; so the Targ. "I'lS, Syr. -H^ &c. Deriv. the proper name NIS. Hithp. iTp^nJl (fut. ap. 'nsn^) to excite oneself, to be stirred up, to be angry, a with one Jer. 50, 24; Peov. 28, 4; to be stirred up to war (rusfibisb) Dau. 11, 25, i. e. to throw oneself into strife Dbdt. 2, 5, with a of the person against one 2, 19, or of' the thing 2 Kings 14, 10, but also in the sense of to excite war Detjt. 2, 9, or absolutely to carry on war, to press on in combat; tl-TSn'iy even to his fortress i. e. Gaza Dan. 11, 10. Deriv. tTisn. it; ■ mj n. (not used) tr. to split, to hollow, to hollow out, conseq. = 'la'ia from 'l.^ (whence n'^i'is), and connected in its organic root with "XS ("iW I. whence rT-i5»?2), 1p -S &c. DliS-' i»EOV. 21, 7, and ITT :" 'r T 1" : ' ' liilji Hab. 1, 15 are to be referred to 'Tn.l, and the meaning to snatch, to col- lect, should not be assumed. Deriv. ')i1|; n-i:i 299 n^ij on the contrary ri'ia comes from 'IS ?l"ia (after the form fiaD; from Ips) /■. same as la'iS prop, the separated, sundered, little, hence a grain, a kernel, but only metaphor, the 20*'' part of a bp.uj Let. 27, 25; Num. 3, 47; coinp. Gran and granum (corn); hence a small weight of brass or iron, used as a coin also. So were the o^oloi of the Greeks. Comp. too SfpVa in the Mishna, the smallest weight of the Persians, from xjli> a com. iTniaN is a secondary form. — 2. bruised, made small, chewed i. e. food already swallowed,- in the phrase ^5 nbsrt Lev. 11, 3 4, 'a 'n^is 11, 7; comp. rumen (connected with rima). ■]ina (with suf ■15115, ^5i-) m. prop, swallow, wind-pipe, hence throat, as an organ of speech Is. 58, 1, Ps. 115, 7, and of swallowing 69, 4; Jer. 2, 25; metaphor, neck Is. 3, 16; Ez. 16, 11; cognate in sense "IN!}?:, which is of ■" ■ ■ ' ' ,lvi=>- the same. u't^ similar origin. Arab See n'na'i.i and fr^H ni~ia (from ia) a shelter, prop, an inn Jer. 41, 17. nil (Kal unused) -) "-P- of a territory in the south of Palestine, mentioned with 11125.^ and phw, 'TiilS and n-il^M; accordingly the inhabitants were called ■'pa 1 Sam. 27, 8, which the K'ri reads I'ln (see ITa). Comp. the Phenic. NT'na '{waste station) n. p. of a Phenician'town in Africa (Polyb. 1, 74). See ina. ''T"l3i see tia. F : • •••I".* D'l-T'lS (formed from T'la , as a collect pi.: desert mountain; according to others mountain of the Oerizite tribe, see fna) n. p. of a part of the Ephraimite moun- tains (therefore always coupled with Iti), over against h'^'^'Si the city DSiD oriVist- ^Zms being between the two, in a valley (Judges 9,7), where the Samaritan wor- ship was afterwards established Deut. 11, 29; 27, 12; Josh. 8, 33; Jos. Ant. 11, 7, 2; 11, 8, 2; in the LXX Fa.- IT^a (from fia with the termination ere, 'comp. T1352) m. an axe Deut. 19, 5, Is. 10, 15, to cut wood or stone; comp. the cognate rTiMT?, Zab. iM=^, and the Ar. in many forms. It is by no means a quadriliteral from )1Si, as some make it; the Targ. N5"'Sf. i^ «l««"?- CD'lil (not used) tr. to hollow out, to deepen, in order to put somethmg m; cognate Din. Deriv. bU'lJN. (which see). Qi^st adj. m. (in the cod. Samar. in Gen. 49, 14 for d';)a) bony, strong, which the Samar. translator, however, read Qi'ia. ^"lil (not used) a stem adopted for Vlia (which see), but which should be derived from 'lo^&c. — 4. like dSS, a^, 12333: iAe essence of a thing, i. e. itself, res ipsa, 2 Kings 9, 13 on the steps themselves (for which Aramaean presents an analogy), where Targ., LXX, Ar., Syr. have only guessed at the sense. Derivative dpi denom. to draw of the skin, to flay, of beasts of prey Zeph. 3, 3 : their judges are evening -wolves, they do not strip off the shin in the morning , i. e. in their insatiableness they complete their nightly employment of robbing in the night; the LXX, Vulg., Targ., Syr. have translated correctly according to sense: they let nothing remain. The Targ. 'Q'~\i (on Ps. 27, 2), Syr. Joj^, Ar. 11^ (to shave off, to abstract) are also denomin. Pih. dp5 to draw off the skin (from the bones), an image of victory Num. 24, 8 ; metaphor, to gnaw, the sherds of a cup Ez. 23, 34. nn^ (j)l. with suff. litiia'il) Aram. m. a lone Dan. 6, 25. '''Q'la {strong) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 4, 19. 1*1^ (not used) tr. to plane, to make smooth; comp. Ar. (jvs^ to plane, to smooth. Deriv. Till. ^ ' l"!^ (with a of motion hS'lJi , with suff. V-l"?; P^' ^'i?>^ '^o'^^^'r- »Ti?'?|) f. prop, a level, open place, area, locus compla- natus, like Ar. ^^ , (jJ**- , hence a threshing-floor, because it consisted of an open, level place Num. 15, 20; 18, ^'^- '^ T7P Jek. 51, 33 to tread down I a threshing-floor firmly, i. e. to make it level; 'Ji-ja Is. 21, 10 son of the thresh- ing-floor, i. e. the trodden grain, as an emblem of Israel; poet, 'a of the grain itself Job 39, 12, perhaps omitting "13 (see InST^N). — Some names of places are" also compounded with 'ji, as "iiaNrt 'a Gen. 50, 10 (see 1£:n); ifi^i^ 'a 1 c/hb'. 21, 15 (see I^IN); y\'D\ '3 (a firmly esta- blished threshing-floor) 2 Sam. 6, 6, for which in 1 Chb. 13, 9 stands li^"'!? '5 (threshing-floor of the spear; see also D")il intr. to be broken to pieces, to be crushed to pieces, therefore cognate with 51?) &1!7 (which see); figuratively of the soul, to be dissolved, crushed, with b for a thing Ps. 119, 20, i. e. to be de- voted to a thing with great desire; comp. isi^n properly to rub in pieces, then to search after, and so too Aram. On.1 to inquire, to learn, ND'13 doctrine sought out. For the fundamental signification comp. Targumic 015, Syr. '-"r^, Ar. (jijja.. See Vi'is. Hif. B'l'lSrt (fut. D'^'ia^) to break in pieces, to crush, e. g. the teeth by gravel. Lament. 3, 16. i?"!^ L {fut. 5>pa^) tr. prop, to cut off, to cut away, to remove, hence flJ'IM, and so 1. to shave off, ^pT Jee. 48, 37 (for which in Is. 15, 2 5>lJi), a meaning that the Syr. "^r^ also has; figurat. to take away, to scour off, Ez. 5,11, where the following Oinn ^^'b^ gives the mode, but where the LXX read S»1Si« (anmao- liai, see on Peov. 15, 32) 1 will indulge my inclinations (opposite pSNnis), comp. Peov. 29, 18; to purloin, deprive of, snatch away, tlMitt Job 15, 8: and hast thou purloined wisdom to thyself? i. e. captured it as a booty; to withdraw, d^S''^, with la of the person 36, 7. — 2. to diminish, to abridge, ph (the appointed portion) Ez. 16, 27; to lessen, to withdraw, '-Q.'n (God's word) Jee. 26, 2, rrsb*'! niD3 Ex. 21,10; to weaken, to lessen, iitTito" (de- votion) Job 15, 4, and with ^a of that :^^:i 301 sy^ij ■which is lessened Deut. 13, 1; Eccles. 3, 14. Nif. ypM (/Mi. y\yi^ pause ^p-) to he diminished Ex. 5, 11, to he ahridged, dllj Numb. 27, 4, nbni 36, 3: to he less ' ' iT-;r ' ' esteemed 9, 7; to he withdrawn, from (^a) something Lev. 27, 18. The organic root of this stem lies in 3>-'na, -which is also found in 15, 1.|; and the Sanskrit ^ri, xsiQ-oa, car-ere, XVQ'OS &c. appear to be connected with it; Ar. P v^ to shave off. J?*lil n. (Kal not used) tr. to swallow, to draw up, to drink violently, in the or- ganic TOot = At. -&. (to draw), Syr. r«, Ar. '^,^, Talmudic IS'nS; but only in Pih. 5>'na (Jut. 5*'nS^) to sip up, draw up, Job 36, 27: for he swallows drops of water; comp. Ar. c *=► to draw in, sip, swallow (water). r]"1il tr. 1. (not used) to snatch, to take together, to press together into a ball, corripere; deriv. IjISN. — 2. to snatch away, to float away, of a river Judges 5, 21, as the Syr. ^j-^ for Hebr. Sjaid; Ar. Oy&. n. and IV. the same. — 3. to tear off, clods of earth; deriv. na'nSM; comp. o*a» a piece of earth torn off, also '^ysa. to sweep away, ver^ rere. — The organic root is I)Ta , also found in t]"!")!. 11^ I. (i. e. ^i; fut. ia;, with suff. IMIJ;, D'lia^ and perhaps also 'J|'ia^; but also fut.^il Lev. 11, 7 after the manner of an intrans.) tr. same as b.^ to turn about, to roll; the forms of which word in Semitic, belonging to the de- rivatives , being also interchanged with the latter; hence 1. tr. to turn in a circle, to encompass, to enclose; hence the pro- per name Tia , like b^b-l. — 2. tr. to roll along, to roll together (see Hithp.), comp. jLfi (irruit), i. e. to scrape together, to collect, with the net, Hab.1,15 he rakes it together with his net. — 3. to roll for- ward, to move forward, i. e. to snatch away, Pkov. 21, 7 Dp.iS^ snatches them off; comp. Ar. ^. — 4. intr. figur. to move about any where, i. e. to ahide, to dwell (see Hithp.), comp. Lat. ver- sari, Hebrew '13. — 5. /wi.l.l'; (which, however, may also be the fut. Nif.) to roll up, to draw up, the food abeady chewed (!Ti3)Lev.11,7, as the Syr. i-^, Ar. j^ IV. and VLH. ; but this meaning in Hebrew is still doubtful. Nif. assumed for 1.^^ Lev. H, 7 and for ni'i|5 Job 20, 28;' but the former is fut. Kai of Tna, the latter the Nifal of •IM (which see). Hithp. 'n'lisrirt assumed for 1 Kings 17, 20; Jek. 30', 23; Hos.7, 14; which forms, however, may also be derived from Tia (which see). In all the five meanings of this stem lies the fundamental signification to turn, to roll, so that 'I'na appears to be merely a harder form of bbi; comp. Ethiop. angargara, to roll. Ilil II. (Kal not used) tr. to sepa- rate, to divide, to take away, coinciding therefore in its organic root with that in S»-1.!i, hence iTn.*! 1., 1.11.1 and irvK; to disunite, to crush (see tl13), to chew, to grind to pieces, whence ilia 2.; to split, to hollow, whence riia.l^; to saw, i. e. to cut in pieces. All these mean- ings can only be perceived from the derivatives; Syr. and Ar. the same. Puh. 1ia to he divided into pieces , to be sawed asunder 1 Kings 7, 9. "113 (from 113 1. ; circle, region) n. p. of a place in Philistia, which formed a distinct kingdom Gen. 20, 1 ; 26, 1 ; '3 bn3 26,17 the valley lying beside it. At the present day, ruins three hours south of Gaza are still called QerAr. Ji^'nil (not used) same as D13, which see. At. (J«j~'' Hence tola (with suff. "itois) m. rubbed into pieces ,' bruised , gravel. Lev. 2, 14 16; comp. D113 , N''D113 , Nifl3 in the Mishna and Talmud, Hebr. nD"'1S;; Ar. Ji^,y?- coarsely broken in pieces. I^^IJ 302 Dm Ji?"lil I. (fut. 125'nS'') tr. to drive, to thrust, to empel, a people from their father-land, with "'Ssa of the person before whom Ex. 34, 11; to put away, a wife, from (to) one, hence trttSl'ia divorced Lev. 21, 7 14; Num. 30, 10; to cast out, to drive about, CCai llis'i, said of waters Is. 57, 20. In the same sense Il5p^ I. (Deut. 2, 12; 9, 1) according to the interchange of S and i (see a), is used. Hence the orer. root is ili'l'Si, IB'T''. Ueriv. the proper names DWIS, ll^'l?.- Nif. UJ'iaS 1. to be driven forth, to be cast out, Jon. 2, 5. — 2. only a trans- posed form of ttJi"! to rage, to boil up stormily, of the sea, Is. 57, 20; Am. 8, 8; see irja'i. Pih. UJpS {inf. abs. ttSn-J, fut. 125'nS':) o^, tia^<, Ar. *-»*»■, ^jUJcs- body, modern He- brew 1531^5, m^Miaa &c. liaUJH (same as dia'a II.) n. p. m. Nbh. 6, 6. JtJ^il 1. n. p. of the eastern boundary of Egypt, bordering on Palestine and Arabia, perhaps north or north-west of the gulf of Heroopolis, where Israel settled till their deliverance by Moses, Gen. 45, 10; 46,28 29 34; 47,1-4 27; 50, 8; Ex. 8, 18; 9, 26. The chief city of this boundary land was DO'??'! (which see) i. e. Herd (Hqc6, after which the ancients named the western arm of the Eed Sea), from which city the exodus set forward Numb. 33, 3 seq. Accord- ingly the LXX put for 11^5 Heroopolis i. e. Hero or Eamessa. West of Eameses lay dns (still at the present day Thum) Ex. 1, 11; and according to the LXX I'S i. e. Heliopoljs, not far from the ^yptian Babylon (now Kahira), be- longed to the same. In addition to this, we know of Goshen, that it bordered on Philistia Ex. 13, 17, 1 Chk. 7, 21, and lay therefore higher than the rest of Egypt Gen. 46, 29; that on the other side it was not far distant from the seat of government (Memphis or Tanis) 45, 10, reached as far as the Pelusiac arm of the Nile (therefore in the Jerus. Targ. I. and II. ■ji^Dibij?) and was reckoned to Arabia (Ptol. vofiog lAQa^lag, Geogr. 6, 8). It lay between the Nile and the Arabian gulf. On this account the LXX also call it Fsah 'Aqa^ia? (Gen. 45 ^ 10), as Saadia refers to the territory. — It has been explained as an old Egyp- tian word from the Coptic ^iii-'x.oM. (boundary of Hercules) , but without its being altogether certain. — 2. n. p. of a city and district in the mountains of Judah Josh. 10, 41; 11, 16; 15, 51, which was perhaps originally founded by an Egyptian colony from )Wi. nti^il (not used) intr. to listen, to hearken attentively, and thence to act in a mysterious, magical way. The organic root r|U5".1 is cognate with that in r|tB"N , t|Tl5-3 &c., and the Syriac ..sjL^(to stroke softly) is also connected with it. Deriv. NDlp5 (attentive listening) n. p. m~ NEHrn, 21. "Ityil (not used) tr. to attach together, to bind, by beams, like 1^)5, 'lia't! and others. This stem also existed in the dialects, as is seen from the derivatives JL^ (beam and bridge), Targ. ItB.^, Syr. 1h^ (bridge), in the Mishna 'niU.^ (bridge); llik , rS. to make a bridge. In the Peshito r^ stands in 2 Sam. 19, 17 for the Hebrew tlbs to cross. Deriv. the proper names Tlt^S, '''pilli-V 5i75!7j) (Kal not used) to touch, to feel, to grope, to seek, Ar. ^JM^ and (jmL^*- (also in the signification "to handle and feel all over, to perceive", cognate in sense uSffla), Targ. «;3, Syr. ^^ and >-^, Zab. w*j. In the farther deve- loped stem dia'5 n. (which see) the in- trans, meaning' to be palpable, dense, hard, firm, comes forth. The organic root UiS (also in the meaning to examine by touch) is connected with •a)?. Zeph. 2, 1; on the contrary, the organic root nj 304 "inj in tt5p."a (which see) appears to be de- rived from another point of view. Pih. fflUJa to grope about, to feel around, like a blind man, absolutely and with accus. Is. 59, 10. TO I. (contracted from rri^, as nb from mb, which form is then = !Ti5, Viv' IT-' with which Hebrew andPhenician names of places are formed) fern, an epithet of rrnnffl;? orfraSS, therefore exactly like .Tl-l (which see), and then n. p. of a Philistine chief city, the principal of the five princely cities 1 Sam. 6, 17; 21, 11 ; 27, 2 ; 2 Sam. 1, 20; 15, 18, the birth place of Goliath 1 Sam. 17, 4, and known in battles with the Hebrews 1 Kings 2, 39; Am. 6, 2; Mic. 1, 10; 1 Chr. 18, 1 ; 2 Chr. 11, 8 ; 26, 6 ; accord- ing to Euseb. (Onom.) five miles distant from Eleutheropolis on the way to Diospolis. At times Gath disappeared from the Philistine pentarchy Zbph. 2, 4, Am. 1, 6-8, and only a tetrarchy remained. Patronym. Tna Josh. 13, 3; 2 Sam. 6, 10 11 ; 15, 18. In 1 Sam. 17, 52 N^3 Stands for it. In the place 1 Sam. 7, 14 m-^5>;, 'fnp^n the connection re- quires quite another locality, which perhaps was also called na; but the LXX, as other versions, read 'jib)?l!JNa 313^-1^1 anb 'AandXaivos stag l/d'C6§, where properly speaking aipN is meant by ar^N. Once m stands for ■jiMT na 1 Chr. 18, 1, for which in 2 Sam. 8, i ''^^f^'7 sna (which see) is put. With regard to its position, inasmuch as all traces of Gath afterwards disappeared, it has been identified with Bauoyd^Qa, Betogabris i. e. iXiZi rria, ')i'ias n-^a {place of giants; Vee 1 ' Sam. '17, 51; 2 Sam. 21,22), where is still the hamlet vHy^ '■^^^ (iJoSms. Palest. II. 613. 620), especially as one comes from Beit- Qibrin northward to the neighbourhood of Bdt mba (ab), and David fled from Nob to Gath 1 Sam. 21,2 10. Gath, written by Josephus rlrxa, -tj (Mn.5), forms the first part of the compound'in the follow- ing names of places: a) ^spn na (with a of motion "iSp nn5, see'^ierj) 'n.p. of a locality in Zebulon Josh. 19, 13, the birth place of the prophet Jonah 2 Kings 14, 25; according to Jerome (prefat. to Jonah) 2 Eoman miles from '''lis^ to- ward N"'^a£3. The present village el- Mishchad (iX^^), where the grave of Nabi Junas is shewn, is looked upon as the same {Robins. Palest. III. p. 449). b) liM'l m (see li'a'i) n. p. of a city in Dan Josh. 19, 45, 10 Eoman miles from Diospolis toward Eleutheropolis (Jerome). At a later time we meet with c) rs&arifiavri i. e. D''3?aTa na «. p. of a farm tenement at the foot of the moiint of Olives, on the other side of Cedron Matth. 26, 36. — With respect to the de-' rivation, the explanation from the Sans- krit Gati refuge, or its identification with a city in Arcadia is to be rejected, since na could not have been Philistine but old Phenician. But neither can the word be taken as Semitic in names of places, in the sense of wine-press, since all analogy is wanting; and it seems best to regard the localities as so named from the old Phenician worship of Gadda. na II. (from nn.5 ; pi. nina) f. prop, tub, hole, case, hence wine-press, in which the grapes were trodden, Jo. 4, 13, Is. 63, 2, rarely a place where wheat was threshed out. Judges 6, 11. nna f. see na I. IT • ' 1- TlS see na I. V • r DTia (same as na I.; dual, because • r * ^ i- ' ' the city consisted of an upper and lower part) n. p. of a city in Benjamin, Neh. 11, 13. rr'Fia n. p. of a musical body of Levites Ps. 8, 1 , who had their chief seat in the Levitical city "ji^a'n n.^. This explanation suits better than that of the Targum of the city of Gath, the word in the titles of psalms not being capable of an interpretation referring to instruments or airs. "iDil (not used), hence "^CS ^' P- *>f ^^ Aramaean people and district, mentioned along with nnj 305 yw, bin and T»?5 in the ethnographical table Gen. 10, 23, called in Arab, tradition {Abulf., Hist, anteisl. p. 16) r>^, and designated as a head-progenitor of the races i>y^ (Tamud) and ,jmJ(X^ (G'a- dis). How Josephus (Ant. 1, 6, 4) comes to accept him as the progenitor of the Bactrians, is not clear. nnil (not used) tr. to deepen out, in order to put something in; comp. Tar- gumic un, Syr. wjLi», Greek xevO--os and the Hebrew 113. Deriv. na II. i-T r 1, called nbl (=nbl[), Dcdeth, as the name of a letter signifies door, not be- cause its form in ancient writing was like the door of a tent, as is thought to be found still in the Phenician ^ (out of which came the Greek JAta by the omission of the tail) or in ^ and dif- ferent other forms whence the d- figure of the Tuscan and other alphabets is said to have arisen; but because the word represented this same sound in its initial letter. The following pheno- mena are to be explained by the fact that Baleth bore a close resemblance to Beth and Besh, botli in the old wi-iting and in the characters derived from it, as e. g. in preserved Phenician in- scriptions, a) its interchange with b, e. g. nbn 1 Chr. 11, 30 = abn 2 Sam. 23, 29; b)"with r, e. g. ns'-'i TChr. 1, 6, C3''f.'ii'7 1, 7, Tnan 1, 4l', ^'i» 1, 50, isiraT 6, 62 = nsn Gen. 10, 3, D''2ni 10, 4, ^im 36, 26,' Tiln. 36, 39, WM'n' Josh. 21, 35 ; nn-n (belonging to nm'i Ez. 32, 5) = nzl (sanguine infectus est), like the Ar. fgjo. and ^^3 the same; p^ = pp; "^^ = 'rt'n; Ar. -*wcs. = JUm-5»- to collect; tibai, Ez-'e, 14 = nba":; tiN'n Ps. 18, 11 = nilj'n 2 Sam. 22,'iii the noun riN"! Deut. 14, 13 in the cod. Sam. MN'i; 3>p.5 = 5>n.5; nart"l79 Is. 14, 4 = !i|i?773 &c. From tlie Semitic name of the letter, by which the usual form nbl was altered into nbl, one sees that the sound of it was da" As a numeral 1 is four, T 4000. The pronunciation of Daleth was usu- ally d, for which reason it is inter- changed, within the language itself and with relation to the Semitic dialects, with the harder consonants n t (comp. 113 and 'inS; 11 and In; !nbl and nbn; ni and Dn; pia and pna; NTOl IT T ' ^ I- I- ' ' |-T^ ' -t' V I'J Syr. }3?.i; bia Ar. JlXj) or B « (comp. laai and OSU; Mai, Aram, satp, Syr. 1.^4; laa Ar. ^Jo). To this harder pro- nunciation of Daleth was sometimes added the more liquid sibilant z, so that it was properly sounded ds, for which the peculiar b stands in Arabic, a cir- cumstance that explains its manifold interchanges with the pure soft ^-sound or T, or with 5, e. g. bl and br, bj?! and bar, 1S»1 and IST, Sn.; and S>n, ail and v_), 5 , IS and d^ , 115 and v^XJ ; I- T • > I" 3 more rarely with V, as yi-J and gV^i DilB and (•jji'; also exceptionally with ta', e. g. 11 and ltd; with to e. g. !iai and nsto &e.; comp. Phenic. T = Aram. 1 applied for the Genitive. The Ara- maean, however, prefers the flat d-sound to the liquid z, not merely where the sound was originally a mixed one, but also where the liquid «- sound ^ was native at an earlier period of Semitism. There was besides a cognate relation- ship between d (l) and I (b), as the verbs ffll^ and llJib, lj?1 and b?1 shew; comp. Aram. 1» for iJj? Dan. 2, 30; 4, 14 22 ; Greek 'OSvaaevg, da^Q, iiBlstata, for which the Latin has Ulysses, levir, meditor &c. In completed stem-forms, Daleth (and Zain cognate with it) often appears at the commencement as unorganic, with relation to the mother-form, i. e. not be- longing to the original root, e. g. ba""J (see ba-n), pa-1 (see pa-N) &c. — In 1 T . T 2Q t?1 306 n«i the ulterior development of nouns from simple stems d appears with the pre- ceding vowel d, a, 6, u &c. as a very old derivative syllable, e. g. dd in TiJ'lS (whence lilffl'is), Aram. Ip.'is (from phs), (id in "is^D , the proper names l^bi , ly?::*; 6d in 1DD1, hence mfas'n, and' in the proper name nhuS; Ad in IV^hi; Td in the proper name l^bJi, comp. Syr. 'r^r^line, series, from^{J», and others. In this derivative syllable, d is some- times interchanged with t and t (n , D). J^T I. (not used) as an organic root to !i-Nl, N1-2 which see. IT T ' IT T ^5T II. (not used) to be adopted as an organic root to the reduplication N'lN'i and Ti (which see). SsT (masc. y^ Aram.pron. demonstr. f. this, Dan. 7, 8, used like the Hebrew HNT as a neuter, this, that, 4:,27; N'n H'lh one to the other i. e. to one another 5, 6; NVT? N^ one from another 7, 3; comp. Syr. the same. In the Targumic N'l!!, Syr. l?oi, it forms the chief part of the compound. — From N1 is formed the Hebrew NT (after changing d into 6 n^^T has arisen out of it). Originally it may have sounded harder, viz. Nn (Greek ro, Lat. tu in turn). 2^1 (part. fern, tias'i Jer. 31, 25 r T ^-^ ' jT-:iT ' as if from SI = ar, in the Aramaean manner, without one having to read n|3N'7 or iiaN^; inf. constr. n^N'i, like ^'^IV. Is. 58, 2) intr. same as SIN I. and Nj3'5, therefore 1. to faint, to pine away, to languish, of ffiSS Jer. 31, 25, yv Ps. 88, 10, or also of persons, Jer. 31, 12, with 11^ hy the means; also: to hunger. LXX aa&svsTv, Vulg. languere. In its organic root iis'i (rJTN, N-ai) cognate with Sanskrit tap, Persian' to/- ten, Latin (aJ-escere, Greek laq)-. De- rivat. liaiSl'7. — 2. to have sorrow, fear, terror, to be distressed; derivat. :iNi, !n|3N'i. Comp. Ar. tr. o| j (to frighten). ■r-The related stem in Syr. ^sj, Arab. otii shews that the fundamental signifi- cation is to melt. DNT adj. m. see iiSNI and li:3N'!i. IT T IT T : 'it: tlDNT (from masc. SNl) fern, fear, n T : ^ IT T -' ' ' ■ terror. Job 41,14, hence the Syr. 12^^?. ■jinXT (from SN'i, like ■jia^'n from a^'l; constr. I'ilJlN'l) m. prop, tab-es, faintness, Deut. 28, 65; Targumic liHI, Till from a'l = SN'n. 'it it I- r r^Xl see VI. it it -1^'^ (/""*■ ^^T.) intrans. prop, to be beaten in pieces, to be struck down, to be crushed, cognate with the organic root in N-3'i, 'rj'^, p'l, therefore the Ethiopia is to be thin, lean. In use: to fear, to be concerned, to be distressed, with the accusat. Is. 57, 11, Jer. 38, 19, or V 1 Sam. 9, 5; 10, 2, or with y^ of that which one is anxious about Ps. 38, 19; seldom absolutely, Jer. 17, 8. The connexion, therefore, with the root in triy-avov, ■z'qK-sa&ai is questionable. Deriv. tlSN'n, the proper name SOT (s^i'n). Syr. v^? the same, whence 1^-^ anxiety, sorrow. !^^5^ (fearful) n. p. m. of an Edomite, 1 Sam. 21, 8; 22, 9; Ps. 52, 2, for which the K'tib 1 Sam. 22, 18 22 has a;i1 (which see). M^XT f. anmiety, sorrow, fear, Jer. 49, 23;'Ez. 12, 19; Prov. 12, 25; "la for fear of Josh. 22, 24. ' ' J*1>*T to moisten, a reduplicated form of m n., and the basis of Tn (which^ see); Sanskrit dhi to drink. T\'^1 (Jut. iiNIi, ap. Nil) imir. to it T ^ ,V I . ' IT VI"' drive along quickly, to hasten along, to flee speedily, of the flight of the eagle Deut. 28, 49 (where the Sam., cod. reads MiS'i;) Jer. 48, 40, or of other birds of prey (see the noun rtsi). Figurat. of God Ps. 18, 11 , he did fly ('*'!jp) '"■pon the wings of the wind, for which there is in 2 Sam. 22, 11 NT;i (see letter l). It stands poetically for t\^'$. Ar. fotiJ n. to hover, 'i\o\i> a gentle rocking motion. Deriv. TMSn, tTi^. — n«i 307 321 The org. root is M.-N1, which lies also in NT3 2 Kings 17, 21 K'tib, and this . IT T ' ' is closely related to Tn in the reduplicat- ed ni'l, to ND in saSD, ISO in N&NO, 5>T in yT.y\, then again to m (rpii), ni-2, fl-ni &c. Comp. Sanskrit di, da; Greek &S-SIV. fiU'l (formed oat of rtN'n from Pihel; (T I ^ IT - ' therefore in another form !T'5) f. bird of prey , so called from its rapid flight; then a ravenous bird Lev. 11,14, accord- ing to the Sam. cod. Deut. 14, 13 for MNI (see that and the letter l), -which ■IT T ^ ^ / J the LXX translate by yv'ip (vulture), and the Vulgate by milvus, n"'! Is. 34, 15 is the same, which form is adhered to especially in Aramaean (Targ. isn^'i , Syr. i^*?, Sam. Mn^N'i &c.). 7^1 after the Arabic: to take short r T ' steps; an assumed stem for the n. p. nbN.l'; (but see this). "li^l an assumed stem for li*'^, see DT (or ai'n; pi. C'a'l) epicene (m. and f.) a bear, a she-bear, 1 Sam. 17, 34 36; 2 Kings 2, 24, which growls Is. 59, 11, roves about after booty Prot. 28, 15, lurks in secret Lament. 3, 10, and is associated with the lion Pkov. 28, 15, 1 Sam. 17, 34 (Wisdom 11, 18); she passes for a more terrible animal than the pan- ther Prov. 17, 12. bt>, JUt>, bear, she-bear. — Accord- ing to the derivation from na'n (to sneak) it has been commonly assumed that 3^1 is so called from a sneaking, awkward gait. But as that is not sufficiently dis- cs .- tinctive, Bochart already takes it from ^-j\ to be hairy, v_;ijO lanugo, ^— oiif pilosus, and S'l would be shaggy. See also r T 3T Aram. epic, the same, Dan. 7, 5, a symbol of the later Median empire. J^Dl (not used) intr. to rest, like IT r the Ar. LjJ, either of old age, death,' or as a figure of prosperity; hence sa^ (according to the Vulg., Jerus. Targ.'"l'. and II., Ibn G'anich, Jos. KimcM and others). But the meanings "rest, old age, death, prosperity" &c. do not suit NaT in Deut. 33, 25. According to theLXX', Onk. Syr. Sa'ad. and others to be vig- orous, quick, lively, powerful (oppos. to relax), from Nil = ms to be firm, ' n T IT T ' »■, powerful, a meaning that suits better in all respects (see however N3^). De- riv. Na^ and the n. p. NaTi?2. " ■•• I ^ IT : 1", ND^ (only with suf. '^^^'i) m. (ac- cording to LXX, Onkelos, Syr. Sa'ad.) strength, firmness, Deut. 33, 25: and thy stretigth continues thy life long (3 refers to time), conseq. from Nm (=riiS and root aS""') tr. to make firm; intr. to be firm. But S£ is seldom flattened into d. The Jerus. Targ. I. and II., Vulg., Ibn G'an^ch, Kimchi understand old age: and as thy {youthful) days will be thine old age (conseq. from S<3'1 = yi, Ar. iSii to creep along, of an old man). But since 'Jj^'^i signifies rather the days of life instead of those of youth , and the connexion with the preceding member requires it otherwise; since farther Sia'n in the proper name N3"i"'n does not well admit of this explanation : it seems more advisable to translate it riches, affluence, fulness (yfiihMidrash wa-Jikr. rab. ch. 35, Jalk. p. 312, andMusafia), from Na'l = at to flow to, Targumic NT1 the same. NDT see NaT'JJ n. p. IT : IT : r '■ 331 (i. e. 31; Kal not used) intr. to r T ^ r' ' speak, which this stem means in the Talmud (see Pih. and Poh.) ; comp. Syr. -^ (on 1 Sam. 20, 13) to communicate (by words). Metaphor, to growl, of bears, whence perhaps a^. Pih. aa'l (not used) to spreadby words; then to speak ill of, to slander, to de-. fame, to bring before people; hence Ma'1« Poh. aai"! to make one speak, to make talkative, of fiery wine Song of Sol.' 7, 10: making talkative the lips of those asleep, i. e. wine is so fiery that thq^ 20* nm 308 .-n^Di intoxicated in their sleep speak aloud while dreaming. The organic root a^ is in Targu- mic ia, Syr. ^^ , whence Af. to make known (by speech), U^ (preacher), l^ (report); which root probably lies in n'J-3 n. also. M" T riDT (not used) tr. to cause to flow out, to mnpty, the body ; cognate in sense N'nn (which see), Min. Conseq. the or- ganic root rt-ai is identical with the Aram. ::'!i, ^s?, Hebr. ST and others. IT ' ' IT Deriv. ^ran (which see)i »"I3T (with suff. rinjn'n) f. 1. what is spoken, talk, of one,' Jee. 20, 10, Ps. 31, 14 (parallel nsffl Ez. 36, 3), not di- rectly slanderous or hurtful, in which case iiS'n is added Gen. 37, 2. It is joined with N"'an in this sense. — 2. evil report, slander, construed with by N-'itirt Num. 14, 36, or merely N-'Sir: Pbov. 10, 18 ; Ar. '^y^S, o^iS a slan- derer, — 3. fame, i. e. what is made known by talk Pbov. 25, 10 ; comp. Targ. «aD, Syr. k^. nii^n see n^h'i. IT ! IT : np"l {part. pi. Vpa^) Aram, same as Hebrew' nar Ezr. 6, 3. Deriv. nai73 and IT ' 1- : - l"!?! (.P^- V'^^'i) ■4»'a»!. m. a sacrifice, EzE.' 6' 3 = Hebr. nST. ' -iv 'ji^'pT (only pi. d"'5i''a'l) 7«. flux, of the body, Qsvfia yaatgog, dung, 2 Kings 6, 25 (K'ri, consequently after the form lV)?-> Ti;?^ formed from a verb ri'b). That people in a time of famine sought dung for food is testified by Josephus (B. Jud. 5, 13, 7) and Celsus (Hierob. 11. pag. 233 seq.). According to the Targ., 3n G'andch, Kimchi and others, the word is compounded of fiiiii ai'i (^'■p = li:?i'7 from ai-j = ait) dung of doves, which others take for a periphra- sis of any bad vegetable nourishment, as Bochart thinks roasted chick-pea, which is called in Ar. doves' dung. But Hebraism has no love for such com- jpounds, and so these explanations fall away. TheK'tib p'''in, which is reckoned indecent, has. the same meaning. T^HT m. 1. the hinder part, of the temple, the west hall, the whole hinder part, where was the holy of holies 1 Kings ch. 6; 7, 49; 8, 8; 2 Che. 3, 16; 4, 20; 5, 7 9; interchanged with &''Wn)5.ri iBT[j? 1 Kings 8, 6 ; as the special seat of holiness used also of the western and holier part of the tabernacle under the appellation la'nj? T'S'i, Ps. 28,2. — The LXX have left it untranslated; Je- rome (Xa^r^giov) and the Vulg. (oracu- lum) thought of "IS '7; but it certainly comes from l^'n III. to he behind, to he after. Ax. J4> (to be behind, to be after, figur. to waylay, to chase), cognate in sense with ap5»; hence the Talm. lai";! 9 '" and 'la^ back, Arab. -at> pars postica, j|i> postremus &c. — 2. (perhaps pas- sage for cattle) n. p. of a royal city of the Canaanites JosH.12,13, named iTia'^ 10, 39, in the later territory of Judah, in the neighbourhood of Hebron 15, 7, situated in a mountainous district 11, 21; 15,49; inhabited by priests 21,14, and said to have been called earlier 'iSD ni^p 15, 15 or ^rso ni'-ip. la'i (lai) is Phenician = Hebr. 1BD a stuff pre- pared from the skins of animals, like theHimyar. jO a book written on palm leaves, -si to write ; from this arose after the insertion of the <-sound fXi(i, _<> 8iq)&sQa, the Phenician word having passed over generally to the Greeks (perhaps with the alphabet) and the Persians (Peis.j^ii writer). T'a'n may therefore mean book- town, i. e.' where the sacred writings of the Phenicians were kept, as those of the Chaldeans (Berosus) were in ^wqpapa (Ptol. 5, 18), Hipparenum (Plin. 6, 30); and might be pai-aphrased by "nsD n;'i)5 Judges 1, 11, or rtso T^^p^ Josh. 15, 49 (seensd). — 3. (scribe) n. p. of a Phenician king of lib^i? Josh. 10, 3. n'H'^IlT (and iTjja'l) proper name of a city. Josh. 15, 7, which is different perhaps from 'T'a'7. 13-1 309 P3-I "nST (not used) Aram. tr. same as Hebr. pal and Joj. — 2. to enclose, encircle (of a round object) ; whence the proper names iiba'n, D^nba*!. Metaphor.: to embrace (amorously), to enclose; whence the proper name D'jba'l (from bai). — The organic root is ba"T , also found in ba'-l, baTi, ba"3 &c. ^3T (sing, unused) m. amorous em- bracing, coition, hence dual D'^ba'l ["na; na expresses reference] (of double co- pulation) a symbolic-prophetic surname of a harlot im Hos. 1, 3. nbllT (circle, roundness, from ba'! 2 ; with a of motion iinba'i) 1. n. p. of a city in the extreme northern border of Palestine, like laia (wilderness) in the south Ez. 6, 14. This Diblah is (accord- ing to Jerome, Kimchi and others) the Riblah (iiba'n) situated in nnn Jes.52, 9 27, where the LXX huve' Js^lad-d (nba'i), since r and d are often inter- changed (see l), and also the Syr. L^^j (see Cast.) is put for Riblah or Daphne. — 2. Only rfaaZ D^rtba'! (double circle) Num. 33, 46, or connected with n^a Jer. 48, 22, proper name of a city in the plain of Moab , where was also a city ymhv ; in Jerome's days it was still standing (see Onomast. under Jassa). •ibnT (constr. rba'i,pZ.t]''ba'7, from ba'n) /. prop, a mass pressed together, therefore a cake of figs, a mass of dried figs, TraXd&ij (which originated from nba'7, Athen.XI.p.500Casaub.), joined to'''ti-!:Nri ISAM. 25,18; 30,12; applied also to Leal 2 Kings 20, 7. D''b3T see rtbax I nb^T see fibai. rtDT see nba'i. DTlbm see inbax ■ I- T ; ■ (T : • pST (from pai, in pause iipa'n Job 29, 10, ipa'i 41, 15; m/. constr. Mpan Deut. 11, 22; fut. pan^, 2 /. pi. riJanFi) intr. 1. to ie attached to something, to adhere to, actually and mentally, with a Gen. 2, 24; Euth 1, 14; to cleave to, to stick to, with b Ps. 44, 26, btj 2 Sam. 23, 10, Lament. '4, 4, OS of the person or thing, Kuth 2, 21. After this origi- nal signification we should explain the expressions : "rinb or "^rj'bN '^ Ti"i:b pai the tongue of one cleaves to his palate, by which is meant, sometimes to languish Lament. 4, 4, sometimes to be dumb Ps. 137, 6; Job 29, 10 (comp. Ez. 3, 26); (laa) fflD3 (issb) ynsb pan the body cleaves to the dust i. e. lies sorrowful in the dust, Ps. 44, 26; 119,25. Seldom absolutely, Job 41, 15: the dew-laps of his flesh adhere closely. — 2. to strive after, in order to unite oneself with a thing, properly to addict oneself to; metaphorically to hunt after, to pursue and at the same time to catch (cognate in sense NS): , a'^fen) i. e. to be close be- hind, with "nn.!!? Ps. 63, 9, Jer. 42, 16, accus. GBN.Tg, 19, or :? Deut. 28, 60; comp. Latin haerere in terga hostium. Deriv. pal, pal. Puh. pa"! to be firmly attached to one another, absol. Job 38, 38, or with a 41, 9. Hif. p''a'll7 (fut. pi. 1p"'ai:, shorter Ipan^) causat. of Kal 1. to cause to cleave, to 'make adhere, with bs Jer. 13, 11, or a to the thing which Ez. 3, 36; 29, 4. — "2. like Kal: to be close behind, to hunt after, to chase and catch, to seize, with accus. Gen. 31, 23, 2 Sam. 1, 6, I'lnN Judges 20, 45, 1 Sam. 14, 22, or with a of the object Deut. 28, 21. Hof. pa"!!! to be made adhere, with accus. to a thing, Ps. 22, 16. The stem (Targ.pa'7, Syr.-a=?, Ar. (iJiS, (3*^) (J-ftis) is in its organic root pa-1 , identical with that in pa-N 11., PDI 310 "1D1 pa-n, Aram. '^a"'n &c., and has its ana- logy also in the extra-Semitic tongues. p21 {pi. 'Q-''i>V\) adj. m., n)?a'7 /. cleaving, adhering to, with a Deut. 4, 4, 2 Kings 3, 3; with > 2 Chr. 3, 12 faith- ful; absol. attached to Prov. 18, 24. p^T (/Ji. d"'|55'i) the anneseation , sol- dering, welding. Is. 41, 7. — 2. Only in pi. shoulder-joints, so called from union lKiNGs22, 34; Targ. ri??l» (Jek. 38, 12) for nib''SN ; Samar. np-'i'i for n"i3N. p?l {part. pi. yp.y^) Aram, same as Hebrew pST Dan. 2,' 43. ^DT I. (Kal only part. m. '15^, ^Z. d'^'ia'i, f. nils'!, part. j»as«. 'lai; once inf. with sMyf. '?;''p.ana Ps. 51, 6 ; elsewhere usually in Pihel) tr. to range, to put to- gether in a row, to set in order, to bind together, especially words, i. e. to speak (comp. verba serere, whence sermo; Gr. iiQsiv from Feq; Sanskrit bra, bru after a like figure), consequently like 'r^'iy Job 37,19 = d-''j)?3 'ti'iS. In this custo- mary meaning it stands with the accu- sative of the object Is. 45, 19, Ps. 101, 7, with bN Jeb. 38, 20, Jon. 3, 2 or h of the person Esth. 10, 3, or with 's ijNa Deut. 5, 1 ; Jee. 28, 7. With ?S of the person , sometimes to promise good respecting a person Jer. 32, 42, sometimes to speak evil, Ps.31,19; 109, 20. With a of the person only in Zech. ch. 1 and 4 to reveal. With D3> Ps. 28, 3 to speak with one. — Of many verbs, which usually appear only in Pihel ("la'l, ^p, ^p:l, ^rp., ^i?3, ^30, ^pn, b^a) the participle in the Kal form occurs (1^^, aT>, 1Bpi=l, Mlj?, tlph, MD3, MSh, bbia), because this having the esseiace of a noun is not under the necessity of following the verb. In Phenician Kal was also in use, as t)'i5^^ IIJN (the man of whom they spoke) "or in another text lani Plant. 1, 6; n'na'i ib. 1, 7. Deriv. ^ii, iiiai, 'la^?: 2." IT t' ITT :' IT : • mf.'-]^1i to convei-seMkh-SjlG; with by to speak one with another against one 3, 13 ; with a to speak of one Ez. 33, 30, Ps. 119,23 (in a good and a bad sense). Pih. 'is'i {pause '~en and so perhaps Jer. 5, 13; 2 f. "'nna'i Jer. 3, 5; part, m. "nana, /. nian73; inf. iai, -la^; on the contrary la"! Ex. 6, 28, Deut. 4, 15, Hos. 1, 2 is not the inf., but the per- fect; fui. lan^, "ia"i;) to speak, in the' widest usage, without what is spoken (as in the case of T5N) necessarily fol- lowing, therefore it stands absolut. Is. 1, 2; Job 11, 5 &c.; sometimes with the accus. of what is said Gen. 21, 2, Ex. 6, 28, or what is said follows in direct discourse Gen. 41, 17; often laN fol- lows by way of supplement (see T?i<). The person spoken to has bN Gen. 12, 4, -riN 17, 22 for which even nN (ns) Numb. 26, 3, b Judges 14, 7, Dy Deut. 5,4, bs Jer. 6, 10 (as 11,2), --^Db Ex. 6, 12, 's ''iTNa Gen. 50, 4; but the signi- fications are distinguished according to these constructions, as: a) a "1 Numb. 12, 8, Hab. 2, 1 to reveal to one (see a 15^ Zech. ch. 1 and 4) ; to speak on behalf of one 1 Sam. 19, 3; of one Deut. 6, 7 or = agabist one Numb. 21, 7, Job 19, 18; on account of one I Sam. 25, 39, Song op Sol. 8, 8, sometimes = in order to try to gain one, to seek to gain one Jek. 31, 20; by one Numb. 12, 2; 2 Sam. 23, 2. b) by '■! to pronounce to one, to promise Gen. 1 8,19, Is. 37,22; to threaten Jer. 25, 13; generally to declare, with the addition of aiu or iiaiu Numb. 10 I . IT 29, 1 Sam. 25, 30 (which is sometimes equivalent to: whereby good arises Esth. 7, 9), or with ny-i 1 Kings 22, 23. For IT r ' it stands bN Jer. 36, 31. c) with bs of the person: to command one Ex. 1, 7, Job 42, 9 (LXX nQOt^tdnaai), more rarely with b? 42, 7; bsj DiblU "1 to pro- mise peace to one, Ps..85,9, on the other hand "3. Dibilj "n or b 122,8, Esth. 10, ; I 7 . . 7 7 7 3 to wish prosperity to one, and DibttJ "1 to speak of peace Ps. 35, 20; niaiu "5 bij Jee. 12, 6 to speak in a friendly manner with one, elsewhere with "ns 2 Kings 25, 28. d) with accus. of the person: to speak with one Gen. 37, 4 and perhaps also Numb. 26, 14; fre- quently with accus. of the object, as P7.1S Is. 45, 19, d-'-iffl'^n 33, 15, ^pia ' . I. r T I" ' ' *•,• ly 13"! 311 IDT 69, 3, nba? 32, 6, NTJB 59, 4, seldom absol. 22,25, asb? of the person is also sometimes omitted Euth 4, 1. e) with -nN of the person and accus. of the ob- ject: to speak something upon one, e. g. Bib\l5 Jer. 9, 7, Q-'pEW? 39, 5, where however "ns is sometimes interchanged with riN 12, 1. — Of peculiar expres- sions and meanings we have to note the following: a) to speak eloquently Ex. 4, 14; Jer. 1, 6; Ez. 3, 18. b) with b of the person: to promise Deut. 6, 3; 19, 8, with or without the accus. of the object 12,20; Gen. 24, 7. c) 'E aVb? "i to speak kindly to one, to speak heartily with one, alio qui Gen. 34, 3; to con- sole Is. 40, 2; when however the refer- ence is to the speaker himself, to speak with oneself 1 Sam. 1, 13, Gen. 24, 45, sometimes = to think, to reflect, as aba "1 orab-Q?.EccL.l,16; 2,15. d) 'T'ffl '"■=! f sing a song. Judges 5, 12, or to glorify by song Ps. 40, 6 ; comp. Ar. JLjs , Lat. di- cere (Ov. Met. 1, 1). e) "ija"! "i Is. 58, 13, pi. D'"n2'n "1 Hos. 10, 4 to speak a lying word, comp. Jer. 29, 23. f) 2 "i 1 Sam. 25, 39 orb Judges 14,7 to speak for one, to woo (see Puhal). — In 1iai';i Gen. 34, 13 "1 has no other sense, but it refers to the following I'l73i<»l, after a parenthesis has been inserted with TiJN. Deriv. 'la'n, iTiaT K-: I" ■' ITT - Ihih. 'la'l 1. to be promised, with a of the person' of whom something is pro- mised Ps. 87, 3. — 2. with a of the person, to be wooed, for one Song of Sol. 8, 8. Hithp. lailri (prop. IS'in^r; orAj part. *ia'i73) prop, to talk with one another, therefore to communicate on^s thoughts by speech, with bs of the person Ez. 43, 6 ; 2,2, where according to the LXX riN is for inj« ; Num. 7,89;= to speak ge- nerally, with accus. of the object 2 Sam. 14, 13, where Vulg., Syr., Targ. read *ianai. TiTinaiia Deut. 33, 3 see JTia'n. 1" - : I IV : - • ITT - *1DT II. (Kal not used) 1. trans, to dnve, to lead (cattle to pasture), to drive in (herds), to guide, to drive along (a boat), whence 'na^, n'na'i, "la"]'?! per- Jiaps iilia-], rTna-iM, 'iia'^ 2, and the proper names 'lai, ^lai, nia'n; the 1r ^ . . IT : ' r : * ' r : it ' Phenician proper name "nai. — 2. Figur. to drive away, to snatch away, to destroy; hence laT Pih. 'na'l to snatch away, to destroy, with accus. of the object Ps. 127, 5, 2 Chr. 22, 10, LXX a7id>lsas, Vulg. interfecit; in the parallel passage "las. Hif. T^a.";!! ifut. apoc. lai^) to drive, to lead, with nnn to lead under the do- 7 - r minion of one i. e. to subjugate Ps. 47, 4; 18, 48, for which 2 Sam. 22, 48 1^y\l2^ = 'T"i7:i i. e. l^^ = 1^ (=''7,'i"i Ps. 144, 2, hence the LXX naiStvwv i. e. 'T'pi73l) as a periphrasis; Targ. "lana. The stem 'na'^ is also in Ar. jt> l-T J^ (pasture), -ji> (to lead, to guide) = ap3, nns, Ji> (march; comp. agmen out of agimen from agere to drive) &c. , in Targ. la'n, Syr. j-^^? to lead. For the organic root la-i comp. Talm. ICN. pasture. "13T in. (not used) intr. to be be- P T ^ ^ ^ hind, Ar. -Ji> to be behind, to follow, to pursue, j^o\ the same, JO =''pn^- Deriv. "l^a"! 1. and perhaps tT]5^'l. "1D1 rV. (not used) tr. transposed from a'n'n to stick (with a pointed sting), to pierce] cognate a^iit. Deriv. probably in'ia'i. "■13^, in the pi. ^y^^, see ^a'nii. nn'l {constr. la'^, with suff. na'i, i'ia'7 ; pi. d"'ia'7, constr. ■''na'i; comp. Phenic. ^'D.'^ Mel.' 3, 6) m. prop, a stringing to- gether of words or syllables into one whole (see '-Or\ L), and so 1. a single word, in the proper sense (yerbum, LXX loyog, Qfjiia) 2 Kings 18, 36, Job 2, 13, and this equivalent to a few words, a short speech Gen. 44, 18; Job 4, 2; ino "n Judges 3, 19 a secret word (of message); Q"'fl'bN "7 a word of God i. e. a divine announcement 3,20; an entreaty 2 Kings 9, 5 ; a word of promise Josh. 21, 45; "laT "i Prov. 25, 11 a spoken word. Hence pi. Q''7?1 «%^« words, of a language, D''nriN 'f Gen. U, 1 07ie "IDT 312 nm kind of words. — 2. speech, consisting of many words ra,nged together after the laws of language, senno Job 15, 3, in which sense occur aia "i Ps. 45, 2 beautiful discourse, "5 1135 skilled in dis- course 1 Sam. 18, 18; a saying, maxim, sentence Pkov. 4, 4 20; a wise saying EcCLES. 1, 1 ; a thought 8, 1 ; a prophetic saying, oracle Jbr. 1, 1; d^nsto "7 Is. 36, 5 word of the lips i. e. without mind. PI. D''1!3'1 discourses j. e. connected Gen. 29, 13 J b4, 18; Ex. 4, 28; '^ b?3 pos- sessor of discourses i. e. a speaker Ex. 4, 10; 24, 14. From this signification is to be derived fig. a) promise, prop, utter- ance, particularly in the expression "1 a"')?!! 1 Kings 2, 4 &c. or also alone; comp. snog, b) command, precept, law, regulation (by words), also taken collect, e. g. of God 2 Sam. 12, 9, of a king 1 Sam. 21, 9, of Moses Josh. 1, 13, of other men Phot. 26, 6, Is. 8, 10, in which sense occurs the pi. D'^'ni'iii rTiiuy Ex. 34, 28 the ten commandments, 6 8s- xdloyog. c) an inquiry 1 Sam. 17, 29; an account, an answer Ez. 9, 11; Prov. 18, 13; smart repartee 27, 11. d) an utterance of God, a revelation, vatici- nium Is. 9, 7; 16, 13; an oracle Job 4, 12; especially in the compounds ■'^ "la'i 2 Kings 7, 1 ; bi« ^-^ ^•3.1 n-^Tt 1 Kings 13, 20, b? . . . 1-Chr. '22, sV 's n;a . . . Hag. 2, 1; pi. ti'''-W different prophetic utterances Jer. 39,16, Ez. 12, 28, for which the phrase lim-bs 'nai 12, 23 is rare, e; decree, plan, proposal 2 Sam. 17, 6; 1 Kings 1, 7. f) repoH, news 1 Kings 10, 6. All these variations which refer back to signific. 2. may be easily apprehended from the context, and en- larged. — 3. Prop, what one speaks of, object of discourse, hence not the dis- course itself, a) a thing, res (comp. res from Qe'm; Sache in German from sagen), a matter Eccles. 7, 8, 2 Sam. 3, 13, and this like Dans (which see), Aram, i*^'?) Greek snos, Qijfia, Xoyog = some- what 1 Sam. 20, 2, particularly in the phrases np la'iri Gen. 20, 10, pi. i^lp!? '3'''P?'i5i which may be resolved partly by accenting the demonstrative, partly in another way. So when "1 stands absol. or in constr. state: K'3U "1 any thing unclean Lev. 6, 2 , nayinii "!j Jer. 44, 4, nbiSH "i Judges 19, 24, or ' ' ITT : - : ' ' 1i1 comes after, e. g. iai miy anv IT T ' ° (T T r :v •' thing fUthy Deut. 23, 15; pi. d'^aia D''13'7 2Chk. 12, 12 good, di'ia'n nib'-'by /dtU- nesses Deut. 22, 14. In this sense it means: any thing Gen. 18, 14; 131 yiK Numb. 20, 19 it is nothing i. e. it is of no importance, which, however, may also mean nothing at all 1 Sam. 20, 21; ISTbs Numb. 31, 23 every thing. Here belongs the signification belonging to a thing, with the noun following e. g. dr la'n Ex. 5, 13, WJJ 131 2 Chr. 9, p 1- : ' ' IT T 1- ; ' 24 daily, yearly; or it remains un- translated, e. g. niiiriNn "''lai 1 Sam. 10, 2, riiiy ■'131 Ps. 65, 4. ' b) occur- ' ' i_ IT r: • '_ ' rence, action, history, or in the pi. res gestae 1 Kings 5, 7; 11, 41; 2 Che. 33, 18; d''n''tl '1 histories of the days i. e. chronicles; tljanbwn '1 affairs of war IT T : ■ - • " ' 1 Sam. 11, 18. c) relation, reference, way, condition, Judges 18, 7 they had rela- tions with no one i. e. they were isolated and without association with a neigh- bour; narail lai relation of the altar Numb. 18', 7; Di?n '1 1 Kings 9, 15 the-^ relation of the levy; "ni1l3a "1 Job 41, 4 [12] the manner of his 'great deeds. d) cause, suit at law Ex. 18, 16, in full form UEffla IS-^ 2 Chr. 19, 6; in which signification are put with 131 the verbs 11511 EzR. 10, 16, ti^j> Euth'4, 7, D=i)? Deut. 19, 15. So the pi. d-'l31 2 Sam. 15, 3 (parall. S'll 15, 2) and a!cc6rdingly '1 iai to conduct a cause Josh. 20, 4; d"'13'7 b»3 one who lias causes Ex. 24, 14. e) ground, cause, causa, ratio Josh. 5, 4; hence 1j?1-b» Gen. 12, 17, ''1.a'=J"^? Deut. 4, 21 as & preposition: because, on account of, like causa; before verbs liasi larb? 22, 24 (comp. M13l). The succession of senses in this very frequent word is developed in a great degree from the fundamental concep- tion, as in the later Hebrew diins. Ax. j^\ and v-Aki., Targ. sb?;, Nnb?a, Syr. 1^:2^, Pers. ^^ &c.; it is therefore a ")D-I 313 n*iDi tnisconception of the LXX in translat- ing 131 Is. 9, 8 = lan. 13T from 13'n 11. ; ;j«. with suff. '^''pa'i) «». prop, snatching away, hence destruc- tion, ruin, pestilence, joined with 133 Ex. 9, 3, b't-j^ Jer. 21, 6. The bringing of a plague is called 'a "7 nViB" Ex. 14, 18, 'a '1 in3 2 Sam. 24,"13, "n'a Visn Ex. 5, 16. The plural Hos. 13, 14 denotes mille viae leti, the many sicknesses of which the most terrible is called n73 liaa Job 18, 13; but a later read- viT I : ' ' ing (1 Cor. 15, 55) appears to have been tJ:3"]T, thy sting. Comp. Arab. _Ji> death, %LiO misfortune. 13T (after the form n|3B) m. the speaker i. e. the spirit of God which speaks out of the prophets Jer. 5, 13; if = 131, then DiTisa must have stood. I3JT m. 1. (from 131 11.; with suff. il31, D131) pasture, = lai53 1; D1313 I : T' n: t' *^ ' it : • ' it: it ; = '33 Is. 5,17 as on their pasture; then a flock on the pasture Mic. 2, 12. — 2. (from lai III.) prop, hack (see I'^ai), turning of the back, progress ; 11313 SoNG or Sol. 5, 6 (to be read for iiaia) at his pro- gress, if we should not rather read iiaya (comp. IWSa 2 Sam. 12, 25 from I3ia; n3l» Job 28, 13 from PI311). In r : • ' ^ IT :v ' it i-'^ old writing the interchange of 3* and 1 was possible. Perhaps D1313 in Is. 5, 17 is according to their being behind. *131 (not used) m. = lain pasture, hence 131 iib or iai ib {pastureless) n. p. of a place not far from d'^Jfia on the other side of Jordan 2 Sam. 9,45; 17, 27; identical perhaps with 13lb (which see). im see proper name 13lb. Kllin (constr. ni3l) Aram. f. prop. a cause (= 131 3), connected with 15> and ^ it t '^^ r ^1 only as a preposition, conseq. "1^ 11 ni31 in order that Dan. 2, 30; 4, 14, Here 1? stands = bv (see 1). rriHT f. only Ps. 110, 4 ■'nl?1 bs in consequence, from iai IH. Yet it is better to refer it to JTi^l- n"l2!T (after the form inobl?; only pi. ^^"131) f. Utterance, word, hence "JM Ntos ri*ai to receive of the utterances (of God) Dbut. 33, 3 ; LXX iSg^aro dno tmv Xdycov avToii; so the Vulg. correctly. ni3T (only constr. ri131, in a very ancient form Tiiai; with suff. also "0131) f. (from I3l) 1. a cause Job 5, 8, like 131 3. — 2. relation, mode, manner Ps. lie, 4 = iai , as the LXX and Syr. have already taken it; see !1131. — 3. ground, reason, only as a preposition joined to by, viz. niai"b?, and belonging to the following noun Eccles. 3, 18; 8, 2, or with .IB following, prop, from the ground that ... i. e. in order that, like Aram. N131. "nibT (-i:3'7, pi. a''15l) f. l.a bee, a wasp, usually in ^^ Deut. 1,44; Judges 14, 8; Ps. 118, 12; but the sing, also occurs fig. Is. 7, 18. — 2. (prop. bee; comp. Greek and Lat. Ms'liaaa, Melissa, Ger- man Emma, i. e. Emme, Imme = bee, a proper name fem.) n. p. of a prophetess and singer Judges 4, 4 ; 5,1 (as Velleda among the old Germans, Tacit, hist. 4, 61.65), from whose abode there, a place was called nii31 la'n 4, 5. It was also IT : •■■ I ' the name of another woman Gen. 35, 8. — '1 is usually derived from 131 11., and is said prop, to denote march or proces- sion (of bees), as the Ar. j-^^j tit it is possible that iai, Targ. and Syr. lat, t-=l , Ar. ' jC, belonging to this noun, has the sense of to buzz; or 131 = 311 to pierce, which suits the designation of the bee. ''IDT (from 131 = ia^: horn on the pasture, or it stands for li'lSI Jah dis- tributes promise) n. p. m. Lev. 24, 11. Comp. the Phenic. proper name 131. riDT (in mss. also ri13T, a feminine form of 13^: pasture) n. p. of a border- town of Issachar, apportioned to the Levites Josh. 21, 28; 1 Chr. 6, 57; in- stead of it there is in Josh. 19, 20 n-iaiii which has arisen out of nl31!i. In'Euseb. Ja^gd^ in Issachar, different from Ja^sigd in the district of Diocae- sarea, at the southern foot of Tabor; it is r\i2i 314 |1J1 Still called at the present day V»^i>- n"lDT ionly pi. nina^; from l^'iH.) /. prop, the driving, hence a raft, put together from the trunks of trees 1 Kings 5, 23. ^D,1 (not used) mir-. to be slimed to- gether, to be put together by grease, as a thing which is slimy, sticky, fat, whence lOa'n; generally to be pressed together {into a mass or lump), whence rifflS'^ 1 ; metaphor, to put a lump together (of a hill\ whence rilBa'l 2; to be strong, fleshy (of the body), whence the proper name Il5a"!\ — The stem is closely connected with 125du &c. ; and the Ar. (j*ot> (a mass of men), (jjyOt> (to be thick, close) be- long to the same root. aJ^T {pause-a'jri, with sujf. "'llJa'l) m. prop, a sticky mass, that hangs together; specially honey, of house- or forest- bees Ex. 16, 31 ; 2 Kings 18, 32 ; 1 Sam. 14, 26 ; Deut. 32, 13 ; Ps. 81, 17 (comp. liili ayQiov Matth. 3, 4); of grapes, i. e. mead extracted from grapes boiled to the thickness of a syrup Gen. 43, 11, Ex. 27, 17, which was an article of com- merce. Figurat. in connexion with abn Ex. 3, 8, with -pzvi, rr;! Deut. 8, 8 or 'tri'^-: 2 Kings 18, 32 a 'sign of the ful- ness of nature; honey and milk under thy tongue Song of Sol. 4, 11 i. e. thou speakest very sweetly, like similar figures in Greek and Latin. ?iui5l f' ^- * lump of fat, a mass of fat, hence a camel's hump, Is. 30, 6, as the Targ., Syr. and Vulg. have also taken it. — 2. {hill-place) n. p. of a city in Zebulun Josh. 19, 11; comp. nouns of this stem in the Ethiopic and Am- haric in the sense of "hill, mountain". ST (after the form li, from iiai, once (T ^ it' IV t' SN'n Nbh. 13, 16; pi. D'^ai, constr. ■'Jl) m. prop, fruitful, manifold, self-increas- ing, like the Aram. Iia (fish), therefore a fish, of the sea, frequently joined with O^rr Gen. 9, 2, Num. 11, 22, Ez. 38, 20, which was taken in nets Eccles. 9, 12 and then eaten Neh. 13, 16; a sea-fish, )(i}tog, is called bin-l! a^ Jon. 2, 1 ; from the fish -market a gate of Jerusalem, was called u^nn ^Sia Zbph.1,10; Nbh. r r - - r 3, 3. — In Aram, the usual word instead is "JIS, and so the Arab, jjjj from a root-signification Qognate in idea. Hence the denom. ail (Kal not used) tr. to fish, from which denominative the nouns SJ'l, ail and nan are formed; as a verb IT- _ (I ' only in Mif. a'l'l (for ai^rt) to catch like fish, with accus. of the object Jbr. 16, 16. r\ji1 (fut. !l5'T') intr. to grow, to in- IT T ^ 1*. : ' crease, of animals Gen. 48, 16, in funda- mental signification and root identical with naio, which expresses the same of plants, since T and iu are interchanged (see l); comp. Ar. l5\ (to grow). This' growth may be taken with respect to quality = high, prominent, firm, fat &c. or with respect to quantity = to be much, manifold, fruitful; and from this the significations of the stem in Hebrew and Arabic are to be explained. The idea of the verb "to cover" in Ar. La>.4>, e^t> is only secondary, proceeding from to increase, as m (7j-«Jo, i^.^^. Deriv. ai (aNi), to which belong the denom. ail (and thence Man, a''i, a^'i), with the nouns "31 and liai. The derivatives of IT T 'it the reduplicated stem ]13 are analogous. flM (constr. T\m, with suf. Dnn) f. a fish, either collect. Gen. 1, 26; Ex. 7, 18; Num. 11, 5; or as ai Deut. 4, 18; Jon. 2, 2. " ]i3tT (from Jia'i formed after the form lia"!) n. p. m. of a god of the Philis- tines who was worshipped at W» Judges 16, 21, "inidN 1 Sam. 5, 5 6, Zbph. 1, 9, and generally in all the five Philistine cities, and whose festival was solemnised there, 16,23 seq. The Maccabees destroy- ed Dagon's temple at Ashdod 1 Maco. 10, 83 84. His image was the form of a fish, with the upper part of the body like a man 1 Sam. 5, 4. This idol-name is still preserved in the appellations of the places ']ia'i rria Josh. 15, 41, after- bn 315 ^n wards changed into "lin "IDS. With re- gard to the fish-form 1 Sam. 5, 4 •\m is derived from J1 and is considered as the male counterpart of the female deity Berke'to i. e. Nna'i'j! = Nni^ (f^^^ from fi- — ^? with ^ inserted) worshipped in Syria (according to Lucian de Sy- ria Dea §. 14), whose image likewise terminated in a fish below, as it is well known that fish-worship prevailed among the Syrians (Athen. 13. p. 346), Ascalonites (Ctesias in Diod. 2, 4), in Aphaka, Hierapolis and other places. Yet Sanchoniathon (in Philo Byblius) explains Jayiov, 6g iari alrav i. e. pi, whence he infers /taymv stisidr] svgs altov Ml aQotQov; and he considers him Zsiig lAqoTQiog (Jerome: Jupiter ruralis). It is therefore possible to take "jiai in the sense of procreation, growth, then a name for the productive nature-god, as the stem also allows. The Phenic. Br}- tdyoav, as the Kronos of the Phenicians was called {Brjtaycav 6 Kqovo? vtto 'Potvi- xmv, Etym. Magn.), is ]i5T"'a (Dagon- sanctuary), confirming the latter mean- ing. 7JII (fut. bSi'11, part. pass. blJl) intr. 1. to shine, to glitter, to lighten- afar, of a flag, a military sign; hence bn. — 2. to exalt, to praise, by a metaphor like that in bbfl (which see) Ps. 20, 6 and in the name (i. e. for the fame) of our God will we praise, where the LXX, Vulg. Syr. read bllM, and Ibn GanS,ch looks upon the sterd itself as transposed from bnn. bi5'i Song of Sol. 5, 11 -TIT ' ^ celebrated, distinguished. The organic root is b:i"1. The stem is not connected with the Ar. (Jla»t> to cover, to disap- point, deceive (= Hebr. 15a). Nif. hSTii denominative from bai, which see. bj'i (with suff. ibsi; pi. O'^bai, with suf. tXVhyf) m. prop, the far -shining, the distant -appearing, as D5; hence a flag, banner, for every four tribes Num. ch. 2, more than niN (a military sign) which every tribe had. Metaph. cohort, under one banner. Dfiibaib 5*05, tipn to encamp, to march on after their banners. Num. 2, 31 34; ibw-b? ffiiNi 1,52 euery one with his troop; comp. Latin vexil- lum (Tacit, hist. 1, 70), Ar. iiJ\^0, Persl cXaj, German Fahnlein, in a similar sense; therefore the Targ. Dp.U {td^ig), Vulg. turma &c. In Gen. 49, 10 the Sam. codex reads T^bJI for vhil. Fi- _, IT T : IT : - gurat. Song op Sol. 2, 4: and Ms banner over me was love, where the LXX and Syr. unnecessarily read lb51 i. e. the imperative plural for ibil. Deriv. the denom. Nif. b^ii to provide oneself with banners, to banner oneself, i. e. to equip, part, nibjl'15 the bannered, troops of warriors, as the LXX, Symm. and others have taken it. pi (not used) intr. to grow, to put forth fruit, particularly of the ears, iden- tical with the Ar. ^Tv2»- 1> TV. (granis in- duruit seges), and consequently with ^til. Yet it may be also a farther de- velopment of fiJI (which see). Deriv. (perhaps lisi and) pT {constr. ^ai, with suff. las'!, tjrsi) m. prop, young shoot, sprout, more de- finitely fruit of the ears, corn, of wheat, rye, barley, Jo. 1, 10 17, Neh. 5, 2, joined to lU'l-'Fi , l^ili;^ &c. to denote ful- ness and fertility Gen. 27, 28 ; Dbut. 7, 13; Is. 36, 17. Sometimes bread, pre- pared from pi Lament. 2, 12. IJT (3 person once 'ISI for 'isi, for assonance with lb'') tr. (according to the Targ. [lass], LXX and Kimchi) to collect, e. g. the young, to protect or warm them , of the arrow-snake Is. 34, 15; to heap up, to bring together, e. g. Di51''5, Jer. 17, 11 the crier (i. e. the partridge) which heaps up eggs, which she has not laid (lb"'), LXX "Tiegdi^ avv Tjyaytv a ovx stsxer; so too Ibn Gandch. — On the stem ^51 comp. Ar. J^i>, Targ. "151, hence '1151 aheap, Zab. H^?; and the meaning also of ^151 to cherish^ fovere (Job 39, 14), as the Vulg. and Saadia take it, proceeds from this fundamental signification. "n 316 Doni ^^ (prop. part, of 11'^) »i. a friend, only in the proper names libs (^^ w a friend) Num. 11, 26, Tl-'bN 34j"21. IT (d«aZ la^'55, constr. ''V\; with sa/. 'T''7'5i '^n'^ "*• breast, mamma, of the virgin Peov. 5, 19, Ez. 23, 3 8 21, prop, the teats under which the breasts (D'^'ilB , which is etymologically from a similar fundamental signific.) are arched, 16, 7. — The rare Hebrew word 11 , Aram, in , Ar. ^5tXj &c. appears in different forms in the Indo- Germanic (Greek th&rj, Tiiifos, TiT&cov ; old high German tutta = teat; north German Titte &c.). There as here the noun has arisen from the reduplicated verb-stem; here from N1N1 to moisten, to give drink, to suckle (comp. Sanskrit da-dhi milk, dhajd a sucking child, Gothic daddjan), from the simple stem N1, Sanskrit dhS to drink. TT see lil. rm (not used) a stem incorrectly adopted for !i11, tiim, see til and ■ 11 _ _" IT- • ' IT especially Inifil. rni and iilllri see Ini and iiini. rr • IT - • 'T IT : • jIT 1. proper name of a Cushite, of Jiayi, who, like his brother Naia (which see), was the founder of a Cushite tribe Gen. 10, 7; 1 Che. 1,9. As well as NS^, "Jll is also looked upon as the founder of an Abrahamic- Arabic race, Gen. 25, 3, a race that had intercourse with dealers of Tarshish, and delighted in Gog's lust for plunder and destruction Ez. 38, 13. This implies that a part of the Dedan-race had mixed themselves with the Abrahamic-Arabic tribes. — 2. M. p. of a Cushite tribe which be- came incorporated with the Joktanites, like that of the Sabeans, and settled in eastern Arabia, at the Persian gulf, yet more to the north than the Sabeans. Carriers of the intermediate commerce irom the Persian gulf to Tyre Ez. 27 15, their caravans went, sometimes plundering, sometimes trading, through eastern Arabia aud its steppes unto Tema (NM'^n) on the borders of the Syi-ian desert, where they found protection against attacks Is. 21, 13. Belonging to the great Arabian race of 11)? (as many other tribes belonged to it) they conducted a great business of exchange in cushions and housings Ez. 27, 20. They ai-e therefore mentioned along with NMTi Jee. 25, 23; while another IT •• ^ ' ' Aramaean-Edomite group begins there with T1S. A part of this tribe settled in the neighbourhood of the Edomites, led perhaps by their intercourse with them in caravan-processions as far as Petra, and were therefore involved in Edom's misfortunes Jee. 49, 8; Ez.25, 13 (where !1511 stands instead). Another part of the tribe may have proceeded to Yemen, where under the name p (for pi) to- gether with VnNa (= bTW) and iv (in Yemen) they traded in wrought iron or steel,, i. e. sword-blades, with the Ty- rians Ez. 27, 19. Gentile Diill Is. 21, 13. — 3. proper name of the seat of this tribe a) at the Persian gulf, where an island rr*'r*? (Dirin) is = Dedan among the Syrian writers (d and r being inter- changed), as Syrian translators also put ^i? (Doron) for Dodon; b) in the neighbourhood of Edom, whose capital (according to Euseb.) is said to have lain in the vicinity of ]31S between ybo and the Dead Sea. The stem of the word, as it de- signates a Semitic people and land, is doubtless Semitic, and being so, it can only be reduplicated from the root p and be then somewhat contracted as often happens; ^1 Arab, ^fo to he deep, low, therefore "jll properly low country. U^yy^ n. p. of Javan's last son i. e. of one of the most important Greek races, named with Elisha i. e. the Aeolians and Dorians, with Tarshish i. e. the Tyrrhenes, Etruscans &c. Gen. 10, 5. But this name of a Greek race in the ethnographical table is called D'^DIil in 1 Cheon. 1, 7, which either arose by interchange of d and r, or should be considered an explanation of the name Q'^jJli. The Jer. Targ. 1 on Gen. 10, 4, and the Targ. on 1 Che. 1,7 &c. have re- m 317 im solved the name into l3"'aTi'n, perhaps for the sake of a di£Perent orthography (ar passes into 6, comp. 'i?!?^ = 'n?*!?^ Is. 15, 5, see l), understanding the Trojans, who were also called Darda- nians, derived from one Dardanus. As the Dardanian or Trojan race formed the centre of the north Greeks (Mysians, Trojans, Teucrians &c.), they might be adduced along with the others. The LXX (in Gen. and Chr., even in Ez. 27, 15 Podioi for D-iDTn), the cod. Sam. (on Gen. 10, 4), Jerome, Syncellus and others have incorrectly thought of the Bhodians, since they could not be ad- duced in the ethnographical table as a great Grecian race. m I. (not used) intr. to hasten for- ward, to hunt after, conseq. = til , closely connected with the roots N'n in Ti-si (which see), NU in NaN£3, NO in NDND; and as these appear only in reduplicated forms, so does the present. The redupli- cated form irnfi"! , abridged oTi , means in Talmudic (as Ibn G'andch has com- pared it) to drive, to make run, Ar. tjfi (to go quickly), and Hithp. tTTnin = MTinfl has arisen out of it: on the con- trary the Ar. (t>l(> (to go staggering, to shake, to rock), ulj' (to totter, to rock) and similar reduplications proceed from another fundamental signification of the simple root. See rtlfi'i. rCl n. (not used) intr. to reach to, to suffice, to satisfy. Deriv. '^X n*l n. p. of a district belonging to the Assyrian kingdom, mentioned be- tween ^3125=185 and obs, and from which colonists were brought to Samaria Ezr. i, 9. It means the present Dahistan east of the Caspian Sea, whose inhabitants were called Jdoi (Herod. 1, 125), Dahae (Virg. Aen. 8, 4). Ptolemy (6, 1, 3 4) adduces also an Assyrian locality Telde i. e. ITrbri. The Dahians are mention- ed by^Livy (XXXV, 48; XXXII, 38) and Ammian. Marc. (XXII, 8) along with the Medes and Elymaeans. The modem province of Daikh is said to be the district of the Dahians. Gentile "'H'l, pi. N;ri?^, K'tib Ninn. DHl (not used) a stem assumed for the noun nj3n']?3 Is. 14, 4, and if this reading be adhered to = Ar. CAj (to scare) or ^O (to surprise), consequently nari'i)? a sudden attack. But for a parallel to toii it is better to read Inari'ia, as also Is. 3, 5 a!Ti is parallel to ios':. See r T Dtl'l (not used) Aram, same as Hebr. itit, which see. n' Dm (def. Nafll, InaiTi) Aram. m. gold, ==Rehiew apT Dan. 2, 32; Ezr. 7, 15; applied to dbst Dan. 3, 1, -jNa 5, 2, tx^-'i'ati 5, 7, nbN 5, 23 &c. IT • : - ' ' ITV! ' mtlT (not used; only in its con- tracted state iiTi , and this reduplicated from 5Tn I.) to drive forward, to move forward, to make run, which form and meaning are still usual in the Talmud. Comp. Ar. st\j6i> 11. to hasten, to run. IRthp. iipii (= Ttr^r/n; fut. Ti-^T) to move forward, to proceed, therefore to walk. Is. 38, 15 / will walk forward all my years (""niiO'bs stands as a designa- tion of continuance in the accus.); Ps. 42, 5 / walked with them to the house of God (D- in D'n'i?? is accus., which verba of going sometimes govern). sini see ■'p'l. ■'HT (def. pi. Niii;i after the Syriao manner) Gent, from !Ti Ezr. 4, 9, where K'tib has Nini = N-'iri1 as if from im. Drn (Kal not used) intr. to grow stiff, to be startled, to grow dumb, to shudder at, to be shocked, when one can- not find words (cognate )axo, tt-an) ; Ar. |vS04>, |vJ8i> tr. to surprise, i. e. to make one shudder, terrify. Nif. firtna (part. DMia), to be terrified, to be perplexed, to be made to start Jer. 14,9; Zi'OTcfe" bniau, asperduto; the LXX read dTn? unsuitably. Trn (only part. Ip'l) intr. same as mm 318 nn IT T constr. pi. "11, of which it is an enlargement, l.to turn quickly in a circle, to trot in a circle, to hunt, of a horse in the hippodrome, Ar. y\S (to turn, to wind); metaphor. to trot quickly, to run, of a horse Nah. 3, 2; comp. i;i (ip'i) and 'n3'^3, where we have to proceed from a similar fun- damental signification ; Sanskrit dru, dra, Greek Sqa-fi &c. Deriv. JTilri'^. — 2. Fi- gurat. to run on, to continue, like other verbs of circling also ; deriv. 'ipin. In Ar. to run in a circle, spoken of time, as the Hebrew IJJ ('Tl'n); hence ^JOO (time, century). niHT (from the masc. ^rt'i; only ni'nfll) f. rapid course, of horses, gallop, Judges 5, 22 then the hoofs stamped (the ground) by the swift gallop of their war-horses. n an unused organic root for the reduplication 11'^ which see. n see nsiii'H, nin see i^. 31^ (Kal unused) intr. 1. to flow, viz. il = ST (lalT). Deriv. i'''!, the proper name ')'in"''i. See below under ')i"'5'7 a mean- ing to ;?oi« out. — 2. Metaphor, io melt, to pine away, taJ-escere, like SN'l, SIN, ns'i, Ar. iwito, Syr. ^s?. //i/. a-'lrt «o caMse to pine, TacS Lev. 26, 16; comp. i:5s3 'jiaNJi Deut. 28, 65. - JIT see s-n. Di^n TO. a ;?«Aer, Jer. 16, 16 K'tib and Ez. 47, 10 for ail; from the denom. ' IT-' ■aw. nDi^lT (after the foi-m naw) /■. a ;?sA- m^f, piscatus, or fishery Am. 4, 2 ; Talm. JT'ajll a fishing boat. TIT (same as 111 from Tl'l; loving, or joiner, uniter; but according to the Ar. orthography Ojlo (Dawud) it must be considered equivalent to Tni beloved) n. p. of the famous Israelite king, founder of a dynasty (1055-1015 B. C.) 1 Sam. oh. 16. 17. 18; 2 Sam. altogether, 1 Chr. ch. 12 - 30, and the chief composer of the Psalter, in which 74 psalms (in the LXX six besides) are attributed to him. He is designated servant of God Jeb. 33, 21 22 26; Ez. 34, 23; 37, 24 25; comp. 1 Kings 11, 32 34 36 38; 2 Sam. 7, 25- 29; Ps. 18, 1. After Ezekiel his resur- rection and return were expected; like the return of Pashutan in the Zoroastrian doctrine {de Sacy, M^moires sur div. antiquitds de la Perse p. 94 seq.). Some- times "1 stands for his posterity Hos. 3, 5. Y'T'y is Zion 1 Kings 3, 1 ; '^ rT'a either tower of David Is. 22, 9, or Da- vid' s posterity 7,2 13; Jer. 21, 11. The orthography Till is constantly found in Chr., Ezr., Neh', Zech., elsewhere only in Hos. 3, 5; Amos 6, 5; 9, 11. The Phenician proper name fern. N'l"''! (Dido, JiSm) is =IS'li'lS, therefore the Etym. Magn. nlavijttg,' Sia ro nokka nXavi]- 'd'ijvai. liT (and 1^; with suf. ■''lil, 'r\ij, '!|nin,' ini'i; pl.'ti^'^.'i'^, constr. "-i", ^-^jr, WT) '"• 1- contracted from lil'g, prop, one united, hence a friend Is. 5, 1, pi. friends Song op Sol. 5, 1 (yet perhaps more correctly here cousin); one beloved Song op Sol. 1, 13 ; 2, 3 ; 4, 16 ; 5, 2 &c. (parallel S'n 5, 16); metaph. uncle, prop, relation Lev. 10,4; Judges 10,7; ISam. 10, 14; 2 Sam. 23, 9. In Jer. 32, 12 "''1^ stands for "'l^'ia. Comp. Targ. NaiSh, Arab, j^, tViLa. (friend and uncle), Syr. 1?? (family friend) &c. — 2. Onlj pi. as an abstract: love Song of Sol. 4, 4; Din^ n? Ez. 16, 8 love-time; 'T 5311)73 23, 17 bed of love; Dili riTl I- : • ' ' ' 1- ITT Prov. 7, 18 to be intoxicated with love; then Mss of love Song op Sol. 1, 2. Comp. Ar. v_;^=. , oi.=>- love and beloved, Hebr. nsiin acquaintance and an acquaint- ance. Ill (not used, an assumed stem for the nouns 1i1 hi], Tn, niil, i1j coming from the same fundamental signification. T^T (pi. D-'Til and D"iiTn: see 11) m. a basket, prop, a thing woven, for figs Jek. 24, 2 ; to put the heads of enemies in 2 Kings 10,7; generally the burden- basket which slaves carried Ps. 81, 7; a trough, for flesh 1 Sam. 2, 14, along with ■11^3, rn'sj? and TiIe; a kettle, prop, fitted together, for boiling Job 41, 11, in which sense is the pi. D^'lTl 2 Chr. 35,13. The Syr. and Zab. l?o? and bo?l , Targ. Vm and ^-n {pi. def. Nnini'i), Sam. iTTl'n have a similar sense. mil (from the masc. Ill) /. aunt, IT I ' ' ' amita (from amata) Lev. 18, 14; 20, 20. illT (=lMTli'n, Jah is friend) n.p. m. Judges 20, 1^2 Sam. 23, 24; 1 Chr. 11, 12. In 2 Sam. 23, 9 the K'tib has in- stead inil, which is =^11111. r ' IT T I 'irmiT (= ItT'lin, Jah is friend) n. p. IT 1 I ^ IT T I ' " ' m. 2 Chr. 20, 37. ■^I^n (only pi. D'^NII'l, constr. ""N-, as riiisblb from ■'bib, after the Aramaean IT! . '' manner: i- is here a farther addition to r Tn, in order to form a new noun-stem) m. 1. same as 111 a basket Jer. 24, 1, and there interchanged with the latter. — 2. pi. love-apples, which diffuse a strong, agreeable smell Song of Sol. 7, 14, are said to effect desire of venery and fruitfulness Gen. 30, 14 15 16, and have probably an intoxicating and stupe- fying influence (Ar. t5i>lt> an intoxicat- ing drink). Saadia understands ^Lw {mandrake), Targ. W^^l {^y~jij Man- dragora), which became ripe at the time of wheat-harvest (Ditan ^''JSp). ■''liT (= iti,;'ii7) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 24, 4; 2 Sam. 23, 9 K'tib. '"liH ■'■• ("'^- "O"*''"- n'jl) intr. 1. to be sick, to be ill, of women at their monthly pui-ification; hence Wn'Ti rTiS Lev. 12, 2 the separation of her being sick, = inin Mn'i:a 15,33; comp. Ar. |^.1!>, *lt>=f.5 to be sick generally. — 2. (not used) to be anxious, sorrowful, unhappy, comp. Syr. and Zab. io?. Deriv. T{T\ (fem. MTi), iin 1, ni^a 1, "ii'j. — 3.''figurat. (not used) to dissolve, to become putrid, of food; deriv. ""Ti 2. r : The organic root in In- 11 is connected with that in ai, aTN, SNI, N-ai, tTiT IT ' I- T ' r T ' IT T ' IT T (comp. Sanskrit dt, d^w, dli); and all meanings may be referred to, to flow, to melt. nn n. (not used) tr. to clothe, in- cZa-ere, iv-dv-eiv. Deriv. Sll"!'? 2. nn af^'. m., Iinfem. 1. sicA^, ill, weak, of a menstruating woman Lev. 20, 18 ; substantively 15, 33; or generally un- clean Is. 30, 22. — 2. mournful, sad, of ab Lament. 1, 13. nn adj. f. see !ni1. JT r I." T niT (Kal unused) tr. to drive forward, to push on, to press forward, like the organic root in !i-ni, til"3 (Ar. ^Ii> figur. to reject, to contemn); also intrans. Ilif. tp'fn {fut. ni"!j) 1. to thrust away,, to cast out, Jer. 5 1, 34 from our pleasant dwellings (D''313'.) he has cast us out (the K'tib has^-'iti'iri). — 2. to wash away, blood-guiltiness Is. 4, 4 ; to wash, rtbiy (the flesh of the sacrifice) Ez. 40, 38; the altar 2 Chr. 4, 6. ''sn (an intensive form of "ill) adj. m, IT - |- J szcA, ill, at heart, i. e. troubled Is. 1,5; Jer. 8, 18. "■IT (after the form i.^; coresir-. ''1'^) m. 1. sickness, illness Ps. 41, 4. — 2. &- «ofo«(f, jjKirid, food, ■^J^nb iins Job 6, 6 as putridity in my food i. e. repugnant to me, Targ. "'niwob isniil 'Tj-'p ("'i']? is not' be taken in the sense of ''"I3, as merely). Jin 320 aim see SN'T. 1" I" . T'lT see T»1. Tin <»•• to pound, to bruise, to heat, in a mortar Numb. 11, 8: deriv. flD^Ti. The organic root l^"^ exists also in Tyi, N-ST, ln-:3'5, Targ.redupl. '^I'lSl, Talm. (Nithp.) 'Tji'^J , Ar. (Jto and also in vil^i (to grind). ■^m as a noun, see n3"'DlT r'B'lD'n /• the name of an unclean bird Lev. 11,19, Deut. 14, 18, by which the Targ. (n^IU 1.|3 mountain-artist) un- derstands mountain-cock (Nia Nbias*npi) from «i'n (master) and TiO'^'s (rock) i. e. rock-inhabitant, or from Tjl'^ Ar. dLst> cock and rise's, hence stone-cock; the LXX and others: fA« hoopoe. But the •word is not yet sufficiently explained; and the stem may also be V\'d1. Dn I. (not used) intr. to flow slowly, of water, identical in its organic root (D^ with that in fl-M'J 1 (whence QT blood), y-^a'n &c., and a collateral form of yi (which see). Deriv. the proper names lin'^'i, naia'^'i. Dn n. (not used) intr. to be silent, soundless, noiseless, to he quiet; in its organic root d'l identical with Q'l; Ar. I»ti> to rest, to remain. Deriv. tiJail, na^T f. 1. (from dl'l II.) stillness, noiselessness , hence figur. grave, realm of death Ps. 94, 17; 115, 17. — 2. n.p. of an Ishmaelite tribe, as Tip Gen. 25, 14, on which the seer Isaiah 21, 11 pronounced a short oracle, after he had received the knowledge of their mis- fortune from Ti^ffl. The LXX have Idumea; the old interpreters incorrectly understood it symbolically. Prom this tribe the rocky-district Buma on the borders of Syria and Arabia and others besides of like name (Duma el-G'andel, D-Qma el-Shamijja, Duma el 'Iraki) re- ceived their appellation. — 3. proper nam^ of a city in Judah Josh. 15, 52. '^lyVl adj. m., but only used in P-" n'"017 odj. f. 1. still, silent, figurat. devoted, trusting, of u5d3 Ps. 62, 2, with bN of the person whom one trusts. — 2." subst. (like nouns in n"-) rest Ps. 22, 3 ; submission, or adv. submissively 39, 3 ; a silent hope, 65, 2 to thee (belongs) trust (and) praise; comp. dJg'i 37, 7. Oiy^t 1. (an adverbial formation after n the form ID?3 i^, 03 n. Dp I'n) adv. still, silently, Is. 47, 5 ; subrrdssively Lament. 3, 26. — 2. (after the form tko, OMil) subst. quietness, silence, dumbness Hab. 2, 19. ptaaW 2 Kings 16, 10, from ptoai'i, and this, after the usual change of ar into 6, from pbM'n'i 1 Chr. 18, 5; the punctuators wished the origin to be still perceived in "^11. See pia^'n. jn (not in; p«''/'- 1^,, 153, with suf. iW-j; ^aW. 1^; fut. ^in^ for ^inj) (intr. to be low, oppressed); metaphor, to make subject, to rule, to govern a thing; identical with the or- ganic root in Ti'lS belonging to \n». In this sense Gen. 6, 3: my spirit shall not rule over (a) 7nen i. e. I will take back the divine spirit in men (Gen. 2, 7), which is of divine origin, and rules over men. > The LXX, Vulg., Syr., Saad. and others have translated freely to dwell, remain, without reading Tl'li or y^\ — 2. to judge, to decide, to determine (disputed causes, see ■)!«), which was connected with the ruler's office in the east: either with the accus. of the person for whom one decides Gen. 15, 14; 30, 6, or 'with accus. of the object ']''1 (a cause at law) Jbr. 5, 28; 22, 16; 'sO, 13, in which sense Symm., Graeco-Venet. and others take pn; Gen. 6, 3. Deriv. ^-i, )^'n, the proper names ll, bs^ai, bNil, tiS'^l, ^T^^ — The idea of judging , however, (besides the relationship with ta&aj, Ar. *X^) branches out into two ideas that arise from judging, namely a) to protect, i. e. to help to the right Gen. 30, 6; also with the appended iil. Jer. P"" 321 ^n 22, 16; b) to punish, with accus. of the object Gen. 15, 14; hence in Ethiopic the stem denotes to condemn to hell, and the noun, condemnation, the under-world. Another enlargement of the idea of Judging is c) to quarrel, to dispute, as the Ar. ^^^^ (III. and IV.) to quarrel, prop, to attack one by judging or litigat- ing; comp. p-TS, C23\^3. Deriv. T^'i, Nif. pns to bring reproaches against one another, to contend with one another, to litigate, 2 Sam. 19, 10; comp. aEOJ. Pih. l"1 (not used), deriv. Vl. Hif. T'ln (only in the abridged form 'I'^'l, which has become a newKal, in the inf. and imp. y^, fut. ■]"''ii) same asKal: 1. to rule, to govern, with accus. 1 Sam. 2, 10; Zech. 3, 7. — 2. to judge, since ruling smd judging coincide (as in t^SiU, Ar. ^It> and *X:a.) Gen. 49, 16, Jer. 21, 12 , with the addition of V'l or £2B'a73 ' ' , ' I* n : as accus.; particularly of God's judg- ment Is. 3,13. As inKal this meaning divides into a) to punish, with a of the object Ps. 110, 6; b) to protect, Dbut. 32, 36. Deriv. !irT2. — ri Job 35, 14 IS a noun. y.n (part. pi. T'pN'j K'tib, T'i^^ K'ri) Aram, the same, Ezr. 7, 25. Deriv. ■)"''i, 'IT - ' IT ■ ; ■j^T m. only in l^ia' K'ri Job 19, 29, for which the K'tib reads Vlia. Ac- cording to the Midrash, Kimchi, Ibn Esra &c. from •Ta = 1UJN and ■)i'i or f'! judgment; according to Targ. ^11 or ^I'l judge. More correctly (see my Concord.) from liB (which see), conseq. "jITlJ or 'ii'ia = iiuj since •■a3 = im is not in use in the book of Job; on the contrary ■'Ta is quite usual. SiDIt (and:i5i'i, comp. 5*513 and 5>5i3; pause 33 i"!; from i:ji which see) m. prop, weak, flexible, hence wax Ps. 22, 15; 68, 3; 97, 5; Mio. 1, 4, of which melting (oa) is predicated. pT (fut. yi'l'') intr. to jump, to spring, Job 41, 14 : before him leaps terror; LXX iQex^i; without their having read y=i'in. — V^ is the Ar. ,jolt> (to leap, to leap away), Syr.^^? for amgtav (Luke 1,41), Targ. y^ to rejoice, to leap for joy; ^■fl (Lac. di^a) = Hebr. ■jiio'^'n capra, Talm. na-''7 = "jiiBiO; the organic root, therefore, is = «5l II. ' IT pn I. (fut. p-i'l cod. Samar.) 1. intr. to look around, to see around, to spy around, to keep a look out, whence p^'i according to some; then to inspect, to criticise, Gen. 14, 14 cod. Sam.; comp. Sam. p-'lis at Gen. 18, 16; 26, 8; Ex. 14, 25 for Hebrew t^p.^a:; Syr. -ni? the same, Targ. p;;^ &c. But it does not suit p;;n, and jt is better to derive it from signif. 2. The modern Hebrew p11 = ^[ly to examine closely, pl"'n thorough criticising, strictness, reduplic. p'ip'l and subst. pl'ip'l &c. belong here. — '■ 2. to surround, 'to enclose, of intrenchment, a line of circumvallation; comp. Ar. ijjljoo circus, lj Jo a ring. Deriv. p;;"!. pi^ 11. (part, pi) intr. to dissolve, into dust, to be scattered as dust, Dbut. 9, 21; it is connected with p'l tr. (which see). Sif- P"'7.v7 (/"*• P''7.f) '" pound, to bruise, 2 Sam. 22, 43.' ' p^T (only 3 pers. pi. ip'i) Aram. intr. prop, to divide, to separate, to go asunder, hence to dissolve, to fall to pieces, of the parts of a pillar Dan. 2, 35. Elsewhere instead of it Af. of the stem p'l (which see). From the transitive idea of divid- ing arose in Aram, the signification "to discern, to distinguish, to examine, spe- culari", to which p;;i has been referred; and the Ar. |Jjli>, ,J>I6 "to taste" be- longs here likewise. liT (or '-n; with suff. I'nil; pi. nini, nili'i, three times D''li) m. 1. properly circle of time, period of time (from 'OT I.), as the At.yJDd (time, century), 'iXj (time) from vLj (to turn in a circle, to revolve) &c., Greek nsQiodog, hence period of a man's age , of a generation, LXX yevsci Deut. 7, 9; 23, 3 4 9; EcciiEs. 1, 4 &c.; 'I'n li Deut. 1, 35, '^21 nn 322 in *i^ ^inb Ex. 3,15, or ini lib Ps. 77,9, or ^Hi 'liTnJ> 10, 6 or Qi'iiT 'ni'n 72, 5 from generation to generation, i. e. for ever and ever, to eternity, and therefore especially of future time; particulai-ly so in the plural with suff., as DD''n'"ii Lev. 23, 43 &e.; rarely of past periods Is. 58,12; 61,4: the ruins of many past periods. The duration of a man's age ■was 100 years in the patriarchal time Gen. 15, 14 16, Ex. 12, 40 (comp. se- culum among the Romans, originally a generatio7i), afterwards from 30 to 40 years. Job 42, 16. — 2. men of a definite time, as race is used in English, Numb. 32, 13, in a good sense Ps. 14, 5 as ■well as in a bad Dbut. 32, 5;. Jee. 7, 29. Hence ■with the genit. and suffix a contemporai-y i. e. one living at the same precise time, as i^il Is. 53, 8 : his contemporaries, or TTi'li the same. Gen. 6, 9. — 3. a dwelling, either from the circular form of the nomad -tent (see biiN), or from li'i 2; figurat. nilaN 1i^ Ps.49,20 the dwelling of the forefathers, i. e. the grave; "''lil Is. 38,12 my habi- tation i. e. my body, the abode of the soul. Comp. Ar. ^\i>, Targ. T''^, I'l'i. ' — 4. (circle of houses together, city; comp. Latin urbs, connected with orbis according to Varro, Greek noXtg from noXim, Ar. xft> city) n. p. of a Pheni- cian royal city Josh. 12,23, apportioned to the tribe of Manasseh 17, 11, which could not be taken for a long time Judges 1, 27, and therefore not pos- sessed by Manasseh till late 1 Chr. 7, 29; elsewhere ■written li^'n Josh. 17, 11. The whole district about Dor, a hilly tract, was called 'ni'n nsi {hill-district of Dor) Josh. 12, 23, or 'iN'i nss 1 Kings 4, 11; but as several hills (■with ham- lets) belonged to it, this mountain dis- trict was named lil niS3 Josh. 11, 2 (n'^niiii ^^'Ti 17, 11). ' 'The districts 'U-'y's', Tja^n and i'^aa in the neigh- bourhood of the Dor-district were called nOSli niabffl (i. e. prop. TricoUis, Tri- lop'hus) Josh. 17,11. i)oj'(Greekz/c590?, -Qo) lay on the coast of the Mediterra- nean Sea, 9 Eoman miles north of Cae- sarea (Jerome) on the way to Tyre, be- low cape bn'13 {Joseph, contra Ap. 2, 9) 1 Macc. 25, 11 seci. ; now there is there a village Tortura (perhaps Ij.O jjJs mountain Ddra) with a harbour. In com- position with this word is "nil"")"'* (see T:^) Josh. 17, 11, 1 Sam. 28, 7', "ixhi V^ Ps. 83, 11, the proper name of a city and district in Manasseh. "111 I. (not used) intr. 1. same as "itTi to circle, to turn in a circle; hence t- T ' of the course of time or a section of it, as the Ar. Jo, derivat. 'li'i 1; of the roundness of an object, deriv. Ti'^ 1. a noun; of the border round about a place, deriv. tTTia and the proper names 111 , 'nis'n, S'Til'; comp. besides the stem "IX — 2. After the Aram, manner : to dwell, prop, to move oneself about any where (circumire, se convertere, divertere, ver- sari) Ps. 84, 11, deriv. 1^ 3; but the verb in this sense may be a denomin. from the noun "lil (prop, from the cir- cular, ring-shaped tent of nomads , see bllN); see Ti'n. 'Tl'^ n. (not used) tr. to tear, to tear up, to tear in pieces, to cut asunder, as the organic root in N-Tn, IT* I.; cog- nate 'nS. Hence TTT^. r r : - 'nn m. (not used) tr. to put in or- der, to arrange, to dispose in rows, same as 'in , 'la and the organic root in TtD. IT ' IT ° r T Deriv. ITn 2, iTTiin. I ' IT : "l*n {part. pi. V'P"'^) constr. I'lN'i, or V^-'l, constr. '''ii'i; fut. ^T') Aram. ' r:iT' I":it' ' (•:' 1. same as the Hebrew Ti'n I. in signif. 2. to dwell, Dan. 2, 38; 4, 9' 18 32. Hence Tin, ^^fa, in the Targ., also 'T;'n dweller, NIJ'^'l dwelling. — 2. like Hebr. "n^il I. in signif. 1. to circle, of time. Deriv. Tl. — 3. to run on, to continue, comp. hwo?, durare; deriv. NT^nn. See inx ^ ' IT • : r T '~^ m. 1. (from Ti'n 1.) a circle, only in Is. 29, 3 II'IS, where Kimchi takes it = II'ISS) (see ^^3); a ball 22, 18, comp. Arab. \ji>, Sj.jti> the same. — 2. (from "il'i ni.) a pile of wood, a fu- neral pile, properly arranged, piled iri «"in 323 nm rows, Ez. 24, 5, for which 24, 9 has IT : N"1^T (same as ^"Vi) n. p. of a city in Babylonia, where was a plain cele- brated for the erection in it of a fiery oven Dan. 3, 1. Since the Dura else- where mentioned as on the Chaboras ("liati) in the neighbourhood of Circe- sium (t!5''123'i3) and (Nn''j) ZartAa (Amm. 23, 5, 8; 24, 1, 5; Polyb. 5, 48) can hardly be meant, as Babylonia scarcely reached to the Chaboras (Xen. epp. Cyr. 1, 5, 1 comp. with 7, 1), there only re- mains JDura on the other side of the Tigris (Polyb. 5, 62; Amm. 25, 6, 9), not far &om ApoUonia. /lovqa. Ptol. 5, 66 is ^'n. I , ^V\ I. (jpart. /'.NUS'i Jbe.50,11 for til!3l , where the LXX ' thought upon NiSl' : inf. ahsol. 'ttJilN Is. 28, 28 for iBin, V IV' ' IT ' I ' as r|iON Jee. 8, 13, Zeph. 1, 2 ; inf. constr. 'dl'7 ; ' imp. f. •'TBi'i instead of "^m"^ Mic. 4, 13, not to allow the M-sound to re- turn for the sake of euphony; fut. 1B1']'') tr. 1. to beat by treading, to crush by treading Job 39, 15 ; to beat to dust Is. 41, 15; to lacerate, by drawing a threshing sledge over Judges 8, 7 ; Am. 1, 3 ; figur. to annihilate, enemies, Mic.4, 13; cognate in sense p'l. — 2. to thresh, com, either by the treading out of oxen, or by ipia, yi'nn Hos. 10, 11; 1 Chk. 21, 20. lieriv. la'i'n, nisn?^ = rndi-Ta. •r' IT \ t IT ; Nif. ffliia {inf. constr. aSiIln) pass. Is. 25,10. " Hif. ttj-'lrt, instead of which is only the short fonn'tti'''l (jn/?n. with sm/. illS^'i) same as Kal TZJl'i Deut. 25, 4. Hof iai>in pass. Is. 28, 27. Identical with «31 are the Ar. /j*(ft>, Targ. 125'^, Syr.'-*'? &c.; and also lc^J*l> (trusit). aJW (/m«. IZJIT:) -4raM. the same, Dan. 7,23.' !l2?n n. (not used) intr. same asyiV, deriv. T'l^'^'l, ')'1123'''1, 'jillS'l, 'Jid'^'n. n^"! (not used) a stem assumed for the proper names Q^n^, in^, inn; see however rt';'n (=rti'!i I-) and M^^^ SSnT (not used) ^ram. (an assumed stem for Nim Dan. 6, 19) tr. to press down, metaphor subigere feminam, as the Ar. La.i> and L^ j, Hebrew IliSB. According to the Syr., Vulg., Grae'co- Venet., Hashi and others, to spread out, same as NtiU , hence Nini = inbiB (from IT : ' iT-:r 'it : \ ^ nblZJ to extend), which is also favoured by the signification of the noun in To- sifta; according to Sa'adia, Nathan, Levi, Ibn Esra and others, to strike the strings, to play. See, however, Ninx nm (inf. abs. Tim, constr. niRI; IT T ^ IT' It' but Kal only in the Psalms) tr. same as Tn (ni'n) to push , to push down, ^"^S^ Ps. 62, 4; a person, so that he falls 118, 13; to thrust, to drive forward 35, 5; elsewhere also to drive away (see Nif.), to hurl (see Puh.), to overthrow (see Til). Deriv. ■'ttl, nniM. Nif. nni? {pan. pi. constr. ipni ; fut. tttyv, on the other hand ^XW Jbb. 23, 12 should be referred to n]l = tin'i, just as iniVa 11, 20 to ba) pass, of Kal Is. 11,12; 56,8; PEOV.i4,32. Puh. nrn {Zpl. the same. IT t' ^ iVi/; (fwf. ni'') IJass. = ?1p1? J^B- 23, 12. 21* rn 324 'f'n'l {pause ■'tl'i) m. a thrust, a push, figurat.- destruction Ps. 56, 14; 116, 8. ^''n^ see bp'=T. ?n^ {part, htn ; part. pass. h''tn , fern, 'rh') Aram. intr. to slink, from fear, to slink away timidly, to go away, Ar. (jLa» t> (to slink away from), identical with the Hebrew brtT (which see); therefore ge- nerally, to be afraid, to tremble, to quake Dan. 5, 19 (cognate in sense ^IT); with dlp-lJi 6, 27, as the Hebrew NTi with ''3E73; b'^rt'i fearful, terrible, horrible 2, 31; 7, 19;'comp. Hebr. is'n'13. Fah. bni to terrify Dan" 4, 2. Vyi (not used) wir. same as ']31 io S'row , to send out (fruit) , to bear fruit, Ar. (T^i»0 IV. granis induruit seges; de- rivative in^ OT. properly a little com, hence millet, grummel, holcus, Ez. 4, 9; Ar. 9 -^ 1 " ^ ^^^l>, Syr. p-i»oj. ^^'^ (only pa^. ^ass. tjltTi) tr. to push, to strike, figurat. to drive on, to spur on, r]ini impelled, in haste Esth. 3, 15 ; 8, 14. — The organic root Ijn-n also lies in 1)?"^, Syr. ^.sa-i to impel; Ar.- (_;>.&(>. Nif. £)ll']5 to urge oneself, to hasten, 2 Chk. 26,"20; to go in haste, with bi« Esth. 6, 12. Mif. S)iri1tl (not used), deriv. Msmja. pn'l (^ari. pp^; /af-PpT:) ^?'. prop, to cut into something, to pierce, figurat. to press, to oppress. Judges 2, 18 ; Jo. 2,8; comp.Targ.pp'7, Ithp. pp'iiij , Syr. *.■*«.?, Ar. (aa.t) the same. The funda- mental signification lies in the organic root ptl"'!, which exists also in pti and n-pn.' it' t ■liT (after the form \!i, ra, from mil, as those are from Tti, fm; pause "'T, constr. 1^, like ''M, lii; but with SK;f. ii^Jlt ^"V "*• !• sufficiency, the requisite, ''l-'bl? Mal. 3, 10 (Jerome) not merely for a 'sufficiency i. e. above what is suf- ficient = superabundance, (''ba negatives the idea of the noun, not merely limit- ing but also exceeding, comp. Is. 5, 14). ■'13 as sufficiency i. e. enough there will be Esth. 1, 18; the requisite, there- fore constr. state Let. 25, 26 ; Deut. 25, 2; Judges 6, 5; ''Jiu = ■'VrtJ? 2 Che, 30, 3 prop, what is enough i. e. for a sufficiency; so too '^121 for the requisite, and therefore Construct stateNAH.2, 13; Hab. 2, 13. — 2. Adv. enough, sufficiently, e. g. ilia ■''=1 Lev. 5, 7 sufficient for a lamb; ibrtM ^Tr Deut. 15, 8 enough for the need; ibp '''7. Peov. 27, 27 enough of milk; SlbiJ»^\ Is. 40, 16 sufficient for the burnt-offering &c. where the significa- tion of a noun may still be perceived. — By appending "''n to the prepositions 3, ^, 1); and after such union putting it along with the following noun or infin. in the construct state, new rela- tions of words arise to form relative clauses, as bb, 15V *re always sub- ordinate to nouns. Thus a) '''7a always as soon (as often) as Job 39, 25 i. e. with, amang; on the contrary in Jer. 51,58, Nah.2,13, Hab. 2, 13 ■^l? means for a sufficiency . . . i. e. for. b) ""IS according to the measure of, correspond- ing to, Lev. 25, 26, Deut. 25, 2, i. e. suf- ficient for the following subject, 3 ex- pressing comparison; on the other hand in fi3'n!>5"i'73 Judges 6, 5 as enough of locusts, i. e. in such swarms as troops of locusts, c) ■''IM as often as, every time when, a designation of time, sometimes before the infin. 1 Sam. 1,7; 18, 30; 2 Kings 4, 8; 2 Chr. 12, 11, sometimes before a finite Jer. 20, 8, sometimes in time-determining expres- sions, where it is intended to denote fre- C[uent return, e. g. iilinna iBlh I'ms , ■'■^M •inaisa naia Is. 66, 23;' ha^a rwiis •^'nn Zech."14, 16. On the other hand 'Vm Ex. 36,5 is more than enough (for the service of the work). — The fundamental signifi- cation of '^'7 does not lie in superfluity and number, in which more than a suf- ficiency is desired, but in sufficiency for the need: enough, what is requisite; hence the idea of the stem Tn is to be determined only according to this as- certained fundamental sense. The no- 325 :n tion of sufficiency is connected with that of copiousness or multiplicity (see liliPROv.SOjlS 16); and since the latter in Hebrew is often associated with to flow, to flow together, Ml might be identi- cal with ^t>^ , in which the idea of flow- ing is involved. 1^ constr. of ""I, see ''1. I" r' r ^T (originally = Hebrew demonstr. pron. tiT , which is also used as a relative like the Phenician 1; comp. ^n, ^^S) Aram. pron. relat. (sing, and plur.) who, which (in the Targumic also merely "7, Syr. ?, after rejecting i). It stands 1. as a relative, like the Hebr. 'niB6«., at the head of the sentence Dan. 2, 23 25 28 35 &c.; but more frequently than in Hebrew also before the prepos. a, ■)» 5, 2; 6, 14; EzK. 6, 2. — 2. as the de- signation of a genitive, like the late Hehrew V "TBiN, where the noun pre- ceding is either in the absol. state, e. g. Tii 'il ^Ta fire-stream Dan. 7, 10, or in the definit. state 2, 15, or with suff. of the following noun, e. g. MUbN I'n SMilJ tAe name of God, prop, his name of Grod 2, 20. — 3. as a relat. conjunct, like the Hebr. 'W^ or more usually ''3 , iAai, q^nod, after incomplete clauses, e. g. after verbs of knowing Dan. 2, 8 ; 3, 18 ; 4, 6, of seeing 3, 27 &c.; after clauses like i"'S:i-']?3 2,8, a™|5-Ta 2,47; seldom at the beginning of the sentence 4, 20, as "TIBN also stands, or as "iS in the be- ginning of a direct address Dan. 2, 25 37; 5, 7; 6, 6 14. Often its expresses a) a temporal relation, e. g. ''''I'T? 4, 23 (opposite '''=!"1? 4, 22) from the time at which; b) a consequence, after the verbs Nsa 2, 16, I35>£3 Dia 3, 10 29, ayriN 6, , IT : ' ' I" : IT ' ' I- T : • ' 8, or a purpose Ezb. 5, 10 that, so that, in order to; c) because, for, Dan. 2, 20; 4, 31; 6, 24, like the Hebr. ''3; l^ '''p for if Dan. 2, 9 = Hebrew Dn' ■'3, but which signifies in Ezr. 4, 16 that if. Joined to other particles it is found in ■'•11 Dan. 4, 5; Ezr. 7, 25 &c.; i'i3 ^^115X3 Dan. 3, 7; 5, 20; 6, 11 15; -Nil ■'n3 2743; Nb-''^ 6, 6; iTbS 6,8; "^3 •"lbap^^2,10 40; 3,29; 5,22; 6,5 23; ■'i! b,5i?.^ Ezr. 6, 13; ■'t Mm Dan. 2, 28; Ezr. 7, 18; iv-ja Dan.' 4, 14; 5, 21; -p ■'7. 4, 23; Ezr. 5, 12; ■''^-ly Dan. 4, 30; 6,25; 7, 11; I'll npa^-n» 4, 14 &e. — The Arabic too has this pronominal stem, as is seen from ^5 jJI who, which, in the dialect of the Tagites ^b and .3, the same. See Hebrew '''i. r "•"n , only as the first part of the name aMT il n. p. of a place in the wilder- ness, over against t]1D, in the circle of TINS), bD'n, ^ab and n'llst!. Deht. 1,1, without one being able to detei-mine it more exactly, since the present Dahah east of Sinai, situated at the sea, does not suit the condition of the place de- scribed in the passage. "''H = Ar. ^^b, .(3 prop, who, then master, possessor = Hebr. bsa (comp. pi. Jjt, ^J^l possessor, prop. = ii.f, tlbs); the proper name, therefore, is the same as SMT b5>a place of gold, as the LXX have taken it {Kaia^qv- aea i. e. Kara ra XQvaea). •n^n m. see Ti^ai. p ' I : • \2^'^ (or 'l^a'^'l, river-place; fromai'i) n. p. 1. of a Moabite border-city, which Israel took and destroyed on their march to Canaan, and the tribe of Gad rebuilt Num. 32, 34, hence IS )h^^, 33, 45. At the distribution, Reuben got it Josh. 13, 9 17, but afterwards Moab retook it Is. 15, 2; Jer. 48, 18 22. For the sake of alliteration with D'l it is called in Is. 15, 9 ')iM'''i, especially as nm (be- longing to D'l) is of like fundamental meaning with ai. It lay on the northern bank of the Amon, which part of it was called lb"''! ''M. Somewhat farther 1 1 . I" in the plain, are still found ruins called ^jL*Ji>. — 2. of a city in Judah Nbh. 11, 25, which has come, however, from ibi'i (from )W), since it is termed M5ia'''7 Josh.' 15, 22; and there too 'rlli^in. — 3. In the cod. Sam. Deut. 28, 65 for '\J^X yi (formed from the Pihel-form of S1'n,^fike litt; pi. QiJil) m. a fisher, Is, jn 326 P^-1 19, 8., for which in the K'tib Jbe. 16, 16 ail stands. J^l see ail. r ' yih see SN^. 1- I" (T'l (from MIT, not used) 1. trans. IT T ^ ITt' ' prop, to moisten, to wet, hence to dye, the same fundamental signification being in 5>|3a, Aram. 5>a5t (cognate with 5»j3iB, Nao, S'Sid); deriv. 'i|''i. The organic root, therefore, in in-'^l can only be put with that in tTl, M-ai, yi (which see). — 2. intr. to flow out, to spring forth, to bubble out, of a cistern, where tril = !Ti1 is likewise cognate with SOD, »T T (TT ^ *3 IT T ' yato; comp. Arab. (^iJ} (prop, to flow). Deriv. n^ (Aram. Pill), the proper names 'Dim, ■jn^ and ']m. — n^'j belonging to the noun 'n"'^, see the word. IT-' n»T (stands for nsn from fiNl) fern. IT - ^ IT - IT T^ ' name of a bird of prey inhabiting ruins, Dbut. 14, 13, Is. 34, 15, as rts'i. (n en- closed between vowels passes into ■*; comp. a;^ from as'l.) iiT (after the form iba, ibiS, forri, ' : ^ I : ' I : ' it : ' which has arisen out of Vn, as the I T Aram, form is pronounced) f. a colour for writing, which was used, according to Josephus (Ant. 12, 2, 10) in different kinds (comp. Ar. ^j^ colour, then ink; German Tinte from tincta i. e. colour- ed); ink, Jbr. 36, 18, which in N. Test, times was black 2 Cok. 3, 3; 2 John 12; 3 John 13. The word has also passed into Persian (o*.J.t>) from the Semitic dialect (Targ. 1^'n, Syr. lia^?, Ar. sf'J ink-stand). ']i53''T (from dl'^ I.; river-place) n. p. 1. of the city ')a-''i Is. 15, 9. See 'jh'-'l. — 2. of a city in Judah, for which there is in Nbh. 11, 25 fa"''!; on the contrary in Josh. 15, 22 n5i?3'''i; but the latter name appears to come from nai^''^ see Va"''!! and the stem 1M1. IT r 'I • 'r T I^T Hebr. as a verb-stem, see 'jl'i. y^l Aram, as a verb-stem, see 111. 'j''?! (with sM;f. iS"''! , Tji'^'l) m. a cause, a judicial transaction, to be settled by a decision in law Dedt. 17, 8. To conduct the cause of a person, to bring it to a decision, is called 'J'''^ 5>i;j Pkov. 29, 7, T''i ntv Ps. 9,5; 140, 13, I'l'i 'jn Jee. 22, 16, which is sometimes = to help, to assist, to take one's cause in hand, tisuj "1 Peov. 31, 5, 'B ria nan Is. 10, 2"to r '':'!■■ IT • ' pervert the cause of a person, to turn it aside. Figurat. a cause in dispute, a dispute, Peov. 22, 10. — 2. right, as law, with ni Esth. 1, 13. — 3. a sen- ' IT ' tence of a judge, a decision, also con- demnation Ps. 76, 9. — 4. the sentencing, the judgment, hence y^'^_ NB3 Peov. 20, 8 the seat on which the judge sits. In Ar. from the same stem ■oU-^'^ (diwS,n) judg- ment. — 5. n. p. of a territory in the Assyrian empire, mentioned with the provinces OpSN., '^nO'iSN, bs'na, IS'IN, baa, "^sldluS, Tn, Db»,' whence" colonists came to Samaria. ']'''i is now difficult to be determined. Gentile "'Ji'i Eze. 4, 9. r • ' 1''^ (defin. N3i'i) Aram. m. 1. right, Dan. 4, 34; 7, 22, conseq. = Hebr. tasiBn Is. 1, 17; Has. 1, 4, not right in a dis- pute. — 2. judgment, as an abstract, then judicium; concrete a judicial person, a judge, 7, 10 26. — 3. sentence, decision, metaph. punishment, Eze. 7, 26. ■jiT (from Pihel) m. a judge, 1 Sam. 24, Y6. T^ .4m?». TO. the same Eze. 7, 25. Tit - ' nD''T {judged, avenged) n. p. f. Gen. 30,21." ''D'^n (def. pi. N"'5i'!i from ■j-''^ 5) see r?.'" ■ nSn 1 Che. 1, 6 see rs''1. p|;T (from pl'^) m. a watch-tower, of besiegers 2 Kings 25, 1; Jee. 52, 4; Ez. 4, 2 (tAe building up is usually ex- pressed by nsa, or also by ijrii Ez. 26, 8); therefore = ina, Syr. tao?. So the usual assumption. But the constant use of the sing, and a'^ao standing with it make it better be referred to significa- tion 2 of pi'i, and to be translated in- tyn 327 rDT trenckment , surrounding wall; LXX ns- gkeixoe. \t}^1^ see MJW. tti'^T m. prop, threshing, Aram. 125"''i; then threshing-time Lev. 26, 5. tJ?^'! see m'l I and II. 'jiaJ'^T see ']Xa''X lajifj (= Ymi^ 2) K. p. m. Gen. 36, 21 26 30. ' ijljiri (or ')iia'''i from HJII 11.) masc. 1. mowreifflm-^oai or antelope Deut. 14, 5, prop. leaper, Aram. NS'^'i caprea, LXX nvyagyo? (i. e. white-rump, from ya"^) a species living in Egypt and Africa. — 2. (also pW, TlOl; antelope) n. p. m. of some Edomites Gen. 36, 25 30, pro- bahly a designation of mountaineers. "nT Aram, see Tj'i. "riT (jiause Ip ; from TJlD"!) m. oppressed, dejected, humbled, miserable (prop, lean, slender = pi); figurat. small, inconsider- able (cognate in sense iSS) Ps. 9, 10; 74, 21; along -with Din; 10, 18. TR, (in the Targ. also Tj''^., ■'S'^'n, ■^3^1) .4?*am. pron. demonstr. m., Tjl /". this, EzR. ch. 4. 5. 6, formed from ^'i and N'n and strengthened by the suffix -k from te, which is also demonstrative. Another kind of enlargement is Tjl^N and ■^jn'^N in the Targ.; comp. Arab. cJti3 from \i> = Hebrew iiT. The same -k is also in the Targ. ^^^N, ^7^. t?I3T (Kal unused) jraJr. to be pressed together, figurat. to be bowed, oppressed, kept down, lessened; identical in the organic root with "qi, "pi ; while the same organic root in Tp, Arab. l^iJ, cJo, is transitive, Deriv. N31. V IV Nif. sons to be cast down, dejected, of the ab Is. 57, 15. Pil'ssn (inf. with swjf. 18*3'^ Is. 53, 10; fut. N31';) to tread down, to crush, anp (pnde)'ts. 89, 11; to humble, -^I^V Prov.22,22; to subject, W Is. 3, 15; to cause to suffer 53, 10; to destroy Ps. 72, 4; Job 4, 19; 6, 9; to grieve, D''V?S 19, 2; 's ban nrin "n to cn a-ilBln to bring back to dust Ps. 90, 2. — 2. (after the form aas, ""il) m. bowed, discouraged, ni'l m s^!nt![ Is. 57, 15 ; Ps. 34, 19. H'D'l m. assumed by some for ifj!31 Is. 53, 10; but see N31 under N3X r\yi I. (in Kal only M311 Ps. 10, 10 IT T ^ " IT T : K'tib, fut. Tfzii ibid. K'ri) intr. same as NS'n, Ps. id,' 10 Ae (ibn or ■^sbn) is cast cfoitrn (M3'n or iiBT') ared io!c«d ^ IT t: IV : •' (nilj"'); but one can read the Ktib tiSTl (adj! from ns'i), the K'ri iiS'i': (Nif-V, without the sense being altered. Deriv. ■'31. Nif. MSIS (1 person "'n'^BI?; i^art. ns-l?), as'VjDnS from NjDl Ps.38, 9; 51, 19 and perhaps Ps. 10"l0 K'ri (MSi:)- Pih. !i31 to bruise, ni»Jt5>. Ps. 51, 10; IT • I T -. io destroy 44, 20. n^T n. (not used) mfr. same as M3T IT T ^ '^^ (which see) to be clean, innocent. Pih. ti31 (not used) to he very guilt- less, very clean; deriv. VBI. n3!7 (after Spanish mss. Deut. 23, 2; for which German mss. have N3l)) see N31. IT - , . i^^ (from rtS'i after the form ibn) m. dasA% (of the waves), the breaking of waves Ps. 93, 3. VST (from nsn n. in the intensive form" as rD3» from Tfi^ Numb. 12, 3 ia ' ITT ITT I^T 328 nh the Kal form) m. (according to Ibn Esra, Kimchi and others) bowed down, miser- able, then like ■'35> pious, Peov. 26, 28 a lying tongue hates the pious. Accord- ing to the LXX and Vulg. from inS'n n. to be innocent, pure, therefore VS"^ is = ''3T innocent, clean, and the abstract for concrete, innocence, LXX a.X'^&sia, Vulg. Veritas, which certainly makes an antithesis to TpttS. "nD'^I (not used) 1. tr. to bruise, to break in pieces, to crush, Ar. ii)3 , iden- tical with the organic root in 'Tjl, H-31, N-5'n, Ar. ^S, dliS, n-rrn, pi &c., Greek fiax-w, 8ax-va>; metaphor, to lessen, to press down, to despise. — 2. intr. to be bruised, figur. to be wretched, dejected, mean. Deriv. 'tj'!, rt3'3; on the contrary T^SI comes from fiS'i II. IT - IT T \y\ Aram. pron. demonstr. pi. , these (formed from 'Tj'ji with "j- appended, as en in 1''Vn), but also connected as a neuter with the singular Dan. 2, 31; 7, 20 21. "iDT (not used) Aram. tr. same as Hebrew 13T, namely 1. to press into, to bore into, of a spear, = 1p_1 infigere, hence metaphor of the membrum virile; derivative the noun ^S'l. — 2. Figur. to impress, on the memory, to rememher, to retain, whence 'jilS'l and T^SI. ID'7 {j)l. T^'TO'i) Aram. m. same as Hebrew *1DT, prop, male (see the verb *15'1 1); but only specially of the male of sheep, a ram Ezr. 6, 9 17; 7, 17; Syr. I~? mas and aries; comp. Greek a^Q>iP mas and uqiiv aries, Pers. ij^S'mas and aries. 'ji'lpT (def. Willp'i) Aram. m. a re- cord, Ezr. G, 2 as a record, i. e. as an original document. As commentarius properly signifies the same, ^iJ^o? ■fS.si in Zab. means liber commentariorum. p5lT (pi. def. N';?^?'^) Aram. m. the same, Ezr. 4, 15 NiJ'iSI "nDD book of , ' ' IT- T ! T r ; ' documents. ?.^ (pause b'n; from Vbl) adj. m. (pi. ti"'f'l!). /"• i^^l (i''- ni?5) 1- tottering (to this side and that), loose, staggering, shaking; therefore decaying, wretched (of the appearance) 2 Sam. 13, 4, of kine Gen. 41, 19, with n'i5»1; or small (in years or worth), insignificant, little Jvdgeb 6,15, with T'5!^; weak 2 Sam. 3, 1, op- posite ptri. — 2. Subst. m. poor, opposed to yiia Job 34, 19, to T^ffiS* Ex. 30, 15; - I ' ' r T ' ^ ' impoverished, wretched, unfortunate, with ')i;'ai«Ps.72,13; 82,4, din; 82, 3, ''Sy Zeph. 3, 12, Is. 26, 6, US'! Peov. 28, 3' whom law (Exod. 23, 3;" Lev. 19, 15) and morality (Ps. 82, 3; 113, 7; Prov. 14, 31; 19, 17; 21, 13; 22, 22) were efficient in raising up and protecting; a poor debtor Am. 4, 1 , who becomes a slave at last 8, 6. — 3. (from i-ibn I.) subst. m. prop, same as nb'i (the fold of a door), but only metaphor, door of the lips (comp. nriE) Micah 7, 5. LXX &VQK. ^bl cod. Samar. Ex.2, 19 for rtbl, IT T IT T ' which see. 2l?T (part.ibft"^) intr. to leap, to spring, with b» over something, in the expres- sion to leap over the threshold Zeph. 1, 9 i. e. to serve his lord with respect (as in the East they were wont not to tread upon the threshold of the master's apart- ment, but to leap over it). ■^^- ^V-'^ (''"'• ^f'-'^-) '" '^"P '"'*''' "'"^^ accus. of the object 2 Sam. 22, 30; Ps. 18, 30; with b? to leap over a thing Song op Sol. 2, 8; seldom to spring absol. Is. 35, 6. The stem, which is still found in Semitic only in the Targ. sbl, is in its organic rootsb"'i, as it is preserved also in extra-Semitic tongues (Sanskrit lagh, laugh, transsilire, Gothic laik-an salire, Greek perhaps Xay in Xay-coe prop.; leaper &c.). n?l I. (fut. rtb"!;) intr. 1. to wave^ to rock to and fro, to move, of twigs , of a water-bucket, to hang down, of the leg of the lame (according to Ibn Chagguj, see however bb'i), to hang, of the door on its hinges, therefore identical with. r6i 329 ^h •"b^ (with suff. rb'n = 'iib'!i as TirT' = 1" t: ^ " IT : IT I : IT it : - i'nn;;, without heing a dual for that reason) m. a bucket, a pail; only figur. seed-vessel, therefore applied to posterity Numb. 24, 7. According to the Ma- soretic punctuation from D^^bl the two buckets or seed-vessels, i. e. the testicles, which also suits. "ib^ (from nbl n.) m. the same Is. 40, 15. n'^bl (from nbl out of nb'n II., and IT T ! I" T IT T ni; /aA is deliverer) n. p. m. Eze. 2, 60 j l^EH. 6, 10; 1 Che. 3, 14; comp. the Phenic. proper name n^hayb'i JsXai- dataQTog (Joseph, contra Ap.). lIT'b'l (the same) n. p. m. Jer. 36, 12; 1 Chr. 24, 18. Jlb''bT (unfortunate, miserable; yet perhaps like x-LJi> languishing) n. p. f^ Judges 16, 4-18. JT'^n (plur. ni^^'n, from Ti)^ I.) f. branch, bough, tendril, from waving to and fro Jer. 11, 16; Ez. 17, 6; vulgar Ar. juJi>, Malt, dylje (vine), Syr. t^^-^r branch. ■J?"! I. (3 pers. pi. ib^, once ibW Is. 19, 6; 1 pers. sing. ''niV'i, pi. ISib'n) intr. 1. like tlb'l I. to wave, to totter (to and fro), to be'insecure, hence figurat. of men, to be loose, poor, wretched, unfor- tunate, weak, Ps. 79, 8; 116, 6; 142,7; comp. Ji (to be low, miserable, bad); of rivers , to be dried up , to be drained, along with apn Is. 19, 6 ; Syr. "^f to fail. Deriv. b^, nbl 1, the proper name nb^bl. — 2. to hang (a swinging from side to side), spoken of miners let- ting themselves down Job 28, 4, they hang, they swing far from men. Deriv. nb'3 2. Here the fundamental significa- tion is not " to hang down ", but " to swing to and fro"; hence the Arab, redupl. "to shake, to totter from side to side, to wave", Ethiop. of the waving of the hair, the tottering of old age. The organic root in n-b'n , br , bD, bn &c., Sanskrit til (moveri), Greek (jal-fwo) -affffco &c. points to this fundamental b'5, bn, !n-bn &c. Deriv. n-'b'i, b^ 3, rSl, nb'n." V IV ' n T n?T n. (fut. Thyi) tr. to draw aloft, water from a well, i. e. to draw, without an addition Ex. 2, 16 19; figurat. to draw out, i. e. to get out, a counsel in the heart Prov. 20, 5 ; elsewhere to set free, deliver (in proper names). Deriv. "'b'l, •'b'n, the proper names tT'bl, ifTibl. Ft:' r r „, .i ~r : Pih. nb'1 (imp. pi. 17b'3 = 1p'3) to ex- tricate, to draw up (from the abyss of danger) Ps. 30, 2 ; to take away {the legs from the lame, which he could not other- wise use)PROV. 26,7. The Yod ini;ibl has either arisen from the third radical sound, as is frequently the case in !ib, or II has been resolved into ly; comp. qivlXov and folium, aXXog and alius, the French pronunciation of fille. Identical with this stem is the Ar. J3, ^(>, Syr. P? &c. (comp. iXdm, toUere). It is not connected with iib'n I. nb^ (only with suff. 'j\n'bii) Is. 26, 20 K'ri'see nb'n.. nb^ (constr. rib'!; pi. nib^) f. 1. (from bl 1 which see) prop, poverty, scanti- ness, smallness; concrete the small, the poor, i. e. the people 2 Kings 24, 14, for which fiNil ("Q,?) nbl stands in 25, 12, Jbk. 40, 7, and the pi. TY^I Jer. 52, 15 16 is also used for it. — 2. thread-work (from the waving of the threads to and fro, see bbl), thrum, licium, by which the web is fastened to the weaver's beam Is. 38, 12, comp. Targumic bib'i thread-work; according to the ancients decay, sickness, see bl- — 3. locks of hair, hair-braids (comp. bribn) Song op Soii. 7, 6, which the versions render according to conjecture; comp. Arab. juJIiS (the tuft of the long palm-branch that hangs at the uppermost part). — For fibl as an adj. fem. see bl. , it- '' I rhi (fut. Uhy]) tr. to trouble (water), by teeading it Ez. 32, 2 13; bo too the Syr. w^i^? ; but the word had also an intrans. meaning, as may be seen from the Targ. nb'n. The organic root is nb"'=7, which is also in nb"N. - t' r t bb'l 330 nH meaning. — For libl Pkov. 26, 7 see nb'n II. ^«/. bl3 (^fut. Vl^) to sneak, with which [^\ is cognate; but the organic root is Hb"'!, also found in t]b"N, Clb""*; comp. Xlna, 'kina.ca, aXsiif-m, Lat. lib-are. Deriv. T^Ti (proper name) and 5|bT m. a dropping Pkov. 19,13 ; 27,15. •jiebT (Pers.) n. p. m. Esth. 9, 7. p^T (inf. constr. p'^'i; fut. pV]^) intr. 1. to glow, to bum, of the lips Pkov. 26,23 i. e. hot kisses; of arrows Ps. 7, 14: he makes his arrows burning ones i. e. arrows wrapped with combustible ma- terials; figurat. to be in anguish Ps. 10,2, violent anxiety or pain being compared to heat 39, 4. 'a pb'i Ob. 18 to kindle, set fire to. — 2. tr. to pursue hotly, prop, to bum after, with '^inN Gen. 31, 36, 1 Sam. 17, 53; but also without it and •with the accus. of the object. Lament. 4, 19. Pih. pb'n (not used), deriv. n)?b'3. ffif. p'^b'in to MndU, IISn Ez. 24, 10; io heat, of wine Is. 5, 11. The organic root pb-n is also in nb I. (nib I.), iib-d. At. (3^, comp. Latin luc-exe, German lug-ea &c. pbl (part, pb'n) Aram, the same Dan. 7, 9: '' rjP^T (after the form nibllj, prop, inf P'ih.) f hot fever Deut. 28^22; Talm, IT : V nbl (after the form nD3, n'HjJ., conseq. from ^ib'n I., not the fern, of bl and belonging to bb'n; but the fern, n- is re- tained in dual and plur., before the suff., as in nD3, i. e. nb"! is looked upon as a segolate form, hence with the suff. ^nb"^ Is. 26, 20 K'ri, as if the sing, were nbV, but which stands here for ^"'rb'n; dua:l Qinbl, constr. Tibl, with suff. ir'^rib'^; but also pi. ninbl after the form ninos, constr. ninbl) f. 1. a door, hanging and turning on its hinges Prov. 26, 14, some- times divided into two turning halves (niaDia) or wings (also called rib'7}, each wing or fold consisting of two planks i'D-'Shit or a'^sbp) 1 Kings 6, 34, Ez. 41, 24 (in the Mishna, table or plank generally), distinguished from tins (prop. opening), by supposing (ins to consist of nbl or ninb'^ 1 Kings 6''31, In the V tv it: ' signification of door or folding door, rbf. expresses the door hanging upon hingesj to which were applied the verbs 'lip Gen. 19, 6 or bys 2 Sam. 13, 17, nns 2 Kings 9, 3, T^ayfi Nbh. 3, 1, 'laiij Gen. 19, 9 &c. The dual is used of the two fold- ing gates of cities, temples &c. Deut. 3, 5, 2 Che. 4, 22, Is. 45, 1, more rarely of simple houses Josh. 2, 19; hence Q^nb'=l S''Sfl to establish a city with gates 1 Kings 16, 34; figurat. of a^uia Ps. 78, 23, for which elsewhere niSi'lN; of las Job 3, 10 i. e. the maternal body con- sisting of two halves, labia pudendi; of I3"'3S 41, 6 i. e. the two sided mouth of the crocodile; of the sea 38, 8; of Le- banon Zech. 11, 1 &c. But the pi. is used still more frequently Judges 3, 23, 1 Sam. 3, 15, 1 Kings 6, 31, 2 Kings 18, 16, and in the applications al- ready mentioned Neh. 7, 1 3; 13, 19; 2 Chb. 29, 7 ; Ps. 107, 16. Q-^^yin ninb'? ' ' ' 1- - IT 1 ; - m 331 riDi the doors of the nations Ez. 26, 2, is a paraphrase of Jerusalem as the centre of intercourse with foreigners (23, 40 sq.). nb'H door Song of Sol. 8, 9, i. e. access- ihle to every one approaching. — 2. page of a roll, columna, because it is like the wing of a door Jbr. 36, 23; but ac- cording to others (= Babbin. ^SiB, Ar. i^U, Pers. \0) section. m (abridged out offiB'^fromrnaijI.; eonstr.'D'^j withsuff.'^m, 5|731, onceDSM'l Gen. 9, 5 and ^m; pi. D''a'n, constr. vz"!, with suf. 'rj^M'^," T'M'i, 'r:V2'^, 'O'TiVz^) m. 1. blood, prop, something viscous and flow- ing (seeilM'i I.) Ex. 7, 19 ; Lev. 3, 13 &c. ; of animals Ez. 44, 15, or of men 2 Sam. 23, 17; or what flows from single mem- bers Prov. 30, 33. d'l by(orDin-'bi!«)bSN to eat with the blood 1 Sam. 14, 32 ; Lev- 19, 26; •'P.2 D'l (or Dl) blood of the in- nocent i. e. innocent blood 2 Kings 21, 16; Ps. 94,21; Dbut. 19, 10; menstrual flux, of women Lev. 12, 7; 15, 27; life Peov. 1, 18, because the blood was con- sidered the proper life Deut. 12, 33 ; of the redness of water Ex. 7, 21; 2 Kings 3, 22 ; blood of circumcision Ex. 4, 25 ; bloody robbery Zech. 9, 7; metaphor. Mood-guiltiness, murder, a cause of murder or blood Lev. 17, 4, Num. 35, 27, Dbut. 17, 8, especially so the pi. t3"'n'i Ex. 22, 1 ; 2 Sam. 21,1; Ez. 22, 2 ; Ps! 5, 7 ; therefore with b3> Dbut. 19, 10 or a guilt of blood i. e. guilt of shedding the blood of one; elsewhere the pi. is ap- plied to blood shed Gen. 4, 10. — The noun is the same in the other Semitic dialects (Targ. QlN, def. NJa"]!!*; Sam. f^ and DIN, Phenic. dlN. pronounced , whence ^-^s (see l). — 2. (according to the Targ., Eashi, Kim- «hi) likeness (=n a gush of blood or rain, v_.*.SX*ii blood and milk flowing out, (JJs blood, milk, JJs dew; see Dietrich, Abh. fiir semit. Wortforschung pp. 110- 12). In extra-Semitic tongues also the idea of SZooc? comes from that of flowing; comp. tn I., i)m. Deriv. Q'n (from fi'jl), and denom. dlN with its numerous de- rivatives. ilDl n. (fut. nan';, imp. uni) tr. pr.operly to place in relation to some- thing else, to bring or to put together with something, hence 1. to make like, to compare, to adjust together, with b of the person with whom comparison is made. Song of Sol. 2, 17 ; 8, 14, where the reference to the subject lies in 'Tjb. Pihel usually stands for this. From the same meaning comes: to think, to ima- gine, which is mental comparison, Jek. 6, 2: as a comely and Immirious thing have I thought (formerly) of the daughter of Zion, Jerome, Syr. and others taking it in the sense of liken. — 2. intr. to be like, to resemble, with V Ps.89,7; 144,4, Vs« Ez. 31, 2 8 18; cognate in sense bi^a, mil5. Derivat. nia'n, l-ia-i; see r T ' IT T I : ' 'I ; • ' Q'jT 2. Nif. MM "75 to become like, to resemble, with accus.'Ez. 32, 2 (according to LXX, Vulg. Syr. and others); with 3 Ps.49, 13 (Kimchi). Eeferred by others 'to fin '5 III. Pih. mp_ {fut. WSl^) 1. to compare, with b Is. 46, 5 , Song op Sol. 1, 9, or biSi with somewhat Is. 40, 18; figur. to n^i 332 nm speak in similitudes, of the prophets, same as Vta?? Hos. 12, 11, which the LXX and Jerome misunderstood. — 2. to unite ideas i. e. to fancy, to imagine Ps. 48, 10; to mean, to think Judges 20, 5; Is. 10, 7; Ps. 50, 21; to destine, with "b for some one, 2 Sam. 21, 5. Hithp. MTa'irt (fut. M^T) to make one- self like, to place oneself on a par, with V Is. 14, 14. The stem "i (Targ. mm, Syr. |io? &c.) has for its organic root tl-MI in the sense of "to bind together, to adjust to- gether", which reappears with enlarged meaning in Dl'll, Dli, DT &c.; comp. Sanskrit sama (agreeing, like). HOT III. ifut. naT') tr. (a farther derelopment of tn , Q't) 1. to cut off, to conclude, to cause to end, therefore to cease, of weeping Jee. 14, 17; Lament. 3, 49; for which also DIJ (Nif. of tn) appears 2,18; once to destroy Hos. 4, 5, which, however, the ancients took from nal II. — 2. to be speechless, dumb, silent (see Nif); metaphor, to rest, to be at rest. Deriv. iM'n, ini. JSIif.lViyi pass, to be destroyed, of na- tions Zeph. 1, 11, cities Is. 15, 1, lands Hos. 10, 7. Earely: to be dumb, of cattle Ps. 49, 13. n52T (from D)ai) /. a hermitage, a place of death- like stillness (see M?3 (image), Targ. la'i, Syr. Uaio?, the same. ''SpT (from ti)3'i III.) m. rest, cessation. Is. 62" 6 7; PsVsS, 2. ijptT (from nn'5 m.) m. = i?:;i, rest, prosperity, D^ai '')3'7 ls.d%,10 prosperity of days , i. e. the best days ; according to the Targ. (iTl), Aq., Symm. (aa&siifiia) from J1721 III. (prop, to be bound) sick- ness; according to Ibn G'andch, Eashi, Kimchi (mn'13) and others in the sense of "to destroy"; according to the LXX and Vulg. the standing still (of the sun) i. e. noon (comp. iv rg fisa^fi^Qin tov ^t'ov, Ar. jj«.4-cJ( ouo^(>, drlrr 'jiss Peov.4, 18), without ■'Mia being the reading. But the sense given is more natural, on account of ■'?2'i. i-t: ■j^ai (after the form )'\^'b^) m. same as nia'l Ps. 17, 12 (Eabbinic: a repre- sentation). DDT {3 p. pl.'^lS'^, pause 1)^; inf. and imp. Q^, Dil; fut. 1 CV after the form riD^, TJ5';, Q'fi^, where the reduplication moves forward, because tlie word con- cludes with the radical sound to be doubled; fut. 2 intrans. D'l';, like '^'!3^, Dn^, pi. 113^^ and la'i';; but WV may be regarded as a fut. Nif.) intr. 1. same as na'i II., dn (dl'l) to be still, to be silent, i'Sam. 14, '9; Ez. 24, 17 (see p5N); Ps. 4, 5; to be struck dumb, with terror Is. 23, 2 ; to trust calmly, with b of the per- son, or absol. Ps. 37, 7; 62, 6; to look at in calmness, to be resigned Jer. 47, 6; Lament. 3,28; to stand still, of the sun Josh. 10, 12 13. — 2. to cease. Job 30, 27; Ps. 35,15; Lament. 2,18; to be se- parated, isolated (seetia'i); and in many other modifications, conseq. = inaT III. Deriv. tiaa'n, Tim. On the contrary da=^Loi>, 'ja^ dung-heap, and from it the Arab, denom. JuoJ to dung); bial again is only a collateral form of ba'i II. (which see). Hence la^ , ili'q'Vi and the proper names Insa'i, ■)ai?i, MSana; perhaps also ]ai'i, Ws". IXDT Jre. fls dung-heap, on the field, 2KikGS 9, 37, Jer. 9, 21, on the earth 8, 2; 16, 4 (in fiansb la^ rfw^fl' of the earth, there is an alliteration); comp. Ar.|j^i> (dung-heap), (jLxiO and JL«i> (fimus), whence /j-i"^ stercoravit. n3)3T (a dunged place) n. p. of a city in Zebulon Josh. 21, 35. Perhaps we should read instead !1253'1, since ')i'!3'l suits better there. See"iri3b'''i, ';ia"''n.' i?pT {fut. Viy-il, inf. ahs. sb'i) intr. to flow, to run; metaphor, to weep, to shed tears, of the eye, Jer. 13, 17, Ar. j«jOi> the same; to flow out, of the juice of the vine, of the olive (see i>ai[); hence yn'ji, Ti'Siyz. The organic rooVis i'-aij, identical with that in d1 I. and !l-ai I. IT IT IT y)3T (with suff. ':|5»a'i) m. properly a tear, only figurat. (Kimchi, Parchon) the trickling out, the juice, of vines or olives, consequently wine, mead, Ex. 22, 29, like the Greek SdxQvov twp dspd^mv, Latin arlorum lacrimae, Sam. i'a'n ex- I- : tract, best issue, Malt, demgha a drop. niJyQT (with suff. •'nsa'i; pi. nisan) f. a tear, and collect, lacrimae Eccles. 4, 1 (Ar. )tjoS), whose source is in the eye Jer. 8, 23, that flow over the face Is. 25, 8, a sign of sorrow Ps. 80, 6; 126, 5 , of repentance and regret Mal. 2, 13. "1 tnija Ez. 24, 16, 'n Ci-'3i» itt' Jer. 9, 17 to ^weep. ' " " ' ''" IQ'l (not used) intr. same as "nan (which see), to overtop, to be promi- nent. Deriv. 'n5pnn (which see). pK^pT (not used) intr. to be indus- trious, active, Arab, ^3*^wo^> the same; conseq. the proper name pilJM'i derived from it: place of industry. But industry could hardly be thought of in the first appellation of the city. Perhaps place of weaving, from ptoM'l = Ar. (^ to weave, which (jjujO\t> also means, from which the forms ptoa'n'i and ptoMll are explicable. p5!^P'^ (not used) -) n. p. m. of different persons 1 Chk". 3, 1, EzR. 8, 2, Neh. 10, 7, espe- cially of the famous wise man and prophet, from whom the book of Da- niel is called; all Daniel; and Ezek. 14, 14 20; 28, 3, where he is mentioned as a wise man and pattern of righteous- ness. 'I3JT (not used) intr. same as !l3'n to be low, assumed for the proper name flS'i; At. ^ji> the same; see, however, ITT JT abridged from Hl"^ knowing, in the proper names S'T'SiN. (which see), i>T'?3125; comp. Phenic. Dp;y'i=d)5"5>i; n. p. Deriv. perhaps the proper name bsWl. 3Jn see 'S'ryi. ST (from 'i'V, prop, inf.; pi. 'a'^'Si) m. what one knows, knowledge, of a thing. Job 32,6 10 11 ;%&,Z; pLwisdom, consisting of a fulness of knowledge 37, 16. ni^'n (not used) intr. same as H'T, whence njJ T (= Ti'Ti part. m. knowing) n. p. of a Midianite, only in W'^bs* Gen. ' •' IT T : V 25, 4, where bN is perhaps the Arabic article. See, however, WnbN. nsn (from yji; pi. niyV)'/; =?'i. Ps. 73,11 construed with the accus. like the verb. Is. 11, 9 ; ;?Z. = Qiy'i 1 Sam. 2, 3. WT (jmp. of ^Ti = Wn, since a of 17 ; ^ -^ i-T IT : ' motion occasionally becomes elsewhere rt^, see 3>n\ PSll^T (from 5>'i and bjS, comp. bsW)? from dp and blS; Si is knowing) n. p. m. Num. 1, 14; for which bsiyi stands in 2, 14 (see l). Perhaps the primitive form is b!!J1S>Tl (from 5»'n'i); comp. t\h. ?]S?T (/m«. '^?'i^) intr. to he pressed together, to be trodden down; metaph. to be extinguished, of "ni Prov. 20, 20; 24,. 20; Job 18, 5; figurat. to be destroyed Is. 43, 17; of water, to dry up (see Nif.). The stem is connected with 11, ii rj .'■.., 'it' 'r' oyr. ^1; it IS also written 15*T Job 17,1. ''" Nif. 'Tj^'ia to become extinct, to dry up^ of water. Job 6, 17; comp. Lat. extin- guere aquam. Puh. "^jSi to be destroyed, Ps. 118, 12; comp. Lat. exstingui. 7i?T (not used) intr. same as bsi to r T ^ ' i-T shine, to lighten, metaph. to be celebrated^ hence the proper name bSIFi. Com- parison with Arab. jLfct> to disappoint, J^O to be concealed, is unsuitable. riyir (prop. inf. fem. of ^li after the form riTn, naid, as SI is masc, there- fore construed with the accusat. like Td"^ and the verb; with sujf. inSI, it •• ' " I- : - ' dSFi?'!!) fern,, knowledge, i. e. perception, Prov. 19, 2 a soul too without perception i. e. one not knowing duties; Eccles. 7,12; knowledge i. e. design '1 ''bsa with- out design i. e. unawares Deut. 4, 42 ; usually cognition Hos. 4, 1 ; Mal. 2, 7 ; insight Prov. 1, 4; wisdom 1, 7; 10, 14; *! ■'bast imprudent Job 35, 16 &c., gener- ally in all shades of the verb's meaning, and therefore coupled with tl^ata, !l3iaFt, inlin, nasn, isia, W'-a &c! ' it ' IT : t ' it ' IT * nDI (not used) tr. to push against something, to scratch against something,. metaph. to disdain, to revile, to vex, to grieve, whence "isi;. The organic root is !1-S1, also found in tll"5, '!\'Y"!^\ Arab. \.sii, ij<>, (c*'^* /•^'^ ynxh. the same fundamental signification. ''S ^7 (only^aj/se '^B^) in, a stumbling block (LXX, Vulg.), scorn, reviling Ps. 50, 20; Jewish interpreters translate M5''l ^^''I- DDT (part. pBil) Gen. 33, 13, whence the proper name 'n'osTt. — The stem is divided in Arab^ 'it; t npDT 336 px-n into j»Si> and (3i(>, the forpier for the physical, the latter for the figurative meaning; and the organic root pD"!! is also in pB-D I. Ilitfip. ps'nn!! to press hard (against a door), i. e. to take it by storm. Judges 19, 22, npST {cattle-driving) n.p. of a station of the Israelites in the wilderness, Num. 53, 12, now el-Tohhacha. pT (from p)? 'n) adj. m., rt)? '5 (pi. nijJl) f. beaten small, crushed, hence fine, of dust Is.29,5, of spices Lev. 16, 12; thin, of hair 13, 30; figurat. lean Gen. 41, 3, interchanged with p"!; consumptive Lev. 21, 20, where, however, it is explained, sometimes a hectic fever (Arabs Erpen.), sometimes little (Syr.), withered in the limbs (Graeco-Venet.), sore-eyed (Onkel., Saad., Vulg., Kimchi = Talmud, p^) &c. ; slender, of ears of grain Gen. 41, 6; slight, of the voice 1 Kings 19, 12; op- posed to full, strong, fat &c. p^. m. dust, Ex. 16, 14; Is. 40, 15. p^ m. a fine, thin cloth, a fine carpet. Is. 40,22; Talmud, p^ a thin covering of the eye, cataract; comp. adj. p'l. !?pT (not used) intr. to rock to and fro (in the air), of a tree, to wave, there- fore (in the Mishna) \i'jy^, Arab. J^"5, Syr. llo? palm-tree. Derivat. nbpT {place of palms) n. p. of a Joktanite tribe and a district of Arabia Oen.10,27; 1 Che. 1,22. Pi^l (p^^- P?-; f"t- )?'?;. i^itt ««/• ^S]?-!;) same asp^^ (pi^), "^^1(^,5^), rt-5^, N-bl, Tt-m &c., dividing into two lead- ing senses: 1. to beat small, to beat into pieces, to crush, to reduce to ruins, Q'^'ifi Is. 41, 15; to thresh in pieces 28, 28, with IBI'^. — 2. intr. to be beaten smMl, 'iBi'b Deut.9,21; to be fine, whence the adj. p'n, the noun pi, p^. Ar. \ji>. ^^f- P??J (2 fem. nij^'iri.; inf. 1 p'i_li also as an adverb, fine, inf. 2 pill; fut. yv , ap. yV') like signification 1 of Kal, to break in pieces, riiDSM, D ^s'lDS 2 Chr. 34, 4 7 ; to crasA, to dust 2 KiifGS 23, 6 15; to bruise, spices Ex. 30, 36; to destroy, 2 Sam. 22, 43 (see pi'i). Hof. pnirt pass. Is. 28, 28. ' PJ5T (Pe. not used, see pll) .4ram. the same. ■^f- P?,5 (3 /■ rip.Jin, 3 _p^. >, S\(> &c., to reject, to refuse, = N'lT (which see), Ar. f^\ (TV.), hence along with E]|irt (in the noun Dan. 12,2). Deriv. '(ii^nT (from liN'^1; constr. 'jiN'll, 2-n 337 r- T goad ; to .like I'ilS'J from 11^3';) aversion, an ob- ject of aversion Is. 66, 24. 3 IT (not used) tr. to pierce, with a tear up, land; to cut into; cognate witli S'nS, tj'iCi , Ar. ^-Jj-o , >-3 5), whence iis'n'ia (which see). y^T'lir (usually derived from Tn and 5>1 = y"7_ i. e. pearl of knowledge; better from STn n. to which y^Ti that stands for |-T ^ -IV it points, •= ^'^'yi bearer, holder) n. p. of a wise man contemporary with So- lomon 1 Kings 4, 31, for which in 1 Chr. 2, 6 STi. ' -IV "niT (from "IW n. : modern Hebrew pZ. Q'^'ni'll) m. a prick, a thorn, spina, LXX TQi^oXog, joined with tibs and naa Gen. 3, 18; Hos. 10, 8 with p)?; Syr. 1j??? and Arab. )I(S»*> (names of a tree). Di'llf (from D'H'n, Ar. |»w;io to glow, to bum, as ^is^ from )&'£) m. the south, the meridian region, as the region of light or the sun, Dbut. 33, 23, Eccles. 11,3 (cognate in sense SM, Ta"'F), r^;); the south-wind Job 37, 17. Comp. ^rgo? ^a % ^sXiov re (Hom. H. 12, 239) = south. (Qi- is therefore not a termination.) nim (from TTT n. after the form bilDttJ) prop, running round about, roving about (= ^n, 1!l'=l), hence 1. /. a bird that flies round about, swiftly Pbov. 26, 2, and whose nest was observable in the temple Ps. 84, 4; according to the an- cients a swallow or swift bird (see D'^D); according to others a wild dove, Arab. 1"1T ^ oU, (free i. e. wild dove), which, however, does not suit so well. Parallel liElt. — 2. m. freedom, liberation, of slaves, captives, Lev. 25, 10; Is. 61, 1; li'l'^rt nsti Ez. 46, 16 the jubilee-year, the year of setting slaves free; figurat. a spontaneous flow, a free efflux, of lb Ex. 20, 23. tyi^'n n. p. of three Perso-Median VIT : IT * kings, JdQsTos, namely 1. "'I.^sii "n Dak. 11, 1 or nsj'ia 6, 1, in full form' "IS "n ''ya S»'TJW Stril^niS. 9, 1, i. e. Cyaxares if.'son of Astyages (569-536 B. C). — 2. iDIBn "n Nbh. 12, 27 i. e. Darius, r : — IT ' ' son of Hystaspes. — 3. Ezr. 4, 5 24; 5, 5-7; 6, 1 12-15; Hag. 1, 1; 2, 10; Zech. 1, 1 7; 7, 1, i. e. Darius Nothus. Others still may have also borne the name. — In the cuneiform inscriptions of Persepolis, Barjawes has been sometimes found (Lassen, tiber die keilfdnnigen Inschriften p. 158), sometimes Barheds {Qrotefenct) ; soiaetimes Darajavash, Dar- jawus, has been read (Lassen, die alt- persischen Keilinschriften p. 41). '\ is derived from darj, Zend, dere, Sanskrit dhri conservare, with the formative sound awu, therefore ig^siijv, as Herod. (6, 98) explains it; 10 expresses the nominative sign s, as in fii'13, Ui'lT. Comp. Oppert, Journal Asiat. 1851. p. 261. ajim see 125^1. I : - t- T TjT^ (fut. "^-ni) prop, to go along, to advance, to ascend (connected with a'1'7 , _j(J, Aram.p^£:, [^Jo, Greek zQtjstv &c.), hence 1. intr. to go, to wander, to walk, with accusat. of the way Job 22, 15 ; with bs over something 1 Sam. 5, 5 ; Am. 4, 13; with a to wander or go through something Detjt. 1, 36, Josh. 14, 9, i. e. to tread upon Is. 59, 9; to go into, to come into Mio. 5,45; with IM to go forth, to step forth, to appear Num. 24, 17. — 2. tr. to tread, to tread down, an enemy Is. 63, 3 , hence the expressions : a) "1 a)5;i Job 24, 11, na "i Neh. 13, 15, "5 naa Is. 63, 2, ln;i the strength (of enemies) Judges 5, 21. Derivat. Ti'n'i and '^'IT?. Jlif. TJ'^'piVi (fut. T^'^'^T., 3 plur. apoe. ^yni) caus. 1. to make to go, to cause to walk, i. e. to conduct, to lead, with a of the way Is. 48, 17, Prov. 4, 11, or in a figurat. sense Ps. 25, 5; but also to make to advance, Judges 20, 43 they made them go as far as !iniS?a — in order to entice the Benjamites by that means out of their strong position ; for JiMISHi is the name of a place = nn5)3 1 Che. 8, 6 and ninau 2, 52. Ac- cording to others it is equivalent to the Ar. CN4>f and Syr. Af in the meaning to reach. — Absol. to lead Is. 11, 15, with b? over a thing Hab. 3, 19. With accusat. of the way, to tread Job 28, 8. — 2. to tread firmly i. e. to level, ']'iji Jee. 51, 33; figurat. to bend (the bow), transferred to the tongue, which is ob- vious in Jee. 9, 2 ; but there appears to have stood 13'i'i';i (according to the con- sonants). T]"!-: (with suff. iS'i'i; dual d^S'n'l Peov.'28, 6 18 of the" double way of the perverse; pi. Dp'n'i, eonstr. "'S'l'i) comm. (but fern, only in Deut. 1, 22; Ps. 1, 6; 119, 33; Ezr. 8, 2; the cod. Sam. also in Deut. 28, 7 25) : 1. a going *= walking, as an action: 'H TiW Judges I 17, 8 {noiovnai 686v Herod. 7, 40) ; "n 'rjbrt Pkov. 7, 19 to go on^s way, to journey; b '\ one has a going i. e. he goes out 1 Kings 18, 27, used especially in cases of continuance, as Qi"' "l 19, 4 a day's journey, which was about 15 English miles; D'^M'' niobld "i three days' journey Gen. 30, 36. — 2. Concrete: a going = a way, via, which one treads, conseq. = tTiN , e. g. 'p"b» GrEN. 38, 21 ; po6t. 'T ''bit 49,17 on the way; Q'^STl b? at the ways i. e. openly, of the abode of the prosti- tute Jee. 3, 2; "13 Numb. 22, 22 in the middle of the way. In this concrete sense bbQ Job 19, 12, nss Is. 57,14, ip^ 43, 16^, a!)ffl 43, 19 &c. are used with it, sometimes with 3 Josh. 2, 7, after tiM and '~fl'o with '\'n &c. , or in the accus. after verbs of going, as after 'Tjbrt Deut. 1, 31, nbls> Num. 21, 24, rt3& Josh. 13, ' ' ITT '_ '_ ni , ' 18 &c., to denote direction to a thing, in via ad; or lastly with genit. of the place whither a way leads, and so al- most a preposition: towards, the way to, e. g. ys "1. Gen. 3, 24, llffl 'j 16, 7, ■ji^s: ijj'i'i! Lament. 1,4, bsia ■'i'ni Peov. 7, 27, nia "i 14, 12, most frequently to point out the direction to a coimtry, as d-' '1 1 Kings 18, 43, lisitii "i Ez.40,20, diTnSl "n 40, 45, once the verb is in- serted before the genitive Hos. 6, 9. Elsewhere the genit. following "n de- ^ notes relation to and dependence upon, e. g. ^iB5!i '\ the way of the eagle Peov. 30, 19, i.e. which he takes aloft; Ttb^an "i Num. 20, 17 the public high-way, rj odog Tj ^aaiXrjtri (Herod. 5, 53), i. e. that which the king takes. So in iSi'llb TjEiM 1 Sam. 25,12; 'nb Ws Is. 53, 6;' 'lb ^bli Gen. 19,2; figiir. yisn-bSi '^'n'l Josh. 23, 14, i. e. the way to the grave. See QN, ffli<1. — 3. Still concrete, but more metaphor. an accessible, level road Is. 49, 11; an open, free path 49, 9; room to walk in Num. 22, 26 ; Job 38, 19. — 4. Metaphor, mental walking and doing (like the Ger- man Wandel = action), in frequent use J hence conduct, undertaking T?b. 2,12; 37, 7; action 1, 6; way of acting. Is. 40, 27; Jee. 32, 39; aiy^"jiPEOV.4,14, d-'Sto'^. 2,20, njj^'ia "1 16,31 &c. in the seise ot DOT! 339 ty-n manner of life, walk, course of action, in which signification, because it includes the collective plans and negotiations that enter into all undertakings, the plural often stands Is. 55,8 ; Jer.32,19. Besides the phrases iSi'il-riN ^Tz-^ 1 Kings 2, 4 to keep his walk, iiUJi'ia' i3"jl ipS Ez. 9, 10 or te'l'l? «i"'!!?b Jer. 17, 10, there is also the'plui-al D^'i'il ^•'a'^'n 7,3,"^ T'i?^! 2Chr.27,7, or sing, "and pi. interchange in one phrase 1 Kings 15, 26; 2 Chr. 17, 3. In this sense we should also take a ia^. "n Prov. 30, 19 : the action, the intercourse' of a man with . . . Joined to God "i denotes either the conduct of a man which pleases God, which God approves, Job 23,11; Ps. 5, 9; 27,11, where "n. might also stand in the plural Is. 2, 3;''Ps. 51, 15; or the agency, mode of acting of God i. e. how God acts {odb? ^£oi) Matth.22,16, 68ol &eov Acts 13,10), where again, sometimes the sing. Ps. 18, 31, sometimes the pi. Hos. 14, 10 stands; hence creation -work, the operation and suppoH of God Prov. 8,22; pi. the works of God Job 26, 14. Connected with this is a) way, manner, e.g. 'y^'nNr[-b3 "JT. Gen. 19, 31 the way of all the world; comp. odog, Ar. ijjjs &c. in a similar use. b) religion, worship, the way of reve- rencing God or the gods, e. g. aai? "i.Ps. 139, 24 the worship of the gods; Am. 8, 14 the worship at Beersheba; Dbi5> "jl.Ps.l39, 24 the religion of preceding times, i. e. of David, Hezekiah &c., when idolatry was not mixed with the true religion. c) affair, fate, lot, experience, used in the sing, and pL, i. e. conceived as the way in which man walks Ps. 10, 5 ; 37, 5;119,26; Am. 2, 7; Job 3,22; 8,19; d''iK5j '^T'^ ^^- •^^' ^^ "''*^'' *^* ''"** "^ Egypt; metaphor, a periphrasis of the state of a woman in her monthly courses Gen. 31, 35. n-'Dm see Tl'i^. •jias-lT see pB'i'iN CT)'^ (not used) intr. to shine, to glit- ter, to lighten, Ar. --o (to burn); deriv. Di'H'l. piupnn see pto^l. JJ'm I. (not used) tr. same as S'J^ I. to sow, to plant, whence the proper name • IV : V J?Tn II. (not used) tr. same as Aram. Vyi , Hebrew S'lT II. to lift up, to hear^ to hold; deriv. the proper names S'l'n, r :- r : : - yV\ (not used) Aram. tr. same as Hebrew S'll II. (which see); deriv. y'n'i, IT : '.■ ynT {plur. 'S^'Sy^, with suff. '''r\'\'Sy\) Aram. f. arm, Dan. 2, 32. JJ-IT (see Vpi) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 2, 6, contralcted from' SJi'i'l 1 Kings 4, 31. py^ (not used) tr. same as ypT II., Arain! ^I^, as ppT =i'pT I. Deriv. ■jip")! {bearer) n. p. m. Ezr. 2, 56. "Tm I. (i. e. 11 ; not used) intr. 1. to shine, to glitter, to lighten, of precious stones, Ar. ^5 and Kt>, Sanskrit dri (to shine), the organic root being still found in l^l'N, II'ITI &c.; derivat. 1^. The noun ai'l'n should be referred to the stem D'i'n ,' 'n^'^l to ^^ (l^'n). '^"IT II. (not used) intr. to hunt round about, to rove about, to go about freely, the same organic root lying in 'l^ II. and lln'i. Comp. Ar. SjtJiJ a spindle (from turning), \^'>)'^ whirlpool. It is possible that the fundamental significa- tion "to whiz, to chirp" belongs to "rm as the name of a bird, as in^i>; comp. 'i!lS a paiTot (prop, the shrill-warbling) .liJ. (5 a whizzing tone, ^ J the mur- muring noise of a multitude. Deriv. ti^'n {fut. TlJ'Ti';; inf. constr. once m-'^'l^T.-R. 10, 16 for UJ'I'l) tr. prop, to tread to pieces, triturate (as the Targ. D'1'1, Syr. >-.»,)?, Ar. ^jJ^S &c. have this objective signification; or to break through, to cut through, to cut into, con- nected with the organic root in llJVn). 22* Wll 340 5<^"I In use are tlie following: 1. to penetrate (into a thing or person) as 'ip.n (which see) i. 6. to seek, LXX ^ijtsTv, what is lost Ez. 34, 6; to seek out Lev. 10, 16 with accus. of the object; especially ii la'T!) to seek God i. e. to turn to him r T with prayer and trust Jbe. 10,21, Zeph. 1, 6, Ps. 34, 5, Lament. 3, 25, 2 Chh. 16, 12, i'^ iilj'n^ worshippers of God Ps. 9, 11, also with the addition of ib'bsa 119, 2; in later diction with ? 1 Che. 22, 19 or bij Job 5, 8. Tte same phrase is applied to the worship of the gods Jer. 8, 2; 2 Che. 25,15 20. Some- times with b of the object, Detjt. 12, 30. Cognate in sense «5^.5i. ■'''"nN NSa, i. e. to be heard Jee. 29, 13, should be considered as a supplement. d"''anl'1 Ps. Ill, 2 the sought, wished for (deeds of God), as elsewhere D''"i1?2n. Else- where with b Job 10, 6, 'inir'39, 8 to seek or search after; with a to seek (help) from one 2 Che. 16, 12' — 2. to investigate, to fathom, to explore, one, as Ip.ri, either absolut. Dbut. 13, 15, Judges 6, 29, along with T!5^a, Ip.n, bsia, or with the accus. 1 Che. 28^ 9, 2'Che. 32, 31; bi 2 Sam. 11, 3; or b|? of the person 2 Che. 31, 9; b? Eccle's. 1, 13 or b3>H of the thing Is. 34, 16. Most frec[uently: to ask (God, the gods, the seer, the oracle, the physician, magi- cians &c.) i. e. eithet to inquire, seek for from one, with accus. Gen. 25, 22, Ex. 18, 15, bs Is. 8, 19, b Ez. 14, 7 and b^. of the person 2 Che. 31, 9, a 1 Sam. 28, 7; or also with the accus. 1 Kings 22,7, b^ 2 Kings 22, 13, b|?M of the thing Is. 34, 16. The person who is asked as the medium is put with BS>M 1 Kings 14, 5; njjtn 2 Kings 3, 11, 'rarely with . a Ez. 14, 7 ; and the person /b?* whom one asks, either with bN 1 Kings 22, 7 or 1?3 Jee. 21, 2. — 3. to demand, desire, with accus. of the thing Deut. 22, 2 or with a5>a 23, 22 or ■jM of the person in addition Mic. 6, 8; once absolutely in the sense to ask, beg (bread) Ps. 109, 10, where, however, the LXX read 1115'iJi instead of Ittj'ill. With Ti?3 of the per- ' I IT S I" • ■*• son and the accus. of the thing: to de- mand something back from one Ez.34,10, hence the expression 'a l^M (Q:?73).d1 "n to require of one shed blood, i. e. to avenge the guilt of blood Gen. 9, 5; Ez. 33, 6; Ps. 9, 13; then to revenge, punish, either absol. Ps. 10, 4 or with oyg of the person Dbut. 18, 19. — 4.. — From the objective fun- damental signification arose that of to set foot upon (a place), to visit, with accus. Am. 5, 5 or bs of the object Deut. 12, 5, which, however, may also mean to look for; so too in Peov. 31, 13. Deriv. TiS'l'Ta. Nif. td^ns (inf. abs. IBI'IN = "nln Ez. 14, 3, to avoid the coming together of hh, whence one h is sometimes dropped 2 Sam. 19, 23; fut. ■^-fvi, 1 pers..xa'^'& Ez. 1. 1., by the influence of liSlIN) to be explored, examined, 1 Che. 26, 31; to be required i. e. revenged Gen. 42, 22 ; but usually reflexive, to allow oneself to be induced by entreaties (to hear a prayer), with b of the person Is. 65, 1; Ez. 14, 3. ^^"T! (3 pers. plur. p has originated in a farther development of the root at its begin- ning. Deriv. Nl^'l. ^^1 341 m ITif. ^''ffl'lrt to cause to sprout, to bring foHh.{cogaaXe in sense N''Sin)GEN.l, 11. aiiil m. young herbage, x^o^, spring- ing out of the earth Gen. 1, 11, 2 Sam. 23, 4 and blooming Is. 66, 14, after it is watered by rain Dbut. 32, 2 ; in full form 'I p'l; 2 Kings 19, 26; Ps. 37, 2; Is. 37, 27. It is the best food of animals Job 6, 5 , the dress of the meadows Ps. 23, 2, and its perishing is a misfortune Is. 15, 6; Jee. 14, 5. Different from T^Sn Peov. 27, 25 and atos Gen. 1,12; 2 Kings 19, 26. Aram.' MNri'i, Syr. (transp.) ] 1?^, Zab. 1-Mf, Ar. (j^Sj, the same. W'l (= &ttj'i; Kal not in use) intr. 1. to be fat, juicy, full of marrow, Ar. a.m;i> and transposed « Jo, ^jtXi' the same; on the contrary »,*uti is transi- tive and of specific application. Deriv. 'JUJ'l (adj.), llB'jl. — 2. (not used) to be strong, large, powerful, according to the usual metaphor. Deriv. y6l 2. PUi. ll^'n (3 fut. riS'iB'l': for '\'4T., !^- instead of rt- , see Ti-^ to make fat, pithy, to strengthen, DJtS Peov. 15, 30 ; to anoint, 1BN1, belonging to the luxury of a banc[uet (Am. 6, 6; comp. Luke 7, 46) Ps. 23, 5; figurat. (according to Rashi) to regard as valuable, important, consi- derable, Ps.20,4; according io IbnEsra a denom. from 'jid'l which see. Puh. -^m to be w'ell fed, of UJS3 Peov. 11,25; 13j4; to be made strong, of per- sons 28, 25; to become fat, of the field Is. 34, 7. Hothp, llBlli to be sated, of a sword Is. 34, 6. '"■' The organic root ^Q-^ for Dl^-n is identical with that in 1-MlB, Dffl-n. ■jaJT {pi. I3''31B1, constr. "'S'tti'l) adj. m. 1. fatl with ijjffl'ls. 30, 23 ] well fed Dbut. 31, 20; 'sappy, juicy, of the palm Ps. 92, 15. — 2. rich (comp. Greek naivs Herod. 5, 77, Latin pinguis Hor. Od. 2, 12,22), great, mighty Ps. 22,30; comp. Ar. *A^t>> f^.!^ (remarkable, famed). •jUivr (with suff. iJlZi'l) m. 1. fatness, with abn, of animals for sacrifice Jer. 31, 14; figurat. a rich meal Ps. 63, 6; superabundance, 36, 9; fulness, blessing 65,12; Job 36,16; sap, oil Judges 9, 9. — 2. fat ashes, of sacrificial animals Lev. 1,16; 4,12; 1Kin6s13,3 5 (hence according to some the denom. •\'esn Ps. 20, 4 to make into •jffl'ji, but see ^'^B'l); also ashes of burnt buildings Jer. 31, 40, comp. 52, 13, so called probably from their fattening the soil (Plin. 17, 9). Deriv. the denom. •JISI. Pih. to cleanse from ashes, to re- move ashes, Ex. 27, 3, Numb. 4, 13. m {constr. only once n'jEsTH.2,12; with suf. '\m\ pi. DTil, constr. Til, with suff. Dfl'^ni; a late Hebrew word, used only in Ezra and Esthee, and taken from Aramaean) f. command, a royal one Eze. 8, 36; Esth. 2, 8 (with Ija'i TjbMn); 4, 3 8; 8, 13 &c.; a legal pre- scription, a law, EsTH. 1, 8 19; 2, 12; 3, 8; 4, 11 15; collect, laws, rights 1, 13 15, with T^'ji. In m^ijk Dbut. 33, 2, written as one word by the Masora, the Targ., Vulg., Sa'ad., Ibn Esra &c. find, it is true, the present n'l; but it is = riTttSN in the signification of tiliBN, see rri^BN. — We must reject at the outset every Hebrew derivation, since the word has come from Aramaeism, which is unknown in old pure Hebraism. Such Hebr. derivations are : Tn contract- ed from n^'i (Michaelis), or ni from nW = nillj" and therefore = nilj fundamen- I IT turn (Kanne), orni = mi after the form ^ ^ IT it: of n5?3 from ni^ = riT" (Simonis), or Ttl IT : ITT "''tp '"^ contracted from nS'n and from ti-il = 11 , IT : IT T ' IT ' conseq. = y"! (Filrst in Concord.). But in Aramaeism itself, where no etymology can be shewn for it, it is found only during the Persian dominion; and the later Syriac writing is also ignorant of it. Hence the derivation should be sought in Persian alone. TU ddt is the part, pass, of ddten to set (Sanskr. dhd, Greek iiO-tl/jii, German thu-n. That), conseq. what is settled, established, hence law, statutum (from statuere), &saii6g, edict, comp. Persian C>\S jus; so too Pehl. dadha, Zend, daetie and Armen. dat (see lani). IT T :' m 342 n m (constr. once rrn Ezr. 7, 14; def. IT '" ■ Nrri, with suff. lisni: cow«:rt a!nd 5>:ri = i»53, Dirt IT T IT T ' r T |- T |- T ' '.MV and Din, ISrt and Ij^n, IrtS and Ipa, Drtb and Dtib, IrtD and IrtD^ rtrtSt and l-T l-T' f T J-l' IT T rttiK, 3rt3 and pp5) or in relation to other Semitic dialects (e. g. bnrt Ar. O^XJ^, airt Ar. (.tXia., llrt Ar. .tXjSk, IDrt Ar. V-.., Ip-J Syr. ^ &c.); and many difierences between the books of Chronicles and other historical ones (i7hnrt 2 Sam. 23, 25 and ^lilrtrt IChr. 11, 27) may be derived from this. As a numeral rt signifies 5, !l 5000 ; as an abbreviation rt must have early denoted the name of God (rtirty, see Movers, kritische Untersuchungen tiber die bib- lische Chronik etc. p. 75) ; as a sound of the alphabet it is pronounced He. Being a simple aspirate like N, it is interchanged with it, whether it be an initial sound of verbs, e. g. Dirt and tllN, llrt and 11N, prt and pN,' or a IT. l-T 1-t' 'l-T 'i-t' medial sound, e. g. Urtb and BNb, or the article -rt, Phenician -N, Arab. Jl, or rt of Hifi'l e. g. b^Naij = 'Ati Is. 63, 3, m']N='lrtMic. 7,' 15, rtn45="irt Zbph.'2, 14," D''3^N = 'ttJrt Jer. 25, 3; but the latter seldom. — While it some- times expresses a stronger aspiration and even increases to the strongest guttural, it is interchanged with n (see before), and also with 3 as an extension of this interchange, e. g. ibrta and ifc^M, lrt?3 and laa ; with a e. g. arts and aas»; with S> e. g. ps and lart &c.; but the last is rare. In addition to the intrinsic value of ITe as a consonant, since the whole Hebrew alphabet consists only of con- sonants, it forms the vowel letter in 343 n certain final syllables of a word ending with a vowel, i. e. in words that termi- nate in vowels (which happens also with JS, T and"'): a) a, e. g. ttSSM malha, MriN atta. N stands for this, not till late and Aramaeising, e.g. Nan Is. 19,17 chogga; on the contrary it is usually wanting in the second person of the perfect, e. g. nans katabta, ']D'bw malUcha. Ex- ceptionally it stands b) for S, e, e. g. nibs KalnS, niJ* ayyS; Tn ze, rtM me; but for e Yod ('i) is also written, e. g. ^iba malki; comp. the change of n into £ in Greek, c) for 6 (which is often = a), €. g. nabllJ SklomS, InbllJ Shilo, flS kd; but here it is interchanged with 1, e. g. r^tupo, •hm^'ribVi Shild, 1S5=n33 n'kd. Besides these organic interchanges, arising from the harder or softer pro- nunciation of He, the following which are rarer, are worthy of notice: 1. with Yod ("i), as '^bn and Trbi , nsrt and Inai , ^ •" ''"T, M-T ' ITT ITT ' mn and m\ ban and bD^ &c. The IT T _ ITT ' r T r T connection of the y and k sounds (comp. 01"' = Din) makes it probable that this took place in the first instance through the medium of the k sound. — 2. with the sibilants (S, 0, T, ia) e. g. Tibrt and TibD, 111! and irid, bbrt and bW, the Shafel- form aflblB from anbfl (15N and Aram. 1" : - f" : - ^ i-T lit); comp. the interchange of the Greek s with s in Latin, e. g. i'| sex, inzd septem, sgna serpo &c.; Sanskrit Sindhu, in the Hindu dialect &c. — 3) with n, e. g. isn and 1S3 , ban and / 3 o I- T r T ' r T bas, a"ilri Aram. ai5 &c. r.T ' r T r : In building stems out of organic roots, the following peculiarities relative to He present themselves: 1. fi as a middle sound of stems is frequently softened out of the harder k sounds, e. g. ans out of anN (which see), aa| (which see), therefore v— *.^ , Targ. atl; or it is con- nected with k the interior sound of a word, e. g. t:pa Ar. o^, bpa Ar. Isi, Opa Arab. |V={, jiXj. — 2. Concave stems with two sounds, whose stem- vowel is a, falsely called I'y, frequently enlarge this stem into one of three igounds by hardening the interior vowel- sound into He (n), e. g. IpN = IN (tin), IS; bpNlI. = b!S, bn; ^^N = IN (^ix) ^Pl = ^3 ; ^ii ^"^^ >*? ; o'pi (i4) = ^'^ m Aram, np^; bl?=bp)?; ^p^=^^;T 13 = ina: ba =b!ia: llj^ and v.ii^i3 JT I- T ' IT r T ' IT ^-~- k./ la and ma ("ina) &c. — Besides, He IT |- T ^ (- T ' ' after a serves to build stems out of or- ganic roots by putting it in front, e. g. ElTpj OTv?) '^^'p &c. — 3. It is in- serted for the purpose of making pluri- literals, see ap3'i. n sounds as a consonant at the end of a word, when it is denoted by the point in it called p^S)2 (i. e. causing to be pronounced). But the point also stands in mss. under He {Michaelis de codd.Erf. §. 19 ; Lilienthal, codd. Eegiom. p. 27. 64), as also under 1 and i when they are meant to be consonants, e. g. ^bN. Hence stems which terminate in n- of which there are but six in Hebrew (nba, np ■> , nnb, nai , nbp , nan), are connected 'j-T ' r T ' i-T ' r'T ' I- T ' ' with those that end with the k sound, e. g. nba EzR. 4, 4 K'tib, Ar. (^Jo &c. n- and (without the accent) n- an enclitic particle {He local), the most frequent and most usual one to denote direction towards a thing (see n-). Its use is twofold: 1. with a noun in sub- jects not personal, where n- is accent- less, e. g. ns'iaffl towards Samaria, nna 1 Kings 2, 40 to Gaih, n'lpp to the mountain, nbai3, nbaa &c. If the final ' T IV : - ' tm vowel in the noun be already without an accent, it is lost when this accentless enclitic particle is annexed, e. g. fl^'lj!?, nanp, nis*©, nn^a, nnia from y^iN, T :'i" T : r t :i ' t :it ' • i- 07.(5. (where - is lengthened by a stronger accentuation into -, comp. rtl^n|5. from UJIP), nia, ma: the vowel of the noun- stem is seldom shortened e. g. n'np from in, or is thrown back to the front e. g. n'asia from DjD^a, but in pause fiaS'lj JUDUBS 9, 1. h- is accented when the ground-vowel in the segolate-form is o, e. g. nbns Gen. 18, 6, niSJf 19, 23, naiii Mic. 4, 12, an exception to which occurs only in the construct state Gen. 24, 67, elsewhere but seldom e. g. nn^ 344 Jos. 19, 13. This particle is appended in the way mentioned even where nouns are joined to prefixes (a, )12, b, -ll) and direction to a thing is not obvious, e. g. naasa Josh. 15, 21, rtbsaa Jbr. 27, 16,'''!ibi03 Ezr. 8, 31; bss to fall down Ez. 9, 8^ 5>'i3 to sink down Ezr. 9, 5; ati"' to sit down 9, 3; E)15» to fly to Ps. 90, 10; b) with verbs of striving after, reaching to, throwing down, driving to, e. g. Vi'lB Ezr. 9, 5, t]Ni^ Ps. 119, 131, ttS)9a Dan^ 8, 15 and here too with Q^Ut, because it belongs to it; npb to hand over Zech. 11, 13; TpN to take hold of 2 Sam. 4, 10; )n Num. 8, 19; bj?ld to weigh to Ezr. 8, 25; D>)ir5 8, 17 &c.'; c) with verbs of crying to, of speaking to, of disputing e. g. 5>i«5 Ps. 119, 147, im Judges 6, 10, iaVl>AN. 10, 16, IWNbh. 13,21; d) with verbs of attending to e. g. Sizisi Dan. 8, 13, ln; 13, 10; e) with verbs ex- pressing a continuance of time, without interruption, e.g. yiii to sleep on (with- out disturbance) Ps. 3, 6 ; Qbtl to dream on Gen.41, 11 ; baisnli to continue moum- ' ' I" - : • ing Neh. 1, 4; nns to keep opening i. e. in succession Gen. 43, 21. On the other hand in Mbsj*-! Ez. 3, 3 Ti- is sufi'. 1T_: IT ' IT and only without mappik because of the distinctive accent (see Jbr. 6, 6 after LXX, Vulg., Syr.; 44, 19 &c.); so too in nsnai Deut. 29, 7. See n-. , IT : •- ^ ' iv As to the derivation, this final a- sound with a noun is manifestly a very old accusative case, which has been preserved merely for the sake of ex- pressing motion towards, and because of this sense it might also be attached to the imperfect of verbs. Such accusa- tive a is closely connected with the accu- sative-sign M in Ethiopic {Ludolf, Gr. aeth. p. 112), which is confined merely to the union with proper names , as is the case with the Amharic inseparable 345 preposition ha i. e. to {Ludolf, Gr. Amh. p. 47). If we compare the Sanskrit and Arabic, it appears to have been pro- nounced in its full form a-n; but the n was lost, as the Greek accusative a arose out of av, and as the n in Sanskrit becomes weak, losing itself in various instances and so dying away. Only in some adverbs, which are nouns in the accusative, the still older accusa- tive case am has been preserved, viz. in QSn, Qp-'l &c. IT • ' 'it •■ n — or (accentless) 'n- an enclitic par- ticle, = in-, from which it is abridged, being also a designation of direction towards: 1. with a noun, as M5T1 Ez. 25, 13, rtab 1 Sam. 21, 2. — 2. witi a verb, e. g. fia'n Jtjdges 9, 29, MN'Ij'NT 1 Sam. 28, 15", nsiSTi Ps. 20, 4'' W^ Pkov. 24, 14. t\ see under In and brt. IT -: r n (pronominal stem) 1. shortened from n!n (an exclamation of astonishment &c.) = nn Ez. 30, 2 , only in the compound nN!n^(which see); but in IIMNtl Micah 2, 7 (oA i^e word) !n is better taken as a c[uestion, like the second signification. — 2. an abridged prefix-sourffl, inter- rogative, preceding N and In, e.-g. TiMNin Micah 2, 7, IMNH Job 34,31, 'nMNrtEz". ' ' r T IV ' ' IT li- as, 9, Djstiln EccLBS. 2, 19, as always when short a is to be pronounced before a semivowel with long a (comp. -in); see 5- — 3. the article shortened before H with a or 0, and before 5> and tn with a, e. g. cisntn, mnm, Titnin, pyn, issin, ° IT T IV' ITT IV' ' I T IV' 'ITT IV ' IT T |V ' Q-'iannn, •mint, D-'^ilnin. The same is r tt: IV' ' I T iv' (■ T ly the case with the article where it is used as a relative pronoun, e. g. NtobinJn Josh. 10, 24. .t\ i. e. ha with Dagesh forte follow- ing. The weakened forms !n, in, !n in certain cases, see under bin and Ntn. ~t\ (pronominal stem; inseparable) pronoun interrogative, a prefix -vocable smoothed off, put before the first word of an interrogative sentence. Like the Latin an and Greek ^ it introduces a q^uestion, in order to obtain certainty, 2 Sam. 18, 32 is it well with the boy? 9, 2, and so in cases where one is not clear about the nature of the answer and either expects a denial, when the inten-ogative clause may be resolved into a simply negative one, Latin num. ? Gen. 4, 9, Job 14, 14, Peov. 24, 28 (Targ., Vulg.); Ab instead of in. actually standing in parallel places (e. g. 2 Sam. 7, 5 mnNp, for which 1 Chk. 17, 4 has 6n''!n, bia7:rt, ?[btn;'or Sheva r ' " IV : - : I- ' i : r ' i ' : r ' , moveable is drawn to In, e. g. Ijl??'! Gen. 17, 17, nihSiln (hak-Ftonet) Gen, 37, 37, I'lSln Jer. 8, 22; but usually. ^^^ 346 i?3n n merely, as MSISM Gen. 27, 38; 'illiNM I- 'iy, VnVn to nbnVn, from w, bin-'pZ. ta'^aiiain, with suff. ■^artatl) "». a sacrifice, which was consumed upon the altar, a holocaust, as Eashi, Targum and Kimchi (in his Dictionary) have taken it; com- paring the aJiain (to roast, to burn, tor- rere) of the Mishna and Talmud (e. g. Men. 10,4; Sabb. ch. 2) and the Arab. ^A.g-*JO. In full form it is only con- nected with Mat, in the sense of burnt- offering, Hos. 8, 13 my burnt -offerings (i. e. those that should have been burnt for me) they sacrificed only for flesh and eating (i. e. to be able to eat flesh). The rare word is chosen for the sake of as- sonance with D^ariN 8, 9 or lanaJlN 4, r T -: ' I" : — : ' 18 (on which account the LXX have taken it here as = d'^artatlN , rjyaTitjus'va), a peculiarity which the prophet loves. ^Sn (fut. bail,"'.) intr. prop, to breathe, to breathe out, to inhale, to blow (comp. Talm. bail, bail, to steam, to evaporate, to smoke, to blow about, Sabb. 17'' 95"; the Syr. Vaoi , besides the Hebrew sig- nification: to wander about, of herdsmen or flocks ; the organic root appears to be ba'tl) ; but only fig. to be vain, transitoiy (as a breath), empty, unreal i. e. sinful 2 Kings 17, 15, Jer. 2, 4; to be foolish, Ps. 62, 11, comp. EoM. 1, 21; bail 'n to behave foolishly Job 27, 12. Derivat. baiTl, and the proper name bat!. Hif. baJlil to befool, to lead astray Jek. 23,' 16? b3tl (cowsJr.bart, as is sometimes the case in other segolate forms, e. g. ^"HT, ■^ilt!.) 'ip?. 5>p5 from s»'nT, inp, ^rio, i»U5; Witt sM/V-'baii, '^ban, iSaii; pi. Q'^baii , constr. ''bail) m. 1. a breath, a&fMS, a&fiog, aura, which passes away quickly, and to which are compared acquired treasures Prov. 21, 6, the life of man Ps. 144, 4, Job 7, 16 (therefore earthly life is called '!i in^ Eccles. 7, 15; 9, 9, or li ''^n ^m'^ 6, 12), human action and occupation, thinking and providing, Eccles. ch. 1. 2. 3. 4 &c.; batia Ps. 62, 10 lighter than a breath. — 2. Figurat. a thing vain, fruitless, Lament. 4, 17, Jer. 10, 3, whether it be worth- less in itself Prov. 31, 30 and therefore applied to words, nonsense, foolishness Job 27, 12; 35, 16; Ps. 39, 7; Eccles. 5,6; or transitory, not continuing Is. 30, bn 347 run 7, therefore transitoriness, Eccles. 11, 8 dll that enters (into the world, oomp. 6, 4) i. e. appears, is transitoriness; nothing- ness, 6, 4 for he comes in nothingness i. e. he is bom nothing; metaph. an idol, Deut. 32, 21; 1 Kings 16, 13; Jer. 10, 8; with the addition of NITB Ps. 31, 7 or 133 Jer. 8, 19; unrighteousness (of gain) Prov. 13, 11. As an adverb in vain, vainly, Job 9, 29; Zech. 10, 2; senselessly Job 35, 16; uselessly Is. 49, 4. — 3. (transitoriness) n. p. m. Gtbn. 4,2. bnn. see bjJi. ^Dn (not nsed) intr. same as las I., Ar. i^vAft to he firm, hard, only of ebony. Hence ]yr\ see i^h. inh (with suff. ■^SSrt; or l^irt, with suff. ''VzS':}; not used) m. same as ^SN /?jTO, hard, a stone; specially ebony, i. e. stone- wood (Symm., Jerome), Phenic. I^tl , whence it came to the Greeks and Eomans (i^sv-og, heben-um, eben-ns) &c. In^'its native land (India) it was named from its blackness (comp. Sanskrit k4- laskandha black stem &c.); and Pa?-- chon has claimed for the stem )'2'n the meaning "to be black and shin- ing". ""aan (from ■jaSl; pi. t:ij!:?n) adj. m. prop, ebon, viz. stick, whence pi. Ez. 27, 15 K'ri ebony -poles {(pdlayyeg), which the Tyrians purchased from the south and east coasts of Arabia; K'tib 12r\ (3 pi. I'llalr; K'tib Is. 47, 13; part, 'nih ibid. K'ri) tr. to cut in pieces, to divide in pieces, Ar. -aJ6 , Hebr. 'lan II., hence figurat. to divide of, to determine, the heavens, after the manner of as- trologers Is. 47, 13, where the K'tib reads D^Hia TaTt (y^»), the K'ri (and LXX, Vulg.)' b''''a'i25 '■'I'sh. So Kimchi. According to Parchon it is equivalent to •l^n I. to conjure, to practise magic, and therefore ^ish is identical with lan ibid. 47, 10 12,' and with the Axeb."/^ to know, to understand (modern Hebrew 'nifl a learned man). i2i) are: nTiJl'in {Hadad is help; comp.1T»''VN , >TtSii) n. p. of a king of Syrian Zobah, David's contemporary 2 Sam. 8, 3-12, 1 Kings 11, 23, for which name there stands in 2 Sam. 10, 16 19, 1 Chr. 18, 5 seq. 19, 16 19 (LXX, Vulg., Syr., Arab., and Josephus also in the first passage) IT? 115 > "'^tliout this reading being more correct on that account. 'jia'l'l'l?;! {Hadad-Bimmon) n. p. of a deity of the Syrians compounded of two names (see llrt and liai); for •^ftp alone was also the name of a Syrian god 2 Kings 5, 18, representing a cer- tain aspect of Adonis. From this god a city in ynm nj? jja was named, which lay not far from 'jezreel, and was called Maximianopolis in Jerome's time. A celebrated lament took place there, ac- cording to some for Tfl^^l (3 Kings 23, 29; 2 Chr. 35, 23); according to others, the dead lament in the worship mn 350 D-in of Hadad-Bimmon to which Zech. 12, 11 refers. According to the Targ. the word is the proper name of a Syrian king, son of li'H'iau. mn I. tr. to stretch out, to stretch IT T ' forth, to reach forth, the hand Is. 11,8. But this meaning seems to be only de- nom., while the primitive one seems to be to take, to lay hold of, identical with iTl"' (see !i) belonging to Ti (comp. Lat. hed in pre-A«?2(i-ere, Gothic hand-\\%, Grerman Hand from had &c.). After a noun had been formed from it with the meaning hand (perhaps "fn = Ar. t>f), there arose a denom. verb with the signification: to stretch out the (taking) hand. It is not connected with ^dJb or mn II. mn n. (not used) intr. to lead (cog- nate in sense ani), to point out (the way), Ar. (cjijo, Syr. *-»-?<'i, whence the Ar. xjt\;a = Hebrew iJlia. Derivat. n. p. nn (contracted from llirt, besides which there existed a form IIJJI, Ar. Joss, Syr. ojjffi, Pehl. hendo, Zend. heando &c.) n. p. of the well-known country India in Asia Esth. 1, 1 ; 8, 9 ; denoting originally the Indian river Sind-us (Sanskrit Sindhu; see n), then the land. A farther explanation of the name does not belong to the present place. Di^!^ (only constr. tnTl, Diltr, from DlSl) m. prop, firmly trod, with D^bs'n: foot-stool, Ps. 99, 5; Is. 66, 1 ; Talmudic 1)333. ■••'■••. /■ min see Tin, TilN and Cilinin. "l^nn (only^Z.d'''n'nn; from Tin II.) TO. hill, mountain, prop, rising up Is. 45, 2; so also the LXX. D'liltl n. ^. of a Joktanite-Arabian tribe'^GEN. 10, 27, in southern Arabia, identical with the Adramites (Ptol. 6, 7, 10 25 26 'ASqafutai), trading in frank- incense (Theophr.), east of the Him- yarites, with a commercial place Kane (Wjj) on the sea, north of whom the Ghatramotitae (riTO'ilsn), with their ca- pital Sabata (Plin. "h. n. 6, 32), dwelt, 'n is contracted from d1 "nil^ (A^or is ewalted; linn = 'li'iN, as ITTt = Tin). They were so called from the worship of Hador or Ador (see 'ni'iN, d^lilN, D'ninN , I^n), i. e. the fire-god. See d^'jH. ""in {mighty, chief; from'i'rnll.) n.^. m. 2 Sam. 23, 30, for which the parallel 1 Chr. 11, 32 has I'lin (free, noble, chief). T]"!)"! {imper. '^'irt) i*"- *" i^'effld down, to trample into ruins, with ntiri to trample under foot. Job 40, 12. The organic root 'rj'l-ll also exists in Ij'i, N-31 &c.; Ar. liljjo to destroy. Dnn (not used) tr. to stamp firmly, to tread /irmly down, with the feet, to dam; then to tread generally (cognate in sense ©53); figurat. to make fast, to fit to one another, to fit together &c. The organic root is Q"!"!!, identical with that in dl-N (see p. 24), Ar. *3f, and ge- nerally with those in da, dT, d'l. Deriv. • I" I" ' IT dnn, din. IT' IT D'TiI {constr. d'jn) see ai*]n. D^»l (from the verbd^rt; def. i!m'ir\; pi. fM-) m. a piece, Dan. 2, 5; 3,"29; 'n 1|3» = jM«i;? Tioish (2 Macc. 1, 16), to cut in pieces; Syr. a member, prop, a piece. Others take the Pers. -IjUje and ^tfcXJf, a member, as the basis: and the Aram, djlii , Jojci, is said to be denomin., as in other respects much that is Iranian has come into Aramaean. mn {Peh. unused) Aram. tr. to cut in pieces, to hew in pieces, Ar. *<\* (to lay in ruins), comp. rs'fi-vsiv, tem-no. The organic root dTli is also in d1, dT.1, dt-i| &c. '" "' ' '" ' r T Pah. d^n (not used) to cut or hew in pieces; Syr. >ojoi, Ethpa. >i?ei.<:f, Tar- gumic Af. d^ns. Deriv. din. DlH (not used) intr. to be green, to sprout. The organic root is Dl'n iden- tical with that in jS-llSl, la'rn, Ar. -- ^ IT T ' r T ' (j«i>J (to be green). Hence Din 351 "Tin DTn (j>l. I3''l?15) ™- *^ myrtle. Is. 41, 19'; 55, is'; z'bch. 1, 8; so called from its fresh green leaves; comp. Ar. (j»i jjfi (the same). The shorter form DN (Talmudio) is also in Arabic dialects nSin (myrtU) n. p. f. EsTH. 2, 7, perhaps identical with the name '!Atoaaa (daughter of Cyrus), see Herod. 3,133; comp. the Greek proper names Myrto, Myrsine, Myrtoessa &c. nin iinf. constr. Ejirti 'with suf. nB15; fut. tl^Sl."0 tr. to push, to thrust, •with accus. of the object Ntna. 35, 20, with the sAoMZ(ierEz.34,21, as ri.13 with horns; with 'JM of the place away from which and bs whither Job 18, 18; Is. 22, 19 ; to expel, thrust out, to drive away, with the accus., ''23a and "lasViJi DEaT.6,19; ■ 9, 4; Josh. 23, 9; to repulse PROvrlO,3. In the cod. Samar.DEUT. 6,19 and 9, 4 the Hif. of C|13 stands for it, and the Hebrew C|^3Si Ps. 68, 3 appears to be contracted from Sjii and tjitl. — The organic root t]1-!i lies also in Cll"1, rt-s'i, £1TS, tlii-?. _ "liri I. (not used) intr. 1. to shine, glitter, lighten, of fire, therefore only a collateral form of TIN, the organic root of which Tl"!! lies in Tl also (which see): Derivat.' 1T[5 (in W'nirt), 1175 and ^'tr\ C™ D^ilrt)) the name of the fire-god. — 2. Fignrat. to he splendid, beautiful, magnificent, distinguished, elevat- ed, great, majestic, like verbs of shining elsewhere. Deriv. IIM, !TTi!i, Tin. IT T ' IT T -: ' V IV lin n. (fut. 'Tiri;) mir-. 1. to be pro- minent, to outtop, of mis, mountains; deriv. the noun 1*nrt. — 2. Pigurat. tr. to lift up (cognate in sense NiUJ), hence with Q''3S Lev. 19, 15 32 to elevate, to TT ' draw forth, to adorn, to favour in pre- ference, once with the omission of 'D-'iB Ex. 23, 3; in a bad sense: to swell out, linrt puffed up Is. 63, 1 (see Hithp.); according to the LXX acting foolishly. Deriv. Illn. ITT Nif. Tnrt?. to be highly esteemed, to be elevated, to be honoured, Lament. 5, 12. Rithp. Ilrtrirt to be proud, to puff one- self up, Pkov! 25, 6. inN (which see) is evidently =11^1 1. and II. in the signification "to be wide, great"; an objective signification lying there also in 1'rx, rrniJN, ins; whence two fundamental senses are to be as- sumed in "1|1N likewise. The Arabic has instead either sdJ^, whence jjjol tumidus, or \Jk^. The organic root ^Tln, ^TH has either the fundamental signification trans, to heap up, to accu- mulate, to make thick and large, or the idea of shining has been transferred to prominence as in 5>Si. "inn (eonstr. ITn, with suff. ■'^IM; IT T ^ I — : " |-T-:' constr. pi. "^."irt) m. 1. height, Ez. 16, 14, majesty, with'liri, liasPs.S, 6; 21,6; fame, with Tb> Pkov. 31, 25; Ps. 149, 9 ; pride, Is. 35, 2, hence yiSSi is cognate in sense (which see), but seldom coupled with it Is. 2, 10; preference Mic. 2, 9. — 2. ornament, splendour, Ps. 29, 4; decoration of arms 45, 4; beauty Is. 53, 2 ; ornament of dress Ps. 104, 1 &c. "Ttil m. ornament, splendour, Dan. 11, 20 ornament of the kingdom i. e. Jerusa- lem, or the temple; for the land, ^iS 11, 16 is used; comp. Tin. Tin (from Tin I., only in compound proper names) m. 1. same as TIN and ^i'lN fire, like the Zend, dtar, Pers. j6f the same; comp. IIS. — 2. Ized repre- senting fire, the fire-god, as such also a deity of the Syrians, who had come from the Persians and Assyrians, interchang- ing with Tirt- Derivat. the proper name mn {Peh. unused) Aram, same as He- brew iiTt n. r T Pah. Tirt to esteem highly, to celebrate, with b of the person Dan. 4, 31 34; 5, 23.' Deriv. mn (with suff. ■''niri) Aram. m. same as Hebrew TnM Dan. 4, 27. ITT "ihln «. same as Hebrew "llii, and existing only in dl'r!!!;) which see. r\^ir\ 352 i^)r\ Jl"ltn {constr. n'l'iil) /". same as "flit Ps. 29,'2;J96, 9; Peov. 14, 28. Dihn (Hador is elevated) n. p. m. 2 Chr. 10, 18, for which ailN stands in ' ' IT -: other places 1 Kings 12, 18 and dT^ilN 4, 6. "nil., "ns and ^Tin are considered identical. ITS'lin. {Hadar is help) n. p. of a Syrian king 2 Sam. 10, 16 19; 1 Chr. 18, 3seq.; 19,16 19, elsewhere written ■"llln. The LXX and Josephus write iTS'p.'irt after the analogy of '^b^llN, where TIN = ^nin. 1 — : 1 — : nn (pronominal stem) interject, oh, alas, ahl an exclamation of grief, with b Ez. 30, 2, from which arose by N prosthetic, ?iMi< (which see), and by blunting off, "ii'(see "rt 1). in (pronominal stem) interj. woe, Lat. hen, eheu, vae. Am. 5, 16; instead of it is usual '^iln (which see) as a longer form, besides which liN and lias (which see) also exist. in original form of Nin which see. *l!l-, in- see Nlli. i^'n (imp. Nirt, fut. Nl!T' = Nl!T'; see Nl!l out of hawa) intr. same as !nJl io ' ITT J« EcCLBS. 11, 3; Job 37, 6: Ae says to the snow, be thou on the earth (as the Vul- gate translates according to the sense). On the fundamental signification see under Win and 'rv'n I. where compari- sons with the Arabic are also given. Deriv. the proper name i«W\ Min and 1l^^n (3 fern, mn and mn ; IT -: IT -: <• ' I- -: it -: ' 2 perf. n'^irr. and n'^iri. &c.; 3 fut.iH^h for Nin;.;' ~i pi. m:\jr\h, f. Vllnb,''see 5) idram. mtrans. same as fnrt, Ni!i in Hebrew: to he, to become, Dan. 2, 35 &c.; connected with the part, it forms a nar- rative tense (aorist) 6, 11; 7, 19 &c. ^5^^ (pronominal stem; the primitive form irt exists still in the proper name inibN; in in nsfi Jer. 18, 3 out of which is made in K'tib injn and K'ri Nin nsfl; in ^Y-- in 29, 23K'tib, and in the suffixes in-, in-, i" &c.; pi. dn and 11,1:1)^ see under these themselves) pron. pers. (3 pers. sing.) m. (anciently for the fem. also, especially in the Pentat. where the punctuators have constantly written Nin and read ^"'Tf), he. It is contrasted with nns Dbut. 28, 44 or liN 2 Sam. it - ' r -: 7, 14, but is more frequently used than the other personal pronouns. The following classes of its manifold use may be distinguished: 1. it is applied as the usual designation of the 3 person of the personal pronoun: he, is, referring to something known, while nr points to what is coming Gen. 4, 20; 10, 8; some- times with emphasis he himself, the same, ipse, iste 20, 5, which may proceed so far that it coincides with significa- tion 2, Ps. 33, 9, and to such a degree that it stands even for the first person, Job 13, 28 and the same one, i. e. and 1, 13, 27, comp. Lat. hie homo for ego. — 2. It is used to make the sub- ject very prominent, like avrog, ipse, in order to refer back to it and dis- tinguish it from other things; and so it may be rendered self, as also dnN (Jer. 2, 31; Hag. 1, 4) may be occasionally translated. Num. 18, 22 and the Levite himself; Is. 7, 14 the Lord himself; Ps. 50, 6; Prov. 3, 34; 28, 10; Esth. 9, 1. In composition this meaning is ex- pressed very strongly, e. g. Nin D5 Gen. 4, 4 26 himself also, i. e. likewise, in which case the preposition of the pre- ceding noun is not repeated 10, 21. The meaning appears somewhat stronger when it precedes the noun and li^li follows it,»e. g. njtn nb':Vn Nin this same night, Ex. 12, 42, or when the follow- ing noun repeats the preposition of our pronoun, e. g. 1 Chr. 4, 42 "'53?3 onjj ■|i5>73'l^ of the same sons of Simeon, a pecu- liarity still more frequent in Aramaean. From this it happens, that Nin may be joined to the first or second personal pronoun, e. g. Nin liiN Is. 43, 25 / my- self, Nin nns Jer.' 49, 12 thou thyself^ or with ''12 Is. 50, 9, strengthening them all. It may also stand as a predicate quite irrespective of a noun, where, connected with pronouns, it forms a clause by itself, Ps. 102, 28 and thou art «in 353 i)r\ thyself; Job 3, 19; Is. 41, 4. But if this Nin be appended to a definite noun going before, witbout being put merely in a free position as adding to the de- finiteness of tbe idea of the noun though collaterally, H^TTn stands in the sense of the suTne, Lat. idem, e. g. Nliirt di^ln the same day Gen. 15, 18, which accepta- tion Nin alone has but rarely Gen. 19, •33. Contrasted with iiji.ti, NirJil receives the sense that Gen. 26, 32, 1 Sam. 27, 6; and N*>'n according to some an abbrevia- tion of Nin^ (EcCLES. 11, 3) and then a noun the existing = God, by which NIlTT would be explained in some passages of Scripture and in the proper names NlJTibN , NliT'SN ; but see Niln 3. Din (Kal not used) intr. to roast (in the fire), to burn, of sacrifice. The or- ganic root in Sfl is identical with that in M-SN (to dry, to roast), Greek bn-r- dco (to roast), and certainly with the Syr. wiUi (to glow, to burn). Pilp. aiiail (not used) to burn, a sa- crifice; deri'v. afiafl. This reduplicated form exists also in the Mishna and the Arabic, Jewish interpreters (see Parchon) having already compared it. pin see lah. ■'Dnin Ez. 27, 15 K'tib see ip.:?^!. ^^^ (after the form ain, bijJ; with suf. A.ifi, (Jiii!!, inin and nnh; from lltl) m. 1. dear neighing, of the wai- horseZECH. 10, 3; Job 39,20; the sounds of thunder Is. 30, 30. — 2. shining, fresh- 23 -nn 354 lin ness, of health Dan. 10, 8 ; the green, the glitter, of the foliage Hos. 14, 7; figur. height, majesty, of domiuiou Jer. 22, 18 ; Zech. 6, 13; Dan. 11, 21; 1 Che.29,25; dignity Num. 27, 20; exaltation, fame, of God Zech. 6, 13 ; Hab. 3, 3 ; joined with IIM Ps. 104, 1. The connection of the IT T ' two meanings also exists in pbn , where their development is given. — 3. {fame, majesty) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 7, 37. Else- where in the same sense in the proper names I'iniaiN, iniliU, rfllil-i, irtiiTiin , t : • ' IT : ' it:- I ' it: - i ' IT • 1 mn (i. e. lirt; not used) intr. 1. same J ^ IT ' ^ as 1!l to sound aloud, to shout, of the spirited, far-sounding neighing of the war-horse, the loud tones of thunder &c. Deriv. lirt 1 and m^lTT. — 2. Me- taph. (comp. bbfl) to shine, to glitter, to lighten, of the splendour or redness of fresh -coloured health, of the shining, green foliage; figurat. to be celebrated, elevated, great, majestic. Deriv. ni!i 2. — The organic root 111 has no connection with the Ar. (Xgj, which is merely a collateral form of nai; but it has per- haps with n-i; (which see). Deriv. Tin and liirj in proper names. ^^l^ m. same as liM 2 freshness, of health, or better in a figurative sense, renown, majesty, as an epithet of the divine names n\ bN, with which it is IT ^ 1" ' interchanged, as "i^js. Only in the proper names Tifi-'aN , ^5!^■'m., '^^'rplL'S, niri'; = liJi in niniJiN. iT'l'Tin {Jah is renown, originating from n^-iiin; i" is a vowel of union, as elsewhere ''-^ n. p. m. Ezr. 2, 40, 1 Chk. 5, 24, and for iT^nin 9, 7. . IT : I ' ^•T'l'lin (the same) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 3,24^" tT'*7in (the same) n.p. m. Neh.B, 7. iT'lIn (the same) n. p. m. Nbh, 7, 43, for which is rt;il'i\' ia 1 Che. 9, 7. nin {part.Tt^h; imp. m. illfl, f.^^^ti) intr. same as rt;j!i, prop, to blow, breathe (cognate in sense Qffij), a representation of what moves, to which the idea of life attaches itself; hence 1. figurat. to live, to be, to exist, then to arise, to be- come. Gen. 27, 29; Is. 16, 4; Eccles. 2, 22 ; Neh. 6, 6. The stem is therefore identical with mn I. (which see), whence nin, and with Tf^n (which see); the fundamental signification lying in the Talmudic N3!l. to breathe, Arab, (^v*, whence sLp (a breath of air). Deriv. niJT;. In Arabic the meaning "to rush, storm, bluster" is derived from that of breathing, and admits of manifold ap- plications. — 2. (not used) to desire, to wish for, coming perhaps from the idea of drawing into self (like adspirare), whence Inin 1, according to some; but the noun may be a collateral form of niN, which see. — 3. (according to some) to be thrown down, precipitated, to fall, hence to break in, of misfortune ; but the fundamental meaning is to storm along as an intensive of to blow, and with this sense only in Pihel, because the derivative STili 2 alone proceeds from it. Ar. ;_5jJ6 the same. Ti^n (a collateral form of niN; constr. IT - ^ _ IT- ' n^il; pi. nilrt) /. 1. eagerness, lust, in a good or bad sense, Prov. 10, 3 ; nirtai d"''l.ya 11, 6 and by the eagerness of the faithless (i. e. whom they lead into sin) ; Ps. 52, 9 ; Mic. 7, 3. Arab. ^^, Malt. hewa, the same. — 2. overthrow, destruc- tion, corruption. Job 6, 2; 30, 13, where the K'ri reads M"!!; figurat. in the pi. crimes, injuries, Ps. 57, 2; 91, 3; 94, 20; Prov.17,4 and elsewhere; Ar. i«jJ8, iCjJS the same. See !nrt 3. nin f. same as nilrj 2, Is. 47, 11, Ez. IT ' IT- ' ' > 7, 26, with iai2J. Dvjin (= Cl^'in^ yho [protects] the multitude, see 'ati) n. p. m. Josh. 10, 3. "'in (pronominal stem) interj. same as '''^^t (which see), an exclamation of threatening, with the accusat. following Is. 1, 4, with bN Jer. 48, 1, b? 50, 27, b Ez. 13, 18; of 'grief 1 Kings' 13, 30; of exhortation Zech. 2, 10. Tjin (i. e. -^n; fut. -^n^ for ^^'n^ a ^m 355 pn form found only in this verb ; inf. TjrtM ; Vtn. is used for the perfect) Aram., intr. to go, BzE. 5, 5; 6, 5; 7, 13; so ako in the Targum. The stem 'rjin is obviously connected with Arab. _Lff (to hasten), viJLA^ (the same) &c., like ^bfi. with the Ar. laJL* (to be PLuick), [^'i (to hasten), J. 5 (to go in); and it is therefore ques- tionable whether 'Tjrt has come from ';|bln. with I eliminated, since we should rather compare for the organic root the Sans- krit ap, Greek ay-eiv, Lat. a^-ere, and with the digamma the Sanskrit wag, Lat. vag-o &c. iS^n (not used) intr. to be clear, to enlighten, to shine, eq^uivalent to bbn I. Deriv. b'^n. ni^bi.T (irombbt^JL) f. folly, sense- lessness, EccLES. 1, 17; 2, 12; 9,3. rri" is here a collateral form of W, and therefore fii^biti is sing., like nibbi:#, ni?3?n. n^lV^in f-i the same, Ecclbs. 10, 13. D bin m. stroke of a hammer, on the •••I anvil. Is. 41, 7 (Kimchi); but see thn. Din a ground-form to the personal pronoun On, which see. p-in I. (3 person with suff. dart) tr. same as OMfi to entangle, to put into embarrassment (motion), with tumult, with accusat. of the noun derived from it Dbut. 7, 23. Deriv. na^ina. Nif. Diri; (fut. dirt;, from dirt:) to fall into confusion, into tumult, from astonish- ment, 1 Sam. 4, 5 ; 1 Kehgs 1, 45 ; Both 1,19. Din n. intrans. same as rtnrt, Drt to I IT T ' 1- rage, to make a noise, of floods, of a multitude; hence Mic. 2, 12 rtSMirtn dlNM theii shall make a noise because of IT T I" ^ ' the multitude, where it stands = rt3a5rtn, ' Tiv : ' since it cannot stand for rt57a''rtn, ^ r ! I- T ' much less be referred to rtMrt. Pigurat. = rtart of the fluctuation of the mind, to sigh, to lament (see Hif.). Ar. -Lsc to rage, te roar, to be strongly moved. Derivat. dirtn, the proper names drt, drtirt. IT Hif. dirtrt (only fut. d''rt:;) to lament, to mourn, to sigh, Ps. 55, 3, like rtnrt " ' ' IT T 42, 6; prop, to manifest commotion of spirit. IDin see dp they. DQin (fr-om drt after the form bbin; IT ^ I- . IT ' raging) n. p. of an Edomite 1 Chr. 1, 39, for which Gen. 36, 22 has dM'^rt. ' ' IT " pn (with suf isirt; Tl^Sirt Ez. 27, 33 is sing. = Tjiirt, as 'r^-'ptXSi 16, 56 = Tj^-) m. same as ^IN , 'jiN : wealth, riches, prop, what has been earned, acquired, Prov. 3, 9; 11, 4 &c.; with ^lUS Ps. 102, 3 and with the adjectives ^p"" Prov. 1, 13, ppy 8, 18, ap 13, 7; n'^a Tirt all the possessions 6, 31; lirt-Jib Ps. 44, 13 no wealth, i. e. small, worthless (see S«'^). Adverb, enough, sufficiently, Lat. large, Pbov. 30, 15 16. \)T] (not used) Aram. pron. pers. of the Spers. masc.pl. they, formed from the sing. Irt with the pi. y\~. It is the last part of tlie compound "jlSN for llrt^tj which see. The fern, form is Vp, lying m T^SN (which see) = Vp?i?- pn I. (Kal not used) intr. same as y\» I. (which see), prop, to breathe, to blow (cognate in sense bart), hence 1. figurat. to be vain, empty, i. e. to vanish (like a breath); see Hifil. Ar. (jl^ {to be light) has the same fundamental signification ; comp. Sanskrit an to breathe. — 2. (not used) prop, to fetch a breath, after a work, hence to respire, to rest (cognate in sense 1!5b3 prop, to iDreathe), whence the Ar. ^tl to rest, to feel oneself easy, is explicable. — 3. prop, to pant, hence to be weary, to gain by labour, to ac- quire, to get by effort; deriv. ^irt. See ■JIN II. The stem Irt has been abeady explained in its two fundamental signi- fications under ■)!« I. and 11. of which it is merely a collateral form; and the organic root is also frequently met 23* pn 356 «^^ with in extra-Semitic tongues (see IIN, rr-5N I.). "mf. yTiTi (fut. I^lri;) to act foolishly, vainly (comp. baflll) Deut. 1, 41; cor- responding to iT'Tni 1, 43. ?in n. (not used) intr. prop, to be bent, hence to be hollowed, of vessels, which are able to hold a thing on account of their hollowed form, conseq. "(n — !n-2N 11. (which see), !i-5» &c. Deriv. Y'r}. VI M (unused) an assumed stem for ■Jith, taken as = yiti to cut in pieces, to divide into pieces; but see y^h and m- 32W see aSM n. p. "iSin at Neh. 13, 13 see 'n^^N denom. "liil m. 1. same as '^tl a mountain, oQog Gen. 49, 26, where the LXX read ■'pin 1S>, the cod. Sam. 1? I'lrt, parallel nis»a3 Dbiy; but according to the Masora and accent, according to Onk., Vulg., Syr., Saad. and all the other ancients, the reading was "'piJl, belonging therefore to Dilin (froni !TnM). — 2. n. p. of cer- tam mountains, see ^h. Tliaffiin Zech. lO, 6, mixed up as it were of iuji and a>ii!5, but = TiilaittJ!!. See :iTa. I 3''!0tQin (=''i!l^, Yho is hearer, comp. 2>aiB^'bN, 'n;»affl)' n. p. m. 1 Chr. 3, 18. rUJin (='i!i:, God is help; it7 = iri': and yrji = ^TO, S-O^, from 5>ia = 3>'a"') re.jj! OT. Num. 13,' 8; 2 Kings 15, SO-' Hos. 1, 1. fT'yjpin {Jah is deliverer; S>iain is an infinitive noun) n. p. m. Jer. 42, 1 ; Neh. 12, 32. Din (Kal not used) tr. to persecute, to hate, prop, to press injuriously upon one, or to storm against one. Ax. v:i\.Sb (malum intulit), redupl. ■•:■ g'>«ft (to push against something violentlj^. The org. root nn appears also in Sanskrit Md, Lat. od-\, Gothic hat (to hate). — Another stem nilTi is =n-Jj» (to bind about, to sur- round with a rim), whence the deriv. niJl = ri'''nhedffe; out of which comes the name of the letter ^rt (see n), as Parchon writes, Pih. nniti {fut. nniii^) to persecute and assail, with ^? Ps. 62,4, as the Targ., LXX and Vulg. understand it. T'Jlin n. p. m. 1 Chr. 25, 4 28; see ■'nls'n^, where is the explanation. nin (only part. pi. D'^Th) vitr. same as fiTti to see dreams, visions, metaphor. to dream, to see delusive images. Is. 56, 10, as LXX, Aq., Symm., Vulg., Targ. appear to have taken it. According to others (see Kimehi) to talk confusedly, to rave, comparing it with the Ar. (^Ju*, which may have come, however, from the preceding signification. nS-Til Is. 1, 16 see nsr. IT- • ITT '^raail see SIU and at3\ • I • I" I l-T ''fl abridged from rT'!i see ni!i andfi. ^n (pronominal stem) 1. interj. same as in Ez. 2, 10, of which a weaker form is ■'N n. (which see), and therefore not = ins. — 2. first part of the compound IS^n, which see. J^^n(pronom. stem; pl-l'rj, 1lti'ri)pron. pers. of the 3 pers. f. pi., they Lev. 21, 9 &c. In the Pentateuch Nin constantly stands for it, which the K'ri reads N^n and the cod. Sam. so writes, with the ex- ception of eleven places (according to the Masora on Gen. 38, 25), where N^n stands even in K'tib ; elsewhere Nin stands for N^n but three times 1 Kings 17, 15, Is. 30, 33, Job 31, 11, and three times is thQ K'tib N^n Ps. 73, 16, Job 31, 11, Ec- CLES. 5, 8, which the K'ri rightly reads Nin. The numerous applications of N^n are in the three first leading senses the same as in itin. It should be added, that it is frequently used for the neuter it ; passages to prove which may be found in Noldius's Concord, p. 255-60. Etymologically N"!?! should be con- sidered as compounded of "'n (Syr. '*^, Sam. "^n) and N^, ya, Ethiopia js& (an old pronoun for 3 pers. fern, whose mase. «M 357 HM is NT wa), from which hiya arose the ■present form; y being attracted into i; At. ^, hiya = Us6, y being attracted into i; vulg. Ar. and Malt, hie. Ma &c. NTI Aram, the same Dan. 2,9 20 ; 7, 7. ITT! (from "illn I- after the form Clb"'?) m. same as 1!rj sAoai of joy, joyful ac- clamation, of vintagers, men of the wine- press Jer. 25, 30; 48, 33, or warriors 51, 14. rn*T\ (only pi. rin-) /". a cAoiV, a choir of singers Neh. 12, 8. In form it is to be derived from Irt (TiJl) = 1p I- (since this stem really existed), and is a noun developed from its Pual, after the form of 1310, nyap. The connection I" ~ r '• with ninin (which see) is natural, as in is cognate with tni. IT " ITT n^T;n f. collect, choirs, Neh. 12, 8 according to another reading. HTl (2 fern, once n'i';n 2 Sam. 14, 2, iri'ijin Ez. 16, 31; part. f. rt;il-i Ex. 9, 3; imp. n^n, with Wilw HW, f. "^^I^.y P^- ^in, with W&w V'ny, inf. abs. Tt^t^ Ez. 1, 3 and i-iln Num. 30, 7; inf. c. ni-in and ' IT, 7 7 # , ._.. with pre/iai rii''!ia, but once after the Aramaean manner fi;tl Ez. 21, 15; fut. rr'rT', op. •'H'') m«r. same as flirt I., Nirt IV : • ' -r r l' ^ IT T ' IT T (Targ. Nirt) Syr. ]ooi, and cognate HTl, rtin) prop, to breathe, hence 1. to live, to eanst (comp. Greek sliii Od. 15, 432), animal life shewing itself in the breath- ing Job 3, 16; Dan. 1, 21; Eccles. 2, 7 18; 4, 3 16; 6, 12. Metaphor, to he emistent Is. 23, 13, also of things Gen. -2, 5; 7, 12; Is. 11, 16; to be {in a state or in a place) Gen. 4, 8; 13, 7; Zech. .14, 6; generally to exist, to be, in the greatest variety of applications. Comp. the modern Hebrew Tftn esdstence, i. e. ITT -: ' -God, hence It DiB the name of God. — . -: I" 2. to be, in the widest sense, i. e. not merely as living and existing, or as hav- ing a how and a where, but also = «()<», esse, as a subst. verb to unite subject and predicate Gen. 1,2; 3,1; 15,5; 16,12; Job 1,21 ; 3, 4 &c. whether the predicate be a subst. or adj., a numeral, parti- ciple &c. rt;jrt as a logical copula is fre- quently absent Gen. 1, 2, and should be supplied fi-om the context. With this meaning of "r\ the following peculiarities are to be noticed: a) in late Hebrew, it is a periphrasis for the narrative tense, in connection with the participle of an- other verb, as is usual in Aramaean, e. g. fibs ■'iiNT Neh. 1, 4; 2, 13 15 = bysi: Job 1, 14 ; more rarely in earlier writings Gen. 4, 17; 15, 17; Is. 10, 14; 19, 18. b) With b of the person to be to one i. e. to belong to one, which may be translated to have Gen. 12, 16, therefore =b UJ^,, Greek saxi fioi. Also with b of the per- son or thing to serve some one or some- thing, to tend to, like the Greek sJvai or ylvsa&ai sig ri, Gen. 6, 21 and it shall serve thee; 9, 13 and it shall serve for a sign of the covenant. When the infin. with b follows : either, it shall serve for . . . Is. 5,' 5 (more rarely with the omission oiTi'^it Is. 8, 18); or to be about to, to intend to, to wish to Gen. 15, 12; 2 Che. 26, 5 ; or lastly, it is to ... i.e. it must . . . Josh. 2,5, Ez. 30, 16, i. e. in other words, if'n with the infin. is equivalent to the imperfect Still farther, with b of the person, to behave as, i. e. to be such an one, 1 Sam. 4, 9 behave lihe men. c) 'M with D5? to be with one, i. e. to stand on his side 1 Kings 1, 8; ab ns» n^rt to have I ' I" !■ IT T in the mind 11, 11; IrjTBN D3> It to have ' ' IT • r T intercourse with a woman Gen. 39, 10. d) '3 ''5"'3fa "n to be in the eyes of one, i. e. to appear; see yv. e) b? Ti to be over something, i. e. to protect, prop. 1 Sam. 25, 16, or figurat. Zech. 12, 2. See b?. — 3. to arise, to become, i. e. to come into being, to be born, absol. Gen. 1, 3, or with yq of the place whence 17, 16, EccLES. 3, 20, or b of the person for whom Is. 19, 15. Hence arose the mean- ing: a) to become somewhat, with accus. Gen. 19, 26, or b 2, 7. b) with b of the person to fall to' one's lot Is. 17, 2;. Job 30, 31 ; IB'^Nb "n to fall to the lot of a man i. e. to marry" him Num. 30, 7 ; Hos. 3, 3. c) 3 "n to be as one or something i. e. to be likeFs. 1, 8; Is. 14, 19; even in this sense tl^rt is omitted Is. 10, 9. — 4. To this is closely attached the signification n^^ 358 pn to take place, to happen, to fall out Ex. 32, 1; Is. 14, 24; Eccles. 3, 22; -ffi rt^rj it happens, that ... 7, 10. Thus '^fl^l or 1V!T[ often in narrative style: it hap- pened, it will happen, of which it is hardly necessary to adduce examples; but in the phrases "bs '''i 131 It or Wn Nfeiail Tl the sense is to come down, IV - IT T _ ' to come in, to arrive at &c., which must be referred to this signification. Deriv. IT : ' I : ' I \ I :'" it ' it ' it In favour of the fundamental signifi- cation which has been given, the identity of tnrt, mri, trri &c. appears to speak, and from this the sense to fall into a sickness, to precipitate — to flee has been developed (see Nif and the noun iT^ii). Comp. nin. Nif. Irffii 1. to become, with b some- ' IT : • ' : what Deut. 27, 9, and "nsta of the per- son from whom 1 Kjngs 12, 24; to take place i. e. to be fulfilled Pkov. 13, 19; Zech. 8, 10; to happen Judges 19, 30. — 2. to be weak, to be gone (cognate Mbni) Dan. 8, 27; to be gone, i. e. to be over, of sleep, with b^ of the person Dan. 2, 1. n*n (from Pihel of Ti-'Tt = fnrt) f. rT - IT T IT T ' ' snatching away, calamity Job 6, 2; 30, 13 K'ri; see iilfl. "ISVn see "naiN. IT IT IT Tl''n (pronominal stem) conj. same as '^"'N (which see), but only in the later scriptures 1Chr.13, 12, Dan. 10, 17 and in the cod. Samar. Gen. 34, 31 (usually ^Ti there); comp. 'jDN, Syr. r^oi. b3''n (c.bsin; pi. D-ibs'^ii [nibs-'n only Hns. 8, 14 in a peculiar meaning], constr. "ibain, with siiff, D3ib3''^i; from bsM after the form TT^n, nb''3," t3a\n) m. IT - IT •• ' l|T ••' IT ••'' {f, only Is. 44, 28), properly a large dwelling, containing in it a number of inhabitants ; definitely a palace, a splendid house Amos 8, 13; hence •jlt) bs'^fl a palace inlaid with ivory Ps. 45, 9 ; a53> Ti a palace of luxury Is. 13, 22 ; TjbM In cifarfeZ o/' the king 1 Kings 21, 1; metaphor, temple, as the palace of God Is. 44, 28, better bs-'ilfl the sanctuary of Jehovah Zech. 8, ^, Neh. 6, 10, in full form '^•^ bD"!!! (comp. i'^ n'a) 2 Kings 18, 16 or '''i lIDlb bs^H Ps. 79, 'i : f ...ii |- " ' » seldom an idol-temple Hos. 8, 14. In the signification temple it is also applied to the tabernacle 1 Sam. 3, 3 ; to the princi- pal space in the temple or its nave, with- out the porch and holy of holies Ez. 41, 1 4 15; 1 Kings 6, 3; or to the whole temple-building without the fore-courts Ps.68, 30, Ez.42,8; figurat. spoken of heaven as the palace of the world Ps. 11,4. bSSI {def. Nbnin, with suff. rtbsin) Aram. m. same as Hebrew bsifi Dan. 4, 1; 5, 2; EzR. 4, 14; 5, 14, i7e. palace and temple. b'yTy Pi. see bsn. ..... ,-T b'^n (from bH = bn after the form n''t) OT. splendour, brightness, light, only in the proper name b^rt^'ax, which see. pb^n (a resolved form for bbn, from bbrt I.) OT. (according to Kimchi) splendour, brilliancy of light, prop, diffusing clear- ness, light, then concrete brilliant star, morning star Is. 14, 12, and so with the addition of in'i5-)a. It is thus explained by the Targ. '(jSlnM SSte), LXX (ems- (fOQog), Vulg., Kimchi ('Hijan asis) and others. The Ar. syov is of similar de- rivation. Another b];''lnEz. 21, 17, Zech. 11, 2 is imper. Hif. of bb"!, which Aq., Syr. and Jerome have erroneously re- ferred to this place. □^*^ belonging to I3?ai:i see tnit Hif. Da'^fl n. p. see aa'iM. rr ■• -^ IT ya^'T} (from ^a!^ = lUN I. after the form bs-^rj, Sl^a, Dl^il, ba-'S; artificer, work- master, comp. iIsn) n. p. of a wise man of Solomon's time 1 Kings 5, 11, 1 Chr. 2, 6, and of a chief singer 6, 18. Per- haps abridged in the Aramaean way from ■^a'^nn (faithful). j'n (pronominal stem) see ']'in and V*} "*• Pi'op- deepened, containing (see )'i'n II.), then a hin, name of a measure for liq[uids, containing ^j^*^ of a na n^'^ 359 ^n (which see) or 12 S"b (which see), accord- ing to Josephus (Arch. 3, 9, 4) 2 Attic loag or 12 sextarii Ex. 30, 24 &c. i. e. five c[uarts English, •^xn Num. 15, 9, niijibttj 28,14, ni»'':i^Ex.^9,40, n^-iSffi Ez. 4, 11 were used of a hin. n^fi see niM. r ' lanGrEN. 27,36. Cod. Samar. has this I --• for ''Srt i^i our text, meaning whether so? then = yea sol i3 = m3 so, as the Samaritan translates. ?3n (not used) intr. to take, to re- ceive, to hold, therefore =^3, bb"'' , Aram. ' ' IT ' I T ' bS~S; figurat. like 33 1 to be strong, fat, thick, firm, abiding, which meaning lies in JXft, iM*, whence J^ a fortress, a tower, JJuLo tower &c. Deriv. bsirt. According to others (in Kimchi) the noun is derived from the quadriliteral bjDj^, Arab. JSlff, which assumption, however, is unnecessary. nS3n Pkov. 26, 26 see !riD3. n - • IT T "IwH (Kal not used) tr. prop, same as iby to injure, to trouble (comp. intr. Targumic i'i3, N^3, Syr. Ijfis), next: to act unjustly to one, Ar. jCa., which ./"os. Kimchi has already compared. So the LXX and Jerome have taken it. Ifif. T^Srtfl (only fut. 2 pi. «i'l31in = iT'snn, as "lisTTi Jer. 9, 2 = i3'^'ni'i) to l- . - 7 I ; ;- ' I* :"' , cawse trouble, to do an injury (by words), with b of the person Job 19, 3 (parallel d''b3ri), comp. D^baa ■'5Siis3'ini 19, 2; K. Levi: to deride; according to the Targ. to mistake, in nouns of two syllables, e. g, lTOriri,'']l^ri, ■jsyii; but oftener in tri- syllabic ones &c. e. s. iTTiiliirt, D"'iBinrt. •{ ° T IV IT IV ' I- T r: IV d) Before N, S, Tt, "1, -rt is usually al- tered into !l, e. g. U^^rt Gen. 15, 11, dISM, Ifin, 5^!l &c. Sometimes the _ r- T ' IT T ' IT T initial N-sound of the noun is amalga- mated with this -M, e. e:. rTiSTlSii from - ' ° I MT 'SUSsin. e) Some words lengthen the vowel with the accent, when the article is prefixed, e. g. dSM from dS, y^Nfi from yniS, nN)?!i from riNp; as on the other hand the vowel at the beginning of the word is shortened, e. s. diblHNM , ' '^ I- T r; IT ' elsewhere dibflN: dittSlsn from d-'Tlilp. r T I ' i- r'r: - r t'it f) The weak final vowel falls away when the article is put, e. g. sNil from ribx; Tbin for iitbrt. In connexion with the IT - IVT - vowelless prepositions 3, 3 and b, the rt disappears, and - with Dagesh forte following is put with them, as -3, -Si, -b. On the application of the definite ar- ticle see the grammars. — 2. a pronoun ^bn 360 7!?n demonstrative, i. e. still perceptible in its demonstrative character, where bfl, though properly the article, has the signification hie, haec, hoc, as 6 i} to in Homer and Herodotus, e. g. UV'n ho- die, hoc die, a5>Brt this time, lnb''Vfl this night, Tii'Wn this year. — 3. a pronoun relative: who, which (without distinction of number or gender), in order to intro- duce relative clauses = THJN , and there- fore joined to verbs and particles, as NlS^lnrt Josh. 10, 24, ^ib^fi 1 Sam. 9, 24,"rTVVrip Ez. 26, IT.Na^^'ninp Ezr. 8, 25, ■3.^Tfr\ 10,14 17, i»'''p:Rrip 1 Che. 26, 28,' -INSMSrt 29, 17, yirri 2 Chr. 29, 36, and also according to the Ma- sora n^an Gen. 18, 21; 46, 27; Job 2, 11, ibisb Gen. 21, 3, Mibsii Is. 56,3, InaiBii EuTH 4, 3, UN "isn Dan. 8, 1 ; and since ■'n at one time existed in a rela- tive signification, it may be so taken frequently before participles; comp. Ar. Jl for (^jJI. In n-'aiB 'ifflNp 2 Kings 6, 22, where a relative meaning suits, there stood perhaps niausii whom thou hast taken, and a marginal gloss may have put by way of annotation 'ifflN to -ll, i. e. shewing it has this meaning,' which transcribers afterwards made into ItiNp. — 4. Very rarely brt may have also been an independent interrogative particle, like the Ar. Jf, a reminiscence of which has been preserved only in iba^Fi IT bp Deut. 32, 6 (according to the orthography of the high school at Nehardea), because bna is construed with the accusative. But with regard to the article see also Nln. Deriv. Nbii departiculative, sbln (!lS?bn), Dbln.. Nbil (departiculative [derived from a particle, viz. btl] ; not used) tr. to remove, comp. Ar. J^ the same, Syr. (redupl.) ''^ioiiioi, hence Nif. NbrtS. to he dispersed to a dis- tance, Mic. 4, 7, parall. rTlS 4, 6. J^bin (elsewhere the form is usual only in 15>) m. distance, remoteness, formed fiom btl ille, only with a of motion llNbH 1. are adverb of place : thither away, afar off, away, illuc, ultra, ulterius, e. g. '!l"lBa Gen. 19, 9 stand back (to a distance); 'til Bffi?? 1 Sam. 10, 3 from thence and further; 'rtl |;|^K1 20, 22 from thee and farther away, i. e. beyond thee (opposite !isp3 f^ltn 20,37); b Oia Gen. 35, 21, Jee.'22', 19, Am. 5, 27 far away from ... — 2. an adverb of time: "•)» 'rtl t?1!l Is. 18, 2 since they were and on- ward, 'i. e. till now; 'HI NWIn Si"rta ' ' (TT I - I - If /roira iAai c?ay and forward 1 Sam. 18,9 &c. Comp. ''^01 , "^oiii the same,''^3i^ beyond, and so too the Samar., Zabian &c., wher^ the particle comes forth still better; in Targ. Nbiib, ibiib {afar off) bp is con- nected with other demonstratives be- sides. njj^n see Nbp. DPn according to the cod. Samar. in the noun Miiabfi Ex. 30, 34, see abn. IT-: : V ' > i-T bl^il (only plur. Q"'b") ''*• prop, an abstract, praise, rejoicing; concrete a thanksgiving festival, of the harvest- gatherers, Lev. 19, 24; Judges 9, 27. See bbrt I. Pihel. T5il (from tiTbti which see) pron. demonstr. comm. this, that, with a noun masc. Judges 6, 20, 1 Sam. 17, 26, 2 Kings 23, 17, Zech. 2, 8 (the cod. Sam. also in Gen. 24, 65; 37, 19), or fern. 2 Kings 4, 25; seldom without a noun 1 Sam. 14, 1; Dan. 8, 16. The ground-form to it is: ntSil (from the article brt, the de- monstr. b la, and tit) pron. demonstr. masc. the same. Gen. 24, 65; 37, 19, where the cod. Samar. has the abridged form Tbii, which is the more usual. The Ar. (ctXll is compounded in the same ' offiS manner, and is abridged into jJI. ITSn (according to Ben Asher, but according to Ben Naphthali Itbij) pron. demonstr. f. that Ez. 36, 35, in its com- position like iiTbti, only that the middle demonstr. is not b but b. 'TY^t\ (only pi. Dijpibn) m. a step, a going. Job 29, 6 ; from i^r\. Elsewhere: r\ybn 361 -Pn HD'^bri (only pi. niS") f. a proces- sion,"a march, of God Ps. 68, 25; going, of warriors Nah. 2, 6, but which the LXX have taken as = Tj'n^. way Hab. 3 6 ; figur. way, manner, conduct, Peov. 31,27, as TJ'i'l. elsewhere; march of tra- vellers, or caravan Job 6, 19. It is pos- sible that B"'S''b5 and niS" belong only to one singular form. Ton {part.^'^h; inf.abs.':\'\bl^, constr. 'Tjlsin'as'^'rj'^nb, '7'blriu, before Makkeph -rf^it, ; imp. pi. labti only Jer. 51, 50 ; fut. poet? and rare TlSW, '^^'n^, l^"^??-' ^'^^ which the forms of TjV usually appear, see the verb in question) intr. to go, to walk, to move forward, in the widest sense, 1 Sam. 17, 39, of animals Gen. 3, 14; Lev. 11, 27; to go for one, to be active, to be a messenger. Is. 6, 8; Job 38,35; to extend, of a border Josh. 16, 8; to spread, of a report 2 Chr. 26, 8; to sail, of a ship Gen. 7, 18; to roll forward, of a wheel Ez. 1, 19 ; to walk, of the moon Job 31, 26; to resound, of the voice Jer. 46, 22; to depart, of let- ters Neh. 6, 17; to flow, 1 Kings 18, 35 &c. ; and in general whatever expresses active motion, and is clearly seen as such from the context. As its con- structions are very numerous (with ac- cusal, with b, bij, 1?, 'OS, a, V^, -riN, ■''im, T\inyh, ■'isb, ya, D5»a, nisj?, lisn) and the fundamental signification is also varied in proportion, the follow- ing combinations deserve notice : a) with the accus., to go to, a place, where the place has sometimes a of motion Gen. 28, 2, sometimes not, Jer. 37, 12; or it has riN Judges 19, 18 ; to walk through, to pass through, peragrare locum Is. 50,10; to pour out, to overflow, to inun- date, where the object with whioh stands in the accus. (Lat. with the ablative) JoEii 4, 18, hence the figure in Ez. 21, 12 : all knees overflowed with water, as a description of fear; in a poetical figure: to live through, to walk through, e. g. ni)?-!!!; Is. 33, 15, m'7 (nothingness) Mic. 2, iV, nb3 Is. 57, 2, D-'MFi Ps. 15, 2, where we must supply Tl'i'i, which is sometimes put. b) with bij of the per- son, to go to, come to one, Num. 22, 37, or also in a hostile sense: to go against one 1 Sam. 17, 33 ; with bs? of the place to which one goes Gen. 22, 2 ; ... ^a "rt . . . "bs to proceed from . . . to . . . Ps. 84, 8, comp. Jer. 9, 2. c) with b of the place 1 Sam. 10, 27; 14, 48, or of the person Gen. 24, 56 to go to, towards, seldom in a spiritual sense Is. 60, 3. Quite different from this is the append- ing of a pleonastic dative to 'rfs'n in confidential discourse, e. g. ib Tjb!! Song OF Sol. 4, 6. d) with nS, the same, when the object of going is stated, Gen. 22, 5. e) with b? to go together (prop. to), i. e. to attach oneself to Jer. 3, 18; to go somewhither 2 Sam. 15, 20; to go up, to a place that lies higher Jer. 3, 6 ; to go upon something Judges 5, 10; to be sent over Neh. 6, 17. f) with :? to go in something, to go about. Josh. 5, 6; 1 Kings 18, 5; Lament. 4, 18; to go through Is. 43, 2; to go into something Is. 38, 10; 46, 2 and figurat. 45, 46; to go with something (in the sense of pos- sessing or conveying a thing) Jer. 46, 22; Hos. 5, 6; most frequently in the figurat. sense to live, to walk, to pursue a way of life, where a stands ^before nouns which supply the idea, as "'■' '^'y^/i Dbut. 19, 9, '''1 irij^tia Ez. 5, 6 &c.,' or also in a bad sense lij.'fa Jer. 23, 14; yet the accusative also' stands for this, g) with d5? and "FiN (see D3> and tin) to go with one, i. e. to accompany one Gen. 14, 24; 18,16; 24,58; Ex. 10, 24; Josh. 10, 24; 1 Sam. 30, 22; figurat. therefore with d3> of the person or thing, to make common cause with one or with a thing. Job 31, 5; 34,8; Prov.13,20; tm 'rt 1 Sam. 10, 2, -n8«a r: Jee. 3,_ 1 should be looked upon as an antithesis, h) with 'iseb to go before 2 Sam. 6, 4; Ex. 13, 21. ■'?.?5? "n EccLES. 8, 3 or '? T!?'.? ''^ Judges 6, 21 are regarded as its antithesis, i) with ■'pnis (see ■'pm) to go after, to follow, igisad-ai omam. Gen. 24, 5, in a good sense Jee. 2, 2 or in a bad sense Hos. 2, 15; to strive after'Ez. 33, 31 ; to hunt after Jee. 3, 17. k) with nNp]?b see ns'li?. 1) with ip. of a place or "person, to 'go away (oppo- fn 362 ^bn fiite Nia) 1 Kings 2, 41. — Besides the fundamental signification of "rjbfl with its manifold variations caused by dif- ferent constructions, the following signi- fications should be noticed: 1. to dis- appear, to pass, to retire (cognate in sense Jjbn) Song of Sol. 4, 6 ; 2 Kings 5, 26: my heart did not go away, i. e. 1 remarked. — 2. A kind of auxi- liary verb, expressing the continuance, self- increasing state of the action in- volved in the verb following, in such a manner as this: b'lSI '^ftil ^b;;i Gen. 26, 13, is>si Ti^rt isVfi i Sam'" 6, 12, 'la'iT "^libri O'^ab'h 2 Kings 2, 11, 'rjibn niaj Gen. 8, 3,' or lioni Tlibii i;lri 8, 5^, or ap.)51 ':|bh 1 Sam. 17,41. —^3. 'to s«aZA through, to go along, Ex. 9, 23 ; Ps. 73, 9 ; to press forward with force, of desire (ttJB:) EccLBS. 6, 8. — 4. the imper. with a of motion, iisb, has often the meaning of an interjection, besides that of the imperat. Num. 10, 29, jro to! age! (Greek i&i for ays) Gen. 31, 44; rarely in- stead of it rjb Num. 23, 13, which also stands for the fern, "lib 19, 32, but not for the pi. lib 37, 20'.'— 5. Like a kind of auxiliary verb it has an adjective with it, e. g. 1'11'iy 'i^ Gen. 15, 2; "n Q'^an Ps.l5, 2; Di'i^ '!i Is. 20, 3; 'Tijj 'n Ps'. 42,10. Deriv.'':tb?i, '^•^'h'n, iis-^bln^ "rjbga, comp. !i5b. iVj/. IjbinS 75 2 Chb. 28, 23) to lead, to guide, Zbch. 3, 7, as the Masora understands ; but as elsewhere only'^"'bi!i and'r|ib"'!7 appear in Hifil, the versions take it = fii^bMa , and later authorities = D^sbna. See Tibi. I- T -;r ' ri Hithp. 'Tjbnnrt to walk to and fro for oneself, i. e. to walk for pleasure Gen. 3, 8; to walk about Ps. 35, 14; to go about Ex. 21, 19; to march about Job 1, 7, with a 38, 16, with bj? of the place 18, 8. With 'S ■'JBb to go before, to rule, 1 Sam. 12,2; with "FiiS to have intercourse with one 25, 15; with ^a of the person to go away from Judges 21, 24. Figur. to walk, to live, to lead one's life, as Kal, with a Ps. 26, 3, ■'isb Gen. 17, 1, -riN 5, 22. See Aram. ';|llri ,' Hebr. 'r^Kb , tib-ld , 'Ttb-n, Ttb-UJ. Deriv. nsibHn'. ^bi} m. a way, a journey; concrete a wayfarer 2 Sam. 12, 4; figur. the flow- ing out, of honey, 1 Sam. 14, 26, but in LXX, Vulg. and others as a verb. t^bil (from "rjbin.) Aram. m. a road-tam, a Ps. 106, 5, a Is. 41, 16, or also absol. to be celebrat- ed, praised, Prov. 31, 30. Hence tibnn. The organic root btl, also found in b!TN I. and bfl, exists in its funda- |— T IT mental meaning in the dialects also (Ar. J^, Targ. bp&c). 77(1 II. (Kal not used) intr. to wander here and there, without aim or object, cognate in sense with iiSlU H. and yva, with which latter it is interchanged in 1 Sam. 21, 14 15 16, and therefore iden- tical in its organic root with Ar. Jjo^ (to err, hence JjOI error) and that in bin's. Wandering is an expression for to rave, to indulge fancies, to be mad, metaph. to storm, to rage, of an enemy ; in which sense one might take D''bb'i!l Ps. 5, 6; 73, 3; 75, 5 (parallel D'^yi^'l), and the fut. 5bhn 75, 5. Then it is like bD3, which is originally to waver hither' and thither (= bffls), both being transferred to being foolish (i. e. without steadiness). With bp in this sense is connected hta H. (bbiB TL whence bbiniUN , bbiiij, bb'^ia) aAd'bn H. (bbn II. whence bbin). Poel bbin {fut. bbirr;) to make un- steady or wavering, to mislead, Eccles. 7, 7, comp. ExOD. 23, 8; to confound Job 12, 17; Is. 44, 25; parallel b3D, ■!|^bin bbra. Deriv. n:)bbin. "Poal bbin (only part, bbinjji) to be seized with raving, madness, raging, bbinn an enemy Ps. 102, 9, therefore more than bbin 5, 6; Eccles. 2, 2. Hiihpo. Sbinnn to be mad, to rage, 1 Sam. 21, 14 and he raged, while they tried to hold him with their hands; then to toss to and fro, to reel, of the drunken, bbn 364 nn Jek. 25, 16; 51, 7, along with fflSiinrt; to roll quickly, of cbariots 46, 9 ; Nah. 2, 5 ; figur. to be drunk, mad, 3 with some- thing, Jee.50,38 and they are (as if) drunk with the terror -inspiring images (idols'). Deriv. (according to Saadia) fibfin. psin (rich in praise viz. is God) n. p. m. Jtjdgbs 12, 13. »T'1pb>l an exclamation of praise to God, literally praise ye Jah Ps. 117, 1; 145, 2 ; hence it is frequent as a liturgical exclamation in later Hebrew (Chron., Ezra) and so in the New Testament. D^n I. (not used) inir. to he strong, firm, whose organic root lies .also in db-N, ab-n &c. Deriv. Q'brtl.; comp. Dbn to rtnbriN and Db-i to' ^^i. r T T IT : - r T -.• i DSI n. {fut. B'blni , with sujf. ■'iMblT': paH. pass, filbn) tr. prop, to strike thin, metal plates, since the organic root Db-rt is cognate with that in db"3 to strike down, and the Lat. lam-ina. Hence the word means to strike, to hammer, not with a pointed hut a flat instrument, e. g. ^ys, bilB3 Ps. 74,6, niabrt Judges 5, 26, along with pna, ' 'J^tia ; to stamp , of horses' hoofs 5, 22; , to tread down, vineyards, of an army Is. 16, 8. Pig^rat. to chastise, to punish, Ps. 141,5, Pkov.23, 35, parallel iisrt, IliSitl; to conquer. Is. 28, 1 overcome ly wine, comp. Greek oivonXriKtog. In Qbiii ays Is. 41, 7 dbin is either a participle with the accent drawn hack, which suits the parallelism, or (according to Kimcht) a noun (which see, under dSs). d'bn 1 Sam. 14, 16 is an adverb (which see), like the Ar. ^Isb. Deriv. fTab^M , mabrt , dbiln (which see) and the proper name dSn. ... |.. dbrt Qiammer, of God, comp. Mal- leolus), n. p. m. 1 Che. 7, 35. apn (bp with the adverbial termina- tion Q- , comp. O'Nns, dllibiii, driM; see Fiirst, Lehrgebaude p. 179) adv. 1. hither, after 115S5 1 Sam. 14, 38, Njn 10, 22, :3'n;j5 14, 36, N'^^rt 2 Sam. 7, 18^^ ap; Judges 20, 7, aillj Ps. 73, 10, consequently an- swering to whither? d'b^l d'brt Aa't^er awif thither, as ri3!il !n3rt (2 Kings 2, 8), but only with the omission of the first d'bii. 1 Sam. 14, 16. — 2. hei-e, Gen. 16, 13, answering the question where'? On the termination see d-. Ar, |Vj I out of the organic root !i-nlri, Din; on the contrary, the Ar. t.^^ (to rain continually) is = ^-*^, and has nothing in common with it. According to the Targ. (the LXX and Jewish interpreters in part) ba"!l = b?3 to speak, to chatter, to bustle, which is not so well founded (see rtVpii.). Derivative ^bn adj. m., 'rkp'n, f, see M^Jart. riii'an (from the masc. bfan, see bain) II •. -! ^ it' r t ' f. noise, of the wind Jek. 11, 16; of an army Ez. 1, 24, as 'jiJpn (which see) is used elsewhere. Perhaps the fundamental signification of the organic root b?3"ln as inb?5"5 (which see) is: to assemble, to col- lect, to heap together; whence 'ni>12'n: a heaped mass, a multitude. □DH (perf. resolved Can, "^iaart, Oaain, once "'nfeli; inf. c. tin, with suff'. a^'ri; fut. Dh\ ap. t]n\ with srf. DKlfT' IT ■ ' ' I t' -f^ tit' " I" i : 2 Sam. 22, 15) tr. prop, same as filrt I. to drive, to put into strong motion or haste Is. 28, 28; then to disturb, to terrify, nana Ex. 14, 24, QV 23, 27 , elsewhere enemies Josh. 10, 10; 2 Sam. 22, 15; Ps. 18, 15; to storm, in proper names; figurat. to destroy, to carry of, Jee. 51, 34; Deut. 2, 15; Esth. 9, 24; parallel *lj3N. Deriv. the proper names DaiM, tiWrt. — The connection of Drt and DM I. IT " |- IT with nan or DM II. is douhtful, since here the fundamental signification is to drive, to urge on, which is transferred sometimes to the scattering (of enemies), the discomfiting of them, sometimes to the urging on, instigare, thus cor- responding to the Ar. *^, ^^^ (to impel), *Ls8 (to scatter); while man is onoma- topoeic and allied to the Ar. **♦* (to make a humming noise). Nif. Dins ; on fut. Din;, see Din. jPn I. (not used) tr. same as "jas L to perform the work of an architect , to bring together, to compose; hence the proper name la''n. |Dnn. an eiToneously adopted stem for DSian Ez. 5, 7, see lian. IV : r -: ' ' 'it ?Dn (Pers.; either = |vUi8 celebrated, or as the Sanskrit Heman, the planet Mercury; or perhaps Sam is = Horn, the name of an Ized, as in the proper name Nniisn Zend. ha6m6datai. e^ given by Hom; see 'jain??) n. p. of a Persian minister, an enemy of the Jews Esth. 3,1. "q^Dari see '^"'ian. 'n''jpn (K'tib "^"lian; def. NSiJ- or N3\, Syr. ioi shew- ing the same thing; and^mcAi is wrong in considering the interrog. power in 'Jtji as originating in an omitted interrog. 5- b) a mere conditional conjunct, if, si Ex. 8, 22 ; Lev. 25, 20; Is. 54, 15 ; Jek. 3, 1 ; Job 40, 23; cod. Samar. also Gen. 30, 38, Num. 22, 11 and 23, 20 (Hebrew rtSfl), Deut. 4, 32, and the LXX else- where; often interchanged with DN 2 Chr. 7,13. The same meaning is borne by tiSrt (see the word) which has arisen from it, by the Aram. ');^ (which see) and the Syi-. • f; and there is a manifest connexion between '^rt and QN, without one being able to shew whether this or that was the more original. yr\ (pronominal stem) Aram, same as Hel)rew 1^ H. in aU the three leadmg meanings, viz. 1. as an exclamation: lo! ecce! Dan. 3, 17. In this sense it is prop, nothing but a demonstrative par- ticle, this', that there; hence Ipb on this p]ijn 368 njn account, propterea Dan. 2, 6; 4, 24 (see Hebr. ']'n II.); the meaning but for his sake 2, 30 is conditioned by the pre- ceding negation. — 2. Conjunct, interrog. : whether Ezr. 5, 17. — 3. Like the Hebr. "Irt 3 or dN, a conjunct, condit. if Dan. 2, 5'"6; 3, 15 16 18; 4, 24; 5, 16; Ezr. 5, 26, hence ]^Tb after a negation pre- ceding, unless, nisi Dan. 2, 11; 3, 28; 6, 8, and like DN put twice: be it so ...or so, sive . . . sive Ezr. 7, 26. 5]43n see q^.i and t)^ii. nUil I. as apron. pers. 3 pi. /"., see ')rt I. nun n. (pronominal stem, moulded together out of )'ri here, there, and ns" of motion, or "Vn with n- of direction to- wards; see N3N) an adverb of place and time: 1. hither, either after verbs of motion aii», nbiri, ni, N'^an, mi, or giving verbs the additional idea of motion, as in ^p)2 &c. Gen. 15, 16; 45, 5; Josh. 2, 2; Judges 16, 2; nsm ?13M hither and ifetter 2 Kings 2, 8; !i3rtT ^aa /V-om «Aee AMej- 1 Sam. 20, 21 (opposed to ^'73?3 MNbm); Sisn 15> «Ams far Num. 14, 19 or T : ITT' ' T|" - ' ' of time till now Gen. 15, 16, in which latter sense it has also been moulded together with IS, giving rise to MS'lS'. (which see). — 2. Rejecting the idea of motion: here, in this place (comp. Ar. \lsi. Malt, hyn, hyni &c.) Gen. 21, 23; Map ... n5p here ... there Dan. 12, 5; nspi nap \ere and there 1 Kings 20, 40. (IJjn (pronominal stem moulded to- gether out of ip II. and !i3- =ii5 or fiS", as is still visible in iiSrt Gen. 19, 2; with sm/. of the 1 pers. sing, and pi. ■ijiSfl, <153S7 Josh. 9, 25; in pause issn, I53rt Gen. 22, 1 11; Job 38, 35; in and cut of pause with -« before the accent ■-Wrt, ISSrt Gen. 22, 7; 27, 18; 44, 16; 50, 18; Num. 14, 40; 3 pers. insri Jer. 18, 3 K'tib, but usually iSSi, pi. Dan; 2 pers. |:[3!7, jpawss ^^3n Ps.'l39, 8, fern. "Tjan, /)Z. dj?3fl) prop, a pronoun demonstr. hardened into an adverb, hence 1. there, see there, as originally the Latin en, ecce. Connecting with itself the idea of the verb to be it points to a definite ex- istence or presence, when a definite per- son is spoken of, hence is there, e. g. bns«a ln3in is in the tent Gen. 18,9, where the personality (he, she, they) remains un- expressed; so too 1 Sam. 19, 22, 1 Kings 21, 18; when past is spoken of it means was or were there 2 Kings 6, 20. In the case of irt the reference is sometimes presupposed Gen. 11, 6. In poetical language it is put alone, without nearer notification, e. g. MSJi there is [he) i. e. the well-known one Job 9, 19. — 2. Since the idea of a verb is in some way con- nected with TiHn, the circumstance ad- mits of explanation that the personality concerned in the action however feeble, is subordinated to the word as a sort of accusative, e. g. I33lrj en eum! which may be converted into the expression of a verb involving the notion of being, as there he is. rtBfi with the suffix is to be explained in this way, as is the case with ilji and T'N but especially with the iJs* — ^" ^'i^t'j^i' '9^^ immediately or not before participles, it gives to the tense involved in the participle a certain demonstrative liveliness, where we might take it simply for an interjection behold! This is particularly the case when the participle expresses the present (prae- sens relativum) Gen. 27,42, Jer. 16, 12, more rarely when it expresses the future (fut. relat.) Gen. 6,17 or the past (praet. relat.) Gen. 41, 17. Here Msn denotes merely existence, as in signification 1, without giving the person as the sub- ject of the clause, since that is made known in what goes before, e. g. 'niS'ii !i3p Amos 7, 1 behold (he) formed. Seldom does the subject follow 7, 1; Ez. 37, 19. More commonly nsrt has the subject in the suffix with itself, when it is joined to the perfect Is. 28, 16; Jek. 3, 22 (7, 11 is an exception). — 4. It is a mere exclamation, lo! like ]!7t in lively dis- course Gen. 20, 15, in exhortations Ps; 134, 1, as a peculiar part of a sentence Jer. 23, 30; after iibn Hab. 2, 13 ; 2 Che. 25, 26. — 5- = IP with the meaning if. Lev. 13, 6. nnjn 369 njDH nnsn. (prop. inf. Hif. of tis) f. per- mission of rest, ease Esth. 2, 18, by which the LXX and Targ. understand remission of tribute. IT'Sn see nii. n^aSl Zech. 5, 11 see ms. obSl (same as dbn gratiosus, from •jn; or equivalent to D5"'ti endowed with goods, rich, from ^5!i) proper name of a man whose son or sons (ipa or ']'£) pos- sessed the valley on the south eastern side of Jerusalem Josh. 15,8, 2 Kings 23, 10 K'tib, which perhaps had already belonged to Hinnom, himself; there- fore niin-\!| Josh. 15, 8 : 18, 16. When this valley, whose western part was called N?3'5 b'ip.r! (field of blood), subse- quently became the burning-place (ris'ri) where children were sacrificed to Moloch (see ''l), the signification of to lament or whine (from yiri which see) may have been thought of as lying in D5n. pn (not used) intr. to lament, to whine, = V-Sf, !^-5^« I, Ar.-^t, ^. See Dbrt. J7jn (not used) intr. to sink, to be low, of ground, conseq. =5*33, Arab. «ij6. Derivative SSn (low ground) n. p. of a territory subdued by the Assyrians, mentioned along with D^l'iBD and nw 2 Kings 18, 34; 19, 13; is.'sV, 13; and as D^l'lBD was the province of Sipphara (see Ptol. 5, 18, 7) situated in the most southerly part of Mesopotamia not far from Ba- bylon, and mV is certainly identical with NW (2 Kings 17, 24 31) whence colonists were transplanted to Samaria, and the place must also be looked for near tini3, S'irt appears to have been at the lower Euphrates. The people in Hend^ may have been a Phenician race (SSr: from Wn = WS Xva, a name of Phenicia and of the Phenician pro- genitor), as those of M with the fi''W, who dwelt in pastoral villages as far as Gaza (Dbut. 2, 23) and were mixed with the Philistines generally (Josh. 13, 3), were perhaps one people; a fact which explains how it is that Ezekiel 16,29 and 17,4 calls Chaldea an 1?,^? V^N ; and how old accounts (Herod. 1, 1; 7, 89; Just. 18, 3) speak of Phe- nicians at the Persian gulf. In the city XjLft (!A.nah) at a ford of the Euphrates, the name may be still preserved. nS3>l (infin. Hif of :]!|3 , then a noun, like ilflSrt) Jl'nSll) /■ o. shaking, shaking about, a sieve. Is. 30, 28. PB^n Ex. 20, 25 see CilJ. ■jJISn Jer. 32, 4 see IpS. Dn {pause Dfl) inter j. hist! hush! a call for reverential or any other kind of silence (according to Parchon), ono- matopoeic (like the Ar. «-o) Judges 3, 19, Hab. 2, 20, with ijSM of a person, following Zeph. 1, 7, Zech. 2, 17; as an adverb in silence, silently Am. 8, 3. It was not till late that a plural of it l&fl was formed, as if it belonged to an im- perative Neh. 8, 11. In the same man- ner, from an Arabic word *Jj6 corre- sponding to d'b5 (which see) was formed a plural Sy^JJ^. From this then the verb 'rto'n would be developed. Ac- cording to Eimchi Drt belongs to the Hhel of ilDln (which see). nOn (Kal unused) intrans. same as IWn to rest, to be silent; Ar. fjuSb to speak softly, secretly; redupl. yii gmff. Hence according to Eimchi: Pih. tlSJl, only in imper. Drt, pi. Ibut also "TjisrtN Zbph. 3, 9) tr. same as TjSN (which see), TjiN (which see), 1. to turn, to turn about, e. g. t\'iy Josh. 7, 8, with''5sb of the person; to change S3ffl?2 (a s/c^ mare's bed) Ps. 41, 4 i. e. to re- store to health; to turn over, US* Hos. 7, 8; to invert, T^, as a sign of wheeling about 1 Kings 22, 34, but T^ ri also in IT T the sense of always to turn the punish- ment, i. e. to renew it Lament. 3, 3; to direct, tV(-\ Ex. 10, 19 ; also intr. to turn oneself, to turn about, when no object stands with the verb 2 Ejngs 5, 26. With regard to the construction, it should be remarked: it occurs with biS of the person and accusative of the thing, Zbph. 3, 9 for then I turn to the people (the language) into a pure lip; with bsa from whence 2 Kjngs 5, 26; with b to turn into Ps. 66, 6, or with the accusative Lev. 13, 3; with the ac- cusat. to overturn, a chariot Hag. 2,22; !ibs>ab "n Judges 7, 13 to overthrow up- T : I- : T ' ^ wards, to tumble over. — 2. to destroy, Qi'i^ Deut. 29, 22, 2 Sam. 20, 3, Jee. 20', i6, with a partitive. Dpi ''n?!?!? ^ 4, 11 I have destroyed among you (i. e. among your cities); d''1rt Job 9,5; yiN 2 Sam. 10, 8 ; to overthrow, QiyiU'l Pbo'v. 7 7 7 J- T . - 12, 7. — 3. to pervert, to turn away, words, i. e. to lie, Jer. 23, 36; to act with moral perversity (see 'HSh), to act crookedly i. e. foolishly, deceitfully (see nsEt^n), Deriv. ^sii, 'rjsrr., ^ep, ^Dh, "iVj/.TlBW (3 fern. ilMrti; 3 pi. ttSW and 13S!-IS; infin. abs. '^'iBrtS.; fut. "^sW^ij 1. to turn oneself, with 5N . . . ^H from ...to Ez. 4, 8, or absolutely Ps. 78, 57, i. e. to bend sidewards, to flee, to turn about, with bN of the person Josh. 8, 20; but with a of the person to turn against one Job 19, 19; with bs or b to turn to one Is. 60, 5, Lament. 5, 2; of ab , to writhe, with pain, with 'B a'n)5 a .1, 20, or b? of the person Hos.' 11^ 8; to turn themselves, with b? upon one 1 Sam. 4, 19; to be changed Job 20, 14, with b into something Ex.7, 15, seldom with the accusative Lev. 13, 25, or with b . . . I?? EsTH. 9, 22 , or also with b of the pers. in whom something is changed, Dan. 10, 8. — 2. to be overturned i. e. destroyed JoN. 3, 4; Job 28, 5. — S.Fi- gurat. to lie, fallj to be changed with the tongue, Pkov. 17, 20, as in Arabic. Pih. (redupl.) '^SSSln (not used) to act very perversely, very crookedly, whence the adj. "^BSsn. Hif. 'T|''Et7!i (not used) an intensive form of Kal, whence rtSSrtM; but also 7 1^ .... 7 to make crooked, to turn aside, the body ; to cross, i. e. to fetter crosswise by shutting up in a wooden frame. Deriv. nasiia. Hof. IjSfltn to be turned, to be preci- pitated, with by upon Job 30, 15. Hithp. "TjEiinrt to turn oneself (of a brandishing, glittering sword) Gen. 3, 24; to wind (in circles), to move about (of a cloud) Job 37, 12; to be turned, changed 38, 14; to turn or roll oneself about, to tumble,'b'h'S, Judges 7,13; and also according to the derivative (iiSSlnn) to shew oneself perverse. The fundamental signification is more or less modified in the Ar. liLsl and viLftSB (see 'rjBN and 'rjBrt) ; and the two forms are also found in Aramaean. The Ar. (^JjI to turn oneself, to give way, to flee, ;^5 to perish, Hebrew 'Tjas (which see), are connected with it. The organic root is TiB-lrt. 'r T tlSln adj. m. see 'rjslDBlnt. "nSn m. the reverse, the contrary, Ez. 16, 34! TlSn m. the same, Ez. 16, 34. 'nSn (with suff. dSSBrt) m. perverse ness, Is. 29,16 your perverseness! comp Ar. ^iXJuJi the same. inSBri (after the form MbT5) f. over- IT .. -; ^ IT" :' throw, destruction, desolation. Gen. 1&, 29 ; according to the Sam. cod. perverse- ness = iiSBrtn , reading niSBrt in Deut. IDSDH 371 -in 32, 20, but it has nasg (which see) in the first signification Gen. 19, 29. "r^BSDn, (adj. redupl. from ':|Srt) adj. m. very crooked, perverse, turned, Peov. 21, 8, opposite to 'nili'^, cognate in sense with bpbP5>.. DJjn (Assyrian) n. p. f. name of a queen of Assyria, as even Samuel ha- Nagid (in the 11"" century) says: asn fisb'art di25, and as Kimchi has under- stood the word (in his Dictionary). Nah. 2, 8 andHuzzab is taken, is carried away. The proper name is probably compound- ed oiHuzz (Pers. (J«j-&' heautifut) and ah (Pers. lol splendour), signifyilig beauti- fully beaming, chush and ab being applied elsewhere in Aryan proper names. nbsn (inf. Hif. of baa) f. deliverance, EsTH. 4, 14. ?yn (not used) intrans. to be sharp, pointed, of a cutting or sharp weapon, hence "jah. The organic root is "l^-rt, which is also found in 1^ (which see) belonging to 1"'i5t and tiSS I., and in ■jlU. In Arabic the stems "% ■■•'^ , ^yas>. have the same meaning, as also the Targ. ■jan, whence ^^.-uaik, Targ. NS'ian an axe, a battle-axe, i^v^^ weapon of de- fence; even the Greek a^ivij may have come from the Phenician Ni'^^rt, since it has no suitable etymology in Greek. The inorganic fi may also at an early period have been sounded n, since the noun is also read in mss. ']^h. ■jSil m. a iattle-axe, Ez. 23, 24, as the Targ., Kimchi, and others under- stand it; see 'jKfl. "iJn (from 'Tnii; with the article 'ifiln, r ^ r T ' IT T ' with a of motion !m!i, and with the T IV ' addition of the article iTniiln; constr.'^'n, but with suff. illrt and'-'''n'nn, Q^in 'in II |. ,_. I- : -' lT-:i- a resolved form; pi. Q"''lrt, with article di'nnrt, constr. •^'in, -miiluff. iirt, rin, and also resolved constr. illln, with suif. l"-:r ' *' !T''l'l5) 1. m. a mountain, a hill, in the widest usage JEa.16,16; described more exactly by adjectives: t\hs, Is. 30, 25, rtSl^S 13, 2, or by nouns: 'n^5£)2 "r\ Ps. 42,7, f35.i 'n 68,17. Applied to 1p are: ns)? Josh. 18, 16, uSs^S Jtjd&es 16,''3, lit 1 Sam. 23, 26, inD 25, 20, »bi! 2 Sam. 16, 13 &c.; and it is mentioned along with rtsaa Is. 40, 4, nbsia Josh. 9, 1 &c. In connection with I'^i or Q''?l'bN (God's mountain) it is Sinai or Horeb Ex. 3,1; 4, 27; 18, 5; 1 Kings 19, 8; also ■nlirr alone Ex. 19, 2. i'^ I'Tirt or I'lrt are tAe ' I" : - 1" T moMrato'ras of Judea Is. 14, 25; 49, 11-, Zech. 14, 9; 'iln alone is Zion or the temple-mountain Dbut. 33, 19, Ps. 78, 54, in full form <'' n-'a 'nrt Is. 2, 2, n^ari "nrt Jbe. 26, 18, d-ih'^N izSlj? 'rt Ez. 28, 14; tti'ij? with a suffix accompanies the noun in Ps. 2, 6. Very often is the name of the mountain, or that of the country in which it is, or its plantation (see Q'^nij) added, e.g-isbaii, •'5''D, Di^55>ln, VsiiJ, '''n^itjtin, ITOItt &0.; and Irtln is appended only to the proper name "ih. IS ^n Hab. 3, 6, ti'ip.""''n'n!n Dbut. 33, 15 mountains of past time, i. e. belonging to the first creation, primitive mountains; f|bN ''p,'^^I maintains of thousands (of animals) Ps. 50,10; ri^a "r\ 76, 5 mountains of prey i. e. Aeops o/ Jooiy; "niafi ^^t Song op Sol. 4, 6 heap of myrrh, a figure of enjoyment; "ina I'nii 2,17 mountains cleft i. e. full of fissures; tJ^aiU!? ^pli 8, 14 spicy mountains; tjUJi I'nn Jer. 13, 16 night-mountains i. e. which being covered by night are not accessible, and so the figure implies insurmountable obstacles ; di'iaJ I'n'i!! see ia3. — 2. Figuratively difficulty, hindrance, i. e. hostile power Zech. 4, 7 (comp. Is. 40, 4; 49, 11), hence according to the Targ. the Per- sian kingdom, as 'lil in Jer. 51, 25 means Babylon, a mighty kingdom, which, in its character as a desolator of countries, is called 11101155311 "lil, as elsewhere a /Jre- vomiting mountain is termed HD'llB IJi 51, 25 a burning mountain i. e. a burnt volcano, which is called nififflMrt "irt as being stiU penetrated by fire. — 3. mountain-district Josh. 14, 12; 17, 16 18, hence 1!lM the hill country, of cen- tral Palestine ISen. 12, 8; Deut. 3, 25; of the territory of Judah, as that which 24* nn 372 Ji"in once belonged to the Amorites Num. 13, 29 ; of the mountainous district on the east of the Dead Sea Gen. 14, 10; par- ticularly in association with the names of the territories JTiin"', T'S'ia, ''ifaN, Wi), Q'^ISN &c. With regard to moun- tains, countries, cities or districts whose names are preceded by 1'n or '''ifi, see Jiias, •''ifeN, D'jpSN, bN-n-'a, nbs'a, pbn, a'n'h" liain, o^n, "mirl"', dni\ ' IT T ' i" ' ' I :■••' V11-' JT :' it:' Q^'iai!". ^i'?*. pfe! pa?!. I^V?. ^^?. a-'S-ns, Ti;i5?. l^aV^, t=':;iM2t, li^ais, *Ti5>to, lian. r •• ' IT The noun, of which a form 'nh also existed, comes from a stem 1!i Jo 5« high, to be elevated, to project (cognate rt-'lil); and the idea of the noun is therefore prop, a height, found also in oQ-og, ovQ-avog (height, heaven) &c. "lin (an old form for "/rt; on the con- trary I'l't'n Gen. 49, 26 is not, as the LXX and cod. Samar. [and so too Sa- muel ben Mi'ir or Eashbam] take it, from 1i!i = "irt, but from D'^'nirt belonging to !Tnrt; mountain) n. p. 1. of a mountain in the south east of Palestine (where Aaron died Num. 20, 22; 33, 38 &c.), at whose base lies the city of S>bD i. e. Petra ('K^, oQog iv ^ rslsvtu 'AaQom, nX^- aiov IlitQag noXgmg, Eus.), now called ^j^^\jb ^ Ju£^ (G'ibl Nabi HSiiin) {Burchh. 11. p. 715-16) distant a day and half's journey from the southern point of the Dead Sea. — 2. of a north- eastern branch of Lebanon, at the nor- thern boundary of Palestine Num. 34, 7 8, by which the Talmud (Gittin 8) un- derstands the mountain WMN, Isaac ITT-:' Parchi the Ar. sOI ^^^y^\, which is directly over against ran. The cities rras Josh. 19,30, now jvlc, and S'in'n in Asher 19, 28, now w^^s, lie at the north-east of this mountain, a short distance from it, which suits the con- text. Kin (mountain-land) n.p. for northern Media the great , belonging to Assyria, which is a mountainous district (in Ar. called Juil el-Gibl, in Pers. ^^Lx****^ KuMstan, also ^.♦^SV.elt i^|t* ■^''^* «^ 'Agmi) 1 Che. 5, 26; in the parallel passage 2 Kings 17, 6 it is therefore more definitely described by ."'jia "'pS. The Talmud (Kidd. 72 »; Jebam. 17 «) understands by it Hamadan and the lo- calities near (tl'^niiani TjTMin) or Neha- wand ('iii!i3). The original significa- tion of Nirt as an extra-Semitie word was Arya, as Media was anciently called (Herod. 7, 62) ; but the Hebrews thought oflrt. Se ?^in (not used) intr. to glow, to bum, same as N1N (which see) and JlT' 11. ITT ^ ' ITT (which see), Ar. ^5« I &c. Deriv. bslrt. Nin see bsiil. ' ■•• I-.- I" : - bNIM (from acn with the termina- tion el) m. hearth, fire-place, hence the name of an altar Ez. 43, 15, called elsewhere b'^N'iN (which see) K'tib, and bN'ii? (which! see) K'ri. Jin (fut. 5*151) if- to kill, to murder, prop, to invade one in a hostile man- ner, to pierce, in or out of war Gen. 4, 8; Is. 10, 4; by the sword Am. 9, 4; by other weapons 2 Sam. 23, 21 (cog- nate in sense nJfn); by the bite of a serpent Job 20,16; by grief 5, 2, pesti- lence Jee. 18, 21 &c.; but always by violence; rT"??!! stands instead of it but seldom. Sometimes generally, to destroy. Is. 14, 30, along with laN Esth. 9, 6. Usually construed with accusat. Judges 9, 24, seldom with b of the ob- ject 2 Sam. 3, 30; Job 5, 2; with a, to slaughter among ... 2 Che. 28, 9. Spoken of beasts Lev. 20, 15 it also means to slaughter. Is. 22, 13; of plants, to destroy Ps. 78, 47, like DTO Job 14, 8; in a figurative sense Lament. 2, 4. Deriv. ain, min. viv' IT"-: Nif. i^Tli (inf. constr. with a: aiHa = anfipa; fut. i'lJl';, 3 impf. fem. plur. JlSSIrtFi) pass, to be Jdlled, slain Ez. 26, 6 ; Lament. 2, 20. Puk. sph pass, the same, Is. 27, 7. The stem is = Ar. djs* (to pierce, to nn 373 cnn violate), wtile ^yS^ (murderously to rebel) has a special meaning, though it also has that of to kill; comp. the Gothic vrik-a.n ^to push), Lat. urg-eie (to press). The org. root is S1"fl, being also in the Tarff. aT3, whence sa'iJ an axe, Zab. " r !' IT :v w >-^t^ Mars, Arab, i-wo, whence ^y Mars. ^ ^ '' 3i'in m. a killing, slaughter, choking, Is. 27'; 7; Ez. 26, 15; Ai. JJ)> death- stroke. ^^ il3i"in Z'. slaughter, killing, strangula- VP> r?--?, or?' n"7' r-"^ ^t'? ^"^ In its application: to pull down, with accus. of the object naTM Judges 6, 25, '!■>;? Ez. 13, 14, a-i 16/39, b^^aa 26, 4, UMin 26, 12, laa'a Mic. 5, l6', T'y Is. 14, 17; or absoh 'Jer. 1, 10; 24, 6; 31, 28 ; 45, 4 ; Mai. 1,4; Job 12,14; coupled with niaNrt, vna (uSns), a-iinri and in |-v:lv' ' i-T ■» i-t" r:;:K opposition to Insa, baH; sometimes to de- stroy, to annihilate, figurat. to scatter: "rt yy^ to destroy a kingdom Pro v. 29, 4; WiVi fl to break the teeth Ps. 58, 7; "n Ta^isn to tear away from a station Is. 22, 19; bt« "n to break through to one, i. e. to press forcibly toward one Ex. 19,21 24. Deriv. rtDiIrt, mD". See D-iri. Nif Dlrti (fut. dnrt;;) pass, to be torn down, li-rPROv. 24,31, rtttin Jer. 50, 15, niaraM Jo. 1, 17, lio'-i Ez. 30, 4; figurat. nilS Ps. 11, 3; niOlrtS destroyed places Ez. 36, 35 36, cognate in sense ni'H'iBS. PtA. aiti a little stronger meaning than that of Kal Exod. 23, 24; Is. 49, 17. D"l?1 m. prop, a tearing in pieces (from Dlln, see Kal), concrete a lion, Dlrtrt T'S? Is. 19, 18 lion-city, the name of Leontopolis in Egypt. The singular expression seems to be selected for its ambiguity, in order to have another meaning connected with it. The LXX render "n'n T'S by nohi; (plSrt) aae- Sex, city of salvation, the Peshito abides by vMjoi, which is explained p-ojas (re- demption, deliverance), and so agreeing with the LXX (from &1!i to tear out, to deliver, comp. bss). The Targ. has another collateral sense, viz. "n destruc- tion, referring to Jer. 23, 13. There is nin 375 brin also a reading D'lti, meaning Helio- polis. "1*in I. (i. 6. Irt; not used) intr. to ie Af^iA, to be elevated, se efferre, prop, to rise up, to project, to be prominent, Ar. -S5 , hence " horruit " ; deriv. 'nfi , 'nti , Tin, ihn. Metaph. «o Je firm, strong, (see a^N, Sin); comp. n^n. "I^in n. (not used) tr. same as IIN r T ^ '" "^ GO ^ l- d'^^rSl.) adject, m. mocked, derided; see fi^Vri!^.- B''321iri (the adject, bnrt become an abstract noun) m. pi. mocMngs, derisions, Job 17, 2. The doubling of the third radical sound is irequent in this forma- tion. nbjiil see brrt. I : I- •• r T dPin see Dan. I" - r T nnn i. e. nsi belonging to Pihel rnin, see niln. 1 ), called in (or ri, iNl), Faa, as a letter signifies a joegf, nail, hook, because, as is alleged, the sign of the letter is like that figure in ancient writing, as may still be seen from the Phenician. The same is the case even in the square character. But the choice of the name was not made on account of resemblance of the sign to the object, but because of the initial sound, which holds good in the ease of the rest of the alphabet. In the Semitic alphabet Van was the sixth letter; and as the sixth it came to the Greeks from the Phenicians under the name Bav {F). The Greeks, how- ever, excluded it afterwards from the list of letters, but retained it as imatj- (lov Bav in denoting the number 6; while it also continued as the Aeolio digamma (F). It came to the Latins as F. 1 is 6 as a numeral; i is 6000; its sound was vd. With regard to the essential nature of the sound, it was originally a semi- vowel like Yod, whence it is connected with u. Before the introduction of the vowel signs i constantly stands for the extended and longer u and o, 1. where two vowels come together, e. g. "'lii hdi, '''hi galAi. — 2. after a short or long a, with which it forms a kind of diph- thong, conseq. for au, e. g. pin chauran, whence choran. — 3. at a later period the short u also began to be expressed by it, e. g, tlblS kullam Jee. 31, 34, niin hukka Ps. 102, 5, n'>ito'' Jechonya Jee. 27, 20, d''3airt hobnim Ez. 27, 15, JliilN oniyya 2 Che. 8, 18 &c., where, however, the K'ri endeavoured for the most part, to obliterate it. — 4. for the long 6 in forms like Vna, ^m; in later writing still more elongated, e. g. ms, 1in Ps. 72, 14. — 5. for u in an ac- cented syllable at the end, for example liW Job 1, 7, ains katub, biai dagtil; but this was often altered when it ceased to be a final syllable, or when the vowel- signs were afterwards introduced. — 6. at the close of a word for it or 6, i. e. lans, liMB, lii, n^a, is, but also interchanged with M when it represents 6, e. g. iiabia, TiS^Q; rarely N is put after the 1 as o or u, e. g. NiS'^ Eze. 3, 7, Niia^i, NTi5» Zech. 1, 1, Nnsbrt; but n precedes it distinctly when T makes the beginning of the syllable, e. g. in, 'mN, seldom in the middle, as Itui nod Judges 4, 19, 1n:i"ii vayyaiS 2 Kings 14, 13 for li-^l, ■i!T'i25nN'' Jee. 27, 1, ms'ip Frot. 1 as the prefixed conjunction m (and) con- tinues to be written only by 1, e. g. fT^il. — 7. Where n was to be written as a consonant and a vowel in succes- sion, the vowel only was written, e. g. nnnizj-'i 1 Kings 9, 9 for nnniaii. — After vowel -points were introduced, a point was put over 1 for 6 (i); to denote m, the point was put into the middle of the vowel-letter i (i); and the sign - was placed only where a Vau did not stand for u, which sign, there- fore, is interchanged with 1, e. g. "^bt and ibiN Gen. 24, 5 39. The following have still to be no- ted in connexion with the vowel 1. 1. When i follows, it attracts the i intO' 1 377 1 itself, e. g. piin from huinak, but i re- mains in an accented syllable, e. g. ">lto3> 'astii. — 2. with a preceding (a + u) it melts into i , e.g. inan? from ki'tabtd-ii. There are only a few exceptions to this, as pin. But 1 becomes a consonant, when the mixed sound at (i^ precedes, which becomes a, e. s. in the suffix T^- out of am; or in certain noun-forms, e. g. HTO out of ma-Mi, to distinguish them from the construct state_ (nijp), though the language gives the contracted forms more freq^uently, e. g. bip , T^to, tlifl and others ; or when 1 is the third radical sound, e. g. inD, to which, however, there are excep- tions, e. g. i'''!. — 3. After i preceding, T passes into the consonant v, e. g. T^ninS), T^B, T^aN, though the language rather avoids this change. The same happens with d following, e. g. f^^^^; but not with a, e. g. Diari3 out of kHahu-am. ' ° it: As a middle sound, T has a twofold nature. It is either a labial, and so softer than a, B; or it is a hardened vowel u. In the former case 1 is interchanged a) with a, e. g. LH and SJi ; biN and b^N ; ms and tiSN ; Aram, bli and Hebr. bas ; IT T IT T ' r : r T ' taay Ar. yo*^ (to supply the place of) ; b) with D, e. s. rtib and !iDb; and con- ' ' ° ITT ITt' sequently c) with a, e. g. "Jl.J'HN and lasiN, Aram, ttan and ttin. 'ITT : -' r ; r : The fact of the laws of "i and i as vowel letters being similar, both being alike weak and liq[uid, has given rise to their frec[uent interchange in the formation of roots and stems , e. s:. lr\T\ ' " IT T and iVn, tiin and JT^rt; iT'nji spot Lev. IT T ' IT T IT T ' IT : ' ■* 13, 10 24 from TnU to declare; n. p. bs'^ina and bN'^na. Hence it comes to i"T I : r'T ■ : pass that roots or stems ending with the sounds i and u, which must have been ori- ginally different, are abeady fused into one another completely, i. e. the final i-Bound prevailed in flexion; and i has been preserved only in nbi», 15S», in order to distinguish the stem from MbuJ to draw out, i35> to point out. The same is the case at the beginning of stems and roots, where the language had stems and roots with the primitive initial Vau, and dis- tinguished them from those beginning with Tod; the Yod not becoming pre- valent, instead of the 1, till a later period, e. g. i;] wine, bsi I. (bxis), biS 1 n. (b"'Nin), mn (Wirt), nn, (n;iir7),' nai (nsii), lbl (ibii), b?; (b-'yirt), which have interchanged their initial 1 with Yod. 1 at the beginning has continued only in some remains, viz. in ibl Gen. 11, ' ITT ^ 30, 1T1 Prov. 21, 8, n, and in some ' ITT ' ' it' proper names Stll, pT, STi?], "isioi, ■'Don &e. where much is still doubtful. r :t In the formation of stems, we have to distinguish, the beginning, middle, and end with respect to 1. 1. At the beginning of a stem the language, as has been mentioned, avoided Vau, and where 1 was necessary as the first radical sound, it always passed over into ■', appearing again in flexion where it has not to stand at the commencement. — 2. In the middle of stems, such only have 1 in which the letter is wholly a consonant, e.g. 5»i.!i, biN, bl3>, "nti, ms, mn, ma, mb, tlip; on the other hand ITT' ITr' ITT,? IT't ' the so-called 15> are nothing but simple monosyllabic stems with the medialsound a, as follows from a strict historical and analytic examination, the fact being con- firmed by flexion and comparative phi- lology. -\ medial as a consonant, like all labial sounds, may become so weak and liquid that nothing more remains of them than the a-sound connected with them, e. g. W'n and rTi, 5>iTa and 5>ffl; TjaiB and '^to, ban and bn' baiJ and bS, pan I jt' r T it' r T it' ' r t and pn; isn and in, nsa and nu, ' it ' I-T (T ' I- T it ' nsizS and nia. It has been preserved I- t it '^ somewhat oftener in N, e. s. ilN5 and ' O ITT ms, rtNFi and mn &c. But the old ITT ' IT T . 'T T custom of looking upon concave stems or such as have a for the middle sound as 15>, makes it necessary to put them in the dictionaries as IS. — 3. At the end of stems, Vau has always the power of a consonant. — 4. When 1 as a con- sonantforms the middle sound, the Arabic has the w-sound at the beginning; comp. ^^.^r\, Hiit, Mib. See mb5>. IT T ' IT T ' ITT IT : - 1 is the conjunction" and" before Sheva or labial sounds, and it only appears as W in the word iiMINM. See X 378 sm 1 see 1. '1 (5 with Dagesh following) is pro- perly the strongly uniting Vau with the fat. (imperf.) ; 1 on the contrary appearing with the perfect. A simple action is put by it into a certain state of dependence, i. e. it does not alter the time, but it develops it farther; hence the name Vau conversive ('^ISSiii n) is unsuitable. Ety- mologically, it is natural to seek no other origin for it than it is for the con- junction 1. See the grammars, ) (before Sheva or a labial 1; when the accented syllable follows immedia- tely, i) the conjunction "and" uniting words and clauses. But it also signifies with, and indeed, and yet. Generally it has many meanings, according as it is explanatory, adversative &c. , according to its position before clauses which in- volve the cause, the consequence, the aim &c. On its application and mean- ings see the Syntax. The conjunctive Vau was pronounced u, like the 5 in the vulgar Arabic. — As to the proper origin of T (u«), it is partly connected with S]N ("'SN;) and therefore with the At. o (see tjN), as tjN . . . t|N Is. 46, 11 is identical with I ... I 38, 15 ; partly with IN (in), which still means "and" in nJiiNM (from Irra in na), as ■!}<... IN whether ...or Lev. 5,21 is = 1 ... 1 Prov. 29, 9, and like IN generafly is inter- changed with 1 Num. 5, 14, being like T in its fundamental signification. It includes in itself, therefore, the Ar. Z and o; and the numerous senses may be explained by the union of the signi- fications of both. In no case should it be referred to a noun-stem (li which see), at most perhaps to the organic root «i II. (which see); but the fundamental signification is to be sought partly in the pronominal stem is or IN (which see), partly in the pronominal stem tjN (which see), is or tis (in i«S''N, nisn, 'isn), as -also in the Latin we.' ^) I. (pronominal stem) see N1M. 5^1 n. (not used) is the simple organic root for the reduplicated stem n (from NINI, whence the noun li), to rivet to- IT t' " 1 i gather, to hook together; comp. the Ar. ^U (prop, to bring together, to unite; conj. VI. to collect) and ^<-e;) where the same fundamental signification should be adopted ; Sanskrit wi (see Pott, etym. Forschungen I. 230. 259), Latin vi-eie, «2-men &c. In no case can one put it along with 1T15> (Ewald, ausfiihrl. Lehrb. d.hebr.Sprache §. 117). Perhaps the con- necting 1 may have arisen from this simple root, prop. »a (= Lat. que, ve; Copt. Re) union, addition. bi^l I. belonging to iVi/.VNii seebNJ I. ?i^1 n. belonging to Hif. b"'Nin see ?!31 belonging to Hif. b'':jiin see ba\ ti/51 belonging to Hif. UJiiiH see ©3"'. nJI belonging to Hif. rwh see na\ i^Tj Aram, belonging to Af. N'i'iti see N1\ jt: mj belonging to Hif. iTiin, Hithp. irmnin, see iTTi II. IT- : ■ ' ITT pi n. p. Ez. 27, 19 according to Michaelis same as iott>U i- e. ^L;(>L two rivers, and then the name of a city of Arabia, as G'obla in Arabia was also called city of the two rivers; but probably 1 in the passage referred to is the conjunction 1 and T^ = TTl , see ^Tl ; or it is abridged fi-om pS '^Aden, where commerce was carried on, according to Edrisi. S?11 belonging to Nif. snii, Hif. Tfm, Hof. S'Vfn, Hithp. 5»pnS7, see Si;, yil Aram, see 5>'T'. r: it: jnT n. p. of a place on the border of the Amorite and Moabite terri- tories, where Israel conquered in battle Num. 21, 14, as Ibn Gfandch, Parchon, Ibn Esra, Kimchi and others understand )) 379 pi it. This Vakeb was situated in tiBID IT which is as little known as the former, both being found in no other place than the fragment belonging to an old song of the lost ^^ ni'pD.ba Isp, which be- gins with accusatives. The reading of the Targ. ^atl'^riN (to be given, delivered) which Kimchi found in mss.; and the taking of tlSlD as = CjlD &^; the trans- lation of Bashi artj ('nffli*) -nij, and that of the Peshito atib'fi^ ; the opinion of others that it is a proper name =!n3na 21, 18: — are aU adverse to sober cri- ticism. n (reduplicated from Sin. which see) tr. to unite, to rivet; derivative 11 (plur. O^yi, constr. ''11, with sufflw drt'^ll) m. a hook, nail, which rivets or holds fast something, found only in Ex. ch. 22. 26. 27. 36. 38. It is a very old word that goes beyond the invention of the art of writing (see l). Vil belonging to yil see y\\ 'y\'] (an adopted stem for 1T1 Pkov. 21, 8; not used) intr. to bear (a burden), hence figurat. to sin, to be laden with guilt (comp. fiS bao Is. 53, 11, 'i> nas Ps. 38, 4); At. »Vj (to bear a burden), whence /-;Si (vizier, prop, bearer of a burden i. e. of an employment; comp. bajulus in the mediaeval period, out of which came baillif, Ital. bailo, French charge d'affaires) and figur. ^vi (to sin, to be laden with guilt), the noun \\y (burden and guilt, crime). Deriv. 'ITI. — The organic root Ifl may be con- nected with that in 3>'nT 11. (whence ^ht). 1T1 in. guilt, crime, hence 'ItI ffl"'N Prov. 21, 8 man of guilt, opposed to TJT the pure; like the adject. 'TJBiDrt and the opposite 'ittji in the same passage. But since the sense and context alone could justify this acceptation; since Hebrew usus loguendi and the absence of all reason for applying such an unhebrew word are repugnant; Jewish interpreters have classed it with IT. bnj belonging to Nif. bpiS, Hif. binirt, see 'bn\ NDT'^I (old Persian, either worthy of reverence, from the Persian t> jj , or pure from the Persian » is . prop, white; more probably from the Zend, vahja better, very good, an epithet of Ized haoma, and from zata born, hence born of Ized Haoma) n. p. m. Esth. 9, 9. See Stem and Benfey, iiber dieMonatsnamen&c. p. 199. PS] belonging to Nif nsii, Hif nisiin, Hof. nsin, mthp. nsinri, see n3\ r T l?! see lb\ 151 m. a child, offspring Gen. 11, 30. lbl m. the same, 2 Sam. 6, 23 K'ri. T]?! belonging io Hif .^'h'U see 'r^\ nJI I. belonging to Hif. HSlrt, see ITT W I. nJI n. (not used) intr. to be weak, ITT > tame (Ax. (cJpi which has been assumed as a stem for flDIi ; but probably = Sir II. (whence M3i"'), prop, to coo, then to sing, to praise, generally identical with nss n. as is nS"' I. with ™5> I. Deriv. ITT ITT ITT n'^DI (from JTiSI Jah is praise, comp the proper name 1V2 S.) n.p. m. Ezk.10,36. ID) belonging to Nif 1i?15, Hof. IDin, see 1D1. I- ' I- T ^IQI belonging to Nif r)pi3, Hif. rjipiri , see s\'o\ TDl belonging to the Nifal- Hiihp. 1S15, see 1D\ 1 ' l-T 1J?1 belonging to Nif Ipi, Hif. 1''5>lrt, Hof 15>in, see ns;. Ti^l belonging to Nif. 'fpi, see T?;. b)i\ belonging to Hif.Yp'n, seeb»;. n^J belonging to Hof. ElSlM and the noun nssin, see Eiy. V r.' ' l|- T belonging to Nifypi, see ys\ DDT 380 DDT (not used) see ''DSl. r T ^ '' I- : T ''DSl (from DB1 = MDB: rich) n. p. m. r : T ^ r T it t ' ' ^ Num. 13, 14. i^SI belonging toir2X.?iBirt, seei»s\ ■)if] n. belonging to Nif. 'n^ii, ^o/. IKItl, see 15t\ DJil see ns\ PT l-T Ipl see np\ Vpl belonging to Hif. ?'')?'in, ZTo/. »)?.in7see »)?;. "ID] belonging toIfz/.Tiip.irt, seel)?;. }<^1 belonging to Nif. N'liS , see N"!;. Tnl belonging to Hif. I'^'nin, see TiJ. rrri belonging to .ffi/. ITniJi, see rt'T'. K?"!! belonging to Nif. «5pi3, ^i/. ttSiTin, see '6'r^. r ' i-T DK^I belonging to iV^e/. ail5i5, Hif a''i2Jirt, see aia\ r ' i-T COEi^T belonging to Hif. I3"''iz5in, see I-T yi I. (not used) mir. same as lUSi* I. (■which see) to be strong, firm, As. ^jMt\ (the same); derivat. perhaps lIlSl strong^ as an epithet of Jah (comp. the proper ■ name !i3l25i* fortification). Derivat. the proper name ''312:1. W) n. belonging to Nif. Ttui5, see ''3tO'] (=!T'il2Jl Jah is strong) n. p. m. 1 Chk. 6, 13, for which bNii stands in 1 Sam. 8, 2, which may have the same signification. yt!?1 belonging to Hif. »ilBiH, see l-T ^Iti'l belonging to Hif. T'^^in, see l-T Tlffil (old Persian ic*-^^ beautiful woman, Zend, wahisti optima) n. p. f. EsTH. 1, 9-19; 2, 1-17. nni belonging to noun nnin, see lnrii. T 1 , called fS'tzyzra (']';? in the old language, from 'JIT n. comp. Armen. zen a weapon; afterwards na'iT was used for it 1 Kings 22, 38) signifies, as a letter of the alphabet, a weapon, because it has the form of a pointed weapon (sword, dagger, lance &e.) in old writing, and in the Phenician still, as well as in almost all alphabets derived from it. This assump- tion was made when inquirers started with the view that the earliest writing consisted of hieroglyphics; a view not confirmed by a closer examination. The name was chosen on account of the initial sound. In the Mishna (Sabb. 12,5) it is true a shorter form iT (whence the plur. ']^t) appears instead of the name y>^_, as the Arab, ts also occurs (from i^K), and the Ethiopic zai &c.; but the Greek name ^fjta cannot be at all explained by that circumstance, as it obviously proceeded from a Pheni- cian name IT'T that may have been used for it. As a numeral, t stood for 7, f for 7000. Besides, only sa must have been uttered, before the appella- tion Sayin, other sounds also presup- posing a simpler name. The sound of the letter T was origin- ally a soft, liquid s (somewhat re- sembling the French £), to which the Ar. \ corresponds, e. g. bTN I. Ar. jK , Jyc , and so 1in, bTS, ira, *iat &c. But there ITT' I-t' l-T ' l-T is also connected with s the dull sound. d, with which it was fused into one sounds ds, and for which there is a peculiar character in Arabic i>. In com- paring the two languages this circum- stance must be attended to, e. g. Intti , Ar. --, '°itt' ltX», rij3| Ar, ^(i &c. From this double 1 381 «1 nature of the sound 1 we can explain, 1. how it can change with other sibi- lants, or how they can mutually pass into one another in organic roots as well as stems, e. g. Aram. N-TN Hebr. ffl8, il^? and atoS; particularly a) with D: as' lbs and'obS; "TiT and llD; bbj and bbO; MT and WD; T5a and 053: i-T ' i-T 'rr ' i-T i-T ' "ini and 'llrtd: riT and aD"ii or, compar- r T r T ' I- r T ' ^ ^ ,- * ing Semitic dialects: SDS Ar. cjj; fit a Syr. Us ; dT Ar. ^ ; 1T3 Ar. ^; bpn Ar. Jva^; tiStl Ar. |*y^ &c. b)with2£: as pST and p5>l£; 'n5>T and 'nyS: ^15 ' Vt ' r T ' I-T 1- T ' I-T and IS)?; T5 and y)5; ^'T! and t]-!^; pT and na; WT and niS; QT and DS; t'iJ. Is. 66,il and yi5t; 'iT and IJt; IpT and 'nSlSi; and comparing Semitic dia- lects: Syr. i?oi Hebrew Inn'^S; Syr. '-o?l Hebr. plS &c. c) with ia:"as !it 1 Sam. 17,34 and nto; ^nj and 'nnto;''pto and pT; apT and 'cj^ial ppto and'npl'; ril5T and asiS; especially observable in a comparison of the dialects, e. g. piS Ar. ^jC &c. d) with T25: as tIJl and IIJIH; pm and ptdn; 'im ('ITN) and 1\dl5 &c. — 2. It is especially interchanged with t- sounds, among which the transition into T stands foremost, as a) bb'n and bbT; nST and rtS'j II; IST ank 1)5 •!; J^bT anoC^^b'i ; Tj^T and Ij^'i and others (see t). In particular, the Aramaean flattens T into 1, as nST Aram. Ha'i, •-«*?; art? Aram. afTl, V»oi5; ira Aram. Tia, »i-= r :' ' I-T r: ' ? &c.; the reverse seldom happening, as JT^b'i Targ. r)bt, n;5ia'i Targ. Nn^ia|, where the Zabian dialect, especially, inclines to keep the sibilant sound. In Ar. i> stands instead of it, though not constantly, as SNT i_a26 &c. Compare for this interchange the Greek aSaXiog (Doric) for a^alsog, ada/iidv for d^tjiiidv. b) It is interchanged with U, as nar and naa, IrtT and Irta, drrr and NMU; r I ' rT r T ' ri I" t ' in Ar. Jb stands for it, as DT3 Ar. ^^laj &c. c) with n, as bibr and bnbn, nt and Nn, apT and Cipn, TiM Is!! 5, 13 it ' I'l-T l'i-T ' I" : ' ' perhaps = ■'ja (Dbut. 32, 24) &c. But in these interchanges sometimes one is more frequent than the other, some- times the Hebrew varies from the dia- lects. In addition to what has been said, this should be remarked: 1. the occasional exchange of T and a, as lar I. and ina; aa Ez. 25, 7 and ra; MS 47, 13 and rtt ; very seldom of 'p, as t\ril} and Elp'ttj. As this mutual re- lation of the other sibilants and the X;- sounds is found in the formation of stems, as lUid and 'nrn, liaia and itta, tilVi and tilL DliB and d'ln, laS and I-T I-T ' r T r T ' I- T '?ap &c. shew, it cannot have arisen from orthographical causes, but only from vocal ones, from an original sibila- tion of the A; -sounds. — 2. The letter has a vocal relation to 1, which was generally reckoned, on account of its peculiar pronunciation, sometimes to the gutturals {rh, q), sometimes to the rustling sounds. Thus e. g. pTa = p'la Ez. 1, 14, ^^m and 'ji'in 7, 13; comp. dpO and DOn. Besides T and "1 may also have been very like one another in shape, as in Arabic there is but one figure for both; hence in this language the interchange of » and •. is very frequent, e. g. *j^ and |Vyi» , -=i and ys£ ; so too in Per- sian; comp. too the Latin Furius and Fnsius, honor and honos, arbor and arbos, quaero and quaeso. — 3. The letter has a connection with M (which see), as the Latins change the rough breathing of the Greeks - into s, so e. g. dMT U. and dMfr, comp. bbrr and bblE; but this is rare. — 4. It has a connection with the liquid n, e. g. IDT and 1)p.i, rjIT and ^^^i II, ?15 and V^f, rtDT and nps, IrtT and 'iW; the proper IT T 'ITT ' I- T rT' -F * name MfT 1 Cheon. 23, 11 and NSn IT " ' IT • 23, 10, &c. ^T I. (pronominal stem) an original form of the demonstrat. pronoun, which passed into tiT (which see), according to the usual exchange of a and o; and then the feminine formation nsiT (which see) arose out of tiT. ^ I i^T n. (not used) intr. to move to and fro, to stir, identical with the organic sST 382 12] root S^T , ND (in DID), 5>D-i , -wHch also it' it ^ I -" r T' exists out of Semitic, ia the Sans- krit su, Greek asv-, a si-, aai'-siv &c. rrom this then came the reduplicated Kal IT out of NTNT, as NDND, 3>TyT out IT IT T ' IT T ' IT : T of ND , S>T , which latter usually is derived IT ' IT ' „ ■' as a verb 15> from TIT. See TIT I. I I i^T, originating from NT (which see), forms the basis of the feminine forma- tion ni«T (which see), iT Hos. 7, 16 and IT Ps. 12, 8, Hab. 1, 11, which are ori- ginally the same, also standing dialecti- cally for it. On the other hand nT is only niiy , after the n is dropped. D^T (not used) intr. perhaps same as CIST to be furious, hence the noun SNT l|" T ' .' _ I" : a wolf. But when we consider that SNT is reckoned to the fox species in the East and the old Egyptian sib only signifies the Jackal; still farther, that this animal is named from the colour of its hair in other languages: it is better to take SNT = ariT, aiitt, to be 1" T r T ' r T ' shining like gold, to be gold-coloured. The Ar. >»^lo (to frighten) is connected with *^* *^ ol(>, *l\ (to drive, to drive forward, to drive away, to scare), and has nothing in common with our iNT. r'T DNT (plur. D'^aiST, constr. "'SNT) m. 1. epicene: a wolf, a sAe-woZ/ Gen. 49, 27; Is. 11, 6; 65,25; Ez. 22, 20, named from the golden colour of its hair, like the Latin vulpes, Gothic wulfs, German Wolf. As the Ar. v_aj6 signifies also the fox, the old Egyptian sib the jackal, so here too the canis aureus, Ivxog xQvasog, the jackal, is chiefly meant. a'ny 't Hab. 1, 8, Zeph. 3, 3 (Targ., Par- chon) is a wolf that goes forth in the night for prey, comp. kvxog vvxregivog (Op- pian, Cyneg. 3,266), vvxrmoQog (ib. 1, 440); on the contrary niri'iS. 'T Jer. 5, 6 a wolf of the forests, since i'ns; has no plural ri'ila'ny.. — 2. {wolf) 'n. p. m. Judges 7, 25. See also axT np\ I" : hfi D^ (formed from the masc. Hx = NT I IT and Ihis = liT, by means of the femi- nine termination -<; with !i- appended InnijT Jer. 26, 6 K'tib, without any greater emphasis; in later writers also with n dropped, as HT 2 Kings 6, 19; Ez.40,45; EcCLES.2,'2 24; 5, 15 18; 7,23; 9,13, as femin. nouns in uth and ith sometimes reject th in the same late time) pron. demonstr. f. 1. this, 2 Sam. 23, 17, 1 Kings 3, 23, nsiTb to this Gen. 2, 23, sometimes with a noun Ps. 80, 15, sometimes without one Is. 23,7, where one easily perceives the reference to a feminine noun. In its usual junc- tion with a noun 'T stands after it, like every adjective, e. g. niiTij 1t»a!j Gen. 21, 30; but where the verb to be is in- cluded, it precedes, i. e. the verb to be separates it from the noun, as niN nijo:"in'Palmyrene NblST itt: v' ITT r - ' •' Ti"- : i. e. SN'IST (Palmyr. inscript. 4, 1), VianaT '(ihii inscript. 2). IST adj. m., !TnaT /". see tTniaT. IT 1T\ : ' IT : IDT (construct state in the proper name '''laT) m. a present, Gen. 30, 20. Out of it are formed the proper names ■'■nST (in the New Test, ■^'nar), bNiiat. ''^DT (=!T''^aT; ./aA is a gift) n.p.m. Josh. 7, 1, for which i'imt stands in IChk.2,6; 8,19; 27,27; Neh. 11, 17; but ""lai Zs^sSaZoe Matth. 4, 21 (Syr. ^r^l) is an adjective. bN''^?T {El is gift i. e.bestower) n.p. m. Neh." ii, 14; £a^di^X 1 Macc. 11, 17. n'^int (from i^f ) ■^''^ *"* fl'!'!'«»') n. p. m. f Chb. 8, 15 17; 12, 7; Eze. 8, 8; 10, 20. *in'''T3T (the same) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 26, 2; 2 Che. 17, 8; 19,11. 31Dt (pl- constr. ■'aiat) m. 1. prop, a little animal that roams about or flies hither and thither; spec, a fly, a gadfly, Is. 7, 18, a figure of the military mul- titude of Egypt; nia "t death- bringing i. e. poisonous fly Eccle's. 10, 1. — 2. a fiying, buzzing insect, only in union with b?? 1 Kings 1, 2, the name of Ba'^al at "Ekron, as the averter of the insect. Similarly Ztvg anofivtoe (Paus. 8, 26, 4), the deus Myiagrus of the Eomans (Solin. ch. 1). Comp. the epithets of Hercules InoxTovog (vermin-killer), hoq- I'om'mv (locust -killer). See V?a. — In the dialects the same word is found with a like meaning, Ar. V^"^? ^7^- ]£>j, \£a}. Tare. Naai, isana'l, Talm. • 1 • ) o IT : • ' IT : ' NS'll"'!, Malt, dyhbyn &c., only that T is there smoothed off into ds or d. T12T (endowed, presented, sc. by El) n. p. m. 1 Kings 4, 5. 1*131 (from Pihel; bestower, giver) n. p. ot.'Eze. 8, 14 K'tib. m^DT {presented, given, by God) n. p. f."2 Bjdsgs 23, 36 K'ri, for which the K'tib has ii^'^at. By form it is an ad- iT • : '^ . ject. fem. of masc. lat; but a form triiat may have also existed. ^13T (and bat; with a of motion nbar) m. 1. prop.' a place surrounded, enclosed, hence a habitation, Ps. 49, 15 and their image (their beautiful body) is for corruption; the grave is that which is of their habitation, i. e. what remains of their habitation, it forms their bia^; tower, hence tmpZelKiNGsB, 13, 2 Che. 6, 2, in full form virp, '] Is. 63, 15; the tower or habitation of heaven, where the sun and moon were supposed to reside. Has. 3, 11 sun and moon enter into the tower of heaven (^b^lD; cognate in sense )ii"a. Hence b?a , the" Saturn of the Phe- nicians, was called biat b?a i. e. Ba'^al of the heavenly tower, referring to his fortress in the seventh heaven, as he is also called 113*7? b?a (which see), b:?a D"'?3123. — 2. (see bat 2) a gift, only in the proper name Tibat. — 3. (a gift, viz. from Jab) re. p. hi. Judges 9, 28. ^ibut see llbat. ibsinr see yh^i nyi {inf. constr. tiaT, fut. Mar) tr. to^ slaughter, with accus. of the object, e. g. nto Is. 66, 3, 15?a, 15«J£ Num. 22, 40, '-fyisi 1 Kings 1, 19; also absolutely, «o kill for sacrifice, to sacrifice, Eccles. 9, 2, with b or ^SBb of the person for whom Ex. 8,23' 24 ;'"22, 19 ; 1 Kings 8, 62 ; and in this sense also with the accus., e. g. nos Deut. 16, 2, d-iJibl^ 27, 7, nnin, objectively Lev. 22, 27 or subjectively Ps. 50, 23; naj 1 Sam. 2, 13; of hu- man sacrifice Ez. 16, 20; with a of the place where Ps. 27, 6; with bV at or upon somewhat Ex. 20, 24; 23, 18;, 1 Kjngs 13, 2. Eigurat. to prepare a great meal (of what is slaughtered) 1 Sam.. 1, 4. Derivat. nar, nnaT and tfata. nni 384 n-iT Pih. nat (fut. nati) intensive: to sacri- /?ce frequently, 1 Kings 3, 3, with a, W or ■'SSb of the place Hos.4,13; 1 Kings 3, 2 ; 8, 5 ; and b of the person or thing Ps. 106, 38; HIb. 1, 16; construed ge- nerally like Kal. 'S t:3> 'T Hos. 4, 14 to sacrifice, supported' by a person. The stem nST is flattened in Aram, into na'7, Syr. ^j»=?, but where we also 9 ^ ^ " find ^-"Si, Ar. J>,>; still stronger in the Hebrew nau, and with an initial vowel- r r ' sound nSN. The organic root is fia'T ; comp. Greek aqjuy, the theme of aqux^ta. PIDT (p^- ^'''n^'O "*• 1- <^ victim. Gen. 31,54, with the addition of that which serves to make it, as d'^ablB Lev. 3, 1, n;iin 22, 29, -nip^a 2 Che.V, 5; usually employed generally in the sense of a sacrifice, of which one may partake Num. 15, 3; or generally sacrifice ISam. 15,22; hence to sacrifice is expressed by naj ntey, ins, njaj l Sam. 1, 21; Jee. 33,'18"Ecc'lbs.4,17. — 2. Pigurat. a great slaughter Is. 34, 6 ; with y's'n Zeph. 1, 7. — 3. a banquet, a meal, Peov. 17, 1; 1 Sam. 9,12; hence D""?:;!! 'T a yearly (sacrificial) meal 1 Sam. 1,21; hnsuSM 'T a family meal 20, 29. — 4. {sacrifice) n. p. m. Judges 8, 5. SinnT (only in pi. with sm/. dnhat) f. prop, sacrifice, only figurat. idolatry, idolatrous worship, Hos. 4, 19. ''St (if from aat : roving about) n. p. m. EzsriO, 28; Neh. 3, 20 K'ri; but pro- bably written by mistake for ''3T (see EzB. 2, 9; Neh. 7, 14). flT^ZlT (bestowed, given) n.p.f. 2 Kings 23, 36 K'tib. X3''3T (acquisition, gain) n.p.m. Eze. 10,43. " ^DT I. (fut. VaT"') tr. to surround, to en- circle, to encompass, to limit round about, identical in its org. root ba"t with that in ba".!i, ba"!, ba"n, ba-3 &c.; deriva- r T ' r T ' I- T_' I- T ' tives 5iaT , and sat m the proper name ba^N (which see). Pigur. to cover, to encompass, to shade, in the sense of to copulate, to lie with, with accus. Gen. 30, 20. Some have wished to find an- other meaning of bar with reference to nbar Hab. 3,11, comparing bas* I. and giving it the meaning of to be pale, dun- coloured, Mb at as a noun signifying pale- ness (so WaJitj; but there is no sufficient reason for this. ?DT II. (not used) only a collateral form of laj, arising from the inter- change of 1 (which see) and b, whence biat in the proper name llbar. PpT m. the arch of heaven, a tower, only in the proper name b^f^ (which see). bar see biar. "jip?! (also'jb-, and-iat; gifted, viz. of God) n. p. of the tenth son of Jacob by Leah Gen. 35, 23; 46, 24, and then of the tribe descended from him Num. 1, 9, whose territory in Palestine is de- scribed in Josh. 19, 11 &c. Gentile ''3'biaT Num. 26, 27 from I'biaT, as the LXX and Vulg. pronounced the name. |5T same as Aram, ^at, which see. |51 (part. pi. T'SaT) Aram. intr. to acquire, to purchase, to gain, N31i* (time) Dan. 2, 8; comp. "emere tempus" (Cic. Verr. 1, 3); hence the proper name N5"'aT. The stem is usual in Aram. IT ■ : , (Syr. «^»l), but the organic root is ^a'T , existing also in the Sanskrit pan, wan, Lat. ven-Ao, Gothic vinn-a,n (to gain). pD| see piar?. JT (from sit) to. a shell, a husk. Num. 6, 4. JIJT a "Stem incorrectly adopted for ST, but see 'tiST. it' Ii-t IJT see iaT5>. |-T iTr- TT (prop. part, of TIT; pi. fiilT) m. proud Peot. 21, 24; impudent Is. 13, 11 ; wanton'Mjo,. 3,19, and therefore applied to the sectaries of a later time, Ps.ll9, 21 51 69 78 &c. niT same as IT (TIT), assumed for ITT IT ^ I •" the construct 'lilT , such dropping of - PL 385 sm from li* verbs being found only in com- pound proper names. ■jilT (from lit; constr. 'ji'i'r, as if from mt = "» , with suff. 'Kh^) m. pride, Prov. ITT it' " !'!l!' T, 1 T 11, 2, sometimes joined with 55 Jee. 49, 16. n} (a pronominal stem from ^T , which still exists in the compound "'TN Ps. 124, 3-, but the final d or e often dis- appears in compounds, as in TiS from iTN, tb from fiTb; with the final a X : IT i'.T ' changed into o there is also IT for MT Hos. 7, 16, or i«T for the feminine niir', or <1T Ps. 12, 8, Hab. 1, 11, and in IT^ii) 1. pronoun demonstr. m. {fern, only in Josh. 2, 17, Judges 16, 28) this, hie, ovtog, referring to what is present, while Nlrt (which see) refers to what is well known. So Judges 7, 4, where the distinction clearly appears. In its application it stands 1. including the idea of perso- nality, this, hie; in which case it is either alone Job 1, 17, or put after the noun, where both have the article, as JiTn Di^ti Gen. 7, 11. When it precedes the noun in the signification just men- tioned, it is either the predicate of a clause, i. e. it includes the verb to he Ex. 35,4, Judges 4, 14, 2Kings6, 13, or it is an Aramaeism, as n^aii tiT this house EzK. 3, 12, DVrt MT 1 Kings 14, 14, as'i'i fij. Ps. 49, 14, and so Josh. 9,12, P's.'48,i5; comp. N»bn W'l Dan. 4,15, Syr. \i4 Mn, Ar. v_>lixjTttX^, Greek ovtog olxog. It also stands a) after the noun as a genitive, e. g. rtT T'tiJa the worth of it 1 Kings 21,2; b) in the signification of iste, with the additional idea of contempt, also like ovtog, Ar. fj^ 1 Sam. 10, 27; Ex. 32, 1; c) re- peated !1T . . . nr this . . . that, the one . . . the o«Aer'''lKiNGs22,20; nrbs ttT Ex. 14, 20 one to the other; d) in connection with interrogative particles, where it makes the c[uestion more liwly, e. g. nr ^Ti who there? Is. 63, 1; tTt Nlrt "'li who is that there? Jer. 30, 21; !it ''N who? 1 Kings 13, 12 &c., though this is oftener applied locally (see ^&). — 2. Dropping the idea of personality, not distinguishing gender and number, and so a) a demonstrative particle appended to interrogatives and words of exclama- tion to give emphasis, e. g. iiT-nig what then? ii note Gen. 27, 20: tlT HiTi see there! 1 Kings 19, 5; W Tt^h wherefore tAen ? (Ar. t6UJ) Gen. 18, 13, or as a de- signation of the manner how, as flT3 talis; b) in a local sense: here, e. g. tlTa here, Mc, prop, in hoc loco Gen. 38,' 21; nT here Num. 13, 17; there Ps. 104, 25; Judges 5, 5; c) relating to time, as !Tf. fin? but now, just now, IKiNGS 17,24; 'is, 24; Mic.5,4; Euth 2, 7, especially so with numbers for years or days, equivalent to the Ger- man sehon, e. g. U'l'aSS irtT now twice Gen. 27, 36, tJ-'SUS nasi rrr'ZECH. 7, 3 (this) so many years, and so Gen. 31, 38 ; 43, 10 &c., where Saadia translates by tXJi now, German schon. — II. A relative pron. who, that, which, arising out of the demonstr. as is often the case (see Nin, -ri), Ps. 104, 8 to the place which thou hast founded; 78, 54; Pkov. 23, 22; Job 15, 17; comp. in German der for welcher, damit for womit. The relative meaning is commonly used in poetry, as also IT, and the article (see b!i). This demonstrative is a general Se- mitic word, existing in the Ar. \b (ttV^), f. ^5^, »6 {^, SJ), Aram, --j!, f. an (Nlil), Ethiop; se, f. sa, sati &c. But the pronominal stem seems to exist also in the Latin -ce, Greek -8s, Attic -Si, in oSs, roSs, German da. f\l m. only in 1 Sam. 17, 34, a col- lateral form of rtto. HT (='!ST) an abridged form of ni 25 3nt 386 11 "to turn oneself quickly" proceeds from that of shining, as in the Latin micare. 2flT (constr. HTn, with 1: anti Gen. 2, 12) m. 1. gold, as metal Gen. 36, 39, Ex. 3, 22, metaphor, a gold shekel, when numerals stand before it Gen. 24, 22. In distinguishing kinds and ore appear ^inu 'T Ex. 25, 11; TBia 't 1 Kings 10| is -J p)?T?a 'T 1 Chr."28, 18; aiu 't 2 Che. 3,"^; \^iO 'T 1 Kings 6, 20^ aini^ 'T 10, 16; d'^1':| 'T 2 Chr. 3, 6; Ni'ffl''T^Ps. 72,15; 'I'-^siN 'T 1 Chr. 29, IT : : * ' I- : ' 4. — 2. Pigur. 0!7, so called from its shining colour Zech. 4, 12, comp. 1!!^'; ; perhaps also the sun or the golden bright- ness of the shy Job 37, 22. nni (not used) a stem assumed for the nouns IT, lit, n^T and the proper names DnT , in''T ; but' for rT'T and the IT" 'IT "' .r proper names the stem is nit (which see); and T^T may come from a verb W: nr (tit) = the organic root laiiT, arts, 5T"N &c. There may, however, have been a stem nrtT = tTiT, Ar. Lrti, Syr. IT T JTT ' p |oi5 to glitter, Ar. Lsov to shine, Syr. ]\ , IT , whence came again the reduplicated form iTTt, abridged TIT. See TIT III. "'''' IT (in many mss. T^T; from the stem IT as a T5> after the form 'P'^l , llS^'n , D"'3: IT I J- 7 |. 7 |. 1 y^j) m. prop, brightness, shining, and therefore blossom; metaph. flower-month,, name of the second month of the Jewish ecclesiastical year 1 Kings 6, 1 37; in n 387 nn the Targ. fully N';5^''3 VJ. TTri, Arab. (Pococke) J^y^ /-S-^- "^^^ later name I^^M lias the same meaning, and is also in At. \\3\. )] (pronominal stem) a dialectic varia- tion of NT = IHT, as d is often inter- changed with 6; only in Hos. 7, 16. See !iT and niir. IV I *IT (not used) tr. to shoot forth, to bring forth (in fulness), to beget, gignere, pro- germinare, especially spoken of the pro- ductions of the field ; comp. Sanskrit su, s{i. Then metaphor, to overflow, to be abundant. Thence comes the redupli- cated <)nt, abridged TIT. See TIT 11. IT (pronominal stem) l.pron.demonstr. (without distinction of gender and num- ber) a collateral form of IT this, which is =nT (see IT) Ps. 12, 8,' Hab. 1, 11, belonging to 'n^ and tiB. — 2. like !iT a pron. relat. , either with reference to a mascuUne Ex. 15, 13 16; Is. 43, 21; Ps.32, 8; 142,4; 143,8, or a feminine 9, 16; 31, 5, or to several nouns 10, 2; 17, 9, or connected with the relative like the neuter "this, that", that which Ps. 68, 29; or it expresses a general relation Is. 42, 24. This form is also found in "iT^ii (which see), where it is likewise ■=MT. In Talmudic IT stands, parti- cularly in compounds, for iiT. In Ar. •3 stands in the dialect of the Tayy for the usual ^5 JJf. ait (after the form iin; with suff. iSiT, frilT) m. fluai or flow of semen, in men Lev. 15, 2; the monthly courses, in women 15, 25. D1T {part. m. aT, f. fiST, constr.VS^; fut. aiTi) intr. 1. to flow, to stream, with accus. of the thing (like verbs of ful- ness), fi^M Ps. 78,20; 105,41; Is. 48, 21 (paralLtirai^); to overflow, abh, iB'^'i Ex. 3, 8 ; metaphor, to m^lt, to dissolve, Jbe. 49, 4 iky valley melts, i. e. its inhabi- tants go to ruin; to pine away Lament. 4, 9. This transition is also in SN'i, Ar. (0I6. Comp. too D^?3 Ps. 58, 8 and 2 Sam. 24, 14; the Ar.^._UJiJI iO;Jo is = ab D)3\ — 2. Specif, of the monthly courses in women Lev. 15, 25, with accus. ail, S'iT, hence rtiT a woman suf- fenng from an issue of blood 15, 19 ; of the seminal flux or gonorrhea in men 15, 2; hence ST 15, 4 also a noun. Deriv. aiT, aT. ' ' IT The stem aT is closely connected with tiii, tiT , but also with aTN I., i1 , as'i , I IT ' l|T ' r Tj^ ' IT ' r T ' in-a'1, Aram, ai'n and ^ao?, the same. IT T ' I ' J 11 (not used) tr. to enclose, to bind about, to surround with a rim, of the shell or husk enclosing the fruit, hence ST. The stem is connected in Hebrew with SID, in Aram, with SIT to bind, Pa. SJT , Itpa. SWTN, with the nouns Sl^lT, SIT, with the Sanskrit jug , Lat. jug-, Greek Qvy-. Ill intr. 1. (Kal not used) to cook, to seethe, to boil, as is seen from Nif. and Sif. Ilia is originally identical with it (mean- ing "to boil up, to ferment"), whence T^iU; comp. the Sanskrit svid (thfe i was lost by the v becoming a vowel, therefore the Latin sud-, with which are also con- nected the Greek Cbco, ai^m [comp. ^v&- og], German sieden [comp. Sud, Ab-sud], English seethe, Syr. •>\\ to be hot, &c.). — 2. Pigurat. (as in THB, Ar. Ub, Lat. ferveo) to boil over, to boil up, of anger, to fly out in a passion, to act arrogantly, with bs Jee. 50, 29 or b» of the per- son against Ex. 18, 11; according to the derivatives to swell, to overflow, of water, Ar. (>K (comp. JiNS, p'tt5^); to be haughty, proud, arrogant, forgetful of God. Deriv. Nif. (not used) to be cooked, seethed, whence the noun I'^Ti for ^iT5 (which see). ■W- T'p 0«- T'll, apoc. nr) 1. to cause to boil, to cook a mess (T^TS) Gen. 25, 29, — 2. Pigurat. to act haughtily, presumptuously, wickedly, either absolut. Deut; 1, 43, or with the infin. following, which defines it more closely 18, 20, or with bi) of the person Ex. 21, 14; Neh. 9, 10.'" 11T (Peal not used) Aram, like Hebr. nT fi;om5>T , Utifintr. to move IT T ' r; • jt' IT' to and fro, to stir, of wild animals, and generally of their movements and life; in Aramaean generally to move, to stir, to mx)ve forward, Arab, to hasten, hence xj^\ haste. Deriv. the noun T^T 1. TIT n. (not used; abridged from the reduplicated 1T1T from IT , which see) tr. to push forth, to bring forth, to beget (in fulness), principally of the productions of the field; deriv. T"'T 2. TIT m. (not used; abridged from the reduplicated itit, from it, which see) intr. to be prominent, prop, to shine forth, to glitter forth; whence tlTITM and the proper names tJ^nT, T-'TV nT^T, NTn, NTT. The ninaamental signification to shine, to sparkle, is often transferred to that of shining afar, to project forward (comp. "■'P.J, T^l;^., W?, 03), as also to that of fleeing quickly, of blossoming (see ys, fili, &c.); and the likewise reduplicated stems DID (whence DiD, DID a swallow), yiit (whence y^at blossom and wing) are identical with it. QiT^T n. p. pi. of a primitive people of 'Ammon Gen. 14, 5 (prop, the pro- minent ones, giants, from TIT III). rniT (from npT; corpulent, strong) ■n.p. m. 1 Che. 4, 20 (comp. Ar. ijaJa^ a body, Hebrew yilttS large, huge, spoken of beasts). r''1T (only pi. njlT) /. a projecting I comer, of an altar Zbch. 9, 15, i. e. the hom-like comer-pillar, xsQatosidsts ym- n'ai (Jos. B. J. 5, 5, &); the comer column, of a building Ps. 144, 12, from rtlT , as T3R.J '^''?» 03 have proceeded from a similar fundamental signification; Ar. 2uL j , Syr. li-ko] the same. The Hebrew noun 1TB (comer-tower, granary), Samar. rT'SiTM, refers to the same fundamental sense. 7IT tr. 1. same as V>bT to scatter to and fro, to lavish Is. 46, 6 ; on the other hand ibTn Jbe. 2, 36 comes from bTN ; metaphor. to esteem lightly, as also J 16 (med. Te). — 2. (not used) to separate from, to go away, to remove, Ax. JK (med. Waw), identical with the organic root in bT'N; deriv. Mb IT, constr. nbiT, , r T ' IT ' n- ' ' ^Hif b-'TM (comp. n-'Bn, rT'fi) to throw away, to despise (opposed to 133) La- ment. 1, 8. JipiT /. separation, removal, only in the construct state nbiT (witii suff. rjnblT, pause 'my ; Mri") a prepos. besides, praeter, except, 2 Kings 24, 14 ; for which, how- ever, anoldconstruct-form''nblT usually appears Dbut. 1,36; 4, 12; IEjngs 3, 18; in the same sense with a suff. Is. 54, 5; 64, 4; without relation to a noun Josh. 11, 13. n^lT see MblT. Tlb*lT see iibiT. I- T I IT I IT I, (Kal unused) tr. to nourish, to feed, to support, prop, to make full, thick (see Hofal), whence the Ar. jjjX (solid, of the body) ; deriv. 'jiTM and according to some tiSIT 3. Hof. pn {part. pi. D"'5TTO Jbr. 5, 8 K'tib, which the K'ri reads D^'SOn, from ■JT^ to be weighty, heavy) to be well fed, to be strong Jee. 5, 8 ; see ^tn. 11T (Peal not used) Aram, same as Hebrew "jSlT I. In the Targ. it stands for b3b2i. Ithp'e. yrriij (fut. Wr\'^) to be well fed Dan. 4, 9. p^ 389 ^)) yi] n. (not used) tr. 1. to point, to sharpen, identical with '\'p, IS in its or- ganic root; comp. 'JT-N, and see lit HI. Deriv. nSiT 2. — 2. to bring to a point, to form, to shape, if the noun 11 is to he referred to it; see fi5T. y(\ III. (not used) tr. to adorn, to ornament, to set in order, Ar. ^K, hence ^jj\ dress. Deriv. ITS. (with N prosthetic), rtJit 2 and the proper name !l3''T. It is possible that )V II. and III. coincide inthesignif.1 of ^IT 'll. naiT (and MiT; pi. riSiT) /■. 1. (part, fern, of rtat) a harlot, a prostitute, noQvi] Lev. 21,' 14, in its full form nsiT ri^'N 21, 7, who is described as wearing pe- culiar attire Peov. 7, 10, going about singing in the city Is. 23, 6 &c.; 'T rT'a a brothel Jer. 5, 7; 'T ^Snij «Ae &'»•« of a whore Detjt. 23, 19; figurat. infidelity (by having to do with others) in a po- litical respect Ez. 16, 35; carrying on traffic with all the world Is. 23, 16 ; fallen away 1, 21. — 2. (from ^it II.) a pointed weapon, spiculum, telum, IKiNas 22, 38, comp. Aram. TJT weapon. But perhaps from I^T III. see Its. — 3. (from ^it I. after the form Inaiu) a female who enter- tains guests, a hostess, mulier cau- ponaria, navSoxsviQia (according to the Targ., Josephus and others) Josh. 2,1; Judges 11, 1; 16, 1; 1 'Kssqs, 3, 16, a meaning which the Targ. extends also to Ez. 23, 44, and Ibn Gan^ch to Jo. 4, 2. This explanation, however, is by no means safe ; since the LXX already take 'T in the usual sense. J^ll I. (fut. ?Tj) intr. to be m,oved, to shake to and fro, hence to move oneself, with ■)» before one Esth. 5, 9; to quake EcoLBS. 12, 3; to be terrified, to tremble, to be afraid (see WIT , W?,l)- Deriv. the proper names ytif.l, ^''t- Pih. redupl. 5>m {part. 5>TJ>ta) to drive forth, to push forth, to scare away, depriv- ing of possession, like N&ND (Is. 27, 8) Hab. 2, 7, which meaning is found also in the Mishna (Shebi'it 3, 7; 'Orla 1, 3). The simple stem 5»t is closely con- nected with NT , ND (which see) and with the organic root in5>D"i. It is also found in the Ar. cl\, Targ. 5>t, Syr. "^1, re- dupl. gpij, £J^6, tjlj", Syr. 5, Sanskrit tap, Lat. sap (in sapo), German saf (in Saft) &c., Ar. oK the same, be- longing to ooS resin. Deriv. nST and the proper name tj'^T 1. HIT n. (not used) after the Aramaean to lend, to borrow, cognate in sense with VniB; deriv. the proper name i\'^y 2. "lit I. {part. m. IT , f. rtlT) intr. same as 1iT (comp. nib = rtsb) Is. 59, 5 the crushed (egg) divides itself into a viper, i. e. produces a viper. On 11T Ps. 58, 4 see 'niT I. and Nif. under the same word. Poh. TiiT see I^T. |-T IIT m. see ^iTM I. nniT f. see 'TIT II. mi (i. e. m, not used) intr. to have a sweet, pleasant smell, of olives, there- fore like the Sanskrit swdd, Greek jjS-vs &c. ; or to be juicy, fresh, as an organic root TT cognate with that in "lUJ and lia^b; in every case mi should be assumed as a stem. Derivative n^T (as rrja from nia), the proper names Dnj, iri^T, and ni"iT in the proper name rl^niiTa. IT : I i • NTT (projection; from tlf HI.) n. p. m. 1 Chb. 2, 33. nm I. (i. e. riT; Kal not used) tr. to m^ve off, to move away, to shove, from a place, to remove (the Targumio HT and Syr. w*] are intrans. ; Arab. \ or reduplicated a^'j^S are trans, without being originally different from riT); the organic root in aD"5, nD"S, rtO"B is cognate. Nif. Tm (fut. rt-r) to be displaced, to be shoved, to be removed, from (b5>M) somewhat Ex. 28, 28; 39, 21, as "the Targum, LXX and others have already taken it. Hif. tiTil (part. nTM) to remove, to carry away. Is. 23, 10, according to the Syr., but see ntiT IT. nriT n. (not used) tr. same as pp.T, to bind, to tie, to gird, whence the noun nra (after the form 'iJta, iwa) and n'na. - TT ?T\\ (part. btjT) intr. 1. to creep, to crawl, of serpents, therefore 'naS' ibnj Deut. 32, 24 (cod. Sam. ■'brtj), ynS^'T Mxa. 7,17 serpents, comp. Targ. b'^HT a worm, NbrrT, Syr. U«l caterpillar, brtT serpent; At. Jka.\ (to creep). Deriv. ribpT. — 2. (not used) to flow slowly; hence in the Mishna bpIT river (Mikv. ch. 5); comp. Zab. '^>-»l. — 3. to creep along fearfully, to be afraid. Job 32, 6, for which is in Aram, bni, Ar. J^O- nbnT (serpent) n. p. of a stone (laN) in the neighbourhood of bsT "jiJJ east of Jerusalem; then the name of a place 1 Kings 1, 9. See laN. nni (not used) intr. same as ynuj to be dense, firm, strong, full, of the body; 391 HDT Arab. (joiSui. Deriv. the proper name npiT. ^T (pronominal stem; not used) pron. demonstr. same as W, forming witt N prosthetic the time-particle ''TN , which form also exists in the Aramaean Y^^^.; n^T (an assumed stem for the adject, 'ji'inj see 11]. liT^T (from 11] after the form Dhi5> from 115>) adj. m. boiling, proudi ing, of waves Ps. 124, 5. Tft m. Hebrew see IT. lit (with sm/. nniT, irv, plur. with SMjf. ■'Ji'T'T) jij-am. m. brightness, Dan. 2, 31; 4, '33; freshness, of face 5, 6 9; Syr. li*-l splendour, Arab. j^\ ornament. See IT. I* TT m. 1. (from TIT n.) overflow, ful- ness, liasi 'T Is. 66, 11 heavy, rich ful- ness (parallel Tifi = Tljo) , for which in 66, 16 abn stands. It is possible that fit is =yi5t (from TIT III.), or that, as mss. have it, V\ should be the reading there, which suits the connexion. — 2. (from TIT I.) an animal, a wild beast, Ps. 50, 11, i. e. what moves and lives, comp. ivn animal. {ij^hT (= iNfT from TIT IH.; shining) n. p"m. 1 Chb.'4, 37; 2 Che. 11, 20. nT'^T (brightness, ornament, grace; from TIT in.) n. p. m. 1 Chr.23, 11, for which 23,10 has WT, which see. ' IT •' nD^T (the same, from )■!>] III.) n. p. m. i'Chr. 23, 10, for which in 23, 11 is riTn. IT • SUIT {terrified, from ?-Tr) n.p. m. 1 Chr. 5, 13." niT 1. (melting-place, from Cl^T I.) re. ^. of a place in Judah Josh. 15, 55, 2 Chr. 11, 8, in the vicinity of which was a de- sert of like name 1 Sam. 23, 14; Gentile 1B1T 23, 19. Euins are still found at fell Zif, south of Hebron (Robins. Pa- lest, n. p. 191). — 2. (lent viz. by God, conip. b^NttS) n. p. m. 1 Che. 4, 16. nijsn Is. 50, 11 see pT. D^ P^T Prov. 26, 18 according to many mss. See pT. ■T'T see ^1T. n^T (i^^- t3''in\T, from niT, after the form n^a from nia) to. an olive, as fruit Is. 17, 6; 24, 13,' hence 'T Tjp'n Mic. 6, 15 to tread olives, 'p^ ys the olive-tree Hag. 2,19; for the latter n^T alone also stands Judges 9, 9; in full form n^^T laiB Deut. 8,8, ina: n-'T 2 Kings 8, 32 ; an olive plantation is called nn Q'lB Judges 15, 5 or in the pi. D"'riiT Zech. 14, 4. Besides, nn also means an olive branch Zeoh. 4, 11; farther olive-oil, in full form nv Tati Ex. 27, 20. — This noun is in Ar. oj V , whence the denomin. t:i|v', Targ. and Syr.Nnn, J-M. Coptic ■xwiT, and so in the Ethiop^ Armen., Spanish (azeyte) ; Phenician Nni.T (Zetha, Zsi&d) proper name of a promontory. in^T (shining, beautiful; comp. Hos. 14, 7) "re. p. m. 1 Chr. 7, 10. nt ««^ 1> "^^T (abeady with a slight pause "^T Ex. 27, 20; Lev. 24,2) adj. to., rtST A cfea?-, transparent (only from 'TJST which see), hence pure, of oil Ex. 27, 20, frankincense 30, 34; LXX Siacpav^g. Eigurat, in a moral sense, innocent, pious (see fi3T), along with 1l2Ji Prov. 20, 11; Job"8, 6; good, of ngb 11, 4, bSf 21, 8; jpMj-e, of nVsn Job' 16, 17. Phenic. "^JT (num. Cil. A) pure. NDT (not used) Aram, same as Hebr. rtiT: to be pure, clean, pious, also applied in the Targ. externally for Hebr. Ilnta; Talm. i3t (pious). Deriv. 1ST. 1- T ' I Vr / IT riDT (fut.'n'SV, oncen3TN = 'TN same ITT V I-.-:-' k:--- !• as 'T'; Mic. 6, 11 according to the Ara- maean pronunciation; see n) intr. same as ns'n n. to shine, to be clear, trans- parent] to glitter, cognate in sense with '-/na; but only used in a moral sense: to be pure, innocent, sinless, righteous, MiC. 6, 11; Job 15, 14; 25,4; to conquer (as' )D] 392 IDT the effect of moral purity; on the other hand 5'tB'i is applied to the victory of an unrighteous cause) Ps. 51, 6; LXX rtxao), Syr. li] (to conquer). The stem is Arab. ^^, Targ. NjD'i,- Syr. |i?; and the organic root n-3T is also in r|T, rt-p3 (see T) &c. " ' Pih. nst (fut.. M3r) to cleanse, to purify, ab"PEOV. 20i'9' ITiN Ps. 119, 9. Hence the proper name "'ST. Hithp. InSTtl (from 'TfiSl) to cleanse one- self (morally) Is. 1, 16. 13; (in the Targ. cortstr. riST, tf*/". NFiI^t) Aram. f. purity, innocence Dan. 6,23j Targumic for iTjJ'ia, 'jij'/J?. n'D*13T (from TfSr) Z'. prop, trans- parent, spec. gfZass, drinking glass Job 28, 17 (LXX, Vulg., Syr.), which was of great value in ancient times; accord- ing to others crystal (Symm.), the Arab. _-L».\ signifying both. In Ar. and Syr. the verbal stem for this noun ran in the form "-^l, _^ , therefore Ar.L».\ , S] glass, the verb by a metaphor denoting also "to be thin, to be transparent". "1^5T (from 13T; with suff. rtllDT, I T ^ r T ' " IT : ' '^'193';) m. belonging to the male sex, of men and beasts Ex. 23, 17 ; 34, 23 ; Deut. 16, 16; 20, 13; in the first instance from lit. ITT 113 T (rich in fame viz. Jah is; see 13T) 'n. p. m. Num. 13, 4; Nbh. 3, 2; i'Chb. 4, 26 ; but 25, 2 for '''nS'f which see. ''?! (pure, innocent viz. Jah is; from nsty n.p. m. EzR. 2, 9 ; Neh. 7, 14 (Ezr. 10,^28 and Neh. 3, 20 K'ri lar stands written for it); comp. Zaxiaiog Lxikb 19, 2 5 8; Aram. ■'NBT, •'N3T, where the N expresses the vowel Patach. ^31 (3 pi. : t- IT : - : ' IT T I ' !• : • Nif. 'laW {fut. 'IDT';) to he remembered, with accusative of the person or thing Is. 23, 16; 65, 17; Ez. 21, 37, with ■'3Sb. Num. 10, 9, or bN of the person before or with whom there is remembrance Ps. 109, 14, or with b of the person, to whose hurt somewhat is remembered Ez. 18, 22; 33, 16; to be brought to re- membrance EsTH. 9, 28; to be praised, to be worthy of remembrance Job 28, 18. — 13T3 Ex. 34, 19 see ^DT. r : ■ ' IT T Pih. '13T only in the noun 'jilDT and the proper name 113 T. Hif. Ti3Tt7 {inf. constr. Ti3Trt, with suf, also Cii'l3Tr! Ez. 21, 29) 'l. to bring to remembrance, to mention, with accus. of the object and bN of the person Gen. 40, 14; 41,9; to renew the remembrance of 1 Kings 17, 18; to bring to mind 2 Sam. 18, 18; to refresh, to renew Ps. 45, 18; T'STM he who consigns a thing to remembrance, i. e. a historiographer, chancellor (president of the royal chro- nicles, an office which still exists among eastern nations) 2 Sam. 20, 24; 2 Kings 18, 18; comp. nishs-Tri "''iBO. — 2. to think of, to mention, in language 1 Sam. 4, 18; to expressTSiX. 23, 13; to announce, Jer. 4, 16; to name Is. 49, 1, parallel Nip ; to mention with praise Ps. 87, 4. — 3. to name with praise, i. e. to praise, Ps. 71, 16, Song op Sol. 1, 4, with ''3 in the conclusion Is. 12, 4; 1i3Tlnb Ps. 38, 1 and 70, 1 to praise God, by sacrifice ; often joined with i'^ Dtti, •aia% Ex. 20, 24, Josh. 23, 7 (cognate in sense Nip 11 01!5d); seldom to cause to jiratseEx.20, 24. — '- 4. to sacrifice, prop, to praise, to bring an offering of praise, and there- fore in the language of sacrifice to burn, nJiib Is. 66, 3. Deriv. MIBTN. IT : ' ITT :- ]D-|T The stem 13T is Ar. J'j, Syr. r=», Aram. ID'i of like meaning; and there is a transition in the Arabic from it to "penetrating rain, to stormy anger" &c. "l!3T {pi. Q'^'p^t) "*• 1- a male, spoken of men and animals, mas, masculus (prop, membrum virile, Ar. 2c>) Gen. 1. 27; 7, 3; Is. 66, 7; a man, joined with nD|5S Lev. 15, 33, or MffiN Judges 21, 11, and metaphor, of male images Deut. 4, 16; Ez. 16,17. Ci"'13Tb adv. accord- ing to the males EzR. 8, 3; 2 Che. 31,16; see also 113T. The male sex prevails in enumeration Ezr. ch. 8 and on other occasions (Lev. 6, 11 22; 12, 2; 22, 7 &c.) as the superior; even in animals in the sacrificial ritual it was regarded as the more complete Ex. 12, 5; Lev. 1, 3; Mal. 1, 14. Hence the denom. Nif 13T3 to be horn a male, of cattle Ex. 34, 19, in the Arab, of men also; the cod. Sam. has T'3Trt. — 2. {memorable, glorious) only as a proper name 2 Chr. 24, 26 ; elsewhere in the proper names rT'13T, WIST, 13Ti\ ■'IDT. IT ! - : ' IT T I ' r : • -|3T or 13T (with suff. i13T, i'^i") m. 1. remembrance, Deut. 25, 19 ; Ps. 112, 6 ; memory Prov. 10, 7 ; recollection Ezr. 9, 28. — 2. memorial, name (LXX orofia), by which the significance of being is made prominent (parallel BllJ) Ex. 3, 15; Ps. 40, 5; Hos. 12,6, comp. Ex. 15, 3; Am. 9, 6; Ps. 83, 19; fame, praise Ps. Ill, 4; 135, 13; 145, 7, ;r;'^3T Is. 26, 8, Ps. 102, 13; Ar. ^6 ; farther metaphor, scent Hos. 14, 8. "113T {pause 13t) m. 1. the same, Ex. 27,14^ Is. 26, 14," Prov. 10,7, for which mss. have 13T; Phenio. 13T (Tugg. 5) the same. — 2. {fame) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 8, 31, for which rT'13T in 9, 37. ' IT : - : ' li"13T and fl3T {constr. Til?!, with suff. 'TIJilDT; pi. Cl''p.'l3T, later nii") m. 1. the image of a man, in idol-worship Is. 57, 8, consequently = 13T ^M^it Ez. 16, 17. The imagery would be taken from the act of adultery, which suits the context. — 2. same as 13T remembrance, recollection, Ex. 12, 14; Josh. 4, 7; n31 394 n^T memorial Ex. 13, 9; 'T ntlSM a memorial sacrifice Num. 5, 15; 'T '^JSN stones of remembrance Ex. 28, 12; 'T ISO * *"*■ membrance-book, Mal. 3, 16, i. e. by which the names of the inscribed were recalled to memory; riiShST 'nSD chro- nicles EsTH. 6, 1, written by the T'3TM; l3"'i'"llDT memorable sayings Job 13, 12. — 3. a' celebration, for the remembrance of a thing Lev. 23, 24. ''"IpT {renowned, from ^^t) n. p. m. Ex. 6^ 21; Neh. 11, 9; 1 Chk. 8, 19 23 27; 26, 25; 27, 16; 2 Chr. 17, 16; 23, 1 ; 28, 7, and 1 Chk. 9, 15, but for which *TiST stands in 25, 2. n'''l!3T {Jah is renowned) n. p. m. 2 Kings 14, 29 &c.; Greek ZaiaQiag. in'^'I^T (the same) n. p. m. 2 Kings 15, 8-11. '' 6^?] (not used) tr. same as Mbl 11. ITT ^ ^ 'T T prove. — 3, {counsel, con- sideration) n. p. m. 1 Che. 6, 5 ; 2 Che. 29, 12. !Tli50T {constr. rHzi), f. properly the twig that moves to and fro, hence shoot, twig, vine-twig Num. 13, 23; vine-branch Is. 17, 10; rod, Ez. 8, 17 see, they reach the rod {Barsom of the Persians) to their nose. It was the custom of the old Persians, while praying to the sun, to hold the Barsom (Strabo XV. p. 733. ed. Casaub.). But the Talmud ( Joma 77 ^), and after it the Jewish interpreters (Eashi and others) have understood by .IliMT in the passage of Ezek. crepitus ventris, with reference to v. 16. ?li53T {ynthsuff. in-) f. thought, think- ing, Ps. 17, 13 my thinking did not go beyond my mouth. The form is like mm, niVn Ps.77, 10, ni^B; prop, an infin. with the termination 6th, which prevails in lib; and as such 6th is not the plural-sign here. D1DT (not used) intr. according to some:'io rage, to riot, of a multitude of people, or the tumult of peoples, therefore from l3T = Stl, redupl. DlUt = Dp?2ti , Ar. |«yo\=|>g«!t ; but better from DT = DS, Ar. *\, Syr. >=i in the sense of to bind firmly, to bind together, hence to be dense , tight , powerful , a like transition taking place in flip; deriv. CIT72T , Ar. *.^' r/^ &c. The DDl 396 "IDT Sanskrit jam, Greek yafi may also be- long to it. — 2. Figurat. to meditate, to devise, as a spinning of the thoughts together, to think, either in a good or indifferent sense, with the accus. of that which one thinks of, Peov. 31, 16 she thinks of a field and acquires it; with the supplement of rtias Gen. 11, 6; or in a bad sense: to meditate upon evil (on chastisement, punishment) Detjt. 19, 19 ; Jer. 51, 12; and in both senses Zbch. §, 14 15; with b of the person: to de- vise plots (ni?3T?3) against one, Ps. 37, 12. Deriv. nsiTJ ni)2T, d?2T. — In Ar. IT •' I -' ITT GS ^ the verb |vu<, or f*ys>', |»ys>. has this meaning; in Hebrew we find in a'lN a cognate image. Pih. (redupl.) QTMT, see above tiTaf. Hif. dTli (not used) 1. to think, to me- ditate; — 2. to devise plans, to lie in wait for, to intrigue, hence also to act criminally; — 3. to act prudently, con- siderately; deriv. frata. □OT (with suf. iaMT) m. plan, pur- pose; 't p''Bti to fulfil the purpose, Ps. 140, 9.^ ' ■■ }1 (Jut. 'I^T';) tr. to number^ to mea- sure out, hence to arrange, to determine; in Kal only I573r Gen. 11, 6 and ^MT Detjt. 19, 19 according to the Sam. cod., for which Dnr stands in our text. — The organic root is ]a"T , which is also in n-5a. Deriv. IMt' pT. IT T 'it:' 'r: Puh. ']MJ {part, lara) to he appointed, arranged; only in tie latest Hebrew EzR. 10, 14; Neh. 10, 35; 13, 31. yi2\ (only sing?) m. an appointed, de- termined time EccLBS. 3, 1 ; respite Neh. 2, 6; a later word for nsia and nS; Ar. (jL«\, Malt, zmyn the same. yO\ Aram. m. the same, Dan. 2, 16. I^T (Peal unused) Aram. tr. same as Hebrew 'JMT to number, to apportion, to determine, Ajc. iO"^)- Ithpa. I. 'J^'l'Trt to determine mutually, to agree together, Dan. 2, 9 K'ri; the K'tib may, perhaps, have read Tatii (like the Hebrew Ifsni); LXX avvsi- naa&s, Theod. avvd&sa&s. In the Targ. and Samar. version for the Hebrew 1?ii. Besides, the Targ. has also the Pa. ^iaT, Ithpa. II. yifjVn, see Ithpa. I. Af. IMTrt to determine, to agree Dan. 2, 9 K'tib, where perhaps Ta-Trt must be read; more frequent in the Targ. ■jyOT {def. NSMT; pi. ')"'|!?3T, def. N=;1?3T) Aram', m. an appointed time, JSiaT sa aJ «Aai '1T (to sow the field). — 2. (according to the Targ., LXX, Aq., Symm., Vulg. and Syr.) to cut off, grapes, i. e. to gather the vintage; deriv. Tiat (according to some). — The fundamental signification of the stem, which the noun TiBT (according to some), Nif. 'lan, Pih. lat belonging to the noun rrisiTa, Hif. T^aTIrt to the noun STiaT73 completely establish, is confirmed by the identity of it with _j\ (to prune the vine), m and b being interchanged, from which latter comes Sov (cut off, piece, section, part), Malt. _3\ or »G\ (cutter) &c. Hence it is connected with Ijsn (which see), Ar. !*!», Hebr. Ipr, U. The org. root is la-t , identical with that in 1i-it, ^rj-n IL, rt-ia, Ar. iclj, r T ' r T ' IT T ' ^/^ also the Aram. "IS"!? &c. The other sense of j\ "to be strong, firm", is con- nected with the organic root in "la'S. Nif. 'laM (fut. ^ar) to be cut, pruned, of the vine Is. 5, 6. Pih. 'tizi (not used) to cut off, to snuff, a light; deriv. the noun n'n'aT?a (which ^^] 397 3J1 see), as the LXX on 2 Che. 4, 22 have taken it. Hif. T'MTln (not used) same as Kal: to prune the vine; deriv. rtlMTM. ^DT n. (Kal not used) intrans. 1. to buzz, to hum, i, e. to sing, Ar. vo\ and jj, Targ. 'na'T, Syr. r^\ the same, Ethiopic of the humming or buzzing of bees; comp. Sanskrit swar. — 2. Fig. to sing with the accompaniment of an in- strument, i. e. to play; then to praise, to celebrate, to dance, to leap, as far as song was the main thing in the act. Deriv. rtlMT, nlMT, IMt, IMTM, T'MT, it: •' it: •' viv' I : • \ i-t JTT'aT, T^aT (according to some), the proper names "'^at> P'?t- JPih. THT {fut. liar) 1. to sing, used of the voice, along with 'T'1B(n) Ps. 27, 6; 57,8; 105,2 and •\'p 98,' 4," with which it is identical; LXX vfivsiv. Spec, to celebrate, i. e. to glorify one in song, to praise, to extol, particularly Grod, where the Targ. has naffl; with b Ps. 9, 12; 47, 7 ; 147, 7, "bt? 59, 18 or the accus. of the object 47,7; 57,10; 108,4. dfflb 92,2 orOTB 7,18; 66,4, or also Dffl liM is often put paraphrastically for the name of God. Sometimes also InTiSS 21, 14, T3» 59, 18 stand as the accusa- tive. Tias liar is to celebrate in song gloriously or magnificently 30, 13; but 11133 -BN fTTHTN 108, 2 .denotes: 1 altogether, I myself, will sing praise (lia3 = lIJB5 self, a periphrasis for the pronoun); 'ii^b^ 'T 92, 2 to sing praises with elevation; b''3tea 'T 47, 8 to sing a *b"'3t3M (which see).' — 2. to play, with 3 of the instrument, as basa Ps. 33, 2, -lisaa 98, 5, t|na 149, 3, prop, to ac- company the song with instruments, as was customary in ancient times; LXX ■^dlXsiv (prop, to finger, to touch). IBT (pi- def. mx'ysi) Aram. m. a singer, a temple-singer, Ezr. 7, 24, Ar. y^j- IMT (from '■mi to hop, to spring, Ar. Jjo\) m. a wild roebuck or goat Dbut. 14, 5, so named from its springing, Targ. NS'''!. The acceptation giraffe (LXX, Graeco-Ven. fw^a/tqoioff = xiK \ , Ibn G a- nach, Kimchi) is mere conjecture. "l^T (not used) Aram. = Hebr. TaT; deriv. "laT. Pael. lat, like the Hebrew 1WT; de- , I" - ' 1" - ' rivative TaT. IT- "I^T (def. N't) Aram. m. a playing of instruments, Dxs. 3, 5 7 10. liQT (only pi. with suff. t:rt'''n^t) m. branch of a vine, only figuratively of the members of a family, which are included in ')B.5. Nah. 2, 3. See iTniar. tn"l)pT (constr. nv) Z'. 1. sores', tones, of baa" Am. 5,23; song. Is. 51, 3. — 2. J^a most celebrated fruit (Kimchi) Gen. 43, 11, from Tat n.; according to Parchon either from '1)2 1 L the fruit cut of, or = Ar. Sy*j fruit generally, from 'IMT = 'lan , P- . n*iaT see STpiar. IT : IT . JTTaT see nT^aT. IT • : IT • : i'1>pT (renowned viz. is Jah) 1. n. p. m. l' Kings 16, 9 , LXX Zan^Qi; Num. 25, 14; 1 Chk. 2, 6; 8, 36. — 2) n. p. of a country between Arabia and Persia, i. e. between a^5> and Db-'S Jer. 25, 25 ; IT-: IT ■■ ' ' perhaps identical with Zimiri, there- gio arenosa in Ethiopia, apud Pliny (H. N. 36, 25). pPT (the same) re. p. of a son of Abraham by Keturah and then the founder of an Aramaean- Arabian tribe Gen. 25, 2; IChr.1,32. n"11QT (a poetical form for iTna'!, see nits) f. fame, praise, Ilx. 15, 2; Is. 12,"2. 11 (from WT , after the form TCJ from STilIJ; paMse ^T [not "jT]; pi. D''5.'r) m. sort, Mnd, genus, Ps. 144, 13 (where the LXX have taken it = Aram. l]j = W), 2 Chr.16,14; Targ. •)!, Syr. ,J the same. As genus comes from the root yev, gen, so is It from rtST (which see). '(T (P^- eonstr. ''5T) .4mm. m. the same, Dan. 3, 5. D J1 (not used") f »•. same as C15D to wag. n:T 398 to move to and fro, the tail. The organic root is SS'T, £15,"D, -which also exists in I]3 (tl^). A figurative sense is to de- viate, to swerve, to turn off the 'way, hence wi*J<> (deviation, transgression). 33T (with su/. i:35T; ^Z. niaiT, constr. niiST) m. tail, of animals Ex. 4, 4; Judges 15, 4; figurat. end, stump, of a fire-brand Is. 7,4; the crowd (opposite to TUk^n) Dbut. 28, 13, Is. 9, 13, i. e. mean, contemptible; then the part that comes last, the rear, of an army, whence the denominative Pih. S5T (comp. b'n5) to cut off the rear (ait), to destroy the rear, Josh. 10, 19, ■which is explained in Deut. 25, 18 by ' r.*-:r i- t v:r.- - t nJT (part. m. !i3T, fern,. fl5T: inf. ahsol. ITT ^-^ tV ' * IT ' ' !13| , corasfr-. niST ; /m<. Hir , apoc. ir.) mij". prop, to shake out seed, semen emit- ter e, therefore toheget,to cohabit (comp. f'OiXog, prop, mejens), from the organic root !l-5T, cognate with Sanskrit gan, gna, Greek ysv, Lat. gen. In Hebrew only 1. to play the whore, to commit fornication, of men with bsj of the female Num. 25, 1; asually of a wo- man, whether married, i. e. to commit adultery'Kos.3,3, Is. 57, 3, or unmarried Gen. 38, 24; Hos. 4, 13; with accnsat. Ez.16,28, SI 16,17, bs 16,26 or "'pHN (prop, to run whorishly after one) of the paramour 16, 34, with slight modifica- tions of the idea; with bi> of the man. Judges 19, 2 to play the whore upon (the man) i. e. against or besides him, hence it is unnecessary to read iiTSni (Dathe) or nstni (Stnder) ; on the other hand, in Ez. 16, 15 b? is equivalent to a in the first member, to play the harlot upon the name, i. e. trusting in the name to play the harlot madly. Seldom, to play the harlot involuntarily i. e. to be dishonoured Am. 7, 17. Part. fern. tiDlT a harlot, Deut. 23, 19, in full form rtl^N 'T Ez. 23, 44. — 2. Figur. a) to aposta- tise, from God, to commit idolatry (Israel being thought of as the spouse of Je- hovah, God being the husband, and idols being adulterers), with accusal r^' Jek. 3, 1, "^"^niA Ex. 34, 15 of the para- mours i. e. the idols; and also with )'n Ps. 73, 27, ■'pma Hos..l,2, nrtna 4,12, nnn Ez. 23, b', b^a of the person from whom one apostatises whorishly Hos. 9, 1. b) with I'lnt? to run after whorishly, e. g. nias Lev. 20, 6, ab, T:j? Num. 15, 39 ; '1N, Ti5|}'''T!, see Furst, Lehrgeb. p. 202; only in plur. Q'^lilS'j, constr. ■'513T, with sm/. 'r|';il5T , riiSMT) m. 1. whoredom, fornication, Ez. 23, 11, ini'l 'T Hos. 4, 12 the spirit of impurity i. e. of idolatry; tJiSBKi "T TiDn 2, 4 to put away unchastity from the face (Jer. 3, 3, Prov. 7, 13); 'T -ipb; Hos. 1, 2 children of whoredoms. — 2. Eigurat. idolatry. m:T 399 apostasy, sorcery, 2 Kings 9, 22, parallel fiiBUSSi, i. e. the arts of policy. nilT (after the form n'^Sfi.; -uih being like the plur. termination -oth, also with the suff. pi. Jbr. 3, 2, comp. 3, 8 and Dj5''ri^aiB Zeph. 3, 20-; pi. Q-inwi), f. whoredom, fornication, Jbk. 13, 27; Hos. 4, 11; flgurat. apostasy, idolatry "Nxm. 14,33; Ez.23,27. njl (/m«. nir) 1. «r. io ;jMsA forth, to push away, to cast away, e. g. fiftll^?3 Lament. 3, 17 ; to reject, TVsl\ a 2, 7, aia Hos. 8, 3; Ti'l??© ifpiS m'i,'b he (God) rejects thy calf (thy idol) Samaria, as also 8, 3 it is so used (on account of the sudden change of person in the following hemistich [iSN for isis] the LXX, Theod., Quinta, Ar. read nST, the Targ., Syr. and Jerome take it pas- sively to be rejected); with DSM Ps. 89, 39, Cbsti 44, 10 (where the object also stands for TOj); then in a milder sense, to forsake, to leave in the lurch, with accus. of the object Ps. 43, 2; 60, 3 12; 88, 15; 108, 12; Zech. 10, 6, and there- fore with '21S (see Hif.) 1 Che. 28, 9 ; seldom with the object omitted Ps. 44, 24, 74,1; 77,8;89, 39;Lambnt.3, 31, the object being understood from the context, without the verb being intr. on that account. — 2. (not used) intr. prop, to push self away, therefore to lose it- self (of water), to dry up, to flow off, according to the LXX and Vulg. ; deriv. ttiTN, the denom. tTiiTiS^l, and the n. p. it:-' - !■:-•• IV ' _ _ -t tliST. — The fundamental signification of the stem is not = Ar. ^^S or 'A-i-M to stink, to be rancid, for '^Hit cor- responds to these; but, like the funda- mental signification of HDiS, pST (which •see), to press forwards or onward, to cast away, as also the Syr. ■-Di\. Hif. niitrt (Jut. n-ist:;) to reject, t]ib3 (the holy vessels) i. e. to desecrate 2 Chr. 29, 19, to cast off, with 'ja from a thing 11, 14; to leave in the lurch 1 Chr. 28, 9. pi a stem incorrectly adopted for )l, see Tin and "it. ITT 'I- l^T pJT (Kal unused) trans, same as Syr. vnJi to press forward, to shoot (an arrow), to reject (therefore identical with nST in its fundamental meaning), then intr. to leap forth, to spring forward, of a beast of prey. Arab, (transpos.) ijyj. fi"!)?'. see pT. -^ Pi. pST {fut. pat';) intensive: to leap forth with violence, to ireah forth, to break out {Ibn Esra, Kimchi), with 1M of the place Deut. 33, 22; comp. Talm. p3T (Nid. 59 "; Chul. 37 ») to shoot forth, to rush forth, of blood; p15t (Sebach. 25 •>) the rushing out, of water, which has been abeady compared in part by Ibn Gan&ch. nV] (not used) intr. same as 5*T I. (sit) to be terrified, to tremble, from which the noun T\1S.^_ may be explained. See HIST and TOT. iT-:r 'iT-rr nUT (constr. nST, from SM II. as in IT" * l~" ~ < Talmudic the Hif. is V^IH, whence the enlarged stem 5>t-j, Ar. c \j, has arisen) /. sweat, prop, what drops out. Gen. 3, 19; Syr. l^^l^o?, Talm. NS'^T. See VV. ^12? T (usually considered to be from (T —."I" WIT [which see] transposed, like fnb? out of inbl?, from ?1T I.) /. fear, terror, Deut. 2§,' 25; Ex. 23, 46; elsewhere merely K'ri Jeb. 15, 4; 24, 9; 29, 18; 34, 17 ; 2 Che. 29, 8. It is possible that a stem !iS>T = 5>«iT I. should be assumed ITT - I for the form !115>T., which the proper name 'lli'T seems to favour. 'iT-:r l"!?.!. (fear-maker, see TlW_) n. p. m. GenV36,27; 1 Chr. 1, 42. " '' T^yt (a form more frequent in Ara- maean) m. a little, Is. 28, 10 13 there a little, here a little; adv. a little while, fiiKQov, parumper, paulisper Job 36, 2, of time, as it is also in the Targ. for Hebr. ti'i-q. "T'Si'r Aram. adj. m., ll'r'Vl f. little^ small, 'oi a horn Dan. 7, 8, Hebrew TV'S:. r T T]^] (Kal not used) intr. only another m 400 pVi orthography for "rjSI (which see), to ex- tinguish; hence Nif. ^'S\'i figur. to he extinct, of D'^W'^ Job 17, 1, where many mss..ah'eady read liyii , and the Targ. and Syr. use the same.' Dyj (fut. ti3>r Num. 23, 8 and dyr Pkov.24,24; imp. Ha5>j Num. 23, 7 for !iM3>t) intr. to roar, to foam, as the Ar. iT-:ir ' . jvi) (V.) and the cognate Mediterranean prove (see layt); then io he irritated, excited, enraged, to he angry, to rage; spoken of God, to perform judgment , to punish, to he ready to punish, Ps. 7, 12; to give vent to indignation Mal. 1, 4; to curse, with accus. Num. 23, 7 8, Zbch. 1, 12, seldom with h^_ Dan. 11, 30; D1i>T. ""^ Prov.22, 14 one cursed or punished hy God; figur. of a measure: to Je cursed i. e. scan* Mic. 6, 10. Syr. >ai.^ the same. Nif. DIStS to he angry, irritated, fret- ful, QiMytS D'^SS a fretful countenance Pkov. 25, 23; cognate in sense D"'B5»T Gen. 40, 6. 0?T (with s«;f. ''???t) m. wrath, judi- cial anger, Ps. 69, 25 ;' Zbph. 3, 8 ; 'T "^bB Is. 13, 5 mst?7«?»«rats of punitive wrath, comp. 10, 5 'T rtEja; intensive SljS 'T Lament. 2, 6, for which !:]»T stands else- where, Is. 30, 30; threatening 30, 27, joined with fisiU; time of punishment, time of persecution. Is. 10, 25; 26, 20; Dan. 8, 19; 11, 36, comp. 1 Macc. 1, 64; 2 Macc. 8, 5; Baruch 2, 13; excitement, ■ehullition, zeal Jim. 15, 17; curse Hos. 7,16. n^j I- (A*- n^'5'^' '"/'• ■^^^ *"^- '^??^ iratj*. to foam up (of the sea), to boil up (of anger), to he violently maved, i. e. to be angry, 2 Chr. 26, 19, with by of the person; to be provoked, with D» of the person, ihid.; to be excited, ill-humoured, disturbed, then to he sorrowful, fallen, of Q'^SS, either as the effect of sorrow Gen. 40, 6 or from bad nourishment Dan. 1, 10, = a^T5 Prov. 25, 23. Deriv. tiyj and tl?t- The fundamental signification of the stem lies in the being violently moved p»T, !Tp5>T. hither and thither, to which the Targ. C]ST (Ps. 59, 9 for Hebr. 1,?to), whence n'b?1 a storm (for ^i^D or nsib), and the Samar. q^T to snort at (Gen. 2, 7) refer; and it coincides only accidentally with D5»T. In Ar. v-j'"^ ^o frighten, to scare, i. e. to move violently, corresponds to it. The Hebrew r)?D II. whence nsiD (which see) is wholly identical with it. The organic root lies also in Clffl'S , ^'^'^^ fiyMl. (not used) intr. to glow, to hum (%yr. ^^\ in Ethpe.), whence some derive the meanings of Sl?T I. also; cognate ain:a, sri|, SNT &c. From this comes the quadriliteralS)?bT (which see), by the insertion of an I. PJJT adj. m. angry, irritated, excited, 1 Kings 20, 43; 21,4; along with "ID. t)JJT (with suf. is5»l) m. anger, Peov. 19, 12; 2 Chr. 16, 10; rage, violence 28, 9; judicial anger (of God) Mic. 7, 9; joined with t]N it strengthens the idea Is. 30, 30, as' with D?T Lament. 2, 6; figurat. violent roaring (of the sea) JoN. 1,15, comp. "maris ira" (Ov. Met. 1, 330). pyT {fut. pyr, imp. p5>T, inf. constr. p5>T and pST [according to some]. Is, 30, 19"; 57, I's) intr. a later form of the older p?a (which appears in the Pen- tateuch), to cry, to lament, with hs Jee. 30, 15 or a over Is. 26, 17, witi \ for one 15, 5, 'Jer. 48, 31, with ''SDbia of the person, on account of one 1 Sam, 8, 18, with accus. of the object Is. 14, 31 or of the means 2 Sam. 19, 5, or also absolut. 13,19; Jee. 47,2; along with b-^b^i, b-'b-'n 48, 20; Ez. 21, 17. Usu- ally in the sense to cry to, to implore God for help, with bs Ps. 22, 6 or "3 of the person 1 Che. 5, 20; to enlnrtat, with accus. of the person Judges 12, 2, Nbh. 9, 28, or also with accus. of the thing over which Has. 1, 2, or with accus. of the direction whither one supplicates 2 Chr. 32, 20; figurat. of lifeless things Hab. 2, 11; also to call Ez. 9, 8. Deriv, pI^T 401 Nif. P5T3 to be called together, to as- semble, Josh. 8, 16; Judges 18,22 23; 1 Sam. 14, 20; with '^'inN to assemble after one, i. e. to follow his party. Judges 6, 34 35. Sif. p''»Trt 1. to ei'y to, to call, Jon. 3, 7, Job 35, 9, like Kal, after the man- ner of many intransitive verhs. — 2. to call together 2 Sam. 20, 4. The stem 'T (Targ. p3>T, Syr. ^1, Ar. (3^) ^^^ l^*''^) together with its older form pSS, is =SN1B, out of which the medial radical sound may be easily perceived as an elongation of the d of the organic root pT , pi£ , affl ; just as the Ar. ^3-*^ (t° sound), ^ (to cry out), jtiLo (to crow), *iu*/ (the same), Lj\ (to shriek), 25 (to sound), ^Lo (to shriek) refer to a simple organic root. pST (with suff. ^)5».T., 'r\'p_-) m. cry, Is. 30, 19 ; but in 57, 19 it may be taken as an infin. prt (in the Targ. 3 p. pi. aiB 1 Chr. 23, I'^or S'^Mia Na r T r T ' I' ^ ". J^ Josh. 23, 2. — The fundamental signi- fication has been assumed to be to be de- caying, bowed, cwved, with an appeal to the Ar. ^O (to be bent), (j-i'"^ (de- caying); or linguistb have gone back to IP t and the Arabic forms connected "iTT with it. But looking at the words cog- 26 E liate in sense, viz. I25'i2ji (Aram. ffliB)?) and ilia, it is better to put the organic root ')p_"T in juxta-position ■with the Lat. can (canus, can-ities), softer sen (sen-ex i. e. sen-ec-s). Derivat. "fpj (adj. and snbst.), i)?T, rt2);T, di3;5T. Hif. yprn (fut. )''pv) to grow old, to shew age (see 1l5"''ll»t7, T^abn), of men Peot. 22, 6, of plants Job 14, 8 ; comp. "senescunt prata" (Plin. 18, 28). IpT (from p.T; eonstr. yp_1, -with suff. ■'?.)?! rcij??H) »»• (f^- Is- 15,2; Jek.48, 37) properly the sprouting hair on the chin, hence the beard, a bearded chin, of men Lev. 14, 9, Ez. 5, 1, Ezr. 9, 3, along with Viik'^ ^yto or fflis'l; seldom of the hair of the lion 1 Sam. 17, 35. Ar. i^b , Syr. P-bj. Applied to it are nVa 2 Sam. 10, 4, S^.J Jer.48,37, STJ Is. 15, 2, nso 7, 20,' ri72tt 2 Sam. 10, s! ' ' IT T ' ' r T ^ The Ar. is also applied to the hairy parts of the sexes, to the lower part of the body. The Greek ysvsiov, yivvg, xovvog, Lat. gena, German Kinn, have their origin in like manner from the idea of sprouting. ]j3t {eonstr. 1)p_'r Gen. 24, 2; pi. Q'^p.p.T, eonstr. "'5)5'; , with sujf. i3);t , once L niip.T Zech. 8, 4) f. old, grey, with age. Gen. 25, 8, with Qiai 3>aia a-iai N^M aged 35, 29, Jer. 6, 11; coupled with the nouns ©"iN Judges 19, 16, N-^SS 1 Kings 13, 25, rrilart bi»S Judges 19, 22 &c.; with V^ following, older than Job 32, 4. — 2. Substant. a) an old man, oppos. to the -IW Gen. 19, 4, Jer. 51, 22, d'^a; bw Is.' 65, 20, lina Jer. 31, 13, and joined with 125125'' 2 Chr. 36, 17, Miito (ffl-'N) Lev. 19, 32, whose ornament are grand- children Prov. 17, 6, and gray hairs 20,29 (comp. 16, 31). n;a i)5.T Gen. 24, 2, pi. n^S i5)?T 50, 7 -aD| , in the Targ. for 6*iB3, iib'i, -whence to hang up (in Aram.). The organic root is also in the Sanskrit skab', Greek axi]7t, axan, Ijatin scap, scip &c. ^li^l {part. pass. !:]'')5T) Aram, the same, but also in the meaning to raise up (a cross), to hang up Eze. 6, 11; Syr. ppT I. (not used) tr. to bind, to at- tach, Targ. pfyt the same, hence y^p^pl, fettered (Is. 60, 11); Talm. figurat. to bind, to compel, to chain to; comp. Sans- krit sagg, Lat. sequi. The Ar. i^Jjv (to fetter), ;jLjj (bond, fetter) have been developed out of the organic root by n inserted. Deriv. pT I. pDJ n. (not used) intr. to glow, to bum, the organic root pT being iden- tical with that in ns (see Unit), and perhaps with that in pfa; the Targ. pT, whence pIpT (spark) and Np''T (lightning), Syr. U>^\ are the same. Deriv. pT 11. pp^ ni. (fut. pn) intr. to drop through, to trickle through (cognate in root with Germ, seihen, seigen, sickern), and the org. root pT may be identical with that in TfO'i ; prop, to pour (comp. the French couler from the Latin colare); hence ilNb laa >ipTi they trickle (or drop) through as rain with its (rising) mist (whence the rain arises) Job 36, 27. Figurat. trans, to filter, to strain, wine (see Puh.), i. e. to fine it; to purify, metals (figurat.) Job 28, 1, difiisrent in fundamental signification from t(l^. Pih. pjSf to purify, gold, by smelting; then in a moral sense Mal. 3, 3. Puh. pj? T to be purified, e. g. wine from the dregs is. 25, 6; of metals Ps. 12, 7; 1 Chk. 28, 18. IT (jpart. of 'tit) m. see 'TIT ; Phenic. ■nT the same. T ^T. See the redupl. form 1T1T. IT (from IIT n., with suff. 'I'nT) m. a border, ring, hence ledge, edge, of a table, of a chest Ex. 25, 11; 30, 3 4; 37,27; Ar.^^ (according to some), Syr. Ir*! (collar),' the stem of which is X\ Syr. ^\. ^^' ^y^ (from ^1T I. which see) f. same as trnj (as the Samai-. cod. and some mss. read) foreign, bad, therefore 'tV iTiln to become loathsome Num. 11, 20. n^.'lT see I'jiN'iiiSi. 3"1T L (Kal not used) intr. same as D'lT (Kimchi, Levi), to flow, to run off (of brooks, after the snow and ice are melted), therefore equivalent to C|'1T (in q-'T'^t), Ar. Ljj\ (to flow) = Oj6, i_iU (water-channel), v-jj^*/, Oww (the same), Syr. transp. ^'> , Targ. li'it, whence anw (Arab, transp. i-jljV?) a canal; Phenic. a'nT {current) n. p. of a river (Serbes) in Numidia. Puh. a'lT to be flowing, Job 6, 17 at the time they flow (i. e. as soon as they begin to pour themselves out in sum- mer time, from the melting of the ice), they are already dried up. DTI n. (not used) intrans. same as a'lttS II. v-aj-*' to sprout, to grow (see iBnj). Deriv. probably aiJT in the pro- per name baa'n'f. b53'lT (i. e. Vaa^'n'r, begotten in Ba- bylon,' ^wah. 38 « Isaaa 5»pT3i^) n. p. of one of the descendants of David in Ba- bylonia, who led back the first Jewish colony to Palestine Hag. 1, 1; Ezr. 3, 2 ; 4, 2. Perhaps better and more suit- ably from bjga a'lT {shoot of Babylon) ; comp. iTjanili. "ITt (not used) intr. to grow luamriant, to be emuberant, of plants, particularly of exuberant pastures; the Talm. noun 1'lT is luxuriance of branches (Sabb. 103"), wiLLow-branches, whence the denom. npt (Shebi'it ch. 2) to cut ofi" the superfluous boughs. The fundam. significat. is to in- tertwine, to interweave, to entangle, Syr. ??1 (to mix with one another), connected Derivative 26* with "Tito I. r I Ill 404 vnT TIT {willow-bushes) n. p. of a valley Num. 21,12 and a brook Deut. 2,13 in Moab, east of the Dead Sea, which the Jerus. Tai-g. I. on Numb. loc. cit. has abeady translated by willow -brook; it may be identical with t]i:3'ns; \ir\i_ Is. 15, 7 and M315>n bns Am!" 6, 14, a IT i-:iT -r ' ' boundary stream between Moab and Edom, which flows into the Dead Sea; comp. Phenic. Is^art'i'nT n. p. of a river, bs I'l.t n. p. of a city. niT I. (part. rt'iT, inf. constr. nilT; ITT ^^ IV ' ' I : ' fut. STlT';, ap. 'IT";) -, ni5>-; from Sir 11.) eomm. (masc. !• ' I ' l-T •' ^ seldomer) prop, the member necessary for lifting and carrying burdens, there- fore 1. the arm, the lower arm, brachium Deut. 33, 20; of animals, the shoulder Num. 6, 19 ; with N prosthetic 5;hTN Job 31, 22. With relation to this objective meaning, the breaking, crushing, cutting off &o. of the arm is expressed by "lauj Ps. 10, 15 , 5>n| 1 Sam. 2, 31 &c., and is also frequently applied in a figur. sense. The following phrases are also figurat.: na Sji^T a powerful arm Is. 44, 12, T'y !sb 'f an impotent arm Job 26, 2, MB'l 't an arm lifted up, i. e. threaten- ing 38, 15 ; !i^5C3 'T an outstretched arm, i. e. one ready to manifest strength Deut. 4, 34 &c. — 2. Metaphor, power, might, Q^li ■'S'i'nT the powers (might) of his hands Gen. 49, 24; ^toa 'T fleshly i. e. human might 2 Chb. 32, 8; exertion of poiver Ez. 17, 9; pi. fulness of power Dan. 11, 15 22 31, like S^nns (which see), ^gaximv tig^av (Jud. 9, 7). Farther: violence, violent deed Job 35, 9; "r 125"'i« a violent man 22, 8 ; helping power i. e. assistance, help Ps. 83, 9; Jer. 17, 5; Is. 33, 2; hence army Ez. 30, 21, especially in the pi. 30, 22. On the other handy-iT Is. 9, 19 is arm, which the LXX (abeXcpog), Targ. (having in mind the phrase Jbe. 19, 9) incorrectly translate companion, reading ^'i perhaps; and iS'lT Ez. 31,17, which the LXX and Syr. read iynt, may be read IS'IT {his allied troops) and be = niy'-iT 30, 25, if it should not be taken collectively in this passage. Ar. etj5, Aram. NS'i'i, ii>.i? the same. »i'lT(onlypZ.d-'y-iT; from the Pih. of yit I.) m. seeds, garden herbs, as poor food Dan. 1, 12, for which Qis'S'iT is in 1, 16. 511T {pi. fiiyilT, from Pih. of 5»1T I.) ,.. \^ r I"' i-T ' m. seeds, garden seeds Is. 61, 11; 'T i)1X seed of seeds Lev. 11, 37. p]^nT 405 D-11 ft|''T"lT m. (an abridged reduplication for E]"''!?'?! from r|'iT which see) m. usually an overflowing, a copious watering, Ps. 72, 6 as vain-gushes to the overflowing the earth (LXX, Vulg., Syr., Eashi) ; we must there- fore take 'T ='Tb , comp. Syr. li-a* J) (imber) for fi'iT (Job 24,8), Ar. Ovlji, Talm. ^''}.y. (Jom. 87") the same'. But this sense does not suit the parallelism, where one expects the meaning of ts in 'T; and therefore the Targ. and Kimchi have taken 't = Ta , reading the second he- mistich yiN'sjipT (b?) D''a''a'i3, under- standing the stem S]'1T in the sense of Tt-J to shave off, to cut off, Ar. k_>«_ifl (to cut off), Talm. !:ipT. See ripT L and 11. "l^T^T (formed from the reduplicated form 'IT'IT [which see] into a noun) m. girded, firm, equipped, with D';5ri?3 Pkov. 30, 31 one girded about the loins, the designation of an animal swift in the loins, which goes along proud and bold, perhaps the war-horse. Accord- ing to this fundamental signification the LXX, A(i., Theod., Vulg., Targ., Syr., Arab. &c. understand a cock, Ibn Esra an eagle, and in the Talm. (B. Kamma 92'') T'T'IT actually denotes something similar; Kimchi, Levi and others render a greyhound; according to the Talmud (J.Ta'^anit ch. 1) T'T'lT means a fighter, a combatant, and so here a wrestler. But all these meanings are only conjectural; and as 'T stands here beside ffl^n (as leader of the flock), it is probably a periphrasis for the swift- loined, fleet and active stag, whose proud and quick gait is praised else- where (Is. 35, 6 ; Song op Sol. 2, 9 17). The idea of girded is often = vigorous, quick-mowing, as is already shewn by the verb 111 (Aram.) abridged from int to gird, then to he active, swift, Arab. jjs\ (agilis). See It'll and IpT. "ITTI (not used) tr. to gird, the loins, hence intr. to be active, quick, swift in the loins; deriv. T'T'lf. Trom this re- duplicated form has 'arisen the Aram. t'lT in the widest sense, and out of it f'lT (girdle), tit &c. The simple stem is 'lt = 'l5t, It n., Ar. \\; since such a reduplication may be formed from each of these roots. ni] {inf. eonstr. rf^\ ; fut. tTnt';) intr. to break forth (of a birth), to arise (see tTnt , M'ntN), cognate in sense with y"is (Gen. 38, 29), to bloom, to grow up, to rise up (tTTTN), of plants, comp. tl'IS, Ar. iJJo with the same metaphor; to break out, of leprosy 2 Chr. 26, 19, usually, how- ever, to break forth, of "liN Ps. 112, 4; il3;:ia Eccles. 1, 5, Nah. 3, 17, dn Job 9,7; with b of the person on whom the sun rises, "i. e. to see the rising sun Gen. 32, 32, with b? of the person over whom sun-rise appears Ex. 22, 2 ; figurat. of ■^•' lias Is. 60, 1, i''' 60, 2; to appear (see niti'if). Deriv. tTlt, nntN, ■'niTN, ^ it: ■-:*'^ ~i" it:v' r t:v' riTru, and the proper names ti'nt, '^ti'it, it:-. it:-:* it:' The fundamental signification of the stem now given is confirmed by the organic root YTTt, which is also found in n'l"5t (of the breaking forth of sound), n'n"B (of a blossom) &c. ; the Ar. ^y^, Targ. S'l"^^ have the same root. iTlT m. 1. rising, of the sun Is. 60, 3. — 2. {origin, birth, concr. sprout) n. p. m. Gen. 38, 30; Num. 26, 13; 1 Chr. 6, 6; 2 Chr. 14, 8. Patronym. ''rr'it Num. 25, 13, elsewhere 'ins. N"inT (see fTlt) n. p. m. Num. 26, 20; see initN. r t: -- n'^n")T {Jah is appearing)n.p.m. IChr. 5, 32' for which is iTitrnf 7, 3 ; Ezr. 8, 4. ' ' IT : - : • ' ' ' a^lT (from DIJ after the form p^ns, a''5>5 m. (according to Sa'adja, Ibn Esra) same as Q'lT (comp. Dnp. and D"''!)?) a pour- ing rain, a violent rain, the bursting of a cloud Is. 1, 7. But as Di'nt in the pre- ceding hemistich belongs to 'it , and the context speaks of barbarians and enemies generally, it is better, with the Targ. to take it also as the pi. of It. Uy\ I. (Kal not used) intr. same as a^t I., tfnt I., to flow, to pour, to gush forth (with violence); deriv. Dnt, ria^t D^T 406 i?-iT and (according to some) D'^'iT. — The stem is =r|lT, 0\(i, a^J, <>->)), inter- changing a and a vsdth a. PoA. DpT {3 pi. in'nT; comp. ^Y^ 'iSb as Pohel-forms) to pour down, -with the accus. d''a, of the clouds Ps. 77, 18 (Targ., S^.)- mi II. (2 pers. with ««/. tJnM'n'j) «>•• to cut away, to cut off, to snatch away. Ps. 90, 5 thou snatahest them away. Ax. l»wio (to cut off), ^\\ (to tear off). DIT (especially used by Isaiah) m. a pouring rain (violent), a storm, with the addition of D^u Hab. 3, 10, Is. 28,2, coming out of the clouds Hab. 1. c. or down from the mountains Job 24, 8, which drives against the wall Is. 25, 4 or is also accompanied by hail 25, 2; 30, 30, from which people seek shelter 32, 2. n^nt (eonstr. DW'IT, with suff. tina-) f. prop, a /lowing or emission (of seed), an efflux, concrete seed-pouring tube, rod Ez. 23, 20, parallel to 'niBa (the virile membrum), and spoken of the lascivious horse; comp. Jek. 5, 8; 13, 27. Prom the same stem comes the Ar. lj ^\ (water- reed). J^'IT I. {inf. eonstr. ?hT, imp. 5>pT, fut. S''^!''.) *'■• 1. to strew, to scatter, to dis- perse, i. e. to banish, a people, with a among . . . Zbch. 10, 9 ; figurat. to dis- seminate, to spread, e. g. 'liN prosperity Ps. 97, 11; to spread out, to supply copiously, with a double accusat. Jer. 31, 27; Hos. 2, 25. — 2. to scatter seed, to sow, absol. MiCAH 6, 15; Job 31, 8; opposite 1^)? Ps. 126, 5. S'lT a sower Jek. 50, 16. With accus. of the field, to sow, as ^IM'IN Gen. 47, 23, ynist Ex. 23, 10, fTitt'LEV. 25, 4, Ps. 10?" 37; also with accus. of what one sows, e. g. d"'an Jbb. 12, 13, CiiNb3 Lev. 19, 19, most frequently S>'nT Dbut. 22, 9; also nbn Judges 9, 45 ; 'figur. ni'n Hos. 8, 7, h'a'S Job 4, 5, tlbw i. e. to practise Prov. 22, 8, n;5ns 11,' 18, where reward or punishment is looked upon as harvest, or where the seed is regarded as the resolve and the reaping as the action Jer. 4, 3 ; on the other hand 1^^'^\ Hos. 10, 12 means in conformity to (accord- ing to) righteousness, comp. the follow- ing ■'Db; with b? to sow beside somewhat Is. 32, 20; witli bN in ... into Jer. 4, 3. Prom this signification then arose to plant, among men by posterity (see S'lT and Nif. 5»pT5), to fructify &c. — 3. to plant, vines' Is. 17, 10, comp. serere. Deriv. 5>1T , S^TM and the proper name batv'iv or bN5»-- W- ^'pT? (fut. 5>pr) pass, of Kal, to be dispersed Ezr. 36, 9, to be sown Lev. 11, 37; of men, to be propagated Nah. 1, 14, to be impregnated (of a woman) Num. 5, 28. Pih. 5''nT (not used) intensive of Kal. Deriv. S^T, »1'1T and fy'HT. Rih. S'-A to be sown Is! 40, 20. Bif. ^'''iTll to bear seed, with accus. y^l Gen. 1, 4; to conceive seed (spoken of a woman) Lev. 12, 2, where the cod. Sam. has the Nifal. The organic root of the stem lies also in M-1J , ^T-S ; and the Ar. e a ) , Syr. "^'l , Phenic. S>1T &c. are identical with it; -T . ' on the contrary Lat. sero (for seso; sa-en, sow) and the Arab. p)^t to spread, do not belong here. See be- sides, 5»^1 I. i?*ll n. (not used) intr. to lift, to carry, to hold; comp. Targ. i>'i'i and Talm. N'l'i (to bear), Ar. a\i (to contain, hold), and yTl U. above, whence Sll, STTH, r T _ ^ ' - IV ' r : - ' Sanskrit dhri i. e. dhar, Pers. ddr, the same. Out of this fundamental signifi- cation arose the Ar. cvj, Syr. "-i^i? to help, i. e. to support, to assist in bearing; farther to desire i. e. to ask for, to inter- cede with, i. e. to stand for one as a helper. Deriv. S>'"iT, 3>'"iTi«. yni (eonstr. once SpT Num. 11, 7 [see b5rt], with suff. ■'S'lT ; prop, without plur., but with suff. Ci3''3»''iT ISam. 8, 15, which stands for SSS'IT on account of DS'^M'is) m. prop, what is scattered, hence 1. con- crete, seed, of herbs Gen. 1, 11, trees n^ 407 n^T I, 29, corn Lev. 26, 16, plants Eccles. II, 6, even of the slip of the vine Ez. 17,5, like the verb Vrj; but especially seed-corn, fruit Gen. 47, 23, with the addition of the quantity and kind Lev. 27, 16; Is. 5, 10; figurat. a grain, of IS Ex. 16, 31. 'T '1W2 Am. 9, 13, 'T S^'t Jek. 35, 7 to sow. — 2. what springs from seed, grain Detjt. 28, 38, 1 Sam. 3, 15, in full form 't riNian Deut. 14, 22 or also V^^i? 'T. ^^^- 27, 30, oppos. to ysTl I'lB; fruit, produce Is. 23, 3, also denoted" by lB5rt ■'Is and yi^rt bia^ Zech. 8, 12, and in this extension of meaning figur. Jer. 2, 21, like semen; comp. Phenic. 1B"'D 5*"1T , CsQaopoig i. e. -(pig (Diosc. 2, 124) product of the flax-plant. See nffls. Seldom as an abstract, the V IV ' sowing Gen. 47, 24, Is. 17, 12, or sow- ing-time Gen. 8, 22. — 3. seed, of men Lev. 15, 16, which is emitted in copu- lation 19, 20; and besides generally children, posterity Gen. 12, 7; 'T yn: 38, 9, 'T D-'prt 38, 8 to give a posterity; seldom of one child Gen. 4, 25. diiB3N 't ' CT-: IV male posterity 1 Sam. 1, 11; V^l'l chil- dren's children Is. 59, 21. In connexion with names (DiTiaN , \fnii, mi &c.) im- ^ IT T : - ' ' I -:i- ' r T ^ mediate, near posterity are less thought of Jer. 33, 25 ; Lev. 21, 21 ; 2 Kings 11, 1 ; 17, 20. — Figurat. 4. what stands in filial union with a person or thing: with tl^'^'!3^t Mal. 2, 15, Q'^^'-'iS Prov. 11,21, ii '--aiSsi Is. 65, 23, ■<''' -'ias Ps. 69, 37, or ^)5«u" Is. 57, 4, ajni?' Ezr. 9, 2 &c., which may be differently translated ac- cording to the context. — 5. stock, family, race 2 Kings 11, 1; Dan. 9, 1; comp. l^'l, semen, ansQina &c. used similarly. ?'"IT see ?i'nT. y"lT {def. nS'it) Aram. m. = Hebr.ynr 3 Dan! 2, 43, for which n'^S^I is in the Targ. ?nT see yi'iT. ■jyiT (Pihel-form; only;??. d''5>'nT) m. greens, vegetables Dan. 1, 16, identical with d''5>'-|T 1, 12. HIT I. (not used) intr. to flow, to overflow, to flow forth; comp. a'lT, Wn, Ar. Oj6, Syr. -s'i-[ &c. Hh. (redupl.) tint to flow strongly, to pour; deriv. (usually) tl''nT. ?^'^T n. (not used) tr. to cut off, to mow, a meadow; see tl'^T'iT. p"lT I. (fut. phr) tr. to moisten, to wet, to sprinkle (see p^nra), Samar. p'lT (Ex. 36, 36) for Hebr. pi; ; hence 1. witli b? of the place and accus. of the object to sprinkle, to squirt, to squirt up, e. g. D'1 Ex. 24, 6, Ttii "|)3 Num. 19, 13: Ar. I- ' ' IT" 1" ' ' |ijj spoken of injections, clysters. 2. Metaphor, and seldom (of dry things) to scatter, ^SS Job 2, 12, WB Ex. 9, 8, ' IT T 7 7 _ |. 17 altars beaten into dust 2 Chr. 34, 4, ttJN"ibn.i Ez. 10, 2. Eigur. perhaps Hos. 7,9: yea gray (gray hair) is sprinkled upon him; but as p'lt I. is never intrans. and the construction with a does not appear, it is better to refer it "to p'lT 11. Deriv. T?Tr?- Puh. PIT passive Num. 19, 13 20. The organic root of the stem p'l"T (Syr. ^i}, Ar. |W»\) lies also in pp-j I., p'l; and in Pers. rikh-ten, Lat. rz^^-are, Goth. Wg'-us the same root may also exist. (^■m n. (not used) intr. same as niT I i-T ^ . '"» io sfene forth, to shine, to be white, of the grayness of hair Hos. 7, 9. TIT I. (Kal not used) ir. prop, same as 5>'nT, JilT (which see), to strew, to scatter about, Ar. », which is properly ch. Thereby is explained a) the frequent interchange of rt and n in the language itself, or in relation to the dialects (see !i) ; b) the gradual endeavour to make the harder A-sound in Cheth to be heard, in order to distinguish it from !l. As a numeral n , the eighth letter of the al- phabet, signifies 8, fi 8000; as a sound it is pronounced che = hhe. With respect to the pronunciation, n was a strong aspirate uttered from the throat, according to the early separation of it from M. But this guttural was a) still so near the simple guttural h that in the formation of stems a fre- quent interchange could take place be- tween n and n, as Ttbn and 'rtbTi, 'n'^'n and n'jn &c. (see in), so that the LXX (rarely the Latin) represent it by the spiritus lenis, in the absence of the guttural sound in Greek, e. g. liann 'AsQum, pin Avqavmg, ii^n Eva, "^^'n EvuTog, n">ffl"Ki Mmaiag (New Test.), bNTp. Azelus (Justin. 36, 2), n^plb Jovsi&', "ibna MooXei, nbin?3 Msovla, Di'i, ttSan andlliSS, 'Tin II. and 'TIS, ujan and lani, r|bn in. and abs, ^Mn and^MSi, btun and^bms, DilSn and Dns; — 5.'with'p\ e. g. 'in Sqan and ElU]?, fflion and ffltoi?, iiiJn and "itui?, asn I. and' asp, 'nen and ':ap, Tin and inp, ttjin and la^p', aun and aap, nan and nap. — 6.' As y {gK) in the language also attaches itself to the guttural sounds, so Cheth is interchanged with 3», e. g. in asn rr. and aw, sin and 515>, ban and bay, nia Phenic. 5>ia Sam. 5>aa, iijin and my, 1in and I'lS I., bbtt and bb^, trnn and na'», ban and bu», nnn and ^MS I., aan'and ass, apn and a'py in. &'c.' — Besides these normal changes of the cA- sound the following are note- worthy: a) its occasional interchange with the sibilants, e. g. "IT IB (to turn), Aram. Itn.; i;rm and ■tj'h']©; tinyn and HiQaiiog; 'uan "and aa'iu"; !lb''in. and xXi^\ (Sa'adja), ^Vr\ and ISO &(5. — b) At the end of stems it corresponds to the Sanskrit Visarga, e. g. nM-it Sanskrit mah (to sprout), nps Sanskrit rah (to grow) &c. i^n see nn and nin. IT IT ' SnSn see niti. IT T • 2'n (with suf. ■'atl; from aan I.) m. prop.' a hidden place, one guarded round about, hence inlet, bosom Job 31, 33, to cover a thing C|M£:); Targ. tjU?., ti^ay of similar origin; elsewhere aS there. Deriv. usually the denom, aan to carry in the bosom, Deut. 33, 3 also lie bare the tribes in his bosom, which the parallelism appears to favour; see however aafji n. i^Dni. (Kal unused) tr. 1. to conceal, to veil, to hide, to cover, cognate with. ^2n 410 "iDn nsn, inB3, nas, Ar. U&. (also L~» IT T ' IT T ' n T ' • ^ = n|2S)), U&. &c. Comp. ajnri I. — 2. Figurat. to protect, prop, embrace; applied to the voice, to make soft. Nif.s^m (2pers. nxjaW; 3pers.pl. liSahS; mV.'corestr. Nifin: /wf. nSon) 1. «o hide oneself, to conceal oneself Judges 9, 5, 1 Sam. 19, 2, with % of the place where Josh. 10, 17; 1 fe[NGS 22, 25; 2 Chr. 18, 24 to be hid in a chamier which leads to another, i. e. into the most secret one; d''b3Sl"VN among the vessels 1 Sam. 10, 22'; usually with dti Josh. 10, 27 or rt«i© 2, 16. — 2. to he hidden, T IT ' concealed, hence in the adverbial con- struction with nia Gen. 31, 27 to flee . Pih. aS'nn (with r inserted instead of a duplication, as in the case of 05*13; not used) to bind very fii-mly, to gird, Ar. lj< * n~ -, »s vi~» -, (_jwlaa» the same. Deriv. rtaS'nn (which see). DSn (formed from a'^Jtn) adj. m. dug 1" T '' '^ out, cut out Is. 5, 2. to separate, to split, like 'j^n, hence to divide, into two Gen. 32, 8 or three parts Judges 9, 43 , with 'j'^ai . . . ']''a Num. 31, 27, or merely 'j-'a Job 40, 30'; to separate, with ya of the person or thing Num. 31, 42. The original signifi- cation to cut in, to separate, to break through, is still found in Is. 30, 28 it divides even to the neck, i. e. it reaches so far; Ps. 55, 24 their days are not broken through, i. e. they do not live out half their lives. Deriv. isn, niisn, r -:' it' ilXriM , niltna , the proper names ■iNJEn'' iTv:iv' r-:i- ' X- X- 1- : :- Nif. nam {fut. 'n'S.n^, abridged ym) to separate oneself, to be divided 2 EIings 2,8 14; Ez.37,22; Dan. 11, 4. "liSn {an enclosed place, a castle; from ll^fi) 1. n. p. of a Canaanitish city in the north of Palestine, Josh. 11, 1, over aila "'53 i. e. upon the marshy sea or lake Samockonitis , now lake Hu- leh (Jos. Antiq. 9, 11, 1), Josh. 11, 5 7, then the name of a whole kingdom. In the neighbourhood of 'liSsn , over which Canaanite princes ruled under the name of pai Josh. 11, 1, and which was also the head of three kingdoms (lilM, Ti'nnifl, tl^j^as?) 11, 10, lay ■'bnes ttS'^jj. Judges 4, 6, upon "'briBS IJi (Josh. 20, 7), now nsa 1p (G'iIjI Saffad); mp being named together with 'liSrt 2 Kings 15, 29. W^iTt nuj'nn was also situated there. Judges 4, 2. This kingdom of Razor was allotted to the tribe of Naph- tali Josh. 19,36, after Joshua had burnt its capital 11, 19, and slain its king, 11, 10; 12,19. At a later period Canaanites nmn mifn 477 i^ijn had re-establislied it and acquired power over Israel, till Barak put an end to it, JtTDGBS chs. 4 and 5. As it belonged to the Israelite territory, Solomon forti- fied and made it a key towards the north, 1 Kings 9, 15, till Tiglath-Pileser con- quered it 2 Kings 15, 29. — 2. n. p. of ■ a city in Judah Josh. 15, 23 , a lan j?. being there also. — 3. n. p. of another city in Judah, elsewhere called Ti'lStJ. Josh. 15, 25. — 4. re. p. of a city in Benjamin Nbh. 11, 33. — 5. n. p. of a kingdom or territory of a Sheikh be- longing to the nomad Arabs Jee. 49, 28, perhaps named from D'''n5tO: (Is- 42, 11), i. e. wall-less villages. It lay on the other side of the Euphrates, and is mentioned with lip.. "Ti^tO) LXX 'LdawQog, is also the Phenician name of places: e. g. 'niatti , '!AaaovQog (Ptol. 5, 3), n. p. of a city in the district of Car- thage; 1i2tn, Asurae, in proconsular Africa; 'n, 'Aaamgog between Agyrium and Enna in Sicily. nn'Tn niSn {new Sazbr) n. p. of a city of Judah Josh. 15, 25, so called to distinguish it from liSli 15, 23, which was named Hazdr absolutely, or nsid'; 'n (old Haz6r). Sinin is an Ara- maean adj. fem. of nin (which see), and was occasionally put for MtU'it};- C>n the point comp. the Phenic. N^'in (Chadaso, Adaso) or llJin (Chadas, Adas) in names of places, e.^g. ffl'iri DJ?M Makom-Adas, i. e. Maeomades (Plin. 5, 3), Mamvdda (Ptol. 4, 3), N'l^'ir!. nni? Karthadaso, abridged Carthado, 'whence KaQ&ii&w-v. mSiSn see 'n^'^'^n. IT : I -: IT , I . niSrt (after the form nim, ninrt; constr. nisn) f. the middle, e. g. rtb^b Ex. 11, 4. ' '■ iSn (see yn) m. pi. for Q-'itri 1 Sam. 20, 36-38, like ■'19? 2 Sam. 22,44, Ps. 144, 2, ■'p>'n Song op Sol. 8, 2, n.)? Ps. 45,9 ford^B?, Q-'S'S'l, D"'?.'?- iSn (ire pause ■'lip, with suff. rJfn, 15''2ir!)"'m. «Ae half, half part (of a thing divided into two halves), applied to D^ Ex. 24, 6, WT' 26,12, nata 27,5, Itoa Num. 12, 12, = nisn Judges 16, 3, particularly to measures Num. 15, 9; 1 Kings 7, 35. •'anb pbn 1 Kings 16, 21 to divide into two parts, prop, to separate into halves. "TjbB i5Sn Neh. 3, 9 12 16-18 a half district, the district {'^bs) being divided into two that it might be managed more easily. Then the middle Josh. 10, 13, Ps. 102, 25, i'lltHM Zech. 14, 4 out of its midst, i. e. in the midst. Probably too it means the middle point or centre, in the proper names nffiMrt ■'Sn, riripBii '^an. On Maocabean coins ■'ill. is half a bplj^. ''Sn m.. merely an enlargement of yn, which see. nin353in ''Sn (midst of resting-places) n. p. of a locality in Judah, whose prefect (as) is called once fiNI'i 1 ^^hr. 2, 52 (it must have been written fiN"i^ 'ail 'n. ■'SN). Its inhabitants were de- scendants of Salma son of Caleb 2, 54. See nmisn ■'Sn . -i-T- 1--: ntlSBri ''2n (middle of resting-place) n. p. 1. of a locality in Benjamin, whither the inhabitants of 5>as (which see) were driven, and which place is called simply nnw in IChr.8,6. Else- where it is mentioned as JiniSM , as far as which the Israelite army retreating in feigned flight enticed the Benjamites Judges 20,43, an act which is more ex- actly described as done at Wljisin nss. — 2. of a city in Judah, elsewhere named niroiart ■'sn. 1 CHR.2,52,witht3nb nia, neVj;, SNi'^ rr^a ni^jC)?, 5>'iif (='"i?if), whose inhabitants were the posterity of NMb^, a son of Caleb. Derivat. the patron. ^nWIS'n ■'Sn 1 Che. 2, 54, i. e. an inhabitant of 3azi ha-Mandchath, in Judah. T'Sn (lengthened from ISO, comp. ffl123'> and 125>125"') m. 1. (from ISn) «» I" T r T' ' ' enclosed place, a court, a dwelling, gener- ally A., and though the Masora reads ']l£h, it does not alter the meaning. See ISh. ?]^n (Peal not used) Aram. prop, to storm, to rush, like the Hebr. t['£p , Ar. ' "-^-^ (to rush along, of the horse). 1 g *n ^ IV. (to rush along, of a race,) w» *^f' (to be kindled), hence to rage, to be angry, to be severe; in the Targ. for T?ll, consequently also, to be insolent. Af. r|itm {panic, nsana and 'riiia) to shew strictness, rage, severity, applied to Nni Dan. 2, 15, N3ba nViM 3, 22. IT I ' ' IT I - 1- • ' yyn (only in part, ysh) trans. 1. to divide, to partition, into crowds, di- visions, ranks; line or rank being con- ceived of as a segment (comp. Talm. taiCJ'l'aJ a line, from tslid). Hence yah forming ranks, lines (i. e. arranged di- visions), in bands, festival processions and the march of . armies being so de- scribed elsewhere (see Pih.) Prov. 30, 27. Deriv. the proper name TiKSn. — 2. (not used) to cut in pieces, to divide into parts, to separate into pieces, or to break of in splinters, to disjoin (from a larger piece), deriv. ySO; to cut to a point, to sharpen (an arrow), deriv. yt]. — The fundamental signification of the stem is sufficiently clear from compar- ing it with mart, yn, and with ta, Yp_, Arab. {jas>. (to divide, to allot), Talm. yan to cut in, whence Na"'2tn an in- ' I : ' IT • -: cision, a cleft. Pih. ystn to march along in rank and file, to go in ranks, in orderly bands. Judges 5, 11, louder than the cries of men marching in a festival procession well- arranged. yyn 479 iJin Puh. yitn to he cut off, to he shortened, of the days of one's life, hence to he completed, at an end. Job 21, 21; in Ethiopie to be lessened. ySn (butSj-'K^an is from yp) m. that which is broken off, separated (from a large piece), hence a small stone, gravel, whose points hurt; consequently dif- ferent from bin, Peov. 20, 17; Lament. 3, 16; Targ. saiar! (on Pkot. 20, 17), liSSri (from ystn after the form liaS'i from tiS'n, constr. IJian) m. a row, of trees, only used in union with "nan, conseq. *TOn tl (palm-rows, palm-forest) n. p. of a place between iBIp and the south end of nbtert d;;, as far^as which point the Phenician race "''ibN dwelt Gen. 14, 17; comp. Judges 1, 36. At the same place is the present Kumuh still existing in ruins {Bohins. HI, 178 sq. 186 sq.). nttn fasp (see lan) is ob- viously identical with IMn Ez. 47, 19; 48, 28 , the southernmost boundary of Palestine; with Qa/xaQci of Eusebius (Onom. s. V. Hazazon Thamar), which was distant a day's journey from ^'lan on the way from the latter to rib''??, and where a garrison was stUl in his day; perhaps also with ^nn "in the wil- derness, in the land" 1 Kings 9, 18 K'tib, which Solomon fortified. In 2 Che. 20, 2 this place is identified with •<'[Si )' Ez. 47, 10, now 'Ain el-Fesh- kah (Bohins. 1. c. p. 491), being situated in the same westerly direction, towards the north end of the rib^rt b\ See r: ' r ■jSSn see yaian. nSSn Pihel-form of the stem IJtn (which see). »TlSin (pi. nil", contracted out of niX'nSr!) /. a trumpet, used when the people were being called together Hos. 5, 8, at public festivals of joy 2 Kings 11,14, at sacrifices 1 Che. 13, 8 &c., and whose different signs were more exactly denoted by 5>)p_ri, yi'n!i. It is coupled withd^nbatt IChr.16,42 and ^Biiij Ps. 98, 6, without being identical with them. *1^n (not used) tr. to enclose with a hedge, to enclose, to surround, a fortress, a court, connected with Tin, 'nitS, 'nty, 'ITN, 11!5ri, lldp &c. ; comp. — tfls>-, whence vLoa*. (a fence, a fort), JtLs>- (to en- close, to lock, to bar). Deriv. I^^r T'Stn I, the proper names ni'nssn, "niitn, "nifn (Kal unused) intr. 1. to sound shrill, to clang, to peal, of the clear and bursting voice of man, of musical instruments; cognate in sense bbn, bbit. This idea proceeds from that of shining, glittering, being clear; the same metaphor happening in bbii and other words; ac- cordingly the organic root is 'n¥"^r which is also found in 'ifiT (which see)^ 'nilSt with the initial sound enlarged. See Pihel. — 2. to hloom, to he green, to sprout forth, Ax. /->a^, particularly applied to the first glistening green. The same metaphor is also in 'iJii (Ar. JbC flower), yits &e. Deriv. T^isn 2. Pih. I. ^Stn (part. d'^'lSriM K'ri) to sound, with the trumpet, to blow the trumpet, 2 Che. 5, 13 K'ri, where the K'tib has the Pihel-form IMan (part. dnajtriM). Pih. li. Titian (for litn, with Dagesb resolved, hence part. d'^'lJtariM) to blow the trumpet 2 Che. 5, 13 K'tib. Pih. III. 'Ti.Siri (with the last radical repeated, as in 'jiS'i, 15N.125,. another mode of gradation or intensity; part, U'^^'l^h'a K'tib) to sound the trumpet 2 Che. 5', 12 K'tib, where the K'ri has the Hif d'^'iSintt. pa. IV. ISitn (contracted from Ij^l^d, as bTNTS. from b'jbTS., Aram. 'lUton. from initin;' vart. IKlsna) to blow the trum- nyn 480 p^n pet 1 Chr. 15, 24; 2 Chr. 7, 6; 13, 14; 28, 28 in K'tib, for which the K'ri reads Qi'iaiitt in all these places. Deriv. IT : 1 -; Hif. lanh (only paH. Q'^'nStritt K'ri) to sound the trumpet, to blow with the trumpet 1 Chr. 15,24; 2 Chr. 7, 6; 13, 14; 29, 28. "iSn {constr. lan, with suff. i'l^f.) pi. B^'iltn with c. ■'^l£"n, and ni'isn with ponstr. riTnltti, from 'iSn) common gend. 1. a court, atrium, of a palace 1 Kings 7, 8 , of a temple 2 Kings 21 , 6, parti- cularly of the fore-court, hind-court, or middle court of God's temple; prop, an uncovered space enclosed on every side, therefore a court-yard Ez. 40, 14, more exactly described by '^M"'??!! 40,19 28, liipinrt 47, 16 or nsb'-in "2 Kings 20, 4, wiJi^n Ez.40,31, mz^iB 1 Kings 6, 36. ^''S is put for it even m the K'tib 2 Kings 20, 4, because of its fun- damental signification, ^^ti was also a guard-court or prison belonging to the royal castle, denoted more precisely by nna'art Jer. 32, 2, Neh. 3, 35, being also found in private houses Ex. 8, 9, 2 Sam. 17,18, and ingardens Esth. 1, 5; sometimes also of the court of the holy tent Ex. 27, 12. nilUp ni'isn Ez.46, 22 courts bridged over (see 113)?). -^ 2. a village, a hamlet, villa, vicus, which though not enclosed by walls Lev. 25, 31, is still enclosed within itself, differ- ent from iiT'tp a moveable camp (Ps. 69, 26) Gen. 25, 16, and usually belonging to city districts Josh. 13, 23; chs. 15. 18. 19; Nbh. 12, 29; it is seldom the encampment of nomadic tribes, which commonly consisted of a circle of tents Is. 42, 11; Ps. 10, 8. — Many names of places are compounded with 15£H, like the German ITof, such as T^N-ll^n {Addar-court, see Tin) n. p. of a city in the south of Judah near Edom Num. 34, 4, probably used for ^iian (because Hezron is omitted), and conseq. different from Tin Josh. 15, 3. Tin (Addar) appears to be identical with IIN, the name of a God (see '^b'jS'n'iN, •^il??.) '^7^) TIN, lyainN); comp! Mai- can'der (Plut^ de Isid. 13) = 11N "^hli, with n inserted; Adramytos (Xan- thus apiid Ath. 12. p. 515) = riTO-TlN; Amandra (the original name of the Greek Iconium, because the Assyrian Perseus planted the pillar of Adar) = TIN ]l3n &c. rt'ia lan {Gadda-court, see fTiS p. 263) n. p. of a city in Judah Josh. 15, 27, probably named from the Gadda-wor- ship that took place there at one time. tiDlD ISn (horse-court, i. e. court of IT I — ; ^ the horses of the sun, in the sun-wor- ship) n, p. of a place in Simeon Josh. 19, 5, but called in 1 Che. 4, 31 isn d'^SlD; comp. as the designations of places riasTan n-ia, tt5M«5 n^a. On the heathen I T : V - 1" ' •.• IV I" worship of the sun with consecrated steeds and chariot see 2 Kings 23, 11. In Phenician the proper name OO'IBS Cabarsus in Byzacium and the proper name masc. Dp&"iay (Kit. 2) are also to be derived from this worship. D1D1D -iSn see nOlD ISO. •jlSij; 1^5 {court of the holy fountain) n. p. of a place in the north eastern point of the holy land, at the border of Damascus Ez. 47, 17, called elsewhere IS-'S IJSn Num. 34, 9 10; Ez. 48, 1. 'it "I--: ' ' ' l)^*'5> is the Phenician pronunciation of ']5''»; the worship of fountains is known from ■tt37aij|-'ji;?, IteTr? &c. i^y^v isn see lipii* lan. b»1^ iah. {court of jackals) n. p. of a city in Simeon Josh. 15, 28; 19, 3; Neh. 11, 27. Names of places and dis- tricts are sometimes denoted by bsillj, 'ji3''rirT''i:£ri {the middle ISr, to dis- tinguish it from two other neighbouring ones) n. p. of a locality towards the border of Hauran, the most easterly point of Palestine towards the north Ez. 47, 16. i"lSn see illtn. I : V I" : V lilSn 1. (fromlSri; blooming, beauti- ful) n.p.m. Gen. 46, 9 12, Greek 'EcQa/t (Matth. 1,3); patr. "'jinan Num. 26, 6. — 2. (from l^tl; hamlet) n. p. of a city in Judah Josh. 15, 25, elsewhere "liSh 15, 23. nniin 481 npn nnSn (hamlets) re. p. of a station of the Israelites in the Arabian desert Num. 11, 35; 12, 16; Deut. 1, 1. "'"ISn (same as li^ian 1) «-i'- «• 2 Sam. 23, 35 K'tib, for which the K'ri and 1 Chr. 11, 37 have i'lSn = p'lan. riansn l. n. p. of the third son of the Arabian progenitor ■jajji in the eth- nographical table Gen. ib,'^26, 1 Che. 1, 20, prop, the name of an Arabian race which was a branch of the Jok- tanites, having their seat in the district Chazarmavet (Ar. viyj^ol^is. , i:ijmJoK., «iJ^-). — 2. {court of Mat, i. e. of the God of the lower world, Pluto, which ria signifies in Sanchon. p. 36; comp. nTO''nN) n.p. of a district east of Yemen on the Indian ocean {Niebuhr, Arabien p. 283-94), where there was abundance of frankincense, myrrh and aloes, which became articles of commerce. But it was very insalubrious and destructive to the inhabitants (Beresch. rab. ch. 37 ; AiT. Peripl. 9, 7; Agatharch. 10). It was originally an emporium of the Phe- nicians, who called it niJJ'ian (Samar. riia"''l5tn) on account of its injurious climate. The Hebrews changed 1^)73 into ma, which they did also in the case of'mabst for niabst (from oblt), V IT : - I : - ^ I- T " and of the proper name maT5» for mat^. The Arabs retained it as a foreign word, wavering in the last syllable between Mut and Maut; and as another, foreign (Phenician) dialect was spoken there, ^ ^ (I ^ they formed out of it a verb *s in~v harlare loqui, though this verb has not the remotest connection with the appellat. signification of the place. "llSn Pihel-form of 12n which see. I" : • I" T pn I. bosom, lap, see p"'fi. pn n. (only constr. pi. "^"ifjiTl, in a re- solved form like ibbx, "laa?; fromp]p.n) m. a regulation, decree, "n ppn Is. 10, 1 to make a regulation; ab 'n decrees of the heart, i. e. well grounded Judges 5, 15, for which ■''l)?ti (counsellings) is put in 5, 16 by way of irony. ph (before Makkeph -pn, with suff. "''F'^' ni?"?' ^^° Hi?'"?; p^- o^if.n, c. ■'ipn, with suff. '^■'IjJn, 'v^T\\ from '■ Pip. n) 'w. prop, marked in, engraved, hence 1. a thing firmly established or determined, a statute Gen. 47, 26 , with UBiaia 1 Sam. 30, 25; custom, usage Judges 11, 39; 2 Chr. 35, 25 ; particularly a law Is. 24, 5, or also collect, laws Ex. 15, 25 ; hence the phrases ph DiU ibid., 'n ■jnj Ps. 99, 7, 'n nab Ezr. 6,"l0, 'n t-lias Deut. 6, 24, 'n 'latu 1 Kings 3, 14, 'na nbii Ez. 11, 12; and in the plural also. It is distinguished from aST^a by this, that it appears as an absolute thing, without a motive, and therefore it means decree, ■'j?!! Job 23, 24 what is decreed for me; a determination, of God Zeph. 2, 2; fig. a definite, appointed time, e. g. of the re- gularly returning rain-season Job 28, 26. — 2. what is determined, meted out, allotted, and therefore what is imparted Gen. 47, 22; Prov. 30, 8; a task, what is proposed Lev. 10, 14; an appointed inheritance Ezek. 16, 27; due, income 45, 14; allotted food Prov. 31, 15. — 3. bound, limit, applied to space Micah 7,11; Prov. 8, 29 ; Jbr. 5, 22 ; boundaiy, circle Job 26, 10; shore 38, 10, hence 'n 'naia to break off the rocks of the shore, probably frompn=pn (which see). Fig. limit Job 14, 5; ph ■'bab Is. 5, 14 bound- less, measureless. — 4. bosom, interior = pn. Job 23, 12 / kept the words of his mouth more than my interior; so the LXX. ph-bijPs.2,7=ph-nN, bs stand- ing for riN. T\pr\ (Kal unused) tr. same as p)j>_n to cut in, to hew into, to engrave, hence to carve, images; to draw, to paint; comp. yqaqisiv. Ml. Uph {part. fl)?nn) to be engraved, carved, painted, with b» in or upon a thing 1 Kings 6, 35; Ez. 8, 10; 23, 14. Hithp. Mp^nnfi ifut. ti)?nn^) to put a circle or limit (ph) about (b») a thing, Job 13, 27 thou puttest thyself as a limit round about the roots of my feet. Perhaps it is a denom. from ph. nijin {constr. npn; pi. niSh)/'. a law. ^Dpn 482 ^pn determination, ordinance, proceeding from God Ex. 13, 10, of nos 12,43; the pi. in Lev. 18, 4 ; of heathen laws Jer. 10, 3, i. e. idolatry, Mic. 6, 16 the idolatrous ordinances of Omri; then an established, appointed time, of liit)? Jer. 5, 24, of the laws of nature 33, 25; customs, mores, 1 Kings 3, 3. NS^pn {urging on, incitement, viz. Jah is) n. p. m. EzR. 2, 51; Neh. 7, 53. npn (not used) intr. to bend oneself, to be crooked, Ar. v_BJia>, identical with ian belonging to asn4 and Nian ; more correctly perhaps = tjSN (which see) to urge on, to drive on; deriv. the proper name NSIpn. ppn (i. e. prt; 2 pers.'n'ipn, with suf T'r'PD) pO'i't. act. p'pjt, part. pass. "p^pTl; inf. constr. ph, with suff. 'ifTi; imp. with suff. rtjSn) trans, same as ri-pn: 1. to cut into, Hew into, to dig, plUM (a dwelling), with 13 of the place Is. 22, 16; to in- scribe^ in ^SD, with b? 30, 8 (Greek yQacpsiv), in Msab Ez. 4, 1, fig. ti';s3-bs Is. 49, 16; to trace, pourtray Ez. 23, 14. — 2. Metaphor, to establish, to lay the foundation of, 3lrt (the arch of heaven) = y-')?'! Prov. 8, 27 ; yiN ■';i£)'iM 8,29. — 3. Fignr. to prescribe, to ordain, to give laws Is. 10, 1 , part. pj5,ifl = pp.ni? law- giver, leader, ruler Judges 5, 9. Deriv. Pih. pnh {part. pp.n?a and pp h ; fut. pp.in^) to engrave, to inscribe, laws, hence to decree Prov. 8, 15, where pIS is an adverb; to lead, rule, pp.n?3 law- giver Judges 5, 14, Mng, leader Is. 33, 22, ppha rip_bn Deut.33,21 the portion ap- pointed by the lawgiver; pph?3 metaph. a sceptre, the instrument and badge of a ruler (Horn. II. 2, 86. 101. 279 ; 3, 218 ; 14, 93) Num. 21, 18; Ps. 60, 9; 108, 9, therefore the parall. Il5i<'i Ti^a (strength of the head = helmet) 60, 9 and asia (sceptre) Gen. 49, 10, only poetically for dominion, rule. Puh. p)?ri prop, to be cut, engraved, hence to he established, determined, as right, law; p/J^rra right Prov. 31, 5. De- rivat. the proper name p')?)!. Hof. pnin {fut. pp':) to' be inscribed, engraved, IBBa Job 15, 23. ppn a singular form for the constr. pi. ■')]?,5?l7i see pp II. ppn (with a of motion tij5"; a ditch) n. p. of a city in Asher 1 Chr. 6, 60 (where pplfi is written), situated on the border of Naphtali Josh. 19, 34; but in 21, 31 the same city is named rpbrt, and in 19, 25 t^pbn; which seems, how- ever, to have been a place in the vicinity of ppti) with which it was confounded. This city still appears in the Talmudic period; and is perhaps the present Ja- k6k, four hours from Tabor {Robins. III. p. 133 App.). Ipn {inf. constr. ipti., imp. with suff. ''TS>y^'i /"*• '^')?'7-) trans, prop, to dig, to dig through, to break through, the organic root 'lp."fi being also in '1p."i, lp-a, ip-'n, Ss-T, n-'n3 &c. duly figur. to search out, 1 Sam. 20, 12 ; Prov. 18, 17; 28, 11; to explore Job 5, 27; 28, 27; to spy out, to reconnoitre Judges 18, 2; 2 Sam. 10, 3; to examine, 'iS'i Prov. 25, 2, T,'!^. Lament. 3, 40, a^ Job 29,16. Denv. 'npn, "ipHM. ' '•••i- ' 'it : V Nif. 'ip.tlp. to be searched out, ascer- tained 1 Kjngs 7, 47 ; to be investigated 31, 37; ^)?.ti; ixb = ipn y^. Pih. Ijjn to find out, to exhibit fun- damentally, Q-'b'UJa Eccles. 12, 9. Ipn {constr. plur. "'"npti) m. 1. a searching out, examination, of God and divine things, with ^^ (Is. 40, 28; Ps. 145, 3; Prov. 25, 3; Job 5, 9; 9, 10) or isb (34, 24; 36, 26) unsearchable, un- fathomable, or not to be explored, infinite &c. — 2. a finding out by minute and per- severing investigation, i. e. an investiga- tion exceeding the appointed measure, Prov. 25, 27 and their soul's minute in- vestigation (of divine things) is a burden (see 1^53), i. e. as the eating of much honey is not good, so also is the te- dious examination of divine things bur- densome (comp. Sir. 3, 21-25); or tkb nn 483 D^n ■should be supplied to the last TiS3 , out of the first hemistich, ■with the mean- ing, is not laudable (Levi ben Gershom). — 3. the object or result of searching, ■what is to be searched out, i. e. deep wisdom, philosophy, Job 8, 8; 11,7; the deepest, innermost, most hidden, 38, 16 = *lp™ (Ps. 95,4). — 4. same as pp 11. determination, decision Judges 5, 16. in (only pi. ff^lh, eonstr. ilh, ■with suff. t7"'in; once ti^'yfn Eccles. 10, 17) m. 1. (from "Tin) nohle, free (comp. Aram, in, "'in, Syr. IjI^, At. LL), of the Edomites Is. 34, 12 or the Je^ws Jeb. 27,20, ■who ■were near to royalty 1 Kings 21, 8 11, or out of ■whom kings ■were chosen at the election of a sover- eign Is. 1. c. — Qi1in-)a Eccles. 10, 17 a free one, a periphrasis for the sing. — 2. (from in II.) a hole, a breach, in a ■wall Ez. 8, 7, in a door 2 Kings 12, 10; eye-hole Zbch. 14, 12; hole in the earth 1 Sam. 14, 11; Job 30, 6; hole of prey Nah. 2, 13; but for window, open- ing lin (■which see) stands, in Song op Sol. 5, 4. The proper names ^il'n in 'n nia, D^iin, the Gent. '^jJin, in in in iai3M (see 1515) , the name of the tribe ■ilti (j)l. Q''in), and the proper name masc. '^in should be taken agreeably to this meaning. — 3. (from in I.) a basis for the farther developed "'in (■which •see); see moreover ilin. in m. Is. 11, 8, see 1>)n (in its three meanings) and as a proper name. J^'nn I. and nin in derivatives (not IT T ITT used) tr. to clean from dross, to purify, especially the body by excrements, comp. Talm. Nin to scour away, to purify. At, f^ (to separate dirt) ; and also 15 v^ and f ^ in the derivatives. Deriv. Nil i i^in II. (not used) and rtlfl tr. prop. IT T ^ ' ITT to knot around, to t^wist round, cognate •with niN rV., Arab. ^5^!, therefore to embrace firmly, of a coat of mail, har- ness. Deriv. Ninn, and the proper name n-'nin. ""'' IT -: : - Xin (from Nin I.; pi. QiNll , eonstr. ... |.,. ^ ITT ' .'^ |. ^ _.T ■'Nin, ■with suff. DniNlh) m. offscouring, excrement, dung Is. 36, 12 K'tib, for •which dn''in from iin (which see) stands in the original passage 2 Kings 18, 27. The K'ri has always in its stead euphemistically the word iilSiSt, whose vowels are put to the noun before us, in the text. Din I. {imp. ain, pi. liin) trans. 1. (not used) same as C]in, Din I., 315 to cut, to divide, to tear asunder, comp. Aram, tjlin knife. Deriv. 311 1 and 2. — 2. to fight, contend, Syr. ^=H») -^r. i_jy~» , prop, to tear in pieces, to lacerate ; comp. Ar. i-J)-^ '^^''^- Hence to kill Jer. 50, 21, with d-'inSn; to slaughter, D^is ib. 50, 27 (a. figure of destroying the adult male population 48,- 15). Deriv. Nif. 3in2 to contend with one another, to extirpate, 2 Kings 3, 23 according to the LXX. Comp. Syr. ^H»4. Hof. ainrt iinf absol. 31.1^) io *« ' i-t: IT ^ ' IT. IT' subdued 2 Kings 3, 23. D"in n. (not used) mf?-. same as Din, aiN, Din n. to be high, firm., comp. r T ' r T " -. besides 'jiaiN and ^inin the Ar. ,»^^ (a stone pillar, a grave-stone), j»sJ8 (pyra- mid); and even pyramis has come from p' (the Egyptian article) and p* t (iram). Deriv. nam 2, 3in 5. IT tt; ' vr- Din (fut. 3-in:i., sometimes 311.^ in mss.; imperat. f. ■'311) intrans. prop, to burn up, to dry up (in consequence of heat), therefore 1. to become dry, of Ul'a Gen. 8, 13, d; Ps. 106, 9, of ins Is. 19, 5, Job 14, 11, 1,;?a Hos. 13, 15, IS*-' Is. 19, 6; to be diy, of nbji^. The transi- tion from signif. 1. is observable from Is. 42, 15; 48, 21 &c. Deriv. apn, a'lh, nain, na'in, nain, liain , ain4, the iT^TiT ' . IT tt: ' IT :t ' ' I T-;' viv / adj. S'nn, and the proper name S'nn. Nif. h-rn to be laid waste, of T'S' Ez. 26,19; 30,7. Puh. ain fo Je dried Judges 16, , 7 8, '" Mif. a'^'inrt 1. to dry up, D^^ Is. 50, 2; 51, 10; IJsty 37, 35. — 2. "with suff. vnia'^r!) /• 1- (from apn I.) a sword (prop, edge, sharpness) Ez.5,2, to which are applied n^n Ps. 57, 5, nanfa Ez. 21, 16, nmrtB, ^iu>iia 21, 33,"nQibiB Num. 22, 23, lim "^bhs Is. 27, 1 T and ' ' IT 't ' IT : ' ' which as a weapon is coupled with TT^pn. 1 Sam. 13, 22, laa 1 Che. 5, 18, Tiii^Yp Peov. 25, 18, 'nia)?. Hos. 2, 20, li'7''S) 1 Sam. 17, 45. The expression 'n ■'Sb at the edge of the sword Judges 1, 8, i. e. with the edge of the sword, for which also 'na nstl 2 Sam. 12, 9, '"I i'^tl Josh. 13", 22 are used, is fre- quent; "n -"Bb bsi Is. 8, 24 and 'nil bes ^ ' IV r : I- T ' I-.- - 1" T Num. 14, 3 being also said, 'n ^ly Job 19, 29 is sin of the sword, i. e. by which one incurs the punishment of the sword or death, comp. yTJ^ "jiy Ez. 21, 34, afiaQila nQog d^dvaiov 1 John 5, 16. — 2. a sharp instrument, a Icnife, for circumcising Josh. 5, 2 ; a razor Ez. 5,1; axe, hatchet, 26,9; a chisel Ex. 20, 22 ; teeth, of the Nile-horse or hippopo- tamus Job 40, 19, on account of its two large tusks. — 3. war (Ar. i_j*£»- war), represented as a calamity, along with ia^. 1 Che. 21, 12, Disia 2 Che. 20, 9, ^1. EsTH.9,5, a^'n Ez! 14,21 dec Coupled with iiDSa flight Lev. 26, 36, ni^auj captives Gen. 31, 21, bbn slain Num. 19, 16 &c. where the genitive is to be translated by, from, before &c. — 4. (from a'ln) m. dryness, consumption, as a disease of men Dbut. 28, 22. — 5. (from apnlL; pi. with suff. 'a'n'^rbrfn) grave, mausoleum, palace of the dead 2 Che. 34, 6 K'ri, where the verse is connected with the two preceding ones and should be translated: and in the cities of Manas- seh and Ephraim and Simeon as far as Naphtali he has burnt (the priests' bones) in their palatial resting-places round about. On the K'tib see ina I. r T D"in {pi. n'ia'iri) m. 1. (from a"!)!) heat, glow. Gen. 31, 40, either external Is. 25, 5, extinguished by the shadows of the clouds 25, 5, or internal Job 30,30; dryness, drought. Judges 6,37*, the drying up, of water Jee. 50, 38; and coupled with a'nn being an image of the drying up of the sea of peoples. — ■ 2. desolation, wasting, 'h i'is> Is. 61, 4 cities of desolation, i. e. desolated cities, and therefore associated with tTaiB Jee. 49,13, or Ms'irj; asnia'nnb 25,9 stands similarly; in an intensive way MaMffi 'h Ez. 29, 10; destruction Hag. 1, 11^ with- out any necessity for reading a'ln with the LXX. The Aram, and modem Hebrew la'^ltl and 'jS'in are developed out of it. — 3. Prop, a wilderness-bird, concrete bustard Zeph. 2, 14, i. e. a bird of the desert which continues on the 2in ground, named along with tlie ostrich (XenopL Exp. Cyr. 1, 5, 2), Ar. Vt^- In the parallel passage Is. 34, 11 i'y/ stands for it; which the LXX and Vulg. have here. D'lh (not used) 1. adj. 771., nis'in adj. f. pi. equivalent to a'nn Ez. 36, 35 38. This form has arisen out of the low and somewhat Phenician pronun- ciation of the -. — 2. a'lh or a'lin (the waste, desert, viz. mountain) n. p. of a top of Sinai, on which the Mosaic law was announced Ex. 3, 1; 17, 6; Deut. 1, 2; 1 Kings 8, 9, now O'ibl Musa {^gjM^ie iS^^). Formerly a'lh was the general name, and ''5'^D the more restrict- ed. Compare on G'ihl Mfisa Bohinson, Bibl. Ees. I. p. 177, 551 &c. 3'nn, (Peal not used) Aram. = Hebr. Hof. a'nti'^ *" ** ^O'id waste, destroyed, EzR. 4, 157' ' nS'in (formed from S'lh and only- sing.) f. wasteness, desolation, of ^"'5! Jer. 27, 17, rr^ja 22, 5, yiN 7, 34, d-i'iMnw (desirable pleasure-grounds) Is. 64, 10; coupled with Txm^ Jer. 25, 11 and tlMMH? 44, 6 ; a desert Ez. 25, 13 ; figur. calum- niated, despised Ez. 5, 14, with ins'lfl. Ar. v_sfj.i. the same. nDin (from rtln'^n) f. dryness, op- pos. toV; Ex. 14,21, Hagg.2,6, 1N^ Ez. 30, 12 ; dry ground Josh. 4, 18 (cognate mda-i). niain Is. 48, 21 is = nain. ITT—' r TT: ' IT TIT riDin (pl.rvQ.'-yn, constr. nis'nn) f. IT T t: I tt: I . T 1. a wilderness, a desert district, Ps. 102, 7; desert cities and places which have become so by the inhabitants being carried into exile, and may cease to be so again Ez. 33, 24; 36, 33; in opposi- tion to which primitive deserts 26, 20 are called Dbi5»a niain; elsewhere IT 1" I tt; ' cities lying in ruins for generations past are also termed dbi5> nia'nn Is. 58, 12; IT I : T ' ' 61,4. Farther ruins Is. 51, 4; destroyed buildings Mal. 1, 4; Ez. 13, 4. — 2. (only plur. ; from iin II.) palace of the dead, mausoleum, pyramid, Job 3, 14, for which in 3, 15 a^'Fia stands with the meaning 485 inn of n^a Is. 14, 18, i. e. house of the dead. The vain kings of Egypt built pyra- mids for their sepulchres and filled them with their treasures {Jahn, Biblische Archaologie I. 2. p. 439 seq.). ']iD"in (pi. constr. •'ah'itl) m. heat, ^Zow,' Ps. 32, 4. t^JlSin or ns- (Persian) n. p. m. EsTH. 1, 10; 7, 9; comp. Pers. (j^r^- (ass-driver). !i3iDnn see wiain. IT : - IT : - yir\ (fut. pi. la'nn;) intr. 1. (not used) to leap forth, to spring forward, to break forth, out of a place, comp. Ar. e^y^ (to break forth, to go out), in which sense the Targ. even takes the passage Ps. 18, 46, therefore to hop, to spring, of the locust. Deriv. bi'lU. — 2. to quake, to trenible, to be moved with fear, to hasten with trepidation, therefore ya S'lM Ps. 18, 46 to flee trembling out of {Bashi), for which Mic. 7, 17 has ')72 TS'l; comp. Tnn '\'a Hos. 11, 10 to flutter with trepida- tion, and the Ar. _. w» (to be fearful), c jff (to hasten with trepidation) ; Targ. ann the same, whence NS'in = iitt'iN (JRashi). "lifi (which see) standing for Sin 2 Sam. 22, 46 is transposed. P3"]ri (from a'nn with the formative syllable V- after the type of bbn^ from D'l^., bisiusj from ^im, biiaiB =i bisnto from Die, Aram. biBW from IBTO; see Mrst, Lehrgeb. p. 203 , and the" ijlll-t d''5''3S p. 103) m. an edible, winged spe- cies of locust Lev. 11, 22, Ar. J> jv > j> (as one may read in Casiri Bibl. 1, 300) a kind of locust, aJja-y^ (march of lo- custs); and from it the denomin. there J>&ye> (to leap, to spring, of locusts or horses). mn ifut. Tyn;^,,, pi. "^II'Q^) ««*»•• *o be afraid, to quake, to tremble, absol. Is. 19, 16; 32, 11, along with Ips, ni; sometimes joined with ab, as the seat of terror 1 Sam. 28, 5; with b of the. n^n 486 mn thing of which one is afraid Job 37, 1. bjj 'n 2 Kings 4, 13 to be uneasy for one;^ vr\^-\i^ llJiN 'n Gen. 42, 28 one turns to the other trembling; riNI)?? 'n 1 Sam. 21, 2 . (to be afraid). Derivatives Tnti, fllin; ^ ' . i"i' ITT-:' and the proper name Tin. Sif- T^'pSp {part. T^'iriM) to terrify. Lev. 26, 6; Judges 8, 12; to put into fear Ez. 30, 9, where the LXX read ia^'irirtb. The organic root Tn-n is clo- sely connected with the root in 'TSI, r' r Tin {pi. d'^l'it!) <'4}- *«• !• trembling, fearful. Judges 7, 3, with b? of that for which one trembles 1 Sam. 4, 13. — 2. Figurat. /ZZZeii wiiA reverence, with holy awe, with "bij Is. 66, 5, b? 66, 2, a of the thing for which one is so filled fizK. 9, 4. Y'nn {place of terror, comp. ^iTin 2) n. ^. of a place in the plain of bsS'iT^ at ?'ab4, whence were two of David's heroes"; Gent.'^'\'\n 2 Sam. 23, 25. In the vicinity of this place at the foot of Gilboa is l'"in ')iS (fountain of Harod), i. e. a fountain bubbling up beneath a hole in a wall of conglomerate rock, which was called in the Middle ages Tubania, and is now En Galud. Above it Gideon en- camped Judges 7, 1. In Judges 7, 4 it is simply named d';?5 and in 1 Sam. 29, 1 ']';? in Jezreel. fTfin {constr. n^'nn, pi. niTn) f. 1. terror, fear, 1 Sam. 14, 15; conster- nation Jer. 30, 5; disquiet 2 Kings 4, 13; fearfulnessls.21,^; D-'^l'bN '0 ISam. 14i,lb frightful trepidation; Qnij "n Peov. 29, 25 the fear of man. — 2. {place of terror) n. p. of a station of the Israelites in the desert Num. 33, 24. mn I. same as N^n I.; deriv. "'in, IT T ITT ' r-:' lino- mn n. (inf. abs. fhn, constr. ni'itl; IT T ^ ' it' 1 -:' fut. iH^.n;;, ap. ^'n'\) intr. to glow, to burn. particularly of anger, hence 1. to be Hndled, with r|N Ex. 22, 23, Deut. 7, 4, seldom without JriN 2 Sam. 22, 8; with a Num. li, 33, or b^ Zbch. 10, 3, or IJN of the person at whom one is angry Num. 24,10; omitting !:]8 and with Ij of the person who is angry Gen. 18, 30, or with the addition of T'5''»a 31, 35; with b5> of the cause 2 Sam. 19, 43. i- — 2. Figurat. to be fretful, vetcatious, excited, moved, sad (cognate in sense with QST, nS5») Gen. 4, 5; 34, 7; Jon. 4, 4; to be zealous, with a against some- thing Hab. 3, 8, and, as one may see from Pih. to oppose, from Hithp. to be jealous, envious, and according to some also fromNif., to rage. Deriv. "''in , ')i'iri 1. ' — 3. to prick, to sting, of thorns &c., like Tin. Deriv. "li'itT 2. Nif. rrnns in Song op Sol. 1, 6 and Is. 41, 17,'see Tnn. ' ' l-T Pih. tTnf.P' (/«*• fTp.5D!) to strive, to carry on war, with nij or a with one Jer. 12, 5^ 22, 15, where 'for nisa, which yields no suitable meaning, the LXX read Tnsa, an allusion to Ahaz'a IT T : ' fondness for building (2Kjngs 16, 10); the cod. Alex, and the Ar. read attnisa. This singular, quadi-iliteral Pihel-form, with the Hithpahel too perhaps, seems to have arisen from a noun ni'itin {oppo- sition, combat), which is still preserved in the popular dialect; especially as the letter Tau has established itself in the Syr. Mif. !T|}niri (fut. ap. in^) to stir up anger (qjs)"JoB 19, 11, with b? of the person; figur. to act with ardour or zeal Neh. 3, 20. Ilithp. inprinr: (fut. ap. ^nr^'i) to be incensed, to be indignant, with a of the person or thing against one or a thing, Pkov. 24, 19; Ps. 37, 1 7; seldom ab- solutely Ps. 37, 8. See Pihel. The stem !i^n is the Syr, Ij--, -t-». and the Arab. («^ (hence SJvfe- heat), as the derivatives shew. Instead of it the usual Syr. and Ar. are r^, Ar. t^; as in Hebrew the organic root ti-in is interchanged with in in this sense. ' mn 487 ^inin nnn ni. (not used) tr. same as N'nrt n. (belonging to N'nrin), hence to screen, to protect round about. Deriv. »^,'J'!':in (oTit of ^|!;\''in) J^n (Bechor. 39) the eye-lid itself, as if like a split in the eye. — 4. a pointed instrument, for threshing, figurat. Job 41, 22, pi. nia'^n Am. 1, 3; an adjective to i'rnz Is. 41', 15, or alone 28, 27, identical with y^'^n 2 Sam. 12, 31 and 1 Chr. 30, 3. — 5. (out of ynij, therefore the plural &'^21lin) a diligent one, oppos. to bay Peov. 10','l;'l2,24; 13,4; 21,5. See'firil,4. — 6. (from ypn in.) gold, the' fenest and best Peov.' 3, 14 ; 16, 16 ; Zech. 9, 3, mentioned with TB Peov. 8, 10 19, whose colour is p^pt!? glittering. — 7. {indus- trious, zealous) n. p. m. 2Ejngs21, 19. inn (not used) tr. to arrange, to put together in a row, to string, on a cord or lace, Ar. >)^ Syr, Tr-, Talm. Tin, T'ln , with the numerous derivatives. The organic root is closely connected with that in la^'i 11., UiTi IL &c. Deriv. r T ' r T tiin. I T nnn (not used) tr. to veil, to protect round about, same as '!J'n3, and like it arising from reduplication of the simple, organic root. Derivative nitl (not used) m. protection, defence, only in the proper name fT'n'iO. 1"nin {nobility, distinction; from the Pihel of l^n) n. p. m. Eze. 2, 51 ; Neh. 7, 53. Tn*in 488 nn JT^mn iJoJi, is a protection; from IT -: ! - * n'ln which see, conseq[. out of tT'tl'in) n. p. m. Nbh. 3, 8, but only according to some mss., the usual reading being iT-i :- OH'in (splendour, glitter; from Din reduplicated) n.p. m. 2 Kings 22, 14, for which 2 Chb. 34, 22 has niDn = rtDin. ' IT : - IT : - "iri"in (see Pihel of llti) m. inflam- mation, Dbdt. 28, 22, which the Syr. has well rendered by liuirxjLi!.^. D*in (not used) tr. 1. to engrave, in- scribe, a writing, prop, to cut in; con- nected with ypri, nnn, lain, Ti)? be- longing to tJ^I)?, Talm. Dl)?, Greek XaQoiaaa, xaQaiTei, Pers. |jjL»w^, and in the modern languages with grattare, gratter, to grate &c. Derivat. ain 1, ablli. — 2. to sculpture, to cut out, to hollow out, to deepen. Deriv. BilM and ain 2. "" V IV The fundamental signification of the stem is sufficiently certified by the Syr. ^t-* (to cut in, to pierce), iM'=-«' (an incision, puncture), Ar. isj^ (like the Hebrew Nia metaphor, applied to form- ing, creating) ; the Talm. airi (to repent) is figurative, prop, pungi conscientia. The organic root appears to be avn, as\is seen from Tia. l-T Din m,. 1. a style or stylus, for in- scribing letters, therefore metaphor, (like stylus) a cliaracter, Is. 8,1 with a man's style, i. e. with the common, usual cha- racters so as to be easily read. — 2. a graving-tool, Ex. 32, 4 and he formed it with the graving-tool (LXX, Onk., Sam., Kimchi, after the Ar., .L^). But this meaning does not suit either the signi- fication of lail, or the context. Others, therefore, understand foi-m, pattern, type (Saad., Ibn Esra); but this signification for 'n is by no means proved. Better with reference to the same phrase in 2KiNas 5,23: bag, and so the passage is to be translated: and he rolled it (the gold) up in a bag (Targ.), conseq. = a^in. Cbnij (pi- d''53a'in, constr. ''J2-; de- veloped out of ain 1 with the noun- ending D-, like la^'li?) m. a writer, a writer of hieroglyphics, IsQoyQafifiursve, and at the same time an interpreter of the sacred writings and customs, as well as of dreams. Gen. 41, 8 24; Ex. ch. 8 and 9. The LXX render ID''MU'10 by e^riyijrai (Gen. 41, 8), aoquarai Ex. 7,11; Dan. 1, 20. Hence the word embraces the priestly class of Egypt, and is then transferred to the Magi, Dan. 1, 20; 2, 2. C]1SN, rjllSSJa, ■''iiU3, D'^sn (Aram.) ap- pear to have formed distinct classes be- sides. The hypotheses that "n , denoting what is specifically Egyptian, is the Coptic epswAi ( Jablonski) thaumaturgus, or ce^pecTWM (de Eossi) guardian of my- (I -^ O " steries, or the Persian (XXjei>ys>. a wise rnrni, Zend. Khratumat {Hyde, de rel. vett. Persarum p. 379), or that it pro- ceeds from Dan = Ar. |VA^ (to decide), are without foundation. abnn {pi- V'^pin, H- n";^') Aran. m. the'same, Dan.'2,10 27; 4,4; 5,11. ''Ill (from Hin) m. anger, glow of anger, usually coupled with C]N Ex. 11, 8; Dbut. 29, 23. i"lh see ■'lin. ''"in (formed out of in, with the adjective termination ">-) m. 1. (from in I. = 1in) white i. e. fine bread (LXX, Aq., Syr., Vulg., Gr. Ven., Saad.) Gen. 40, 16; and so also Onk. and Jonath. (Jer. Targ. L) appear to understand it; Ar. i^yyS' the same. Symm. has de- rived it from in n. referring it to bo, which, however, is less appropriate. — 2. (from in n. ; inhabitant of the caves, troglodyte; pi. D"''l'n) n.p. of the original people in Edom , who were afterwards conquered and destroyed by the Edo- mites Gen. 36, 20-30, Detjt. 2, 12 22, probably named from their dwelling in the rocky holes of mount Sei'r. At an earlier period, however, they had also heads of tribes (Gen. 36, 20) among the Edomites. — 3. (from in I. in signif. 2. noble, free; comp. the Phenic. 1h noble. nn 489 bin n. p. m. Kit. 2, 1 ; 15, 1) n. p. m. Gen. 36, 22; Num. 13, 5; 1 Chr. 1, 39; comp. the proper names llfl , '^'iin , "''IIH , 'O'^Ti , niin, nnin, rtTin &c. IT • ' I • ' IT • ''"in (constr.pl. ''■nti) m. same asN'nn d«n(7. CS^'' ■'"If. 2 EJMGS 6, 25 (accord- ing to another reading of the K'tib) doves' dung, which was eaten in a great famine (v. 28. 29), as is also said of Siin 18, 27 ; comp. Joseph. Jewish war 5,"" 13, 7; Celsii ffierohot. 11. p. 30. ■jinn (after the form ')VS'n [which theK'rihas], irSN, 1i;i\)y; pZ. t]'iii-'';n) m. dung 2 KiKGS 6, 25 K'tib (after an- other reading) ; perhaps a kind of roasted sweet vetches which look like doves' dung (see Boch. Hieroz. II. 44). D''"in (jpl. d'^pi'iri) m. prop, hollowed out, therefore pocket., hag, which was either carried by itself or fastened to the dress 2 Kings 5, 23; Is. 3, 22. See a'nn 2. onn see W\. r T IT D'^'in see in and "'"nh. r * I O'^'in {one early-horn, strong, the early-bom being thought strong; from :]'nnn.) n. p. m. Neh. 7,24; 10,20; in EzR. 2, 18 rt'ni'' stands for it. — Aram. "j - tllin, Ar. >-i%5.»- lamb, is so named from juiciness and freshness. Patron. ''B'''l5 1 Chr. 12, 5 K'ri: helonging to a family Eariph (otherwise unknown). See tll^H. Ar . (.jijLwSk autumnal rain. yi'in {pi- cows«J'.''2ti'nn or "'it'nr!; from yin I, 3) m. 1. a pointed instrument, a tlieshing roller, with the addition of bT'ia 2 Sam. 12, 31, 1 Chr. 20, 3, same as yiin 4. Another meaning of 'n was ditch, which is stUl preserved in the Mishna; comp. Phenic. yin grave, He- sych. s. V. oLQiCog. — 2. a piece, a slice, of cheese or curds 1 Sam. 17, 18 (LXX, Vulg., Targ.); Greek iixijim, Ar. oaj^ the same. aj'^in (with suff. iiBi'nn) m. 1. afield, that is ploughed 1 Sam. 8, 12. — 2. time of ploughing Gen. 45, 6, Ex. 34, 21, just like the forms SliON, T^S)?, liHT, a'^SIS. ■'pi'in adj. m., niuS", f. silent, still, of the east wind (Targ.), therefore sultry, not cooling Jon. 4, 8; LXX and Vulg. according to the sense, hurning. The derivation from iB'iri = ynrt to he sharp, and niTai'in = nw (Ex. 14, 21) cannot be proved. "nin I. {fut. 'T|hn::) tr. to roast, T^S , Prov. 12, 27 laziness (i. e. the lazy man) does not roast his game (either because he is lazy and takes nothing in hunting or leaves unroasted what he has caught; so Ihn G'andch, Ibn Koreish, Kimchi and others); Ar. ^^. H^l^'i (from H'2'i = ns'n to be slack) stands for '■] TB''N. The explanation of the LXX,'Trg., Syi'., Vulg. from 'Tj'nn n. (which see) is less suitable, partly because not hunting is no sign of idleness, partly because what is acquired by hunting is conceived of as already existing. The stem is identical with the Targ. ■tjpn, Syr. tH*. -Aj- (Jy^i ^'^^ ^^^^^' fore the signification is completely gua- ranteed; the fundamental signification is "to glow, to bum, to singe, to illumine" ; and the organic root appears to be Tp'H. like that in pp-a, np-T &c. T]"in n. (not used) intr. to catch in one another, of lattice-work; identical in its organic root '^j'n-n with that in aVN, an-^) T^"i? &c. Hence ' l^nn \pl- 13"'315. like the pi n"'3U|?, di^M'-^from IB I?, b)30 m. trellis-work. lattice. Song of Sol. 2, 9; Targ. N3'nn. the same. Tjin (Peal not used) Aram. tr. same as Hebr. Tjin I., to singe, to hum. Ithpa. '^'innrt to be singed, burnt, of the hair Dan." 3, 27. ^*in a stem assumed for Vnn (for b'^n, from Ipn with the formative syllable b^ as mhby_, bsi^N; yet bMi;3n Dan. 11, 44, and therefore it is also ap- plied to God Is. 34, 2, to the extermi- nation of persons Josh. 10, 39, or things Num. 21, 3. "^im Cinp to destroy after Jer. 50,21 is to'be taken like iiriN ISS ' \"~:r I" • 1 Kings 14, 10, standing with S'ltl (to murder). Hof. Dppfl (Jut. dpm) to be devoted, exterminated Ex. 22, 19; Lev. 27, 29; EzR. 10, 8. Din II. (not used) tr. prop, trans- posed from lan (see p. 460) to bind, to bind into each other, and therefore con- nected with "1^3. Deriv. DIM 3. r T vi" mn in. (not used) intr. same as d*!!! to be high, to be prominent, of the peaks of a mountain-chain &c., Ar. i*^, f»)j, *\i and |»ws. the same; metaph. to be firm. Deriv. the proper names liM'nn, iiM'^n, Q'nn. ' "■" IT : T ' I" T Onn {fortress, fort; from din HI.) n.p. of a city in Naphtali Josh. 19, 38. din (i. e> d'''nrt = d1'nn snub-nosed; r T ^ 1" T IT ' comp. Lat. Simus, Silus as proper names, and for the meaning comp. Ejai'in.) n. p. m. EzR. 2, 32 ; Neh. 7, 42 ; but in 12, 3 dri'l stands for it. ann (with suff. ^"nin-, pi. di?3'in) m. 1. (from d'nfi I.) a sword, weapon, Hab. 1, 16 therefore he sacrifices to his sword (d'lp), alluding to d'ln net, the Scythians having sacrificed to the sword as a sym- bol of Mars (Herod. 4, 59 62). — 2. curse, extermination Josh. 6, 18. 'n trii Dbut. 7, 26, 'n\ n;rt Josh. 7, 12, 'pb ip? to be devoted to a curse, to esstermination; 'p ia>N 1 Kings 20, 42 a man devoted to destruction; 'p dS the people devoted to punishment Is. 34, 5. Metaphor, property cursed, denoted Deut. 13, 18. — 3. (from d;iri n.) a net Ez. 26, 5; 32, 3; Hab. 1, 15 17. Din (from din I.) m. curse, exter- mination, Zech. 14, 11. flJS'in (fortress, mountain-fastness; from din III.) n. p. of a royal city of the Canaanites at the border of the pDin 491 ^&:in Edomites towards the south, where the Jews made a vain attempt to penetrate from vinp into Palestine, probably at the pass el-Sufat Num. 14, 45; 21, 3. After the occupation of Palestine it lay in the territory of Judah Josh. 15, 30, but was subsequently assigned to the tribe of Simeon 19, 4; 1 Che. 4, 36; comp. 1 Sam. 30, 30. Anciently it is said to have been called nsa (which see) Judges 1, 17, at which passage the name Hormah is accounted for. li/Q^n (from D'irt III.; prominent^ rugged mountain) n. p. of the highest peak of a mountain range in the north- east of Palestine, a part of 115 sb (Josh. 11, 17; 13,5) and the extreme boundary of Israel east of Jordan Dbut. 3,8; 4, 48; Josh. 12, 1. At its northern foot lay the old ia b:sa Josh. 11, 17; 13, 5. Hermon is a part of the modem G'ibl el-Sheikh (^JuiJ' i^-*^)) ^■^- of Anti- libanus, and its highest peaks are covered with perpetual snow (hence N.^bn 'nitj stands for it in Onk., the Jer. Targ. I. on Deut. 3, 9 , Targ. on Song of Sol. 4, 8, Samar. Targ. on Deut. 4, 48). As there were several such ridges, the plur. of it d''3b'in also appears, to which a 13>:i?3 irt seems to have belonged Ps. 42,7; comp. the Alps, the Appennines. This chain of tops was also called '|{<"'iB (which see) Deut. 4, 48, by the Amorites liSiU 3, 9, by the Sidonians ^i'^iB ibid.; but probably these were merely names of single parts, which are sometimes distinguished from one another 1 Che. 5, 23; Song op Sol. 4, 8. aja")!! (for fflija'nn, from D'nri with the noiin-ending iZJi-;, as in •ii^lfvr\, 10153?) m. a sickle Deut. 16, 9. The noun is incorrectly taken as a compound of t3'nn and tiin or of d'nri (Ax. -vis- resecuit) and IZJnn (Ar. Ji^^o. rasit;, or from i25ain = il3«!n. r : - 1" prr (for Tjin, from 'Tin) l.(a noUe, freeman) n. p. m. Gen. 11, 26-31, where he appears as an Aramaean, and conse- quently ancestor of an Aramaean race; IChr.2,46. — 2. (parched place, steppe; with a of motion ii3'in) n. p. of a north- western Mesopotamian city in the oldest patriarchal time Gen. 11, 31; 12, 5; 27, 43; 28, 10; 29,4, which must be touched at on the way from Ur (of the Chaldeeg) to Canaan. It was probably founded by Haranites; as the relations of Haran, viz. sbs and iTvii, gave names to cer- tain places and territories there, e. g. sbs to the Mesopotamian city NJibs in the district where the Chaboras falls into the Euphrates (see Steph. Byz. s. v. (lidlya) ; Si'liu to the district in the north west of Mesopotamia where pn also lies (see Barhebr. Chron. Syr. p. 142). In the classics it is called Kaqqai, Car- rae, among the Syrians and Arabiajis \r", lotv^) ^"^^ "^^^ formerly a flourish- ing city. At the time of its conquest by the Assyrians 2 Kings 19, 12, Is. 37,12, it had given its name to a district belonging to it. — 3. n. p. of a place on the Arabian gulf, 12 stations south of Mecca (Assemani, Bibl. Orient. Ill, 2. p. 563; Steph. Byz. s. v. Kdqqai), be- side the purely Arabian places, viz. ?133 on the south coast of Arabia (called among the Greeks Kavri Ptol. 6, 7, 10), I'ly the Arabia Felix of the ancients; described as an emporium together with NiU;, and a medium for Tyrian traffic e'z.'27, 23. ■'3""in see li'nh. tD''3'ir! {district of caves, see Tip) n.p. of a Moabite city situated on a decli- vity, not far from nitnib Is. 15,5; Jee. 48, 3 5 34. Perhaps the dual originated in the fact of there being an upper and lower town; Joseph.'OQiuvai. The Gentile i3'-in Nbh. 2, 10 may also be derived from it. 1S5"]n n. p. m. 1 Che. 7, 36. Ac- cording to Simonis from ^n^ (constr. of ins) snorting, and 1B3 panting (Syr. r^ anhelavit); but this' explanation gives no suitable sense. Perhaps the proper name has arisen from the combination of Clpn and V\W, or from i]m alone with 1 inserted; according * which 1- at D^n 492 monn the end -would be a mere formative syllable. D'ln I. (not used) intr. prop, to be beld together, to be bound together, then to he tough, clammy, spoken of viscous, binding earth or clay (cognate in sense Aram. C]Dri which see); comp. Talm. rT'D'iri loam, nD'"in loam-like food. Deriv. '^llpiD. O'ln 3^ n^C'in. — The organic root Vrn is closely connected with that in t1-n, n-N, VTN, ^'^-p &c.: the fun- damental signification of hanging closely together lying in all these words. D*in n. (not used) intr. 1. same as iS'lfl to become or he rough, of the skin ; to he scahhy, i. e. not to be smooth, Ar. luijA., Syr. uiojj» the same; comp. Syr. M»oj4» the upper, rough wind-pipe, Ar. H. and ni. to irritate, embitter, (M«-«iv&- a kind of thorn, Syr. ucj— z] to be hard and rough. — 2. to he full of Misters, of the skin , Ar. IV. the same. Deriv. D^n (not used) intr. to shine, to glitter, to vary colours, to illuminate, of the sun, conseq[. same as y"nn (which see) belonging to y^^n 6, and not con- nected with 'nitfi (which see), as the or- ganic root here is D'l"H, Sanskr. rlish, Pers. rfish-en. According to others, the fundamental signification is to cut off, therefore D'nn is properly the disk of the sun, or has the same meaning with 0*10, to'in ; which, however, is forced. Deriv. D'nn 1, tlCin, the proper name !TnDn IT :- Pih. (redupl. ; not used) DH'nn to shine strongly, to glitter, derivat. the proper name On'in. Cin (from D'lM) m. 1. the sun, prop, glitter, splendour, therefore ti'iT is used of its rising Job 9, 7, and sa of its going down Judges 14, 18. In this sense 16 mss., many editions, the Talm. (Menachot 110 *), Symm., Vulg., Saad. and others in Is. 19, 18 read D'n!i, understanding by it coupled with I'^V Seliopolis, but see O'iri. — 2. (from Din 11.) the itch, scahy prop, blisters, by which the skin gets a rough appearance Deut. 28, 27 , with ai.!|. — 3. {place of clay, of loam, from D'ifl I.) in the proper name Vyi riSMn (possession of the clay-place) Jud&es 2, 9, for which n^D 'Fi occurs in Josh. 19, 50 and 24, 30, by transposing the letters. It is the name of the city built by Joshua in the Ephraimite mountains Josh. 19, 50, where he lies buried 24, 30; Judges 2, 9. In Eusebius's time his grave was still pointed out in the city QaiivaaraQa (i. e. QafifaraaQa, Onom. s. v.) on the northern part of the mountain Vi^i (ibid. s. v.), which was also seen by the pilgrim Paula (Jerome in Epitaphio Paulae). At a later period the place dwindled down to a village called 'nS3 D'lti , where the graves of Joshua and Caleb existed furnished with monuments (Schwarz, dasheilige Land, p. 115. 119), — 4. (the same) n. p. of a place in the territory east of Jordan beyond nisp. Being situated on a mountain a steep road led to it, called D'lnin fibsa , whither ' viv - i"-;r ' (D'nnri fibsab) Gideon pursued the Mi- dianites, so that he did not turn about till he arrived there (O'lnri nb??3ba) Judges 8, 13. The LXX' and Pe'shito considered D'nfi here to be the proper name of a place; and even Aquila and Symm. did not read di'nti but selected the mountain merely because of its situation. JlDin m. same as Din 1, Judges T : i- ^*'- 14, 18. niDin (K'tib)f. the place of pot-sherds or potters Jbe. 19, 2, the name of a gate leading to nsti near which they threw broken pottery; on which account the Targ., Talm. (Jer. Erub. 5) and Rashi understand by it the dung gate, which is not correct. As the name does not appear in the lists of the city-gates (Neh. chs. 3. 12); and the Harsllth-gate, ■ since it led to Tophet, must have been in the south where the city-walls had no gates whatever, a gate of the tTit^. appears to be meant (see Kimchi). n^D*in 493 p]nn rr^Dnny. K'ri for nitc^n Jbe. 19, 2. J?"in (not used) intr, same as 5>nN io /?ee witA flutter and haste, Arab. P jJ*- The organic root is yVfi, i>'i"N, wlueh is ako in p^i"^, Ar. ^_j*-*- Deriv. the proper name ?'nnF), as ^'iNPi is to be derived from SIN. r T n*in I. {/at. Clpn^., ;)ar(. t)ph, tY- constJ". C|'"in) tr. 1. (not used) to pull off, to pluck off, leaves, fruit, prop, to separate, to tear off, to snatch away. The organic root i\'Tn is therefore identical with that in TiT^, tll'tp; Ar. 0»&-the same, whence v-ojji^; SLsherbst from herp= carp-o. Deriv. Cl'in (according to some), the proper names ^[^y^, Elpl^i rjlin (according to some). — 2. Figur. to reproach, upbraid, scorn (comp. pro- scindere, to rebuke), with accus. of the object Ps. 69, 10; 119, 42; Prov.27,11, i. e. to injure, to tear with words (comp. bSN , yyp , At. Lia» carpsit and laesit), j'oB 27, 6 my heart reproaches not one of my days , i. e. I can never reproach myself. Deriv. HB'^n 2. For tie'^na 2 Sam. 23, 9 we should either read with 1 Che. 11, 13 D'^7?l DSa the name of a place which Josephus also has ; or take it as construed with a of the object in signification 2. to cut 'in, which should be reckoned to Pihel. — 3. (not used) same as S'ln I. to cut, to cut asunder, with an instrument for dividing, then to point, to sharpen; comp. Targ. rji'in sharp, cutting, :\y\'n edge; figurat. of the incision in the female pudenda. Deriv. Ms'in 1. — 4. (not used) to bare, to make naked (proceeding from the fundamental signification "to pluck off, to tear off"), hence applied to a woman: to he exposed, delivered over, i. e. be- trothed, comp. Talm. InSI'in. for tlffll^N. (Kidd. 6 "); or generally to give up, life; of buildings, to destroy, to lay waste. Deriv. fiB'nn 3. Nif. t)'in3 to be delivered over, betrothed (to a man)', spoken of a woman Ley. 19,20. Pih. r|pn (fut. t]'in^) l. to upbraid, to reproach, to scorn, with accus. of the object 1 Sam. 17, 26, Ps. 74, 18, along with rijis 2 Kings 19, 22, or with the accus. ins'in Ps. 79, 12; seldom with b 2 Chr. 32," 17. — 2. to cut into, with a of the object 2 Sam. 23, 9 (if the read- ing be right). — 3. to expose, to deliver up, TUBS the life. Judges 5, 18, like JTiy^T (from" rt'i^) Is. 53, 12. n'nn n. (not used) intr. 1. to in- undate, overflow, of rain, connected with tllS I. Deriv. SQn. — 2. Figurat. to he juicy , fresh , prop, to have moisture, life-juice, life-marrow, and then metaph. applied to vigour, youthful strength, as in the case of nb and nb. Deriv. the proper names r|p,f^) ^'''^'^i ^y^- t|"lh (with suff. ■'S'ln) m. 1. harvest, harvest-time, opposed toy ;p_, with which it constitutes the whole year Ps. 74, 17; the Hebrews dividing the year only into these two halves. As the time of cold it is the same as "niJ Gen. 8, 22, denoting the cold rainy season generally Prov. 20, 4, in which rooms were warmed through by fire-pots; for which purpose the kings of Israel and Judah had peculiar divisions in the royal palace Jer. 36, 22; Am. 3, 15. Hence 'ri can- not be derived from Slpn I. "to pluck off" (as Herbst from herp) and then under- stood to mean the time of gathering fruit, because the language has £158«, !:]ipi« for the latter, and 'h is never described as such a season; but from t]'in n., which perhaps the proper names t]'''nn, ri'i'nn and!|'iri confirm. — 2. Prop, moisture, figurat. the sap and marrow of life, the juice, freshness, therefore the freshness of youth, the tiTne of youthful freshness, Job 29, 4, like tl^ vigor aeta- tis Deut. 34, 7, nip (which see) from nns. Thus signification 2. is closely related to signification 1. From sig- nification 1. comes qin (fut. tlin^7) denom. to pass the winter, with b? of the place Is. 18, 6. mn (prop, a powerful, strong one, hence of fresh age, or early-born = Aram. riD^n 494 n3a-in TiSI, in which language tjin has the same signification, and is opposed to biSN.) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 2, 51. See q'^'pn. nS"!!! (constr. ns'nn: wZm?-. niein, . IT : V ^ r : ••• ' -^ IT-:' c. nis'^n) /. 1. prop, fissure, split, there- fore^ Dagrj'na, female pudenda Is. 47, 3, cog- nate in sense with ns, parall. to MTl^, as there could be no euphemistic para- phrase in this place. — 2. reproach, Gen. 34, 14; 1 Sam. 11, 2; reviling Lament. 3, 61; a shame Is. 30, 5, with nilJa Ps. 69, 20, Tia 119, 22, lib]? Pbov."i8, 3, rtsil*; Ez. 5, 15, bTi3?3 Jbe. 24, 9, sraiB IT : ' ' IT T ' ' IT - 49, 13 &c. Hence the expressions and phrases: 'n HiJi Nbh. 2, 17 Mic. 6, 16; bsa 'n T'Drt, bb-J 1 Sam. 17J 26, Ps. 119, 22, or nsSn tjON 'B Is. 4, 1 to take away the shame. — 3. (from ri'in i. signif. 4) desolation, Jer. 49, 13, along with ^73125, I'lh (signif. 2); on the other hand, ma "in coupled with SlB'^n Ez. 5, 14, gets the meaning of calumny. yy[ I. ifut. ypm) «»•. 1. io split, to separate, to divide, cognate in sense with "^,1-5 ) '^p!?! tJien according to a usual metaphor, to decide, DBTU?; {a sentence) 1 Kings 20, 40; deriv. p'^n 1. — 2. (not used) *o separate, mark off, to mark out, a quarter, as -\n referring to n'HT.^; deriv. yi'iri 2. Pigurat. to limit, "de- termine, of the days of life Job 14, 5. — 3. Proceeding from the idea of cutting in pieces, splitting, dividing into parts, then by a usual metaphor to make an incision, a fissure, a puncture in, spoken of the fissures or incisions of the eye- lids, lips &c., Arab, (joya- (to cut into the skin, to puncture, to wound), deriv. f«l'7ri 3, yi'iri l; to cut off, to separate, deriv. y"''nh 2 ; to point, sharpen, figurat. of the pointing of the tongue (for of- fending) Ex. 11, 7; Josh. 10, 21 ; comp. JuD. 11, 13. Here belongs the significa- tion to make incisions, to dig, still pre- served in the Phenic. and Talm., whence in the Mishnal'"'''nn a ditch, Phenic. ynn a grave. Deriv. yi'in 4 and yi'ltt 1. — 4. to be zealous, to be sharply at one's heels (At. yOvs») 2 Sam. 5, 24, for which we have in the parallel place 1 Chr. 14, 15 nanb'ai NiSn tn (see however ynn TL.); IT T : • - r •• IT J- _ I r T ' ' to be industrious, deriv. yiin 5 ; of taste, to be sharp, sour. Ax. the same ; whence \jOys>. a salt, sharp herb, Kali. Deriv. ■jiintl (according to some). Nif. ynns (only part. fern, as a suhst. ilii'ina , constr. njtiins) to be decided, de- lTTv;lv' •.• li"..;!'.*' ' termined, part. fem. Dan. 11, 36 as a subst. decree; TCi,^'nV\ rtbls extermination IT Tv:r.' : it t and decree, i. e. the decreed destruction Is. 10, 23; 28, 22; Dan. 9, 27; nst^m niaa\I5 Dan. 9, 26 decree of desolation, i. e. by which desolation is effected. V"in n. ifut. ypn':.) intr. to equip or gird oneself; therefore to be nimble, war- like 2 Sam. 5, 24 (Targumic rip.n), which suits the parallel place 1 Chr. 14, 15; Hebrew ybh and Targumic ynfi. the same. Hence generally to be strong, firm, deriv. IJt'nrt; comp. Phenic. ybn a warrior, whence the proper name byajrbU Mass. 1. y^r\ (not used) intr. same as O'lM to glitter, shine, of gold colour; Phenic. ynn the same, hence nS'in (Diosc. 4, 58 xovQ^rjra i. e. XQvaa.v&siJi.ov) a sort of golden flower. Deriv, yiin 6. T"11 ^^^ used) Aram. intr. same as Hebrew ypn II. yin {def. NS'nn, with suff. ftlt'iri; pi. T'it'itl) Aram. m. loin, Dan. 5, 6, like Hebr. ybn, so called from strength and firmness; more frequent in the Targ.; Syr. f^ with Eesh elided. naS'nri {pi. niai^nn, from iiasn with 1 instead of the resolved Dagesh, from aan n.) f the firmly knotted, a fetter Is. 58, 6; figurat. torture, pain Ps. 73, 4. What is drawn tightly and fetters, represents the idea of pain, of wiithing, niann 495 ^^n The Arab. ^ ^ o ^ of convulsion, as in Vail, has also Eesh in the verb i niSin see yi'in 4. CS^n see yi'nn 5. r ; it 1 I T ^Snti (from yyi i, 4; pZ. tjisa'nr!) m. (according to the Arab, and Samar.) sour grapes Num. 6, 4, so called from their sharp taste; but according to the Targ., Onk., Talm., 'Arflch, Tanchum and others kernel of berries, which suits ST, whence the word is to be derived &m yvn n. p"nn ifut. pHf.l) tr. to rub violently against one another, to grate, grind, Ar. ijf*^ to rub by filing, \J^yS. to gnaw, ^•jS- to rub; hence to rub together, to grind, the teeth, to gnash, with the ac- cusat. Ps.112,10 or a Job 16, 9 and bs of the person 37, 12; "comp. the name of the vowel p'lri (=p'ip), explained by 'latB. Tin (3 ». fern, nin for rTtiti; on the pT^-'^' TIT Tr' contrary «i^n Is. 24, 6 belongs to TVfn) intr. 1. to glow, to burn, of fire; me- taphor, to be hot (spoken of the bones), of the heat of fever Job 30, 30; to glow, of metal Ez. 24, 11; from other conju- gations and from derivatives it means also to be parched, overheated, spoken of the throat or lungs, with too much crying (Ps. 69, 4), compared to a bel- lows-bag which has become hot (Jer. 6, 29); to be consumed, of wood (by fire), to be arid, burnt up by the sun, of land &c. Deriv. ^'i", and the proper name pfl. Figur. to sting, to bum, of thorns. Deriv. 'ji'nn (according to some) and V"in. — 2. same as Itt I. and ^"in IT IT r T to be white, figurat. to he shining, dis- tinguished, noble; derivat. perhaps D'^'lh (see in, I'ph); see also lin^n. Nif. 'nns after the form Das , together with 1«' after the form nn'Sj^bns {^pl. 1105 the duplication entirely aban- doned, as ibsri Ez. 36, 3 from bbs to bring in, go in; hence the part. d'^'iHS ; fut. in';) to be heated, to glow, of ni3U Jek. 6, 29, 'ji'^.j Ps. 69, 4:-, to be burned 'Eiz. 15, 4; to be dried up 24, 10. Eigurat. to burn, with hatred and rage, with a of the person Is. 41, 11; 45, 24; Song OF Sol. 1, 6. PiA. Ip'^n (redupl.; inf. constr. 'lU'l'n} 1. to kindle, to make bum, ail Peov. 26, 21; to glow strongly, to burn, spoken of fever. Derivat. inin. — 2. to be very distinguished, noble; derivat. the proper name lirilf- In Arabic the verb J.&. besides the meaning "to be hot, to glow" has also that of 1in, lin, i. e. to be noble, free; and it is possible that both senses be- long together in Hebrew also. "l'^^^ (onlypZ.Di1in)m.a sun-parched land, a waste, a desert Jeb,. 17, 6. Ei^'in (fut. ■iS'l'n^) tr. to cut in (wood, metal or stone), to grave, upon (bS) a table (for which nin I. occurs in Ex. ^ r T 32,16), and figurat. Jer. 17, 1; prop, to divide, to split, coinciding with ni&, nin, yin, ns; and others. Deriv. iBIh 1 l-T ' 1 l-T ' f-T ^ 1" and 2, and the proper name N;23in. 2. to plough, Deut. 22, 10; Is.'Vs, 24; 1 Kings 19, 19; Job 1, 14. Am. 9, 13 tlie plowman will approach 'the reaper, i. e. these two employments will con- stantly succeed one another closely by reason of prosperous increase; 'n \j5iin 1 Sam. 8, 12 to cultivate the field .J (comp. Ar. (j*rji to carry on husbandry; usually »£>>=►); figurat. 's ^fbv 'n Ps. 129, 8 to plough upon one's back, i. e. to maltreat one; figur. to work Judges 14, 18. Deriv. Itjiin. — 3. to fabricate with sUll, to fashion, out of wood, me- tal, stone Gen. 4, 22, 1 Kings 7, 14, prop, to cut, Nia and other verbs of cutting being metaphorically applied in the same way; Ar. *i)tj=>- the notch of a bow. Eigurat. to devise, to machinate, 5>il5l Hos. 10, 13, nyi Peov. 3, 29 with - IV ' ' IT T ' by of the person, XIN Job 4, 8, prop, to form. Derivat. UJlh',^ ffiin 1, iBin 11., ni25in 1 and 2, the proper name N^'^t! !• Erom'the fundamental signification "to divide, to cut in pieces, to make inci- li'in 496 Lynn sions, to grave'' has arisen, according to some, the meaning to be sharp, zealous, violent, powerful, as in the case of y'nn I., and by it they explain "ii!3"''in; but see Nif. 1151.113. (fut. ©in],) to be ploughed, Jer. 26,'r8'; Mie. 3,'"l2. Pih. IBItl (not used) to form with skill, to fashion, in wood, stone, or metal. Deriv. lOin I. Hif.-6'^'ynT\ (^a/-«. ttjiin.):) l.to plough; deriv. niB'nnM and troSina. — 2. to work, V itf-:r IT "-:r ' n5>'i 1 Sam. 23, 9, agreeably to the me- taphor, application of siguif. 2 of Kal. tyin I. (not used) intr. prop, same as Dirt, yyi, to shine, to glitter, there- fore according to the usual metaphor, to be green, to grow, to shine in green, spoken of a wood; comp. ^^^ (thicket, forest) from tTlS III. {to sprout, to grow), Targ. sas (forest) from aas. Derivat. ■oSlh, adj. lain, the proper names rhn (for' «5in = itiin), ilSIn and nia'nn 2. (ac- cording to some). Others compare the Ar. (jiys^ to be rough, of the skin, thence transferred to the busby ground like aspretum,;~hvLt this is the Hebr. TUin II. ; and the analogy of 15>i and Aram. N3N IS against the supposition. t^nn II. (fut. IBpnj.) intr. 1. (not used) to speak softly, in a whispering, murmur- ing manner, spoken of magicians and soothsayers, who lisp forth their formu- las or sentences slowly and mysteriously (see SiStDS, Mann, Is. 8, 19; 29, 4), therefore to practise magic (comp. Targ. It5l5 to act the magician, iS'nn, fem. «B5in an enchanter male and female). Deriv. lain 3 (pi.) and the proper name Wiain 2. — 2. to be silent, quiet, still, inactive, proceeding from the idea of whispering and soft murmuring, the op- posite of noisy and lively. Hence a) to be inactive, spoken of the still, in- active rest of God, when He will not regard man's supplications,Ps.35,22and 109, 1 be not silent, i. e. be not inactive, but help, hear, along with £:p_n5 83, 2 /so also are ntin and ■'H'T used, n53> IT r r Ti ' IT T being the opposite); with ya of the person, to turn from a person in silence (i. e. not hearing and bringing help) 28, 1; with bN of the thing, to be in- active at or in something 39, 13; h) to march along without noise and bustle, of God Ps. 50, 3, since he is elsewhere represented as coming with thunder (Ex. 19, 16); c) to be silent, of the ears, i.e. to be deaf Mic. 7, 16, hearing in the verb »Mld (= yaiB in Ethiop. to rustle, to make a noise) being named from the opposite; d) to be quiet, sultry, of the east wind (according to some), to act secretly, covertly, with all quietness &c. Deriv. adj. "'ipiln (according to some), and llJIp 2. Ar. \juys>. to be deaf, Syr. Pih. l2Jin (not used) to be deaf, of men, as an organic disease; or figurat. of the serpent, which does not listen to the charmer. Deriv. iZJin. Hif. ©■'inn or ti'inn (fut. la-'^ni or ~Vj to practise silence, i. e. to be silent, Pkov. 17, 28, opposite to la'i Job 33, 31 or nsy 2KiNGs'18, 36; to keep quiet 2 Sam. 13,20; 19,11; not to beseech, to repent Ps. 32, 3 ; with b of the person, to observe silence towards one, not- to gainsay or reply Num. 30, 5 8 ; with bst to be silent towards one, to listen to one in silence. Is. 41, 1 , and opposite to I25''in.n ■JM Job 13, 13 to be silent from one, i. e. quietly to let him alone ; with accus. of the person, to bring a person to silence 11, 3; Jek. 38, 27; to pass over in si- lence Job 41, 4; Jer. 4, 19. But it is also used like Kal, of God, when he does not help Hab. 1, 13, or with ']73 of the person to turn from one in silence 1 Sam. 7, 8. Phenic. iDin the same, Hif. lainn to bring to silence, ]iainN for •iai^iiiN (Poenul. of Plant. 2, 7)'." Hithp. lainnn to keep oneself still, in- active, quiet. Judges 16, 2 ; 'iB''inn also having this meaning Ex. 14, 14" SI' ili I. (not used) intrans. same as Din I. to be soft, viscous, of plaster, clay. Deriv. iain 1 and 3; the proper names b'ln and liiain coupled with T-p. t:;in 497 5i;nn K'^in II. (not used) infrans. same as O'nn II. to become or be rough, of pot- sherds; comp. Ar. iwy^- scabit, or intr. asper fuit; {^y^ scaber fuit. Derivat. iain 2. ^ V r." aj^n I- (for TS'^in, wherefore the first (T T ^ IT - ' Kametz remains: constr.vi^n, pl.wili'in, ' n' ^ I- tit' constr. ilB'in) m. a cutter in wood, metal 1" tit' ' or stone, one cutting, graving or fabricat- ing, therefore lap UJin Ex. 28, 11 stone- cutter, bT'ia 'n Is. 44, 12 blacksmith, "n ' IV : - T ' ^ ' T Qiijy 44 J 13 joiner; always applied to one who fabricates his material with edged tools. Without appendage it is applied to aU sorts of workers using tools that cut, along with stin (a weaver) and D]?n (embroiderer) Ex. 35, 35 ; 38, 23. Consequently it denotes workers in metal 1 Che. 29, 5; Is. 40, 19 ; 44, 12, in wood 2 Kings 22, 6, Is. 40, 20, in stone; also a maker of arms Is. 44, 11, a lock-smith 1 Sam. 13, 19, an architect Zech. 2, 3. Figurat. Is. 45, 16 workmen of sorrows, i. e. who prepare sorrows; Ez. 21, 36 workmen of destruction, i. e. who produce destruction. In l-JOMni TlJ'nnfn 2 Kings 24, 14 16, Jek. 24,1 ^"29, 2 they are workmen, artificers, who, as belong- ing to the staple of the nation, were transported into exile by the enemy (see, however, 'i.lDa), like the D"'i2Jnn \ I 1 |.. . . / 7 I- T IT 2 Chr. 24, 12. Phenic. fflin the same (Kit. 4, 3). aJin n. (only pi. Q'^lS'^n) m. a work- man, artificer 1 Chb. 4, 14, therefore D'^ia'nri »''& {^orkmen's-valley) 4, 14, or 'nil 1.1 Neh. 11, 35, the proper name of a place (see "'^ p. 280). ajnn (constr. •srm; from iBpn I.) adj. m. (according to some) wooded, dense, an adjective to bSM (after the form ilsn, IBa) foliage, by which shade is caused e'z.'si, 3, which suits MS ns^, naa I ' 'iTT (" : 1 : nnip, where the adject, always precedes in the construct state. tljnn m. 1. only the pi. D''ia'in. arij- /Jcj'aZ work, therefore 'n Dpn Is. 3, 3 sfe7Zei OT »<«, skilful artificers having occupied the highest social place. But as the phrase stands beside itinb pa:, sig- nification 3 (sfe'ZZecZ in magic arts) seems to be more suitable. — 2. (from Bin II.) . , 1" T -^ stillness, silence; hence Josh. 2, 2 adv., in'stillness, silently. — 3. pi. enchantment Is. 3, 3, properly the whispering of en- chanters. il5"in (pi. Q''to'nn, constr. ■'tonn) m. I. (from tonn I.) loam, clay, a material for earthen ware, hence 'n "'bs Lev. 6, 21 and often; "n lar Jer." 19, 4 a potter; "n "'baa Lament. 4, 2 earthen pitchers; then alone, what is made of clay, Peov. 26, 23. — 2. (from tonn II.) ;jo«- sherds Ps. 22,16, or vessels broken into sherds Is. 45, 9, from their rough, scab- bed and scratchy nature Job 2, 8; 41, 22. rr'to'nn Ez. 23, 34 has been taken T IV T-: ' aslriii25in = !T''T2ia (Ps.75,9), since the T IV T-: T IV T : ^ \\ . Ar. \j"Y^ (to keep, to guard) is = "ipiB- But it is better here to understand the fragments of a cup. In Phenic. TB'nn is the same, therefore nbbSln fenn is the sherd, which was the token of hospitality, tessera hospitalis (Plant. Poen. 1,8). — 3. (pottery) only in union with Tij? n. p. of the chief city of Moab Is. 16, II, also called aNin ^^l? 15, 1 or ^1)5 nto'in 16, 7; 2 Kings 3, 25. It is the later N3'n3 (so Targ.), Kerakka, Charaka 2Macc.12,17, uQyfKerak, Kerek, three hours south east of 15 (Num. 21, 15) i. e. axin ^y (Is. 15, 1). It is still inhabited, and provided with a fort (Robins. Bibl. Ees. II, 569). ajnn (with a of motion Mia'^n, pi. d"'l25'nri; from la^n I.) m. 1. thicket, forest, 1S'am723,16 Isi'Targ.fflpin, Sam.NTB^ii (the n softened into n) the same, Talm. NT^S-'in, iTIJi'in forest, Targ. denomin. IT •-:' I •-: , iBin to grow into one another as m a thicket. Hence the phraseological allu- sion T'MNiii ffl'nyt! nj?iTS.3 Is. 17, 9 like the abandonment (desolation) of the forest and of the mountain-top (mountain- fort, see Ti???), i. e. like as the Amorites and other CaLaanite tribes abandon their last places of refuge before the victo- riously-pressing Israelites. Hence it ia tL;^n 498 Dti'n xinnecessary to read, with the LXX, •''pJsNnj ■'jinn n|?«lT5>3; or with Aq., Symm., Theod., Syr.,' Saad. and others, to take the word in signif. 2 as a pro- per name. To this head has also been referred Ez. 31, 3 (see lain); perhaps only 2 Chr. 27, 4 rightly. — 2. (forest) n.p. of a wooded mountain in J)''T 'la'itt of Judah 1 Sam. 23, 15 , interchanged with in 23, 14. There were nilitM (strongholds) 23, 14 19; besides, there was in the same place a hill iib^sn (which see) 23,19. " "' J13'^^ (for liJpn) m. deaf, whose ears are silent, as it were. Is. 35, 5; 43, 8; also in a metaphor, sense 42,19; of the serpent Ps. 58, 5, i. e. which is deaf to enchantment. From 125'nn 11. I" T aj'nh m. 1. (a participial form) a worker, in brass IKraos 7, 14. — 2. (an abstract form like irp, ISN) a cutting- instrument Gen. 4, 22. HtaiTl 1. (Aram, defin. from iB'nn = IT : - ^^^ 1—: Hebr. 123'iri, worker) n. p. m. Ezr. 2, 52; Neh. 7, 54. Many explain it one horn at the time of ploughing, like the proper name Sertor among the Eomans, one bom at seed-time, or in the signification Silens, conseq. = Tacitus. -^ 2. in bn N'O'nn {full of magician, comp. !:]H33i«, ni335>a) n. p. of a locality along ithe river ijjS, where was a colony of Jew- ish exiles Ezb. 2, 59, Neh. 7, 61; as there were in the same direction the exile-places nba bp ib. ib., S-ilaN bn Ez. 3,16, 'nfeisbFi 2KiNGsl9,12,''iteb'n Is. 37, 12 from 'itoN bs. With these com- pounds of bn may be compared besides Thiluta, Thilsaphata (Amm. Marc. 24, 2 ; 25, 8). n^in, /"• 1. artificial work, with ')5N Ex. 31, 5 stone-masonry, with ys 35, 33 joinery. — 2. {city of crafts, place of arti- ficial work; according to others forest) n. p. of a city in northern Palestine, situated in b''b|rt yip (1 Kings 9, 11), which was also called on account of its Phenician and heathen population "^"hi £i;;ii|!l (Is. 8, 23), and therefore it 'is named diiil-i 'q Judges 4, 2 13 16. In the vicinity of this locality, upon Irt ■ibn&i (Josh. 20, 7), now G'ibl Safad (nsi 1p), lies ■'brisi lanjs. Josh. 21, 32, alsVcaiied b'^baa'';^. (i'Maoc. 11, 63), where there is still at the present day a village Kedes (Robins. Ill, 622). Erom the appendage it may be inferred that there was still niZJin. V I -; riB'nn see to'in 3. rrin (pa7-t. pass^. ni'in) tr. same as 123'in to engrave, with bv of the thing in wAM, Ex. 32,16; Targ.n'nn, Syr.^H*, Ar. uij^hSk. the same. Din (not used) intr. same as izSin I., b'nn I. and yin. Derivative J"T 1 |"T rrin (thicket, from n'nn, see tinti, ilS'n'n, ni^'in 2) n. p. of a forest in the western part of the Judah-mountains 1 Sam. 22, 5, not far from iib'^:?)? 23, 1. 3tyn (inf. constr. la'ttSn, after b also a^ri; /m«. Sioni, before Makkeph-aioni) tr. 1. Jo imd, to bind together, to knot, viz. a) to knot threads, spoken of a weaver, part, laian a weaver (Ex. 26, 1 31; 28,6), withp;nh(35,35; 38,23) de- noting the artificial work necessary for the tabernacle; Phenic; at^n the same (Kit. 7, 4). b) to unite artificially, mu- sical instruments Amos 6, 5, artificial works Ex. 31, 4, hence aian 2 Chr. 26, 15 an artificer; of the inventors of war- like implements see Pih. c) to bind about, to gird about, a girdle. Derivat. S^fj. d) to fence, to encircle, to fortify around, a place, or to make firm, proceeding from the idea of uniting, chaining together; comp. 'nttjj; Neh. 3, 38, M'isn Am. 9, 6, the proper name 13N, Ar. xJoLs*, firm building, prop, ligatio; hence perhaps ailj'in 2 Che. 26, 15 a fortification-archi- tect, one who builds a stronghold, if this word does not belong to signif. b. De- rivat. Miaioria 1, natona 1, the proper name "jiaian. — 2. Metaphor, to meditate, to devise, a spinning together as it were of ideas (a similar metaphor occurring in dUT, d'lN, lata); commonly in a bad sense, with accus. of the object, !TraT7a styn 499 Ps. 21, 12, W'g 35, 4, lis Mic. 2, 1, n'i3slrinPROV.16,30, Ijd-nV {unrighteous) Is. id, 7, also with n:i«5n)3 2 Sam. 14, ' ' IT T -:r ' 14, Jee. 49, 20, or followed by infin. with b 1 Sam. 18, 25, Lament. 2, 8, Jer. 18, S; Neh. 6, 6, Ps. 140, 5, and with b? of the person Jer. 11, 19; 49, 30; Gen. 50, 20. To this figurative signi- fication belongs to think 1 Sam. 18, 25; to meditate 2 Sam. 14, 13; to pur- pose Ps. 140, 5 ; to account, i. e. to value, to esteem highly Is. 13, 17, Mal. 3, 16, to count as, rtSlTb Gen. 38, 15, rfnbiljb ' IT : ' ' IT • : 1 Sam. 1, 13, to count to Gen. 15, 6, Ps. 32, 2, to esteem, to regard, Is. 33, 8; 53, 3 ; to reckon, i. e. to judge, to weigh, to reflect upon. Deriv. liat^n. — 3. (not used) intr. to be allied, to be befriended, to be attached to, Deriv. ailin (in the proper namein''Sii5n),p'a5n (infriaffln ,!Ti5a;an), it: — /''IT T-:^ it: --:' it:: --:^' naisn, amn (in naiattin). IT \ -w V w ^ T IT - : - ^ Nif. aian?. {fut. aTOn;;) to be counted as Deut. 2,''ii", Prov.'iT, 28, with b La- ment. 4, 2, 3 Job 18, 3, a Is. 2, 22, d5> Ps. 88, 5, i)p3 Hos. 8, 12, or with the acciis. of the person or thing for which a thing is taken, and therefore in this case it has the meaning to be like to; then to be esteemed 1 Kings 10, 21 ; to be reckoned 2 Kings 22, 7 ; to be imputed Lev. 7, 18 ; to be counted to, with b Josh. 13, 3 or b? 2 Sam. 4, 2; to be considered, with b of the person Num. 18, 27. Hh. aisn ifut. aian^) 1. (not used) to make artificially, to put together, of war- like machines ; figur. to devise plans, in- trigues. Deriv. ^iaisn. — 2. to meditate (with exertion), to think Ps. 73, 16, iB'i'i Pkov. 16, 9; to devise, with accus. S"! Hos. 7, 15 or S'niib Prov. 24, 8 and bs of the person, D''^aaa-b3> 'n Dan. 11, 24 to plan against strongholds (in order to take possession of them); absol. to form hostile designs Nah. 1, 9; to think over (examining) Ps. 119, 59; to review 77, 6; to make account of Ps. 144, 3; to reckon 2 Kings 12, 16; of inanimate things to be about to do or suier Jon. 1,4. — 3. to be very friendly to, allied with. Deriv. the proper name iTOn. ])2wr\ Hithp. a^nn!7 to reckon oneself, to count oneself, with a amang Num. 23, 9. The stem 'n is closely connected with aan II. belonging to iiaa^f , S,t3, At. i .B vt'% (to draw firmly together), \^iJiS (to fetter), y^^JLi^ and ^^\ &c.; but the organic root is ai2J-ri, a^-ti, comp. Talm. ait to bind, a'^ii: bundle '&c. IT ' r Dtun (constr. aizSn) see fiiauin. IT T ^ r-:^ IT : — : nain m. glrdle, belt Ex. '28, 28, Lev. 8, 7, applied to the girdle of the ephod. DaJn (in compounds ailjn) see fi5'ia«:n. DUJn {part. pass. aillJn) Aram. tr. to regard, to count, !ib& = Nb3 Dan. 4, 32 as nothing (see !lb). flD^lIllBn (compounded of aion from ailJn befriended, and !i511n from ■)'i 3 with tl- wanting the accent, i. e. EshmAn or Pan, therefore it means Eshmun is a friend; see 'jS^ Itn) n. p. m. Neh. 8, 4. aiap (after the form 'Tjba) has in proper names especially the meaning befriended, associated, servant (of a deity), proceed- ing from the fundamental signification. yi is aPhenician name oiEshm4n(yQW), a Phenician God, called by the Greeks Fan, as the proper names "p, )yi yi prove. »13U5n (friendship, association) n.p. m. 1 Chr." S'i 20. liSaJn m. 1. power of combining, ex- cogitation, computation, therefore judg- ment, understanding Ecclbs. 7, 27, with nnan 7, 25; reason 9, 10 with inia5>a IT : T ' ' ' J'.— :r action, making up the sum of what is to be done in life. — 2. {stronghold) n.p. of the residence of the Amorite king Sihon, who took it and the whole ter- ritory north of the Amon from the Moabites Num. 21, 26-30; Deut. 1, 4; 2, 24 26 30; 3, 2; Josh. 9, 10. When the Israelites conquered it, it was al- lotted to the tribe of Eeuben Num. 32, 37, Josh. 13, 17, then to that of Gad Josh. 21, 39, was made a Levitical city, and was celebrated for its fish-ponds Song op Sol. 7, 5. The Ammonites pre- ferred an unjust claim to it Judges 11, 32* |i35:;n 500 ipn 19 26. When Moab aftei-wards became free, after Ahab's death, it retook Hesh- bon; but it was wrested from it anew Is. 15, 4; Jer. 48, 2. Joseph. (Ant. 12, 4, 11) calls it 'Eaai^m and the district belonging to ii'Eaas^cavms; Euseb. and Ptolemy name it 'Ea^ovg; and so the ruins still existing are called on coins. ■jiDffin {pi- nishian with Dagesh re- tained irregularly) m. 1. surrounding, enclosing, strong works 2 Che. 26, 15. — 2. inventions, make artes Eccles. 7, 29. rT'paJn (Jah is associated, fromSlBti) n. p. m. 1 Chk. 6, 30. W^Spn (the same) n. p. m. 1 Che. 25, £' "' imtDn (not used) m. befriending, at- tachment, used only in proper names. It is an Aramaean form for 'jiattJn, as ■jiaiBn and 'jisisn occur also from the same stem; in. the construct state it is "naiaJn (contracted from rT'-5i12Jn: IT : - — : IT : : ; ' Jah is a friend) n. p. m. Neh. 10, 26. n''D3aJn (the same) n. p. m. Neh. 3, 10; 9^5^'' nSyn (inf. niuin, fut. iitun;:.) intr. to be quiet, inactive, still, of waves Ps. 107, 29, opposite of 'rca'rt ; to be silent, speech- less Eccles. 3, 7, opposite of la'i ; there- fore with typj^ Is. 62, 1 not to press with words; to keep close 65, 6, i. e. not to think of; applied to God, to do nothing 64, 11; to men, not to pray. )12 "n Ps. 28, 1 = ya ffl'i'iriti, to turn away in silence from one. Hif. flfflpn {part. pi. tJifflna ; imp. pi. ITCnfl preserving - from the perfect, as •ip-'Myr! Jee. 49, 8 30) 1. to observe silence, i. e. to be silent (see 'UJinritl), of Grod, not to help Is. 42, 14; to be still 57, 11; 2 Kings 2, 3 5; with ya of the object to remove oneself in silence from Ps. 39, 3; to be inactive Judges 18, 9; 1 Kings 22, 3; 2 Kings 7, 9. — 2. to reduce to silence, withb of the person Neh. 8, 11. — ■ajnm Job Si, 5 see lain. The stem is connected with fiDrt (p. 369) 3*i^n {associate, friend, viz, of Jah) n.p. ot.'Nbh. 3, 23; 10, 24. Tliti5n {def. NSiTlin) Aram. m. dark- ness, obscurity Dan. 2, 22. NBTOH {uncovering, nakedness") n, p. m. EzR. 2, 43; Neh. 7, 46. plain see p^n. p^t^Tl see plan. "lISBn see 'iffin. nt!?n {part. pi. m. vtiizjn, f. ^ni^n with - for -, after a guttural) Aram, intr. prop, to be binding, compelling, therefore to have need, to want, to make use of, Dan. 3, 16 we do not want, i. e. we do not think it necessary; Ezr. 6, 9 and what is necessary, i. e. and all ne- cessary things. Deriv. ini25n. The stem "n is thus used in the Syr. in the Peal- and Ethpael-form, in the signification to be suitable, useful, con- venient, necessary; and as the old inter- preters translate it by T^'i^ (aram. ^[IK), TlJUJin (from «Jin), there can be no farther doubt about the meaning. The form is obviously abridged from the re- duplicated uinian (comp. Til, bib, a^a, VX, DID, DID); and the simple root ffln has the meaning to bind, to draw to- gether /irmly, to attach firmly; hence the redupl. denotes partly to be compelling, binding, necessary, partly to be suitable, convenient, its organic root being con- nected with that in TtTN. r T - Wffin (c. nin-) /. need Ezr. 7, 20. n^'^ajn see nsian. IT •• -! IT •• -: qiffin see cjfen.. Titian {fut. '^ffln;;) intr. to be dark, Qi"!! Ez. 30, 18, to be obscured, IBMffin Is.' 13, 10, lis 5, 30, r)fflj3. 1^313 Job's, 9, of the light of a tent 18, 6, to be extinguished, of the light of the eye Ps. 69, 24, Lament. 5, 17; Eccles. 12, 3 and the lookers out of the windows are quenched, i. e. the eyes; of a land covered with locusts Exob. 10, 15, of the darkening of the visage Lament. 4, 8. Figurat. of mental or political obscuration, of misfortune or a low con- '■pn 501 nstyn dition, hence to be unfortunate, low, fallen, unknown, helpless. Deriv. "^l^n, rtDlBH, nsian , '^jifin, "ijidnn. — The fundamental signification seems to be to veil, to cover (see t\^y, ubs), since darkness is usually regarded as a veiling of light; accord- ingly the organic root TJIBTI is cognate with that in pi, pffl'H, p'td"} &c. mf. "^^i^nfi (1 p! ■'FOiiSnp \ fut. Tjiian:, ■siion^) 1. to make dark, to darken, with accus. (Di'^) Am. 5, 8, or with V 8, 9, of the darkening of the earth by a total eclipse of the sun in the year of Jero- boam's death; or absol. and figurat. Jeb. 13, 16, i. e. helplessness breaks in; to spread darkness Ps. 105, 28; 139, 12.— 2. Figurat. to darken, to confuse, !nS5> Job 38, 2. "ntl'n {part. Tjtoin; fut. TjiStl^ TfiBON or l^ionis) tr. to hold, to hold bach, to keep of, with 'ja of the person to withhold, to detain, to 'refuse Gen. 22, 12; 39, 9, to keep from, to deliver 1 Sam. 25, 39 ; with the simple accus. of the object to save 2 Sam. 18, 16, to keep far from 2 Kings 5, 20; to spare Pkov. 13, 24; 17, 27; p^l 'n Job 30, 10 to keep back the spittle, i. e. not to spit out before one ; to reserve 38, 23; to give a check to Jer. 14, 10; to put a stop to Job 16, 5 ; Is. 58, 1 ; to snatch, ii5b3, from the pit Job 33, 18, Ps. 78, 50, for which pTlSn stands once Is. 38, 17; 'riNbl yra to give and not withhold, i. e. to give abundantly Prov. 21, 26; to deliver 24, 11, Ps. 19, 14; without stating the object Ezr. 9, 13 thou hast delivered (us) below our iniquity, i. e. undervaluing our iniq[uity; to limit Is. 54, 2 ; to moderate, i. e. to hold 14, 6. In Ez. 30, 18 mss. and interpreters {Rashi, Kmchi) have read Di^Jr; Tjiun and trans- lated: the day has denied (its light); per- haps the more correct reading is "^[12)0. Mf. "^ton; (fut. '^ton;) to be held in, moderated Job 16, 6, to be delivered 21, 30. The fundamental signification of the organic root '!]i»-n (Targ. Tjon to lessen, to draw ofi', Syr. ^iH" to withhold, to keep back) appears to be to cut off, like 1^3, and therefore it is connected with the organic root in li-Sto (belonging to Y'sVi), Lat. sec-are, Targ. '^jiDn a little piece. "Bin (only pi. D'^sn^Sn) adj. m. dark, low, poor, mean, therefore D^3\Bn Prov. 22, 29 obscure, low people; Targ. N5i«5ri, NS''l»n for bl. " IT • -: r T^aJn (with suff. ■'SiBn) m. 1. dark- ness, opposed to "liN Gten. 1, 4 18 ; Ec- CLES. 2, 13, conceived of as an inde- pendent material Is. 45, 7 ; Job 38, 19 ; dusMshness Josh. 2, 5 ; a dark night Job 3, 4, with npba {dark shadow), !i53» {dark cloud) 3^5"; 10, 21; 34,22, or with bsiy and 155> Deut.4, 11; nbBN Zeph. IV T-: 'ITT ' ' IT"-: 1, 15, closely connected with the latter to intensify the meaning Ex. 10, 22, parall. ^rh'h Job 5, 14. — 2. Figurat. helplessness 5, 14; 12, 25, opposed to dV and fi'^'irTi^; horrid, dark sheol 10, 21 ; the grave 17, 13, 'n ni'il^iN Is. 45, 3 treasures of the grave (because great treasures were concealed in a Babylonian sepulchre, Herod. I, 187); a prison Is. 42, 7; danger Job 15, 22, misfortune, misery 15, 23 30; 20, 26, threatening danger 22, 11; 29, 3; death 18, 18; wretchedness 23, 17, IS 'n Is. 5, 30 = inailim nilt 8, 22 as a climax. Then IT r (T T ' darkness of the understanding , i. e. igno- rance, short-sightedness Job 37,19; Ec- CLES. 2, 14; falsehood, injustice Is. 5, 20; Prov. 2, 13; Ecclbs. 2, 13; sadness EccLES. 5, 16. TiUJn Aram, same as Hebr. "^^n. Deriv. 'ijiuSn. nbaJn (fem. of ^[^n, like nar^ aban- donment Jer. 49, 11 from aTS*, fiplIJ5> ' _ VI ' *IT : IT pressure Is. 38, 14 from p12Jy ; the Dagesh lene expected at the beginning of the second syllable is omitted, because a sibilant [ffl, T] precedes, as is also the case with 1, e. g. n5'n\ 13''S1il5, ■'S^?, ' " IT :- r : - i : ' 13 "ip, 13'n'i, though the rule has not been carried out) /. darkness (parallel Ubib), MiC. 3, 6 and darkness shall be to you, that you may not receive an answer. "311: n or !l3"'lBn. (c. nSlBp after the; form naris from rrMrtS; on the omission r v-.K IT •• ; ' n^tyn 502 of Dagesh lene see nbiBn) /. same as Tjtiri Gen. 15, 12; Is. 8," 22; Ps. 82, 5; 139, 12. nSUSn see niTlSn. IT : V IT •• -: D'^pUpn (pi.) rn, darkness, figur. misery, misfortune Is. 50, 10. /Jifn (Kal unused) intr. to reel to and fro, to totter; hence to be weak, decaying, feeble, exhausted, a collateral form of b*il53 (which see); comp. Arab. Jumjs., cMkA., Jmi^, Jlim^ (to be weak, slack, then to be bad, mean, worthless), Ju&- (to be lean, weak), J^A»*5'(to be inert, flabby) &c. Nif. Vions to be enfeebled, exhausted, decaying, whence tJ'^bl^na Deut. 25, 18 enfeebled. 7tyn {part. bttJn) Aram. tr. to rub or beat fine, to crush, cognate in sense with p^ (a verb) Dan. 2, 40 ; Syr. '^^^ to beat out thin, of tin, Talm. Nbl2Jin what is IT ; t pounded, bruised, gravel, like to'n.|i of similar derivation; figurat. Syr. V.»-i» to analyse closely, finely, subtly, to think, ^* PJl)?5- The fundamental signification is unconnected with the Hebr. baJn. 1- T Dtifn (not used) intr. to shine, to glitter, to be luminous, spoken of shining brass, connected with Dn3, ']u5n, Aram. dl^n. Metaphor. (like other verbs having the same fundamental signific, e. g. in, in), to be shining, distinguished, rich, noble, or physically, to be large, strong, corpulent, like the Ar. ***«?►, ft'Misa.; of places, to be fruitful, fat. Deriv. Dl25n belonging to the ulterior developments '')75«5rt, hioilin, the proper names ST!5n (perhaps' also dtoti), lini^n, nsfauSn"' Qtpn (noble, distinguished, rich, or shining, viz. Jah is) n. p. m. Ezr. 2, 19; Neh. 7, 22. dSdn see Siliin. IT •, IT li'Q^^n {fruitfulness, fulness) n. p. of a place' in Judah Josh. 15, 27, whence in the later period of the language the Gentile "'Siutin or "^i" or "'NJ" Hashmo- \ I- : - 1- I- T ]\Dr\ naean, i. e. proceeding from Hashmoni in Josephus (Ant. 12, 6, 1) 'Aaaiicovalog, a surname borne by the Maccabean family from their ancestor downwards. PHtlin (from Q^2Jn splendour, glitter, with the derivative ending b-, as in b£31SN,b'a5n; with a of motion' !ib?2ll5n) r : — :' tt-:' _ ti- : --' m. shining or burnished brass, polished gold, Ez. 1, 4 27; 8, 2, obviously iden- tical with bbj? nuSriS (according to the LXX shining brass j elsewhere smelted or burnished brass) 1, 7 or irtsa niljns (EzB. 8,27); Eevblation 1, 15 and 2, 18 XalxoXt^avog. It is possible, however, that the word is foreign, i. e. Assyrian, and might be known as such in Me- sopotamia, where Ezekiel lived. The electrum, as the LXX and Vulg. ren- der it, is a mixture of silver and gold, a clear, shining metal; comp. PZmy 33, 4. l^aJCn (from dian with the derivative syllable ']-, as in lam, 1^10; i'^"'"- U'lSJiTfin) m. 1. properly shining, hence noble, distinguished, a magnate, Ps. 68, 32 (Kimchi), confirmed by the Arabic; the family name D'^N;3M11Jn has also been un- derstood in conformity with this signi- fication, but improperly. — 2. n. p. of Hermopolis in Egypt, Coptic s'mois-mc-, Ar. (juUMjil , in which sense Ibn Sar&h takes n"'3n;25ri Ps. 68, 32 i. e. the inha- bitants of Hashman in Egypt; which, however, is very problematical. nDQUJn (fruitfulness) n. p. of a sta- tion of the Israelites in the desert Num. 33, 29. Vu^ (not used) intr. same as Di25n to shine, to glitter, to be beautiful, of dress, conseq. connected with the Ar. /%.Mfca>-, whence the proper names ^jm^ {•pr\) &c. Deriv. ')ian. But as the signi- fication of the verb is too indefinite for the derived noun, it is better to com- pare the former with "jan I.: to surround, to hedge about, to enclose, to conceal, of a magazine, comp. 'jiin and lah 1. ■jaJn m. properly bag, therefore the four-cornered gorget worn by the high- priest on the breast, which was set with ^\i;n 503 ^^n 12 precious stones in gold, arranged in four rows, the hollow part of it having the dillN and D'^Hn Ex. ch. 25. 28. 29. 39 ; Lev. 8, 8. As 'it gave decisions in difficult CLuestions, it was called "n tasuJBfi Ex. 28, 29 30. The version of Symmachus doxiov refers to the funda- mental signification; and that of Xoyiov (Philo) and loyslov (LXX) to the ope- ration. See Ben-Sira 45, 10. fl^n I. {part. pass. pi. constr. "'Bliuri. a Syriae form for ■'&" Is. 20, 4, as ipia Judges 5, 15 = ''pb; inf. ahsol. qiBn, constr. withb tltonb; imp. f. sing. -^B^r\\ fut. f(9iTV^^ tr. 1. to separate, to divide, to strip off, like £]Dn (which see) ; whence Ijion (a noun). — 2. Metaphor, to make bare, to uncover, Ar. t^JuuS. So e. g. nia Is. 20, 4, bailj 47, 2, D^bitt; Jee. 13, 26, a sign of contemptibleness and mean- ness; SilT 'n to make bare the arm Is. 52,10, Ez. 4, 7, 1. e. to go courageously into the fight, heroes having been ac- customed to bare the right arm in battle, in ancient times (Arr. Alex. 5, 18 ; Silius Ital. 12, 715; Stat. Theb. 1, 413; Lucan. 2, 543); to discover, e. g. the hiding- places of the enemy Jer. 49, 10; of IS^ Ps. 29, 9, IBI. Jo. 1, 7 to strip off the bark (of a tree), to strip it of leaves, which is tantamount to its uncovering. Deriv. IjizsriT?, the proper name NDlfen. nti'n II. tr. to draw, D';)? (with \a_ cut of) Is. 30, 14; miB Hag. 2, 16. The organic root appears to be connected with qto'ti and with 5!S1^. Oipn {pi. constr. ■'Bton) m. a division, a Utile floch, of goats 1 Kings 20, 27 (Targ., LXX, Vulg.). Dt!/n I. intr. to cleave or tie or bind oneself to something, deriv. pffln or pIttSn; to be attached to, united to, firmly bound to a thing; fig. with a of the pers. to have pleasure, delight in one. Gen. 34, 8 ; to love Deut. 21, 11; to adhere to 7, 7; Ps. 91, 14; or absolutely with an infin. following, to have an inclination, desire, pleasure, in or for doing a thing 1 Kings 9, 19; 2 Chr. 8, 6. Deriv. pTBp. Pih. plBti to fasten together, to knot together, to bind (by cross-poles) Ex. 38, 28. Deriv. pvin. Fuh. p^n (part. pl!5n?3) to be united Ex. 27, 17;' 38, 17. "''' The stem is sufficiently ascertained by means of pTM (which see), Ar. (3^?** (to adhere to), ;3"*iuC (to love), (Jjy»- (to bind), Targ. pion for Hebrew UJjan &c. The organic root is pi?"^^, also found in ptU-S, pT, Ar. liLs. &c. Dt!?n n. tr. same as TiiBn Is. 38,17, as the latter stands in a similar phrase in Ps. 78, 50 and Job^33, 18. pajn or pi;Sri {pi. t3"')?.ll5ri) m. what is fastened (to two opposite points), a junction-rod, a cross-pole, Ex. chs. 27. 36. 38. pUJn {pi. Q''p.") ™- a spoke, connect- ing the rim with the nave lKiNas7,3S pffitl (with suff. ■'p.lBn) m. desire, what is pleasing, opposed to what is useful or necessary; ease. Is. 21, 4; metaphor pleasant-building, 1 Kings 9,1 19; 2 Chr, 8, 6. "^ti^n (not used) tr. same as IIB^ to knot around, to bind about, to hind, to unite, hence like the Ar. mjs>. to as- semble, to bind together; spoken of water, to run together (into thick clouds); from which fundamental signification it meant even at an early period to arrange, to bring together in harmony; Phenician 'lUJn the same, and therefore in the Pheni- cian cosmogony TilStl (Chusor, like Ulom = ab'S) was the principle of order, rdhs, hence the name of the world-arranger, XovaoiQog in Damascius (in his Pheni- cian cosmogony); and lisn, "Aaamqo?, arrangement, the eighth principle of power in the primitive cosmogony of the Babylonians; with N-lfflp Kmadgi} (union), rTni^fi , Xovadg&ig (Sanch.p.42), a name of Harmonia, by which is meant personified law 0nvQai (N'nin), so far aa harmony and order are the consequence of law. The organic root is I^J"!?, 1lJ3'i? . mtyn 504 nn also existing in 'it?']? IT., Aram. 1£3"|?, and in ^il5. from the fundamental signi- fication may naturally result the mean- ing to be firmly wound together, to be strong, firm; which the Targ. assumes for ^n«Jn. IT : - mJUn {constr. n'n^n) /. a gathering, denseness, with d^a as a poetical peri- phrasis for thick cloud 2 Sau. 22, 12, rendered hy Ibn G'andch fulness of rain. The LXX and Syr. read r3l25n after Ps. 18, 12. "lasn (plur. Q'^T) m. the nave, of a wheel, modiolus, in which the spokes unite 1 Kings 7, 33. tyt^'n (not used) intr. same as tildjJ (belonging to TZSp.) to be parched, sapless, withered, hard, of grassblades. Arab. a ^ ^jiok rV. dried up. aJUJn (after the form nnn, a colla- teral form of llJilin) m. dry grass, hay, which the fire easily catches Is. 5, 24. It seems to be interchanged with 12J)5_ 33, 11. Ar. (jMjyMA. the same. nn (after the form bl, i'l, TfT ; pi. Q^nn) 1. adj. m. dismayed, terrified, fear- ful, ISam. 2, 4, where fii'iM nil))?, stands poet, for niUj?. "''n'a.V, as elsewhere the verb nn is applied to D'^'iai (Ob. 9), oppos. to b'^n "ITN ; Jee. 46, 5. — 2. {pause nH; with suf. DSTO) ^i^st. fear, dread. Job 41, 25; DSnn the terror of you GtEN. 9, 2, where the suS. is in an objective sense. From this noun is developed I- • ' IT • rin (giant, prop, terror, the same me- taphor as in D"'MSJ, see a^is) 1. n. p. of a son of Canaan, mentioned as the se- cond after ■j'T'K Gen. 10, 15; Gent. pi. m. nn ■'Ja 23, 's'fem. nn ni:a 27, 46, or 1-1": ' ' ' I" 1 : ' ' sing. masc. ""Fin, fem. n'^nn Ez. 16, 3, fern, plur. n^nn 1 Kings 10, 1. — 2. Collect, designation of a race Exod. 3, 8 , also pi. D"'nn Josh. 1, 4. In the patriarchal time this tribe had their centre (Gen. ch. 23) at Hebron, the oldest city in the world according to the Israelite view (Numb. 13i, 22); and became related to the Edomites 26,34; 27,46; 36, 2. The tribe ""in only is mentioned as dwelling in the 'midst of the Hittites at that time, 34, 2. Hence the Hittites occupy the first place in the enumeration of the Phenician tribes inland Ex. 3,8 17 ; 13, 5; Josh. 3, 10; Judges 3, 5; Eze. 9, 1; Neh. 9, 8; and in archaic phraseology all the interior was even named y"1!* D'^nnM Josh. 1, 4. At the time of Mo- ses they had entirely disappeared , at least as the leading tribe, and dwelt as a scattered remnant among the Jebusites and Amorites Num. 13, 29, Josh. 11, 3; the latter having stepped into their place. — 3. In consequence of violent commo- tions in Palestine before the conquest of it by the Israelites, the Hittites were driven out of the land, in their collec- tive capacity, and peopled the opposite island of Cyprus, which must have been called not merely the island of the Q"*!??, but also that of the O'lnn. At the time r • of Solomon, when all the remains of the Hittites in Palestine were doomed to eternal servitude 1 Kings 9, 20 21, there were still fl"'nn!l ''Sba with O'lN "'Sbja 10, 28, which can refer only to the nu- merous kings of Cyprus (where were nine kingdoms Diod. 16,42; Mel. 2, 7; Plin. H. N. 5, 35); and the n^nn, whom Solomon married 1 Kings 11, 1, the fear of the Syrians for the D"'nnt7 ""SbM with the Qi'naa ■'Sbia 2 Kings 7, 6, "as also Judges 1, 26 can also refer to nothing but Cyprus, as Josephus (Ant. 9, 4, 5); Eusebius and Jerome (s. v. XsTTisifi) have understood the point. But as Greece had attained to an ascendancy there at an early period, the ethnographical table (Gen. 10, 4) reckons the D'^ns to ]V, a double derivation of a similar kind occurring in the case of other tribes also (10, 7 28 29). In Phenician sources n3 is the proper name of the city Citium in Cyprus (on a Sidonian coin with the inscription ^'IS n3 iSSN 333 6N QShitb), the oldest town of the Phenicians on this island; then the name of the whole territory; written elsewhere ni3 (in Chit- tite inscriptions). In addition to these forms there occurs on Tyrian and Chittite nnn 505 Dnn coins nn. An inhabitant of this city- is called ■'nS, Kmsvg (Athen. inscript. 2, 1), for which "'nn also appears (33. inscript. of Citium); pi. ^FiB (Kit. 1, 1). nnn («»/?«. eonstr. with b: ninnV; IT T ^ ' : I :- ■ fut. t^n^^, with suf. T[nn2) ''"• '" **^«5 lay hold of, seize (Kimchi), with nD5 Ps. 52, 7 to take and pluck; TUN 'Pi Prov. 6, 27 to take up fire, with ']M of the place whence Is. 30, 14; with bs?of the person and accus. of the object. In Pkov. 2&, 22 it is a praegnans expression for, to take up and lay upon one, or nnn has also the meaning of nns. nnn Pkov. 17,10 can only be the fut. apoc. of iinn according to the Milel-aecent, like snn from nsn {Kimchi), and with a of the person = a tni< to lay hold of, 'to seize; and the meaning of the phrase is, re- proof lays hold of the wise man more &c. Ar. Ui^ the same. Deriv. tinnM; on 1 _ IT : - ' the contrary the proper name nnia comes from nn = nn , like nna from ns -, see IT 1-' -r it' mM"'nN. I " — : The organic root of the stem H-nn is closely connected with that in lU'ti , rn-N. r T nnn (from nnn after the form nao) (T * I" T IT ' ' /. terror, fear Gen. 35, 5. bwn m. a bandage, 'n DtU Ez. 30, 21 to put a bandage = '^yn in the same place; Talm. bnin basket, made of twigs ot rods plaited into one another. nnn PI (from the redupl. Pihel nnnn after the form bJiba; only ^Z. D'^nnnn) m. terrors, dangers, Eccles. 12, 5, in- correctly taken by Jerome and the Vulg. for a part. pi. terrified, fearful.. ''nn (^atww^OT. from the proper name np;"^^;. D-'Fin) m., n-'nn {jpl. njnn) f. see the proper name nn. n''nn m,. same as dnin Gen. 38, 18 p t it ' 25 in the Samar. text. n'^nn (with &uf. &n''nn) f. 1. same as nn, nnn, nnnn, terror, cognate in sense with Jibna; Ez. 32, 27 for the it T r.* ' ' ' heroes were a terror (or to read with vss. 29 30 fifj'll^-l thdr heroship); the LXX read Dbs innn ■'3. Ez. 32, 30 Onnia-Vj Dr'^nna with their terror of their might, i. e. that proceeded from their might, 'n ipS 32, 24 32 to cause terror. — 2. respect, awe, 26,17. — An- other n'lnn see under nn. r • 1" "nnn (Kal unused) tr. 1. to cut, to divide (cognate in sense 1^), Targ. 'rjnn, closely connected in its organic root with that in pn-a, nn"3, about which ' 1- T '_ r t ' fundamental meaning the numerous de- rivatives in the Targ. and Mishna hardly leave a doubt. — 2. to establish, to de- termine, to decree, as yiTl, "nT-l. Nif. '^ir\m to be determined, decreed, upon (b?) one, Dan. 9, 24. ^nn (Kal unused) tr. 1. to enwrap, to swathe, a new-bom child ; to wrap up, to bind, a wound (cognate in sense ttjan), proceeding from the fundamental signi- fication "to wind, to bind", and identical in its organic root bn"n with that in bTii, bn'S, Aram. bTJi, "'*>i — «, Arab. r T ' r T ' r : ' ? ^' XxSkc. Deriv. bhn, iibnn. — 2.ri- ^ I T ' it • -: gurat. either trans, to cover, to conceal, to hide, or intrans. e. g. of a lurking-hole; better, however, after another metaphor, to be strait, firm, dense, strong. Deriv. the proper name ibnn. Pih. bnn (not used) to bind about strongly or firmly, a wound, to put on a bandage. Deriv. binn. Puh. bnn to be swaddled, Ez. 16, 4. Hoph. bnnn the same, Ez. 16, 4. phn (not used) adj. m., only fern, as the substantive n^nn (with suff. ■inbnn) f. a swaddl- ing-cloth, cover, in a fig. sense Job 38, 9. ipnn {lurking-hole or stronghold) n.p. of a place in Damascene Syria Ez. 47, 15 ; 48, 1 ; Ar. (.^Jub.. latibulum. Dnn (fut. fihni) tr. 1. same as DBn p T ^ t : -' IT, to shut up, lya 'n Job 9, 7, to enclose, to close, to veil, like ISa ^50; to seal, with. a of the instrument, "dnna 1 Kings 21, i, n?a£ia Esth. 8, 8 10, as the close or / Dnn 506 jnn subscription, B'^airri. the undersigned Neh. 10, 2 ; to seal up, i. e. to close, Jer. 32, 10 44, opposite to ""iba vss. 11 and 14; Is. 29, 11; to seal, with a of the thing, to press the seal upon a thing, i. e. to seal it up. Job 33, 16; 37, 7; comp. Greek cgopttj'/? (seal) from qopatrffto (to close). — 2. Figur. to seal, to close, = QnD Dan. 12, 4 9, i. e. not to publish a book or a prophecy; to close T^i'M Song of Sol. 4^ 12, the image of an untouched maiden; to confirm Dan. 9, 24, like aqiQayi^Eiv, consec[. = to justify, to recognise; to fill niNtatl (the measure of sin) Dan. ibid.; to keep Is. 8, 16, with *i^ {to bind up) , of a judge's sentence of punishment Job 14, 17 which is in a li'niS or 'nS'iN Deut. 32, 34. Part. I ; IT ' finin Ez. 28, 12 a sealer, i. e. last, viz. highest, supreme. Deriv. dnirt, nanh, Nif. Qnns (inf. alsol. dinni) to he sealed Es'th.3, 12; 8, 8. JPih. dnfi to close, to shut up. Job 24, 16, with iab as a dat. commodi. Hif. D''rill!l to close, to stop, from {yq) a thing Lev. 15, 3. The stem has its analogy in dDti, d&n, dt3N, day, Ar. ^, f^Xh^ &c., but the organic root is manifestly driTi; Arab, also, to bolt. DSlh see dnin. IT IT QJiri (with suff. santi) Aram. tr. to seal, to close up, Dan. 6, 18. J153nn fern, same as dnin Gen. 38, 25. V IV ' IT ' ?rin (inKal only the part. m. ']n'n, with sulf. iinh; fem. nsnh, with suff. insnn) tr-are*. prop, to bind, to wind, to tie, connected in its organic root iriTi with that in ]£?-«, N-5a, )p-^, in-si (which see) &e. But in use it is only metaphori- cal, a) to effect a union, an affinity, spoken of the father of a maiden, hence inn a father-in-law, Ex. 18, 1; Num. 10, 29; Judges 4, 11; 19, 9, prop, one who makes an alliance; nunh a mother-in- ' V IV law, Deut. 27, 23, i. e. the mother of the wife. Eor the father and mother of the husband the language has dti, nian of like derivation, Deriv. inn. ' ^ • Ti^ b) to marry, i. e. to enter into an alli- ance. Deriv. nsnn . c) intr. to be related, IT*. — : ^ made a friend of. Deriv. ^nn 4. Hithp. innnti to contract affinity by marriage, with "nij (accus.) Gen. 34, 9, 1 Kings 3, 1, a i"Sam. 18, 21 and ) of the person 2 Chr. 18, 1, only applied to that which arises on the woman's side. In explanation of the fundamental signification comp. Arab, ^y^ III. to contract affinity by marriage, H. and IV. to marry, ^lyXs>- to bind, out of which has arisen a) the meaning to circumcise, i. e. to devote by vow to a god, to unite in marriage with a god, as it were, circumcision expressing ideal union with God; b) to keep a feast at a wedding or a circumcision. ISnn {constr. ^nn , with su/f. isnn; pi. d^snn , with suff. T'Snn) m. prop, one allied, married, hence 1. at a marriage- feast, a bridegroom, who rejoices in con- ducting home the bride Is. 62, 5, and like the latter exults in that day (see !l^3) Jer. 7, 34; 16, 9; 25, 10, who wears a chaplet Song op Sol. 3, 11, and encircles his head like a priest Is. 61, 10; who with joyful spirit and fuU of life's enjoyment goes forth from the bride - chamber (Msn, Tin) with the feeling of vigour, Jo. 2,16, Ps. 19, 6, after he has become in the wedding-night by the offer- ing of the maiden's blood a d'^BI inn, i. e. one allied by the maiden's blood (Ex. 4, 25 26), an idea which was subsequently transferred to circumcision. — 2. a bride- groom of circumcision, i. e. who is allied to God by the dedication of the blood of circumcision {Kimchi, Ibn 6'andch, Ibn Esra), called from the consummation of marriagedi?2'i inn Ex.4,25 26 ; hence Ar. ijjCik to circumcise, ^j^s^ circumcised, (jbi^ circumcision &e. — 3. a son-in- law. Gen. 19, 14, 1 Sam. 22, 14, some- times with b instead of the genitive 1 Sam. 18, lb, Neh. 13, 28; as TinN, ins, ans, Nito, b si are also used.— 4. Generally a relative by marriage 2 Kings 8, 27. n:nn 507 nnn inSrin (from the masc. inn) fern. IT >• — S ' ' esipousaHs^ nuptials, SoNQ of Sol. 3, 11. ^nn (fut. tlijin^) tr. to tear away, to rob, = titan, £l£3)?, Ar. »-iX&. (of death's seizure), hence to catch, seize. Job 9, 12, where the LXX read T^n. Deriv. &rin (after the form Tjba) masc. a robber, Peov. 23, 28, not the ahstrfct robbery; Ar. t-flJCa» (robber, death). "inn (fut. l'rn\ pi. Vir\w) tr. to break thrsugh, with a of the object, e. g. a wall Ez. 8,8; 12', 5 12, seldom with the accus., e. g. Q'^Fia Job 24, 16 ; to break through into, to press into, with a of the limit to which. Am. 9, 2; figurat. as 5>i)pari (2 Kings 3, 26), fps (2 Sam. 13, 25 27), to make an exertion, of sailors Jon. 1,13; where the Targ. and Vulg. translate according to the sense "to row". The Ar. Jisk ''to deceive" is not connected with the word. Hif. TTjnfl (not used) to break in, of a thief, deriv. n'^FitiJa. nnn (L e. nn, /m. nnn, pi. inn, in pause nnn, wn; imp. pi. ?nn; part. nn, pi. d^nn; fut. nni, nnn, nnx, as in other intrans. verbs of this class, e. g. bp"!, na'', 'sli, Qni; 1 pers. with a of motion nnnjS; pi. -nnni, innn. Another nni,, e. g. Jbe. 21, 13, belongs to nns, and here belongs also Wtt'; Job 21, 13 for inn'') intrans. 1. to be overthrown, brought to shame, to be disgraced, dis- appointed, with iB'^ah or m Is. 20, 5 ; 37, 27; Jee. 8, 9; 17, 18; 48, 1 20; 50, 2, of which it is a stronger expression; to be confounded, sad, Jbe. 14, 4; to be in despair 48, 1; to be dismayed 48, 39; to be terrified Job 32, 15 ; with NpJ to be alarmed Dbut. 1, 11, Josh. 10, 25, with ')a Is. 30, 31 or ''3BH of the person Jee. 1, 17 or also 173 of the thing Is. 31, %; to be dispirited, helpless Jbe. 50, 36 (parallel bsis); Ob. 9; Is. 8, 9. — 2. to be crushed, bruised, broken in pieces, objectively and subjectively Is. 7, 8; 51, 6 and perhaps in other places. The connection of the two senses is seen from Ijai^ (Job 41, 17), and from the Arab, verbs ^jyi, Jije, ^m^, where both exist likewise. But see Pihel. Deriv. nn (adj. and subst.), nnn , nnn, n^nn, the proper name np. Nif nni to be afraid, construed with ■lisa Mai. 2, 5. But as Kal has this meaning, the form may perhaps be better referred to nni after the form l-T cini. r • Pih. I. nnn (3 fem. nnnn) l. to ter- rify, to put into fear, with a of the thing by which. Job 7, 14, in" which sense Hifil (31, 34) and the noun (6, 21) are used. In Dnin'uS)? nnnn Jbe. 51, 56 it is usual to read either dniB]? or innn to bring out agreement in gender and number, and to take the sense intran- sitively (like nns Is. 60, 11, nps 51, 13) "to be broken to pieces", translating their bows are broken; 1 Sam. 2, 4 being rendered in the same manner. But though nnn (perhaps = nn3 , lans , Ar. dJf>) has the signification to be broken in pieces, we have seen under nn (above) that there is no need to depart from the usual meaning even when the word is coupled with n^|5. (1 Sam. 2, 4). miSp stands for 'p lIJiN an archer, and nnnn refers to baa, the leading sub- ject in this verse and the next, so that we should translate: she puts their archers (the reading should be n'lniniS)?) in fear, nn being parallel to "isb (as in Jee. 8, 9) and Qi'p'iaa to niriiB)5. Pih. II. (not used) nnnn the same. Deriv. nnnn. Hif nnn (2 pers. nnnp for 'nn , as is sometimes the case before gutturals, comp. e. g. nn'isn from Tti*; 1 pers. ■'nnnn, with i convers.innnni, abridged from' innnn , as ''nan out of ■'nh-'an from riV2, the vowel between the last radical and the personal suffix often falling away, e. g. ■'Fi'ltt^ Ex. 23, 22 from 'ntt, dnbuii Gbn."17, 11 Nif. of ba; fut. nn^," nns, with suf ■'inn^ *['nnN. — in^n^ Hab. 2, 17 stands, ac- cording to some, for wn^, instead of nnn^ 508 D which the LXX and Jerome read Tinw) to put in fear, to scare, Jbr. 1, 17; 49, 37; to scare with anguish Is. 9, 3; to terrify Job 31, 34. In Hab. 2, 17 if we are to read inn^, the suff. should be be taken as a parallel to ^|?> rtnna. Deriv. rnn fearful, a fearful state. Job 6, 21. In Gen. 9, 2 the cod. Samar. uses referred to rrijirtii; but if ttnni, it is to it for the subst. nn. CD D , called rTit; (i. e. rrjE: from na , na , to knot, to knot together, to twist into each other) or U-iU (i. e. ta^U from a^iU, Dts), as the name of a letter signifies twisted together, united into one another, wound together, concrete a basket (see 111), apparently because in old Hebrew and Phenician writing (Ui (^)) ft)i ^^^ therefore in old Greek &c., as also in Palmyrene, the sign so used represents the outline-form of a household basket. The orthography rT't: , whence the Greek OiJTa, is the older; and the meaning serpent, after the Arab. ia^Lb, or after another Arabic word sHn, rests in part on a misconception of the true form, and in part on a misinterpretation of the word. See Uia, nia. But the an- cient Semitic term was not chosen on account of the form of the letter, but for the sake of the initial sound, as is the case with all the names of the letters of the alphabet. As a sound of the alpha- bet it was uttered te, like be, gi, de, he &c, in primitive fashion; and the name n^a must have adapted itself to the original sound in this instance, as in the case of the other letters. As a numeral it denotes 9, lb 15, a 9000, a being the ninth letter of the alpha- bet. With reference to the pronunciation, a ^ands in the same relation to the other t-sounds as p does to the ^-sounds, i. e. it is a sort of guttural, an aspirated t, which the Greeks represent by 0, e. g. niB &^ra, abM fidl&a, tjia Greek &QV7rT0}, the Germans by t or th, the English by t; whilst n is only a, t- eound. Some have wished to find the application of an aspiration to it, ortho- graphically, in JTliia'? Ez. 22, 24, aptly read by the LXX !Tn?7a73 = Sliaa (from •' IT T : •. IT T \ ^ ia73); but this is not proved. So early as the LXX the relation was the re- verse. So e. g. asiB 2nqidr, ')a)5'' 'lExtdv, naa Ta^ix, Tiaa MatQai&^ n being- represented vice versa by & (see n). There are but few departures from this mutual normal condition in which a is set forth by & or even 8, e. g. ai3 0ovS, abs'ibs 'EXi(fald&. The same holds good in the rendering of the Punic in Plautus's Poenulus, e. g. N'na?? (= Hebr. JTnaa in the sense of "dutyj obligation", Poen. 1, 13 mutro), and in other Phenician words scattered through Greek and Latin writers, e. g. Dias 'Aradi'v (Diosc. 1, 119). Here, as in the LXX, nothing more than the later period of the pronunciation is shewn, which is also followed by the Syriac orthography. Besides the original, gut- tural, dull-aspirated a , there was also a sibilated i. e. one mixed with a sibilant, sound, denoted in Arabic by a diacritic point (Jb). This division of the letter appears clearly from the different signi- fications of stems written alike. From the diverse nature of the a- sound just given we can explain 1, its interchange with the other t- sounds, when the <-power prevails, a) with 1, as lasa and tiaT, baa II. and bai, qiU and ni'l II., Iia and in; coinp. ^ai Aram. Naa Syr. U^, laa Arab. n ^' ^ IT ■ •/ 'I V IV ijdo; b) with n, as MSjn and !iya, iqari and t)nri, V'lnSOS (DaV. 3,5 and' 10, 15)^ and pTOSa? (iO,'7), aaT and nn-n, IW and inn' "iaa and lan; comp.'liapr l-T ,,1"' 1"^ c '"iJ I"* Arab. JOs, t2lB(5 Syr.li^ajj, 'la^ Arab. NED 509 !?n!D JCi'. — 2. with n, -whon the dull gut- ■tural power prevails, e. g. biU 11. and ian, riiu and Ei-nn; comp, wnn Zab. y^^i^ , .iiu. and -014 &c. — 3. with the sibilant X, as aan and iSri, »|?U and s^:t, "nua and iaa\ i^a and lira, nsa 1- T ' I- T r r ' I- T r J ' r T and nsJS: and sometimes also with the Other sibilants, e. g. NU and NO and 5>T, naa and nj5t, baa I." and VaT^, rria and ma, "Tia and 111!) &c. Besides ITT ' I I Til these normal changes caused by the peculiarity of the a -sound there are other rarer ones, viz. 1. with "1 on ac- count of the similarity of a and ''\ in the old writing, e. g. naia Jek. 12, 5 for npia; 2. with b, e. g. t\^S for rib»; i"is Is. 66, 19 for ais, hence the LXX (t>ovd , through the medium of "1 perhaps. — Moreover a was sometimes assimilated before a in old language, e. g. Targ. 'ji'H'a, Syr. Uai^, in the New Test. iia(i(iiovS.s (Matth. 6, 24; Luke 16, 9 11 13), Phenic. Tag {Augustine on the Sermon on the Mount lib. 2), from In a completed stem-formation, Teth appears at the beginning, with reference to the mother-form, as often inorganic, i. e. not belonging to the organic root, e. g. na-B, ba-a, in-a, tia-ia, t-i-b &c. " (- T ' l" T ' it' I|- T ' IT NCD (Kal unused) trans, to drive, to IT drive forward, to push, to push forward, cogn. with NO (whence NBNO), NT belong- ing to the redupl. form NTNT , from which the verb TIT I. and perhaps also 11., 5>T (whence 5>t»t) and 3>0 in the org. root of 3>D-3, Nia belonging to Niai»=NijJs«Ta; r T IT o t* (.. • 1 sharpened in its last sound and connected with n'n , n-ni, m-3 ; in intrans. signific. IT ' IT t' r T ' ^ with Tn (to hasten forward, to hunt after q[uickly) belonging to the redupl. form iTiri'i (which see); with N'JT the organic root of 'n-m, and Nl-J (which see). This root-theme is also repre- sented very frequently in the other Se- mitic dialects. Pih. (redupl.) NaNE? {Ip. ■'riNMNa) to drive forcibly, to drive forward, hence io sweep, to sweep away, i. e. to destroy Is. 14, 23, comp. i^nN l^a 1 Kings 14, 10 and 21, 21, nnal Khigs 21, 13 in a similar sense. For the form comp. UsLb in a like sense, in Talmudic (Bosh ha- Shana 26'') the abridged asa (to sweep out), whence the noun BIN a (scouring out, cleansing), Aram. NBNB (to sweep out) and the noun •'BNB (def. NniBNB) a besom (in the Talmudic place men- tioned), cognate with NSND Is. 27, 8 from ND to push. Deriv. NasBM (for IT ^ f -.: - Nasa?:). Di^CO Aram, same as Hebr. aa (aia) prop, to' shine, to glitter, therefore me- taphor, to be joyful, with b? over a thing Dan. 6, 24, referring here to the person rejoicing, consec[. = to rejoice in oneself; Syr. -=i^ the same. See aia. NOSD see NB. ,.. . IT 3t3 (from aia) .4mm. adj. m. good, like Hebr. aitp Dan. 2,32; agreeable, pleasing EzE. 5, 17. In compound Aramaean proper names aa occurs besides aa (see bsaa, lis'iaa)*' r : it' '1 • : -' Dt3 see aa. ,- IT pSiDB (El is good; in pause bN:;B, as - often arises in pause out of -, e. g. Tprt Is. 18, 5, bM): 38, 9, aiBli 42, 22, ■niBii: Ez. 23, 14) n. p. of a Syrian, a vassal of Eezin Is. 7, 6, as also the name of a Persian prefect in Samaria EzE. 4, 7, who was probably a Syrian. On aa comp. the Hebrew form aia in the proper names !TJ5ia, 1fl|;?'i9 &<=■> the Aramaean form being afterwards in- digenous among the Jews, e. g. bs^^aa (ToB. 1, 1), Ta§irjl. bs is also used among the heathen Semites for a de- signation of the supreme Being (see bN p. 89-91). D3[D (not used) a stem assumed for naa; but see raa. b^^l^t: (only pi. Q-'biat?, from bpB H.) m. a turban, a tiara, mitre Ez. 23, 15, i. e. that part of it which surrounds the head, as one still meets with it on Ba- bylonian monuments (Herod. 1, 195; ^13D 510 HDD MUnter, Eelig. d. Babyl. p. 97), the over- hanging part being called ti^ilQ (after the form fflisb), hence Ezbk. ibid. ■'HlID D'^bliCJ overhanging high, turbans, out of ':;i Q-'m^i?. According to the LXX, Vulg. and the old interpreters from bS£3 I. which is less suitable. r T T^!IlB (from 13£3) m. a high point, a height {navel according to the LXX, Vulg. and others; Talmudic the same), mth y"7N!l projecting point of the earth Judges 9, 37, mountain-summit, identical with d-i'iiin iiiSnI 9, 36, and also as r T IV I" T ' ' running out in a slope on all sides, a high land, land of the middle, spoken of Palestine Ez. 38, 12. 'lisn as a proper name occurs in a similar original sense. In Phenic. Iht?, c. 1ii::(Thubur, Tubur) is the same, in the metaphor, sense hill, mountain, height; conseq. in names of places e. g. Np^i'iatp (Thuburnica, hill of moistening; Np'^i = 'D^) n. p. of a hill in Numidia; N]?iffl'nsr: (Thubursica, hill of overflowing') n. p. of a city there. riDCD I. {inf. constr. rati , imp. nht? Gen. 43, 16 for tl^tp) tr. 1. to slaughter, cattle Ex. 21, 37 j Dbxtt. 28, 31, parti- cularly for eating Gen. 43, 16, 1 Sam. 25, 11 , Peot. 9, 2, slaughtering for the altar being expressed by tiST. Gener- ally to cook, prop, to prepare the prin- cipal meal, which consisted for the most part of what had been slaughtered. Ar. ^-*Js to cook, to roast; Greek jiayuQog a cook and a slaughterer or butcher. — 2. Metaph. to hill, to murder, to massacre, men Jer. 25, 34; Ez. 21, 15; Lament. 2, 21; Ps. 37, 14. Deriv. HSD, nnau. ' ' - IV ' JT : ■ Pih. niaD (not used) to slaughter re- peatedly or to cook repeatedly, spoken of a cook; metaphor, to massacre repeatedly, of an executioner. Deriv. nau, Innaa. IT - ' IT T - 3if. 'rpiiti^} (not used) same as Kal. Deriv. nacpa. The stem (Ar. ^s^, Syr. >j*5ii) is con- nected in its organic root tii'ia with that in tii'N, hi'T, Aram. ns"!. r T ' r T ' r : n320 n. (not used) intr. same as fiBU, nsJt, prop, to extend, to spread, hence to be wide, extended, thick, fat; the or- ganic root being n5"U. Deriv. the proper names nata, npljU, perhaps also nau. riDp Aram, same as Hebr. naia L Fah. nau same as Hebr. hau. Deriv. r - r • "nna (with suf nnint?, from nau i.) m. 1. slaughter, of cattle Is. 53, 7, Pkov. 7,22, hence banquet Gen. 43, 16, prop, the copious slaughter for the guests in- vited Peov. 9, 2. Metaphor, massacre, murder, destruction Is. 34, 6; 65, 12; 'tch ins to give up to the massacre 34, 2 ; 'ab IT' to m^eet destruction Jee. 48, 15. — IV - l-T ' 2. (from tiau n.; thick, strong) n. p. of a son of lins Gen. 22, 24, then of a IT '_ ' Nahorite Aramaean tribe, mentioned along with the Nahorites dtl-i, llJrin and MS5>^ (which see). — 3. (ajriewseo?!, ZeuaZ) n.^. of a Mesopotamian locality, where this Nahorite branch had their seat, be- longing to sails d'lN, which David wrested from Hadadeser the contem- porary king of Aram Zoba, along with inna (which see) 2 Sam. 8, 8 (Syr. >— ai , a reading that the Ar. and LXX [Me- Ts§ax] have also had, while we have in our text the transposed form nua). In 1 Chk. 18, 8 nnats stands for 'it. A _ i- : • trace of the city has been found in a city Taibeh situated on the caravan route from Aleppo to the Euphrates, as ''n'"ia has been found in Berah, south east of Damascus; but there may have been other places, derived from the tribe Thebach, which bore this or a kindred name. See rina£3. n2a (from Pih.; pi. d-'tiau) m. 1. a cook ISam. 9,23 24, i. e. he who slaugh- ters for the principal meal. — 2. a slaugh- terer, slayer, executioner, in the royal body-guard, pi. the body-guard, the life- guardsmen, whose chief was called "lia %ri (Gen. 37, 36; 39, 1), or "a a'n (Jee" 39, 9), and who as head of the preto- rians was at the same time head of the army 2 Kings 25, 8. Hence the Vulg. translates princeps exercitus. The d-inaar; 'nu? or 'a a^i had chiefly to ex- nD:D 511 ns;3iD ecute sentences of death, as he was commander of the royal palace-guard; corresponding to the Persian Nasakshi Bashi (Morier's Joumfey I. p. 5), to the Turkish Capi Agassi (Liidke, Beschrei- bung des tiirk. Eeiches p. 290) or Ka- pidshi Bashi; under whose inspection the state-prison was put Gen. 40, 3; 41, 10; the same that conducted transpor- tations of the people 2 Kings 25, 8; Jbk. 39, 9 &c. riBD {def. pi. N'^nau) Aram. m. the same Dan. 2, 14. nnati (^pl. nin-) f. a female cook 1 Sam. 8, 13, with Tim. andnnj?'!. nn3C3 (from nsti 11. ; extension, level) n. p. of a city in Aram Zobah 1 Chk. 18, 8, together with 'jlS), for which in 2 Sam. 8, 8 nau (nua) with ipHa (which see) stands. The city Thaebata (from snriata = ritiaa) in the north-west of Mesopotamia "(iPliny, N. H. 6, 30), or the place Qe§ri&ii (NntiSU = npau) of Axrian (in Steph. Byz.)' which lay ac- cording to the Peutinger tables (XI, e) south of Nisibis, may refer to this name. See naa. ^DCO I. (part, bab; fut. Vat?:) tr. to moisten, to sprinkle, rigare, tingere; therefore to dip, to immerse, in anything fluid, with accus. of the object i^'^^j 5>a3£SJ, npnS, ns &c.) and a of the lic[uid (dna, )^ifi, f'an^' '^'^1^^)' ■^^^- 1^' ^^' 1 Sam. 14, 27; to dip in nnffl' (a slimy pit) Job 9, 31 where one is dirtied, hence to defile generally (Syr. only in this sense); omitting the accus. Ex. 12, 22; also to bathe Deut. 33, 24, seldom intrans. 2 Kings 5, 14. — The fundamental signi- fication of the stem is to moisten, to be- sprinkle, connected in its organic root ba-a with that in bs 11., ba-;, Va-ia &c. and accidentally coinciding with 5»aa, which originally denotes to press into, to sink in, only in the ulterior ap- plication of the meanings. Comp. Ar. Jt ^ to dye, prop, to dip in colours, where b has passed into m. The noun biaa has been improperly referred to this signification. Nif. baas to be moistened Josh. 3, 15. 7DD II. (not used) tr. 1. to wind, to wind about, to cover, connected in the t^ organic root ba-a with that in ba-^ 2, ba"H, ba".1 , ba"3 ; in Ethiopic the same. Deriv. biaa. — 2. Figur. to cover around^ to protect; hence baa in the proper name in^baa. pnp {constr. baa) see irt^baa. I^'^b^p {Jah is protector) n. p. m. 1 Chr.' 26, 11. ySID {fut. 5>atp';) 1. (not used) tr. to press in, to impress, into a thing, of a seal, particul. in Pih. (deriv. nSaa) ; comp. Talm. 5*aa to impress, in metal, hence ?aaa a stamp, a coin, Ar. «*!» to im- press a seal, to seal, Syr. the same; to sink in , to fasten in , of mountains, that are fastened into the earth, of thresh- olds sunk into the ground &c. — 2. intr. to sink, to sink into (a), a'^a Jbk. 38, 6, m-a Ps. 9, 16, i-ibista iv' 69, 3, yiN Lament. 2, 9; to press into (a), fisn; absol. to sink down Ps. 69, 15. Pih. S>aa (not used) 1. to impress, a seal, hence to seal, like the Syr. and Ar.: deriv. n5>aa, which see. — 2. aS:, as the idea im- plied in S>aa passes elsewhere into 5>as. Deriv. the proper name nisaa. Puh. 5>aa to be sunk down in, to be immersed Ex. 15, 4. Hof. 5>aart to be sunk, stuck into, to be put into Jbr. 38, 22; Prot. 8, 25-, Job 38, 6. The stem 'a is connected with S>a!£ I., as is seen irom the dialects; and the organic root is 5>-aa. For the proper name ni5»aa we may compare perhaps 5»aa with 5»ai!: 11. r T ^ I- T niySB (pi. subst.variegatedness,spott- edness) n. p. m. Ezr. 2, 43 ; perhaps from 5>aa = i>a:an., Iia>a5r also appearing as a proper name. nySD (with suff. in^aa; pi. ni5>aa, constr'. ni5»aa, with suff. dnblaa) f. prop, what presses into, hence 1. a signet-ring. -incD 512 MD Ar. «jLb, a sign of the highest dignity, with which the king's writing was mark- ed below EsTH. 3,12; 8,8 10, worn by the prime minister among the Persians 3, 10; 8, 2, as also among the Egyptians Gen. 41, 42 (in the Grecian period the state-seal was in the hands of the regent 1 Macc. 6, 15 ; Curt. Alex. 10, 5 ; Justin. 12, 15; among the Turks it is in the hands of the grand-vizier). It was also worn by private men but rarely, and named Dnin Jbk. 22, 24; Ben-Sira 49, IT 13. — 2. A female ornament, named along with nO, QT5, t»13, h'^iV, liJjJli, msas Ex. 3*5, 22|" Num. 31, 50; Is. 3, ITT ! V ' ' ' ' ' 21. — 3. a ring generally Ex. 25, 12; 28, 23; 36, 34; 37, 3, whether it was for holding together the boards of the tabernacle, or for the ^dn, ']i'nN &c. — According to signific. 3, which occurs oftenest, the fundamental meaning of 'U appears to be roundness, so that the third would be the first sense ; the stem would be S'aa = 'iSa, ids, to turn in a circle, 'n- having passed into 5> (6); and in all similar cases this syllable was pronounced perhaps nothing but 6, inas- much as i" stands instead of it. The same has happened in 3>Sa = 'n2a, S>|5a S'S, see t!"'3.'l'7, 115* (belonging to IS'S*';), IS'isn; comp. Phenic. ^^2^^2»h Bomilcar (='bn'n3) «S;c. ^DCD (not used) intr. to he heightened, formed into a hill, to project, spoken of a mountain, of a peak; metaphor, ap- plied to the projection of the belly, the navel. The stem 'U is also found in the Hebrew lan I. to the proper name lian (which see); Sam. lau, hence the noun Miau a mountain; Aram, 'nata, 'lit: IT : - r . r : the same, and so Tito from ^l£a (='nat3 , , ' IT : ^ IT : after the form Dbl^) mountain, height; Phenic. *iat3 the same, from which lata - T ' I : (Tubur, Thubur) in the names of many places; as also from the Phenic. 'nan comes the noun ^hnM the name of a T -: mountain in Bhodes, Sicily &c. The organic root seems to be 'na"J3, with the fundamental signification "to heap together, to accumulate", as inia-J!:; or with that of projecting, as in Ija-N, l?:-n &c. i%. laa (not used) to project strongly, deriv. I'lats. I - "iDtJ Aram, see lltJ. ']53"l3t3 (Bimjnon is good) n. p. of a Syrian, father of Benhadad 1 Kings 15, 18. at? is abridged from au, andTian (which see) is the proper name of a Syrian deity, who had a temple in Da- mascus 2 Kings 5, 18. See ']i53'ill5. Comp. the Phenic. proper name D14*aa (Aram is good, Tugg. 2; see Gesenius, Mon. p. 456), ffiN being = D1 the name of the Libyan Baal, 'Pdjiag in Hesychius, 'ThpovQoivioe in Sauchoniathon. riSD (probably contracted from nnau, with elision of rt, as in rinau of the Classics) n.p. of a city lying somewhat south of Abel-Mehola, consequently a little farther from INttJ n^a than bas •it : I" (- T ilbna Judges 7, 22 ; it belonged to Is- sachar, like Abel-Mehola itself. nil ID m. the name of the tenth He- brew month EsTH. 2, 16, written by Jo- sephus (Ant. XI, 5, 4) Ts^s&og, Te^i'&. According to C. B. Michaelis it is abridged from risatp, signifying dirt-month (from yaia = Ar. )«Ais to be very dirty"). But as the names of the months are foreign, according to tradition (Kosh ha-Sh. ch. 1), i. e. non-Semitic, it is better to explain the word out of the old Persian, where the Jewish calendar originated; and that again agrees with the Indian. Among the di£ferent series of the Indian months occurs one (Asiat. Ees. III. p. 258), where that of Tapas corresponds to Thebet, the former denoting winter, the cold time of the year (Wilson, Sanscr. Diet. B. V. tapas). The name may have come out of India into the territories of Persia. Erom the word Tapas has arisen the Hebrew nata, Samar. n'^atj, Palmyrene naa, Coptic lOibs, Ar. ijyh, Greek rv^i and T^|St. niD I. (not used) intrans. to be soft, kneadable, sticky, spoken of tough, clam- nco 513 nncD my and binding earth; cognate in sense ii'n, TiJm, fflsa, Din I., Aram, non, though different in their apphcation. In this simple organic root, it is identical trith the fundamental signification in na (nia), na (nnu), where the h is hardened into ch; the idea of plastering over (Tsyyco) also in bSFi proceeding pro- perly from that of being slimy, sticky, and the same idea being perceptible likewise in uSsu, i:J31. Arab. %\io the same, whence ssUs loam. In Hebr. the noun (a"'!?) is developed out of the redu- plicated form. The identification of the stem with Na (which see), and the ac- ceptation of the noun a"*!; as offscouring are incorrect, because a'^a is represented as a soft mass into which one sinks (Jbr. 38, 6), and that is worked up as material by the potter (Is. 41, 25). Pih. (redupl.; not used) fia'^a (out of tiatia) to plaster with clay, or to he very sticky, kneadahle. Deriv. a''B. The organic root !ia, as has been already mentioned, is hardened perhaps into na, where it has received a trans- it' itive collateral sense; in Arab, be- sides *Uo (to be viscous, clammy), (^Li , whence .Li (slime, dirt), also belongs to the stem. nCO n. (not used) 1. trans, to knot to, to knot together, to join together, to twist together, spoken of basket-work (cogn. NO in ND-N, Syr. i«f, see p. 126), prop, to bind, to bind about (same as iS^ri), to put on a bandage, hence to heal; the idea of healing in NS"l being derived from the same point of view. On the con- trary, the organic root in n-iti, Arab. t^yio and ^jif', identical with that in a|£-n n., ST-B, ailS-n &c., does not belong here. — 2. intr. to twist, of the serpent. Pih. (redupL) nafia or naia (not used) to twist or interweave into one an- other strongly, of a basket, to twist its folds into one another, of the serpent. This reduplicated form is then abbre- viated into a simple verb, into a'la or aia (which latter is afterwards changed into nia), whence the noun a''a, the name of the letter aia (i. e. a^a), rT^B (i. e. n^a) a basket, W iJ ei , isyia a serpent, can be explained. In Phenic. aia (Taaut) is a name for the principle of xoanog and ovQavof; heaven and the world being de- scribed as a twisted serpent {Saneh. p. 6 and 22; Varro, de ling. lat. V, 10; Ma- crob. Saturn. 1, 9); and from this is also to be derived the Egyptian name aia (Thot, Thoyt, comp. Mmva^g = Ttm), Alexandr. aia (0ca^) and aa, an Egyp- tian name of Esculapius, whose worship came from Phenicia. ninip or iha (constr. lina, before Makkeph "niia; pi. D'^'lha, D'^'lilna) adf. m., n^ina or irrnha {pi. rii'iht?) f.' clean, in the widest sense, therefore purified, spoken of arjT Ex. 25, 11, Dri3 Job 28, 19, white, shining, pure, of t|''3it Zech. 3, 5, of vessels Lev. 24, 4, Is. ^66, 20, of a place Lev. 4, 12, of water Ez. 36, 25, but especially in the Levitical sense, of men and things Lev. 7, 19, Num. 9, 13, 1 Sam. 20, 26; of animals permitted by the law for food Gen. 7, 2; rtniM il'nha Mai. 1, 12 a pure meat-ajfering ; in a "moral sense, innocent, pious, plea- sing to God, true &c. Ps. 51,12 ; Job 14, 4. "inD {imp. Itia, fut. IJia';) intrans. 1. (not used) to shine, to glitter, to be illuminated, spoken of the sun, same as ■nrtS; Targ. "nt^B, Syr. the same, whence lil'^B splendour, ITifiB the same, ljart. iribW) to be cleansed Ez. 22, 24, as the ancients mostly un- derstood it. But the LXX read HiaM (from 'nU'a), parall. to naiU-J (from Dl^a)'; on the contrary, they have in 39, 16 n^nb for of the person, and a of the thing whereby; hence to be consent- ing, comfortable Eccles. 7, 3; Judges 19, 9; to J« pleasant, with 'S ''i'^V^ Num. 24, 1 ; in later language with b? of the person Esth. 1, 19, Neh. 2, 5, seldom with b Job 10, 3 ; e) of the state of a person: to be well, in health, 1 Sam. 16, 16; to thrive Deut. 4, 40, with bt* of the person 1 Sam. 20, 12 ; to go well with, with b of the person Gen. 12, 13, and so in" a great variety of applications. Deriv. aia , aia , Siaia , the proper name aia alone and in compounds (e. g. in irt^isiN aia, n^aia), aia (in avoiriN, iia^iN), tint:'', nn:at3i and perhaps also , . _;/» IT : T ' TIT ; T * -t na>i\ 'V!:/'.a''a!l(likela'')j)ii fromtll)?; 2 pers. naian 1 Kings 8, 18, Ipers. Tiaam Ez. 36,11, where the form fluctuates between M) and '^D; elsewhere are the usual forms of ""S, as occurs in other IJ* also, e. g. ffiia, conseq.a''a''M, naa-'!!, liaan, »ar«.- 31DD 515 DID a''E:''a, ^•'PU, inf. absol. St;"'!!, a'^B'^i^, consJr. :i"'£2n, "ill, imp. na"'ta"'!l, 1S"'t?''n; fut. miaiN, a''£:i'' for which stands i'^ai'' Job 24,21, apoc. au'';;, SB'^n) " aiU the blessing of God Jer. 31, 12 14, Hos. 3, 5 , and taken generally Ps. 27, 13 ; riches 65, 5; Deut. 6, 11; 2 Kings 8, 9; the right, rectitude, of Oyr? Ps. 119, 66; goodness, benevolence, of God 25,7; 31, 20. — 4. in the proper names aiB'^aN,, awHN , which see. I ■ -:' ■1»1*3hit HiD (jgoodis Adon-Jah) n.p. m. 2 Chr. 17, 8. nDita f- prop, an adject., with Inct'nM Gen.'24, 16, bsto 1 Sam. 25, 3, )n Nah. 3,4 taking them in a higher degree, and generally used in the very various senses of aia. As a subst., however, 1. goodness, well-being, as action Neh. 5, 19 ; 13, 31, oppos. to nS'l; beneficence, kindness, bene- ficium, in the expressions '£3 'nW Ex. 18, 9, '0 dbilJ Gen. 44, 4, 'B a'^iart'YSAM. 25,21, of 'gratitude; b 'aa ')''3'ri to be in readiness with beneficence (i. e. to give help) for one Ps. 68, 11, 'a y^'D'n ex- pressing the procuring of help with something, as also in a 'jnD Ps. 46, 7, a T5I7 Prov. 7, 13 the means by which are expressed by a. — 2. goodness, as a thing received, hence prosperity, wel- fare Job 9, 25, enjoyment Eccles. 5, 17, 'aa bas Job 21, 25 prop, to bite pros- perity, i. e. to taste, to enjoy prosperity; then fulness, fulness of blessing, fruitful- ness,'Ps. 65,12 the year of thy full blessing, i. e. the year with thy fulness of blessing, the object in the accusat. united with the wherewith into one idea, as in Ps. 74,19; 90,12; Hagg. 1, 9; good, Ps.l6, 2 my good or happiness (goes) not be- (TDICD 617 b)^ yond thee. — 3. goodness, good quality, in the plur. Neh. 6, 19. ri'IliQ {Jah is good) n. p. m. (in the later period of the language) Ezk. 2, 60, Neh. 2, 10, Tm^iag. in*3iB (.the same) n. p. m. Zech. 6,10."' ' mCO (3 p. pi. Ilts) trans, to twist to- gether, to knot together, to weave together, hence to spin, to weave, Ex. 35, 25 26 ; deriv. mU73. — The stem ilia (Targ. Nit?, hence njjjtp'b spider, Syr. io^, Ar. ^•Js the same) has for its organic root fl-IU with the fundamental significa- tion to twist firmly or compactly to- gether, connected with that in as-n 11., iJB-n, it-3, Cl£3 (ClTO), rt-W &c'; Phe- nician Nita the same, whence the proper name N;.t?H (spinning) Motye, the name of a Phenician colonial city in the north- west-of Sicily. niD (nt3, «ina, Dnnu: part. DTia. - ( ^ IT ' IT ' Iff : - ' -^ r T ) inf. constr. Wa) tr. to smear, to paste, to paste over, to coat over, to plaster over, 11)3 1 Chk. 29, 4, n^a Lev. 14, 42, some- times, moreover, with the accus. of the material nit? or bgta. Tig. to make decep- tive, to make hypocritical, Ez. 13, 12 14, where white-wash is a figure of deceit (see Matth. 23, 27 ; Acts 23, 3), and Dipta (white-washers') Ez. 13, 15 are the deceiv- ing prophets. Deriv, nit?. Nif. nit33 {inf. constr. Hil3fl) passive LEV.14,'43'48. The organic root MU, together with nt?, Ar. ^\Jo (to besmear, to bedaub, to overlay with fat), is also found in tTU"3 II. and perhaps in fl-nt3 ; and is connected with the root in Ttyy-ia, ting-o, German tiinchen. Q'lD as a noun, see rrtl II. Pih. IT 'it t3il3 as a noun, see rtt3 11. in Pih. . ' IT C01D (not used) 1. intr. to be viscous, soft, a stem assumed for the noun ait?, though the latter originated in the redupl. form naia (= nana) from na I. and IT • ^ IT ; • ^ IT should be referred to it. — 2. trans, to twist or weave strongly into one another (of a twisted basket), to fold up within itself (of a serpent), arising from rtait?, Siana from lya II. a shorter stem. Deriv. the name of the letter aia (for aif?), for which there is also niD, as if from nia = aTO. I rSTDID (contracted from naasa, like asiS) from asaS: only in pi. nbaia-, IT ^ IT : T ' .* ^ I T I ' the stem is £]ia) f. a band, a fillet, about the forehead Ex. 13, 16, Deut. 6, 8 and 11, 18, to be put Diii? r,5 i- e. before or above the eyes (Megilla 24; Mechilta on the passage), and not between the eyes (Menachot 37), viz. for remembrance or for a memorial (lilBTb) Ex. 13, 9; Targ. (NStsia, def Nnsaia, pi. IBtpta) also a band for the arm (2 Sam. 1, 10), an ornament for the head (Ez. 24, 17 23), a crown (Esth. 8, 15), for the Hebrew words myitN , INS, n"iay ; talm. (nsaiB ITT : •-• . I" : ' ••■iv-:' ^ •-• iv Sabb. 57 ' and °) an ornament for the fore- head, whose knot on the high point of the forehead was called Nnsapl Nnlttin; IT : • '; • . JT : ~ ' it reached from ear to ear (VNb 1TS73, ^ 'v IT 'v I " ' Sabb. ibid.) and was commonly worn by women. "We see from this the uni- versality of its original signification. The LXX translate it aadXevrov {the im- movable, firmly sitting), Aquila aTivaxzd (nearly the same), which was in use perhaps at that period for this forehead- ornament; like the later liVsn because worn at prayer (iibsn), and the qcw- Xaxtyqia because applied as an amulet; which, however, do not really correspond to the true sense of the word be- fore us. ?1[D I. (not used) intr. to totter, to reel, to mxnie, to stir, to move forward, of persons walking; cognate in its organic root ba with that in bfN I., bt &c. Targ. the same; and therefore there we have the Pael bja ambulare, whence blia ambulacrum. Pih. (redupl.) babt? {part. baVyi") '" fling forward, to throw about, to cast about Is. 22, 17, assuming the accus. rt^aba by way of strengthening the idea, where the adverb to it is laa ^ICD 518 ^)^ (mightily). Targ. babta the same, whence the noun bltp^tj a ■wandering about, Talm. D'^btabUM moveable goods, op- pos.to t]''S)j'ij?73; Samar. for S^iil ^^^ Zab. btJ'it: (out of btj^ta) in a like sense. Deriv. ribabu. Mif. b^asi (/m«. b'^t?;, cspoc. bD;;) fo casi, with aecus. of the object, by a out of and b? to Jer. 16, 13 ; 22, 26 ; to t^rot^ about Ez. 32,4, with bs Jon. 1, 12 15; to throw 1 Sam. 18, 11, with b? to or a< .20, 33; figurat. bij ni'i "rt Jon. 1, 4 io cast forth a storm upon a thing, i. e. to set in motion by a storm (of the /^.s- lafi^oQsiog in the country about the Mediterranean Sea). Hof. buin (fut. bur, once ba;i) «o 5e tossed about, with b? whither Jer. 22, 28, with TjblBn; of a lot, to be cast, with 3 Prov. 16, 33; of men, to he prostrated Ps. 37, 24; Job 41, 1 [9] will he not be cast down even at (bs) the sight of him ? ^-ID n. (not used) tr. 1. to heave (on high), to lift up, to remove, to bear, cognate in sense with NiB5 , and conseq[. identical in its organic root bu with that in bO"3 (which see). — 2. Metaph. to rock, the same metaphor being in JtbD, JlbD, bp.TB; to be weighty, heavy, as alsa in bU3, bpT23. Deriv. b'^aa. |1D i. e. )a (not used) Aram. intr. same as MB I. (out of which it is enlarged by the addition of n; as ^IT III., i. e. 'JT to adorn, Ar. ^^\\, is enlarged from tlT) to be soft, kneadable, viscous, like the Hebr. and Aram. ']1D (which see), from ND. Deriv. VO. IT ' I- niCO (not used) tr. to bind about, to cover around, to fold about, identical in its organic root t|U with that in i\0'S, il-yi II. ; Ar. oUs the same. Deriv. the IT T ' proper name fem. naa (ornament) ; comp. STnUS as a proper name fem. Pih. (redupl. ; not used) tiusa to wind strongly about. Puh. !r|aDU (not used) passiv. Deriv. *TI!D I. (not used) intrans. to wait, to wait for, to hope, to hope for, identical in its organic root 'nU with that in 1t3"3 (Targ. ^U-5, Syr. i^, Ar. JiJ), ^jt"? &c. Deriv. perhaps la'^a {expectation, hope), which, however, probably comes from the stem D'lU enlarged out of 'IB , as Q'n3 (belonging to D'ns), dba (be- longing to ab^), Dbn (belonging to Dbn), dnb (belonging to dnb) are to be referred to 'IB, bit, bn, nb.' "See DIU, I— ' 1- ' I- ' IT V\V ' t T *11D II. (not used) tr. to surround, to turn around, to enclose around, spoken of a fence, a wall, and so the noun developed out of the part. pass, is used of circular tents, enclosed courts, folds &c. The organic root 'lU is identical with that in '-n I. (^Tu], in, Trsi, IT^ ^ ^ 1- T'' ' IT ' r T ' 11-ri &c., Arab. \Uo , where the funda- mental signification is to surround, to enclose; besides, to fly in a circle, to make a circular flight, spoken of birds. Deriv. the noun 'iia 1, 'rt^'iO , the proper name IW. I ; IT CO III. (not used) trans, same as Til m. to arrange, to put in a row, to dispose, identical in the organic root la with that in HTD. Deriv. 'Tia 2. I- T ( ")1£3 m. 1. (from "iia II.) a circle, a round thing, for holding kettles, belong- ing generally to the kitchen-department of the priests Ez. 46, 23; Ar. v>i9, limes. — 2. (from "l^a in.) a row, series, of precious stones Ex. 28, 17, or applied to a row of rr^n in a building 1 Kings 6, 36, of Q''S|?^' 7, 4, QiniMS 7, 2 &c. "lltO (def. N'Tia) Aram. m. a mountain, a height, Dan. 2, 35 45, Ar. \^ of Sinai, taken from the Aramaean. The stem is latp = Hebr. 'nsa , and 'l, ^e^|^ and ^Jo. The or- ganic root n-tiU is therefore connected with that in nu-a I., nu-ffi. r T ' r T Pih. mtita (arising from a duplica- tion of the last original radical and changing one into 1, as in rtinnTUfl, msJ) to stretch, a bow, hence iin'aa IT. T' ' ' l"-;r : niB)?. Gen. 21, 16 bowmen, who stand at a certain distance from the mark. nPEO II. see nnu. IT T IT •- nnC (only pi. ninu) /. usually the reins (Targ., Kimchi and others, Vulg. and LXX in part) i. e. what is over- spread with fat, consequently the fat of the reins (from nia) Ps. 5 1, 8, Job 38, 36, the reins also being elsewhere brought into combination with fat Deut. 32, 14 ; like abn and ab (in Arabic usus loquendi) to be explained agreeably to the same view. But the reins are not the seat of tiMSn, but of the feelings (Psalm 16, 7;Pbov. 23, 16; Job 19, 27), and the context (Job 38, 33-38) requiies an- other noun. We should assume, there- fore, that the word signifies 1. the con- cealed, the closed, the hidden Ps. 51, 8, i. e. the heart {Ibn Esra), pai-all. to dnD, LXX TO. aSr/Xa, comp. Eomans 2, 29, conseq. from iinu II. = Ar. LiiJo to be darkened, veiled, whence sLixl? (a cloud). — 2. a dark cloud Job 38, 36, parall. to "'ISto (meteor, phenomenon). •jinp m. prop, a mill, then a mill- stone Lament. 5, 13. -line see IhU. rinb see nnu. 1 ■ IT \ nnCO (3 p.perf. na) intr. same as liU (muj Is. 44, 18. jnCp (part. "Ipia, inf. abs. linu, fut. ']'ni2'i) tr. to crush, to beat small (with a hand-mill), with a of the place Judges 16, 21 and by which Num. 11, 8; nisnb EcoLES. 12, 3 the grinders, i. e. the teeth. Grinding was the employment of slaves Is. 47, 2, Ex. 11, 3 (Job 31, 10), comp. Matth. 24, 41; Hom. Od. 20, 105-8; fig. to allow to be a concubine, to be given up to that Job 31, 10; and to crush, bruise = N31, i. e. to maltreat Is. 3, 15. Ar. I" ■ ' :,: ' t-crt (^, Aram. IrtU, ^4 the same. Deriv. MStiU, lint?. (13 no /• a mill, only metaph. Eocles. 12, 4 of the internal work of the mouth. "nnCD (not used) intr. to glow, to burn, to kindle, of sores and inflammations, from the organic root 'lrt"a, coinciding in its original signification with ^n, ^ti-iu I. &c. and in part also with ^M'SS. Deriv, ina. The Syr. i--^, Ar. ^P (to snort, to pant) have nothing in common with our stem. "ihp (only pi. d"''n"nt:) m. carbuncle of a disease, a diseased ulcer Deut. 28, 27, named with Q'^'ia?: rnuS ; 'aa iiStr 1 Sam. • r ; ■ ' I- : ' ; - it • 5, 6 12 to smite with ulcers, buboes or boils, spoken of God doing so, 'a inBrt being so used (Gen. 19,11; Num. 14, 12 ; Deut. 28, 22 27 28), and conseq. iha. can only be the name of a disease and not of the member: b 'a (see JBurchhardt on the Beduins, p. 26); generally a dwelling Ps. 69, 26, paxall. to bilN ; a rustic village with all belonging to it, Song op Sol. 8, 9. — 2. same as •5°^, Arab. jvXio the same; comp. obn II. in an intrans. sense to be bold, stout-hearted, courageous. Deriv. the proper name Dbt3 (formed from rt-ba with the ter- mination D-, comp. dba, 07)3; place of lambs) n. p. of a city in Judah Josh. 15, 24, perhaps identical with ti'iNba 1 Sam. 15, 4. '' ' ' l^obp (oppressor, violent)n.p. m. Ezr. 2,42; Neh. 7, 45; comp. the n. p. "'Mbn. ^t2^ (fut. Nua-i ; inf constr. lnN72B, on I" T ^ IT 4 • ' ' IT : T ' the contrary Mic. 2, 10 = MNJaa as a noun) intr. prop, to be muddy, dark, ob- scure, black, oppos. to "irjii to shine; Ar. the same, hence UJs (a dark, black colour), je^isl (dark, black); comp. Sanskr. tarn, prop, to be dark (also to mourn), tamas darkness ; Pers. tern. Me- taphor, to be dirty, rancid, stinking, sor- didum esse, identical with the organic root in DJIT (which see), and then, be- cause it constitutes the essence of un- cleanness, to be unclean, in a Levitical sense, spoken of men Lev. 11, 1-31, animals 22,5 or things 11, 24-30; 15, 4-26. rigurat. to be desecrated, to be spiritually unclean Ez. 43, 8, Ps. 79, 1 &c., in particular Ps. 106, 39, Ez. 22, 4 with a of the thing by which. Deriv. N?2B, '^tta, fiNMa. Nif. NMa3 (2 p.' DnMtpS omitting the N; part. pi. QiNlMas) to defile oneself, with a Lev. 11, 43 or b of the thing «DCO 522 pD Ez. 20, 31 by which; especially in a spiritual sense, to he profaned, defiled Hos. 5, 3, Ez. 23, 7, of the pollution of & woman by adultery Num. 5, 29. N5313'; from Hithp. stands for the future. Pih. N^3tp (2 p. f. riiSMt: ; inf. c. NMU, with suf. D|?N,'Ha; fut. Hlsoi) in the widest sense: to desecrate, profane, to make unclean (spiritually or Levitically) what before was holy, llj'i)? bs'^fi Ps. 79, 1, tu'j7)ja Ez. 5, 11, ^'^ -jSiBW Num. 19, 13, mp^ ID«5= i2J^]^M Ez. 43, b, nnns ■'''i 36, 18 j" rr^ain 9, 7,'^'^ rr^a 2 Chk.'36, 14, either by Levitical uncleanness ; or by idolatry and wickedness as d''b''ps Is. 30, 22, niMa 2 Kings 23, 13, 'nari 23, 10 i. e. to repudiate, to treat as an abomination (a"'5i1)?ia), conseq. = to be- daub, to tear off, to destroy. Farther, to deflour, a woman Gen. 34, 5 13; Ez. 18, 6 11; 33, 26; to pronounce unclean, spoken of the priest Lev. ch. 13, 'ITS TUNI Num. 6, 9, which was otherwise holy; Ez. 20, 26 and I declare them unclean by their own gifts, inasmuch as they are offered in a heathen manner. Puh. N^tl pass. Ez. 4, 14, of «5B5. Ilithp. NMart (only the fut. N'aa^, supplyingtheplaceof Nifal) tomake oneself unclean, hj touching a dead body Lev. ch. 21, Num. 6, 7, by idolatrous worship Ez. 20, 7 18, by the bread of mourners Hos. 9, 4, with a or b of the object by which one is defiled, or absol. Hothp. Nlaa!! (in a purely passive sense) to be defiled Dexjt. 24, 4; comp. SpC3 {constr. NME3, pi. O'lNttU) adj. m., iiisnu (constr. "NMEp) f. unclean, in A Levitical sense, spoken of men Lev. 13,44, of animals 5,2; 7,21, or of things 5,2; 14,40; 27,11, whether by seminal flux, contact with the heathen Ez. 4, 13, or other things which were regarded unclean, as !Tn3 22, 10, animals Lev. 5, 2, meats Judges 13,4; opposed to liiit:. 'ttSssb NMU Num. 5, 2 or nmu I T VIVT I" T ' J.. J Ti5S5 Lev. 22, 4 unclean by touching a corpse (UJsa = JnM '3 Num. 6, 6, oppos. to •"O '3 Job' 12, 10).'" Figurat. as a subst. an uncircumcised one, along with bp^ Is. 52, 1, because circumcision was a symbol of purity; a heathen 35,8; 64,5; riNMU ais'n Ez. 22, 5 of an unclean i. e. heathen, name or calling; and therefore a heathen land (Am. 7, 17) and the food of a strange country (Hos. 9, 3) were reckon- ed unclean. dTiBto Nnt3 Is. 6, 5 unclean of lips, i. e. sinning with them. la a moral sense, guilty, sinful. Job 14, 4. riN'OO (after the form rtai:J>) f. un- IT : r ^ IT : T' cleanness, Mio. 2, 10. lnN13B (pi. niStitp) /. impurity, in a Levitical sense Lev. 5, 3, of a menstruat- ing woman Ez. 36, 17, of idolatry Ezh. 6, 21, of whoredom Ez. 24, 13, of adul- tery Num. 5, 19, of sinfulness Ez. 39, 24; MNMialri m'l Zech. 13, 2 a lying spirit, i. e.' a strange, godless spirit (Is. 52, 11; EzE. 6, 21), proceeding from unclean gods (Jer. 23, 13), comp. nvev- /la axa&aQTov (Luke 11, 24; Bevel. 16, 24). HDCD a weak form of S>MU, which IT T 1- T ' see. Y\'/yO {pi. t3''3TOa) m. 1. a hiding- place, a prison, figurat. darkness, Job 40, 13 enclose their face in darkness. — 2. Only ^Zwr. goods, treasures, cognate in sense with D''3Bto, Deut. 33, 19 and treasures, (precious) goods of the sand, i. e. glass. IPCP (inf constr. 'jiac:, fut. 'jMtp';) tr. to conceal, to hide, li Prov. 19, 24, bSM ' 'it ' ' •.' IV Job 18, 10; to conceal, 'niTN Jer. 13, 7, I^N 43, 10, fiS? (guilt) i. e. to dissemble Job 31, 33, with a of the object; with accus.. of the object Josh. 7, 21 and a of the place Jek. 13, 4; to make invisible', to cause not to come forth into sight, hence lltiU bB3 Job 3, 16 an abortion which has not come forth; then to keep, to preserve, "^Tlin (calamity) Job 20, 26; to enclose 40, 13 'HBSa, i. e. to withdraw ' IT T W ' from the light of the world; to sink, CibTsa Jer. 43, 9. ns 'a Ps. 140, 6 or plur. ens 'U Jer. 18, 22 to lay a snare; nia'n 'U Psalm 9, 16 and 31, 6 to set a net; nnid 'a 35, 7 to make^ a pit, being J?DCD 523 DJ^CD concealed, prepared, and laid for one. Deriv. ITOU, l^ajg. Nif. laUS to hide oneself, to conceal oneself, witli % of the object Is. 2, 10. Hif. ')''MUn to keep, to preserve 2 Kings 7,8. According to the usual interchange of consonants the stem paU is closely connected with "jStt, and then with IBD (at Deut. 33, 21),' ipto (Deut. 33, 19)'; and by an interchange of ) and "n the Targumic '\'na = 'nat? (Syr. and Sam. in the same manner), Ar. ^.tis; Phenic. yau the same, and therefore THM comes out of ina53 = ifeD'g (which see); but the organic root is yO'O with the funda- mental signification to hold firmly to- gether, to keep together, related to the Persian mdn-den, Lat. man-ere, Greek fiev-siv. J7DCD (Kal not used) intrans. prop. to be gloomy, ohscure, dark; metaphor. to he dirty, figur. sinful; consec[. = NUD in its fundamental signification, as is also the Targumic Vlia, '''-io^, Arab. k*ie; also like Tjian to be poor, low, helpless (see "^isn). Nif. 5»Ha2 (only 1 person pi. ')5''M£?l3 for r T (which see), )'£ (belonging to ti3S, naaja), ID-n (to fetter), •ja-ia (to weave cunning), Aram. N-SSJ, Ar. /j-"'; (to twist), (jJo (to bind) &c. In Phenic. N3a (fut. NSa^) denotes to set, to erect, a memorial, to place, to set up (Kit. 2, 2 ; 3, 1; 8, 1; 23; Athen. 4), and is closely connected with fiin I. and the organic roots in ^n-S, l-j-i 11.; consec[uently it belongs to quite another stock of roots. Derivative >«5B (with suff. f^^id) m. a basket (of twisted work) Deut. 26, 2 4; 28, 5 17; Targ. wa, Talm. --Stii, Ar. idJujo, the same. n^.CD (Kal unused) intr. to be dirty, soiled, after the Aram. !:]5U , uai^ ; prop, to be enveloped with dirt, to be cover- ed with it; identical with the organic root in CjS, CJ^TI, r|5"S, 55".1 in its ori- ginal meaning. It is possible, however, that it has in Hebrew only the signi- fication to be enveloped, covered, since ttjab is a parallel to its use in Pihel. Fih. tl3D (fut. t]i'oi) to soil, to defile, SoN& op'"SoL. 5, 3"(LXX, Vulg.), per- haps better to wind about, to envelop, parallel llJab. nyCO (Kal unused) intrans. = InSn to wander about, to wander hither and thither, to go astray, Targ. !S3'U, Syr. i.^, Ar. lib and (c*'^ ^^^ same. The organic root H-5>a, which is also in yn, !i-5>n, IT _T ' ^ _ 1- ' IT T ' has for its fundamental signification to reel to and fro , to waver , in walk , dis- course, or actions. See Msn. ' IT T Hif. Wtpfl to conduct or lead astray Ez. 13, id. Adopted from the Ara- maean. DJ?^ {inf abs. Db>U ; fut. D^£p^) intr. to take food, to taste, tiob 1 Sam. 14, 24, 2 Sam. 3, 35, bSN Job' 12, 11, i. e. to perceive by the gums ('^n) or the sense of taste, to try food by the latter, Job 34, 3, therefore to taste 1 Sam. 14, 29 43 ; Jon. 3, 7 ; different from bSN and dnb , which express the biting and con- sumption of food. — 2. in a metaphor, sense, to feel, to perceive, to understand Ps. 34, 9; Pkov. 31, 18. Derivat. D5»a, fi»£?M. ' The stem is more frequently used in the Semitic dialects (Targ. D5|B, Syr. and Zab. >o^ , Ar. I bJ ? , Ethiop. the same) both in a physical and mental accepta- tion; but the fundamental meaning ap- pears to be to sting, to prick, to press. Di?D 524 HDD spoken of the sharp feeling connected with food tasted, of the strong irrita- tion of the feeling of taste, as sen tire (to feel) is connected with sentis a thorn (comp. 'Tjh); and so the word in its first conception is essentially related to ']»a I. (to prick). D'^'a (with suff. ia?i3, "^ayu) mase. 1. taste, of food Ex. 16, 31; Num. 11, 8; Jbe. 48, 11; flavour Job 6, 6 (comp. fiyan). — 2. Metaphor, feeling, percep- tion, understanding, 1 Sam. 25, 33; Job 12, 20; discreet judgment Pkov. 11, 22; 26, 16; knowledge Ps. 119, 66; a ju- dicial decree, a public sentence Jon. 3,7. aya Aram. m. decree, determination, spoken of God Ezb. 6, 14; 7, 23; 'B la according to the decree, command = dStST? 6, 14. '" ' D^D (Peal unused) Aram. intr. same as Hebrew ^Vp, appearing frequently in Targumic. Pah. d5>a {fut. QSU':) to give to taste, to give to eat, Dan. 4, 22; 5,21. DSp {def. SOa^U) Aram. m. 1. taste, flavour, sapor, Nlun D3>t3a Dan. 5, 2 at the flavour of the wine, i. e. in a proud wine-freak. — 2. an intellectual decree, hence a royal sentence, command, 'U tlUJ to command, to order Dan. 3, 10; Ezr. 5, 3; 6, 12; pass, bs "a Diil3 7, 21, with V? Dan. 3, 29 or DnjJ.-IM of the person who commands 6, 27, and b5> 6, 14 or b of the person who is commanded Ezb. 5, 3. Earely, a reason, an account, 'U fiiu to make account of Dan. 3, 12; '£3 afii 6, 3 to render an account; discretion, 'Ep ^'^nil. 2, 14 to speak discreetly, like tie Hebr. d?£3 :iiajrt Pkov. 26, 16; bsa 'B Ezr. 4, 8 9 17 lord of counsel, of decree, i. e. counsellor, royal prefect, rendered by Jewish interpreters T'STM or 'ISO, but more correctly = tins Ezr. 5, 3; 6, 6; Phenician dU '3 (Numid. 3, 3) the same. ' ( J?E3 1. (Kal unused) tr. to bore through, to pierce, Arab. /TvJiio the same, Targ. va for Hebrew 'np'n, n'^Mrt, Ti'z'n; con- nected in its organic root partly with d?C3, partly with IB, ^6, and modifying in various ways the original meaning. Puh. 'jSb (part. IS'ba) to be pierced, thrust through, by a S'lli Is. 14, 19. ?J^C3 II. (only Kal) to load, to put on luggage, to burden, with aecus. of the object Gen. 45, 17, consequently same as 1»B; Targ. 'JSU, Syr. ,J^ in an in- transitive sense: to bear. Li Ar. i^^Jt^ has also had this meaning, hence t^^^ a loaded camel. PlCD (with suf. ■'SB, dEB; only sing., for <15''SB Gen. 43, 8 stands for ,_QAgVi coetus &c. HDD (Kal unused) tr. to spread out, to stretch out, expandere, of the hand, of a mantle &c.; cognate in sense nSB. The organic root nB"B is also found in nns (ns) n.; Arab, ^.^ie to be full to redundance, therefore to overstep the limit, to rise, to swell, to over- flow &c. Deriv. nsB, MBB, nnsu, nnsuM. -,- , . Pih. nsB to stretch out, to spread out, d^MttS (as a tent) Is. 48, 13; figurat. to extend = to grow, to cause to thrive, i. e. to bring up, to educate, to nurse (spoken of children) Lament. 2, 22, parallel Sia"!.. It is unsuitable to take it as a denomin> from HDB (Kimchi). Deriv. t]BB. nStD (only sing.) m. prop, the flat, spread hand, as a measure a hand-. nDCD 525 nncD breadth (expansio manus), palmus, aa- Xtttaxij 1 Kings 7, 26; 2 Chb. 4, 5. A 'tJ is eq^uivalent to four fingers'-breadth = Vfi of an JiMN ; elsewhere nsta stands for it. nSD (only jjZ. Q''ttBia) m. abstract, bringing up, education Lament. 2, 20. nsb m. same as n&U a measure Ez. 40,5 43; 43,13. nnea (onlypZ.nirrBU)/'. l. a hand- breadth, but only figur. measured out Ps. 39, 6. — 2. In architecture, tAe pinnacle- like fence (of flat roofs), a roof-enclosure (in the form of fingerless palms) or corbel, 1 Kings 7, 9. bSD (/at- bsu-;) «n prop, to fasten, to /Le to, to paste upon, to spread over (plaster), therefore in part equivalent to bsn to overspread, to smear over, in part to 'non (which see). The Ar. JlsJo, which is the same word, is applied to artificial arrangement of a discourse. 'U is only used figurat. to impute, to fasten upon, to charge with, "IplB, with bs of the person Ps. 119, 69; ljy6 •'bab Job 13, 4 liars, imputers of falsehood, de- visers of falsehood; yiV b» '£3 14, 17 to stitch upon an iniquity others besides, i. e. to fabricate iniquity against one. Comp. the Aramaean bsa to spread over, to besmear, Syi-. to soil, to spot, Talm. b'^sa plaster, clay, to which meaning is akin that of entering upon or join- ing in a thing, to take part in it (Arab. i^Jde), to belong to &c. See bsn. DSD the stem perhaps of 1D&U. "iDDp (j)ause 1CB£?, pi. Q^'IDSt:) m. u commander, leader, Jbe. 51, 27, Nah. 3, 17 (Targ., Rashi, Kimchi), in which sense it has been taken sometimes like the Persian -w. Li' dux bellicus, or the Persian jmAS princeps altus, sometimes as transposed &om the Persian Vr^^ satrap. In both passages, however, the meaning heap, troop, army suits better. The LXX have correctly aviijiixrog (a mixed company or army). The word seems to come either from DBU = tosn - T r T to put together, to bring together, with the rare noun-formative syllable 1-, or to be Assyrian. "" P|D!D I. {inf. absol. tlisa) tr. to turn hither and thither (the hinder parts, the hips), spoken of the dishonourable move- ment and gait of coquettish females Is. 3, 16, and therefore the Targ. has at the place ^Bj^a innsa, Saad. they waddle, Luther sie sckwannen (i. e. wag the tails), which is tantamount to turn- ing their hips about; the Ax.\Jda, oO has originally the same meaning. P|B^ n. (not used) see i\^. "iDp (not used) A,ram. tr. same as Hebr. IBJt (belonging to l^s^) to point, to cut in, to scratch into, identical in the organic root IB'D with that in ^S, IB-n, 1B"D &c. The Arab. Jiio pro- ceeds from the same sense. Derivative nea (with suff. rrnsu, SJi'iBU; plur. 'j'l'lBU , with suf. ■'rti^Bta) m. properly a point, a prick, hence a nail (of men), a claw (of animals) Dan. 4, 30; 7, 19; Syr. ir^, ir^^, Ar. flji the same. t^&£3 (only Kal) intr. properly to be slimy, viscous, fat, applied to a mass of fat, metaphor, to be without feeling, ob- durate, Ps. 119, 70; IMia (Is. 6,10), Greek waps, Lat. pinguis, being metaphor, used in the same manner. Targ. U9B^, Syr. ' * ^/, the same, hence \BSU to be very foolish, to be dull, ffisa a fool, TIUBU foUy &c. The stem is closely connected with il5ai. r T TWO (from JlIU; ornament) n. p. f. 1 Kings 4, 11; comp. Inlia». TlCO {part. T'lb) trans, to drive, to press, to thrust, I'lb t|b'7. a pressing, driving drop, i. e. one drop thrusting the other forward Peov.19,13; 27,15; Ar. (iJo the same, Targ. Tnu, Syr. ?r-^ for ti^S to drive forward; perhaps the same stem may be in trud-eie. Talm. "iptp or Tia to press, Ti'iU pressed, i. e. em- ployed in various ways. n^tD 526 PjlD Hif. 'V'-iall (not used) to drive for- ward, to pish forward. Deriv. the pro- per name TiUtt. Tip {part. pi. m. VTltJ; pass. Ti'ia) Aram. tr. to thrust forth, drive forth, with •ya from Dan. 4, 22 29 30; 5, 21. nICD (not used) intr. prop, same as InbU to ie /VesA, tender, young, blooming, juicy, but here only to be fresh, juicy of ■^tlb; Jo suppurate, to be fresh, of !13M; Ar. l^jis, jJs the same; on the contrary t\'lp is not connected with it. Derivat. r T ^ Di'lD (from 'TiU I.) m. prop, expecta- tion, hope; hence DilUla as an adv. in ex- pectation (that something will take place), before, coupled with the future Euth 3, 14K'tib; in K'ri the usual dltsa stands for it. The noun comes from 1U ('Titi) I. with the termination Di", the same end- ing as the usual ']i- appearing also in words from verbs S>"5» and SlV, e. g. Di'^i'i from Ti, aii-iS from tins. I- ' I : • ITT mCD (Kal not used) intr. to exert, to tire oneself, with work, Targ. fTlEa, Ethiop. Tmi (interchanging t2 and 115) the same; comp. the modern Hebr. tTita with its derivatives. The signification "to throw, to press, to drive" in the Ar. _. jJs lies in its connection with Jo, as may be seen from the derivatives. De- rivat. nib. W- TP'^'!?'^ {fut. n'^lt?!) to load, to burden, e. g. the clouds with moisture (■''n = iji'i), i. e. with rain-water. Job 37, 11; Symm. ini^Qiasi. See "'I. rrnb (with suff. OSri'ic) m. a burden, charge, trouble, Dbijt. i,12; Is. 1,14. '''ItJ (after the form ijiy) ai;. m., TP^'q f. moist, suppurating, of nSM Is. 1, 6; /resA, of ifib Judges 15, 15 ; comp. Syr. \i°rl wet, fresh. D'nCD a stem assumed for QIU, ac- cording to some, in the signification to interrupt, to stop, like the Ar. ^Jio; but see D1U. ■'' Q-ip (from niU I. or 13113 = 113) m. prop, expectation, hope, same as Qi113, consequently like DbS from bs (bw), labn, QbJC, D13 from" 'in,, ba, 13 = 13, out of ia with the termination d-; but merely as an adverb, in expectation, ex- pectanter, .hence before, not yet, coupled with the fut. as the sign of what is un- finished, either in a clause expressing state, with the subject preceding Gen. 2,5,1 Sam. 3, 3 , Josh. 2, 8, or with- out a subject before it, e. g.Ex.10,7 rfosJ thou not yet know ? or subordinated to a preceding statement, and translated be- foreEx.12,34:, Josh. 3, 1, but for which Siaa stands usually 2 Kjngs 2, 9, Jbh. 1, 5; seldom strengthened by a sub- ordinate negative (frjb) Zbph. 2, 2. It is rarely coupled with the perfect, as jsb iy (Prov. 8, 26) or nanjj (Ps. 129, 6), and used of the past with the meaning while not yet. Gen. 24, 15; 1 Sam. 3, 7; Ps. 90, 2 ; Prov. 8, 25. Qiaa Hagg. 2, 15 from not yet, i. e. before, coupled with the infinit., and compounded like l|i?M. n*lCD (pari.S]1b; inf. a6s. CjlD, constr. SqiU, before Makkeph -E]ia; fut. t]ia';, once tl1£?^ Gen. 49, 27) tr. 1. to pull' in pieces, to tear in pieces, spoken of wild beasts (rt;.^N, SNt) Ps.7,3; 17,12; 22, 11 ; metaphor, io strike, to inflict disastrous strokes Hos. 6, 1, parallel to TOI^; to be greedy of booty, to be fond of war. Gen. 49, 27 ; figurat. of destroying, lacerating anger (£]!«) Am. 1, 11; Job 16, 9; 18, 4. — 2. to tear off, to pluck off, from a tree. r|ia Gen. 8,11 stands for C|iaKi = SrjIbM and belongs to Puhal; but see also r|1£3 adject. Deriv. MSIU, qia 1. Nif. CIII35 to Jfi torn in pieces, lacerated Ex. 22,12; Jer. 5, 6. Pah. rjia the same Gen. 37, 33; 44, 28; to be plucked off, torn off. Gen. 8,11, where tllU stands for Bib out of CilbM ; l|TT llT l|T : ' see, however, the adject. !:]ia. The stem is manifestly connected with ai'i, aiit (in the meaning "to tear up, to cut up"), and in Arab, the stem 0«is must also have had the meaning "to cut off" (= V)5); hence the noun o35 ; P1"1CD 527 margin, exti-emity (= Yip, Greek &QV7r- ra; but the organic root is ClT^i exist- ing also in t\'J"n, i\T^- tt'^ti (from ti'na I.) adj. m. fresh-sprout- ing, 'green. Gen. 8, 11, and so relating to nbs. See also UIU in Fuhal. n"lCD I. (not used) to shoot forth, spoken of the leaves of a plant, like Mbs belonging to Th's, generally to sprout forth, to germinate, to break forth, of fresh plants; metaphor, to be fresh, new, Ar. vj-b. Deriv. Sl'iU 2, V^'Til. n'nCO II. (Kal unused) intr. to be sa- tiated, nourished, connected with the Sans- krit trip, Greek rqitf-itv. Deriv. tl'lU 3. Hif. tl'^iail to feed, to nourish, with accus. of the person Prov. 30, 8. nntJ (with suff. isi'iD , '^S'ly) m. l.prey, booty, prop, the lacerated. Job 4,11; 38, 39, the torn away Gen. 49, 9 ; 'U ip.;:!tl Ps. 76, 5 mountains of prey, i. e. the strongholds out of which incursions are made; comp. IMacc. 5, 5. — 2. (only pi. constr. ■'S'na) a leaf, Ez. 17, 9 all its leaves will wither. — 3. food, nourish- ment, Ps. Ill, 5; Prov. 31, 15; Mal. 3, 10. nSIB f. what is torn, by wild beasts GEN.'3i,'39; forbidden for food like MbM Lev. 17, 15; booty, of wild beasts Neh. 2, 13, in a figurat. sense. !?B*l!D n. p. of an Assyrian land,, mentioned with the Assyrian provinces I"''! (which see), DISS (which see), 'm (which see), 'T|SWtt5^ bsa, is-iN , 'TjnD'^SN'', db?, out of which together the great and powerful ruler Osnapar had trans- planted colonists to Samaria. These co- lonists were called N|;'bB'lU (a Gentile pi. from a sing. "'bs'lU) from their former Assyrian country "Ezr. 4, 9; and being imported, foreign, and heathen inhabi- tants who had adopted Judaism in part, they endeavoured to calumniate the Jews in the eyes of the Persian king snilJttSnn'ilS. The territory Tarpel has been supposed to be found in Tapur of Ptolemy (p. 148), east oi Elam, with which it is mentioned; more correctly perhaps, the territory Tarpet is at the Maeotie swamp, whose inhabitants Tag- Ttrixsg are mentioned in Strabo (I. p. 757)^ In no case can it be the Phenician Tri- polis. ■ibBID see bs'ia. 1 , called "r (a Phenician pronuncia- tion for 11, comp. Sib"i5» 2 Che. 33, 7 = Db''3>, Dbi5>; Q''T'n = d^''n), Yod, as a IT " ' IT ' t • IT • ' ' ' , , letter signifies the hand, because it is alleged that in old writing its figure presented the rude image of a hand spread out, with its fingers; comp. the Phenician ,7], "H, fl/l, ^1 &c., whence Tod in the old Hebrew, Samaritan, Ara- maean-Egyptian and Palmyrene writing originated. It is more correct, however, to assume, that the name was selected merely on account of the initial sound, as in the case of the other names of alphabetical letters. In the Greek name 'laza (Nnii), 1 has been changed into r, because of its similarity of sound to ^Htu, O^ta &c. The Ethiopic name Yaman (= ')■'»'') leads to the same initial sound. As a numeral '' being the tenth letter of the alphabet denotes 10, '■> 10,000; it is pronounced y6. With respect to the pronunciation of Ydd, a threefold course may be disting- uished in it: 1. as a final development of the fe-sound, arising as it were out of ^ (dsh), Yod is connected in part with the A-sounds. Hence a) its interchange with i, e. g. yT" n. with 5»n.V, MNa with ng^^ IS^S I. with ffiT' I, 11515 n. with 125"; 11.; TT l-T ' l-T „ , ' J. aa^ perhaps with Das, out of the root na, expressing the idea of relationship j comp. Tahn. 'TiV Ar. jJ^^y^ (precious stone), Arab. i>^ Pers. -a- (Judah), lia; Ar. sjOuLs» ^turaea), V^ Armea- 528 n^'' yini &c. b) with H, e. g. UV (B^ -with Clin, d»'' with DMH, W with w'n; aN-« I ' TT r T ' ITT ITT ' rt with nn n. &c. c) with a, e. g. 'nfflj with "IUSb. d) with p, e. g. u5id; and 125©)?; ^rT'^ and lap II. e) with 3>/e. g. IJt'' I. I-T r'T ' I O l-T and IISS*. ttj:3'' and fflas; yet this inter- r T ' I" T r T ' ^ change with !> is capable of another explanation. In the present direction Yod may have been developed out of g {dsh), as vice versa a g comes out of ^, e. g. Sanskrit yuvan (juvenis), Pers. ^jlyi. (guv^n). — 2. as a soft, liquid sound, so that it may either be formed out of n or Z, or may be interchanged with them, both in Hebrew itself, or in relation to other dialects, hence a) it is interchanged with 3:, e. g. fiNJ and Insi, ^l Ar. v_^3 (to roar), cogn. to Hebr. Si; yj>j; {A^. g) and 5>i?3; itS; cognate with 3>D3 Ar. cyi, Loj; pa; and pJlS = ■^03: TiD-' and 'SD5: :i2S'' and laiti: S>r 'l-T'. M-T I|-T' l-T I-t' |-T Ar. c jj » /tMiJ ; ap.j and Sp_a ; TO J and Ar. ,-«J-, rw'' and Ax.\jd,i^; 'IN'' and VJ ' ITT • ' . ' J-T ini. Whether '^■jaia Is. 51, 23 can be explained in this way for 'T|';iin 49, 26 remains doubtful, b) with b, though seldom, e.g.r5>"> Is. 33,19 aqd lifhi S»P'' and Ar. )M &c. — 3. as a semivowel, i. e. standing in the closest connection with the vowel i, this vowel being har- dened into the consonant y. As such, though it is stUl a consonant, Yod ap- pears a) in the place of Vau, when the latter was originally the &st radi- cal, e.g. in bN% ii3a\ yr^, na"", lO'^ &c., which were originally IB; rarely in pri- mitive words, e. g. y^l wine, from TJI, or in the middle of a word, e. g. iTT^na Lev. 13, 10 from nin, comp. p. 377. b) when the vowel i or e is added to the consonant y, the softer pronuncia- tion by N sometimes appears, e. g. ■'ifl''S 1 Che. 2, 13 out of •'UJ^ , ttJN 2 Sam. 14','i9- and Mic. 6,10 out oi'^l, n'sTSJ (for which theMasora has H3TN) 6,11 out of n3f ; or out of yi arises merely i, when a vowelless consonant precedes, e. g. ribb'^'i Jbb. 25, 36, ^■'nilj^'^a Ps.45,10, rp)?^^ Prov. 30, 17, li'^n'^S) Eccles. 2, 13 out of nb^], Tiinin;?:!, r^?>ii, Ti'^fi'Tf On the contrary, the separated i-a or i-ya in the middle of compound proper names pass into one syllable ya, e. g. ^K??f' ni?:?«. n,?;'??. ^?t;^«. a^i??^?. aiuj^bs, nrsbN out of ^nN-'ag, iqDN"'aN, noN-ibsi, yn^'iiN, fiip^^N, 'a'''m-'''b»i, l|T I rv:' ITT rv:' 'I'T rv:' l-T rv:' SnrK'^bM. c) Yod as a consonant at the T IT ' v: ' beginning of words often appears to be pronounced like i, hence rtTirt^ LXX 'lovSd, Ti£3^ 'IrovQaia &e.; and in Syriae all "^"s sound as if written with i, e. g. In addition to these organic modifi- cations and changes in the nature of the ybd- sound, it is frequently, inter- changed with N, fi and 5>, which may lead to the conclusion that it has a con- nexion with the gutturals, so e. g. a) with 8 in bais and ba''; VSN and Va'': las* 1" T r T ' ' I- T ' r T ' r T Aram. 'la';; ISir ZEeH.11,13 and IJtiN; ^V and' n1^^ in.-, V? I- and 11^; npN and inj; IpN and in;;; lUN and in^; Targ.'r|bN and rib';; Hebn'^MN U. and ^ia; &c.' b) with ti, e. g.'^bin and Tfb;; riiri and m'' III. : nain and 'ha\ c) with IT T ITT ' , IT T ITT ^ J>, e. g. iBay and iai\ ' ° 1"T |"T 3^5^ (1 pers. sing, ■'nas"') intr. to long for, to desire, with b for a thing Ps.ll9, 131; Syr. '•^\* the same. In this stem Yod should be looked upon as a softened k-sound, and therefore aif is identical with an n., Ar. v-^sa- , with the organic root in aa"5>, a!l"t<; the Sanskrit ap = Latin ap in ad-Jp-isci, German happ-en, Lat. cuj7-ere &c. belong to this root. Out of the softened root as have afterwards grown the stems iri-aN, aN-n, M-IN &c. ° IT Ti ' |~ T ' IT T Mof. aiS^lrt (not used) to be wished for, longed for, hence probably the proper name aNia for asia. IT IT ni^^ (3/«m. tinsi) intr. to agree, con- venire, to suit, to be adapted, to beseem, Jee.10,7; Targ. NK^ Syr. U* the same. Hence the part. m. '^&'i, rtNi, fern. N"'N'' contracted N''i and many nouns besides. It is a collateral form of rtN3 11. (which -n«^ 529 n«^ see), 'where the fundamental idea may also he seen. "lis"' see 1i«-'. •T'STN'! {Jak is hearer; 1TN1 is ori- ginally an old part. fut. of Hifil from the stem 'jtn and heeame a noun in the formation of proper names) n. p. m. Jek. 35, 3; Ez. 11, 1; comp. ln;;5TN. ^IJT'DTN'' (the same) n. p. m. 2 Kings 25, 23; liz. 8, 11. But for this proper name there is in Jer. 40, 8 and 42, 1 JT'ST"', IJT'ST'', which may be contracted n:-i'. it:-:' •' from it. "!''!<'' (enlightener, viz. Jah is) n.p. m. Num. '32, 41, Jitogbs 10,3, Esth.2,5; in the New Test. 'IdsiQog (Mark 5, 22). Patr. 11N'' 2 Sam. 20, 26, where, how- ever, it is better to read with the Syr. I'ln^rt (belonging to Jattir, in the moun- tains of Judah). ?i<'' I. (i. e. bST, Kal not used) intr. to he sl/zck, feeble, weary, lazy, cognate in sense bOB and bsa with a similar fundamental signification; metaphor, to be foolish, dull, bad, slackness and weari- ness being transferred to foolishness and badness, as vice versa vigour and power (b'Jti) are applied to honesty and virtue. The organic root (bsi) is the same as in Vtn (which see), bv^, Aram, bi"?; with a harder initial sound in ba"i, rn-ba; and here belongs too the Ar. xX> to be slack, weak. Nif. bNii (3 pi. ibN.is, 1 pi. li^jS'is) to act as a fool Jer. 5, 4, to appear as a fool 50, 36, to be foolish (sinful) Num. 12, 11, to dote Is. 19, 13. In putting it with biN, we may look upon bjsis as arising out of bisii, consec[uently from biN (see p. 37), but that is not neces- sary. 7^'' n. (i. e. bsi ; Kal unused) intr. to |-T ^ |-T' • ' will (Kimcht), identical in its org. root with the Sanskrit wal, Greek ^ovX-o[iai, Latin vol-o, Gothic vil-jan'&c. To put it with bs II. (biN) is incorrect, since that is only a softened form of bfl (which see). £Pif. b''Nin (imper. bs'iSl', "bsivT, pi. ibiNiiT, fut. bN"-', apoc. btj;, bsi;') to mani- fest the will, to undertake, to venture. Gen. 18, 27, to make a determination Josh. 17, 12; Judges 1,27 35; 1 Sam. 17, 39; to he content 2 Kings 5, 23; to be pleased Judges 19, 6; to execute the will Job 6, 9. In all these and similar significations the idea of a resolution arising out of one's own free-will lies; and it is construed with b before the infinitive, or with the finite verb with or without a copula. The meaning to begin, which the LXX and Vulg; have eleven times, can only be explained by the idea of making a determination , and should be looked upon as a periphrasis. In 2 Kings 5, 23 the LXX read Nibrt for bNin. 7 J^^ m. (not used) intr. same as b*)*! 11. to he before, first, forward, to begin; deriv. perhaps partic. Hof biSIM (which see), contracted biM, biM (which see). nt^^ (not used) intr. prop, to glitter, to shine, with quick motion; therefore metaphor, partly to lighten, to shine, like the Samar. adj. m. ■''n-N^ fern. flN^iSj^ shining, beautiful; partly to bloom, to sprout, like the Samar. 1N.^. for N^^jJ, comp. 'y^^a , tils after a similar metaphor; partly to bubble, to flow, a similar me- taphorical application taking place in IW, with which it is identical, agree- ably to the interchange of Yod and Nun (comp. RN'' and fiiSS, iSti and SltS, TlD; \ r ,TT ITT' l-T |-T' I|-T and 'TjDS). It is possible, however, that the organic root IN""' is connected with 1'N and with that in 1N"n, which would I |- T ' ^ lead to the same fundamental meanings Deriv. 'njjt^. nj*'], rarely liiS^ (with 3, lii^t'^? and 1l«''3', " once 1N3 Am. 8, 8 'eliding Tod I ;-' IT ' ° quiescent, which orthography has been in Ben-Sira 24, 37, causing the incor- rect rendering (og qxog ; with a of motion tTlN", with suf. nsi; pi. D'''li«\ constr. T I : ' " r : ' •* r : ' , i'i'N^) m. 1. generally a river, oocumng with ins (a stream) and D5NI {a pond) Ex. 8, Y, Is. 33, 21, sometimes dis- tinguished from these, sometimes iden- tical with them; metaphor. Di'i'NJ the 34 •^^^ 530 22^ wet passages in mines, shafts Job 28, 10, identical with niirrs 28, 11. On tMs it;' general meaning comp. the Zab. S'liN^ a river. — 2. Specially, the river of Egypt, the Nile (as Oanga prop, means a river, then Ganges; Bhenus, Ehine, prop, a river) Gen. ch. 41 ; Ex. ch. 2. 4. 7. 8; Is. 19, 7 8; Ez. 29, 3; whose canals and arms are sometimes called d"''lN^ 29, 3; 30, 12, sometimes ni'i^iS Is. 19,6". In full form the Nile is styled^D'^'ittT? 'IN^ Am. 8, 8; 9, 5, and its arms nto '<'iii\ or Q:pa?a 2 Kings 19, 24; Is. 37, 25". •nif "n'^ijip the harvest of the Nile Is. 23, 3, i. e. the corn of Egypt. As the river at the time of its overflowing spread over Egypt to a wide extent (Am. 8, 8 ; 9, 5), the Nile is used as an image of un- limited enlargement Is. 23, 10. — 3. the Tigris Dan. 12, 5 6. The noun "li?^, whose appellative signification both in Hebrew and Greek is apparent, seems to have come out of the Semitic into Egyptian, where the Copt, eioop (river), lop, eiepo, lepo (The- baic), leppo (Bashmuric), is^po, la^pcu (Memphitic) denote river, stream, valley- stream, Nile; especially as no clear de- rivation for it is to be found in Egyp- tian. The other names of the Nile too bear a Semitic stamp. The Greek name NsTX-os, Nilus, Nile, is the Phenician bffi = Hebr. bn (a bed with flowing water) prop. Nile-valley, for according to a tradition (Plut. de Is. et Osir. 66) the whole land was so called, comp. At. Jjj river-bed; lni^ for the Nile is probably identical with JS* river-bed and 8>^- The old Ethiopic name too .SiQ-ie for Nile and sir on the Eosetta stone (lines 14 and 15) is nothing but the Semitic 'I'nilJ. The explanation from the Sanskrit which has been attempted, as if NsH-og = Sanskrit Nilas, black, 1i<^ Sanskr. Jaras flowing, is to be re- jected. . tu^'^ (Kal not used) intr. to forsake, to give up, a thing, to desist from a thing, .Ar. (j**xJ together with (j«jt desperavit de aliqua re; in Talmudic this stem i» frequent. Nif. laisis (part. mNii) giving up to desist from (yo) one 1 Sam. 27, 1; to de- spair, part. aJiSiS one in despair Job 6, 26, who gives up; then as an adverb in vain, there is no hope Jeb. 2, 25 ; 18, 12; Is. 57, 10. Pih. m'l (inf. constr. ViiX'^) to cause to despair or to give up, with accuS. or the object, Eccles. 2, 20. Talm. tUIN; abandonment. |-jsaj{i'^ (the same) n. p. m. 2Kdigs 23, 23; 2 Che. 34, 33. The proper names fflsi"' and 'ttJNitTi have the same IT .IT : meaning, from ffiN = fn23N. ''iriN'' (for ■'iFiNt out of lF\t»1 with the adj. termination "'- , following the track of one, from ^HN, Aram, ins* ; more cor- rectly from ins = ^ns to he firm, stead- fast, At. ^\ belonging to (JJoI firmus, stabilis, hence ^inN^ is interchanged with lim) n. p. m.'l Chk. 6, 6 [21], for which verse 26 has "'iriN. i^D'' a stem incorrectly adopted for NSia Ez.43,11, 2Sam. 3, 25 K'ri, but IT which occurs with NSia for NiaM only on account of the resemblance of the two. Besides, if such a stem were to be as- sumed, 83"' could only be an enlarge- ment of Na. rr 35^ I- (i- 6. av, Kal unused) intr. to cry aloud, to call, to sound afar, to re- sound. At. ^_*jI originally to cry aloud, with ^_*J to howl (of the beasts of a de- sert), only in Hh. aa';, (fut. aa;;';) to cry out pain- fully, to complain (Vulg.) Judges 5, 28, an interpretation implying joy finding flo place in it, according to 5, 29. See The stem a^ (aa^) is closely connecteS with the Ar. <_^j (to bellow), Yod being D3> 531 ^D> often interchanged with Nun as an initial sound; but on the other hand the interchange of Yod with Alef also existed in this stem, as is shewn by the Arabic, and by i^N in modern Hebrew in the sense of, to flute. In Targumic aa-" stands for the Hebrew "lil, »i1!i, and the Syr. v-iicu. has the meanings to exult, to cry aloud, to trumpet &a The stem b!3J n. appears to be lengthened out of a''. Deriv. the proper name Mil 1. '- ^ ^ IT 33^ II. (not used) intr. to wind, to turn, to turn back, conseq. from a; = '2'' (ar), as (ais), Ar. oil (from o^l re- versus est), and connected moreover with auj. Deriv. the proper name aai^ 2. ^'^1) (after the form aiS'n, 'bia.^; with auff. nbia^ , db") m. produce, hence ^rwif, of yiN Judges 6, 4, 15.5. Hab. 3, 17, prop, what is moved in, brought into the barn, from ba'' I. to move into, to be brought in; figurat. goods, riches, of a house Job 20, 28. More probably, however, from ba'^ I. in signific. 3. to sprout, to grow, whence also come ban, bain, conseq^. wAai is brought forth, grown, produce. DID'] (after the form Qlp^; ground trodden down, from DIS; but according to others from Da'' = ffla"') n. p. of the I" T I" t' ^ city which was afterwards called Jeru- salem JiroaES 19, 10 11; 1 Chr. 11, 4; Gentile "'Dia'' or iDia"!!, i. e. the Phenic. tribe that dwelt in and about Jebiis and the neighbouring mountains Num. 13, 30; Josh. 11, 3. Earely is the city called ■'Oia^ti-'T';* Judges 19, 11 or simply ■'Dia'jrt Josh. 15, 8 and 18, 16, poet, ■'pia^ Zech. 9, 7, and mentioned with the half- Benjamite half-Judaic cities Slslt and t\htA (=r|bN Zech. 9, 7) Josh. I's, 28. ■iDia^ as an insignificant Phenician tribe of the mainland is always enumerated last Gen. 15,20, Josh. 3, 10; and per- haps they would not have been dis- tinguished as a separate tribe, had they not been the only one in southern Pales- tine that maintained their independence till the time of David 2 Sam. 5, 6 seq. They seem to have belonged to the leading race of the Amorites. IrtZl'; {chooser, selecter, viz. Jah is) n. p. m. 2 Sam. 5, 15. I'^DJ (intelligent; from^ia) n.p. of the Phenician kings of northern Palestine Judges 4, 2, who resided commonly at Baeor Josh. 11,1 10 11; 12,19. The name appears to have become a general title, since it always recurs. The stem ■ja was also peculiar to the Phenician dialect, as appears from the phrase 'j"'a STil (it is clearly known) Plant. Poen. 5, 1, 9, rendered by the Latin text "monstratum est". ui'^ni see irjar ?5^ (jiot used) intr. to be condensed, tight, strong, proceeding from the idea of being wound together, verbs of wind- ing and binding being generally applied metaphor, to strength; Phenic. ba'' the same. Deriv. ba'' 1. The organic root ba*'' is closely con- nected with that in ba'ti I., b3"S, par- ticularly with that in ba"-i, where the idea of strength, thickness, firmness, lies in the corresponding Arabic stem. In this sense of to be strong, firm, the stem ba (bia) for the noun bia (1 Kings 6, 38, Is. 44, 19) is also to be presupposed; since the two significations of the noun, a) the strong one, the powerful one, = b^a , b) block, log, are only explicable from this fundamental meaning; the stemb^a too being probably referrible to it. PD"* !• C'^*'* used) intr. 1. to well, to flow, to stream, Arab. Jo 5 (to flow co- piously, to stream, to rain); deriv. ba^, bai'', perhaps biaM, and bas as an Ara- maeised form for bai\ — 2". to well up, to spring up, therefore to suppurate, to ulcerate, especially so in Pihel (see ba^). — 3. to be moist, wet, metaphor, to be fresh, green, fruitful, to shoot forth, to grow, the same metaphor being also found in ba, ba, baN; deriv. bia^, ban, proper name bain; comp. Phenic. baj to sprout, whence bai ('Is^dX, ayqmarig '• 34* b> 532 DV^D^ Diosc. 4, 30) a sprout, Syr. "'*>-£i*. gi-ass. — 4. to move, to move forward, to walk along gently, a meaning often derived metapBor. from that of flowing; comp. bTN in connection with by, '^brt ynth ■^yp 1 Sam. 14, 26; the 'French aller with the German wallen. Hifil and Hofal are to be explained by this fact. Deriv. the proper name bS"" (2). Pih. ba^ (not used) to fester, to sup- purate, spoken of a wound; deriv. ba^i nba\ V K - Hif. b-'Siil-l (fnt. b"'a'i\ ba'') prop, to make go, then to lead, to conduct Jbe. 31, 9, with Tfbifl, with the accus. of place whither A. 60, 11; 108, 11; to lead along, to bring forward, to offer, "'125 68, 30 and 76, 12, nttja Zeph.3, 10, with b of the person; figurat. to carry afar off, of the feet Is. 23, 7. Hof. bjain (fut. bar) to he carried, led, with b to a place Jer. 11, 19, Job 21, 32, Is. 53, 7, and Vj? from Job 10, 19; to he offered (as a gift) Hos. 10, 6, iffl Is. 18, 7, IMtti (as produce of the land) Hos. 12, 2; to he led or conducted away, i. e. to he rescued Is. 55, 12 ; Job 21, 30 on the day when the floods of wrath descend. The nouns bai'', baiN I" r are Aramaeising forms out of Kal, for bas«, ba^; conseq. they must be derived from Kal. The transitive idea of this stem ap- pears to have been to drive, to drive on, consec[. to lead, which is connected with moving, walking, in which sense the organic root ba-^ may be related to that in baTi III., ba"!l (to roam about, r T ' i- T ^ ' to wander) belonging to the proper name ban (prop, the wanderer, the nomad, comp. Syr.- ''^^-S" to rove), ^D"* n. (not used) intr. to shout in |"T ^ ' joy and triumph, an ulterior develop- ment of a^ (see aa^ II.), hence to sound. Deriv. bai 2 and the proper name bai''. ^3'' Cp'- constr. "'ba^) to. 1. a hrook, a stream, a river, coupled with fi'jM Is. 30, 25; 44, 4. — 2. (mover, wanderer, nomad) n. p. of the first son of Lamech, the father of nomadic life and of mov- ing about with flocks Gen. 4, 20. From ^Di (Peal unused) Aram. intr. same as Hebr. ba; I. Af. ba^rt (inf. !iba''p) same as Hebr. b'lain to bring, to lead Ezr. 5, 14; 7, '15. ba'' (out of Pih. from ba'' I.) adj. to., nba;; fem. festering, suppurating, of a wound, having sores Lev. 22, 22. ^n*" or bai-- (pi. Cl"'b?r) m. 1. (from ba'') a he-goat, ram, aries (so named from its 'strength like b^js), hence bai'rt '['i-g Job 6, 5, ''rt 'iB^ffl 6, 4 6 8 13, and with the omission of ']'n)?. Ex. 19, 14, ram's- horn, a wind-instrument. This explana- tion is already in the Targ. (s'lSI'i) and the Jewish interpreters, agreeably to tradition (Eosh ha-Shana 3), from which we learn that the word had the same sense in old Arabic; Phenic. ba'' (Mass. 7) the same; comp. Munk, I'in- scription ph^n. de Marseille p. 34. — 2. (from baj n.) a cry of joy, a joyful noise (connected with the proper name bai"'), a designation of the great jubilee- feast on the 10'" of the 7* month of every 50* year, axmounced by trumpets (lBiil5) through the whole land Lev. 25, 8. It was a year in which agri- culture rested 25, 11, and Hebrew slaves without distinction had to be set free ('ni'1'1 N'l)?) 25, 10; Jer. 34, 8; in which alienated pieces of land reverted to their original possessors or their heirs Lev. 25, 8-17 39-41 54; 27, 17 seq.; and according to Josephus (Antt. 3, 12 13) even all debts were remitted. In full form they said bai^ri rSTU Lev. 15, 13 28 40 50 52 54;" 27', 17 18 23 24; but n3U9 is also omitted Lev. 25, 31, and I* ! therefore ba'' in this respect is some- times masc. Num. 36, 4, sometimes fem. Lev. 25, 10. D3'P5'] (as the name of a person con- queror of a people, as the name of a place place of victory, compounded of d5»-5>ba^) n. p. of a city between 11573 nbs^ 533 P3^ (afterwards Legio) and bsS'iT^, mention- ed with "^SS.?!, consequently situated in the territory of Manasseh Josh. 17, 11 (21, 25); Judges 1, 27. In 1 Chb. 6, 55 D»ba stands for it, as the LXX have IT ; • , ' BaXaafi Judges 1, 27. Another city in the same neighbourhood was 'TIS (see p. 275), where there was also a height nba'' see ba\ V 17 - IT - D3^ (not used) intr. usually to he bellied, thick, extensive, therefore to he pregnant, consequently = 133 (013, see p. 187), Dpi (lp3), tJNS, DS; deriT. Pih. da^ (not a denominative) to impregnate, spoken of marrying the wife of a brother to perpetuate his name by means of children. Probably, however, the fandamental idea is to he allied, related, joinedin affinity; fronll. belonging to Dtl and ni73ti, 'jnn &c. also proceeding from the same point of view; except that it is specially applied here to a brother-in- law. Accordingly the verb stands for tyz, dSS (■^ changing with S or 5, Yod generally being related to A-sounds) = ■jas, y^i which see; but the general use of it is lost in this very old word. Deriv. 613'', naa'', and the denomin. IT T ' ••• I" : ' tia\ I" • D3'' (prop. part. Kal; with suff. "'Ma':, Saa'') m. brother-in-law, i. e. brother of IT T r ' the husband, who had to marry by law the wife of his brother that had died childless Dbut. 25, 5-9. Only in such a case does Scripture employ this primitive word. The Aramaean dialects (Targ., Syr., Samar.) preserve the archaic He- brew expression. Deriv. the denomin. Pih. da^ (inf. constr. da;|) to fulfil the duty of the ba; Deut. 25, 5 7, i. e. to marry the widow of a brother (after his decease); transferred to the time before the revelation of the law Gen. 38, 8. ria^'] (only with a suf. Tfriaa^ , iriMa^ ; from a masc. da*') f. sister-in-law, Deut. 25,7 9; EuTH"i,15. P!SI35^ {El is builder) 1. n. p. of a city in Judah Josh. 15, 11, according to the usual account one hour north- west of Mar, i. e. ')i'n'i5?». But though on the Philistine border, its situation cannot be determined exactly; since it cannot be identified with ln3a\ — 2. n.p. of a border city of Naphtali Josh. 19, 33, on the south shore of the T\'ys,'3 Oy, which Josephus (Jewish wars 2, 25, 6) calls Jamnia (tl3a^) or Jamnith (rT'Sa;;) in upper Galilee. In the time of the Talmud it was called N^"' nB3 (Jer. MegiUa 1, 1). " ' ' nS^'' {builder viz. El is") n. p. of a primitive Philistine city between iD"> and I'liBN, which Uzziah was the first to conquer 2 Chr. 26, 6; afterwards it was called Jamnia or Jamneia. It was 240 stadia from Jerusalem (2 Maco. 12, 9), 12 Koman miles from Diospolis (according to Euseb.), situated on the Mediterranean Sea , having a good harbour (Ptol. 5, 16), a large Jewish as well as heathen population {Josephus, Jewish war 1, 7, 7; Philo 11. 575), playing a part in the Maccabean wars (1 Maco. 4, 15; 5, 58; 10,69), and was subdued by Pompey to Syria {Jos. 1. 1.). At the time immediately before and after the destruction of Jerusalem it was celebrated as being the seat of the Sanhedrim and the academy (Eosh ha- Schana 29''); comp. Sperbach, diss, de academia Jabhnensi etc. Wittenb. 1740, 4. At the present day the place is called Yebna, to the west of Ekron, 1 hour from the sea {Robinson's Bibl. Ees. III. p. 22). In Phenic. Nja;; (Jom- nium) is the name of a Mauritanian city. n''33'' {Jah is builder) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 9,8."'' ' 51*33'' (the same) n. ». m. 1 Chr. 9,8. DD^ belonging to Dia'; see dia. VD"* (not used) intr. same as y'S to shine, to glitter, to be beautiful, Arab. (jojj. Deriv. n. p. yari. pD^ (not used) intr. to break forth, to flow forth, to stream out, to pour out. t>y 534 Ji^DS of a river; the organic root is pS'"', Ar, (3^ the same, and is also found in rt-sa , Ar. i^Xj, in M-5S &c. Pih. (not used) pai_ to poMr omJ strong- ly; derivative piil^ (formed from the Pihel of pai after the form NS)?; the running, flowing forth) n. p. of a river beyond Jordan, which takes its rise in tho mountains of ittJa, forming the border of 'ji'ay to- wards the Hebrews Num. 21, 24, Josh. 12, 2, Judges 11, 13, over against oaiJS, and after a course of one and a half hours {Burckh. II. 597), falling into the 'JJl'n^ At present it is called Sarka (blue river), \j\\ , dividing el-Belka from another territory. The Targ. has p'2V; written in Greek it is 'la^ax, 'loc^uxios, 'Itt^dxxog, 'Ia§6x &c., all which refer to the Hebrew name. Scripture (Gen. 32, 25) seems to have considered p^i = "P^a and the river to have been named from wrestling or struggling. liT'p'lD'^ {Jah is blesser) n. p. m. Is. 8, 2. "na^ is an abridgment of "nS';, and even tT'S'ia originated from the same. tl/D"' I. (inf. dbsol. ■|l5ia\ llSai, constr. I-T ^ ' it' it' llSa'' and in a feminine form nilSa''; fut. laai^ or ©5^, pi. in pause IIBS';) intr. to he dried, withered, parched, by loss of the juices and fluids of life, hence a) of plants, 1"'i£n Is. 15, 6, yy Lament. 4, 8, la^ia niNS ^Jer. 23, 10^ atos Ps. 102, 12,'iB'ni;3 Hos. 9, 16, ^M'i3!n Sis'i (of the wood-crowned Carmel) Am. 1, 2, "'S'la rWS. (the leafy sprouts) Ez. 17, 9, 'i-'sil? (bough) Is. 27, 11, y'lta (crop) 19, 7^ parallel bai,, bbia, H3n, bSN &c. b) to * 1"T '' 1" ' IT 1 ' I" T ■' dry up, of wet, moist, fresh, juicy ob- jects, of dnjs Josh. 9, 5, y'lN Gen. 8, 14, bl^y Ez. 37, 11. c) to 'wither, of ?h| Zech. 11, 17, n; 1 Kings 13, 4. d) Is. 56, 3; withered, of' DSS Ez. 37, 4';' dried, of D-'ai?. Num. 6, 3,' oppos. to nb; figurat. dried up , perished, of I25s5 11, 6. — 2. (from m;: = 12513 I. in Hif.; having paleness, dunness) n. p. m. 2 Kings 15, 10-13 14. — 3. (fl dry place, from «5a; I.; with a of motion ntia'' 1 Sam. IT' T I" T 31, 12 which occurs even after the pre- ty^i 535 nj^ position a 31, 13, often written, how- erer, ll5"'3"''; coinp. Phenic. rias'; in"; na Teheste the proper name of a Numidian town) n. p. of a city in Gilead, fully l5»bJi ilSa'' Judges 21,8 seq. or % ilJ-'ai " : • i"T * -f. . , , ' .^ 1 Sam. 11, 1, perhaps to distinguish it from another Jabesh. It lay the distiance of a night's journey from y6 ni5(Scytho- polis) 1 Sam. 31, 11, on a river called Jabesh (lljai bns), at the present day WadyJabes {Burckhardt's travels p. 451), which flows not far from Betshean into the Jordan. Eusebius (Onomast. s. v.) relates, that' a small village of this name still existed in his day, six Ro- man miles distant from Pella towards Gerasa (1J5"15). Comp. Bobins. new Bibl. Ees. p. 415 &c. This city was also poet, termed merely 15>b5 Hos. 6, 8, char- acterised by the prophet as a city of blood: andiyb.1 1 Kings 17,1 the abode of Elijah (who was born in naiBn) is, according to Tosaphot (Taanit 8 * ) our Jabesh -Gilead, as also iilSbart 2 Sam. ' TIT ! • - 24, 6 according to the Midrash on the place; and since u5lii, i. e. Gerasa, was in the neighbourhood, the Midrash and afterwards Saadia had the name of the place USia for this Gilead. At the pre- sent day, four hours east of Jordan, there is still a village fflSi, on Wady Jabis {Schwarz, Palastina p. 186). aJIIl'^ (not used) Aram. intr. = Hebr. 1"T Pael 125a;; same as Hebr. isa';; deriv. niaa\ ntl521|] /■ the dry, i. e. dry land, dry ground, opposed to Qi Jon. 1, 9 ; Ps. 66, 6 ; so too At. (j«jj ; 'a];a Ex. 14, 16 on the dry ground, dry-footed. QUj3'' {the lovely one, from fiioa) n. p. m. IChe. 7, 2; comp. Disaj?, nttisa. naJ3'' f. same as niaa-'" Ex. 4, 9; Ps. „, ,•■• re- ' IT I- ' ' 95,5. naJ2;; {def. snilja:) Aram.f. same as Hebri nitJai Dan. 2, 10. V IV"- ' PNl'] (from bsS; a deliverer, revenger viz. El is) n. p. m. Num. 13, 7; 2 Sam. 23,36; IChr.3,22. ^^l {part, aj'i) trans, to dig, to dig through, e. g. arable land, with hoe and mattock; as^ a husbandman Jer. 52, 16 (Targ., Eashi), along with d'13 vine- dresser; different from 'natj!, a labourer with the plough. The organic root M—^ lies also in a.J I., which is used in the parallel passage 2 Kings 25, 12 K'tib. 351'^ (contracted from a'lr, like abs, yjj ; pi. Q''aA;) m. cultivated land, a field, along with uSj? Jbb. 39, 10, which the Vulg. has singularly interpreted cistern nil33i'^ (from na.!;; high-place) n. p. of a city in Gad, in the neighbourhood of na: Judges 8, 11, formerly called KJ> Num. 32, 42, and still preserved in the modern cjIj-o Kauuat (see Burck- hardt, p. 157, and 504 of the German translation) ; elsewhere named with "ITS*;; 32,35. '"- ^ri'^b^l)!'; {Jah is a great one) n. p. m. Jer. 35, 4. T\T' I. (Kal unused) intr. to feel pain, to suffer pain, doluit, as also SS"', Arab. «& • and ass have the same fundamental signification; therefore to grieve, to be fatigued, to be pained, troubled, melancholy, other cognate verbs being metaphori- cally applied in a similar manner; comp. Arab, ^^y Deriv. ']isi. Nif Mali (for nais, as 1DTO for 'iDiM: IT ^ IT ' IT IT » part. m. MiW, pi. constr. ■'aii, fern. pi. niais) to be afflicted, Zbp'h. 3, 18 the afflicted remote from {yi2) the solemn as- sembly (Kimchi); Lament. 1, 4 their maidens are afflicted. Pih. na'' {fut. MS'' for n.V''; see llJa'') to IT' ^ IV- I'.— : ' |.. ./ afflict, to prepare grief for Lament. 3, 33. Hif. rraiii (with suff. f. sairt; part. naia; fut. nar, 2 plur. ■ji^'ari = lain) to afflict, to grieve, with accus. of the per- son Job 19, 2, Lament. 1, 5, or absol. 3, 32; to torment, 'q'jaia Is. 51, 23 thy tormentors, without any necessity for reading with some mss. and agreeably to 49, 26 ':j';5ia (from rt3;). Deriv. nam (after the form n^in). m^ 536 "1J> nJ^ n. (Kal unused) tr. to push away, to impel forward, to remove, to separate, to put away, identical with the Ar. x^ , L^ and ^y Talm. Si^rt, Syr. >-^, as also with Tii'n 11. (page 348). ffif. rtih to remove, to put away, with IflS of the place 2 Sam. 20, 13, where, however, the suffix is wanting (for Irtah), as 20, 12 proves. So the Targ. , Syr., Vulg. &c. Syr. ^^o1 to expel. 'jiDi'' (with suff. Q3ia^) m.affliction, grief, sorrow, Ps. 13, 3; 31, 11; coupled with nn5N Is. 35, 10, WT Ps. 107, 39, H'nJi 116, '3, bM» Jbr. 20, 18, opposite 'to tin52toEsTH.V22:'''Mn'KiiaJBR.3i,i3«o cause sorrow to he followed hy joy; comp. ^M^^ Is. 53, 11. 1ia;i li'nsiia Ez. 23, 33 ^'jiai ']i'i5i23 drinh of sorrow (instead of y^;^, comp'. Is. 51,21, and Ti^3ffl = 13'd or 13i!JN according to the LXX 2 8am. 6,19)."" "lis "I adj. m. fearing, fearful, Jer. 22, 25; 39, 17; in Phenic. a subst., where the fern. N'lh'; means having reverence, serving God, in n. p. f. iS'ia^nMSt (Amp- sigura) Plaut. Poen. V, 2, 165?' 108. "l^lj'' {dwelling-place, from 115 1.) n. p. of a city in Judah Josh. 15, 21; comp. -I1.J 2 Kings 9, 27, bsa ll-ji 2 Chr. 26, 7; Phenic. I.J and i^S'ia (= l5»a'i.!i). 'S'^'H^ (prop. /jarf. pass.; plur. constr. ■'^"la^) 1. ac^'. m. wearied, tired, coupled with rjB and substantively Job 3, 17 : who strains his strength , i. e. wastes it = an oppressed, persecuted, pious one. — 2. (constr. S^i;], with suf. '^S'^i'], pi. with suff. ''?''4^) concrete what is gained by work, procured by wearisome labour, gained by effort, often coupled with d';B3, i. e. what is worked for, and procured by physical labour, Ps. 128, 2, especially corn raised by cultivation Hagg. 1, 11; goods Is. 45, 14 with iriD, produce of the field Job 39, 11, produce of cattle Jer. 3, 24, Gen. 31, 42, Dbut. 28, 33, property Ps. 109, 11, riches Jer. 20, 5, possession Is. 55, 2, field Ps. 78, 46, in fihort all that one has acquired by effort Hos. 12, 9 ; figurat. of God, a work Job 10, 3. — 3. Absti-act, labour, work, Job 39, 16. f^S>^y. (constr. nW^) /. weariness, ex- haustion, EcGLES. 12, 12 exhaustion of the flesh (the body). "'b^'' (out of the Hofal of rtbJi; exiled, carried away) n. p. m. Num. 34, 22. P^ a stem assumed for n5 and sy- nonymous with At. iO«s»j ; but see nna. ^J'' (fut. i>Si^, S»a^) intrans. same as MS J I. (Ar. «3»j the same) to grieve, to be weary, to be uneasy, therefore to be wearied or weak with toil, coupled with tl5»; Is. 40, 28 30 (or :)jy Dbut. 25, 18), to exert oneself, to strive, bSM (adv.) in vain Job 9, 29, pi'nb prop, for what is empty i. e. in vain Is. 65, 23, for which p'^'l"'^'75i stands in Jer. 51, 58; to torment oneself^ followed by an infin. Prov. 23, 4, but elsewhere with an object where- with or upon which one toils, with 3 Josh. 24, 13; Is. 47, 12. Pigurat. to work with toil in a thing 43, 22, i. e. to consider it as a yoke, as burdensome. Sel- dom with the accus. 47, 15 or absol. in the sense to be weary, weak Lament. 5, 5. Deriv. S>a\ i>a\ V^i"*, ns>ia\ -|"T ' IIT ' - l-T ' IT • : Pih. ^11 (fut. ^lyi) to weary, to make faint, with accus. of the object Josh. 7, 3 ; to exhaust Ecclbs. 10, 15. Hif. SiaiM to weary, to oppress, with 5 of a thing Is. 43, 23 24; Mal. 2, 17. 3JS'' m. what has been got by labour, earnings, goods. Job 20, 18 ; Phenic. nVi^ (place of earnings; comp. Hebr. pttSlg'i, ^iny) n. p. of a Tangier city Ptol. 4, 1. y'y' (pi. 'O'^yyi) adj. weary, weak, ex- hausted, coupled with £);» Dbut. 25, 18 or Q^nj ns'n 2 Sam. 17, 2; wearying Ecclbs. 1,8; "Phenic. SSJ old (Trip. 2, 3). b'aj , b'siu) intr. prop, to turn, to withdraw timidly, therefore to be afraid, i3Stt of a thing Dbut. 9, 19; 28, 60, lili'e is n. (page 275) also construed with "'iBU; seldom with accus. Job 3, 25 ; to sfiud* -):ii 537 der, with aocus. 9, 28 / shudder with all my pains. Deriv. TiSJ (IJj) adject. The organic root 'ij'i is identical with 'ns n. (page 275), and the present stem is an ulterior development of the other; Arab. -s»j and J^j the same. Phenician IS'' the same, whence nli'' {'loyoQ&as, Jugurtha, i. e. holy awe, reverence) said of Baal; then a proper name; comp. in Hebrew ins Gen. 31, 42, N'nia Ps. 76, 12, of Jehovah. ^Jl^ (not used) Aram. tr. to heap to- gether, to carry together (stones), to roll (round masses), identical in the organic root IS-; with Hebr. 'i.n I. (page 274), ia I. (page 301), 1S-N"(page 20), and remotely withb-i (page 287) also; comp. Aram. "is-t. Deriv. 1" : I3i'' Aram. m. a heap of stones Gen. 31,47, Targ. T''ns^ for Hebrew ti-hi Jek. 51, 37 and VI? Mic. 3, 12, Syr. r-^ the same. mi"' see ia\ V I ; IT 11 (like D1 from MU1 abridged fr-om TiT' which is prop, a participle from the stem tTT' III., and in this abridg- ment also before apodoses; constr. ^1, with sm/* ir, ^i:;, but BSi; Gen. 9,'2 and ISf. Ez!l3,21 for Dsii and isni; dual 'd';"'r, abridged •'•V Ez. 13, 18, 'if we should not read with the LXX and Vulg. and according to the parallels T^^ arm, constr. "''i^ ; pi. in a technical sense rill, constr. fiiT') /. (as the names of it' I r ' ^ the human members always are, e. g. j)j?, va;, bj'n,, d?s, 5>a5fs«, ifia, s^t &c.; masc. only in Ez. 17, 12, and according to the Sam. text Lev. 25, 28 and DeUt. 19, 5 ; Ez. 2, 9 is uncertain) prop, what lays hold of, seizes, hence the hand, the human member with which one takes or seizes Ex. 19, 3, and generally, with which one acts 1 Sam. 24, 13 ; 1 Kings 11,26. In this original signification one says T' inS Gen. 38, 28 to stretch out the hand, '^'tlDS Ex. 7, 19, li VSp Dbut. ' IT ITT ' ' IT ' I-'t 15,7 &c. ; or T* is put as a more specific explanation, with a noun, as 1^^ riMlton Lev. 5, 21 the pledging of the hand, note of hand, 1^ 'nS'ttS 21,19 brokenness of hand, 1|^^ lag Num. 35,17 hand-stone, i. e. which one seizes with the hand, and not 'J3N 3*^)^.) 1,^ T?"''?-? "■ ''^'oodeii utensil for the hand 35, 18, i. e. which is taken in the hand; T' irnhD Ez. 27, 15 merchandise ' IT I- : _ ' of the hand i. e. direct merchandise , as 11 'ntib 27, 21 one who brings wares di- rectly. To be more express one says "iiw 11 Gen. 48, 17, hn'ah 1i Judges ' TT I- ' ' I : I" 3, 21; yet 1i also stands as a parallel to 11531 5, 26" Is. 48, 13, without there being any need to assume that I1 signi- fies here the left hand. Seldom is it used of the fore feet of animals, e. g. the ni»Miu Prov. 30, 28. — Here be- r T : ' ^ long also the expressions tlBb I1 the hand to the mouth, a gesture expres- sive of meditation Prov. 30, 32; I1 Q'^to iis-bs Job 21, 5, Mic. 7, 16 (rjs Siia neb Job 29, 9), ns iab T Dito'40, 4 to be dumb, silent; iZJji'n-'by 12 ^^^ 2 Sam. 13,19 to put the hand upon the head, as a sign of heavy sorrow, of being op- pressed by God's hand. — Other phrases in which I1 is applied may be found under Nba.Nita, Has, ami, nsi, nbuS, 1" • ' IT T ' IT T ' IT T ' IT T ' '" J TiUn, 5>p_n &c., where 11 is freq^uently taken in the following metaphor, signi- fications. Here belongs also the ex- pression d';li ^la between the hands, i. e. upon the breast Zech. 13, 6 = DiyiT-lia 2 Kings 9, 24, comp. QiSiy ^la Deut. 11, 18 the forehead. — QilJ the pair of human hands, often for the pi. Is. 13, 7; Prov. 6, 17; Job 4, 3. The following metaphor, meanings in peculiar phrases have arisen out of this literal signification: a) assistance, help, support, in the phrases 'B~'QS 'S I1 ST'ii 1 Sam. 22, 17 or 's-nsi 2 Kings fs, l^ more rare is the same meaning in the formula 'Ba 'B i; 2 Chr. 30, 12; screen, sheltering power, Is. 25, 10, particularly so of the guarding hand of God Ezr. 7, 6 &c. in the most various phrases; where, however, sometimes tiai£3!l I1 7, 9 or naiDb 8, 22 is employed for perspi- cuity. In like manner the signification human help, human cooperation belongs here, opposed to 11 11, e.g.i;:; ixb Job- -1^ 538 n^ 34, 20 not ly a hand (human one) i. e. mot by man's lielp; TJ DDNa Dan. 8, 25, Aram. VT'i «'= 2, 34: i d'^T' ibn La- MENT. 4, 6 &c. — b) force, violence, en- mity. Gen. 16, 12, attach 37, 27, prop, attacking with the hand, so especially in the phrase 'BS Mnin 's li 1 Sam. 18, ^ , : • IT : jT : r ' 17; applied to Grod, suffering, punish- ment, stroke Ex. 9, 3. In a similar sense occurs a 11 ina Ex. 7, 4 or a li lnNJ£i : IT '|-T ' : (T IT :iT EuTH 1, 13, where ln5"ib is but seldom added Judges 2, 15; WTi iittJrt Is. 1, 7 ' i- IT r " 25 and Am. 1, 8 io iMT-ra the hand (violence) against one, seldom with -bi< for b? Ez. 13, 9. — c) of the super-human power and might of God that seizes man, hence same as the spirit (of God), that power- fully excites and impels man; so espe- cially in the phrases h'$_ i'^ 12 Iniii Ez. I, 3, with -bij for Vs i Kings i¥, 46; hv 'nxi'^n ii ni Ez. 3!l4; bs ii ii nbss r 'it : IT r ' ' r r it : it 8, 1, for which ni'n stands in 11, 5; in which acceptation is to be taken the noun-expression l^rt T\j>jn Is. 8, 11 the power of Ood's might, i. e. the being im- pelled by the Spirit of God. ^T^ liBtt Jer. 15, 17 because of the might of thy Spirit which overcomes and impels me (Rashi). — d) joining of the hands, as a sign of assurance, fidelity, promising and confirmation, hence l^ "jriD 2 Kings 10, 15 and Ezr. 10, 19 same as to assure, confirm, to determine, coupled with ri'^'ia and nbN Ez. 17, 18; b n^ \n (or wi'tli it T ' ' : IT 'r T ^ accus.) to vow subjection to one Lament. 6, 6, 2 Ghr. 30, 8, for which we have also nnn l^ IpS to submit oneself 1 Chr. 29, 24. So' too "^ the phrase lib 1i Prov. II, 21 hand to hand, i. e. the hand upon it, in truth, as an assurance, like 16, 5. On the contrary absol. li 'jns Jer. 50, 15 belongs to Ti in signif. '(2) side. — e) the hand as the medium of activity, hence action, doing Job 27,11 = I'l'i in a general sense. — f ) guidance, leading, attaching to the idea of doing or con- duct, ■in; 'li^a Ps. 95, 7 the flock of his guidance or oversight, guardianship, care, hence 'S il^'b? at the hand of one, i. e. under his oversight, guidance 1 Che. 25, 3; direction, 'B il^-b? 2 Chr. 23, 18 according to the direction of one; also pattern 29, 27. Akin to this 1i is coupled with pre- positions, as g) in the sense of posses- sion, therefore 1ia with suf. in posses- sion of, after verbs of carrying, leading &c. 1 Sam. 14, 34, Jer. 38, 10; iija ^iN EccLES. 5, 13 he possesses not; so too in the Aram. Ezr. 7, 25. — h) power, might, after verbs of giving over, giving up (ips, ]ii.53, Qlto, rk'4) Gen. 9, 2, 2 Sam. 18, 2, where 1i|3 may be translated into the power of. In this sense is also to be taken 'S 1i)3 after verbs of demand- ing, taking, liberating (iB'ni, lU)?.!?, n)?b, bi5ilri),viz.(io tear)out of the power, might, or also out of the possession &c. Farther 'B i^i'bs upon the hands of one, i. e. into tiie power of one, after )n Gen. 42, 37, Ni^li 2 Kings 10, 24, ^i^ln^prop. to pour out, i. e. to expose) e.g. Ps.63,11 he will be abandoned to the power of the sword, Jer. 18, 21; Job 16, 11; farther 'B T nnn Gen. 16,9; 41, 35; Jer. 3, 6;" ija with power Is. 28, 2 i. e. powerfully. In Is. 20, 2 the LXX, Saadia and many ex- positors have unnecessarily rendered '1 113 into the power (i. e. to give over to one); but better in signif. i. — To the meaning might belongs the phrase 11 'IS)? short in hand i. e. impotent, power- less Is. 37, 27, comp. 50, 1, a mode of expression usual among the Arabians and Persians too (see I^P)- On the contrary, long-hand (li'^^IN, 1i '^'IN) ftanQoxsiQ , longimanus (a surname of Artaxerxes) means powerful. For this meaning comp. marews 'mih.nivog strength; Ar. i>t power, victory, with of hand. — i) mediation, hence 'B liSi by means of, by, per, spoken of revelations, com- mands, promises of God, or used also after verbs of sending a message Num. 15,23; lKiNGsl2,15; Jee.37,2;Prov. 26, 6. — k) holding, catching, seizing, hence Dlia 1 Sam. 21, 14 while they held him, i. e. "among their hands, in their presence. In Job 15, 23 1ia stands in the sense of lib (1 Sam. 19, 3) at the side, and ilia iibs = ii>bab 1153 Job 18, ' it:'it i:-:'it ' 12. — 1) the hand considered as bestow- 539 nb^i^ ing, hence 'S i;^? according to the bounty I e. the liberality- of one IKinus 10, 13 ; ESTH. 1, 7. Besides this original signification and the metaphorical ones, 1> has still the following figurative meanings, 1. (in the pi. niT^) an artificial hand, i. e. a hold or support, an axle 1 Kings 7, 32 33, a stay 10, 19 ; Targ. N'lll^N fulcrum, sus- tentaculum, comp. Ar. tXj manubrium and similar figur. designations in Aram., Pers. &c. (see niss). — 2. side, i. e. where the hands of men are, e. g. ^N'Jtt ^l Ex. 2, 5 a side i. e. bank of the Nile, and interchanged with M6ia Detjt. 2, 37. Therefore with prepositions, l^b at the side, at 1 Sam. 19, 3; Prov. 8, 3 at the side of the doors; V n^a 1 Sam. 4, 18 by the side, since Eli sat flSST? ISffl 1^_ (LXX) 4, 13 (K'ri); n^btj 2 Sam. 14,30 at the side of; T^'b? the same 15, 2, or also in the pi. "'irb? at Num. 34, 3, Judges 11, 26, Ti^"''n':-bS T'M.S'.p IChr. 6, 16 [31] to appoint to, in or by the temple- music. The Samar. cod. at Dbut. 33, 12 has translated fsiB^ i''' 1^_ 1^2 «* **« ^ide, the side of God will he dwell, which is far-fetched, according to our text. Eor another meaning of "''I'^'bs see above. In this sense also stands the dual D^IJ the two sides, coupled with an'n wide to- wards both sides, i. e. stretching right and left Gen. 34, 21; Is. 33, 21; Ps. 104, 25. Comp. the same application in the Aram, r* , Lat. manus, Greek xsiQ &c. — 3. (from !T1J IV.) a place Dbut. 23,13; iTi-by UJiN every one in his place Num. 2, 17; spot Jbr. 6, 3; dual room, space Josh. 8, 20, but where one would have expected drtb instead of Drta, and therefore it is better to take D^jij there in the meaning of capability, poioer to act, power. D^'l"' in the phrases 'J aph, '-< ran'n may belong to this signification. — 4. (from mi IV.) prop, a projecting thing, hence a monumental pillar 2 Sam. 18, 18, a trophy 1 Sam. 15, 12, a way- mark, a characteristic sign, Ez. 21, 24 and choose out for thee a way-mark {yc^^ Jbr. 31, 21) at the beginning of the road; then a tooth, a point, sbd in'; Ps. 141, 6 rock-points; in a figurat. sense Is. 56, 5 remembrance; tioT^. the pin, penis erectus, Is. 57, 8 thou pointest the pin (see tiTtl), which suits oasitt)): niaiiN (the Targ., Syr. and Kimchi have taken it less pro- perly in signific. 3). — 5. (from iTiT' III.) prop, gripe, hence a part, only in pi. niT Gek. 43,34; 47,24; 2 Kings 11,7; Neh.11,1 ; thence fames Dan. 1,20. On the contrary 11 Dan. 12,7 has the usual mean- ing might, as in Dbut. 32, 36 ; and Ti n'ri Is. 57, 10 means animation of power. 11 {def Ni: , with suff. 'TjT , nii , dhT. ; pi. 111!) Aram. f. same as Hebr. 1i hand Dan. 2, 34; 5, 5; then possession Ezr. 7, 25 &c., power, lia aiji to invest with power 5,12; might Dan. 6, 28. 11 see nbNIi. i- IT-: : • t^T* (from NIT ; Peal not used) JLj-am. it: *> it:' intr. same as Hebr. !Tjii I. (which see), prop, to name, to utter, to express; hence a) to confess, b) to praise; only Af Nlin {part. NlinM , contracted Nlin) to thank, to praise, to celebrate, with njaia Dan. 2, 23; 6, 11. Targ. the same; also to confess, like Peal; Syr.^?ol the same. The proper name ll^li and the Gentile i"l1!ii are from the same stem; but they come only through the medium of the Hebrew. nbt*'!'' (memorial-stone of El) n. p. of a city in Zebulon Josh. 19, 25. ni is an old pronunciation for l^i ^^ i^ ^^^ found in the Syr. and Samarit., and Jibi* is elsewhere also a fem. form of bN , being in the proper names tlbsin , nbNSii (see nbs). In Phenician 1i is IT ■■ I * IT—:' * compounded with the epithet of God ybv {'Ehovv xaXov/JSvos "Txpiaros in Sanchon. p. 24) in proper names, e. g. Idalion {'fh'ST. memorial stone of Elyon) n. p. of & Cyprian city. In such Phenic. compounds the construct state frequently seems to be pronounced ^li (idi, iddi), as in S'liji'i: {place of the city) Idicara, n. p. of a city in Numidia; 'iiPi'll (the same) , n. p. of a Phenician colony in \£;2i^ 540 m^ Babylonia; b^i"'"!^ (strength of Baal) Iddibal, u. p. of a Fimic suffete. 113 3"7'^ (from ttS^'H; a stout, fat one) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 4, 3. TT' I. (i. e. 11, from I], as may be seen from the Arabic; not used) intr. to be bound, to be united, to be in close friendship; to be attached to, therefore to love; to be faithful to, a friend, be- loved. Deriv. T^l.i, ri1'T''7^, the proper names 11% ■'T', tiniTi, !T'1''1'' and TiiM. , . I , — J IT • : ' IT : • ; it •• The stem Ti'' should be properly written "ll, and has originated from 11 (softening the initial sound v into y, as is always done in Hebrew stems, Ar. (3 i>Z to love). But 11 has been probably transposed from 11 forming the basis of the reduplicated form ill. Under 11 and 11'^ we have given the connexion of it with the organic roots of other stems, and a comparison with similar roots in the extra-Semitic languages. m^II. a stem assumed for nil'', lli; rT t-' I-' but see TtT^ II. ITT iTV I. (out of nil , by changing the initial u-sound, as usual, into y; Kal unused) intr. to pronounce, to utter, to name, hence metaphor, a) to confess, acknowledge, to announce in words, b) to praise, to celebrate, in poems and songs; At. i^iiy, Aram. H'V, ]^ the same; but the 1 appears there in the Pael and Afel forms, as may be seen from ill and N11N. Deriv. perhaps the nouns nili, nil, andnili in the proper names linii, linili, IWIi; ii; in the proper name fTi1\ Hif iiiin (part. iillM; inf. c. niliri; fut. iilii, but also iiliii: Ps.28, 7;'45, 18; Neh. 11, 17) 1. to express, therefore to admit, acknowledge, confess, with accus. Prov. 28, 13 or b? of the object Ps. 32, 5, as in Hithp. (Neh. 1, 6; 9, 2); the same meaning is found in t54>., and in Aramaean. — 2. to give thanks, to praise, to celebrate, to glorify, i. e. to name aloud, to celebrate, with accus. of the object •J8, as well as with 1!l (I1!l) belonging to tll^tl, the initial ^ being interchanged with fi (as ITT' IV. is withrtlill. and 1i with an old 1!l Ar. i>l) ; IT T IT •" hence it would be better perhaps to fix a separate stem !ili V., unconnected with fill I. The noun Hl^ll is to be derived from the Pual of Irt '(llii) =M1\ these IT ^ I ^ ITT ' stems coinciding in their meanings; and so it is used besides fllin 2. Deriv. IT possibly ni1% nil, n^l^ in the proper names liniii, lini^, )^r\-'V.- Hof. (not used) Hll!i (jut. iillii^) to be praised, celebrated. Deriv. the proper name tilirr', the Geitile ■'lini, Aram. IT : ' r : ' llfii. Gentile illST;; the proper names ilirii, n^lilii,' and the denom. W; perhaps also !i1^!i (see nil^). Hithp. rtlirfl Xpart. rtlina, pi. D^linKl ; ««/■. n^inJl; fut. niins) to confess, hence to make confession of sin, absol. Dan. 9, 4, Neh. 9, 3, or with accus. of the ob- ject nsan Num. 5, 7, fw Lev. 26, 40; seldom with bs, prop, to make a confes- sion about a thing Neh. 1, 6; 9, 2, or with b? in the thing sinned in Lev. 5, 5, or upon a thing (laying the hands upon) 16, 21, rarely with b of the person 2 Chb. 30, 22. In the i'arg. and Talm. appears also Pa. ^11 in this sense; whence ■"111 confession. The stem iilj I. i. e. till (as plainly appears from Hithp., Aram. Pael and Ar. (^i>^) may be easily perceived in its fundamental signification from the JIT 541 ]inn^ organic root rt-Ti , cognate with in-ia , N- £33, Sanskrit wad (loqui, dicere), Greek avS-?!, vd-siv, asid-siv, and Sanskrit wand to praise (from wad with n inserted) <&c. In a wider development of mean- ing, irf coincides with Iti (lliT, comp. Sanskrit 2cZ laudare), whence ti'T'ln, with- out their being radically connected. On n^ in inif , 'rn'^ , and rrn in ini , see the 'it ' '■!- ' IT 'iTt' words themselves. m^ II. (imp. pi. Ill) tr. same as in'T' ITT ^ •'^ ■'^ 1 :' ITT -(on the interchange oid and »• see p. 305) to cast, to hurl Jer. 50, 14 (Targ., LXX, Syr.), where ytj is to be supplied out of the following, and VT; is found as a various reading; yet the idea is also implied in iVT'; Arab. i5i>. the same. Oomp. Sanskrit ^MiA (pugnare). Ethiopia the same. Fih. trn'j {inf. constr. riT; 3 pi. fut. I'l^ for ^'V^^ to throw away, D'^ijitl ri5'i'|5 (the horns, i. e. the powers or kingdoms of the heathen) Zech. 2, 4; to cast, ^as Lament. 3, 53, V'nia Jo. 4, 3; Nah. 3, 10; Ob. 11. riT' in. (not used) tr. to take, to lay hold of, a collateral form of flirt I. ; the ' ' ^ IT T ' organic root lies also in the Lat. hend in pre-Aewd-ere, and in the Grothic had in hand &c. Deriv. T", and "il in proper names. ryV IV. (not used) to stretch, to ex- -tmd, of space or place, then to project, to be prominent, spoken of a monument, way-mark &c., consequently- = !mf1 1., which has the same sense transitively. Deriv. T" 3 and 4. — Under TiTn I. we it ^ ITT have conjectured that it may be a de- nomin. from nM = 'T'; which must be , it it' retracted. i^i (= 'yni favourite, from Tli I.) re. p. m. ilzB. 10143 K'tib; 1 Chb.' 27, 21. 'liT' (Judging, viz. El is) n.p. m. Neh. 3, 7;'comp. 1^, Ti^SN, Vs^S??,, V„^ (see p. 181) and asiu, fT'taeuS, ifiiasiiS, ■r _ -" II T ' B : - I ' IT : - : ' taSfflitT', S3S015N, Phenician?5>3asia&c. IT T • : ' IT T I- v:' - - : - : 5^1^ (from S'T'-, much-knowing, wise, prophesying) n. p. m. Neh. 10, 22; 12, 11; comp. the proper names yTi and sn-'aN (out of s>T^M), s^V2vi, 5n'>in\ IT ;-. ^ iTi:v-" IT • : ' itt i ! ' vi^v, y'T'bs'a &c. ITT I ' ITT : V : y^Ti see S'li?:. - IT - I - niT^ or rTi (from iiT' I. after the I ! R: ^ ITT form niNl EccLEs. 5, 10 K'ri, ninffl I * ' I : Pkov. 28, 10; not used) f. praise, thanks- giving, to God, concrete a choir praising; nnin 2, nVrtn (Neh. 11, 17) a choir of praise, signif. 3 of rtlilri to conduct a choir of praise (Neh. ib.), and !Tl»rt (12, 8), which may have also arisen from tTTin, referring to this signification; if fTT^ = 1!l I. not should be adopted for the meaning in question. Only in the fol- lowing proper name •jinni. (in use with lim^ 2 Che. 35, 15 and lini'i'; Neh. 11, 11 K'tib, 1 Chr. 16, 38 K'tib, Ps. 39, 1 and 77, 1 K'tib; belonging to a choir of praise; the termination IV bearing an adjective character in the proper names formed by it) 1. n.p. of a Levite distinguished under David as a chorister in the temple-music along with ■JM"'!! and qiDN, 1 Che. 16, 41, upon ni'iSian and D^nbia?:, giving the tune and music to others (Q'^S'^HiBab), performing (sas, comp. 25, 1, and NtoM 15, 22 in the same sense) beautifully and fine upon the D-'^'biSin T'lB ''b? 16, 42, or also upon (a) the '1133 in'(b») songs of praise to God 25, 3. His children practised the art of sacred music under their father in part 25, 1-3 6, and in part were porters 16,42. As N|35, Nfea and ']i''.lln are also applied to the exe- cution of musical pieces, it is easily ex- plained why Jeduthun was also called ttTh 2 Chb. 35, 15. — 2. re. p. of one of the 24 (1 Chb. ch. 25) musical choirs (rriinNEH. 12, 31) left by David, which bore the honorary title Jedvthun or Je- dithun, perhaps from him, as its founder, Ps. 62, 1 a:nd 77, 1 to the director (nS5M. president, overseer, leader) of the choir Jeduthun (comp. "]•£). The use of b» be- fore ')ini1^ shews plainly that it is the name of a choir, over which a n!£5n was set, to whom the psalm was con- signed for performance. A choir of this n^ 542 VI' name may have been employed still later, even after the exile 2Chr. 35, 15; Neh. 11, 17. — 3. n. p. of a supposed post- exile poet from whom Ps. 39 proceeds, the author being always distinguished from the dTiSDa by b. In Arabic the ■writer is also denoted by J. ^'T (a very old participial form from nn"' I.) see rT'i\ ITT ' IT T : ''iT' (from 11"! I. after the form iSTi; a I — ^ i-r I — ' favdiirite, friend) n. p. m. Ezb. 10, 43 K'ri. TT"^ (constr. T''!';, with suf. 't'i''T.', P^- prop, lovely, friendly, befriended; but com- monly a subst. a /"n'enrf, applied to God Is. 5, 1 , in his relation to the Israelite people, or vice versa to the people Jeb. 11, 15 in their relation to G-od; in the pi. Ps. 60, 7; 108, 7; elsewhere ■^^ 1i1_l means the pious 127, 2, spoken of Ben- jamin Deut. 33, 12. The pi. fern, is frequently used in an abstract sense, as is common in language, loveliness, delight, hence n'tl'^'il Tiia Ps. 45, 1 = aip ^^'^ 45, 2, rTiSBUiM rriT'l'' 84, 2 the loveliness ' ' it:- it ' of the temple (pi. 'i^a also in Ps. 132, 5 of the temple). nT^T' adj. and subst. see T'T'. IT • ! 1-T •TT'T! (** beloved one) n. p. f. 2 Kings 22, i! DiT'l'i see 1il\ I • : I'T niT^'l'^ fern, loveliness, delight, with tt5si, applied to the Israelites Jek. I2V7. •^''Tll {Jahis a friend) n.p. m. 2 Sam. 12, 25. ' ' fT'T' (contracted from ^T' and ttV IT T : ^ l-T jt' Jah is praise) n.p. m. Nbh. 3, 10, 1 Chk. 4, 37, formed in the later period of the language after rt'j !T^_^^« (Ps. 118, 19). S'l'Ii see - PT bjjtS"'"!'] {El is intelligent i yil.i, cowst?-. ?''T;, lengthened out of yii) n. p. m. idHR.7,6. "'"' rT'T (from Mi; I. after the form n-'^t^ Num. 21, 2% rr^l^^ Gen. 50, 4) f. same as t\T\\; only in the proper name y^Ti'^'T'. see Tiri'n\ tlb'T'' (melting away, languishing person, from rj^l) n.p. m. of a Nahorite Gen. 22, 22, then of a Nahorite- Aramaean tribe, named with the races im. , TB'^V?) '^'^i?- yT' I. (out of S^'il; inf absol. ^7;, cores*?-. n?1, with suff. "'ri?^, once In^'n Ex. 2, 4; m/)er. 5>'n, once rtjS'n Pkov. 24, 14 for W'n , a of motion being blunted off into es'fut. 5>T], once ST;^ Ps. 138, 6, like a'^Uii Job 24, 21,'b'''b''N Jee. 48, 31, the radical Yod being firmly retained) prop, trans, then intrans. 1. "l'' is applied with 5>aiI5 Is. 40, 21 28, is conceived of as r T ' ' the result of rtNl Is. 6, 9, particularly 44, 18, EcclbV 6, 5, 1 Sam. 23, 23, rarely the reverse 23, 22 ; and so 'S'V is to be taken in many other places where it might almost be translated by to see Gen. 3, 7; Ex. 2, 4. The LXX frequently render '^ by iSsiv (1 Sam. 10, 11; Job 28, 13; EccLES. 3, 21). — 2. to per- ceive, to marh, to experience, first, it is true, by sight Is. 6, 9, 1 Sam. 22, 3, Job 5, 24, but then by hearing also Gen. 9, 24, Lev. 5, 1, or by feeling Gen. 19, 33, so that it might be translated by to hear, to feel. Here belongs the signification of feeling and experiencing by the senses, particularly in the case of threatenings, promises &c., as far as punishment, promise &c. are said to be felt by the senses Ex. 6, 7 ; Ez. 6, 7 ; 7, 4; 11, 10; Hos. 9,7; similarly the Ar. *Xft. Hence to feel, punishment Ps. 14, 4; on the contrary it is better to take EccLES. 8, 5 and 9, 1 according to signification 3. Metaphorically from this, to lie with, spoken of a man Gen. 4, 1 and 24, 16, or a woman Gen. 19, 8, Judges 11, 39, in which latter case the addition n^ 543 VI' of 'nST MiBM 21,18 or'nst a3'B57D'!3 Num. ITT r : ■ . ' |TT_ i; ! • : 31, 17 sometimes occurs; it is even ap- plied to lewd cohabitation and sodomy Gen. 19, 5 (prop, to perceive or feel by the senses a man, a woman; or to come to know them sensually). This euphem- istic application o£i>'p , in thePentateuch occurring only in the Jehovist, is also used by the Syrians ("^r*, >°^), Ara- bians (o^), Greeks (jivtaaxai), Eomans (cognoscere) &c. — 3. to mark, to under- stand, perceive, discover, mentally, Gen. 8, 11, Judges 13, 21, 1 Sam. 20, 33, once with the addition asb DS Dbut. 8, 5, perhaps also Is. 44, 18, and there- fore coupled with 'JIS and b'^S'ilJrt; with a of the means which produce knowledge Gen. 15, 8. In this sense Eccles. 9, 1 man does not know either love or hatred, i. e. he has no perception of them. By this subjective signification are to be explained the secondary senses: a) to be concerned ahout Eccles. 8, 5; to direct the attention to a thing, i. e. to look into it Gen. 3.9, 6; and so coupled with 'jia to give force to the meaning of 'ina Job 34,4; to have a care for Pkov. 27, 23; io observe closely Job 9, 21; to have intimate acquaintance with a thing, Is. 51, 7, i. e. to love Gen. 18, 19; to see to a thing Prov. 9, 13, constantly with the accusat. of the object, rarely with 3 Job 35, 15. Hence applied to God, to provide for, to take under special protec- tion Ps. 73, 11, to select Nah. 1, 7, with ■JM; to men, to adore, reverence Ps. 9, 11; Hos. 8, 2; Job 18, 21. b) to come to know, in the first instance by inspection Num. 14,31, but also entirely subjective- ly, e. g. tlUSn Peov. 24, 14. c) to perceive, to search after a thing, to look after 1 Sam. 12, 17; 23, 22 23; Job 5, 27. d) to know, a person Gen. 29, 5, 2 Sam. 3, 25, Q» Ps. 18, 44; or a thing, to understand e. g. inaiB (a language) 81, 6, ':BD Is. 29, 12; sometimes to he acquainted with a thing, to comprehend Is. 1, 3; DibilJ "^ to lay hold of or desire peace Is. 59, 8. It is construed with the accusat. Ex. 1, 8, seldom with b of the object Ps. 69, 6; but it also stands absol. Job 36, 26, or with the accusat. of the object and ''3 in the apodosis 2 Sam. 17, 8. D^lSa ''' Ex. 33, 12 to know by name, i. e. very intimately, dVU denoting essence or essential nature, ^"ji an acquaintance, a friend, Job 19, 13, opposed to IT; SITi one known, i. e. distinguished above others Deut. 1, 13. With this is con- nected e) to he skilled in, e. g. y% Gen> 25, 27, ^';!^ 1 Kings 9, 27, ■'rtS Am. 5, 16, ']''^^ m EsTH. 1, 13, i. e. not only ta have understanding of such things, but also to practise them. — 4. to know (generally), scire, more fully with t^Syi Peov. 17, 27, Ma^a 1 Che. 12, 32, i. e. to have a clear consciousness of a thing. Hence it is followed a) by an apodosis, with -la Gen. 20, 6 , or without ''3 Job 19, 25, or with !i. interrogative Judges 18, 5, -^12 Gen. 21,' 26, !ia Ex. 32, 1, !TKib ' ' I- ' ' IT ' ' T IT Dan. 10, 20, ')';n» and nSN Josh. 2, 4 5, W?3 ■'is 1 Sam. '25, 11, iMbffla Jon. 1, 7. Often too b) by a simple accusat. of the object Job 15, 9, or a Gen. 19, 33, br Job 37, 16,b . . . ^3 2"Sam.19,36, modi- fying the acceptation of the object of yii. c) by an infin., without b Jee. 1, 6, or with b Eccles. 4, 13, more rarely by a finite verb, either immediately Job 32, 22 or separated from it by \ d) Absol., the object of knowledge being combined with the idea of the verb Gen. 4, 9; 48, 19 &c., after the object has been already spoken of either be- fore Job 38, 5, or in the aj)odosis 2 Sam. 12, 22; or 5*11 denotes to have ' ' l-T experience Job 8, 9, to be wise Ps. 73, 22; hence d''5>1'' Job 34, 2 = tJiaan. ' I- ! I ' r T -: 'S^^ aiU "1 Gen. 3, 5 22 to know good ITT I T ' ^^ and evil, i. e. to have moral perception, which separates man from the beasts. — Deriv.S'n, MJ»'i, ns."i, i»iu {S'Vi), nyTia, ?1T' (in ?1'155), the proper names 5>1^ (by^itself and' in !T'5»1\ STias , ST^blS, \ J IT : - : ' IT • -:' itt : ■•■ ' i>T'^l^^^ 5>T'i\ s»Tib5>a, ST'Mia), y-'T' in ITT I : ' ITT ' ITT :•••:' it • -.'l - i't bsS"''!^, 5>'i (core^iz-.S^, abridged perhaps from yi;), in bt;i3''l (perhaps also in yTias*, ST^'aia), according to some 5>'l IT • -: ' IT ■ : -" ° I (= TT) in the proper name ^"^^ Nif. 5*115 {fut. 'Syo , pause yir\) pass. v-)' 544 n^ of the different meanings of Kal, to he seen, perceived, observed. Gen. 41, 21, to be known, 1 KiN&s 18,-36, to appear i. e. to he recognised Ps. 74, 5, to be well- known, celebrated, with b of the person EuTH 3, 3 and a of the' thing Ex. 33, 16, or a Ps. 76, 2 where or by which one is famous ; or i3 or 1)3 follow in the apodosis Ex. 21,36 ;' Dbut.21, 1. ■'n?;ii5 in Ex. 6, 3 was not read ■'nsi'ifl by the Targ. and LXX, but the original pas- sive sense was changed into an active, in order to express the contrast, to Moses, more sharply. See ^'IJ II. Pih. 5>T (2 pers. tin?!';) 1. causat. to cause to know, with a double accusat., to show, to point out. Job 38, 12, where the K'ri reads IniBM nyT'. — 2. (not used) an intensive of Kal, to be very knowing, i. e. to be wise, prudent, skilled in enchantment; deriv. "'S'ST; (out of Y5>T), n. p. »m Fuh. yTi (part. m. SliM, f. nyT^M Is. 12, 5 K'tib, if it be not a noun nSTia after the form n:>B''M from 5>S3i) to be known, Is. 12, 5, hence partic. an acquaint- ance, a friend, Ps. 31, 12; 55, 14; 88, 9; parallels "^^la, t^», ap5«, ?p. Poel 5>^ii see 5»t; III. Hif. s'-'nitl {imp. 5»lirt, fut. t''^^') causat. of Kal in all the different senses of it, to cause to know or experience, i. e. to show, with b of the person and accus. of the thing Ex. 18, 20; to make to feel, with a double accusat. Jer. 16, 21; to announce, to inform, to relate, with an accusat. of the person and thing Gen. 41, 39; or with accusat. of the thing and b of the person Deut. 4, 9, 1 Sam. 10, 8, or with b of the person and bs of the thing Is. 38, 19 in the sense of respecting; or with accus. of the person and an apodosis Job 10, 2, or with omission of the accusat. of the pronoun Jer. 11, 18, or simply with accusat. of the thing Is. 12, 4, or with 'JM of the thing of which the announcement takes place. Is. 47, 13 the new-moon ■ prognosticators announce of the things that shall come; then to give an answer, with accus. of the person Job 38, 3 ; to teach, with b of the person Phot. 9, 9 or accusat. of the thing Ex. 18, 16, or a double accusat. Is. 40, 14; to communi- cate, '^'^•n 1 Sam. 14, 12 (ironically), and so in the most varied senses. Hof. i>n'i!l (for 'S'pn; part. m. i>n1tt or S^nia as a subst, fem. nsiia or r?l>ia) 1. to become known, manifest, with bN of the person Lev. 4, 23 24, Targ. S'TTiN. Fart. fem. known, revealed Is. 12, 5 K'ri. — 2. to be acquainted, be- friended; derivat. subst. S>nia, 5>lia, ny-ria. "r Hithp. 'SVTfn to make oneself known Gen. 45, 1 ; to reveal oneself, with bN of the person Num. 12, 6. The fundamental signification of the stem S'T' i. e. 3>Ti (Aram. ST^, Phenic. i-T i-T ^ I- : ' yT< the same, hence the Phenic. in Nifal 5»n-lN Plaut. Poen. 5, 1, 16 I will obtain knowledge, 5>1ii [■j'^a] ibid. 5, 1, 9 it is intelligently perceived, in Itpeal 5*TriN ibid. 5, 1, 8 to be perceived, and so in the proper name 'OpS'V], Jauafiag) ap- pears to have been "io see", to which may be attached the idea of ^^ coming to know" inasmuch as the basis, to dis- tinguish, separate, divide, may belong to seeing, as in the case of MTti (see pag. 430); conseq. prop, to separate sharply by the eye; comp. cernere, ISsiv, videre and dividere, Idus &c. The same organic root in the meaning to see, know, perceive, exists in the extra-Semi- tic languages also, e. g. Sanskrit wid, to know, Greek i8-siv out of fiS-stv and the basis of oJ8u, Lat. vid-exe and di-vid-eie, connected with fid in findo (to divide, separate), Gothic wit-axi (to know and see), vait, to know &c. From this development of the idea, we can explain the At. cO* to lay aside, prop. to divide off, to separate, to remove, l(i; to stop up, to check &c., which could not be united with 5»Ti otherwise. And n so the original idea is given in 9'V IT. which is here treated separately, be- cause it appears but seldom in Scripture. V"IJ n. {part. pass. ^I"!:;, fiit. ^-r) tr. VI' 545 n^ prop, to divide, separate, split, cut, con- seq. ST' = yi-l (see pag. 527). Hence a) like »l"i (Lament. 2, 3) to shatter, to destroy, risabs (= r'i:73'iN Is. 13, 22) Ez. 19, 7, as the Targ. and LXX already translate, without reading S'n'i. b) to break into, to cut into, of an enemy Ez. 38, 14, without any necessity for read- ing HSF\ (after Jer. 6, 22 and Jo. 4, 12). c) Figurat. to chastise, to visit, "hh SIT Is. 53, 3 visited with sorrow, where in- terpreters and translators unnecessarily abide by the general signification of yv I.; to punish. Gen. 18, 21 according to the Targ. Nif. yra (£«/■. with su/.-'SJ'ijri -, fut. y^jxi , in pause S7.57) to he chastised, punished Prov. 10, 9; to he visited, S'esl. 31, 19 after I was visited, I smote upon my hip, i. e. I performed repentance (and so it is a stronger way of expressing what is in the protasis). Hif. y-'nin {fut. apoc. 'S'r^) to cut, to pierce , to hore into ; generally , to chastise, with a of the thing by wMch, and the accusat. of the object. Judges 8, 16 and he eliastised with them (with thorns and thistles), parallel llJll 8, 7, as the Targ. (ijan), Syr., LXX,'Vulg. have understood it, without our being obliged to suppose that they read S'jn; and as Ibn Koreish, Ihn O'andch &o. have explained the word. i^l^ in. (Kal not used) tr. a trans- posed form of 1?'' (which see), as on the contrary •^S•^ in "'ri-isiai Ex. 25, 22, ny'.» 29, 42 are translated by the LXX as = 3>T; comp. similar transpositions I'nas p2 18, 13 for i-iya (see 2 SamT. 22, 13)" 03*1)5 Ps. 49, 12 according to the LXX,'Vulg., Syr. for D'naj), and per- haps also ina Son& of Sol. 2, 17 for *ian = proper name I'an, which is con- nected with the pi. C'lH (mountains) on account of its extent. Fo. yni (1 pers. "'nsiii for ■'nnsi"') to appoint 1 Sam. 21, 3,' with bs to, as also ^?^i Num. 10, 4; Neh. 6, 10. 3>Ti (a knowing, wise one,viz. El is)n.p. TO. 1 Chb. 2, 28. This '; still exists in the proper names ST'bN, STiini, STii"'. , ^ _ ill! v' ITT I l' ITT 1 ' 3»n;V??. !^,;?"i:. see also Si pag; 335. ^/T' (fut. »13'') Aram. intr. same as Hebr. S'r^ to understand, to feel Dan. 2, 9; 5, 23, coupled with Nm and Va^; to observe 2, 30; to be convinced 2, 8; 4, 14; to come to know 4, 6; to perceive 6, 11; to learn 5, 22; part. pass. S'^'V known, notum Ezs. 4, 12. Af.yTi'n(part.S'f'i;) m. the spirit of an oracle, the spirit of sorcery, which is knowing and wise, see "^yST. ^i'^S'f' {Jah is knowing; 5>T c. of ST) n.p. TO. 1 Chr. 9, 10; Phenic. constr. ST, abridged S'l in the proper name Dp?l. ^'^'yi.^ (formed from 'jiS'i'; after the type of liljSS with the termination ">-) TO. prop, one possessing the y^ST (oracle- spirit), i. e. a sorcerer, magician, adduced along with ais, and spoken of lying prophets Lev.' 19, 31; Deut. 18, 11; rarely the spirit of the oracle itself (i. e. the knowing, the wise) Lev. 20, 27. The At. *JLft is metaphorically applied in the same way. I^im'; see 'jinil\ 'P\^ (out of the first syllable of the name of God Hirt^; i being changed into a) TO. Ood, after exclamations of praise, e. g. after the imper. pi. 31 horrible darkness; n^-n'ap'bTa SoNa 35 ■■ n^ 546 n^ pr Sol. 8, 6 fearful flame (the LXX read il'^nhflbia)-, Pi^ "jiDn one great in power Ps. 89, 9 ; n;-\3b»a the mighty deeds, Ps. 77, 12 I praise (according to the K'tib) the mighty acts, when I think of thy won- ders of old; ni •z.Yrm (not 's.nrm) 118, 5 and he heard me with the most perfect enlargement; perhaps M'^ niMT Ex. 15, 2 my triumph and high praise (is he) should also be taken so. The noun is more firmly attached in !T'l3''b5> great deed, Jbe. 32, 19 and mighty in great deeds. Comp. bN Ps. 36, 7, D'^rt'biS 68, 16, 1 Sam. 14, 15, U-^'n'bifib Jon. 3% ^'^ "'ish. Gen. 10, 9 in the same sense, designat- ing the highest degree of the idea be- longing to the noun. Perhaps W is appended to certain tenses of the verb only for the purpose of expressing the conception of the verb in a stronger degree; and so the places adduced above would have to be translated otherwise. As M" is identical with Miiri, it is na- IT ^ IT : ' tural to suppose that it cannot be found in composition with the latter, and when it appears in Is. 12, 2 , we should con- sider that it is wanting in the parallels (Ex. 15, 2, Ps. 118, 14) as well as in mss. and versions, and is probably spu- rious on that account. Even in Is. 26, 4, though Aquila has it there already, it is either a very ancient gloss, or it must be explained in connexion with fT^a which is just about to be elucidated. — '- In n^a Is. 26, 4 and Ps. 68, 5 the a be- IT : ' ' : fore Ml has usually been regarded as Beth essentiae, and so the word has been translated in a far-fetched way, or generally so as not to be satisfactory, though the use of such a a actually exists in the language (page' 175). It is more probable that a more mysterious, perhaps a holier name (W^a) existed from primitive times besides the short name of God fT", under whose form IT tt'' may have been conceived of as in- vested with higher attributes. The pas- sages would accordingly be translated: Is. 26, 4 FJah is irirr:, Ps. 65, 5 B'Jah is his name. Comp. the annexation of the B in the name of the God Bdnxog (intimated in Plut. de Is. ch. 34), whose primitive form was "Iav,%o? (Arrian, ex- ped. Alex. II, 16). But the etymological derivation and meaning of this a is not ascertained. The application of this short name of Deity M'' to the formation of the names of human beings, by its being made to follow its epithet, does not appear till after the time of Moses, in this case always with the omission of the Mappik in fl; though W was already known in the primitive period. So in the pro- per names n^iN, nnw, rr^itN, n'^TtiN, '■ , IT--:' IT • I ' IT!—:' it:--:' irriN, rvb^, rfans, niiais, st'SIn, IT--:' iT-r' it:--:' it:--:' it: — :' tr^ia, !Tini''Ta, nisa, sriiiDa, tr^wa, IT :r ' IT : I : - ' itt : ' it : i : ' it : - : ' nitoa, n-ipapa, rr^Nia, M'^i'na, fr-na, it— :r' it':i':-' it t:' it : -'ii- ' it:-' tribna, iv'ya's,, JT'b'i, ininin, iTiTii-i, IT : - : ' it : - ! ' itt : ' it: - i ' it : i ' rT>iin, JT'Siaiin, Jr^naT, fiiisr, rfn'iT, IT - I ' IT : - I ' it : - : ' it : - : ' it : - : ' ITT-:' it:---;' it--' itt-:' it'-:-' tribsn, ri'pbn, rr^sin, nnon, n^nin, it;--:' it'-: -' it: — :' it:--:' it-:.:-' it: — :' IT- t ' it:-:' it:--:i-' . it ■ i' it : ! - ' IT : I- : ' it t : ' it : - : ' it : - i ' IT--' it:-:-' IT!!-' it'-:-!' it-:' IT : T ; ' IT : T ; ' it : v-:i- ' it : ; * ' it : •- : ' M^iv n'^M'nv fT^auSr, rr'niiu'', n-^iuji'', IT - : ' IT : : - ' it : - i ' it t i : ' it : - i ' it - - ' IT : - : - ' IT : - : ' it :- : ' it" : - ' ST^S'^a, iT'Ub'n, iTisba, im's^, nnSTa. itt r ' IT : - : ' it - ! - ' IT : - I- ' it: - r ' ST^a^ta, rtiia, niabaa, nisntt, trrina, IT T I : ' IT T : ' it : -•- I*-- : ' it : — ' it : - - ' rr'ans, TriWi, iriisia, !Ti'n5>s, n^ii, it:-:' it :••■.:' it:- i' it;-:' itt' JT^ini, rfiai!*, ir^is, n^w, ir^iTS, IT : - : ' it : - I ' it t-: ' it • i ' it : — : ' it: — :' ITT-:' it:^ — :' it- i :-' itt-:' iTTis, iT'bny, iTiiB, rr^Nba, rr^bs, itt-:' it,:,"-: itt: ' it t : ' itt : ' Miubs, n^bbs, irrips, ninns, n^pia, it : - : ' it : - : ' it : '- : ' it : - : ' it'- : ■ ' rcisa, tT'bp, iiibip, n-'isi, Jiiani, it:- : ' ITT 'i--' itt 'i ' ITT :' it : - : ' tr^ai, iT'bs'n, niMyi, n-'s'n, rr'Daffl, IT : -' iTTi" : ' IT : - I-' itt : ' it:- : ' iTi'ini!;, !Tj53ffl, !^^^sa^^?, !^,';'^a^?, fi,";l?^, n'^U3ii5, In-ia'nTij, n'^'iia." In many of these IT :- :' it: -.-r'. itt : / . , name-forms tli is interchanged with l^ii or with "i!i^ prefixed, rarely with bN~ e. g. bN-'H'' IChk. 15, 18 instead of MitTi & |., . . J ,iT * : 15, 24: seldomer fii is shortened into IT n- (see rtaia). See also ini, ifT'. IT ^ IT - -^ IT ' I : n^ (abridged from fllfl"; a name of God) m. same as rt'', prefixed only in proper names as STO and i)', in which- case it is abridged still farther into ■;; (- has arisen from -, because Yod with' its vrwel forms a separate syllable). See; too ininv Niln'', s»nij\ IT : ' 1 .. I - 1 .. 2.1"' 547 in^ DH"' (imp. sing. m. ati , but also retain- ing, and at the same time lengthening the vowel, i. e. with a of motion t^^fl, rarely nan, f. -lan, pi. lan) tr. 1. to give Gen. 29, 21; to reach forth, present, as a gift Job 6, 22, omitting the accusat. of the object; to ascribe Deut. 32, 3; to procure, a''3S Gen. 30,1, nas 2 Sam. 16, 20. — 2. to set, appoint, to put Deut. 1, 13 ; 2 Sam. 11, 15 ; to lay, to lay upon, a burden, always proceeding from the fundamental signification to give. The imper. nan is used, moreover, as an exclamation: cornel come on! like nsb (which see); and in this sense it stands also for the fern. Gen. 38, 16 and the pi. masc. Ex. 1, 9. Deriv. an\ For lan Hos. 4, 18 see under anj*. ' r T PeaZaZanan^ (not used) to give wholly, i. e. to bestow, whence, according to Kimchi and others, anan (from 'ni) a present; but see anan, which is derived from anan (fo roast, hum, torrere), the simple stem of which is an (ain) to sting, to burn, of the nettle, comp. theTarg. sain the nettle Is. 7, 23 (see a>in p. 353). The fundamental signification of the stem an"! , though the Hebrew and Phe- nician have usually ins for it, is suf- ficiently established by the Semitic dia- lects (Ar. Ji^5, Targ. ap^ a^, Syr. ^.soi-k, Sam. an^); and every other ex- planation comparing it with aiSJ, nas is to be decidedly rejected. But the organic root is a"' = aa (by interchang- ing 1 and a); and as such it is already found in extra-Semitic languages (see Furst's Lehrgeb. p. 42). nrr^ (after the form a'np, anS; with IT r IT ! IT . suff. '^an^) m. what is given, allotted (^Kimchi), hence fate, lot, in the phrase ") ■'''"''? T'^i^f? Ps. 55, 23 leave to God the lot, entrust God with it. On the use of Tj-'bi^n see Ps. 22, 11 or the cognate in sense b^ (to roll) 37, 5, where the general word 'Tj'i'i (way, opportunity, fate) stands for an^; comp. too nSM (from ni?3 to apportion, to give) what is al- lotted, gift, lot (Ps. 11, 6; 16, 5; Jer. 13, 25), translated by the Targ. in the passages in question Nan''_, Nani73. Ac- cording to the Talmud (Meg. 18*) "i is said to mean possession, goods, as" in the Aramaean phrase ■'1\ai Trian'' bpllS ■'Nba.^N {take thy property and throw it on my camel), which coincides with given, alloted. According to another meaning of an"! (to give up, to impose) an^ may signify a burden, in which sense the Targumic "^las on Ps. 55, 23 may be understood. But it is probable that the Targ., LXX and Vulg. had merely the figurative use of the word in their mind while employing laD, cura, iiiqifiva. nn'; (j;ian% lan^ ;i?art. an; , pi. van;; part. pass, a'^n^, which is united with a pers. pron. ; imper. an; on the con- trary fut. and infin. from ^ni) Aram. tr. same as Hebrew an"' and more frequent; with the dative of the pers. and accus. of the thing Dan. 2, 21; Ezr. 5, 14; 'S i;;a an^ to give into on^s power Dan. 2, 38 ; to deliver over, to give up to 7, 11 ; to put, i. e. to lay a foundation, NIJIBN Ezr. 5, 16. Ithpe. an'^riN (fut. an'^n;:) to be delivered over, with 5 of the person Dan. 4, 13. in^ denom., see niin'' and i'Tin\ ^Ty'' (place of renown, from lin) n. p. of a Danite, formerly a Phenician, town Josh. 19, 45, mentioned along with npnbs, nb5»a, fflmij T^s &c. i^rn'' (from mn n., leader, guide, viz. Jah is) n. p. m. 1 Ghr. 2, 47. iin^ (abridged from mn'' = mnv but JT ^ " I" I ~ II ' with the first syllable preponderatmg, therefore Milet) m. a characteristic name of God among the Hebrews, applied perhaps even at a very early period, but frequently used only in post-Mosaic proper names, e. g. in'S'lN, in^as &c. Eor this older 11B'' Neh. 8,"l7. See :*Pili->". I - I •• ' IT : Nin'' (contracted from Nifl and !l^. = Tf^; Jah is God) n. p. m. 1 Kings 16, 1; 2'kiNGS ch. 9 ; 1 Chr. 2, 38 ; 4, 35 ; 12, 3. ■^ is lengthened out of the first syllable of the original name of Deity !l?.t77, viz. from "rt^, according to the usual laws of the language, and Nifl in signi- fication 3 (see p. 353, as in the proper names NlJi^'blSt , N1t7"'?N &c.) means God. See W^\ - I " TrtNitT] {Yehd is preserver or helper) n. p.m. 2'Kings 10, 35, 2 Chr. 36, 1, for which THNV also stands in 36, 2; 21,17, for which inn™ in 22,1; inpT?. in 22, 6 and tT'THN in 2 Kings 9) '16 ' it:--; ' occur; 2 Chr. 34, 8. See TUN, "'iriN. ' ' IT T ' r : ~ Uisirr^ {Yeho is supporter; IBN part. of l»1N III. page 45 = fl'^N) n. p. m. 2 Kings 12, 1, for which UJNV stands in 11, 2; and 13, 10, for which is fflSii 13; 9. See rv'^-^. " ' IT • I TliT^ (abridged from- the Hebrew mifT',' like lin out of niin) .4mm. f. IT :' I " ri V .1 same as iTTitT' the name of Jewish IT .: Palestine, Judea, Dan. 2, 25 the sons of the captivity of Judea, i. e. the Jew- ish exiles; 5, 13; 6, 14; Ezr. 5, 1 8; Syr. joouk the same. It does not oc- cur as a name for a Judean. In Ar. >>yj^. and Oyl^ means Jews collect, abridged from the Hebrew. In nitT'aN, nino-'N, Titi"''??, Tifi"'n» iin is = i'in. mirr; (a participial noun from the nnn^ 549 nmn> fat. Hophal of the verb nT' I.: praised, viz. is Jah, but Scripture gives other allusions to this proper name Gen. 29, 35 and 49, 8) 1. n. p. m. of the fourth son of Leah and the patriarch Jacob Gen. 29, 35; 43, 3 8. After him the name of one of the twelve tribes, fully miMi Man Num. 1, 27, more rarely "^ 'rr^a 2 Sam. 2, 4 or '> ■'53 Jer. 7, 30; in the prophets tTTilT; alone Hos. 4, 15 ; 5, 5 ; a tribe that already exceeded the others at an early period, in numbers, distinction, and fame Gen. 49, 8 ; Num. 1, 27; 2, 3 &c.; Judges 1, 2 seq. As the designation of a tribe '■; is com- monly masc. Is. 3, 8; Hos. 4,' 15; 5, 5 13; 6, 4; but as collective it is also construed with the pi. Jer. 31, 24; or with the fern. Nah. 2, 1; Lament. 1, 3; Mati. 2, 11. A usual name among the later Jews also, as 'lovtSag the Maccabee, 'Iovdagj:ts^§aToe{'^^b),'Iov8ag'Ic)xaQiatTtig (nv'ni;-ffliN),7oi;S(i?theGalilean(ibibar!), 'IovSiigBaQaa§dg{{H^Vi-'-\^) &c. — 2.n.p. f. of the district allotted to the tribe of Judah in the south of Palestine, and de- scribed in JosH.15,1 sq. and 19,1-9 ; fully "I yiN EuTH 1, 7 ; therefore it is added to certain parts of the land, e. g. "i '13'in Josh. 15, 61, "^ anb rr^a Euth'17, 7. After the division of the kingdom, "; denoted the new kingdom, contrasted with that of Israel, which consisted of Judah, Benjamin, and in part Simeon and Dan, with Jerusalem for metropolis ; opposed to bstlto'; and D'J'iBN, in which sense we must take !Tii!T; 1'n Josh. 11, 21(oppos.tobN'ito^ 1p orSn'rt), ": ijDb7a 1 Kings 14, 21, 'V''^?^ 1,9, poet. '^ ffliN Is. 5, 3, '7 ■'3a Jer" 7, 30, "; n'la Is. 22, 21, poet. '1 na Lament. 2, 2, 'i yiN Is. 26,1, '1 na'iN''l9,17, '■; ■'p^ jEK.4,i'6&c. !Ti73p''1 and D''pi\ ■ (T f'-; IT : 't: ' it : *iT' t 3"'"l''i!T' ( Yeho is a combatant) n. p. m. 1 Ohr. 9, 10; Neh. 11, 5 ; in 1 Maco. 2,1 'IwaQi^. See the proper names '^y, ■'a-'T', i'-ii (in b5>a'i\ ntdaT'), ■'a-'i.'^ ^Dirr^ (prop- ^^^- Hof. of bbj ; one po- tent, viz. Jah is, comp. fT'bS'; in the same sense, conseq. l!i^ is not = iH^) n. p. m. Jer. 37, 3, for which bsi"' stands in 38, 1. 313iiT^ {Yeho is munificent) n.p. m. 1. 2 Sam. 13,5, for which is aiDii in 13, ' ' ITT I ' 3; 2 Kings 10, 15, for which Jer. 35, 6 has aiiii; the name' of a Eechabite, of ITT I ' ' the Midianite tribe Kin (1 Chr. 2, 55) or Kayin, which was on friendly terms with Israel, as we learn from other places (1 Sam. 15, 6). insirr^ {Yeho is giver) n.p.m. 2 Sam. 15, 27; 21, 21; 23, 32; Judges 18, 30 &c., interchanged with insv; seldomer with pnirTi or pnv. 'it T I ; 'tT T I Clpirr^ (for t\OV, retaining the Tl of Hifil, as in ?''il3in^) n. p. m. Ps. 81, 6, applied to the Israelite people, as rria C|OV &c. See qoii. msiJT^ {Yehd is the unveiling, i. e. he unveils, Tns a noun from ims 11.) n. p. ' IT- ITT ' -T m. 1 Chr. 8, 36, for which TilS'' (a noun . . IT : - ^ from tTl5> I. in Hif , unveiler) stands in 9, 42. It is possible that triS'' may have stood in 9, 42 and become fllS^ by the interchange of 1 and "n (see l). pvin^ 553 yr\'' nyirr; {Yeh6 is provider of semual pleasure; y^S a noun from ^IS which gee; comp. Tivvs) n.p.f. 2 Kings 14, 2, where the K'ri reads T'1?^'^? having the same sense; "p^S after the form ai^ia being also a noun. See yis. plSin^ {Yeho is righteous) n. p. m. Hagg.' 1,'i" 12 ; 2, 2, for which 'Xi; stands in EzR. 3, 2 seq. ; comp. pilS and p-jK inpna^'jiN, pTi-'sb-a, jrpns, wpiit. * viv • I -:' ' viv • ; - ' it'» : • ' it'' ; * pis, pina and plS are ako epithets and names of deity elsewhere, see Dlin"; {Yehd is exalted) n. p. m. 1 Kings 22, 51; 2 Kings 1, 17; 2 Chr. 17,8; '/m(iaft Matth. 1, 8. D1 is very often used in proper names ^i^^an epi- thet of God, e. g. DT, a'n'115 (= D'n "ii"j5), Oil'', d'niiN, xrktu, D^'^as*,' D'njas, n ' ti -: ' IT : - ' it • -:' it : - ' DTiDSTa , DT^JIN ; so too in rT'721. n • I - ' it • I -:' I' ! ~ SDBJiiT' {Yeho is a covenant; see yailS) n. p. f. 2 Kings 11, 2, who is named nsaiain^ in 2 Chr. 22, 11. Comp. the proper names SauS, yytq "isa, Msaa, yaiBibi* (ny^ttS'^bN), s>aBiW\ saajna &c. - IV ■ v: ^ r : - • vy' - iv : ' - u* : - ff^ltpiiT; or yiBirt; [Yeho is help; S»1tt?, sa? is a noun from 5>1!5 [SlUJl = S>iBi - T' - H' IT ■- I ■■ 1-T after the form a^S:, til'n; as also Vli [after the form pn, p'l, 13] in the proper name Sta'i'n = SiaiiTi; and the noun 3"iilj itself in the sense of S^lZJi appears in the proper names V^vi^^ [.•; = in;;], ?'HB''bs«. &c.) n. p. m. £x. 17, 9, called at first 3?«Ji!l; 2 Kings 23, 8 ; Zech. 3, 1 ; in the LXX 'Itjaovg, in Vulg. Josua. If the proper names ■'yiB'', niS^aSi, WSiBi, r r r : ■ ' it : - : ' it : - : ' rr'yfflin, Siaia, yia-'a be considered, it IT : - I ' r •• ' IT " , ' . is apparent that the nouns SVO and SfiU in 3«nsi!T' and Sioin can only be taken - I : - 1". •' • in the sense of Slli\ Originally indeed, the proper name SffliM was a noun formed from Hifil {helper), like Siailn in fiJSTZJiil; but after Moses had already changed the name into S'lBifl^ in order to bring out the name of God in it, it was seen that in the irt of yaiil there was nothing but an abridgment of in\ See STi5, vt, ?iii5-'aN , ?iTB''bN, yrana, SiTlJisba, where yi'iU may have arisen in part out of other elements. OSIIJin^ {Yeho is judge) 1. n. p. m. 2 Sam's, 16; 1 Kings 4, 17; 15, 24; 2 Kings 9, 2; comp. the proper names UDiiS, asiB-'bis, DDiai'', n-'usia &c. — • IT T ' IT T (■ V: * IT T I ' IT : - : 2. ji. p. of a valley (pay) between Jerusalem and the mount of Olives Jo. 4, 2, so called because God will there hold a judicial process on the nations ; to which meaning the prophet refers 4, 2 12, and therefore calls it V^i^nn p!35> (valley of decision) 4, 14. At the time of king UEiiJifi^ the valley in question was called riD'na TyaS 2 Chr. 20, 26, but IT T ; ' ••'(■• ' ' already in Joel's day the Jehoshaph3,t- valley, because God held a judicial process there upon the heathen nations ; and for that reason it should aga.in be- come at a future time a valley of judgment. At a very ancient period the valley was termed niffl paS (valley of the dale), and then as a meeting-place of many kings ^\}^1^ pnS (king's valley) Gen. 14, 17, where the childless Absalom Subsequently erected a monument to himself 2 Sam. 18, 18. Thus the valley was termed in succession a) H]"a '5>, b) 'ibwn '3>, c) ns'na'y, d) visvi^^^'y / I V IV - |« I / IT T : r ' ^ IT T I : i" or y-Tinrt '5J. It lay on the south side of Jerusalem. Through it the Kedron flows, running into the Dead Sea; and it contains row upon row of sepulchres. , "I'^rj'' adj. m. elated, proud, arrogant, puffed up, of 13-5. BlAb. 2, 5; Prov. 21,24; comp. Arab. jj^Jij = Hebr. bs3>. See 1ln\ ^'^" bsbbn'^ (El is the glorious) n. p. m. 1 Ch'r.4,'16 • 2 Chr.29,12 ; comp. bisbbna. D'b.T' (from obn I. = Dbn) m. the r -3- V I- T I- T -^ name of a precious stone, so called from its hardness Ex. 28, 18; according to Ibn Esra, Jak. Tussi, a diamond, ada/iag having the same etymology; while 1153 U5 is merely the point of the diamond; in any case different from n?3bni<. TIT : - yty (not used) tr. to tread down with yn^ 554 i Num. 26, 24 or i'^ffl'' K'tib 1 Chr. 7, 1. — 2. (converted) ac- cording to the LXX, Vulg. and New Test. (James 5, 11) for avN, which may come from aiN = a^\ I I 3D1'' 1. (from h'21 I., howling, i. e. desert [see b''b^], as a proper name ?V habitant of the desert) n. p. m. of an Arabian tribe belonging to the family of Joktan, and called after him Gen. 10, 29, of whose dwelling-place nothing definite can be given. — 2. (from aS"' 11., same as the proper name am^i) n. p. m. among the Edomites Gen. 36, 33, Phe- nicians Josh. 11, 1, and Hebrews 1 Chr. 8, 9 18. ^ni'i see ba''. pni'i (after the form IS^D , from bS"" I.) m. a river, Jer. 17, 8, the Aramaeised form of which is bii*. PDI'i (a participial form from bi'' II.; playing) n. p. m. Gen. 4, 21, ancestor of such as play on the harp and pipe. Probably there is an allusion in the name to bi"" I., according to which ban'' signifies rover , nomad , music being thought an accompaniment of pastoral life, among all nations. See ba-« 2, ITT lan;" (see lj3Tilri:i) n. p. m. Ezr. 8, 33; "10^22; 2 Chr.'31, 13; 'Iwaa^Sog 4k Ezr. 8, 63 ; comp. !T''iaT. 'l^Ti'' (yd is worthy of remembrance, comp. the proper names JDiomnestes, Mne- or Mnasitheus, Theomnestus) n. p. m. 2 Kings 12, 22, for which 2 Chr. 24, 26 has lat (out of "i^T?); comp. the proper names n^'^'IST, "''laT, IST, IIST. Jini'^ (Y6 is living; !sn stands for pn? 555 nr ■'Nn, as there was also at a later time a name "'Nni"', from a stem NH to live = nn, whence in parfn, coresir. ip, like I'n, corestr-. I?, from fTi; partly constr.'^'n in bs"'n, as "'s) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 8, 16; 11,45, pnV (see l^niii':) »• P- m. Neh. 12, 22,'^ for 'which in:i^" in 12, 11; 1 Che. 3, 15; 5, 35; I2V4' 12; 1 Chr. 3, 24; EzR. 8, 12; 2 Kings 25, 23; 4 Ezr. 9, 1 (LxJKE 3, 30 'lavdv; afterwards there was a n. p. f. fisni;' Luke 8, 3); comp. fT'33n. it:--: nai'' see fl!3\ IT IT \ yTi'i (see 3>i;|in':) n. p. m. Neh. 3, 6; 12,10; comp. fi,;?i:. Y'Z'^V (see T'^?^^'^) "• i'- ™- ^2- 1' ^i comp. IT'SSV D^'P'^i"' (see D'^p'^iH'') n. p. m. Neh. 12, 10; comp. B-'lJ^bsj, ^i|^'?E?- a'^'l'^i'i (see a-i'i^iii';) n. p. m. Ezr. 8, 16; Neh. 11, 5 10; "in 1 Macc. 2, 1 ^'2'2V ( Y3 is glory) n. p. f. Ex. 6, 20, the only pre-Mosaic name compounded with V; comp. the Greek proper names Athenocles, Diodes, Dionysocles, He- racles, Metrocles, Pythocles &c.; Germ. Theutbrecht, i. e. glory of Theut, and in Hebrew too the proper name '^N nias (= lias ■'as). I T ^ IT r -. ^D^"' (see bsifr:) re. p. m. Jer. 38, 1, for which bsifl^ stands in 37, 3; the Masoretes have considered bSN Peov. 30, 1 as an Aramaean form of this name. But see bsis*. it' D1^ (i. e. D"' ; not used) intr. 1. to shine, to glitter, to be clear, to lighten (e. g. of the day), which stem suits the deriv. ttr very well (comp. Gothic dag-s, Ger- man Tag, from the stem dag = Sanskrit dah, urere); Ar. (•Ls the same, Targ. D'' and d;;, Syr. ^^^ and ^io- the same. Deriv. DV, daii. On the other hand, nw = D'' (oil) should be assumed as the stem for d-iJaj, ni73J and the proper names D'as, bNia\ — 2. to be hot, warm, it • ^: ' 1" : a transition from signific. 1, as is the case with other verbs of shining, lighten- ing (see lis, Tii &c.). Deriv. D\ The stem d"" (dl'') is preserved in Se- mitic only in derivatives ; and (»»j, >oa*, di"", da';, i^iv" ! can only be explained by means of the word not being used as a verb fXi , Aram. d^'J and d\ From »yj have originated in Arabic the denomi- native verbs Jw; to be hot, to glow, 00 j to glitter, to shine (whence oWjjo wil- derness, comp. the derivatives of ^S)> The organic root d'' is obviously con- nected very closely with dn, dp, with l»^ in l=»l (to be hot) &c.; as also the Hebrew tiDi (to shine) is = Ar. Lii (to shine), and J>BJ (to glitter) is = Lii». ai'' (used only in the sing., with suff. ■'ai', ^t^V, and the dMoZ d';ai"', d'^a'', and from tins form the adv. dai'' ; from d Num. 29, i, and so in various applications. Me- nv 556 ODV taphor. derived from tke present mean- ing are a) birth-day Job 3, 1, as appears from 3, 2 ; Hos. 7, 5 according to some, b) crowning-day Hos. 7, 6 (Targ.). c) festi- val day 2, 15. d) day of slaughter 2, 2, comp. Is. 9,3. e) day of punishment, of downfall, of misfortune Ps. 37,13; 137, 7; Job 18, 20; Ob. 12; day of death 1 Sam. 26, 10; Ez. 21, 30; day of defeat Is. 9, 3 ; the judicial day (of God) 2, 12 ; 13, 6 ; Jo. 1, 15. f ) the present time, hence di'M from this day onward Is. 43, 13 ; Ez. 48, 35 ; di;' ""SBb Is. 48, 7 before now, be- fore this hour, g) final time, end, of life, thus Dr -6{b Job 15, 32 the not-end, i. e. remote from the end of life, h) the time of life, Di]" Tvd'i) Job 30, 25 who has a heavy time of life, i. e. one oppressed, i) any time fixed by a more definite statement Judges 18, 30 (see pi. ai53i). j) the time or duration of a day, hence a day's journey Deut. 1, 2, fully oii '^'l\ Num. 11, 31. k) a short space; parti- cularly so D;;?5i'a Hos. 6, 2 from two days onward, i. e. after two days, after a short interval. 1) Adv. = dU'i'^ by day, opposed to nb^Va Ps.88,2, -where ''n)?5>at is to be supplied in the second member, and ^'laj in the first, dii dV every day, i. e. daily Gen. 39, 10; at every time, con- stantly Ps. 61, 9; Dill di"! day by day EsTH. 3, 4, for which dri dii-bsa stands ' ' IT I T ! in 2, 11; dra ';» day by day 1 Chb. 12, 22, for which is also used dii3 dvb 2 Chr. 24, 11, or also in the sense every day (see "lai); dra drS) one day as an- other 1 Sam. 18, 10; dr-bs dra from day to day, i. e. daily Num. 30, 15. The Ar. 1*^ is also used in manifold ways, as for day of slaughter, time of life &c.; -""if (•j^l to-day &c. The following formulas belong to the adverbial character of dv, where it is coupled with the article or with pre- positions prefixed, a) di^rt this day, to- day, hodie (= hoc die) Gen. 4, 14, '"rt-IS 19, 37 till to-day, till now, fuUy UV'rt wn 1 Sam. 17, 10, Wrt dixrt-lS! Gen. 26, 33, while di^ri Mt'"1 Kings 14, 14 should be otherwise taken (see Ht); by day, during the day = Q'OV Hos. 4, 5, opposed to Hb^brt Neh. 4, 16; at that time, then 1 Sam. 12, 17 ; about the (fore- mentioned) time 2 Kings 4, 8. — b) dijia followed by an infin. on the day when Gen. 2, 17, at the time when 2, 4, after that 2 Sam. 21, 12, when Ex. 32, 34, sel- dom with the perfect following Lev. 7, 35; sometimes 3 alone stands for it Gen. 2, 4. — c) di^a in the day, at the time of the day Gen. 31, 40; on the same day, i. e. immediately Prov. 12, 16; to- day Judges 13, 10, where, however, it is better to translate these days, i. e. re- cently. — d) di"? about this day, i. e. at present, now Gen. 25, 31, which never has the meaning before, formerly; di"? M-Trt or TifTi di'iJlS as at this time, i. e. as at present, as just now Gen. 50, 20, Deut. 2, 30, 1 Sam. 22, 8, even if the subject to which allusion is made be already past, the formula being specially used in fulfilled prophecies, with the meaning, as it is now, as is the case at present Jer. 11, 5; 25, 18; Ezb. 9, 7; yet sometimes about this day, i. e. the day the author has in his mind Gen. 39, 11. — e) di^a from the day when, since Ex. 10, 6 ; Deut. 9, 24. — f) di;irt-b3 all the day, i. e. daily Ps. 42, 4; 73, 14, parallel d'l'lpab; the whole day 32, 3, parallel iib^bln'bs Is. 62, 6; at all times, constantly, always Ps. 52, 3, Prov. 21, 26, with I'^an sometimes added for per- spicuity's sake Is. 51, 13; in like man- ner dii'baa Ps. 7, 12, and probably also 88, 10, where, however, some take di"" = i33> misfortune. — For supplementing the meanings and applications of di"' comp. the other noun-form JDJ"', pi. D"'M^, constr. ■'a'', and nia'', constr. nia'^. r ; ' it' I : nil (def. sail; pZ. ■)iMi'', constr. once ''•ai EzR. 4, 7, def. N^^ai;; from the pi. with a feminine ending comes the constr. pi. nail) Aram. m. same as Hebrew di'' in all its variety of senses Dan. 6, 11; EzR. 6, 15. DXDi'' (out of di-i with the old termi- , IT * 1 . 1 ' nation d-, which was originally an ac- cusative form) adv. 1. by day, in the day- time Ex. 13, 21, Is. 4, 5, oppos. to tib^b, r 557 nji^ hence Slb^bl "' day and night, i. e. always Ps. 1, 2, more rarely the reverse tl^'^b OHi"''] Dbdt. 28, 66; in the later usage of the language and with an Aramaean colouring dai"'a Neh. 9, 19 occurring in- stead of it; oomp. Syr. j ViSn t -i . — 2..daily, day by day Ps. 13, 3, hence without the opposite nb^b. — 3. by the light of day, Ez. 30, 16 and Memphis will have enemies hy the light of day; comp. Jbe. 15, 8 ti'^insa IliB and the opposite nb-ib 11111! Ob. 5. V]'^ (not used)' tr. probably same as '\V^ (interchanging' g and v or J, as 5>i'' II. i. e. ^11 changes with S*"!?!, Pers. kerm = Germ. Wunfl, G^eek itws = mtis\ comp. p. 249) to stamp, to pus%^ to press, deriv. perh'aps yp ; figurat. to srAdue, oppress, deriv. Ta^"^ 3, and according to some the noun iii. |1 ^ n. p. m. 1. the fourth son of Japhet Gen. 10, 2, conseq. the fourth Japhe- tic leading race. By it is principally meant the Hellenic race, the lonians, then all the Greeks in Greece Is. 66,19; next the Greek- Macedonian empire, whose first king was Alexander Dan. 8, 21. — In Daniel's prophetic symbols the con- tinnators of IT' are: Seleucusl. Nicator, Antiochusl. Soter; Antiochus 11. Theos; Seleucus II. Callinifcus; Seleucus' III. Ceraunus; Antiochus III. the Great; Se- leucus IV. Philopator; Heliodorus; De- metrius I. Soter,! Dan. 7, 24. — Gradu- ally )V came also to mean the Greeks in Asia Minor, or the south-eastern ones at the Black Sea, dwelling beside the -Tiberanians and Moschites, or those called the Achaeans in classical authors Jo. 4, 6, Zech. 9,13, who dealt in slaves ; the Phenicians often being the mediums of barter Ez. 27, 18, Is. 66, 19. — The form of the name IT^ is closely connected with the Greek 'lav, 'lav, 'laveg &c.; for the basis of all seems to have been 'laovsg, with the digamma 'IdPorsg. As to the meaning, that ot "the young" has been adopted (Pott, Etym. Forsch. I. p. XLI), opposed to the rgaixoi, the old; the Greeks themselves relating (Aristot., Meteorol. 1, 14), that the Hellenes were formerly called rgaixoi; comp. Sanskr. juvan, Zeni.jawan i. e. juvenis. — 2. n,p. of a city in Yemen, called in Ar. jjIj or ij'^. (probably =^j-»j), then taken for the territory of Yemen generally JoEi, 4, 6, adduced along with NSi^ 4, 8 and yi (=TT=J) and bTN (an old name for the metropolis of Yemen Sanaa) Ez. 27, 19. Deriv. '^iV (pi. D'^iT^) a patronym. m. from iTi Jo. 4, 6. 'ITT ' IP (not used) intr. 1. to be soft, of a mass, hence like rtU I. (to U"'!;) to be clammy, viscous, of a mass of dung (the Arab. j-JI [il^] has the same meaning taken figurat.); deriv. the noun ^V (see aits). — 2. Figurat. as in the Arab, stem, to be lax, soft, weak, and there- fore to be tender, mild, spoken of the dove. Deriv. TOV 1 and 2. JT IT 1 (constr. "iv) m. mud, dung, swamp, cogn. in sense with a"'£i; 'jvrt D'^U com- bined Ps. 40, 3 dung of mire, i. e. dirty slime, an intensifying of the simple idea, like pNi^ 'nia ib., ""ba rinti Is. 38, 17; !lblS)3 ]V swamp of the depth, i. e. deep swamp Ps. 69, 3. The stem of this noun is ■j]"' in the meaning just given; but others derive it from y\'<, and regard yi'' as lengthened out of pv in the sense of trodden down, bruised, which is less appropriate, because Ip is thought of as liq^uid. ]1^ (i. e. y^ ; not used) tr. to press the vine, to tread or to press out the grapes. The organic root y is identical with that in Xf', yy-i (interchanging Yodaxii. Gimel). According to this etymology one might take the noun y^^ to mean apressed or trodden thing, if such were not too general, and if it were not improbable that the word should have come to extra- Semitic peoples under that name. mDi"! (see -in'') n.p. m. 2 Sam. 13, 3; Jer. 35, 6. ."I3i'' (pi. b'>i'f^; constr. •'ii"') f. 1. (from )V 2, conseq;. formed out of nsr) prop. njv 558 nb^vv a tender, mild bird, therefore the dove Gen. 8, 8, the dove being also called among the Eomans avis Cytheriaca; '■'-^a a young dove Lev. 12, 6, pi. 'i "'ia 12, 3. The dove is an emblem of purity and innocence Song op Sol. 1,15; 4, 1 ; 5, 12 , is used on account of its loveli- ness and mildness as an epithet for dear, beautiful, beloved 5,2; 6,9, and is conceived of generally as full of sim- plicity Hos. 7, 11 (comp. Matth. 10,16), as cooing with dull and melancholy tones (nart, 5fl3, nn^) Is. 38, 14;_Nah. 2,8; Ez. 7, 16, and as flying (juickly, like (the clouds) homewards to the nia'lN Is. 60,8; Ps. 55, 7; Hos. 11, 11. It "'is said of the wild dove that it flies shyly to the mountains Ez. 7, 16, directs its course by its wings ('nas?) to far distant parts in order to settle there Ps. 55, 7 ; and makes its nest in the hidden clefts of rocks Song op Sol. 2, 14, or on the margins of yawning precipices Jbr. 48, 28. niv ''B53 the wings of a dove Pb. 68, 14, a symbol of the timid and fleeing wings of an army (see !r]53). Hence too symbolically tJie timid, fugitive Jewish people, specially so in an old poem tJil^ITi dbjS nv (Ps. 56, 1), which words should be read laj-pn^M bs nsi'' (dove of God from the far sea), after which poem the 56*'^ psalm was sung. — 2. n. p. of a prophet 2 Kings 14, 25 ; Jon. 1, 1. — 3. (only in sing, and that from TtiV, from )y) f. violence, a tram- pling down, oppression, nai^ln 'ji'^rj wrath of down-treading, i. e. oppressive or cruel wrath Jer. 25, 38, translated by the LXX great, violent; '»fi a'lh sword of violence, i. e. the murderous sword 46, 16 ; 50, 16, where the LXX read Tiil'Ti a'nn and translate fiaiaiQa EXlfjviXJi, ^^ they explained the chapter of Alexander's march, at whose approach the Persians cleared away in the hasty flight of baa and D^'lSa "before the Greek sword" (Curt. 4^ 7; Arr. 3, 1, 16). InffiVrt T'^rt Zeph. 3, 1 fiiVil is in apposition and = ri5i»lri Tiy, spoken of rtlS^i. In every case the acceptation of rtai'^ as a part. fem. should be rejected on account of Jer. 25, 38. pDi-i or pr {pi. 'D-^'^.'y;, constr. ■')?.5'i;', prop, a part, of pJ"') m. 1. a sucking babe, who becomes a PIJpS Is. 11, 8, coupled with VbiS* (which see) Ps. 8, 3 , Lament. 2, 11, 'opposed to na''to ilJ-'N Deut. 32, 25, in full form Dinfi piV Jo. 2, 16. — 2. a young twig, a shoot, a sucker, as it were, of a tree Is. 53, 2, opposed to llJ'lizS (comp. Greek f^oaxog and xoQog). Usual, however, in this meaning is rjSai'' (with suff. iri)55i;i; pi. with suf. Vnipsv) /. same as piV 2: twig, shoot, Ez. 17, 22, where piV should be sup- plied to '^'l (a tender twig) ; a branch Hos. 14, 7; bs* '■' ilNK"' the shoot runs over a thing Job 8, 16; a sprout 14, 7; a bough Ps. 80, 12. inai'l' (see -in^) n.p.m. IChr. 2, 32, Neh. 12, 11, for which occur also 'jSfTi'' or ISO'iSl?, Greek 'lawa&av (Ton. 5, 13). Dpi'' (a noun from the fut. Kal of £]D'i; increaser, viz. Jah is; comp. ClD"'bN, iTiSDii) n. p. m. Gen. 30, 24 (where the name is interpreted) ; 30, 23 (where the name is derived from tiDN); chs. 37-50. Instead of it there is in Ps.81,6 tjOin^, the !i of the Hif. being also in fut. retain- ed in Mniln^(Ps. 45,18), ?iiaiin^(116,6), and b"'b"'lr7^ (Is. 52, 5). As his two sons Ephraim and Mana^seh were the heads of separate tribes, both together were also called t|Dii, or in full form rtaM, "ija, "i n''ja 2 Sam. 19, 21. And as they were the leading tribes in the kingdom of Israel, ClDi'' also meant the kingdom of the ten tribes Am. 5, 6; Zbch. 10, 6. More rarely does it mean the whole nation of Israel Ps. 80, 2, Am. 5, 15, for which in Ps. 77, 16 riDVI aJ55>i "^Da . ' Ij" ! 'i-:r I" : IS put. C]DTi does not appear as a proper name belonging to others, till a later period of the language, Ezr. 10, 42; Neh.12,14; 1 Chr. 25, 2, fT'Spi'^ {Jah is increaser) n. p. m. Ezr^S, 10. !nb!!*3?i']i (compounded of rtbs^ and Wi''"fut. Hif. of W; El is snatcher; IVV 559 yn^r comp. bsW, bN''y, and see too inbN r p. .1 f . ...» ,T _; page 93) «. p. m. 1 Chr. 12, 7. ' ^3Ji'l (Fd w powerful; iy from ni5> ■wliich see) n. p. m. Neh. 11, 7. nS'i'' see !ibis»i\ ;■■■ IT ■• I niyV {Y6 is help) n. p. m. 1 Chs. 12, 6; comp. IJ^-'bijt. ''^■'^'i'' see "i5iS>i''bN. I- "I r ■• I : V UJS'i'^ (Fd w hastener to, see lUW I.) n. p."m. 1 Chr. 7, 8; 27, 28. pISi'; (see -iJi^) re. p. m. Ezr. 3, 2. In Ben-Sira 49, 12, 4 Ezr. 5, 5, and in the LXX, the form was p'l^'i'' 'IfoctSex. plSi^ see piili\ nSi'' or lit'' (with suif. i^Sti, 15'na'': plur. C^Sij', constr. iV; a participial noun from 'il£i) m. 1. prop, fashioner, former, hence a potter, who treads clay Is. 41, 25 (U-^U DM'n), works in loam (iU'nn, 'nnn) 29, 16; '45, 9; 64, 7; Jbr. 18, 4; 19, 1, and makes earthen vessels 2 Sam. 17, 28; Ps. 2, 9. Qi'niSi^ bas Is. 30, 14 pitcher of the potter, i. e. an earthen pitcher. D'^'nai^ri 1 Chr. 4, 23 is the designation of a corporation of potters, who sprung from the tribe of Judah, from Siblli, and are spoken of as the inhabitants of Dttb (anb '^aiB'' viv V" vw -. : I should be read there for Dfib "'aiai, ac- cording to the Midrash on Bath ch. 1, with which opinion agrees El. Wilna in his commentary on Chronicles), a city of Judah (whence perhaps the Gentile ■'anb 1 Chr. 20, 5), into which came also the inhabitants of the cities of Ju- dah D'^SUi and r\^-ii (see Josh. 15, 36, r T : IT": '' ' ' 1 Chr. 12, 4), for the purpose of working for the king. — 2. a former of the bOS Is. 44, 9, Hab. 2, 18, i. e. a statuary. It is applied to a carver in wood (the verb is also used of forming in metals). — 3. a creator, i. e. former, spoken of God, and therefore coupled with iS'n'a Jer. 10, 16, Am. 4,13, and so used generally without regard to the form or figure of what is created. — 4. Eigurat. a framer, one who forms and creates in his mind, spoken of men Ps. 94, 20, or of God Jer. 18, 11. — 5. = 11tiN same as iai» (if we should not read 'nSi''), treasure, Zech.11, 13, particularly of the temple, where there was such (1 Kjngs 14, 26 ; comp. Mark 12, 41 seq.). ISi'' see 'litix n'^pi'' (a noun developed out of the fut. Hif. into a proper name, the Hif. D''15iM, fut. Q'^iJI'', being formed in the Aramaean manner; a setter up, viz. Y& is) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 4, 22. The later pro- nunciation of Qi'lV ('/capf/ftLtTKB 3, 29) is analogous, earlier D^i"'. nil see TTiX I ITT mi^ (harvest-bom) n.p.m.'EzR,2,18, for which Neh. 7,24 tj'^'prt; comp. ipir mi'' (part, of rTTi n. i. e. from fTin IP ^^ ITT ITT = !lTl, the cognate stem NT' being ac- tually interchanged with JlTl Prov.11, 25) m. the fructifying seed-rain, the au- tumnal rain, different from ^pbM Dbut. 11, 14; Jer. 5, 24. I'li'i (same as fi'nii) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 5, 13. D'^'li'' see 'a'^\ Dli'' (see Q'niM';) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 26, 2b,'I(oqdii Matxh." 1, 8; 2 Sam. 8, 10, for which 1 Chr. 18, 10 has Dli^n (an ' IT -: ^ interchange between "i"' and 'li'iii, see ^?t''5)- ion Dtlbl'' (grace is returned) n.p. m. of a son of Zerubbabel 1 Chr. 3, 20, the hopes and consolations of the returning Israelites being mirrored in the names of his other sons also. !T'?tai'' (Jah causes to dwell; ^^av is fut." Hif.' of ntiS;) n.p. m. 1 Chr. 4, 35. tV^V (76 is a gift; till: = iffl) n.p. m. 1 Chr. 4, 35. H'^TlIJi'' ( Y6 is correspondence, i. e. is self-satisfying; tT'll!? a noun from Wli^, the proper names •i'lTB^ and iilffi^ coming from the same stem also) n.p.m.lOsR.' 11, 46. yilJi'^ ('Jaa^S Matth. 13, 55; Ldkb 3, 29) see ?1125.1. ^CJi^l") 560 b^^i^v I3Sa5ii (see. -in-') n.p. m. 1 Chr. 11, 43; 16, 24. Onr {Yd is perfect; comp. Ps. 18, 26 31) n. ^. OT. Judges 9, 5 7; 2 Kings 15, 32-38 ; in tte LXX and N. Test. (Matth. 1, 9) 'Itad&ai^, which seems to imply a form Br"'V. ITT I -\r\V see ini. I" r mri"' see n'nn\ V re vltf T'^, V see Titi. f' r ITT 'D.V\ (Peal not used) Aram, to flee from^ to slip out of, to escape, danger; Ar. (_}•«; the same. Hence the further Shafel-form iT-iisS'. See aT«5. I" ■- r : iW (not tised) intr. same as ifiTi II. ITT ^ ' ITT (see '')' to be collected, to be ttnited, to join, i. e. to betake oneself to the pro- tection of a person; Ar. ^gv. the same. Derivative ^'N"'r (El is the uniting = trir.; ''t^ a nonn from nti) n. p. m. 1 Che. 12, 3. ITT-' ^ ' n-T"! see n^r. n • IT ■ • IT'' see bS'iir r ! I" • : n*P {Jah unites or assembles; W^ from ^:t3 II. = riTi) re. p. m. Ezk. 10, 25 : ITT ITT"' *■ ' ' comp. for the appellative meaning 'bNaaijj, bssajs &c. fP (from TIT III.; shining, viz. Jah is) n. p. m. 1 Chb. 27, 31 ; comp. flT'^T. HN"'!?;'; (= !^|';V!^ -^a^ is a deliverer; from Nbj or Tibi = 'nbl) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 8,18. D1^ a stem adopted for <|MT- Cfor TOP IT ■» I :iT \ II from dMT) Gen. 11, 6, see D?3t. I-T' ' ' |-, )V (not used) tr. same as 1TN I. (see page 51); deriv. in {constr. in) in the proper names iTiST, ?Mi-. * ^ IT :- : ' IT ^TJ (con««r. 1,17), see '\i\ rr^DT'; (either contracted from iT'STN^, or from "ir; = ITN I. with the meaning "to weigh, to determine", and so ']t; is con- struct of ITJ; Jah is determiner)' n. p.m. Jer. 42, 1, elsewhere W3tn\ IT : — ;i" W3T'; (the same) n.p. m. Jer. 40, 8, instead 6f which occurs elsewhere !T'5T\ it:-;, ]iV (not used) intr. same as 3»t (SIt) U. to run, to trickle, to drop, to drop out; hence figurat. to sweat'; comp. Ar. &\l (to run, to flow) and Ethiopio, the same, = c(ii and ctXJ (to flow out). The stem is connected with 'rjD"', "rjps, p^"", flTi,- the y initial sound being frequently in- terchanged with the initial n elsewhere. The organic root ^T-J lies also in Vi II. ; and 3»T is usual for it in Aramaean. Derivative yV m. same as Ti'SI sweat, Ez.44,ig -17 _ IT" ' ' they shall not gird themselves with sweat, i. e. where they are easily exposed to sweat (Targ., Talm.), or while they sweat (Aquila, Symm., Jerome), or so warmly that they shall sweat (perspiration being considered as unseemly in holy persons). nT?"; (a native, see TCyi) n.p. m. same as n^TN (1 Kings 5, 11) or TTnr. (Gbn. 38, 30; 46, 12), the head of a family in the tribe of Judah; hence tTnPrt the Izrdhite, one belonging to the fainily of TTiT 1 Chr. 27, 8. In this form the fifth of David's twelve heroes is designated, as being descended from Izrah; the eighth and tenth (■'Ti'iTb) being likewise traced back to the same head of the family, 1 Chr. 27, 11 13. The right name of this princely leader (ito) Was nwaia (which see) or nia«5 (=riina«)) or n^iB (=nnaTa) son of Agee (Si^-fa) . of the placelhW (i^-jrt), or ^'15 (^'T^'n^) or 1i"i5 (■"1115'^); according to another account of ihti (which see) 1 Chk. 11, 27; 2 Sam. 23; 25. {T'tt'lIP (Jah is appearing) n. p. m. ICiiV. 7/3; Neh. 12,42. ynr (from SpT I.; planter, founder) m. only in the proper name bN5*'nT'' or bN?:-. btt^Pnt'] or b85|- (El is founder, see »pr; with a of motion tibNS") 1. n. p. of a city in the tribe of Issachar Josh. 19, 18, though belonging to Manasseh 17, 16 (as Eusebius and Jerome akeady b^v^^^ 561 liT riglitly observe), in the north of Palestine, where the Israelite king Ahab (1 Kings 18, 45 46; 21, 1; comp. 21, 18) had his favourite place of residence, and which Jehu made his dwelling place altogether (2 Kings chs. 9 and 10). Both drew on themselves there the guilt of shedding much blood (the latter by murdering Ahaziah and his brothers 2 Kings 9, '27; 10, 14, and by the other massacre which he caused there 10,11), to which Hos. 1, 4 alludes in '^ la'i. This blood- guiltiness, as Hos. 1, 5 prophesies, was to be avenged in the plain of biSS'lP by a decisive day of slaughter ('■; DV), on which the kingdom of Israel was to be exterminated 2, 2 ; as Naboth's blood was formerly avenged there 2 Kings 9, 25 26. The plain, in which the city of Jezreel lay, is called '1 pa» JosH.17,16, Judges 6, 33, Hos. 1, 5; in the Apocrypha and Josephus TO fisya nediov 'EadQijXav (Ju- dith 1, 8), or simply to nsdiov fidja (1 Maco. 12, 49); but the district be- longing to the city was styled '"] pVri 2 Kings 9, 10 36 37; for which"; bn occurs once 1 Kings 21, 23 (bn=pbn. according to all the versions). In other places 'V alone also denotes a great ter- ritory lying around the city of Jezreel 2 Sam. 2, 9, mentioned along with 'iS'b.^ , Tim (see page 158), D^pDN, Vi?;?l'as a chief one of the places that held to the dynasty of Saul; or also named with ■ijiyri (now Taanak on the south- eastern slope of mount Carmel), iia?3 (now el-Legtln, but a little to the north- west of the preceding), and '^Ni^ rr^Si (now Beisan, where the plain of Jez- reel opens into the Jordan-valley) &c. 1 Kings 4, 12. At a later period it was even a designation of the kingdom of the ten tribes generally Hos. 2, 24; and accordingly this prophet calls his son symbolically Jezreel 1, 4, alluding to the appellative meaning 2, 25; for it was never the name of a person; 'P in 1 Che. 4, 3 as well as dUiy, bNliS &c. bemg nothiug else but names of places. According to Eusebius, Jezreel lay be- tween Legio (i'^an) and Scythopolis {1NB5 IT'S!); and the mountain of y'sbs was also in its vicinity from which a fountain {•]';s) reached to the city 1 Sam. 29, 1, on which lay also the town -yy 111. This fountain was also called -aiD l^y Tubania (.William of Tyre 22, 26). At the present day traces of this city are found in Zerin or Serin from Seril (Eobinson III. pp. 162. 173. 227 seq.), to which the founder of the sect Serini belonged. — Gentile m. ■'bNS'ir 1 Kings 21, 1, fern. n'^bNy'nn or n-''Ss- 1 Sam. 27, 3; 30, 5. — 2." n. p. of a city in Judah Josn. 15, 56. Nan;: (formed out of the Hif. of Nan I.; protector) m. only in the proper name NatT'blS. IT : - : V "in'' (fut. itT') intr. to he united, to he bound together, with one, 'B riN Is. 14, 20; to associate oneself, to attach oneself, to one, with a Gen. 49, 6, i. e. to par- ticipate in a thing; conseq. only a col- lateral form of iriN , which is a denom. r T ' ■_ from iriN; Ar. (X^5> '^i *^® same; in Phenic. 1HN (hence ntiN a for one, Mass. T V ^ TV;' 3), its denomin. ItiN and its collateral form ^'n'< also existing; and from the latter come '^f\2 {together with, hesides, Plaut. Poen. V. 1, 3) and d'lm (una cum, ib. m., act. V. sc. 3 v. 22), in;, 'Isovd (Philo Bybl. 42 Orell.) = Hebrew T^n^ fiovoysvtjg. Deriv. Itl^, llrt^ and niini, T'fT', mTT', with the proper IT : -' I't' IT • :' ^ '^ name iin^- Pih. fiy] {imp. tni) *" vnite, i. e. to col- lect, ab Ps. 86,11 ; in modem Hebr. often meaning, to express or recognise one- ness, to unite, from which comes 'Tin> Tij'i {pause Ih'') m. 1. suhst. communion, oneness, 1 Che. 12, 177 will have towards you a heart for oneness, i. e.-I will have one heart with you (inN-ib 12, 38). — 2. adv. conjointly, together, with one an- other, junctim, a) of united action Ps. 2,2; 31,14, to the exclusion of others, with the personal pronoun: only we, you, they together, Ezra 4, 3; coupled with Snbi to contend (1 Sam. 17, 10), 'osm to piead (Is. 43, 26), "IMS' to step forth into debate (Is. 50, 8), it expresses mu- 36 "in"" 562 n^pin^ tual and hostile action; while iu other places, joined with N^anrt Job 16, 10, )^ 38, 7, lanbnlri Ps. ll, 8 &c. it de- notes community of action, b) of place or persons: una, together, in one place, 1 Sam. 11, 11; 2 Sam. 10, 15. '^2 Q.^ Ps. 133, 1 is probably nothing but a strengthening of the idea, c) of time: at the same time, simul Job 6, 2, or re- ferring to place and time at once 2 Sam. 21, 9. d) it expresses the closer union of two persons Ps. 49, 3 (parall. D3 - Da) or agencies Is. 42, 14; 44, 11; Ps. 40, 15 ; Latin pariter. e) it denotes all in- dividual things put together in one, the comprehension of a whole, and is therefore to be translated by entirely, all ■together, Ps. 62, 10; 74, 8; Job 40, 13; in this sense withb3 34,15, or even for "bb 38, 7 ; with a negative (4«b in;;) none -Hos. 11, 7; S-iiD ini Job 10, 8 all to- gether round about, i. e. totally, without aught being wanting. Prom this mean- ing has arisen the rare one: wholly, un- hurt, unscathed, Ps. 141, 10 (the wicked may fall into its [the ns's] nooses) / re- main unscathed, I escape continually. ^^'' see min. - r IT T 'rn'' see iriiin\ vi-.- it: :v "nn^ (in three later passages Vlti; Jek?46, 12 21 and 49, 3, as if i- were the suff. pi. ; but the proper form is "nxyi = ilW from in"' , which is an old accu- sative form, besides D-; d- also exist- ing as such a form together with !^-, used adverbially) adv. together, with one another, uni,, but by virtue of its signification it is only applied to a number Dbut. 33, 17, or with verbs in the plural 2 Sam. 2, 16. As an adv. it refers also to verbs or pronouns of the 1 pi. masc. Is. 41, 1, Ps. 34, 4, or fern. 1 Kings 3, 18, or to the 2 pers. pi. Is. "45, 20, or to nouns with a collective idea Ex. 19, 8, Is. 40, 5, where hb pre- cedes in order to strengthen tlie ex- •pression. The meanings are similar to those of in;, and express united action, together, all together. Is. 11,14, Ps. 34, 4; therefore it is joined to reciprocal verbs (e. g. ysis, 1?i5 &c.) Ps. 55, 16; Job 2, 11; Is. 41, 1; together, with one an- other, Gen. 13, 6; 22,6; Judges 19,6; Josh. 9,2; at the same time, simul Is. 1, 31; Ps. 4, 9; in like manner, pari modo 1 Sam. 30, 24; Dbut. 12, 22; as well.. . as also, pariter ac Jer. 6, 12; entirely, embracing a number of single things in one Jer. 5,5, Job 24, 17, and so after bip Is. 22, 3; or bs is omitted Is. 10, 8; Ps. 37, 38. Phenic. tJin'' the same. ' IT : - 'vltl'^ (out of ^iin^; union, viz. of El) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 5, 14; comp. b^iin;, Win"!; see linx. IT : : V 7 I ■• bNl''^n;] (compounded of bN and in;;; union of Et) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 5, 24; see 'nrw W^nn' (the same) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 24, 20V27, 30; comp. b{>5''in\ Itl."; comes from ini = in\ viv -r 51511'; see bNl!n\ '^15') (-^^ ^ *^* animating; lirin^ from n-nn [froiQ fiin I.] = n^n) n. p. m. 2 Chr. IT • ■■ IT T J IT • '^ ^ 29, 14 Ktib. !l|n''_ see jN'^Ttl"' (El is revealer; tlin"' is a I" • -:i- IV— ;i- noun from the fut. Hif of tiTH; comp. the proper names bsm , bN"'Tn , mim , X a. I" T -: ' I" • -: ' ITT -: ' 11".. I^tn) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 12, 4; 16, 6; 23,' 19; '2 Chr. 20, 14; EzR. 8, 5; see !n"'Tn\ it: :- n'^Til^ (Jah is a revealer) n.p. m. Ezr. 10,15V' prn'' see bNptn\ bi<)?.Tn"; (outof bN-pWJSZ is mighty, as ^TipTri''" arose out of Ri-pTni; the IT'' : • : IT ' — .•;!»' Syrian, Greek and Latin translators in forming the name followed the model bi«Ji.);>Tn El is strength) «. p. of the great priestly prophet, who lived and pro- phesied in Mesopotamia, among the Jewish exiles, at the river Chaboras Ez. 1, 3; 24,24. The word also occurs as a proper name masc in 1 Chr. 24, 16. Sl^jprn'; (see bN;i5.Tn:) n. p. m. Hos. 1, 1, Mic. 1, 1 ; for which in other places stands irt';)5'rn'; Is. 1, 1, or iTjjm 2 Kings 18,1 10; Ezr. 2, 16. " " in^pin> 563 i^n^ IJT'PTn'] (the same) n. p. m. 2 Chr. 28, 12; is/l, 1. The fonn 'E^sxt'ag is developed after ST'iSTH. "iTrr^ see 1" : - JTlTn'' (out of Ri '-im'^Jah is thePro- IT" ; - *• IT I" : - tecting, or /aA is the home-bringer, from Itn I.) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 9, 12 ; for which Neh. 11, 13 has ■'THN (which see). irr^ see riTi. • re IT T ^^T'1 (^^ '** t^e Living; comp. '^ '^'n) n. p. m. 1' Chr. 15, 18, for which 15, 24 has rt^ni; 27,32; 2 Chr. 21, 2; 29,14, where the K'tib has hH'.W; 35, 8; Ezr. 8, 9. The abridged form is bsiltl (which see). Fair. ibt«itT' 1 Chr. 26, 21. ,. ^ vr I- • :' -^ ' jT • : ' 1. only, of 11 Gen. 22, 2, but also a subst. without 13, are oreZy sora, 'i bas Jer. 6, 26 and Am. 8, 10 mourning for an only son, i. e. great mourning; in Zech. 12, 10 I'ln'' refers to the mourning for ^1?].. Sometimes an only beloved Prov. 4, 3, LXX ayanajisvog. Fern. nT'tl^ JuDaES 11, 34 referring to na. — 2. alone, forsaken, unfortunate, coupled with iS» Ps. 25, 16, comp. 27, 10; and to this meaning belongs the pi. Di"i''n; Ps. 68, T~ solitary, wandering, left behind (in campaigns); parallel Qi'ilDN. (prisoners of war). iTT"'!!'] fern. prop, the only, the best, what cannot be replaced, unicum, i. e. thelife,the somZ, Ps.22,21; 35,17; comp. lias. I T n* n ■] (Jah is the Living) n.p.m.l Chr. 15, 24, for which bs'^ri^ stands in 15, 18. P^rr^ (extended from bli"') adj. m. hoping, trusting, Lament. 3, 26. ?n^ I. (Kal not used) intr. same as bn (bin) 5 to be intent upon something, to wait for, to hope, to trust, to bear; cognate in sense Ji-l)?. Deriv. the adj. b"'lri'' ; perhaps too hlV in the proper name bisbiT'; if it be not derived from Inbn IT. I" : : - ' IT T Nif. bniS (3 fern. hbtTiJ; fut. bn", apoc. bnii, out of bn^l'', bn^v to wait Gen. 8, 12; 1 Sam. 13, 8 (according to the K'tib); to be kept in suspense Ez. 19, 5. Perhaps the adoption of a Nifal form should be entirely discarded; for bn"'''! Gen. 8, 12 should either be read by the analogy of 8, 10 bn'">i (fut. Hif. of bin), where in the unpointed text the dageshed Tod was compensated by duplication (comp. rT'-'NT' Jer. 37, 13 for rr^isn^); or bn"i»1 after the form of p5''ni"(l Sam. 1, 23, which is the fut. Hif"); or lastly bpisi after the form yp/ni (fut. Kal) Gen. 28, 16; as also fito'iii Gen. 24, 33 and 50, 26, !ini!5iN1 Judges 12, 3 should either be expressed Dfe'i^J, MMfe'^NI (fut. Hif. of Qto;) or atoi'^i, nati'^Ni. As for nbnis Ez. 19, - r-' T : r T it-: i ' 5, either bni should be taken here as = ' rT ilbni., which suits liN ; or with the LXX IT T ' |-T ' the reading ought to be inb n^i. The former is preferable. Pih. bn^ (3 pi. ibn'j., in pause ibp';, with Dagesh forte aifter the accented vowel in the liquid consonants. Job 29, 21, asinlbin,15n5,naiia; part.hn-^'a; ' i"T ' itt' T IT ' -f^ r— : ' imp. bnr, fut. bn::^ , MbniN, 3^Z.iibn:;^) 1. to wait, to long for, a thing with 'b Is. 42,4; to hope in (bsj) a thing 51,5; frequent in the psalms, e. g. in God Ps. 31,35; 130,7, his goodness 33,18, his judicial procedure 119, 43, his pro- mise 119, 74; seldom absol. 71,14; Mic. 5, 6; to j^afi/b^ Job 30, 26. — 2. to con- tinue, to persevere, to be patient, there- fore absol. Job 6, 11, parall. i:JS5 '^'''1!!?.^. = C|N 'TJ'^'iSti (to be patient), which sense it probably has in 13, 15: behold, he slays me, I will not be patient any more, which suits the context; 14, 14 all the time of my service will I wait. — 3. Cau- sat. to cause to hope, to excite hope, to console, with bs of the thing and the accus. of the person Ps. 119, 49 ; follow- ed by the infin. with b Ez. 13, 6. Hif. b-inin {fut. binii, b-^nii*, cohort. iib'^niN, bnin, apoc. bni^ii K'ri) to wait, to tarry, absol. 1 Sam. lO, 8; 13, 8 K'ri; to hope, absol. Lament. 3, 21, but usually with b for a thing Job 32, 11; 2 Kings 6, 33"; to wait for Job 32, 16. In Jer. 4, 19 K'ri and 2 Sam. 18, 14 36* ^n> 564 Ji'n^ MbiniN stands for rtb-^nNi (fut. Hif. of bin) in the sense of, to quake, to tremble, and does not, therefore, belong to our verb. Along with the Hifil form b''niH another may have existed, viz. b'^tl'^n; by which the K'tib brT"! 1 Sam. 13, "s is to be explained. Deriv. rbnin. The stem bnj is connected in its organic root (bp-j) with bti (biri), and also with bS) (bl3); as t!be Arab. Jj 5 (I. rV.) to trust is connected with bn\ ITT' II. = Thn I. see bni I. Nif. rT ITT i-t bspri^ {El is pacifier i from bm out of rtbw, anounfrom the fut. Hif. of'nbnll., '• v. 1 . IT T ' or trom 35^ continuance, eternity, and hi) n.p. m.'GEN. 46, 14; Patron, ''bsbni Num. 26, 26. '""" •l^nil see bNbri\ Dnj (fut. tipi = dp''7, but for which occur also dm, njMn-; = ani';, WKin"'';; ou the contrary IJpVij., ''snani belong to Pihel) intr. same as'dn, fiaVl III., Dtl (dm) to he warm, to have or feel warmth 1 Kings 1, 1; Eccles. 4, 11; to he hot, hailing, warm, Ez. 24, 11; figurat. (of the heat of feeling) to he excited Dbut. 19, Q; to he in the rut, to conceive Gen. 30, 38, where the old general form ns-'; is used for the feminine, as 1 Sam. ►j to be hot, to rut. All 6, 12. Ar. jvi ^ the forms here reckoned as belonging to dpj may also be refeiTed to dan (which see). ' Pih. dpi (3 pers. fern. Munj^ Ps.51,7, 3 p. pi. i7|in;;. for =iMn;i,"as%'nnN for TTIN from 'npN; inf. constr. dn!;','''with ■*«/• S^ll?!?;:) '0 *« very warm, hot, to he in the rut, stronger than Kal; hence applied to the begetting of sheep Gen. 30, 39 41; 31, 10, and to the conception of woman Ps. 51, 7. These forms, how- ever, may also be referred to d?3n. "y^l^tyi (from "nan) m. the name of an animal belonging to the hart-species, constituting with b»N and 145? the com- monest game of Palestine Deut. 14, 5; 1 Kings 5, 3 ; LXX nvyaqyog, Vulg. hu- halus; probably a species of deer of a red colour, like the buck; Ar. ^^«^. *')yn> (from nan I. in Hif.; protect- ing, viz. Jah is) n. p. m. 1 Che. 7, 2. in'' see Wn. I - r IT T ^n^ (not used) intr. to he bare, naked, of the feet, connected in its organic root tjp-J with tjn, and with that in Ijp-D, tjp'ld; Ar, ^^to. "VIH. to uncover oneself; Syr. the same; Targ. tin;;. Pa. rip:, Ithpa. t\p1T^^ the same'. ' The fundamental signification proceeds from the idea , to be rubbed off, peeled off. Hence 5]n'' adj. m. hare, naked, of the feet, hare-footed, 2 Sam. 15, 30, along with ti'qs (applied to the body) Is. 20, 2 3, and i[^^^t\ (applied to the pudenda) 20, 4; but also as a subst. and so coupled with a femin. noun Jbe. 2, 25, like ISNffl Is. 37, 29. bSSri^ {El is an apportioner; Sn^ is from Iri^n^, a noun from the fut. Hif. of !15£n in the sense of pbn) n. p. m. Gen. 46, 24; for which IChe. 7^,13 has bN"'i:n\ PaiT-on^OT. ■'bNKm Num. 26, 48. '" ' '' nSri'' see Vtw T : r ' -r nSOl see bj«an\ bx''2n'' (= biJJiril) n. p. m. 1 Che. 7, 13. ■ ' 1 p. fut. 'npN Gen. 32, 5 for iniJij) intr. to delay, same as IpN, to which also the two forms in^^ and ins may be refer- red; though the stem ini (ini) may have existed in Semitic, as appears from the Maltese wachar. Hif. T^niM, only fut. apoc. "inri 2 Sam. 20, 5 K'ri; it is better, however, to read it as the future Kal ini'' (like tpi'' from TpN), and so refer it' to ^8. ■^n; see rtin. ITT LiTlJ (Kal not used) intr. to sprout, to shoot forth, to grow, of plants, com; ^ry 565 2D^ figurat. of men, to arise or descend from, prop, to be born or begotten; cognate in sense with lb '' (comp. Hithp.) ; Aram. Dn\ Deriv. ian\ Hithp. ton^nti (inf. constr. ton;;nrt, ■with suff. latori^rilri) same as "i^^nn (Num. 1, 18), to announce oneself according to de- scent, origin, family (nnbinb Gen. 10,32), to be registered or to cause oneself to be en- rolled in a niibin -ISD (see Gen. 5, 1). At a later period of the language i25n;;nrt was used for iV^nti. Passively, to be enrolled according to descent Ezb. 8, 3, e. g. D'^IStb (according to males, in the male line) 2 Che. 31, 16, fully ninbinb '::nri 1 Chr. 5, 7 ; 7, 9 ; but also absolut. to be enrolled genealogically 1 Qa&.b,Vl \ 9,1. TOmnrib 1 Chr. 5, 1 to be registered genealogically e. g. !i"ibab (according to the rank of the first-bom); Nbh. 7, 5 in order to be registered; 2 Chr. 31, 19 and to every one who was registered ^UVin for ri TaJN.) amxing the Levites. ton^rirt (inf constr.) also as a noun expressing an act , en- rolment, registration (according to genea- logical descent) 2 Chr. 31, 17; concr. the register, 1 Chr. 4, 33 and their genealogi- cal register was to them, i. e. they had their own; 1 Chr. 7, 5 their register in relation to all, i. e. the sum total of the enrolled; 7, 7; 7, 40 and their list is according to the army (NSSa), i. e. according to what they contribute to the army setting out; 9, 22 their register is in their villages. d''ioiT'n53rt ana Ezr. 2, 62 and Neh. 7, 64 the genealogical table, for which tonirt -\S0 occurs 7, 5. The stem tohi is identical with the Targ. Dn^ (in a figurat. sense), Arab. (jw^, 'y^ (interchanging 3 and '^) to spring, to descend from (whence sL^ sprout, origin, root); and the organic root Vin-1 is also found in OITIB (to - T I- T ^ shoot forth out of the root- stock), TZJn'D (which see), and others. In Syriac ^-=i-^ to sprout, to grow (whence hO't^ =ton;;), is cognate with it in sense, and the stem shreb is connected with the Hebrew t^\i^ to shoot up high Ps. 122, 6, £)bn to sprout, to grow, to grow after Ps. 90,5 (comp. Uisu» sprout, Nsbn pasture). ton 5 "»• prop, descent, lineage, '»!! 1B0 Nbh. 7, 5 a booh in which descent is re- gistered, therefore like nibin race, fa- mily, stem, Targ. Dn;; the same. PPl^ (same as the proper name Tfm = revival, comfort, viz. Jah is) n. p. m. of a descendant of Judah , whose families and offshoots dwelt in tiS^lt 1 Chr. 4, 2 ; also as a Levitical family 6, 5 28; 23, 10; 2 Chr. 34, 12. Any derivation of the word from rtnn, outoffinni, or from IT T ' IV : -' 111"', developed out of iTin^, is unsuitable, nn^ an assumed stem for the proper name nn^ which see. D'', £2'' see rias. p*' r ITT DD''!. (only/M<. au'i'', au\ onceiai'' Nah. 3, 8, which future or imperfect forms may be also referred to ato (which see) though the existence of the stem aai is well founded in other ways) intr. same as aia (see p. 514) prop, to shine, then 1. to he beautiful, lovely, pleasing, of the aspect Esth. 2, 49, with ■'Jiya of the person. — 2. to be cheerful, joyous, and then glad, merry, of sb Judges 18, 20, Euth 3, 7, to be pleasant, 's "'rsa 1 Sam. 18, 5, or 'D ^isb Nbh. 2, 6\ Esth. 5, 14, b Ps. 69,'32," to please, 's "-rya Gen. 34' 18. — 3. to go well with, to receive good, with b of the per- son Gen. 12, 13 ; generally 'in all mean- ings of ai£p, whose supplement it is. Deriv. aa-ia. Hif. a'ia-'n and a-^un, see Hif of aia ' I- .. |. .. 7 I p. 515", where is also to be found the etymological investigation of the present word. Deriv. the proper name bsaaina (which see) = bs ^''au. Eor the organic root aa"i comp. also the Sanskr. div, dup, prop, to shine, then to be cheerful. DCD'' II. (not used) intr. to flow co- piously, of water-brooks, cognate in its organic root aa"'' with i^"2 (which see). Deriv. the proper names iiStp'', naai, and perhaps also fia\ D!D> 566 r\y . nCJ"] (only fut. ma'i.';) Aram. intr. same as Hebr. iu-" I. Eze. 7, 18. nmp'' {rich in rivers, seeaB'' II.) n.p. of a city in Judah (Jerome) 2 Kings 21, 19: prob. identical with TltiV or na^ (out of fiac = nmU''), which is men- ^ IT : i IT : t' ' tioned along with bn'i3 and q^t Josh. 15, 55, and is still preserved in the modern village Jatah, an hour south of Hebron, and half an hour north west of el-Kirmil (ba^s). riDD'' (only with a of motion InnaCJ"') IT : T ^ "^ T IT : T n.p. of a station of the Israelites in the desert Num. 33, 33 , Deut. 10, 7, which was rich in water. The Targ. writes TOa^; and so it is different in form IT : T ' from nau\ IT :t niS'] (also rttaii , see tiSt?;) n. p. of a city in Judah, south of Hebron Josh. 15,55, which was assigned to the priests 21, 16. Comp. BoUns. Pal. II. p. 190. 195. 628. 1^13'^ (from TiDlL, protector, or circle, district) n. p. of the 10^'' son of Ishmael, and so the name of one of the Ishmae- lite races, the Itureans, mentioned along with n'-'SS, 1"ip , bsaiN, diUM &c. Gen. it:' it'" ' I" : : - ' it : • 25, 15; 1 Chr. 1, 31. They carried on an unfortunate war with the two and half Israelite tribes beyond the Jordan, in which they were defeated, as well as the n''N''i:ifi, aiiS and ttjisi 1 Cheon. !■•:-' IT I- T 5, 20. The territory inhabited by this race was likewise called TiU^; and was still known in later times under the name oilturea (Ar. ««Ji.a2>. G'iMr) Luke 3, 1. It lies between Hermon and the pilgrims' road separating it from HaurS,n {RoUns. Palest. III. p. 901 seq^.), east of the sea of Tiberias (JfMreie?-, de rebus Ituraeorum, Hafniae 1824, 4'°). •ji'^ (from I'l;' i. e. Ill, after the form ^in, if the noun be of Semitic origin; constr. li;;, once y^l Song op Sol. 8, 2, with suf. ''5''.^) m. wine, a favourite noble drink Job' 1,13, Is. 22, 13, from Dia5» or d'^SSn Nbh. 13,15, coupled with Idid Lev.' id, 9, ya-^. Peov. 21, 17, aVn 'is! 65, 1; but also hunches of grapes, with yjp. Jee. 40, 10; intoaication Gen. 9, 24. Th'e application of this expression to wine in the -Hebrew language, is very frequent iu prose; in poetry the Ara- maeising Ian (which see) stands. — As to the derivation, a Semitic verb-stem has been adopted for the word, 'Jl'' = ^V to tread the grapes, conseq. )'^^ is trodden out. The Greek ohog, Lat. j;m-um, Ger- man Wein, English wine, Armenian gini &c. are obviously without any clear etymology in the Indo-Germanic; but they are identical with ')^;^, and seem to have come from the East. Ar. ^jJ« a bunch of grapes, Ethiopic (wain) wine. See Ti;! . 5|ii see ne\ '1 P ITT "r^l^ 1 Sam. 4, 13 K'tib, for which the K'ri and several mss. read correctly T^l; and after the latter (according to 4, 8) lyiljil has dropped out, which the LXX express. nU'' (Kal not used) intr. l.tobe strong, firm, powerful, identical with the Arab. «Sj and «AJ (firmus, Stabilis fuit); and the organic root TTd"^ may be also the basis of n? (which see) to be powerful, Ar. iiJL&- (firma est res); the organic roots in H-Stl, in-pti being of cognate import. — 2. Eigurat. to be established, strengthened', i. e. to be proved, justified, a meaning that comes out more clearly in Nif , Hif., Hof. and Hithp. Nif nsiJ (part. f. nnsiS) to act rightly to one another, to dispute with one another, therefore mutually to arrange a dispute Is. 1, 18, to put forth a cause mutually, with a? of the person Job 23, 7 ; or pas- sively, to be set to rights, to have one's right secured (according to mutua,! ar- rangement). Gen. 20, 16 right has been obtained with regard to all. Q'^nba see ' kif. ti-^diH (n'^sH; inf. abs. TO'iH, constr. rv'^in, nj3in; fut. VSi'', ap. TTpv) 1. to decide, between disputants, to judge, with b of the person Is. 2, 4, coupled with rataS'ttS; to determine, 'nifflittSi(with ' I" . I- T ' _ I • : >• equity, impartiality) 11, 4; to appoint b^y 567 b^^ Oen. 24, 14; tl''3'i?3 a mediator, umpire Job 9, 33; 32, 12; with b of the person in. whose favour one decides, and DS of the opponent Job 16, 21 ; to prove, to shew , rts'lrt (reproach) , with bs of the person, i. e. to demonstrate it against one Job 19, 5. — 2. reprove, rebuke Job 40, 2; Amos 5, 10; to punish, chastise, blame, chide, i. e. to set right to one's disadvantage 2 Sam. 7, 14; Ez. 3, 26; Is. 37, 4 &c. Deriv. nnsin and nnsin. ' IT" I -r Sof. tiSIH to be chastened, punished Job. 33, '19. nithp. nSWrt to dispute, with d» of the person, Mic. 6, 2. A comparison of this word with the Ar. ^>5^ to tread, which has heen attempted, does not suit. P'^S"' (constr. b''^^) m. 1. a noun from the fut.Hif.of bl3, the persevering, strong, only in the proper name rTib"'3\ — 2. measure, cognate in sense with m?3 in this signification, 1 Kings 7, 2 6 a thou- sand baths as a measure, 7, 38; 2 Chr. 4, 5. Comp. b^3, Nb'^SM , bi373 in Ara- maean. The stem is bl"3. JT'^'^p'] {Jah is the Strong, Enduring, see ^'^li;) n. p. f. 2 Chr. 26, 3 K'tib, for which the K'ri is Tvhv. But fT'bS"' , IT : T : 'T \ T : and H^b'13^ may also spring from bs'^. I'^ipi {an Establishes, Founder, viz. Jah is) n. p. m. 1. Gen. 46, 10, elsewhere an;;NEH.ll,10;lCHR.24,17.— 2.(«Ae Holding firm. Protecting, prob. referring to God and not to the pillar; the name was merely the dedication which was given to the pillar by means of it) n. p. of one of the two pillars before Solomon's temple 1 Kings 7, 21. That the pillars pS'' and Wa (which see) were symbols of the sun's rays (Bauer, Eelig. des Alien Test. n. 92) or of Saturn {Movers, Kelig. der Phonicier I. 293) or emblems of the Tyrian Hercules {Vathe, Eelig. des Alten Test. I. 324. 336) is improbable. /D'' (3 times bis\ Spers. fern. nbS"|, I T ^ I t' -f^ ' it: it' g^J.m. nbSJ, l^ers. inpause''nbbj, else- where ■'nbsj; 3 pi. lb?';, in pause ibipj; inf. abs. bb'', biS'', constr. rtbbi; used ' t T ' IT' V 1 : ' in Kal only in the perf , while the im- perfect is bon-owed from Hofal, as in ^;j;, fl)? and yTp.; &c. the forms sup- plement one another) intr. prop, to be wide-embracing, roomy (after which b3"'lrt is to be explained), to put together" to hold together, to receive (into self), to contain in self (as is seen from the de- rivative bS'^M) ; therefore figurat. to bear (see Is. 1, 13), i. e. to take up what is laid upon one, a burden ; to refrain Gen. 37, 4, i. e. to hold together the forces or passions of one, in order not to allow them to break out. But usually a) to be able , I can , an auxiliary verb , as it were, followed by an infin. with b Gen. 45, 1, Ex. 40, 35, or also without b 2, 3, Judges 8, 3 ; seldom absolutely Ex.'8, 14, Jon. 1, 13; to dare, Imay, i. e. to be empowered Num. 9, 6 ; and in this general meaning even b'lSrtb bb'^ to be able to hold 2 Chr. 7, 7 , nisiub '1 to bear Gen. . I" T T 36, 7, an idea which lies originally in bb"! alone, b) to prevail, to overcome, i. e. to have power over a thing, with accus. of the object Ps. 13, 5, or with b Ob. 7; Jer. 38, 22. Deriv. bs-i):, bs-'n. . IT * ' IT - The organic root of the stem b3""', agreeably to the development of the significations just given and to the si- milar meaning of the Aram. b!l3 (which see), is closely connected with b3 (bl3, whence '^b'^s); as the nouns blsia, b3"'ln I- . / J IT • ' IT •■ derived from the present stem already set forth. The present root also exists in b5"M , if the latter be adopted as the stem for bs"'!! (which see), Targ. bD'S (to be strong, firm, enduring), Arab. (J^JLa, JXe, Joi (to have a firm sup- port in a thing, to trust in), and in N-bs (iibs). It is possible, however, that bb"'' is connected with bn (bin), Ar. JLa» to be firm, strong, which ap- pears likewise in bti"'' (which see). ITo/'.bsin (only/iii.bai'i) to be enabled, therefore to be able, I can, and in all the meanings of Kal generally (supplement- ing the imperfect of Kal in this manner) Gen. 19, 19, followed by the infin. with b 31, 35 or without b Num. 22, 38, and also absolutely in many modifications, by 568 nb'> e. g. not to prevail Job 31, 23, i. e. to be powerless. Instead of the inf. with or without b, sometimes the accus. of the thing follows Job 42, 2, or a finite verb, in the same number and tense, Lament. 4, 14 thei/ cannot touch; or the accompanying verb stands in an- other number Num. 22, 6 ; or the latter has 1 prefixed Esth. 8, 6. Deriv. the proper names b^V, bsw;; (on the con- trary n'^bS'', 1il">- are to "be referred to bl3). ""- " ^D'; (or bs^ 2per3. Fibs';; part. m. bS"', pi. VbS"'; imperf. bs^, bSFi with i-t' ^ ' r :it' ^ ' R • ' 11 • . . bsi'') Aram. intr. same as Hebrew bS"! r ' It to he able, I can, followed by the infin. with b Dan. 2, 47; 3, 17; 4, 34; to over- come, 'to prevail, with b of the object 7, 21. Af. ba^rt to he Me', I can, i3an. 6, 21 followed by the infin. with b. Of. bsw (Jut. bsv, bSIFi) like the Hebrew 'Hof. Dan. 2, 10; 5,16 K'tib. bb'' (constr. bS'i) m. see JT^bsV 1!Ti-. ^ I T ^ IT : it: I :' IT n'^bS'^ (Jah is theStrong; bs^is abridg- ed from 'bip^ = bis; from bl3, like S3'; in n^5S; out of the fut. Kal of lis) n. p^f. 2 Che. 26, 3 K'ri, for which also occurs IfT'b^'' (the same) n. p. f. 2 Bjngs 15, 2^^ = lb'' (constr. iSi) m. see iT'SD''. rT'33'^ (Jah is Estahlisher) n. p. m. Jeb.' 27,20; 28,4; Esth.2,6; 1Chb.3, 16 sq., for which V^Ji^^ 2 Kings 24, 6 or ")iSJ'i|| were used at an earlier period of the language. Comp. the proper name ')"'3''. W33'; (the same) n. p. m. Jeb. 24,1, for which the abridged form liTiiS is in 22,24. See also IST'SSS, rT'5S3,"rhi, 'Tib\ lb"i," lib: in the proper name llb'^nN.. Nif. ibii (3 p. pi. inlp'iS; part, ibis, pi. Q''lbi3: inf. Hbin, and with the accent drawn back ibllrt; fut. "ib!|i) «o Se bom, VJT • ' ' 1" T "^ ' with the dative of the father Job 1, 2, Gen. 10, 1 &c., but the subject is often omitted Gen. 17, 17, as the object is in Kal. — Peculiarities are the following: a) the subject occurs in this conjugation with ns Gen. 4, 18; 21, 3; 46, 20, as is sometimes the case in Nifal elsewhere. b) The verb stands in the sing, even where it refers to plurality 1 Chk. 2,9; 3, 4. iDI ibis to be born as a poor man EccLEs! 4, 14. Figurat. ibis t3^ Ps. 22, 32 a new and later generation; comp. N'lM a?, li-^inN 1i1. From this tense conies the noun'ilb?!! (='11lb^H) Eccles. I :iT • ) ' I !iT •-' . 7, 1 = rilblrt origin (oppos. njn); i. e. the termination i" sometimes arises out of ri" after rejecting n, as iai from nia'i, i;;bn Eccles. 5, 16 from rrbn; seldom I" merely e. g. I^bl Pbov. 26, 7 = ni;ibi. Nif. andHof. iblS (3 pi. 17V1?) «> *« horn, 1 Chr. 3, 5 ; '20, 8. The -form has arisen from a fluctuation between Nif. and Hof. Pih, lb;; {inf. constr. 1^2, part. fern. nlb^a) 1. to make to bear, to help tobring forth, spoken of a midwife, with accus. of the object Ex. 1, 16; hence mb^n a midwife Gen. 35, 17; Ex. ch. 1.— 2.'in- tens. of Kal, to bear, whence the noun lib^ with a passive sense. Puh. lb"' (twice ibl^, sometimes also lb;" without a pause; part. I^V Judges ihl 8 without m) to be bom Gen. 10, 21, also with the omission of fi"'Sa; to be created, Ps. 90, 2; in Job 5, 7 some read ibi'', man is the begetter of b'iS. Sif. Iijjin or l-ibh (part. n'')ia, pi. Qi'l'^bia; inf. abs. T^bin, constr. T"]?!!!; fut. 1"'bi'', apoc. lbi"i) 1. to make bear, to cause to bring forth, spoken of God, i. e. to bestow the faculty of bearing Is. 66, 9. — 2. to beget, of a father Gen. 11,27, with accusat. of the child, ■)& Ez. 18, 14; more rarely to fructify, with accus. of the woman 1 Chr. 2, 18, figur. of the earth Is. 55, 10; to produce, to emecute 59,4; to create, bts '^bas Job ' ' ' IT !■' : V 38, 28. — 3. to propagate, to give origin to. Deriv. nibiM, nibin, the proper names ibin, ibin inlbinbij, T'biia, mbin (nibiH). ITT I ^ -•■ll- -' Hof. ibrt (iblln; inf. nibin, nibii) to he bom, 'hence nibil Qi;" Gen. 46,'SfO the day of birth; then birth Ez. 16, 4, prop. the being bom, like the Nif. with riN. Hithp. ib^ri*? *" announce oneself as having been horn, i. e. to cause oneself to be enrolled in nilbin "'^SD Num. 1, 18, for which i2Jn;;nfj (which see) was used at a later period of the language. lb;; {pi. ts'^lb;, constr. ilbi Is. 57, 4, ususdly ■'ib^i with suf. Vlb^ tJli'iib;;) m. prop, what is bom, natus, therefore a child, without respect to sex Ex. 2, 3 6 8 9 &c., though as a rule it is used in the sing, only of a male child, but in the plur. it is always applied to both sexes, children 1 Sam. 1, 2, Ezr. 10, 1, Neh. 12, 43 &c., if nilb"" does not stand ' ' IT : beside it Zech. 8, 5; transferred to the young of animals Is. 11, 7; Job 38, 41. ib'^ is used of newly-born children Ex. 1, 17, or of such as are carried by the -ib^ 570 l!" nurse Gen. 21, 8, as also of larger boys ttat play 2 Kings 2, 24, of youths Gen. 4, 23 ; 42, 22 ; Dan. 1, 4; 1 Kings 12, 8 ; especially Eccles. 4, 13. It is figurat. applied to Ephraim who, after con- version, was to be a lb"" i. e. son of delight Jer. 31, 20. It is also used to describe some nouns intensively, e. g. la'''lSi "''ib^ Is. 2, 6 strangers (apostates, heathen), comp. vhg L^xan^v; 5>fflS"'''7b^ 57, 4 i. e. (vicious) D''»i25s: Mi)-' ''1^'' Is. 29, 23 i. e. the (pious) sons of Jacob. Parallel with it is izjiis: Gen. 4, 23, op- posite an old man 1 Kings 12, 8. ih"' see lft\ flT^'^ (pi. ni'ibi) f. a maiden Zech. IT T - IT!'* 8, 5, but also = !1'1J>5 a virgin Gen. 34, 4; Jo. 4, 3. ""■''" nilb'2 , nib;: (a late word like ni';irii») fem. childhood, youth, Eccles. 11, 9 10; metaphor, young men Ps. 110, 3; comp. ai-lina Jek. 15, 8; Ez. 30, 17. rib'' (fut. apoe. r:ib\ rnbm after the form "rjb;;, "lb";) intr. prop, to gape from dryness, or better to gasp for a thing (from the excitement of hunger), lan- guor e, then to be starved, exhausted, en- feebled, Gen. 47, 13 and the land of Egypt was exhausted by reason of famine. — The stem sb"' (which was abeady assumed by Schultens and Michaelis) has for its organic root Rb"'' {Kimchi comparing it with nb in the reduplicated form of the Hithp. Sbflbnn, though another radical signification lies at the basis of this), Ar. «J (redupl. «Jjd II. to be weak, languishing, exhausted); out of which root the stem Mjsb (which see) has been developed. The latter form has also been assumed as the stem here by the Targ., LXX, Ihn G'andch, Ibn Chaj- jug, Saadia &c., inasrhuch as they con- sidered "bn to arise from Iniibn, nsbn. The Sam. cod. has even Nbrii in the text. See Insb and J-inb. "'"" , IT T IT I Tip'] (after the form b%i!, unused) m. prop, birth, only in the proper name •ilb'^hi*. (which see). nib'' {pi. d''lV^ out of nib';) m. bom, i, e. a boy, a child, Jbe. 16, 3, 2 Sam, 5,14; sometimes an apposition to 'ja Ex. 1, 22, 2 Sam. 12, 14, where, however, it appears to be an ulterior development of 'Tib\ I T lib'^ (from y^; the abiding, continuing one, viz. Jah is) n. p. m. 1 Che. 4, 17. lib'' {constr. T^b^ pi. constr. ''Tb^) m. bom, i. e. a child, rrja T^b^ Gen. 14, 14 a domestic, i. e. (applied to slaves male and female) one bom and brought up in the house, looked upon as faithful and attached; opposed to such as were bought 17, 12; elsewhere used only in an archaic manner for of spring; of the descendants of giants Numb. 13, 22, 2 Sam. 21, 16 18, 1 Che.20,4, for which ^5 also stands in other places. T]?^ (only inf. constr. nsb, with and without a suff. ; imper. m. 'rjb , "'rjb , with He opt. tisb , in pause MSb , three times ^'rjb ; imp. f. ""Db , pause "iDb ; pi. isb , pause «i5b, /)Z. /. Jiaib and ^"jib ; fut. ^•^_, pause '^b.';, apoc. ':[b;|, once written rtsbifs with 1 MiC. 1, 8, and this like "'B in all forms . of the future) intr. same as 'Tjbii (which see) to go, to walk along, see the very various applications and senses under "^jbfi. In Phenic. 'rjb'' and 'TjbM the same, hence nbbJl. course, journey (helicot, elychoth, elicos. Plant. Poen. 1, 8 12), Tjbh (hulec, a guest ibid. 1, 13; 2, 20); and from Hif. "ribinn (ibid. 1,5) a place where one turns in, hospitium. mf. 1. '!j''bin {paH. '^■'biM, fem. pi. r^S'^biM; inf. constr. '^J'^bili; imp. "^biii, pl.\i->\'\'n; fut. ^-^hy, TJb'i\ apoc. '^br, ■^jbi) to conduct, to lead, with accus. of the person Deut. 8, 2 and a of the place where Is. 48, 21, Peov. 16, 29; or the accus. of the place whither Hos. 2, 16, 2 Che. 36, 6; more rarely with bs of the person Num. 17, 11 or of the thing Jee. 31, 9, orbs 2 Kings 25, 20, Ez.36, 12 (where the LXX read incorrectly Ti'ib'iY']) ; with ya of the place whence 2 Kings 24, 15 ; to cause to flow Ez. 32, lA:,to carry abroad'Ecci.'ES. 10, 20. ^^^ 571 Vb^ Sif. n. "^y^i (only in imfer. fern. ''3''b"'S^) '" carry of, take away Ex. 2, 9. ■■ The stem Tj'b'', in which Tod appears sometimes as original, sometimes as arising out oiVau, is closely connected with TjbM, according to a well-known interchange of verbs "iD and tlS (comp. nin and nj\ TiTn and InT' &c.). The (T T HT ' JT T ITT ' ^ Arahic stems ;3-l» (to go quickly), (^J^ (to hasten) and J.^ (to go into), lead to the fundamental signification. The or- ganic root '^b""', "^b-rt, also found in "^isb, nb-ia, '^b-id, leads to the same, and is given in Tjbtl. ' ??^ (Kal not used) intr. to wail, to la- ment, identical with bbs II. if it forms the stem of the interjection ibbs ; identical with n-biS n. Jo. 1, 8, Ar. Jt (to sigh), J. (= b:;) redupl. Jp^ (ululavit), Syr. and Targ. bb';, Vl and iSf, Greek olo- Xv^siv, Lat. ululare &c. The fundamental signification, however, appears to be to howl, yell, cry, cry out, which is also OS that of Jt; and therefore bb!n I. in the sense "to halloo, to utter clear sounds" may be connected with it. Other verbs of complaining and wailing proceed from the same fundamental significa- tion (see lri3N I., TON, pij<, pW, nns, nnii, )^n &".). Deriv. bb^ !^bb^ Eif-b-^YK} (/««.bib"'.':Mic.l,8, oftener pushing the vowel forward b'^b';'; , ib'^b.';^ b''b''N, ib'^b'^n, see aai; once in the original sense ib^bii: Is. 52,5 keeping the h of the perfect) 1. to shout triumphantly, Is. 52, 5 their rulers (the Babylonians) triumphantly shout. This is best suited to the radical sense of the stem, especi- ally as the Syr. "^^1 is also used of the cries of warriors. The Targ. and Kashi, followed by others, saw here a different meaning from the usual one, and took bbi as = bbJl I. in the sense of "to i-T r T boast, to brag", which is unnecessary. — 2. to break out into cries of woe, to lament, absol. Jer. 47, 2, coupled with 1BD 4, 8, ni'n "laiaa Is. 65, 14 from the breaking of the spirit, i. e. because of a broken heart; or with b!^ of the person for whom Jek. 48, 31, or b of the thing which one bemoans Is. 16, 7, or b^ of the place where one wails Hos. 7, 14. Also figurat. of inanimate objects, e. g. TJii'ia Zech. 11, 2, ^s^ Is. 14, 31, ni^SN. lljilii'iri 23, 1. The original significa- tion is still perceptible from the fact that it is coupled with pST Ez. 21, 17, Jee. 48, 20, and that it means also to utter complaining, sorrowful sounds; Am. 8, 3 and the joyous songs of the palace utter sorrowful sounds (comp. 8, 10; Jee. 25, 10; 1 Macc. 9, 41). In Ps. 78, 63 some read ibbiil (as a collateral form of lbb''!j), and translate in parallelism with verse 64: and their virgins made no lamentation, which seems to have been intended by the LXX. But Targ., Eashi, IbnEsra,Kimchi and others too have rightly left bbl^T untouched, and refer- red it to bb!i I. (which see). As no Hifil or Hofalfdrmb''birt, bbiM of bb; occurs, the derivation of bbin Ps. 137, 3 from bb"! {Mos. Gheguitilla, Kimchi) should also be rejected. There is no reason for assuming a noun bb'^rt to Ez. 21, 17 and Zech. 11, 2. ^b"* (after the form nn'n) m. a howl- ing (of wild beasts), Deut. 32, 10 howling of the wilderness, i. e. a frightful wilder- ness; Arab. VH^ (howling) for *— >l>i». i_jLo wilderness of howling. nbb'^ (constr. nbb"') f. wailing, cry IT T : ■ (" : 1* of sorrow, lamentation, Is. 15, 8; Jee. 25,36; Zeph. 1,10. J??"! I. (only used in perf.) intr. to speak inconsiderately, rashly, particularly in vowing, Peov. 20, 25 the snare of a man (is he who) rashly vows as holy (Kimchi), which suits the context; and therefore the organic root 5>b"J would be= Ar. ^ii (to swear inconsiderately) Sura 2, 225 ; LaJ the same. It comes to the same sense if we read ilinj; sb^;]., by which the sentence is only made less hard. The fundamental meaning appears vb^ 572 D'' to be to stammer, to prattle (thought- lessly), to speak foolishly, like Tisb Job 6, 3 (where the accent is drawn back on account of the pause, see Ps. 37, 20; 137, 7) and Obad. 16 (as in Is. 28, 11 aS^b is supposed to be a consequence of drinking wine), or 5»b (?9b) = wb, if we adopt this as a stem for those places. In putting the accents the Masoretes wa- vered between 5»b"' (3 perf. Kal) and 5»b^ (3 fut. apoc. Kal of §?b), and therefore they appended both accents; a differ- ence which does not alter the sense. J??"* 11. (not used) tr. to eat, to gnaw at a thing, to eat up, to lick up, prop, same as S»ba to swallow, to destroy, to annihilate; the ancients already adopt- ing in yb"* I. the meaning of sba. Deriv. S>bin, msbin, nybin to designate a worm, as the noun pb]; is derived from the cognate stem pb""' or pb ('^nb), and ns'l (which see) from 073^ = Arab. ft\ comedit, voravit. Accordingly the or- ganic root »b-J exists also in 5>b (3>lb), 3>b-a &c. ^ee'ybn. 1- T r T 31 D'' m. see Sb"" I. -\1 I- T n?^ (not used) intr. same as EjbiS to stick fast, to cling, to cleave to, particu- larly of scurf or tetter, which sticks fast to the skin; Ar. k_aJ> III. to be attached to, united, Targ. r|b, C|sb tr. to bind to- gether; and even the organic root of Sibn II. is connected with it. The Tar- gumic Cib"' is used in the 2^ signif. of ^>-?-, I'' Pih. tfil (not used) intens. to stick very fast, of scab and tetter. Hence PBp^ f. an itching scai, tetter. Lev. 21, 20,' from qb; (Gittin 70»); LXX p?"" (not used) trans, to lick up, off, away, to eat off, to graze on (spoken of a locust that eats away the grass) ac- cording to Ibn Esra (as "TjOb is applied to oxen Num. 22, 4); hence pb\ — The organic root pb"'' exists also' in Tjnb , Pi?-^, 5>b-; II. '"&c. But pb may also pass for the stem of pbl. pb'' m. the name of a grass-eating locust (as b"'On devours the corn Dedt. 28, 38 and hh the fruit Am. 4, 9) Jo. 1, 4; 2, 25, Vhich bears the epithet of 'IMG Jbk. 51, 27 on account of its rough horn- like membranes in which the wings stick, and which ai-e pat off when receives its last skin, a process that fits it for flight. Cl'^'l £:«5s pb'j the yelek strips off (the wing- covering) and flies away Nah. 3, 15. Yet b'^On Ps. 78, 46 also stands in poetry for pb;; 105, 34, and both for na'^N Ex. ch. 10, without their being identical on that account. The LXX have some- times jSpoiip?, sometimes axp4'; theTrg. has NH'IS (flying), the Syr. U-f. l^^P^- (fro™ ^PJ?) "*• "■ shepherd's pocket OT bag 1 Sam. 17, 40, distinct from t-'s'in ib3. r JT I- : Di L (from the stem MMJ I- = t3,; [Si;'], in the sing. = dii, as an epithet of Jah only in the proper name D!jaN.; c. I'O'J in the proper namebNlM'j; pi. C*?^ from d"* or n?2'', once V'a'', constr. ''73^, with a of motion fl?3"'ai; more rarely and poetically the plur. ninj, constr. nin^ Dbut. 32, 7, Ps. 90, 15,' after the ana- logy of the Aramaean, where the pi. is n'av, which is even the reading of the Sam. cod. Deut. 32, 7) m, 1. clearness, light, like di"' originally. In this sense d-i is weakened into 1^ in the proper name T^tiN, which see. — 2. only in the pi. The signification of it is the same as that of Qi^, day (including the night) GrEN. 8, 10, Lev. 8, 33 &c., whence d'^ins d''53i Gen. 27, 44 soine days, i. e. !• T -: I- T '_ " a very short time, as vice versa d''a'i d'^M^j Dan. 8, 26 means a long time. Elsewhere d'^M"' alone denotes a) days, i. e. a short time 8, 27; Neh. 1, 4; b) an indefinite time Gen. 40, 4; e) a long time Numb. 9, 22 ; 1 Sam. 29, 3 ; in which cases some have incorrectly understood an exact and fixed period of time. In such senses d"'M"| is found where the meaning be- comes stronger, and in phrases of the signification a): ^ifes is d^MJ Gen. 24, 55: days or a tenth, i. e. a few days- Q1 573 Q1 or a whole tenth of days, so that 'litos* is more than the mere D'^M"', IN in other instances also introducing the greater; 1 Sam. 29, 3, where D"'5aj is less in rela- tion to the following Dijia. d-ittj bl5> a suckling of days Is. 65, 20 i. e. who is not yet a full year old. Q'^aja JcDaBS 11, 4 and 14, 8 after days, i. e. after not very long a time (for which 2 Chb. 21,19 has 0172573 D^ajb), S^a'! Drajtt Josh. 23, 1 standing for the reverse. So too are to be understood Wiz"^ YK^. CrEN. 4, 3 and '; fg) Neh. 13,' 6, the opposite of which is b^a'! 'J f)?!? Jer. 13, 6. Lastly we find Caj applied to larger periods, introduced by IN, in signif. e Numb. 9, 22: two days or a month or a considerable time (fiia""). The pi. D^tti is more used than the sing. DV in the sense of time, without respect to days, single or in groups, e. g. Dia'irbs Detit. 4, 40 all time, i. e. al- ways, omni tempore; Bia^tl "'pi'i histo- ries of times 1 Kings 14,19, i. e. annals; Qi^i^il ri'ins the time following, the fu- ture Gen. 49, 1, Is. 2, 2 (in prophetic, promising, and Messianic discourses); 'S iM^a in the times of . . . Gen. 26, 1; ISAM. 17, 12; 1 Kings 10, 21; par- ticularly as comprehending in itself the following groups of years 1 Kings 2, 11, and therefore immediately pre- ceding DiilB Gen. 47, 8, or placed after definite times, e.g. after D;n:iB Gen.41,1, niyaia Dan. 10, 2, laih Num."ii,20, rrc^ Detjt. 21,13, as an adverbial accusative, for the purpose of generalising, as it were, the fixed time which is previously put, somewhat like the common saying: two years' time. In threatening prophe- cies DiTai is also used of terrible times that are coming on Is. 39, 6; Jer. 7, 32 &c. — Other applications of D"')?"' are these: a) a definite cycle, which may in- clude many years. Gen. 29, 21 my years ■of service (^ai) are full, b) time of life, age; hence the phrases '"1 sa Gen. 24,1 to come into days, i. e. to be advanced in age; '1 lias very aged Job 15, 10, opposite to 'J 'n¥)?14,l; laiSN '''qi 10,5 the period of human life &c. &c. ; figur. great age = Qia; ah Job 32, 7, parallel QijllZJ ah ; continuance, of inanimate things Gen. 8, 22. c) a year, 1 Sam. 27, 7 a year and four months; Lev. 25, 29, when nsiB hjsaa is past; d"i73;b yearly Judges 17', 10; 'Jrt nar ISam. 2,19 yearly sacrifice; nai^jJi d^aja Ex. 13, 10 from year to year (Saadia); 1 Sam. 1, 3; for which 1, 7 has nsi^a Taxa ; t3i3«5 dij:;; two years 2 Chr. 21" 19 ='cpMi Dini\:3'(2 Sam. 13, 23), as the Vulg., Syr. and others have also taken it; fiiai hv QiB' 2 Chr. 21, 15 year by year, comp. Is. 29, 1. There is uncertainty in the passage Am. 4, 4 {and bring) your tithes every three days, which should be translated, according to Kimchi, every three years, with refer- ence to Deut. 26, 12 ; but Ibn Esra takes it literally and in irony. Bashi also takes it literally, and as an antithesis to the appointments of the true wor- ship. Comp. for this signification the Targumic "py, and many expressions for "time" in Arabic, which denote a year. See tiV. D'' n. (from dai I.: constr. d^ retain- JT ^ l-T ' IT ingKametz, and d^ only in the combi- nation C11D"D2; with a of motion nai; with sujf. na;; pi. d^a;, which is also used collectively for the sing.) m. prop, a heap of water, a conflux, a collection of water, a mass of water, cognate in sense with ni)?a (Is. 22,11); hence sea. Gen. 1, 10 and the collection of water he called sea (d^a^). d"'??^ is used in poetic lan- guage for the sing, d^, as dia^ bin Job 6,3, dial rjiri Gen. 49, 13, d'la^ ab Ps. 46, 3, for which formulas d^ stands in prose Gen. 32,13; Josh. 9, i"Pbov. 23, 34. di is the opposite of niaai Ps. 66, 6 or na'nn Hagg. 2, 6. It is also used a) for a sea of clouds, thunder- clouds, Job 9, 8, perhaps also 36,30; d^a also being so employed Ps. 29, 3. b) for greai rivers, e. g. the Nile Is. 18, 2; 19, 5; Nah. 3, 8, the pi. for the Nile- canals Ez. 32, 2 ; the Euphi-ates Is. 27, 1, Di-15> tJia Am. 8, 12 and Zech. 9, 10 from IT - IT • ' o i-L the Nile to the Euphrates, as far as the promised territory was to reach (Gen. D^ 574 r\D^ 15, 18); the Eed Sea, the Jordan Ps. 114, 3 5. c) for the great iron laver in the court before Solomon's temple 1 Kings 7, 24, 2 Chr. 4, 3, fully Ci; n«5n3n 2 Kings 25, 13 or pltlM D^ti VI:- ' 'it it - 1 Kings 7, 23, so called from its re- semblance to the sea-basin, d) the bed of a sea, filled with a mass of waters Is. 11, 9. e) brooks, streams, which flow into the sea. Am. 5, 8; &, 6; Eccles. I, 7. f) figur. the mass of an army, a sea of people Jer. 51,42 (comp.Ez. 26, 3;Ps.18,16;Is.8,9);Hab.3,8. g)New Tyre, more fully D»rt TiSJi Is. 23, 4, as Tyre is described situate at the entrances or gateways of the sea Ez. 27, 3. But in general- h) the Mediterranean Sea (other- wise in prose 'ji'inNM d^lrr Deut. 1 1, 24 or binart nijli Num. 34" 6)" from whose- bed and channels (d'')?''BN) 2 Sam. 22, 16 and bubbling springs (d^iSSi) in the lowest depth Job 38, 16, and double doors or restraining shores (D';nb'n) 38, 8 and im- measurableness Lament. 2, 13, Job 11, 9, and uttermost part (n'l'nriN) Ps. 139, 9 &c. the poets drew their images. "'^N Sirt the islands of the Mediterranean Is. II, 11, for which D"' alone is also used inHos.11,10. See IN. Because this sea lies west of Palestine , Di also denotes i) the west, the western garters, e. g. "> nil Ex. 10, 19 the west wind, "i TNs IT - I ' IT I" : the west side 27, 12; MB"' westward Gen. 28, 14, which means also to the sea Numb. 34,5; b Q^a to the west of ... ! IT • ' - Josh. 8, 9. Also specially k) the eastern Sea, the Bead Sea, Is. 16, 8, Ez. 47, 8; and 1) the South Sea Is. 49, 12, Ps. 107, 3, contrasted with the north; conse- quently not the west always. — Eor the combination of W with certain exacter designations or adjectives see under the words (e. g. nbu, dinuSbs, n'nss and ni^??, ns'iy, iB;, d:pVm. it?:,' £]SXj are likewise applied in manifold ways. D1 {def. NTs;) Aram. m. same asHebr. t3i li. Dan. 7, 2 3. IT ' n^ (from t]»•;) m. a warm spring (Vulg.). An Edomite wy had discovered such, when he fed the asses of his father Ti^'S^ in the wilder- ness Gen. 36, 24. lain may here be a part of DiiN lain (2 Kings 3, 8), south of iNia; and therefore the warm IT ' springs rise in a tract south-east of the Dead Sea, flow in Wady el-Achsa, and make it luke-warm (Burckh. Syria p. 674). The LXX retain the word, con- sidering it a sing, (zov M[itiv) ; the Syr. has i-«io transposed from )ia-'- = Q;;, and therefore it also does not translate the word. According to a tradition (in Je- rome andDiod.) wai-m springs were called among the Carthaginians (Jerome: non- nuUi putant, aquas calidas juxta linguae Punicae viciniam, quae hebraeae con- termina est, hoc vocabulo significare), Syrians and Hebrews (Diod.: o HvQog xai 6 'E^QuXog rov laiish [dH";] vSag §ovXov- Tcu liysiv) diU\ Agreeably to a second tradition (cod. Sam., Targ., Onk.) D^'a.'; is = Sasj (Deut. 3, 11), a name of the giants and aborigines of the Moabite border, whom the Horite '^Aiiah first met there, or first conquered (NltM as in Ps. 21, 9) as Ibn Parchon (s. v.) thinks. Ac- cording to a third tradition (Taxg. Jeru- shalmi I., Midr. rabba ch. 82, 17, Eashi, Kimchi, Nachmani, Arab. &c.) it means mules, which 'Anah is said to have pro- duced by the mixture of species. But there is no etymological ground for the last two explanations. ^^ty^ (not used) intr. same as !n73i I. n-T ^ ' ITT to be clear, bright, then to be warm, spoken of a region; lengthened by n ■JUJ (whence la'^n) which see. At. joo. to be hot, of the day; originally, to be clear. Deriv. NJaTi. IT " HD^ I. (not used) intr. same as D'' ITT ^ " (W) which see; by which the sing. Si I. {constr. ia;) and the pi. D'^ai, nia'' are to be explained. To this signification of lna'> = d'' belongs the fundamental mean- ing of N?2J for the proper name Nain, where the Ar. is compared. See da"! IL DD"' n. (not used) intrans. to swear^ bi<)D^ 575 like the Targumic NM'; , Syr. P>a*; hence the noun Ttwa (with'suff. la?3, to swear; but hMi should not be considered, reversely, as an abridgment of ^tt^ PNIW^ {El is light, splendour; TO^ constr. of d"" I.) n. p. m. Gen. 46, 10, for which Num. 26,12 has bNlMS (which see),, and to which perhaps the proper name IsNiab also belongs. rial see Qi I. W*)y> see SI I. !• T IT rxry-iy^ see 'a> i. T l- T IT n^'^P'] (from D)?; II., the pure, as day-light, comp. Diana from dies, and so the Arab. JuiUj, dove; according to others = !l5''M'; the fortunate, which is improbable) n. p. f. Job 42, 14. ^121 (from in; ; constr. I'^a';, withsMyf. •'3''a;, tJ5''72i) /. {masc. in Pkov. 27, 16, Ex. 15, 6, Isut where ^iMJ may also be taken as fern.) l.a light, clear region, the day-side, i. e. the south (= T3"n) Ps. 89, 13, oppos. to ')iS5£(dark, covered, gloomy region, i. e. the north); Job 23, 9 he veils himself in the south (rias* like all verbs of clothing with the accus.), and I see not, opposite bli«ato (north); as in the passage just cited fi'i)?. (east) and 'liON (west) appear; Is. 54, 3 for thou wilt spread thyself out towards the south (VMj) and towards the north (bl5 is put in the genitive, e. g. with y^v\ Sam. 11, 2, piil5 Ex. 29, 22, ^^; Ps. 73, 23, '^'n;;. Judges 3, 16, for which, however, the adj. ''i'')?'; or "lyqi also stands. V'a"' alone is often used for I IT the hand as a symbol of help and pro- tection Song of Sol. 2, 6, of good or bad action Ps. 26, 10; Judges 5, 26; hence we find it applied to God, e. g. i'' T'M'] Ex. 15, 6, yvhlS "[ Ps. 77, 1, as a help- ing Ps. 60, 7,'svipporting 63, 9, strong Ex. 15, 6 12, holding Ps. 139, 10, bene- ficent and beatifying 16, 11 or threaten- ing and crushing power Lament. 2, 4; and so in the very various significations of SiTj and T^ generally. Hence the following phrases are to be explained in accordance with this idea: TB"'N 'S I'lM'; Ps. 80, 18 man of the right hand of one, i. e. whom one's right hand supports; 'S V?'''? ^s. 16, 8 at the right hand of one, i. e. at his side; 'S "b ail5i to sit at the right hand of one Ps. 110, 1, i. e. to be his ad- ministrator, friend &c. Also applied to other objects: 'i-b? at the right hand Gen. 24, 49, '1 to the right hand Num. 22, 26, for which also V'^'^^ Gen. 13, 9 or lin^b Neh. 12, 31 &c. occurs. Sometimes ■[laj stands along with T Ps. 73, 23 or SilT 44,4 tautologically, or to strengthen the "idea. Pigur. = right, correct, proper, EcCLES. 10, 2 the heart of a wise man is at his right, i. e. in the right place, just as the Germans apply linkisch, mean- ing by it "unfit, unskilful". — 3. pros- perity, the right side and south being regarded as natural symbols of good fortune; whereas on the contrary a dark, gloomy region, the left- or night-side is an image of misfortune (see DiU, bi^MiO); comp.- Ar. ^j^, good fortune, ILA (hebr. HMto) to be on the left side F 576 P and unfortunate &c. This meaning of Vaj is found Gen-. 35, 18 in the name pajsa (son of prosperity), which name is also -written 'jirja Num. 1, 36 (see I^T?^)' separately V^^-ia 1 Sam. 9, 1 K'tib; besides in ']i);i-iB''N, whence the patronym. ■'|iia';-iljij«' 1 Sam. 2, 1. Tib;; alone appears as a proper name (comp. JFelix) Gen. 46, 17; Num. 26, 12; IChe, 2, 27; Nbh. 8, 7. To ^ijaj in this sense belong also the proper names V'?"'? (from r'i?rT9 = r*?ri?) ^^»- 1*^- 25 .' neh. 10, 8, 1 Chr. 24, 9, and V'j?;?'? (= T''?;?^) Neh. 12, 17 ; 2 Chr. 31, 15.' 'See ^5x5% — IT ! " 4. aw oa«A Ps. 144, 8 11, to which meaning *1)51D is suitable as an epithet, and accord- ing to the requirement of the first mem- ber of the verse. Ibn-Balam has already compared here the Ar. ijjy+J (swearing), lai 4 (see too na^ II.) and Ar. , .v*j X. 'it *■ ]TT_ -' W •• (to swear) confirming the same sense fully; though the meaning "right hand" might be retained, agreeably to Is. 62, 8. — 5. same as laTi the name of a dis- tnct inEdom, Deut. 33, 2 from his Yamin- region to Eshdot (i. e. to Ashdot ha-Pisga) he came to them (see nittJSj p. 157), 'jMin actually appearing in the parallel pas- sageHAB. 3,3. In this sense ■j'^??"' like p'^n may properly denote a dry, scorched, sun- burnt land, as in Arab. L»jLi' is = ^ i * '"' wilderness, and as from LoJ (=na"') ap- _t, ^ 5 ^ ITT' ^ pears the noun oL««x (desert). Deriv. ''Jia^, ''j!"'a^, and the denomipative ■jaj (a denomin. from 'J"'??"'; Kal not used), whence Hif. VM'^li, also in the forms X'lSn, y'a'p, VMg!^ (inf. C. 'J'^Mrt; imp.f ■'5"'M''n; M.'T'MV.,"2p^- 15"'aN.F)) ^sa, also occur. Once with yiN there is merely i3"|?3i Tamin-land 1 Sam. 9, 4, which ap- pears to have been the name of a piece of land in a territory which was not Benjamite; though the meaning "Ben- jamite" is also probable in the passage. ''D'^W' Patronym. m. from the proper name masc. "j'^M"' Num. 26, 12. ah'D'] (fulfiller, viz. Jahis, fromsba) n. p"m. 2 Chr. 18, 7 8. n3)3'' (the same) n. p. m. 1 Kings 22, 8. 'Tibp'' (the Ruling one, -viz. Jah is) re. p. to.i'Chr.4,34. DD^ I. (i. e. d^; not used) intr. to be collected or heaped together in a mass, to flow together (in heaps), hence d"" II. — The organic root d^ (dB"') is completely identical -with that in dJ-N (whence dJN 1 and liJpSN 1 , d5 I. (dBS) and d» (dB»), dj3 (diia) &c., Ar. !».». (whence *^ a col- lection of water), »,^ (to collect); but especially aj, redupl. *.ii.«j>' (to gather together), whence *.L£4j'(sea); since the interchange of the ft-sound -with Tod is certain (see p. 249 and 528). In Ar. there was also a stem |vj, whence |vJ sea; only this was less used. DD^ n. (not used) intr. same as d"* rr ^ ' IT (dl'^) to be clear, pure; figur. to he lovely, innocent. Deriv. the proper name rtB''W\ Vty' (not used) intr. 1. to he luminous. F 577 mD^ clear, spoken of a region or quarter of the globe, like U^ (pv), Ji-MJ, out of which the stem seems to be enlarged by means of n. Deriv. I73"'n 1. — 2. to be southerly, the south side being con- sidered the clear , bright one ; the north the reverse (see lis^), as dark and clouded; to be on the right, an oriental being accustomed to make the east his standard or starting point, and therefore the south serves to denote the right, while the opposite side is the left. Deriv. vm; 1 and 2, I'd;, "•2m^ irn^ 1, denom. 1''53"'ln, for which there is also '{■'MNn, without THJ being on that ac- count = 153^ (see IMS II.). — 3. to be prosperous, brightness (see signific. 1) being a sign of prosperity, the clear, the right, and the day-side being considered the fortunate one, but the gloomy, the dark, the left (see JTato belonging to DiB in b^5nto) being the unfortunate one; Ar. jrj-»J the same. Deriv. the proper names rn"" 3, liijii, nsar — 4. tr. to make clear, bright, manifest, to swear, conseq. transferred from the fundamental signi- fication; or to lift up the right hand, to swear by means of the right hand (see Is. 62, 8). Deriv. T^MJ 4. — 5. to glow, to burn, to be hot, of a desert. Derivat. p-'n and y^ls^ 6. " Hif. T'Mirtj'and y^lSn 2 Sam. 14, 19, VMNin Is.' 30, 21, lin^rt 1 Cheon. 12, 2, denom. from y^'a'^ (which see). Yiy (not used) m. same as V^"' in ' IT T ^ ' ^ ^ ' r T signific. 2, Ar. i^^-tJ the same. Hence the adj. m. laai, fern. IT'SM''. DDH'^ (prosperity, from 'jai 3; comp. Arab. iLUj felicitas) n. p. m. Gen. 46, 17; 2 Cek. 31, 14. lari^ (from ia; = vaj, Ar. jj^") adj. m., ni3M; f. right, IKings 7,21, 2 Kings 11,11 (used of inanimate things), par- ticularly of members that are in pairs, as ijis Ex. 29, 20, V Lev. 8, 23, bs'n 8, 24. rT'M'i alone, a subst., the right hand Lev. 14, '16, 3'DyQ'^ {a holder bach, aheeper, viz. Jah is) n. p. m. 1 Chb. 7, 35. Comp. 5>3?|in. ^D^ I. (Kal not used) tr. same as la ('TlW which see) to change, to alter, iden- tical in its organic root with Irtu II. But in this meaning it occurs only in the Jlif. ^''M''lri to change, to eaichange Jer. 2, 11, if it be not better to take "T^M'^n for T^Mii (see miB in Hif.). '' Hithp. ^'Kprlr\ to change oneself, with a with a thing, i. e. to enter into the place of, to take on^s place. Is. 61, 1 into their splendour ye shall enter (Saadia, Rashi), the Ar. Jjo (to exchange) hav- ing this sense also in conjug. V. It is not necessary to assume a peculiar stem 113'' for this conjugation; since the Hithp. may be formed so from simple stems in the Aramaean fashion (comp. Targ. D^:;ns« from On). The Targ., Syr. and Vulg. take it as = IMNnrt Ps. 94, 4 in the meaning "to glory", an assumption which is unnecessary. But see IJJ"' U. *1P^ n. (Kal not used) intr. to stretch upwards, hence to be elevated, high, same as TaN (which see); deriv. the noun 1M'' in the proper name ?1^'?'?, "IMj?. in '^,^1^'lt I'nttV According to this fundamental signification is the explanation of Jlithp. ^13irin to glory, with a of the object, Is. 61, 6 ye shall glory in their splendour (Targ., Syr., Vulg., Kimchi, Ibn. Esra &c.), conseq. = IMNnfi Ps. 94, 4^ which is = 5?n» y^iart in the passage. ^iy^ see Tf^ni. nrl'' see fT'^ai and •''na\ V |... IT • : - I* : - \Xyi2'', 'lafi^QV?, see !Tia; and n'ra. il'^h) (out of T,-, 'im;; height of Jah;. IH"' from 1?2'' n. = las , the same stem vr r T r T ' lying also in the proper name masc. ■''iB^ i. e. 'laji^Qi 1 Macc. 9,36, originat- ing in !T''lMi from 'IM'' = 'la"', for which Josephus has A(iaQuiog, i. e. Mi'iJiN , the Syr. I'lMN = rt'l'iaN in a like sense) n. p. m. 1 Ch'r. 7, 36. I'he proper names nns Mof MiIMn) and fT"iaN., Irt^lMN. IT • : •■' IT :--:' it : -. (above p. 117 secj.) may be better taken in the sense of ITia^ here; on the contrary another proper name Npa;; i. e. 'la/i^Qije (2 Tim. 3, 8), in the Talmud Np5?M, is 37 nD^ 578 r\)m^ derived from N1M , !i^?3 = IMN meaninff IT T ' IT T 1- T ° to prophesy, to announce (Ethiop. "'in), and should therefore be taken in the signification of magician , enchanter &c., after which manner tTiTa and ni'i'nKi are also to be explained. I'na^ 'Ittfi^Qi, from in;; n. see Tiyzy nn'/O'' see ri'ia\ IT • : - IT ! • Ji'P'' (Kal not used) intr. same as IJJttin to touch, to feel; only in Hif. 12J''?3''ln to let feel, hence imper. with «M#. ■'Siaa'^H Judges 16, 26 K'tib, Zci me feel, for which the K'ri has ''SlBia^, as if from lUa (l!5l53) = 1BM. y>*3i EccLES. 12, 5 should be re- ferred to yis: and y'^a , the signification of both verbs being purposely expressed in the word. See aati. ITT nj^ ifut. n3''\ W5, with saf. QJii: (TT ^ IV • ' IV • ' " IT • ' nsi'i Jer. 25, 38; 46, 16; Zeph. 3, 1 is not the part, of tli'^, but a noun from "yo which see) tr. to tread down, to op- press, to suppress, to extirpate, Ps. 74, 8 we will ci'ush them entirely {Ibn Cf andch, Ibn Parchon), a verb being really ne- cessary there. The organic root of the stem ii-5'' would accordingly be identi- cal with that in ^5""', '\T'^i according to the well-known and proved interchange of''anda,as well as of a and v, Targ. N3 ■; , ij!^ the same. But as Ttt"^ does not appear elsewhere in Kal, other ancient exposi- tors (Targ., LXX, Kimchi) take d5"'3 as a subst. ys (which see) with the suff., their whole brood (will we destroy); so that the verb has dropped out. hi'O is a subst. which see. Sif. nairt {3 pi. ^itn, part.pl. m. DiaiM, with suf. 'rj'^a'ia; inf. c. nbiM, with 'suf. I3nairj5; fut. naii, 3pl. <)ai'i) to maltreat, to oppress, with the accus. of the object Ez. 18, 12 16; to overreach 22, 7; to deceive, by extortion Deut. 23, 17; to torment, of enemies Is. 49, 26; to thrust or push away, with accusat. of the object and ■))? Ez. 46, 18, comp. 45, 8. The Targumic "laiN has the same mean- ing. With the stem rta'' may be also compared TtiS II. ni3'' (with a of motion innia'', resting-^ -IT T I T place, from mi) n. p. of a city on the confines of Ephraim and Manasseh Josh. 16, 6 7; on the contrary, another city of the same name is meant in 2 Kings 15, 29, situated in the extreme north of Palestine, west of the lake Merom, probably yai ; a city of that name being indicated in that district. D13'' (from Qia = ya ; propagation) n.p. of a city in Judah Josh. 15, 23 K'tib, for which the K'ri has Dia'' (j)lace of flight). m^ see hiai and Cl')a\ I IT - IT IT QSiai see Diax IT IT nJ'' belonging to TpSTj see tlia. np''3'^ (from p-ia;; = paji) a sucker, sprout, Ez. 17, 4, = pan'' 2. and n)?ai'' 17, 22; Phenic. pa; (Diosc. 3, 121)' a kind of geranium. pJJ (part. m. pai-i; fut. pai^) tr. to moisten, to wet the lips (see tip a), then to suck, with accus. Q^^ (*^^ breasts) Job 3, 12, particularly in the part. m. pail Song op Sol. 8, 1, Jo. 2, 16, where it is used as a subst.; figurat. intr. to enjoy in abundance Is. 60, 16; to receive or take in rich abundance 66, 11 12; Deut. 33, 19; Phenic. pa"! the same. Deriv. p3i\ npar, !ip/a\ ^ Mf. piailrt (once p-^an Lament. 4, 3; part. f. npa"'M, with suff. inpa"'53, and' •pi. n'ip''a''jg as a subst., but the latter also adjectively Gen. 32, 16; inf. constr. p-^aiin; imp. with suff. and lEp (Zeph. 2, 14; Ps.! 1D^ 579 ^1D> 102, 7). According to the Targ. (qis)?), Syr. and KimeJii: the night-owl, conseq. from Ejl^S; according to the LXX and Vulg. the ibis (an Egyptian bittern or •heron), consec[. from t^'Oii to blow. "ID^ (part. IDi , inf. constr. ID"" , also with b, liS''b 2 Chb. 31, 7, because even in the ftit. Kal Tod the first radical is resolved into the second Is. 28, 16 ; fut. 1&'; according to some) trans, to set, like ID (*TiD) intr. to sit; metaph. to found, r'ja EzR. 2, 12, i. e. to build up, usually spoken of God, the earth Is. 48, 13; 51, 13; Job 38, 4, with b? upon Ps. 24, 2 ; 104, 5 ; to found (the vpult of heaven) Am. 9, 6; to create (the world) Ps. 89, 12. Figur. to pile up in strata, nin'l^. 2 Chb. 31, 7, such piling resembling the building of a house; to prepare, to ap- point, i. e. to assign Ps. 104, 8, like aito elsewhere (Ex. 21, 13); to constitute, always with b for a thing, tn"'ii!i1j for punishment Hab. 1, 12, parallel DliU UETUHb (to appoint as a judge); Is. 23, 13 Ashur constituted this people (the Chal- deans, y^N as in Is. 11,4; 66,8) into in- habitants of the steppes; then to establish, rilS Ps. 119, 152. For the etymology see under IID. Deriv. 10^, liD^, iTlID^, iDin, torn, mow, rTio''?3, t'sm. ' IT ' IT ' ITT I ' ITT 1" ' I iVj/.IOii (inf.10fi)n, with sujf. DlS^rt; # ,- \ / J.. T . ' II IT : IT • ' fut. "^OV) 1. to be planted, applied to a people who settle down Ex. 9, 18; to be built up, of h'D'"n Is. 44, 28. — 2. to sit down together, for consultation (see lio), hence to take counsel together, with b?' of a person Ps. 2, 2; 31, 14. Fih. 1&1 (inf. constr. 1Bi; fut. IBi'') !••• ^ ' I"-' ' 'V' 1. to found, to build, a city Is. 14, 32, a temple Zech. 4, 9 ; to lay the founda- tion-stone, with a of the cost Josh. 6, 26, with accus. of the material 1 Kings 6, 31, — 2. Eigur. to prepare, TJ* praise Ps. 8, 3, to appoint Esth. 1, 8, to ordain 1 Che. 9, 22. Puh. ^Sn (part. I&^a) to be grounded, set, upon (b?) something 1 Kings 6, 37, Song op Sol. 5, 15 , with accus. of the material out of which 1 Kings 7, 10. Hof. 1pm (part.nMM, inf.'-fo^Ti, also used as a subst.) to be established 2 Chr. 3, 3; EzE. 3, 11. Is. 28, 16 an establish- ed foundation, i. e. a firm foundation. — IB^M is a subst. with an irregular Dagesh forte in , and stands for lDi?a. — Comp. Phenic. 1B_'i_ to set, to fix, a monumen- tal grave-stone; part. pass. 101 (Kit. 23,3). Ip'] m. foundation, act of laying the foundation-stone, only metaph. beginning EzR. 7, 9. n'lb'; (only pi. nilD^) f. same as liD'j foundation, cognate in sense with niniJS; figur. Lament. 4, 11; Ez. 30, 4. liC] (with suff. iniD'], dliD^; plur. 'W'i^'OI, with suf. fT'liO';) m. ground, foundation, on which a thing rests, e. g. of an altar Ex. 29, 12, Lev. 4, 7, of the temple 2 Chr. 24, 27, but also in a figur. sense Hab. 3, 11 making the founda- tion naked (by the swelling flood) which reaches up to the neck (i. e. the depth of a man), spoken of the Chaldean empire (uncovering or laying bare the founda- tion, Mb Sin, STl5>, is a sign of destruc- tion) Ez.' 13, 14; Mic. 1, 6; Ps. 137, 7; fibiy '^ foundation of eternity Peov. 10, 25, i. e. eternal duration (comp. 10, 30; Ps. 125, 1); that on which something is founded, basis. Job 4, 19; firm position 22,16. liD-'n lyilS 2 Chr. 23, 5 the name I . - - 1- ^ ^ of a gate of the palace, which is called lib lyid in 2 Kings 11, 6; see I^jD. rfy'ihi see n'lfa';. n'lID'; (with suf. inniD:) f. founda- tion Ps. 87, 1. 1*101 (plur. fii'n^B'', with suf. I'lJiD'' I T ^-^ I" : ' II r 1 K'tib, where, however, it is better to read '^'y/O'l as an old plural; from "n^D) m. one drawing back,anapostate,3'EB.. 17, 13 K'tib the apostates OniB^ = D'^'HW;) are written in earth (not in stone Job 19, 24), i. e. their memory will be soon extinguished. The K'ri reads '''1101 = D"''1>|D1, where 110 has the same sense. See IIB. ■'liiB'' or illB stands parallel „ I . I- : r to -n lati*. 1" :i liS'] (after the form IIB'd, 1^35, from IB'') m. a reprover. Job 40, 2 shall 37* T' 580 rf the reprover contend with the Almighty^ ^ is an infin. absol. (Judges 11, 25); and "niS^ is parallel with ti"'3i». ?|DJ (only fut. 'Tj&ti) intr. to pour, with b? upon, Ex. 30, 32 it shall not he poured on the flesh of a man. It is un- necessary to take it passively and 'T|Di'; as = ^^V; diU'''; also is not passive. nSp'; (contracted out of iT'SiD'i, from !ll3D; Jah is a looking one) n. p. m. Gen. 11, 29. '?]53p'] m. see irT'Stip'] {Yahtl, is Supporter) n.p. m. 2CHH.31, 13; comp. ?M;5?3l?, '^^B'^flN. P^DJ (usually in the perf., tlDJ, in pause fib;; rtSD'', nSiD\ inSDV !)BD\ 'ITT' IT :(T' tii-t' •;rT' i :it' m pause ?SDJ; liSDJ; part.pl. m. tJ'^Bb';'; in/- consi?-. niBo" instead of nSD, the termination dt sometimes appearing also in verbs ii'b and 5»'5> e. g. nsiSfi Zbch. 13, 4, nisito Pkov. 8, 13, ni^pt^Ez. 36, 3, without its being necessary on that account to assume a stem rtSD = ftd"'; ITT ll-T' jfflip. rjD, but only m the pi. ISD; fut. IlDi\ ri&i, !:)Oi«i, apoo. ^Qik-;, after the form tpi, tpi*'', the stem r)Di coinciding with JjON in form and idea, as vice versa t)DN has also tjD'i in the fut.; on the contrary the forms ti'^Di^ qpi"«, E)ps<'' belong to Mfil which coincides in mean- ing, in the case of this verb, with Kal) 1. to bring together, to bring to, hence to add, with accus. of the object and b? of the thing to which the addition is made Lev. 5, 16, seldomer with bN 2 Sam. 24, 3; but the accus. is oftenest omitted entirely Deut. 13, 1, Peov. 30, 6, the addition being merely considered by itself; to increase, hence followed by an infin. with b expressing the increase of an action following. Gen. 38, 26 and he added not to know her, i. e. and he knew her no more. In this case t]D'' is like an auxiliary verb, which, in com- bination with the verb -idea belonging to the infin. following, and changed thereby into a finite verb, may be trans- lated farther, more, thenceforth, in future. once again, again, longer, still more, just according to the context. Gen. 8, 12 and it returned not again; 2 Sam. 2, 28 and they fought no longer; Lev. 26, 18 and will punish you in the future still farther. Instead of the infin. with ^ following our verb, as is usual, the former follows occasionally even without^ Gen. 4, 12; 37, 5; or the finite verb too in the same form Gen. 25, 1, Judges 11, 14, Hos. 1, 6, more rarely in another tense, num- ber and form; all being then taken as a collective idea, e. g. Is. 47, 1, where "rfb IN"!)?? stands for Np)?!7V' To heighten still more the adverbial intensifying of the conception in the verb 1)0'', "liy is sometimes added Gen. 37, 5 ; 1 Sam. 18, 29 ; 2 Sam. 3, 34. Sometimes the verb which has to follow "> , is omitted, when it can be supplied from the preceding context. Job 20, 9 the eye sees him and not farther, consec[. (tl'Tl^) tl'^Diri Sibl; in the same manner 34, 32; 38, 11; 40, 5 32; Ex, 11, 6; Num. 11, 25; Deut. 5, 19; 25, 3; Jo. 2, 2; in which sense the formula niOi"i iibi d^Ji'bN !ito3>'' ns I !• I : I- v: R— :r i 1 Sam. 3, 17 and 14, 44 is also to be ex- plained, the latter for nito.b t]''p^"' ilipi. In Is. 11, 11 the verb ti'b^Sb is omitted, the seer having conceived of the first exodus out of Egypt as being already mentioned. — 2. to increase, to give abundantly , with b^ of the person, Ez. 5, 16 / have given you numerous plagues; besides, to do good to, with b of the person Ps. 120, 3; to exceed, to surpass, with by 2 Chb. 9, 6 or bij of the thing 1 Kings 10, 7, and the accusat. of the material in which 1 Ejcnos ibid. ; and so too iri'ipiSl EccLES. 1, 16; to enhance, with b? of the object, Ps. 71, 14 and I enhanced all thy praise, i. e. I praised thee more; then to multiply, enlarge, extend, to make more abundant, more numerous, withb^Ps. 115, 14, EzR. 10, 10, btj Ez. 23, 14, b Is. 26, 15 or accus. of the ob- ject Lev. 19, 25; to augm£nt, with the accus. Peov. 1, 5 ; Job 17, 9 ; Is. 29, 19 ; to become richer, in a thing 2 Kings 19, 30; rtSilSMb "> Job 42, 10 to increase double. Deriv. the proper names C|Di^ P]D> 581 pJ?^ (identical witli rjD'irt^ from Hifil), ln''BD'i\ The noun £)D'' (increaser) in f|D''l;N 1 Chr. 6, 8, SlOjbN Num. 1, 14, does not probably belong here, but to r|i3N. Nif. t|0i3 (^paH. tjD'iS) to he added, •vdth bi> Num. 36, 3; to be appended Jeb. 36, 32; to join oneself, with b^ Ex. 1, 10; to be increased Peov. 11,24. Fart, f. pi. risDia subst. additions, something new , a new mishap Is. 15, 9. Mif. Jj'^piti (throughout the whole perfect; part. f['^Q'i'a; inf. constr. I)''Di!l; fut. ti'^Ov) same as E1&'' in Kal (which see), the two being even interchanged, 1 Kings 10, 7 and 2 Chr. 9, 6; some- times also interchanged with tjDN , with- out having another signification Ex. 5, 7. Deriv. the proper name tl5^!^^ ffof. £)Dlrt (only in fut. t\W) i Sam. 27, 4 K'tib, same as i^Dii. &D'' (increaser) assumed to be in the ' IT T ^ 1 1 proper names t|D''aN, ^10^56}, but see them. 5|D'' {Pe. not used) Aram. tr. = Hebr. Rof. t)D1tl (/m. nBD>ifi) to be added, Dan. 4, 33 [36]. *lD^ (Kal only in the part. 'nD'' ; fut. lOi. after the form ps: Gen. 28, 18, 1S^, therefore with suff. d-iBsj Hos. 10, 10) trans, prop, to bind, to tame, to restrain, connected with 'iDN; 10i being also put in combination with the taming of a bullock (Jer. 31, 18); then to administer discipline, and generally to chastise, to instruct Prov. 9,7; to admonish by reproof Ps. 94, 10, parallel n"'3in; to correct, punish Hos. 10, 10, with an alliteration to b 1DN. Deriv. "IDIM, IDb and IDiH. : I- T IT ' IT I" Usually the Nif. 1013 (imp. 1D|n, fut. IDJ^) to be chastened, instructed, admonished, to allow oneself to be corrected, to be brought to understanding Ps. 2, 10; to learn reproof, to be amended Jer. 6, 8; 31, 18; to be chastised, restrained Prov. 29, 19. Fih. IS'i (part. IB;??; inf. abs. lb;, constr, IB; and il'lS;; imp. 'iS;; fut. •ns;;) to chastise, to punish, with accus. of the object and a of the instrument 1 Kings 12, 11; 2 Che. 10, 11; proceed- ing from God Lev. 26, 18, or from men Prov. 19, 18; figurat. to stir up, to ex- cite Ps. 16, 7, where nib-'b is an adv. of time; to admonish Prov. 9, 7; UBTlJMb '; to admonish to right Is. 28, 26 ; fiS-b? '; to chastise on account of sin Ps. 39, 12 ; to exercise'H.os. 7, 15; ')'a IB; to dissuade from a thing Is. 8, 11. Deriv. 'liB;. Eif. TiO;}! (for T'Difl; fut. T'D^;) to admonish, to threaten, Hos. 7, 12 agree- ably to what is heard . . . will I threaten them. Nithp. 1B|5 (3 p. pi. perf. I*;!!?;?) to be instructed, corrected, Ez. 23, 48, conseq. after the form '1533 (Deut. 21, 8); if we should not read ^I'nD'ii, since no Hithp. of ID'' appears. The organic root of the stem ID"'', which also lies in lO'lS (where are to be found its other comparisons and com- binations), signifies originally to bind, to tame, to restrain, from which funda- mental signification the rest are devel- oped. This connection is still perceptible partly from the different applications of the verb, and partly from 101M and "iDia, so that it cannot be doubted. DD'' belonging to rriBti see nio. |- T tj « J- . ( y (out of US' from ns»''; pi. D'^y) ^IT ^ IVT ITt' ^ I-t' m. a shovel, for removing ashes from the altar Ex. 38, 3; 1 Kings 7, 40; Jer. 52, 18 (Targ., Kimchi). The LXX and many interpreters have wished to ex- plain it otherwise, in consequence of its being put with other utensils; but that is not necessary. VSy; (height, high place, from y^S = Y^ii, Y^'', as from the latter come the names of places Y^^' V???' ^^^ from the cognate in sense SS'', the names »''£>; and n»S''M) 1. n. p. of a place, where the families of the learned or Soferim (D'''nBiD rrinsilSn) dwelt at a later period 1 Chr. 2, 55. It lay probably in Judah, since the Judah- territory alone is spoken of in the whole geo- graphical appendix (1 Che. 2, 42-55) to the 70 descendants of Judah (1 -41). "ly^ 582 r\v^ Hence its identity with yas (Eashi) in Issacharmustbe rejected. — 2. (aShm- ing one viz. is Jah) n. p. of a celebrated family-head of the race of Judah, de- scended from yi)?, and farther back from ^ini^X, viz. from his first wife Ti^hVi, 1 Chb.4:, 9 compared with 4, 5-8. 'The conclusion of the 7* and beginning of the S"" verse may have been: ^nstyrTiS -ntji ii5»-nN n-'bin yijfi iyijjV "■jsniji 'tti 'yayj ■'ii*. n'i^i yj3S>'\ Two verses about the history of this Jabez are in- serted in 1 Che. 4, 9-10, taken from an old source; in which yas^ is derived from aj£5>. '"'" "15?^ I- {fut. ^T^'l) tr- to appoint, to flo!, spoken of a place Jbr. 47, 7, of time 2 Sam. 20, 5; to order, HX^q (the rod of chastisement, i. e. a hostile army) Mic. 6, 9; elsewhere also to ap- point or cite (before a tribunal), on a definite day ; to promise, to determine be- forehand &c. — The organic root 1»-i lies also in 1J> (iw) and IS with a cog- nate fundamental meaning, Ar. o, and is connected with T?; see also Sn^ in. Deriv. TSia 1. Phenic. 1»:; the same; hence Plautus Poen. 1, 9 •iSiS ya it is intelligently appointed, if we should not read 5>li5 ya. Hif. Iiyin {fut. 1''»i"') «o appoint, to cite (before a tribunal), on a certain day Jee. 49, 19; 50, 44; Job 9, 19. Hof.yj^Ti (part. m. pi. ainyiH, /. pi. niiya) to be fixed, appointed, Jbr. 24, 1 ; to be ordered, directed Ez. 21, 21 [16]. li^^ II. {fut. l^''^) tr. 1. to bring to- gether, to coZZeci, congregare, hence til^ 1, TSia; to bind, to unite single parts, hence the proper names M-'ISia, Minsis. — J. Uigur, to marry, i. e. to contract an engagement Ex. 21, 8; to give in mar- riage, with accus. of the woman and b of the person to whom 21, 9. Also ac- cording to the derivatives, to agree, to concert, whence IJJiJi 2 ; to come together, at a place or a definite time, to meet together, hence ISia 3. Nif. 1^13 {fut'.\'SV\) to resort, with accus. of the place to which and b of the person to whom Ex. 25,22; to repair to 29,42 43 (see S»ljlII.); to make ont^s appearance, with bN to one Num. 10, 4; 'S"b? '^'S^'i to gather together against one, to conspire Num. 16, 11, and also to col- lect about one 1 Kings 8, 5 ; 2 Che. 5, 6 ; to agree upon, unite Ps. 48, 5; to join with one another, to gather together, with a Nbh. 6, 2 or bN of the place 6, 10; with the adv. Illrii to agree entirely, fol- lowed by the infin. with b Job 2, 11; to meet Am. 3, 3. Hof. 15»in (not used) to be collected, brought together, united, in a place of refuge; therefore like the passive oftjON to be received. Deriv. !T15>173. The fundamental significations of lyj I. and II. to appoint, to fix and to collect cannot be doubted, both because of the usage of the verbs and their ra- diations in derivatives; and though these ideas can be apparently separated, yet both seem to have united in one primi- tive conception. The organic root n3>"i appears to be connected with that ""in ia II. (page 263), whence Ti-i^, with IS II. (page 270), irx (page 18), Ip-N and in-;j, *lj?"N, *l)p."?, and in numer- ous identical terms in Aram, and Arab. Hence the fundamental signification was to bind, to put together, to unite, to gather together, cognate in sense with Mip &c. From such radical meaning proceeded that of appointing, establishing; the same sense being developed out of other verbs of binding or uniting. On the other hand, ly; I. may be connected with IS and 1.1. 1?i!!> "«• feast, prop, an established time, whence i'^yi and i1S>''. il3?'; (out of ynv/^^ from ns^, which comes from TiSi; born on a festival) n. p. m. 2 Che. 9,^29 K'ri, for which the K'tib has iji:?\ Elsewhere il» and Nils; (which see) from IS with a like sense, stand for it. ''^3?'' see iw. I- : V I : V nyj (only Sp.perf.) tr. to snatch away, to sweep away, to beat away, of hail Is. 28, 17 (Vulg., Saadia, Krmchi &c.), as t\^ia is applied to water; generally, to -iV' 583 ^)V^ put away, to clear away, whence 5*'' (for it)"^); to destroy, whence the nouns iy^ and ■'SI (from nW and niy) in Vni5>^ and 2N''»\ Sif. (not used) Win {fut. InSi'') to snatch away, to destroy, of God; deriv. the noun HSV (snatcher) in the proper name iibssi'', which see. IT " . ' The stem W^ appears to be of the same form and fundamental significa- tion as US J n. (which see), Hart II. (which see), y and i being often interchanged; and also as the Arab, ^-ftj (but which has developed the radical meaning in another direction, to collect, comp. £]DNl and nsD) and ^ju X. (to separate). siS''; see ?Xiy^ (El is snatching away, i. e. a snatcher) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 9, 6; 9, 35 K'tib; 11,44 K'tib; 2 Chr. 26, 11; 29, 13; EzR. 8, 13; for which the K'ri has ^SJ''»'; for the most part. Viy^^ (from y'15>; the Counselling one, viz. Jah is) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 8, 10. -|!i:5'» (forest) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 20, 5 K'tib, for which ^■'y stands in the K'ri. See 'li>\ -r lii'"' (only plur. d'l'n'iJ'^) m. a forest, Ez. 34, 25 K'tib, a collateral form of ^1 (which see). ttjiy^ (a collector, viz. Jah is; from IBW) re.\p. TO. Gen. 36, 18, for which «5"iii stands in K'tib 36, 5 14; 2 Chr. Il|i9; comp.iayi\ li?'' I. (Kal not used) intr. same as iy (TTS*) to ic Aarrf, hold, impudent, shame- less (Targ., Vulg., Syr., Kimchi &c.); part. Nifal TjJii (d?) Is. 33, 19 a people conducting themselves boldly and impu- dently, comp. diis T? ■''15 Dbut. 28, 50, a-iss fy "nba Dan. 8, 23. Its connection with W (n5>) would be explained ac- cordingly, like that of DH"', pbj with an, i?b. But Wii OS stancis in the pas- r ' ' I- IT r "^ aage just cited in relation to "']?.'?? Q^ Insto, Tiiub asb? d?, and the language can be used only of a foreign-speak- ing people. It is better, therefore, with Rashi to take tSiS = TSib = W'b Ps. 114, 1, the foreign -speaking people being regarded as inimical, in the midst of whom one could not feel at home. While the stem T?i is =T?b, we must either read T»i5 = T»'b, or look upon Wii (after the form dmn as a collateral form of dnin) as a collateral form of TSib. See ' ^Nif. Wis see Kal. TJ?'' II. (not used) intr. to command, to determine, to rule, to decide. At. yc. the same, the organic root f?"^ being identical here with t? (to be strong, firm, determined, firmly resolved). Deriv. the noun ts;; in the proper names bN"'TSJ. (abridged bS-'TS) and TPXt^.. •^y'l see T?; il. and bjS "'??.;!., i^,';!!'.^ PS'^Ty (El is the Commanding, Deter- mining one, from T?2 ^.nd bs) n. p. m. 1 Chr 15, 18, for which 15,20 has the abridged bN"'TS:. n^Ty^ (the same) n. p. m. 1 Chr. iT--:i- ^ 24, 26. T'TSJi see 'iTS^r f. :- r:- "iTy"' (a place hedged about, from ITS ; twice liT?^ 1 Chr. 6, 66 and 26, 31) n. p. of a city in Gilead 2 Sam. 24, 5, which was wrested from the Ammonites Num. 21, 32, and allotted to the tribe of Gad 32, 3 35; Josh. 13,25. It was appointed a Levitical city 21, 37 ; 1 Chr. 6, 66. In the times of the great prophets Isaiah and Jeremiah it belonged to Moab, and was celebrated for its wine Is. 16, 8 9 ; Jer. 48, 32. The fruitful district about Jazer, abounding in wine, was called '1 V"1N Num. 32, 1. "i d"! Jer. 1. c. may have been a brook or pool at 1, since a sea of the name is not known to exist; and under d"' Is. 1. c. this pond may likewise be intended. According to Euseb. (Onom. s. v. 'iafije) the place is six hours from "jiailSn, four hours from Tfs.'y, and it stUl existed at the be- ginning of the 14**" centiuy (Estori ha- Farchi). But now there are only ruins there under the name of Szir (Seetzenj CDJ?^ 584 ir p. 430; Burckh. p. 622) ot Seir (Bucking- ham, Syria II. p. 109). A spring Wady Beir rises there, from which perhaps '2 Ql is to be explained. There is also a mountain 'ITS^, which the Targ. calls •nisa (see j! b'hebi'it ch. 9. 3), lying in southern Belka, Ar. G'ibl Asora, 3^2 hours south west of Heshbon, belonging to the Jazer-district. The Phenic. proper name Jader is not IW;; but I'in; (a Glo- rious one, viz. El is). CDjy^ (only 3 pers. perf. with suff. ijuy) tr. same as TitiS I. to cover, to clothe, with a double accus. Is, 61, 10. terhaps ''ipS'] is a mixed form of the perf. and imperf. Kal from rtB5> I. COy^ (part. !35|;, pZ. with swjf. ''fibS'^ Aram, trans, same as Hebr. ys'', prop, to maAe firm, hence to determine, to form a determination. Part, counsellor Ezr. 7, 14 15. Deriv. NUS. IT" Ithpa. B»"inN to consult together, to come to a united resolution Dan. 6, 8, = Hebr. yvja Ps. 83, 6. ''»'] see PN'^i?'] (same asb^Wj) n.p.m.lGsR. 5, 7;' 15,' 18; 2 Chr.'35,"9; Ezr. 10, 43; and elsewhere in the K'ri. "T'J?'' (an inhabitant of the forest) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 20, 5 K'tib, for which the K'ri has IS'S^; and 2 Sam. 21,19 ■»'ns>i. I r' ' I— :r Ujiyi see i25lJ>\ r : I : 13r;i (from'lp» = 'nSSr; afflicting) n. p. m. 1 Che. 5, 13. ^J?"* (Kal not used) intrans, same as {lbs (which see) 1. to ascend, to climb (a mountain), applied to the goat, the chamois, or also men; Ar. J^j the same. Deriv. b^j 1 and 3, ilbsi 1, the proper bame Db:?\ — 2. to be prominent, to be conspicuous, of a mountain, J^« the same. Deriv. the proper name hsi 2. — 3. Fig. to be high, to have worth, to be profitable, useful, to be mentally promi- nent as it were, a cognate sense exist- ing in Thy also. Deriv. bs»'' in Vy^ba, 4he proper name MbSji. (n^?.;!)- Hif. b-'^irt (part. m. h-^pli; fut. b-'^i"') to be of use, to serve (cognate in sense 15D), with a of the thing Job 15,3, or absol., ancL "^S in the apodosis 21,15; with b Jer. 23, 32 or the accus. of the person Is. 57, 12; >ib''5?"-> ■'nirtlp Job. 30, 13 they help my fall, comp. Zech. 1, 15 W'nb 'nTS>; to have value Jer. 16, 19, IT T I l-T ' ■JM b''^1!l to be of mare use than , to be mare advantageous than. Job 35, 3 ; "iib b''J?'i'i an idol, Jer. 2, 8. In modern Hebrew the deriv. nb5>in use. VIS. ^y^_ (from b?; 3, or from Inb^, like ■jy; fro™ ™5>) m. height, in a concrete sense ; figur. worthiness, height, eiecellence, in the compound b^^ba (which see). P5>i (only in signif. 1. plur. '0,'h'S^I, constr. ■'bS''.; from b?"!) m. 1. properly a climber, hence a chamois, which climbs rocks or high mountains Job 39, 1 ; Ps. .104, 18. The rocks of the wild goats 1 Sam. 24, 3 were situated in the desert of En-gedi. Ar. J^., J*^ the same. — 2. (a prominent one, figur. a prince, as in Arab.) n. p. m. of a judge otherwise unknown, to whom there is a reference in Judges 5, 6. — 3. (chamois) n. p. f. of a Kenite woman Jxjdges 4, 17 18; 5, 24. i<^yi see fib5>'' 2. IT -:i- iT-a- MbS'' (constr. Th~)f. 1. same as by 1- IT -:r '* , '" ^ Prov. 5, 19, hence ']'n TOV^ chamois of grace, a flattering address to a woman. — 2. (elevation) n. p. m. Ezr. 2, 56, for which Neh. 7, 58 has sbS"'. D j3J1 (frombsi with the termination IT : - ^ "I" Q-, the ending a- or ■)- being also found in other stem-names of the Edomites, e. g. in !an5>5, DMin, dais, QuSn, DT^y ° IT : -' IT •• ' IT ' IT 1 ' IT • &c. ; ascender of the mountains) n. p. m. of an Edomite Gen- 36, 5 14, the head of a race. ?j^^ (not used) intr. same as !13^ I. in its variety of significations: 1. to howl^ to complain, to screech complainingly ^ of animals of the desert, prop, to raise a. cry (as !iD5> I. is used of a rejoicing cry Jer. 51, 14 or a shout of victory, jr 585 njyi Ex. 32, 18, of a howling complaint Is. 13, 22, of a Boag of praise and re- sponse Ex. 15, 21 ; 1 Sam. 21, 12). Deriv. )in, n53>1 (which see). — 2. to utter, say, teach aloud, clearly, openly; of God, to hear, this second meaning being also unfolded in Msy with great varieties. Deriv. ^y^ and the proper name ''i^.V In the organic root )S"^, also found in Ti-iSL, 11-53, )i-i, l)j^&c., the signi- fications follow one another in the way now given; sagen and singen being also connected in German. I?"* (prop- /"J""*- "*.; only in jjZ. D'^SS'; Lament. 4, 3 K'ri) m. the ostrich Lament. 4, 3 K'ri, prop, a screeching, lamenting animal of the desert {KimcM, whom Auri- villius, Oedmann &c. follow) ; and in real- ity, the ostrich has become proverbial for its screeching, doleful cry (Mic. 1, 8 ; Job 30, 29); as the Samar. version puts NIT>S3> ni3 for n55>«M T\%. In like man- T '-: - : iT-:r - r ner, the other name of the ostrich, DiJS'n {screech, the plural form denoting the abstract) Job 39, 13, and the Ar. name \\jti\ for the female ostrich point to the etymology given. The K'tib reads i3 d''iy, for they are screechers (ostriches) of the desert. ■jj'^ (from lyi 2, or from the syno- nymous ti3»I., whence also ^Vis, just as bV and ly may be referred to 'rtby and -r -r •' IT T !T15>) m. an exact account, an exact ex- pression, given according to purpose, aim, intent, attestation (in a judicial sense), proof, i. e. correspondence to judicial investigation, the act of having in view, by means of utterance (see !135>); therefore plan, aim, intent, ^?M and M?5>a also proceeding from the idea of answer, correspondence (the answer corresponding to the question). Hence 1. a preposition: on account of, propter, i. e. where a result corresponds to a past cause, with a noun following Ez. 5, 9: in-ia "> Hagg. 1, 9 on account of my house (which lies waste); !T3 '2 "ra account of what? Hagg. 1. c; followed by an infin. with the suffix Is. 30, 12 because of your despising, where isb stands in the apodosis at the introduc- tion of the conclusion or consequence 30, 13, as 'jjDb also follows in the case of signif. 2. 29,13 14; Jer. 23, 38 39; Ez.5, 7 10; 13, 8. Sometimes as a conjunct, because (see signif. 2) with the finite verb it is omitted in the course of the sentence, and must be repeated Is. 37, 29 ; but usually the apodosis of con- secution is introduced by the finite verb merely Jek. 7, 13 14; 48, 7. — 2. A conjunction, although, albeit, Ez. 5, 7 although ye have become richer (lIMtl) than the nations round about you, yet Accordingly it forms together with the apodosis the ground of a result, because, eo quod, quia, with the relative TiBN. following, always at the beginning of a clause or a new address; while l^wb with 'IfflN following, expresses the aim itself Gen. 22, 16; Deux. 1, 36; also with 13 following Num. 11,20, 1 Kings 13,21, which is sometimes omitted Num. 20, 12. The perfect always follows Is. 3, 16, and in the apodosis of consequence or consecution 13b or "isbl sometimes 'i"T 'i"T : stands 8, 6 7; 29, 13 14, which is also frequently omitted. It is occasionally doubled in solemn judicial style: ^1 1?2?1 because yea because Lev. 26, 43; Ez. 13, 10; 36, 3; once with the imperf. following Ez. 44, 12, where 13-by stands in the apodosis. — 3. in order that, so that, ut, with the imperf., Ez. 12, 12 he shall cover his face that he may not see the land with his eyes; elsewhere ISttb stands instead of it (Gen. 18, 19). — 4. {singing, playing, the pipe, applied to the Phenic. god 'Jl judge, ruler, who is also called fSl bi'a, corresponding to the Pan of the Greeks) re. p. an epithet of Baal or Dan playing on the pipe, therefore in the proper name ']»"' ■j'l 2 Sam. 24, 6. See 11 4. '' ' ilDS"' (after the form nb5>^ from 1i>\ prop, howl, cry) f. the ostrich, always coupled with na, plur. niia, because tlSS'^ alone expresses nothing but the abstract idea of a doleful cry. The ostrich is represented as dwelling in waste places Is. 13, 21; 34, 13; 43, 20; ••Jr 586 Y)r Jer. 50, 39, wailing and awfully crying Mic. 1, 8, Job 30, 29; and is reckoned among the unclean animals Lev. 11,16; Deut. 14, 15. The Targ. has for it Na5>.3 , Nnia5»3 , the Syr. V:^, Ar. *L«S and sjolJu, a word which is also in the Talmud, and comes from d!?3, ^iaiJ to utter a wailing cry, Ar. |vJu = a,xj to utter melancholy sounds. ^^V' (answerer, i. e. hearer, viz. Jah is) n. p. m. 1 Che. 5, 12. 64;/w<.:]y"ii, t]^5^, S^.^jZ. »|S3»1, in pause IBi*^, isy^) intr. to be weary, faint, to eaiert or fatigue oneself. Is. 40, 28 30 31, coupled with ^Ji, as in German lass und matt, matt und miide, in English faint and weary; oppos. to be vigorous, powerful, strong. The being fatigued is conceived of as arising from active exertion, internal weakness, exhausting walking or running Is. 1. c, Jer. 2, 24; p'^V'^'ia 'J Hab. 2, 13 to he weary in vain; fflN-^t!? "I Jee. 51, 58 to he wearied for the fire (where the Vau must be erased); then to faint, with thirst Is. 44, 12 (as also qps), to he exhausted, with hunger (see t]3>j) ; figur. to perish Jer. 51, 64; to yearn for (consolation), see E)SJ. Deriv. r]3>j, and according to some Hof. i^^Ti (only part. m. ^$12) to he wearied, exhausted, Dan. 9, 21 exhausted with a wearisome course, i. e. with haste (Ihn Esra, and perhaps the LXX). See The organic root ri^-j lies also in r]S» (Ci«i5») 1 Sam. 14, 28 3l" (to be exhausted or faint, with hunger) and in tj-jy; and the fundamental idea seems, as'^in the stems MU3>, quy, t^v (which see), to proceed from that of veiling, covering, enwrapping, according to a usual figure; so that the other meanings in ri»i, l)is>, £)» are clearly connected; Ar. i_ie.IV. to walk wearily. SIS' J (j>lur. a"'Syj; from );i5|j) adj. m. wearied, faint, spoken of a hard pursuit Judges 8, 15; suhst. a weak, powerless one Is. 40, 29, faint 2 Sam. 16, 2; in a spiritual sense Is. 40, 4. Phenic. tj^y"' = tl3>J (Kit. 23, 2) weak with old age. nJ?T (transposed from i*aj; Kal not used) intrans. 1. to shine, to glitter, this sense being usual in ys'', nsi. Deriv. ° I-t' ITT t\V\ — 2. Figurat. to be high, i. e. to shine or appear at a distance; comp. 05 II., 5»BJ, 1^5N &o. where the same metaphor, transference appears. Hof. t\^T\ (only part, m.) to shine, to glitter, Dan. 9, 21 shining in splendour. Hif ^-^pTl (= S'^Bin; not used) to make to shine forth, to make appear, figurat. to he very high. Deriv. npsjin (which see). t|3J'; (from r|»; after the form 1p^) m. splendour, glitter, Dan. 9, 21. The LXX, Vulg., Syr. and Kim^hi, Ibn Esra &c. have derived the noun from tiyi. y5?J {part. m. ysv, part. f. with suf. ■inayi;i; part. pass. f. InsiW:; fut. ys>-^) tr. 1. to make firm, to establish, to sup- port, since the organic root yy-i is identical with that in rt-lW I. (whence y?a), only that the latter is intrans. (to be strong, hard); comp. Ar. ■^'- and \jas- (to be firm, strong), Syr. 1^ (the same), and the Hebrew W (TW), Arab. V*) T^-J I. to walk along quickly &c., but especially 1?-;. Prom this we can explain the signification to fasten, i. e. to make fast, y^S (the look), upon one ('B-b?), Ps. 32, 8' / will fasten mine eyes upon thee, as the Targ., LXX and Vulg. already understood it. The stems, Tar- gumic USJ, Ar. iii^ (to admonish, to advise), ja^ (to decide), JlI; (to sup- port), are concentrated in the Hebr. ys*-'. — 2. Figur. to resolve firmly, to decide, absol. Is. 14, 24 27; Mic. 6, 5; followed by the infin. with b Ps. 62, 5; 2 Che. 25, 16 ; oftenest with the accus. of the object, as rriWT Is. 32, 7, nas 8, 10, y;;-nay Ez. ii, 2, n^'i Is. 7, sV'with by 19, 12, Jee. 49, 30 oVb» of the person YV' 587 ^y^ against whom one determines 49, 20; to bring on, to bring about, to prepare, to ground, with accus. of the object and b of the person Hab. 2, 10; Prov. 12, 20. — 3. to counsel, with accus. of the person and of the thing 2 Sam. 17, 15, or in the sense of ewhorting, with accus. of the person Ps. 16, 7, parall. to ID"'; to advise, TTSS 2 Sam. 17, 7, with b? against one 17,21, or b for one Job 26, 3, or also with accus. of the person Ex. 18, 19, 1 Kings 1, 12; or the object is ex- pressed in a special clause 2 Sam. 17, 11. Even in this sense, the language does not refer to pondering on all sides of a question; but it is a mental urgency and support, which is closely connect- ed with the fundamental signification. Hence ys'' as an official designation, counsellor, mentioned along with kings, judges &c. Is. 1, 26; 19, 11; Mic.4,9; 1 Chk. 27, 32, or with other supporters of the state Is. 3, 3 ; spoken of one who can always determine wisely and there- fore firmly, by his possessing wisdom; and so it is a q^uality of the future offspring of David, the Messiah Is. 9, 5 ; comp. Tjba to determine, to advise, whence '^573 (which see). Seldom to counsel generally 2 Chr. 22, 3. Deriv. nJty, iiasb. Phenic. W"' t^e same, IT" ' IT" I ' -T ' hence yin a royal counsellor (Kit. 33, 4), imp. yy with b of the person (Trip. 2, 1). Nif. y»ia (jiart. m. y^ii, pi. n-'Ssia; fut. ysy\) to consult, with one, 'STlN Is. 40, '14, or 'S d» 1 Cheon. 13, 1, seldomer 'fe"bN in the sense to give onSs decision to a person (for the pur- pose of judging it) 2 Kings 6, 8; to admonish, the people 2 Chr. 20, 21; a denom. from ap5» ' ' 'rr 'l"T heel, comp. Hos. 12, 4; a cunning one, a deceiver, according to Gen. 27, 36; but the name seems to be derived, more correctly, from ap_5' meaning to be after, to follow, denoting successor, one born after; comp. the proper name ai)?5>, Ar. i^ '" ^yAS. successor) n. p. m. of the famous Jewish patriarch and progenitor, also called bs'niB'; (which see), whose life and fortunes are described in Gen. 25, 26- ch. 49. Hence it is used for .the whole Jewish people Num. 23, 7 ; Deut. 32, 9 ; Is. 27, 6; Jee. 10, 25; Am. 6, 8 &c.; ai?y^ii in the Jewish people Gen. 49, 7, retaining the image of Jacob's person- ality Is. 44, 1; Ob. 10; poet, for '1 in this sense '^ nia Is. 2, 5, 'I 3>'nt 45,' 19, '■1 ■'5a 1 Kings 18, 37, '1 nbfip De'ijt. 33, 4. In the same sense should also be taken '■< Ti'bN Ex. 3, 6 and '^ T'SN Ps. 132, 2 of the God of Israel ; and in Ps. 24, 6 mss., the LXX, Syr. read 'I ■'rt'biSt; see also DMiaN , ptiSt'; with the same usage. Elsewhere it is used for the kingdom of the ten tribes Is. 9, 7 ; 17, 4 ; Mic. 1,5; and after its destruction, for the whole kingdom of Judah Nah. 2, 3; Ob. 18. — Probably it was owing to reverence for the name that it was never given to another person during the life of the Hebrew language; just as diTnas and pn^'; too, never appear as the names of other persons. nnby (from apJ''' with a of motion, T li~;r ^ 'i-;r to Jacob, i. e. reckoned; comp. Mbs'lTBN, 1 Chr. 25, 2, SibNIlIJi 25, 14 to ^AsareL ' ' T I" : - : ' ' to Jesharel) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 4, 36. The form of proper names with an accent- less rt- appended, did not originate till a later period of the language. 'ip?.1 (from Ip.y =bp5> ; a Sagacious, In- telligent one, viz. Jah is) n. p. m. of an Edomite chief 1 Chr. 1, 42, one ip» also appearing among the dukes of Edom (Gen. 36, 27). The whole race bore the name of "' ■'23 Num. 33, 31 , which be- came also the name of a pasture in the wilderness, where many springs existed Deut. 10, 6. ly^ (not used) intr. same as rt'iJ* IIL T^T ^ ' ITT ^V" 588 nyi (whence ninj> and perhaps !TTi*.53) and n5> n. (Iiy , -whence lyiy 2 and'l'yiny 2) to sprout thickly, to grow, to grow green, particularly applied to the thick branches of a forest intertwined with one an- other, or to the bushes of a forest; cog- nate in sense aaN (page 6), Aram. a^N., whence NSN forest; in like manner iB"int. (to grow green, to grow), whence 123'nn forest, rrin, whence n^n forest. Deriv, '1?,!) ^'2^1t TiS';, the proper names iny.!, r I ' ' T 'ir'' (from l^i or TlISi ID..: with a of -r ^ l-T ITT ' motion tTlS*;'., with suff. iiy^, ^-\S1; pi. fi'i'iy';) TO. sprouts, a thicket, i. e. a thick plantation of trees, in a garden or park EccLBS. 2, 6, ba'13 'l a thick garden- wood 2 Kings 19' 23, 'is. 37, 24, of the thick, richly-planted places of Lebanon. Usually a forest, where there is a growth of wild trees, in opposition to bM^iB Is. 29, 17, in which sense Qias are specially marked Is. 7, 2 ; 44, 23 ; Ps. 96, 12; where a fruit-tree seldom grows Song op Sol. 2, 3; whose wood is better for use than that of the vine Ez. ch. 15 ; where the wild beasts dwell Ps. 50, 10, Is. 56, 9, Am. 3, 4, and which is sel- dom traversed Deut. 19, 5. ^s^jn ■'sao Is. 9, 17 and 10, 34 the thickets of the forest, which IS'' means also by itself. T^Jtan 'i the steep Lebanon- forest , situated on the highest summit Zech. 11, 2. Then a wilderness covered with shrubs, Is. 21, 13 ye caravans of the Dedanites, ye must lodge at evening (^'TS.a = S'lSa) in the wilderness covered with shrubs, instead of in the accustomed places of shelter; generally a wilderness, Hos. 2, 14 (parall. ■^nto Is. 56, 9); '1 niaa Mic.S, 12 wUder- ness-hills. Figurat. a thick, wood- like mass, e. g. 'oj2 n^a Is. 22,8, elsewhere lisaV^i ',! n-ia 1 Kings 7, 2 and 10, 17 21 forest-house of Lebanon, a great armoury built by Solomon at Jerusalem, so called either because its pillars were made out of cedars, or because it "was erected of cedar- wood; with which, however, pidBln Neh. 3, 19 is not iden- tical. Still further, a city thickly stud- ded with houses Jer. 21, 14; a forest of men 46, 23; a strong, thick, warlike army Is. 10, 18 19 33; 32, 19; as|rt '^_ Ez. 21, 3 or :353 miBrt "i 21, 2 forest of ' viv IV T - r J ' ' the south, forest of the field in the south, i. e. the thick population of Judah (:iA3 is the south of Palestine generally, poet, the kingdom of Judah ; tTib poet, land, like !T3'1N. 21, 7). — In 'this appella- tive sense pi. D"''n5>'; (viz. IT''!)?, city of forests, forest-town) n. p. of a city on the border between Judah and Ben- jamin Josh. 9, 17; 18, 15; Judges 18, 12, formerly called nbsa 15, 9 or n'^lp 3»a Josh. 15, 60, elsewhere also ')5 Qi^S^rt Jee. 26, 20, abridged V^'iV 1? EzE. 2, 25, or n'pp_ alone Josh. 18,^28. Poetic. 1?; ilto '{fields of the forest) stands once for a"''iy^ n;;'!)? (comp. 1 Sam. 7, 1 &c.) Ps. 132, Q. — MetapL a thicket of reeds, where the wild bees abide, and which they cover with honey 1 Sam. 14, 25 (where UJa'^ should be supplied be- fore ^Ti); honey-copse, while IBS'! ri'W'^ 14, 27 is a single honey-shrub, Targ. i«p. — ■'il5ai-D5> ■'lyi Song op Sol. 5, it'- r : • • I- : - ' 1 poetically for ">'n5>2 ^5'7' On tte noun comp. the Ar. transposed cl^ and c.o a thicket of reeds, a shrubbery of rushes, -ftj a forest-like, rugged place (whence the denom. ^^l to be difficult of access), Syr. Ir^li* a thorn-thicket for the Hebr. fflN'l, TiMia and n^t;5 , Targ. IS'iSf myrica, Arab. lO^j^ thom-bushes, &c., whence the connection of the senses comes out clearly. Phenic. 'W^ wood. my;](pi.ni'i^V) after the form nsba) f 1. same as 1»^" forest Ps. 29, 9," of the forests of Lebanon and Sirion. — 2. same as 1?^ in a metaphor, sense, honey-twig 1 Sam. 14, 27. — 3. (from !T15>I.; unveiler, viz. Jah is) n. p. m. 1 Shr. 9, 42, for which 8, 36 has !^^?iJ7''. (which see). '''151. {inhabitant of the forest, de- rived from ^tz') "• P' 'n. 2 Sam. 21, 19, where D'^a'nk came up out of the follow- ing line, in consequence of which '^'IV.1 was read. For this name, Tii>'^ stands Dni*^ 589 1D^ in K'tib 1 Che. 20, 5, the K'ri having D'^IS'] as a proper name see 1»\ fi3"n3Ji {constr. tt5^", a noun from the fut. Hi£' of ilj'ny, Ar. q«^ IL, to settle, to abide; hahitation-giver) m. only in tT'UJ'lS'' (Jah is the procurer of a IT : v-jr ^ . habitation i. e. a home-giver) n. p. m. IChr.8,27; see ilSp?.;! and ilSpy. ntoy^ (from JliSS) m. maMng. It is a noun formed from the fut., existing in the proper names "^ioyi, ito^.\ iiBS 1 (= 'J'iiBS'.l maker, viz. Jah is) w. p. m. Eze! 10, 36 K'ri, for which the K'tib has '^^Jl (which see). itoi^'i' (abridged from !l»«?»!, -^a^ w the making one) Ezr. 10, 36 K'tib, for which the K'ri has iiasv itojjh (=ntosi.) see bs'^toy'' (El is a creating one) n. p. of one of David's heroes 1 Chr.11,47, called niaitan = iniasMin, i. e. sprung from a ITT I : - . I- TIT . : - ' V '^ . city M^aaa (which see); oomp. ssnias. msi (liberator) m. Hence iT^'ID'' (Jah is freer) n. p. m. 1 Che. 8,25Vcomp. IsNlTllS, n;;'!?, W-- nS^ (2 p. fern, n-is;; MttS''^, ap.tl''j) intr. same as i>S"i (comp. MS J I. and ?a J , iL».j) S"' , Tare. 5>S whence the re- r T ' I o IT dupl. ys?B, Ar. Li-i. (to shine, glitter, y being changed into thei-sound), ^-J (eminuit) ; and the Sanskr. bha (to sHne), the Greek qtS, (in ifaipsiv, (fd-og, con- tracted cpmg) &c. is the same root. The Ar. ^i (to be perfect, to be complete) may have also come from it. nS'' (constr. MB';) adj. m., MBJ (constr. ns'; ; pi. niB'' , constr. n'lB';) f 1. beautiful, applied to the form of men Song or Sol. 1, 16, 2 Sam. 14, 25, and women Gen. 12, 14, 1 Kings 1, 3; usually with the addition of 'nsn Gen. 39, 6, Dbut. 29, 17 or TVA^ii 1 Sam. 17, 42 , Gen. 29,17; even to animals Gen. 41, 2 18. Used also of single members of the human body 1 Sam. 16, 12, or of inanimate things Ez. 31, 3; agreeable 33, 32. — 2. high, overtopping, of Cj'ii (a hill) Ps. 48, 3. — 3. Figurat. suitable Eccles. 3,11, useful, excellent 5, 17. ''S"nB'' (after the last two radicals are reduplicated to shew that the idea is made stronger, the adjective-ending is regularly formed as in i^3, ''3S, ''t'n) adj. m., TPS-TtSl (which alone occurs) f. very beautiful, well-looking, of nbsS (cow)|; a figure of Efypt Jbr. 46, 20, as its god is called T^aN (bullock. Apis) 46, 15 (which the gloss of the LXX and Theo- doret have here already). iB'' (once N'lBi Eze. 3,7 according to I T ^ • T ^ , a later orthography, comp. IBi? with NIBN; high-town, i. e. which projects to a height above the sea) n. p. of an old (Plin. 5, 14) Philistine maritime city on «1D^ 590 yD^ the Mediterranean Sea, at the border of Dan, but belonging to ni25bB Josh. 19, 46, a port in Solomon's time 2 Chr. 2, 15 (comp. 1 Kings 5, 23), but especi- ally celebrated as such in the Per- sian period Ezh. 3, 7. In the Maccabean ■penoiJapko was taken by Simon(l Maco. 14, 5) ; and from the time of Jonathan (ibid. 10, 76) it was recovered by the Israelites. It lies 150 stadia from An- tipatris (Josephus, Antt. 13, 15, 1), six miles west of Eama (Abulf.), and above ten hours from Jerusalem; at the west end of the mountain-road. After under- going manifold fortunes since the time of the Macabees, it is still called by the Arabs ULj (Jafa) or LftJ {Jaffa), by the Syrians -^so* i/opi), in Greek (after the Syriac form) 'Jonri or 'lonTztj ; which names all come from the Hebrew form (^BJ , iBJ or ■'Sj). The Phenician pro- nunciation may have been NSi (= 'nsi) ; and Strabo already describes it as being sv v''S'' (hill-place, from 5>Bi) l.n. p. of a place in Zebulon Josh. 19, 12, ac- cording to Eusebius the city Syhaminos (n3ia)?ti Baba Bathra 119^), which, as Josephus already states, lay upon the Mediterranean Sea in the vicinity of ba"!? between iSS and Caesarea (l"""!!?)?), and was called 'Hqsd in his time. But though not exactly identical with Sy- kaminos, it was situated in the very neighbourhood, and is the same that is called in Arab. LajL=» Chaifa {Golius on Alpharag. p. 132), in Tahnudic InBin (Sabb. 26»), in Pliny (5, 18) Jebba (Jeba), different from Sykaminos. — 2. (distinguished) n. p. m. in Phenician Josh. 10, 3, as well as in Hebrew 2 Sam. 5,15; 1 Chr. 3, 7; 14,6. obS^ (a deliverer, viz. Jah is) 1. n.p, m. 1 Che. 7, 32; comp. •'tibs, bN''£?bB and STitpbE). — 2. (place of refuge) n. p. of a place, perhaps identical withubs iT'a (which see); and hence the Patron. "'Esbs^ one belonging to Japhlet Josh. 16, 3, ?D"' adopted for the noun V?^! ^^^ see J]in. ilDS'' (a noun from the fiit. Puhal of flSS; prop, who becomes visible, an ap- pearing one , viz. Jah is) n. p. m. Num. 13, 6; 1 Chk. 7, 38. JJD^ I. (Kal not used) intr. prop, same as tlB'i 1. to shine, to glitter, to appear, whence !i5>B'; ; metaphor, to appear, i. e. to become visible; applied to persons, to be distinguished. Deriv. S'^B"' 2. — 2. to appear afar off, to be prominent , of lo- calities, i. e. to be situated high. Deriv. the proper names ?''B'' 1, n?BiM, nysiM; perhaps riBSin also, transposed from VQ^ 591 i^!ii r^Bin, should be referred to it; see too rsia. Comp. Ar. iJu in both senses, «ii to be high. Sif. ?"'S?iri (fut. Sf'S'ii) 1. same as I'^iX'ri to cause to shine, "^iV ^iN (lightning) Job 37, 15, with b? upon a thing 3,4. On Job 10, 22 see'i>B:; 11. — 2. to appear, to come to (as also fTnT) Dbxjt. 82, 2; Ps. 50, 2 ; 94, 1. — 3. Tigur. to enlighten, i. e. to favour, with b? of the object Job 10, 3. J^C n. (Kal not used) tr. to envelop, to veil, connected in its organic root 5>pSJ with n-sn. Hif. S''Birt ifut. ap. i>Bi) to envelop, to veil. Job 10, 22 and it (yis) vdls like darkness , i. e. this land of Sheol veils in deepest darkness. nyS'' f. splendour, beauty, majesty Ez. 28, 7 17. nD^ (not used) tr. to select, to mark out, proceeding from the idea of sepa- rating, splitting (cognate in sense Nbs); particularly to make into something ex- traordinary, distinguished, wonderful. The organic root ns— i would accord- ingly be that in 13, riB (which see) &c. Derivat. the noun nSTO; the partly cognate Nb? ^^^ *^^ Aramaean Nffl'''lS, (iiB'i'ns proceeding from the same view. But see nsia. riB'^. (formed out of riB;^, fut. apoc. Hif. of !ins, after the analogy of sego- late nouns; extender, spreader, viz. Jah is, the Scripture itself Gen. 9, 27 point- ing to this derivation) re. p. of the third son of tlb Gen. 6, 10; 10, 1; afterwards represented in the ethnogra- phical table as the most distinguished next to QTB 9, 27; 10, 2 21. In that table Gen.' 10, 2-5 Japhet is given as the progenitor of 14 peoples, to which are added the inhabitants of the lands (10, 5) washed by the sea; so that geo- graphically the name comprehends all Europe, Asia Minor, with the exception of the south of Taurus and of Asia be- tween the Black and Caspian seas. As to the name, it has been brought into connexion with 'lanstog of the Greek my- thology {Bochart, Geogr. sacra; ffasse, Entdeckungen II. p. 131), and explained accordingly(5Mitearera,Mythol.I.p.222), or with other parts of the Greek myth. But such comparisons are very insecure ; and if we take the passage Gen. 9, 27 not as an explanation but a bare as- sonance, nsi may be derived from fiB"' ' VIV <^ ITT (after the form nb'l, nC3) denoting the white -coloured race distinguished for its beauty; after the analogy of fin and filB. In modem Hebrew the pro- per name (mLwujs* (beauty) Hassan was translated by it. PlFlS'' (from tins; a breaker through, i. e. causing to bear, viz. Jah is, if it be not abeady in itself an epithet of the supreme deity, like the Egyptian Ptah and Phenic. Pataik from the same stem) 1. n.p. m. Judges 11, 12; 1 Sam. 12, 11 ; Greek 'Jscf&ds. — 2. re. p. of a place in Judah Josh. 15, 43. ^NTiriB'] (.El is a begetter) re. p. of a valley on the borders of Asher and Zebulon Josh. 19, 14 27. It is conjec- tured to be the present Jefdt (Robinson, new Bibl. Eesearches p. 135 sec[.)- t^if^ (once, with the elision of N , TiSti ITT ^ ' ■ ITT Job 1, 21; inf. abs. itSi, constr. riNS con- tracted from nxa; imp. NS, with a of motion InNtt Judges 9, 29, pi. f. inS'^Ni? Song of Sol. 3,11, because with rt3''N'i ; part. m. NSi"', f. niJJt'' Ps. 144, 14 or nJtii Deut. 28, 57 or NK'-' out of HNS'' I" ' IT IT : I EccLES. 10, 5; fut. Nit';) intr. 1. express- ing self-activity, to go out, to go forth, from a place, oppos. N2i , usually a) with yiz of the place whence Gen. 8, 19, Job 3,11, yet also (comp. the Latin egredi urbem) with the accus.Ex.9,29, 2Kings 20, 4, therefore in the participial con- struction T^Sn ■'NSt'' Gen. 32, 23 those r T 1" : . going out of the city, MSnli iNa']' 9, 10, l^ia ■'NS't 34, 24. In going out of a door or gate, the place is usually joined with a (through), because it is also a going 'through, Jer. 17, 19, Neh.2,13, but also with 153 JbdgesH.SI, and with the accus. of the object Job 30, 24 ; Gen. «i:^ 592 t^Ji^ 34, 26. — b) without regard to place, expressing mere agency, hence absol. Gen. 24, 11; Ex. 16, 4; Judges 3, 24. To b) belongs the signification to walk, where also no stress is laid upon the act of going out; with accus. whither, Am. 4, 3 and ye shall go to the breaches; 'a ■''i™ '; to follow 2 Sam. 11, 8; to go out to war Is. 42, 13: 'S "^asb "^ to march before, to war 1 Sam. 8, 20; nN"!)?? "> to go to meet Job 39, 21 &c..; 'S-iij '^ to come to one 18.36,16; to travel, in order to trade Deut. 33, 18 ; to go out free, of slaves Ex. 21, 3, fully lUJBn '; 21, 5 or i^JDnb "i 21, 2 ; Nlf even of inanimate r : T r T ' ' it r things, which revert free to their first possessors Lev. 25, 28. — 2. to go away, to go forth, from a person, construed with d5>a Ex. 8, 26, riNM 5, 20, vbV? Gen. 41, 46, Esth. 8, 15, with little 'dis- tinction in the meaning, according as the being with one is expressed by DS , "nN or i3sb. Going away from God stands with ''35ba Gen. 4, 16, i3S nisa Job 2, 7, seldom with the accus. in the meaning to forsake Jek. 10, 20. — 3. Me- taphor, in a variety of applications as to withdraw, remove, with ya from Is. 49, 17 (pai-aU. pn-n 49, 19); Jer. 43, 12; Lament. 1, 6; to march off, with the accus. of time 2 Kings 11, 7 9; to wan- der forth, absol. Ps. 144, 14, with a to a place Jek. 29, 16 and "jW whence, "but also generally to wander, to go, with ya whence and bN whither Jee. 9, 2; 25,32; to go to hunt 1 Sam. 17, 35; to go to till the fields Ps. 104, 23 ; to go forth, from the mother's womb, to be bom. Gen. 25, 25; 38,28, frequently with the addition of Vd|n Job 1,21, di? laaa 3,11, Dn'nM Jer. i, 5; seldom D^bs'n 'j-'Sa Deut. '28, 57; of animals, with 'ffl'lisa Is. 14, 29; to arise, with ■)?? {out of) Job 38, 29; to spring from, to be begotten, with 's la^na GBN.35,ll,':j'nj.a 46,26, •'S^aa 15, 4, once '? ijatt Is.ls, 1, the pro- genitor being elsewhere compared to a spring (Prov. 5, 16 18; Ps. 68,27); to proceed Gen. 10, 11 ; 17, 6 ; 1 Che. 2, 53 ; to go out, from prison Eccles. 4, 14, distress Peov.12,13, danger Jee. 11, 11, slavery 2EliNGS 13, 5, i.e. to be liberated, sometimes with T' rilnriJj; to escape,-viWb. accus., an evil Eocles. 7, 18 ; to go forth, by lot 1 Sam. 14,41, from trial Job 23, 10; 'B TUBS, ib '1 to go out, of the mind of a person Gen. 42, 28; Song op Sol. 5, 6 ; to proceed from, grow, sprout, bloom, of plants 1 Kings 5,13; Job 14, 2; to Jfiar Deut. 14,22; to grow out, of a horn Dan. 8, 9; to appear, become visible, of the sun Gen. 19, 23, the stars Nbh. 4, 15, the morning-dawn Hos. 6, 3, figur. of salvation IS. 51, 5 ; to move along, to move down, of fire Num. 26, 35, lightning Ez. 1, 13, wind Zech. 6, 5; to gush out Ex. 17, 6, comp. D^M NXia; to be drawn, of lots Josh. 16, 1, with b of the per- son; to be shot, of an arrow Zech. 9,14; to be brought out of, of wares 1 Kings 10, 29 (comp. N^ia vs. 28); to spend, pay away, with b? for a thing 2 Kings 12, 13; to run on, to extend, to pass on, of a boundary Num. 34, 9 ; Jer. 31,39; to project, of b'=isa , with pa out of Nbh. 3, 25; with 'lai to bring forth words, to speak Is. 6, 10; to speak forth ^ to com- mand Esth. 7, 8; to promise Is. 45, 23; to issue, of a decision Ps. 17, 2; to flow out Judges 13, 14, and so in the same manner other applications. Deriv. t»"'S"' , (T ' IT T ( ' V !■.• ZTif/. N^itin (/m<. N-'Sti'', op.NSii; imp, Nlt'iln, onceN-iitin Is. 43, 8; ^art.N''Sia, once tt^ia Ps. 135, 7) caus. to cause to go out or forth, hence to lead out, with accus. of the person and ^a of the place Ex. 13, 3; Ez. 11, 7 &c.; to lead away, with b?B of the person Gbn. 45, 1; to lead to, with bK of the person or place 19, 5, Ez. 46, 2l, or also with b of the place 2 Che. 29, 16; to carry throughj with 13 of the place Ez. 12, 5. In fig. applications as in the case of Kal, to free, from slavery Ex. 13, 14, from pri- son Is. 42, 7, from trouble Ps. 25, 17, from an enemy's power (i;iN?3) 2 Sam. 22,49 (for which the Ps. 18,49 has tabs aiiNa); to lead to war Is. 43, 17; "to drive forth Eze. 10, 3 ; to cause to arise, to be bom Job 10, 18 ; to bring forth, by art Is. 54,16; to put forth, plants, fruits Gen. 1, 12; Ps. 104, 14; to cause to ap- D!J^ 593 J!i^ pear, to make visible Is. 40, 26; Job 38, 32; to make clear, to bring to light Ps. 37, 6; Job 28, 11; to take forth, to se- parate, with ■'isn Lev. 26, 10 or pa out ofjEB,. 15, 19 ; to bring out, i. e. to spread, a report, with bs of the person respect- ing one Num. 14, 37; to announce, with b of the person Neh. 6, 19 ; to draw out kx. 4, 6; Ez. 21, 8; 24, 6; to exact, or to impose a tribute, with b» 2 Kings 15, 20. Hof. NSin to be brought out, led forth. Gen. 38, 25; to flow out, i. e. to be sent forth from a spring Ez. 47, 8, if we should not take B'^NSl^p here as a noun in the sense of mouths. The stem NStJ has been preserved pure only in the Aramaean NS^, i-^ (to shoot forth, to grow) and in the Ethiopia NSI wazea; elsewhere it is = »03 and then = c yj (to go out), LdJ (the same), Yod and Nun being inter- changed in the initial sound. The or- ganic root is 85t""', which exists also in 8S belonging to MNS, nsia, NIK, M£K3K (Aram. «»•; belonging to NSiffl, Nib'i^, see NS;B)I in J>0-3 &c. In' the dialects ^naJ, pes , ' ^ are in use for it. Phenic. N3S"' (paH.pl. m. DNK'"' [iusim Plant. Poen. 1, 10]) the same. 3S^ (Kal not used) tr. same as asti (which see) to set, to put, to place, a signification usually assumed to explain the Hithp. But neither this Hithp. nor the collateral form aS3 (necessarily to be assumed as a Kal to Hif, Nif., Hof., and as a stem for the nouns n''2£3 , 3^3 , as?5, aSM, !ij3^a, rijas^a) render the assumption of a transitive signification for Kal necessary; rather do the iden- tity of the stem with the Ar. v-*-^* (to stand, to stand fast, to endure), >_^5 (to stretch or lay upon the ground), v_/..*0« (to be constant, enduring) and its manifest connection with i'ttj'^, as well as all the stems compared at ^223 point to an intrans. meaning: to be firmly in a place, to stand firm or sit, to lie firmly in a place &c. Phenic. SS'' tr. to place, part. laJS^. Hithp. asinn (fut. aSTi"! ; 3 fern, once asnr for asinn Ex. 2, 4; imp. in pause n'aS2'?f7) *" «*''»'^ /<"■'*. Job 38, 14 they stand there like a garment, i. e. as if dressed out; Ex. 2, 4 and his sister stood afar off; Jer.46,4 shew yourselves stand- ing forth with your helmets; with 's DS to stand against one Ps. 94, 16, but also to stand with or o« the side of one Num. 11, 16; to stand firm, in opposition, to withstand 2 Chr. 20, 6 ; 2 Sam. 21,5; to take a stand ISam. 17, 16; to set oneself, with a Ex. 19, 17 or b? of the place Hab. 2, 1. The combination with by of a person or thing is most frequent in these applications: a) to stand with a person or thing Num. 23, 3; to take up a position with one 2 Chr. 11, 13; b) to stand against one, to rise up against Ps. 2, 2; c) to stand before one, to do ser- vice Job 1, 6, but in the last sense it is also construed with 'e ''iDb Ex. 8, 1 6, in which manner 173? also appears Prov. 22, 29. DS"* (Peal not used) Aram. intr. same as Hebrew a»;; comp. ai:3. Pah. aS"! (inf. constr. lsaS"i) to make sure, determinate, clear, certain, Dan. 7, 19 with b?: then I wished that he would give me assurance respecting . . . (the reading !sa"'S2 from a'lSI does not at all give a good sense). Deriv. a''B\ J^"* (Kal unused) tr. prop, same as y^'< to lay down, to set down; the Ar. «2£"'i , partly also with pst"'' (seeHif.); but not with ast"', since the latter is intrans. r t' "inS"' (a noun from the fut. Kal of IT : • ^ ^tl5l) m. 1. what shines or gives light, hence oil, coupled with iBiTin Num. 18, 12; Deut.7,13; 28,51; fig. 'i'n'^'i'n laa Zech. 4, 14 those anointed with oil, the two heads (the spiritual and the civil). — 2. (a Shining one, viz. Jah is) n,p. of a Levite Ex. 6, 18 , who became head of a family; patr. ■'1.!j2t': Num. 3, 27. yiS"' (with suff. ■'Sllt^; plur. constr. "i^lJE^, with suff. ''SVi.i; proTp. part, pass.) TO. 1. spread out, hence a couch, a bed, either a marriage-bed Gen. 49, 4, one of the dead Job 17, 13, or a couch to rest upon Ps. 63, 7; sometimes appended to tons;. 132, 3; the spreading of it is de- noted by ls^ Job 1. c. — 2. (/". only in 1 Kings 6, 6) an expression in archi- tecture 1 Kings 6, 5 6 10 K'tib, which has sometimes been explained story (contignatio = stratum), sometimes floor (Symm., Joseph.); probably it means the {eaitended) lower building, substruc- tum, except that both single stories or floors 6, 6 10, as well as the whole building are denoted by it. The K'ri has another form ^''it'', to give a form for the technical application of the word. pnS'' (mocker, laugher; in Gen. 17, 17 and 18, 12, the laughter, sometimes of Abraham, sometimes of Sarah, some- times that of people at the birth 18, 6, is assumed as the occasion of the name; it is best explained by the joy of the parents at his being born in their old age) n. p. m. of the great progenitor Isaac, whose life is described at length in Gen. ch. 21-28. Like ai?3>'' and dri'i^N, pna^ is also put for all Israel. Sometimes ptiiu^ (which see) is put in- stead Am. 7, 9;" Jer. 33, 26 ; Ps. 105, 9. LXX 'laadx. t^'^S'' {constr. pi. ^»^)ir<) m. shoot, son, 2 Chr. 32,21K'ri, prop. JS?5 (modem Hebrew pi. niystt), ^=i:£j and" i'-'SJ. Eif. y-'Sn {fut. y-^^i) to spread out, for a couch, to make as a bed, with ac- cusat. of the material, biNUS (as object) Ps. 139, 8, i. e. to make the conch in Sheol; to spread sackcloth and ashes Is. 58, 5, as penitents do. Hof. S>sri {fut. 5>S7) to be spread un- derneath as' a bed, 'iBNl.pto Esth. 4, 3; with nnn, and iTH"! spread under Is. 14, 11; yet it is better to take 5»S^ as a noun in the last passage signifying cushion, on account of the parallel ilS?'?- 3>2l m. cushion Is. 14, 11, see SS''. pU^ I. {part. pass. m. plS;; , pi: QijiS^ , fern, nips';; inf. constr. npIS; imp. pS.^ and pS; fut. I. pit;_ after the form TjbnJ 'lb.':, dp. pJt;. 1 Kings 22, 35, fut. H. pi"- = pa-'';, therefore pi. ipa;i 1 Kings 18, 34, 2 Kings 4, 40, more frequently fut. in. pS^, pSN, before Makkeph "pSN; fut. I. occurs only in an intrans. sense) 1. tr. same as p5t 11. (p15t) to pour, to pour out, a liquid, as Ql Lev. 8, 15, QV2 2 Kings 3, 11, iuiiS'Gen. 28, 18, with b? of the person or thing on which Lev. 2, 1; 1 Kings 18, 34; hence 'jM'd "' 's llJIS'i-by 1 Sam. 10, 1 to anoint, also with omission of the object or accus. 2 Kings 4, 4; seldom with bs for b? 2 Kings 9, 6. With a to pour in Ez. 24, 3; to pour out, a liquid food, with b of the person 2 Kings 4, 41 or with 'B ■'isb 2 Sam. 13, 9. Figur. with b? to pour out, on the thirsty, desert land, i. e. to refresh and make it fruitful Is. 44, 3 ; to pour the spirit of life upon a thing, i. e. to ii^- pu^ 595 -ly -vigorate, to elevate Is. 1. c. Here be- longs the part. pass. piSJ Ps. 41, 9; an evil is poured upon him (i, e. sick- ness penetrates him); as one says of anger, it is poured forth Jbb. 42, 18. — 2. In a metallurgical sense: to cast, to melt, metals, with accus. of the object Ex. 38, 5 and b of the person for whom 25, 12 and 3 of the place where they are cast 1 Kings 7, 46. piS; Job. 28, 2 and 29,6 belongs to p«II. (which see); -while pis; 41,15 16 belongs top3, npai)2 1 and 2. The stem in its first signif. coincides exactly, as to its organic root, with that in "^0-3, TiD, '^D-', nir5-a, and in signi- '(- t' mt' m- t' r t' fication 2 also with pT, "rjT.. pS'' n. {part. pass. m. pISJ ; inf. constr. nplt) intr. 1. same as pit HI. (pl2£) to 'VK^ ' IT ' ' be firm, condensed, hard, hence piaj hardened, i. e. very firm Job 41, 16 , of the hardness of a stone, especially of the lower millstone. Hence too 41, 15 = psa 11, 15 a firm mass. pp and Sia Gen. 32, 8; 1 Sam. 30, 6; 2 Sam. 13, 2; Judges 2, 15; 10, 9; Job 20, 22. ia; belongs to 'n'na I. The stem iai in this signif. is iden- tical in its organic root ("la";) with that in "la-n, "m-n, 'na-y, ^T-5>, in aU which r T ' r T ' 1- T ' r T ' . lies the fundamental meaning or hedging about, enclosing; Ar. wO to straiten. "lU^n. (part.m. lav, most fireijuent- ly used as a noun, which see; fut. I. Ik:, I??. ■«"tli ««/• FI'^¥? ■^^- ^^' ^' 49," 8, K'tib ^fTiSfi*; also the o is lost, as inpa: Is. 44, 12; fut. H. ip:, "iS:, av. la'ii, i^ai) tr. prop, to cut, secare, ^ - '■' "'■' 38* nij^ 596 nst^ cognate in sense with N'la (=rt'il3), hence to form, to fashion, of a carver in wood, a joiner Is. 44, 9 12, but also of a, smith 54, 17, oftenest of a potter 64, 7. Phenic. 'IS'"' a potter. Hence figur. to create, of God, supplementing N'la and Hia» Is. 43, 7; 45, 7; Jeb. 33, 2;"Aii. 4, 3; with accus. of the object and accus. of the material Gen. 2, 19 ; but the latter is frequently omitted Ps. 104, 26; Am. 4, 13. The idea is, however, only applied generally, and in such a way as that the original meaning to form is entirely in the back-ground Is. 45, 7 ; Zeoh. 12, 1. Metaphor, in general to make into some- thing, to destine, to appoint, with accus. of the object and b to Is. 42, 6; 49, 5; to devise, where riiB5> or N''a!^ denotes the execution and completion Is. 22, 11; 37,26; 46,11; 2 KiNtis 19, 25; with hv of a person or thing to plot against one or a thing Jer. 18, 11; Ps. 94, 20 devising mischief against (b?) the law. For ISV or "nSi as a noun, in its variety of senses, see under ISti"'. Deriv. 'iS:'' , 1 ... VI" ' Nif. 'iSiS prop, to be formed, fashioned, therefore to exist, to be, Is. 43, 10 before me there was no God, parall. IVTt. Puh. IS7 to be preformed, predestined, O'^m; {days of life) Ps. 139, 16. Hof. laii to be made, 'b'3 Is. 45, 17. The organic root of this stem ^^"^ with the fundamental meaning "to cut" is also in IX 11. (TUt), whence the noun TlK edge, and image, form. This root is moreover in 1^-3 I. (Targ. 1¥"^. Syr. j^, Ar. ^_jll.), 'nS-)?, lT-a (which see), 'lO-n (intrans.), Ar. _»_£>. (prop, to cut) &c., where the same fundamental meaning is found. Hence the metaphor is just as in N'i3; and in actual usage there is no distinction between the two verbs. See Tilt II. IS'' (with SMjf i'ji^';, 13'ia^) m. 1. concr. formation, frame, of a l^i , particularly of man as a weak creature of the dust Ps. 103, 14; the clay-work, of the potter Is. 29, 16 ; an idol Hab. 2, 18. — 2. Tigur. the formation of the thought, the inclination and endeavour, after evil, usually coupled with ab Gen. 8, 21, or ab nia«:5na 6, 5; 1 Che. 29, 18 ; seldom without ab Deut. 31, 21; but also generally />M»770«e, in a good sense. Is. 26, 3 thou preservest those that are staid in purpose, where HS^ is the accus., standing for 12£; '^I'pD. — 3. (creation , viz. of Jah) n. p. m. Gen. 46, 24; patr. ■''12?-; Num. 26, 49. 12'^ (only pi. D'^'pa^) m. the form, of the members, the bodily structure Job 17, 7. "''12'' (from M'l'nS'' creation, i. e. a creator is Jah) n. p. m. 1 Chk. 25, 11, for which 25, 3 has I'pa, with Yod re- jected at the beginning! nV^ (only fut. ns^, nsn, iisnsri, where Yod the first letter of the root in- stead of quiescing is assimilated to the following sound by Dag. forte, as in "nis^ , ^%'\, conseq. forrK"''; or DK"; &c.; 3p.pl. in pause inS'; doubling the last radical, as in ibin, '^ir\i, naiiM &c.) intr. to r T ' IT T ' T IT ^ bum, to be set on fire, to kindle, with a in a thing, Is. 9, 17 and it kindles in the thickets of the forest; to be burned, iBijja in fire, i. e. to perish in the fire 33, 12 ; Jbe. 49, 2; 51, 58. Nif. nS3 (after the form n^3, like a:^'' and a^5 ; used only in the perfect) to he burned, consumed, of a country Jbh. 9, 11; with laiHS or also without any addition, of pastures 9, 9; generally to be desert, waste 46, 19, where the LXX read n!£3, from n>ilE, Ar. v:i>Lo it' I ' (to call, comp. the Phenic. n. p. b^an^u invocation of Baal); in the later period of the language like Kal, to be con- sumed, with iZJlga to perish in fire Neh. 1, 3; 2, 17. Figur. of burning anger, with a of the person in whom 2 Kings 22, 13', or of the object in which it flames up 22, 17; for which the usual '^n'l stands in the parallel passage 2 Chr. 34, 21 25. In Jer. 2, 15 the K'ri has the pi, inSi (from nsts in an objective mean- ing), while the K'tib reads nnS3 in the sing.; in no case should a stem Ti'lti be thought of. 2P^ 597 np^ Hif. rT-SI-l (after the form ys.'n, p'Srt, S'lSnfrom aS"", pS"", ya-": part. niS?3: fut. n"'S2, op. ns^; but also once re- gularly the perf.^TT'pTi 2 Sam. 14, 30 K'tib) to burn, to set on fire, to kindle, with accus. of the object kindled, iipbn 2 Sam. 14, 30, •\■sv|^2 Jer. 51, 30, '-ri 32, 29 ; but when ilJN stands with it to supplement the idea of the verb , and the meaning accordingly is to set fire to, the object wherein stands with 3 Jer. 17, 27; 21, 14; 33, 12; 50, 32; A.U. 1, 14; Lament. 4, 11, where iIJN may also be put after Ez. 21, 3; twice hs stands for 13 Judges 9,49, Jer. 11, 16, as vice versa a (ips) for b» 9, 8. «5n3 n"'Sn to cause to perish by fire, with accusat. of the object 2 Sam. 14, 30, where the K'tib reads rr^Sin. Another form, n-'Stfi after the analogy of a^'Uil (from aaj), whence comes the/M«. with suff. nsn'^SN Is. 27,4, belongs also to our stem; but we should read "■'SN. The organic root of the stem nS'J lies also in nd-i belonging to the Nifal niBS and in nid (nnia) or nil5-3, if this be the stem. Dp^ (not used) intr. to be hollowed out, to be deep, of a tub, hole, pit. The org. root ap."' is also found in ap."3 1., ap. II. (aai5),'a]? (a, i)?.Vn, n'i'i;?^ r\i'i^s; from iiirj) /'m. obedience, reverence, respect Gen. 49, 10 (Targ., Ihn G'andcA who compares the Arab., Kimchi and others); Prov. 30, 17. It is true that the Vulg., Syr., LXX (in w the Genesis passage) take it to mean expectation, hope = Mlpn , which the word may also signify; that Rashi, the cod. Sam. (see n!lp), Levi ben Gershom &c. suppose it to denote attachment to, a sense which also lies in the verb; and that the LXX, Targ. and BasM on Prov^i understand it to mean old age, from tllip to be weak} but the first significa- tion is preferable because of its natural- ness. T'lp'' m. a burning log Jbr. 30, 14. lip') m. a burning Is. 10, 16. pipi (in mss. £31)?;;; from £31)^) masc. a thing to be rejected or cast away Job 8, 14. See 01)5. Dip') (a noun from the fut. Kal of dip) m. the existing substance, i. e. the living things of the earth Gen. 7,4 23 ; Dbut. 11, 6; perhaps from filp to live, so that '7 would denote a living thing. aj^lpli (after the form D1S», Blb'ttJ 2 Sam. 20, 19, from «i)5; , and = iai)5J Hos. 9, 8, being in signif. = part., see T25p_'ii; pi. Q"'1!J1)?7) TO. an ensnarer, a net-layer, a fowler, Prov. 6, 5, usually with ns (which see) laid by the lai)?; Ps. 91, 3; Hos. 9, 8; D''iaip7 •^V Jer. 5, 26 the stooping (Tjffl infin. of "^ISIIJ) of the fowlers. :ijipi see ffil)?V ri*lp'i (fromnp-' after the form mmi EocLES. 5, 10 K'ri, nilauJ, niniB) fern, might, only in ^Nl''ri'lp'] (El is almightiness) n. p. m. 1 Chk. 4, 18, formed from bs} and mp'; with the vowel of union '^-. 'jtip'' (a noun formed from the fut. Hof. of ibp, prop, a curtailed, shortened one, i. e. a little one, comp. the proper name ■)U)? ; the LXX and Vulg. read ]ap'; , from the fut. of Kal; the Arab, was spoken and ynitten Kachtdn, (jUa,s\j) n.p. of a son of Eber, of the fifth generation after Noah, from Shem, and therefore to be considered a Semitic progenitor Gen. 10, 25. The thirteen tribes de- D^D'' scended from Joktan viz. IITabN, jqb'OJ, viT :--:' -iv' n -:' jx ' it': •' bii5>, bNtt^aN , Niffl, ^siN, sibiin , aav 'it ' r T • -:' jT : ' r 'it •-:' it had their abode in southern Arabia, and gave their names to the countries there 10, 25-30. According to 10, 30 the Joktanites dwelt from n;B?3 till where IT ■* , one comes to "ISO, even to the east- iT : ' mountain, i. e. from Bisha on the great road of Negd, called the key of Yemen, to Safar, the metropolis of the kings of Saba and Himyar, and as far as the eastern mountain-territory. Comp. Fo- cocke, spec. Hist. Arabum p. 338. 0''p_'' {A setter up, viz. Jah is, from ai)j) n'p. m. 1 Che. 8, 19; 24, 12. "T")?;; (formed from the Pihel of 1|5;) adject, m. dear, costly, valuable, Jer. 31, 20. T'p^ (def. NT')^^) Aram, adj.m. weighty, important, Dan. 2, 11 ; distinguished, noble EzR. 4, 10. DpJ (not used) intr. same as Dp^ (D^ii?), out of which it is lengthened (in its application to proper names); as it is also elongated at the end into fi73p. Derivat. the noun Dp'' {constr. D]?^) in the proper names fT'73p';, Dsup^, and dp/' {constr. np'') in the proper name IT : ':t Dpi {constr. dp_^) masc. see iT'Mg';, IT r *-: □pi {constr. ?3pj) m. see Dynp\ tT'lQp'^ {Jah is the Continuing, Endur- ing, see Dp_j) n.p. m. 1 Chr. 2, 41; 3, 18. DS'TSp'^ {continuance of the congrega- tion; Mp"' constr. state of dp'') n. p. of a Levitical city in Ephraim, south-west of iibh'O bas< on the mountain that rises it : I" T rugged above the plain of the Jordan, nearly opposite to the mouth of the pa"' 1 Kings 4, 12, 1 Chr. 6, 53; for which another Ephraimite city D^Sap is men- tioned in Josh. 21, 22. Oy'Qp'^ {continuation of the family) n. p. m. i Chr. 23, 19. The reference of dpi to djj'', constr. dp"", is not suf- I S t T 'it I ficient; rather see dp''. 599 ypi nSp'^ (from fi3)5 I.) masc. possession^ Dyap"' (from dy iisp'' possession of the congregation; ii;pi is a noun from the Hofal of n;p I.) n. p. of a Levitical city in Zebulon Josh. 21, 34, situated at mount Carmel, and therefore called ^'^1^^ '; 12, 22, where a brook rising in Carmel flowed by 19, 11. It was for- merly the residence of a Canaanite king 12, 22. There appears to have existed also another city of this name; because the addition of bn^sb was put to ours. J7p^ I. (only fut. y^2i ^?-?i y^^T^^e, the synonymous V^J is used in the perf. Ez. 23, 18 22 28) intr. same as yp.3 to he taken away, removed, struck off, as the Ar. «Xj (to strike away, to knock off, to drive away) has the same funda- mental signification when trans. Hence figurat. a) to be dislocated (of a limb) Gen. 32, 26; b) to stand off, from a thing, to turn away from, with \^ Jer. 6, 8 or hsj2 of the person Ez. 23, 17 18, therefore to be tired of. Cognate in sense is yp , Up (to withdraw from a thing, to feel disinclination to it). The organic root 2»p_" ■' , as a collateral form of yp."3 , lies also in yp (flp), 3> and a, as also a and U being frequently interchanged in the formation of roots ; in the Arab, only the above-mentioned » O and also {jajii (to loosen, to break off, to put away) are connected with it. yp'' n. (Kal not used) tr. to stick in, to fi^ /irmly to a thing, Arab. «j'j (to push or stick into a thing, figurat. to curse, to reproach); with which *jij (to cut into) and iJU (to pierce) are also con- nected. The organic root »p_'' is closely related to 5'p_ (which see), yj> II. &c. Hif. v-^yn {imp. yp.'irt, fut. »-'pr) to fasten, to a stake, to impale, to nail to, i. e. to crucify, as the Vulg. rightly translates; while to hang or hang upon is expressed by nbn Num. 25, 4, 2 Sam. 21,6 9 ; with b or ■'3sb of the person for nr 600 np^ whose satisfaction the punishment takes place. Hof. »)5_1rt {jpart. yp^ia) pass, to he impaled 2 Sam. 31, 13. np^ (inXal is used only the Sp.fut. pi. , whence k_aj>« limhus, armilla; and especially hy the simple stem tjp (tjl)?) belonging toUSIpn, but which may also be derived from fiiji, like nyittJn from i'lar The organic root in £]j5-3 (which see), whence tjiji. Sis (53, written with initial 3 in Arab, and Targ. also, and coinciding with tjM , belongs to a quite different group. Hif. t)'')?!7 (after the form ?iSrt, a-'JSn from S>5S^,'aSJ; inf. absol. t\yj3,'T\'ei.r]; fut. ^"'5?.!l) *" ^ in a circle, to surround, to encircle, with accus. of the object Ps. 22, 17, sometimes with the addition of a^'SO round about 1 Kings 7, 24, and fig. Is. 15, 8 ; but also with bv of place 2 Kings 6, 14, Ps. 17, 9, paxall. to asD 88, 18, or together with aiao 2 Kings 11, 8; to encompass, TiSM, with b? of a person Job 19, 6, yet figuratively b? is sometimes omitted Lament. 3, 5; to go round in a circle, rtnffl'an iw Job 1, p ' iv : ■ - r : ' 5; to cut round Lev. 19, 27, to leave a tuft in the middle of the head. ri)5.ri Josh. 6, 11 or E)i;?n 6, 3 is used ad- verbially for round about, circumcirca. f j?.J (only /««• V)?-'':, Vi?.:. once Yi: 1 Kings 3, 15 after the form IS^, apoc. YP;,V) iwtJ*. to stir, to move, opposite to rest, hence to awake Gen. 41, 4 21, op- posite to Ttt5; 1 Kings 18, 27; sometimes with the addition of fl3l^a out of sleep Judges 16, 14, or ')^|;a from intoxication Gen. 9, 24. The stem y;?,; is in Arab, la£j^ with a similar fundamental signifi- cation; but the organic root is ypj"', which is also in yy^ {T^)\ the HiJf. of yp is very common in prose for y)?i. IP'' (fut. 'n)?''7, I)?''.'] and Ijpj;) intr, prop, to be heavy, weighty, like the Tar- gumic 1(?7, Syr. r**, Ar. j"; &c., which make this fundamental sense clear; and here it is even active in part, to make heavy, to burden. Hence metaphor.: to be distinguished, famous, QU) 1 Sam. 18, 30, unattainable, dear Ps. 49, 9, costly, valuable 72, 14; to be dear, precious, usually with 'S '^i^'S'z of the person 1 Sam. 26, 21; Is. 43', 4;' 2 Kings 1, 14; to be difficult to comprehend, with b Ps. 139, 17 (comp. Dan. 2, 11). Only in appearance is 1)?'' construed with byn of the person Zech. 11, 13, since b3|9 here refers rather to 'T|''bT^!7 (which is construed with b^M of the person 2 Kings 13, 23; 24, 20; Ez. 18, 31; Deut. 9, 17), the sense of the passage being: cast into the treasury (of the temple) the "ip »!l TIN (prop, costly prophetic mantle, from which the figure is taken, then ike honorary reward for it), with which I was honoured. In derivatives also, to he dear, splendid, shining, distinguished, honourable^ com- posed, meek, mild. Deriv. ^p'', 1p?, !Tip\ ni"ip\ '" "'' n':-' i't: PVi. 1)5'; (not used) to be very dear, very valuable. Deriv. T'p.^. Sif T'^.in (imp. 155 h; fut. T^^Ji"') to make precious or dear, with 'ja more than Is. 13, 12; figurat. to make rare, with in to withdraw from . . . Pkov. 25, 17. The original signification of the stem IpJ is, as already mentioned, suffi- ciently and unquestionably confirmed by the Targumic Ip.^ to be burdened, charged, obdurated, hardened, weighty, heavy; Syr. j-a* partly trans, to burden^ make heavy, partly intr. to be oppressed, by a burden, Pael to honour, reckon worthy &c., Sam. ^pj] to be burdened and to he, honoured, valued; Arab. inti\ J>. to be earnest, steadfast, calm, dignified, mildy np^ 601 '^p^ tame, and trans. Jsi to burden, to make heavy &c. ; especially as the development of the meanings in the cognate (in sense) 133 forms a complete analogy; and also in the Latin stem grav the same con- nexion of signification exists. Both the noun Tvnpl (Zech. 14, 6) in the sense of the noun fTn)? (Nah. 3, 17), and the adj. ip; (constr.'^p,^) Prov. 17, 27 K'ri, interchanged with Sjp. (ibid. K'tib), and the analogy of the cognate (in sense) na"3 in its organic root, point to the original conception of the organic 1)?."J , which is therefore, to he drawn or press- ed closely together, to he pressed thickly or closely, to he heavy, weighty, the heavy, weighty, thick and dense appear- ing as a mass firmly bound and drawn together; manifestly connected with 1p. ("1'np), Ar. j* to draw together, to stiffen (with fros^, to freeze (the same figure being also in NB)5 = I"?? > ^1p^^ *" ** ''°^^i ip III. (lip) to knot to, to hind to. The same is the case with "I5"3. The Ar. Jljj means to he drawn together, to he thick, of the belly (iXaS belly), to be tbickened in a point into a knot; of curdled milk (comp. NBJ?, NJ33 11., ps), to be drawn together, to he stiffened, by severe cold (sjui' cold). The organic root of na-3 is also in 13 II. i. e. 1ia _ 1" T - r T (which see). -1pi {constr. 1)p_^, with 3, I]?''?; pi- Di'ip';) adj. m., tTl'|5^ {constr. npp^; pi. n'ilp';) /. 1. prop, contracting, hence fig. reserved, thoughtful, of nil Prov. 17,27 K'ri, for which the K'tib has 1p. (which see). — 2. weighty, heavy, large, of build- ing stones for the purpose of strength- ening 1 Kings 5, 31; 7,9 10, explained by the appended nftl.1 tl"'pSN. and ms (freestone) 2 Chr. 3, 6.' In Is. 28, 16 it is better to take n'lp^ as the constr. state of the noun Tt~f;>1 (which see). — 3. great, powerful, considerable (in number), an adjective to lirt Prov. 1,13; 12,27; 24,4 = pn5> 8, 18, ip 13, 7. — 4. Fig. dear, costly, precious, spoken of precious stones 2 Sam. 12, 30; 1 Kings 10, 2 10; IChe. 20, 2; Ez. 27, 22; Job 28, 11; of men Lament. 4, 2; Prov. 6, 26; valuable Ps. 36,8; Jbr.15,19 (opposite bbir); Prov. 3, 15; rare (comp. Hif. of -ip_;) 1 Sam. 3, 1 ; Ps. 116, 15 ; splendidly, majestically, adverbially Job 31,26; subst. splendour, hence D"'13 1^.'; Ps. 37, 20 beauty of the meadows, i. e. grass. "Ol (with suff. I'll??) m. preciousness, i. e. treasure Job 28, 10; dignity, honour Ez. 22, 25; Esth. 1, 20; splendour 1, 4; costliness Prov. 20, 15 ; dignity, high po- sition Esth. 6, 9; riches Ps. 49, 13 21. IP'' Aram. intr. = Hebrew 1p\ Deriv. ip\ 'IT J Pah. 1)3_2 (not used) to he extraordi- nary, singular, very distinguished. Deriv. -Ip^"; {constr. 1)?^ def. N115^ Mlp^) Aram. m. riches, treasures, Dan. 2, 6; dignity, coupled with labia, isbn 7,14; authority 5, 20. mp'' (after the form !i5»l!J1, tlN1\ jji: . ^ _ ^ IT : ■ IT : • tiNito, an infinitive noun, constr. nip"'; IT : • r ■ ■ pi. with suff. ^■'ni1)5^) f. 1. weight, of a stone. Is. 28, 16 a stone of the comer, of weight, of an established foundation, i. e. a weighty foundation-stone suitable for a corner, for which purpose the heav- iest and largest were taken. — 2, pre- ciousness, valuable possession, Ps. 45, 10 daughters of kings are among thy valuable possessions (in '1)?''3 the Dagesh is to be explained as in iiS"'b above p. 579). aip'^ (1 pers. in pause ''nisp;, 3 pi. Iiljpi^j'once in pause liliSp^ Is. 29, 21, where in appending a Nun the preceding vowel - is lost; part, fflpv) tr. prop, to knot, to ensnare, to wind, to lay snares, with accusal tiQ Ps. 141, 9, the nouns iBip"' and izilp"' being usually also coupled with ns; but also without OS, and merely with b of the person to lay snares, spoken of fowlers, and metaphor. Is. 29, 21, Jer. 50, 24, which is followed by 13^5 the effect. Deriv. ilJip;, ffiipj, «5)?.ia, and the proper name ITBpJ. Nif izSpii (fut. ffipv) reflexive, to be w^ 602 ^^1^ ■snared, to be caught, coupled widi nsbi Is. 8, 15 ; 28, 13 ; construed with a by Dbut. 7, 25 ; Pkov. 6,2. — TlSjjj.ii Ps.9', 17 stands for Il5j?i3 (3 ^ers. ^er/. sing.), since the reflexive signification alone suits here. Hof. 12jp_lrt {part. m. plur. d''T|5)5i;i = t)i«3p1'ia) ' to be snared, caught, Eccles. 9, 12 like them (birds) are men snared. The fundamental signification of the organic root of this stem tt5p"J, which is also found in miJJ, Vi'p-i, «J|p.-y and many others, is to knot, to bind, to inter- twine; and is copiously unfolded under "iBlp with comparison of the cognate Se- mitic stems. a3|?'i m. see ItlJ)?'' (fromlJJJJi' with the termination '^- ; fowler) n. p. of a son of Abraham by Keturah Gen. 25, 2, from whom the Arabian tribes NSllS and 111 were derived 25,3. "- '"' np^ (not used) tr. to reward (com- batants), to give the reward of victory; the Ar. oo. and Ethiop. have the same meaning. Deriv. the noun rip'' (constr. njJ'') m. reward of vic- tory, only in PSrip'^ (usually explained, fromMn)5J bs subdued by El, iinp^ Hof. of finp, Ar. LXs to serve; better from ?N 81)5^ El's reward of victory , from T\p_'') n. p. of a city in Judah Josh. 15, 38. With regard to the signification of this name, Amaziah had given it to the city 3>bD (Petra) after he had got a great victory in the valley of salt, south of the Dead Sea (el-Gh6r) 2 Kings 14, 7. i^T' I. (only inf. constr. NIT;) trans. same as iri'T' I. ITT. Hif. N'^'pin (only part. m. pi. Q'^iS'nTO and 3 p. fut. pi. ^1X~!f) in a similar sense to rvrn from rtT^'l. IT ITT ^1^ II. (not used) same as !TT> III., ITT ^ ITT ' only Hof. N'niri {fut. N'ni"' = N'p.i''), like the Hof. of rin-' III. ITT i^T' ni. see N^r ^^p.J iXp-perf.-^^m^'',^ 2 p. mp^&c., but also QnNT' Josh. 4, 24, as if the IV t: /■ t ground form were NT' after the type of Nip; part. m. ny; inf. constr. iX'l'], but with V <^'i?. for'!^Vb=t<'7''b, more fre- quently Tii^y,; imp. »'l\ pi. May, with Alef quiescent by an Aramaeism; fut. N'T'\ N'nV pi. WT'^ INT') intr. 1. to IT • ' IT- ' •'^ I : r' I ir' tremble, to quake, for fear or also from faint-heartedness Ps.76,9, coupled with Tin Judges 7, 3 or TDn Deut. 20, 3, but also with joyous surprise {Ibn Esrd) Is. 60, 5 : then wilt thou tremble and beam (with joy); nns also, which stands as a parallel to'^N'iri (oriN'l''n, as mss. have it), being taken in the same sense. Comp. ine and T.11 Jek. 33, 9 in this signi- fication; and if flNI sometimes appears in the expression of joy (Is. 66, 14; Zech. 10, 7), it only describes the idea of joy at seeing a thing, without there, being an identity with the present passage. — 2., to be afraid, to tremble, to be fearful, either absol. appearing only as a consequence of what has prer ceded Gen. 3, 10; 18, 15; Jer. 3, 8; or that of which one is afraid, follows in the apodosis Ps. 46, 3, Jer. 51, 46, but always circumstantially; and when the act of fear has relation to a person or thing, ya follows (Ps. 3, 7; Job 5,21) or •'3E52 (2 Kings 1,15 ; 19,6) or ^iti\l3 (1 Sam. 18, 12) of, or in addition b of the person or thing for whom one fears Pro v. 31, 21; Josh. 9, 24. When the thing of which one is afraid follows in a verb, the infin. and b are put Gen. 19, 30, or the infin. and ^a Gen. 46, 3, 1 Sam. 3, 15; or an apodosis follows, introduced by )3 Gen. 31, 31 ; 32, 12. Sometimes NT is put to have an assonance with !1N"1, without another meaning, e. g. Job 6, 21; 1 Sam. 28, 13; Ps.40,4; 52, 8 &c. — 3. to fear, with accus. of the person Num. 14, 9, Job 9, 35, or of the thing Ps. 23, 4, as an active verb. — 4. in a noble sense: to feel awe, hence to reverence, esteem highly, honour, pa- rents Lev. 19, 3, a king 1 Kings 3, 28, leaders Josh. 4, 14, prophets 1 Sam. 12, 18, the sanctuary Lev. 19, 30, an oath- t5"l^ 603 n«n^ 1 Sam. 14,26. For the most part applied to religious awe and the fear of God, where the object d'^fl'^N, or'^'i, or'^'i d\B, stands in the accus. Ps. 33, 8; 102,16; Is. 59, 19, seldom with lisls?? Eccles. 8, 12; or '^ is omitted Jbr.44,10. Hence it means directly to be pious, faithful. God- fearing Ps. 40, 4; 52,8; 64,10; Is. 41, 6; Mic. 7, 17, i. e. to have an awe of God who does mighty deeds 1 Sam. 12, 18, who reveals Himself by His servants Ex. 14, 31, who avenges injustice Ex. 1, 17; Pkov. 3, 7; Job 1, 9. Then gener- ally, to worship, God 1 Kings 18, 12; idols 2 Kings 17, 7; Deut. 3, 22. Deriv. N]1J, !lN"i';, N1i73 and perhaps the pro- per names TP^y^ , liN'l\ — 5. proceed- ing from the fundamental signification, to turn or bend iaci, like the Arab. Ijj, and therefore also to refrain. Derivat. N'if N'nia (only part. m. acfli , f. tiff "nis , pi. r\i!«"ii3 , and fut. N'll';) to be feared, hence to be fearful, terrible, dreadful, of a people Is. 18, 2 7, Hab. 1, 7, a wil- derness Deut. 1,19, Is. 21,1, the day of judgment Jo. 2,11; 3, 4 ; io 5e reverenced, of God Ps. 130, 4. Part. Nli3 awe-in- spiring, exciting astonishment, wonderful, stupendous, an epithet of God Deut. 10, 17, Dan. 9, 4, of the name of God Deut. 28, 68, Mai. 1, 14, of angels Judges 13, 6, of a holy place Gen. 28, 17, of mighty deeds Ps. 66, 3 5, of praise Ex. 15,11. 'niNS also appears once fors'iis, as an epithet of God, Ps. 76,5, as well as 76, 8 ; though one may also abide by the textual reading. niNlii subst. won- derful acts, deeds of kings or heroes Ps. 45, 5, or of God Deut. 10, 21 ; as an adv. in a wonderful way Ps. 65, 6; 139, 14, like niNbs3 as an adverb. I T : ■ Fih. NT" (part. m. NT'a, inf. NTi, with I"" ^c^ i"T : ' ' i"T ' ■suff, Uixy) to terrify, to make afraid, with brta, with the accus. of the object 2 Sam. 14,15; Neh.6,9 14 19; 2Chr.32,16. Hithp. N'i"'nf7 (according to the cod. Sam. Gen. 42, 1, which the Targ., Syr. and others follow in translating) to he mutually afraid, therefore to be help- less; but it is neither necessary to write '"^'It?^' ^^^ *° regard iN'inn as=iN'i''nn, since the Hithp. of !i!ij"i suits very well, The original signification of the stem is clear from ttpj (which see), Ar. s»j (to tremble, to be afraid), 5>'ni (which see), Ar. £^^ and go (to be afraid, to quake, to retreat timidly) ; and the transition to to retreat timidly, to be timorous, fearful, and to be pious with relation to God, is indicated both by the Ar. c»j, and the stems in Arab, and Syr. cognate with the original conception. X'ni (constr. {^'Ji , plur. V'Hi'yi ; prop, a part.) adj. m., TtH^^ (but only constr. r\a a'n\ - I- i : ^ -r Hi' Baal is contender, disputer; in Judges 6, 32 another turn is given to the signi- fication of the name, which does not at all seem to have been the original one) n. p. of the judge known elsewhere by the name of lisna Judges 6, 32. Inas- much as bya is ' identical with ni;ja = ni^a in the religious views of the an- cient Hebrews, he is called in 2 Sam. 11, 21 niaa'n^ (which see). liXX.'IsQo^daX, Sanchomathon (Eus. Praep. Ev. 1, 10) 'lEqaji^aXog (termed a priest of Jeho- vah). The name was at first an epithet of the Phenician Archal, i. e. Hercules, in Palmyrene b^ai'i'' (Palmyr. Denk- maler IV, 5) ; and Gideon may have re- ceived this surname as a warrior.. DyDT' (Ood is enlarger, see fi5>) n.p. of the first king of the ten tribes 1 Kings ch. 12-14, and then of another king 2 Kings 14, 23-29. rJB3T' see VyaTi and nuSa. v IT -,! -1- •»: vw m^ {Bp.perf. once 11 JuDaBsl9,21 abridged from fp ; in the old triumphal song of Deborah, which has much Aram, colouring, Tn^ 5,1 3 occurs twice, since the perf. is necessary here on account of TN compared with verses 11 19 22, as the old translators also take it; inf. abs. ih"", constr. pn"! [with suff. ''Fi'i'n] and once TiTi Gen. 46, 3 [elsewhere with the first vowel -, e. g. Siyn, filb], once even I'l^ with suff.'^'i'T Ps. 30,4 K'ri: I J ' " I' :t ' ' imp. Ti or lengthened rtTi; fut. *Tn^_ omitting the first radical, apoc. IT" , in pause *i'n^_) intr. properly to fall from or down, to go, run, flow down, to which fundamental signification all the mean- ings and aU comparisons lead. Hence to move downwards, to descend, to come down, fi-om a higher place to a person or thing Ex. 19, 11 18, Ps. 144, 5; with ■|a of the place whence 2 Kings 1, 10, Deut.28,24; and withbj? to, if it be an elevated place Ex. 19, 18; Mic. 1, 3; to descend, come down, go down, travel down &c. with ya of a place Ex. 19, 14, Ez. 27, 29 ; but with bjJM , if the verb to be supplied before Tni must be coupled with hs, Judges 4,'l5; 1 Sam. 25, 23; Ez. 26^16; seldom with DJ?M Judges 9, 37. The place to which stands withbs, when it is an elevated point Ez. 47, 8, but otherwise with bij 2 Sam. 11, 10 or b Song op Sol. 6, 2 , or with an accus. with or without a of motion Ps.55,16, Job 7, 9, Gen. 12, 10; which accus. with a partic. is so expressed as that 'VV stands in construct state with the follow- , ■1*1^ 605 ]iy ■ ms noun, e. g. lia ■'ll'-' , IBS "'Ti'-' , Ps. 22, 30, S'Oire^' doion iraio the pit, into the dust; seldom with a Ex. 15, 5, Is. 63, 19, which usually means to come down by or on a thing Gen. 28,12, Judges 7, 11, 2 Kings 20, 11, to descend into some- thing Is. 5, 14; Jon. 1, 3. With bs of a person Ex. 11, 8. Very often 'i stands absol. Gen. 43, 20; Ex. 19, 24; Is. 47, 1 ; and to supplement the idea a verb in the infin. with b follows 2 Kings 8, 29, IChk. 7, 21, Judges 15,12, or without b 1 Sam. 17, 28; or also a finite verb 2 Sam. 23, 20; Numb. 11, 17. The ap- plications of '"I are very numerous, and may be grouped under the following significations: to be brought down, T^a in the hand 1 Sam. 23, 6, to fall down Jbb. 13, 18, to be precipitated down Ex. 9, 19, to run downwards, of a boundary Num. 34, 11, Josh. 18, 16, to lead down, of a way Prov. 7, 27, to sink, perish (fig.) Ez. 30, 6, to go down, of the shadow on the hands of a sun-dial 2 Kings 20, 11, Is. 38, 8, to come down, to descend, at the manifestation of God Is. 63, 19 ; 64, 2, to rush down, to battle Judges 5, 13, to incline, of the day Judges 19, 11, to enter, when the thing is con- ceived of as lying lower, e. g. into a ship Jon. 1, 3, into a well 2 Sam. 23, 20, to walk down, to the sea or to a port Jon. 1, 3, to a spring Gen. 24, 16, to a garden Song of Sol. 6, 2; to put to sea Is. 42, 10; to come down from a city {because cities were usually on heights) Euth3,3, 2KiNGs6,18, from the citadel 1 Sam. 9, 25 , from the temple to the citadel Jeb. 22, 1; 26,12; to go into the combat, because fights were usually on a plain 1 Kings 18, 44; to go to the slaughter-bench Jeb. 48, 15; io travel, to a, country lying lower Judges 7, 24, 1 Sam. 25, 1, so from Jerusalem to Egypt Gen. 12, 10, to Philistia and the lands on the coast Judges 14, 1, 1 Sam. 13, 20, into the Jordan- vaUey 10, 8; it is even coupled with Qi'ifiin-by Judges ' 11, 37, when the country out of which one goes to the mountains lies still higher; to flown down Dbut. 9, 21; to I fall down, of rain, of dew Num. 11, 9, and so in a great variety of applications. Like other words of flowing, overflow- ing, 1p; (likewise Ar. O^^) has with it an accus. of the thing which descends, e. g. the eye flows with D^.JJ "libs Lament. 3, 48, ■Q'^12 1, 16, TiSm Jbr. 9, 17, sel- dom with a Is. 15, 3.' Deriv. trm and the proper 'names IT;., 'j'5'i\ Hif. Ti'liil {party-\-^^y)i, fut. T'Tl'') prop, to cause a thing to go down, to bring down Judges 7, 4; 1 Sam. 30, 15; to let down Josh. 2, 15; to send down Ez. 26, 20; to cast down Ps. 56, 8; to put down Is. 10, 13; to subdue, chastise 2 Sam. 22, 48, for which lai'l stands in the parallel place of the Psalm; to let flow down, shed, tears Lament. 2, 18 ; to sink, the head 2, 10; to cause to flow down Is. 63, 6. Sof.TVfnpass. of Hifil: to be led down Gen. 39,1, to be taken down Num.10, 17, to be cast down Is. 14, 15. The original idea of 'I'l'' is both a motion downwards and a motion for- wards, to proceed, to proceed descend- ing, to fall forwards, to which the same stem in Ethiopic, and usage in Arabic (tS. to go down) point. Hence it is cognate with a'n"' (which see) to throw headlong, to precipitate, with 'B iwb to run to m^et, to precipitate before, and Pih. £2'!^ trans. The organic root Tl"^, tJT'' is identical with that in Vl, Tn, r I ' it' 1-' arrn &c. r T T"]^ (according to some low ground, water, comp. '(Xll)'^-P- "*• Gen. 5, 15, the sixth in the series of the patriarchs Gen. ch. 5 ; and if we assume that the fathers before the flood only denoted a very old circle of gods, we may understand by this the god of low ground, of water, Bomewhat = the Indian Var una. Asa designation of a certain circle of time '^ may denote a marching down, i. e. the going down to the plain to carry on the cultivation of the soil. In any case Tl|J appears to be identical with IT'S of the other narrator. A name of later times 1 Che. 4, 18. \^11 (prop- river, from IV, as in n^^ 606 n-1^ Syr. from the same stem comes the noun l?r* lake, sea; comp. lis^ the Nile, prop, river, stream, l'nil5, and the Nile itself [see 'n6<^], also Ganges from ganga, prop, river, Lat. Bhenus, German Bhein, prop, flowing, river, &c. &o. The ter- mination )-, as already remarked by Hitler in his Onomast. p. 194, is a very old Aramaeising dual form [comp. Aram. Vp^l> because the river is divided by the Sea of Genesareth, comp. ']''H'1^ = ^?pj'll?) «• P- of the great river of Pa- lestine, the Jordan, usually with the ar- ticle on account of its easily observable appellative signification Gen. 13,10; 32, 11; 50,10; Is. 8, 23; Jek. 12, 5 &c.; the article is omitted only in Ps. 42, 7, where the poet calls all Palestine '^ yiN , and Job 40, 23, where '2 denotes stream, river generally. In Phenic. ■j'n'n^ was also the name of a river in Crete (Hom. Odyss. /, 292). The Jordan has its different springs at the foot of Antili- banus, and comes forth from a hollow (Pan's hollow) south of the city "J^^ T^ (Phenic. I^l bS2 i. e. Paneas, Banjas), . for which reason the Talmud (Bechoroth 55) looked upon the name as moulded together from 'j^ I'll;, (river of Dan). '■■'il ^3^ see ^33pirt"'n:35> see'iaS; liN-l '^'n see IINX As to the orthography of the name, there was in addition to yj'll (whence the Targ. Ni'i'il, Phenic. 'j'^'i^ & yvy^ (from Ti;), from the latter "of which arose the Greek 'loQddvtjs, Lat. Jordanes and Jordanis (Plin. H. N. 5, 15), Syr. Jurdnon, Arab. el-Urdan (it is, however, so called only as far as the lake of Tiberias, for south of that it is named el-Sahriat, juUwmJI i. e. the ford), Pers. Jlordum. The derivation of it from Iji'n, At. (J<>j, to rush, should be rejected. m^ (ouljfut.pl. Il^'nn, which should be read Itl'iFi, as some mss. have 1tTi''ri) intr. same as N'li to be terrified, afraid Is. 44, 8, coupled with iriS; Ar. s\j the same. See Nl"'. i"t m^ I. (1 p. perf. ■'n'^'IJ!; part. m. h'li'' , ;?Z.D'''nii, f'f; inf.ahs.'rn^, c.ni';)^, with b,ni'iib, once Ni'n: 2Chb.26, 25"; imp. '^'T. i /^*- i^'?."'? ) which does not, however, occur) tr. l.to throw with a sling, with a of the shooting-engine 2 Chb. 26, 15 ; to shoot, arrows (Q"'!?n , D1(?t) 1 Sam. 20, 36 37,PROv.26,18,'omittingyn2KiNGS 13,17, Ps.64,5, with V at one'Ps.11,2; npii (pi. Di^i) an archer 1 Chr. 10, 3; 2 Chr. 35, 23. On d^ii see !TTi 11. — ' , 'T ■ ITT 2. to lay, the foundation- or corner-stone Job 38, 6; to erect, a memorial stone Gbk.31,51; generally to found; the Aram. NM"!, Syr. ]^'>, Greek ^allsa&ai, Lat. jacere being also used in the same sense. Derivat. a = 'b5>a n^na), ^ IT ' IT -|- -1- IT'' Heshbon is destroyed unto Dibon, we de- solated them (Qiib'2 fiit. Hif. of H«3S = nSJ Jbb. 4, 7) as far as Nofach (Nobach), the fire (1256} for 1«58«., as the LXX read) reacheth unto Medeba. — 2. to shine, to glitter, to light, hence to see, which is an illumination (comp. Xemam)', as iriN'i (which see), is also capable of being referred to this primitive idea; nn^ 607 D!3K?n> and the redupl. Mv comes back to tte signification just given. See Hifil. Hif.'rn^'n (par*: tipia, pl.'a'''-\ya; inf. tonstr. ni'i'ifT, fut. tihi'') 1. to shew, to point out, i. e. to cause to see, witli ac- cusative of the person and also of the thing, as y» Ex. 15, 25, Tj'i'ji Ps. 27,11, seldomer with a to point to a thing, as ■nTia ISAM. 12^23, bs T'a Job27,11, or with 5N 2 Chr. 6, 27, but also with the omissfon of Tj'n'i. Gen. 46, 28 ; with ■JM of the thing out of which. Is. 2, 3 and he will shew us (one) of his ways, in a fig. sense; sometimes also with a of the instrument Prov. 6, 13. — 2. to teach, to instruct, prop, to point out a way, an outlet or expedient, with accus. of the person Job 6, 24 or accus. of the thing Is. 9, 14, or with a double accus. Ps. 27, 11; 86, 11 &c.; seldom withb of the person Deut. 33, 10, Hos. 10, 12 ; or absol. Hab. 2, 19; Job 36, 22. Hence tTn^M a teacher, master, prop, instructor Is! 9,14; once !Tnia stands for it Ps. 9, 21, as the LXXandSyr. have taken it. On the meaning "lord, ruler" see under tTia; and In'lin in proper names see under tTniM. — Derivat. Mlin and per- IV IT *■ haps Tin 1. m^ in. (i. e. trm, transposed from ttTn : in Kal only part. m. Uli"') intr. to IT T ' tf ^ K flow abundantly, to stream over, part. rt'li"' as a noun the early rain, as that which pours in abundance Deut. 11, 14; Jbe. 5, 24; on the contrary npi'' Hos. 6, 3 is the fut. Hif. for 'n'l^•^ TilSN^and has therefore the accus. with it. The noun trni"' as a proper name is only a colla- teral form of npii; and perhaps the proper name '''I'ii'also belongs here. Nif. JTnna (only fut. N'ni'' Prov. 11, 25, whic£ stands perhaps for Tt'Tji) to be moistened, see Hof. Sif. n^^ifi (ti;ih, fut. 'n'ri\part. nnia) 1. to water, to fructify, with the accus. yiN Hos. 6, 3; part. !TniM = !Tni'' the richly- fructifying early rain Jo. 2, 23, along with I25i)jba , as STli'' in Jek. 5, 24 ; on the other hand npia'Ps. 84, 7 is the proper name of a parched and fruitless valley, through which the pilgrims had to go, as well as through that of Baca. Other places were also designated more exactly by STpiM, as iftN Gen. 12, 6, fTiiW^ nya.^ Judges 7,1; a point which will be explained under tl'ilM. — 2. to fructify, to beget, of a man. Job 3, 3 and the night, which said, a man ha» begotten. But see Til'n. Hof. n^in {fut. N'nii = !S'Ti\ which, ' IT ^ IT ' \ however, is better taken as Nif.) pass, to be moistened, quickened, Prov. 11, 25, ilT; (an old form for ni'n^ from IrTi; I.) f. foundation, place, only in the proper names bNil^, t:bti1'^^ bS'n^ {foundation of El) n.p. of a de- sert, the south-eastern continuation of the desert 5>i)?n, 2 Chr. 20, 16 compared with 20, 20; 'and probably the large flat teiTitory which is now named el-HusS,sah (yiisri) from a bns (Wady) on its nor- thern side (Bobinson, Palest. IT. p. 480). niT^ (perhaps denom. fromn'i|l; bont at the new moon) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 5, 14. Comp.'^blbN (see bibs), UJnn (see'tt)'ih4)f lan, ''AX!, nvjin, i'lS,' nss (modern He- brew nDs = B-]a), ■in^TB. pi"!"! m. same as 'p'T:, green thing, green herb Job 39, 8. J^aJ^T^ (possession, viz. of Jah) n. p.f. 2 Kings lb, 33, for which 2 Chr. 27, 1 has TW^'T'. IT : naJIT' ra. p. see NUSil"!. IT : * IT : ob'ai'n'^ (originating in Dbld-1'1':, ac- cording to the Masora on Jer. 26, 18 written fully five times D'jbi^l'n':, as it was at a later period on Maccabean coins and in modem Hebrew; with a of motion 'rrnhm'-fi IKings 10,2 or fully rurbidiT: 2 CHR.3'2,9 ; with prefixes -lBQiL.jof. abaJITi see Db«5l'n\ m^ (not used) intr. prop, same as rt'iN to go about, to wander, same as aSD, 'iriD, prop, to turn, to go about, here to make a circuit, spoken of the moon^ the moon being generally celebrated for her majestic walking (Job 31 ,26). Deriv. Tty^, n'l;, the proper names tTn"'. and ni'T'. - "T The fundamental signification of the stem "' to riT' does not lie in to shine, T -,-T ... to glitter, even if fisab (which see), Ar. -43*, Latla luna, proceed from that; but in the regular monthly circuit ; and the Ar. ^\l (to run through a cycle of ^ .-- -0^ time), together with -»- ji i 'wbence x^«! a section of time, ;^_i«Lj' a chronicle, and ^ >. n. to descnbe a monthly date, confirm this fundamental meaning, which can only be in the organic root tl'i"'*! found adso in HTa, m"n &c. r T I r T 1?'' (P'^*'P- aparticip. noun; withsw^f. '^d'!!^) "*• pi^op. that which makes a circuit (monthly), hence the moon, a heavenly body determining times Ps. 104, 19; in m^ 609 ^ixn*" prose with the article Gen. 37,9; Deot?. 4, 19; 17, 3; 2 Kings 23, 5, seldom in poetry Ps. 136, 9; rather is it omitted there Job 25, 5; 31, 26. ';; ■'p.Db Ps. 72, 5 before the moon, i. e. as long as the moon endures, always, like "^ iba IS till there is no more moon, i. e. always; 89, 38 confirming this manner of ex- pression. In Targumic, Syr., Zab. and Arab, are used for "moon", like the Hebr. !i:3b in poetry, such nouns as have stems denoting to shine, Aram. S'lnO, Syr. iicTUo, Ar. ^ (from ^ to be white); but the use of the word for "month" is a sure proof of the deriva- tion given. The Arab. _K to come at evening, of the new moon, is a denom. rrr;. (^^^.D'^ni';, constr.^trriim. l.prop. time of the cycle of the moon, i. e. a lunar month, Dbut. 33,, 14; Job. 3, 6; 7, 3 &c., used in poetry as well as prose, though the later ffllh (which see) is more fre- quent. D''Mi 'I. I)eut.21,13 and 1 Kings 15, 13 a month of time, i. e. a month long. fiTlT' 'lU'na Deut. 33, 14 fruit of mx)nths, r T : viv i.e. what the months bring; poet. D'j|5. "'ti'n; Job 29, 2 months of the past, i. e. earlier days. — '■> is related to riT' as moon to month, fiyvtj to /i^v; Aram. iSITi^, i-^r') Zab. transp. Nin^ ^^^ same; and the noun may also have been in Arab., as is to be seen from ^\j 11. — 2. (per- haps = UJin new moon, and then like it applied to proper names) n. p. of the fifth son of Joktan Gen. 10, 26; 1 Che. 1, 20; afterwards the name of a tribe related to the Hadramautites, and of a region, by which is understood the moon- coast if^\ V^) ^^^ moon-mountains ( -«iiJI tKA=») with their inhabitants in the neighbourhood of Hadramaut. ni'J (not used) Aram, same as Hebr. tnTi, hence ni'' (pi- V into the hands of one, ' : I": r Job 16, 11 he hurled me into the hands of the wicked, as the LXX, Symm., Vulg„ ft si have already taken it; Ar. hyy Puh.li^'^ (part. aTia) io be swift, nimble, as in (Hab. 1,8) of the Chaldeans, hence B'lia, coupled with "^jTSaa, Is. 18, 2 7; describing the bold and warlike Ethio- pians at Meroe. But see a'nn. ''"I'l (an old form for T\^y_ from !Tn; I.) f. foundation, same as ^T^, only in the proper names bs'^'l';, n^»Vr> '''^iP} ^l!ti"1i {foundation or possession ofEi) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 7, 2. 39 ani 610 nsn^ D"'")'' (a noun developed out of the fut. Hif. of ai'l) m. 1. an opponent, adver- sary, enemy Is. 49, 25; Jer. 18, 19; Ps. 35, 1. — 2. (a leader of combat, viz. Jah is) n.p. m. EzR. 8, 16. The proper names a'l'iji"', ^■''iJiJT; are compounded with it. ''?"'1'! (contracted from ti,:;?'''^^ •^"^ is a leader of combat) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 11, 46. The proper name "'i'^'i is abridged from it. ln*'1'' (contracted from fli i^i; founda- L IT • : JT r: tion of Jah) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 26, 31. iin*1i (= H'T') n.p. m. 1 Chr. 23, 19 ; 24, 23. TVrV'y^ see in'n"'. irf'l'^ see 'vrw niXJ''"]'; {elevation^ see n'iM'n^)n.;>. m. 1 Che! 7, 7; 12, 5; 25, 4; 27,'l9; 2 Chr. 11,18; 24,30; 31,13. ni'a'^n': see mz'y). ny'l'! \pl- "^■''1% from S*p; which see) f. the curtain (from its tremulous motion,) of the tabernacle Ex. ch. 26-36 ; Num. 4, 25; the hanging, of a tent Ex. 26,12; metaph. tent Ps. 104, 2, parallel to bns Jer. 4, 20; 10, 20; 49, 29; SoN& OF Sol. 1,5; therefore coupled Tfith '^ina 2 Sam. 7, 2, ntin 1 Chr. 17, 1, niS'i'i being the chief parts of the tent. Poet. yiN niS*"''!^ Hab. 3, 7 the tents of the earth i. e. the nomadic peoples of the earth. Syr. pi*r* also « *«"'• j-liJjiTi {shyness, timidity; pi. for the abstract) ra. ^. /l 1 Che. 2, 18. TlTl (not used) intr. same as IjS'n 3'T' 13>VD"'3n'aM Ex. 28, 42 from the loins even to the thighs; Song of Sol. 7, 2 the roundings of thy thighs, i. e. the beautiful archings of them; '"In £]3 Gen. 32, 26 the socket of the thigh, i. e. the hollow between the thigh-bone and the loins. Peculiar phrases are: 'hv pilB ilBrt Tj'ni Judges 15, 8 to smite the hip to- gether with (b? so employed also in Gen. 32, 12; Ex. 12, 9; Job 38, 32) the thighs a proverbial phrase for, to smite vio-^ lently, fearfully even to maiming, partly the same in Arab, too (see Hamasa ed. Freytag p. 250). ';| b^ pBD (or 'J-btj) Jee. 31, 15, Ez. 21, IT, to smite violently on the thigh, a gesture of pain and aver- sion, comp. Horn. II. 16, 125; Od. 13, 198. 's 's'T' NSii Gen. 46, 26, Ex. 1, 5 : I •.•!•.■ ITT ' ' ' = 'a ■'Jtbrna N5f Gen. 35, 11 signifying :!■•:- ■• IT T ' 11 to be descended from, QiST' as well as Q'jSbn being thought of as organs of generation; hence to put the hand under the thigh Gen. 24, 2 and 47, 29 equivalent to to take a solemn oath, the organs of the generating power of nature having in the view of the ancients a certain sanctity (Herod. 2, 48, 1; Plut. de Isid. 18). Me- taphor, nates (buttocks) Num. 5,21 27; the flank. Judges 3, 16 21, Ps. 45, 4, in animals the leg, ham Ez. 24, 4, in inani- mate things the side Ex. 40,22 24, the bending, turning, i. e. the lower side Ex. 25, 31; 37,17; but ns'i;; as a peculiar form stands for this more frequently. 111 see Tt'Ti and nsir ■I -.'re M"T IT :- NlDl^ (only with suff. Wii'l^) Aram, f. thigh, side, of inanimate things Dan. 2, 32. riDII] (from a masc. 'Tjl^., with stif, inaii, DnST' K'tib; dual QT31\ but I T :-' ITT :- ' TT :" constr. '^Ti&'-fl with Dagesh lene in Kaf) fern, the side, hence dual, the two hinder sides of a thing, e. g. of 1311553 Ex. 26^ 23 27; 36, 27, i. e. the hindmost, last,; D"'D^^ 611 D^^ extreme space whieli is conceived of as two hinder sides. So also of rr^a 1 Kings '6, 16; Am. 6, 10; yi^ Jee. g', 22; 50, 41 (interchanged with nis33 in the same sense); -lia Is. 14, 15; Ez. 32, 23; in Judges 19, 18 ; rt'ny?? 1 Sam. 24, 4 ; rtiiBD Jon. 1, 5; ^i£!:£ Is' 14, 13; Ez. 38," 15; Ps. 48, 3; lis'a^ 2 Kings 19, 23; Is. 37, 24. The sing, is but seldom used in the sense issue, end Gen. 49, 13 and Ez. 46, 19 K'ri. The transference of the names of members to inanimate things is also found in &3U9, Cin^, tfiii &c. D"n^ (not used) intr. same as d'n, dIN pT *• ' it' n /o ie A/giA, large, to be elevated. As an organic root 01 is developed into stems in all sorts of possible enlargements; and is found in dl, dN'^^ M-»1, OTH, r' J" ' IT t' r t ' dlTi , dT5> &c. besides in dTN , d1 ; we r T ' 1- T '"«■' i" have to assume a stem dl"" foT the de- rivatives niMI"", n'in'n*i, "'MT' &c. all the more readily, as (..j occurs in Ar. also with a like meaning. an'' (constr. dp^) m., IriMI^ /. see iM1^, I ••: JlU'l'' (arising from the fut. of inMl) m. the elevated, only in the proper name IT ; : * ' IT : :^ nijQ'l? {height, hill) n. p. 1. of a city in the plain of Judah, formerly the resi- dence of a.Canaanite king Josh. 10, 3; 12,11; 15,35, and inhabited again after the exile Neh. 11, 29. According to Jerome it lay in the vicinity of biNFittSsjt about l-'^/a German miles from Beth- G'abrin; now the hamlet Jarmuk. — 2. of a Le^^cal city in Issachar Josh. called nai 19, 21, and 3,58; different from ntaNl Jilead 6, 65. (from d'T' m., nal"' f.; the pIuT. for the abstract, elevation) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 8, 14; 23, 23; 25,22, for which ria-'li stands in 24, 30 and 25, 4; Ezr. 10,' 26' 27; 10, 29 K'tib, for which the K'ri has niMI; niW'T' IChr. 7, 8. it' 1 ": ' ''P")''. (from n;j dp'; Jdh is an exalted one; dp^ constr. of dp;)' w.^.m.EzK.10,33. ST'aT' (contracted from fti 'rta'T ; Jah IT : : • ^ IT IV : • ' is the exalted one) n. p. ra. of the famous priestly prophet, to whom belongs the well-known collection of oracles in the Old Testament Jbk. 27, 1; Dan. 9, 2; Greek 'l8QS[iiag (Matth. 16, 14). Also a proper name for different persons 1 Che. 5,24; 12,4 10; Neh. 10, 3; 12,1 12. in''53"1'' (the same) n. p. m. of the same prophet Jer. 1, 1 &c. A name also of other persons 1 Chr. 12, 13; 2 Kings 23,31; Jer. 35, 5. J^"l^ (only 3 pers. perf. Wl'') intrans. 1. to turn bach timidly, to be afraid, to despair, to tremble, to quake, identical with Np;, Mp;, Arab, co (to be fear- ful, despairing), c^j (to recede timidly). Hence with a play on the word Is. 15, 4 therefore the equipped of Moab cry out (Wl"'), their souls despair; or on that account the heroes of Moab cry out, their souls tremble within them. Deriv. the proper name ri'i5>i'l\ — 2. Metaphor. to wave hither arid thither, to flutter, spoken of inanimate things, cognate in sense b^l (= ISl), whence nbsi (a veil). The fut.' Spi belongs to'»?'i. Deriv. M5>''1\ IT •: NBT' m. see bNB1\ IT : ■ I" : : • bt^i:>^' ish yello-w, golden colour ; comp. Sanskrit Mranja green, gold, Greek iqiasog, with the Sanskrit harita green. See Pih. I. and II. Deriv. the proper name ']^|J^^ Pih. I. pljJ'n'; (aredupl. form; not used) to be greenish yellow, gold-coloured, shin- ing, designations of yellow and green being often derived from the vegetable kingdom ; comp. Greek yhoQog from x^-oij, Syr. i-oi-ki>o flavus from ^j-t > -^^^ iJ^oV. the yello-wing of corn, from a stem (jO — ij)i5> ^^^ tiom another stem of the same root (jw^j to be green, to grow, comes ;-*«j. yellowish red, (jwvl. yellowish. De- rivat. the adject. p'il5'n\ Pih. II. p'2'] (not used) to be very pale, to be fawn-coloured, i. e. to be of a pale yellow; of the yellowish colour of the face, of the yellowing of corn &c. Deriv. As to the stem, it is usually separated from p'lj ; but if one keeps in view the organic root of both (p'l"'', p'n"''), and puts it with that in pt! 11-, V^ , PT'3 H-j p'l"S II., pVT , there appears as a com- mon fundamental signification the intr. to be moist, juicy; hence of plants, to sprout, to be green, to grow, or to be fresh, tender, green {"pT); of food, to be fluid, thin (ppM II., pps'll.); of a fluid, to flow, to pour; of mud, to flow out, hence act. to spit out (pip."!) ; of a fluid material, to wet, moisten (p'lj); and lastly, of earthy or firmer parts to be soft, thin, tender, so far as that expresses the fluidity of them. Prom to sprout, to be green, has arisen the verb of colour to be green, of the bright green of plants; then to be- come yellow, to be yellow, taken from the ulterior progress of plants ; and even to be reddish yellow, of the glitter of gold, and accordingly to shine; ideas of shin- ing, glittering being elsewhere connected with that of blooming, sprouting, and thus p'lT I. and 11. would coincide. Hence in Arab, there is a radical connection between the stems ^\^ (to sprout, to be green), |j,\j (to put forth leaves), ^jwj (to be yellow, yellowish green), ij»j (to wet, to moisten), |j\ (to be thin, tender, weak), ij-w* (to be fluid, of soup; the usual ijy^ is a denomi). See the de- rivatives of the single stems. pTi (constr. pl^) m. the tender, fresh sprout, of the N^. 2 Kings 19, 26, Is. 37, 27, which has no continuance "'SSb d't'ip ■ (D^np should be read for rtnp). p^in l-H a garden of green, e. g. of herbs &c' bEUT.11,10; 1 Kings 21,2; '; np'^N a portion of herbs, i. e. cabbage Peov. 15, 17. Comp. Ar. sU\^ leaf, dsf a kind of fodder, from (Jjf = lilT (to be green, tender), Syr. l-oi-', Jj^r* (cabbage, herbs), U-*-^' (green, from V^), l-^'4 (to be moist, to sprout), Ar. _ yo (meadow) from srv-^ &c. &c. B'lU m, greenness, verdure, coupled with iiasj Gen. 1, 30; 9, 3, Nffl'j Ps. 37, 2, MnterT'NnM. 22, 4, y5> Ex. iK 15. See lipn'; (from Pih. II. of pp^) m. pale yellow, the colour of the face Jer. 30, 6, comp. Greek ^jXcapoff, dt'^Qog; then yellow- ness, of corn Deut. 28, 22, Am. 4, 9, Hagg. 2, 17, coupled with ')is'5'aJ (a dis- ease of grain); Ar. (jLsvJ, -vl, (j\l the same. lip'^i {pale yellow, as a colour of water, from ppj) n. p. of a city in Dan, coupled only with ''M, perhaps because it lay upon a river named pp'l^t? "''?. Josh. 19, 46, not to be identified with J/p'li {constr. Sp.T') m. see ayp"|i (from dS> and SpT' fut. Hof. IT I: :t ^ r V :t of S'p.'n ; spreading of the people) n. p. of a city in Judah 1 Chr. 2, 44. plp'^'! object. TO., plur. f. nij^'ip'i';, 1. greenish, greenish yellow, of the colour of the leprosy in clothes Lev. 13, 49; 14, 37. — 2. greenish yellow, of gold, or reddish yellow, of the colour of yi'in Ps. O 68, 14, in Ethiopic gold itself, Ar. ij^j 5j;ni 613 nty"!^ money), ijLi\f crocus, Sanskrit Mranja, greenish and gold &c. t2?1^ I. {inf. constr. ni^p; fut. Vi'r"i) trans, same as IZJ'IS I. to drive, to drive forth, to chase away, to take away, with accus.of the person Deut.2,21 22-, 9,1, coupled with T'MiUtl 2, 12; but always with the additional idea of taking pos- session of what belongs to the expelled Dbut. 11, 23; 12,2; 18,14; 19,1; 31, 8; Jbr. 49, 2; Prov. 30, 23. The LXX and other translators have for the most part the translation of llSl-i I. 'B "^isn "i to drive one away from the face of a person, i. e. that he should see him no more Deut. 12, 29, Judges 11, 24, = 'B --Jsn lap.; Ex. 34, 11; but the Hif. iB'''pi'n Judges 11, 23 or T'auJti Dbut. 31, 3 are usually employed in this sense; and then ili'y follows in signifi- cation II., as a supplement. Nif iiSpiS (fut. ffl'nn';) to be robbed, of possessions, to be taken away, hence to ■become poor Gen. 45, 11; Prov. 20, 13; 23, 21; 30, 9, identical with TU'n (til'n), which means, in its fundamental sense, the same as \jm\\ to snatch away. . Hif. i»i'iirt (part. ttS'^'liM; fut. ffli'ir) to snatch away, to carry away, to destroy, by pestilence Num. 14, 12; to root out Ex. 15, 9; to expel, drive away Judges 1, 29 30 31 33; 11, 23; Josh. 3, 10; 17, 13; Num. 33, 52; Ps. 44, 3, and like Kal in this sense coupled with 'S "'JEM Ex. 34, 24 ; Num. 32, 21 ; 1 Kings 14, 24 • 21, 26 ; 2 Kings 16,3; metaphor, to rob, hence to make poor 1 Sam. 2, 7, opposite to TiTZiyti, and fig..ii25'T''is.'34, 11; imp. •6'-\ and Tli'i, also ffl'l^; inf. constr. mo'i, with suff. Timi, also'TlJT" Judges 14, 15 according to the acceptation of Norzi in the Minchath Shay; fut. US^"*^ , pi. ^■^T\ together with lUS'i;;) tr. l'. to take, to seize, to snatch to oneself, parti- cularly by force, rapere, 1 Kings 21, 15 16 18; to take possession of, with accus. of a place Gen. 15, 7, Lev. 20, 24, Num. 13, 30, Josh. 1, 11, spoken of a land, house, riches &c. Ez. 7, 24, Ps. 105, 44; to conquer Is. 14, 21, Ps. 83, 13, but seldom absol. Deut. 2, 24. ffl'ii'' he who takes possession, a conqueror Jee. 8, 10, Mic. 1, 15 (with an allusion here to the word iraJN'na). Here belongs also the expression S^N ^Via '; Gen. 22, 17 to conquer the gate of the enemy, i. e. his cities. — 2. Like the cognate in sense TnN to possess, to inhabit, to hold in possession, spoken of lands, regions &c. Lev. 25, 46; Ez. 36, 12; Is. 60, 21. Also trop. of inanimate things Hos. 9, 3, or of animals Is. 34, 11. Here belongs the passage Judges 18, 7: and the possessor of the dominion (l^y td'li^) injured nothing in the land. — 3. to inherit, to take pos- session of as an inheritance , absol. Gen. 21, 10, or with accus. of the thing Num. 36, 8; to be heir of, with accus. of the person Gen. 15, 3 4. izS'iii an heir 2 Sam. 14, 7. Deriv. irdT', MiBT', nilj'n, TiSlia, MlUlia, TBTniFi, and the proper names NTiSiV, inuJi'T', nia^ia. IT : ' IT : ' V IV Pih. iBp^, (fut. lap^^) to hold in pos- session, to receive, figurat. Deut. 28, 42, Hif 1l5"''pirt (fut. iB-i'ii"') to give in pos- session, with a double accus. Judges 11, 24, 2 Chr. 20, 11, hence figurat. Job 13, 26: (AoM leavest me in possession of the sins of^y youth (i. e. the punishment of them) ; to leave for an inheritance, with b of the person Ezr. 9, 12. As to the stem 'ttS'T' II. which is in "•" = Arabic '\j, in Syr. .^j-', it is identical with lijp,; II., to'lNi &c. in the organic root; whence we see that the funda- mental, signification is to bind, to unite, to comprehend. t\X&'y\ f. an object of possession, of conquest (of enemies) Num. 24, 18. r\\D^^ 614 3jy^ ntij"!"; f. 1. a possession, Deut. 2, 5; Josh. 1, 15; Judges 21, 17. — 2. m- heritance Jee. 32, 8. aj"' (a very old noun from a verb- stem InilS'', which has lost, however, the IT T ' ' ' final sound in pronunciation, the same thing taking place also in other nouns from rfb, as in the case withdl;, 11, DtO, yy, 15, na, blB, Vn; before Makkeph ■aj;;, with suff. J^tB';, i:©.'; , Dj5l!Jp.) m. being, existence. But in actual use ffl'; sub- ordinates itself 1. to another noun (as bs, "tab, ^bn &c.), so that it cannot be conceived of without a supplement, e. g. fi"'t7'b!!|t UJ;; , i. e. though a subst. it appears almost entire- ly as a verb, and the suffixes to it are verbal, i. e. with S inserted, as iSttJ"' th^re is EsTH. 3, 8 ; hence it does not appear in the constr. state. — 12}^ forms along with the noun following either a proposition by itself, as nTRFi llj;; Job 11, 18 there is hope, ilifsn ''b"'^.1 EuTH 1, 12 Ihavehope; or it stands in connection with a suc- ceeding proposition whose noun is inde- finite, and which is better helped forward by it, Pkov. 18, 24 there is a friend who is more faithful than a brother; Job 5, 1 there is one that hears thee. More rarely is ffi; succeeded by definite nouns in a circumstantial statement Judges 6, 13; or in conditional clauses Gen. 24, 49 ; Judges 6, 36. For ©;; sib Job 9, 33 should be read la;; Nb (sb = lb) accord- ing to the LXX and Syr. — 2. Like the idea of a verb in the 3* person it may either stand alone and without a supplement, e. g. TjnN ti;; there is with thee Prov. 3, 28; or separated from its reference, e. g. 3^ ib-ffli Gen. 33, 9 there is much to me, i. e. I have much; or like a verb it is put after the sub- ject, e. g. 12);; tT'X''?. ^^* '■"'^ there, i. e. are not wanting Is. 43, 8, 1 Sam. 21, 5, hence also as an answer 125;; it is, yes, Jer. 37, 17 ; in a strengthened form ©;; ti;;j it is certainly 2 Kings 10, 15. Here belongs also the union with 1tt5N. in «J^; 1125n there are many who . . . i. e. many . . . NbhI 5,2 3 4. — 3. equivalent to iisiriin (which is from the same verb) essential, i. e. enduring possession Prov. 8, 21, as Ibn Esra already translates ; the LXX having vnag^is, Gr. Venet. ovaia. — By an Ara- maeism tOS? stands in 2 Sam. 14, 19 and Mic. 6, 10, in many mss. 12J''N, for ffl:, which should be referred perhaps to a stem !ll25iS = iiuS''; in Aram. rT'lS stands IT T ITT' _ r , for it (which see), whence in conjunc- tion with Nb has arisen n''b. As the proper name "'125'; is formed from 123.";; so is the proper name ''B5''N (a collateral form of ■'UJ'') from 125''N or T2JN ; and from n^N is a proper name "'n'^K. Phenie. 125i« {tig, as, us) the same (Plant. 1, 7). i^^^ (not used) intr. same as ST125"', fiuSs. Deriv. the proper name i!«l25''n, which see. 3ti/'' (part. m. Siai'', f n^'IJi'' and fiai^V Neh. 3, 8, with the very old an- nexed "'- before the genitive "'4125'' m. Ps. 123, 1 and iinlTJJ'' fem. Jer.'iO^ 17; 22,23; Lament. 4,' 21; inf. absol. a^lBJ, once ai\23 with Yod thrown away Jer. 42, 10, and the reverse once aiffli 2 Sam. ' ' IT 15, 8 K'ri for Siffl from ^^"O; inf. constr. naffl, with suf.''n^ili, once "ina^ [accord- ing to some] Ps. 23, 6; imp. STB, before Makkeph -ati, and !iai25; fia. aiB.';, apoc. aia^ , once Iri5i3ttj''n Ez. 35, 9 K'tib, while the K'ri like" 1 Sam. 7, 14 has MSliSn, but Ez. 36, 33 is in favour of the K'tib) intr. to be firm in a place, to hold it fast, to possess, hence 1. to sit, comprehend- ing with Dljji (to rise up) Ps. 139, 2 or Niai NS; Is. 37, 28, all doings and trans- actions. With a of a place when it is of such a kind that one sits in it Gen. 19, 1, 2 Sam. 7, 1; elsewhere with b?, when one sits upon 1 Kjngs 1, 35, 2 Kings 13, 13 or at something 1 Sam» 20, 24; also with b and the infinitive following Prov. 23, 1; seldom with b. of a place Ps. 132, 12; Is. 47, 1. With dS of a person to sit along with one, i. e. to be on terms of communion with Ps. 2^^ 615 35^1 26, 4 5; Jbr. 15, 17. To this belongs the signification to sit down, i. e. to enjoy the rest of sitting Gen. 27, 19, with b of the place Ps. 9, 5; '? V?"'\' 'J to sit at one's right hand Ps. 110, 1, which is a seat of honour (1 Kings 2, 19), or with b? Is. 47, 1 ; 1 Kings 2, 19. With TSSiM Gen. 21, 16 to sit over against, where nb is inserted in order to ex- press self, "i has often the secondary- sense a) to sit in judgment, to judge (comp. Lat. sedere, Ar. (jjuJ^ V.), ap- plied to God and men Ps. 9, 5; 9, 8 310.1 labiSb will judge for ever; Mal. 3, 3; hence "the phrase UBTBlarrby "> Is. 28, 6, because judges usually sat on high chairs; sometimes it is the case that even BSffl follows in the infin. as a supplement Jo. 4, 12; of God, who sits for judgment bisiab i. e. in order to bring afloodFs. 29, 10. b) to be enthroned, of kings Ps. 61, 8, Is. 14, 13, along with bM Zech. 6, 13; of God Ps. 2, 4; 55, 20; 102, 13; in which sense it is con- strued with bs , 3 &c. ; Qiailii'' enthroned ones, i. e. princes Is. 10, 13. To this belongs the signification to rest upon a thing, = 351, the act of being enthroned, as it were, above a thing, with accusat. 3113'' Q''a'l3lri enthroned on the Cherubim 1 Sam. 4,'4';' 2 Sam. 6,2; 2 Kings 19, 15; 1 Chr. 13, 6 ; parall. with 31'13-b? iS"!. Figurat. bisiia-' nibnn siiSr' Ps. 22, 4 enthroned over Israel's songs of praise; fflp. SIS'' Ps. 55, 20 enthroned or riding along upon the east wind, in order to punish, c) to sit in ambnsh, to lurk, Ps. 17, 12; though sti"" in this sense is usually combined with other words, e. g. a'liN Judges 16, 9, a'lN inb Job 38, 40, ai8na Ps. 10, 8; comp. Greek loxsvoi from Xsyca. On the contrary '^ Jer. 3, 2 has only the meaning to abide, sofar as the harlot was accustomed to tarry in the ways (Prov. 7, 12). d) to sit as an expression of being bowed down, struck down and forsaken, with V"iNb Is. 3, 26; Job 2, 13; 1D5>-bs» 18.47^1; 113 7 ' ' IT T - ' ' IT T Lament. 1, 1 ; 3, 28 ; Qniia'j? Ezr. 9, 3 ; nsnbi* Gen. 38, 11; Is'. 47, 8. e) to sit IT T : - ' ' ' ^ in inactivity Is. 30, 7, quietly waiting for something (b») Jer. 8, 14, hence to lie in rest and idleness Judges 5, 16, elsewhere y^'i Gen. 49, 14; to this head belongs also "^ 1 Sam. 13, 16. f) to sit spoken of inanimate things, i. e. to be put, placed, Ps. 122, 5 for there are set thrones for judgment (Targ., LXX, Syr.); to stand there 125, 1 (Targ.), parallel £3173^ isb; to be firmly established, Zech. 12, 6 and Jerusalem shall be firmly established in its own place at Jerusalem, i. e. just where it stands at present; 14, 10; Jer. 30, 18 the palace shall stand at the proper place, parall. flbrfb^ i^riSSJ ; to lie there, Zech. 2, 8 Jerusalem shall lie there as niT'iS (an open place), i. e. be no 'ittSM Tiy. — 2. to abide, to remain, with a 2 Sam.'iO, 5, bj? 1 Sam. 25, 13, and the accus. of the place Euth 2,7; with b of the person for whom one tarries Ex. 24, 14, Num. 22, 19 (where this dative is omitted), Hos. 3, 3 ; and also with a pleonast. dat. Gen. 22, 5. Figur. of inanimate things. Gen. 49, 24 and his bow remained in strength, i. e. it always continued firm and strong. — 3. to in- habit, with the accusative Gen. 4, 20; 25,27; Is. 44, 13; 42,11; d-'3ia; in- habitants Ez. 26, 17, in which sense we frequently find such combinations as tqbi^i'il ■'aia;', bja^ ■'ao;' Jbr. 51, 12, 1l'n72ttj'ai23i'''ls. 9,'8&c. Then to possess, i. e. to have Gen. 4, 20; to dwell, with a of the place Gen. 13, 12, b? on or in Lev. 25, 18, bs, b, D3> and ntjt with, at a thing or person Gen. 27, 44; 34, 16; Judges 5, 17; Ez. 3, 15. nujn '^ to dwell in safety, see MUa. Also, to be inhabited Jer. 17, 25; Jo.'"4, 20; Zech. 7, 7; Is. 13, 20 ; which is the sign of a prosperous state, hence = to flourish, oppos. to DUJ Jer. 50, 13; Jo. 4, 20; Zech. 14, 10. Deriv. nai», auSia, aiBin, tia-^ia, in proper names the parts atO'', aiBJ, 3fflJ» auji, iauji, •'affl\ naiij. ... , I I : • ' r : • ' v iv Nif. a«5i3 (part. fern, natois) to be in- habited, of yiN Ex. 16, 35;' T-j? Ez. 26, 19; nia'in 38,''l2; D'^M^M na«5i3 (of ik) ' 1 tt; ' ' r- • ••• I". ^ I ^ Ez. 26, l7 inhabited out of the seas, i. e. nsi^s 616 3J3 ^2t^^ projecting above the surface of the ■water, and inhabited. According to Bashi, however, D'^^'M is to be taken here as = dia^M (viz. d'^sJang), with reference to the ^appellation of Tyre "■'aia ^iT/bs. anp Is. 23, 7. Pih. aiS^ to pitch (ffl dwelling), Ez. 25, 4 and «% (la'ip_ "isa) pitcAe^i (AetV n'i'i''t3 (huts) in thee. Hif. ^iiljirt (1 person with w/. once QTiiisin Zboh. 10, 6, a flexion borrow- «d from ailij, which was not carried out; as in nilia Num. 10, 36, Siffl Jek. 42, 10, Tiri'ttJ Ps. 23, 6 the flexion is "borrowed from aiTB, and vice versa per- haps 2 Sam. 15,8; part, ^-^m-a , fut. a-'ilJr) to ««i, to cause to sit 1 Sam. 2, 8, to cause to dwell Ps. 4, 9, with accusat. of the place and of the person 113, 9 or with a Gen. 47, 6, b? of the object Hos. 11, il; to make a dweller Ps. 68, 7; Hos. 11, 11; to cause to be inhabited Is. 54, 3; Ez. 36, 33. From the fundamental sig- nification has then arisen, as in the case of l?i n. the meaning to marry, ■with the accus. Eze. 10, 2 10 14 17 18; Nbh. 13, 27. Derivat. the proper name rTi-aiai\ IT ; • Hof. ildlrt (fut. auSl'i) to be inhabited, to become flourishing Is. 44, 26 ; to be made to dwell, to be settled in 5, 8. aiBl"' in a proper name belongs to aniB. The fundamental signification of the stem is not, as has been falsely assumed after the Arabic, to draw the feet to- gether, to squat; but it is identical •with i^""', in its organic root (Sia-i), to keep firmly in a place, to hold it firmly, to possess it, and therefore to sit, or still more correctly figere (sedem), to fia in the tent-pegs, to make a habitation, comp. v_jbtu to stick, Aram. auS, >-s.a/ to dwell near, hence inn ti accola, neighbour. In Arab. \_*Ji had the same meaning (hence ou« seat, chair), a verb in the Himyaritie dialect also; so also v_*J5, and here again the organic root is \_*J-. (comp. Aram, an"';), therefore also ^_^', redupl. iJfcAAJ (to set oneself firmly); Phenic. aW'; the same, whence na^ (si- bit, sibt, d-weUing) Plant. 1,9 in Dj?a inaisvi (place of -his dwelling), inaia = linai^) syptu (dwelling place) n. p. of a place in Mauritania; and also inaia aia the proper name of a city there. The meaning "to spring forth, from a lair, to lie in wait" is derived, as in the Hebrew, from the idea of sitting (in ambush); and the Arab. tXjus has the same metaphor, transference, though the fundamental meaning be "to sit", as in ilB''. naji (constr. aTIJi) maso. dweller, see IT T lD5>aTB\ IT : TIT DaS'i see ail»\ r,T IT Dilji (constr. i^^^ m. see Q»?l$^ naj;; m. see asjaigi^., aba iaiB^ and aba '^aii5\ I ; r : ■ Dai'' see rtiBpaffl\ ~i it't : :t 3B5'^ see nauja aia\ DNDUJ'^ (throne of God, see atj) n. p. m. i'Chr!"24, 13. riD^'^ 223'' (dwelling in the [people's] habitation; raid for D5> nai») re. p. m. of V I--* it V IV'' ^ one of David's heroes 2 Sam. 23, 8, de- scended from a family ibsnn or 'jbsn (which see), therefore named "'ifasrin 2 Sam. 1. e. or liMSn-ja 1 Che. 11,' 11. Instead of rai^a aitji the parall. 1 Chk. 1. c. has ayailj'' , which would have the same appellative sense, if we read D3>aiB7 (= DS^a-ailJi). \ it : I - :' iauJ"' see aba iaTB\ I : . I : I : • 3b3 iSip'^ (dwelling on the mountain; '\'Zt01 from liaiB^ from attjjjj n. p. m. of a giant 2 Sam. 21, 16 K'tib, for which the K'ri has aba iaiB\ ■ : I* : • nSffl'] (an appeaser, viz. is Jah) «. p. m. 1 Chr. 4, 17. ''aaj'; see asa iai^r ''DSJi see onb laiB'' see ai«j\ . li T V I-.' • fi T it 335 ■'30'; (= aba iai^^) n.p.m. 2 Sam. 21, 16 K'ri. ■ • ■ Dn^ ^2ty^ 617 nnb '^aaj'^ (turner back to [Beth-] Leheni) n. p. m. a descendant of Judah and founder of a great family 1 Chr. 4, 22. See ai«j\ IT nyDUJ'' {the people turn home) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 11, 11, elsewhere naffia atij'' (which see, where too another explana- tion is given). pSiB') {a free one; firompaiD which see) n. p. m. Gen. 25, 2 ; comp. pai^. nffipauji (from Ulljpa auji seat in n 't : : T ^ _ IT 't : V 1 misfortune} see tl^IJ)?) n. p. m. 1 Che. 25, 4 24. nSy^ (not used) iwi?'. prop, same as inom to be strong, firm., to stand firm, (see fT'lBin), hence to be, to exist, like 13 (TI3), At. ij^j prop, to stand firm, IT t \^ ,^ then to be; comp. Ar. Lll (to support, to make firm), ,j«f , ^f (to be firm, hard), Hebr. 113!* III. (uSin) to support, establish, HN in. (rm) to be, to exist, IBS? I. (latON) to be powerful, strong &c. The organic root is also in Sanskrit as, Latin e5-se &c. Deriv. 115;;, iia^, n^fflin, and perhaps the proper name ntiv. Pih. tTiS^ (not used) to be firm, to exist, of God. Deriv. the proper name iT'ffl^, IT • ' DiaJ'' {turner bach, turner home, viz. El is; formed from the fut. Kal in the sense of nia'd atd) n. p. m. Num. 26, 24, for which I'tinR.' 7, 1 has a-'IU'' in K'tib. aiTO'i asiB {the remnant will be converted) is a symbolical name of Isaiah's son Is. 7, 3 (EzK. 10, 29). Fatron. laiB^;; Num. 1. c: comp. D5>aTa?. ' ^ IT : TIT maj'' (from the fut. Kal of TllfO; self-answering, self-satisfying, viz. is Jah) n. p. m. Gen. 46, 17. See ■'im\ niUJ'' (= n?lI5'' bowed one), 8eetT'niT!J\ -IT^ -IT ^' ITTi: tTTliSU'' (from fl'' rriiai one humbled IT T i : IT " I : iy Jah) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 4, 36. '^'Iffl'' (from ST'lllS';, Jah is self-satis- fying)' n. p. m. Gen. 46,17; ISam.14,49. yiiaji {Jah is help; ."; is lengthened from !T' = n'', and »112) is a noun from ^TW^ S>t^=i»iIJ;i) 1. re. p. m. Nbh. 8, 17, for which occur elsewhere SjaJilT; (comp. Ben-Sira 46, 1) and 5>iaiti'; E'zr. 2, 2, otherwise called yitJiMy, 1 Chr. 24, 11 ; 2 Che. 31, 15 &c. &c. The name 'Iijaovg (Matth. 1, 21) is also the same. — 2. n. p. of a place in Judah Neh. 11, 26, beside imbi?:, abs-n-^a &c. ITT I ' ■.MV njJiaJ"; (once rinyi©^ Ps. 3, 3 with an accentless a appended, as is some- times the case in poetry, comp. !in73''N, rtn^T^; pL niJ»»il25^) f. deliverance, rescue, from danger Is. 56, 1 ; Ps. 14, 7 ; salvation Is. 49, 8 ; the giving of help Ps. 3, 9 ; and because God is constantly ready to help he is named "' ■'M'bN, ^la, bm Ps. 89, 27 ; 88, 2 ; acquittal, from an accusation Job 13, 16; help, spoken of God Ps. 9, 15, fully '^^ nS'niJ'; Ex. 14, 13; victory 1 Sam. 14, 45, '^ bijs cry of victory Ps. 118, 15; a fortunate state, prosperity, i. e. honour, distinction &c. Job 30, 15, and also elsewhere in a great variety of senses; more rare is the pi. Is. 26, 18; Ps. 18, 51. tfis niyiilji Ps. 42, 6 12 I'T 1 : ^ \ ^ the salvation of the face, i. e. which is bestowed upon one. rW^ (not used) intr. to gape, to yawn, of the stomach or belly, in consequence of emptiness or disease of the stomach (Targ., Bashi); hence it is only a mo- dified designation of 5>u5j , Arabic »*«• , except that in Arab, the transposed form (ji.a.j (to be empty, of the belly) is used for the signification of the present word in Hebrew. Deriv. ni25\ But this meaning seems attributed to the verb only on account of the clause preceding nil3^. Mic. 6, 14; and as the sense in question has no analogy in Hebrew, it is better to bring the organic root Rffl""' into connexion with HlB, tTilJ, and to IT ' r ' assume the signification to be twisted together (of the entrails by hunger). naj;; (with suf. j\n:ai^) emptiness, of the stomach or belly Mio. 6, 14; more correctly a state of being shrunk with hunger. See fiiB''. pntU'i see i?na\ I IT : • ' IT : • CDJi'S 618 b^Vt^ti;^ COtS'^ (Kal unused) intr. to be extended, stretched out, wide, identical in its or- ganic root taifl-'' with that in t2ttj, n-aiu, , r T it' IT t' M-ITB, Ar. itX*« (to extend, spread out). Targ. Bti^, Af. taffliN the same. Hif. ii'ajin (/a<. aiffiii) ). D'^aj'' (requiter) n. p. m. 1 Chk. 7, 1 K'tib, where the K'ri has aiu5i; else- where called ail Gen. 46, 13. See also I- 1 : ••• naaj'i (formed fromrri and nilS'' Pihel IT_- • ■■ IT IT- or troj, Jah is existing, living) n. p. m. 1 Chb. 7, 3; 23, 20; Ezr. 10, 31. in'JB'' (the same) n. p. m. 1 Che. 12, 6." ■ ■ n'^aJJ adj. TO., riM"'!^^ f. see nin''ffl^ and lia'^^^r D^ffiJ (establisher, from the Hifil of aiis) TO. only in b^Q'^ip'; {El is founder) n.p. m. 1 Chr. 4, 36, compounded of bs d''iB\ na'^aJ'' see ni)3''u5\ JT • : I • : 'jiSD'^aJ'^ (formed like Ma'^TIJi from an adj. Cttjj) TO. a waste, desert. Is. 43, 19 ; Ps. 107, 4; with the article a desert spe- cified by the context Num. 21, 20; the desert of Judah 1 Sam. 23, 19; also poet, without the article, e. g. of the Sinaitic desert Dbut. 32, 10. The proper name 'Xfn'"^ belongs to the stem DTO. j-li!QiaJ'i (from a sing, rta-ia;;) f. pi. 1. desolation, destruction Ps. 55, 16 K'tib, comp. MNiuS iMjsian 35, 8. — 2. (joined with n^jg in niTpim^rt Vi'^'z place of deso- lations) n. p. of a iJloabite city Num. 33, 49. But it is possible that 'ffl^ has an- other meaning in names of places. ai'^aS'' (only in the book of Job, lengthened out of l2JttJJ; pi. Q'^^'^iS:) m. an old man. Job 12, 12; 15, 10; 29, 8; Targ. ffl-'IS)? the same. itB'^aJ'; (from fT;tt?''«?> Jah is an aged one) n. p. m. 1 Che. 5, 14; comp. Dan. 7, 9. □t£?J (fut. oi;5i;> Ez. 6, 6, and Duj;., Dion Gen. 47,19; Ez.12,19) intr. same as DailS to be waste, desert. Gen. 47, 19; Ez. 6, 6; to be terrified Ez. 19, 7, gener^ ally in all the significations of q:@U9. Deriv. nMi©^, liM'^lB^, and the praper name nitt"HB\ Hif. d-'IBlTT "(after the form i'^ft'n, S>^'rl■, fut. D'^l^^) to make an astonishment of Jeb,. 49,20; 50,45 surely (see DN d) he shall make their fold an astonishment on account of them (i. e. on account of their fate). Qil^y Num. 21, 30 should be referred to ITT ITT O^'' (fut. DiO", CliB"'!!*, ap. UVi''^) tr. to put, to lay, same as Qto (Qlis), with 'S ■'Ssb to lay or put before one Gen. 24, 33 K'tib; iiato-'Ni Judges 12, 3 K'tib and I put. In the former place the K'ri has Dtoi;ii (fut. Ho£), in the latter naifflNl (fut. Hif); an alteration which is unnecessary. Without a !K'ri DiU'"'! stands in Gen. 50, 26, where a passive meaning is not necessary. See dli!3. Naaji (from NattS = naiO; a high, ele- IT : • ^ IT T . IT T ' »' ' voted one, viz. El is) n.p. m. 1 Chr. 4, 3. 3?aiD'' (or »a-, from the fut. Kal of ^IT : • ^ r ' 5»B1^) TO. a hearer, only in the three fol- lowing proper names. b^y^Jp \ {El is hearer; comp. 3>Bl25''bN) n. p. of a son of Abraham by Hagar, the ancestor of many tribes Gen. 25, 12-18; pair. ■'bNSMlB^ (eliminating the N 1 Chr. 27, 30) pL^ry, the name of an Arabian people, who carried on a caravan traffic with Egypt, to whom in particular ^^Nabathaeans uniKedarenes belonged; and whose territory sometimes extended from Egypt to Assyria Gen. n^^Di!;^ 619 njsyi 25,18; 37, 25; 39, 1; Judges 8, 24; Ps. 83, 7. Also n. p. m. of other persons in later times Jbr. 40, 8; 1 Chb. 8, 38; 2 Chk. 23, 1; EzR. 10, 22. •T'SaaJ'^ (Jah is hearer; comp. tT'SHl!:) n. f. m. 1 Chb. 12, 4. ' IvT'SXiaJ'; (the same; comp. 1M;?aia") M. ^. m!'l Che. 27, 19. lai^''. (from the fut. Kal of 'naid) m. keeper, guardian, only in ■'IPIB'; (contracted from 1T^-q-:Q-\,Jah is keeper') n. p. m. 1 Chr. 8, 18; comp. jT : - : ' r : ■ Vi!'^ I. (not used) intr. to be juiceless, weak, fading, old, oppos. ttJlH; derivat. ■)iBi and the proper name 'miS3\ The organic root ')AB"'' is also found with this meaning in extra-Semitic languages. Nif. iTBii {part, m.ys'o, f. njiljii) to he old, sapless, spoken of grain of a former year Lev. 26,10; to be dried up, old, of leprosy 13, 11; figurat. to dwell long in a place Deut. 4, 25. JtJyS jj_ (not used) intrans. to shine, glitter, light, same as "[tin, Dl^n, d^fl (which see). Derivat. the proper name • ft 12?'' (perf. inilZJi, 15U5"'; inf. constr. I |"T ^^ ' • h-t' I :it' ' 1118^; fut. Ilfl''^) intr. properly to sink down, from exhaustion and weariness; to be languid, inactive, weary; hence to deep Job 3, 13, with nis ; to fall asleep, a consequence of asi^ Ps. 3, 6; 4, 9, and stronger than D13 Is. 5, 27, oppos. to IIS Ps. 44, 24; of men 1 Kings 19, 5 and animals Ez. 34, 25; metaphor, of inactivity Ps. 121, 4 and the sleep of death Job 3, 13; the latter fully T\va '; abi» Jbr. 51, 39 or niMrt '; Ps. 13," i. Deriv. wiB (N5ia), nis'iiS, 11251, nsiiS. IT •• ^ II •• ■" I : ' ' I" T ' IT : Pih. 1TB1 (_fut. ITS 11) to cause to sleep JCDGBS 16, 19. The organic root of the stem "jtB'J (Targumic 'y^l , Ar. ,%*«•) with its fun- damental signification of rest and in- activity is also found in INUJ (to be at rest, inactive), ')iBl. (^112)); and even the stem ']'ayo (to lean or rest upon) belongs to this root ; as the Syr. -t^s^uo to support oneself, to rest, denotes "to sleep" also. ]a3i {pi. DijlUJi) adj. m., ^IDl^i f. 1. old, belonging to a former year, spoken of grain Lev. 25, 22, of fruit Song op Sol. 7, 14, metaphor, old, of an aqueduct in Jerusalem Is. 22, 11, out of the upper G-ihon 2 Chr. 32, 30, which is also called the upper pool Is. 7, 3; 36, 2, made by Hezekiah; of a gate Nbh. 3, 6; 12, 39. — 2. Only in "lUJi n^a abridged from l^ji 13 ni3, which the Syr. and Arab, have (1 Sam. 7, 11), i. e. old Beth-Cor, which is identical with old Mizpeh 1 Sam. 7, 11. Iliji may also be read for l^aJl 7, 12.. "' laji (prop, jjart.; pi. DiSlIJi, constr. liffli) adj. m., nSffii f. 1. (from yq"^ sleep- ing, as a consequence of asu) 1 Sam. 26,7, oppos. toyiipu 26,12 or iy Song OP Sol. 5, 2; ley nans idtui Dan. 12, 2 ' ' IT T r :- f-: ' the dead. In Qiauji TiSlB sail SoNG op r •• : 1" : • I" Sol. 7, 10 (see aai) five versions read 075101 ifiSiB, which yields no sense; others wish" to read D1312: Dneiu (their r T IT T : ^ purple lips) or d^Siai iriDia (lips of age) ; but it is not necessary to depart from the usual reading. — 2. (from lUJi II. a Shining one, viz. El is) n. p. m. 2 Sam. 23,32, for which 1 Chr. 11, 34 has DtBrt (whici see). nsaj'' {the old) n. p. of a city in the neighbourhood of bs rfa (which see) and Ills;?; all which the Judean king Abijah wrested from Jeroboam 2 Chk. 13, 19. As Bethel lay on the border of Benjamin, and Ephrain (K'ri, = DilSij 2 Sam. 13, 23 and 'E(pQaiii John 11, 54) or Ephron (K'tib, LXX, Vulg.) accord- ing to Josephus (Jewish War 4, 9, 9) was in the neighbourhood of Bethel (see D^IBN), nsiZJ-' may have also been situated in their vicinity. Accordmg to this, '1 cannot be identified with HiTBSi (which' see). At first '1 may have been merely an epithet or "adjective to the proper name of the city, as it is still in the Mishna (Erachin 32 "); but sub- sequently it was put alone like H^'lH (which see). v^^ 620 ]Qti;^ 5?jy^ (Kal not used) intr. prop, to be wide, th.eAr,»*ul and the preceding tilzS^ having the same fundamental significa- tion; cognate in sense ni'l , iri'n , opposite "n^- Hence metaphor, to be free, fortunate, unrestrained, delivered (from oppression) ; the ideas of wide and strait bfeing else- where transferred in the language to fortunate and unfortunate. yi25 II. (?11i5) has the same meaning, whence come ?1ll5, ^ilZJ, !l5>1ian, and the proper names N5>1«5, ?1ia.1i ?l^'i^^ — Derivat. i'ffl;, Sffl;;, WITIJ^, niyiBia, and the proper names 5>'ll5"'a" S>ia''a^, 5>ffl'' inrT'SUJ"', lln"'-, ,- .. J IT " ' ITT it; - : ' jT ' 5»12jn in i5>ffl\ -IV I- : • Nif. 5>;fii3 (part. 5>ldii, /m«. SfflJ^) «o Je delivered, with ']73 of the person or thing from whom or which Num. 10, 9, 2 Sam. 22, 4, Jek. 30, 7, and a Jy which Deut. 33, 29; Ps. 33, 16; to be saved Jer. 8, 20; to be happy Peov. 28, 18; to be victorious Zech. 9, 9. Hif. S''Tl5irt (/m*. ?i«5i\ retaining n ?"'«5iM^, apoc. 5>iBi;'; once with suff. in the short form d33>ffli for DSJ'ifflii Is. IV-: r IV-: r 35, 4) prop, to make wide, i. e. free, hence 1. to deliver, to save, with accus. of the object Ps. 3, 8; 20, 7, with 'ja of the person or thing from whom or which 7, 2; 34, 7; 44, 8; 59, 3, and a whereby Hos. 1, 7; 1 Sam. 17, 47. Iri n'i!S7?B?fiEz.36,29 to free from the power of impurities (i. e. sins); pifTlJi 'in Jek. 30, 10 to bring deliverance from afar; seldom absolutely Is. 45, 20 a God that does not deliver. In this sense a de- liverer oi saviour ib called ^''lijia, spoken • of God Is. 19, 20, Zech. 8, 7; or of men Neh. 9, 27. — 2. to help, to support, with accusat. of the person Ex. 2, 17, 2 Sam. 10, 19; applied also to God Ps. 12, 2; seldom with b of the person Ps. 72, 4; 86,16; or abW. 2 Sam. 14, 4; metaphor, to give victory Deut. 20, 4, Josh. 22, 22 , 2 Sam. 8, 6 ; also with an accusat. SiSlttSn 1 Chr. 11, 14. A pecu- liar expression is "''1'' "h ny^^^Ts my hand helps me, i. e. I conq^uer only by myself Job 40, 9; for 1"' occur also y^Tii Ps. 98, 1 or ?i'iT Is. 59" 16. 1 Sam. 25^ 26 and 33 is to be taken otherwise: to support by a violent measure. 3>B3i (only five times) m. deliverance, rescue'HAB. 3, 13, where it has the ac- cusat. with it, like an infinit. ; elsewhere as a construct to )''T2'^ Ps. 20, 7 or D'^ln'bs 50, 23, to denote the help of God or of his omnipotence, yvir^ iT'Tjilri Ps. 12, 6 to set at liberty, to put into a state of victory. 5>1257. stands for the pause-form. Sraj;; (only in pause; with suf. ''S'^'], 'TjS'.ia^, once ^fS'.ffl,'^) m. freedom. Job 5, 11 and the gloomy (i. e. those in distress) are strong in freedom; hence of God ';. 'Tia 2 Sam. 22, 47, ';; Ti)?. 18,3, '^J •'S;j'bj;. Ps. 18, 47, or S>;25^i. alone ,27, 1 'as the bringer of salvation Is. 62, 11. Pigur. blessing (of fruitfulness) 45,8, prosperity 61, 10, salvation Ps. 132, 16. — Deriv. the proper name ''iSIBX yuji {constr. Sttj'j) m. helper, only in IT : - : ' IT i^Jajh (from InijJ'aJ'; Jah is salvation) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 2, 31; 4, 20; 5, 24. iT'J'UJ'^ {Jah is helper) n. p. m. Ezr. 8, 7 19-^ Neh. 11, 7; 1 Chr. 3, 21. liT'^Pai'] (the same) n.p. of the famous prophet of the Old Testament, whose name is borne by a collection of oracles Is.ch.1-66; 2KiNGsl9,20; and of other persons besides 1 Chr. 25, 3; 26, 25. nti^^ (not used) intrans. to be hard, firm. At. oLwwls, v«**uu>, \^h.i , which must likewise proceed from this funda- mental signification. The org. root is tm-\ Deriv. ^iB«ji, !iBl25i, and the pro- Ir T I" :it' IV :it' ^ per names nsttj^, lS'tt5\ nBBJ'' (or MSlIJi according to mss.) m. I- :it *■ IV :iT ° ' jasper, a very hard half-precious stone which is wrought in order to make jewels and ornaments Ex. 28,20; 39, 13; Ez. 28, 13; Ar. jashm, jashb, jashf the same; Greek jJ iaamg. It seems that the name was spread abroad by the Phenicians. nStO'' (for rt'^B'd'' from !nl25^ a firing it : • ^ It: : • It-T ' ' ' strong one, viz. Jah is) n.p.m. IChr. 8,16. ■jBaJ^ (a firm, strong one, from rjlB"') n. p. m. 1 Chr. 8, 22. "Ityl 621 "Ity^ 1^^ (fut. TaSi^, once in a form that does not appear again ^'4l 1 Sam. €, 12) intr. prop, same as TJJSj "^SN (whicli see), conseq. 1. to be straight, of a way that deviates neither to the right nor left, to go straight, 1 Sam. 6, 12 and the Mne went straight (i. e. the straight ■way) forward; then to be even, level, of a country, opposite bp.S; Ar. -w*j to be easy. Derivatives lisj 1, li^^;, ^"^1 1, nil^-iM 1, li"!!^. — 2. rigur. io' be right, good, pleasing, "ITISn also being used in a moral sense; hence in the phrase 'B ■'5''?a '■< to be right in on^s eyes Num. 2*3, 27; Judges 14, 3; of the soul, to be even, tranquil, composed, Hab. 2, 4, i. e. not to be overbearing, not to overstep ph, oppos. tobs?; comp. !iiiB Is. 38,13. Deriv. 'niii'' 2, Vtbi 2, 'niti^ia 2, iia'^ti; ITT ' VI ' ( • ' IT " ' the proper names Tl'llS^) '^^?.i a^d 'IIBJ in nbsniB"'. On ns'iis'l 1 Sam. 6, 12, T r : - : t : r •" see the analytical part at the end. Pih. ITS'; {part, 'nia;:??, fut. nis^': , once 11^91 2 dnR. 32, 30 for "TiTi) to make straight, n^ii* Pbov. 9, 15, ra\ 15, 21, of moral conduct; to make even or level (i. e. to remove all obstructions), in a physical and spiritual sense, tj'n'i Is. 45, 13, ni8 Peov. 3, 6, '■frtn Is. 45, 2; to direct, to lead straightly 2 Che. 32, 30, metaph. Job 38,3; to approve, to esteem as right Ps. 119, 18. Puh. Itb;* {part, 'nis;'??) to be made right, prepared, spoken of a thin plate of gold which is cut into ornaments 1 Kings 6, 35. Hif. T'lB-'n and T'UJin {fut. T^ffl'^lO to make even, 'T|'n'7., with "'JBb of the person Ps. 5, 9 ; to keep a straight direction Prov. 4, 25, without 'r^'yi. laj'' (co«s«r. TIB''; pi. dilia'', c. ■'^uJi) IT T ^ r : ' *^ I- T : ' r : •■' arf/. TO., iTnirii {pi. xr\ya'i) f. 1. straight, 1. e. not bent, but upright Eze. 1, 7 ; of a way 1 Sam. 12, 23; even, plain Jee. 31, 9, then figur. Eze. 8, 21 ; on the con- trary Q'l'nffi^ in Dan. 11, 17 should be derived from 'nip?; straight, in a moral sense Job 33, 27, Mic. 3, 8, where the doing of the opposite is expressed by tt))3», myri. — 2. to be right, good. pleasing, particularly in the combination 'S ''5"'5S pleasing to one, beloved by one Josh. 9, 25 ^ Judges 17, 6, well-pleasing Deut. 12, 25, agreeing with 2 Sam. 19, 7, in which sense 'S ''isb sometimes occurs Peov. 14, 10; just, righteous, either of God Deut. 32,4, his judgments Ps. 119, 137 and his word 19, 9; or of men, honest, upright, just, morally good 1 Sam. 29, 6; Job 1, 1; 8, 6, for which is also Tj'ij! -iilj^ Peov. 29, 27; pi. Q-'l©: Job 4, 17; 'l7, 8, for which are also aVi'iTlJi Ps. 7, 11 (once in the sense, o/ are Aones<, willing mind, 2CHR.29,34)and':}nT[ •^'yia'] Ps. 37, 14 or aba lia; 125, i:-,^ upright in acting Peov. 20, 11. As a subst. the best Mic. 7, 4, pious Ps. 37, 37 &c. ; hence plur. the Israelites Num. 23, 10; Ps. Ill, 1 (where ms»i is to be taken for dnisn). ^ IT" : IT T-;!-' Tor the use of 1«ji in nbs'iia? (accord- ing to the reading of many mss.) 1 Che. 25,14, see under nbs'niB';. The accep- tation of lilji in the phrase 'ifTiDD Josh. ITT -^ T- Vl" 10,13 and 2 Sam.1,18 is difficult. Accord- ing to the Syr. and Ar. versions followed by Lowth, Michaelis, Herder and others, it is said to be equivalent to T'lSll {book of the poem or poems); or according to the Ar. &u>Lt.s> (valour, ability) the book of heroes; but 1125'' is better taken as a '^■' collect, for Israelites according to the tradition in the Talm., like QiTOSi Num. ' r T : 23, 10, Ps. Ill, 1; and so translated book of the Israelites, i. e. national book. -ijljh (= 'Tiaj) m. honest, see ll"!!^:. laj;; (only pi. O^'iia^ after the form Di'lJiilj' a"''ia«j from "IMttJ, lao) m. ac- r T : ' I- T : v iv ' v iv ' commadation, settlement, prop, a making smooth, Dan. 11, 17 niuy IMS DilttJ'^n ' ' ^ iv-:r I • I' T r (according to the reading of the LXX, Theod., Vulg.) and he will bring about a settlement with him, conseq.=d'''J!1B''n !rtto5{ 11, 6, and like Sixaia 1 MaIdc. 7, 12. But if we abide by fltoS, we must at least erase the copulative T, as being repeated out of iay. "laji {righteousness,Yiz.oi^\)n.p m. 1 Che'. 2, 18. laji (with suf. i'lfflj) m. 1. straight- ness ,' of a way Peov. 2, 13 ; 4, 11 ; right. b^^^'> 622 ]n:y^ uprightness, truth, Job 6,25; duty 33, 23 ; honesty, piety 1 Kings 9, 4, also with the addition of :3b or aab Dbut. 9, 5, 1 Che. 29, 17; Job 33, 3 'ni^yb? (according to Norzi "''by) against right. In this sense TUJ'' stands once adverbially = n"''n'iB''73 EccLES. 12, 10 and to note down rightly (if we read iinsi), or and rightly noted down (if we read'ainsi). — 2. = llljy, with which it is connected by its root, property, substance Peot. 11, 24. ^N'liB'; (from bs M'liB'; El is ruler; but in 'Gen. 32,29 and^Hos. 12,4 it is explained wrestler with God; with the emphasis on El Gen. 32, 31 ; 28, 17 20; 35, 10) 1. n. p. m. the patriarch Jacob, which name he bore afterwards in ad- dition, and whose origin is told in Gen. 32, 29 ; 35, 10 ; Hos. 12, 4. He has the name in Gen. 35, 21 22; 37,3; 43, 6, and in many other passages of Genesis, in ac- cordance with which his sons are called '1 13a 42, 5 ; 45, 21. See ajjiyv — 2. bN'ii^^ '■':a in the historical books from Exodus ony7a,idL=the Israelite people, for which bjS'lto:' rT'^ Ex. 16, 31 ; 40, 38 and bN'nto: HTs'Ex. 12, 3 &c. stand. But bsj^to^ alone is most frequently used to express this Ex. 5, 2, Num. 21, 1 , Josh. 4, 22 ; which with US or m» to he sup- ' , IT IT" ^ plied, IS sometimes construed with the sing. Hiase. Josh. 4, 22, or the sing. fern. Jek. 3, 1 1 ; sometimes with the pi. masc. Josh. 3, 17. In this sense we should take the combinations '; ""JjJT Ex. 3, 16, "; ''«"'iB5 Num. 7, 2, "< -iiai^ Ex. 24, 4, ": iB''!i« JosH. 9, 7, '■; niiVOEUT. 23, 18, '■; ■'rj'bN Ex. 6, 1, "; yis 1 Sam. 13, 19 (for which also bsiiO'; merely stands as a fern. Is. 19,24); and "; with this mean- ing is frequently conceived of as a single person and figur. represented accordingly Ex. 4, 22; Num. 20, 14; Is. 41, 8; 42, 24; 43, 1 &e. — 3. Emphatically, the true, pious, faithful Israel, and so a title of honour for the select of the people Is. 49, 3, Ps. 73, 1 (parallel asb --pa), Hos. 8, 2; as also s;>y'^_ Ps. 24^ 6 (pa- rall.'i'i "ilzS'l^); comp. John 1,48 ; Komans 9, 6. — 4. In the period when the king- dom was divided, '1 is the name of the ten tribes, in opposition to the king- dom of Judah 2 Sam. 2, 9; 19, 40-43; 1 Kings 12,1, because the majority of the people attached themselves to it; in which sense we must take '1 isb?? 1 Kings 14, 19; 16, 5 (opposite fining 'pr''^)- In the same sense stands also '^ IT'S Hos. 1, 4; 5, 1, or bjS'nia; alone Hos. 4, 15; 5, 3. As Ephraim took the lead among the ten tribes, "' 1H Josh. 11, 16 is = U']lsst Irt. Sometimes the two king- doms^ "axe called "; ■'pa ''iia Is. 8, 14; and the kingdom of Judah alone, after the ten tribes were exiled, '^ "iNiri Is. 10, 20. — 5. After the exile V'w^as again used for the whole kingdom (in Ezr., Neh., Chr. &c.), even when an earlier time and Judah specially is spoken of 2 Che. 12, 1; 15, 17; 19, 8; principally in the psalms Ps. 14, 7; 22, 4&c. — Gent. m. ' with n or p (which see) is possible in Hebrew, it is better to compare "02 with ttjp_ and lUn , meaning to be sapless, dry, which suits the idea of being old very well; Maltese jass the same. Deriv. iSiiU"', the proper name lUjil^; and aJJB'' m. an old man, one gray-headed, along with 1)5,T 2 Chr. 36, 17. From IB"'©'' in a proper name we see that it is also an epithet of Jah, because wisdom is in him as in old men (Job 12, 12), which quality belongs to the judicial office; besides, the primitive Deity is so called in opposition to the newly originated unreal gods (Deut. 32, 17; Jek. 23, 23); on which account Daniel calls him Tiaii p-'n? (7, 9 13 22); comp. Ttsnalcaco/Jisvog rlfisQwv (Sus. 52). "iDfflBS"' (contracted from "liiu sis': , IT T . ^ IT T IT he, i. e. El, brings reward) n. p. m. Gen. 30, 18, comp. V. 16. As the pronuncia- tion varied between "iaiS"' and ISiBfei., IT T • IT T IT ■• ' the singular orthography ISTBfe'; arose. nty (Kal unused) intr. to dry up, to become exhausted, of water, by heat and drought, identical with nsi in its organic root, except that the latter is applied to combustible materials. nu33 is just the same stem (Is. 41, 17; Jbr. 51, 30); as n^'' and nSiS, ass'' and aiS5 mutually t-T i-T ' ri l-T ^ supplement one another. Nif. ni^3 (after the form nS3; 3 pi. ini^S) to become dry, of water (by means of heat). Is. 19, 5 and the waters of the Nile (d:j the Nile Is. 18, 2 comp. Nah. 3, 8, now called el-Bahr, i. e. the sea) become dry, parallel Il5ai , ann. The ver- sions (Targ., Symm., Aq., LXX, Syr. &c.) have more or less paraphrased this meaning; but Ibn Esra has already taken it rightly. Of the collateral form mB3 the Nifal 'ttinS'; appears once Jer. 18, 14 for ,.. T. ty> or (weakened) n^ (with suff. 'lit7n'J> in Targ. litin;;;) Aram. m. prop, person, body, essence, being, as Bar Ali explains the Syr. ^-», identical with the Hebr. niJt (page 45) or riN (page 168); as it is derived either from sni = Hebr. !ll23i, or (T : IT t' from rw == ms. In usage only as a sign of the accusative Dan. 3, 12. The original form may have been nn (from nr, nil = niN), as is still perceptible from the compounds niSi, nib, the syllable nn = r"* being attached to h, 3. t^n'' see n\ IT : " 2!)] (Targ. a-^nv, par^- P^- ™- V'^''}'^ Aram. intr. same as Hebr. STB'' to sit, N3"i'i to judgment Dan. 7, 10 26, also without any addition 7, 9 ; to dwell Ezr. 4,17. Af. anirt (Targ. aniN and Ittaf anim) to cause to dwell, to plant, with accus. of the person and a of the thing Ezr. 4, 10. ' nn^ (not used) tr. to pierce into, press into, identical in its organic root with lUN (which see), Targ. lUN, UUN., Phenic. TUN, Ar. t\ij. Deriv. npj, and according to some nn\ TJl'' {constr. in^; pi. niin^ constr^ r\'nTi\ but with suff. nTihri^ &n'in;i) comm. a peg, nail, driven into the wall Is. 22, 25, Ez. 15, 3; a tent-pin, to which' nn^ 624 DH"' a tent is fastened Judges 4, 21, Ex. 27, 19; the fastening being used as an image of being established Is. 22, 23, of remaining Ezr. 9, 8 , for which 'nXJ stands in 9,9; as also for the figure of a TUaiS , who keeps together a multitude of men Zech. 10, 4; metaphor, a shovel Dbut. 23, 14; i'^»T\ "; the pin of a web Jtjdges 16, 14, i. e. the roller or beam to which the threads of the warp are fastened. nn'' see rtPcbN. TIT TIT'V: Dini (from nnj;^Z.d''Hin^, with sm/. *^''ari;, T^ah^) m. 1. prop, a deserted, forsaken one, hence an orphan. Is. 1, 17, being without a protector, i. e. a father ; therefore coupled with fisabs Jbr. 7, 6, ^^ Ps. 10, 18, \n 82, 3, "ysisca. 7, 10, 1.|i Deut. 24, 1 7 ; generally forsaken, help- less, Job 6, 27; 29, 12; Hos. 14, 4. Ar. *xXj the same. — 2. same as Qn spoken of God, a Perfect, Pure one, Ps. 10, 14; comp. Ar. |Vaaj perfectus(Golius p. 2763). "TlJTj (according to Kimchi from Tin I. after the form dip';) m. what is sought out, selected. Job 39, 8. According to the Targ. (with the approbation of the LXX and Vulg., and agreeably to the accents) a poetical (Aramaeising) form of the imperfect = IW he spies out, parallel to IBTl'J; according to LeClerc Tirr; = 'in;; superfluity, riches. But the explanation of Kimchi is the most pro- bable. nn'' (not used) tr. to push, to strike, connected in its organic root tin"'' with that in IT^, Tl-m, nVS, Til', N-bl, IT ' IT T ' r T ' 1 n IT T ' ti-S'n ; while the idea of pushing or strik- ing is transferred to striking down, pressing down, striking away, pushing away. But as the Arab. ;^-3'j has ob- viously for its first meaning to divide, to separate, whence x^U^ bough (cut off from the palm), stick, club, it is better to identify fin-'' with the organic root in lip"? , Pp"2 ) '^"■n ) '^i? , in signif. to split, to separate. Deriv. nnin. T^ipi (the wide, roomy, viz. city) n.p. of a city in the mountains of Judah which was given to the priests Josh. 15, 48; 21, 14. Gentile ■''n'^n: 2 Sam. 23, 38, as the versions read for '^'nn^ , if we do not assume that ^n^ is =f T^'n^. The place is now called Attir, lying south of Hebron. T'n'i (def. NT'S"!) Aram. adj. m., rtTn^, NT'Fi!! /• exceeding, extraordinary, power- fid Dan. 2, 31; 5, 12. The fern, is also an adv. very, exceedingly 3, 22 ; 7, 7. ^n^ I. (Kal not used) intr. same as rT bnll (which see) to laugh, to jest, to make oneself merry, to mock. The interchange of rt and 1 at the beginning is also found in Tjbin and '^b'', mtl and InT^, I|- T I|-T ' IT T ITT ' nsrr and ins\ ITT ITT Htf.b-^rln (after the form b'^brt, V*?-?. ^lart omitting the radical Yod in the orthography; 2 p. perf. nbnrt) to mock, to deride, with a of the person Judges 16, 10 13 15. bn the contrary, bnrt, and with the accent drawn back bn?l Gek. 31, 7, as also the inf. constr. bnrt, fut. bnrt':, belong to Pih. 11. of bnrt (which see), with thesamemeaning as Hif. here. Hof. bniSi to be deceived, taken in. Is. 44,20. ^n^ II. (not used) intr. same as bn to be high, hilly, hence the proper name nbri'' (liill-place) n. p. of a place in Dan Josh. 19, 42. Perhaps the stem bni is here = bnn (which see) and the meaning as in 'jibnrt. DH'' (fut. 1 p. Qp-iN , in pause dtjis) intrans. 1. to be alone, bereft, forsaken, solitary, prop, to be separated, cut off from a thing, to be deprived; connected in its organic root with dn , which means " to come to an end, to disappear, cease, to be concluded". Deriv. din"" 1. and I T the proper name ?inn\ — 2. in a moral sense, to be bare, deprived, released from, alone, without sin, which is conceived of as an oppressive burden; hence to be HDni 625 in^ pure, guiltless, free, irreprehensible, pious, Ps. 19, 14. Deriv. Dini 2. Hif. D'^nil (only the inf. with suff. '^f^'^rfn Is. 33, 1, as we should read for Sja'^n!!.) to make an end of, to have done with, which is a cutting off, a conclud- ing Is. 33, 1. The org. root of the stem (Arab. aXj , I».Xj) is expressed in DFi (D'aFi), where also a copious explanation may be found. niOri'' {purity, guiltlessness, see Dn'' 2) «. p. m. 1 Chr. 11, 46. ?n^ (not used) intr. to continue, to endure, to hold on, to be constant (with reference to time), hence to he old, of peoples that always continue; of rirers, to he ever-flowing, inexhaustible, oppos. to at3, hence also to flow; of continuance as a sign of firmness and strength, hence to be firm, strong, powerful, figur. to be distinguished; in a bad sense to be severe, rough, hard, violent, oppos.to ^Sn. The noun ^rr'N derived from it (which see) appears in all these meanings; and the Ar. /^j'j has likewise the same multiplicity of sig- nifications ; just as the stem "jriN belong- ing to liriN has perhaps the same funda- mental signification of strength and con- tinuance. The organic root is ^t^"'- Deriv. the proper name ^5^l^ nan"' (from the fut. Hif. of nsn II.) 17 r - ^ ITT ' m. hestower, communicator, only in the proper name ^K''3ri^ {El ia hestower) n. p.m. 1 Che. 26,2"! "'' Pr^l {fortress, strengthened place, from '^'') n. p. of a city in Judah JosH. lb, 23. "in^ I. (Kal unused) intr. prop, same as im (page 172) to extend, to spread, to stretch afar, hence to go beyond or exceed (what is usual), to project,, to over- top, of an extended space; of, a number, to be over and above, to exceed (the common measure), to be more, to he redundant, to overflow; in a moral aspect, to he prominent, worthy, noble, distinguish- ed &c. Deriv. inv ini\ r^1n^ in;. 2, 'inia, l^'in^, rrin^, the proper names in; (also in Dyi'n"-'), ^'^n^ ninv Nini; viv ^ IT : : •" I : ■ ' ' IT : • ' it : ■ ' in"' in inias. IT t it t : -- The organic root of the stem in-J appeai-s clearly, in its original significa- tion, from that in in'S* IT. (whence rin^. and the proper name inS), Arab. j^lS', 1id-S>, 1^-rtII., Arab.'^'Aj'V. (to spread, extend) &c.; and we may see that the root in may be connected with bn and 'jn. Nif. inis {fut. ipi;, apoc. inr) to remain, to he left remaining, of a number or mass of persons or things Ex. 10, 15, Josh. 11, 22, with •\-a of the whole of which somewhat remains Num. 26, 65, 2 Sam. 13, 30; andb of the person 1 Sam. 25, 34; 2 Sam. 9, i; or also with a of the whole Neh. 6, 1 , Ex. 14, 22 ,' or where something still remains behind Lev. 8, 32; seldom with a number of persons for ^U 2 Sam. 17, 12, where the versions express "JU; with ""littN to be left after, i. e. after the death of a person 1 Kings 9,21; to he lefi Gen. 32, 25 ; to remain 1 Kings 18, ,22 ; to abide Dan. 10, 13, where it is not necessary to take ln^3 in the sense to obtain the preeminence, comp. iNTOa Num. 11, 26. The part. m. inis Ex. 29, 34, 2 Kings 4, 7, and nipis fern. Lev. 2, 3 are used as substantives, the remainder, remnant. In 1 Sam. 30, 9 we should read ClSBMn for a''lni3H. i-t 1 - Pih. ln^ (not used) to extend or spread out strongly, hence to be roomy, of a place; Aram, to be distinguished, pre- eminent, violent. Derivat. the proper. name I'^fi"'. r- Sif. 1''niln {inf. dbsol. inirt, constr, ITlin; imper. iniM; fut. I'^nii, ini"") 1. to let remain, to leave, with accus. of the thing Ex. 10, 15, Ruth 2, 18, with yi2 of a person or thing of which one leaves some Ex. 16,19, Lev. 22, 30, Num. 33, 55, Ez. 39, 28, and b of the person to whom it is left Is. 1,'9; Jer. 44, 7; more rarely does Tl stand absolutely, 2 Kings 4, 43; Euth 2, 14. The passage Ex. 6, 8 Qib ni'^na ■-nlni^i is difficult; ' IV T : r !■ ! . ' ! 40 in^ 626 ]nn^ "where we must either suppose that rrilirtla has been incorrectly taken out of the 13 verse, or that'ilm should be taken in signif. 2. Figur. to preserve, to spare Ps. 79, 11. — 2. to give a preference to, prop, to make higher, superior, distinguish- ed, with accus. of the person, Deut. 28, 11 and God shall give thee a superiority for good, with a wherein; but also with "b of the person, Ez. 6, 8 and I will give you a preeminence (DSb ''n'inifl'l), while you will have among the nations the escaped of the sword (dsb rvlriia, the first fijsb being dropped). Gen. 49, 4 is Hof."'^ Hof.'-\T\'^'n ifut.^TiV, for which, how- ever, nni"! stands), to he exalted; Gen. 49, 4 thou shalt not he exalted, where there is an assonance with 'nn\ As Hif. does not at all suit here, it is better to take inin for 'Win , as 5>nin stands fori^nin.' I- "IH'' II. (unused) tr. same as 'iDp I., 1UK 2. and others (from the organic root In"'') to knot, to hind, cognate in sense with b:in: deriv. in"! 1, 'nniu and nin''. r T ' VIV ' IT " VIV "in'' Aram, same as Hebr. ini I. r : |-T Pael lrj2 (not used), deriv. lifiV 121'' m. a distinguished, nohle one, see IT T : V 1^5 (with suff. I'lri'i , Q'nriv, pi- Di'pn^) m. 1. (from 'npj 11.) a rope, to bind with, Judges 16, 7; a cord by which a tent is held together, like "inia (Is. 54, 2), and metaphor, the thread of life Job 4, 21, so that it is not necessary to read '2^??';; **« stnng of a how Ps. 11, 2; the girdle of a common man Job 30, 11 K'tib, for which the K'ri has ■'"in^ from Inj in the sense of hridle. Arab, jj , Syr. Ui-» the same, and also lute-string. — 2. (from "in; I; with suff. d"in';) a) the remainder, the rest, e. g. of fiyin Judges 7, 6, d^lay Hab. 2, 8, Ci'^N-'riSli Neh. 6, 14, niiid Is. 38, 10, where' 'i may be rendered by the adj. remaining; but sometimes the noun following is in :the genitive, e. g. Jo. 1, 4 that which is left hy the fia'iN ; the residue Is. 44, 19 ; what remains o/Dbut.SjII, hence T|!i '^ Num. 31, 32 lohat remained after Ta, i. e. besides the TS; so 'D '^'nS'i '^;i. the acts of one that are still to he narrated 1 Kings 11, 41. b) that which exceeds what is necessary, i. e. superabundance, riches, substance Ps. 17, 14; Job 22, 20. c) pre- eminence. Gen. 49, 3 the preeminence in height, and the preeminence in strength, for the concrete excellent, distinguished; excellence, Peov. 17, 7 a lip of excellency i. e. commanding speech, d) as an ad- verb more than, besides, valde, satis superque Dan. 8, 9, like irp (Eccles. 2, 15); 'I'h'S richly, above all measurers. 31,24; with an adj. coupled with "li*!?, much more abundant Is. 56, 12. e) {pre- eminence i. e. preeminent, viz. is El) n. p. m. Ex. 4, 18, otherwise called i"in^; Judges 8, 20; 1 Che. 2,32; 4, 17; 7,'^8, elsewhere pn^; 1 Kings 2, 5, elsewhere N"iri\ f) n. p. of a city = "I'^Fi;; , whence the' Gentile '''in'' 2 Sam. 23, 38'. ,. . . J iri'i (or "ini'') m. prop, (apart.) what stands out, the remaining, therefore the remainder 1 Sam. 15, 15, preeminence, ad- vantage, gain Eccles. 6, 8. As an adv. superfluously, quite too much, Eccles. 2, 15; 7, 16, parallel !l3'it7; more Esth. 6, 6; better Eccles. 7, li ; moreover, 12, 12 moreover instruct thyself out of them; 12, 9 moreover (it is to be said), that Koheleth was a wise man. N"irT; {excellence is El) n.p. m. 2 Sam. 17, 25, for which 'in'' stands in 1 Bjngs 2, 5. {n"lSn'] /. usually what is saved, acquir- ed, hence property, fortunels. 15, 7 (con- seq. like ^7)^^ Ps. 17, 14), to which be- longs MtoS to acquire = tiip (Gen. 12, 5). Better, remnant, rest of the people, accord- ing to which we should translate : there- fore (i. e. on account of this great mis- fortune) they possess hut a remnant, i. e. they keep only a lr\\ See n'in\ 'i'^r'? (~ 1'^'?'?'^ preeminence) n. p. m. Ex. 3, 1; 4, 18; elsewhere termed "in'' and blSiy'i. piri'i masc. excellence, preeminence^ pn^ 627 rooLES. 2, 13; advantage, gain, use 2, 11; 3, 9. It is a late Hebrew -word, used only by the author of Ecclesiastes. '}"irT' (the Excellent one, viz. Jah is) n. p. m. 1 Chr. 7, 37, for which ^n^. stands in 7, 38. DyiD'' (from lni and 05*, remnant of the people) n.p. m. 2 Sam. 3, 5 ; ] Chk. 3,3. STiri^ fern, the net-like covering of the Z&e»-,'"'fuUy njisri-b? '^ Ex. 29, 13, "^ laan 29, 22,' ^asrrra "> Lev. 9, 19, either from 'nni I. to be prominent, to cover over; or better from ^n"' 11. to l-T bind, to knot, so that n'ln'i properly means a net (see mB'n). riri'' only in Jer. 48, 36, prop, constr. state of iTin^, for which the parallel passage in Is. 15,7 has ninv, hut pos- sibly it is conceived of as an adv. to niuy, the construct state being used adverbially elsewhere; and in general Jeremiah modifies and alters consider- ably the expressions of Isaiah. It might be translated: for he has lost all that has been done with respect to the remainder. nn'' (not used) tr. same as nn^i and the similar nil, Arab. viytJC (comp. 'T)b^^ and 'Tib'') to press upon one, to thrust into, to overthrow (see JTifl); hence to sub- jugate, to subject; fundamental significa- tion the same in Arabic. Derivative PfT] (after the formnn'l; subjugation, subjection) n. p. m. Gen. 36, 40. Accord- ing to Simonis contracted from rTin^ (pin), which is improbable. 3, called t]3 (which see), Kaf, as a letter of the alphabet means the hollow of the bent hand (palma cava, the hollow palm\ because, as is alleged, the letter represented the rough form of the palm, in old writing, as is stiU visible in the Phenician Kaf (», ^, ^3); in old He- brew, Samaritan, old Aramaean, Pal- myrene, as also in the later square character, it is said that this was the model; and the Greek Kanna (nss), K, is only a reversed Phenician figure. But here also as in other letters, the name has been selected only on account of the initial sound. As a numeral S signi- fies 20, being the second letter in the series of tens. When D stands at the end of a word, the lower and bent part is stretched out downwards, i. e. as is done in the case of 5, B, ^ (■], t], y). It is pronounced ha. As to the pronunciation of Kaf, it is usually hard like k, being a litera muta; but like the letters nsiA!3 it has an inclination towards the stronger as- pirated kh, for which reason the LXX sometimes represent it by %. The aspi- rated pronunciation afterwards became the usual one, the harder being de- signated by Dagesh lene. In Phenician a twofold pronunciation of Kaf must have existed likewise; as it is repre- sented in the Punic of Plautus some- times by ch, sometimes by c; and one sees plainly from the difierence between his older and more recent text, that Kaf was not aspirated at an early pe- riod. When Semitic words passed into Greek through the Phenicians, whether they were originally Phenician or not, we find sometimes k, sometimes %, e. g. 13 KaSog, TiSS mviga, ^S3 xvagog, ri5n3 (■jh3) X''^u)v, D'l'niBS XalSaioi &c. As a hard and aspirate A-sound Kaf is interchanged chiefly 1. with 5, as 103 and p.i, ba3 and ba.!), !>^i and 5>ai!; 2. with n, as ns3 and HBn, ?m and l:i25n; 3. with p, as »53 and J>S):, a3i> and ap5», nn3 and HTlp. Since '' r T 'l-T ' IT T IT 't and 5* also belong in part to the A-sounds, we also find 4. an interchange with i, as 1«53 and Tttji, D;; I. and D3; 5. with V, as its and aifll., In3 and ^US, abs and dbs» &c. As an aspirated sound it is also interchanged 6. with Tt, as 40* 628 ^sa and'-irta, ibna andlJa^a &c.; as SO the Sanskrit final h (Visarga) sometimes appears as ^ in the Hebrew roots. Most of these changes, which appear more or less in the formation of stems, are best adduced in the ety- mological explanation of the stems, where comparisons with the dialects may also be found. — Other peculiarities connected with Kaf are a) a transposi- tion, e.g.'inis Ps. 22,16 for ■'sn, comp. yn?3n 68, 24 for yann; b)' an inter- change with 3, e. g. liijas Josh. 15, 62 for imSi, ntea 2 Che. '2, 9 for nta; ijn'bal'ls. 33,1 for xin'^53; c) a change of""] and 1, e. g. 'TjiSn-DN Josh. 17, 11 and 15S>-nN 1 CHETe, 55. But in all these instances other explanations have been attempted. "n- is an old termination, frequently preserved in extra-Semitic, ak = ka as a suffix to adjectives, as we see it still existing in Tjpin , TJTSS , ';|U5''a , 'tjp'llrf, though in proper Hebrew words the for- mation has been entirely lost. For this T^- ak = ka "^ alone sometimes appears, abridged from ka, as in 'Ti''3?3!7 (which see), or a final a coupled with ak, and changed into ok, e. g. in '^''''IN, from Arya-ak, '^'iDS j&om Nisra-ak, and many others. This formative syllable 'r^- ak, still preserved in Hebrew, out of the Aryan language, in some remains of the former, is sometimes written n- ach, e. g. in Hb'iSi (which see); with which comp. Aram.'ni'Vj£, ns'ss:, n&lsu &c. I" : I" : ' i- : "Ht ««^ In- "Tj see ■:{-. 5 (before monosyllabic particles 3, e. g. !l|3, tlT3, ntiT3, only once niST3 Oew. 45, 23 in another sense, and in b?3 Ps. 119, 14, Aram. ^»3 Dan. 2, 23, nasi Dan. 3, 33 relat.; so'too before the suffixes n33, Dn3, 0p3; before te = rta either 3, as i?p3 [a peculiar particle], or before light suffixes -ia3 ; before the interrogative particles Ma'', nw, it is coupled with them in close union by means of Dagesh forte, conseq. -3, as TfiSii, tiS3-, Phenic. 3 the same) 1. an adv. a) a relative adverb, how, in what way, c^uomodo, after a verbEccii.11,5 (thou canst not know) how the hones in the body of the pregnant woman (are to be distinguished from the softer parts) = "^^N EuTH 3, 18. — b) an adverb of quality, as, so, Greek wg, Lat. ita, sic, hoc modo, to express state, sometimes coinciding with 13 and ';j''N, and with them de- noting qualitative, modal comparison and likeness Is. 1, 7 8; hence doubled 3 — 3 as — so, as well — as also, when two things are compared or placed together, so that one is to stand in place of the other, or both together are alike in one relation, e. g. so (3) thou as (3) Pharaoh Gen. .44, 18, i. *e. thou art like him in power; the stranger as well as the native Lev. 24, 16, i. e. both; as well — as also, quantus — tan- tus, talis — qualis JosH.14,11, for which also ^3 — 3 Ps. 127,4, or 31 — ? 1 Sam. 30, 24 are put. — c) expressing inde- finite, inexact likeness: about, nearly, circiter, e. g. Dan. 10, 18 somewhat like the appearance of a man, i. e. not exactly like him, as fflSN 'n^53 7, 13; any thing like this great thing Deut. 4, 32 , and so always in rttB, rtViJ3. This application is usually found with numerals, with words of measure , of time &c. , where the original signification as being a mea- sure of comparison almost disappears, in German: ungefdhr, etwa, English about, e. g. about four hundred men 1 KiNaa 22, 6; about an Ephah of barley Uvtk 2, 17; about a day's jou7-ney'Nv!M..ll,31 ; coupled with a, about the middle of a furrow 1 Sam". 14, 14. To this belongs the meaning about in specifications of time, e. g. about midnight Ex. 11, 4; and so also 3, 3 in "nntt nys Ex. 9, 18 andr»3 :3'ny rnJtt Dan. 9, 21 are to be taken. — d) indicating resemblance only to an ideal object not to one mentioned, and therefore representing the thing itself in an intensive completeness, one as high as possible, without reference to an actually existing thing, very, so much, even, extremely, e. g. Neh. 7, 2 for he is 629 a very faithful man (nMN IB'^NS), i. e. as only a faithful man can be; Eoclhs. 8, 1 who is so very wise; Is. 1, 7 deso- lation, so severe a destruction of enemies; 1, 9 xystss so veni few; rT'Eab'S Song op ' IT : • ■' ' ' IT ! I i Sol. 1, 7 one so very feeble, or (if we read JT'UiB) wandering about. In a like sense should be taken rTttSSSi Ex.22,24, D''338rM3 Num. 11, 1, ilJ^'ina? 1 Sam. 10, '27' a'aJiS Job 24, 14, mH3 'Lament. ' ' IT ' ' V|T- 1, 20, lias {the most devastating weather) Is. 13, 6 &c. In this sense does 3 stand before participles, adjectives, substan- tives and adverbs; and the old gram- marians called it OSyfl t\'3, D1^)?ri Sl^ or ninnsti 1)3, because it regularly de- notes the superlative degree of a condi- tion. -— To this belongs e) the designa- tion of a firmly settled time, e. g. DP 3 Gen. 25, 31, 1 Kings 1, 51 at this pre- sent time, i. e. at present, now, for which also nSB Judges 13, 23 or Win 0^3 stand i)EUT. 2, 30; 4, 38; 1 Kings 8,24; 1 Chr. 28, 7 ; even Deut. 8, 18 and Jbr. 11,5 are to be referred to this meaning, taken specially from the stand-point of the present-speaking God. 1 Sam. 2, 16 at that past time also belongs here, i. e. formerly, before; on the contrary in dV3 Josh. 10, 13, n5>3 Dan. 9, 21 3 has the sense of circiter, a'bout. ii^U ri3>3 Gen. 18, ' IT- 1" T _ ' 10 is about this reviving (i. e. returning the next year) time, which is more definitely explained in 18, 14 by isvsb, in 2 Kings 4, 16 by W!i iSiMb; S'ai3 Num. 16, 21 ' ' IV - 1" - ' - IV ! J. 7 at this moment; USUS in a little, forth- with, in the shortest time, brevi, cito Ps. 2,12; 81,15; 94,17; 2 Che. 12, 7, for which is also used 5>5'1 t2j?723 referring to time only Is. 26, 20; Ezr. 9, 8. — f) expressing the greatest possible limi- tation of the time, condition &c. before which 3 stands, e. g. 5>toD3 1 Sam. 20, 3 only a step; B?'!?? only a little Ps. 73, 2; l^NB ib. only a nothing in time, only a little' time, stronger than £3^733. — g) lastly aa a particle of time: at, at the time when, determining and accura- tely fixing the time Gen. 18, 1; 2 Chr. 12,l-fls.l8,iata clearheat; bt3 ajy3 ib. at the time of the dew-cloud; n'nS"Dn3 18, 5 at the ceasing of the. blossom. — 2. A preposition: according to, after, in pursuance of, Kara, secundum, where that which is denoted by 3 serves as a type to what is compared with it, con- seq[uently the comparison is not com- plete, e. g. I3nwi3 Gen. 1, 26 after our ' likeness, i. e. our mWi may serve as a mo- del, and so 4,17 after the nam,e; Josh.6,15 according to this way; Pa. 78, 72 accord- ing to the simplicity of his heart; Zech.2, 10 and I scatter you after the likeness of the four winds, i. e. the four winds shall serve for a type of the dispersion; con- sequently it is not necessary to read either S'a'INa or ya'iNib. In this sense V33 and' 'i;;3 are also to be taken. — 3. Denoting the comparison of two ac- tions with one another, so that the one takes place, while the other too is done, hence a) comparing the time of two actions. Gen. 39, 18 when I lifted up my voice ..., then he left (1 Sam. 5,10 ; 1 Kjngs 1, 21; 2 Kings 2, 9), and in conditional clauses expressing even the imperfect tense Gen. 44, 30 31; Deut. 16, 6 ; Jer. 25, 12. In this way 3 usually stands before infinitives, or also before a verbal noun or a participle, b) standing before a noun, in order to compare two po- sitions, e.g. Is. 8, 23 as the earlier time brought down the land of Zebulon . .., so will the following time &c.; but usually in this sense ^3 — lij^^.3 Num. 2, 17, Judges 1, 7, or in the apodosis the verb merely Obad. 15; Job 10, 19. c) com- pleting a comparison of two positions on a smaller scale, and prefixed to both, e. g. Josh. 14, 11 as my strength once was, so is my strength now, where the comparison has the character of a uniting clause, besides its reference to condition. But for 3 — 3 there stands also 13 — 3. Josh. 2, 21, Js. 127, 4, Prov. 26,8, or 5, _ 3 Josh. 14, 11; Ez. 18, 4. — Of the particles compounded with 3 we may mention DBN3, biMniJ? (see binns), Vinns (seebinn),'VD3'(see'bip), b?3 (see b?),''):N3 (se'e'i:N)Vir!N3 (see ■intj), nVN3 and -3 (see ThtA), 11^N3 (see ItONJ, nwn'3 (see nsin), fians (see rm), w?, T I" T ^ T 1" ' ' T I" T ^ T 1 tv nT3, n!i]2^ Ar. >_*^, Phenic. 5^3) is mostly used in the dialects in the sense of to be sad, sorrowful, to suffer; but the fundamental signification does not lie in to be bent, but in the idea of piercing , as is seen from Hif., Targ. i3 (ai3), Syr. «^= tr. to pierce, whence ^113, l^os a thorn, a thorn-bush. 3X3 (from as 3) m. pain, suffering Is. 17, 11, coupled with nbni (according to mss.) = JlbflU ; the stinging pain (of le- prosy) Job 2, i3 ; 16,6; with ttiiSNi despe- rate Is.l. c, 'n35>3 excited Ps. 39, 3, nJtS lasting Jer. 15," 18. Mentally, sorrow. coupled with a^. Is. 65, 14. Phenic. Ni3 = ?ias}3 as a proper name. n4^3 (Kal not used) intrans. same as !in3 prop, to be weak, feeble, soft, dull, troubled, shy; metaphorically to be faint-hearted, lowly, bowed down. The idea of being dull, weak and slack pro- ceeded from that of the natural sharp- ness and power being destroyed or con- fined; and the organic root may have a connection with that in n3 (whence per- haps comes directly the subst. "'S), !13"3 , to which the Syr. tfa to sting, to chide, and cognate stems in Ar., point. Deriv. the noun rtiS3 K'ri. IV T Nif. riNSa {part, nssa, constr. fijsss) to be bowed down, humbled, Dan. 11, 30, aab tlN33 of humble heart, i. e. pious Ps.lO^jie. 1N33 Job 30, 8, which many read 1N3D and refer to the present word, we should have to translate: they were banished from the land (rebuked); but see 833. ITT Hif.'n^'^'r\{inf constr. TVWi'D'Ti) to wound, to hurt Ez. 13, 22, according to the fun- damental signification of Kal, and as the Targ. and LXX translate; parallel. a'^NSlrj. On this assumption it seems un- necessary to read aiNSIi. nttS {pi. ID"'N3) m. troubled, wretched, Ps. 10, 10 the crowd of the dejected ones (D''i!<3 btt with the separate reading); but see i3bn. r : V ^^^3 I. (not used) intr. same as 'n?3 (in the Talmud), to be dirty, especially applied to water, conseq[. = 135>. Deriv. according to some "1X3. *1i^3 II. tr. to shut around, enclose, r T fetter, comp. the organic root 15, ia"D &c.; better = 13 to bore through Ps. 22, 1 7 ; where either ilN 3 {part. m. pi. constr.) or 11N3 should be read. i-:iT "lk3 m. dirt Am. 8, 8 according to some. But it is demonstrably = 1i*"'3. See 1N\ ' " 33!D (i. e. i3, not used") intr, to be rounds circular y of a level thing or an "13D 631 1DD arched body. The organic root 33 is identical with that in a.|i, 1.|l, ap.; Ar. ^i, so also Ethiopic, Syr. -.=« the same, of coiling up, and of what is round, of lumps &c. ; comp. Ar. JU5 a coil, (_)«Xu balls, Syr. t^i^s glomus. Deriy. the proper name ]ia3; on the contrary ^313 is not from a3 (sas), but is to be de- rived n-om a3 (a-13). IT ^ \' 153 (3 /■«?». in pause !T153; once 1|33 18.24,20; inf. abs. 133; /m*. las';) mir. prop, to shrink (into a dense, thick mass), to become dense, thick, to depressed closely together, the Ar. Jui'having the same ori- ginal signification. Then to be dense,thick, weighty, heavy, the heavy being con- ceived of as a dense, thick mass ; cognate in sense "ip.J (which see). Hence 1. to he heavy, weighty, Job 6,3; to be a heavy burden upon, e. g. 1^ spoken of superior power, preponderance Judqes 1, 35, as %y '3 ~ii TS 3, 10; of the punitive omni- potence of God Ps. 32, 4; of the op- pressive power of sin Is. 24, 20; of labour Neh. 5, 18; to be troublesome, burdensome 2 Sam. 13, 25, always with by of the person, and only in 1 SAm. 5', 6 with h» for b?; with yz of the per- son to be too heavy for Ps. 38, 5. Comp. Ar. Jui' (to be troublesome) , and the Ethiopic, of burden, weight. — 2. Me- taphor, a) to be sore, severe, of TVanhiZ Judges 20, 34, with bij of the person 1 Sam. 31, 3; b) to be numerous Job 6, 3 (comp. Hithp.); c) to be rich, abundant in, with 3 in (what) Gen. 13, 2, like "Ij?; , Greek ^figiJi', Germ, gewichtig; A) to be ex- alted, renowned, honoured, valued, worthy, majestic Is. 66, 25; Job 14, 21; Ez. 27, 25, opposite b)5 (bb]:); e) to be heavy, spoken of members of the body, i. e. stiff and immoveable as to activity, hence to be dim, dull, of the eyes Gen. 48, 10; of the ears, to be hard of hearing Is. 59, 1 ; of the mind, to be obdurate, Ex. 9, 7. For the derivatives to be hard, ap- plied to sluggishness in speech (Ex. 4, 10), comp. Arab. u».J^ (to be heavy; of the tongue, stammering), the Arab. -s, , Syr. i-n^ are used for it. — The significations of the stem present them- selves in the derivatives in greater va- riety than in the verb. Deriv. 133, naS (adj.), 1133, 133, rtl:)33, ni133; in proper names 1133 (in 1133-ilsi) and 133 (in 1531''). JSfif. 1333 (part. 1335, pi. Q-'iaS:, but consfr. "■'1333, with sujf. ii'^ia?? and once t:rtn333 ts. 149, 8, pL f'.' n^fz^Di; inf. cowsir. 133^; fut. 133';) reflex, and pass, of the signific. of Kal, to be heavy- laden, a^75-'1333 Pkov. 8, 24 rich in wa- ter; to make oneself great, mighty, many Is. 26,15; to shew oneself great, mighty 2 Sam. 6, 20; Ez. 39, 13; 2 Kings 14, 10 shew thyself great and remain at home, i. e. shew thy greatness at home; to be dis- tinguished Is. 43, 4; to be highly esteemed, glorified Lev. 10, 3; Ez. 28, 22; to be brought to honour Is. 49, 5, with 3 of the person in or by whom Ex. 14, 4; to feel oneself honouredB-i^Ga.l, 8; to be honour- able, eminent Gen. 34, 19, 1 Sam. 9, 6; to be famous 2 Sam. 23, 19 23; hence 1333 is opposed to nbps Is. 3, 5 ; "'las? y-k Is. 23, 8 9 the honoured i. e. princes ov nobles of the earth, also n''1.333 , D''ia33 alone Nah. 3, 10; Ps. 149^ S! niiaD3 as a subst. glorious things, Ps. 87, 3. Pih. 133 {part, laa'p, fut. 133^) to honour, to hold in honour, with accus. of the object Ex. 20, 12; to favour, with a double accus. Is. 43, 23 ; seldomer with ■\12 Prov. 3, 9 or a of the thing with which one honours Dan. 11, 38; to shew honour, with b of the person Ps. 86, 12, also with the"accus. 22, 24; Is. 24, 15; to esteem holy or high Is. 58, 13; 60, 13; to glorify, with a in a thing Judges 9, 9. Fuh. 133 {part, ispa, fut. 133^) to be honoured, to be esteemed Is. 58, 13; Prov. 13, 18. //z7.l''a3ri(part.l-'a3?5; m/'. aSs. lasrr, constr. 1'''a3!l; fut. I'^as;, ap. 133!) 1- to make heavy, oppressive, bb 1 Kings 12, 10 14; nani (the fetter) Lament. 3, 7; a^pay Hab! 2, 6 with b? of the person; with the omission of biS Neh. 5, 15. — ■ 2. Fig. to bring to honour Is. 8, 23, op- -1D2 632 HDD posite b^rt (to biing to disgrace); to ac- ^ire renown 2 Chr. 25, 19 (for whicli the Nif. stands in 2 Kmg^ 14, lO);;, tp ■moke numerous., to irae^-e^ae Jeb, 30; 19,, opposite 'nSlii^ fa maA^e hemy, the ears Is, 6, 10; io^ harden, ab j^x- 9, 34. Hithp. lasnrt (^aH. lasna) 1. to make oneself many, to $^ num^rouf, Nah. 3,15, with an assonance, to iT'a'nii wd, rt^'lij, 1«f3>2, 1,0-; — 2. to gfary^.tahonOMr om'selfPnov.. 12, 9, opposite !ribj53. 1!l!3 iconstr. naa, once 1i3 Is. 1, 4; ^Z.ai'153, C(i>rafi«r."'na3) I. adj. m. 1. Aeauy, weighty,^ larger (in extent, and weight), of Vy 1 KiNOS 12, 11, Nto Ps, 38, 5, 3»bD Is, 32,. 2; clumsy, of an old man 1 Sam. 4, 18,, of the hands Ex. IT, 12; thick, of las 19, 16. Hence figur. op- pressive, grievous, of ftV Is. 1, 4, 'lyia 2 Sam. 14, 26, ai»'n Gen. 43, 1, 05*3 ITT J7_,_ Prov. 27, 3. — 2. Metaphor, numerous, much, great (in number), of !i?.n.fa Gen. 50, 9, y-)S Ex. 8, 20, naiJM iCs's, b']!"! 1 Kings 10, 2, Q? 3, 9; 'rich Gen. 13, 2; vehement, of bSN 50, 11, lai, Ex. 9, 3, IBOa Gen. 50; 10; awkward, sluggish, of fiB Ex. 4,.10, lifflb ib. v. 16 ; hardened, of the ab 7, 14; A/^cwii., of IS'i 18, 18. — n. subst. (with suff.. """I^S,' ini3) m. prop, a mass of blood thiciened "(into a firm body), hence the liver, as the thickest part of the viscera (Galen, de usu partium 6, 17) Ex. 29, 13 22; Lev. 3, 4; 8, 16; Ax. 0^ the same. '3a tiNM Ez. 21, 26 to look into the liver, a kind of sacred augury among the Chaldeans (Diod. 2, 29), Etrurians (Cic. de divin. 1,42; 2, 13) and other ancient peoples. The liver is poured out on the ground Lament. 2, 11, i. e. the gall, the empty- ing of the gall being looked upon as a result of injury to the liver (see Job 16, 13), and that being regarded as dangerous to life; figur. for the heart is wounded. '^'2^ m. 1. fame, majesty, only in the proper name laSV. — 2. as a stat. constr. of 1^3, which see. Ya| (after the form 'Tj'iN, p^») adj. m.. ^11^3 (fluctuating between !Tia3 and tnia?) f. prop; splendid, shining Ez. 23, 41 J much, rich; but the masc. as well as , the; fern, only substantively riches Nah. 2, 10, possession Judges 18, 21, splendour y magnificerme Ps. 45, 14. For "ns as a : subst. see Ti^3- c '133 m. heaviness, weight Prov. 27, 3, -metaphor, a multitude Nah. 3, 3, violence Is. 21, 15, slowness, of a slowly ap- proaching thunderstorm 30, 27. rrnnS f. heaviness Ex. 14, 25 , i. e. slowness. n!33 (fut. tiaS'^) tr. prop, to covei; IT T ^ r.* ; •' *■ * to conceal, to veil, to envelop, conseq. in its fundamental signification ^ttatl, an I., Nsn, iisn, liSS &e.; usually me- r ' IT T ' IT T ' n T ' •' taphor. to put out, quench, spoken of fire Lev. 6, 6, Prov. 26, 20, of light 31, 18; figur. of God's burning wrath Jer. 7, 20, of a wick going out, as the figure of a weakened, perishing enemy Is. 43, 17 (eomp. 42,3). Ax. Us to cover the fire (with ashes), Lk^ to be quenched. — The organic root is !l-a3 (see Nan), Pih. na3 (inf. constr. ni33; fut. ^33^) to quench, with the accus. ni13 2 Chr. 29, 7, the burning n'i5>3 Is. 1, 31, nniBS 42, 3, m Am. 5, 6; figur. Man Jer. 4,4, nans Song op Sol. 8, 7, D''H«: Ez. 32, 7. IT -;i- ' ' • r T ' nbn.1-ns n33 2 Sam. 14, 7 to quench the coal, i. e. to destroy the last shoot; '3 'a 'ia-ns* 21, 17 to put out the light of Israel, i. e. to destroy all its best things. ^i^S (corasir. lias, ia3, with suff. inas; written sonietimes fuUy, sometimes de- fectively) m. (fern, only in Gen. 49, 6, but in the Sam. cod. masc. there also) 1. a weight, a burden, Prov. 25, 27 aTid the searching out of their (i. ©. of divine things) interior (nias 2, c.) is a burden (1133), i. e. the minute examina- tion of divine things is burdensome (comp. Ben-Sira3,21-25); see 1|?n. — 2. Metaphor, a) riches, substance, parti- cularly what has been brought together Gen. 31, 1; Is. 10, 3; 66, 12, coupled with b:p 61, 6; Ps. 49, 17, frequently with Tiis 1 Kings 3, 18; Peov. 3, 16; -HDD 633 8, 18, or ti"'ti5? EccLBS. 6, 2. — b) honour, fame, renown, partly as a consequence of riches 2 Che. 1, 11, partly as the op- posite of Tibp, in a moral sense. Then, dignity PeoV.' 11, 16; 20, 3, -with inrt Ps. 8, 6 ; o crown of glory, parall. niUJ* Job 19, 9. Figur. the ark of the covenant 1 Sam. 4, 22. Of God, glory, i. e. renown- deserving agency Ps.19,2; magnificence, majesty Is. 42, 8; hence God is called Ti:32i!i -^jba Ps. 24, 7. V Tiasi ■jna to give honour, to hold in honour, to esteem honour- able Peov. 26, 8 ; to celebrate, to praise, God, Jeb. 13, 16, for which also \ "3 Dlto Is. 42, 12 or b '3 ah^ Ps. 29, i some- : T . r-T ' timea occur, b 'a trias to give an honour- able burial 2 Che. 32^ 33. Still farther, high, position Gen. 45, 13; splendour, of a residence Is. 11, 10, of £ne chariots 22, 18, of a throne 22, 23; ornament, beauty, of •\'iidh 35,2, hence b 'sb iT'rj 4, 2 to adorn one; especially the ma- jesty, glory, renown, excellency, of God in his manifestation on mount Si- nai, shining with fire, surrounded by clouds, and sending forth lightnings Ex. 16, 7 10; in the tabernacle; in the temple of Solomon; or in prophetic re- velation Is. 6, 3, Ez. 1, 28; called in the New Test, do^a xvqIov (Luke 2, 9). Hence God is termed bN'iio; 1133 Jee. 2, 11, Ps. 106, 20, poet. Iiai alone Is. 3, 8; also of God in the proper name lias-'N (which see). So too 113 in lajsii. — c) Concrete the noble, the best, either collectiv. for the temple and Jewish people Is. 4, 5, the nobility, nobles 5, 13; 8, 7; 17, 3, the honoured, honoured relations 22, 24, or conceived of individually for IZJBS Gen. 49, 6, Q-^^n Ps. 30, 13. — ...,.,. 7 5,.- J d) a,iy. with honour, gloriously, Ps. 73,24 and at last thou shalt receive me gloriously. minS) see 133. , IT : IT ?133 (from ba3 n.; a dry, parched, sandy place) 1. re. p. of a border-city of Asher in the north-east of Palestine, adduced with pM^ri r-'a (Talm.pMS 183) and bN-iSi Josh. 19, 27. It was still in existence during the time of the second temple ; and after the destruction of the latter a Jewish congregation was there, JD3 since mention is made in the Midrasb rabba (Lev. ch. 21) of the great ones of Cahul (bia3 ■ibil5). This Cabul is called by Josephus (Vit." §. 43. 44; B. J. 3, 3, 1) Xa^alia; and is said to be in the vicinity of 'i35>, viz. two hours north of it, in which district there is at the present day a village Cabul {Robins. New Bibl. Eesearches p. 113), where the graves of Ibn Esra and Ibn Gebirol are shewn; in the Talmud (Pesach 51 *) it is mentioned with i'p''a {Birya, 1/2 an hour north of nsJi) and i35>; and this may also be IT ! . I ^ I *" ' " the ijyi\S in the eparchy of nas, men- tioned by Edris in his description of Syria. — 2. re. p. of a district in Galilee comprising twenty towns 1 Kings 9, 11 ; which was called '3 y'lN according to the etymologising narrative 9, 12-13, because it was unfruitful, sandy and dry. According to Josephus this ter- ritory bordered on that of Tyre, formed a barren sandy mountain-basin, and may have received its name at an earlier period from the city bia3 in Asher, to which the district probably belonged; the appellation being merely interpreted afterwards. As to the signification of the name, the Targ., Syr. and Vulg. have not attempted to give any, but merely retained the word. The LXX identify it with bia.5, bas; Josephus explains it (Antt. 8, 5, 3), like the Phenician iban, Xa^akwv (corruption, uselessness, un- profitableness) and therefore describes it by om UQeaxov; Jerome (on Amos ch. 1) derives it from 3 as and bia =bia^; the Talmud (Sabb. 54") from ^a3 = l3OT be- longing to bin (sand); Rashi, Eimchi and others from baa (to entwine, inter- lace); ffiller (Onom. p. 435) from biail3 (as nothing, biafl = baJl); others from 3 as and bia = ba (nothing). But it is best to suppose that the application of the word alludes simply to the signifi- cation of the name. See ba3 11. |- T ^123 (circle of tents, hamlet, from aa3 ; comp. Tt^n 1. and M-itt with a like funda- mental signification) re. p. of a city in. Judah Josh. 15, 40. But as in all pro- bability the same city is called 1 Che. -1^33 634 5^33 2,49 NSasW; and since iJaSM elsewhere ' IT" : - ' r- : - appears as the proper name of a person, it is safer to refer it to the stem ')53 {which see). T'SS (pi. d'^'l'^as) prop. adj. m. great, much, mighty, spoken of masses of waters Is. 17, 12 as a figure of the Assyrian army; violent, of till (a storm) Job 8, 2, a figure of rushing, stormy speech; subst. a mighty or great one Job 34, 17 24, and therefore an epithet of God 36, 5, or supplemented and determined by ab and nb ibid. i. e. nb '3 and ab '3; with D"')?"' of great age 15, 10. As a neuter, anything mighty, great, much 31, 25; Is. 16, 14. Comp. Phenician O'las (in Sanchoniathon pages 22, 38 Kd^siQoi, Kd^ijQoi), a name of the seven sons of p'X^ (= p'l'lSt) in the Phenician mythology, who symbolised the seven planets. So the planet Jupiter was call- ed, according to a gloss in Hesychius, "T'D? m. a texture, covering, of goat's hair 1 Sam. 19, 13 16, for which the LXX and Josephus read laa (liver) un- derstanding by it a goat's liver still moving, which Michal put into the bed, to make the messengers believe that a breathing sick man was lying there. ?33 I. (not used) trans, same as baa I- T ^ ' r T to bind about, to wind around, to twist about, hence to bind, to fetter, to entangle &c.; deriv. bas. The fundamental sig- nification is sufficiently clear from the stems ban, bs2i, baa &c. Arab. jJ.? (whence Jj-sl^ a hunting-net), Aram. ba3 the same. The offshoots of this funda- mental idea are a) to knot into one an- other, to mix with one another, to inter- twine (comp. Aram, baa to knead); b) to be closely or firmly twisted together, me- taphor, to be firm, dense, thick, great (see b'li). The organic root is ba-3, also lying in ba I. Pill. ba'n3 (not used; with "^ inserted) to veil around, to enwrap, arising out of . Puh. ba'jS) (part. ba'13)ji) to be clothed about 1 Che. 15, 27, with a wherewith; comp. Nbai3 Dan. 3, 21. ^53 II. (not used) intrans. to be dry, parched, like the Arab. tMJ' ; hence to be unfruitful. Derivative the proper name b«ia3. I T ^D3 (pi. constr. "'bas) m. a fetter, Ps. 105,18; 149,8; Arab, and Syr. the same. |33 (not used) tr. usually to bind, to draw together, to intertwine firmly, cog- nate in sense baa; Syr. ^jj^as the same. It is better, however, to take it = laa 3. to be heaped together, to be contracted, into a mass; hence to be hilly, uneven, spoken of places; to be thick, fat, of persons. Deriv. the proper names N5as?3 , ■'Saa^a, and perhaps ')ia3. D33 (in Kal only part. m. Dab) tr. prop, to tread (with the feet), to stamp upon, clothes (in order to clean them); hence to full, to wash; 'j^H'n applying only to the washing of the body. Comp. Greek nXvvnv as distinguished from lovsiv. Part. DSb 2 Kings 18, 17, Is. 7, 3 a washer, a fuller; Phenic. Oab the same. Pih. &a3 (more frequently 633; part. Daaa; fut. Oaa^) to wash, to clean, clothes Ex. 19,' 10, Lev. 11, 25, Not. 1.9, 7, for which purpose ni^a Mal. 3, 2 or ln3 Jer. 2, 22 was applied. To wash the garments in wine is a poetical figure of fulness Gen. 49, 11. Figur. to purify, from sin Jer. 4, 14; Mal. 3, 2; Ps. 51, 4 9. Puh. Oa3 to be washed, purified. Lev. 13,58; 15)17. Hothp. Dasri (arising from Da3nl-|) to be purified, from leprosy Lev. 13, 55 56. The organic root of the stem Da"3 exists also m OS (Dia), DS-'i, W3-1, It ^ I '' I- T ' I- T ' OM-'n, and is connected with lBa-3 I. J^33 (not used) intr. to be high, to be hill- shaped or dome- shaped, prop, to be highly bent, highly rounded, hump- shaped, identical with i>aa, 5>a)j I. Tha nD3 635 nins org. root is 5>-aS, which lies also in as (sail), ap , iJi ,' n-ia, tis, rr-aa, y-a>i &e. Deriv. 3>j3'i3, 5>ai3. The Ar. f^ {^ be subjected) belongs to another group of roots. IDS (Kal not used) tr. 1. to hind firmly together, to weave or knot together firmly; the stems 'na* (page 260), "nan (page 414), bas.'b'sa, bB3, ban'"l, in 3 II., latl &c. which are closely con- nected with 'las , pointing to this funda- mental signification. Hence to plait into one another, spoken of a sieve, to lattice, to make or form net-work, deriv. T^as, tr^as 2, 133)3 , 13373 : to hind, to unite, ITT : ' IT : • ' I" : - ' ' „ t, whence the proper name 133. — 2. By an usual metaphor (as in !np , 1113)5 , pTtt , hli, bin &c.) to he physically strong, powerful, mighty, forcihle; with relation to extent, to he large, long, widely ex- tended, deriv. ilia3 1.; with relation to ' ITT : ' fulness, to collect, to heap up, to make much, deriv. l^aSU; with relation to time, to he advanced in years, old, con- tinuing (in time), deriv. 133. The stem '3 is found more frec[uently in Arabic ( -Is to be great, ^-a5 to be ad- vanced in years, and then in the most various significations), Syr. (r^^** to be- come rich, powerful), &Ethiopic; so that its use in Job, Ecclesiastes &c. appears to have originated rather from the in- fluence of Aramaean. Hh. 133 (not used) to he very strong, violent, massy, celebrated, manifold, old; in every relation an intensification of the second signif. of Kal. Deriv. 1''33. Hif. 1"'33ri {fut. 1''33::) to make many, to heap up,'yh-q Job 35, 16, clear in its meaning after ai'; 34, 37; the LXX incorrectly read TiBS^ Deriv. the subst. 1133^ 36, 31 = 31 in Elihu's mode of speaking. IDS 1. m. prop, length, extent, con- tinuance, of time, as the fem. ii'i^? (co"***"- nia3) is applied to length or extent of space; the Arab. jSf (old age) is the same word. Mostly occurring as an adv. long ago, already Eccles. 1, 10, coupled withd''53bi5»b (centuries ago); '3i!53 while long ago, 2, 16, where it belongs to the verb, D"i|S3!l D'^M^Ii (in future times) iovm.- ing an adverbial accusative. But it is also a suhst. anything old, i. e. what was long ago, 3, 15 what has hecome somewhat old (133), and what is to he, was long ago (133); Syr. i-aa the same. — 2. (the unit- ing, viz. river) n. p. of a river which runs through or washes Chaldea and Babylon. Bising in the neighbourhood of Nisibis, it falls into the Euphrates at "iBiMSIS, after having united numerous streams with itself (Golius on Alferg. page 243 &c.). It is identical with the lifo^qag (Strabo 16, 748) or Xa^wQU? (Ptol. 5, 18) Ez. 1, 3; 3, 15 23; 10, 15 22 ; Syr. j-as , Jass the same. Probably this river was called in Hebrew liafl; the orthography 133 in Ezekiel being merely an Aramaeism. Hence the lian in Assyria, or better between Media and Assyria, is more exactly denoted by Via ins. 'it r : rriD? (constr. nl33; from 133) f. 1. length, extent, always in the combina- tion yiNrt nl33 (Gen. 35, 16; 48, 7; 2 Kings 5, 19) an extent or tract of land, i. e. a stretch of way, which was either a definite measure of distance (accord- ing to the Syr. either a M01B, parsang, l^iSfS, parasanga; according to Saadia Jouo, milliare, a Eoman mile; according to Jerome about 5000 paces), or as must be inferred from 2' Kings 1. c, it ex- presses no definite measure, but corre- sponds to the German "eine Strecke Weges". The LXX have retained the word untranslated Gen. 35, 16; in 48, 7 they add as a gloss Kara thv InnoSQO- fiov (a race -course) i. e. a stage or 3 parsangs (like the Arab, (j^vwl JOyMi), which, however, also stands in the same verse fornlBN "^113. Indefinite names of size, length and weight have often fixed time, measure and weights, as we see from iTiND, b)?T^, InSM, Aram-lW, Nj*!^, Comp. "aqa (a short time), Pondo &c. — 2. a sieve Am. 9, 9, ty^D 636 ^2:> Ji?D3 I. (part.pl. a-'llSaSi, inf. constr. tiilas, fia. 'Uiia?';) trans, properly to tread (under foot), upon a thing, as iBSSi makes clear; to tread down, metaphor, to oppress, suppress, i. e. not to regard, to disregard, to leave unnoticed, TnilV. Mio. 7, 19; to subdue, S'^'l^Sb Nbh.'5, 5; 2 Chr. 28, 10; Jer. 34,^ 16; to force, a woman Esth. 7, 8 ; poet, to conquer, tread down, »b)?: ■'jai* (sling-stones) Zech. 9, 15, a figure of the heathen; while the Israelites are called 'nT3 iJ^N 9, 16. De- rivative fflas. Nif. 113333 to he conquered, taken pos- session of,yis,, with isab of the person Num. 32, 22 ; Josh. 18, i ; to he suhdued Nbh. 5, 5. Pih. 12)33 1236^1 , we may perhaps read 12333 as a periphrasis of bss in ike passage." t&33 (pi- I3"'i2333) TO. a young sheep, after it has ceased to be tibD (a lamb) and has become stronger, usually till three years old, and if it be of one year, the fact is expressly given 'Nxm. 7, 1.5' 17; 29, 13. In other respects '3 is de- scribed as feeding in meadows Is. 5, 7, Hos. 4, 16, yielding wool Prov. 27, 26, Job 31, 20, and characterised by tame- ness and patience Jer. 11, 19; Arab, and Syr. a ram, which suits well the idea of the derivation, being from a ntyD3 637 iy\D stem denotinrg force -and strength. For it we have also aiajp Lev. 3, 7; 4, 35, plur. QiaiBS Gen. 30, 32. Arab, (jio^a lamb of one year. ntDD? f. same as rttonSi Lev. 14, 10; Num." 6, 14. nto33 (constr. rmSi; plur. niioaSi, constr. nitoasi) /". the same Gen. 21, 28 29, 2 Sam. i2, 3 4, without distinction of gender, probably applied at first to other small animals likewise. Instead of this form is also used !iaffl3 Lev. 5, 6. IT : • ■10333 (from 12553 II.) to. an oven, a furnace, for burning lime or smelting metals, and for the preparation of glass, out of which, while it is heated, a thick smoke ascends Gen. 19,28, and in which ashes and soot rest Ex. 9, 8 10; not different in fundamental signification from lisn (from 113 to burn). See "0313. ^^ (from 'Tt3 I.; pi. d'''l3) comm. a bucket, a pail, a vessel (for holding meal) Gen. 24, 14, 1 Kings 17, 14, Judges 7, 16, coupled with Ths, (a bowl) Ecclbs. 12, 6. The word which is the most common of all for pail or bucket came from the Phenicians to other peoples also; comp. Sanskrit ghada (an earthen pitcher, see Bopp, Glossar. p. 60), Greek xdSos, xdddog, Latin cadus, Slavon. Kad &c. In Arab, the denomin. JO to draw, comes from it. IS^S (not used) Aram. tr. prop, to spin, to bind, to bind together; meta- phor, to lie, to dissemble, like theHebr. aT3. Derivat. an3. The Pael is com- l-T |"T monly used in the Targ., Syr. &c. n'Jp (def. NS-iSi) adj. m., Man? /. lying Dan. 2, 9, like nniniB an adjective to nVa, and not a subst. In the Targ. Nsisi, pi. 171? (Is. 57,11) andT^ai? (Ez. 13, 19), is a subst., like aT3 in Hebrew. nnS I. (i. e. n3; not used) tr. same as nn.!| (pag. 305) to deepen, a vessel, in order to put something in, hence like nnJi identical with the Targumic tarj, Syr. '-J^ &c. The root exists also in the extra-Semitic languages. Deriv. 13. nn3 II. (not used) intr. to glow, to bum, to blaze, to sparkle; metaphor, to be of a sparkling , red colour. The or- ganic root 13 is closely connected with that in ■ip_"J (which see). Comp. Arab. i>lj to give fire. A farther develop- ment of the signif. of the verb is the same as in 1'in to stick, pierce, bore; the ideas of burning and pricking being conceived of alike, particularly in the piercing of thorns (comp. i!5n]?, U5?53 be- longing to iBiMS, ttSte)?, cognate with «ja3 n., Vin from iin, ai21 to bum r T ' IT ^ r T ' i- T and to prick); on which account we have to compare with it the Ar. JO io pierce, of thorns, to torment, whence ii\iiSCo- luthea spinosa &c. In the latter signif. it is the verb-root of 'jiT3 1, which is to be derived from Tl3 II. I"T Pih. I. TiB (not used) to spread heat, to emit flames. Deriv. li'l"'?- Pih. n. IBnS (redupl.; not used) to lighten, to sparkle, spoken of a clear, red colour. Deriv. liB"]?. 1W3 (after the form t|>i)iN) m. 1. a clue, 'ball, Is. 22, 18, governed as an accus. by SlSS, and in apposition with tiDSlt, whence we should translate: he IT" ; will roll thee together like a coil, like a ball. But as the verb is wanting to the following words, we may more suitably read 'ni13. — 2. same as 'nil"'? a sur- rounding besieging line of troops, like the Latin corona (Caesar, B. G. 7, 72; Virg. Aen. 9, 508; Liu. 4, 47) Is. 29, 3, parallel aS)? (a military post), and M3rt b? there denotes actively to set up about a thing, with the accus. Tl'l3; like 1^ b? to erect by way of siege about a thing, with acousat. aSU. Hence the Kaf in IT \ _ . 1W3 can only belong to the stem, m this passage. Talm. 1113 a round disk, a circle. IIS) see •'Ji. ■'13 see ■''1. I* : t* lai? m. the name of a shining, sparkling precious stone, prob. a car- buncle (Bn Koreish), so called from ita ^^J-ID 638 HD red-sparkling colour Is. 54, 12; Ez. 27, 16 i Targ. ')13'73 or TilSnS, 11313, TllSIS for Hebrew "^Bb or Q'brt.i; Ar. s jJuk? rubedo maxima, aud JiJi5l5. The Greek naQir/Soviog may be corrupted from this "word. kS^lS see 1SN513'):i5. 113 I. (inf. abs. ^113 Is. 22, 18, as one may read, parallel to C)ii5t) tr. prop, same as 'in3, 'nl3i>, llfi to enclose, sur- r T ' r T ' r T ^ ' _ rownii, encircle, tbe same meaning being decidedly expressed in im I., Ti-J , isn , •liiy &c., hence 1. to swing forward in a circle, to toss forward. Is. 22,18 "Vn 1il3 tiyV' n^Q'l 'J^'nN tossing circularly into a distant land; but we may also retain *T1'13. — 2. to circle, to make a round motion, of a ball, a coil. — 3. to besiege or storm, a place, consisting in surround- ing it, "1113 appearing in the same use. The application of this word in Arab. GtXi ) to he disturbed, troubled, of water, to he mixed together, of an army, has arisen from the fundamental significa- tion just given, properly to be turning, whirling, circling, ins also seems to belong here. Pih. '1^3 (not used) to enclose in a circle, to besiege, to press upon round about, a slight addition to the force of Kal. Deriv. ^113 2, 'ni1"'3. I - ' I . nS II. to bind, to plait together, the same idea being also expressed in the cognate verbs ln;i , ia)5 II., without there being any connection with signif I. on that account; Ar. \Jo the same, whence 'i\dS& bundle. The signif. to be much in Arab, is to be explained by \dS^in the sense of the Hebrew ^1113. Deriv. 'Tl'n3 1, I'll {constr. "TiSi) in the proper name 'ntt3>V'n3. ■••IT : r : NTT3 see 'i^NS'iSiai. "l/0yb']13 {binding of a sheaf) n.p. of a king of th^y i. e. Elymais or Susiana on the east side of the lower Tigris Gen. 14, 1 9. As the form of the pro- j)er name before us is Hebrew; and the Aryan language, as is well known, pre- vailed in Susiana, we must either as- sume that the name is translated or Hebraised. nS a verb-root to the noun >3 I. IT 1- n3 a particle demonstrative refer- ring to quality; sometimes to express a comparison, ), where the particular of com- parison is almost imperceptible 1 Sam. 14,44; 1 Kings 19, 2. !iip is used be- sides 1. as a particle of time, now, prop. so far, 1 Kings 18, 45 till so far, i. e. not long; Ex. 7, 16 till now. — 2. a particle of place: here Num. 23, 15, Euth 2, 8, 2Sam. 18, 30, after verbs of motion MAer Gen. 31, 37; Num.23, 15; rt3 — Tbhere — fAere 11,31; 'rO^ lis hither and thither ' , ^ I T I Ex. 2, 12; !13 1» to that place, yonder Gen. 22, 5. — 3. as a particle of man- ner: in this manner, of this sort. Is. 20, 6 behold, of such kind is our hope; tiba — rtipa in this — in that way 1 Kings" 22, 20. In all the three meanings the de- monstrative fundamental signification prevails. — As to the derivation, iis is abridged from 1M3, and belongs to the family of the pronominal roots 3, "'Si, 13 &c.; it is also found in the com- pound M'3"'iS (which see). nnD 639 jnD_ nn3 {inf. dbs. !ih3; fut. rtln^"', ap. ITT IT'' IV:''-* ^5.''.) Jw*»'«prop. same as SlNlS to Je feeble, weak, hence to be quenched, of the eye, to become blind Zbch. 11, 17, to be dim Gen. 27, 1, Deut. 34, 7, Job 17, 7 ; also in derivatives to be quenched of a burn- ing wick, a figure of being weak, faint, dying; to become pale, of inflammations; fig. to despair, to fail Is. 42, 4. Pih. !-tn3 (3 fern, nnns) 1. intr. to be udry rfuZZ; of the mind, to despond Ez. 21, 12. — 2. tr. to make timid, dejected, desponding, i. e. to chide, to admonish, with a of the person 1 Sam. 3, 13, like a '^y.1" (Zech. 3, 2), this being a damp- ing and weakening of the excesses of others; Targumic NM3. The Syr. lo" has abeady this meaning in Peal. Ar. ff<^<-n be weak. The form filrj3 can only be taken as an adjective feminine, not as the 3 pers. of perfect of Pih. Deriv. IT ■• ' IV •• tins f- mitigation, alleviation, of a wound Nah. 3, 19, different from iiiis ' ' IT " (Peov. 17, 22), which has another fun- damental signification. nnS (from the Pihel of lnlr|3) adj. m. (not used), TXri's {pi. ntns) f- dim, of a burning wick Is. 42, 3; pale, faint, of 3>a5. Lev. 13, 6 &c., where i'as is al- ways construed as a fern.; niiaV ^'i'^?. Jj^Y. IB, 39 palish-white; dim, of the eyes, ISam. 3, 2; fig. dejected, despairing, of m'l Is. 61, 3. brG (only part. m. bpS), pi. T)'U^) Aram. intr. prop, to catch, to hold, hence like the Hebr. bbi to be able, I can, with IT ^ and the infin. following Dan. 2, 26; . 6, 8 ; or a noun in the accusat. follows 5, 15. — The Aram, stem, found else- where only in Ethiopic, is enlarged out of the organic root b3 by extending the fundamental vowel into He, as is also the case in IpS. See Vdj (Hebrew). |n2 (not used, only part. 1^3, which is given below as a substantive) trarts. to perform, execute, prepare, e. g. the ioffices of worship, conseq. enlarged out of 13 (lis), except that the latter is in- trans. ; the Arab. Cy^ and ^\y^ have also, partly as verbs, partly in derivia- tives, the meaning to stand by, to sup- port, to be the medium of executing a bu- siness &c., whence have then arisen "to perform a divine service; to be a priest, prophet; to prophesy, to divine". In the Syr. ,^=, which, in the very various forms of the verb and in its derivatives, likewise began with the fundamental significa- tion here given, there is the same ground- sense, enlarged into "to be prepared, dressed; (of a country) to be fruitful, cultivated; to procure, to obtain (pro- perty, goods), therefore to be rich, for- tunate"; t^i^, for the Hebrew iblD and 1135 , denotes to be firmly-grounded, calm, secure, rich; Ar. ^^y^iji a coun- sellor, helper; comp. Latin facereior "to sacrifice". To this belongs in Hebrew the meaning to serve, to do service (cog- nate in meaning with rTiffl) in a spiritual and secular sense ; therefore spoken also of persons who were not priests, as is seen below under "jn'S. Deriv. "jpB, MSf^l- Pih. ^rtS is to i)e regarded as a de- nom. from ^InB which see. ^ns (^Z-NSfiB; ^z.rf.n3, def.^^^, and '3 , with suff. ■'ni3!i3 and '3) Aram. IT •• •■ I — 1 IT I m. same as Hebr. ^pS a priest, e. g. of EzraEzR.7,12 21; coupled with Levites and Israelites 6,16; 7,13. •\tp {plur. 131553, c. iSlnip, with suff. VSilis, S!Ti5f13 ; prop, part.) m. l.a servant IT-: I ' IV "-: ' ■*■ r^ , , , (in a higher dignity), a minister, a counsel- lor performing service (which originally the word means, according to Kimchi, in accordance with the stem) 2 Sam. 8, 17 (for though Zadok and Ahimelek were of priestly descent, the author intended to relate in this passage a kingly offi- cial dignity only, as in the case of "bs iOSrt, lilsTM, 'n&iO, especially as two high priests would not have performed their functions at the same time) ; 8, 18 of the 111 13a, which the Targ. renders by Va^i-l a!nd IChk.18,17 by fi-'p.iilJN'J Tjbtelri V^b , the LXX by ablaQxat, 7tqi>- jnD_ 640 D •rot SiaSoyoi tov ^aaiXicag, similarly the Syr. and Ar.; 2 Sam. 20,26, where N'!"'^ as an officer is merely put on a par with the preceding; 1 Kings 4, 4; house-officer 4,5, explained by ln»'n; Judges 17, 10, like aj« there, counsellor, -where Kimchi IT ' ' already renders it risrsf 5?a; 2 Kings 10. 11 coupled with 5''i."'a , where Kimchi explains it by TUN ^1; 11, 9, according to the LXX also JoBi2,19, same as D''ityii 12,17; in the passages Gbn.41,45; Ex. 3, 1; 18, 1; Ps. 110, 4 we have to sup- pose at least a union of spiritual and secular dignity, according to the Tar- gum. — 2. a servant of God, who had charge of the sacrifiqial worship Lev. 1, 9 13 15, the expiations 5, 13; 6, 19 and cures 13, 3 6 seq. , the mediations 27.12 23 ; Num. 5,15 &c. ; apriest, spoken of Aaron of the tribe of Levi, who was set apart to the service by a divine covenant Num. 3, 6, 1 Sam. 2, 27 28, who had a knowledge of the law and its interpretation Ez. 44, 15-31 ; Mal. 2, 7 ; Hagg. 1,12 14; Jbk. 18, 18 &c. The priests were also designated according to their office by the expressions I'^i ■'0'l''5a Jo. 1, 9, larjils'rt ''n'lfflM Ez. 45, 4, 'ipaid n^an ri'iaia'a 40, 45," rr^aa a-'n'niBa tl'^lri'bSit Neh! io, 37 or D'^'niM 2 CheoV. 15, 3. As a rule one understands by ^pb a priest of Jehovah Ezb. 9, 7, Neh. 10,1, Ps.78,64; but sometimes the ge- nitive i'' stands with it 1 Sam. 14, 3, or '''^b Lev. 23, 20, 1 Kings 2, 27, or bsb ^rl?^ Gen. 14, 18 (in the mind of the writer). )'nb is also frequently used of heathen priests who were devoted to idolatry m certain places (2 Cheon. 13, 9) e.g.b?a!i '3 2 Che. 23, 17, ■'SM.Si ')iS'i 1 Sam. 5, 5, Iff '3 Gen. 41, '45, l^-iu '3 Ex. 3, 1, bsj nia '3 Am. 7, 10, i^™|!^ ■',55? lKiNGsl3,2, Qin-bN tibb'S 2 Che. 13, 9; also D'^jirtb alone'ZBPH.'l,4, distinct fromd'''l7:3 which appear rather to describe heathen prophets (1 Kings 18, 40); for the Targumic 15313 is a free paraphrase. The Israelite priest appears along with Nias Jee. 8,10; 14, 18; Lament. 2, 20, Tjba 2, 6, By Is. 24, 2, Jee. 23, 34, Hos. 4, 9, yiNJi'^D? Zech. 7, 5, O'^'no Jbb. 34, 19, Ito Neh. 10, 1, lab 2 Kings 10, 19, according as he is associated or put in contrast with a class in society. As to the designations of the different gradations of Jehovah's priests, we have to remark, that the high priest is named binaii l!i3lrt Lev. 21, 10, Josh. 20, 6, 2 Kings 22, 4, )pb Viik'ifi 25, 18, 2 Che. 19, 11, viix'i'n pbn EzE. 7, 5 or lastly n-'iasn liibii Lev. 4, 3 5 16; while he that takes the lowest or second rank is called IrtiiBWrt 1HS). In Arabic and Aramaean the idea is much more widely extended, ^jjolj de- noting a heathen soothsayer, revealer of secrets, administrator, mediator, as- sistant, authorised agent &c., as is given under the stem; in Phenic. ')fl"3 is ap- plied to the Cabiri- priests, comp. He- sych.: Koiijs (Koi^jv) Isgeve Ka^eiQwv o xa&aiQwv q)ovs'a, o1 Si Ko^g; 33 may therefore, perhaps, denote on a Cili- cian coin (A) bia 'jnb; elsewhere the high priest is called l»1 att (Kit. 11, 1) or DSri3 at! (Athen. 4). Derivat. the denominative Pih. IpSi (inf. constr. )'rt^, fut. IrtS';) to perform the office of •\'rys 1 Che. 5, 36 ; to do priestly service Ex. 28, 41 ; 29, 1 ; Ez. 44, 13; to he a priest Hos. 4, 6; 2 Che. 11, 14; figur. to make priestly, i. e. ornamented, much adorned Is. 61, 10, if the passage should not be trans- lated agreeably to the fundamental signification, to prepare, to Wioke. nans (constr. rans, with suf. dn3tl3; pi. niJiis) f. priesthood, the priesfs of- fice Ex.''29,9, Num. 16,10, particulatly that of Jehovah, fully "i^ '3 Josh. 18,7. '3rt n-^'ia Neh. 13, 29 is the law of the priesthood. The pi. in 1 Sam. 2, 36 de- notes the sacerdotal functions. 13 (Targ. def. N13, fem.m^, constr. r^3, m Scripture only the pZ. ^""^3) Aram, f. a window Dan. 6, 11, prop, a hole-, as TiVn frombbn, so 13 from 13 (il3), iden- tical with the organic root in ap_, a)?-'', a)?-5 &c. Ar. ^, s^, Syr. ii" the same. On the passage in Dan. 1. c. "and his windows were open in his upper cham- )D 641 ID ber toward Jerusalem" we have to re- mark, that suppliants in a foreign land turned their face toward the holy city (ToB. 3, 11; comp. 1 Kings 8, 33 35 38 44 48); as in Jerusalem itself the per- son praying turned his face to the temple (Ps. 28, 2). Among the Islamites Jerusalem was likewise their Kibla at first. i3, same as Tib, ia only met with in the compound iS"'N (which see), 2 Kings 6, 13 K'ri. 213 (not used; i. e. ^^) intr. to shine, to glitter, to appear, Ar. Lft~» , in Hebr. only as an organic root in the enlarged and altered stems 3!rtt , atlS , asT , at-N, r T ' r T ' I" T ' r T ' aiB"^, IT , n -IT (comp. Sanskr. subh, Pers. r t' it' _ IT T ^ ^ ' hhiib, to shine, glitter), the i-sound being interchanged with sibilants (see p. 409). Deriv. out of the reduplicated root, 3313 a star, considered in the first instance as a light-giving, shining body. Accord- ing to this assumption, the organic root as would be the same as an (ainp.353), in-SN, Syr. -=i», where thfe fundamental signification is to glow, bum, then to enlighten. According to others the fun- damental signification of this verb is either to be round, dise-formed, ball- shaped, Ar. \_aJ , and Ethiopic the same, Syr. J-aas glomus, Ar. iu5 coil, and therefore the noun asis derived from it would be named from its disc-form; or to be pointed, i. e. of many rays, put along with aN3. But the etymology first given is the most probable. Hh. (redupl.) asas to shine strongly, to glitter or appear in a strong light; deriv. asis. IT D13 n. p. of a people and country who hired troops to the Egyptians, and therefore shared Egypt's fate Ez. 30, 5. As Kub is mentioned here along with atS and Tib (which see) as well as a'nS (which see), it is to be looked for either in the great territory of north Africa, where -Puth and Lud are also found, belong- ing to the Libyan race (comp. Cohd a Mauritanian city, in Itin. Anton, p. 18); or Nubia is meant, which belonged to ij5i3 in old times, whether we read with the Arab, version ai: , or translate it by aa3, like nbl3> from Db5>, II ^ r T ' IT i-T ' but once in the middle of a clause yai3 Ez. 27, 10; pi. D-'Sai3) m. a helmet, of the warrior, coupled with IJU Ez. 27, 10 and 38, 5, na'-i 2 Chr. 26, 14, and yi-^q Jer. 46, 4, so called from its round, pro- jecting form; while the German Helm is derived from helen = celare (to con- ceal, protect). The double form and ac- centuation of the word is founded in its traditional, fluctuating pronunciation. See 3>aiP. IT ' 113 (not used) tr. to pierce, into a thing; to wound, by a pointed thing; metaphor, to injure, to corrupt, to hurt; comp. Sanskr. kad, kath, dolere, kad fin- dere. Conseq. the org. root 13 exists also in 1.5 I., lip. &c. Deriv. T'S, while -jiTB is to be derived perhaps from T13 II. m3 (Kal not used) tr. to pierce into, to burn into, the skin; to scratch into. Deriv. ■'3(=^,1S), i-,p,is, tiiM; yet "'3 may also be derived from a stem !13 = rtl3. — The stem is found in the Syr. las, Ar. (Cji (to bore or to pierce mta a thing, to bum into, figur. to taunt, to chide), Greek xairo, xavco, Koptic x°^ (flame); but the ground-forni of this or- ganic root h^s perhaps nothing in com- mon with 5»p^ belonging to tlie I'edupli- cated form i'p.Sji_. Nif. rtl33 {fut. rTi3;|) to he burned Is. 43, 2; Prov. 6, 28!'' 113 (not used) Arani.tr. to hollow out, to deepen, identical with 3)5. in manj stems; deriv. 13. 41 riD 642 !?D ni2 (not used) intr. to be strong, firm, powerful, whence n3 1, allied in its or- ganic root ns to that in US"'', and also remotely cognate to fl-3n ; comp. Arab. li/Lsk (to be firm), /^-'i, /^-?. (*" ^® firm, enduring), with many others. But the idea of strength does not appear to be original; rather does the primary one seem to be, to be marrowy, juicy, fresh; and then borrowed from the in- vigorating juices of life, to be strong, by which primitive meaning the noun nip 2 is explained; comp. Talm. ni3 juice, moisture, Sanskr. qak, Greek Ktx-vg, xijx- vg, German guik, Engl, quick. The as- sumption of a stem MS (tins) for trz is already contradicted by the Talm. n''Si, the full orthography )ii3, and the Arabic forms aLa. and ^iS'. The assumption of a, stem ni3 and ^S'to be strong, firm, is unnecessary, because it may be only an enlargement of n3. ni3 as a noun see H3. - 1 - 1 ITJ^IS (from a masc. "'13) f. a burning, brand Ex. 21, 25 ; prop, abstr., the burn- ing in. Targ. !lNJ3. 31313 (originating from a3S3, kab being = kav, kau, k6, like netaia from 'aaU; consir. 5313; ;?Z. D-iasisi, constr. ■'jS^'iS, with suff. tl!li53i3)'ni. 1. a star. The stars are named with the sun and moon Gen. 37, 9, Ps. 8, 4, Jee. 31, 35, as luminous bodies Jo. 2, 10, without number Gen. 15, 5, Ex. 32, 13, which have their courses Judges 5, 20, above which God is enthroned Is. 14, 13, out of which astrologers give certain in- dications of fate Is. 47, 13, whose light God alone is able to suppress Job 9, 7, Ez. 32, 7; Is. 13, 10 which may also be taken figuratively. a-'|i3i3-)ia Ob. 4 be- tween the stars, i. e. in heaven. Phenic. 533 the same, metaphor, the pupil, album oculi (Eryc. 4). — The stars were con- sidered animate heavenly beings (fooa) or angels Job 25, 5, hence 2. spec, the name of a deity Am. 5, 26, either Lucifer (Jerome), or Saturn, to whom the seventh day of the week was sacred. — 3. Fig. A prince Num. 24, 17, as in Arabic and Ethiopie. bis see b3. ?13 (3 p. perf. b3) tr. 1. to keep or hold together, of misers (Saadia); as ynp in later Hebrew with its opposite ITS. Deriv. '^'b^'s, "'Vs. — 2. to measure, i-T r • ' I-" ^ ' to measure off, to weigh, particularly dry goods Is. 40, 12 (where the LXX alone translate b3 all) ; which signific. the verb also has in Syr. (Vo to measure, V-^ a measure), in Targumic (b3 the same, for the Hebr. 1?3, hence Nb^SH a mea- sure), and Arabic (JLS the same, hence the nouns J«a5\ JutCo). If we compare the organic roots in bbv b3-n, Aram, bfis, bs-S, which are identical with our P3, we perceive that the idea "to measure" is merely secondary; and that the primary mean- ing must- be to be much-embracing, to contain, to hold in, retinere (of the avari- cious, hence ''b''3, "'bs), to receive (deriv. b'^3tl), to hold out, to be strong (comp. bsbs). On the whole then it is con- nected with Nb3, Mb 3 I., out of which T_ . J IT T ' ^ (T T ' the idea of measuring arose, especially in the sense to hold, to contain, as we say "it measures" i. e. contains so much. Pih. (redupl.) bsbS) (part. bsbSM, inf. constr. b3b3, fut. bsbb"') 1. to receive, to hold, a thing, enclosing it altogether, hence figur. 1 Ejnqs 8, 27 , behold, the heaven and the heaven of heavens contain thee not (God); 2 Chr. 2, 5; 6, 18. — 2. to bear, to hold out, nbtlM (disease) Prov. 18, 14; the office of prophesying imposed Jer. 20, 9 ; the judicial day of the Lord Mai. 3, 2. — 3. to maintain, to protect Ps. 55, 23. — 4. to measure, to weigh, Di'ia'i Ps. 112, 5, i. e. to speak in cautious and measured terms. — 5. to nourish, to sustain, to provide with nutri- ment, with accus. of the person Gen. 45, . 11; 50,21; 2Sam.19,33; 1 Kings 4,7; sometimes also with the accus. of the thing besides Gen. 47, 12; 1 Kings 18, 4 ; comp. Aram. ISD, i-aa? to hold, bear, . nourish. DD 643 jFVA..(redupl.)b3b3pass. to he nourish- ed, sustained 1 Kings 20, 27. Jlif. b''3ri {infinit. constr. b'^Sfl, fut. b-'S;, with suff. 13b;Dp 1. usually to hold, to contain, with a measure ad- duced 1 Kings 7, 26 38. But as in 2 Chr. 4, 5 biDj at the close would be ^uite otiose, the idea of holding, con- taining being already in piTHM, and as besides in 1 Kings 1. c. bia'' as the 3 pars, imperf. (where one expects the part.) would be partly otiose, partly in- correct, it is better to take b''3"' as a noun = rrna, like the Aram. bi3, Nbisa, / IT • ' • r ' IT • : ' blM, P-*^ &c., and accordingly we ought to translate 1 Kings 7, 26, two thousand baths in measure; 7, 38, forty baths in measure; 2 Chr. 4, 5, containing three thousand baths in measure. The usual meaning, however, occurs in 2 Chr. 7, 7 it could not hold; Ez. 23, 32 which makes much or multiplies (tia'ia is to be read here for iia^T?) constr. 331, in the proper name IT'bS''. " : ' ■'^ -r IT : IT : 013 (not used) tr. to bring together, to heap up, to heap together, to collect, in its fundamental signific. being identical with t36» (DMN), Da, Dy, At. i^, j;i^, and the organic root in dS'N; comp. Sanskr.yam, gam, Greek yafi-Eiv, ya/i-^Q., Lat. gem-inus &e. Ar. «jo^yheap, of com, |»^ troop. Deriv. flM''?. THIS (after the form asw) m. prop, lock, hence buckle, bracelet, a kind of ornament Ex. 35, 22, Num. 31, 50, con- seq. from TMS = DM3 to conceal, to close ; in Arab, a sort of jewel, round like a ball. P |13 (i. e. Ijs; in Kal only ^art. m. act. 1,5. a noun, adj. and particle; part. pass. 1<13, only as a proper name; fut. [accord- ing to Jewish interpreters] l^D"-, with s«/. >i53.lDi Job 31, 15, for which' the text has 121131 or ISSID^) 1. intr. same as 13 (l,=?) P'^op- *" stand, to stand upright, to stand firm, therefore to be, to exist, like the Arab. ^IS' to be, to exist, to happen, Ethiop. to have happened, Syr. ^ , Phe- nic. IS) {)Mi) the same, where the perf. ']3 (Mass. 4. 6. 8. 10. 11), and fut. 1p; (ibid^ 3. 7 &c.) appear in the signif. to be, and fut. apoc. -]3i (Plant. Poen. 1, 12) in the meaning to happen, to come to pass. The org. root is conseq. identical with Dp and 133. — 2. tr. to prepare, to create, Job 31, 15, according to Jewish interpreters = 1313. Deriv. 113a, r:3i3a, nsisn 1, ni33n Ez. 43, 10;' 1133 = )'\m Job'iS, 12, the proper name rt33M. Nif. 1133 (3 p. fern. M3i33', 3 p. pi. 1335 ; paH. m. 1133, pi. Di333, fern. ^3133; imp. •jiSSl; fut. ']i3';) 1. to stand firm, of a base, therefore part. 1133 basis, centre, highest point, of the day, i. e. noon Prot. 4, 18 (comp. Greek ara&sQov '^ftuQ, cna- &SQa iisaijin^qia, to ata&sqov trig f'^' arjfi^Qiag, Arab. ^-gJaJf ivjLs); '" *« ««* up, raised up, to be arched, of the DillB Ez. 16, 7 (LXX, Syr.); to be raised on high, of the temple-mountain Is. 2, 2, Mic. 4, 1 (in a spiritual sense); to be founded Judges 16, 26; to be firm, to be established, nisbtt 1 Kings 2, 12, N&3 2, 45, bin Ps.'93, 1; 1133 with a Job ' I" ". r» • 15, 23 or b 18, 12 to stand firm on or at; to exist, of n'lj Ps. 89, 38; to con- tinue, to remain, to endure Job 21, 8; Prov. 12, 3 ; to abide Prov. 16,3; 20, 18 ; and so in the most various applications. — 2. in a moral sense, to be firm, stead- fast, enduring, of tTi'n Ps. 51, 12, ib 78, 37; to be faithful, full of trust , of 3b 57,8; to be determinate, fijcedG^Tiii (Herod. 3,8) by the Greeks j the Nijid (Phenician P:n, TavnU, Tn- vaizdi) of the Phenicians and Egyptians. The cake is the Egyptian confection Neideh (de Sacy, Cluest. Ar. II. p. 25 seq.), offered as a nnr: to tlie goddess, and coupled with "O: . The LXX rotain the word t^mnKova.;, , avmvn^), wbicli the Etym. Magn. and Suidas explain hread mixed with oil; TheoJoret a cake season- ed with pine-nuts, raisins; and Jerome has placentas. D"3 (not used), 03, tr. to conceal, to receive, to keep, of something deepened out, connected with the idea of bringing together, collecting into a thing-, identi- cal in its organic root 03 partly with n3 (belonging to nis:), partly with that in D?"3 •, comp. Syr. w».aa to collect (Peshito on Prov. 11, 29), Arab. 00^ to fill; and j*.!^ appears to have had the meaning to receive, since its derivative ijtiM (purse) is used; also (jj^o a cup. 03 is not connected with 053 (T3a), Aram. 125:3, or with po &c.; neither is it con- nected with Ons (which see). Deriv. 013 and 0''3. I r Cls (with suf. ■'013, pi. nioi3) fern. prop, receiving, concealing, gathering into itself, hence 1. a cup, a wine-vessel Gen. 40, 11 13 21, particularly the circling social cup. To drink out of one's cup 2 Sam. 12,3, is to live in in- timate association with one; the over- flowing of it is expressed by mi; to make eyes in the cup, of wine Prov. 23, 31, i. e. to form pearls. — 2. a por- tion, distributed in the cup, a part contained in it; fully 013 n;7? (Ps. 11, 6); then lot, portion, fate, a natural figure of fioinu. The destiny and al- lotments of God, such as salvation Ps, 116, 13, divine wrath Is. 51, 17, consola- tion Jer. 16, 7 &c. are represented as poured out in a cup to men. God reaches out to men the wrath-cup Is. 51, 22, Hab. 2, 16, Ez. 23, 31 ; and thera r]D 646 lyD arise as consequences of the drinking, what happens in the case of strong drinks, riz. intoxication and reeling, vomiting and fainting Jeb. 25,16 27; Ez. 23, 33. Conseq. Zoi, fate, generally Ps. 11,6; 16, 5; cogn. in sense withpbn, bni-l, i^^QSj Isan. — 3. craw, pouch (which is capable of receiving a thing into it), hence the pelican, so called from its pouch, like truo from trua, an unclean bird living among ruins Lev. 11,17; Dect. 14, 16 ; Ps. 102, 7 ; comp. Aram. Ni'jiDD-ia a part of the entrails (Midrash), in the Talm. niDiSrt rr'a, in the Mishna 0^3 chuck- hole. Aram. NrnS, iSTriS, NOis, ND3, Syr. lias. In Ar. ^j^^l^ cup, ^^ipouch, are from the same stem; but the Pers. \jj is commonly used for cup. ni3 (not used), see i\'z. "113 I. (not used) trans. 1. to lore, pierce, dig through, in its organic root n3 equivalent to !l-13 I., ^3"N, 'IN? (?), "1)5 , '^lp."5i ^'P~'^i -A.rab. ^o' to hollow out, to deepen, a vessel; like the cognate root in *isp , belonging to HIS)?. Another jD means to twist around, to wind about, to bind. — 2. Figurat. to dig out, i. e. to derive origin from, to descend from-; Arab, the same, designated as dialectic, whence ,»5 character, i. e. what is im- pressed. Deriv. tTii37:, tTiiS73 1, ^3 / 1- /• IT : ' IT : ' I (the name of a measure), and also ac- cording to some 13 belonging to ■''13, and rn373. IT" : Pih. 'n^;i3 (not used, from 1?3, like 13J|,)5 from D^)?) to hollow out, to deepen, a vessel or cup; deriv. Ti^iS, 1'3. There may have been also a Pihel-form 1^3. Aram.'n^jS, iaa, hence Syr. 1?aa (kawro) basket, modem Hebrew 0113 bees-skeo, Ar. «^and <(jXjo a basket-shaped cam- el's saddle. "^^^ H. (not used) intr. to glow, to hum, of an oven or hearth, for cooking food or melting metals, conseq. cognate in sense with 1M to IWn, 12:53 U. to 11IJ53; Syr. H tte same, whence Ethpa. ioflzf to be heated, to glow; Arab. JS the same, whence ^•J , -aj (a furnace, hearth). The organic root 13 is accord- ingly identical with that in la IV. (to glow with heat, to cook, to seethe), li' III. (which see), Arab. vLcjin, tl-in, Arab. ^1^ , -i , Syr, H' ; and perhaps also with that in in-a I., 13-3 11., ip-a H. i- T ' r T ' 'r T On the nouns 133, !i1313, 13, see the IT • ' ITT : • ' r ' words themselves. Derivat. the nouns 1:i3, 'y'S, 113 in liBy-liS), and the proper name tl1353. IT" ! 1^3 (after the form nil, a^a, from 11311.) m. T^ro-p. smelting, hence a furnace, crucible, to purify metals from the dross, either gold Peov. 17, 3, parallel SllSa; 27, 21; or silver Ez. 22, 18 20 22; figur. bTian 113 Deut. 4, 20, 1 Kings 8, 51, Jek. 11,4 furnace of iron, i. e. in which iron is melted, for which the greatest heat is necessary, and therefore a figure of fearful slavery and oppression, which ''VS '3 Is. 48, 10 also means. Arab., Syr., Ethiop. the same. Comp. M1373 as a proper name. lis (not used) TO. 1. same as 113 furnace, only in the proper name "113 ^iljy. — 2. same as lb (a measure), which see. naJjj-liS (smoking furnace, comp. ■jTIJy l^sn Gen. 15, 17 and the proper name nsis) n. p. of a city on the border of Judah and Simeon 1 Sam. 30, 30, probably named from a smelt- ing place there. Instead of it is also used the abridged form 'JIBS Josh. 15, 42 ; 19, 7 ; 1 Chk. 4, 32 ; 6, 44.' The Vulg. and Syr. incorrectly read 113. aj^3 (contracted from ©SB, 12513, from 12333 II., like pii23 from pi 125, hence pi. ia"')51l^; black, dark-coloured, as the pro- per name Dtl) 1. n. p. of the oldest son of Dn, whose brothers were Q"'15£72 and IT ' • r : ■ ai3 Gen. 10, 6 ; and who, according to the ethnographical table, was the head of the great Ethiopian race that dwelt ^syD 647 mnD farthest towards the south in north Africa. Scripture and the classics also understand by the name the dark -co- loured people who lived in southern India {Ctesias, Ind. 9. p. 176 ed. Lion; Arrian, Ind. 6, 9), in upper Egypt (Sync. I. p. 286), in southern Arabia (2 Che. 21, 16) and elsewhere. — 2. (like DH 2. southern land) n. p. f. (Ps. 68, 32),"by which are understood a) Meroe often mentioned along with Ethiopia (from the Ethiop. ^Ti = Hebr. mi the rich in ITT water, conseq. = nil?;), enclosed by the two rivers (Dnna),' the Astapus (Nile of the moderns) and Astaboras (Atbar; see Plin. 5, 10; Diod. 1, 37), Zeph. 3, 10; b) Ethiopia proper, i.e. Abyssinia, which the Arabs call (_;***=>• (which also signifies southland only, and is not connected with jJXa^ "to collect"), mentioned with D-IS'a, NSO Is. 11, 11, • I- : • ' IT : ^ ' and with upper Egypt 43, 3; 45, 14; c) the land south of Ethiopia 18, 1, ad- duced with ais and Tib (which see) Jbr. 46, 9; d) the land of the Cossaeans or Cussaeans in Susiana and partly in Me- dia Gen. 2, 13, which is also designated by classical writers as a seat of Ethio- pians; e) the land east of Babylonia, called by the ancients Kvaai'n x'^8"^' by the later Hebrews ffl=)3 yiN. — 3. n. p. m. of a fienjamite Ps, 7, 1. ■'U3^3 I. (pi. Q-^m'S or D'l'TDlS, from til3) Gent, m., rip^S f. an Ethiopian man or woman, i. e. he or she of Cush, hence a) a real, dark- coloured Ethiopian, a moor, Jbr. 13, 23; b) one who is em- ployed as the guardian of a harem 38, 7 10 12; 39, 16 (comp. Terent. Eun. 1, 2, 85), who assumed the name '^b^i-nas, if the name be not Hebraised from an Ethiopie one, like that of the Ethiopian niT^ 2 Che. 14, 8, who invaded Judah and was prop, named OsortAoK, the second Egyptian king of the 22'' dynasty, fol- lowing Shishak; c) an Ethiopian and Libyan in foreign service Dan. 11, 43; d) a Philistine and Ai'amaean Am. 9, 7; e) a Midianite Num. 12, 1. ' ''0513 n. {black) n. p. m. Zeph. 1, 1. I •JID'S (a collateral form of TB13) w. p. f. Ethiopia Hab. 3, 7, a designation of Midian, which stretched as far as Sinai (Ex. 3, 1); as Moses's wife is called a Midianitess rT'iais. r C";ryuJ-l ■,U:^2 n. p. of a Mesopota- mian king, Judges 3, 8 10. The Targ., Pesh., Ar. and ancient interpreters have explained the name Cushan of twofold wickedness, i. e. the horrible; more cor- rectly, perhaps, Q^nyiai may be ex- plained from the Ar. j^julwCsJI (.o) i. e. president of two governments (Abulf. Ann. II. p. 100), out of which it may be Hebraised. Josephus writes Xovaaq- &og; the LXX XovaccQaaifalu. niffliS (pi. niim- only in later He- , IT 1 1 ^■'^ IT •' brew out of Aramaean, from the stem iTlis) f. prosperity, prosperous state, only in the pi. Ps. 68, 7, i. e. freedom. m3 (not used) tr. same as D13 to conceal, to keep, of goods, treasures, cog- nate in sense IES, laU; deriv. part. m. Nif ni3D (which see), after the form Tibs as a noun, the kept, concealed, treasure, like p'aUTi, ^ipK. See ni33. ni3 and nni3 n. p. of an Assyrian district, whence Shalmaneser brought co- lonists into depopulated Samaria 2 Kings 17, 24 30. A locality and river Kuta (j-5tJ, j-J»5) are mentioned by Arabian geographers in the district of Kocha (Istachri p. 54; Kasvin, Cosmogr. II. p. 301), which is termed Kushdn in Masudi, because an Ethiopian settlement was there. Besides, a territory at the Persian gulf, in Susiana, bears the name Kuta, according to which fact the Cutheans would be identical with the Cossaeans, and the Persian province Jutiya in the Darius-inscription at Behistfln (see Ben- fey, die pers. Keilinschriften p. 18. 32) should be identified with it; especially as this country is now called Khusistan. On account of the Samaritan colonists having come from Cuta, the Samaritans are called Xov&aloi by Josephus; in the Talmud DTii), only in Pihel, and in Aram, nearly altogether in Pael, has for its fundamental signi- fication to spin, to knot; so th^t the or- ganic root is 3t"3, identical with that in 3il5"n, a¥"?i 11- (which see). 3T3 (after the form bnp, 'I3iu, DON; (T T ^ IT 'T ' IT T ' IT T ' pl. 0"'3;3, with suf. tJlrt'^STS!) m. 1. ab- stract: a lie, falsehood, deception, nothing- ness. Is. 28, 15, like ^-pj^ (Ps. 33, 17); a"'aT3 tT'Eln to breathe out lies, i. e. to r T : - !■ ■■ ' speak lies Pbov.6,19; 14, 5; 19, 5, else- where '3 la'i Dan. 11, 27, '3 ^'Si Ps. 5, 7; falsity, hence '3 ll5"'N PROV.'lb, 22 a deceiver} '3 dD]5. a false oracle Ez. 13, 6; 21, 34; d'-'STBDnb Prov. 23, 3 dia- appointing bread, i. e. whose enjoyment is only apparently agreeable. — 2. con- crete: any deluding thing, e. g. of idols Am. 2, 5; Ps. 40, 5. 3Tb see 3T3 and N3T3. 3^b (not i;sed) m. a lie, deception only in the proper name ''3T3. N^Ti) (drying up of water) n. p. of a place in the plain of Judah 1 Che. 4, 22, otherwise called in.? (Gen. 38, 5), also a"'T3N (which see). The well-known Jewish hero under Hadrian may have been named from this place jSaT3"13j; changed iijto i«33i3 13, because he was the pretended Messiah. ■'STS (abridged from rriaTB, as the !• ; T I" ': T cod. Samar. actually has it, and this from 3t'3 ; deception) n. p. f. Num. 25, 15, !2^T3 {lying stream, false brook, comp. 3T3N bns, opposite •\r\''» bm) re. p. of a locality in Judah Gen. 38, 5, elsewhere named 3-'t3N Josh. 15, 44; Mio. 1, 14 (where there is an allusion to the name), and iS3Tb 1 Che. 4, 22. IT-l ' "1T3 (not used) prop, trans, to break in, to press in, to something, Ar. fMiJ and -M*S to injure, cognate in sense with V^? (=Vi?'7) and yns; but only figur. and intrans. to be bold, valiant, spirited, audacious; in a bad sense, to be wild', hard, barbarous, destructive, of men and things. Derivat. 'nT3is, •'"iiBN, ni="it3N. c IT : - ' IT!-' I - : : - — The organic root ir"Z is also found in IK; Syr. i\^ the same, hence Ih-V^ valiant. TO (Dan. 11, 6 nisi; with suf. ""nB, QMS; from nl3) m. 1. strength, power, of vital strength Ps. 22,16; 31,11; 38, 11, arising from the juice and marrow of life; but also of war-like, heroic force- Judges 16, 5, Is. 63, 2, manly strength; and in the latter sense taken for the first-born Gen. 49, 3, like the strength i. e. the fruit of the earth Gen. 4, 12; also of the strength of animals Job 40, 16; Dan. 8, 7; fig. of the might of God Jee. 10, 12, Job 26, 12, which is also called once 3b nb i. e. strength of understanding, the highest understanding Job 36, 5. Besides, exertion, striving ^ Gen. 31, 6 ; substance, possessions, wealth,, riches Job 6, 22; 36, 19; Prov. 5, 10 v violence Eccles. 4, 1; in phrases abil-. ity, power to do 1 Sam. 28, 20; 30, 4; -rD 649 wn:i Is. 50, 2. nb-tib Job 26, 2 weakness. In nip V'HN Job 9, 4, nip N^!!b 37,23, 1133 ffs Ps. 103,20 '3 there is merely a closer defining of nouns or adjectives. — 2. the slimy, hence a sort of lizard Lev. 11,30; according to the LXX and Jerome the chameleon; according to the Ar. a kind of land-crocodile, which appears to be only a conjecture. iry3 (Kal not used) tr. prop, to re- move, to separate, to divide, to sunder, to put aside; therefore to conceal, to cover, tp hide, fig. to deny, to deceive, to lie, or to corrupt, to destroy, to cause to disap- pear. — With the stem nn3 are iden- tical the Ar. PtXi*- (to divide, to sunder, to cover, to deceive), i\i (to separate, disjoin), lX.s \j >. (to deny), Ethiop. in3 kachcda (to deny); whence one sees that the organic root is nn"3, with which is to be compared the Ar. i>L5 (to hinder); eomp. also the Greek xaS-, xd^-ofiai. Nif. insJ {part. f. nnns:, pi. ni'inoa ; fut. T_3") pass. 1. to be concealed, hid- den, with y2 of the person 2 Sam. 18, 13; Pa. 69, 6; 139,15; to be unknown, with a negative = y'l"' Hos. 5, 3. — 2. to be destroyed, cut off, of men, as S"!? Job 22, 20, n'^na?: 4, 7, or animals Zbch. 11, 9 16; to be demolished, of Qiiy Job 15, 28. Pih. ins (3 p. ;jZ. inrtSi , paus. Iipa ; fut. ins';) 1. to hide, conceal, to withhold, la'i, with ^M of the person 1 Sam. 3, 18; Jbk. 38,14: with the omission of lai Josh. ' ' IT r 7, 19, or with "'3 in the apodosis Gen. 47, 18. — 2. to deny, Job 15, 18 and they deny not what is from their fathers, i. e. they proclaim aloud what has been handed down, as the object is to be supplied here; elsewhere the accus. of the object is put Ps. 40, 11; Job 6, 10; 27, 11 that which is with the Almighty will I not deny. Hif. T'nsrr {fut. T'n?!) 1. to destroy, to kill, Zech. 11, 8; Psalm 83, 5; with T'jaHJri 1 Kings 13, 34. — 2. to keep hack, itab nnn Job 20, 12. ''IT - r TWO assumed to nb (see ni3), be- r- T -I * - 1 cause in Syr. vj»a, >-»a| appears in the sense of «o6Zou); and that ideacoincides or coexists with strength. But -•»= is there merely a collateral form of ns, agreeably to the interchange of 3 and B. ?Ty2 (2 f. nbn3) tr. to paint, the eyes (a^i''») Ez.23,40, prop, to make dark or black, the eye-brows, in order to heighten the expression of the look; cognate in sense n';:"'? 'Tjisa fi"'i»!i 2 Kings 9, 30; Jer. 4, 30; Ar. J^ (from which dif- ferent conjugation -forms and noun-de- rivatives come), Aram, bns, V^a the same, Maltese kahhal, to cover a wall with cement; Ethiop. as in Arabic. The intr. signif. of the stem is to be black, dark-coloured, Ar. J-s. (nigris palpebris fuit), still preserved in the transposed forms bsn (which see), Ar. JX&. , liU^. The organic root is bn-3, b3-n, which lies also in M-bn. IT T tiTlS (Kal rarely) intr. 1. to decrease, to lessen, to fail, igisn «5n3 ■'Itb:? Ps. 109, 24 my flesh decreases in fatness, i. e. becomes lean. Hence izSnS 1. — 2. (not used) to lie, prop, to lessen the truth ; to dissemble, to deceive (see Pihel). Deriv. ian3 2. Nif. tins? {fut. ffln3';) prop, to lessen oneself, to shew oneself small, i. e. to sub- mit oneself Deut. 33, 29 ; comp. Hithp. Pih. On3 {inf. constr. an3, fut. ISp?^, before Makkeph TOn?^) 1. a stronger ex- pression of Kal: to become very lean, to de- cline much, to lessen much, to cease, Hab. 3, 17 the growth (intott, comp. rtia» i'Hq) of the olive ceases, therefore parallel to "the intransitive niDn-Nb, bia^ y». Hos. 9, 2 and new wine shall fail in it, i. e. in the vat; Wa refers here to ajj^„, which is fern, along with Tna. — 2. to deny, the truth Gen.18,15 ; to lie, coupled with 335 Josh. 7, 11, Ijs.ia' Lev. 19, 11, Wz» Hos. 4, 2; to renounce or deny, God p'rov.30,9. With a of the person Josh. 24, 27, Is. 59, 13,' Jer. 5, 12 i. e. not wholly to deny, or to disbelieve entirely in his existence, but to diminish his; wn 650 "•D personality, as it were, to begin to deny, i. e. to hold the Deity to be really less than he is. This is clear from Lev. 5, 21 : and he denies to (a) his neighbour a (a) possession entrusted to him, where per- son and thing are both construed with a in order to denote a part in which the diminution or denial is. With b of the person prop, to lie to one 1 Kings 13, 18, Job 31, 28, i. e. to pretend, to deceive. — 3. to feign, with b of the person Ps. 18, 45; 66, 3; 81, 16, i. e. to shew submission, conseq. identical with Nif. and Hithp. merely in sense. Deriv. Hithp. la'nsnrt {fut. iiinsn';) to submit oneself 2 Sam. 22, 45 , for which Nif. is used elsewhere. The development of the idea here given being indisputable, the primitive conception belonging to the meaning to lessen, to decrease, to disappear is prop. , to be separated, cut off. The organic root is 125n"3, which lies also in the Ar. (jjuL&. (to lie), (jiL^, (jwLs (to lessen). Otherwise the Ar. Ja^U "defecit" is used to express the same idea. Bin? (with SM/.''ian3; ;jZ.ni«5n3, with sa;f.Dfl''TBn3) m. 1. leanness, i. e. prolong- ed sickness Job 16,8, as iti-inS) in Aram. — 2. a denial, of God Hos. 10, 13, de- ceit, a lie, i. e. idolatry 12, 1, for which the pi. also occurs 7, 3 ; /lattery i. e. faith- lessness Nah. 3, 1; with MbN Ps. 59, 13. ' ITT 1 ainS (for l»n3; only pi. a-^ianS) adj. m. lying, false, to God Is. 30, 9. In the Sam. cod. in Gen. 3, 2 we have fflnS)M for fflnsin, which is either a mistake in ortho- graphy, or the effect of a dogmatic view. "'31. (probably contracted from "^yz, as ■''p from ii'i; otherwise it might be derived from nj3 = ni3) m. a prick, mark, like arlyfia, stigma; a brand. Is. 3, 24 a brand instead of beauty, i. e. scratch- ings in the face from pain and mourn- ing (Jer. 16, 6; Cyrop. 3, 1, 13). Ar. ^g5 the same. Comp. the Talm. saying formed according to it (Sabb. 62'') ■'Bibn IT T ; IT : ^3 H. (a pronominal root, with which 3 is closely connected) conj. relat. in the widest sense, whose meanings are un- folded in the following order: 1. usually a relative particle, that, quod, on, to de- note the relation of the preceding to the following clause, a) in indirect speech] after the verbs fiN'i Gen. 1, 10, Job 2, 13, ynizj Gen. 14,'Y4; 43, 15, S>T Gen. 20, e', i Sam. 14, 3, ^^p Gen'.'3, 11, 1MN 21,7, pHNfi Ex. 4,' 3, 13T Ps. 78, 35,' Job 7, 7, nia' 39, 15, na'to Job 31, 25, Ps. 58, 11, tan: Gen. 6, 7'&c., where the apodosis with "'B is conceived of as a sort of object in the accusative. When a double apodosis follows, "'3 is repeated^ so that both are introduced by "'SI ... ''3, Gen. 3, 6; 29, 12; Ex. 3, 11. 'Ifter a protasis to which no accusat. of the ob- ject is to be supplied, e. g. in '''3 aita it is good that 2 Sam. 18, 3, Lament. 3, 27,' the apodosis is to be supposed in the no- minative, in which case "iS is sometimes omitted Gen. 2, 18. b) in direct speech (arising like oti out of the proper use in indirect discourse, Syr. ', and not to, be translated as a demonstr. =!i3 it a, sic), where we do not at all expect that in English, and therefore '^'3 may be' omitted in translating, e. g. in quoting a direct expression. Gen. 29, 32 she said,, ("'B) God has seen my affliction, 29, 33, Ex. 3, 12, Josh. 2, 24, IKings 11, 22, in which case also ''3 is occasionally omitted Ex. 4, 23; after formulas of swearing, e. g. after bs "'p Job 27, 2, ■'IN '•n Is.49,- 18, £3''v''b8itfi' ■'p 2 Sam. 2, 27, ^''''^n 1 Sam, 20,3,ti-'D'i"iV3i a-'n'bjs Twv na 14,44,. ' ' 1 I- I ; r v: iv-:i- I ' ' where one has to supply a verb to swear, to a^er; or after »aiB3 Gen. 22, 16, where the discourse is direct only in appear- ance, because of the elliptical manner of speaking, c) as a wider introduction to direct discourse even at the begin-: ning of new sections Is. 8, 23; 15, 1; Job 28, 1 ; arising from its usage after ^HN , and not to be translated, d) after particles (adverbs, prepositions, inter- jections), which are conceived of as in- cluding a whole proposition in them- selves, e. g. after DJMN Job 12, 2, Mum ' O IT : T T T f. . ••s 651 ^D Ps. 128, 4, ifibri. 1 Sahi. 10, 1, CjN 1 Sam. 21, 6, Hab. 2, 5, Gen. 3, 1, whether r|N is to be considered an exclamation, a question, or an emphatic confirmation; after DEN Amos 9, 8, •\s^_ Num. 11, 20, 1 Kings 13, 21; after the interroga- tive H in ''3^ , whether there be a mere question 2 Sam. 9, 1, Job 6, 22, or whe- ther an affirmative answer be expected Gen. 27,36; and so after other particles, where ''3 may sometimes remain untrans- lated, or if beginning an apodosis may be sometimes rendered that. See SpS, iy, 3y nrn, lias &c. In all such cases "'3 is r -r' IV -: r a vocable of relation , whether a direct or indirect protasis exist; whether we have to suppose the protasis under the preceding noun or under the particle; or finally whether we must entirely supply the protasis, of whose apodosis is is the commencement. It is always a conjunct, relat. connecting clauses and propositions. — 2. a relative particle of time, if time past be spoken of, when, since, as; when the present and future are referred to, when; and where an abiding past is spoken of, as often as, conseq. a) when, quum, as long as, dum, Hos. 11, 1 (where the verb to be should be supplied); Ps. 32, 3 when [kept silence, i.e. did not confess guilt; Judges 2, 18 a7id when God appointed for them judges; so also Jer. 44, 19; ;/ Ez. 3, 19 &c.; particularly in the narrative phrase ■'S Tl'i it came to pass when Gen. 6, 1. In this sense ''S stands with the perf. when the past is spoken of. b) when, as soon as, quando, ubi, when the future or present is spoken of, in which case it is mostly coupled with the im- perfect. Gen. 4, 12 when thou tillest the ground; 24, 41; 30, 33; 32, 18, where the imperfect may also stand in the sense of time present Is. 8, 19 ; Ps. 8, 4; Job 22, 2. Seldomer does ""S occu-r in this meaning with a participle, to de- note time present Jer. 44, 19 , which is omitted in Job 39, 24. c) as often as, with a continuing, possibly ever-return- ing time (imperf.), e. g. Judges 21,22 as often as their fathers or their brethren shall come; Is. 16, 12; Jer. 5, 19; as soon as, when a definite time is indicat- ed 1 Sam. 10, 7. In all such cases the conditional idea is often incorporated with the clause of time; but for that very reason ■'Si is quite distinct from the purely conditional DN, as is clearly seen from Ex. 21, 2 3 5'' 14 18 &c. It is but rarely that a coincidence between them is observable, whether the perf. Ex. 22, 25 or the imperfect follows Gen. 46, 33; 2 Kings 4, 29. As a particle of time it also stands d) as the consequence of a preceding proposition, and should be translated so, then, whether one of the conditional particles, e. g. DIS (Job 8, 6; 37, 20), Nb DN (Is. 7, 9), lb (Job 6, 2), ■'bib (Gen. 31, 42 ; 43, 10), ■'bl's (Num. 22, 33), 'huSn (meaning when Eccles. 8, 12), 'I'gN. I?; '(GrBN. 22, 16 17), or a noun ab- solute , stand in the protasis, e. g. Gen. 18, 20 as to the cry &c., so . . . ; Ps. 128, 2. [Here we omit so or then in English, and leave the ■'B untranslated. The Germans put so for it.] — 3. a causal particle, to be rendered a) because, quia, on, when a causal proposition with "''3 precedes, e. g. Gen. 3, 14 because thou hast done this, 3, 17. b) for, nam, jag, where the causal proposition comes after, which is a more frequent case Gen. 2, 3 23; 3, 20; also where the causal clause ap- pears only as an intermediate one Gen. 2, 5. c) When various causes follow one another, we find, where the causal po- sitions stand in close relation to one an- other, "IS ... ""S for . . . and, Lat. nam . . . et, quia . . . et quia Is. 6, 5 ; Ps. 22, 12 ; or also where the causal clauses are but loosely connected Is. 9,3-5; 15, 6 8 9; Job 3, 24 25 ; comp. yuQ . . . yaQ Matth. 6, 32 ; 18, 10 11. But ■'31 . . . ■'S is also used either where a causal clause is subordi- nate to the preceding context Gen. 33, 11, Is. 65, 16, Job 38, 20, or where one is dependent on the preceding; in which case we have sometimes "'B . . . ■'3 nam . . . quia (Gen. 26, 7; 43, 32; 47, 20) , sometimes also ■'31 . . . "'3 1 Kings 18, 27. d) The signification for, nam, is indeed the usual one of ""B, but the causal relation does not come out openly and clearly, and must be looked for, ^3 652 nx ^D either in the preceding context Is. 5, 10, where "'S attaches to nraa vs. 9, likewise I- IT - ' 7, 22 where ■'S refers to vs. 21, and Job 5, 23; or in 'the following Ps.22, 10, where "'B is supposed to be the conse- quence of vs. 12; or in the remote pre- ceding Is. 10, 25, where "iS gives the cause of the admonition in vs. 24. — 4. A mixture of the causal significa- tion with other applications of '''3 takes place, either by means of the consecu- tion of clauses, or by dependence on preceding negations, antitheses, com- parisons &c., a) where opposition also is meant to be expressed by ■'3 along with its causal sense, i. e. where the causal statement is so dependent as to ex- clude the first statement, and here it may be translated by aa) but, sed, German sondern, when a negative (ne, non) precedes, e. g. Gen. 24, 4, where "'3 refers to Nb vs. 3 (instead of ^B is also used Nb-DN vs. 38; 45, 8); sometimes Nb alone forms the protasis 19, 2, or VN 1 Kings 21, 15. Instead of ■'3 in this sense we have also DN "'3 after a I- r negative, also meaning but Gen. 15, 4; 32, 29; Josh. 17, 3 &c., the DN alone re- maining untranslated; vice versa some- times ■'3 alone stands for DN "'3 unless, I- r r ' 1 Sam. 27, 1. bb) ?iay but, nay for, but no (in contrast with the preceding), when an open and clear negation does not precede, but the negative force ap- pears from the position of the protasis in relation to what follows it, e. g. Micah 6, 3 no, for (13) / brought thee; Job 31, 18 but no, minime vero; 2 Sam. 19, 23 nay but. cc) but yes, but indeed, but yet, oii.i.0!. 3«(>, where the antithesis is ex- pressed without a negation Is. 28, 28; Job 23, 10 &c. ; but in all these clauses ■'B may also be taken in another sense, dd) but now, in a comparison, where opposition is introduced by ''3, Job 14, 16 but now thou numberest my steps. ee) although, where the opposition is much weakened, Ps. 49, 11 though he sees, b) where ""B announces the con- sequence of a ground not specially men- tioned, and should be translated for which reason, conseq. prop, quae causa est quod, non est quod, nihil est quod. Gen.. 40, 15 I have done nothing why (i. e. that is a reason for) then/ have put me into the prison, where that might be sub- stituted for why; so also 20, 9; Is. 36, 5; Ps.8,5; Hos.1,6. On 13 bs i3 see In all these meanings, of which several sometimes occur even in one passage Josh. 17, 18, the original one, namely that of a relative conjunction, is stiU perceptible in "'B; and by it the etymo- logical analysis and establishment of the fundamental idea is to be sought. In the first place we look upon ki ("'3), simplified out of kvi, qui, as corre- lative of the demonstrat. ta, ti, i. e. ori- ginally an interrogative, as in the west- ern tongues (comp. Sanskr. kva where? Lat. quis, and also ka in its very diver- sified forms; the Syr. ^-^ is also still an interrogative particle, see Schaaf s. v.); secondly as a relative pronoun used in mutually related clauses, like the Latin qui beside quis, except that it remained impersonal, and has there- fore the quality of a conjunction, Greek 0T(, ore, Lat. quod. Amid the mutual relation in which like is compared to like (for which the Greek is oi?, Lat. quam, Sanskr. jatha and the appen- dage -vat. Germ, wie), "'B is weakened into 3 (which see) ; which latter appears again' in the greatest variety of com- pounds, e. g. 13 (out of Itljs), !i3, !13 &c. The Persian and Zabian ^55, "'1 iyoho) is nothing but a weak form of ""B, 3 being pronounced like qu; comp. guerre and war, Gothic hwas, hwa, German wie. The relation of this pronominal root to the Coptic KJk,, KO), Re ponere, cannot be shewn farther. D{< "'3 (both vocables being fused inta one idea) unites in itself the above-men- tioned peculiarities of ''3 and DN, except that in translating sometimes the one and sometimes the other recedes into the back- ground, and is omitted in English. The significations are divided into 1. those in which both meanings appear, viz. a) but (■^B) if (Bn), but when, unless, where a negative precedes, and either a verb "1^3 653 )VD follows, DN ■'3 being translated by nisi quod, praeterquam quod. Gen. 32, 27, Am. 3, 7, Judges 2, 16; or a noun follows, OS '^3 being translated by non, nihil, nemo Gen. 39, 9; Lev. 21, 2; Jeb. 7, 23. For the negative which falls away, there is sometimes a dependent question with a negative force Is. 42, 19, Mic. 6, 8, where, however, we may also translate only, b) but only, sed. Gen. 15, 4; 32, 29; Josh. 17, 3; Jer. 3, 10; 39, 12 (where the K'ri omits Dn); here too the preceding negation is sometimes omitted, and should perhaps be supplied 1 Sam. 26,10; 2 Sam. 13, 33. — 2. cases where the idea of "'3 prevails so much that that of DN entirely disappears, par- ticularly a) in the signific. of the causal for, nam Job 42, 8, after formulas of swearing and asseverations, for which ■'3 alone stands elsewhere 2 Sam. 15, 21 (the K'ri expunges DN, as in other places in a similar case the AN is expunged by the K'ri e. g. Kuth 3,12; 2 Sam. 13, 33; Jee.39,12); 2Kings5,20; Jer.51, 14; after DSUN Kuth 3, 12, where the IT : T ' ' formula of swearing is seldom omitted, and ON ■'3 is to be translated by yea, certainly Judges 15, 7; 1 Sam. 21, 6; 1 Kings 20, 6. b) in the meaning but Gen. 40, 14; Num. 24, 21. — 3. cases where the "^B goes into the back-ground, and the meaning of DN only is per- ceptible 1 Sam. 25, 34; 2''Sam. 3, 35. T"!! (not used) a stem assumed for the noun T'S, and compared with the Ar. otf (med. Ye) to violate; hence to com- bat, to destroy, to cheat; but from comparison within the language itself 113 should be assumed as the stem (which see). T'3 (from 113) masc. prop, violation, hence destruction, misfortune. Job 21, 20. See ■jil-'S 2. TIT'S (extended from li"!?; constr.pl. ■'•ji'T'3; fromTlSlI.) m. a spark, aflame. Job 41, 11 (Targ., Kimehi), parallel D'^T'sb. The Vulgate, which translates firebrand, did not read "'1183, but took l.i'T'3 = T'bV. YiVi) (out of li^B , from 113 II. in the sense of to pierce) m. 1. a javelin, a spear, borne upon the shoulder 1 Sam. 17, 6 7, to the point of which a flag was some- times fastened Josh. 8, 18, thrown after brandishing Job 39, 23; 41, 21, and common as a weapon among the Baby- lonians and Persians Jer. 6, 23; 50, 42. — 2. same as T'S (from 1-13) destruc- tion, death, only in 'ji'T'3 yiji (threshing- floor of death) n. p. of a place between Jerusalem and Kirjath-jearim 1 Che. 13, 9, for which "jiSJ 'ii stands in 2 Sam. 6,6 (see pM). "111^3 (= Ti'l?) m. circumvallation, siege, storming, of a fortress. Job 15, 24 as a king equipped for storming, i. e.- like an enemy's assault; comp. for the- figure the -jau «JiN3 Peov. 6, 11. The versions have rendered the sense freely. See ^113. I - "j^»3 (from Pih. III. of 113), masc (like the noun "jlB which see) n. p. of a deity, whose image was worshipped and carried about by the Israelites in the wilderness. Am. 5, 26 and Kiyydn,- your god (DiJabS is used here like D"'blbs ,, niKlpia &c. as a sing, for idol, conseq. DD'^nbais only an apposition to ^l''?; the Syr., translating lBS Dan. 9, 24, along with riNBn Dlnnbi (according to the K'tib) as its parallel, which meaning Theod. has already, with- out reading sbsb on that account. To shut up Sin means to wrap it up and not to seek it out any more, as in Job 14, 17. But see inbs in Pihel. ' ITT ^^7^ n. in some forms for !lb3 11, ITT ITT which see. xb? (with suff. il^l?3; iJZ. B'^sbS); only in signific. 2. dual D'jNbs) m. 1. prop, se- clusion, separation, hence as a genit. to rr'a a prison, 1 Kings 22, 27; 2 Kings IT*;" 4; Is. 42, 7; Jbr. 37, 15; but also without n-ja 2EaNGS 25,29 ; Jbe. 52,33; Phenic. nS'? = riNbS) (Melit. 2,2) the grave. — 2. anything separated, single, different from another thing, hence dual Q'JisbB two things separated and different, hetero- geneous, of stuffs or animals Lev. 19, 19, Dbut. 22, 9, a word common in modern Hebrew (Talmud), out of the vulgar language. The idea of duality also lies in the Ethiopic Kle two, of two sorts, Ar. is, dual J^^hoth. ajtbS) (moulded together out of sbs as ; "m, i. e. God, is protection) n. p. m. of a son of David 2 Sam. 3, 3, for which the parallel place in 1 Che. 3, 1 has bNJS'n {El is judge), while the LXX have Jakoviu i. e. nibl (Jah is deliverer). ITT : '■ D-JX?? see Nb|. 3P3 I. (not used) tr. same as Bbn 11. P T to weave, to plait together, out of wil- lows, Ar. \.^JL^(to plait), Syr. ' ^'^^ the same. The verb may also be con- nected, in its organic root, with that in nXsKm, plico, plecto. Deriv. aibS 1 and 2. D?3 n. (not used) prop. tr. same as t]53 to press or pierce mto sometnmg, to attack , to lay hold of with violence, to fall upon, e. g. of the wild, ill-natured dogs of the East which are greedy after flesh and seize upon men in their fury; of bold, valiant heroes &c. According to form* and derivatives however, it may also mean to be violent, audacious, pressing, raging. In Arab, both forms exist, viz. v_Ai5'(to be violent, furious, to fall upon, to attack, to lay hold of) and i_JL5'(to pierce, of a sting or thorn); Syr. ' nSn (to lay hold of, to pierce). The assumption of an onomatopoeia to yelp, to bark, for which the Hebrew- has nas, must be rejected, because the manifold applications of the verb in Semitic point only to the fundamental signification given; comp. the Ar. v— ^-^T violence (of cold), wickedness, &j'3S tongs (comp. Xn^is tongs, from lafi^d- rsiv to lay hold of), ,_*JL5'(an animal attacking, e. g. a lion), y^is a pointed instrument, a hook, thorn, claw, tongs, 3UJL5'thom-bush, dual tongs; Syr.lai^ tongs; and many others. Deriv. abs, proper names a^iB, "'^l^?- D!33 see ab3 n. !■• T IT Dbs (the bold, the valiant, i. e. a hero, viz. is Jah) 1. n.p. m. Num. 13, 6, 1 Chr. 2, 18, for which "-aibsi stands in 2, 9; 2, 50. Patr. "labs'l Sam. 25, 3 K'ri a Calebite, Targ.' a'b.B ri-'a'i':, Jerome de genere Caleb, Caleb having actually had his portion in the territory there meant. The LXX, Syr. and Arab, have here taken ab3 as = abs incorrectly, and translate!i^i3b3 doggish. The K'tib has iab3 (secundum cor suum i. e. stub- born, from ab), but the reading of tha '■■ 42 3^3 658 ni^D E'ri is preferable. — 2. ?j. /?. of a ter- ritory in Judah (probably inhabited by Calebites), whose south part is called abstias ISAM. 30, 14, the Philistine dis- trict there (inhabited by Cretans) being named "'n'nsiln Mi. Another part of tMs territory was called iiniBN ab3, i. e. Caleb of Ephrath or Bethlehem 1 Che. 2, 24, in the neighbourhood of which the town lay. Yet it is better there to read (instead of nn'nsjs* abaa) inrrnsN aba ns ^ tit:v rx:'. tit:v |"t it Caleb came to (his wife) Ephrath, for so his wife was called 1 Chr. 2, 19. Per- haps "labs 1 Sam. 25, 3 should be re- ferred to this place. nbs (pi- 0"'^^?) constr. iab3, with suf. ^''abs) m. 1. prop, an attacking, vio- lent and furious beast (Ar. v_;ki5 also a lion), hence a dog, particularly the wild, greedy animal that runs about without a master, and eats even corpses (1 Kings 14, 11; 16, 4; 21, 23; Jbr. 15, 3; Ps. 22,17 21; 59,7 15), such as is found in the East, and, as the nomad-dog is described, vicious and furious (Strabo XVII, 821). Hence it is a figure of raging enemies Ps. 22,17. abs was also reckoned an unclean Is. 66, 3, despised creature EccLES. 9, 4; 1 Sam. 17,43; the latter is still more fully expressed by nz ab| ISAM. 24, 15; 2Sam. 9, 8; 16, 9, once a|3 lBi«'^ 2 Sam. 3, 8, which means, however, according to some dog-keeper, dog-feeder = Kwaywyos (Germ. Hunds- fott i. e. a whipper in), the existence of so low an office being perceptible from Job 30,1. — 2. Pigur. a maleprostitute, therefore ab3 linu the hire of sodomy DbCx. 23, 19, as 'ffii^ 23, 18; comp. iivvss Ebvel. 22, 15. ' ' nmSN nbs see aba 2. T IT : V I" T r*T n^l.{2p.perf.^Nith.suf. ■'inb? 1 Sam. 25, 33; ?ipl. 1^3 6, 10; fut. nbs^ Gen. 23, 6) tr. same as Nb3, of which it is a collateral form; as vice versa forms are developed after Nb3, e. g. rtb3n 1 Bongs 17, 14 from Inb 3 II. (which 'see); and, according to some, the infin. Pihel Nb3 I)an. 9, 24. n^3lL {fut. nbs: , but in IKings 17, 14 nbsn after the manner of verbs Nb) 1. tr. to m:ake ready, to prepare (con- ficere, rsv"(^(.iv, old German zeugen, whence the noun Zeug), i. e. to accom- plish or complete a thing by manual work, e. g. a vessel, a garment, a ship, an utensil, an instrument, armour &c.; deriv. ■'b3 and tTib3. Pigur. with the I- . it: ■ ° accus. of the object, Pkov. 22, 8 and the rod of chastisement (tiaffl) prepares (tlbs^) his punishment (irTnay), like rtS'i nb3 16, 30 to prepare or do evil; with a of the person Ez. 5, 13 to practise '£]!>< against one. — 2. to complete, bring to an end, finish (as fertigen is connected with fertig) , in which sense it differs from tnto5>, which expresses merely the objective idea of work and treatment. But only intr., and either objectively to be completed, ready, smaS Ex. 39, 32, nian 1 Kjngs,6, 38, ii3NbMM 2 Chr. 29, 34, or figur. to be at an end or past, T^ita Is. 24, 13, ay'nii ■'iia Gen. 41,53; y^j? Jer. 8, 20, parallel 'ia»; to he de- termined, resolved upon, with njsa of the person by whom Esth. 7, 7, or with d5>a 1 Sam. 20, 7, and with bx of the person upon whom it is determined ; • to be ful- filled, of a prophecy, promise, or threaten- ing Dan. 12, 7 ; Ezr. 1, 1 ; 1 Che. 36, 22 ; comp. TslsTv vnoajsaiv. — 3. Metaphor. to come to an end, to be done, this being thought of as a state of completeness, coupled with 'iDti 1 Kings 17, 16, also with lU of the vessel in which a thing comes to an end. Gen. 21, 15; to be de- stroyed, to be consumed, to perish Is. 1, 28; Jer. 16, 4; Mal. 3, 6; Ps. 39, 11; Jo vanish, to pass away, to disappear, of a cloud Job 7, 9, of time 7, 6, of smoke Ps. 37, 20; to pine away, of the strength Ps. 71, 9; to languish, to melt away, to waste away (from longing, unfulfilled hope), of the Itoa Job 33, 21, "nNia Peov. 5, 11, d^5''S Lament. 2, 11, Soi 11,20 andl7,5| ■aiDi Ps. 84, 3, U\^ 143, 7, ni;ib3 Song of Sol. 19, 27, and even of animals Jer. 14, 6 ; hence' 125B3 Mnb3 to long, with b after a thing Ps! 84,> s! nb 659 n^D Derivat. nb& (fern, tibs), !ib3, nbS72, IV T^ ITt" ITt' IT!-' Jl^Sn, nipSFi, and the proper name The organic root of the stem !i-b3 has obviously for its fundamental signi- fication only to make ready, prepare, and is closely connected with the or- ganic root in bb» (b?), bbS) (bs) &c.; but this idea itself proceeded from that of "to wind a thing, to move round and round, to carry on", the con- ception of winding, turning about ap- pearing to exist still in 0''b3 (Is. 32, 7 serpentine motions, crookednesses, crooked plans); conseq. connected with the or- ganic root in b(?"5>, bS'S, so that it is still in union with bb-l, bbri, as may be seen from bb3. "To make ready, to conclude, to complete" is merely a farther development of the original idea "to do repeatedly till the completion", as is still to be perceived from bbs. The Syr. iaiio a binding about the head, and the Ar. i^the banks enclosing a river, point to the original meaning. Pih. !ib3 (1 p. ■'n'^ba Ez. 6, 12 and in'^b? Num. 25, 11; inf. abs. ^ibs, once JSbs Dak. 11, 24, inf. constr. nib3; fut. rt?5^, ap. bs^) 1. to do, to transact, to effect, e. g. W'n Pkov. 16, 30; to execute Gen. 6, 16; a (rij?) Tmn nb3 (Ez. 6, 12; 7, 8; 13, 15; 20, 8;'Lambnt. 4, 11) to mxike one's wrath act against a person, i. e. to pour it out upon one. Accord- ingly it is cognate in sense with irHV, of which it is a stronger expression; and almost of the same sense with bbiS, with which it is identical in root. — 2. to complete, to end, tl3xba Gen. 2, 2; to accomplish, ph Ex. 5, 14," 'la'j Euth 3, 18, expressing, along with the infin. following, the additional idea of com- pleteness, e. g. 'nSJjb nbS) to reap to the end (i. e. wholly) Lev. 19, 9; to fill up, »l»sn (the measure of sin) Dan. 9, 24, with Dnrt; hence to end, to cease, op- pos. to'"br]!i Gen. 44, 12; 1 Sam. 3, 12; to intermit 1 Chr. 27, 24, usually fol- lowed by an infin. with b, which re- -ceives by that means the adverbial ac- cessory idea of being at an end, com- pleted, entirely, e.g. laib nba Gen. 18, 33, nb«?b'3 24, 19,'" bssf ''3 43, 1; more rarely followed by an infin. with TO Ex. 34, 33; to make an end of, to cause to cease Num. 17, 25. — 3. to cause to pass away, to make vanish, time Ps. 78, 33; to make disappear, days Job 36, 11; to use, to spend Is. 27, 10, strength 49,4; to use up, Dbut. 32, 23; to destroy, to consume. Gen. 41, 30; Num. 25, 11; 2 Sam. 21, 5; to cause to fait, the eyes of one Lev. 26, 16, i. e. to make them pine away in anxiety and hope; on the contrary !ib3 1? 2 Kings 13. 17, nbsb y_ 2 Chr. 24, 10 is merely an adverbial expression, entirely, com- pletely, fully, prop, even to completion, where ^Ib^ has more the character of a noun than that of an inf. absol., since the infin. construct stands elsewhere 1 Sam. 15. 18. Deriv. irb3, rtb3. Piih. nb3 (3 p!^pl. fut. lb?^) or tib3 (3 p. pi. 1V3) to be completed, finished, Gen.2, 1; Ps.72,20. nba (after the form Wffl) f 1. con- sumption, total destruction, '3 MTB5' to make a complete destruction, Jer. 4, 27; 5, 10; Neh. 1, 8; Zeph. 1, 18; nb3 Mltinin Dan. 9, 27 destruction and de- IT Tv:r.': ' , cree, i. e. decreed destruction. Some- times also with 3 Jer. 30, 11 and njs; (riN or njjt) of the person 5, 18; Ez. 11, 13; iT^s'nbsi Dan. 11, 16 and destruc- ' I T : IT T : ' tion is in Ms power. — 2. completion; therefore as an adverbial accusative, completely, wholly, altogether, prorsus, plane, joined to the verbs tiic? Gen. 18, 21, fflpa Ex. 11, 1; for which nb3^ also stands 2 Che. 12, 12; Ez. 13, 13.' ' nPS (not used) intr. same as fib3 p T ^ ' "^ (which see) to be robust, firm. The final sound )i- is interchanged with M-, as in M3.1 and n35. Deriv. the proper names 1!T133 and ■'JTI33. J : I- : nb3 (prop, part.) adj. m., tlb3 {pi. n'h's) f. pining, of the eye Deut. 28, 32, i. e. looking with longing desire. nbs (from bb3; pi. nft3) f. prop. '■' 42* nb:> 660 n^D adorned, crowned, hence 1. a bride, Bponsa, who adorns herself with d"'"!lS)?, '7?.. P""]?? Is. 49, 18; 61, 10 &c. &c.; ''^yi. I*'-^' — 2. a daughter-in-law, properly tlV? of the son Gen. 38, 11 ; Lev. 18, 15 ; EuTH 1, 6; but in Ar. SIS'. MsS m. (see rtbs in Pih.) completion, completeness, hence rt^3 iy 2 Kings 13, 17; n)?\i 1» 2Chr.24,10 ewere to com- pletion, i. e. completely, fully. nbs (only^Z. d^bsi, with suf. rbs) m. prop, serpentine motion, writhing, therefore a crooked plan, a cunning pur- pose. Is. 32, 7, if we should not take it here as = "'bs in the meaning instrument, medium; see'nbsll. (in its etymological development) ^If? (prop. part, pass.) m. confine- ment, a prison, Jbr. 37, 4 K'ri, which is explained by sbjs in vs. 15; 52, 31 K'ri. In both places'the K'tib hasN-ib?, which arose out of the other. Pheni'c. Nb3 enclosure; hence dj?n-Nb3 Colu- macuma (Ptol. 4, 3) a fortress, n. p. of a city in Byzacene. 21 p I (from sbS) I.) m. prop, plait, wicker-work, of wood or willows, there- fore 1. a trap for birds, in which are many birds Jbb. 5, 27 and a n^ni^a 5, 26 i. e. a wooden bar set upright, the falling of which causes the cover to fall, and effects a capture; comp. Ben-Sira 11, 31 (37); perhaps also ori- ginally a bird-cage, like the Phenic. ^'''?) ^\?, which word, along with the thing, pissed over to the Greeks (xho§6g, xXov^oa, xXo§6g). — 2. a basket, of wicker work, to put fruit in. Am. 8, 2, Syr. |.aaio the same. — 3. heroic courage, boldness (see abS) II.), only in the pro- per name ■'ilbs. I- : ■^n^l?? (heroic; from absll.) n.p.m. 1 Che. 2, 9, for which 2, 18 has ab3, 1 r I WIP? (=Ti!7-; robustness, strength) n. p. m. EzB. 10, 35 K'ri, for which the K'tib is ■'•P'lbs (strong, robust) n. p. m. Ezr. 10, 35 K'tib. riibip? f- pi- the bridal state, Jbb. 2, 2, in the first instance a denom. from M,b3. n^S (not used) intr. same as Ara- maean tlb)?, to be robust, firm, stiff, of a shaft, stem, trunk; metaphor, to be firm, sound, of the body; to be powerful, of the state of the body. TMs expla- nation must have been followed by the Syriae interpreter, who translates nb3 (Job 30, 2) by U.*.ai (strength) ; and Em Chiquitilla (see Beiti-age by Ewald and Dukes I. p. 84) also approves of it, ex- cept that he identifies the noun with TO. Deriv. nb?. Many have been the attempts to ex- plain this stem. According to the Targ. and LXX nb3 is = nbs (comp. mo)? and tllS)?, njts and !iKb) with the meaning to be completed, complete, of the time of life; but this signification does not at all suit the noun nb3 Job 30, 2, where one rather expects a noun with a mean- ing similar to that of nb. According to Saadia and Kimchi same a& Arab. ^i, ^Synda. its cognate, enlarged and transposed stems, which signify to dry up, to shrink together, to be decaying, to be old &c., but this too does not suit Job 30, 2. Our explanation seems the best. nbS m. 1. same as Aram, nb)?, a truTik, shaft, stem, hence fig. robustness, firmness, soundness. Job 5, 26 thou shalt go to the grave in robustness (i. e. healthy and strong), viz. unweakened and un- bent by old age; 30, 2 their strength has vanished, i. e. they are weakly, miserable, sick, without vital strength; parallel n'a. — 2. n. p. of a city built by Nimro'd in Assyria (IIISN) with three others (^,3f ?. 'T'l? nan^i ID'pJ on the east side of the Tigris, after he had left Shinar (1»21S) i. e. Babylonia Gen. 10, 11 12 (Onk., Jer. Targ. I., and so later wri- ters). This nbjs appears to have lain farther north than ir^i'^i, in a territory of the same name, which Strabo (XI. 530) reckons to the plain about Ninus ('TP.r?)) and which is described by Pto- ^bD 661 lemy (6, 1) as north of Adiabeue, and is called KakaytivT^ oiKaXaxiv^, consequent- ly in the district of the modern desolate place Khorsabad, north east of Mosul. According to the Talmud (Joma 10) nbs is said to have been situated on the Euphrates at Borsippa (tjiD'i'ia), i. e. Ba- bylonia; which clearly arose from a mis- understanding of the passage. Accord- ing to the Syr. it would be the city jj-Ji-* (Ephrem, 0pp. I. p. 58), Arab. ■^■^ (Abulf. in Paulus' Repert. III. p. 30), an old town of Mesopotamia, opposite to Tekrit on the Tigris; which is merely conjectural. Its identification with nbn (2 Kings 17, 6) is problematical. ''bis m. same as ■'b"'3 Is. 32, 7, se- (-■•■ I" ' lected merely to have an assonance with nibs. IT" ''-3 {in pause "'bs, withsw/. *[';b3, as in ■»'ns, ■'^1^; pi. d'^bs with the prefixed vowel - from a sing. Th's after the form riMia, d'lJSy, constr. however again ""b 3, with suff^'^h's, S'ib3, D3''b3, T'b3 &c.) m. prop, anything made, prepared (see Mb 3 n.), hence generally a vessel, im- plement, comp. Germ. Zeug from zeugen = rsvjsiv i. e. to make. Spec, a seat, put on a camel's saddle, a palanquin Gen. 31, 37, for travelling or sitting 45,20; Lev. 15, 4; nbia 'ib3 Jeb. 46, 19 travelling ' ' IT I" : ' " equipage, i. e. tapestry- or carpet-seats or this kind; a vessel, vas, made of sUver, gold or clay Gen. 24, 53; Ex. 3, 22; Lev. 11, 33; Jbr. 19, 11; of the vessels of the temple Is. 52, 11; Ezr. 1, 7; Num. 4, 15; belonging to a thing Ex. 27, 19 ; 31, 7 ; 38, 3 ; garments Deut. 22, 5,; ornaments, of a bride Is. 61, 10; the things belonging to oxen, as the yoke, threshing implements 2 Sam. 24, 22 ; a boat, a skiff (made from the papyrus) Is. 18, 2, comp. axeiog, German Gefass, applied to a ship; an instrument, of music IChr. 15, 16, with the instrument itself in ap- position Ps. 71, 22; instruments of war, weapons, arms, 1 Sau. 14, 1, D"'b3 nia armoury Is. 39, 2, fully nanlpn ''bs JtJDGBS 18,11; rna -^'^'s deadly weapons Ps. 7, 14; figur. means, instrument, plan |vb Gen. 49, 5 (see !nb3). In Aram. l«a, 1 • in ' 'it' ^po IB used for it N'^ba m. see Nib3. r : I : tT'bs (from masc. ''b3, like rfaiB IT : ■ ^ P : ' IT ! • from ■'aia, comp. too ST'IS, tT''ia; only pi. nij^bB, constr. nrbs, with suf. Tivbs &c.) f. 1. the reins, which are double Ex. 29, 13 22 ; Lev. 3, 4 (adduced with a'lj^, r'ln'' &c. in sacrificial animals 3, 4; 9, 19), whose fat, as being the finest and tenderest, was offered up Lev. 3, 10, Is. 34, 6 ; and therefore the fat of the reins isappliedmetaphor.tofatwheatDEUT.32, 14. — 2. Metaphorically the interior, = ab, with which it is often put, or the place of which it occupies. The reins, like the heart, were looked upon as a part of the body, an injury to which is painful and dangerous Ps. 73, 21, Job 16, 13, Lament. 3, 13, as the seat of feeling and longing Job 19, 27, of counsel, passion Ps. 1'6, 7, and of determination Jer. 12, 2. Being thus a seat of resolve , God proves and ex- amines them Jeb. 11,20; 20,12; Ps.7, 10. The word, which exists also in the other Semitic dialects (Targ. N''b3, Syr. iJuIikos, At. 2uJiy&c.), should be placed, as to form, along with "ibS, of which it is the feminine; and then it would either mean vessel in a medical sense, or de- note some peculiar form of a specific vessel; especially as the names of many members of the body are taken from those vessels, in the language. More appro- priate seems to me the fundamental signification cartilage, excrescence, like Niere in German, the reins being a thickened, fleshy mass, interwoven with a sort of hard little bodies. The stem Mb 3 might accordingly be = 5>b3 (Ar. Jjijft) to be firm, strong, hard, thick, a signification which lies also in bn (page 426) no. 4, from which we may infer its connexion with the original meaning of rtb3 (to wind together, to twist together, then to be stout, to be tight). ■ji'^bs (constr. \\';h'3) m. 1. a pining, of the eyes, i. e. unfulfilled hope, rest- less longing Deut. 28, 65. — 2. con- lrb 662 ^b sumption, destruction Is. 10, 22 =^ nbs, hence Vlin '3 same as nifinJI nVs ' IT • ITTVW: IT t (which see). ')i''i;3 (longing desire) n. p. m. Euth 1, 2.' ' ■ b-'bs (cowsJr. b-'bs) 1. (from bb3 I.) «rrf/. m., !lb"'b3 (coresir. nb") /^. complete, finished, perfect Ez. 27, 3; 28, 12 com- /)Ze*e in beauty; 16,14 it is perfect in my splendour. — 2. subst.: the whole. Is. 2, 18 and the idols — the whole {pi them) perish, where C|bn can only refer to b"'b3; Judges 20, 40 the whole of the city, i. e. the whole city; b'^b? nbsn Ex. 28, 31 the whole of purple blue, i. e. all blue; also an adv. wholly Lev. 6, 15. — 3. (from bb3 II.) prop, the burnt, hence sacrifice = iib'y, applied both to corn and animals, provided they were burnt Lev. 6, 16; Deut. 13, 16; 33, 10; it is also occasionally an apposition to iibi? 1 Sam. 7, 9 ; Ps. 51, 21. The LXX have oXoxavtfaiia, where oXo- is merely an explanatory addition; Phenie. bb3 sacrifice in general, bb3 Db^ an offering (Mass. 3), bb3 S]bN a sacrifice of oxen (ib.). Coptic «^^ = !ibb. D^bs Is. 32, 7 see rtb3. f ■■ ' IV " b^bs (maintainer, supporter, viz. G-od is ; prop, an abstract) n. p. m. of a wise man before the age of Solomon, other- wise unknown 1 Kings 5, 11 ; but of the tribe of Judah 1 Chr. 2, 6. Tradition considers him a prophet, who lived in Egypt (Seder 01am rabba). ??3 1, {^p.pl. lbb3) tr. prop, to turn, to wind, to wind about, to make circular, conseq. in its organic root b3 same as b.5 (bb.5 intr.), b5 (bi.j), bn nr(bbn II.), bn (bin mtr.), b? I. (bb^ I.) &c. Hence 1. to crown, to encircle with a garland, to adorn, other verbs of the same fun- damental signification having a similar enlargeinent of idea; Arab, Jo, Syr. Vii-s, Targ, b3, particularly in the in- tensive form (in derivatives in Hebrew), the same. Comp. Arab. JuAXI chap- let, diadem, Syr. i l i N- i. — 2. same as nb3 n. to handle, practise, do, carry on, transact, properly to turn a thing, to move round and round, of the per- formance of a thing; the same meta- phorical application of the fundamen- tal idea taking place in bbff I. Hence to accomplish a thing, to complete, to finish,, to make perfect; Ez. 27, 4 11 thy builders have made thy beauty perfect. Comp. also the Aram. bbsilS and the pass. bbsniBN. Derivat. b7^3' 1 and 2; bbSM, bb, Si's r T , '. IT ! ■ ' I ' I and the proper name 333. Pih. bb3 (not used) to encircle with a crown or ehaplet, to adorn; deriv. mV3, and hence the denom. niblb3. ?73 II. (not used) intr. to glow, to burn, of animal or other constituents, identical in its organic root b3 with bb» n. belonging to b^b^ (Ps.^12, 7) according to the Targ. ; Ar. J>fc to glow, to bum; with bp. (bbj? 11.) belonging to the noun bbp, and perhaps also in b)?b)3 (EcclbS. 10, 10); also connected with li-b)5 I. (Ar, Jo, !Xs, Targ. Nb)? for ri'lto'^and fflaj), rt-bs n. belonging to fib's (comp, Coptic *i.Ae to kindle), and with bna, Ar. (.^g^i J-gJ' &c., comp, x^l-sTv, mZ-ere. Deriv. b''b3 3. This primitive idea of "glowing, burning" is sometimes applied to smelting (metals by heat), sometimes to that of shining, sparkling, as of colour to be bright red, clear blue, of violet or red purple; the idea of a bright colour proceeding in other cases in the language from that of glittering, shining. Deriv. bft 373 (in- terchanged with nbsn, and interpreted in the Targ, by "^Ma , from IMS to glow, to bum, comp, ^ms, a coal) and la''bb3M. See also nbsn, Hif. b''b3in'(3 p. pi. ibibsn) to make red or shining, 0^3"'?, only in the Sam. cod. Gen. 49, 12.'' " bbS) (Peal unused) Aram. tr. same as Hebr. bb3 I., to complete, to perfect, to finish. Deriv, b'3. Shaf. bbsia (with suff. nbbST^; 3 p. pi. lbb3tt5; inf. constr. fibbsffl)" «o complete^ to finish, to bring to an end, a building, bb:^ 663 njb awall,EzR.4,12K'ri; 5,3 9 11; 6,14; also in the Syr. to adorn, to ornament. Ishtaf. bbsnttJN {Zp.pl. ibbsniBN; fut. bbsni^:) pass. 'Ezk.4, 12 K'tibVi, 13. pbS) {perfection., completeness) n. p.m. EzRriO, 30. D?3 (Kal unused) trans, prop, to cut in, to prick, to pierce, to wound, hence i{like other stems of a similar funda- mental signification, e. g. t\1!i., ^pi &c.) to hurt, to injure, to grieve, to revile, reproach, insult, proscindere. Derivat. IT • : ' 1 • I The fundamental signif. of the stem is still preserved, unquestionably, in the At. *Jj (to wound, to cut in, whence *-l5 a wound), cognate with *Jj' (to cut off) • and with the Hebr. Clb3; and the mean- ing to speak (Hebr. ^a'^) in Ar. *JLS' has proceeded from the fundamental sig- nification given, prop, to make incisions -(in tones or sounds), to articulate; the same metaphor being supposable in bb73 also. JNif. Dbss {part. Db33, pl.m. d-iabBi, /. niabs;; inf. constr.'th^^; fut. DbSJ'r) to be insulted, reviled, mortified, 2 Sam. 10, 5 ; 1 Chr. 19, b; to be ashamed, with TB3 Jer. 31, 19; Is. 55, 16; Ezr. 9, 6; with ya of a thing to feel shame of a thing Ez. 16, 27; 36, 32; to be put to shame Jer. 22, 22, with a of the person by whom one is put to shame Ps. 69, 7 ; to be made ashamed 2 Sam. 19, 4, hence dbsi with 'T1 Ps. 74,21. IT : • U- ' Ilif t3''bDf1 and D'^bsrt {part. diba?2, inf. eo7istr. D"'b3!l, fut. D^blD^) to reproach, to revile, 1 Sam. 20, 34, where the LXX, Arab, and Syr. appear to have read la'nrt Vbs nb3 instead of VSN iabsrt; IT T - IT T IT • . , '* ^ I • : ' ' to hinder -26, 7, so that it is not neces- sary to read dissbstl; to shame Job 11, 3, L e. to contradict; with the accusat. of the person Prov. 25, 8; Kuth 2, 15; to put to shame Ps. 44, 10; seldom in- trans. to feel shame Jer. 6, 15. As to the passage Judges 18, 7 d"'b3M T'Ni *iai , the LXX (cod. Alex.) have looked upon d^baa as a participle of bb"" (to bo, able); the Vulgate and other translators, did not understand it; Tanchum has got no more suitable sense by transpos- ing into dibaa ^S'l iini {and nothing offended); it is therefore better to take d'lbDJg as a noun with the fundamental signification of the stem, viz. meaning a cutting off, abridgment, want (see N'^bSM), so that the sense of the passage would be, and there was no want of anything, for which 18, 10 has 'nsTba 'liona rs. ■n> • ^^T_w IT T T 1 : - I I" Deriv. d^b373. r : - Hof. dbsil to be shamed Jer. 14, 3; to be hurt 1 Sam. 25, 15. *1u?3 n. p. of a land mentioned with r : ■ _ ^11!5N , which had intercourse with Tyre, and is adduced with !i3S, y^Tt, y^V and NSti as a Tyrian trading place Ez. 27, 23. According to the Targum (""Im) it is Media; according to the LXX and Syr. XaQiidrbtj, a city in Mesopotamia (Xe- noph. Anab. 1, 5, 10); but the former of these explanations has no foundation, and the latter should be rejected be- cause a land is required, and the copula should not be wanting. Kimchi seems to have read liabs. See tl33. , n • : I" - n53?3 (consir. nab 3, with «ttf.''plab 3; pi. nittb?) f. shame, which covers the face, hence like miJa coupled with the verbs lnB3, mb, nus Jer. 51, 51; Ps. 71, 13;"l09, 29; with rtsin and nm ' ' ' ' IT : V ••• I 69, 20; more rarely with nbjiN Prov. 18, 13; '3 Niai to bear reproach i. e. to feel it Ez! 16, 52; 32, 24; contumely Job 20, 3; '33 "rfbii to go to confusion Is. 45, 16; maltreatment 50, 6; invective, Mic. 2, 6 he does not remove (the limits of) invective. miab? /. the same Jer. 23, 39. nJ^S n. p. of a very old city in Babylonia, over which Nimrod is said^ to have ruled, as he did over "rj'iN ('^'^n), 13N and baa, and which he may have found perhaps as a Chaldean place Gen. 10, 10. At the time of the pro- phet Amos Calneh was looked upon^ nj^ 664 IDD along with rta'^ ran. (which see) and r\3, as a pecolior heathen kingdom that had fallen Am. 6, 2 (where nab? stands) ; i. e. it was conquered as a territory by Assyria Is. 10, 9 (where is isb?); and Tyrian commerce with it was very active Ez.27,23 (where is TO?; but see TO?). Tradition (Jer. Targ. I. and 11., Je- rome, Euseb., Ephrem, va-Yikra rabba ch. 5 &c.) understands by it Ctesiphon on the east bank of the Tigris, opposite Seleucia, north east of Babylon; in which case the name of the place would be transferred to the whole territory called Chalonitis or Kallonitis (Flinius 6, 30. 31). nabs see TOb?. iaVs see TOb3. n?3 (not used) tr, to split, to cut in pieces, to hew, with an instrument for cutting or piercing; hence to fell, a wooden idol; comp. abs 11. (which see), Db3 (which see), Arab. v_aJ-S' to pierce (whence ^y^ a pointed instrument, «,xA5' a thorn-bush &c.), Syr. ' ^N-^ the same, whence i^ls«a.o , Nabl3axe, hatchet. It is therefore not to be compared with the onomatopoeic Greek xoXajiza &c. Deriv. t^'^'3. nD3 intrans. to pine, to long for,ynih b of the person after whom Ps. 63, 2; prop, to be weary, from longing, the colour getting pale in those that are longing (see r)D3), while the strength is weakened and taken away (see !ib3) ; Ar. 2US to decline, to become duU or weak (of the light of the eye, of colour, of the understanding); Syr.oiiao the same; comp. Greek xa/t-co, xafti-eo; Pers. aS declining, failing. Deri vat. the proper names dtia3, ltia3 and DMins. IT : • ' 'it : • IT ; nXaS (the pronoun interrog. Txii with 3 closely attached, and even doubling the a), aprepos.ynih interrog. pron.,pop. as whatf for what? but in use an inter- JTOg. particle 1. of space, e. g. Zech. 2, 6 how great is the breadth of it! or of time^ Ps. 35, 17 how long wilt thou look on? Job 7, 19 how long wilt thou not turn away (the angry look)? conseq. = tia'H?. — 2. of number, qu o t? how many ? Gen. 47, 8; 2 Sam. 19, 35; Job 13, 23. — 3. without a question, Zech. 7, 3 so many years; Ps. 78, 40 how often? how many times? i. e. very often; or the inter- rogative element is intended to mani- fest a doubt in the frequency, or even to imply a denial of it, Job 21, 17 how often i. e. not often, seldom. Arab. Ai'the same. See Hebrew Ira. For TtlffH some- rr n- times n?33 stands; as elsewhere, Tili K- ' 'it alone and in compounds, is changed into IXa. In modem Hebr. DITS? (quan- tity) is formed from rtH?, like ni3''N (quality) from 't}''N. iVy2 (from Inn and 3) Aram. adv. IT : IT : ' interrog. like the Hebrew Tfa , "!ia , but where the comparison of the 3 before the interrogative idea disappears almost entirely, Dan. 3, 33 Ms signs how great! See Aram. Tm. n 00533 (from na3; pining, longing) n.p. of a son of BarziUai 2 Sam. 19, 38 3^ who is called ifia? in 19, 41. Erom this Chimlham a settlement in the vicinity of Bethlehem was called Dtia? ni'na Jer. 41, 17, where the K'tib has ninTO3. ' ' IT : inaS see Drtas. I IT : . IT : * il33 (compounded of ia = TXa and 3; so before the grave suffixes, as bsia?, Drtia?, and before nouns; before light suffixes ia3, as "'3ia3, ^ia3, . &c. The organic root is "^o'S, 1523 m. cumin, so called from the. DD3 666. 1DD sharp smell of the seeds Is. 28, 25 27, Ar. io»*5 1 Targ. NSiMB, German KiXm- mel; on the contrary, the Greek xifjuvov, Latin cuminum should be explained by the Phenician form 'jpb. DDID {oxHy part. pass.^'a'S; for which the cod. Sam. has 0,153) tr. to conceal, to keep, Dbut. 32, 34, as all the old ver- sions render the stem; it seems to be connected etymologically with T3.1 , 053. The proper name 0?53a is a collateral form of BiaDa &c., and therefore not to be derived from this stem. The Ar. \ju-tS to be dark, does not belong here. See *TO3 4. r T "1D3 (Kal not used) 1. Ir. to draw together, to plait, to braid, yarn for a net (of fishers or hunters), identical with 153 plexit, texuit, 'i/QM (which see), "lan I. (p. 414) &c. ; consequently like the Targ. "njDjj to bind about, to gird (Talm. to lattice), for the Hebrew "nan , ITN, whence ^TO)?, S'lMl];, Nin); \ girdle; the verb being found in this signification in Syr. and Arabic also, whence -^S^a priest's girdle, ^j^ short, little. Derivat. *n733U, -1K3W, rlM3?3, iriKSa. — 2. Intr. to contract, to shrink together, to dry up, of the skin, by hunger. Deriv. Nif. ^a35 1. — 3. Figur. to con- tract or shrink together , of the feelings, i. e. to be seized with pain or love, so- licitude or compassion, without its being necessary on that account to take '1723 in the sense of to boil, to bubble up,' to be excited, to heave = "ijjn. Deriv. Nif. 1»53 2. — 4. Prop, to be dense or drawn closely together, hence to be dark, ob- scure, gloomy, e. g. of the day by the obscuration of the sun; just as the cog- nate-in-sense verbs TjTjjn, ■a\'S, qw and the Arab. J>*^, ^J«.♦i, Jt+S'with the meaning "to be dark, obscure, gloomy, dense, blind" proceed from the funda- mental signification to be contracted, thickened. Deriv. Pih. 1la3. — Meta- phor. 5. of a dark and melancholy dis- position ; Syr. j^ioa to be sad, melancholy. Af. for T'lJJrt (Ez. 31, 15) to cause to , mourn, irhence l i ' Vi'' sorrow, mourn-; ing; then an ascetic, a priest, who is described elsewhere as sorrowful ; comp, Ar. JojI, Syr. 11*^1 an ascetic, a priest, espec. spoken of a christian one. We need' not refer this metaphorical signification of the stem to the black dress of priests and ascetics (Kimchi). Deriv. 1733. From the succession of meanings here arranged, beginning with the simply ob- jective and proceeding to the metaph. and figurative, the Nifal in its double signi- fication, theHebr. derivatives and the use of the same stem in Targ., Syr., Samar. &c. may be explained very well; the etymological connexion with other stems of the language being unquestionable, so that it is not necessary to adopt two stems of different significations. iViy.ia33 {Zp.pl.^-m'D'i) l.to be con- tracted, shrunk up, parched, of the skin, by hunger. Lament. 5, 10 our skin is parched as by a furnace ('nisri3=1l3na3). The signification "to be scorched" (Vulg.), or "to be blackened" (Targ., Kimchi) is less suitable, because such are not the effects of famine. — 2. to be contracted, to be fastened together, of d''7:np {the feelings of love), with b» 1 Kings 3, 26 or bs of the person Gen. 43, 30, or of D'^ains (sympathy) Hos. 11, 8, i. e. the feeling of love or com- passion is concentrated, strong, or pow- erful. The LXX at Gen. 43, 30 have avatgt'cpm. The same manner of speak- ing is also in Aramaean and Samaritan. The explanation of Kimchi by " to grow warm" is only conjectural. Pih. (redupl.) 'T1733 to be strongly dark- ened, of the day, by the obscuration of the sun. Deriv. 'T''1733. -laS (ijZ.131'1733, with SM^f. Ti'nn3) m. an ascetic, a priest, who has to "offer incense 2 Kings 23, 5, particularly idol- priests, servants of Baal Zeph. 1, 4; so that D''55'3 become Di'i733, i. e. priests of an illegal Jehovah-worship Hos. 10, 5. The application to idolatrous priests is obviously only a Hebrew peculiarity, since the Syr.ljieis denotes any priest; ^nDD 667 and it is a q[uestion, how this designa- tion is united with the meaning of the stem. According to Kimchi the idola- trous priest is so named from his gloomy, black dress, or from the Syriac mean- ing of the stem to mourn., then to be an ascetic, as also in fact among oriental christians Joot, U^] mean an ascetic, a monk (comp. bas* in modern Hebrew). But if a particular fundamental signi- fication of the stem should be assumed for this noun, it would be appropriate to take ^tt| = "nay I., Ar. _♦* coluit deum; and accordingly '1M3 would be a serving one, a servant, like ^ilb in its fundamental meaning. "inns (after the form T^'lSTlS, 'T''nSD , V''bl?n, except that at the beginning -; stands for -; consfr. pi. "''I'^'l") m. obscu- ration, darkening, of the di'^ (light of day), i. e. an eclipse, which caused ter- ror among the ancients, because it was supposed to announce misfortune (nsa) Job 3, 5. Most (Targ. Aq. Syr. Vulg. Saadia&c.) take '''n"''lM3 as compounded of 3 and ta"'TT? (bitternesses, i. e. misfor- tunes), and translate: as the misfortunes of the day, which, however, disturbs the parallelism. There is no reason what- ever for reading aii-i^.i'iUSi and taking it like liN-iTnTOS 24, 13. t^D3 (not used) intr. same as 12333 II. r T ^ ' I" T (see farther comparisons there), to glow, to burn (see 12313), Ar. (j»»*J> (tr.) to set fire to, to bum; hence the deriv. 1231533 prop, fire, glow, which became a name of the fire-god of the Moabites. To compare it with 123S3 I. in the meaning to tread down, to subdue, then to rule, so that I23ia3 would mean prop, rule, concrete ruler, does not correspond so well to the character of this deity. Deriv. the proper names 123U3a, 1230?'?, ;6ia3, I25"'a3 in I2jin313. In the Syr., i: I' : I':.- v . however, there was a verb -Ai^as with the meaning of Hebr. 12333 I., hence f ^. nV i - i night -mare; Arab. (j«^L5 the same, h '^ * ^'' vinacea. P nD3 (not used) tr. same as Da 3 (in- terchanging the sibilant n with D) to conceal, to hide, a meaning which the verb had most decidedly at the time of Ben-Sira, since he explains (6, 21) niasn (wisdom, comp.PROv. 9, 1) as a concealed thing (from na3); an explanation which even if it be an accommodation is pos- sible only by connexion with njjB. Deriv. the proper name nnwaa. •(3 see 13 n. and Ji33. I 1- '(■• IT- 13 I. m. an alleged singular to D''S3 (see M33) and in 15 ia3 Is. 51, 6 (ac- cording to de Dieu, Vitringa, Lowth); but it should be referred to ']3 IV. (which see). •jS n. (along with 13, but with suff. "iSJ?! T|S3, 133; from 133) m. 1. a base, pedestal, stand (of a basin) 1 Ktnqs 7, 29 (but where the old versions have either taken it in the meaning of 13 IIL, or read 131 which they have united with bsiaa). 15 iitoa 7, 31 pedestal-work, a well-known form of the KSn, probably of the laver before the tabernacle Ex. 30,18; 31,9; 35,16_; 38,8; Lev.8,11; in any case different in form from HSisa (which see). I'nn 13 Is. 33, 23 the pe- destal of the mast, i. e. the socket in which the mast stands, the Greek fts- aoSfirj, isTomSti &c. — 2. Metaphor. place, station, of/ice, Gen. 40, 13; 41,13; Dan. 11, 20 and in his place will stand up, i. e. will follow him (Antiochus the great); 11, 21; las'; 133"^? 11, 38 m his place (i. e. in his temple) he shews honour to him (to Ll''J.?a ilbjt, i. e. the Melcart at Tyre). More difficult lin- guistically is the passage 11, 7: and a shoot (ia to be explained as in 11, 5; Neh. 13)' 28; Ex. 6, 25) of her roots (i. e. who comes from the same origin) shall rise up in his place (where the prepos. b? is left out before 153, or direction stands in the accus.); hence the LXX and Vulg. have taken 13 here in the sense of rt33 (Ps. 80,16), which, however, is unnecessary. Syr. P^ , \^^^ the same. 13 III. (prop. part. m. of 113, then a participial adjective; pi- Q'^-iS) !• «47' p 668 P m,,prop. standing upright, standing firm, lijke 'itdj, hence figur. upright, honest. Gen. 42, 11 19 31 33 34, oppos. tobii'nn (spy). — 2. Subst. neuter, and so an adv. to the verbs Inios right, honestly 2 Kings 7, 9, EccLEs. 8,'lO, to 'na'i Num. 27, 7; 36, 5, na'n Ex. 10, 29 ; rightly Josh. 2, 4 ; EzH. 10, 2; aare, «grA<, 15 tib rao< rare Peov. 15, 7 (LXX and Sy^.); 'ip-iib the not right, i. e. the false, empty Is. 16, 6; Jeh.8,6 ',23,10 their strength is unjustness ; 48, 30 and the falsehood of his speeches; while 2 Sam. 18, 14, Ez. 11, 5 and 33, 10, Zech. 11, 11, Neh. 2, 16 are better re- ferred to j3 IV. Syr. UU the same. |3 IV., before Makkeph "is (a par- ticle of confirming and comparison, which has nothing in- common with the idea of a verb, and should not, there- fore, be derived from a verb-root) adv. {comparing and confirming) so, thus, just so, sic, ita, ovzaig, where a confirmation of what precedes, or agreement with it, is intended to be expressed Gen. 1, 7 9 11; 1 Kings 20, 40; Jer.5,31; Am. 4, 5, or a comparison is emphasised by it, thus and not otherwise, so to speak, 1 Sam. 23, 17, in this manner; 1 Kings 1, 36 God so grant (i. e. confirm), where three mss. read 'Tt'OV^^ ^3; Jer.5,31 my people love it so, i. e. will have it take place so. Strictly considered, IB is used a) as a comparison-particle of condition, 50, of such a nature, of such kind, talis, ita comparatus. Job 9, 35 / am not of such a nature, so constituted, with myself, i. e. it does not look so in my heart; Jer. 14, 10 in so peculiar a way do they love to wander, refemng to 13,27; Ps. 121 ,2 just so, i. e. so good and copiously, does the Lord give his beloved, or ^3 is here = niiT3 of such kind. Here belongs also Ps. 61, 9 in this manner (i. e. with snch instrumental music) do I praise thee. b) increasing the quality or quantity, i. e. comparing a thing with what is higher or nobler, Nah. 1, 12 though they he complete and so very numerous . . . yet they will be cut off entirely, c) a par- ticle of comparing number: so much, in such number, tot, Ex. 10, 14; Judges 21, 14; 1 Kings 10, 12. d) referring to time: so long, immediately ,_ forthwith^ 1 Sam. 9, 13, where 3 stands in the pre- ceding member, which is also omitted in poetry Ps. 48, 6 ; Greek ag... mg. e) com- paring the strength of degree, Hos.l 1,2 they call to them, in the same degree they tiim from them; in this case we have elsewhere either 3 ... 3 Gen. 18, 25, or 11 ... 3 Ps. 127, 4; Jo. 2, 4; 2KinG8 7, 18-20. f) the element of comparison going into the background and the con- firmation-power alone appearing, as in 13N (which see): certainly, surely, yea Ps. 61, 9; 63, 3; therefore it even intro- duces a new clause Prov.11,19. g) like ■jlDN (which see) limiting what precedes, however, but, yet, Prov. 28, 2 but it con- tinues long under intelligent, knowing men; Ps. 90, 12 yet teach us to number our days. The application of 'JB compounded with prepositions is much more exten- sive, whether they be independent words ("I"??. "'p.nN) b», 1?), or attach them- selves to it inseparably (a, b), or if it be connected with a demonstrative (13n). I" T ' To these belong: a) •\^s "nriN prop, after it was so, hereupon Lev. 14, 36, coin- ciding almost with iiT ins 2Chr.32,9, IfflN. IpN Ez.40,1; -jb •'-iriN afterwards Gen. 15,14, "im ]3 ■'pni? after that 6,4; If? ■'p.npi'i? afterward 2 Sam. 3, 28. b) pa in such wise, so, Eccles. 8, 10 (the ad- versative yet lies here in 1), Esth. 4, 16, without there being any necessity for taking the a as in ^y^a for a essen- tiae. c) 13b (b instead of b , when the part attached is firm or has the accent immediately after b, comp. a'lb, lyb, nasb) prop, to such, at such, then a causal adverb, on such account, on that account, therefore, usually at the begin- ning of an important inference (pro- pterea, ideo, idcirco) Ex. 6, 6; Judges 10,13; 1 Sam. 2,30; therefore that some- thing may not take place Gen. 4, 15. Sometimes ""B I?; stands in the prota- sis Is. 8, 6 7, or 1»: alone 29, 13 14. Also: for this very reason, 26,14 so that they (the oppressors) may be destroyed for ]' 669 n:D ever. Sometimes it refers to the folio-w- ing, as also 13-b? (Job 34, 27) Job 20,2. In an adversative sense, like 'JSN (which aee) and ys alone, with the meaning 1/et, yet therefore, nevertheless, Is. 7, 14; 10, 24; 27, 9, with DN {although) in the protasis Jbr. 5, 2; yet it may he sometimes taken as in (a) Ez. 39, 25; Hos. 2, 11. d) f5"V? OR that account because, almost like "isb, for that very reason, therefore, as a consequence Gen. •2, 24; 10, 9; 1 Sam. 5, 5, for that reason Is. 5, 25, conseq. coordinate with the preceding of which it expresses the se- quel. Occasionally "jB'b? does not in- troduce a consequence, but the reason, because, as in south German drum for well, Jer. 31, 20 because my bowels are moved for him, I will have mercy upon him; 48, 36 for they have lost all that they have done with relation to the rem- nant (see n'lr)';); Ps. 1, 5 because sin- ners do not stand in the judgment &c., they shall perish like chaff; 42, 7 for I remember thee from the land of Jordan ■and the Herman mountain (i. e. from the holy land); 45, 3 for God has blessed thee for ever. Earely with the meaning of ijsb (Jer. 5, 2) = nsir-bsa with all this, nevertheless Hab. 1, 17. e) ']^~'bs "iS prop, quod propterea, propterea quod, for because, for on this account &c., where 13 establishes the union with the pre- ceding Gen. 18, 5; 19, 8; 33,10; 38,26; Num. 10, 31; 14,43; 2Sam. 18, 20K'ri; Jer. 29, 28 ; 38, 4. f ) Ij3-I? imtil now, hucusque Neh. 2, 16, where 13 appears to be = Aram. 1?3, since \?3-n? (EzR. 5, 16) is used in the same sense. As to the derivation of this particle, its origin from ']n3 cannot be thought of, whether we look to its manifold signi- fications, or its connection with 3 and nip, or its applications and modes of or- thography in the Babylonian (Chaldean), Syrian, Zabian, Arabian &c. In Ba- bylonian, it is true, it is also 13, but entirely with the meaning of the Hebr. Jib, referring to what follows (see Aram. 13); but 1N3 here, there, i.e. 13 in 1N3^ here, liO^ hither, 1^35? from here, Zab. ^ ita, utique, Syr. ^ now, then, t^oi 80, usually corresponds to it; and from ,^ arises Vao in compounds, after n is changed into l; Ax. ^jS', still preserved in ^jXj (nevertheless). We see from this, that fs may have been a very old par- ticle, of which ")3 is a collateral form. The Babylonian I? 3 (which see) must also be referred to this place both in signification and form; along with which there also existed ^SS (after the form b^a), whence the feminine rip?3 (which see) was developed; and therefore 3 should not be here a preposition. IS Aram. adv. so, thus, ita, as a com- parison-particle referring to what im- mediately follows Dan. 2, 25; 4, 11; 6, 7; 7, 23; Ezr. 5, 3; 6, 2; = Hebr. nb, with which, it is connected etymologi- cally. SO 3 Aram, same as Hebr. rt53 in Pih. It : ITT (which see). Deriv. N»?.?, n23. nJ3 (Kal unused) tr. to distinguish, to come to know, a person or thing being distinguished from others by marks, name, and appellation. The fundamental signification is, as iii VV I. and n. (which see) and in y\'a , to divide, separate, sunder, then to mark, to know. The stem is thus connected with nan IT. n T belonging to riiin, with yp , and in this metaphor, sense with the Sanskr. 'gna, liai-gno, gnd, Greek yv(o; as also in its original meaning with the Greek xvd-ia, xrij-dw, xr/'fto "to pierce into a thing" (comp. d33). Ar. ui, Aram. M53 and "IS 3 the same. Deriv. n53. ' Fih. n33 (fut. np':) 1." (not used) to pierce, bite, cut into, of biting or sting- ing little animals, as gnats, worms &c. Deriv. n33. — 2. Prop, to make know- able (by surnames, marks, titles), hence to name, to distinguish, to address, to call by an honourable name Is. 44, 5; 45, 4; therefore with bsj of the person to speak confidentially to one, to flatter, so far as addressing by surnames was a token of familiarity Job 32, 21 22; comp. Arab. \Jf 11. the same, whence 2ulf o surname, agnomen (= ad-nomen), Syr. nj2 670 mJD the same; no men itself, arose fifom gnomen, from gnosco(i^r«<,Lehrg..l78). nSS A a layer-plant, a shoot (from the masc. ']3) Ps. 80, 16, conseq. refer- ring to 1J5S1 vs. 15 (Targ.). It should be derived from 153 to set, to plant, which this verb may also mean (comp. bma, asta). r T ' r t' T\^^n.p. of a city and territory, desig- nated along with pn and ')'1» as a Sabean mart(Naffl ''bsh), IIISN and'iabsin its vi- cinity being likewise mentioned as Sa- bean places of commerce, with which the Tyrians carried on business inter- course Ez. 27, 23. Since NJjl» is known to be the great district of the Sabeans in south-western Arabia, comprehending several tribes and territories (see NSUJ), 117?' T3t?' '^'"?^ ^^^ "^J^V? should be looked for in south Arabia: prt must be KctQQai situated on the Arabian gulf, 12 stations south of Mecca (Assemani B.O. 111,2. p. 563; Steph. Byzant. s. v.), see y^n p. 491; 'py is the modem Aden (Ar. ■jtV.*) in Yemen, likewise on the south-coast, the Arabia felix of the an- cients; 1 (which see), is ascribed to the Cainite Jvbal G-en. 4, 21, i. e. it originated in pastoral life ; as the god Pan is said to have invented the reed-pipe (fistula pastoricia) and flute (Plin. H. N. 7, 57), and Apollo the lyre. It was the most usual instrument of the Hebrews. Being a stringed instrument it was played upon with the hand (l55 , T^a 1-53) by the ancient Hebrews, and served to dispel melancholy 1 Sam. 16, 16 23; 18, 10; 19, 9; or to accompany a poem or song of praise Ps. 49, 5, b 'SS 172T to sing to one with the accom- paniment of the harp 71, 22; 98, 5; 147, 7 ; '32i 'b Sinilri to give praise to one ac- companied by the harp 33,2; 43,4; also '33 bbrt 150, 3. It was also used in divine service 1 Kings 10, 12, then to accom- pany the songs at drinking feasts Is. 5, 12; 24, 8, and by the roving courte- san 23, 16, generally in rejoicing Gen. 31, 27, but also in mourning Job 30, 31. The instrument immediately fol- lowing the liSS is the asi5> Gen. 4, 21, subsequently the t]ri was added 31,27; and in Samuel's time the b^S and b"'bn 1 Sam. 10, 5. In contrast with the bij, '3 got the epithet 'W^i Ps. 81, 3. ^In the temple-music Q'jriba:^ were added to the '3 Neh. 12,27. '3 "was also used by leading musicians (nssti) to give the tune and tone 1 Chr.15, 21 (see n''3.'iHlS) ; fiibas and D^nb^M being also applied to that purpose 15, 28 ; 16, 5. Playing on the harp is expressed by iSBn Gen. 4, 21, IM 1 Sam. 16, 16, n;a lai 16, 23; the mode of execution upon it by Na3. 1 Chr. 25, 1 3 and perhaps also '\'\'^ilr\ (which see) Ps. 92, 4. Giving the key- note with it is denoted by§''Ml25ti IChr. 15, 28 or np, 15, 21. — This genuine nuD 671 DJD Hebrew word, which is confirmed as a native of the language by rrnDB (which Bee), is called in Syr. 1^1* or ijio, Ar. SJUj (appearing in a great variety of transpositions). In Phenic. 133 is the same, which was played at the mourning festivals of Adonis , and personified by the Greeks as the father of Adonis; from the Pbenicians the word passed over to the Greeks in mvvQa, xivvvqa. m33 Aram, see n53. IT T : IT : niaSi see Hebr. n53. IT ; IT ; IST'DS {Jdhu is founder) n. p. m. Jer. ^2, 24, for which there are, in 24, 1 WSS^ in EsTH. 2, 6 rt;?3^ in 2Kjngs 24^6'vs;^rJ^ in Ez.'lV2 VS^V. 13 may be the participle Kal of ']<13, with a like meaning to 'j"'3''. Q^S (not used) tr. to pierce into, to cut into, to pinch, same as ^I33, of which it is an enlarged form; as also the Greek xvin, xv^&, xviqi are merely enlarged from a simple form identical with TiiS. Arab. (vi5 the same, hence JUJj a wound. Deriv. from an intensive form 033 (from D33) coll. f. Same as Wi's from fl33 Ex. 8, 13 14; but as 633 stands IT • ' ' '* " 1 defect, also in 8, 12, it should perhaps be merely pointed D33, as the Sam. cod. has; Talm. Na^iiS fruit-worm. ' IT • : N1333 (formed from N33 or i33 with T I" : ^ IT : r ! the termination Nm) Aram. adv. so, thus, nominatim, nam, referring to what fol- lows EzR. 4, 8; 5, 9 11, or to what pre- cedes 5, 4; 6,13; on the form and deri- vation comp. Furst, Lehrg. p. 188. A de- rivation of it from 1M«. according to the Talmudic future formNa\';, Na''3 is in- admissible, because a) a Talm. form can hardly be accepted here, b) it must have been written Nai33, and c) coupled with NSIMN EzR. 5, 4, it does not at all T :r-: ^ I . suit. The Syr. hic\s namely, from .^j^P , only proves that the Eesh of IMN may disappear. |J!II (not used) 1. intr. same as 13(1*13) to stand upright, to stand fast, of a base, to he set up, to be fixed, of a post, to- be set, planted, of a slip; deriv. IB 11., 13, !n33. — 2. also like 13 tr. to pre- pare, to make, to fit; deriv. 133 in the proper names "i333, irr^SSB, "33. — The ^ -^ i-t:' it:-:' -it stem is closely connected in its organic root with fl-3p III. and lip, while the IT 't 'i-'t ' Ar. j^kS should be combined with the Hebrew "pj, , 13^; in Phenic. 133 is the same, from which comes the intensive form 133 (channon) set upright, erected^ a post, palus, stipes (PZaut. Poen. 2, 53); NE3ij?T crux in Aramaean having pro- ceeded from a similar fundamental con- ception. pa (consir. 133) see i333, n:;333, IH^^". "'a^S (abridged from rt;33.3; Jah is the Creating) n. p. m. Neh. 9, 4. iT^DDS see IT :- : ^i.T^aaS (the same as i333) n. p. m. 1 Chr! lb, 22, for which 15, 21 has ln^;33.3. irT'aaS (the same) n. p. m. 2 Chr. 31, 12. The - under 3 has remained. ' T DJ3 (part. D33, inf. constr. 0133) tr. 1. to collect, to bring together, D"'35N Ec- CLES. 3, 5, oppos. to ':j"'biBfi; to heap up^ along with tjiDN 2, 26 ; to assemble Esth. 4, 16, 1 Chr. 22, 2, 'a '3 to collect into a thing Neh. 12, 44; 'to gather together Qiri ■'53 Ps. 33, 7. Phenic. D33 the same (Kit. 15, 4); Targ. 033 and \b3|, Syr. ~*J-3, Ar. ijuJS', vJii'the same, hence N12)"'33, the modern Hebrew nD33, Ar. jUuLio, xjmjJS a place of meeting, synagogue, church, temple. (The stem T3.1 adduced above page 294 has also this meaning in the first instance.) — 2. (not used) to veil, to hide, the mem- bers or parts of the body, as also T35 S has the same signification, whence the noun TSS (= tlib.^) is derived. Comp. Ar. (j*i US' ambush. Deriv. 033)3. A fundamental signification to con- ceal, to cover, does not shew itself in Hebrew in this verb, especially as the nouns Di3 and 0''3 do not at all agrea with it; it is also a (question whether S;JD 672 |VJ3 the two meanings of 033 as well as t;3 beloBg together, and whether 0:3 and lii should not be combined in their second meaning with ibn I., ybn I., Aram. Tbn. PiA. 033 (fut. 0337) to collect, the dis- persed ones Ex. 22, 21 ; 39, 28 ; Ps.l47, 2. Hithp. OSSriln to hide oneself, to wrap oneadf, in a covering, Is. 28, 20 and the covering is too narrow to wrap himself m, a proverbial expression to denote an inconvenient situation. y J3 (Kal not used) intr. to bend down, to knuckle down, to bend, hence to be low, of a country, i. e. to be deep-lying; to be bowed, bent, 1. e. to be oppressed; to be bent together, i. e. laid together, folded together, of a travelling bundle ; perhaps also to be laid down, of possessions — but always in an intransitive sense only. Comp. Targ. 855 , Syr. |J-,^ to lie down, incubuit, '«^-is to be low, humble, Ar. tiiito be bent together, folded together. The organic root is more remotely con- nected with -^ov, yvv in ypvv, yvvnsTsTv, Lat. gen-u, Sanskr. gan-u. Germ. Knie &c. The verb seems to have no rela- tionship to ^"13; near though it apparently be. Deriv. tiSSS, W3 in the proper names l?:?, ■'5S'i3-, 'n. p.' t15»S3. Nif. 3»333 (inf.' c'onstr. »33rt, fut.'5ys'<) to bow oneself, to humble oneself, to sub- mit, IKiNGS 21, 29, construed with "i5sa 2 Kings 22, 19, ■^a&b 2 Chr. 34, 27J' or "'JBbHi of the person ibid., more rarely absoL 12, 12; to be subdued, subjected Judges 11, 33, 1 Sam. 7, 13, sometimes with the addition 'B 1^ nnn Ps.106,42; Judges 3, 30. " ' Hif. ^--jijplri (fut. ?''232, ap. yss^) to bow down, to humble, to oppress', Ti'&i, Job 40, 7, :ib Ps. 107, 12, fii'ir list^' Is. 25, 5; to vanquish, to subdue 2 Sam! 8, 1, sometimes with 'B ''jsb Judges 4, 23. 3>33 m. see iy33. ' nSaS (only with SM/.':|n3>a3)/". usually something placed or folded together (see S3 3, espeo. according to the Arabic mean- ing), hence a bundle, a package, a travel- ling bundle, Jee. 10, 17 snatch up together thy bundle from the ground, i. e. to go into captivity; comp. Juvenal 6,146 "col- lige sarcinulas et exi"; the Targ. Nlj'nO (combined with '\'SVS 3) i. e. wares, com- modities, perhaps only with the idea of contempt, seems to follow this explana- tion. More correctly: travelling carpet, travelling cover, which the traveller takes with him to sleep or rest upon; for which nbia "^bB stands in Jeb. 46, 19, and that is also understood to mean travelling covers (see ""bs p. 661). The LXX have vnoatamg support, which also suits the usual meaning of the stem very well. I^SS (out of the primitive form ^33, which still appears in Phenician, with the termination lr3, except that rt33>33, which appears otherwise as a proper name, is abridged in 1^33, like 1973 U$ from ti35>?31lj) 1. «. p. m. of Ham's fourth and youngest son Gen. 10, 6, like aU the posterity of Noah there enumerated, at the same time the progenitor of many peoples descended from him (fj'^S, nn, •oi^i^ •'nfaK, ■'Bj.j'ia, '•m, •')?'i'?, •^ro., ■i^TiN, ■''nas:, •'rari) lo', 16-18." — Scri- I'T : - ' r T : ' r t -/ ' pture alludes to the signification of this name when narrating the deepest slaveiy and subjection of the Canaanites to the Shemites and Japhetites Gen. 9, 20-27 ; and in the narrative neither Ham, who is properly the sinning one, nor his other three sons are cursed. The Cartha- ginians in Augustine's time still refei> red to the origin and meaning of the name as intimately connected with them- selves (Aug. exp. epist. ad Bom. §.13: interrogati rustici nostri, quid sint, Fu- nice respondentes ""SSSS). The curse actually took place so far, that the Se- mite Hebrews and Japhetic inhabitants of Asia Minor actually subdued the Cai- naanites on their coasts, though at first the name had not this meaning. The Phenicians called their progenitor 5>33 (Xra), which is the primitive form of 1933 (Steph. Byz. s. v.), and was still in existence along with the other. — 2. (low tract, flat country) n. p. of the low and pJ3 673 ^Ji/'J3 level coast district of Palestine from the northern boundary of the Sidonian state as far as Gaza, inhabited by the Phe- nicians, principally in very early times, i. e. Phenicia in a more confined sense, a part of the Palestinian coast to which the district of Tyre and Sidon belonged Is. 23, 11, and whose inhabitants were called exclusively ■'3y:_3 Ex. 3, 8 17 ; 13, 5; 33,2; Josh. 3,l6;'li, 3; Judges 3,5; EzR. 9, 1; Nbh. 9, 8, mentioned along with the other Phenician tribes, e. g. "'nn , ■ilbN, 1-Tls, inn, ■'D13"', "iTlJiilii, that dwelt in the interior. And the district of the two Sidonian states was actually called "the great plain" (to fj^ya nsdtov, Joseph. Ant. 5, 3, 1); the ancients {Augustini enarr. in Psalmos 104 §. 7; Hieron. de nominibus hebr.) already explaining the name '3 as above; Scripture, in like manner", describing the Sidonian plain in the north as the border land of Ca- naan Gen. 10, 19, Philistia in the south being excluded, Is. 23, 11 compared with Jer. 47, 4. But this original limitation of Canaan, adapted as it was to the name, was much extended at certain times, so that the signification of the name remains quite unregarded. So e. g. rilJbs is reckoned to Phenicia Zeph. 2, 5, Gen.' 10, 19, and the southern border is extended as far as Egypt, to El-Arish at Rhinocorura &c. Num. 34, 5 ; Josh. 13, 3; 15, 4 47. For the whole Palestine on this side Jordan the name '3 was used only because Phenician tribes had settled there before the Hebrews, and it was therefore applied only archai- cally in describing pre-Israelite states, i. e. when the ancient inhabitants (Num. 33, 40; Dbut. 11, 30; Ez. 16, 29; Ps. 106,38), the wanderings of the patriarchs and progenitors of tribes in this land (Gen. 16, 3; 36,6; 37, 1), the promises respecting it (Gen. 11, 31; 12, 5; 17,8; Ps.105,11), and their fulfilment (Lev.14, 34; 18, 3; 25, 38; Num. 13, 2; 34, 29) were the subject, as well as when later writers speak of the relations of primitive times (JuD. 6, 10; Joseph, in the first books of Ant.) ; but the appellation ceases with the settlement of the Israelites; except that occasionally when one wished to designate the inhabitants of the deep Jordan-valley (Num. 13, 29 ; Josh. 11, 3), or to speak of the land on this side Jordan in contrast with the high land of Gilead (Num. 33, 51 ; Josh. 22, 9 11 32; Judges 21, 12; compared with Gen. 33, 18; 35,6), he used the name "jyiB with a consciousness of its meaning. For "lyiB alone we have often '3 y^N Gen. 11, 31 &c. — 3. {pi. with sujf.^'rr2Si'3) Ca- naanites, Fhenicians, standing for laiN 1^23 or ifys?, as piBra^ (Gen. 15, 2) is for""n ffliN or ipiarai, in the sense of merchants Is. 23, 8, Hos. 12, 8, Zeph. 1, 11, is^.i? (which see) being also used in this meaning. nsyDS (Phenicia, the original form of ■\yy3) ~n. p.m.l Chr. 7, 10, 2 Chr. 18,10, spoken of Benjamite families, perhaps because they were received out of Pheni- cia, such being found in this tribe also from la-'llj'in, 12313 &c. I- : - ' ( '^33'3!3 (pi- 0"'35',33) Gentile m. (from W33), ni35>33 f. 1. a Canaanite male or female, a Phenician male or female. Gen. 38, 2; 46, 10; Ex. 6, 15; Ob. 20; Neh. 9, 24; but ""Syssrt is most frequently used as a collective Gen. 24, 3, Judges I, 1, construed with the sing. Gen. 50, II. As we see under 1^33, the Phe- nicians at the sea are chiefly meant by the word Josh. 5, 1; then the inha- bitants of the depressed valley of the Jordan Num. 13, 29, Deut.11,30, Josh. 11, 3, without including the Phenician tribes, e. g. ''•ns Gen. 13, 7, ijin, inn (nn) Ex. 23, 28,' i-iMii* and iDl^i 13, 5„ ^■Spii Deut. 7, 1, 'i-TSp, istanp Gen. 15, 19-21. But all the inhabitants of Pa- lestine on this side Jordan were archai- cally called so by the Hebrews before the latter got possession of the country Gen. 10, 18 19; 12, 6; Judges 1, 10; hence iSSiSit]! V^N = 1?53 'N Ex. 3, 17, Deut. 11^ 50, for which also we have '3n Qipl? Ex. 3, 8 for Palestine on this side Jordan. — 2. merchant, tradesman (see 1?53) Zech.14, 21, Job40, 30, Prov. 31, 24, iecause the Phenicians were the 43 n^2 674 r]J3 principal commercial people in ancient times. nJ3 (Kal unused) 1. intr. to he at the side, to be bent or turned to the side, to give way to the side; comp. ab3 to lay aside, to purloin, Arab. »«***■ to bend ofif to the side, to give way sideways (whence l«A-^>■ side), ^_aJl&. the same, >.jUj» (^W) deflexit, especially to turn from one religion to another, whence v_ftAAi». a believer, i. e. one who has turned from a false to the true religion, and perhaps the Hebrew tpU vice versa to turn from the true religion, to apo- statise (according to which the funda- mental signification of C|5n above would have to be altered); Targ. :]3. 5 = Hebrew !:]33. Whether, with this fundamental signification, the organic root lies in 1.^ (seeaS5), since Targ. 33, Syr. M\ (with ^^ll-^5^) signify "side", is improbable, ac- cording to the analogy of the Arabic; rather does the organic root appear to be here also E]3".1. Hence according to some the Nifal. — 2. to surround with a rim, to wind about, to cover, to protect, to border, a meaning which the Ar. uftJii' has decidedly; whence i-aaaj a cover- ing, a veil. Deriv. !:i:3. The two meanings distinctly ex- pressed in the verb belong together, and are to be developed out of one another, since a) 5»ba (Ar. /tA^) to bend or turn off, from which comes y^S andsbs side, IT ■" ~ IV ' wing (of a door), country, district, is con- nected withb^ to cover or veil around; b) Aram. ']S'i, isi'n, p^? side, comes from ')B'7, ^?, Ar. "liS to cover about, c) Hebrew b^N side, from bSN, Arab. J-«fl^ to bind about, d) Ar. JaS side, country, from JaS to bind about, e) He- brew bap country, district, from batl to border about, to bind around; and f) Targ. NSSn^, Syr. M^ circumfe- rence, enclosure, mai-gin, standing for Hebr. b3 Prov. 1, 17, or tl-'BSSrt b5»3 EcCL.lO, 20 possessor of wings, a winged one, i. e. a bird; seldom 1)53 alone for bird Is. 10, 14; sometimes without such close union, e. g. '3-b3 'lisa Ez. 39, 17, "bs '3-b3 Ties Gbn.^ 7, 14. — As a figure a) of swiftness, hence wings of the wind Ps. 18, 11, of the dawn 139, 9, and to, this the ancients (LXX, Targ., Kimchi) also referred diB53 bisbs Is. 18, 1 ships r]JD 675 mj3 of wings, i. e. winged ships (bsbst = Ar. JJoJJij ships, Kam. pag. 1495, but see signif. 5); b) very often a figure of protection, hence the expressions .b? '3 tops Edth 3, 9, d'jsssi bsa T^non I's. 17,'8, '3 ba:; non 36, 8- 57, V, '3 'nnoa Mori 61, b, '3 nnn rton Euth 2, 12, expressing the idea of protection. — 2. the sMrt, of an upper garment 1 Sam. 24, 6, fuUy b^Mrt qaS) 24, 5 12 or isan '3 Num. 15, 38,' Hagg. 2, 12, for which we have also r|53 alone 2, 12, Zech. 8, 23, in which sense nisss also stands for the constr. pi. Deut.22,12. — 3. the upper garment, with which one is covered at night, or tAe covering itself Ez. 16, 8, and bs tiiS VilS (= iTtiama^siv ' ' r liiT i-T ^ Lttke 1, 35) of sexual connexion, like ^B nss nba (= 's m'ly Mba) to remove the coverlet of one Deut. 23, 1; 27, 20. — 4. edge, extreme border, of the earth, prop, corner, the earth being conceived of by the ancients (e. g. by Eratosthenes) as a garment spread out. Is. 24,16 from the edge of the earth, i. e. from the Phi- listine and Phenician coasts, they being called yisri ■'pSN (Ps. 72, 8; Zech. 9, 10); usual is the constr. pi. niS53 of the four extreme ends of the earth, the four quarters of the world Is. 11, 12; Ez. 7, 2 K'ri; Job 37, 3. — 5. side (see r|:3). Is. 8, 8 the extensions of his sides are a fulness of the breadth of the land, i.e. the overflowing waters extend widely on both sides , and fill the land. Here belongs B^SD3 bsb^? yig Is. 18, 1 the land of the shadow of both sides, i. e. the shadow of the two mountain-chains of Egypt {Saadia, Ibn G'andch), or better the land of the double shadow, i. e. which throws its shadow sometimes to the south, sometimes to the north, a fact which the ancients found worthy of notice at Meroe (Luc. Phars. 4, 333 ; Plin. H. N. 2,75). Seebj^b^. — 6.tAe upper, extreme end of a building, a point, head, pinnacle &o., generally all that has any resemblance to "a wing". Hence Dan. 9, 27 and upon the battlement (i, e. the extreme end above) of the horrible abomination (tJM^a D-^itipia 9, 27 = yipllS da'iS and tif&-a V>il!il|rt 11, 31; 12, 11), i. e. of the idolatrous altar, and even to destruction and the decree (i. e. till the completed, perfect annihilation) will Ood's anger be poured out upon the abomination. Ar. i.ils'the same. "n j3 (not used) tr. to make bow-shaped, arched, bellied, basin-shaped, to bend; Ar. _fc2» the same, whence »vAJi-a» arched, bent work, especially after the manner of tortoise-shell boxes, or what is made out of tortoise shell. The Hebr. liS (ac- cording to the frequent interchange of 3 and 5i), and Ar. _*.io have the same fun- damental signification (see 'liS). The attempt to explain '133 as onomatopoeic, must be rejected, because of the deriva- tives. Pih. 1ii3 (not used) to make greatly bent, arched, bellied. Deriv. ^iSS, and the proper names irnssi, n^'i33, nils 3. ningS see rrip. nil33 see rTisSi. I-;. Vlv mil's (prop, basin, from "153) 1. n. p. of a basin- shaped and very fruitful district {'nSfys,) and territory from the sea of dha to the south point of Gen- nesaret, which has some resemblance to the hollowed out body of a 1iii3 Dbdt. 3, 17 (where, however, the Jer. Targ. 1. takes it merely as the name of a city, and identifies it with Tabariyya). Jo- sephus (B. J. 3, 10, 7 and 8), as also the Talmud (Berach. 44), already de- scribe the fertility of this low-lying territory (TsvvtjaaQms, niDps), which was 30 stadia long and 20 broad, ac- cording to the former. The word com- monly occurs in the plur. rii'133 1 Kings 15, 20 or ni'nji3 Josh. 11, 2. — 2. re. p. of a city built in this basin at the sea of Galilee (n'nS3 b^}, which was assigned toNaphthali Josh. 19, 35. In later times it was called "nDiaa (rerewsar (Megilla 6"). In the Talmudic' period one Jonathan ben Charsa was born there (Tosiphta Ke- lim, at the end); and at the time of Parchi (at the beginning of the 14^'' century) it 43* ti^JD 676 «DD was still in existence, lying, without doubt, one hour north-west of Tabariyya, where the ruins of Gansur are stilj found at the present day. From the name of this city the sea of Galilee, so-called at a later time, was styled n'nS3-D'' Num. 34, 11, Josh. 13, 27, or ni'i33 fif 12, 3; in the Talmud or'-oa bijfi" N^'v The later word 1D55 , '10155 (in the Targ. and Mishna), revvriadQ (l Macc. 11, 67), rsvi'iiaaQ£& (n'nDpa) in Josephus and the New Test., is to be derived perhaps from 05S , Ar. iimJl^ to make a bow, to bend (comp. nuX& , IW.AA inflexit, incurvavit) ■with the formative syllable 1- (comp. T'SSO, Trao, "lasy &c.), which amounts to the same fundamental signification. The Galilean Sea is now called el- Shuweir. ti'JS {inf. idiSW) Aram. tr. to gather together, Dan. 3, 2, Hebrew 05 3, Syr. *-»JLs, Arab. ^j^. Ithpe. lZ553inN {part. pi. y^^^sm) to be gathered together Dan. 3, 3 27. nSS (after the form n5M, nS)?, see Furst, Lehrgeb. p. 177 ; pi. ni53 after the Aramaean manner, since in Hebrew we should expect niNSSi like niffSSM, or n'i'153 like rv5M from n5a, with sujf. J T : it: it : ' " in 15 3) fem. prop, abstr. the giving of a title, the being invested with an honourable name, acquaintance, intimacy, like nSIlM: therefore concrete: one invested with of /ice, a friend, an associate, col- league EzR. 4, 7 (the idea of likeness lies more in the suffix than the noun). n33 (only 2?Z. 1153, constr. m53, with suf. nm53, Iinm3'3, as if from 153) " 1" TIT : ' ' I : ITT ; ' I ; / Aram. f. same as Hebr. n53 Eze. 4, 9 17 23; 5,3 6; 6,6 13; Syr. ):Cla the same. 03 see rt'^03. r I : - D3 m. a throne, in the old poem Ex. 17, 16 for NS3, which form singularly abridged was interpreted by the Tal- mudic Hagada like the use of S'^ (see Bashi). But the cod. Sam. has the full form NO 3 instead. Since, however, the meaning "throne" gives no sense what- ever, and a verb is wanting to the phrase ft"' 03-b3> T'-'3, moreover since r IT 1" - IT • ' , the formula of an oath is never ex- pressed so, and also because the intro- ductory ■'3 is obviously intended to ex- plain the preceding altar -name ''SS "'^ (17, 15), it is better to read 05, and translate with the preceding verse: and Moses built an altar (in remembrance of the victory over Amalek), and called it (better "the banner planted upon it") "God is my banner". And he said (as the reason of this appellation): for the memorial (see T^ page 539) is upon the banner of God: "Jehovah wages war with Amalek from generation to generation" i. e. the sentence from rtanba to 1^ is IT I : ■ I the memorial or sign of remembrance, the inscription (li), as it were, upon the divine banner (H'' 05) of the altar ■'S5 ''i. The LXX read"rt|;03 T;;:? i3 {erxsigl nQV(faia) for with veiled (i. e. invisible) power (God wages &c.), which must be rejected on occount of its total deviation from the text. XDD (not used) tr. same as 03 (003 IT T ^ ^ r ^ r T which see) 1. to determine, to appoint, a festival-time ; Syr. |ji3 1, (not connected with |J43 II. to cover), cognate in sense 1»; I. whence 1?l (feast) and 1?ia (the same) which connects with 1» (yp), Ar. Jk£, Syr. r^ to establish, to determine; comp. Syr. fr^r^ feast, proceeding from the same fundamental sig^nification. Comp. too On I. (which see), whence 073 and nOM. Deriv. N03 and N03 (accord- IT • VIV ^ Vj" ^ ing to mss.). — 2. to establish; in relation to number, to enumerate; to appoint, fix, with relation to price, amount; deriv. n03n (after the form msa), or with IT : • ^ IT : • -" relation to tax, census, whence 03)3 (after the form is^M, b5>a 2, ^5>n, Tta from 1-1- ' -I- ' . -r' VI-.- n5J>, ribs, tTn5> and MIT). ITT ' )T T ' ITT TT-' The meaning of the verb now given being sufficiently attested by origin and analogy to the nouns derived from it, it only remains to investigate the point, from what objective view the significa- t vp , as 03 also is connected with yp.; '' * ^ > '" . ' Ar. LIj the same, whence the deriva- ? o J^ ? o J, tive nouns LwwJ, Lw5 section, part. SC3 (in 2 mss. MD3, in many edi- tions NOa) OT. prop, festival, feast-day, like lyia, whether at the new or full moon; metaphor, a settled, definite time, without relation to a festival Pro v. 7, 20 {Easki), where Aquila and Jerome unnecessarily translate "feast-day of the full moon", Ihn Esra "feast-day of the new moon"; Syr. Ui= prop, festival, on the 14* (Tsabar 'Ali), the 15*(Peshito on 1 Kings 12, 32), the 23* (ibid, on 2 Chr. 7, 10) of a month, either in Tisri (Peshito 1. c), November (Assem. B. 0. n. 304) or December (ibid. 277). See nD3. vr ND3 see rtD3. NS3 (Job 26, 9 and 1 Kings 10, 19 nB3;" with suff. i!SD3, *INC»3, i^O?, pi. riNO?, with «m/." DniND'3, in 'which forms the Dagesh is dropped; from 013, which see) m. a high seat, an ele- vated, arched seat (see 0113); hence a throne, a) of the high priest 1 Sam. 1, 9; 4, 13, to give public audience from it. b) of a king, a symbol of his dignity and honour Gen. 41, 40, 1 Kings 1, 37 47; hence it is taken for kingdom = nsbaa, nsbTsn, nobn (so the LXX) 2 SAMy 3, ibVl4, 9; 1 Kings 2, 12 33; Jbr. 22, 4; 43, 10, fully rDbnn '3 Dbut. 17, 18; 2 Sam. 7, 13; 1 Kings 9, 5, '3 ri3bn 1 Chr. 22, 10; 28, 5, nsb^jiM '3 2 Chr. 23, 20. The throne of David, i. e. the sovereignty of his dynasty, is called niT NB3 2 Sam. 3, 10, bsni?: '3 1 Kings's", 20, ^'^ nialpa '3 1 Chr. 28, 5, ■I'l '3 29, 23, bi8'nil5^"ni3 '3 Jbr. 33, 17, or NB3 merely,^ 2 Sam. 7, 16. c) of a vicegerent, i. e. his seat of rule Neh. 3, 7. d) an elevated seat, place of honour generally, in palaces and among the great, Prov. 9, 14; Is. 47, 1. e) a seat of judgment Ps. 122, 5, fully T''^ '3 Prov. 20, 8, hence tribunal, f ) figur. the throne of God, i. e. his government, administra- tion Jer. 3, 17, Ps. 11, 4, and judicial office 9, 8; 97, 2; 1 Kings 22, 10; also called iB"ip '3 Ps. 47, 9 or nias '3 Jer. V'l • I T • 14, 21. The splendid description of God's throne Is. 6, 1 seq., Ez. 1, 26 and 10, 1, Job 26, 9 &c. is to be taken as vision- ary and symbolical. The noun ND3 (nB3 Job 26, 6 origi- nated perhaps from nijtOB = iN03) is developed out of ND'nB, fio'iB (after the form M?.'1N, JTlTSy) by the assimilation of r, as the Targ.'sD'^lB, Np'i3, "'O'^IB, 10'113, Syr.J-^'aa, Arab. ^^_^ clearly shew; and since the Syr. 1^»J" knap^ sach,1^axs. Dp3, Syr. \^-r> belly, body, is connected with it, the tracing of it back to an arched, rounded and raised form is unquestionable; see DpB. 1(102 see ■''1103. r : - ' '• nD3 (in Kal only part. act. m. MD3, pass.. ■'<1D3, constr. ^WSi) trans, to cover (with a 'lid), to clothe^ to envelop (with a veil); to enclose, of a case, a cap- sule (see nD3); to cover over, to conpeal, sin Ps. 32,'" 1, shame Prov. 12, 16, knowledge 12, 23; but Pihel usually stands for this. Deriv.i1D3, niD?i, n03, niD3M. The stem '3 , Targ. NOB , ''0? (to cover, to hide, to conceal), Syr. lJi3n.(to be- deck, to clothe), Arab. L^ (to attire), appears to have also had for its funda- mental signification intr. to be fat, thick, fleshy, since fleshiness, fatness, thick- ness, fulness were conceived of as a state of the body clothed or covered, to which Job 15, 27 points, where we have the expressions "to cover with fat, to put on suet". Besides, the idea of den-, sity, pressing together, binding together is cognate, the one being merely an extension of the other. Accordingly, nD3 678 nmD3 ntos (whichsee), Ar. fji^ (to be thick, dense), Uia.(to be fleshy), okJ andLiJ {to be dense, to be twisted together), ^^^^(to be full, whence JUyiii'fat on * ^ ^ the belly), Lwl&. (to become fat), Syr. ^^4= (to be thick-fleshed, whence ]hjajao hip Matth. 3, 4) &c. &c. are identical with rtD3. The idea of " covering" passes over, in another direction, to that of "protecting" (see Is. 51, 16); and there- fore '3 is also connected with Dn (Din), Arab. ^joL&- (to cover or close the eyes), in (tin) &c. &c. Once it appears to stand for rton Ps. 143, 9 (LXX). Nif. tlDSS {inf. niOSirt) to be covered, of a land'by (a).D"|^a ]iart Jek. 51, 42; to be covered over Ez. 24, 8. Pih. nS3 {part. tlB^U; inf. constr. niS3; fut. r\q'y],'apoc. D57) to cover. Num. 22J 5, Ps. 78,' 53, figur! Ez, 7, 18; Jbr. 51, 51; Ps. 69, 8; Job 22, 11 the over- flow of the waters (i. e. peril of death) covers thee, i. e. surrounds thee on all sides; 23, 17 and because of my counte- nance, which darkness covers (i. e. suffer- ing covers); to cover over, nNian, said of God, i. 6. not to regard it = NIBS Ps. 85,3; to vol, enfold Num. 9, 15; 17,7; to cover with a veil Gen. 88, 15 ; Is. 29, 10 your heads — the seers — hath he covered, i. e. put into a state of sleep and unconsciousness; Job 9, 24 the face of their judges he veils, so that they cannot distinguish right and wrong; to cover over Dect. 23, 14, with 5i where- with Lev. 7, 13 ; Judges 4, 18 ; 1 Kings 1, 1 ; io enwrap Ps. 147, 8 ; iabria rss '3 Job 15, 27 he hath covered his face with his fat, i. e. he has fattened himself, he has been a slave to his body; but also with the accus. of the covering along with the accus. of the object, Hab. 3, 3 he covered the heavens with his splendour. Then to conceal, to keep secret, to make in- visible Job 31, 33; 33, 17; Prov. 10, 6 18; 11, 13; 28, 13; to protect, T^ bssj Is. 51, 16; to clothe 58, 7, also witli the accus. of the garment Ez. 16, 10; 18, 16; figur. Ps. 104, 6; to fill, with blS Job 36, 32 he fills his hands with light, i. e. he has his hands full of lightnings. But "S is frequently put with bj? of the object Lev. 4, 8; Num. 16, 33;' Job 21, 26. In Job 36, 30 T^b^ should be sup- plied from the first member, and the translation is: and with the roots of the sea (i. e. with the depths of the sea of clouds) he covereth himself. Here belong also the passages where tlB3 has ap- parently an intr. signification Gen. 38, 14, Dbut. 22, 12, Jon. 3, 6, but where only V? of the person with the suff. is left out. With a Ps. 44, 20 or the accus. of the covering Ez. 24, 7; sel- dom with b of the object Is. 11, 9; in the sense to keep secret with ^n of the person Gen. 18, 17. Construed with bij Ps. 143, 9 !i03 appears to be = iion, the LXX reading the latter. !iS3?3 Lev. 9, 19, Is. 14, 11 and 23, 18, 'Ez.'27, 7 is to be taken as a noun. Puh. n&3 {part. 'nf_iil3 , fut. tl&3^) and lnB3 (3 p. pi. 1S3) to ie covered, clothed. Gen. 7, 19 20; Ps. 80, 11 ; Prov. 24, 31; figur. Eocles. 6, 4. Hithp. riS3nn {part. nB3ntt; fut. TiSiScy], apoc. D3n'j) to cover or clothe oneself, to wrap oneself up , with a of the covering 1 Kings 11, 29; 2 Kings 19, 2 ; figur. Is. 59, 6 and they do not cover themselves with their works, i. e. they are good for nothing; seldom with the accus. Jon. 3, 8, or absol. Gen. 24, 65. nD3 see ND3. »1D3 (see ND3; once, in 18 mss. NC3) V(" Vlv' VI"' m. same as Np3, but principally used of the feast held at the new moon of Tisri Ps. 81, 4, where it is paraU. with lanh and designated as Wlln Dii ; the Talm. ND3 is also used of this festival. From verse 6. and onward, the feast-poem of verses 2-5. is not continued. nD3 see NS3. I" • I" ■ nrTiBS {fern, of the masc. niB3, from IT - — I - ' nD3 Piht) cut off, spoken of dry withered twigs, as fuel for burning Is. 5, 25 {Ibn Esra, Kimchi); it is therefore unneces- sary to take 3 as meaning as. Accord- ^IDD 679 ^D3 ing to the Targ., LXX and Vulg. it comes from niD or iinO. - 1 IT I ""IDS {constr. ''<|D3) m. a covering Num. 4, 6 U. niO? (with su/f. nn«iD3, *inipSi), f. a covering, upper garment Deut. 22, 12, Is. 50, 3, couey Ex. 22, 26, clothing 21, 10, for protection against cold Job 24, 7; 31, 19; metaphor, veiling, conceal- ment 26, 6. D'^S-'S '3 Gen. 20, 16 a veil- .,- ..J ... ing of the eyes, i. e. not seeing what is done = appeasement, expiation; conseq. the passage should be translated: behold, this is to thee an expiation for all that has happened to thee; comp. 'S ""JB lri&3 (Job 9, 24), 'B ■'DB 'IB? (Gen! 32, 21), IVi, D^r? (Ex!23j8)-, as vice versa we have the expression 'b TjOM nba (Is. 22, 8). The Targ. and LXX have rendered the phrase according to the sense. nD3 {part. pass. m. 0103, pi. Q"'niD3, fan. !iniD3) tr. to cut off, to hew off, d"'5tip Is. 33^12 • to prune, IBS Ps. 80, 17, in order to burn the branches; Targ. nD3, Syr. >-ifl-o the same. The stem is con- nected with ys)?, 5>Ta, Ar. LIX The organic root is n0"3. Pih. nS3 (not used) to cut off, thorn- twigs. Deriv. (according to some) nniB3. b'^D? Cp'- t3'''b''!?3, withsM/.filr!''b''5?3) m. 1. the obdurate (the sense proceeding from the objective idea to he thick, fleshy, fat, comp. Germ, feist and fest), hence a fool, whom correction does not im- prove Prov. 20, 1 and 17, 16, whom one does not like to meet 17, 12 &c.; often used in Proverbs and Ecclesiastes , out of which a picture of the person may be derived, and by which the word may be strictly distinguished from 'nsa, b">lN, TIB. Fatness and fleshiness sym- bolise obduracy, dulness, insensibility, and sinfulness Is. 6, 10; Ps. 17, 10; 73, 7; 119, 70; just as iniu and fflsu (in their objective meaning to be fat) are also applied in the sense of, to be fool- ish, stupid, dull (comp. itaxvg, pingnis, in the classics), and from the Aram. uSbU, vas^ to be fat come IDBU to act very foolishly, ilSst: a fool, 1125BU folly ; for which reason the analogy of b]N, ba3, as given above, should be abandoned. — 2. rich, Prov. 19, 1 (Syr., Vulg.), oppos. to 1131 (T'lBS* stands in the almost verbally repeated passage 28, 6), na- turally with the accessory idea of pride, high-mindedness , sinfulness (see Prov. 18, 23; Mic. 6, 12; Matth. 19, 23), which suits the fundamental significa- tion of b03. — 3. {pi. D''b'^03) a firm one, a strong one, a hero, giant, hence the constellation Orion, which was con- ceived of as a giant walking along the vault of heaven Am. 5, 8, Job 9, 9 (LXX "EcTTisQog, probably for AQxiovgog) and 38, 31 (LXX iiglmv), then the great con-^ stellations generally Is. 13, 10 (accord- ing to 3n O'andch Canopus) ; the Semites in other respects (Targ. n|5''?3, Syr. ij^al-^, Ar. jLa&.), and in part the Per- sians and Greeks representing Orion in in a similar light. The niSTS.n (fetters) are the indissoluble clusters of stars. — 4. (fat district) n. p. of a locality in the south of Judah Josh. 15, 30 (libD3 15, 10 is different). r!lb"'DI3 f. obduracy, folly Prov. 8, 13.' bO'D (fut. bD3^) intr. 1. to be thick, fleshy, fat, cognate in sense with )iz^ and tOBU (Ar. J*^, whence the noun JjO thickness of body, fatness), particularly applied to the fleshy, fat loins (see Job 15, 27). Deriv. ^03 1, nbo? in the proper name lian nfto?. — 2. Figur. a) to be fat, fruitful, of a district or lo- cality, abn L (abn, abn, nabn, abt^N, ■)iabn) and luiB being also transferred to names of places; deriv. the proper names TibD3, nb03, b-'D3 4. b) to be strong, powerful, heroic, stout, of persons, as also abn I. (see the proper name abn) and la^Pderiv. b-'M 3, lbD3, bib?3, lbD3,'"the proper name TibD3.' c) gener- ally to be firm, strong, to shew firrhness, to trust, deriv. nbD3 1, b03 2; and me- taphor, to be rich (comp. (^ to heap l^DD 680 n^DD ■up, to bring together), deriy. b"'p3 2. — 3. to he obdurate, dull, foolish, hence to he sinful, like lasti and piTB; and so coupled ■vrith 'isa Jeb. 10, 8. ' Deriv. b"'p3 1, 1jD3 S.'nib-'DS, !lbD3 2. ^D3 see lian-ribDB. ?p2l (with suff. ^bpB; ^Z. d'^bDS), with sw;f. ■'303) m. prop, a fleshy, firm mass, a thick lump, hence 1. loin, of men Job 15, 27, Ps. 38, 8, or of animals Lev. 3, 4; 4, 9; 7, 4; Ar. ji^ (thick- ness). — 2. Figur. firmness, strength, then steadfastness, trust, % "3 D"'fe Ps. 78, 7 to put trust in one; Job 8, 14; strength, support 31, 24 (parallel naSM); Peov. 3, 26 (like 'its* Ex. 18, 4), Targ. ISO, where the Vulg. translates it un- necessarily by side, after bss 1- — 3. obduracy, folly, Ps. 49, 14 this their doing, i. e. their trust in wealth (vs. 7) and the final, visible uselessness of it, is their folly; Eccles. 7, 25. nbpS (with suff. ^b?3) f. 1. con- fidence, hope Job 4, 6, coupled with rti j?Fi. — 2. /o%, i. e. stupidity, unbelief Ps. 85, 9. nbD3 (constr.cZ. nib D3, fromamasc. b03) f. flank, side, prop, loin; see riibD3 man. I r ni)D3 (only pZ. nib03) see nibD3. "ibDS see nbD3. i~ -• - r: • 1 JD3 m. name of the ninth month among the later Hebrews Zbch. 7, 1, Nbh. 1, 1, introduced along with the names of the other months (Eosh ha- Shana ch. 1, see bibs, naa &c.) out of Babylonia by the exiles, when they re- turned home. The Targ. writes T'bi??, the Jpocr. and Joseph, read ibD3 (1 Macc. 1, 54 Xaaslsv; Antt. 12, 5, 4' and 7, 6 Xmlif); in Palmyrene it is blbl33; and the somewhat singular form lb03, ibp3 may therefore be referred to bibp3. — As to its derivation, it has sometimes been compared with JUwkS'to be inert, torpid • sometimes with the Aram. i«b03 dirt, arid finally with bp3 to con- tract, to be cold, all referring to the state of the weather. But apart from the fact that these significations of the stems and their application are very uncertain, we must presuppose, even from the analogy of the other names of the months which have come into use through the Aramaeans, as bibN, "TJINj T1l2n (which see) &c., that '3 originated in the primitive Semitic worship, and should therefore be explained accord- ingly. In the forms b 'ujttn Is. 19, 18; O IT 1" T ' ■ but more exact details cannot be had. The inhabitants of this eastern tract of Egypt bordering upon Palestine, Phi- listia and Arabia, where were also ^xasi (which see) and the home of the Hyk- sos (i. e. Hebrew, Syrian, Phenician, Arabian and Carian settlers), were there- fore called D-'tibos Gen. 10, 14, 1 Chb. 1, 12, who bemg mixed with Hamite Egyptians presented a mongrel people with a more Semitic colouring, of whom a part emigrated to Philistia, being DTifflbs (which see) according to Gen. 1. c. Another colony founded by the Caslochians is said to have been Colchis (from. CasloeMs); since the Col- chians came from Egypt, according to the testimony of antiquity (Pindar, Herodotus, Strabo). As to the. derivation of the name, the first part 03 appears to be certain in its manifold applications, and originated with the Phenicians or Semites who settled and traded in that territory, calling a) the mountain district at the Orontes connecting Lebanon and Taurus (Plin. 4, 22, 18), and reaching from Antiochia to Seleucia, by that appel- lation, and practising the worship of 03 b?a. b) The same Semites or Phe- nicians named similarly the haven-town Cassope in Epii-us (situated in a moun- tainous district at the Ambracian gulf), and supported a temple of Baal-Cas (Jupiter Casius) there, see Suetonius, Nero ch. 21. c) They also designated in the same way the city and harbour Kaanioitrj (Plin. 4, 12, 29) in Corcyra, having a similar temple, except that the worship was afterwards Graecised; and so we have Zsvg Kdamg on coins. The meaning of 03 appears to be in Phenician mountain, hill (Ax. LwJ, (^v^ to project, to be high), with the acces- sory idea of wildness or barrenness (comp. !TiT5), identical in stem with ODp , TT| ; the Coptic r&.c mountain is bor- rowed from the Phenician. The second syllable n'b is to be derived from nb to i ~' IT lighten, to bum, to shine, to make dry, these ideas being connected in other words also, Ar. _y, (3-^ (to lighten, to shine, make dry), fib is identical with the org, root in pb""! , conseq. the noun n'b denotes dryness, the state of being burnt with the sun. Thus n'bD3 means a dry, barren mountain. The attempted explanation from a self- developed Sanskrit word katshaloko, said to mean coast-land (Hitzig, TJrgeschichte etc. I. p. 92), must be rejected because no information exists of an extra-Semitic immigration there. DTlbos see n'bOB. r •- : - - I : - DD3 (fut. 003^, inf. abs. Dip3) tr. 1. prop, to cut, to cut off (comp. Targ. D03 to cut in, then to injure, to offend, like Dbs), hence to shear, to poll, the hair of the head after a certain mea- sure Ez. 44, 20, so as to be neither tooi nDD3 682 P|DD long nor too short; identical with the stems DTS (not QOn), dXJ, urp^ {to u'^-pj, Syr. >ors, Ar. ^, j,jjs., ^-S, |V«*i", iv*»o» &c. — 2. (not used) «o s^Zii, di- vide, separate, cogn. in sense with 'nSiB I., 5»'1S, ']13, constantly proceeding from the idea of cutting, separating from one another, dividing off; metaphor, to form hairs, bristles, hair-like points, hair being conceived of as a thing singled, divided (comp. 'isto, l^to, yns, Aram. rT'ra); applied especially to the bristly, rugged points of certain ears of com, e. g. barley (see tTn'Sia). Pih. aD'iS (= aB3 with r inserted; fut. QD'13';) to browse, to feed upon, prop, to cut away, to shear off, spoken of the feeding of the wild boar Ps. 80, 14; Aram, ftp"!)?, Arab. (•SjJ, |*-^r*) i^^r* &c., all connected with the fundamental signification mentioned. Puh. DB3 (not used) to be furnished with rugged,, bristly points, of certain kinds of spelt. Deriv. n?2B3. rriDS (from Puh. I3BS); pi. CWDS)) fern, a low kind of barley with bristly, rugged and sticking up points, usually the prickly spelt, which is coupled with fen Ez. 4, 9 a mean species of grain, sown on the borders of barley fields as a sort of enclosure to them Is. 28, 25, and which ripens, like titan, later than common barley Ex.9, 32. LXX, Aq. and Theod. translate ?««, which signifies a kind of barley (= Sanskrit yaua, Pers. gav barley); on the other hand, Saadia andiJra G'andch (but only by conjecture) have HiXMyS (Talm. Wia-is) or jjLJLa. (Talm. Nabi5, ab^1) vetch. DD3 (fut. Ob;, 3p.pl. >iBb;) tr. prop, to split, to divide, to separate, thence to number, to determine, cogn. in sense with nils (Targ. and Syr. render it by Hii2 , ).l^)Ex. 12,4; identical, as a stem, with fh VP-' V^i ''"^^ ™ its organic root. In elucidation of the fundamental sig- nification comp. Targ. 03 to cut, to pierce, hence to chew, to bite in pieces (figur. to violate), D3 the same. np3 I. (fut i\b'D'i) intr. prop, equi- valent to, to draw in, to withdraw hasti- ly, e. g. the light (Ar. v_iM*5'and uAaw^ to withdraw the light, of the sun and moon, comp. 51?^), or a lively, bright- shining colour (so that an object be- comes weak, pale), or the vital juice; conseq. identical ip its organic root with that in r|p-N, M-BO, ^Ig- Hence 1. (not used) of colour, to be pale, white, whi- tish-grey: a) of the glimmering whitish colour of silver, Ar. ui.< fijv of the grey- ness of ashes , i-9« M ~> to be dry, withered. Deriv. tjOS, the proper name N''BD3. it: • IT Nif. r]033 (part. !r]D33, inf. absol. t]035) 1. to turn pale, to be terrified, Zef. 2, 1 the people not afraid (i. e. defiant) (LXX, Syr.). — 2. to long after, with b, to desire greatly Gen. 31, 30; Ps. 84,3. nD3 n. (fut. C|b3'^) intr. to asscdl, to rush, to pursue closely, Ps. 17, 12 like a lion which assails in order to tear in pieces, which suits the parallelism. From this fundamental signification we might perhaps explain better signif. 2. of !:]B3 L to desire a thing violently, to long for. The stem is closely connected with r|^p , Aram. C]Sn, Arab. t_A. in NnttJn from Nn3>ttJ sn , IT - IT (T : - IT take place only because they are Vowelless. ■jys see n3y3 r353 (fem. from the tnasc. "ffS = I??) an adverb of time, now, but also accord- ing to another meaning of 13, so now, n3»31 and so now EzB. 4, 10; 7, 12, i. e. and so forth, et cetera; contracted ni>33) intrans. 1. (not used) to be rocked to and fro, to be pushed about, to be moved about, to be driven hither and thither, identical with USS-J (which see), Targ. irJa?., Syr. .^, Ar. \Ji.^r^ , and with the organic root in iaa"3 , perhaps also in UJn (which see). — 2. Eigur. to rage, to foam up, cognate in sense tl¥!i?> opposite t3p_iB Ez. 16, 42, and parallel 1^ ppri Ps.li2^ 10; to he disturbed, Eccles. 6, 16 and he is very much disturbed, and harm isto him (vhn =ib "hn) and eascitem^nt; then ^ 1 : T r I- T.' _ to be angry, to be indignant, Egcles. 7, 9 ; to be displeased, out of humor Neh. 3, 33, with bij of the person to be wroth with one, 2 Chr. 16, 10. Deriv. D?3, i03>3. -r Pih. Dy3 to provoke, to irritate, with 3 with a thing, and accus. of the pers. Dbut. 32, 21 ; to grieve 1 Sam. 1,6, where, how- ever, the verse appears to have been 0?3rii wn'nsbn fnD5>3b tnati'i lao ■''''i t^'^^l? 'Ti??.|i according to the LXX. jffif. &''»3n (part. D''?3M, inf constr. O'^ysrt; fut'. D"'»32i apoc' OSIS^y to »»«*« dispirited, to excite, to terrify Ez. 32, 9 ; to provoke, to make angry, e. g. God by idolatry &c. 1 Kings 15, 30; Jer. 7, 18; to cause vexation, sorrow, 7, 19; in a stronger form Cy3 '3^t 1 Kings 15, 30 and 21,22; poet.'s'^'pilMFi '3^i Hos.l2, 15 to provoke most bitterly. CyS (4 times in Job to?3; with suff. ■'py? , ^??3 ; pi. D"'py3) m. sorrow, vexa- tion, p'rov. 17, 25; 21, 19; Ps. 10, 14, anger Prov. 27, 3, agitation, dislike, 12, 16; EccLES. 7, 9; provocation, of God 1 Kings 15, 30; 21, 22; 2 Kings 23, 26; Deut. 32, 19; hence sinfulness Ez. 20, 28; unquietness Ecclbs. 2, 23; 11, 10; insecurity 1, 18. JD53 WMSC. the same, Job 5, 2; 6,2; 10, 17; 17, 7; Phenic. iB5>3 the same (Tug. 5). rS"? see nws). t)3 (from E1S3 I.; with suf. iE3, is3; dual &'^B3, constr. ■'B3, with sujf. "^ES. 'rj'^B?; plur. niB3; Arab.v.I^);/'. (like other names of the members of the body r, va;, 5>a2iN, ina, bj';?,, dsb &c.) the curved hand, the hollow of the hand, into 1=5 685 HDD which one pours a thing Lev. 14, 15, which one fills 1 Kings 17, 12, in which something is held Is. 28, 4, conseq. dif- ferent from 11; compare the northern hnimma, the hollow hand, Greek xvXXi^ a cup and the hollow hand. In use 1. for hand generally, with which one seizes Dbut. 25, 12, Ez.21,16, or works Prot. 10, 4. Here belong the phrases 's 0352 bisn,yTi:irt, MIS, biH& to rescue, liberate, redeem &c. out of one's power. Judges 6, 14; 1 Sam. 4, 3; Jer. 15, 21; Mic. 4, 10; as one says in an opposite sense 's lia ins Judges 6, 13, 's nsa jsa Prov. 6, 3; where also l^ may always stand. Other expressions are C]3 DiilS '3 b? either to lay the hand upon one Job 40, 32, or to protect Ps. 149, 5; nsb t]3 QiiD to lay the hand upon the mouth, a token of silence Job 29, 9; :)53 U3S3 QiiU to stake the life Judges 12, 3, prop, to carry the life in the hand in order to give it up. EjS rtBfi see li33 ; '3 s>)?n see y^J.n; "d sna see Nn^j. Dual Dips both hands. Is. 36|32; 49,\6; but more frequently as a plur. especially in the phrases '3 Ntoi Ps. 63, 5 (and the noun-form in accordance 141, 2) to pray; bN '3 Nto; 119, 48 to lift up the hands to a thing, i. e. to appropriate it willing- ly; bsj '3 iopi Ex. 9, 29 or b Ps. 44, 21, merely '3 to'is Is. 1, 15 or with the accus. of direction 1 Kings 8, 22, and '3 ntauj bij Ps. 88, 10 to pray, to turn as a sup- pliant to; "s~hy NiUi to bear upon the hands, i. e. to protect Ps. 91, 12; pn '3"b? to grave upon the hands (i. e. the names) = to remember continually Is. 49, 16; and so many other modes of expression which are to be found under the verbs belonging to them. PI. ris3, coupled with 'a']'r, either as a mere tautology for ^yv, or better the palm of the hand as a part of it, whether living Dan. 10, 10, or cut off 2 Sam. 5, 4; 2 Kings 9, 35. — 2. the paw, the fore- foot, of animals Lev. 11, 27. — 3. with ba*! the sole of the foot Deut. 2, 5, coupled with even to the tiSn'I Is. 1, 6 or l)?!)? Deut. 28, 35 denoting the whole length of the body. For this stands also the pi. niSi3 Josh. 3, 13, and that either for ^513 generally Deut. 28, 65, or figurat. in Dibp nis3-b5J to the soles of the feet, i."e. in the dust Is. 60, 14, sel- dom of the ark Ez. 43, 7 (see DilH.), or with the addition of d?s 2 Kings' 1'9, 24. — 4. a pan, a dish, in the sing, and plur., on account of its resemblance to the bent hand Num. 7, 14 56; 5>b)5.M t\'2 I Sam. 25, 29 the dish (hollow) 'of the sling; '^'r^ t\'s Gen. 32, 26 the hollow or socket of the thigh. — 5. handle, only in plur. Song op Sol. 5, 5. — nis3 Lev. 23, 40 belongs to n33 = !iS3. C]!3 {plur. d^BSi; from S]13) masc. a cliff, a rock, in whose di'nh the ori- ginal inhabitants of Edom lived like troglodytes Job 30, 6. An invading enemy clambers over JjS (a iibi) Deut. 5, 5; Jer. 5, 10; Ps. 24, 3) Jer. 4, 29. In Aram. (Targ. NBi3, Syr. la*a, Isla, hence ND^S, K^cpae in the New Test, for the proper name lUrQog) it is the usual word for stone, rock, cliff, reef, projecting bank. The stem CJIS has chiefly the meaning " to project, to be prominent, to rise aloft", the same existing in extra- Semitic languages (comp. Sanskrit kap in ^a^-ala, Greek xsfp-alri, xvcp-og, xv^-ij, Latin cap-ut, German Kapp, Kuppe, Kopf, Gipf-el &c. &c.) ; and since !Tl.!i I. belonging to the noun !TI.!| (pi. niia) bank proceeds from the same point of view, and tp'3 in Aram, actually means bank, the verb £]in for the noun C]h seems to have the same meaning as i\M. The original signification is to cut off, to split off, like the Ar. oo (secuit); and there- fore it is applied to a separated, divided, rough rock, to an inaccessible cliff, as is also S>bD from J>bO, Ar. ILu (to di- vide, to cut off), P^^ a rock. The verb l*)^ belonging to the noun IIS rock, and the Greek anotofiog, axQotoiios, QccxTog proceed from the same mode of viewing a thing. nD3 (fut. fissi) tr. same as na3 (of which it appears to be a collateral form) to emtinguish, CjlS (anger) Prov. 21, 14 HDD 686 P ■ (Targ., Vulg.), comp. Jek. 7, 20; like the compared verb prop, to conceal, to cover, to hide, conseq. it is also connected with NSn, an I., NSn, nsti; on the contrary IT T ' r^ ' IT T ' IT T ' '' the Ar. L« (to turn away) must be put with E1S3. JlB? (only pi. niB3; from C1S3 11.) f. a branch, of the palm Lev. 23, 40, so called from its rising upward; hair, branches, tops being in other instances also named from the verb-root " to shoot upwards, to rise aloft". rsBS (with suf iriS3; from :iD3 II.) f. top, of the high, slender palm, top- branch Job 15, 32 ; fig. ITpSNi ^53 Is. 9, 13 and 19, 15 the palm-top and bulrush, i. e. the high and low; LXX fteyav xal IMXQOv or KQXV^ J*'" lekog. "liSS (pL constr. "''1133) m. 1. (from 1B3 m.) a cup, a goblet, difPerent from pltJj, which is adduced by itself IChr. 28,' 17; EzR. 1, 10; 8, 27; called from its deepened form. — 2. (from 1S3l.) hoar-frost, which is scattered about Ex. 16, 14; PsAiM 147, 16; Job 38, 29.— 3. (from 1B3 n. or 'nS3 IV.) Cyprus, the island, ='nS3 4. It is the ground-form of 'n'ns3 II. (which see). D''B3 m. a beam, holding together a wooden building ('ps) Hab. 2,11 (Symm., Theod., Kimchi &c.'). The LXX seem to have read iBsn (which see), if their xavdaQog is not to be understood of a beam, after Vitr. 4, 2; the Targ. has a splinter, from DS3 = iBSti to cleave. •* r T 1- T T'BS (pi. ID''^''B3 from 1S3 II.) m. 1. same as 163 a village, Neh. 6, 2. — 2. prop, the strong, the powerful, hence a lion, particularly the wild and blood- thirsty one Ps. 17, 12; 91, 13; Is. 11, 6, that goes forth for prey 5, 29 ; Mic. 5, 7 ; Jeb. 25, 38, and roars in its fierceness Judges 14, 5; Jek. 2, 15; Am. 3, 4, more advanced in age and strength than a 'TIS Ez. 19, 2 3. Fig. of fierce, blood- thirsty enemies Ps. 35, 17, Jer. 2, 15; hence the Egyptian king Pharaoh is called d';i.1 '3 because of his wild rage for booty Ez. 32, 2 ; also generally a ruler, a king, Ez. 19, 2; 32, 2; 38, 13. iTT^B? (village, hamlet) n. p. of a place" of the Hivites, which the Ben- jamites afterwards got Josh. 9, 17; 18, 26; EzR. 2, 25; Neh. 7, 29. The place is now called Kefir, near Yi,lo, east of Nicopolis (Bobinson's New Bibli- cal Ees. p. 190). ?D3 {part. pass. m. blB3) tr. prop. to bind together, to tie or plait together, identical with baa, ban, ba3 (which see) in its fdndamental idea. Hence to fold together, to lay together, to double, i. e. to put together, or over against one another, two similar things Ex. 26, 9; 28, 16; 39, 9; Targ. bs)? to fold, to double up, Syr. to intertwine, Sam. to practise usury, to surround, to enclose, from which the fundamental significa- tion clearly appears ; Arab, and Ethiop. also to divide into two like parts, whence Jlsj a like part, the corresponding por- tion, which is merely a farther develop- ment of the idea. Deiivat. bB3, dual o:bB3. 'Nif. bB3i {fut. bB3^) usually to he re- peated, to be doubled, Ez. 21, 19 [14] and let the sword be repeated the third time (rtn«j"'b«5 adv.). But since the Nif. of bB3 and tiniB''ba3 as an adv. do not further T r • : occur, and the latter may be taken merely as a fem. adject, to S'lti as the LXX understand it, it is better to con- sider it as an allusion to the preceding ri3, and to read nriB''b«5 ainb nbni !(- ' T r • : viv : 1 1 T : thou bendest (the hand) for a third sword, Hif. b''B3ti (not used) to be wound, to he serpentine, uneven, inaccessible (of a country), so proceeding from the fun- damental signification. Targ. i»bB3 (Is. 40, 4) a mountain spiral (rich in incisions and indentations). Deriv. rtbssa. ^B3 (du. D';bB3) 772. a doubling, 'jDI '3 a double row of teeth Job 41, 5; dual the doubled, n"1l5inb f'hti'S 11, 6 the doubled in wisdom (truth), i. e. as wise again as one thinks and apprehends} D';bB3 npb to take double, i. e. richly Is. 40, 2. ' ^ jD3 (3 fem. n5B3) intr. prop, to curvcy 1D3 687 "1D3 to contract, to bend, identical with '\2i, ■jsa, ^as (-whicli see); and as these are enlarged from the simple stems a.|, tia, 53, so is ")e3 from E]3 by n added; Ar. TviJ'to twist, to roll up, to enwrap. Hence 1. to bend, to wind, with b? whither, Ez. 17, 7 a/id lol this vine bends with its roots to him (to the eagle), !i5B3 by way of assonance to 135, which is of like origin. The Vulg. has taken it in the sense of nrtVilB in the second hemistich, IT : • without reading Mib3; but the LXX like the Targ. retain the fundamental signification (= rijs). — 2. (not used) to shrivel, to be folded together, to be fastened together, oi the entrails; hence to hunger, to thirst (comp. Aram. NIB, Hebr. dSt, Nua with the Arabic analogy there given), Aram. 183, ,^ (to hunger, to thirst, also figur.). Deriv. 1B3. 1S3 TO. hunger, Job 5, 22 ; 30, 3 ; Targ. MT T 7 7 P ik N5e3, Syr. iJ-as, Zab. Vlsoa the same. DD3 (not used) tr. to hold together, to draw together, to bind, to close, of a beam which keeps a building together; trn)? belonging to the noun fl^ip having also this meaning; comp. ySjJ (which see), nD3, Targ. nS3, Ar. ^j«a» with the same fundamental signification. De- rivat. D''a3 (which see). nD3 I. (i. e. t]?, but also resolved tlSli;' part. pass. J11S3; inf. constr. V(f) 1. tr. to curve, to bend, IBN'n, of bul- rushes and of men Is. 58, 5 (on Ez. 21, 19 see bS3 Nif.); fig. to bow, to humble Ps. 145,14; 146,8 (oppos. t\'i>l); to cast down, to make succumb, 57, 7 they have cast me down, i. e. bent me down into the net, for tissi stands here for 1SB3, LXX xai xttteHaiixliav ri]v ■p)XV /">"■ — 2. intr. (not used) to be curved, bent, hence a) to be arched, hill-shaped, humped, bellied; b) to be deepened or hollowed out (in a round and bent form). Deriv. £13. The intr. signif. of the stem lies also in the Syr. ^ (to be curved, bent, with age; to be humped, bunched), Zab. ^as (to be arched, bow-shaped), Arab. a.;, Ar.il^; the signif. to be hollow merely proceeding from a curved, concave form, and not from that of to dig through, to hollow through- out: whence NSa I., ai.l n., ai-i &c. have IT T ' ^ I ' I- T nothing to do with it, and just as little have na-l, nas. But the stem t[}, (f&i) r T ' r T ^ Ir ^ \- t-* is entirely identical with it, having the meaning to be curved, bent, arched, an enlargement of which is 1S.1 ; so is the Aram, ^-s.*, therefore ta-^ flexure, arm, wing, Ar. ^;^As- arch of the eyes. The primitive conception of bentness, round- ness, circularity, whether of a flat or an arched body, lies also in a3 (aa3), Ar. ,_a5, Syr. v-as. The Phenic. tiS3is,tobe hill-shaped, hence the proper name of a city in Phenic. Africa NE&3 ap. Ptol. (4, 3) ximna, Gent. ■'DSB (Tug." 7). In extra- Semitic tongues we have to compare with ni? the Pers. haf-t&a., Lat. c«6-o, cumbo, Greek xafinw &c. Nif. £135 {fut. rijsis) to bow, to humble oneself, with b before one Mic. 6, 6. nD3 n. (not used) intr. to rise aloft, to project upward (of the projecting branch of the palm), to be high; con- nected, in its organic root, partly with rraa, na.;, partly with nss belonging to ^BS. ' Deriv. ^1B3, ns3. VC3 {fut. fE)3n) tr. to close, only in the cod. Sam. Deut. 15, 7 for VBT?ri. "lD3 I. (Kal not used) tr. 1. to cover (see rrnsl). — 2. Fig. to cover over, to conceal, sin, hence to atone for, to for- give. Comp. Ar. <^" to cover, to con- ceal, along with Jth- (of similar mean- ing). Fig. (also in Aram, and Talm.) to conceal, to hide, to dissemble, which is a covering; comp. also -ft& to hide. 'nB3 Gen. 6, 14 is a denom. from 1B3 a (which see); since a meaning "to over- lay, to cover over, to plaster" (cognate in sense nu, bsu, bsn) in the verb, haa not been proved. Deriv. 'nB3 1. "1DD 688 -1DD Pih. 1S3 (/■«{. 155^, tV- consir. 1S3) only fig. 1. to cover, transgression, hence to forgive, to pardon, with accus. of the thing, 5>as Ps. 65, 4, "yfS 78, 38, Dan. 9, 24, but commonly (like all verbs of covering) with b? of the thing, I'lS Jbr. 18, 23, nisan Lev. 19, 22, Ps.' 79, 9, nssia Lev. 5, 18, also with Vs of the person Lev. 19, 22, or with both 5, 18; more rarely have we b of the person Detjt. 21, 8, and b of tie thing Ez. 16, 63, or b? of the person and y^ of the thing Lev. 4, 26, Num. 6, 11 ; still more rarely 3 of the thing Lev. 17, 11. — 2. to make expiation, to procure or efect forgiveness, hence like verbs of inter- ceding, praying, seeking God (bbsnti, rtben Nias, iins'n, N"ip &e.) construed with n»a (which see) for, as well with *i5>a of "the person Lev. 9, 7; 16, 6; 2 Che. 30,18 (where the following verse is to be linked to, and the relative 'niUN is wanting) as with ISa of the thing Ex. 32, 30. — 3. to expiate, generally, i. e. to free from impurity, sinfulness, guilt, cnme, with accus. of the thing Lev. 16, 33; DEnT.32,43; Ez.43, 20 26; 45,20; more rarely with b^ Ex. 29, 36. The phrase 'a D''3S 'nS3 Gen. 32, 21 to cover the face with a thing, returns to the ori- ginal image, meaning not to see what is done, conseq. = to propitiate (see niD3 d^i"'?); fig- likertas of the same meaning to extinguish, anger, i. e. to hush up Prov. 16, 14; metaphor, to cover = to smother, to suppress, inilrt Is. 47, 11. Deriv. nife3, 1S3. VI-' (S . Puh. IBS {fut. lES'j) 1. to be atoned for, forgiven, fw Prov. 16, 6, PiNHn Is. 6, 7 ; or absol. and with b of that which is forgiven or expiated ^um. 35, 33. — 2. Figur., like ITz'S, to be extinguished, weakened, = to perish, to cease, ri'^'na Is. 28, 18 ; also in Aram. Peal in this sense. Hithp. 1S3n^i (fut. 'nssn':) to be ex- piated, forgiven, with b of the person 1 Sam. 3, 14. ' Nithp. 1333 (out of 'nssni , compound- ed of Nif. and Hithp.) to he forgiven, Deut. 21, 8, *1D3 n. (not in use) tr. 1. to string r T together, to unite, to bind together, to put together, e. g. villages in a place, hence as a stem = lan I. (whence li'n^n vil- lage), the fundamental signification also existing in 'nSN I. (which see), 1j3S , IjaSi , 1BN n. (to -iEN), Syr. jA, 'ns^ n. (be- longing to the names of places tllSS*, li'nss; , l^psy) &c. ; as also the Ar. -O , Syr. i-as have the same ground-sense. Derivat. 1S3 1. (also in many proper names), (!i'ns3), T^SS 1, lab 2. and the proper name h'T'SB. — 2. Metaphor, to be strong, powerful, courageous, prop, to be pressed, condensed, the idea of being pressed or stout proceeding from the fundamental signification "to wind to- gether, to bind together", also in the verbs las, laa, 133, lan, which are r T ' r T ' I- T ' r T ' i i . identical with the present stem; and this is the case with pvn, 11^)5 also, as is well known. The same transference is found in the verb ISJi, which is of cognate stem. Derivat'. hys 2, 1B3 3. and the denom. 1S3. 133 m. (not used) tr. prop, to cut through, to break through, to hollow throughout, identical with Ian 11., isn, lap (which see), IDtd (belongjing to IDITIJ), and in its organic root with la (belonging to lia), is 11., 1S?a, IjSS (belonging to ^INb) ; hence also to deepen, to hollow out, a vessel. Deriv. 1iS3 I. 1D3 rV. see 133 4. r T ••• ' ■1D3 {constr. 1B3, pi. O'^IBS) m. 1. (from 183 II.) a hamlet, prop, an union of houses, hence a village Song op Sol. 7, 12, 1 Chr. 27, 25, for which the forms 11S3 1 and 1B3 2 also occur; Ar. ,^3, Aram. 1B3, r^s the same. Very often is this word applied, at a later period, in compounds, in order to give namea to smaller localities, of which an ex- ample appears already in Josh. 18, 24; the term being also met with both in Arabic and Syriac in local names. In the Talmudic period, many locali- ties of Palestine, Phenicia and Syria ncD 689 "1D2 compounded with '3 are adduced, as 1D3 OWN (J. Sanh. 11), b^n lias '3 (Meg. is'")' ■'MN '3 (J. Nedar. 4), 'in va '3 (Chall. 4, 10), n;-?N '3 (J. Kil. 1), S'nttiS '3 (J. Taan. ch. 4), NiS-ia '3 (Kerith. at the end), '3 NnniS (.Tosifta'Jebam. at the end), UKV '3 (Pesi'kta rab. 23), Nn'i;ari '3 (Tos. Chall! 13; Meg. 16"), dU-'? ''3 '(Jebam. ch. 12 at the end), oi-nn '3 (Soth. 20''), rria? '3 (Midr. Echa 72 «j, ■'Njjna '3 (Pesach! 67') &c.; sometimes also the feminine form mD3(hamletship)alone( J.Meg. 1); comp. in the New Test, and Apocrypha KansQvaov[t i. e. 0103 "IBS (Matth. 4, 13); XacpaguaXa/id i. e. N73bia 'nS3 (1 Macc. 7, 31), which is calle'd'in Tal- mudic (J. Aboda-Sara 44) obiiS '3, &c. Comp. the Phenic. NISB (Gaphara) n. p. of a locality at Leptis, Dp "nDB or IBS DOO (Cabarsus , -sussi) n. "p. of a place in 'Byzacium, NM? 1B3 (Cebaradefa) n. p. of a city there, ri'lBS (Cufruta) n. p. of a city there too. -^ 2. (only pi. d'''iB3) cypress-flowers SoNQ op Sol. 4, iV, = nDJs 4. "IDS I. (not used) zntr. to fly about, to be scattered about (of dust, hoar-frost &c.), to fly to and fro in crisp masses, conseq. connected with ^B5>, 1BN I. (which see); the idea of being bruised in pieces and crumbled (see is), not being the original one in both. Deriv. 'niBS 2. nE{3 n. (not used) intr. to be of a clear red, of the cypress-flower or blossom, with the dust of which persons coloured red; identical with isn (which see). In general, perhaps in the first instance, to shine, to glitter, to bloom, the same fundamental signification lying in IBO, IBIZJ, which is then transferred to a bright colour; but see "nsip 4, 1B3 2 and 1iB3 3, with the proper name iriB3. naijayn "1B3 (village of the Aanmo- Hites) n. p. of a locality in Benjamin Josh. 18, 24 K'ri, for which the K'tib has ■'Siasn '3 ; probably a settlement of Ammonites was there at an earlier time. ''aiaj'n -ids see rnimyn ib3. "'aeyn 1B3 (vUlage of the Ophnites, see -[S'y = 1B3) n. p. of a locality in Ben- jamin, in the neighbourhood of Gophen (l??' IJi") <"^ Oophna, lying, according to Euseb., five Roman miles from yaa (which see) Josh. 18, 24, where lES is to be supplied from the preceding ' con- text. It may also have lain, like Gophen or Gophna itself, not far frombiNia vs:ii (Joseph. B. J. 5, 2, 1). A small hamlet in the neighbourhood may have been early colonised by the inhabitants of •\6y (which see), Aram. 'Ophna (N:Ei>, Hiss, NIBS in Joseph., Euseb. &c.), 'lalra. n-'iBl.j (Berach.44»), n;bi.j (J. Taan. 4) and ^3315 n-ia (Tosifta', Ohol. at the end); since the adjective form in "'iDi' would be difficult to explain in case of complete identity. "1B3 (with suff'. i'lB3, rf'IBSl) m. 1. pro- pitiation (from 133 I.), then ransom, ran- som-price, by which what is to be punished is protected Is. 43, 3 ; Ps. 49, 8; price of expiation, "J)S3 '3 Ex. 30, 12 price of life, i. e. what covers it; with b of the person for whom the propitiation is made Prov. 21,18; generally redetnp- tion-^money, value of redemption Ex. 21, 30; Num. 35, 31. — 2. same as Ies 1 hamlet, village 1 Sam. 6, 18. — 3. prop, a strong, firm, hard species of trees, like the synonymous "laJi (which see), cognate by stem with KvrtaQtaaog, cupressus. Germ. Kiefer (which is resinous wood with needle-like foliage generally). Then perhaps the resin of pine, the pitch of pine, got out of the tree, applied to the pitching of ships Gen. 6, 14, conseq. not asphalt or bitumen (LXX, Vulg.), or any resinous substance of the earth or mineral king- dom; Targ. N1B13, ■'■1B13, Syr. ii^", Ar. JiS, -ttJ the same, though farther ex- tended; deriv. the denom. 1D3 to besmear with the resin of a ires Gen. ib. (signif.2 and 3 from 13311.). — 4. (from 133) cypress- plant, cypress-bush, whose beautifully formed and sweet smelling flowers appear in grape-shaped clusters (bafflij) from May till August, Song op Sol. 1, 14 (LXX); called in Ar. sUit (el-hinna, Kimcht). 44 -|D3 690 "inM '3 is said to be named from the bright red capsules of the fruits of the cypress ; better perhaps from the greyish white colour of the blossom (Diosc. 1, 125), from 133 IV. = 'ns5» (to rinD5>), lin (=')|3b), Aram. '^a^t ,' Ar. -to.. The Phen. lais, Greek xvnQ-og, Lat. cypr-us, and the name of the island in the Mediterranean Sea, KvTiQog, Cyprus, are the same Semi- tic word, because the cypress grew abun- dantly in that island; wherefore Homer calls it EvuSije {the sweet-smelling). TiDS is the same, which is a basis for 'ntiBB 11. "IBS (only pi. d"''l") m. collect, expia- tion, forgiveness, Ex. 29, 36, '3^1 nsan 30, 10, 'sn b^N Num. 5, 8 the sacrifice of atonement, the ram of atonement, i. e. by which the expiation was effected; DV '3Si Lev. 23, 27 the day of atonement. rriJSS (no other flexion of which ap- pears) f. cover, lid of the ark of the covenant in the holy of holies Ex. 25, 17; 26, 34; 40, 20 &c. (Saadia, Kimchi), on which the DiSI'lB stood, and which they covered with their wings 25, 20; 37, 9, whence God was thought to speak 25, 22, Lev. 16, 2, Num. 7, 89; and therefore where i'^ 1113, »? 86^a lov KvQi'ov, afterwards called the !ia"'3llj, IT ■ : ' was enthroned. The most holy place was termed on this account rTisSiii iT^a 1 Chr. 28, 11, Targ. ''I'iss nia for T^a^ (1 Kings 6, 5). The same explanation of the word is also given by the LXX in their im&rnia (top-piece, cover); but it was afterwards glossed by IkaaTTjQiov, according to the Hagada (Tanchuma, section va-Yakhel), in which it was de- rived from 1S3 to atone. And this gloss was adopted by the New Testament (Hbbr. 9, 5), the Syr. and the Vulg. ti'DS (Kal not used) tr. to tread down, to press down, to bend down; to press or stuff into, to fill in; conseq. equivalent to iaa3 L, the Talm. •aJS3 (Jebam. 107'') also meaning the same thing, and the Ar. u*aJ may be put beside it; ac- cording to others (in Kimchi) to roll, like the Ar. (jjuji^III., as is alleged. Hif. tU''B3i7, to press down, to bow down, lesa in ashes Lament. 3, 16; Targ. S>33. nC3 (not used) tr. 1. to bind about, to tie about, therefore to encircle, to crown, cognate in sense with iri3, "lUy; Ar. «>.« the same. — 2. to be round, ball-shaped, identical with nsit (which see); deriv. nS3 = ns^ belonging to "nhES L — 3. to bind together, to arrange, to regulate. rS3 m. a foundation word for 'nriB3 L (which see). PSlp {part. pass. m. riD3, which is then inflected as a verb) Aram. tr. to bind, to fetter Dan. 3, 21. More fre- quent in the Targ., Talm., Zabian. It also appears in Samar. with the mean- ing to stop, to hinder. Pah. ns3 {part. pass. m. riS3M, only pi. X'T\B'yi2; inf. constr. nriB3) to bind strongly, to fetter Dan. 3, 20 23. "IPBS I. (once plene TiFiSS Am. 9, 1-, pi. Di'nns3, with suff. iTi'iriB3, ain'''nns3: from riB3) m. 1. a pillar-top, chapiter, capital of a column, so called from its roundness and ball-form. Over it were the d''SO (ressaults) Am. 9, 1. As it was a work of art and ornament, its lying on the ground, where hedge-hogs made their abode upon it, was used as an im- age of destruction Zeph. 2, 14. — 2. an ornamental croivn of the golden can- delabra Ex. 15, 31 33 seq.; LXX acpcu- QwrriQ (once with Symm. ilaazTJQiov, because reading JTISB), Vulg. sphae- rula, and so the Targ. and Syr., all with relation to the proper etymology. The explanation pomegranate-shaped (Jose- phus), apple-shaped {Saadia, Kimchi), after the Aram. NDBIS, ii^oa rose-cup, flower-calix, is merely from another ap- plication of the verb-idea; no other signi- fication of the verb lying at the basis of it. The ground-element of the qua- driliteral noun is nB3 = DBS (head-top), and 'n^ is a formative noun-syllable. ^riS3 n. (from 'n33, 1iB3 3) n. p. of the island Crete, which is termed '3 iN in Jbk. 47, 4, the native land of a race incD 691 "inDD of Philistines; Gent. m. '''jitiS3,pZ.D"''ptiS3 Gen. 10, 14; Deut. 2, 23. As a race named DTjfflbs (which see) came out of tjios (which see), so a race of di^riSB immigrated out of Crete, i. e. Caphtor,, into the coast-territory of Palestine at the Mediterranean Sea reaching from Joppa to the boundary of Egypt Am. 9, 7. Accordingly Scripture recognises the immigrations of two races of the Philistines, from two directions. The Caphtorim destroyed the primitive in- habitants, the D"!-!?, who dwelt in vil- lages as far as nw Deut. 2,23; 1 Chr. 1, 12. As the name iri'i3, p^. d'^ri'nSi, meaning Cretan, Cretans, also appears for the Philistines (ap. LXX, Syr. and others) 1 Sam. 30, 14, Zeph. 2, 5, Ez. 25, 16 (where D''FilBbB stands in the pa- rallel member of the sentence), if 'ins 3 be not identified with Crete (np^)) we must still assume a third immigi-ation. On the other hand it must appear strange that the Hebrews should have had two names ("1F1B3, n"!?) for Crete. But since it cannot te doubted that the Cretans (DTi'nS) formed a principal race of the Philistine population in the south of Philistia Ez. 1. c. and Zeph. 1. c. (LXX); and that David's body-guard consisted of them under the name of "'H'nSfi (the Cretans) along with Philistines (■'rib?5t made from infflbs!! for the sake of as- sonance to ■'nfisn) 2 Sam. 8, 18; as the most southern part of Philistia was called because of this very race innan M^ l Sam. 30, 14 (where it is plain from 30, 16 that Philistines are meant); as, according to an ac- count in Tacitus (Histor. 5, 2) the inha- bitants of Palestine (meaning Philistia, as he also identifies the Jews and Phi- listines) immigrated into it from Crete; and as the Philistine city nw accord- 'ing to Steph. Byz. (s. v. rd.^a) was early called Minoa, after Minos, king of Crete, for which reason the Cretan Zeus, i. e. p73, was worshipped there (Steph. Byz. 6. V. Mivaa) : — the opinion already put forth by Lakemacher (Obs. philol. II. p. 11 seq.), Calmet (Bibl. TJnters. III. 25) and Bosenmuller (Bibl. Alterthumsk. II. 2, 363; in. 385), that the island Caphtor as the home of the Philistines, can only be Crete, should probably be retained. The Hyksos-race of the Caph- torim that emigrated out of Egypt at a very early period and went to Crete (Gen. 1. c), for whom there was no room in the Egyptian home, gave the name inns ■'N to the island of Crete, among the Hebrews; and the Carian, Phenician, half- Semitic barbarian peoples men- tioned by classical writers, the Eteo- oretes, the Cydonians, who are said to have inhabited the island before the Hellenes (Herod. 1, 173; Thukyd.1,8; Horn. Od. 9, 174 seq.; Strabo p. 475), may have been the Egyptian immigrant D"''iriB3, as the immigrant Dirn^bs came at another time out of tl'^DB di- rect, and not intermediately by "Crete. See D'Tj'aJbB, 13 (I3"''p3)- The ancients (LXX,'']?arg., Vulg. 'and others) under- stand by 'nnB3 the coast-district (7appado- oia, which tradition asserts to have been peopled by Egyptians or Semites. Others (Theodoret on Jer. 1. c. and Is. 9, 12, among the moderns Schulthess, Swin- ton, Michaelis) understand it to be Cy- prus, which is manifestly allied to it in name. But none of these explana- tions has so much in its favour as Crete. As to the derivation and meaning of the word, it denotes, like "laip ('123)^ Greek xvtiqos, a cup, a basin, a calix; and as in addition to the original name for Cyprus, proceeding out of the mythic period, nn, ri3 (which see) there was still another appellation 1S3, so the neighbouring island of Crete which shared the same fate with respect to Egyptian -Semitic immigrations, had along with its very ancient name rip3_ (which see) another one inB3, formed out of 'lbs (= 'IBB 4) with an inserted t (n), like iSjiSa '(same as ^P>v£) out of lbs, nllntiy out of n'l'i^S (together with'n^rilfiy out of n^ti5>);^comp. bpSJ Ez. 32,"27 nahed, Syr. VJt^.^ The collateral forms Kqvtito? (i. e. Kimgo?) and Kqdna&os (i. e. KdnaQ-qog) for Kv- 44* niD 692 ID Ttgog, whicli existed in addition, as well as the old Cretan city Aptera (Strabo 10, 479 ^ 'AtiiIqu) for Kamiqa (where the Caphtorim that immigrated from lower Egypt may have first settled), have both preserved the name before us, and prove themselves to be identi- cal; just as the old names ns and rTi3 for the two islands of Cyprus and Crete are unquestionably identical ; especially as by their position they belong to- gether, and both received colonists from lower Egypt at a very ancient period. 13 (^Z.D"''13; fromTlS^m. 1. a sheep (never a tender lamb), more than 4533 (which see, and comp. toais), the stronger', solid, especially the well-fed, fat animal (Targ., Syr., Ar.), of whose abn and Di Scripture speaks Dbut. 32, 14, Is. 34, 6; different from D''b"'N (rams), and bi-iiny (he-goats) Ez. 39^ 18 ; a fat sheep, intended for tribute 2 Kings 3, 4, or special booty 1 Sam. 15, 9 (Targ., Syr.) and for slaughter Jer. 51, 40; in Am. 6, 4 coupled with pa"i73 hiV ; also collect. herds of fat sheep. The Targ. has refer- red D-''n3 Ps. 37, 20 to this head; but it suits signif. 2. better. — 2. a wether, he- goat, ram, hence Ps. 65, 14 the rams copu- late (see'ttJab) with the sheep (Targ.). Fig. an iron battering-ram, an instrument used in besieging cities (along with 11^53, p^l &c.) against the walls and gates Ez. 4, 2 and 21,27 (Targ.); for which 26, 9 has bajj ipJ? (counter -thrust, wall- breaker). The "Vulg. has aries (ferreus), Jos. Kimchi 1233 after the Arab. iAjS^ (ram and battering-ram); Greek xptoff (see 2 Macc. 20, 8). — 3. fat pasture, a luxuriant meadow, a greeti grass-plot, 13 an^3 an extensive, fat pasture Is. 30, 23, Ps.37,20; probably also 65,14, where the Syr. U.Iloj!i ii'zf (fat district) correct- ly, and similarly the LXX. Comp. the noun rTn3. — 4. {fat pasture-land) n. p. f. Caria, KaQia, Caria, a land of Asia Minor in the south west, lying between Phrygia and Lydia, the inhabitants of which, afterwards celebrated in anti-